SV9100 Features and Manual PDF

SV9100
Features and Specifications Manual
NDA-31576
ISSUE 2.0
NEC Corporation of America reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at
any time without notice.
NEC Corporation of America has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers.
The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation of America and shall not be
reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Corporation of America.
Dterm, NEAX and UNIVERGE are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a
registered trademark of NEC America, Inc. Windows, Outlook and Internet Explorer are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. AT&T, the AT&T logo and all other AT&T marks are trademarks of
AT&T Intellectual Property and/or AT&T affiliated companies. Lucent Technologies is a trademark or
service mark of Lucent Technologies Inc. Nortel Networks and the Nortel Networks logo are
trademarks of Nortel Networks. Verizon Wireless is a trademark of Verizon Trademark Services, LLC.
Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United
States and other countries. ViewCall and ViewMail are registered trademarks of Active Voice, LLC.
Adobe, Flash and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries. The Google Chrome browser is a trademark of Google Inc. Mozilla and
Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation. SonicView is a trademark of TriVium
Systems, Inc. iPhone is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. App StoreSM is a service mark of Apple
Inc. Safari is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Salesforce.com is a
registered trademark of Salesforce.com, inc. Tigerpaw is a registered trademark of Tigerpaw
Software, Inc. Plantronics and Savi are registered trademarks of Plantronics, Inc. AMD Athlon and
AMD Duron are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi
Alliance.
Copyright 2014
NEC Corporation of America

6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Communications Technology Group

PREFACE
Before Reading this Manual

This manual provides detailed information for each of the systems features. If you are not familiar with
the features, the Table of Contents provides a list of the features and where to find the feature within
the manual.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Congratulations! You have purchased the NEC UNIVERGE SV9100 System.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system is a feature-rich key system that provides many features including
NEC Contact Center, IP Station and IP Trunk support, ISDN compatibility, PBX compatibility, TAPI
compatibility, Voice over Internet Protocol and Uniform Call Distribution.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system meets the customer needs today, and as business expands, the
system can be expanded to grow as well.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system has a set of manuals that provide all the information necessary to
install and support the system. This preface describes these manuals.
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
UNIVERGE SV9100 General Description Manual
This Manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration and
standards. This manual provides an overview of the UNIVERGE SV9100 system and can be used to
present information to potential customers.
SV9100 System Hardware Manual
The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This manual has detailed
instructions for installing the SV9100 chassis, blades, multiline terminals, and optional equipment.
UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual
This manual provides instructions for programming the UNIVERGE SV9100 system using a multiline
terminal or PC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction
Section 1 General Information ..................................................................1-1
Section 2 Multiline Terminals used with the System ...................................... 1-1
Chapter 2 Features
Section 1 About This Chapter ................................................................... 2-1
Section 2 Important Notes ................................................................................. 2-1
Section 3 SV8100 to UNIVERGE SV9100 Feature Comparison List ............... 2-2
Section 4 Features .............................................................................................. 2-9
Account Code Entry .......................................................................... 2-11

Account Code - Forced/Verified/Unverified ...................................... 2-16
Alarm ................................................................................................ 2-23
Alarm Reports ................................................................................... 2-26
Alphanumeric Display ....................................................................... 2-37
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) .......................................... 2-39
Ancillary Device Connection ............................................................. 2-46
Answer Hold ..................................................................................... 2-50
Answer Key ....................................................................................... 2-53
Attendant Call Queuing ..................................................................... 2-56
Automatic Release ............................................................................ 2-58
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ..................................................... 2-61
Recognize Extension Location when Logging in with NetLink ............. 2-66
Background Music ............................................................................ 2-87
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual i

Issue 2.0
Barge-In ............................................................................................ 2-89

Battery Backup - System Memory .................................................... 2-94
Battery Backup - System Power ....................................................... 2-96
Callback ............................................................................................ 2-99
Caller ID Call Return ....................................................................... 2-103
Caller ID .......................................................................................... 2-107
Caller ID Flexible Ringing ............................................................ 2-122
Caller ID Memo Display Function ................................................ 2-129
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys ......................................................... 2-132
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys .................................................................. 2-137
Call Duration Timer ......................................................................... 2-143
Call Forwarding .............................................................................. 2-145
Call Forwarding with Follow Me ...................................................... 2-159
Call Forwarding Centrex .............................................................. 2-162
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise ......................................................... 2-167
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override ....................................... 2-182
Call Monitoring ................................................................................ 2-184
Call Redirect ................................................................................... 2-190
Call Waiting/Camp-On .................................................................... 2-193
Central Office Calls, Answering ...................................................... 2-198
Central Office Calls, Placing ........................................................... 2-209
Class of Service .............................................................................. 2-218
Clock/Calendar Display .................................................................. 2-239
Code Restriction ............................................................................. 2-243
Code Restriction Override .............................................................. 2-251
Code Restriction, Dial Block ........................................................... 2-258
Conference ..................................................................................... 2-262
Conference Remote .................................................................... 2-270
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release ........................................ 2-274
ii Table of Contents
Issue 2.0
Contact Center ................................................................................ 2-277

Continued Dialing ........................................................................... 2-309
Cordless DECT Terminals .............................................................. 2-312
Cordless Telephone Connection .................................................... 2-331
CO Message Waiting Indication ..................................................... 2-347
Data Line Security .......................................................................... 2-351
Delayed Ringing ............................................................................. 2-354
Department Calling ......................................................................... 2-358
Department Step Calling ................................................................. 2-369
Dialing Number Preview ................................................................. 2-372
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone ............................................................ 2-374
Dial Tone Detection ........................................................................ 2-376
Digital Trunk Clocking ..................................................................... 2-379
Directed Call Pickup ....................................................................... 2-384
Directory Dialing ............................................................................. 2-387
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ............................................................. 2-390
Direct Inward Line (DIL) .................................................................. 2-409
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................................. 2-414
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console ......................................... 2-430
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns ............................... 2-439
Door Box ......................................................................................... 2-449
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................ 2-455
Drop Key ......................................................................................... 2-460
Ecology ........................................................................................... 2-465
E-911 Compatibility ......................................................................... 2-474
Facsimile CO Branch Connection ................................................... 2-513
Flash ............................................................................................... 2-516
Flexible System Numbering ............................................................ 2-519
Flexible Timeouts ............................................................................ 2-542
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual iii

Issue 2.0
Forced Trunk Disconnect ............................................................... 2-551

General Purpose Relay .................................................................. 2-555
Group Call Pickup ........................................................................... 2-560
Group Listen ................................................................................... 2-564
Handset Mute ................................................................................. 2-567
Handsfree and Monitor ................................................................... 2-574
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing .......................... 2-577
Headset Operation ......................................................................... 2-580
Hold ................................................................................................ 2-584
Hotel/Motel ..................................................................................... 2-591
Hotline ............................................................................................ 2-607
Hot Key-Pad ................................................................................... 2-613
Howler Tone Service ...................................................................... 2-616
InMail .............................................................................................. 2-619
InMail Park and Page ..................................................................... 2-661
InMail Upload Download Audio ...................................................... 2-668
InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID ............................... 2-676
InMail Cascade Message Notification ......................................... 2-682
InMail Email Notification .............................................................. 2-704
InMail Find-Me Follow-Me ........................................................... 2-713
InMail Language Setting .............................................................. 2-721
Instant Access Application (IAA) .................................................... 2-726
Intercom .......................................................................................... 2-730
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ................................................................. 2-737
NAPT Traversal ................................................................................. 2-744
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440 Cordless .................................. 2-755
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440/G566/G266 with
AP400/AP300 ................................................................................. 2-769
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) ...................................................... 2-786
STD SIP Transfer-Unattended .......................................................... 2-796
iv Table of Contents
Issue 2.0
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) NAT Mode ................................. 2-807

IP Trunk H.323 ............................................................................. 2-813
IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol .................................... 2-822
SIP Trunk E.164 Support ................................................................... 2-824
SIP Trunk E.164 CLIP Enhancement ................................................ 2-826
Video Support over SIP Trunks ......................................................... 2-828
SIP Trunk Fax Pass-Through ......................................................... 2-851
IP Video Doorphone ....................................................................... 2-858
IP/Digital Call Logging .................................................................... 2-865
XML Call Recording Control (IP Terminals Only) .............................. 2-867
ISDN Compatibility .......................................................................... 2-871
ISDN 2 B-Channel Transfer ............................................................... 2-877
IVR Appointment Reminder Server ............................................. 2-894
IVR Broadcast Server .................................................................. 2-900
K-CCIS Call Rerouting ................................................................. 2-907
K-CCIS IP .................................................................................... 2-918
CCIS Networking via IP (Peer to Peer Connections Basis) ............... 2-922
K-CCIS IP with PVA ..................................................................... 2-928
K-CCIS T1 ................................................................................... 2-936
Last Number Redial ........................................................................ 2-943
Licensing ......................................................................................... 2-947
Line Load Control ........................................................................... 2-959
Line Preference .............................................................................. 2-962
Long Conversation Cutoff ............................................................... 2-966
Loop Keys ....................................................................................... 2-969
Maintenance ................................................................................... 2-975
Meet Me Conference ...................................................................... 2-977
Meet Me Paging .............................................................................. 2-981
Meet Me Paging Transfer ............................................................... 2-986
Memo Dial ....................................................................................... 2-991
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual v

Issue 2.0
Message Waiting ............................................................................ 2-994

Microphone Cutoff ........................................................................ 2-1001
Migration SV8100/SV8300 ........................................................ 2-1004
UX5000 Migration ............................................................................ 2-1011
Migration SV9100-S to SV9100-E System ................................ 2-1013
Mobile Extension .......................................................................... 2-1015
Callback to Cell Phone .................................................................... 2-1022
Multiple Trunk Types .................................................................... 2-1036
Music on Hold ............................................................................... 2-1052
Name Storing ................................................................................ 2-1061
NEC Communications Analyst ..................................................... 2-1065
NEC E911 Security Notification ....................................................... 2-1075
Night Service ................................................................................ 2-1078
Off-Hook Signaling ....................................................................... 2-1087
One-Touch Calling ........................................................................ 2-1092
Operator ....................................................................................... 2-1097
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension ....................................................... 2-1099
Paging, External ........................................................................... 2-1109
Paging, External (VRS) ................................................................ 2-1116
Paging, Internal ............................................................................ 2-1119
Park .............................................................................................. 2-1124
Personal Park at a Co-Workers Extension ..................................... 2-1126
PBX Compatibility ......................................................................... 2-1133
PC Programming .......................................................................... 2-1138
Outbound IP Connection ................................................................. 2-1145
Power Failure Transfer ................................................................. 2-1155
Prime Line Selection ..................................................................... 2-1158
Private Line ................................................................................... 2-1162
Programmable Function Keys ...................................................... 2-1167
Programming from a Multiline Terminal ........................................ 2-1172
vi Table of Contents
Issue 2.0
Pulse to Tone Conversion ............................................................ 2-1175

Redial Function ............................................................................. 2-1177
Remote (System) Upgrade ........................................................... 2-1180
Repeat Redial ............................................................................... 2-1183
Resident System Program ............................................................ 2-1186
Reverse Voice Over ...................................................................... 2-1188
RGA Conference .......................................................................... 2-1192
RGA Router .................................................................................. 2-1199
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External ......................................... 2-1204
Ring Groups .................................................................................. 2-1208
Room Monitor ............................................................................... 2-1213
Save Number Dialed ..................................................................... 2-1219
Secondary Incoming Extension .................................................... 2-1223
Secretary Call Pickup ................................................................... 2-1229
Secretary Call (Buzzer) ................................................................. 2-1232
Security ......................................................................................... 2-1235
Selectable Display Messaging ...................................................... 2-1253
Selectable Ring Tones .................................................................. 2-1258
Serial Call ..................................................................................... 2-1262
Simple MCU Video ....................................................................... 2-1264
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) ........................... 2-1277
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets ........................... 2-1285
Softkeys ........................................................................................ 2-1296
Speed Dial System/Group/Station ............................................. 2-1299
Speed Dial Telephone Book ...................................................... 2-1314
Station Hunt .................................................................................. 2-1320
Station Message Detail Recording ............................................... 2-1323
Station Name Assignment User Programmable ........................ 2-1346
Station Relocation ......................................................................... 2-1350
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual vii

Issue 2.0
SV9100 NetLink ............................................................................ 2-1354

NetLink Multi-SIP Carrier ................................................................. 2-1359
SV9100 PoE Gigabit Switch ......................................................... 2-1369
SV9100 Terminals ........................................................................ 2-1374
SV9100 UC Suite ......................................................................... 2-1391
Synchronous Ringing ................................................................... 2-1416
System Caller Log ........................................................................ 2-1419
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) .................................. 2-1423
Tandem Ringing ........................................................................... 2-1434
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) ............................ 2-1438
TAPI Compatibility ........................................................................ 2-1454
Tone Override ............................................................................... 2-1459
Traffic Reports .............................................................................. 2-1463
Transfer ........................................................................................ 2-1466
Trunk Groups ................................................................................ 2-1477
Trunk Group Routing .................................................................... 2-1482
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On ............................................................. 2-1487
UM8000 Mail ................................................................................ 2-1491
Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode .................................................... 2-1513
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) .................................................... 2-1520
Uniform Numbering Network ........................................................ 2-1529
Universal Slots .............................................................................. 2-1536
User Programming Ability ............................................................. 2-1548
Virtual Extensions ......................................................................... 2-1551
Voice Call Recording .................................................................... 2-1560
Dterm Voice Security Recorder (VSR) ........................................... 2-1560
NEC SonicView IP Recorder (1.0) ................................................ 2-1564
NEC SonicView Recorder (TDM and IP) (2.0) ................................ 2-1570
NEC SonicView Recorder (2.7) ....................................................... 2-1576
Voice Mail Integration (Analog) .................................................... 2-1587
viii Table of Contents

Issue 2.0
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys ............................... 2-1608

Voice Over .................................................................................... 2-1613
Voice Response System (VRS) .................................................... 2-1618
Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio ............ 2-1640
Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Park
and Page ...................................................................................... 2-1647
Volume Controls ........................................................................... 2-1652
Warning Tone for Long Conversation ........................................... 2-1655
Wireless DECT (SIP) .................................................................... 2-1659
Off-Hook Signaling ........................................................................... 2-1669
Caller ID Display After a Call Transfer ............................................. 2-1670
Out of Range Call Warning Notification ........................................... 2-1671
Chapter 3 Codes Tables

Section 1 About This Chapter ................................................................... 3-1
Section 2 Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operations with One-Touch
Key Operation .................................................................................... 3-1
Section 3 Using Handsfree ................................................................................ 3-1
Chapter 4 Feature Availability by Software Revision

Section 1 Feature Availability Chart ......................................................... 4-1
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual ix

Issue 2.0
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
x Table of Contents
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 SV9100 Key Assignment Example .......................................................................... 1-2
Figure 2-1 Left Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart ................................................................ 2-108
Figure 2-2 Department Calling Priority Call Routing ............................................................. 2-361
Figure 2-3 Department Calling Circular Routing ................................................................... 2-362
Figure 2-4 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 1 ....................................................................... 2-380

Figure 2-12 Trunk Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart .................................................................. 2-441
Figure 2-13 ICM Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart ..................................................................... 2-442
Figure 2-14 Automatic Night Service ...................................................................................... 2-471

Figure 2-15 Multiline Terminal Darkens .................................................................................. 2-473
Figure 2-16 CCIS Standard Calls ........................................................................................... 2-479
Figure 2-17 CCIS VE Standard Calls ..................................................................................... 2-484
Figure 2-18 CCIS 911 Calls .................................................................................................... 2-493
Figure 2-19 CCIS VE 911 Calls .............................................................................................. 2-498
Figure 2-20 InMail User Pro Login Diagram ........................................................................... 2-669

Figure 2-21 Example User Access to Voice Mail ................................................................. 2-676
Figure 2-22 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart-1 ...................................................... 2-684
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual xi

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-25 Cascade Message Flow Chart 1 ......................................................................... 2-702
Figure 2-26 Cascade Message Flow Chart 2 ......................................................................... 2-703

Figure 2-27 Example NAT Traversal ................................................................................... 2-744
Figure 2-28 ML440 Cordless Handset .................................................................................... 2-755
Figure 2-29 ML440 Cordless Handset .................................................................................... 2-769
Figure 2-30 G566 and G266 in Desktop Charger ................................................................... 2-770

Figure 2-31 Example SIP Phone ......................................................................................... 2-806
Figure 2-32 Start Recording ................................................................................................... 2-868
Figure 2-33 Recording ............................................................................................................ 2-868
Figure 2-34 Paused ................................................................................................................ 2-868
Figure 2-35 Information Screen .............................................................................................. 2-869
Figure 2-36 Comment List Screen .......................................................................................... 2-869

Figure 2-37 K-CCIS Call Rerouting Network .......................................................................... 2-907
Figure 2-38 Left Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart ................................................................ 2-943
Figure 2-39 Mobile Extension Layout ................................................................................... 2-1015

Figure 2-40 Example Callback to Cell Phone .................................................................... 2-1022
Figure 2-41 E911 Deployment Example ............................................................................... 2-1075
Figure 2-42 PC Programming Overview ............................................................................... 2-1138
Figure 2-43 PCPro Connection Dialog ................................................................................. 2-1139
Figure 2-44 WebPro Login Screen ....................................................................................... 2-1140
Figure 2-45 WebPro Home Page ......................................................................................... 2-1140

Figure 2-46 Maintenance Debug Screen .............................................................................. 2-1141
Figure 2-47 WebPro End User Screen ................................................................................. 2-1141
Figure 2-48 Idle Terminal Display ......................................................................................... 2-1238
Figure 2-49 Confirm Ring Time Display ............................................................................... 2-1238
Figure 2-50 No Answer Display ............................................................................................ 2-1240
Figure 2-51 Maximum of Four Standard SIP Phone Users .................................................. 2-1264
Figure 2-52 SNMP Hardware Key Code Request ............................................................. 2-1283
Figure 2-53 SNMP CPU IP Address Request ................................................................... 2-1283
xii List of Tables

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-54 SNMP Set Trap Alarm 64 ............................................................................... 2-1284
Figure 2-55 SNMP Trap Alarm Details .............................................................................. 2-1284
Figure 2-56 Right Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart ............................................................ 2-1300
Figure 2-57 Example of SMDR Report ................................................................................. 2-1326
Figure 2-58 Virtual Loopback S-Point ................................................................................ 2-1327
Figure 2-59 Example of S-Point Report ................................................................................ 2-1327
Figure 2-60 Example of S-Point Report (Flagged) ............................................................... 2-1327
Figure 2-61 Virtual Loopback T-Point ................................................................................ 2-1328
Figure 2-62 Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop ........................................................... 2-1328
Figure 2-63 Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop (Reverse Order) ................................. 2-1328
Figure 2-64 Virtual Loopback External Call Routed Through T-Point ................................ 2-1329
Figure 2-65 Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop (Reverse Direction) ............................ 2-1329
Figure 2-66 Example NetLink Multiple Carrier ................................................................... 2-1359

Figure 2-67 SV9100 Encryption Configuration ..................................................................... 2-1375
Figure 2-68 System Caller Log Example 1 ........................................................................... 2-1422
Figure 2-69 System Caller Log Example 2 ........................................................................... 2-1422

Figure 2-70 Multicast Mode Example ................................................................................... 2-1513
Figure 2-71 Unicast Mode Example ..................................................................................... 2-1514
Figure 2-72 Auto Mode Example .......................................................................................... 2-1514

Figure 2-73 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Priority Call Routing ........................................ 2-1522
Figure 2-74 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Circular Routing .............................................. 2-1523
Figure 2-75 VRS User Pro Login Diagram ........................................................................... 2-1641
Figure 2-76 IP DECT 2nd Indication .................................................................................. 2-1669
Figure 2-77 IP DECT Caller ID Display ............................................................................. 2-1670
Figure 2-78 Out of Range Example ...................................................................................... 2-1671
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual xiii

Issue 2.0
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
xiv List of Tables

LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List ............................................................................................ 2-2
Table 2-2 Sample Alarm Report ............................................................................................... 2-26

Table 2-3 Alarm Report Definitions .......................................................................................... 2-27
Table 2-5 Sample System Information Printout ........................................................................ 2-28
Table 2-4 Alarm Report Item Definitions .................................................................................. 2-28
Table 2-6 DT330 Compatibility Settings ................................................................................... 2-47
Table 2-7 Firmware Compatibility Matrix .................................................................................. 2-47
Table 2-8 Keys for Entering Names ....................................................................................... 2-118
Table 2-9 Caller ID Matching Rule ......................................................................................... 2-124
Table 2-10 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction ............................................................... 2-378
Table 2-11 Example 2 (Manual Change) .................................................................................. 2-394
Table 2-12 Example 1 Monday ~ Friday ................................................................................ 2-396

Table 2-13 Example 2 Saturday ............................................................................................ 2-396
Table 2-14 Example 3 Sunday .............................................................................................. 2-396
Table 2-15 LED Flash Patterns ................................................................................................ 2-408

Table 2-16 Distinctive Ringing: Tones and Flash Patterns ...................................................... 2-439
Table 2-17 Basic Tone Table Tone 06 .................................................................................. 2-447
Table 2-20 Program 12-02: Automatic Night Service Patterns ................................................. 2-470
Table 2-21 CPN for Standard Calls .......................................................................................... 2-475

Table 2-22 CPN for VE Standard Calls .................................................................................... 2-476
Table 2-23 CPN for 911 Calls ...................................................................................................2-477
Table 2-24 CPN for VE 911 Calls ............................................................................................. 2-478
Table 2-25 CPN for CCIS Standard Calls ................................................................................ 2-480
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual xv

Issue 2.0
Table 2-26 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls .......................................................................... 2-485
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS 911 Calls ......................................................................................... 2-494

Table 2-28 CPN for CCIS VE 911 Calls ................................................................................... 2-499
Table 2-29 CPN for Line Key+911 Calls .................................................................................. 2-507
Table 2-30 General Purpose Relay Specifications ................................................................... 2-555
Table 2-31 Service Tone Setup Defaults, Program 80-01-01 .................................................. 2-568
Table 2-32 Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-02 ................................................................ 2-572
Table 2-33 Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42-01-06 is set to 1 (Enabled) ......... 2-595
Table 2-34 Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42-01-06 is set to 0 (Disabled) ........ 2-596
Table 2-35 Extension Busy Setup ............................................................................................ 2-612
Table 2-36 SV9100 InMail Part Numbers and Capacities ........................................................ 2-622
Table 2-37 Park and Page Call Handling ................................................................................. 2-662

Table 2-38 Park and Page Call Handling ................................................................................. 2-663
Table 2-39 Recording Your Paging Message .......................................................................... 2-666
Table 2-40 Setting the Call Handling Options .......................................................................... 2-667

Table 2-41 Picking Up a Parked Call ....................................................................................... 2-667
Table 2-42 Default Incoming Ringing Tone .............................................................................. 2-669
Table 2-43 Error Messages and Causes .................................................................................. 2-673
Table 2-44 InMail Email Account Information ........................................................................... 2-704
Table 2-45 Typical SMS Notification (No Wav File) ................................................................. 2-706
Table 2-46 Common Email Notification SMTP Server Settings ............................................... 2-707
Table 2-47 Some Common Mobile Telephone Service Provider SMS Portals ........................ 2-707
Table 2-48 Turn Email Notification On or Off ........................................................................... 2-712
Table 2-49 Language Setting Operation .................................................................................. 2-725
Table 2-50 DT700 Series Supported Features (IAA) ............................................................... 2-727
Table 2-51 Default Incoming Ringing Tone .............................................................................. 2-735
Table 2-52 Example Required System Settings .................................................................... 2-745
Table 2-53 Example Required IP Terminal Settings ............................................................. 2-745
Table 2-54 Example SV9100 System Router A Port Forwarding Settings ............................ 2-745
xvi List of Tables

Issue 2.0
Table 2-55 NAPT Terminals Minimum Timer Settings .......................................................... 2-746
Table 2-56 Handset Features ................................................................................................... 2-772
Table 2-57 Supported System Feature List .............................................................................. 2-773
Table 2-58 Minimum Bandwidth Requirements ........................................................................ 2-786
Table 2-59 Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device .................................................... 2-789
Table 2-60 SIP INVITE Header Fields ...................................................................................... 2-848
Table 2-61 Delete + from Incoming SIP INVITE ....................................................................... 2-849
Table 2-62 Delete + and Country Code from Incoming SIP INVITE ......................................... 2-849
Table 2-63 Delete + and Country Code from Incoming SIP INVITE ......................................... 2-850
Table 2-64 DR-Viewer Requirements ....................................................................................... 2-858
Table 2-65 Restrictions for Calling Party Names ...................................................................... 2-873
Table 2-66 K-CCIS Main and Remote System VoIP Resources Used .................................... 2-922
Table 2-67 GCD-PVAA Blade Installed in Slot 6 ...................................................................... 2-929

Table 2-68 GCD-PVAA Blade Installed in Slot 4 and Slot 6 ..................................................... 2-930
Table 2-69 Minimum Bandwidth Required ............................................................................... 2-931
Table 2-70 License Information ................................................................................................ 2-953

Table 2-71 SV8100 Supported Hardware .............................................................................. 2-1004
Table 2-72 SV8100 Supported Terminals .............................................................................. 2-1006
Table 2-73 SV8100 Conversion Exception ............................................................................. 2-1006

Table 2-74 Program Data Moved ........................................................................................... 2-1007
Table 2-75 Input Value Change .............................................................................................. 2-1009
Table 2-76 Supported Service Codes .................................................................................... 2-1016
Table 2-77 Caller ID Sent to Mobile Telephone ..................................................................... 2-1020
Table 2-78 Keys for Entering Names ..................................................................................... 2-1064
Table 2-79 Communications Analyst Support ........................................................................ 2-1066
Table 2-80 PCPro and WebPro Comparison ......................................................................... 2-1151

Table 2-81 Selectable Display Messaging Defaults ............................................................... 2-1253
Table 2-82 Selectable Display Message Character Entry Chart ......................................... 2-1256
Table 2-83 Intercom or Trunk Ring Setting ............................................................................ 2-1260
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual xvii

Issue 2.0
Table 2-84 Non-MCU Mode Video Channel VoIP Reservation .............................................. 2-1264
Table 2-85 MCU Mode Video Channel VoIP Reservation (Peer-to-Peer

Enabled Systems) ................................................................................................ 2-1265
Table 2-86 10. Position .......................................................................................................... 2-1278
Table 2-87 30. CPU ................................................................................................................ 2-1278
Table 2-88 Feature Licenses .................................................................................................. 2-1279
Table 2-89 Port Licenses ....................................................................................................... 2-1279
Table 2-90 Network, Interface, Trapset and Trap .................................................................. 2-1280
Table 2-91 IPL Information Using VOIP ................................................................................. 2-1280

Table 2-92 20. Common ......................................................................................................... 2-1280
Table 2-94 SMDR Report Definitions ..................................................................................... 2-1330

Table 2-95 SMDR Report Format with Program 35-02-14 Set to 0 ...................................... 2-1330
Table 2-96 SMDR Report Format with Program 35-02-14 Set to 1 ...................................... 2-1332
Table 2-97 SMDR Summary Report ...................................................................................... 2-1334

Table 2-99 VoIP Resource Chart ........................................................................................... 2-1356
Table 2-100 CPU Reset Programs ........................................................................................... 2-1357
Table 2-101 DT700 Supported Encryption ............................................................................... 2-1374
Table 2-102 SV9100 Supported Terminals .............................................................................. 2-1375
Table 2-103 Terminal Category Reference Chart .................................................................... 2-1376

Table 2-104 Connectivity of Options (DT300/DT700) .............................................................. 2-1378
Table 2-105 Connectivity of Options (DT400/DT800) .............................................................. 2-1379
Table 2-106 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT300/DT700) ........................................... 2-1380
Table 2-107 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT400/DT800) ........................................... 2-1381
Table 2-108 DT330 Compatibility Settings ............................................................................... 2-1382
Table 2-109 Firmware Compatibility Matrix .............................................................................. 2-1383
Table 2-110 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (DT300/DT700) ................................. 2-1383
Table 2-111 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (DT400/DT800) ................................. 2-1384
xviii List of Tables

Issue 2.0
Table 2-112 Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility (DT300/DT700) ..................................... 2-1385
Table 2-113 Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility (DT400/DT800) ..................................... 2-1386
Table 2-114 Adapter Compatibility ........................................................................................... 2-1387
Table 2-115 Desktop Suite Licenses ........................................................................................ 2-1399
Table 2-116 Exceptions to Firewall for Ports ............................................................................ 2-1399
Table 2-117 Exceptions to Windows Process .......................................................................... 2-1400
Table 2-118 Station Application ................................................................................................2-1420
Table 2-119 Trunk Application ..................................................................................................2-1420
Table 2-120 TAPI Commands .................................................................................................. 2-1454
Table 2-121 SV9100 Maximum System Capacities Trunks/Ports/Channels ......................... 2-1537
Table 2-122 SV9100 9.5 (Base and Expansion) Maximum System

Capacities Trunks/Ports/Channels .................................................................... 2-1538
Table 2-123 Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface Blades ................................... 2-1539
Table 2-124 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface Blades ..................................... 2-1541
Table 2-125 Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface Blades ............................ 2-1543
Table 2-126 Board Power Factor ............................................................................................. 2-1544

Table 2-127 Terminal Power Factor ......................................................................................... 2-1545
Table 2-128 Maximum Number of Packages Installed ............................................................. 2-1546
Table 2-129 IP Recorder Basic Licenses ................................................................................. 2-1567

Table 2-130 SV9100 CPU License (NEC SonicView Recorder) .............................................. 2-1574
Table 2-131 Known Limitations ................................................................................................ 2-1576
Table 2-132 System Minimum Requirements .......................................................................... 2-1581
Table 2-133 Server Hardware Matrix ....................................................................................... 2-1582
Table 2-134 Common Hardware Requirements ....................................................................... 2-1582
Table 2-135 Supervisor/Agent Studio PC Recommendations .................................................. 2-1583
Table 2-136 Supported Operating Systems ............................................................................. 2-1584
Table 2-137 Supported Databases ........................................................................................... 2-1584
Table 2-138 SV9100 CPU License (NEC SonicView Recorder) .............................................. 2-1584
Table 2-139 Voice Prompting Messages .................................................................................. 2-1622
SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual xix

Issue 2.0
Table 2-140 Default Incoming Ringing Tone ............................................................................ 2-1641
Table 2-141 Error Messages and Causes ................................................................................ 2-1645

Table 2-142 Supported Wireless DECT (SIP) Features ........................................................... 2-1659
Table 3-1 Post Dialing Service Codes Single Digit Post Dialing Codes .................................. 3-2
Table 3-2 Service Codes by Number ......................................................................................... 3-3
Table 3-3 Service Codes by Feature ........................................................................................ 3-12

Table 3-4 Function Key Codes by Feature ............................................................................... 3-21
Table 3-5 Function Key Codes by Number .............................................................................. 3-28
Table 4-1 Feature Availability by Software Revision .................................................................. 4-1
xx List of Tables
UNIVERGE SV9100
Introduction Chapter 1
SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
UNIVERGE SV9100 (DTZ / ITZ terminals) and UNIVERGE SV8100 (DTL / ITL
terminals) can be used with the UNIVERGE SV9100 system.
SECTION 2 MULTILINE TERMINALS USED WITH THE SYSTEM
SV9100 Terminals
The SV9100 multiline terminals, either with or without LCD display, offer a variety of
colors, and line sizes.
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the display provides call status data and
programming information.
Terminal line sizes include 2, 6, 12, 24, and 32.
IP Terminals are available in 2, 6, 12, 24, and 32.
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard.
Only the DT330 series terminals are compatible with APR-L adapters.
An Attendant Add-On DCL-60-1 Console is available with 60 stations and/or outside
line assignments.
If the page switching key on the DCL-60-1 Console is used, there is a maximum of 120
keys. Two pages of 54 programmable keys and six fixed keys.
A power failure module PSA-L is available for fail-over to POTS line when there is a
loss of power or network connection to the SV9100.
Features and Specifications Manual 1-1

Issue 2.0
Figure 1-1 SV9100 Key Assignment Example
Softkeys
Line Key
Kit
Numbered
Keypad
Key
Kit
Recall
Hold
Feature
Transfer Mic
Answer Menu
Speaker
Cursor
Pad
1-2 Introduction
UNIVERGE SV9100
Features Chapter 2
SECTION 1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This chapter provides an alphabetical listing of the features that are available with the
UNIVERGE SV9100 system.
Each feature provides the following information:
Description briefly describes the feature and how it is used.
Conditions provides special operating conditions (if any) that need to be

considered with using the feature.
Default Settings indicates the factory default setting (if any).
System Availability describes multiline terminals that can be used with this
feature and lists any additional equipment, such as adapters or blades, that must be
installed for this feature to operate.
Programming lists the memory blocks that support the feature.
Related Features lists features that are associated with the feature being
described (e.g., the Account Codes feature lists the Speed Dialing feature in the
related features list because speed dialing bins can contain stored account code (if
any).
Operation provides step-by-step instructions for using the feature.
SECTION 2 IMPORTANT NOTES
Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operation with One-Touch Keys
A multiline terminal user can access many features using Service Codes (e.g.,
Service Code 744 sets Call Forward Busy/No Answer). To streamline the operation
of their telephone, a multiline terminal user can store these codes under One-Touch
Keys. This provides one-button operation for almost any feature. To find out more,
turn to the One-Touch Calling and One-Touch Serial Operation features.

Issue 2.0
Programmable Keys
When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation
similar to (PRG 15-07 or SC nnn). This means that the key requires service code
nnn, and you can program this code in Program 15-07 or by dialing Service Code
751 or 752. Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information.
Using Handsfree
The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just
press a line key or Speaker key to answer or place a call. For extensions without
Automatic Handsfree, the user must:
Lift the handset or press Speaker for Intercom dial tone.
Lift the handset or press Speaker, then press a line key for trunk dial tone.
Port Assignments
Port Calculation for Trunks:
The system detects the type of blade (trunk or extension) and assigns the required
extension or trunk ports to the slot. The system will use the next available port
numbers it will not reserve any ports.
SECTION 3 SV8100 TO UNIVERGE SV9100 FEATURE COMPARISON LIST
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List provides a cross-reference between the

UNIVERGE SV8100 and the UNIVERGE SV9100 features.
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name UNIVERGE SV9100 Feature Name
Account Code Entry Account Code Entry

Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
Alarm Alarm
Alarm Reports Alarm Reports
Alphanumeric Display Alphanumeric Display
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Ancillary Device Connection Ancillary Device Connection
Answer Hold Answer Hold
Answer Key Answer Key
Attendant Call Queuing Attendant Call Queuing
Automatic Release Automatic Release
2-2 Features
Issue 2.0
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Background Music Background Music
Barge-In Barge-In
Battery Backup System Memory Battery Backup System Memory
Battery Backup System Power Battery Backup System Power
Callback Callback
Caller ID Caller Return Caller ID Caller Return
Caller ID Caller ID
Caller ID Flexible Ringing Caller ID Flexible Ringing
Caller ID Memo Display Function Caller ID Memo Display Function
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Duration Timer Call Duration Timer
Call Forwarding Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding with Follow Me Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding Centrex Call Forwarding Centrex
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Call Monitoring Call Monitoring
Call Redirect Call Redirect
Call Waiting/Camp-On Call Waiting/Camp-On
Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing Central Office Calls, Placing
Class of Service Class of Service
Clock/Calendar Display Clock/Calendar Display
Code Restriction Code Restriction
Code Restriction Override Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction, Dial Block Code Restriction, Dial Block
Conference Conference
Not Supported Conference Remote
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Contact Center

Issue 2.0
Continued Dialing Continued Dialing

Cordless DECT Terminals Cordless DECT Terminals
Cordless Telephone Connection Cordless Telephone Connection
CO Message Waiting Indication CO Message Waiting Indication
Data Line Security Data Line Security
Delayed Ringing Delayed Ringing
Department Calling Department Calling
Department Step Calling Department Step Calling
Dialing Number Preview Dialing Number Preview
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Tone Detection Dial Tone Detection
Digital Trunk Clocking Digital Trunk Clocking
Directed Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup
Directory Dialing Directory Dialing
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL) Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Door Box Door Box
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb
Drop Key Drop Key
Dterm Cordless II Terminal Not Supported
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal Not Supported
DTPlusWare Not Supported

Ecology Ecology
Electra Elite IPK Terminals Not Supported
E911 Compatibility E911 Compatibility
Facsimile CO Branch Connection Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Flash Flash
Flexible System Numbering Flexible System Numbering
2-4 Features
Issue 2.0
Flexible Timeouts Flexible Timeouts

Forced Trunk Disconnect Forced Trunk Disconnect
General Purpose Relay General Purpose Relay
Group Call Pickup Group Call Pickup
Group Listen Group Listen
Handset Mute Handset Mute
Handsfree and Monitor Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Headset Operation Headset Operation
Hold Hold
Hotel/Motel Hotel/Motel
Hotline Hotline
Hot Key-Pad Hot Key-Pad
Howler Tone Service Howler Tone Service
VM8000 InMail InMail
VM8000 InMail Park and Page InMail Park and Page
VM8000 InMail Upload Download Audio InMail Upload Download Audio
VM8000 InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID
VM8000 InMail Cascade Message Notification InMail Cascade Message Notification
VM8000 InMail Email Notification InMail Email Notification
VM8000 InMail Find-Me Follow-Me InMail Find-Me Follow-Me
VM8000 InMail Language Setting InMail Language Setting
Instant Access Application (IAA) Instant Access Application (IAA)
Intercom Intercom
IP Multiline Station (SIP) IP Multiline Station (SIP)
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440 Cordless IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440 Cordless
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440/G566/G266 with IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440/G566/G266 with AP400/
AP400/AP300 AP300
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) IP Single Line Telephone (SIP)
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) NAT Mode IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) NAT Mode
IP Trunk H.323 IP Trunk H.323
IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol

Issue 2.0
IP Video Doorphone IP Video Doorphone

IP/Digital Call Logging IP/Digital Call Logging
ISDN Compatibility ISDN Compatibility
IVR Appointment Reminder Server IVR Appointment Reminder Server
IVR Broadcast Server IVR Broadcast Server
Not Supported K-CCIS Call Rerouting
K-CCIS IP K-CCIS IP
K-CCIS IP with PVA K-CCIS IP with PVA
K-CCIS T1 K-CCIS T1
Last Number Redial Last Number Redial
Licensing Licensing
Not Supported Line Load Control
Line Preference Line Preference
Long Conversation Cutoff Long Conversation Cutoff
Loop Keys Loop Keys
Maintenance Maintenance
Meet Me Conference Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Paging Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging Transfer Meet Me Paging Transfer
Memo Dial Memo Dial
Message Waiting Message Waiting
MH240 Wireless IP Telephone Not Supported
Microphone Cutoff Microphone Cutoff
IPK/IPK II Migration Migration SV8100/SV8300
Not Supported Migration SV9100-S to SV9100-E System
Mobile Extension Mobile Extension
Multiple Trunk Types Multiple Trunk Types
Music on Hold Music on Hold
Name Storing Name Storing
SMB8000 Communications Analyst NEC Communications Analyst
NEC Meeting Center (NMC) Future
Night Service Night Service
2-6 Features
Issue 2.0
Off-Hook Signaling Off-Hook Signaling

One-Touch Calling One-Touch Calling
Operator Operator
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Off-Premise Extension
Paging, External Paging, External
Paging, External (VRS) Paging, External (VRS)
Paging, Internal Paging, Internal
Park Park
PBX Compatibility PBX Compatibility
PC Programming PC Programming
Power Failure Transfer Power Failure Transfer
Prime Line Selection Prime Line Selection
Private Line Private Line
Programmable Function Keys Programmable Function Keys
Programming from a Multiline Terminal Programming from a Multiline Terminal
Pulse to Tone Conversion Pulse to Tone Conversion
Redial Function Redial Function
Remote (System) Upgrade Remote (System) Upgrade
Repeat Redial Repeat Redial
Resident System Program Resident System Program
Reverse Voice Over Reverse Voice Over
Not Supported RGA Conference
Not Supported RGA Router
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Ring Groups Ring Groups
Room Monitor Room Monitor
Save Number Dialed Save Number Dialed
Secondary Incoming Extension Secondary Incoming Extension
Secretary Call Pickup Secretary Call Pickup
Secretary Call (Buzzer) Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Security Security
Selectable Display Messaging Selectable Display Messaging

Issue 2.0
Selectable Ring Tones Selectable Ring Tones

Serial Call Serial Call
Not Supported Simple MCU Video
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
SLT Adapter Not Supported
SMB8000 Conference Bridge Not Supported
SMB8000 Conference Bridge Outlook Integration Not Supported
Softkeys Softkeys
Speed Dial System/Group/Station Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Speed Dial Telephone Book Speed Dial Telephone Book
Station Hunt Station Hunt
Station Message Detail Recording Station Message Detail Recording
Station Name Assignment User Programmable Station Name Assignment User Programmable
Station Relocation Station Relocation
SV8100 Internal Router Not Supported
SV8100 NetLink SV9100 NetLink
SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch SV9100 PoE Gigabit Switch
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals SV9100 Terminals
SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications SV9100 UC Suite
Synchronous Ringing Synchronous Ringing
Not Supported System Caller Log
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Tandem Ringing Tandem Ringing
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
TAPI Compatibility TAPI Compatibility
Tone Override Tone Override
Traffic Reports Traffic Reports
Transfer Transfer
Trunk Groups Trunk Groups
Trunk Group Routing Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
2-8 Features
Issue 2.0
UCB (Unified Communications for Business) Not Supported

UM8000 Mail UM8000 Mail
uMobility Server Based Future
uMobility Wi-Fi Client Future
Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Uniform Numbering Network Uniform Numbering Network
Universal Slots Universal Slots
User Programming Ability User Programming Ability
Virtual Extensions Virtual Extensions
Voice Call Recording Voice Call Recording
Voice Mail Integration (Analog) Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Over Voice Over
Voice Response System (VRS) Voice Response System (VRS)
Voice Response System (VRS) Embedded VRS Not Supported
Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio
Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Park Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Park
and Page and Page
Volume Controls Volume Controls
Warning Tone for Long Conversation Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Wireless DECT (SIP) Wireless DECT (SIP)
SECTION 4 FEATURES
The remainder of this document provides the features for the UNIVERGE SV9100
system.

Issue 2.0
2-10 Features
Account Code Entry
Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or
restrict trunk calls. Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while placing
A
a trunk call or anytime while on a call. The system does not require the user to enter the optional
account code.
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
The system can control extension user ability to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. When
this option is enabled, a user can dial while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and
then dial to return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digit the user dials after answering
an incoming call outdials on the connected trunk.
Hiding Account Codes
Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephone display. This prevents, for example, an
unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display. When
hidden, the Account Code digits show on the telephone display.
Account Code Capacity
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes.
Account Codes can have 1~16 digits using 0~9 and #.
Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes
When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system does not retain
Account Code information. To redial any number with these features, the user must enter an
Account Code.:
If a user enters 12345203 926 540067890, if the Last Number Redial feature is used,

NOTE
the system dials the number as 203 926 540067890. The 67890 is not treated as an
Account Code.
Conditions
If a user enters a code that exceeds 16 digits, the system ignores it.
If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., 1234) appear
on the SMDR report as part of the number dialed.
Do not use an asterisk in a PBX access code when using Account Codes.
Otherwise, after the , the trunk stops sending digits to the central office.
Account Code Entry 2-11

Issue 2.0
Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the telephone
display).
To simplify Account Code Entry, store the Account Code (e.g., 1234) in a One-Touch Key,
and press the key instead of dialing the code.
Speed Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes. Prevent them from being displayed
using Program 35-05-04.
When Account Codes are enabled, the user must press the three times before the
character is passed to the Telco. The system recognizes the initial as the beginning of an
Account Code entry, the second as the end of an Account Code entry, and the third is
passed to telco.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
One-Touch Calling
PBX Compatibility
2-12 Account Code Entry

Issue 2.0
Guide to Feature Programming

The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Program Name/Description Input Data Default
Number
1 2 3
14-01-11 Basic Trunk Data Setup Account Code 0= Disable (No) 1

Required 1= Enable (Yes)
Enable/Disable Account Codes for each trunk.
15-07-01 Programmable Function Keys Line Key 1 ~ 48 Refer to the

Assign a function key as an Account Code key 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 50). Use this key instead of the dial pad 751 by default) Manual for
to enter the before and after the Account 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
Code. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-06-01 Class of Service for Extensions Day Night/Mode: 1 ~ 8 Extension port

Assign a Class of Service (1 ~ 15) to an Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
extension. (1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1
21-01-04 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial 0 ~ 64800 seconds 5

Tone Detection Time
Set the time the system waits for the Telco to

return Dial Tone.
35-05-01 Account Code Setup Account Code Mode 0 = Account Codes disabled 0
Select the Account Code Mode. (None)
1 = Account Codes optional
2 = Account Codes required but
not verified (No verify)
3 = Account Codes required and
verified (Verify)
35-05-02 Account Code Setup Forced Account 0 = Account Codes for toll and 0
Code Toll Call Setup local calls (All)
Enable Account Codes for all calls or just toll 1 = Account Codes just for toll
calls (for mode 2 or 3 in Program 35-05-01). calls (STD)
35-05-03 Account Code Setup Account Codes for 0 = Account Codes for incoming 0
Incoming Calls calls disabled (No)
For each Class of Service (1 ~ 15), enter 1 in 1 = Account codes for incoming
this option to Enable Account Codes for calls enabled (Yes)
incoming calls. Enter 0 to Disable Account
Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes
you enter dial out on the connected trunk.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
35-05-04 Account Code Setup Hiding Account 0 = Account Codes not 0

Codes displayed
For each Class of Service (1 ~ 15), enter 1 to 1 = Account Codes displayed
have the system hide Account Codes on an

extension display as they are entered. Enter 0
to have the Account Codes displayed.
35-06-01 SMDR Account Code Setup Verified Maximum of 16 digits. No Setting

Account Code 1 ~ 9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card)
Enter Account Codes in the Verification
Account Code List. You can enter up to 2000
codes with 3 ~ 16 digits, using the characters
0~9 or #. Use the LK1 to enter a wild card. For

example, the entry @234 means the user can
enter 0234-9234.
This Program will accept a 1 or 2 digit code
but requires a valid input of 3 ~ 16 digits to function.
Operation
To enter an Account Code anytime while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. Use this procedure if your system has
Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also use this procedure for incoming calls. This procedure is
not available for single line telephones.
1. Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
2. Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial shows on the telephone display.
3. Dial .
- OR -
To enter an Account Code before dialing the outside number:
If your system has Forced or Verified Account Codes, you may use this procedure instead of letting the
system prompt you for your Account Code. You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional
Account Codes.
2-14 Account Code Entry

Issue 2.0
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed into your
Verified Account Code list.
1. Access trunk for outside call.
Press a line key or dial a code (except 9) to access a trunk. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on
page 2-209 for more information.
2. Dial .
- OR -
If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account Codes
are hidden, each digit you dial shows on the telephone display.
4. Dial .
- OR -
5. Dial the number you want to call.
To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:
This procedure is not available for single line telephones.

1. Answer incoming call.
If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps dial digits out to the connected
trunk.
2. Dial .
3. Enter the Account Code.
You can enter any code of the proper length. Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified.
4. Dial .
To enter an Account Code at a single line telephone:

Dial a code to access a trunk. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page 2-209 for more
information.
2. Dial
3. Enter Account Code (1~16 digits).
4. Dial .
5. Dial number you want to call.

Issue 2.0
Account Code - Forced/Verified/Unverified
Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk
calls. The system has two types of Forced Account Codes:
Forced Account Codes (Unverified)
Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time they place
a trunk call. If the user does not enter the code, the system prevents the call. As with Account
Codes, the extension user can elect to enter an Account Code for an incoming call. However, the
system does not require it. Forced Account Codes do not block emergency assistance (911)
calls.
Once set up in system programming, you can enable Forced Account Codes trunk-by-trunk. In
addition, Forced Account Codes can apply to all outside calls or only long distance calls. Forced
Account Codes for Toll Calls restricts calls according to the following chart:
Number of Digits
If first digit is not 1 If first digit is 1
Dialed
1~3 Not allowed Not allowed

4~7 Does not require Account Code Requires Account Code
More than 7 Does not require Account Code Requires Account Code
800 and 888 Does not require Account Code Does not require Account Code
011 (International) Requires Account Code N/A
911 Does not require Account Code N/A
Verified Account Codes

With Verified Account Codes, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list of up
to 2000 programmed codes. If the Account Code is in the list, the call goes through. If the code
dialed is not in the list, the system prevents the call. Verified Account Codes can have 3~16 digits
using the characters 0~9 and #. During programming, you can use wild cards to streamline
entering codes into system memory. For example, the entry 123@ lets users dial Verified Account
Codes from 1230 through 1239.
Operator Notification
To prevent Account Code abuse, the system can notify the operator each time an Account Code
violation occurs (Program: 20-13-20). This can happen if the user fails to enter an Account Code (if
Forced) or enters a Verified Account Code that is not in the list. The notification is an automatic Intercom
call to the attendant and a RESTRICT message in the operator display.
2-16 Account Code - Forced/Verified/Unverified

Issue 2.0
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
The system allows extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. When this option is
enabled, a user can dial while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and then dial to return to
their caller. If the option is disabled, any digit the user dials after answering an incoming call outdials on
the connected trunk.
Hiding Account Codes
Optionally, Account Codes can be hidden from a telephone display. This prevents, for example, an
unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display. When hidden,
the Account Code digits show as on the telephone display.
Account Code Capacity
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes. Account
Codes can have 1~16 digits using 0~9 and #. Verified Account Codes can have 3~16 digits.
Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes
When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system does not retain Account
Code information. For any number redialed with these features, the user must enter an Account Code.:
If a user enters 12345203 926 540067890, if the Last Number Redial feature is used, the

NOTE
system dials the number as 203 926 540067890. The 67890 is not treated as an Account Code.
Conditions
If a user enters a code that exceeds 16 digits, the system ignores the Account Code Entry.
If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., 1234) appear on the
SMDR report as part of the number dialed.
If using Forced Account Code with single line telephone you need a VRS to get the prompts
to enter the Forced Account Code.
When you use Forced Account Code on only toll calls, and you dial a local call, you hear a
beep.
The timer set in Program 21-01-14 is applied to toll calls and local calls.
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station bins can contain stored Account Codes. They can be
prevented from being displayed using Program 35-05-04.
To simplify Account Code Entry, store the Account Code (e.g., 1234) in a One-Touch
Key. Just press the key instead of dialing the codes.
Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the telephone
display).
Do not use an asterisk in a PBX/CTX access code when using Account Codes. The ,
causes the trunk to stop sending digits to the central office until another is entered.
Account Code - Forced/Verified/Unverified 2-17

Issue 2.0
Account Codes for incoming calls are not available for single line telephones.
When using Forced Account Codes (Unverified) for toll calls only, the station follows the
timer setting in Program 21-01-14 for all calls.
System Account codes are bypassed when using DISA trunks. If a user calls in via a DISA
trunk, the user is not required to enter an account code.
When Account Codes are enabled in a Class of Service, extensions in that Class of Service
no longer follow the Maximum Dialing Digit setting in the ARS/F-Routes.
Verified Account Codes for Toll Calls across a CCIS network are not restricted when a trunk
access code is added to the number allowing ARS routing through another K-CCIS T1/IP
networked site. This access code (typically a 9), precedes the dialed 1 used by the
system to identify a long distance call. As a result, the call is no longer considered long
distance and the account code is not required.
Forced Account Codes restrict toll calls based off the digits the system dials, not what the
user dials. For example, ARS can be used to manipulate what the user dials. The
determination of a toll versus local call is made after ARS has manipulated the number.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
VRS for Forced Account Codes for Single Line Telephones
Related Features
PBX Compatibility
Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Station Message Detail Recording

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-11 Basic Trunk Data Setup Account Code 0= Disable (No) 1

Required 1= Enable (Yes)
Enable/Disable Account Codes for each trunk.

Assign a function key as an Account Code key 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 50). Use this key instead of the dial pad 751 by default) Manual for
to enter the before and after the Account 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
Code. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1
20-13-20 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) Account Code/Toll Restriction 1 = On
Operator Alert (Restricted Operation
Transfer)
Turn Off or On the Operator Alert when a forced
account code is incorrectly entered.
21-01-14 System Options for Outgoing Calls Forced 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3

Account Code Inter-digit Timer
The system waits this time for a user to enter a

Forced Account code.
21-04-01 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Day/Night Mode 2

Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1 ~ 15) to an 1 ~ 9 (9 = Power Failure Mode)
extension. Restriction Class 1 ~ 15
35-05-01 Account Code Setup Account Code Mode 0 = Account Codes disabled 0
For each Class of Service (1 ~ 15) select the (None)
Account Code Mode. 1 = Account Codes optional
2 = Account Codes required but
not verified (No verify)
3 = Account Codes required and
verified (Verify)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
35-05-02 Account Code Setup Forced Account 0 = Account Codes for toll and 0
Code Toll Call Setup local calls (All)
Enable Account Codes for all calls or just toll 1 = Account Codes just for toll
calls (for mode 2 or 3 in Program 35-05-01). calls (STD)
35-05-03 Account Code Setup Account Codes for 0 = Account Codes for incoming 0
Incoming Calls calls disabled (No)
For each Class of Service (1 ~ 15), enter 1 in 1 = Account codes for incoming
this option to Enable Account Codes for calls enabled (Yes)
incoming calls. Enter 0 to Disable Account
Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes
you enter dial out on the connected trunk.
35-05-04 Account Code Setup Hiding Account 0 = Account Codes not 0

Codes displayed
For each Class of Service (1 ~ 15), enter 1 to 1 = Account Codes displayed
have the system hide Account Codes on an

extension display as they are entered. Enter 0
to have the Account Codes displayed.
35-06-01 Verified Account Code Table Verified Maximum of 16 digits. No Setting

Account Code 1 ~ 9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card)
Enter data in the Verified Account Code Table.
You can enter up to 2000 codes from 3 ~ 16
digits in length. For a wild card @, press the LK

1.
This Program will accept a 1 or 2 digit code
but requires a valid input of 3 ~ 16 digits to function.
40-10-01 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS 0 = Not Used 0

Fixed Message 1 = Used
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the system ability to
play the fixed VRS messages (such as You
have a message).
Operation
To enter an Account Code anytime while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. Use this procedure if your system has
Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also use this procedure for incoming calls. This procedure is
not available for single line telephones.
1. Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).

Issue 2.0
3. Dial .
- OR -
To enter a Forced Account Code before dialing the outside number:
If your system has Forced or Verified Account Codes, you may use this procedure instead of letting the
system prompt you for your Account Code. You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional
Account Codes.
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed in your
Verified Account Code list.
Press a line key or dial a code.to access a trunk. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page 2-209
for more information.
2. Dial .
- OR -
3. Dial your Account Code [1~16 digits, using 0~9 and # or (3~16 digits for Forced)].
If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account Codes
are hidden, each digit you dial shows on the telephone display (depending on programming).
4. Dial .
- OR -
5. Dial the number you want to call.
To dial an outside number and let your system tell you when a Forced Account Code is required:
1. Access a trunk and dial the number you want to call.
2. Wait for your call to go through.
- OR -
3. If you hear Please enter an Account Code, (depending on system programming) and your
display shows ENTER ACCOUNT CODE.
Dial .
- OR -
Dial your Account Code (3~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).

Issue 2.0
Dial .
- OR -
To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:
This procedure is not available for single line telephones.

1. Answer incoming call.
If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps dial digits out onto the connected
trunk.
2. Dial .
3. Enter the Account Code (1~16 digits).
You can enter any code of the proper length.
4. Dial .
To enter a Forced Account Code at a single line telephone:

Dial a code to access a trunk. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page 2-209 for more
information.
With Forced Account Codes, you hear, Please enter an Account Code.(depending on programming).
2. Dial .
3. Enter Account Code (3~16 digits).
4. Dial .
5. Dial number you want to call.

Issue 2.0
Alarm
Description
Alarm lets any station extension work like an Alarm clock. An extension user can have Alarm remind
them of a meeting or an appointment. There are two types of Alarms:
Alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time)
Alarm 2 (sounds every day at the preset time)
Conditions
Single line telephones ring and Music on Hold is heard when the Alarm sounds.
Only a multiline terminal user can view what time the Alarm is currently set for.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
None
Alarm 2-23
Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-11-12 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry MLT, SLT 727

Operation) Alarm Clock 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the alarm clock used for registration digits

and setup.
20-01-06 System Options Alarm Duration 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Set the duration of the Alarm signal.

Operation
To set the alarm:

1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.

2. Dial 727.
3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
Alarm 1 sounds only once. Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time.
4. Dial the alarm time (24-hour clock).

For example, for 1:15 PM dial 1315.
A confirmation tone is heard if the alarm has been set. If the alarm was not set, an error tone is heard
instead.
5. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker to hang up.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, hang up.
2-24 Alarm
Issue 2.0
To silence an alarm:
1. At multiline terminal, press Exit.
- OR -

The single line set user hears Music on Hold when the handset is lifted.
To check the programmed alarm time at a multiline terminal:

1. Press Help.
2. Dial 727.
The programmed time displays.
4. Press Exit.
To cancel an alarm:
- OR -

2. Dial 727.
4. Dial 9999.
5. At a multiline terminal, press Speaker to hang up.
- OR -
Alarm 2-25
Issue 2.0
Alarm Reports
Description
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system logs various errors and reports information about the operation that
can be used to determine the cause of a problem. The system can indicate several errors on the
multiline telephone display, output to a USB stick on the GCD-CP10, or be downloaded in PCPro. The
report data also can be sent via email.
Alarm Report
The Alarm Reports indicate:

System start-up/upgrade date and time
Blade communication error with date and time and the restoration date and time
Date and time a blade was removed from the system
Date and time an extension was disconnected from the system
Date and time of any system data change
Table 2-2 Sample Alarm Report
<< Alarm Report 05/16/2006 14:30 PAGE 001
LVL NO STAT DATE TIME ITEM UNIT SLT PRT PARAMETER
MIN 0002 REC 05/16/06 14:21 PKG Installation PRT 02 00
MAJ 0010 ERR 05/16/06 14:21 ISDN Link PRT 02 12
MAJ 0010 REC 05/16/06 14:21 ISDN Link PRT 02 12
MIN 0002 ERR 05/16/06 14:33 PKG Installation PRT 02 00
MIN 0002 ERR 05/16/06 14:33 PKG Installation ESI 05 00
MIN 0002 ERR 05/16/06 14:33 PKG Installation SLIB 07 00
MAJ 0050 WAR 05/16/06 14:33 System Start Up none 00 00
MAJ 0014 ERR 05/16/06 14:33 NTCPU-LAN Link none 00 00
MAJ 0014 REC 05/16/06 14:35 NTCPU-LAN Link none 00 00
MIN 0002 ERR 05/16/06 14:36 PKG Installation CTP 08 00
2-26 Alarm Reports

Issue 2.0
Table 2-2 Sample Alarm Report (Continued)
<< Alarm Report 05/16/2006 14:30 PAGE 001
LVL NO STAT DATE TIME ITEM UNIT SLT PRT PARAMETER
MIN 0002 REC 05/16/06 14:37 PKG Installation VMS 08 00
MIN 0002 ERR 05/16/06 14:38 PKG Installation VMS 08 00
MIN 0002 ERR 05/16/06 14:40 PKG Installation PRT 07 00
MAJ 0006 ERR 05/16/06 14:41 Blocking ESIB 01 05
MAJ 0006 REC 05/16/06 15:01 Blocking ESIB 01 05
MAJ 0006 ERR 05/16/06 15:05 Blocking ESIB 01 07
MAJ 0006 REC 05/16/06 15:07 Blocking ESIB 01 07
MIN 0068 ERR 01/22/09 09:30 VoIP All DSP Busy VoIPDB 01 00 STA
MIN 0068 ERR 01/22/09 09:31 VoIP All DSP Busy VoIPDB 01 00 TRK
MIN 0068 ERR 01/22/09 09:35 VoIP All DSP Busy VoIPDB 01 00 LNK
MIN 0068 ERR 01/22/09 09:40 VoIP All DSP Busy VoIPDB 01 00 NET
Table 2-3 Alarm Report Definitions
Alarm Report Heading Definitions
LVL Alarm Type (MAJ = Major, MIN = Minor)

NO Number of Alarm (4-digit)
STAT Status (REC = Recovered, ERR = Error, WAR = Warning
DATE Date the Alarm Occurred
TIME Time the Alarm Occurred
ITEM Name of the Alarm
UNIT Name of the Blade
SLT Chassis Slot Number
PRT Chassis Port Number
PARAMETER Related Information
Alarm Reports 2-27

Issue 2.0
Table 2-4 Alarm Report Item Definitions
Item Name Definition
PKG Installation Blade is removed or inserted.

ISDN Link ISDN Line failure is detected.
GCD-CP10 LAN Link GCD-CP10 LAN connection failure is detected.
Blocking Terminal Failure may have occurred because terminal blocking is detected. Terminal
is unplugged or wire is disconnected.
System Data Change System Upgrade performed or Programming change.
System Start Up System is reset.
SMDR Link Connection failure is detected between the GCD-CP10 and SMDR printer device.
STA DSP for IP Station Call were all busy.
TRK DSP for Trunk Call were all busy, includes SIP trunks.
LNK DSP for Net-Link Call were all busy.
NET DSP for CCISoIP Networking Call were all busy.
System Information
The system can print a report of the blades installed, the port assignments, and the port types. This
information is sent to the extension defined in Program 90-13.
The System Information Reports indicate:

Date and Time of the Report
Blade names
Slot condition (working, blocked)
Port assignment
Port classification
Table 2-5 Sample System Information Printout
System Information 05/18/2006 11:02
slot location type assign port condition note
1 1-1 DLC 1-16 Running -------- Connect:
2 1-2 PRT 1-23 Running
3 1-3 COT 25-28 Running
2-28 Alarm Reports

Issue 2.0
Table 2-5 Sample System Information Printout (Continued)
System Information 05/18/2006 11:02
slot location type assign port condition note
4 1-4 none none Not Install
5 1-5 DLC 33-40 Not Install -------- Connect:
6 1-6 LCA 17-24 Running
7 1-7 PRT 29-51 Not Install
8 1-8 VM00 25-32 Running
9 2-1 none Not Install
Alarm Reports 2-29

Issue 2.0
Conditions
Alarm Reports and System Information Reports can be output to a USB stick on the
GCD-CP10.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 supports the following Alarms to be output to the LCD of a
multiline terminal:
SMDR Buffer Full
GCD-CP10-LAN link Error
The UNIVERGE SV9100 does not support printouts of the following Alarms:
Power Failure
RAM Backup Battery Error
Networking Keep Alive Error
IP Duplication Alarm
Up to 12 System Alarm times can be scheduled to print on a Monthly, Daily, and Hourly time
frame. The report indicates both Major and Minor Alarms.
System Information Reports cannot be set to output at a scheduled time.
When using the email functionality of reports, the email address in Program 90-11-10 (From
Address) must be set for the email feature to work.
After a new alarm is output, it cannot be output a second time. New alarms must be
generated before Program 90-12-04 can be performed a second time.
Up to 100 System Alarm Reports can be stored. When the buffer fills, the oldest record is
deleted to allow the new record to be saved.
If the System is set up to email the Alarm Reports and the Mail Server is down, the report is
not sent.
System Information Reports cannot be set for output via email.
Scheduled Alarm Reports via email prints all alarms. When the system detects New
alarms, this information is output via email individually.
Email Alarm Reports can be sent when each New alarm occurs (Per Event). If you want to
receive complete Alarm Reports periodically, you must specify 12 individual dates and
times in Program 90-24-01~Program 90-24-04 (per period).
A maximum of 99 entries are emailed with the scheduled alarms.

The DIMLast and DIMDump files are not sent via email when Program 90-03-01 is used to
manually generate a data dump. They are only saved on the USB attached to the CCPU.
Once successfully sent, the DIMLast and DIMDump files are deleted from the system.
If the email retry limit is exceeded, the DIMLast and DIMDump files are deleted from the
system.
2-30 Alarm Reports

Issue 2.0
A USB Drive must be mounted to the CCPU for the DIMLast and DIMDump files to be sent
via email.
If Program 90-11-15 is set to 1 (Enable) and no USB drive is mounted to the CCPU, the
system will not restart if an error occurs which causes the SV9100 to reboot.
When attempting a call requiring an IP to TDM conversion and no DSP resource is
available, the system displays a message on the multiline terminal and can generate an
alarm via the Alarm Report.
The SV9100 is able to detect another device on the same subnet having an IP address that
conflicts with those assigned to the CPU, IPLE, and DSP resources to make
troubleshooting easy when IP packets are not sent.
The SV9100 can be configured to send an email notification of a system event that causes
a reset and DIMLast and DIMDump files to be created. The system can also be configured
to email the DIMLast and DIMDump text files by using the SMTP email settings in the
47-18-xx programs.
The Alarm Improvement, where the DIMLast and DIMDump files are sent via email, require
the occurrence of a major system event. DIMLast and DIMDump files are not sent for
normal alarm events.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
When using the feature to email DIMLast and DIMDump files, the following components are
required:
USB memory stick
Related Features
None
Alarm Reports 2-31

Issue 2.0

Setting Up Alarms:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-10-01 System Alarm Setup Alarm Type 0 = Not Set 0

Set the alarm type 14 and 60. 1 = Major Alarm
Alarm 14 GCD-CP10-LAN Link Error (IP 2 = Minor Alarm
Layer 1)
Assign a Major or Minor alarm status to the
LAN link. This program also assigns whether or
not the alarm is displayed to a key telephone
and whether or not the alarm information is
reported to the predefined destination.
Alarm 57 IP Duplication Alarm
Assign a Major or Minor alarm status to the IP

Duplication Alarm.
Alarm 60 SIP Registration Error
Notification
Assign a Major or Minor alarm status to the SIP
Registration Error. This program also assigns
whether or not the alarm is displayed to a key
telephone and whether or not the alarm
information is reported to the predefined
destination.
90-10-02 System Alarm Setup Report 0 = No Report (no autodial) 0

Assign whether or not the alarm is displayed to 1 = Report (autodial)
a multiline terminal and whether or not the
alarm information is reported to the predefined
destination in Program 90-11.
90-24-01 System Alarm Report Notification Time Month 00 ~ 12 00

Setup Month
Set the month for the alarm report to print.
90-24-02 System Alarm Report Notification Time Day 00 ~ 31 00

Setup Day
Set the day for the alarm report to print.
90-24-03 System Alarm Report Notification Time Hour 00 ~ 23 00

Setup Hour
Set the hour for the alarm report to print.
2-32 Alarm Reports

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-24-04 System Alarm Report Notification Time Minute 00 ~ 59 00

Setup Minute
Set the minute for the alarm report to print.
Printing Reports:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-12-01 System Alarm Output Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

Indicate the type of connection used for the 1 = USB Memory
System Alarms. The baud rate for the COM

port should be set in Program 10-21-02.
Printing System Information Reports:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-13-01 System Information Output Output Port 0 = No Setting 0

Type 5 = USB
Indicate the type of connection system

information.
Emailing Alarm Reports
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-12-01 GCD-CP10 Network Setup IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 192.168.0.10

Assign the IP Address. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Alarm Reports 2-33

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-12-02 GCD-CP10 Network Setup Subnet Mask 128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 | 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.0
The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid when all |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
Host Addresses are 0. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
If the network section is: |255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0 |
255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
0,
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
127, |255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0 |
128.0, 255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
191.255, |255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
192.0.0, |255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0 |
223.255.255
255.255.255.128
The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid. |255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255|
10-12-03 GCD-CP10 Network Setup Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
Assign the default gateway IP address for the 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

When enabled the system will provide 1 = Report (autodial)
notification of events for each of the enabled
reports. This does not have to be set for
DIMLast/DIMDump files to be sent.
90-11-02 System Alarm Report Report Method 0 = No Report 0

When Alarm Reports are to be emailed, set this 1 = Email Address
option to 1. Email address set in Program

90-11-08
90-11-06 System Alarm Report SMTP Host Name Maximum of 255 characters No Setting
When Alarm Reports are to be emailed, set the
SMTP name (for example, smtp.yourisp.com).
Contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) for
the correct entry if needed.
90-11-07 System Alarm Report SMTP Host Port 0 ~ 65535 25

Number
SMTP host port number. Contact your ISP

(Internet Service Provider) for the correct entry
if needed.
90-11-08 System Alarm Report To E-mail Address Maximum of 255 characters No Setting
When Alarm Reports are to be emailed, set this
email address to where the report should be

sent.
90-11-09 System Alarm Report Reply Address Maximum of 255 characters No Setting
email address where replies should be emailed.
2-34 Alarm Reports

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-11-10 System Alarm Report From Address Maximum of 255 characters No Setting
When Alarm Reports are to be emailed, set this
email address for the station sending the report.
90-11-11 System Alarm Report DNS Primary 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

Address

DNS primary address.
90-11-12 System Alarm Report DNS Secondary 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

Address

DNS secondary address.
90-11-13 System Alarm Report Customer Name Maximum of 255 characters. No Setting
When Alarm Reports are to be emailed, enter a
name to identify the particular system.
90-25-01 System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup CC Maximum of 255 characters No Setting
Mail Address
Define the mail address to receive the system

alarm report CC Mail setup.
90-50-01 System Alarm Display Setup System Maximum of eight digits No Setting
Alarm Display Telephone
Define the extension number that Alarm

Reports are displayed on.
InMail SMTP Setup:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-18-01 InMail Setup SMTP Enabled 0 = No 0

Enables the SMTP forwarding feature for the 1 = Yes
system.
47-18-02 InMail Setup Server Name Maximum of 48 characters No Setting

Sets the SMTP server name. If the DNS server
setting is not assigned in Program 90-11-11, the

IP Address must be used instead of the name.
47-18-03 InMail Setup SMTP Port 0 ~ 65535 25

Sets the SMTP server port.

47-18-04 InMail Setup Encryption 0 = No 0
Enable SSL Encryption. 1 = Yes
47-18-05 InMail Setup Authentication 0 = No 0
Enables authentication, when set to 2 (POP3) 1 = Yes
refer to Programs 47-19-xx. 3 = POP3
47-18-06 InMail Setup User Name Maximum of 48 characters No Setting

Set the user name for SMTP authentication.

Alarm Reports 2-35

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-18-07 InMail Setup Password Maximum of 48 characters No Setting

Set the password for SMTP authentication.

47-18-08 InMail Setup E-mail Address Maximum of 48 characters No Setting
Set the email address for the system. This is
the from address for outgoing emails.
47-18-09 InMail Setup Reply to Address Maximum of 48 characters No Setting

Set the email address for replies to outgoing
emails. This email account is not monitored by

the system and must be checked manually.
InMail POP3 Setup:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-19-01 InMail POP3 Setup Server Name Maximum of 48 characters No Setting

Set the POP3 server name. If the DNS server
setting is not assigned in Program 90-11-11 the

47-19-02 InMail POP3 Setup POP3 Port 0 ~ 65535 110

Set the POP3 server port.

47-19-03 InMail POP3 Setup SSL Encryption 0 = No 0
Enable SSL encryption. 1 = Yes
47-19-04 InMail POP3 Setup User Name Maximum of 48 characters No Setting
Set the user name for POP3 authentication.

47-19-05 InMail POP3 Setup Password Maximum of 48 characters No Setting
Set the password for POP3 authentication.

Operation
To use this feature at any terminal:
The user must be logged in with an Installer (IN) level password as defined in Program 90-02.
2-36 Alarm Reports

Issue 2.0
Alphanumeric Display
Description
Multibutton display telephones have a 3-line, 24 character-per-line Alphanumeric Display that provides
various feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user process calls,
identify callers and customize features.
Conditions
The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled.
Default Settings
Enabled for all display telephones.
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with Display
None
Related Features
Clock/Calendar Display
Selectable Display Messaging
Alphanumeric Display 2-37

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-11-13 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry MLT 678

Operation) Display Language Selection for Maximum of eight digits
Multiline Terminal 0 ~ 9, , #
If needed, redefine the service code used to

select the language for display multiline
terminals.
15-02-01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Japanese 1

Display Language Selection 1 = English
Select the language to be displayed on a 2 = German
multiline terminal display. 3 = French
4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish

extension port =
Class 1
20-11-08 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Transfer Information Display 1 = On
Turn Off or On an incoming transfer preanswer

display for an extension.
Operation
Operation is automatic if enabled in programming.
2-38 Alphanumeric Display

Issue 2.0
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Description
The Analog Communications Interface (ACI) feature uses a PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Phone/Paging)
adapter to provide two analog ports (with associated relays) for Music on Hold, External Paging, Door
Boxes and auxiliary devices such as tape recorders and loud bells. The system allows up to 48
PGD(2)-U10 ADPs (when used for ACI ports) for a maximum of 96 analog ports. Each PGD(2)-U10
ADP requires an unused port on a GCD-8DLCA/GCD-16DLCA blade.
Music on Hold
You can connect up to two customer-provided Music on Hold music sources to a PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
This lets you add additional music sources if the external source on the GCD-CP10 ETU or the internal
source is not adequate. By using PGD(2)-U10 ADPs, you can even have a different music source for
each trunk.
When the system switches the ACI analog port to a trunk on Hold, the PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay
associated with the ACI analog port closes. You can use this ability to switch on the music source, if
desired.
Extension users can dial the ACI analog port extension number and listen to the connected music
source. The PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through.
For Music on Hold, connect the music source to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP module. Connect the music
source control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for additional details.
REFERENCE
External Paging
An ACI analog port also can be an External Page output. When connected to customer-provided
External Paging equipment, the ACI port provides External Paging. To use the External Paging, an
extension user just dials the ACI analog port extension number and makes the announcement. The
system broadcasts the announcement from the ACI analog port and simultaneously closes the
associated PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay. You can use the relay closure to control the External Paging
amplifier, if required. This external paging zone is not included in external all call paging or combination
paging (internal and external).
For External Paging, connect the Paging amplifier to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP jack. Connect the amplifier
control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack.
REFERENCE
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) 2-39

Issue 2.0
Auxiliary Device Control
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can control a customer-provided tape recorder. When an extension user dials the
ACI analog port extension number, they can automatically start the recorder and activate the record
function. When the user hangs up, the recording stops and the tape recorder turns off. For tape
recording, connect the tape recorder AUX input jack to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP jack. Connect the recorder
control leads (if available) to the CTL (control relay) jack.
REFERENCE
By using Department Calling, you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool. When an extension
user dials the Department Group pilot number, they reach the first available tape recorder in the pool.
The relays in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP can optionally control customer-provided external ringers (loud bells)
and buzzers. When an extension user dials the ACI analog port extension number, the associated
PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay closes and activates the ringer. You can use this ability to control an emergency
buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor, for example.
ACI Call Recording
ACI Call Recording allows you to use a recording device connected to a PGD(2)-U10 ADP to
automatically record calls. The recording device is typically a customer-provided tape recorder. You can
set up ACI Call Recording to output to a single ACI port/recording device or to a pool of ACI ports/
devices. With a single device, all calls are stored in a centralized location. With a pool of devices, be
sure you have a port available for recording even in peak traffic periods. You can set up recording per
trunk or per extension.
When set up for automatic recording, ACI Call Recording starts automatically when the user places or
answers their call. The system can be programed to record all incoming trunk calls which ring an
extension. This includes the following trunks:
Central Office calls programmed to ring the extension
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Tie Lines
The system also can be programmed to record outgoing trunk calls, however, this is possible only using
E&M Tie Lines, PRI or BRI trunks.
ACI Call Recording is not available for intercom calls, transferred calls, or calls placed on hold and
answered by an extension with Call Recording enabled. To manually record any call (transferred, ICM,
outgoing CO trunk, etc.), use the Voice Mail Conversation Record key (Service Code 751 + 78).
2-40 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

Issue 2.0
Physical Ports and Software Ports
Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP has a physical port for connection to the telephone system and two logical ports.
For programming, the ports are also called software ports. The physical port connects to a station position
on a ESI ETU. During installation, the first PGD(2)-U10 ADP you set up is physical port 1; the second
PGD(2)-U10 ADP is physical port 2, etc. Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP has two software ports, which are
numbered independently of the physical ports. Normally, the first PGD(2)-U10 ADP set up has software
ports 1~2; the second PGD(2)-U10 ADP has software ports 3~4, etc. There are a total of 96 software ports
(48 PGD(2)-U10 ADPs x 2 ports each). During programming, you assign ACI extension numbers and
Department Group options to PGD(2)-U10 ADP software ports, not physical ports. During installation, you
connect equipment to the jacks on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP that correspond to the software port.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for installation details.
REFERENCE
Conditions
Contact Center agents who are logged on can be recorded.
When ACI software ports are set to be a Background Music source, it only plays to a
speaker, not a multiline telephone.
An extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports. Music on Hold ACI software
ports can be Music on Hold music sources.
An extension can have One-Touch Keys for ACI software ports. The gives the extension
user:
One-Touch access to external music
One-Touch External Paging
One-Touch loud ringer control
ACI software ports can provide External Paging with control, independent of the External
Paging circuits on the GCD-CP10. The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can be connected to any DLC
port.
The devices connected to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP must be compatible with the specifications
below.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for installation

REFERENCE
details.

Issue 2.0
PGD(2)-U10 ADP/ACI Interface Specifications

Relay Contacts
Maximum Contact Ratings 30 V DC @ 60 mA

90 V AC @ 10 mA
Minimum Application Load 1 V DC @ 1 mA
Audio/Music Input
Input Impedance 47 K Ohms @ 1 K Hz

Maximum Input 0.4Vrms or 1.0Vp-p.
Audio/Paging Output
Output Impedance 600 Ohms @ 1 K Hz

Maximum Output + 3 dBm
Default Settings
No PGD(2)-U10 ADPs programmed.
System Availability
Terminals
None
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Related Features
Background Music
Contact Center
Hotline
One-Touch Calling
Paging, External

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-01 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Terminal 0 = Not set 0

Type (B1) 1 = Multiline Terminal
Assign or display the current terminal type 3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset
assigned to B Channel 1 for each port on the 6 = PGD (Paging)
DLCA. 7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used --

Type (B2) 6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging)
Assign or display the current terminal type 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone
Ringer)
assigned to B Channel 2 for each port on the
ESI. 8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door

Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
11-06-01 ACI Extension Numbering Maximum of eight digits. No Setting

Assign extension numbers to ACI software ACI Ports: 1 ~ 96
ports. Select a number outside of the normal

extension number range.
11-08-01 ACI Group Pilot Number Dial (maximum of eight digits). No Setting
Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups. When a ACI Groups 1 ~ 16
user dials the pilot number, they reach an

available ACI software port within the group.
14-09-01 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension Number = Maximum No Setting

Trunks ACI Recording Destination eight digits
Extension Number
Assign the ACI Call Recording destination per
trunk. The destination can be an ACI port
extension number (assigned in Program
11-06-01) or an ACI Department Group pilot
number (assigned in Program 11-08-01). If
destinations are assigned in Program 14-09
and Program 15-12, the destination in Program
15-12 is followed.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-09-02 Conversation Recording Destination for 0 = Off 0

Trunks ACI Automatic Recording for 1 = On
Incoming Calls
Determine if incoming trunk calls should be
automatically recorded in the ACI.

If required, program an ACI Conversation 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Record Key (code 69 + 0). This key allows an 751 by default) Manual for
extension user to press the key to manually default values.
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
record a call to the ACI. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
15-12-01 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension Number = Maximum No Setting

Extensions ACI Recording Destination eight digits
Extension Number
Assign the ACI Call Recording destination per
extension. The destination can be an ACI port
extension number (assigned in Program 11-06)

or an ACI Department Group pilot number
(assigned in Program 11-08). If destinations are
assigned in Program 14-09 and Program 15-12,
the destination in Program 15-12 is followed.
15-12-02 Conversation Recording Destination for 0 = Off 0

Extensions ACI Automatic Recording for 1 = On
Incoming Calls
Determine whether or not an extension should

be automatically recorded when an incoming
call is received.
33-01-01 ACI Port Type Setup ACI Ports: 1 ~ 96 2

Set each ACI software port for input (1) or input/ ACI Types:
output (2). Use input ports for Music on Hold
sources. Use output ports for External Paging/
0 = None
1 = MOH/BGM (Input)

ringer control. 2 = External Audio Port
(Input/Output)
33-02-01 ACI Department Calling Group ACI Ports: 1 ~ 96 ACI Port/Group/

Assign ACI software ports to ACI Department ACI Groups: 1 ~ 16 Priority
Groups. This lets ACI callers connect to ACI 01/ 1/ 1
software ports by dialing the group pilot number 02/ 1/ 2

(set in Program 11-08). : / :/ :
96/ 1/ 96

Issue 2.0
Operation
To call an ACI software port:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial ACI software port extension number.
- OR -
Dial ACI Department Group extension number.

- OR -
Press the One-Touch Key for ACI extension or Department Group.
After you call an ACI software port:

If the port is set for input (Program 33-01-01=1) and a music source is connected, you hear music.
- OR -
If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and External Paging is connected, you can page into
the external zone.
- OR -
If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and a loud ringer is connected, you activate the loud
ringer.

Issue 2.0
Ancillary Device Connection
Description
Ancillary Device Connection allows installation of selected peripheral (ancillary) devices to a multiline
terminal. This feature enhances peripheral device objectives.
An UNIVERGE SV9100 multiline terminal user can accomplish this by using the AP(R)-R/APR-L Unit
(Analog Port Adapter with Ringer) or AP(A)-R Unit (Analog Port Adapter without Ringer) for analog
telephone devices, or installing the AD(A)-R/APA-L Unit to connect devices such as tape recorders.
The AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R/APA-L Units are the interface for installing a single line telephone, Modem, credit
card reader, wireless headset, NEC Conference Max Conferencing unit or other compatible analog
device.
The PSA-L Unit (Power Save Adapter), an optional adapter for the ITL/DTL Terminals, is used to make
or receive a call using the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) when a call cannot be made with
the ITL/DTL extension.
Conditions
The optional device fits underneath the terminal.
A single line telephone connected to an AP(R)-R Unit or AP(A)-R Unit cannot perform
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and does not support a conference with itself and two outside
parties.
A single line telephone connected to an AP(R)-R Unit or AP(A)-R Unit does not support
Message Waiting Indication or Caller ID Indication.
An AP(R)-R Unit (analog port adapter with ringer) can be installed on a multiline terminal
and function separately from the multiline terminal.
When Program 10-03-06 is assigned as APR you cannot manually assign a port number for
an APR. The system uses ports 193~256 (starting with 256 and working down) for a total
of 64 APR ports. APR 1 uses port 256, and APR 2 uses port 255, and so on.
When Program 10-03-06 is assigned as APR you cannot manually assign a port number for
the APR.
Phones that have an APR/APA installed do not pass voice to a trunk until the interdigit time
expires (Program 21-01-03).
When a single line phone is connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-L, a conference cannot be
established unless the 2nd channel of ESI is used for APR in Program 10-03-06 and
Program 10-03-07.
When a single line phone is connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-L, the 2nd channel of ESI
must be used (Programs 10-03-06 and 10-03-07) to switch back and forth between a call
and call waiting.
2-46 Ancillary Device Connection

Issue 2.0
APR-L does not support DTL-2E-1, DTL-6E-1, DTZ-2E, DTZ-6DE or all ITZ/ITL style
phones.
ADA-L can send confirmation sound to far end, but the recording machine must generate
confirmation sound.
Table 2-6 DT330 Compatibility Settings
Terminal Lot Number DT-330

ADA-L Unit Switch
Settings xxx I Lx or lower xxx I Mx xxxJSx or higher
(Version 1.E0 or lower) (Version 8.10) (Version 2.20 or higher)
ADA Connection for Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7

Recording Only. and 8 are OFF. Switches and 8 are OFF. Switches and 8 are OFF. Switches 4
4 and 6 are ON. 4 and 6 are ON. and 6 are ON.
ADA Connection for Dip switches 2, 3, 5, 7 and Dip switches 2, 3, 5, 7 and Dip switches 2, 3, 5, 7 and
Sending Recorded Calls 8 are OFF. Switches 1, 4 8 are OFF. Switches 1, 4 8 are OFF. Switches 1, 4
to the Telephone. and 6 are ON. and 6 are ON. and 6 are ON.
To Send and Receive to Not supported Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7
the Terminal and 8 are OFF. Switches and 8 are OFF. Switches 4
4 and 6 are ON. and 6 are ON.
Lot Numbers: I, J Hardware Revision
Lot Numbers: L, M, S Software Revision
To verify DT-330 terminal firmware, hold down keypad buttons 1, 2 and 3 while plugging the line cord into the
terminal.
Table 2-7 Firmware Compatibility Matrix
BCH-L Unit Lot Number
xxxDxx or lower xxxExx or higher
xxx I xx or lower
Supported Supported
Terminal Lot Number (Version 8.10 and 1, E0 or lower)
DT-330 xxxJxx or higher
Not supported Supported
(Version 2.20 or higher)
BCH Support may differ based on terminal firmware. To verify both DT-330 terminal and BCH-L Unit firmware,
hold down keypad buttons 1, 2 and 3 while plugging the line cord into the terminal.
Default Settings
None
Ancillary Device Connection 2-47

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
AP(R)-R
AP(A)-R
PSA-L
ADA-L
APR-L
Related Features
SV9100 Terminals

the system to be properly assigned .
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-03 ETU Setup (LCA PKG Setup) Transmit 1 ~ 57 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)
Gain Level (S-Level)
Customize the transmit and receive levels of
the CODEC Gain Types for 500/2500 type
single line telephones.
10-03-04 ETU Setup (LCA PKG Setup) Receive Gain 1 ~ 57 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)
Level (R-Level)
Customize the transmit and receive levels of
the CODEC Gain Types for 500/2500 type
2-48 Ancillary Device Connection

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-03-01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = DP 1

SLT Signaling Type 1 = DTMF
Select the type of dialing the connected
telephone uses.
For the UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless
telephones to function correctly, this must be
set to 0. If this option is set for DTMF, after an
outside call is placed, the system cannot dial
any additional digit.

This program change is automatically
performed when the UNIVERGE SV9100
Wireless telephone is registered. When
upgrading software from prior versions, the
previous default of 1 is saved from the prior
database so this option must be changed
manually.
15-03-04 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = No 1

Flashing 1 = Yes
Enable/Disable Flash for single line (500/2500

type) telephones.
Operation
Depends on the connected ancillary device.
Ancillary Device Connection 2-49

Issue 2.0
Answer Hold
Description
Answer Hold allows a multiline terminal user to press the flashing Answer Key to answer an incoming
ringing call or a Camp-On call. When the multiline terminal user is already answering a call, the first call
is automatically placed on hold, depending on the user setting in Program 15-02-06.
Conditions
When multiple incoming calls activate the Answer Key LED, the LED continues to flash until
all calls are answered.
Use Program 15-02-06 (Normal Common, Exclusive Hold) to set the type of Hold key to be
used (Default = Normal Common).
For calls placed in a Park Group, the LED blinks fast (green).
For calls placed in a Park Group by another user, the LED blinks slow (red).
The Answer Hold Feature is not available for Virtual Extensions.
The Answer Hold feature does not function for incoming internal calls.
CO/PBX incoming calls, not assigned to ring or assigned to another ring group, do not
activate the Answer Hold feature.
If the direct trunk appearance key is not assigned when all Call Appearance Keys are in
use, the next incoming call cannot be answered.
Default Settings
Normal Hold
System Availability
Terminals
None
2-50 Answer Hold

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Answer Key
Central Office Calls, Answering

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-12-32 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT, SLT 6

Answer for Park Hold Maximum of eight digits
Assign a key on the multiline terminal or single

0 ~ 9, , #
line telephone for park hold.
15-02-06 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Hold 0 = Normal (Common) 0

Key Operating Mode 1 = Exclusive Hold
Set the function of the Multiline Hold key. The
Hold key can activate normal Hold or Exclusive
Hold.

Assign a park group to multiline terminal line 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
key. 751 by default) Manual for
00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-09-01 Class of Service Options (Incoming Call 0 = Off COS 1 ~15 = 1

Service) Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/ 1 = On
E&M Override
Turn Off or On the extension ability to receive a
second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.
With this option set to 1, the destination
extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to
ring through. If the destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key available for the second
call and a previous call is ringing the extension but
has not yet been answered, the second caller hears
busy regardless of this program setting.
Answer Hold 2-51

Issue 2.0
Operation
To answer a call on a different line key or CAP key with a call in progress:
1. Receive a CO/PBX, DID/DISA/DIL/E&M incoming ring.
Answer flashes.
2. Press Answer, and answer the new call.
The Answer LED goes out. The original call is put on hold.
3. If additional calls are received, press Answer to place the current call on hold and connect to the
next call as long as Call Appearance Keys and or CO line keys are available.
2-52 Answer Hold

Issue 2.0
Answer Key
Description
Multiline terminals have an Answer Key with an LED that flashes when the multiline terminal user
receives an incoming CO/PBX, Tie/DID transfer, or CO/PBX transfer call. When multiple calls are
received, the Answer Key is used to pick up calls and continues flashing until the last unanswered call is
answered. Press the Answer Key during a call to hold the current call and allow the next call to be
answered.
Conditions
The Answer LED functions for incoming CO/PBX calls, CO/PBX transfer/camp-on calls,
and transfer/camp-on Tie/DID calls.
Incoming calls answered by Answer are handled first in-first out.
An Internal call, internal transfer/camp-on call, CAR/SIE/VE calls do not activate the
Answer LED.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Answer Hold
Answer Key 2-53

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-02-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Incoming Type for Day/Night 0

Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. Mode (1 ~ 8):
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID

4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode Switching
22-04-01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Maximum eight digits Extensions 101
Assignment ~ 108 (first eight
Assign extensions (up to 48) to Ring Groups. ports) ring for
Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.
programming. There are 100 available ring
groups. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.
22-05-01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Trunks 1 ~ 400 1

Use this program to assign Normal Ring Trunks Incoming Group Number for
(Program 22-02) to Incoming Ring Groups Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
(Program 22-04). 0 = (No Setting)
001 ~ 100 = (Incoming Group)

102 = (In-Skin/ External Voice
Mail or InMail)
103 = (Centralized VM)
22-07-01 DIL Assignment Day/Night Modes (1 ~ 8): No Setting

Assign the destination extension or Department Extension Number (maximum of
Group Pilot Number for each DIL Incoming eight digits)
trunk. Pilot Number

For this selection to work, set Program
22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).
2-54 Answer Key

Issue 2.0
Operation
To answer calls using the Answer Key:

1. Receive CO/PBX incoming ring.
2. Press Answer.
3. Talk with the CO/PBX incoming calling party.
4. When additional CO incoming calls are received, press Answer to place the current call on hold
and connect the multiline terminal user to the next call.
Answer Key 2-55

Issue 2.0
Attendant Call Queuing
Description
Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear a busy
tone. This helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination
for unanswered calls. For example, you can program Direct Inward Lines and Voice Mail calls to route to
the attendant when their primary destination is busy. With Attendant Call Queuing, unanswered calls
would normally stack up for the attendant until they can be processed.
The 32 call queue total includes Intercom, DISA, DID, DIL, Tie Line and transferred calls. If the attendant
does not have an appearance for the queued call, it waits in line to be answered. If the attendant has
more than 32 calls queued, an extension can transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy
Transfer enabled.
Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable system feature.
Conditions
Forwarding when unanswered or busy can occur only at the attendant if more than 32 calls
are in queue.
Assigning a station as operator in Program 20-17-01 enables call queuing function.
Program 20-17-01 setting overrides setting in Program 20-09-07: Call Queuing Class of
Service Option when set to disable.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals assigned as an operator
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
2-56 Attendant Call Queuing

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-01-01 System Numbering Service Code Set the system internal Refer to the
(Intercom) numbering plan. The Programming
numbering plan assigns the first Manual for
and second digits dialed and default values.
affects the digits an extension
user must dial to access other
extensions and features, such
as service codes and trunk
codes. If the default numbering
plan does not meet the site
requirements, use this program
to tailor the system numbering to
the site.
20-01-01 System Options Operator Access Mode 0 = Step 0

Assign the priority of a call when calling an 1 = Circular
operator telephone.
20-09-07 Class of Service Options (Incoming Call 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Call Queuing 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have
calls queued if a call rings the extension when it
is busy.
Program 20-13-06 must be set to 0 (Off) for
this feature to work.
20-17-01 Operator Extension Operators Extension Maximum of eight digits Extension 101
Number
Define the extension numbers which are to be

used by operators.
24-02-01 System Options for Transfer Busy 0 = Disable (No) 1

Transfer 1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable/Disable extensions to Transfer calls to
busy extensions. If disabled, calls transferred to
busy extensions recall immediately.
Operation
None
Attendant Call Queuing 2-57

Issue 2.0
Automatic Release
Description
Automatic Release drops the line circuit when an outside party abandons the call. For this feature to
work with Loop Start Trunks, the CO/PBX providing the outside line must provide a timed disconnect
signal. Automatic Release is normally provided on Ground Start, DID, ISDN, and Tie Line trunks.
Conditions
Automatic Release on ISDN trunks is provided by the protocol.
When an outside line is accessed using a dedicated line key, the LED associated with the
line key goes off when Automatic Release occurs.
This feature functions while a call is in progress, on hold, or in a conference.
This feature applies to all ICM type calls in progress, holding or parked.
When Automatic Release occurs and the telephone is in handsfree mode, Speaker
automatically turns off. If using the handset, the station is set to idle when the handset goes
on-hook.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
None
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
2-58 Automatic Release

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-02-09 Analog Trunk Data Setup Busy Tone 0 = Disable (No) 0

Detection 1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable/Disable Busy Tone Detection.
14-02-14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start/ 0 = Loop Start (Loop) 0
Ground Start 1 = Ground Start (Ground)
Identify the analog trunk as either loop or

ground start.
80-04-01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm Type 1 (DT) 0
Detection Level 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm (-25dBm)
Set the Detection Level. 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm Type 2 (BT) 0
(-25dBm)
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
Type 3 (RBT) 0

4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
(-25dBm)
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
Type 4, Type 5
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
0
80-04-02 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Min. 0 ~ 15 Type 1 (DT) 15

Detection Level detect level 0: (-25dBm)
Set the minimum detection level. -15dBm (0) to -30dBm(15) Type 2 (BT) 15
detect level 1: (-25dBm)
-30dBm (0) to -45dBm(15) Type 3 (RBT)
detect level 2: 15
-40dBm (0) to -55dBm(15) (-25dBm)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-03 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup S/N 0~4 Type 1 (DT) = 4
Ratio (0dB ~ -20dB) (-20dB)
Set the Signal to Noise ratio. Type 2 (BT) = 4
(-20dB)
Type 3 (RBT) = 4

(-20dB)
Type 4 = 0
Type 5 = 0
Automatic Release 2-59

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-04-04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup No 0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680ms) Type 1 (DT)
Tone Time (0 = not detect) 132 (3990ms)
Set No Tone Time. 1 ~ 255 = 60 ~ 7680ms Type 2 (BT)
The formula is 30 + 30N. 132 (3990ms)
When set to N = 1, it means 30 Type 3 (RBT)

+ 30 1 = 60. 132 (3990ms)
When set to N=255, it means Type 4, Type 5
30+30255=7680 0
80-04-05 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Pulse 1 ~ 255 Type 1 (DT) 1
Count Type 2 (BT) 1
Set the Pulse Count. Type 3 (RBT) 1
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-06 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON 1 ~ 255 Type 1 (DT) 9

Minimum Time (30 + 30 ~ 7680ms) (300ms)
Set the minimum On time. Type 2 (BT) 12
(300ms)
Type 3 (RBT)

25 (780ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0

Maximum Time (30 + 30 ~ 7680ms) Type 2 (BT) 20
Set the maximum On time. (630ms) [ET]
Type 3 (RBT)
40 1230ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 1 ~ 255 Type 1 (DT) 1
Set the minimum Off time. Type 2 (BT) 12
(390ms)
Type 3 (RBT)

83 (2520ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 0 ~ 255 Type 1 (DT) 1
Maximum Time (30 + 30 ~ 7680ms) (60ms)
Set the maximum Off time. Type 2 (BT) 20
(630ms)
Type 3 (RBT)

115 (3480ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
Operation
None
2-60 Automatic Release

Issue 2.0
Description
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (ARS) provides call routing and call restriction based on the digits a
user dials. ARS gives the system the most cost-effective use of the connected long distance carriers.
ARS is an on-line call routing program that you can customize (like other system options) from a display
telephone. ARS accommodates 2000 call routing choices without a custom-ordered rate structure
database. With ARS, you can modify the system routing choices quickly and easily. This is often
necessary in the telecommunications world of today where the cost structure and service choices
frequently change.
The ARS feature can add or delete digits and route calls according to predetermined levels. When
UNIVERGE SV9100 systems are networked together by Tie Lines or K-CCIS, the networked systems
can be called by a system number and a user extension number, just an extension number, or by using
a trunk access code.
ARS Feature Summary
ARS provides:
Call Routing
ARS can apply up to 24-digit analysis to every number dialed. For programming, ARS provides
separate 8-digit and 24-digit tables. Each table can have up to 250 numbers.
Dialing Translation (Special Dialing Instructions)
ARS can automatically execute stored dialing instructions (called Dial Treatments) when it chooses
a route for a call. The system allows up to 15 Dial Treatments. The Dial Treatments can:
Insert or delete an area code (NPA)
Add digits (such as a dial-up OCC number), pauses and waits to the dialing sequence
Require the user to enter an authorization code when placing a call (refer to Program 44-03)
Time of Day Selection
For routing, ARS provides 10 different day selections (called Time Schedule Patterns). Each Time
Schedule Pattern can provide up to 20 time intervals which are assigned to one of the eight day/
night modes. The Time Schedule Patterns are then assigned to a day of the week (Monday~Friday,
Saturday, Sunday or Holiday).
Hierarchical Class of Service Control
ARS allows or denies call route choices based on an extension ARS Class of Service. This allows
lower Classes of Service (e.g., 1) to access routes unavailable to higher Classes of Service (e.g.,
16). The system provides up to 16 (0=unrestricted, 1~16) ARS Classes of Service.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 2-61

Issue 2.0
Separate Routing for Selected Call Types

To provide unique control, you can program separate routing instructions for:
Directory assistance (411, 1411 and 555) calls
Emergency (911) calls

Separate Routing for Equal Access (1010XXX) Calls
Choose different routing for directly-dialed (1010XXX + 1) and operator-assisted (1010XXX + 0)
Equal Access calls.
Basic ARS Operation
When a user places an outside call, ARS analyzes the digits dialed and assigns one of 2000 Selection
Numbers to the call. The Selection Number chosen depends on which digits the user dialed. ARS then
checks the time of day, the day of week and the extension ARS Class of Service. Based on these call
routing options, ARS selects a trunk group for the call and imposes the Dial Treatment instructions (if
any).
Class of Service Option Allows Outgoing Calls to Not Follow Access Map
Using this option allows a Class of Service to be set so that ARS does not follow the trunk access map
settings (Program 14-07-01 and Program 15-06-01). The feature allows an extension user to have CO
line keys on their telephone which allow incoming access only. The user has only outgoing access on the
CO lines when using ARS to place a call.
Class of Service Matching
With the ARS Class of Service Match Access feature, you can determine whether the system should
allow a call based on the COS assigned to the Dial Analysis Table (Program 26-02). This change can be
used to create a tenant-like application. It then uses the trunk group defined in the Additional Entry in
Program 26-02-03 to place the outgoing call.
When this feature is enabled, the calls are routed in sequential order, and are allowed if the Class of
Service for the trunk group matches.
For this feature, Program 26-01-06: Automatic Route Selection Service, COS Match Access is
used.
The examples below use the following system programming:
Program 26-02 for Dial Analysis Table for ARS set as:
Program 26-02-01 Program 26-02-02 Program 26-02-03 Program 26-02-04

Table No.
Dial Service Type Add Data ARS COS
1 203@@@@@@@ 1:Route to trunk group 3 (Group 3) 5
2 214@@@@@@@ 1:Route to trunk group 1 (Group 1) 4
197 @@@@@@@@@@ 1:Route to trunk group 2 (Group 2) 4
2-62 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Issue 2.0
Program 26-02 for Dial Analysis Table for ARS set as:
Program 26-02-01 Program 26-02-02 Program 26-02-03 Program 26-02-04

Table No.
Dial Service Type Add Data ARS COS
Program 12-02 for Automatic Night Service Patterns as:
Time Program 12-02-01 Program 12-02-02 Program 12-02-03

Pattern No. Start Time End Time Operation Mode
1 00:00 08:30 2 (Night)
2 08:30 17:00 1 (Day)
3 17:00 00:00 2 (Night)
Program 12-02 for Automatic Night Service Patterns as:
Mode Ext. 301 Ext. 302 Ext. 401 Ext. 402
Mode 1 (Day) 1 2 3 3
Mode 2 (Night) 1 4 3 5
Program 26-01-03 for ARS Misdialed Number Handling as: 1 (Warning Tone)
With Program 26-01-06: ARS COS Match Access disabled (set to 0):
If at 9:00 AM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
All Extension would use Trunk Group 3
If at 6:00 PM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
Extension 301, 302 and 401 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 402 would not be able to dial out as the COS is lower
With Program 26-01-06: ARS COS Match Access enabled (set to 1):
Extension 301 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 401, 402 would use Trunk Group 3

Issue 2.0

Extension 402 would not be able to dial out as the COS does not match
Conditions
ARS is intended for areas that use the North American Number Plan (NANP).
Line keys, Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, outgoing trunk group keys, dialing 704 + trunk
group, dialing +trunk number, and speed dial numbers assigned to a certain trunk group
can all be used to by-pass ARS.
If no PBX access code is entered in the Dial Treatment, the system can still dial 911.
Toll Restriction overrides ARS.
A system with Automatic Route Selection (ARS) cannot also have Trunk Group Routing.
With ARS installed, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route. The
system automatically redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset.
Speed Dialing may bypass ARS routing.
Set up other options for outgoing calls (e.g., unassign line keys, adjust gains, ARS access
key, Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, etc.).
Refer to Dial Tone Detection on page 2-376 feature for the specifics on how the system
handles Dial Tone Detection.
ARS does not permit 0 and 011+ calls to be routed out separate trunk groups. The
UNIVERGE SV9100 supports only direct trunk selection for dial 0 (Operator) type calls.
If an entry of 911 is programmed in ARS, but ARS is turned off, 911 calls still attempt to
route using ARS.
When using ARS Class of Service Matching, CCIS calls will always follow Class of Service
1.
If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS, Program 26-01-03 determines if the
system should route over the trunk group settings defined in Program 21-02 or play an error
tone.
When using ARS Class of Service, with Program 26-01-03 set to (1) Play Warning Tone,
any trunk (except a CCIS trunk) pointed or transferred to a virtual that is Call Forward
Off-Premise will not complete. For a virtual to Call Forward Off-Premise, Program 26-01-03
must be set to Route to trunk group and the call will follow the trunk group settings of the
trunk, assigned in Program 21-03.

Issue 2.0
When using ARS Class of Service, with Program 26-01-03 set to (1) Play Warning Tone, a
CCIS trunk pointed or transferred to a virtual that is call forwarded off premise will always
follow ARS Class 1 routing properties.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
None

Issue 2.0
Recognize Extension Location when Logging in with NetLink
Description
The SV9100 can recognize each system where the DT700/DT800 extension(s) are connected then
provide an Automatic Route Selection (ARS) COS based on the System (System ID) when using
NetLink.
Conditions
This feature requires Netlink to be enabled.
This feature is only supported on DT700/DT800 and Softphones.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
DT700/DT800
Refer to SV9100 NetLink on page 2-1354 for Required Component(s)
Related Features
Code Restriction
Dial Tone Detection
E-911 Compatibility
SV9100 NetLink
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On

Issue 2.0

Automatic Route Selection:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-01-01 System Numbering Set the system internal Refer to SV9100

(Intercom) numbering plan. The Programming
numbering plan assigns the first Manual for a
and second digits dialed and detailed
affects the digits an extension description of
user must dial to access other this program.
the site.
11-09-01 Trunk Access Code Dial up to four digits. 9

Specify the digit or digits to be used to access
ARS (normally 9).
11-09-02 2nd Trunk Route Access Code Dial up to four digits. No Setting
Define additional trunk access codes. When a
user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access
Code, the system routes their call to the
Alternate Trunk Route.
12-01-01 Night Mode Function Setup Manual Night 0 = Off 1

Mode Switching 1 = On
Turn Off or On any extension from activating

Manual Night Service.
12-01-02 Night Mode Function Setup Automatic 0 = Off 0

Night Mode Switching 1 = On
According to a preset schedule, Enable (1)/
Disable (0) Automatic Night Service for the
system. Make sure to set the Service Patterns
in Program 12-02-01, Program 12-02-02 and
Program 12-02-03.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Patterns Start 0000 ~ 2359 Refer to the
Time Programming
Define the daily pattern of the Automatic Mode Manual for
Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. default values.
These patterns are used in Programs 12-03

and 12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20
timer settings.
This option defines the starting time.
12-02-02 Automatic Night Service Patterns End 0000 ~ 2359 Refer to the
Time Programming
Define the daily pattern of the Automatic Mode Manual for
Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. default values.

timer settings.
This option defines the ending time.
12-02-03 Automatic Night Service Patterns 1~8 1 or 2

Operation Mode (depending on
Define the daily pattern of the Automatic Mode time pattern and
Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. time number)
timer settings.
This option defines the operation mode that the
system should be in during each time number.
12-03-01 Weekly Night Service Switching Night Mode Service Group 01 = Sunday
Define which time pattern should be used on Numbers: 01 ~ 32 (default = Time
each day of the week. Time Schedule Pattern Number: Pattern 2)
1 ~ 10 02 = Monday
Day of Week: (default = Time
01 = Sunday Pattern 1)
02 = Monday 03 = Tuesday
03 = Tuesday (default = Time
04 = Wednesday Pattern 1)
05 = Thursday 04 = Wednesday
06 = Friday (default = Time
07 = Saturday Pattern 1)
05 = Thursday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
06 = Friday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
07 = Saturday
(default = Time
Pattern 2)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
12-04-01 Holiday Night Service Switching Days and Months: No Setting

Define a yearly schedule of holiday night-switch 0101 ~ 1231
settings. This schedule is used for setting (e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1; 1231 = Dec.
special days when the company is expected to
be closed, such as national holidays.
31)
Time Pattern Number:
0 ~ 10
(0 = No Setting)
12-05-01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Night Mode Service Group 1
Extensions Number:
Assign Day/Night Mode Group for each 01 ~ 32

extension.
12-06-01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Trunk Port Number: 001 ~ 400 1
Assign a Day/Night Mode Group for each trunk Night Mode Service Group
port. Number:

01 ~ 32
12-07-01 Text Data for Night Mode Night Mode Service Group Default Text
Make up an original text message, which, Number: Messages for
depending on programming, can be displayed 01 ~ 32 Day/Night
on an LCD of a multiline telephone in each Day/Night Mode: 1 ~ 8 Modes:
Mode. Text Message: Mode 1 = No
Setting
Maximum 12 Characters
(alphabetic or numeric) Mode 2 =
<Night>
Mode 3 =
<Midnight>
Mode 4 =

<Rest>
Mode 5 =
<Day2>
Mode 6 =
<Night2>
Mode 7 =
<Midnight2>
Mode 8 =
<Rest2>
12-08-01 Night Mode Service Range Night Mode Service Group 2

Define the changing range of toggle key for Number:
each Day/Night Mode. 01 ~ 32

Range: 2 ~ 8
14-05-01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Trunk Port 1 ~ 400 = Default = Trunks
Program trunks of the same carrier type in the Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
same trunk group. to trunk group 1
with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-07-01 Trunk Access Map Setup 0 = No access Access Maps

Set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets the 1 = Outgoing access only 1 ~ 400 = Trunk
access options for trunks. 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
3 = Access only when trunk on assigned with
Hold option 7 access
(incoming and
4 = Outgoing access and access
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
5 = Incoming access and access when trunk is on
when trunk on Hold Hold).
6 = Incoming and Outgoing
access
7 = Incoming access, outgoing
access and access when trunk
on Hold
Trunk Access Maps: 1 ~ 400
15-06-01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Trunk Access Maps: 1 ~ 400 1
Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions.

20-03-04 System Options for Single Line Telephones 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3
Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS
When ARS or an analog extension user
accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the

system waits this time before outdialing the first
digit.

extension port =
Class 1
20-08-17 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) ARS Override of Trunk Access 1 = On
Map
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to
override the trunk access map programming
(Program 14-07-01 and Program 15-06-01) for
outgoing calls.
21-02-01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Day/Night Mode: 1 ~ 8 1

Assign Program 14-06 routes to extensions. Route Table Number:
0 ~ 100

(0 = No Setting)
26-01-01 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS 0 = Disabled (ARS service is 0

Service Off)
Enable/Disable ARS. 1 = Enabled (ARS service is On)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
26-01-02 Automatic Route Selection Service 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Network Outgoing Inter-Digit ARS Timer
With Networking, this timer replaces Program
20-03-04 when determining if all network
protocol digits are received. If ARS is enabled
at Site B, this timer can be programmed for 5 at
Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using
F-Route for outbound dialing, this timer should
be programmed for 30 at Site A.
26-01-03 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS 0 = Route to Trunk Group 1 0

Misdialed Number Handling 1 = Play Warning Tone to Dialer
If a user dials a number not programmed in
ARS, determine if the system should Route
over trunk group 1 (0) or Play error tone (1).
26-01-06 Automatic Route Selection Service Class 0 = Disable (Off) 0

of Service Match Access 1 = Enable (On)
With the ARS Class of Service Match Access
feature, you can determine whether or not the
system should allow a call based on the COS
assigned to the Dial Analysis Table (Program
26-02). This change can be used to create a
tenant-like application. It then uses the trunk
group set in the Additional Entry in Program
26-02-03 to place the out-going call. When this
feature is enabled, the calls are routed in
sequential order, and forward provided the
Class of Service for the trunk groups match.
26-01-07 Automatic Route Selection Service 0 = F-Route 0

F-Route Access COS Reference 1 = ARS
Define the system options for Automatic Route

Selection (ARS).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
26-02-01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR Dial Dial a maximum of 16 digits No Setting
Enter the digits (16 digits maximum: 1 ~ 9, 0 (0 ~ 9, #, @)
#, @; 2000 separate entries) for the Dial
Analysis Table which is analyzed by ARS/LCR.
This table is checked after any programmed
F-Route operations have completed. The
system then refers to Program 26-02-02 and
Program 26-02-03 to determine the routing for
the call. To enter a wild card/dont care digit,
press Line Key 1 to enter an @ symbol. It is
important to remember that the system checks
the table numbers in numerical order. This
means that entries for specific numbers should
be entered first (such as your local area codes),
then enter the items containing wild card digits.
If the system sees an entry of 2@@, any table
entries which follow are ignored.
For example, if 268, 269, and 270 are local
exchanges, these would be the first three table
entries which route according to the settings
made in Program 26-02-02 and Program
26-02-03 for each of the table entries. If the
next entry is 2@@, the system checks no
further in this program and routes all other 2xx
numbers according to the entries made in
Program 26-02-02 and Program 26-02-03 for
this table entry.
26-02-02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS ARS Service 0 = No Service (Call Restricted) 0
Type 1 = Route to Trunk Group
For each Dial Analysis Table (1 ~ 2000), select 2 = Select F-Route Access
0 for no ARS, 1 for Service Type 1 Route to
Trunk Group Number to have the number route
to a trunk group [Refer to Program 26-02-03] or
2 for Service Type 2 F-Route Selected to
have the dialed number controlled by the
F-Route table. If Service Type 2 is selected and
F-Route operation is on, the F-Route table used
is determined by Program 44-04. If F-Route
operation is off, the routing is determined by
Program 44-05.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
26-02-03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Additional If Service Type 1 (in 26-02): 0
Data/Service Number Select Trunk Group Number
For each Dial Analysis Table (1 ~ 2000), if 0 ~ 100, (Trunk Group Number 0
Service Type 1 was selected in Program = No Route)
26-02-02, enter the trunk group number 101 ~ 150 (Networking ID)
(0 ~ 100, 0 = No Route)
If Service Type 2 (in 26-02):
F-Route Time Schedule Not
Used = 0 ~ 500

(F-Route Table Number).
Refer to Programming Manual.
F-Route Time Schedule Used =
0 ~ 500
(F-Route Selection Number)
26-02-04 Dial Analysis Table for ARS ARS Class of 0 ~ 16 0

Service
For each Dial Analysis Table (1 ~ 2000), set the
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (ARS) Class
of Service (0 ~ 16).
26-02-05 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Dial Treatment 0 ~ 15 0

for ARS
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Dial
Treatment (0 ~ 15) to be used.
26-02-07 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Network 0 ~ 16 0

Specified Parameter Table
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (ARS)

Network Specified Parameter Table (0 ~ 16) to
be used.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
26-03-01 ARS Dial Treatments Treatment Code Maximum of 24 characters No Setting

Assign the Dial Treatments (1 ~ 15) for
automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial
Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups)
in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment
options are:
3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial
call. This requires at least eight digits in the
ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
2 - Delete the leading digit if dialed as part of
the initial call. This requires at least eight digits
in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the
initial call. This requires at least eight digits in
the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
INPA - Insert the NPA specified by NPA.
DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or
execute the code that follows. For example,
D041234 out-dials 124. Valid entries are 0 ~ 9,
#, , Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause).
Each digits code counts as a digit. So for
example, if a P was added for a pause, the
entry would look like: D05P1234. This Dial
Treatment can only be added from telephone
programming.
Wnn - Wait nn seconds.
P - Pause in analog trunk.
R - Redial the initially dialed number, including
any modifications.
E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments
must end with the E code.
X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in
the Dial Treatment for the system to output the
extension number of the call originator to the
black box for the E911 feature.
26-04-01 ARS Class of Service Day/Night Mode: 1 ~ 8 0

Set an extension ARS Class of Service Class = 0 ~ 16
(0 ~ 16). Automatic Route Selection (ARS) uses
ARS Class of Service when determining how to
route extension calls.
26-11-01 Transit Network ID Table Transmit Network Four fixed digits No Setting
ID (Carrier ID) 0000 ~ 9999
Enter the Transit Network Selection information
element to be added to an ARS call using an

ISDN trunk. This information element identifies
a requested transit network.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
44-01-01 System Options for ARS/F-Route ARS/F- 0 = Not Used 0

Route Time Schedule 1 = Used
Select whether the ARS/F-Route feature should
use the time schedule (0=not used, 1=used). If
this option is set to 0, the F-Route table
selected is determined only by the digits dialed
without any relation to the day or time of the

call. If this option is set to 1, the system first
refers to Program 44-10. If there is a match, the
pattern defined in that program is used. If not,
the F-Route pattern in Program 44-09 and time
setting in Program 44-08 are used.
44-02-01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access Maximum of eight digits No Setting
Dial (Use line key 1 for a Dont Care
Set the Dial digits for the Pre-Transaction Table digit, @)
for selecting ARS/F-Route (eight digits
maximum: 1 ~ 9, 0 #, @). To enter a wild
card/dont care digit, press Line Key 1 to enter
an @ symbol.
44-02-02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access 0 = No Setting (None) 0

Service Type 1 = Extension Call (Own)
Set the Service Type (0 ~ 3) for the 2 = ARS/F-Route Table
Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/ (F-Route)

F-Route. 3 = Dial Extension Analyze
Table (Option)
44-02-03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access 1 = Delete Digit = 0 ~ 255 0
Additional Data (255: Delete All Digits)
If a Service Type is set to F-Route in Program 2 = 0 ~ 500
44-02-02, set which F-Route table to use. (0 = No Setting)
3 = Dial Extension Analyze
Table Number = 0 ~ 4
(0 = No Setting)
44-02-04 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access 0 = Off 0

Dial Tone Simulation 1 = On
Determine if the Dial Tone Simulation is On (1)
or Off (0) for the Pre-Transaction Table for
selecting ARS/F-Route. If enabled, this option
sends dial tone to the calling party once the
routing is determined. This may be required if
the central office at the destination does not
send dial tone.
44-03-01 Dial Analysis Extension Table Dial Maximum of 24 digits No Setting

Set the Dial digits (24 digits maximum: 1 ~ 9, 0 Digits = 1 ~ 9, 0, , #, @
#, @) to be used for the Dial Extension (Press Line Key 1 for wild
Analysis Table. When Program 44-02-02 is set character @)
to type 3, this program sets the dial extension
analysis table. These tables are used when the
analyzed digits must be more than eight digits.
To enter a wild card/dont care digit, press Line
Key 1 to enter an @ symbol.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
44-03-02 Dial Analysis Extension Table ARS/F- 0 ~ 500 0

Route Select Table Number (1~250) (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
When dialed digits match the setting in With Program 44-01 set to 0,
Program 44-03-01, select the ARS/R-Route Program 44-05 is checked.

table number (0 ~ 500) to be used for the Dial With Program 44-01 set to 1,
Extension Analysis Table. Program 44-04 is checked.
44-03-03 Dial Analysis Extension Table ARS/F- 0 ~ 500 0

Route Select Table Number (251) (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
If the received digits are not identified in tables With Program 44-01 set to 0,
1 ~ 250, the F-Route selection table number Program 44-05 is checked.

(0 ~ 500) defined in table 251 is used. With Program 44-01 set to 1,
Program 44-04 is checked.
44-03-04 Dial Analysis Extension Table Next Table 0~4 0

Area Number (252)
If the received digits do not match the digits set
in tables 1 ~ 250, table number 252 is used to

refer to the next Extension Table Area (1 ~ 4) to
be searched.
44-04-01 ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule ARS/F-Route Time Mode: 1 ~ 8 0

Assign each ARS/F-Route Selection number ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0
(1 ~ 500) to an ARS/F-Route table number for ~ 500
each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are eight
time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.
44-05-01 ARS/F-Route Table Trunk Group Number 0 ~ 100, 255 0

Select the trunk group number to be used for 0 = No Setting
the outgoing ARS call. 255 = Extension Call
44-05-02 ARS/F-Route Table Delete Digits 0 ~ 255 0

For each ARS/F-Route table (1 ~ 500) assign a (255 = Delete All)
priority number (1 ~ 4). Enter the number of
digits to be deleted (0 ~ 255) from the dialed
number.
44-05-03 ARS/F-Route Table Additional Dial Number 0 ~ 1000 0

Table
For each ARS/F-Route table (1 ~ 500) assign a
priority number (1 ~ 4). Enter the table number

(defined in Program 44-06) for additional digits
to be dialed (0 ~ 1000).
44-05-04 ARS/F-Route Table Beep Tone 0 = Off (No Beep) 0

For each ARS/F-Route table (1 ~ 500) assign a 1 = On (Beep)s
priority number (1 ~ 4). Select whether or not a
beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is
used.
44-05-05 ARS/F-Route Table Gain Table Number for 0 ~ 500 0

Internal Call 0 = No Setting
priority number (1 ~ 4). Select the gain table
number to be used for internal calls (0 ~ 500).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Tandem Connections 0 = No Setting

number to be used for the tandem call (defined
in Program 44-07).
44-05-07 ARS/F-Route Table ARS Class of Service 0 ~ 16 0

priority number (1 ~ 4). Select the Class of
Service to be used for ARS (0~16). Extension
ARS COS is determined in Program 26-04-01.
44-05-08 ARS/F-Route Table Dial Treatment 0 ~ 15 0

priority number (1 ~ 4). Select the Dial
Treatment to be used (0 ~ 15). The Dial
Treatments are defined in Program 26-03-01.
44-05-09 ARS/F-Route Table Maximum Digit 0 ~ 24 0

Set the maximum number of digits to send
when using the F-Route.
44-05-10 ARS/F-Route CCIS over IP Destination 0 ~ 16367 0

Point Code
For each ARS/F-Route table (1 ~ 500). Set the
CCIS over IP Destination Point Code
(0 ~ 16367).
44-05-11 ARS/F-Route Network Specified Parameter 0 ~ 16 0

Table
For each ARS/F-Route table (1 ~ 500) assign
the priority (1 ~ 4). Assign the Network
Specified Parameter Table (0 ~ 16).
44-06-01 Additional Dial Table Maximum of 24 digits No Setting

If an Additional Dial Number Table is entered in Enter: 1 ~ 9, 0, , #, Pause
Program 44-05-03, define the additional dial (press line key 1 to enter a
table (1 ~ 1000) to add digits in front of the pause)
dialed ARS/F-Route number (24 digits

maximum: 1-9, 0 #, Pause). To enter a wild
card/dont care digit, press Line Key 1 to enter a
P (pause) symbol.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
44-07-01 Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access Set the gain table to be used 1 ~ 63
Incoming Transmit (1 ~ 500). If an extension dials (-15.5 ~
ARS/F-Route number: +15.5dB)
The Extension Dial Gain Table is Default = 32
activated, which is assigned in [0dB]
Program 44-05.
44-07-02 Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access The Extension Dial Gain Table 1 ~ 63
Incoming Receive follows Outgoing transmit and (-15.5 ~
Outgoing receive settings. +15.5dB)
If the incoming call is transferred Default = 32
to another line using ARS/ [0dB]
F-Route:
44-07-03 Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access 1 ~ 63
Outgoing Transmit The Tandem Gain Table is
(-15.5 ~
activated, which is assigned in
Program 44-05.
+15.5dB)
Default = 32
The Tandem Gain Table follows
[0dB]
the Incoming transmit and
44-07-04 Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access Incoming receive settings for 1 ~ 63
Outgoing Receive incoming line, and Outgoing (-15.5 ~
transmit and Outgoing receive +15.5dB)
settings for the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the
Default = 32
[0dB]
CODEC gains defined in
Program 14-01-02 and Program
14-01-03 are not activated.
44-08-01 Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route Time Number: 01 ~ 20 All Schedule

Define the daily pattern of the ARS/F-Route Start Time = 0000 ~ 2359 Patterns: 0:00 -
feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. 0:00, Mode 1
These patterns are used in Program 44-09 and
End Time = 0000 ~ 2359
Mode: 1 ~ 8
Program 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20
time settings.
44-09-01 Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route 1 = Sunday Pattern 1

Define a weekly schedule for using ARS/ (Pattern 1 ~ 10)
F-Route day numbers 1 ~ 7 (1 = Sun, 7 = Sat), 2 = Monday
pattern numbers (1 ~ 10). The pattern number (Pattern 1 ~ 10)
is defined in Program 44-08-01. 3= Tuesday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)
4 = Wednesday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)

5 = Thursday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)
6 = Friday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)
7 = Saturday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)
44-10-01 Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route Date: 0101 ~ 1231 0

Define a yearly schedule for ARS/F-Route. This Schedule Pattern Number = 0 ~
schedule is used for setting special days such 10
as national holidays (pattern numbers 1 ~ 10).

0 = No Setting
The pattern number is defined in Program
44-08-01.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-01 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Detect Level 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm Type 1 ~ 5 = 0
Use Items 11 ~ 32 to set the criteria for dial tone 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
detection for outgoing ARS calls. 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
80-03-02 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Start Delay 0 ~ 255 Type 1 ~ 5 = 0

Time (0.25ms ~ 64ms)
Define the start delay time for DTMF Tone

Receiver.
80-03-03 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Min. Detect 0 ~ 15 Type 1 = 10

Level detect level 0: (-20dBm)
Define the minimum detection level for DTMF -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15) Type 2 ~ 3 = 15
Tone Receiver. detect level 1: (-25dBm)
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) Type 4 ~ 5 = 10
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-80dBm(0) to -95dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-04 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Max. Detect 0 ~ 15 Type 1 ~ 5 = 2

Define the maximum detection level for DTMF 0dBm(0) to -15dBm(15)
Tone Receiver. detect level 1:
-5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
detect level 2:
-10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
80-03-05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward Twist 0~9 Type 1 = 5

Level (1dB ~ 10dB) (6dBm)
Define the forward twist level for DTMF Tone Type 2 = 5
Receiver. (6dBm)
Type 3 = 5
(6dBm)

Type 4 = 5
(6dBm)
Type 5 = 5
(6dBm)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backwards 0~9 Type 1 = 0

Twist Level (1dB ~ 10dB) (1dBm)
Define the backwards twist level for DTMF Tone Type 2 = 0
Receiver. (1dBm)
Type 3 = 0
(1dBm)

Type 4 = 0
(1dBm)
Type 5 = 0
(1dBm)
80-03-07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON Detect 1 ~ 255 Type 1 = 1

Time (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Define the On detection time for DTMF Tone Type 2 = 1
Receiver. (30ms)
Type 3 = 1
(30ms)

Type 4 = 1
(30ms)
Type 5 = 1
(30ms)
80-03-08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect 1 ~ 255 Type 1 = 1

Time (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Define the Off detection time for DTMF Tone Type 2 = 1
Receiver. (30ms)
Type 3 = 1
(30ms)

Type 4 = 1
(30ms)
Type 5 = 1
(30ms)
Recognize Extension Location when Logging In with Netlink:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
26-01-01 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Service 1 = Enable (On)
Enable/Disable ARS.
26-01-03 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS 0 = Route to Trunk Group 1 0

Misdialed Number Handling 1 = Play Warning Tone to Dialer
If a user dials a number not programmed in
ARS, determine if the system should Route
over trunk group 1 (0) or Play error tone (1).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

26-01-08 Automatic Route Selection Service 0 = Disable (Off) 0

DT800/DT700 Multi Log-on for ARS 1 = Enable (On)
Enable or Disable Recognize Extension

Location when logging in with NetLink
26-02-01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR Dial Maximum of 16 digits (0 ~ 9, No Setting
Enter the digits (16 digits maximum: 1 ~ 9, 0 #, @)
this table entry.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Program 44-05.
(0 ~ 100, 0 = No Route).
Used = 0 ~ 500
0 ~ 500

Service
26-02-05 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Dial Treatment 0 ~ 15 0

for ARS
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Dial
Treatment (0 ~ 15) to be used.
26-02-07 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Network 0 ~ 16 0

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (ARS)

Network Specified Parameter Table (0 ~ 16) to
be used.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

options are:
programming.
any modifications.

26-13-01 ARS Class of Service for NetLink (DT800/ Day/Night Mode: 1 ~ 8 0

DT700) Class = 0 ~ 16
Use to set an extensions ARS Class of Service
when used for NetLink. Automatic Route

Selection uses ARS Class of Service when
determining how to route an extensions calls.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

For each ARS/F-Route table (1 ~ 500) assign a (255 = Delete All)
priority number (1 ~ 4). Enter the number of
digits to be deleted (0 ~ 255) from the dialed
number.

Table
priority number (1 ~ 4). Enter the table number

(defined in Program 44-06) for additional digits
to be dialed (0 ~ 1000).

priority number (1 ~ 4). Select whether or not a
beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is
used.

Internal Call 0 = No Setting
number to be used for internal calls (0 ~ 500).


number to be used for the tandem call (defined
in Program 44-07)

Service to be used for ARS (0 ~ 16). Extension
ARS COS is determined in Program 26-04-01.

Treatment to be used (0 ~ 15). The Dial
Treatments are defined in Program 26-03-01.

Set the maximum number of digits to send
44-05-10 ARS/F-Route CCIS over IP Destination 0 ~ 16367 0

Point Code
For each ARS/F-Route table (1 ~ 500). Set the
CCIS over IP Destination Point Code
(0 ~ 16367).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
44-05-11 ARS/F-Route Network Specified Parameter 0 ~ 16 0

Table
For each ARS/F-Route table (1 ~ 500) assign
the priority (1 ~ 4). Assign the Network
Specified Parameter Table (0 ~ 16).
51-01-01 NetLink System Property Setting NetLink 0 ~ 50 0

System ID (0 = No operation)
This is the ID of each NetLink system. Set to

insure that no overlap occurs between nodes.
51-03-01 NetLink Internet Protocol Address List 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Setting Internet Protocol Address List 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
The system seeks the Primary system based 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
on this list.
When there is no Primary system yet, or Fail
Over occurs, Node List is referred to establish
new link. This setting is necessary when
Program 51-01-03 is 0, or Program 51-05-02 is

other than 0.
Once the system connects to the Primary
System, this setting is updated by the Primary
system when Program 51-13-01 is On. So,
enter IP address of the systems which may
become Primary at least.
Operation
To place a call using ARS:

- OR -

You hear normal Intercom dial tone.
2. Dial 9.
You hear a second, stutter dial tone.
3. Dial the outside number.

If you hear another stutter dial tone, you must enter your extension ARS Authorization Code.

Background Music
Description
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to the speakers
of the multiline telephone when the station is idle.
B
Conditions
An ACI [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] port must be used as an alternate External Music on
Hold or Background Music source when different External MOH and BGM sources
are required.
Background Music stops while the multiline terminal is in use.
Originating a call, answering a voice announcement, a ringing call, or internal
paging interrupts Background Music.
Background Music is not available on single line telephones.
Default Settings
Background Music (BGM) is not allowed, a service code to enable/disable Background

Music must be assigned in Program 11-11-18.
System Availability
Terminals
Locally provided Background Music source (i.e., CD player, Radio, NEC Audio
Emcee).
PGD(2)-U10 ADP if different external MOH and BGM sources are required.
Related Features
Music on Hold
Background Music 2-87

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-24-01 Daylight Savings Setup Daylight Savings 0 = Disable 1

Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the system ability to adjust the

time for daylight savings/standard time.
10-38-01 BGM Resource Setup BGM Resource Type 0 = GCD-CP10 (MOH/IN) 0

Configure the Background Music Source input 1 = ACI Port
(0) for GCD-CP10 or (1) for ACI Port.
10-38-02 BGM Resource Setup ACI Port Number for 0 ~ 96 0

BGM Source (only used if Program 10-38-01
is set to 1)
Program the ACI Port to be used for BGM
(0 ~ 96).
11-11-18 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry MLT No Setting

Operation) BGM On/Off
Assign the Service Code to Enable/Disable

BGM.

extension port =
Class 1
20-13-30 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Deny COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Background Music 1 = Allow
Allow/Deny an extension to turn Background

Music on and off.
Operation
To turn Background Music on or off:

1. Press idle Speaker.
2. Dial 725 (Service Code assigned in Program 11-11-18).
3. Press Speaker to hang up.
2-88 Background Music

Issue 2.0
Barge-In
Description
Barge-In permits an extension user to break into another extension users established call, including
Conference calls. This sets up a Conference-type conversation between the intruding extension and the
parties on the initial call. With Barge-In, an extension user can get a message through to a busy
co-worker right away.
There are two Barge-In modes: Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) and Speech Mode. With Monitor Mode,
the caller Barging In can listen to another users conversation but cannot participate. With Speech Mode,
the caller Barging In can listen and join another users conversation.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record
telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with
transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice
CAUTION
should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone
conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to a
telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the
consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the telephone
conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions
An extension user can barge-in on a conference.
An extension user cannot barge-in on an Intercom call if one of the intercom callers is using
Handsfree Answerback. Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker.
With Program 20-13-10 set to 0, a barged into call can be placed on hold by the originator
of the outside call. Both the outside caller and the extension that barged into the call are
placed on hold.
With Program 20-13-10 set to 1, a call which is barged into can be placed on Park by the
originator of the outside call, but only the outside caller is placed in Park. The extension
which barged into the call is dropped.
When Program 20-13-10 is set to 1 (Monitor), only one party can barge into the call.
Privacy blocks Barge-In attempts.
Function keys simplify the Barge-In operation.
When Silent Monitor Mode is used, MIC or Feature + 1 can be used to activate speech path
to the internal and external parties.
Barge-In 2-89
Issue 2.0
The Barge-In key allows for additional data to be assigned to the key. The additional data
can be set to:
Nothing (same as before).
Extension Number (when pressed it will Barge-In to that Extension).
The (when pressed) barges into the Extension where Call Forward Both Ring is set. If no
Forward Both Ring is set, it will act as though no additional data is set [Basic Barge-In
Functionality]).
When using Barge-In, the maximum number of conference ports supported is 32 (two
original participants and a maximum of 30 Barge-In participants).
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Call Monitoring
Conference
Hold
Intercom
Off-Hook Signaling
Park
Programmable Function Keys
2-90 Barge-In
Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Barge-In Maximum of eight digits
Determine what the service code should be for

0 ~ 9, , #
an internal party to use the Barge-In feature.
11-16-02 Single Digit Service Code Setup Barge-In Set up Item 02 for single digit No Setting
Barge-In. For example, you can
assign Item 02 to use digit 5 for
Barge-In. This allows you to
program a function key with an
extension number plus the
Barge-In code (i.e., 5). This
allows one-touch access to the
Barge-In feature for extension.

Assign a function key for Barge-In (code 34). 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
751 by default) Manual for
Optional additional data can be assigned as
extension number or . 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1
20-13-10 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Speech COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) Barge-In Monitor 1 = Monitor
Enable the extension Barge-In Mode to be

Speech mode or Monitor mode.

Service) Barge-In, Initiate 1 = On

barge-in on other's calls.

Service) Barge-In, Receive 1 = On
Turn Off or On Barge-In at the receiving

extension (i.e., Barge-In receive).
Barge-In 2-91
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion 1 = On
Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In (Intrusion) Tone. If

disabled, this also turns off the Barge-In display
at the called extension.

Service) Deny Multiple Barge-Ins 1 = On
Allow (1)/Deny (0) an extension user ability to
have multiple users Barge-In to their
conversation.
20-14-11 Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In 1 = On
Enable (1)/Disable (0) a DISA or tie trunk user

from using the Barge-In feature.
20-18-07 Service Tone Timers Intrusion Tone 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Repeat Time
After a user barges in, the system repeats the

Barge-In tone after this time.
21-01-03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk 0 ~ 64800 seconds 5

Interdigit Time (External)
Program the time an extension must wait
before using the Barge-In feature can be used
on a call (this timer waits until it expires before
putting a call in a talk state). This time also
affects Voice Over.
Operation
To Barge-In after calling a busy extension:
The time in Program 21-01-03 must expire before you can Barge-In.
TIP
1. Call a busy extension.

2. Press Barge-In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 34).
To Barge-In without first calling the busy extension:

1. Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2. Dial 710.
- OR -
Press Barge-In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 34).
2-92 Barge-In
Issue 2.0
3. Dial busy extension.

The extension user hears a warning tone.
The DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group.
The Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks:
1. Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.
2. Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710.
To Barge-In to a Conference Call:

1. Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code (default = 710).
If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the
system automatically places a callback to the extension.
2. Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone in a conference call.
When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the
Conference, depending on system programming, and all display multiline terminals show the
joined party. If a Conference is not possible:
The extension user hears a warning tone.
The DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group.
The Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
Not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks.
- OR -
1. Dial the extension number of the internal party.

Barge-In 2-93
Issue 2.0
Battery Backup - System Memory
Description
The battery on the GCD-CP10 retains the Clock/Calendar and Last Number Redial (LNR) buffers for
each station when the GCD-CP10 encounters a power loss. With a fully charged battery, the settings
are retained for approximately three years.
The system programmed memory (Customer Database) is stored in Nonvolatile Memory and can be
erased only by performing a First Initialization.
For additional storage time, the database and Caller ID History can be copied to the system drive
on the GCD-CP10.
TIP
Conditions
The battery on the GCD-CP10 should be removed during long term storage but must be
installed (protection against loss of power) just before blade installation to provide battery
backup for System Memory.
When fully charged, the battery retains System Memory for approximately three years.
You should replace the GCD-CP10 battery every three years.
During normal operation, the battery is continually recharged using a built-in charging
circuit from the GCD-CP10.
To prevent loss of the Caller ID History, you should save the database before storing the
GCD-CP10.
Battery backup on the GCD-CP10 does not protect the following:
Callback
Off-line Status (for programming system or station assignments)
Repeat Redial
Caller ID History
Default Settings
None
The battery must be installed on the GCD-CP10 prior to programming a customer database.
2-94 Battery Backup - System Memory

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
None
Related Features
Battery Backup - System Power

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-03-01 Save Data Dial 1 + Press Hold No Setting

Save the programmed data on the SRAM and
Flash ROM to the 16MB/32MB ATA removable
Compact Flash memory card. This program
should be used after changing the programmed

data.
This program is available only via telephone
programming and not through PC Programming.
Operation
None
Battery Backup - System Memory 2-95

Issue 2.0
Description
A built-in battery provides complete system operating power for approximately 30 minutes during
commercial power outages. When optional (locally provided) batteries are connected and fully charged,
full system operation can be maintained for an extended time. Actual time depends on system
configuration, traffic conditions, and the capacity of the batteries.
Conditions
During normal operation, the batteries are continually recharged by a built-in charging
circuit.
The GCD-CP10 is equipped with batteries for system battery backup.
An External Battery Pack can be connected to the system to provide extended time during
a commercial power outage.
REFERENCE
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
GCD-CP10
Related Features
Battery Backup - System Memory
2-96 Battery Backup - System Power

Issue 2.0
Programming
None
Operation
None
Battery Backup - System Power 2-97

Issue 2.0
2-98 Battery Backup - System Power

Callback
Description
When an extension user calls a co-worker that does not answer or is busy, they can leave a
Callback request for a return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered
C
extension back, hoping to find it idle.
The system processes Callback requests as follows:

1. Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.
Caller can place or answer additional calls in the meantime.
2. When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.
3. Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy or unanswered)
extension B.
If caller A does not answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback.
4. As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.
Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring. When
Callback Automatic Answer is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the
handset. When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled, the user must press the ringing line
appearance to answer the Callback ring.
Conditions
An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time.
Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) keys do not support Call Waiting/
Camp-On Programmable Function keys (code 35).
If an extension user initiates a Callback but does not hang up, their extension
Camps-On to the busy extension.
Function Keys simplify Callback operation.
The Callback feature is not available when calling a busy station from a Wireless
DECT (SIP) handset.
Default Settings
Enabled
Callback 2-99
Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Call Waiting/Camp-On)

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Cancel Camp-On 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, redefine the service code used digits

cancel Camp-On.
11-12-44 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) SLT 799

Callback Test for SLT 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, redefine the service code used for digits

SLT Callback Test.
11-16-05 Single Digit Service Code Setup Camp-On 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit #
If required, redefine the service code used to
set Camp-On.
15-02-11 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Off 1

Callback Automatic Answer 1 = On
Enable (1)/ Disable (0) Callback Automatic

Answer.
2-100 Callback
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys. 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming

752 by default)
20-01-07 System Options Callback Ring Duration 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15

Time
Set the time of the Callback ring.
20-01-09 System Options Callback/Trunk Queuing 0 ~ 64800 seconds 64800

Cancel Time
The system cancels Callback and Trunk

Queuing requests after this time.
Operation
To place a Callback:
1. Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension.
2. Dial # or press the Callback key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
3. Hang up.
4. Lift the handset when busy extension calls you back.
If the unavailable extension was unanswered (not busy), the Callback goes through after your
co-worker uses their telephone for the first time.
If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension
when you lift the handset. If you do not have Callback Automatic Answer, you must press the ringing
line appearance to place the call.
To cancel a Callback:
1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker and Dial 770.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal, press Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset and dial 770.
Callback 2-101
Issue 2.0
To test Callback at a single line telephone:

1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial 799.
3. Hang up.
4. When the telephone rings, lift the handset.
You hear the Hold tone.
5. Hang up.
2-102 Callback
Issue 2.0
Caller ID Call Return
Description
The Caller ID Call Return feature allows the voice mail system to use Caller ID information captured with
the message to call and connect the person that left the message with the voice mail user that is
checking messages.
Conditions
A caller using a telephone without Softkeys, calling from outside the system, or from a
remote system is prompted to hear Caller ID information and return a call.
Return Call is available for subscriber messages and public messages.
Return Call is accessible to a subscriber during and after message playback.
Return Call is available for new and old messages.
Return Call is accessible to a subscriber using Softkeys in Softkey mode or using DTMF in
voice conversation Mode.
On the UM8000 Mail, one minute before disconnecting the original caller, voice mail plays a
warning prompt and immediately before disconnecting plays a prompt to indicate dropping
the call.
When a subscriber listens to a message from a Softkey equipped telephone, and Caller ID
information is unavailable, the voice mail system leaves the second line of the LCD blank.
When Caller ID is disabled on the system, voice mail displays the message count.
On the UM8000 Mail, from the subscriber options Softkey menu, a subscriber can access a
Softkey menu that allows selection of name or number to be displayed on the LCD during
message playback. The default is name. Voice mail uses this setting to determine the initial
display on the LCD during playback.
Voice mail continues to display Caller ID on the LCD while the post-message playback
menu is still displayed on a telephone equipped with Softkeys.
On the UM8000 Mail, during return call, the voice mail port is in conference with the box
owner and messages.
When Centralized Voice Mail is used, the remote voice mail user gets only Caller ID
number when voice mail answers incoming CO calls and performs an Await-Answer
transfer to the remote user. A Call that forwards to voice mail from the remote system does
not have Caller ID information.
Live Record is not available when using Return Call.
A Telephone used as a Contact Center Plus agent or supervisor station should not have
mailboxes that support Softkeys. Softkeys can be disabled per mailbox in Access Codes
Options by enabling Hands Free Play for a particular station.
Caller ID Call Return 2-103

Issue 2.0
On the UM8000 Mail, the Return Call feature is enabled per mailbox in Subscriber/Access
Options and can be enabled for internal numbers only or for both internal and external
numbers.
To use this feature for long distance calls, ARS must be programmed for the voice mail
ports set to dial out.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual for detailed

REFERENCE
programming instructions.
On the UM8000 Mail, the Return Call parameter must be entered on the Integration Options
line of System/Switch/Switch Information Screen to enable this voice mail feature. Default
is RCV=6,10 where 6 is the number of rings voice mail tries when returning a call, and 10 is
the number of minutes a returned call can last.
On the UM8000 Mail, a trunk access code must be entered on the Return call outdial
access code line of System/Switch/Dialing Codes screen so the Return Call feature can
access a trunk to return the call. When this is not entered, the mailbox user is not prompted
to return the call even when Caller ID information is available.
Use Program 14-01-22 Caller ID to Voice Mail to enable or disable per trunk the ability to
send the Caller ID digits to voice mail.
After the call is ended by either party, the voice mail user is disconnected.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
UM8000 Mail
InMail
Related Features
UM8000 Mail
InMail
2-104 Caller ID Call Return

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-22 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller Trunks 1 ~ 400 0

ID to Voice Mail 0 = Disable
Enable/Disable the system ability 1 = Enable
to send the Caller ID digits to voice
mail.
14-02-10 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller Trunks 1 ~ 400 0

ID 0 = Off (Caller ID not displayed.)
Enable (1)/Disable (0) a trunk to

1 = On (Caller ID is displayed.)
receive Caller ID information.
15-02-04 Multiline Telephone Basic Data 0 = Common Abbreviated Dial 0

Setup Redial (Speed Dial) 1 = Group Speed Dialing
Control
Control the function of the
extension Redial key when used

with Speed Dialing. The Redial key
can access either the Common or
Group Speed Dialing numbers.
Operation
To return call from the UM8000 Mail:

1. While listening to a message with CID information press More, More then Call softkeys.
- OR -
Dial #, 0.
2. To exit from the call, hang up.
Caller ID Call Return 2-105

Issue 2.0
To return call from InMail:

1. While listening to a message with CID information press More, More then Call softkeys.
- OR -
Dial 6, 2 (MC).
2. To exit from the call, hang up.
If you hear Your call cannot go through, your system Caller ID is not properly set up. You will be
returned to the listen mode for the message you were listening to when you tried the Make Call.
2-106 Caller ID Call Return

Issue 2.0
Caller ID
Description
Caller ID allows a display terminal to show an incoming callers telephone number (called the Directory
Number or DN) and optional name. The Caller ID information is available as pre-answer display. With
the pre-answer display, the user previews the callers number before picking up the ringing line.

NOTE
On the GCD-CP10 for Caller ID (also used for DTMF receivers and Call Progress Tone Detection)
32 resources are available. The GPZ-BS10 provides an additional 64 resources.
Second Call Display
While busy on a call, the telephone display can show the identity of an incoming trunk or Intercom call.
For incoming trunk calls, the display shows the Caller ID or ANI data or the trunk name if Caller ID or ANI
are not installed. (Refer to T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) on page 2-1423 for more
information.) For incoming Intercom calls, the display shows the calling extension name.
Caller ID supports the Telco Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND)
service, when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e., messages) between the
first and second ring burst of an incoming call. Two types of Caller ID message formats are currently
available: Single Message Format and Multiple Message Format. With Single Message Format, the
Telco sends only the callers telephone number (DN). The DN has seven or 10 digits. In Multiple
Message Format, the Telco sends the DN and the callers name. The DN for this format also has seven
or 10 digits, and the name provided consists of up to 15 ASCII characters.
The telephone display can show up to 12 Caller ID digits (for non-Contact Center calls).
Once installed and programmed, Caller ID is enabled for all trunk calls, including: Ring Group calls
Calls transferred from another extension
Calls transferred from the VRS
Calls transferred from Voice Mail (unscreened)
Direct Inward Lines (DILs)
Caller ID temporarily stores 50 calls (total of abandoned and answered/unanswered). New calls replace
old calls when the buffer fills.
Temporary Memory
An unanswered call causes the Call History key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 08) to flash, to indicate a
new call was placed in the temporary memory. If enabled in programming, the telephone display shows
CHECK LIST.
This Caller ID data from the temporary memory can be saved in either Speed Dial bins or in One-Touch
keys making them available for placing future calls.
Caller ID 2-107
Issue 2.0
Cursor Key Operation
By pressing the Left Cursor Key the user can access the Redial and Incoming Call History menus. The
flow chart below shows the menu access sequence. If the terminal is not allowed to have the Dial
Preview feature, these menus cannot be accessed.
Figure 2-1 Left Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart
Outputting Caller ID Data
The system includes the Caller ID data on the SMDR report. The report provides the incoming call DN in
the DIALED NUMBER field. The CLASS field shows PIN (just like all other incoming calls).
Caller ID data can also output to a PC or other type of computer through the 1st-Party TAPI driver. This
allows for off-line database lookups. In a customer service department, for example, the computer could
search for a callers records and display their account status even before a customer service
representative picked up the telephone.
Caller ID Digits to Voice Mail
A Caller ID/ANI trunk can send Remote Log-On Protocol with Caller ID digits to the voice mail. When a
trunk 001 receives the Caller ID as 12345, the protocol becomes 6000112345.
Display Reason for No Caller ID Information
With Caller ID enabled, the system provides information for analog calls that do not detect the Caller ID
information. If the Caller ID information is restricted, the telephone display shows PRIVATE. If the system
cannot provide Caller ID information because Telco information is not detected, the display shows NO
CALLER INFO.
Calling Party Number Information
When using the Wireless DECT (SIP) telephone, the system can provide the Caller ID information for an
external call if it is provided by the Telco.
Option to Enable Caller ID Name for SLT
System programming provides an option for single line telephones to display Caller ID.
2-108 Caller ID
Issue 2.0
Add Trunk Access Code to Caller ID with Wireless DECT (SIP) Phones
UNIVERGE SV9100 SIP DECT Phones on the UNIVERGE SV9100 can hold incoming call history. This
history is created based on the Caller ID information element contained in the call Setup message which
is transmitted from the UNIVERGE SV9100. This information allows users to return calls dialing the
number stored.
The stored number, however, does not contain the trunk access code. Without this code, the system
may not be able to seize an outside line to complete the call.
With this feature, when an Wireless DECT (SIP) user receives an incoming trunk call, the trunk access
code defined in programming can be added to the Caller ID. This allows the system to seize an outside
line and then dial the stored number.
This function is applied only to incoming ISDN calls. It does not apply to incoming extension calls.
Caller ID must be available for this feature to work.
The maximum number of Caller ID digits is 20. If the total number of digits [trunk access code
(Program 10-02-05) and Caller ID] is over 20, the remaining Caller ID digits are not dialed.
For example:
Trunk Access Code (Program 10-02-05): 123456# (eight digits)
Incoming Caller ID: 12345678901234567890 (20 digits)
UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless Dials: 123456#123456789012
An additional digit (such as 1) may be required to complete the call (Program 10-02-04).
For example:
Incoming Caller ID shows: 2125551212.
If your area code is NOT 212, define a 1 in Program 10-02-04. When callback is executed, the
system prefixes 1 on the digits dialed string.
Caller ID Sender Queuing Added
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system can provide Caller ID (calling party number) to a single line telephone
with a display.
The system can queue incoming calls to the single line telephone if the system Caller ID sender
resources are busy.
If the single line telephone user lifts their handset while an incoming call is waiting in queue, they hear
silence (no dial tone) and cannot dial out. When the single line telephone user goes back on-hook, the
system immediately sends the queued call to the single line telephone without Caller ID.
Conditions
To have pre-answer Caller ID from the voice mail, the call must be an unscreened transfer.
Caller ID is provided by the GCD-CP10. The GPZ-BS10 blade, which plugs into the
chassis, can provide additional resources for Caller ID if needed.
Caller ID 2-109
Issue 2.0
Caller ID Name can display up to 12 characters.

Caller ID Number can display up to 11 characters.
A Caller ID Number with more than 12 digits follows Program 20-19-01 (first 10 or the last
10 digits).
Caller ID information can be stored in Speed Dialing or One-Touch bins.
Caller ID can be displayed for incoming calls and transferred calls.
ARS can block outgoing Caller ID information call-by-call. To do this, insert the Caller ID
block code (e.g., 67) in the ARS Dial Treatments.
Trunks with Privacy Release enabled display Caller ID until the call is answered. To view it
after the call has been picked up, press the line key, which sets the call to private mode. To
keep the call on Privacy Release, press the Help + Exit keys.
An extension user can display the Caller ID information for a call in Park if Automatic
Handsfree in Program 15-02-08 is set to 0 (Preselect).
An extension user can display the Caller ID information for multiple incoming calls without
answering the call by pressing the line key if Automatic Handsfree in Program 15-02-08 is
set to 0 (Pre-select).
Caller ID information outputs on the SMDR report.
ANI/DNIS can use the Caller ID tables for routing. Refer to T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS
Compatibility) on page 2-1423 for more information.
The system can send Caller ID digits to the voice mail if allowed in Program 14-02-10.
When more than 20 characters are set in Program 20-20: Message Setup for Non-Caller ID
Data, either the first or last character is missing (based on the entry in Program 20-19-01).
If Program 20-09-06: Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service): Incoming Time
Display is set to 1 (On), the first line displays the time and date.
When you shut down the system, incoming history data is cleared. But you can back up the
history data by pressing Speaker + # # 9.
Program 15-07-01 button (63) when enabled, removes the CPN from the setup message
when making an outbound ISDN call, this is a toggle enable/disable button and can be
used on a Call-by-Call basis. Programs 14-01-20, 14-01-21 and 20-08-15 are used for
copper trunks only and can be set only per trunk/Class of Service.
SLT users cannot block an incoming call based on the incoming Caller ID information on a
station-by-station basis.
The GCD-CP10 has 32 resources for DTMF receiving and Dial Tone detection. When a is
GPZ-BS10 installed there are 64 resources available.
When Program 10-09-01 is set to 0 (Common) and Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 1
(Yes), all DTMF/Dial Tone Detection resources are always allocated to analog trunks, not
analog extensions. However, if Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 0 (No), all DTMF/Dial
Tone Detection resources can be used for both analog trunks and analog extensions.
2-110 Caller ID
Issue 2.0
For the Caller ID List to show calls to a station that received a busy tone, Program 15-02-57
must be set to 1 (On).
When Program 15-02-57 is set to 1 (On) and Program 15-02-34 is set to 0 (Trunk), only
outside calls are shown in the Caller ID List.
Caller ID history is not updated for a phone which is in power cutting mode from the ecology
feature. Once power is restored to the phone the caller ID history will start functioning
again.
The priority for the Large LED color for incoming calls is Programs 13-04-13, then 14-01-35
or 15-23-01.
Large LED Illumination by CID (Program 13-04-13) only applies to ITL and ITZ terminals.
DTL and DTZ terminals do not support Large LED Illumination by CID.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
GCD-4COTB with GPZ-4COTF Daughter Board
GCD-2BRIA with GPZ-2BRIA Daughter Board
GCD-PRTA
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Park
Caller ID 2-111
Issue 2.0
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
InMail

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-02-04 Location Setup Area Code Dial (maximum of eight digits) No Setting
Enter the local area code. 0 ~ 9, , #
10-02-05 Location Setup Trunk Access Code Dial (maximum of eight digits) No Setting
Enter the trunk access code digits required to 0 ~ 9, , #
place an outgoing call.
10-09-01 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup 0 = Common Use Circuit/Resource
Allocate the circuits (1 ~ 16 or 1 ~ 64) on the 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
GCD-CP10 for either DTMF receiving or dial 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
tone detection. Circuit/Resource
The GCD-CP10 has 32 resources for DTMF 09 ~ 32 = 2
receiving and Dial Tone detection. When a (Trunks)
GPZ-BS10 is installed there are 64 resources Circuit/Resource
available. 33 ~ 144 = 0
(Common)

When Program 10-09-01 is set to 0 (Common)
and Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 1 (Yes), When
all DTMF/Dial Tone Detection resources are always GPZ-BS10 is
allocated to analog trunks, not analog extensions. installed, 81 ~
However, if Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 0 144 are available
(No), all DTMF/Dial Tone Detection resources can
be used for both analog trunks and analog
extensions.
11-15-03 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for MLT ##9

Special Access) Backup Data Save 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
This service code is used to back up the digits
programmed data on the SRAM and Call
History to the Flash ROM.
While saving the database, it may cause
system lock up.
2-112 Caller ID
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
13-04-13 Speed Dialing Number and Name Large 1 = Not used No Setting
LED Illumination Setup by (CID) 2 = Red
Define the color the large LED will blink when 3 = Green
Incoming call with matching Caller ID is 4 = Blue
received.
5 = Yellow
This feature applies only to ITL and ITZ
6 = Purple

terminals. DTL and DTZ terminals do not support
Large LED Illumination by CID. 7 = Light Blue
8 = White
9 = Rotation
0 = No Setting
14-01-20 Basic Trunk Data Setup Block Outgoing Trunks 1 ~ 400 0

Caller ID 0 = Disable
Enable/Disable the system from automatically 1 = Enable
blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a
user places a call. If allowed (i.e. block,
enabled), the system automatically inserts the

Caller ID block code (defined in 14-01-21)
before the user dialed digits.
If prevented (i.e., block disabled), the system
outdials the call just as it was dialed by the user.
14-01-21 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller ID Block Trunks 1 ~ 400 67

Code Dial (maximum of eight digits)
Enter the code, up to eight digits, that should be
used as the Caller ID Block Code. This code is

automatically inserted before dialed digits if
Program 14-01-20 is set to 1.
14-01-22 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller ID to Voice Trunks 1 ~ 400 0

Mail 0 = Disable
Enable/Disable the system ability to send the

1 = Enable
Caller ID digits to voice mail.
14-01-24 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Disable (No) 0

Outgoing Caller ID through Mode 1 = Enable (Yes)
This command is for PRI and SIP trunks only
and should never be enabled on any other
trunk type. When this command is enabled the
system will pass the originating callers caller ID
on to the Telco if the call is forwarded out of the
system.
Some Telco offices do not support this and will
replace the number you send them with the main
billing number.
14-02-10 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID Trunks 1 ~ 400 0

Enable (1) or Disable (0) a trunk to receive 0 = No
Caller ID information. 1 = Yes
15-02-08 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Preselect 1

Automatic Handsfree 1 = One-Touch (Automatic
Set whether pressing a key accesses a Handsfree)

One-Touch Key (1) or preselects the key (0).
Caller ID 2-113
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-02-15 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Disable 1

Storage of Caller ID for Answered Call 1 = Enable
Enable (1) or Disable (0) ability of extension to

store Caller ID for answered calls.
15-02-40 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Maximum of four digits (0, 1~9, No Setting
Additional Dial for Caller ID Call Return #, )
Enter the digits to be dialed in front of the Caller

ID when using Caller ID Call Return.

Caller Log on Busy 1 = On
When a call to a station returns busy to the
caller, turn On or Off if the call should be logged
in the Call history log as a busy call.
15-03-09 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Disable 0

Caller ID Function For External Module 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the Caller ID FSK signal for an
external Caller ID module or a 3rd-Party vendor
telephone with Caller ID display.
If voice mail is used, this setting must be
disabled or the system integration codes for
disconnect are incorrect. For Caller ID Sender
Queuing, set this option to 1.

Caller ID Name 1 = Enable
Determine whether or not a single line

telephone should display the Caller ID name.

752 by default)
20-02-08 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 ~ 64800 seconds 5

LCD Display Holding Time
Determine the time a user display shows Caller

ID for a second incoming call.

Assign a Class of Service (1 ~ 15) to Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
extensions. (1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1
2-114 Caller ID
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Block Outgoing Caller ID 1 = On
Turn Off or On a user Class of Service from
automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed. If block is
enabled, the system automatically inserts the
Caller ID block code 67 (defined in Program
14-01-21) before the user dialed digits (this
requires Program 14-02-10 to be enabled). If
block is disabled, the system outdials the call
just as it was dialed by the user.

Service) Caller ID Display 1 = On
Turns Off or On the Caller ID display at an

extension.

Service) Notification for Incoming Call List 1 = On
Existence
Determine whether or not the CHECK LIST
message is displayed to indicate a missed call.

Service) Automatic Off-Hook Signaling 1 = On
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension user to Manually (0) or
Automatically (1) receive off-hook signals.
This setting is to receive incoming call
signaling information during call queuing.
20-19-01 System Options for Caller ID Caller ID 0 = First 10 digits (Upper) 0

Displaying Format (If displaying digits are 1 = Last 10 digits (Lower)
more than 12 digits)
Determine whether the first 10 digits or last 10

digits should be displayed when Caller ID
exceeds 12 digits.
20-19-05 System ID Options for Caller ID Caller ID 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Sender Queuing Time (Sender Wait)
With the Caller ID Sender Queuing option,
determine the time an incoming call waits in
queue for a DSP resource to become available.
If a resource becomes available during this
time, the call immediately rings the single line
telephone with Caller ID. If the time expires

before a resource becomes available, the
system rings the single line telephone without
Caller ID (until the queuing time expires, the
single line telephone does not ring). If the
queuing timer is set to 0, the system does not
queue the incoming call.
Caller ID 2-115
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-20-01 Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data 24 Alphanumeric Characters PRIVATE

Private Call
Enter the text to be displayed for Caller ID when
a user receives a call which is classified as a
private call.
20-20-02 Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data Call 24 Alphanumeric Characters OUT OF AREA
from Out of Service Area
a user receives a call which is classified as an
out-of-service area call.
20-20-03 Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data Call 24 Alphanumeric Characters NO CALLER
Information with Error INFO
a user receives a call which is classified as a
call with a CID error.
90-03-01 Save Data Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press No Setting

Save the programmed data on the SRAM and Transfer to cancel.)
Flash ROM to the 16MB/32MB ATA removable
Compact Flash memory card.
Also, used to save stored Caller ID if
permanently saved with service code #*#9
(11-15-03).
90-04-01 Load Data Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press No Setting

Load the system data from the inserted Transfer to cancel.)
Compact Flash Memory to the SRAM and
Flash ROM in the system.
Also, used to load stored Caller ID.
Operation
Storing a Number
To store a Caller ID number in an Speed Dial bin:

1. With a multiline terminal idle, the display shows:
1-01 FRI 09:00AM
301 STA 301
LIST DIR VMsg
2-116 Caller ID
Issue 2.0
2. Press the LIST Softkey.

- OR -
Press the Left Cursor Key twice and skip step 3. The display shows:
LIST MENU
Redial CID
3. Press the CID Softkey (Caller ID). The display shows:

##: xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
Store DEL
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
= Preview List
= Next List
Store = Store in List
DEL = Delete from List
4. Press the STORE Softkey. The display shows:
##: xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
STA Abb TELBK
## = List Number
STA = Store in Station Speed Dial bin.
ABB = Store in Abbreviated Dial bin.
TELBK = Store in Telephone Book.
5. Press the STA or ABB or TELBK Softkey. The display shows:
Store to ABB: COMMON
ENTER BIN
6. Dial the Speed Dial bin in which the number is to be stored. If you press Hold, the next available
Speed Dial bin is used. The display shows:
ABB XXXX:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
If all Speed Dial bins are used, the display shows TABLE IS FULL.
Caller ID 2-117
Issue 2.0
7. Press HOLD. The display shows:

ABB XXXX
-
8. Enter the name to be associated with the stored number.
Table 2-8 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .
1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ] ^ _ ` { | }
2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! # $ % & ( )
Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ?
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed -
ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the
right arrow Softkey instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Feature Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD (Telpro only) Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
9. Press Transfer. The display shows:

SET ABB
10. Press Speaker.

The telephone returns to idle.
2-118 Caller ID
Issue 2.0
To store a Caller ID number in a One-Touch key:

1. With a telephone idle, the display shows:
1-01 FRI 09:00AM
301 STA 301
LIST DIR VMsg
2. Press the LIST Softkey.

- OR -
Press the Left Cursor Key twice and skip step 3. The display shows:
LISTlMENU
Redial CID
3. Press the CID Softkey (Caller ID). The display shows:

##: xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
Store DEL
## = List Number
= Preview List
= Next List
Store = Store in List
DEL = Delete from List
4. Press the STORE Softkey. The display shows:
##: xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
STA Abb TELBK
## = List Number
STA = Store in Station Speed Dial bin.
ABB = Store in Abbreviated Dial bin.
TELBK = Store in Telephone Book.
5. Press the STA or ABB or TELBK Softkey. The display shows:
Store to Personal ABB
ENTER BIN
Caller ID 2-119
Issue 2.0
6. Press the One-Touch key in which the number is to be stored or dial 1~9, 0. If you press Hold,
the next available One-Touch key is used. The display shows:
Key ##:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
If all One-Touch keys are used, the display shows TABLE IS FULL.
7. Press Hold. The display shows:
KEY ##
-
8. Enter the name to be associated with the stored number. Refer to Table 2-8 Keys for Entering
Names on page 2-118.
9. Press Hold. The display shows:
KEY PROG STA
10. Press Speaker.

The telephone returns to idle.
Temporary Memory
An unanswered call causes the Call History key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 08) to flash, indicating a new
call was placed in the temporary memory. If enabled in programming, the telephone display shows
CHECK LIST.
1. Press the Call History key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 08),
- OR -
Press the LIST Softkey and CID.

- OR -
Press the Left Cursor Key twice.

The last addition to the list is displayed.
2. Press the ARROW DOWN Softkey to scroll through the list of numbers in memory.
3. Press the DEL Softkey to delete the entry and scroll to the next entry.
4. The Call History key remains on as long as entries remain in memory.
5. To place a call back to a number in the temporary memory list, with the number to be dialed
displayed, press a line key or Speaker. (Refer to Table 2-8 Keys for Entering Names on page
2-118.)
The outgoing call is placed.
2-120 Caller ID
Issue 2.0
To display Caller ID for a call in Park:
Program 15-02-08 is set to 0 (preselect) for this feature.

NOTE
1. With Program 15-02-08 set to 0 (preselect) and a call in park, press the PARK key. (Program
15-07 or SC 752: 04.
With Program 15-02-08 set to 1 (One-Touch) and a call in park, press RECALL then the PARK
key (Program 15-07 or SC 752 04).
Checking your Answered/Unanswered Caller ID Calls:
To review the last 50 outside calls your extension received:

1. At a display multiline terminal, press the LIST Softkey.
- OR -
Press the Left Cursor Key twice and skip step 2.

2. Press CID.
The first row of your display shows the Caller ID number. If there is an next to the call record
number in the left-hand corner, this indicates that it is a call you missed (unanswered). The second row
shows the date and time of the call.
Press the up and down softkeys to see the list of calls available in the buffer.
3. If the Caller ID includes a name, you can press the HELP key to view the number of the caller.
4. To call the displayed number, press a line/Call Appearance (CAP) Key.
- OR -
To erase the displayed number without returning the call, press the DEL Softkey.
Caller ID 2-121
Issue 2.0
Caller ID Flexible Ringing
Description
The Caller ID Flexible Ringing feature provides several different options for rerouting calls based on
the Caller ID received.
Reject/Reroute Private Caller ID Calls
When an analog or ISDN trunk call is received with Private Caller ID information, the SV9100 can
reject the call by playing a VRS message or it can route the call to an alternative extension or incoming
ring group programmed in Program 22-18-01.
Reject/Reroute Based on Entry in SPD Table
When an analog, ISDN or IP trunk call is received with regular Caller ID information, the SV9100 can
reject the call by playing a VRS message if the Caller ID number matches the Speed Dial group number
programmed in Program 22-16-01 and Speed Dial entry in Programs 13-02-01 and 13-04-01. The
analog, ISDN or IP trunk call can also be routed to an alternative extension or incoming ring group if the
Caller ID number matches the common or group Speed Dial table (Program 13-04).
This option can block calls on all trunks or it can be set on a per-trunk basis.
Programming Examples for Flexible Ringing by Caller ID:

To refuse the Private Caller ID incoming call:
Program 14-01-27: 1 (reject)
Program 20-07-24: 1 (Enable for COS)
Program 22-18-01: 0 (no transfer)
Program 40-10-06: 2 (VRS message 2)
then,
Turn on the Private Call Refuse mode using the service code (Program 11-10-32) or Programmable
Function Key (code 86).
To transfer the Private Caller ID incoming call to extension 301 as ring pattern 2:
Program 22-18-01: 1 (extension number)
Program 22-18-02: 301 (extension 301)
Program 22-18-03: 2 (ring pattern 2)
then,
2-122 Caller ID Flexible Ringing

Issue 2.0
To transfer the Private Caller ID incoming call to incoming ring group 2 as ring pattern 3:
Program 22-18-01: 2 (incoming ring group)
Program 22-18-02: 2 (group 2)
Program 22-18-03: 3 (ring pattern 3)
then,
To reject the call with 2142622000 Caller ID incoming call:
Program 20-07-25: 1 (Enable for COS)
Program 22-16: 64 (Speed Dial group 64)
Program 13-02; Group 64: 1000 - 1099
Program 13-04-01; Table 1000: 2142622000
then,
Turn on the Caller ID Refuse mode using the service code (Program 11-10-34) or Programmable
To transfer the call with 2142622000 Caller ID incoming call to extension 301 as ring pattern 1:
Program 13-04-01: 2142622000
Program 13-04-03: 1 (extension number)
Program 13-04-04: 301 (extension 301)
Program 13-04-05: 1 (tone pattern 1)
To transfer the call with 2142622000 Caller ID incoming call to incoming ring group 2 as ring
pattern 2:
Program 13-04-01: 2142622000
Program 13-04-03: 2 (incoming ring group)
Program 13-04-04: 2 (group 2)
Program 13-04-05: 2 (tone pattern 2)
Conditions
Caller ID Matching.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 compares the Caller ID and programmed Speed Dial and allows/
denies as indicated below.
The Speed Dial table is searched from the starting number and the first match result is
used.
The maximum number of VRS message channels that can be used simultaneously is 16.
These channels are also shared with the voice mail.
Caller ID Flexible Ringing 2-123

Issue 2.0
This feature does not work with incoming trunk calls via networking (from another system).
In this case, the refuse/routing program must be programmed in the system that has those
trunks. Routing to the other systems extension is available.
When Program 13-04 is used; it will override the setting in Program 22-02-01: Incoming
Call Trunk Setup.
Program 13-04 will follow Common or Group Speed Dial numbers.
Caller ID Matching Rule:
The system compares the Caller ID and programmed Speed Dial with these rules below.
Table 2-9 Caller ID Matching Rule
Caller ID Speed Dial Result
2142622000 2142622000 Matched

2142622000 21426220009 Matched
2142622000 214 Matched
2622000 2142622000 Unmatched
2142622000 2622000 Unmatched
The Speed Dial table is searched from the starting number and the first match result
is used.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features

Issue 2.0
UM8000 Mail
Voice Response System (VRS)

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-10-32 Service Code Setup (for System MLT, SLT No Setting

Administrator) Set Private Call Refuse 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Enable/Disable the Private Call Refuse (trunks) digits

which are set in Program 14-01-27.
11-10-33 Service Code Setup (for System MLT No Setting

Administrator) Entry Caller ID Refuse 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Add/Delete the Caller ID to refuse. digits
This operation must be performed from a
Keyset.

Administrator) Set Caller ID Refuse 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Enable/Disable the Caller ID number (trunks) digits

which are set in Program 14-01-27.
13-02-01 Group Speed Dialing Bins 01 ~ 64 No Setting

Designate the starting and ending bin numbers 0 ~ 9999
the system uses for Group Speed Dialing. Starting bin number range:
0 ~ 9990

Ending bin number range:
0 ~ 9999
13-04-01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed Maximum of 24 digits (0 ~ 9, , No Setting
Dialing Data #, @, P, R)
Enter the System and Group Speed Dialing @ = Wait for Answer
numbers and names. Supervision - ISDN trunks only
P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
R = Hook flash - Analog Trunk
Only
13-04-03 Speed Dialing Number and Name Transfer 0 = Not Used 0

Mode 1 = Internal Dial
When the incoming caller ID matches the 2 = Incoming Ring Group (IRG)
number programmed in the speed dial bin, this
setting determines the destination of the call.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
13-04-04 Speed Dialing Number and Name Transfer If Transfer mode is (Refer to No Setting
Destination Number 13-04-03):
When the incoming caller ID matches the 1 = Internal Dial Mode
number programmed in the speed dial bin, this 1 ~ 9, 0, , #, P, R, @
setting determines the destination of the call. (Maximum 24 Characters)
2 = Incoming Ring Group

0 ~ 100 (IRG Number)
P = Pause R = Recall
@ = Additional Digits when
using ISDN functionality
13-04-05 Speed Dialing Number and Name Incoming Ring Pattern 0

Incoming Ring Pattern 0 = Normal Pattern
Define the ring tone for the caller ID routed call. 1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1 ~ 4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern (1 ~ 5)
10 ~ 13 = Tone Patterns (5 ~ 8)
14-01-27 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller ID Refuse 0 = Disable (No) 0

Setup 1 = Internal Dial
Define if the trunk will reject the call by playing 2 = Enable (Yes)
the VRS message based on the Caller ID
information.

Assign function key 86 (Set Private Call 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Refuse) to Enable/Disable trunks which are set 751 by default) Manual for
in Program 14-01-27 to 1. 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
Assign function key 87 (Set Caller ID Refuse) to Function Code) (Service Code
Enable/Disable the Caller ID Refusal (trunks) 752 by default)
which is set in Program 14-01-27 to 1.
20-07-24 Class of Service Options (Administrator 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Level) Set/Cancel Private Call Refuse 1 = On
Enable (1) or Disable (0) an extension user

ability to set or cancel Private Call Refuse.

Level) Set/Cancel Caller ID Refuse 1 = On
Enable/Disable an extension ability to set or

cancel Caller ID Refuse.
40-10-06 Voice Announcement Service Option Set 0 ~ 101 0

VRS Message for Private Call Refuse (VRS (0 = No message)
Msg Private Call) (101 = Fixed message)
Assign the VRS Message number used as
Private Call Refuse. When Fixed message is
set, VRS message guidance is: Service
finished. Disconnect the line, please.

Issue 2.0
The Caller ID Flexible Ringing Flowchart below helps define programming:
Incoming Trunk Call
Caller ID Number 2
exists? No
Yes Go to Chart 2
Search refusing
Speed Dial area PRG 22-16
data exists? Yes
No
PRG 14-01-27: 1
Off And refuse mode is?
On
Search PRG 13-04-01 Play VRS Message

PRG 40-10-07
Data unmatched
Data matched
PRG 13-04-03 Disconnect the call

0 2
Follow PRG 22-02-01 Ring the extension Ring the incoming

number ring group

Issue 2.0
PRG 14-01-27: 1
And refuse mode is? Off
On
Reason of No
Caller ID? Anything Else
Private
PRG 22-18-01
1 2
Play VRS Message

PRG 40-10-07
Ring the extension Disconnect the call Ring the incoming Follow PRG 22-02-01
number ring group
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
Caller ID Memo Display Function
Description
The SV9100 can display up to 28 Characters per line and up to three lines of information for a total of 84
characters (Maximum 28 digits x 3 lines). If needed, the system can be set to use any one of three
available display lines. Additionally, the original CID information can be seen while on the call by
pressing the right cursor button on the phone.
Conditions
In a CCIS network the Memo Display Function is only supported for DID calls directed
across CCIS to a remote system.
Calls forwarded or transferred across CCIS do not support the Memo Display Function.
Memo information cannot be programmed via telephone programming or service access
code, only via Web Pro and PC Pro.
The Memo Display function is only supported on Multiline terminals.
The Memo Display function is only supported for incoming trunk calls with Caller ID
information.
The destination station must be idle for the Memo Display function to work.
The Memo Display function will only search the Common Speed Dial bins, it will not search
Group or Station speed dial bins.
Find the abbreviation area the side of incoming system when trunk incoming via
networking.
When calls are directed to a virtual extension, the virtual extension must be set to ring for
the Memo Display function to work.
Pressing the right Cursor key on the telephone toggles the display between the actual
incoming Caller ID information and the Memo Display settings for that incoming Caller ID
information.
When a call is on hold, pressing the Feature Key and the line key the call resides on
displays the actual incoming Caller ID information.
Default Settings
None
Caller ID Memo Display Function 2-129

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
GCD-4COTB with GPZ-4COTF Daughter Board
GCD-2BRIA with GPZ-2BRIA Daughter Board
GCD-PRTA
Related Features
Park
InMail

2-130 Caller ID Memo Display Function

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
13-01-03 Speed Dialing Option Setup Number of 0 ~ 10000 1000

Common Speed Dialing Bins 0 = No Common Speed Dialing
Designate the bins the system uses for System

Speed Dialing.
Enter the System and Group Speed Dialing @ = Wait for Answer
numbers and names. Supervision - ISDN trunks only
Only
13-04-08 Speed Dialing Number and Name Memo Maximum of 28 characters No Setting
Display 1
This can only be set using Web Pro or PC Pro
and determines what will be displayed on line 1

of the multiline telephone when Program
15-02-58 is set to memo.
Display 2

Display 3

15-02-58 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Caller ID 0

Display Mode of Incoming Trunk 1 = Memo Information
Determines if the incoming CID or the Memo 1/
2/3 setting will be displayed for a matching CID
number.
Operation
None
Caller ID Memo Display Function 2-131

Issue 2.0
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Description
This feature automatically places an outside call on a Call Appearance key when the system is operated
as a hybrid (Multifunction) system. These keys can be assigned on any multiline terminal or the same
key can appear on multiple terminals. This feature allows efficient call handling when numerous CO calls
are received and a limited number of CO line key appearances are available.
Once a Call Appearance (CAP) Key call is set up, the user can handle it like any other trunk call. For
example, the user can place the call on hold, transfer it to a co-worker or send it to a park orbit. An
incoming call is answered on the first available CAP key, beginning with the lowest numbered key. If
keys 1~3 are Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, for example, the first incoming call is answered on key 1. If
key 1 is busy, the next call is answered on key 2. If keys 1 and 2 are busy, the next call is answered on
key 3. If all three keys are busy, additional incoming calls queue for the first available key.
Conditions
A trunk call that is originated or answered at a multiline terminal must appear on a line key.
The line key can be assigned as the Trunk Key, or as a Call Appearance Key. A CAP is
dynamic because it is used for any trunk call. An 8-button multiline terminal can have eight
CAP keys that allow the telephone to process all trunks, eight trunks at a time.
Multiline terminals can be assigned to the same CAP Key. Trunk calls that appear on the
same CAP Key at multiple stations have the same visual appearance of the call (Busy or
Hold).
Any held call left on a CAP key for more than the programmed time recalls to the multiline
terminal where the call was originally put on hold.
When a multiline terminal (other than the one that originally initiated or received a call) is
used to retrieve a held call, the SMDR records a transfer to the multiline terminal where the
call was retrieved.
Only outside lines use a CAP key.
A multiline terminal can have multiple CAP keys assigned to it.
Outside lines reside on the CAP key in the order of lowest to highest line key number on the
station. For instance, when line keys 1, 2 and 3 are CAP keys, the first call resides on line
key 1, the second call resides on line key 2 and third call resides on line key 3.
All Flexible Line keys on a multiline terminal can be assigned as CAP keys in System
Programming.
A conference call involving two outside lines cannot reside on one Call Appearance key.
For Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, trunks must be assigned to trunk group 1 or higher
(Program 14-05-01). Trunk Group 0 means KF (Key Function) mode.
2-132 Call Appearance (CAP) Keys

Issue 2.0
CAP Keys can be programmed from 0001~9999. 0000 assigns the next available CAP
Key.
Trunk Group (02), Virtual Extension (03) and Call Appearance (CAP) Key (08), codes
cannot be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the
additional data required.
If you have both trunk line keys and Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, the line key has priority.
An incoming call rings the trunk line key and when answered, the trunk line keys lights, not
the CAP Key. When you access the trunk for an outgoing call, the Trunk line key lights, not
the Call Appearance (CAP) Key.
CAP keys can only be assigned or used if Program 20-02-23 is set to Original (0).
A system can have only CAP keys or Loops keys.
When SV telephones are installed, CAP key mode must be used. When UX telephones are
installed, Loop key mode must be used.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
SV9100 Terminals only
None
Related Features
Off-Hook Signaling
Secondary Incoming Extension
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys 2-133

Issue 2.0
User Programming Ability
Virtual Extensions

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

752 by default)
20-02-23 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = Original Operation Mode 0

UX5000 Phone Operation Mode (CAP Key)
Selects the Loop Key operation like the 1 = UX5000 Special Operation
UX5000 terminal, or the CAP Key operation like Mode (Loop Key)
the SV9100 terminal.

extension port =
Class 1

Service) Hold/Extended Park 1 = On
Determine whether an extension Class of
Service should allow normal or extended Park

(0 = Normal for Program 24-01-06, 1 =
Extended for Program 24-01-07).
24-01-01 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 90
A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed
it on Hold after this time. This time works with

the Hold Recall Callback Time.
24-01-02 System Options for Hold Hold Recall 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Callback Time
A call that is parked longer than the
programmed time recalls the extension where it
was initially parked.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
24-01-03 System Options for Hold Exclusive Hold 0 ~ 64800 seconds 90

Recall Time
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the

extension that placed it on Hold after this time.

Recall Callback Time
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for
this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on
System Hold.
24-01-05 System Options for Hold Forced Release 0 ~ 64800 seconds 1800
of Held Call
Depending on the setting of Program 14-01-16,
the system disconnects calls on Hold longer
than this time.
24-01-06 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time - 0 ~ 64800 seconds 90
Normal
Set the Park Hold Time. A call that is parked
longer than the programmed time recalls the
extension where it was initially parked.

Refer to Flexible System Numbering on page
2-519 for setting Flexible Timeouts for Class of
Service.
Extended (Recall)
Set the Extended Park Hold Time. A call that is
parked longer than the programmed time

recalls the extension where it was initially
parked.
Operation
To place an outgoing call on hold and retrieve it using a multiline terminal:

1. Go off-hook using the handset and wait for internal dial tone.
- OR -
Press Speaker and wait for internal dial tone.

2. Dial the Trunk Access Code (default: 9).
3. Dial the outside party (the Call Appearance key lights). Begin your conversation.
4. Press Hold (the Call Appearance key flashes).
5. Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys 2-135

Issue 2.0
To receive an incoming call, put it on hold and then retrieve it using a multiline terminal:
1. Receive CO/PBX incoming ring.
2. Go off-hook using the handset, or press Speaker (the Call Appearance key lights). Talk with
outside party.
3. Press Hold (the Call Appearance key flashes).
4. Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.

Issue 2.0
Description
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys are software extensions available on the Basic and Expanded Port Packages. A
Call Arrival Extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring on an individual station or multiple
stations. Call Arrival Keys are busy only when ringing and are not used during talking.
Call Arrival Keys are shared with the Virtual Extensions (VE). In virtual extension mode, the key acts as
a secondary extension. Up to 512 CAR/VE keys are provided.
Conditions
CAR keys and virtual extensions share 512 available ports/extensions.
The 512 available ports/extensions are assigned per extension for CAR key mode or virtual
extension (VE) key mode.
More than one extension can share a CAR key.
An extension can have more than one CAR key assigned.
Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy CAR key.
If multiple CAR/SIE/VE keys are ringing on a station at the same time, the CAR/SIE/VE key
on the lowest Line Key is answered first.
The system can be programmed to blink the page number of a DT300/DT700 DESI-Less
terminal when it receives an incoming call, or switch to the page of the incoming call. Also,
a default page can be defined for the DESI-Less terminal to change to when it goes idle or
when it has answered a call.
DESI-Less screen page switching only applies to idle terminals. If a terminal is not idle, the
screen will not switch if another call comes in until the phone goes idle.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys 2-137

Issue 2.0
None
Related Features
Virtual Extensions

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-01-01 System Numbering Service Code Set the system internal Refer to the
Set system numbering plan. (Intercom) numbering plan. The Programming
numbering plan assigns the first Manual for
and second digits dialed and default values.
affects the digits an extension
user must dial to access other
the site.
11-04-01 Virtual Extension Numbering Dial (maximum of eight digits) Virtual Extension
Assign virtual extension numbers. Port No. 1 ~ 99 =
Virtual Extension
Number
201 ~ 299
Virtual Extension
Port No. 100 ~
512 = No Setting
15-01-01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Maximum of 12 characters STA 101 = Ext
Name 101
Define the extension/virtual extension name. STA 102 = Ext

102, etc.
2-138 Call Arrival (CAR) Keys

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-01-05 Basic Extension Data Setup Restriction for 0 = No 0

Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line 1 = Yes
Enable (1)/Disable (0) supervised dial detection

for an extension.
15-02-07 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Hold 1

Automatic Hold for CO Lines 1 = Disconnect (Cut)
Assign automatic hold (or disconnect) for CO

lines.
15-02-21 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Virtual Extension Key Mode 2
Virtual Extension Access Mode (when idle 0 = DSS
Virtual Extension key pressed) 1 = Outgoing
Determine whether a Virtual Extension/Call 2 = Ignore
Arrival Key (CAR) should function as a DSS
key, a Virtual Extension, or a CAR key. When
DSS (0) is selected, the key functions as a DSS
key to the extension and for incoming calls to
that extension. When Outgoing (1) is selected,
the key functions as a virtual extension and can
be used for incoming and outgoing calls. When
Ignore (2) is selected, the key functions as a
CAR key and can receive incoming calls only.

752 by default)
(03 + ICM = VE or CAR where
ICM is the extension number of
the VE or CAR)
15-08-01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup 0 = Tone Pattern 1 0 = Tone Pattern
When an extension or a virtual extension is 1 = Tone Pattern 2 1
assigned to the function key on the key 2 = Tone Pattern 3
telephone, select the ring tone when receiving a 3 = Tone Pattern 4
call on that key.
4 = Incoming Ring Tone
For Contact Center CAR keys, only tone pattern Extension

1 (entry 0) can be used. The remaining patterns
5 = Tone Pattern 5
are not checked with this feature.
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
15-09-01 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Day Night/Mode: 1 ~ 8 0

Assign the ringing options for an extension Ringing:
Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension 0 = No Ringing
Group Answer Key which is defined in Program 1 = Ring
15-07.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-10-01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order 0 = Tone Pattern 1 Order 1 Pattern
Setup 1 = Tone Pattern 2 0 = Pattern 1
When two or more virtual extensions are set on 2 = Tone Pattern 3 Order 2 Pattern
a function key on the telephone, and the tone 3 = Tone Pattern 4 1 = Pattern 2
pattern by which the sound of each extension Order 3 Pattern
4 = Incoming Extension Ring
differs, the priority of ring sound is set up.
Tone 2 = Pattern 3
5 = Tone Pattern 5 Order 4 Pattern
3 = Pattern 4
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
15-11-01 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Day Night/Mode: 1 ~ 8 0

Assign the delayed ringing options for an Ringing:
extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension 0 = Immediate Ring
Group Answer keys (defined in Program 1 = Delayed Ring
15-09).
15-18-01 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options 0 = Release 0

Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode 1 = Land on the key
Define whether calls to a Virtual Extension Key
land on the Virtual or on the extension / CAP /
CO appearance.
This is assigned for the Virtual Extension Key
not the extension it resides on.
15-18-02 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options 0 = Secondary Extension Name 0

Display Mode When Placing a Call on Virtual 1 = Actual Station Name
Extension Key
Define if calls to or from a Virtual Extension Key

display the Virtual Extension Key name or the
name of the extension it resides on.
20-04-03 System Options for Virtual Extensions 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set for
Delayed Ringing (see Program 15-11) ring the
extension after this time.

extension port =
Class 1

Level) Programmable Function Key 1 = On
Programming (Appearance Level)

program the Appearance function keys using
Service Code 752.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-10-08 Class of Service Options (Answer Service) 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Virtual Extension Off-Hook Answer 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension ability to answer an
incoming call on a Call Arrival (CAR)/

Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the handset.

Service) Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension 1 = On
If set to 1, a busy extension can be called, while
someone is talking on a virtual extension key.

Program 20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be set to
off for this option to work.
21-01-15 System Options for Outgoing Calls 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line (Toll 1 = Enable (On)
Restriction)
Enable/Disable the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature.
23-04-01 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual 0 ~ 64 00

Extensions (0 or 00 = Dont Care)
When an extension has a virtual extension
assigned to a Programmable Function Key,
program this option to determine the priority for
automatically answering the ringing calls when
the handset is lifted. If 0 or 00 is selected, when
the user lifts the handset, the user answers a
ringing call from any group.
Operation
To answer a call ringing a Call Arrival (CAR) Key:

1. Press the flashing Call Arrival (CAR) Key.
To place a call to a Call Arrival (CAR) Key:

1. Lift the handset, or press Speaker.
2. Dial the CAR key extension, or press the Call Arrival (CAR) Key.
The operation depends on the setting in Program 15-02-21.
To program a Call Arrival (CAR) Key on a telephone:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 752.
3. Press the key you want to program.
4. Dial 03.

Issue 2.0
5. Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key.
6. Press Hold once for Immediate Ring
To set for Delayed Ring, skip to Step 8.
7. Dial the Mode number in which the key rings.

1 = Day 1 5 = Day 2
2 = Night 1 6 = Night 2
3 = Midnight 1 7 = Midnight 2
4 = Rest 1 8 = Rest 2
8. Press Hold to set up Delayed Ring.
- OR -
Skip to Step 10.

9. Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings.
1 = Day 1 5 = Day 2
2 = Night 1 6 = Night 2
3 = Midnight 1 7 = Midnight 2
4 = Rest 1 8 = Rest 2
10. Press Speaker.

Issue 2.0
Call Duration Timer
Description
Call Duration Timer lets a multiline terminal with an LCD time their trunk calls on the telephone display.
This helps users that must keep track of their time on the telephone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call
Time begins as soon as the user answers the call.
Conditions
The Call Timer starts over each time the call is retrieved from Hold or Park.
The Call Duration Timer (Program 20-13-36) is not displayed for inbound Contact Center
calls.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Call Duration Timer 2-143

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1

Service) Incoming Time Display 1 = On
If this option is set to 1, the Incoming Call Time
is displayed on the multiline terminals LCD
while the telephone is ringing.
Caller ID should be enabled for this feature in
Program 20-09-06 to function.

Service) Call Duration Timer Display 1 = On
Turn Off or On a Call Timer for the extension.
21-01-03 System Options for Outgoing calls Trunk 0 ~ 64800 seconds 5

The system waits for this time to expire before

starting the Call Timer.
Operation
To time your trunk calls:

1. Place a trunk call.
The timer starts automatically.
2-144 Call Duration Timer

Issue 2.0
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension or an off-premise
number. Call Forwarding ensures that the users calls are covered when they are away from their work
area. The types of Call Forwarding are:
Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered
Calls to the extension forward when busy or unanswered.
Call Forwarding Centrex
When using PBX/Centrex trunks, calls to the extension perform a Centrex transfer using
Immediate, Busy and No Answer Forwarding.
Call Forwarding Immediate
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and only the destination rings.
Call Forwarding with both Ringing
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and both the destination and the forwarded
extension ring (not for Voice Mail).
Call Forwarding when Unanswered
Calls forward only if they are unanswered (Ring No Answer).
Call Forwarding Follow Me
Refer to Call Forwarding with Follow Me on page 2-159 for more information.
Live Monitor
Allows the extension to emulate an answering machine. Refer to InMail System Guide for more
information.
Call Forwarding reroutes calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from another extension.
Call Forwarding can also be split, allowing internal and external calls to forward to different destinations.
The extension user can enable Call Forwarding from their telephone. An extension user can also set the
forwarding for another extension by using Call Forward for any Extension to Destination. To redirect
calls while a user is at another telephone, use Call Forwarding with Follow Me. A periodic VRS
announcement can remind users that their calls are forwarded.
Conditions
Virtual Extensions can be set to Call Forward. Program 15-02-21 must be set to a 1 to
allow the Virtual Extension to place outgoing calls.
If an extension in a call forward chain has Call Forward with Both Ring, calls do not
continue routing to other extensions in the chain.
If an extension in a call forward chain has Call Forward with Follow Me set, calls do not
continue routing to other extensions in the chain.
Call Forwarding 2-145

Issue 2.0
If the extension has Call Forward-Both Ring set to another extension, it will only continue to
forward if the Both ring location is forwarded (B/NA or NA) to VM and no where else.
Call Forwards can be chained allowing calls to forward from one extension to the next. Up
to 32 extensions can be linked in a call forward chain.
Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from
receiving Department Pilot Calls.
Ring Groups do not follow Call Forwarding.
Call Forward Split does not allow for Call Forward with Follow Me.
If Call Forwarding off premise, a trunk access code must be included in the forwarding
number.
Call Forward with Follow Me allows for a single station to set follow me for multiple stations.
When canceling Call Forward with Follow Me, the use must specify the station to cancel or
cancel all.
The telephone must be idle to enable call forwarding with a Programmable Function Key, or
receiving dial tone to enable call forwarding with a service code.
Call Forward for any Extension to Destination cannot be set or canceled from a Virtual
Extension.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override allows for Overriding a Call Forwarding or DND
setting at another extension.
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is
ringing their telephone.
An extension user can forward their calls to a Department number.
A DSS key indicates a Call Forwarding indication for extensions.
When DND All and Call Forward are set on the same telephone, call forwarding works. If
Busy and No Answer Forwarding are set to different locations, it follows the Busy
forwarding.
Function keys simplify Call Forwarding operation.
If an extension Class of Service denies Call Forwarding (Program 20-11-01~Program
20-11-05, off), the extension can still dial the service code to Set/Cancel Call Forwarding,
but it cannot set any data.
Call Forward Both Ring Split does not work to an off-premise destination.
If an IP telephone has forwarding set and then loses connection, it follows the forwarding.
If an IP phone has Busy and No Answer Forwarding set to different locations and it loses
connection, it follows the Busy forwarding location.
2-146 Call Forwarding

Issue 2.0
When the following are done in sequence,

Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer is set to extension
Call Forwarding Immediate is set on extension
Call Forwarding Immediate is cancelled on extension
then,
Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer is set back on the extension.
Call Forwarding No Answer is set to extension
then,
all Call Forwarding is cancelled.
Any settings in Programs 24-09-04 and 24-09-05, copies the information to Programs 24-09-02
and 24-09-03 and is changed to Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer.
Call Forwarding Busy is set to extension
then,
Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer is set back on the extension.
The @ and P characters are not supported in the call forward destination. These
characters are only supported on a one touch/DSS key and in speed dial bins.
If the terminal is configured for Call Forward Both Ring and DND is activated, the calling
station will receive a busy tone. Call Forward Both Ring is not followed.
If Program 20-11-30 is set to 0 (Off), the Call FWD setting is displayed on the terminal LCD
screen when idle.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals and Virtual Extensions

Issue 2.0
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Department Calling
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Do Not Disturb

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-10-06 Service Code Setup (for System MLT 733

Administrator) Setting the Automatic 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Transfer for Each Trunk Line digits
Set the service code for setting automatic
transfer for each trunk line.

Administrator) Canceling the Automatic 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code for canceling automatic

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Administrator) Setting the Destination for 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Automatic Trunk Transfer digits
Set the service code for setting the destination
for automatic trunk transfer.

Administrator) Off-Premise Call Forward 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
by Door Box digits

Operation) Call Forward All 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code for setting call forwarding digits

all calls.

Operation) Call Forward Busy 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight

for busy calls.

Operation) Call Forward No Answer 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight

for no answer.

Operation) Call Forward Busy/No 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Answer digits
Set the service code for setting call forwarding
for busy or no answer.

Operation) Call Forward Both Ring 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight


Operation) Call Forwarding Follow Me 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight

for follow me.

Operation) Do Not Disturb 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight

for Do Not Disturb.
11-11-45 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry MLT, SLT No Setting

Operation) Set/Cancel Call Forward All 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
(Split) digits

Set or Cancel the call forward all split.

Operation) Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
(Split) digits

Set or Cancel the call forward busy split.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Set/Cancel Call Forward No 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Answer (Split) digits

Set or Cancel the call forward no answer split.

Operation) Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy/ 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
No Answer (Split) digits
Set or Cancel the call forward busy or no
answer split.

Operation) Set/Cancel Call Forward Both 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Ring (Split) digits
Set or Cancel the call forward the both ring
split.

Destination (No Split) digits
Set or Cancel the call forward all destination
with no split.

Set or Cancel the call forward busy destination
with no split.

Answer Destination (No Split) digits
Set or Cancel the call forward no answer
destination with no split.

Operation) Call Forward Busy No Answer 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set or Cancel the call forward busy or no
answer destination with no split.

Operation) Call forward with Personal 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Greeting digits
with Personal Greeting.
Bypass Call 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes which are used digits

for bypass calls.
11-16-06 Single Digit Service Code Setup DND/Call 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit No Setting
Forward Override Bypass
Customize the one-digit Service Codes used

when a busy or ring back signal is heard.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1
20-09-01 Class of Service Options (Incoming Call 0 = Off COS 1 ~15 = 1

E&M Override
Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive a
caller.

Turn Off or On an extension ability to have calls
queued if a call rings the extension when it is
busy.

Service) Call Forward All 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set

Call Forward Immediate.

Service) Call Forward When Busy 1 = On

Call Forwarding when Busy.

Service) Call Forwarding When 1 = On
Unanswered
Call Forwarding when Unanswered.

Service) Call Forwarding (Both Ringing) 1 = On

Call Forwarding with Both Ringing.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Call Forwarding with Follow Me 1 = On

Call Forward with Follow Me.

Service) CAR/VE Call Forward Set/Cancel 1 = On
Turn Off or On the ability to set and cancel Call

Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual Extension.
20-11-30 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer 0 = Off 1

Service) Disable Call FWD Indication on 1 = On
LCD
When set to On (1), Call FWD setting is not
shown on the terminal LCD.

Service) Intercom Off-Hook Signaling 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension to send off-hook
Signals.

This setting functions with Programs 20-09-07
and 20-13-06 disabled.

Allow a busy extension user to manually (0) or
automatically (1) receive off-hook signals.
An example of an off-hook signal is the tone
heard when receiving a second call.
24-02-03 System Options for Transfer Delayed Call 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Forwarding Time
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding interval. For
an unanswered call, Call Forward No Answer
occurs after this interval.
24-09-01 Call Forward Split Settings Call 0 = No Call Forwarding 0

Forwarding Type: 1 = Call Forward Both
Assign Call Forwarding Type and the 2 = Call Forward No Answer 3 =
destination numbers for each extension/virtual Call Forward All
extension. 4 = Call Forward Busy No
Answer
5 = Call Forward Busy
24-09-02 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Maximum of 24 digits (0 ~ 9, , No Setting

Forwarding Destination for Both Ring, All #, @, P, R)
Call, No Answer @ = Wait for Answer
Assign CO Call Forwarding Destination for ring, Supervision - ISDN trunks only
all call and no answer. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
24-09-03 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Maximum of 24 digits (0 ~ 9, , No Setting
Forwarding Destination for Both ring, All #, @, P, R)
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding Destination Supervision - ISDN trunks only
for ring, all call and no answer. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only

Forwarding Busy Destination #, @, P, R)
Assign CO Call Forwarding for busy @ = Wait for Answer
destinations. Supervision - ISDN trunks only
Only
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding for busy @ = Wait for Answer
Only
24-09-06 Call Forward Split Settings Call Maximum of 24 digits (0 ~ 9, , No Setting

Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for All #, @, P, R)
Assign Call Forwarding for CTX/PBX all call, no Supervision - ISDN trunks only
answer destinations. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only

Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for #, @, P, R)
Busy @ = Wait for Answer
Assign Call Forwarding destinations for busy Supervision - ISDN trunks only
CTX/PBX calls. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only
Operation
To set Call Forward Immediate at a forwarding station:

2. Dial the Call Forward Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function Keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 10)

Issue 2.0
3. Dial 1 (Set).
4. Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5. Press Speaker or hang up.
Refer to Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Park and Page on page 2-1647.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key lights.
To cancel Call Forward Immediate at a forwarding station:

- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off.
To set Call Forward Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:

2. Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
- OR -
3. Dial 1 (Set).
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns on.
To cancel Call Forward Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:

- OR -

Issue 2.0
3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
To set Call Forward Both Ring at a forwarding station:

2. Dial the Call Forward Both Ring Service Code (default: 745).
- OR -
3. Dial 1 (Set).
4. Dial the destination extension number.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns on.
To cancel Call Forward Both Ring at a forwarding station:

2. Dial the Call Forward Both Ring Service Code (default: 745).
- OR -
(Program 15-07-01, 14 or SC 751 Key Code 14)
3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
To set Call Forward Follow Me from the destination station:

2. Dial the Call Forward Follow Me Service Code (default: 746).
- OR -
3. Dial 1 (Set).
4. Dial the station number to be forwarded and then the destination number.

Issue 2.0

The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key goes on.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from the destination station:

2. Dial the Call Forward Follow Me Service Code (default: 746).
- OR -
3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
4. Dial the station number, which is forwarded, or 0 to cancel all extensions.
To set Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination:

2. Dial the Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code (Default: 790).
3. Dial 1 (Set).
4. Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
To cancel Call Forward Immediate for any Extension:

2. Dial the Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default: 790).
3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
4. Dial the station number which is forwarded.
To set Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination:

2. Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default:
793).
3. Dial 1 (Set).

Issue 2.0
4. Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
To cancel Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination:

2. Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default:
793).
3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
4. Dial the station number, which is forwarded.
To set Call Forward Immediate using a Virtual Extension:

1. Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
3. Dial 1 (Set).
To cancel Call Forward Immediate at a forwarding station:

3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
To set Call Forward Busy/No Answer using a Virtual Extension:

2. Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer Service Code (Default: 744).
3. Dial 1 (Set).

Issue 2.0
To cancel Call Forward Busy/No Answer using a Virtual Extension:

3. Dial 0 (Cancel).

Issue 2.0
Description
While at a co-workers desk, a user can have Call Forwarding with Follow Me redirect their calls to the
co-workers extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-workers desk longer than
expected. To prevent losing important calls, the employee can activate Call Forwarding with Follow Me
from the co-workers telephone.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To reroute calls from the
initiating (forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding.
Conditions
Multiple Stations can set Call Forward Follow Me to one station.
Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming. DIL calls
ring an idle Department Group member, then follow Program 22-08 programming then
Program 22-04 programming.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Do Not Disturb
Call Forwarding with Follow Me 2-159

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign the service code of Call Forward Follow digits

Me.

752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1


Operation
To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a multiline terminal:

1. At a multiline terminal, other than your own, press Speaker and dial Service Code (746, Program
11-11-07).
- OR -
Press the Call Forward Follow Me key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: Code 15).
2. Dial 1 to set.
2-160 Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Issue 2.0
3. Dial the Extension to forward.

The multiline terminal with display indicates on the display of the telephone which Call Forward
Follow Me is set. Also, the Programmed Follow Me Flexible Line Key flashes (if assigned) when
Follow Me is set.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own multiline terminal:

1. At your multiline terminal, press Speaker and dial Service Code (746, Program 11-11-07).
- OR -
Press the Call Forward Follow Me key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: Code 15).
2. Dial 0 to cancel.
3. Dial 0 (Cancel All Forward Follow Me).
- OR -
Dial the extension number with Follow Me set.
To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a single line telephone:

1. At a single line telephone, other than your own, lift the handset and dial the Service Code (746
Program 11-11-07).
2. Dial 1 to set.
3. Dial the extension to forward.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own single line telephone:
1. At your single line telephone, lift the handset and dial Service Code (746, Program 11-11-07).
3. Dial 0 (Cancel All Forward Follow Me).
- OR -
Dial the extension number with Follow Me set.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me 2-161

Issue 2.0
Description
The Call Forwarding Centrex feature allows a station to forward an incoming PBX/Centrex CO call to
an outside location using the same PBX/Centrex CO line to free the line for additional use.
Call Forwarding Centrex supports the following:

Call Forward Immediate
Call Forward Busy
Call Forward No Answer
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
Conditions
Call Forwarding Centrex calls transferred from another station are forwarded when the
transferred Trunk is assigned as PBX in Program 14-04-01.
The following incoming calls follow Call Forwarding Centrex when the incoming trunk is a
PBX/Centrex trunk:
DIL
Station Transfer
Automated Attendant Transfer
DISA Calls
Call Forwarding Centrex is not supported for Call Forward Both Ring Split.
A maximum of 24 digits can be assigned in the destination for Call Forwarding Centrex.
When a trunk is set to CTX/PBX, and is set for Call Forwarding Centrex to an incorrect
number, the call recalls and follow CO incoming ringing (i.e., DIL, Normal Ring Group
Programming).
When Call Forwarding Centrex is set and all trunks are changed in Program 14-04-01
from PBX to Trunk, Call Forward is cleared from memory.
When DND and any Call Forwarding Centrex is set, the call forwards immediately.
Call Forwarding Centrex does not follow the Code Restriction of the stations.
Default Settings
Disabled
2-162 Call Forwarding Centrex

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
PBX/Centrex CO line
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Door Box
Do Not Disturb
PBX Compatibility
Virtual Extensions

Call Forwarding Centrex 2-163

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Allocate the circuits on the GCD-CP10 ETUs 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
Program 14-01-13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Circuit/Resource
Loop Supervision Enable (1) loop supervision 09 ~ 32 = 2
for each trunk that should be able to use Call (Trunks)
Forwarding Centrex. Circuit/Resource
33 ~ 144 = 0
(Common)
When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available

(Split) digits

Assign the Call Forward All Split Service Code.

(Split) digits
Assign the Call Forward Busy Split Service
Code.

Assign the Call Forward No Answer Split
Service Code.

Assign the Call Forward Busy No Answer Split
Service Code.

Enable/Disable loop supervision for the trunk.
14-04-01 Behind PBX Setup 0 = Stand Alone (Trunk) 0

Indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX 1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
(1) or not (0). There is one item for each Night 2 = Not Used

Service Mode. 3 = CTX assume 9

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

E&M Override
caller.

busy.

Turn Off or On an extension ability to send
off-hook signals.


24-02-13 System Options for Transfer Hook Flash 0 ~ 64800 seconds 2

Sending Timer When the System Answers
Automatically
Set the time the system waits before sending

the hookflash for the Centrex Transfer after
answering the call.

Assign Call Forwarding Type and the Supervision - ISDN trunks only
destination numbers for CTX/PBX all call, no P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
answer. R = Hook flash - Analog Trunk
Only
Call Forwarding Centrex 2-165

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign Call Forwarding Type and the Supervision - ISDN trunks only
destination numbers for CTX/PBX busy calls. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only
Operation
To activate Call Forwarding Centrex:

1. At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.

2. Dial the Call Forwarding Split Service Code (default not assigned).
3. Dial 3 (CTX/PBX).
4. Dial 1 (Set).
5. Dial number to Centrex Forward to.
6. Hang up.
To cancel Call Forwarding Centrex:

- OR -

2. Dial the Call Forward Split Service Code (default not assigned).
3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
4. Dial 3 (CTX/PBX) or 0 (All).

Issue 2.0
Description
Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. By
enabling Call Forward, Off-Premise, the user can stay in touch by having the system forward their calls
while they are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be any telephone number the user
enters, such as a mobile phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can
route the off-site telephone number over a specific trunk or through a trunk group, Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) or Trunk Group Routing.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:
Ringing intercom calls from co-workers extensions
Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail 1
Direct Inward Lines 1
DISA, DID and Tie Line calls to the forwarded extension 1
Transferred calls 1
Off-Premise Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Arrival (CAR) Keys, Call Arrival (CAR) Keys, or Ring
Group calls (i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Program 22-04 and
Program 22-05).
Conditions
If a call that forwards Off-Premise goes out on a trunk assigned as TIE or DID, and the
called party does not answer before the time in Program 34-07-05, the call recalls to the
station that performed the transfer.
Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or
ground start trunks.
The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot exceed 24
digits.
If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10~17), the DND key
flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.
DID calls to an extension with Off-Premise Call Forwarding set do not recall if there is no
answer.
Door Boxes must be programmed for the calls to be transferred Off-Premise.
1. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect
supervision enabled (refer to the Programming section).
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise 2-167

Issue 2.0
The outside number Call Forwarding dials can be only a number normally allowed by the
forwarded extension Toll Restriction.
If Fixed Messaging for VRS is enabled in Program 40-10-01, a caller to an extension
forwarded Off-Premise will hear "Please hold on, your call is being rerouted."
When a station is in DND and any Call Forwarding Off Premise is set, the call forwards
immediately.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise is not supported when using Alternate Trunk Group Routing.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Code Restriction
Door Box
Do Not Disturb
Virtual Extensions
2-168 Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Forwarding Off-Premise. Circuit/Resource
33 ~ 144 = 0
(Common)
When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available
11-07-01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Dial Dial (maximum of eight digits) No Setting
Assign pilot numbers to each Department
Group set up.

Assign the Call Forward All Service Code. digits

Assign the Call Forward Busy Service Code. digits

Assign the Call Forward No Answer Service digits

Code.

Answer digits
Assign the Call Forward Busy No Answer
Service Code.

Assign the Call Forward Both Ring Service digits

Code.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(Split) digits


(Split) digits
Code.

Service Code.

Service Code.

Ring (Split) digits
Assign the Call Forward Both Ring Split Service
Code.

Assign the Call Forward All for any Extension
Service Code.

Assign the Call Forward Busy for any Extension
Service Code.

Assign the Call Forward No Answer for any
Extension Service Code.

No Answer Destination (No Split) digits
Assign the Call Forward Busy No Answer for
any Extension Service Code.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

E&M Override
caller.

is busy.

Service) Call Forwarding Off-Premise 1 = On
(External Call Forwarding)
Turn Off or On setting up Call Forwarding
Off-Premise at the extension.

off-hook Signals.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-03-01 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks Day Night/Mode: 1 ~ 8 1

Used to set the Trunk Route Table for 0 ~ 100
Automatic External Call Forward. (0 = No setting)
24-02-07 System Options for Transfer Trunk-to- 0 ~ 64800 seconds 1800

Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone
Timer starts when a trunk begins talking with
another trunk (for example: Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer, outgoing from trunk, Tandem
Trunking). When this time expires, a warning
tone is heard.
24-09-01 Call Forward Split Settings Call 0 = No Call Forwarding 0

Forwarding Type 1 = Call Forward Both
Assign Call Forwarding Type and destination 2 = Call Forward No Answer
numbers for each extension/virtual extension. 3 = Call Forward All
4 = Call Forward Busy No
Answer

Assign CO Call Forwarding destination Supervision - ISDN trunks only
numbers for both ring, all call and no answer. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only
Forwarding Destination for both ring, All #, @, P, R)
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding destination Supervision - ISDN trunks only
numbers for both ring, all call and no answer. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only

Assign CO Call Forwarding busy destination @ = Wait for Answer
numbers. Supervision - ISDN trunks only
Only
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding busy @ = Wait for Answer
destination numbers. Supervision - ISDN trunks only
Only

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign Call Forwarding destination numbers for Supervision - ISDN trunks only
CTX/PBX for all call and no answer. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only

Assign Call Forwarding destination numbers for Supervision - ISDN trunks only
CTX/PBX for busy. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only
25-07-07 System Timers for VRS/DISA Long 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3600

Conversation Warning Tone Time
Determine the time a DISA caller or any
Trunk-to-Trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)

conversation can talk before the Long
Conversation tone is heard.

Conversation Disconnect Time
Determine how long the system waits before
disconnecting a DISA or any trunk-to-trunk

(such as Tandem Trunking) call after the Long
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding Normal (0) Trunks:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Transfer for each Trunk Line digits
Customize the service code to be used to set
the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature.

Transfer for each Trunk Line digits
Customize the service code to be used to
cancel the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature.


the destination for the Automatic Trunk
Forwarding feature.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
13-01-01 Speed Dialing Option Setup Speed Dialing 0 = Trunk Outgoing Mode 0
Auto Outgoing Call Mode 1 = Intercom Outgoing Mode
Determine if dialing an Speed Dialing number
will dial an outside number (seizing a trunk as
assigned in Program 13-05) or an Intercom
number (0 = Trunk Dialing Mode, 1 = Extension
Dialing Mode).
Enter the Common and Group Speed Dialing @ = Wait for Answer
numbers and names which are to be used for Supervision - ISDN trunks only
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only
14-01-26 Basic Trunk Data Setup Automatic Trunk- 0 = Normal Transfer (Normal) 0
to-Trunk Transfer Mode 1 = Step Transfer (Step)
Enable (1)/Disable (0) each trunk ability to use

Step Transfer.

extension port =
Class 1

Level) Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to- 1 = On
Trunk Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use
the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service codes.
22-02-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Incoming Type Incoming Type for Day/Night 0
There is one item for each Mode. When using 0 = Normal
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding the trunks must be 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
set for Normal (0). VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
24-02-11 System Options for Transfer No Answer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Step Transfer
Assign the amount of time each transfer
destination rings before step transfer is
performed.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
24-02-12 System Options for Transfer No Answer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Define the time that elapses before the
automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is
performed.
24-04-01 Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target 0 ~ 9999 9999

Setup
Assign the Speed Dialing number bin
(0 ~ 9999) to a trunk and the mode which

should be used as the destination of the
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding DID (3) Trunk Forwarding by Department Groups:
Refer to Department Calling on page 2-358 for additional Department Group programming.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Assign pilot numbers to the Extension
(Department) Groups you set up in Program

16-02.

Operation) Automatic Transfer Setup for 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Each Extension Group digits

the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature for a
Department Group.

Operation) Automatic Transfer 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Cancellation for Each Extension Group digits
Customize the service code to be used to

cancel the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature
for a Department Group.

Operation) Destination of Automatic 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Transfer Each Extension Group digits

the destination for the Automatic Trunk
Forwarding feature for a Department Group.
13-01-01 Speed Dialing Function Setup Speed 0 = Trunk Outgoing Mode 0

Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode 1 = Intercom Outgoing Mode
Determine if dialing an Speed Dialing number
will dial an outside number (seizing a trunk as
assigned in Program 13-05) or an Intercom
number (0 = Trunk Dialing Mode, 1 = Extension
Dialing Mode).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Enter the Common and Group Speed Dialing @ = Wait for Answer
numbers and names which are to be used for Supervision - ISDN trunks only
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only
14-01-04 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Gain 1 ~ 57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 32 (0 dB)
Level for Conference and Transfer Calls 0.5dB intervals)
CODEC gain set at 0 dB [Program 14-01-04 =
32 (CODEC Gain Type 2)] can be used to set

the transmit CODEC gain type for multiline
Conference or transferred calls.
14-01-05 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Gain 1 ~ 57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 16 (-8 dB)
CODEC gain set at 0 dB [Program 14-01-04 =
32 (CODEC Gain Type 2)] can be used to set

the transmit CODEC gain type for multiline
Conference or transferred calls.
14-06-01 Trunk Group Routing Priority Order 0 = Not Set Refer to the
Number 1 ~ 100 = Trunk group No. Programming
Set the priority order number 1 ~ 4. 1001 ~ 1100 = 1000 + Route Manual for
Table No. default values.

Assign an Automatic Forwarding at Department 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Group key (58) or a Delayed Forwarding at 751 by default) Manual for
Department Group key (59) for an extension 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
user. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
16-02-01 Department Group Assignment for Department Groups 1 ~ 64 Default = 1

Extensions Priority 1 ~ 9999 extensions in
Set up the Department Group called by the pilot Department
number and the extension priority when a group Group 1 with
is called. priority in port
Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23-02. order:
Port 1 priority = 1
Port 256 priority
= 256

extension port =
Class 1

Service) Department Group Trunk-to- 1 = On
Trunk Transfer (Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turn On or Off an extension in a Department
Group ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
24-05-01 Department Group Transfer Target Setup 0 ~ 9999 9999

Assign the Speed Dialing number bin to be
used as the destination of the Department

Group Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding DID (3) Trunk Forwarding Using DID Translation Table:
Refer to Direct Inward Dialing (DID) on page 2-390 for additional DID programming.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-11-05 DID Translation Table Number Conversion 0 = No Setting 0

Transfer Destination Number 1 1 ~ 1 00 = Incoming Group
For each DID Translation Table entry 101 = (Not Used)
(1 ~ 4000), specify the first and second Transfer 102 = In-Skin/External Voice
Destinations if the callers receives a busy or no Mail or InMail
answer (action defined in Program 22-11-04).
201 ~ 264 = Extension Group
If the Transfer Destinations are busy or receive
400 = Valid Extension Number

no answer, those calls are transferred to the final
transfer destination (Program 22-10). 401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = DISA/VRS
Message
1000 ~ 1999 = Speed Dial
Number (000 ~ 999)


transfer destination (Program 22-10). 401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = DISA/VRS
Message
1000 ~ 1999 = Speed Dial
Number (000 ~ 999)
Operation
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise non-split:

- OR -

Issue 2.0
2. Dial the Call Forwarding Service Code.

- OR -
At a multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys (Program
15-07-01, Program 15-07-10~Program 15-07-15 or SC 751 Key Code 10~15).
3. Dial 1 (Set).
4. Dial the Trunk Access Code (default: 9) + Number (9+2142622000).
Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 704 + Line Group (1~9, 01~99 or 001~100) or
#9 + Line number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5).
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function key flashes.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise non-split:

- OR -

2. Dial the Call Forward Access Code (default not assigned).
3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise Split:

- OR -

2. Dial the Call Forwarding Service Code.
3. Dial 1 (Set).
4. Dial 1 (Internal) or 0 (External).
5. Dial Trunk Access Code (default: 9) + number (9 + 2142622000).
Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 704 + Line Group (1~9, 01~99 or 001~100) or
#9 + Line number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5).
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise Split:

- OR -
2. At a single line telephone, lift the handset.

3. Dial the Call Forward Access Code (default not assigned).

Issue 2.0
4. Dial 0 (Cancel).
If Internal and External are set both are canceled.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding for Door Boxes
These operations are performed at the Door Box Ringing Extension only.
NOTE
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:
This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks.

NOTE
1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker + dial SC 722.

- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press Call Forward (Device) key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751,
code 54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + dial 722.

2. Dial the Door Box number (1~4).
3. Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded.
4. Press Speaker (or hang up at the single line telephone) to hang up.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:

- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press Call Forward (Device) key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751,
code 54).
- OR -

2. Dial 0 (Cancel).
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
Set the Destination and Forward the Line:

2. Dial 735.

Issue 2.0
3. Dial trunk port number (001~400) to be defined.

4. Select the mode (1~8) to be defined.
5. Enter the telephone number, which is the destination of the forwarded trunk.
The number is stored in the Speed Dial bin number assigned in Program 24-04-01. This entry
overwrites any existing number defined in the bin.
6. Press Hold to accept the entry.
7. Repeat from Step 3 to define another mode entry or press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel the Line Forwarding:

2. Dial 735.
3. Dial trunk port number (001~400) to be defined.
4. Select the mode (1~8) to be defined.
5. Press the Exit key.
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Step Transfer) (follows the predefined destination in

Program 24-04-01) Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
The Speed Dial bin must be defined in Program 13-04-01 for the line to forward.
NOTE

2. Dial 733.
3. Dial trunk port number to be used (001~400).
Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding:

2. Dial 734.
3. Dial trunk port number to be used (001~400).
Department Group Line Forwarding
Method 1:
Set the Destination and Forward the Line:

Issue 2.0
2. Dial 604.
3. Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4. Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
5. Enter the telephone number, which is the destination of the forwarded trunk.
The number is stored in the Speed Dial bin number assigned in Program 24-04-01. This entry
overwrites any existing number defined in the bin.
6. Press Hold to accept the entry.
7. Repeat from Step 3 to define another time mode entry or press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel the Line Forwarding:

2. Dial 604.
4. Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
Method 2 (follows the pre-defined destination in Program 24-05-01)

Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
The Speed Dial bin must be defined in Program 13-04-01 for the line to forward.
NOTE

2. Dial 602.
Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding:

2. Dial 603.

Issue 2.0
Description
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension. This is helpful,
for example, to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through.
Conditions
None
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features

2-182 Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Customize the Service Code which is to be digits

used for Call Forwarding/DND Override.
Customize the 1-digit Service Code used for

DND/Call Forward Override.

752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

Service) Call Forward/DND Override 1 = On
(Bypass Call)
Turn On or Off the ability to use Call
Forwarding/DND Override.
Operation
To override an extension Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb:

1. Call the forwarded or DND extension.
2. Press the Override key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 37).
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override 2-183

Issue 2.0
Call Monitoring
Description
Call Monitoring allows selected multiline terminal users to monitor another users conversation without
participating. A programmable audible alert tone can be sent to that station user. Without the audible
alert (silent monitor), no indication is provided to either the monitored station or the outside party.
telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with transmission,
CAUTION may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior
to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and
state laws require some form of notification to all parties to a telephone conversation, such as using a
beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone
conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the telephone conversation. Some of these laws
incorporate strict penalties.
Call Monitoring with Coaching Ability
Call Monitoring with Coaching Ability allows the transmit path to be opened only to the monitored station,
to provide the Coaching ability for the person that is performing the Call Monitoring. Press the MIC key,
or dial Feature + 1 to toggle the Coaching ability on and off.
Conditions
An extension set as an operator in Program 20-17-01 cannot be monitored using the
Contact Center Call Monitor (15 Feature key) Enhancement.
While using the Contact Center Call Monitor (15 Feature key) Enhancement, if the
monitored extension places the call on hold or transfers the call monitoring is stopped.
The Contact Center Call Monitoring (15 Feature key) Enhancement is supported on trunk
calls and is not supported on internal calls.
If an extensions class of service has Program 20-13-06 or Program 20-09-07 enabled, the
Contact Center Call Monitoring (15 Feature key) Enhancement does not work.
No alert tone is provided to callers when using the Contact Center Call Monitor (15
Feature key) Enhancement feature.
Speech path is not supported for the Contact Center Call Monitor (15 Feature key)
Enhancement feature even when Program 20-13-10 is enabled.
A maximum of 32 extensions can be monitored using the Contact Center Call Monitor (15
Feature key) Enhancement feature.
Call Monitoring is allowed for internal calls.
An extension user cannot Monitor an Intercom call if one of the Intercom callers is using
Hands-free Answerback. Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker.
2-184 Call Monitoring

Issue 2.0
An extension user can monitor a conference call.

With Program 20-13-10 set to 0, a call, which has been barged into, can be placed on hold
by the originator of the outside call. Both the outside caller and the extension, which is
monitoring the call, are placed on hold.
The handset and microphone are muted during Call Monitoring.
Live Record does not work for Call Monitor calls.
While being monitored, an extension cannot receive Voice Over.
When a monitored extension places a call on hold, Call Monitor is automatically finished.
With Program 20-13-10 set to 1, a call which is being Monitored can be placed on park by
the originator of the outside call, but only the outside caller is placed in park. The extension
which is monitoring the call is dropped.
When Program 20-13-10 is set to 0 (OFF), coaching is not permitted. When Program
20-13-10 is set to 1 (On), Program 20-13-45 takes effect.
When Silent Monitor Mode is used, MIC or Feature + 1 can be used to activate speech path
to the internal and external parties.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Barge-In
Conference
Hold
Intercom
Park
Call Monitoring 2-185

Issue 2.0
InMail

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Barge-In 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Determine what the service code should be for digits

11-16-02 Single Digit Service Code Setup Barge-In 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit No Setting
Customize the one-digit Service Codes used for
Barge-In.

752 by default)
20-02-27 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = Off (Contact Center Mode) 0
Contact Center Monitor for Business Mode 1 = On (Business Mode)
Select whether or not Contact Center Call
Monitor provided in the Contact Center Mode
works in normal business mode.

extension port =
Class 1

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

busy.
This setting must be Disabled (0) for the Call
Monitoring Enhancement to function.

Enable the extension Barge-In for Speech

mode or Monitor mode (i.e., Barge-In initiator).



Barge-In at the receiving extension
(i.e., Barge-In receive).

This setting must be Enabled (1) for the Contact
Center Call Monitoring Enhancement to
function.

Tone)


Allow (1)/Deny (0) the extension user ability to
conversation.
20-13-45 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Enable COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) MIC Key Mode While Call 1 = Disable
Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in Call
Monitoring Mode determines if the monitored
parties receives the barge in alert tone when
Coaching Mode is enabled.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-17-01 Operator Extension Operators Extension Maximum of eight digits 101

Number
used by operators.

Extensions defined in this program cannot be
monitored using the Call Enhancement feature.

Repeat Time
After a user Barges In, the system repeats the
Barge-In tone after this time. Normally, you
should disable this time by entering 0. (This

time also affects any other type of call
interruption features, such as Voice Mail
Conversation Recording, Voice Over, etc.)

before using the Barge-In feature can be used

on a call (this time expires before a call is put in
a talk state). This time also affects Voice Over.
Operation
The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before it can be Monitored. Listen for busy/ring or busy
tone.
To Call Monitor after calling a busy extension:

2. Press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 34).
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks.
1. Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.
To Call Monitor without first calling the busy extension:

1. Press Speaker or lift handset.
2. Dial 710 or press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 34).

Issue 2.0
3. Dial a busy extension.

If Monitoring is not possible:
the extension user hears a warning tone.
the DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group.
the Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability:

2. Press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751:34).
3. Press MIC or Feature + 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off to the monitored station.
- OR -
1. Dial the extension number of the busy party.

3. Press MIC or Feature + 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off.
To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability without first calling the busy extension:
1. Press Speaker or lift the handset.
2. Dial 710 or press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751:34).
3. Dial a busy extension.
4. Press MIC or Feature + 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off to the monitored station.
To Call Monitor after calling a busy extension using Contact Center Call Monitor:
2. Press the Contact Center Terminal Speech Monitor key (Program 15-07 or SC 752:*15).

Issue 2.0
Call Redirect
Description
Call Redirect allows a multiline terminal user to transfer a call to a predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call. This can be useful if you are on a
call and another rings in to your extension. Press the Call Redirect key to transfer the call, allowing you
to continue with your current call.
This feature works with the following calls: Normal trunk call
DID
DISA
DIL
E&M
ICM
The following calls cannot be redirected with the feature:
Contact Center
Transferred
Department Group (all ring mode)
Door Box
Virtual Extension
Conditions
After pressing the Call Redirect key, the call does not recall to the extension.
The predefined destination must be an extension number or voice mail pilot number.
When a call is Redirected to another phone it does not follow the forwarding on that phone.
A call cannot be redirected across a CCIS Network.
Default Settings
Enabled
2-190 Call Redirect

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

Service) Call Redirect 1 = On
transfer a call to a predefined destination (such

as an operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the call.
Call Redirect 2-191

Issue 2.0
Operation
To redirect a ringing call:
With an incoming call ringing your extension, press the Call Redirect key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 49
+ Destination Extension Number) without lifting the handset.
2-192 Call Redirect

Issue 2.0
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Description
With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without
hanging up. When the user Camps-On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating
the waiting call. The call goes through when the busy extension becomes free. Call Waiting helps busy
extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in queue for a
busy extension without being forgotten.
Conditions
Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) keys do not support Call Waiting/Camp-On
Programmable Function keys (code 35).
If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the Camp-On to a
callback.
Off-Hook Signaling gives an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 750 to
Camp-On and/or DID callers from automatically camping on.
Function keys simplify Call Waiting/Camp-On operation.
An extension user may Transfer a call to a busy extension.
Trunk Queuing lets an extension user camp-on to a trunk.
Call Queuing must be disabled also to disable Call Waiting.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Call Waiting/Camp-On 2-193

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Callback
Off-Hook Signaling
Transfer

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
This service code enables Second Call to each digits
extension when Program 20-09-01 (Second
Call) is set to 0 (disable).
Set Camp-On 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Code, which is to be digits

used for setting Camp-On.
Customize the Service Code, which is to be digits

used for cancelling Camp-On.

Call Waiting Answer/Split Answer 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, use this program to change the digits

code users dial to Split while on a call.
setting Camp-On.
2-194 Call Waiting/Camp-On

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the function of the Multiline Hold key. Hold

can activate normal Hold or Exclusive Hold.
15-02-12 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Off- 0 = Muted Off-Hook Ringing 5
Hook Ringing 1 = No Off-Hook Ringing
Set the telephone off-hook signaling. 2 = Not Used
3 = Beep in Speaker (SP)

4 = Beep in Handset (HS)
5 = Speaker & Handset Beep

Assign a function for Camp-On (code 35). This 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
key is also the Callback key. 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
20-01-08 System Options Trunk Queuing Callback 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15

Time
Set the Trunk Queuing callback time. A Trunk
Queuing Callback rings an extension for this
time.

Cancel Time
The system cancels an extension Callback or

Trunk Queuing request after this time.
20-03-01 System Options for Single Line Telephones 0 = Hookflash (Hooking) 0

SLT Call Waiting for Answer Mode 1 = Hookflash + Service Code
For a busy single line (500/2500 type) 794
telephone, set the mode used to answer a
camped-on trunk call.
Service Code 654 is for Live
Recording at SLT (Program

For ESL sets, enabling this option (1) allows the 11-12-53).
user to dial Service Code for Voice Mail
Conversation Record.

extension port =
Class 1

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Second Call for DID/DISA/DDI/ 1 = On
DIL/ E&M Override
caller.

busy.

Service) Intercom Off-Hook signaling 1 = On
off-hook signals.



Service) Block Camp-On 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to block

callers from dialing to camp-on.
20-18-06 Service Tone Timers Interval of Call 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Waiting Tone
Set the time between call waiting tones. This
timer also sets the interval between off-hook
signaling alerts.
21-01-18 System Options for Outgoing Calls Reset 0 = Enable (On) 1

Dial After Failure of Trunk Access 1 = Disable (Off)
Enable/Disable an extension user ability to
continue to dial codes or extensions after

receiving Trunk Busy. This must be Enabled for
2-196 Call Waiting/Camp-On

Issue 2.0
Operation
To Camp-On a busy extension:

1. Call the busy extension.
2. Dial # or press the Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
3. Do not hang up.
To camp-on to a trunk, refer to Trunk Queuing/Camp-On on page 2-1487.
To cancel a Camp-On request:

1. Hang up.
2. At a multiline terminal, press Speaker and dial 770.
- OR -
At a multiline terminal, press the Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
- OR -
To Split (answer a waiting call) at a single line telephone:
Listen for Call Waiting Tones.

1. Hookflash and dial 794 to repeatedly split between the two calls.
This operation is valid only before the caller performs the camp-on operation (refer To Camp-0n a
busy extension step 2).

Issue 2.0
Description
The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunks) calls to meet the exact site requirements.
This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. A maximum of 400
trunks are available. For additional information on making trunks ring, refer to Ring Groups on page
2-1208.
Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for trunks. If the trunk is not answered at its
original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group (this ring group applies to DIL or non-DIL
trunks). This could help a secretary that covers calls for their boss. If the boss does not answer the call,
it rings the secretarys telephone after a programmable interval.
Universal Answer
Universal Answer allows an employee to answer a call by going to any multiline terminal and dialing a
unique Universal Answer code. The employee does not have to know the trunk number or dial any other
codes to pick up the ringing trunk. You normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night
Answer (refer to Night Service on page 2-1078). When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External
Paging, an employee can answer the call from the first available telephone. You might also want to use
Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing
is not adequate. After hearing the ringing over the Paging, an employee can then easily pick up the call
from a shop telephone.
The Automatic Off-Hook Answer of Universal Answer Call options (Program 20-10-07) determines
whether or not the extension has the Auto Answer feature for ringing calls. This option allows a user to
lift the handset to answer a ringing call; dialing the service code is unnecessary.
Additional Trunk Ring Tones
Various ring tone patterns and melodies for incoming calls are available (Program 22-03-11); Ring Tone
Patterns 1~4 and Melodies 1~5.
Sidetone Volume Setup
This option allows system programming for the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels,
based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Side Tone Auto Setup
Per each analog trunk (or all analog trunks) the most suitable Codec Filter setting for Program 81-07 and
Program 81-17 can be automatically adjusted using Programs 90-68-01 and 90-68-02.
2-198 Central Office Calls, Answering

Issue 2.0
During the trunk measurement process, the following LCD indications are provided:
During measurement: Measurement (x/4)
x = number of measurements
Measure complete: Complete
Error condition: Error
Trunk busy: Busy
After successful measurement, the option to copy the same settings to all analog trunks is shown.
Side Tone Auto Setup available when the system is in an idle condition.
NOTE
Conditions
The incoming ring group assignment programmed in Program 41-03-01 overrides the
setting in Program 22-05-01.
Ringing calls can be picked up regardless of access map programming.
An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset.
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time
period. Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing
calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.
Line keys and Call Appearance (CAP) Keys simplify answering outside calls.
If the Absent text message was set by the originating extension, the destination extension
displays the assigned text message instead of the Reason for Transfer message.
If an extension is assigned to a Trunk Access Map that has no access for a trunk, the
extension can still retrieve parked calls on that trunk. The extension can also Group Call
Pickup and Direct Call Pickup calls ringing another extension on that trunk.
terminal when it receives an incoming call, or switch to the page the incoming call is on.
Furthermore, a default page can be defined for the DESI-Less terminal to change to when it
goes idle or when it has answered a call.
To adjust for proper audio quality, refer to Programs 81-07 and 81-17.
Default Settings
Enabled
Central Office Calls, Answering 2-199

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Any Trunk Blade (i.e., GCD-4COTB, GCD-2BRIA, GCD-PRTA, etc.)
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Contact Center
Directed Call Pickup
Do Not Disturb
Group Call Pickup
ISDN Compatibility
Line Preference
Long Conversation Cutoff
Night Service
Warning Tone for Long Conversation

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-XX ETU Setup The assigned data varies Refer to the

Use program 10-03-XX to setup and confirm depending on the blade installed Programming
the basic configuration data for each blade. in the slot. Manual for
This program represents different data default values.
depending on the blade installed in the slot.
Please refer the SV9100 Programming Manual
for a more detailed description of this program.

Operation) Display Language Selection for 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Multiline Terminal digits
Select the service code which can be used at

an extension to change the displayed language
on a multiline terminal display.

Operation) Change Incoming CO and ICM 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Ring Tones digits
Customize the change incoming CO and ICM
ring tones used for registration and setup.

Operation) Check Incoming Ring Tones 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Check incoming ring tones used for registration digits

and setup.
Specified Trunk Answer 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, redefine the service code used to digits
answer a specific trunk which is either ringing or
on hold.
14-01-02 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Level Trunks 1 ~ 400 32 (0dB)
Customize the transmit and receive levels of 1 ~ 57
the CODEC Gain Types for each trunk. (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB

intervals)
14-01-03 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Level Trunks 1 ~ 400 32 (0dB)

intervals)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-02-02 Analog Trunk Data Setup Ring Detect Type Trunks 1 ~ 400 1
Set Extended Ring Detect or Immediate Ring 0 = Normal/delayed
Detect for the trunk. For T1 loop/ground start 1 = Immediate Ringing
trunks, this option must be set to 1 for the
trunks to ring and light correctly.
14-05-01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Trunk Port 1 ~ 400 = Priority Default = Trunks
Assign trunks to trunk groups then go to 1 ~ 400 1 - 400 assigned
Program 14-06-01 below to set up Trunk Group to trunk group 1
Routing. with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
14-06-01 Trunk Group Routing Priority Order 0 = Not Set Route 1, Order
Number 001 ~ 100 = Trunk group No. Number 1 = 1
Set the priority order number 1 ~ 4. 101 ~ 150 = 100 + Networking (Trunk Group 1)
System No. Order Numbers
1001 ~ 1100 = 1000 + Route 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not
Table No. Specified)
All Other Routes
(2 ~ 100) and
Order Numbers
(1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not
Specified).

access options for trunks. Ring Group 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
programming overrides Access Map 3 = Access only when trunk on assigned with
programming. Hold option 7 access
(incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold
15-01-05 Basic Extension Data Setup Restriction for 0 = No 0

Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line 1 = Yes
Enable (1)/Disable (0) supervised dial detection

for an extension.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian

9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
15-02-02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 1 = High 2

Trunk Ring Tone 2 = Medium
Set the tone (pitch) of the incoming trunk ring 3 = Low
for the extension port you are programming. 4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2

6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5

Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk 1 = Enable
When this option is disabled, incoming calls to
an extension indicate on any Hotline key for
that extension as solid (busy). When this option
is enabled, lighting is determined by the setting
of Program 22-01-01 Incoming Call Priority. If

set to trunk priority (1), the Hotline key lights
solid when a trunk call rings in. If set to intercom
priority (0), the Hotline key does not light for
incoming trunk calls, but lights solid for
intercom calls.
15-03-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Normal 0

Terminal Type 1 = Special
Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port
to receive DTMF tones after the initial call
setup. Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF
tones after the initial call setup. For Voice Mail,
always enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


752 by default)
15-25-01 DESI-less Page Setup Incoming Call Notify 0 = Disable 1

Event 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the ability of a DESI-Less
terminal to blink the page number that has an
incoming call on one of the keys.
15-25-02 DESI-less Page Setup Incoming Call 0 = Disable 1

Automatic Screen Switching 1 = Enable
terminal to switch to the page that has an
15-25-03 DESI-less Page Setup Idle Automatic 0 = Disable 0

Screen Switching 1 = Display page 1
Define or Disable the page to be automatically 2 = Display page 2
displayed when a DESI-Less terminal becomes 3 = Display page 3
idle.
4 = Display page 4
15-25-04 DESI-less Page Setup Answer Automatic 0 = Disable 0

displayed when a DESI-Less terminal answers 3 = Display page 3
a call.
4 = Display page 4
20-02-09 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = Disable 1

Disconnect Supervision 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable disconnect supervision for the

system trunks.
20-02-15 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = Name and Number (Both) 0
Caller ID Display Mode 1 = Name
Define the Caller ID display mode for multiline

2 = Number
terminals.

extension port =
Class 1

Automatic Off-Hook Answer 1 = On
Universal Auto Answer (no service code
required).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal 1 = On
on ICM Call

Continued Dialing, which allows DTMF signal
sending while talking on extension.

Service) Display the Reason for Transfer 1 = On
Select whether or not an extension should
display the reason a call is being transferred to

their extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).

Restriction)
21-01-16 System Options for Outgoing Calls 0 ~ 64800 seconds 20

Supervise Dial Detection Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
feature, if dial tone is not detected after the
extension answers an incoming line, the system
determines the call is unable to complete and
releases the DTMF receiver.
21-01-17 System Options for Outgoing Calls Digits 1 ~ 9 4

Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line

feature, determine the number of digits to be
dialed before the call should be disconnected.
22-01-01 System Options for Incoming Calls 0 = Intercom call priority 1

Incoming Call Priority 1 = Trunk call priority
Determine if Intercom calls or trunk calls have
answer priority when both are ringing
simultaneously.
22-01-02 System Options for Incoming Calls 0 = Disable 0

Incoming Call Ring No Answer Alarm 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the Incoming Call RNA Alarm. If
enabled, the ring cadence changes for a call

that rings longer than the interval set in
Program 22-01-03.
22-01-03 System Options for Incoming Calls Ring 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

No Answer Alarm Time
Set the Ring No Answer Alarm time. If a trunk
rings a multiline terminal longer than this time,
the system changes the ring cadence.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-01-04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Answer Recall Time 0 = No Overflow
A DIL that rings its programmed destination
longer than this interval diverts to the DIL No
Answer Ring Group (set in Program 22-08).
22-02-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Trunks 1 ~ 400 0

Set the feature type for the trunk you are 0 = Normal
programming. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
22-03-01 Trunk Ring Tone Range Ring Tone Pattern 0 = Ring Tone Pattern 1 0
Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks. Trunks 1 = Ring Tone Pattern 2
ring extensions according to the Ring Tone 2 = Ring Tone Pattern 3
Range selected in Program 22-03-0 and the 3 = Ring Tone Pattern 4
settings made with either Service Code 720 or
4 = Melody 1
Program 15-02-02.
5 = Melody 2
6 = Melody 3
7 = Melody 4
8 = Melody 5
9 = Ring Tone Pattern 5
22-04-01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Maximum of eight digits. Extensions 101
Group 1 calls.
groups. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

To have the trunks ring extensions, assign Incoming Group Number for
trunks to a Ring Group. The incoming ring Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
group assignment programmed in Program 0 = (No Setting)
41-03-01 overrides the setting in this program. 001 ~ 100 = (Incoming Group)

Mail or InMail)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-06-01 Normal Incoming Ring Mode 0 = No Ring 1

Indicate whether the trunks in the Ring Group 1 = Ring
assigned in Program 22-04-01 should ring or

not ring.

Assign the destination extension for each DIL Extension Number (maximum of
incoming trunk (001~400). eight digits)
For this selection to work, set Program Pilot Number
22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).
22-08-01 DIL/IRG No Answer Destination 0 = (No Setting) 1

If an incoming trunk call rings longer than the 001 ~ 100 = Incoming Ring
DIL No Answer Time (Program 22-01-04), it Group
routes to the destination you specify in this 102 = (In-Skin/
option. Determine if the destination should be a External Voice Mail
Ring Group, In-Skin/External Voice Mail, or
or InMail)
Central Voice Mail.
103 = Centralized VM
23-03-01 Universal Answer/Auto Answer Day/Night Mode 0

Use this program to let an extension user 1~8
automatically answer trunk calls that ring other Route Table Number
extensions. When the user lifts the handset, 0 ~ 100

they automatically answer the ringing calls
based on Trunk Group Routing programming
(defined in Program 14-06).
82-08-01 Sidetone Volume Setup Input Data (Digital Sidetone 6

Adjust of the multiline terminal side tone Level: Analog Sidetone Level)
volume. There are two levels, based on 0 (-54 dB : -54 dB)
whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or 1 (-48 dB : -54 dB)
analog trunk. 2 (-42 dB : -54 dB)
3 (-36 dB : -48(dB)
4 (-30 dB : -42 dB)

5 (-24 dB : -36 dB)
6 (-18 dB : -30 dB)
7 (-12 dB : -24 dB)
8 (-12 dB : -18 dB)
9 (-12 dB : -12 dB)
Operation
To answer an incoming trunk call:

To use Universal Answer to answer a call ringing over the Paging system:
1. Go off-hook.
Depending on system programming, this may answer the call and you can skip Step 2.

Issue 2.0
2. Dial #0.
If you hear error tone, your extension Class of Service prevents Universal Answer.
To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 711 + 2.
3. Select the ringing (1~8) and tone range (1~4) you want to check.
4. Go back to step 3 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up.
To change the ringing of your incoming trunk:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 720 + 2.
3. Select the ringing (1~8).

Issue 2.0
Description
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. This lets
you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each individuals needs. To place a
call the user can:
Press Line Keys
Press a Trunk Group Key
Press a Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) Key
Dial a code for a specific trunk (#9 + the trunk number)
Dial a code for a Trunk Group (704 + group number)
Dial a code for Trunk Group Routing or ARS (9)
Dial an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (which you must define)
Press or Use a Speed Dial bin
There are 400 available trunks.

NOTE
Trunk Port Disable
The system provides a service code (default: 645) which can be used by an extension user to block a
trunk for outgoing calls. The user which busied out the trunk still has access to it. All other users are
blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call. The trunk, however, can still be answered by any user
programmed with the trunk access.
Sidetone Volume Setup
Allows the system programming for the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels, based
on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Per each analog trunk (or all analog trunks) the most suitable Codec Filter setting for Program 81-07 and
Program 81-17 can be automatically adjusted using Programs 90-68-01 and 90-68-02.
Trunk busy: Busy
Central Office Calls, Placing 2-209

Issue 2.0
After successful measurement, the option to copy the same settings to all analog trunks is shown.
NOTE
Conditions
If the trunk name seize display is enabled in programming, the Call Timer starts
automatically after the user places a trunk call. Disabling the trunk name seize display also
disables the Call Timer.
The system can automatically select the correct line to use based on the number dialed and
the time.
With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call
without lifting the handset or pressing Speaker. Users without Automatic Handsfree can
preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing Speaker.
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time.
Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to
hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.
An extension Toll Class of Service may prevent dialing certain numbers.
Dialing 9 or any other trunk access code after dialing an extension, terminates the intercom
call and seizes a trunk.
Phones that have an APR/APA installed do not pass voice to a trunk until the interdigit time
expires (Program 21-01-03).
Setting Program 14-02-11 to On may cause a slight delay in dial tone while loop current is
returned.
character is passed to the telco. The system recognizes the initial as the beginning of an
Account Code entry, the second as the end of an Account Code entry, and the third will
be passed to telco.
To adjust for proper audio quality, refer to Programs 81-07 and 81-17.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
2-210 Central Office Calls, Placing

Issue 2.0
Any Trunk Blade (i.e., GCD-4COTB, GCD-2BRIA, GCD-PRTA, etc.)
Related Features
Code Restriction
Dial Tone Detection
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Microphone Cutoff
Trunk Groups
Trunk Group Routing

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-XX ETU Setup The assigned data varies Refer to the

Use program 10-03-XX to setup and confirm depending on the blade installed Programming
the basic configuration data for each blade. in the slot. Manual for
This program represents different data default values.
depending on the blade installed in the slot.
Please refer the SV9100 Programming Manual
for a more detailed description of this program.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-01-01 System Numbering Refer to the

Programming
Set system numbering plan.
Manual for

default values.
11-09-01 Trunk Access Code Dial (maximum of four digits) 9

If required, change the single-digit Trunk
Access Code (normally 9). If you change this
code, you must also review the settings in
Program 11-01-01 for the new code selected.
11-09-02 Trunk Access Code 2nd Trunk Route Dial (maximum of four digits) No Setting
Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in Program

11-01-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
11-10-27 Service Code Setup (for System MLT, SLT 645

Administrator) Trunk Port Disable for 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Outgoing Calls digits
Define the service code which should be used

by an extension user to block a trunk from
being used for outgoing calls.

Select the service code which can be used at

an extension to change the displayed language
on a multiline terminal display.
Define the service code for Activating Call digits
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override. This code

is available only if you disable the voice mail
Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09.
Trunk Group Access 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define the service code which should be used digits
by an extension user to select outgoing Trunk
Group.
14-01-01 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk Name Maximum of 12 Characters Line 001
Set the names for trunks. The trunk name Line 002
displays on a multiline terminal for incoming Line 003
and outgoing calls. :
Line 400

intervals)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

intervals)
14-01-07 Basic Trunk Data Setup Outgoing Calls 0 = Deny (No) 1

Allow or Deny outgoing calls on the trunk you 1 = Allow (Yes)
are programming.
14-01-10 Basic Trunk Data Setup DTMF Tones for 0 = Disable 0

Outgoing Calls 1 = Enable
For each trunk, Enable/Disable the ability to
hear the DTMF of the digits dialed when placing
the outgoing call.
14-02-05 Analog Trunk Data Setup Dial Tone 0 = Dial Tone Detection Not 0
Detection for Manually Accessed Trunks Used
Enable/Disable dial tone detection for directly 1 = Dial Tone Detection Used
accessed trunks. If disabled, the system

outdials on the trunks without monitoring for dial
tone.
14-02-11 Analog Trunk Data Setup Next Trunk in 0 = Disable 0

Rotary if No Dial Tone 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the system ability to skip over a
trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option
pertains to calls placed using Call Appearance
(CAP) Keys, Speed Dial, Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) (ARS), Last Number Redial or
Save Number dialed. It does not pertain to line
key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
14-02-14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start/ 0 = Disable 0

Ground Start 1 = Enable
Select Loop start or Ground start for the trunk.
Assign trunks to trunk groups then go to Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
1001 ~ 1100 = 1000 + Route 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not
All Other Routes
(2 ~ 100) and
Order Numbers
(1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not
Specified).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold

4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian

9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish

One-Touch Key or
Preselects the key.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


752 by default)
20-02-06 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 ~ 64800 seconds 5 seconds

Preselection Time
Set the preselection time When a multiline
terminal user preselects a line key, the system
remembers the preselection for this time.


system trunks.

extension port =
Class 1
20-07-12 Class of Service Options (Administrator 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 14= 0

Level) Trunk Port Disable 1 = On COS 15 = 1
Turn Off or On an extension ability to use the

Trunk Port Disable feature.

Service) Trunk Outgoing Calls 1 = On
Turns Off or On outgoing trunk calling for the

extension.

on ICM Call


Restriction)


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Incoming Line

21-02-01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 0 ~ 100 1

Assign Program 14-06 routes to extensions. 0 = No Setting (Calls will not
route.)
21-15-01 Individual Trunk Group Routing for 0 ~ 100 0

Extensions 0 = No Setting (Calls will not
Designate the trunk route accessed when a route.)

Code. Refer to Trunk Group Routing to set up
outbound routing.

Timer starts when a trunk begins talking with
another trunk (for example: Trunk-to-Trunk
Trunking). When this time expires, a warning
tone is heard.
24-02-10 System Options for Transfer Disconnect 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Trunk to Trunk Timer
Timer starts after the Warning Tone is heard
(24-02-07). When time expires, the trunk is
disconnected.
82-08-01 Sidetone Volume Setup Input Data (Digital Sidetone 6

Adjust of the multiline terminal side tone Level: Analog Sidetone Level)
volume. There are two levels, based on 0 (-54 dB : -54 dB)
whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or 1 (-48 dB : -54 dB)
analog trunk. 2 (-42 dB : -54 dB)
3 (-36 dB : -48(dB)
4 (-30 dB : -42 dB)

5 (-24 dB : -36 dB)
6 (-18 dB : -30 dB)
7 (-12 dB : -24 dB)
8 (-12 dB : -18 dB)
9 (-12 dB : -12 dB)
Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:

1. Go off-hook.
2. Dial 704.

Issue 2.0
3. Dial trunk group number (001~100).

4. Dial the number.
- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal, press the trunk group key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 02 +
group).
2. Dial the number.
To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:

1. Go off-hook.
2. Dial 9.
If your system has an Alternate Trunk Route Access code, you may dial that instead.
3. Dial the number.

- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal, press the Trunk Group Routing key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 02
plus trunk group).
2. Dial the number.
To place a call over a specific trunk:

1. Dial #9.
2. Dial the line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
3. Dial the number.
- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal, press line key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 01 001 to 400).
2. Dial the number.
To busy out a trunk from outbound usage:

1. Press Speaker + 645 + Trunk Number (001~400) + 1.
The user which busied out the trunk still has access to it. All other users are blocked from seizing it to
place an outgoing call. The trunk, however, can still be answered by any user programmed with the
trunk access.
To Remove a Trunk from a Busied Out State:

1. Press Speaker + 645 + Trunk Number (001~400) + 0.

Issue 2.0
Class of Service
Description
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for extensions. The
system allows any number of extensions to share the same Class of Service. An extension can have a
different Class of Service for each of the Night Service modes. This lets you program a different set of
dialing options for daytime operation, nighttime operation and even during lunch breaks. An extension
Class of Service can be changed in system programming or via a Service Code (normally 677). There
are 15 available Classes of Service.
Conditions
Before assigning a new COS, make sure the new COS matches the old COS or you may
enable options, which the extension should not have or remove options, which it should
have.
An extension can have a different Class of Service for each Service mode. At default, the
Mode names are assigned as follows:
Mode 1 = No setting
Mode 2 = Night
Mode 3 = Midnight
Mode 4 = Rest
Mode 5 = Day2
Mode 6 = Night2
Mode 7 = Midnight2
Mode 8 = Rest2
tone.
CCIS trunk pointed or transferred to a virtual that is Call Forward Off-Premise will always
2-218 Class of Service

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
The attendant (extension 101) has Class of Service 15 in all Night Service modes. All other
extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes.
If changing Class of Service via Service Code:
An extension can use Service Code 677 to change another extension Class of Service
(Program 20-13-28 = 1).
An extension can automatically block another extension attempt to change their Class of
Service via Service Code 677 (Program 20-13-28 = 0).
The default Service Code for this option is 677 (Program 11-11-24 = 677).
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Night Service

Class of Service 2-219

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Change Station Class of 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Service digits
If required, change the Service Code a user
dials to change an extension Class of Service.

extension port =
Class 1

Level) Manual Night Service Enabled 1 = On COS 15 = 1
Turn Off or On an extension ability to manually
Switch the Night Mode (Service Code 718).

This option must be enabled for an extension to
be able to display the Night indication.

Level) Changing the Music on Hold Tone 1 = On COS 15 = 1

change the Music on Hold tone.

Level) Time Setting 1 = On

the Time via Service Code 728.

Level) Storing Speed Dialing Entries 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension to store System or


Level) Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to- 1 = On
Trunk Transfer

Level) Charging Cost Display 1 = On


Service Code 752.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Level) Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog 1 = On COS 15 = 1
trunk only)
Forced Trunk Disconnect. This allows the
extension to disconnect an Unsupervised
Conference in progress.


the Trunk Port Disable feature.

Level) VRS Record (VRS Msg Operation) 1 = On COS 15 = 1

record, erase and listen to VRS messages.

Level) VRS General Message Play 1 = On COS 15 = 1
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to dial 4
or Service Code 611 to listen to the General
Message.

Level) VRS General Message Record/ 1 = On COS 15 = 1
Delete
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to dial

Service Code 612 and record, listen to, or erase
the General Message.

Level) SMDR Printout Accumulated 1 = On COS 15 = 1
Extension Data
Determine if the Accumulated Extension Data is

included in the SMDR printout for each Class of
Service.

Level) SMDR Printout Department Group 1 = On COS 15 = 1
(STG) Data
Determine if the Department Group STG) Data

is included in the SMDR printout for each Class
of Service.

Account Code Data
Determine if the Accumulated Account Code

Data is included in the SMDR printout for each
Class of Service.

Level) Register and Delete DECTPP 1 = On
Allows the administrator to register and delete

DECT telephones.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Level) CO Message Waiting Indication 1 = On
Callback Number Programming
Enable (1)/Disable (0) an extension ability to
receive CO Message Waiting Indication.

Enable (1) or Disable (0) an extension user

ability to set or cancel Private Call Refuse.

Enable/Disable an extension ability to set or

cancel Caller ID Refuse.

Level) Dial-In Mode Switch 1 = On
Enable/Disable an extension user ability to set

or cancel dial-in mode switch.

Level) Do-Not-Call Administrator 1 = On

or cancel do not call administrator.

Level) Date Setting 1 = On
the Date using the service code defined in
Program 11-10-41.

Service) Intercom Calls 1 = On
Turn Off or On Intercom calling for the

extension.

Turn Off or On outgoing trunk calling for the

extension.

Service) System Speed Dialing 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make
outbound calls using system speed dial
numbers.

Service) Group Speed Dialing 1 = On
outbound calls using group speed dial
numbers.

Service) Dial Number Preview (Preset Dial) 1 = On
Turn Off or On extension user ability to use Dial

Number Preview.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Toll Restriction Override 1 = On
Turn Off or On Toll Restricting Override

(Service Code 663).

Service) Repeat Redial 1 = On

Repeat Redial.

Service) Toll Restriction Dial Block 1 = On

Dial Block.

Service) Hotline/Extension Ringdown 1 = On
Turn Off or On Ringdown Extension for

extensions with this COS.

Service) Signal/Voice Call 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension allowing it to force
Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.

Service) Protect for the Call Mode 1 = On
Switching from Caller
When an extension is set to ring mode for ICM

calls, enabling this option prevents callers from
changing the call to voice announce mode.

Service) Department Group Step Calling 1 = On

Department Group Step Calling.

Service) ISDN CLIP 1 = On
Determine if the ISDN calling line identity
presentation and screening indicators are to be
allowed.

Service) Call Address Information 1 = On
Enable/ Disable Call Address Information for

each Class of Service.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Service) Display E911 Dialed Extension 1 = On
Name and Number
Turn Off or On an extension ability to display

the name and number of the extension that
dialed 911.

Map

override the trunk access map programming for
outgoing calls.

Service) Hotline for SPK 1 = On
activate hotline or ringdown when pressing the
Speaker key.

Service) Hot Key Pad 1 = On
a call by just dialing the number without first
going off-hook.

Service) Automatic Trunk Seizing by 1 = On
Pressing Speaker Key
Enable/Disable the ability to access trunks

when going off-hook by pressing the speaker
key for each Class of Service.

Service) Voice Over to busy Virtual 1 = On
Extension
Enable/Disable the ability to make voice over to

a busy virtual extension for each Class of
Service.

Service) Display Indication for Security 1 = On
Sensor Detection
Enable(1) or Disable(0) an extensions ability to
display indication for security sensor detection.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Display Indication for Emergency 1 = On
Call by Remote Inspection

display indication for emergency call by remote
inspection.

E&M Override
caller.

have a line or Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
available for the second call and a previous call is
ringing the extension but has not been answered, the
second caller hears busy regardless of this program
setting.

Turn Off or On the Caller ID display at an

extension.

Service) Sub Address Identification 1 = On
Define whether or not an extension displays the

Caller Sub-Address.

Existence

enable Handsfree Answerback or Forced

Intercom Ringing for their incoming Intercom
calls.

is displayed on the multiline terminals LCD
while the telephone is ringing.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

is busy.

Service) Calling Party Information 1 = On
Turn Off or On and extension user ability to

display calling party information on CCIS calls.
20-09-13 Class of Service Options (Incoming Call 0 = Immediate COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) DND Active While Ringing 1 = Next
Assign when the DND will be enforced (set at

same time a call is ringing or for next call).

Group Call Pickup (Within Group) 1 = On
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls
ringing an extension Pickup Group as well as
ring group calls (Service Code #).

Group Call Pickup (Another Group) 1 = On

ringing outside a group (Service Code 769).

Group Call Pickup for Specific Group 1 = On
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for a specific

group using service code 768.

Telephone Call Pickup 1 = On
Enable or Disable the group call pickup.

Directed Call Pickup for Own Group 1 = On
Turn Off or On Directed Call Pickup for calls
ringing an extension Pickup Group (Service
Code 756).

Meet-Me Conference and Paging 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension to use Meet-Me

Conference and Paging.

Turn Off or On an extension to use Universal

Auto Answer (no service code required).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

answer an incoming call on a Call Arrival

(CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE)/
Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset.

Call Pickup Callback 1 = On

Call Pickup to Pick up Callback calls.

Answer Preset 1 = On
Enable/Disable Answer Preset for each Class

of Service.





Unanswered





Service) Unscreened Transfer (Ring 1 = On
Inward Transfer)
Unscreened Transfer.

Service) Transfer Without Holding 1 = On

Transfer Without Holding.

Turn Off or On an extension incoming Transfer

pre-answer display.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Group Hold Initiate 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension ability to initiate a

Group Hold.

Service) Group Hold Answer 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension ability to pick up a

call on Group Hold.

Service) Automatic On-Hook Transfer 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension ability to use

Automatic On-Hook Transfer.


up Call Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.

Service) Operator Transfer After Hold 1 = On
Callback
Turn Off or On an extension ability to have a

call which recalls from hold transfer to the
operator.

Service) Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 1 = On
Restriction
Turns Off or On the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer

Restriction. If enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
is not possible.

Service) VRS Personal Greeting (Message 1 = On
Greeting)

Service Code 616 to record, listen to or erase
the Personal Greeting Message.



Transfer)
Turn Off or On the ability of an extension in a
Department Group to use the Trunk-to-Trunk

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) No Recall 1 = On
Allow (0)/Deny (1) answered Transferred calls

from recalling the originating extension.

Service should allow normal or extended Park

(0 = Normal for Program 24-01-06,
1 = Extended for Program 24-01-07).

Service) No Callback 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive

Callbacks.

Service) Restriction for Tandem Trunking 1 = On
on Hang Up
Allow/Deny an extension user ability to set up a

tandem/conference call automatically when
they hang up.

Service) Restricted Unsupervised 1 = On
Conference
Allow/Deny an extension user to initiate a
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Tandem Trunking).

and cancel Call Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual
Extension.
20-11-24 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer 0 = Non Exclusive Hold (Off) COS 1 ~ 15 = 1
Service) Trunk Park Hold Mode 1 = Exclusive Hold (On)
Set the hold type when a trunk call is put on

hold by an extension.

Service) Transfer Park Call 1 = On
Turn On or Off an extension user ability to

transfer a parked call.

Service) Station Park Hold Mode 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension users ability to

Personal Park on a Co-Worker's extension.

Service) Call Park Automatically Search 1 = On
Turn Off or On using the Call Park

Automatically Search option.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-11-28 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer 0 = Normal COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) Both Ring Enhancement 1 = Enhanced
0 = Normal (default) rings on other extension
when the other paired extension is busy (not
idle).

1 = Enhanced does not ring other extension
when the other paired extension is busy (not
idle).

Service) Disable Call FWD Indication on 1 = On
LCD
When set to On (1), Call FWD setting is not
shown on the terminal LCD.
20-12-02 Class of Service Options (Charging Cost 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) Advice of Charge 1 = On
ISDN-AOC
Turn Off or On a DISA or tie trunk caller ability

to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic
Route Selection (ARS).

Service) Cost Display (TTU) 1 = On
ISDN billing information.

Service) Long Conversation Alarm 1 = On
Turn Off or On the Warning Tone for Long

Conversation (not for single line telephones).

Service) Long Conversation Cutoff 1 = On
(Incoming)
Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls.
20-13-03 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 =0

(Outgoing)
Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls.

(Bypass Call)
Turn Off or On the ability to use Call

Turn On or Off the ability of an extension to
send Off-Hook Signals.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Service) Message Waiting 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to leave

Message Waiting.

Service) Conference 1 = On

initiate a conference or Meet Me Conference.

Service) Privacy Release 1 = On

initiate a Voice Call Conference.

Service) Barge-In Monitor 1 = On
Enables the extension Barge-In Mode to be
Speech mode or Monitor mode (i.e., Barge-In
initiator).

Service) Room Monitor, Initiating 1 = On
Extension
Room Monitor other extensions.

Service) Room Monitor, Extension Being 1 = On
Monitored
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to be
monitored by other extensions.

on ICM Call
Turn Off or On the extension ability to use


Service) Department Calling (PLT No 1 = On
Called Extension)
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to call a
Department Group Pilot.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3





Tone)


Service) Programmable Function Key 1 = On
Programming (General Level)
program General function keys using Service
Code 751 (by default). (Refer to Program
20-07-10 for Service Code 752.)

Service) Selectable Display Messaging 1 = On
(Text Messaging)
Selectable Display Messaging.

Transfer)
Turn Off or On operator alert when an extension
improperly enters an Account Code or violates
Toll Restriction.

Service) Extension Name 1 = On

program the name.

Service) Busy Status Display (Called Party 1 = On
Status)
Turn Off or On the ability to display the detail
state of called party.

Select whether an extension should display the
reason a call is being transferred to their

extension (Call Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Privacy Release by Pressing Line 1 = On
Key
Turn Off or On a user ability to press a line key

to barge into an outside call. The Barge-In
feature must be enabled if this option is used.

Service) Group Listen 1 = On

Group Listen.

If set to 1, you can call a busy extension which
is talking on a virtual extension key. Program

20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be set to off for
this option to work.

Service) Allow Class of Service to be 1 = On
Changed
Turn Off or On the ability of an extension COS
to be changed via Service Code 677.

Service) Paging Display 1 = On

display paging information.

Service) Background Music 1 = On
Allow/Deny an extension user to turn

Background Music on and off.

Service) Connected Line Identification 1 = On
(COLP)
Define the supplementary feature availability for
each extension Class of Service (COS).


multiple users Barge-In to their conversation.

Service) Contact Center Supervisors 1 = On
Position Enhancement
This option must be on for the operator to use

service codes in Program 11-13-10 through
Program 11-13-13.

Service) Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling 1 = On
off-hook signals manually sent from a
co-worker.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3




Service) Headset Ringing for SLT 1 = On

the Headset ringing.

Service) Contact Center Queue Status 1 = On
Display
Turn Off or On the Contact Center Queue
Status Display for an extension Class of
Service. Any extension which has this option
enabled also hears the queue alarm.

Service) Do Not Disturb 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set or

cancel Do Not Disturb.

Service) Voice Mail Message Indication on 1 = On
DSS
Turn Off or On the Voice Mail Message
Indication for an extension on a DSS console.

Service) Extension Data Swap Enabling 1 = On

the Station Relocation feature.

Service) Disconnect Supervision 1 = On

Service) Live Monitor Enabling 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension ability to use Live

Monitor.

Service) MIC Key Mode While Call 1 = On
Monitoring

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service) Station Number Display 1 = On
Determine if a station Number is displayed (On)
or not displayed (Off) in the LCD when the
phone is idle.

Service) Station Name Display 1 = On
phone is idle.

Service) BLF Indication on CO Incoming 1 = On
State
Determine if a BLF of the station lights when a
Normal CO call is ringing the phone.

Service) AIC Agent display which call is 1 = On
from
Determine if the station logged in via AIC codes
shows which queue the call is coming from.

Service) Number and Name appear in the 1 = On
directory
Determine if an extension name and number
are listed (On) or unlisted (Off) in the directory.

Service) VoIP All DSP Busy Display 1 = On
Enable/Disable the All DSP Busy alarm
displayed on the LCD when the caller makes an
IP call and there is no VoIP DSP resource.

Service) Language Selection for Specific 1 = On
Extension
This setting must be Enabled (1) for a

telephones Class of Service for this feature to
function.

Service) Call Waiting for Standard SIP 1 = On
Terminal
Set up Call waiting (Off-hook Signaling) for
Standard SIP terminal.

First Digit Absorption (Delete First Digit 1 = On
Dialed)
For Tie Lines, Enable/Disable the ability to
absorb (ignore) the first incoming digit. Use this

to make the tie trunk compatible with 3- and
4-digit Tie Line service. This option does not
apply to DISA.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access 1 = On
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability

Trunk Group Access 1 = On
to access trunk groups for outside calls (Service
Code 704).

Outgoing System Speed Dial 1 = On
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk callers

ability to use System Speed Dialing.

Operator Calling 1 = On

to dial 0 for the telephone system operator.

Internal Paging 1 = On
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk callers
ability to use the telephone system Internal
Paging.

External Paging 1 = On

to use the telephone system External Paging.

Direct Trunk Access 1 = On

to use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code 715).

Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN 1 = On
T-point>
Enable/Disable a tie trunk caller ability to use

Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code 26).
This option is not available to DISA callers.

Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA 1 = On
Enable/Disable a DISA callers ability to use the
Call Forward service codes (Program 11-11-01
through Program 11-11-05).

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk user from

using the Barge-In feature.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Retrieve Park Hold 1 = On
Turn Off or On the ability for a DISA caller to

retrieve parked or held calls.
Operation
To change an extension Class of Service (via Service Code 677):

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 677.
3. Dial the extension number you want to change.
You see: MODE1:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
The extension you dial may be set to block your attempt to change their Class of Service.
4. Enter the Day 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE2:nn
5. Enter the Night 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE3:nn
6. Enter the Midnight 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
Hold.
You see: MODE4:nn
7. Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE5:nn
8. Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE6:nn
9. Enter the Night 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE7:nn
10. Enter the Midnight 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
Hold.
You see: MODE8:nn

Issue 2.0
11. Enter the Rest 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: ICM Dial
12. Go to step 3 and enter another extension number.

- OR -
Press Speaker to hang up.

Issue 2.0
Description
The system uses Clock/Calendar Display for:
Central Office Calls (Access Maps) Station Message Detail Recording

Class of Service (Class) System Reports
Direct Inward Lines Toll Restriction (Class)
Display Telephones Trunk Group Routing
Night Service (Automatic) Voice Mail
Programmable Trunk Parameters Voice Response System
Ring Groups
Using the Daylight Savings Setup program, you can determine whether the system should automatically
adjust the system time for daylight savings time/standard time changes.
Clock Adjustment
The system can be programmed to automatically adjust the system clock on a nightly basis. This feature
allows you to make adjustments should the system cabinet regularly lose or gain time.
Conditions
The system retains the Clock/Calendar Display after a power failure or system reset.
Changing the time may change the current Class of Service (COS) service depending on
the COS mode setup.
You can program the system to automatically switch modes.
Single line telephones cannot set the time and date.
Changing the system time automatically changes the InMail time.
Default Settings
Enabled
Clock/Calendar Display 2-239

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Class of Service
Night Service
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
InMail
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-01-01 Time and Date Year 00 ~ 99 No Setting

Enter two digits (00 ~ 99) for the year.

10-01-02 Time and Date Month 01 ~ 12 No Setting
Enter two digits (01 ~ 12) for the month.

10-01-03 Time and Date Day 01 ~ 31 No Setting
Enter two digits (01 ~ 31) for the day.

10-01-04 Time and Date Week 1 ~ 7 (Sunday ~ Saturday) No Setting
Enter the digit (1 = Sunday, 7 = Saturday) to
indicate the day of the week.
2-240 Clock/Calendar Display

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-01-05 Time and Date Hour 00 ~ 23 No Setting

Enter two digits (00 ~ 23) for the hour.

10-01-06 Time and Date Minute 00 ~ 59 No Setting
Enter two digits (00 ~ 59) for the minutes.

10-01-07 Time and Date Second 00 ~ 59 No Setting
Enter two digits (00 ~ 59) for the seconds.

10-24-01 Daylight Savings Setup Daylight Savings 0 = Disable 1
Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the system ability to adjust the

time for daylight savings/standard time.
10-24-02 Daylight Savings Setup Time for Daylight 00:00 ~ 23:59 02:00
Savings
Enter the time of day the system should adjust

for daylight savings time (0000 ~ 2359).
10-24-03 Daylight Savings Setup Start of Month 01 ~ 12 3

(Summer Time) 1 = Jan
Enter the month of system should adjust the

2 = Feb, etc.
time for daylight savings time (01 ~ 12).
10-24-04 Daylight Savings Setup Start of Week 0~5 2

Enter the week of the month the system should 0 = Last Week of Month
adjust the time for daylight savings time.
10-24-05 Daylight Savings Setup Start of Week Day 1~7 1

Enter the day of the week the system should (1 = Sun, 2 = Mon, etc.)
10-24-06 Daylight Savings Setup End of Month 01 ~ 12 11

Enter the month of system should adjust the (1 = Jan, 2 = Feb, etc.)
time for standard time.
10-24-07 Daylight Savings Setup End of Week 0~5 1

Enter the week of the month the system should 0 = Last Week of the Month
adjust the time for standard time.
10-24-08 Daylight Savings Setup End of Week Day 1~7 1

Enter the day of the week the system should (1 = Sun, 2 = Mon, etc.)

Administrator) Setting the System Time 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the system time Service Codes for digits

the System Administrator.
Clock/Calendar Display 2-241

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-02-07 System Options for Multiline Telephones 1~8 3

Time and Date Display Mode Type 1 = (12 hour)
Select the display mode (type 1 ~ 8) for Time 10 MAR TUE 3:15PM
and Date (i.e., time and date format). Type 2 = (12 hour)
3:15PM MAR 10 TUE
Type 3 = (12 hour) 3-10
TUE 3:15 PM
Type 4 = (12 hour)
3:15PM TUE 10 MAR
Type 5 = (24 hour)
10 MAR TUE 15:15
Type 6 = (24 hour)
15:15 MAR 10 TUE
Type 7 = (24 hour)
3-10 TUE 15:15
Type 8 = (24 hour)
15:15 TUE 10 MAR

extension port =
Class 1


Operation
The date must be set in system programming (10-01).
To set the system Time:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 728.
3. Dial two digits for the hour (24 hour clock, 13 = 1:00 PM).
4. Dial two digits for the minutes (00~59).
2-242 Clock/Calendar Display

Issue 2.0
Code Restriction
Description
Code Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only
certain types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system applies Code Restriction
according to the Code Restriction Class. The system allows for up to 15 Code Restriction Classes and
960 extensions.
Conditions
If a Code Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table, the
system does not restrict the call.
Code Call Digit counting may prevent users from taking advantage of long distance
automated services like Contact Center and automated Technical Service.
Code Restriction is applied when accessing ARS.
If Program 21-01-10 is programmed with an entry other than 0, a call cannot have a talk
path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing
an out going call. This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem
when dialing 911. Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller. This option should be kept at
its default setting of 0 to prevent any problem with dialing 911.
Common Permit Code Table
Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Code
Restriction Classes to dial. To let all users dial 911, for example, put 911 in the Common
Permit Code Table. The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and
Common Restrict Code Tables. The system provides 10 tables, with up to four digits in
each table entry. Each code is four digits maximum, using 0~9, #, Q and Recall (as a wild
card).
Common Restrict Code Table
The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Code
Restriction Classes. To prevent all users from dialing directory assistance (411), for
example, put 411 in the Common Restrict Code Table. Be sure you do not allow the codes
you want to restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permit Code Table. The
system provides 10 tables, with up to four digits in each table entry. Each code is 12 digits
maximum, using 0~9, #, Q and Recall (as a wild card).
Code Restriction 2-243

Issue 2.0
Restrict Code Table

When you want Code Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use the
Restrict Code Table. To block only 1-900 calls, for example, enter 1900 in the Restrict Code
Table. (If the same Code Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the
system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both
tables are not restricted.) The system provides four tables, with 60 entries (restricted codes)
in each table. A restricted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0~9, #, and Recall (as a wild
card).
Permit Code Table
The Permit Code Table lets you set up Code Restriction so that users can dial only selected
(permitted) telephone numbers. Use this table when you want to restrict most calls. To
allow all users to dial only area code 203, for example, enter 1203 in the Permit Code
Table. 1 + 203 + NNX + nnnn are the only numbers users can dial. (If the same Code
Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that
you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.)
The system provides four tables, with 200 entries (permitted codes) in each table. A
permitted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0~9, #, and Recall (as a wild card).
International Call Restriction
International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial.
You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls, or you can build a permit table to
allow only certain calls. To allow most international calls, use the International Call Restrict
Table. To prevent most international calls, use the International Call Allow Table. The
system provides 10 International Call Restrict tables with up to four digits in each table
entry and 20 International Call Allow tables, with up to six digits in each table entry. Valid
entries are 0~9, #, and Recall (as a wild card).
Code Restriction for Speed Dialing
Speed Dialing can bypass or follow Code Restriction. If you allow many users to program
Speed Dialing, consider code restricting the numbers they dial. If only administrators can
program Speed Dialing, Code Restriction may not be necessary. You can separately
restrict Group and Common Speed Dialing.
Toll Digit Counting
Use Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial. You can use this
option to prevent users from accessing local dial-up services. For example, set the
Maximum Number of Digits in Local Calls to seven to limit local callers to dialing the
exchange code (NNX) and local address (nnnn) only. The system provides four tables in
which you can make entries for this option. The range is 4~30 digits.
Code Call Digit Counting
With Code Call Digit Counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can
dial. This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial-up
services. You can make four entries (4~30 digits).
2-244 Code Restriction

Issue 2.0
Toll Free Trunks

Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted, such as the company presidents Private
Line. Users can place calls on Code Free Trunks anytime to anywhere, without
inadvertently being Code restricted.
PBX Call Restriction
Code Restriction programming lets you enable/disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX
access codes. You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have trunks
programmed for behind PBX operation. Refer to PBX Compatibility on page 2-1133 feature
for the specifics.
Additional Default Entries For Common Permit Code Table
Additional entries have been added to the default Common Permit Code Table. The default
setting is as follows:
Table 1: 911 Table 4: 1822 Table 7: 1855
Tie Line Code Restriction Enhanced

In Program 34-01-05: E&M Tie Line Basic Setup System Code Restriction, if this option is
set to 0, the system follows the setting in Program 21-05-13: Code Restriction Class
Restriction of Tie Line Calls to determine whether or not the Code restriction setting in
Program 34-08 is to be followed. If this option is set to 1, the system follows the system
Code restriction settings defined in Program 21-05-01 through Program 21-05-13.
A user can temporarily override extension Code Restrictions.
The system allows or denies outgoing access to trunks depending on Code Restriction.
If the system detects the call is answered by detecting reversal in an analog trunk this
restores both way voice paths immediately.
When using DISA or Tie Lines, additional programming is required for Code Restriction
(DISA, refer to Program 25-10; Tie Lines, refer to Program 34-04).
A user can temporarily block their extension Code Restriction access, preventing unwanted
calls from being placed on their telephone while they are away from their desk.
Each phone and trunk have a Restriction Class. The higher class applies for outgoing calls.
For example:
When trunk class is 01 and station class 02, Toll Restriction Class 02 is applied.
When trunk class is 15 and station class 03, Toll Restriction Class 15 is applied.
Default Settings
Disabled

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction, Dial Block
PBX Compatibility
Multiple Trunk Types

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-08 Basic Trunk Data Setup Toll Restriction 0 = Restriction Disabled (No) 1
For each trunk, enter 1 to Enable Toll 1 = Restriction Enabled (Yes)
Restriction; enter 0 to Disable Code Restriction.
15-02-30 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Toll 0 = Vir. Ext. (Virtual Extension 1
Restriction Class Class)
Select the Toll Restriction Class to be used 1 = Real Ext. (Real Extension

when placing a call from a virtual extension. Class)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1


extension.

Transfer)
Toll Restriction.
21-01-10 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial 0 ~ 24 0

Digits for Toll Restriction Path
If this option is programmed with an entry other
than 0, a call does not have a talk path unless
the user dials at least the number of digits
entered in this option when placing an outgoing
call.
This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this
program causes a problem when dialing 911.
Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call does
not have a talk path, preventing the emergency
dispatcher from hearing the caller. This option
should be kept at its default setting of 0 to
prevent any problem with dialing 911. If the
system detects the call is answered, by
detecting Reversal in analog trunks, this
restores both way voice paths immediately.
21-01-15 System Options for Outgoing Calls 0 = Disable 0

Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line (Toll 1 = Enable
Restriction)
Enable or Disable the Incoming Line feature
system wide. When enabled applies code
restriction when hook flash is sent on inbound
trunk followed by dialed digits.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Incoming Line


Assign a Toll Restriction class to an extension 1 ~ 9 (9 = Power Failure Mode)
for modes 1-8. Restriction Class 1 ~ 15
21-05-01 Toll Restriction Class International Call 0 = Unassign (No) 1, 6 ~ 15 = 0

Restriction Table 1 = Assign (Yes) 2~5=1
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, Assign
or Unassign the International Call Restrict Table
(Program 21-06-01).
21-05-02 Toll Restriction Class International Call 0 = Unassign 1, 3 ~ 15 = 0

Permit Code Table 1 = Assign 2=1
or Unassign the International Call Permit Table
(Program 21-06-02).
21-05-04 Toll Restriction Class Maximum Number of 1 ~ 4 =Table 1, 2, 6 ~ 15 = 0

Digits Table Assignment 0 =Disable (None) 3=1
Select the table (defined in Program 21-06-03) 4=2
to be used to determine the maximum number 5=3
of digits allowed for outgoing calls.
21-05-05 Toll Restriction Class Common Permit 0 = Unassigned 1, 8 ~ 15 = 0

Code Table 1 = Assigned 2~7=1
Choose whether the table set up by Program

21-06-04 is referred to, or not referred to.
21-05-06 Toll Restriction Class Common Restriction 0 = Unassigned 1, 6 ~ 15 = 0

Table 1 = Assigned 2~5=1
Choose whether the table set up by Program

21-06-05 is referred to, or not referred to.
21-05-07 Toll Restriction Class Permit Code Table 1 ~ 4 = Table 1, 2, 6 ~ 15 = 0

Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring to the table 0 = Disable (None) 3=1
set up by Program 21-06-06. 4=2

5=3
21-05-08 Toll Restriction Class Restriction Table 1 ~ 4 = Table 0

Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring to the table 0 = Disable (None)
set up by Program 21-06-07.
21-05-09 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for 0 = Does Not Restrict 0

Common Speed Dials 1 = Following Restriction Check
For the Code Restriction Class you select,
Enable (1) or Disable (0) Code Restriction for
Common Speed Dialing numbers.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-05-10 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for 0 = Does Not Restrict 0

Group Speed Dials 1 = Following Restriction Check
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, Enable
(1) or Disable (0) Code Restriction for Group
Speed Dialing numbers.
21-05-11 Toll Restriction Class Intercom Call 0 = Disable 0

Restriction 1 = Enable
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, Enable
or Disable Intercom Call Restriction. If enabled,

extensions cannot place or receive Intercom
calls.
21-05-12 Toll Restriction Class PBX Call Restriction 0 = Disable (No) 1 ~ 6, 8 ~ 15 = 0

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, Enable 1 = Enable (Yes) 7=1
or Disable PBX Call Restriction.
21-05-13 Toll Restriction Class Restriction of Tie 0 = Disable 0

Line Calls 1 = Enable
Select whether the Toll Restriction set up in

Program 34-08-01 is Enabled or Disabled.
21-06-01 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup A maximum of four digits to be Tables 1 ~ 10 =
International Call Restriction Table assigned. No Setting
Enter the international dialing codes you want

to restrict.
21-06-02 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Dial (maximum of six digits) Tables 1 ~ 20 =
International Call Permit Code Table No Setting
Enter the international dialing codes you want

to permit.
21-06-03 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup 4 ~ 30 = 4 ~ 30 digits Tables 1 ~ 4 = 30

Maximum Number of Digits Table
Assignment
Select the maximum number of digits allowed in
outgoing calls for each table (4 ~ 30).
21-06-04 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Common Dial (maximum of four digits) Table 1 = 911
Permit Code Table Table 2 = 1800
Program codes into the Common Permit Code Table 3 = 1888
Table. Table 4 = 1822
Table 5 = 1833
Table 6 = 1844
Table 7 = 1855
Table 8 = 1866
Table 9 = 1877
Table 10 = No
Setting
21-06-05 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Common Dial (maximum of 12 digits) Table 1 = 900
Restriction Table Table 2 = 1900
Program codes into the Common Restrict Code Table 3 = 976
Table. Tables 4 ~ 10 =
No Setting

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-06-06 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Permit Dial (maximum of 12 digits) Table 1 ~ 4 = No
Code Table Setting
Program codes into the Permit Code Tables.
21-06-07 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Deny Dial (maximum of 12 digits) Table 1 ~ 4 = No
Restriction Table Setting
Program codes into the Restrict Code Tables

(200 codes per table maximum).
21-06-08 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup PBX Dial (maximum of 2 digits) Table 1 ~ 4 = No
Access Code Setting
The system allows up to four tables for PBX
access codes. PBX Access Codes can have
up to two digits, using 0~9, #, and LINE KEY
1 (dont care). Refer to PBX Compatibility on
page 2-1133 for the specifics.
21-21-01 Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk 1 ~ 15 1

Basis Setting) Restriction Class
Enter the Toll Restriction Class for the selected

trunk.
34-01-05 E&M Tie Line Basic Setup System Toll 0 = No (Off) 0

Restriction 1 = Yes (On)
Determine if an incoming Tie Line call should

be subject to Toll Restriction.
34-08-01 Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines Maximum of 10 digits (0~9, , No Setting
Define the Toll Restriction data for E&M Tie #)
Lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line
Code Restriction is enabled in Program
21-05-13.
35-02-01 SMDR Output Options Toll Restricted Call 0 = Not Displayed 1

SMDR can include or exclude calls blocked by 1 = Displayed
Toll Restriction.
Operation
To place a trunk call if your system is Code Restricted:

1. Place call normally.
If your Code Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial, your call is cut off.

Issue 2.0
Code Restriction Override
Description
Code Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass the Code Restriction for an extension. This
helps a user that must place an important call that Code Restriction normally prevents. For example, you
could set up Code Restriction to block 900 calls and then provide a Code Restriction Override code to
your attendant and executives. When the attendant or executive needs to place a 900 call, they just:
Press Speaker, dial a service code, and enter their override code.
Press Speaker and dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9 or #9 002).
Place the 900 call without restriction
You can assign a different Code Restriction Override code to each extension. Or, extensions can share
the same override code.
Code Restriction Override bypasses all Code Restriction programming. Walking Code Restriction allows
you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user. When a call is placed using Walking Code
Restriction, the restriction for the call is based on the Code Restriction level defined in Programs
21-05-xx and Programs 21-06-xx.
Conditions
Off-Premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines.
In the Class heading in the SMDR report, POTA indicates that the call was placed using
Temporary Code Restriction Override.
Code Restriction Override and Walking Code Restriction temporarily overrides an
extension Code Restriction.
If the system has VRS, users hear, Your call cannot go through. Please call the operator
when they dial a number that Code Restriction prevents.
Default Settings
Disabled
Related Features
Code Restriction
Code Restriction Override 2-251

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Temporary Toll Restriction 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Override digits
If required, change the service code (775) for
Temporary Toll Restriction Override.

Operation) Toll Restriction Override 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, change the service code (663) for digits

Toll Restriction Override.


(Service Code 775).
21-01-07 System Options for Outgoing Calls Toll 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Restriction Override Time
Set the Toll Restriction Override Time. After
dialing the Toll Restriction Override codes, the
system removes Toll Restriction for this Time.
21-07-01 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Maximum four digits No Setting
Assign Toll Restriction Override codes to (0 ~ 9, #, )
extensions. Each code must have four digits,
using any combination of 0 ~ 9, # and . Each

extension can have a separate code, or many
extensions can share the same override code.
21-14-01 Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup Dial (Six digits) No Setting
User ID
Enter the Walking Toll Restriction Override User
ID codes (six digits) into tables. Up to 500
different override codes can be entered.
21-14-02 Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup 1 ~ 15 1

Walking Toll Restriction Class Number
Enter the Walking Toll Restriction Class of
Service (1 ~ 15) to be used for each table
number assigned in Program 21-14-01.
2-252 Code Restriction Override

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Toll Restriction.
35-02-02 SMDR Output Options PBX Calls 0 = Not Displayed 1

When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR can 1 = Displayed
include all calls or just calls dialed using the

PBX trunk access code.
35-02-03 SMDR Output Options Trunk Number or 0 = Name 1

Name 1 = Number
Select whether the system should display the
trunk Name (0) or the Number (1) on SMDR
reports.
If this option is set to 0, Program 35-02-14
must be set to 0.
35-02-04 SMDR Output Options Summary (Daily) 0 = Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed
provide a daily summary (at midnight every

night).
35-02-05 SMDR Output Options Summary (Weekly) 0 = Not Displayed 1

provide a weekly summary (every Saturday at

midnight).
35-02-06 SMDR Output Options Summary (Monthly) 0 = Not Displayed 1

provide a monthly summary (at midnight on the

last day of the month).
35-02-07 SMDR Output Options Toll Charge Cost 0 = Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed
include toll charges.
35-02-08 SMDR Output Options Incoming Call 0 = Not Displayed 1

Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed
include incoming calls. If you disable this option

(0), incoming calls do not print.
35-02-09 SMDR Output Options Extension Number 0 = Name 1

or Name 1 = Number
Set this option (1) to have the SMDR report
include extension numbers. Set this option (0)

to have the SMDR report include extension
names.
35-02-10 SMDR Output Options All Lines Busy 0 = Not Displayed 0

(ALB) Output 1 = Displayed
Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB) indication

should be displayed.
35-02-12 SMDR Output Options DID Table Name 0 = Not Displayed 0

Output 1 = Displayed
Determine if the DID table name should be

displayed.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
35-02-13 SMDR Output Options CLI Output When 0 = Not Displayed 0

DID to Trunk 1 = Displayed
Determine if the CLI output should be displayed

for DID.
35-02-14 SMDR Output Options Date 0 = Not Displayed 0

Determine whether the date should be 1 = Displayed
displayed on SMDR reports.
This option must be set to 0 if the trunk name is
set to be displayed in Program 35-02-03.
35-02-15 SMDR Output Options CLI/DID Number 0 = CLI (CLIP) 0

Switching 1 = DID Calling Number
Determine whether or not the CLI/DID Number

2 = Caller ID Name
Switching should be displayed.
35-02-16 SMDR Output Options Trunk Name or 0 = Trunk Port Name 0

Received Dialed Number 1 = Received Dialed Number
Determine how the SMDR should print
incoming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If set

to (1), ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits. If
set to (0) trunk names are printed instead.
35-02-17 SMDR Output Options Print Account Code 0 = ACC 0

or Caller Name of Incoming Call 1 = CNAME
Determine if SMDR should print Account Code

or Caller Name of Incoming Call.
35-02-18 SMDR Output Options Print Mode for 0 = Normal 0

Caller Name of Incoming Call 1 = Line Feed
Determine how SMDR should print Caller

Name of Incoming Call.

Issue 2.0
Walking Code Restriction
663?

Issue 2.0
Temporary Code Restriction Override
service code be changed

775?

Issue 2.0
Operation
To temporarily override a restricted extension Code Restriction:
You can override restriction for only one call at a time.

NOTE

- OR -
At single line telephone, lift the handset.

2. Dial 775.
3. Dial the 4-digit Code Restriction Override code.
If you wait too long before going to the next step, you may have to repeat the procedure. After dialing
the service code, the display indicates the override codes as they are being entered. As the last digit is
entered, the display is cleared and ICM dial tone is heard.
You hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
4. Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
5. Dial the number without any restriction.
To use your Walking Code Restriction level at an extension:
You can override restriction for only one call at a time.

NOTE

- OR -

2. Dial 663 and dial the 6-digit user ID for Walking Toll Restriction.
After dialing the service code, the display indicates the override codes as they are being entered. As
the last digit is entered, the display is cleared and ICM dial tone is heard.
You hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
3. Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
4. Dial the number.
The call is allowed or denied based on the users Toll Restriction Class of Service level.

Issue 2.0
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Description
Code Restriction, Dial Block lets a user temporarily block dialing on an extension. This helps a user
block his or her phone from being used by another person while they are away from their desk. A user
must enter a 4-digit personal code to enable/disable this feature.
Dial Block can also be set by the supervisors access code. If Dial Block is set by an extension user, the
supervisor cannot release it. If Dial Block is set by the supervisors code, the extension user cannot
release it.
Important: This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an
assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a
supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.
Conditions
If the system is reset by a first initialize, the Dial Block feature is cleared.
This feature is not available for ISDN S-Bus extensions.
Both Program 21-09-01 (Code Restrict Class) and Program 21-10 (Dial Block Restriction
Class per Extension) can be set at the same time. However the system gives priority to the
setting in Program 21-10.
Dial Block can temporarily block an extension Code Restriction setting by changing to a
predefined table that has more restrictions.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
None
2-258 Code Restriction, Dial Block

Issue 2.0
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Administration) Dial Block by Supervisor 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign a service code used by the supervisor to digits

set Dial Block for another extension.

Operation) Dial Block 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign a service code to use for Dial Block. digits

extension port =
Class 1


Dial Block.
21-07-01 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Maximum of four digits (fixed) No Setting
Assign Toll Restriction Override codes to
extensions. Each code must have four digits,
using any combination of 0 ~ 9, # and . Each

extension can have a separate code, or many
extensions can share the same override code.
21-09-01 Dial Block Setup Toll Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 15

with Dial Block
Assign a Code Restriction COS (1 ~ 15) when

the Dial Block feature is used.
21-09-02 Dial Block Setup Supervisor Password 0 ~ 9, , # No Setting

Assign a 4-digit password used by the (4-digit fixed)
supervisor to enable or disable Dial Block for

other extensions.
Code Restriction, Dial Block 2-259

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-10-01 Dial Block restriction Class per Extension 0, 1 ~ 15 0

Assign the Code Restriction COS (1 ~ 15) used (0 = No Setting)
by an extension when the Dial Block feature is
enabled. If this data is 0, Code Restriction COS
follows Program 21-09-01.
90-19-01 Dial Block Release [Release?]: Dial 1+ press No Setting

Enter the extension number to release from the Transfer
Dial Block Restriction. This program can be (Press Transfer to cancel.)

used when a password is forgotten by the user.
Operation
To set Dial Block:

- OR -

2. Dial 600 (default).
3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block Code (as set in programming).
4. Dial 1.
Confirmation tone is heard.
5. Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up.
To release Dial Block:

- OR -

2. Dial 600.
3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4. Dial 0.
2-260 Code Restriction, Dial Block

Issue 2.0
To set Dial Block from another extension:

- OR -

2. Dial 601 (default).
3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code (as set in programming).
4. Dial the extension number to blocked.
5. Dial 1.
To release Dial Block from another extension:

- OR -

2. Dial 601.
3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4. Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block.
5. Dial 0.
Code Restriction, Dial Block 2-261

Issue 2.0
Conference
Description
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. With
Conference, a user can set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. The
GCD-CP10 provides 64 (96 when the analog modem function is not used) conference ports, to allow
any number of internal or external parties to be conferenced together for a limit of 32 parties. This means
that one extension can conference up to 31 internal and/or external parties together (the originator would
be the 32nd party reaching the maximum of 32). While this Conference call is active, another user can
initiate a separate Conference also for a limit of 32 parties, or any number of conferences can be
initiated with any number of parties (up to 32) until all 64 Conference ports are busy.
Conditions
96 conference ports are available when the analog modem function is not used.
An ADA module is required for speech recording.
Split allows a user to alternate (i.e., switch) between their callers in Conference. This allows
a dispatcher, for example, to control a telephone meeting between themselves, a customer
and a service technician. The dispatcher can meet together with all parties, privately set up
a service strategy with the technician and then meet again to set the schedule.
Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially
set up. If a user places an outside call, conferences extension 101 followed by extension
102, Split cycles from the trunk, to 101 and finally to 102. The Split cycle then repeats.
If a users extension has Barge-In enabled, they can also Barge-In on an established
Conference. This permits, for example, an attendant or supervisor to join a Conference in
an emergency. It also allows a co-worker to leave a conference and then rejoin the
telephone meeting when it is convenient to do so.
If a users extension has Barge-In monitor enabled (Program 20-13-10), they can Silent Monitor
a conference already in progress (Program 99-01-49 option 49 must be set to 1).
A Class of Service option is available which allows or denies an extension user from
automatically setting up a Conference/Tandem Trunking call upon hanging up the
telephone.
An extension with Barge-In enabled can Transfer a call to an existing Conference. This
allows, for example, an attendant to locate co-workers and then Transfer them to an
existing telephone meeting. There is no need for the attendant to locate all the parties at the
same time and sequentially add them into the Conference. Transfer Call Into Conference
Code (624).
2-262 Conference
Issue 2.0
An option is available which allows an extension Conf key (SC 751: 07) to be programmed
for Conference or for Transfer. When set for Transfer, the user places a call on hold, dials
the extension to which it should be transferred, and presses Conf. The call is then
transferred. When set for Conference, with an active call, the user presses Conf, places a
second call, then presses Conf twice. All the calls are then connected.
Users can Barge-In on a Conference call if allowed in programming.
Define the outgoing call options for each trunk and user.
Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area.
DISA and Tie Line users may use the Barge-In feature on a Conference call if they know
the service code and are permitted in their DISA/Tie Line Class of Service.
Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging.
Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.
A user can set up an Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Conference and then drop out of the
call, allowing the remaining parties to continue the conversation. Establish two trunk calls,
press Hold and dial #8.
You can optionally program Conf (Transfer) for Transfer. In this case, the multiline terminal
must have a Conference function key. The system also allows a call to be transferred into a
Conference call.
When the Conference Originator hangs up with a conference on Hold, or when trying to add
another caller, all internal calls are dropped.
Conferencing when talking on a Virtual Extension:
While talking on a Virtual Extension, if the station has an internal call on Hold, a conference
call cannot be established.
While talking on a Virtual Extension, if the station receives an intercom call (call to its actual
station number), a conference call cannot be established.
While talking on a Virtual Extension, if the station has a call on Hold, a conference call cannot
be established.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Conference 2-263
Issue 2.0
None
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


If required, change the code users dial to Split digits

while on a call.
11-12-57 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT, SLT #8

Tandem Trunking 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
With two trunks in Conference press Hold and digits

dial #8 and the Conference/Tandem happens.
Transfer Into Conference 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, change the service code used to digits

transfer a call into a Conference call.
Customize the one-digit Service Codes used for
Barge-In.
14-01-04 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Gain 1 ~ 57 32 (0 dB)

Level for Conference and Transfer Calls (-15.5 dB ~ +12.5 dB in 0.5 dB
Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk intervals)

when it is part of an unsupervised conference.
2-264 Conference
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-02-24 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Conference 0

Conference Key Mode 1 = Transfer
Allow an extension Conf key to be programmed
for Conference or for Transfer. When set for
Transfer, the user places a call on hold, dials
the extension to which it should be transferred,
then presses the Conf key. The call is then
transferred. When set for Conference, with an
active call, the user presses the Conf key,
places a second call, then presses the Conf key
twice. All the calls are then connected.

752 by default)

SLT Call Waiting for Answer Mode 1 = Hookflash + Service Code


extension port =
Class 1
20-11-21 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer 0 = Allow COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) Restriction for Tandem Trunking 1 = Deny
on Hang Up
Allow/Deny an extension users ability to set up

a tandem/conference call automatically when
they hang up.



Enable the Barge-In Speech Mode or Monitor
Mode at the initiating extension (i.e., Barge-In
initiator).


Conference 2-265
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3




Operation
To establish a Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1. Establish intercom or trunk call.
2. Press Conf or Conf softkey (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 07).
3. Dial the extension you want to add.
- OR -
Access outside call.

- OR -
Retrieve call from Park orbit.

To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or press the Speaker key and dial 9, the Trunk
Access Code + the trunk number (default #9). You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more
parties to your Conference.
4. When called party answers, press the Add softkey or Conf twice.
If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system Conference
limit.
If the call being added is busy/unanswered:
With an outside call, press the line or Call Appearance (CAP) key for a call previously added to the
Conference. The unanswered call drops and the initiator is back into the Conference call.
Adding an Intercom call to an outside Conference call: Press the Conf softkey on the multiline terminal
display or Conf twice to re-establish the Conference. If using a non-display telephone, press Conf
twice.
With only Intercom calls in the Conference: Press Conf twice to re-establish the Conference. If the voice
mail answers, there is no way to drop that extension out. You must drop the Conference call.
5. Repeat steps 2~4 to add more parties.
2-266 Conference
Issue 2.0
Single Line Telephone

1. Establish Intercom or trunk call.
2. Hookflash and dial #1.
3. Dial extension you want to add.
- OR -
Access trunk call.

- OR -
Retrieve call from Park orbit.

4. Hookflash and repeat step 3 to add more parties.
- OR -
Hookflash twice to set up the Conference.
To Split (alternate) between the parties in Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press Conf (Transfer) or Conference key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 07).

2. Dial Split service code (794).
Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Press the Conf
softkey or press Conf twice to set up the Conference again.
1. Hookflash and dial 794.

Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Hookflash twice
to set up the Conference again.
To drop an outside call from the Conference:

1. Press Hold to place the conference call on hold.
2. Hang up.
The lines involved in the Conference ring back separately to the telephone.
3. Answer and disconnect the unwanted outside call.

4. To re-establish the Conference, answer the remaining call by pressing Conf after each call is
answered. Press Conf twice when all calls have been answered.
Conference 2-267
Issue 2.0
To exit a Conference with internal and outside conference members without affecting the other
parties:
Multiline Terminal
1. Hang up.
If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers, the outside callers hear what is programmed
in Program 10-04-01.

1. Hang up.
If you are not permitted to use Tandem Trunking, outside callers may hear Music on Hold.
To exit a Conference when all conference members are outside parties without affecting the
other parties:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press Hold key.
2. Dial # 8.
3. Hang up.

1. Hookflash and dial # 8.
2. Hang up.
To Barge-In to Conference Call:

1. Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code (default = 710).
system automatically places a Callback to the extension.
2. Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call.
When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference,
depending on system programming, and all display multiline terminals show the joined party. If a
Conference is not possible:
the extension user hears a warning tone
the DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group
- OR -
the Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks:
1. Dial the extension number of the internal party.
2. Dial the single digit service code, if programmed.
Instead of the single digit service code, the service code 710 can also be dialed at this point.
2-268 Conference
Issue 2.0
To Transfer a Call into a Conference:

1. While on a call, press Hold.
2. Dial the Transfer to Conference service code (default = 624).
system automatically places a Callback to the extension.
The display shows the line Number, Number/Name and Extension Name/Number.
3. Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone in a Conference call.
If an error tone is heard, Barge-In is not enabled for the extension and the call cannot go through.
Retrieve the call by pressing the flashing line or Call Appearance (CAP) Key or hang up and the call
recalls the extension.
When the call is transferred into the Conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the
conference, depending on the entries in Program 20-13-17 and Program 80-01, and all display
multiline terminals show the joined party.
To cancel the transfer, press the flashing line or Call Appearance (CAP) Key to retrieve the call.
4. Hang up.
Conference 2-269
Issue 2.0
Conference Remote
Description
The Remote Conference feature enhances the built in conference capabilities of the SV9100 by allowing
outside parties to dial a Remote Conference pilot number and password to connect to a Conference call.
The conference circuits on the CPU are used to join each party to the conference. A maximum of 32
conference participants is possible for one Conference.
A maximum of 20 simultaneous Remote Conference calls are possible with proper licensing and
available conference resources. In addition, the conference call can be password protected so that any
user joining the conference would be required to enter a password before being connected.
Conditions
The Barge-In feature cannot be used when an extension is on a Remote Conference call.
The Remote Conference pilot number cannot be set as the destination for Call Forward.
A Remote Conference participant cannot place the conference call on Hold.
Calls cannot be transferred to a Remote Conference pilot.
The maximum number of system conference resources is 96. If the built in modem
functionality is enabled this is reduced to 64.
Each extension or trunk needs one conference channel to participate in a conference.
The maximum number of participants per Remote Conference is 32 if conference resources
are available.
A maximum of 20 simultaneous Remote Conferences are possible if conference resources
are available.
Up to 96 callers can participate in a Remote Conference if conference resources are
available and the built in modem is disabled.
A conference call cannot be split over the CPU's conference blocks.
When joining a conference a busy tone will be heard if the maximum number of Remote
Conference participants has been reached or if a conference resource is not available.
As the conference time limit nears, the system will provide a warning tone to all participants
based on Program 20-34-05. Once this timer expires, if the conference is still ongoing, the
participants will be disconnected by the system.
If an incorrect password is entered a warning tone is heard and the caller must hang up and
dial back into the conference pilot.
One Remote Conference license (0047) is required for each Remote Conference.
2-270 Conference Remote

Issue 2.0
A VRS license (1001) is required for the Remote Conference only if you are going to
password protect the conference as VRS is used to play the please enter your password
prompt. At default, remote conferences are set to prompt for a password in Program
20-34-06 and conferences 1-4 have passwords set. If you set the conference to 1 (Skip) in
Program 20-34-06 you do not need the VRS license but still need the remote conference
license (0047).
If Program 20-34-06 is set to normal and no VRS license exists in the system you will get
ring no answer (RNA) when calling the Remote Conference pilot.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Remote Conference license (0047)
Port License (0300)
Version 1 Enhancement license (0411)
VRS Port License (1001) Required if remote conferences will be password protected.
Related Features
Simple MCU Video

Conference Remote 2-271

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-19-01 Remote Conference Group Pilot Number Must work within current system No Setting
Enter the pilot number for remote conference. dialing plan.
14-01-03 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Level Trunks 1~400 32 (0dB)
Use this option to select the CODEC gain for 1 ~ 57
the trunk. The option sets the gain (signal (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB
amplification) for the trunk you are intervals)
programming
14-01-04 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Gain 1 ~ 57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 32 (0 dB)
Use this option to select the CODEC gain type
used by the trunk when it is part of an
Unsupervised Conference.
14-01-05 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Gain 1 ~ 57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 16 (-8 dB)
Use this option to select the CODEC gain type
used by the trunk when it is part of an
Unsupervised Conference.
14-02-09 Analog Trunk Data Setup Busy Tone 0 = Disabled 0

Detection 1 = Enabled
Set the basic options for each analog trunk port.
20-13-46 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Disabled COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Remote Conference 1 = Enabled
Set Class of Service option for Remote

conference.
20-34-01 Remote Conference Group Setting Maximum of 12 characters. Conferences

Remote Conference Name 1~4=
Set name for remote conference 1 - 20. Conf 1 - Conf 4
Conferences
5 ~ 20 = blank
20-34-02 Remote Conference Group Setting Maximum of 4 numbers. Conferences

Remote Conference Password 1 ~ 4 = 1111
Set password for remote conference 1 - 20. Conferences

5 ~ 20 = blank
20-34-03 Remote Conference Group Setting 0 ~ 32 Conferences

Remote Conference Remote Conference - 1~8=8
Maximum Participants Conferences
Define the maximum number of participants of 9 ~ 20 = 0
a Remote Conference.
20-34-04 Remote Conference Group Setting 0 ~ 64800 seconds 7200 seconds

Remote Conference - Maximum Conference
Duration
Set the time limit (in seconds) for each
conference.
When this time passes, the conference is
disconnected by the SV9100.
2-272 Conference Remote

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-34-05 Remote Conference Group Setting 0 ~ 64800 seconds 300 seconds

Remote Conference - Ending Conference
Alert Tone Time
Determine how long prior to disconnecting a
Remote Conference call (based on the
maximum conference duration above) the
SV9100 should send out a beep.
This is used to warn the conference
participants of the pending disconnect.
20-34-06 Remote Conference Group Setting 0 = Normal 0

Remote Conference - Password Mode 1 = Skip
Set remote conference to skip password or

prompt for password.
20-34-07 Remote Conference Group Setting MCU 0 = Disable 0

Mode for Remote Conference 1 = Mode1
If using the Simple MCU Video feature set the 2 = Mode2
MCU video mode for the remote conference.
This will also require VoIP licenses (5103).

Setting this value for mode 1 or mode 2
determines whether Program 84-27-22 or Program
84-27-23 is used.
Operation
Joining a Remote Conference Call:

1. Internal Party: Lift the handset and dial the extension number of the Remote Conference pilot
number (assigned in Program 11-19-01).
- OR -
External Party: Dial the telephone number for the Remote Conference pilot number (assigned in
Program 11-19-01).
2. If enabled, the system prompts for a password.
3. Dial the conference group password.
4. If the correct password is entered the caller is added to the Remote Conference. If the wrong
password is entered a warning tone is heard and you must hang up and dial back into the
conference pilot.
As the conference time limit nears, the system will provide a warning tone to all participants
based on Program 20-34-05. Once this timer expires, if the conference is still ongoing, the
participants will be disconnected by the system.
If an incorrect password is entered a warning tone is heard and the caller must hang up and
dial back into the conference pilot.
Conference Remote 2-273

Issue 2.0
Description
Voice Call Conference lets extension users in the same work area join in a trunk Conference. To initiate
a Voice Call Conference, an extension user just presses the Meet-Me Conference key and tells their
co-workers to join the call. The system releases the privacy on the trunk, and other users can just press
the trunk line key to join the call. Line keys assigned for the trunk blink indicating that privacy has been
released, and others can join the current call.
Voice Call Conference does not use the telephone system features to announce the call. The person
initiating the Voice Call Conference just announces it verbally. A tone, indicating others have joined the
conference, can be provided.
The GCD-CP10 provides 64 (96 when the analog modem function is not used) conference circuits, to
allow two groups of internal or external parties to be conferenced together up to a limit of 32.
Privacy Mode Toggle Option
The Privacy Mode Toggle option allows an extension user to quickly change an outside call from the
non-private mode to the private mode. If the outside call is on a line key, the user just presses the line
key to switch from non-private mode to private mode. For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle
option, trunks initially have the privacy released. The remainder of the call is private. If the call is on a
Call Appearance (CAP) Key, the user presses their Meet-Me Conference function key instead. Unlike
pressing the line key, pressing the Meet-Me Conference key toggles back and forth between private and
non-private mode for the call.
Conditions
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys and Virtual Extensions do not support Voice Call Conference
Programmable Function keys.
Voice Call Conference requires a Meet-Me Conference function key and trunk line keys.
This feature is not available on single line telephones.
With Caller ID enabled, a call with Privacy Release shows the Caller ID until the call is
answered. It can be viewed again by pressing the line key, though this sets the call to
Private mode. To keep the call on Privacy Release, press the Help + Exit keys.
Default Settings
Disabled
2-274 Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Caller ID
Conference

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-19 Basic Trunk Data Setup Privacy Mode 0 = Disable (No) 0

Toggle Option 1 = Enable (Yes)
Determine if a trunk should be able to be
toggled to a private/non-private line

(0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled). This option is not
required for Voice Call Conference.


752 by default)
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release 2-275

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1



Tone)

31-01-04 System Options for Internal/External Paging 0 ~ 64800 seconds 90 seconds

Privacy Release Time
Set the interval users have to join a Voice Call
Conference after it is announced. (Note that

this interval is also used for Meet Me
Conference.)
Operation
To join a Voice Call Conference (if invited):

1. After Conference request, press indicated line key.
A Conf indication is displayed on both telephones.
A trunk with privacy release or Voice Call Conference blinks.
To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties:

To toggle between Private and Non-Private mode:

1. Press the Meet-Me Conference key (Program 15-07-01, SC 751: 32).
- OR -
Press the Trunk Line Key. (This toggles from Non-Private to Private. To go back to
Non-Private, the Meet-Me Conference Key above must be pressed.)
2-276 Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release

Issue 2.0
Contact Center
Description
Contact Center uniformly distributes calls among agents of a programmed Contact Center Group. When
a call rings into a Contact Center Group, the system automatically routes the call to the agent that has
been idle the longest. Contact Center is much more sophisticated and comprehensive than Department
Calling and other group services it can accurately judge the work load at each agent and distribute
calls accordingly. The system allows up to 64 Contact Center Groups and 896 Contact Center agents.
You can put any agent in any group. An agent can be in more than one group only when using AICs.
This allows, for example, a Technical Service representative to answer customer service calls at lunch
when many of the Customer Service representatives are unavailable.
The Contact Center Master Number is the extension number of the whole group. Calls directly ringing or
transferred to the Contact Center Master number enter the group and are routed accordingly. Although
the master number can be any valid extension number, you should choose a number that is out of the
normal extension range.
Contact Center operation is further enhanced by:
Contact Center Call Queuing
When all agents in a Contact Center Group are unavailable, an incoming call queues and causes the
Queue Status Display to occur on the Contact Center Group Supervisor display. The display helps the
supervisor keep track of the traffic load in their group.
The Queue Status Displays shows:

The number of calls queued for an available agent in the group.
The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting.
For each Contact Center Group, you can set the following conditions:
The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs.
How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs.
If the supervisor should hear a Queue Alarm when the time in queue portion reoccurs.
This alarm is a single beep tone that reminds the supervisor to check the condition of the queue.
A remote K-CCIS user can call, or transfer to a Contact Center Pilot number. However, an incoming
K-CCIS call to the Contact Center Pilot does NOT provide a Link Reconnect.
Contact Center 2-277

Issue 2.0
Contact Center Overflow (With Announcements)
Contact Center offers extensive overflow options for each Contact Center Group. For example, a caller
ringing in when all agents are unavailable can hear an initial announcement (called the 1st
Announcement). This announcement can be a general greeting like, Thank you for calling. All of our
agents are currently busy helping other customers. Please stay on the line and we will help you shortly.
If the caller continues to wait, you can have them hear another announcement (called the 2nd
Announcement) such as, Your business is important to us. Your call will be automatically answered by
the first available agent. Please stay on the line. If all the Contact Center Group agents still are
unavailable, the call can automatically overflow to another Contact Center Group or the Voice Mail. If all
agents in the overflow Contact Center Group are busy, Lookback Routing automatically ensures that the
waiting call rings into the first agent in either group that becomes free.
You can assign a Contact Center Group with any combination of 1st Announcement, 2nd Announcement
and overflow methods. You can have, for example, a Technical Service group that plays only the 2nd
Announcement to callers and then immediately overflows to Voice Mail. At the same time, you can have
a Customer Service group that plays both announcements and does not overflow.
You can assign a Contact Center Group to play the Queue Depth only when using the VRS for message.
The Queue Depth can be played after the 1st Announcement only, 2nd Announcement only, or after both
Announcements.
Dial Out of Delay Announcements
When listening to a VRS delay announcement, the caller can press a 1-key option to transfer them to
another extension, Voice Mail, Ring Group, another Contact Center Group, or to a Speed Dial bin. The
caller can press the digit during the message only or for X seconds after the message. This per Queue
option effects both the first and second delay announcement if set.
VRS Delay Announcements Using InMail
InMail can provide Contact Center Delay Announcements. Any of the 32 (1~32) InMail Routing
mailboxes (Program 47-07-01) can be set to Announcement mailboxes and can be used as the
message source for the 1st and 2nd Announcement Messages. This option is applicable only to Contact
Center Overflow modes that are assigned Contact Center delayed messages and Program 41-08-03
must be set to 2.
Agent Log In and Log Out Services
A Contact Center Agent can log in and log out of their Contact Center Group. While logged in, the agent
is available to receive Contact Center Group calls. When logged out, the agent is excluded from the
group calls. The programmable keys and Alphanumeric Display on an agent telephone show at a glance
when they are logged in or logged out.
2-278 Contact Center

Issue 2.0
Agent Identity Code (AIC)
An Agent Identity Code (AIC) allows Contact Center agents to log in any extension without setting
Program 41-02-01. Using AIC, Contact Center agents can also log in to multiple Contact Center groups
at the same time (up to 64 Contact Center Groups). The system also allows all extensions (up to the
system maximum) to log in using the same AIC code. AIC and Contact Center groups for each work
period (mode pattern number) can be set in Program 41-18-01 as shown in the following example.
Mode Pattern Number

Operation
Table # AIC
Group
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 789 1 1 1 - - - - - -
2 789 1 2 1 - - - - - -
3 789 1 16 1 - - - - - -
4 567 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
5 678 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6 678 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
7 678 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Example:
With this example, Contact Center works as follows:
Example 1: Log In with AIC 789
During Mode Pattern 1, Contact Center agents belong to Contact Center groups 1, 2, and 16 at the same
time.
During Mode Pattern 2, Contact Center agents belong to only Contact Center group 1.
During Mode Pattern 3~8, Contact Center agents do not belong to any Contact Center group and the
Contact Center extensions work as normal extensions.
During Mode Patterns 1~8, Contact Center agents belong to only Contact Center group 10.
During Mode Patterns 1~8, Contact Center agents belong to Contact Center groups 2, 3 and 5 at the same
time.

Issue 2.0
Multiple Agent Log In
Contact Center agents can log in any extension with multiple AICs (up to three). Using the example
setup above, Contact Center works as follows:
EXAMPLE:
Example 1: Log In with AIC 789 and 567
During Mode Pattern 1, Contact Center agents belong to Contact Center groups 1, 2, 10 and 16 at the
same time.
During Mode Pattern 2, Contact Center agents belong to Contact Center groups 1 and 10.
During Mode Pattern 3~8, Contact Center agents belong to only Contact Center group 10.
Example 2: Log In with AIC 789, 567 and 678
During Mode Pattern 1, Contact Center agents belong to Contact Center groups 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 and 16 at the
same time.
During Mode Pattern 2, Contact Center agents belong to Contact Center groups 1, 2, 3, 5 and 10.
During Mode Pattern 3~8, Contact Center agents belong to only Contact Center groups 2, 3, 5 and 10.
Some conditions with Multiple Agent Log In:

Contact Center agents cannot log in to the system supervisor or group supervisor extension.
To log in with AIC, the extension should be set to AIC Log In mode in Program 41-17-01.
If the extension is set to AIC log in mode in Program 41-17-01, the system ignores the setting of Program
41-02-01 for the extension.
Multiple extensions (up to the maximum capacity of the extension) can log-in with one AIC. For example,
even if Contact Center agent A logs in extension 350 with AIC 789, Contact Center agent B can also log
in to extension 351 with the same AIC 789 at the same time.
A supervisor cannot log out an agent logged in by an AIC code.
Emergency Call
If a Contact Center Agent needs assistance with a caller, they can place an Emergency Call to their
Contact Center Group Supervisor. Once the supervisor answers the Emergency Call, they automatically
monitor both the Contact Center Agent and the caller. If the agent needs assistance, the supervisor can
join in the conversation. Emergency Call can be a big help to inexperienced Contact Center Agents that
need technical advice or assistance with a difficult caller. The supervisor can easily listen to the
conversation and then jump in if the situation gets out of hand.
Enhanced DSS Operation
A programmed extension user can use their DSS Console to monitor the status of the Contact Center
Agents in a group. The DSS Console is an essential tool for supervisors. The console key flash rates tell
the supervisor at a glance which of the group agents is:
Logged onto the group (i.e., in service).
Logged out of the group (i.e., out of service).

Issue 2.0
Busy on a call.
Placing an Emergency Call to the supervisor.
Not available or installed.
The Contact Center Supervisor can use their console also for placing and transferring calls just like
any other extension user.
Flexible Time Schedules
A Contact Center Work Schedule lets you divide a day into segments (called Work Periods) for
scheduling the activity in your Contact Center Groups. You can set up four distinct Work Schedules, with
up to eight Work Periods in each Work Schedule. Each day of the week has one Work Schedule, but
different days can share the same schedule. For example, your Monday through Friday Work Schedule
could consist of only two Work Periods. Work Period 1 could be from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM when your
business is open. Work Period 2 could be from 5:00 PM to 8:00 AM which covers those times when
your business is closed.
Headset Operation (With Automatic Answer)
A Contact Center Agent or Contact Center Group Supervisor can use a customer-provided headset in
place of the handset. The headset conveniently frees up the users hands for other work and provides
privacy while on the call. In addition, a Contact Center Agent with a headset can have Automatic Answer.
This allows an agent busy on a call to automatically connect to the next waiting call when they hang up.
Incoming Call Routing
Incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific Contact Center Groups. These types of calls ring
directly into the Contact Center Group without being transferred by a co-worker or the Automated
Attendant.
Rest Mode
Rest Mode temporarily logs-out a Contact Center agents telephone. There are two types of Rest Mode:
Manual Rest Mode:

A Contact Center Agent can enable Manual Rest Mode anytime they want to temporarily leave the Contact
Center Group. They might want to do this if they go to a meeting or get called away from their work area. While
in Rest Mode, calls to the Contact Center Group do not ring the agents telephone.
Automatic Rest Mode:

When a Contact Center Group has Automatic Rest Mode, the system automatically puts an agents telephone
in Rest Mode if it is not answered. This ensures callers do not have to wait while Contact Center rings an
extension that is not answered. For multiline terminals, the system enables Automatic Rest Mode for all
telephones with Rest Mode keys. For single line telephones, you must set an option in programming to enable
Automatic Rest Mode. If an agents telephone is placed in Rest Mode because a call is not answered, the
agent needs to manually cancel Rest Mode to log back into the Contact Center group.

Issue 2.0
With a Rest Mode key programmed on a Contact Center agents telephone, when the agent is in rest mode,
the key is lit. If the Rest Mode key is pressed while an agent is on a call, the key flashes to indicate a pre-Rest
Mode status. When the current call is finished, the agents telephone is in rest mode. The agent can place
intercom calls or receive direct incoming calls while in Rest Mode. The ability to receive incoming intercom
calls is defined in system programming for each Contact Center group.:

NOTE
A Contact Center System Supervisor cannot be placed in Rest Mode.

NOTE
When logging in with AIC mode, Program 41-18-02 must be set for 41-14-08 to work.
Supervisor, Contact Center Group
You can designate an extension in a Contact Center Group to be the group supervisor. Once assigned
as a Contact Center Group Supervisor, the user can:
During programming, you can choose one of three modes of operation for each Contact Center Group
supervisor:
A Contact Center Group can have only one supervisor. An extension can be a supervisor for only one
Contact Center Group.
Supervisor, Contact Center System
You can designate an extension as a Contact Center System Supervisor. Once assigned as a Contact
Center System Supervisor, the user can:
The system can have only one Contact Center System Supervisor.
Work Time
Work Time temporarily busies-out a Contact Center agents telephone so they can work at their desk
uninterrupted. This gives the agent time to fill out important logs and records as soon as they are
finished with their call. There are two types of Work Time:
Manual Work Time:

A Contact Center Agent can enable Manual Work Time anytime they need to work at their desk undisturbed.
You might prefer this Work Time mode if an agent only occasionally has to fill out follow-up paper work after
they complete their call. When the agent is through catching up with their work, they manually return
themselves to the Contact Center Group.
Automatic Work Time:

The system implements Automatic Work Time for the agent as soon as they hang up their current call. This is
helpful in applications (such as Tech Service groups) where follow-up paperwork is a requirement for every
call. When the agent is done with their work, they manually return themselves to the Contact Center Group.

Issue 2.0
Hotline Key Shows Agent Status
An extension Hotline key provides the normal Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for co-workers and a unique BLF
for Contact Center Agents. Like the supervisors DSS Console BLF, the unique BLF shows when the
covered agent is in service, out of service or busy on a call. This enhanced BLF gives a department
manager, for example, Contact Center Group monitoring abilities without having to become a supervisor
with a DSS Console.
Hotline gives a multiline terminal user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline
partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer
calls to each other just by pressing a single key. Enhanced for Contact Center applications, Hotline
provides a unique Busy Lamp Field for Contact Center agents as well as a BLF for co-workers that are
not Contact Center agents. The charts below show both sets of BLF indications.
BLF For Contact Center Agents
When the key is . . . The Contact Center Agent is . . .

Off Idle and is not a Contact Center Agent
On Busy
Double Wink Off Making an Emergency Call
Wink Off Logged off or not installed
Double Wink On Logged on
BLF For Co-Workers That Are Not Contact Center Agents
When the key is . . . Your co-worker is . . .

Off Idle
On Busy or ringing
Fast Flash In Do Not Disturb All calls (option 3)
or Intercom calls (option 2)
Enhanced Supervisor Options:

A Contact Center supervisor can individually assign extensions to Contact Center Groups, and set an agents
status once assigned. This provides the supervisor with tremendous flexibility to reassign agents as work loads
vary.
Queue Status Display with Scrolling:

When all agents in a Contact Center Group are unavailable, an incoming call queues and causes the Queue
Status Display to occur on the Contact Center Group Supervisor and/or agents display (based on the Class of
Service). The display helps the supervisor keep track of the traffic load in their group. Any display multiline
terminal can have a Queue Status Display Check programmable function key. The multiline terminal user can
press this key anytime while idle, and using the VOL () and VOL (), scroll through the Queue Status
Displays of all the Contact Center Groups. The Queue Status Displays shows (see the Queue Status Display
illustration below):

Issue 2.0
The number of calls queued.

The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting.
Th e n um be r o f
cal ls i n q ue u e. H o w lo n g the lo n ge st qu eu e d
ca l l ha s b ee n w a itin g.
2 LINE -0 01 01 :3 0
N am e o f tru nk th at h as
b ee n q u eu ed the lo ng es t.
For each Contact Center Group, you can set the following conditions:
The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs.
How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs (see the Queue Status display Timing
illustration below).
Queue Status Display holding time.
Queue Status Alarm enable/disable.
Queue Status Alarm sending time.
When Logged Out of Contact Center Group:

When Contact Center agents are logged out and a call is placed into the Contact Center queue, the telephones
of the logged out agents display the Queue Status and they hear the alarm according to the settings defined in
system programming. Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key returns the telephone to
idle until the time in Program 41-20-03 expires again.

Issue 2.0
Do not use both Program 41-15-01~02 and Program 41-20-01~05 to set the Contact Center queue
alarm. Select either one or the other for the system to follow.
Available in Program Available in Program

Feature
41-15-01~02 41-20-01~05
Queue Status Display --- Yes

Queue Status --- Yes
Display Time
Alarm Yes Yes
Alarm Send Time Program 41-15-02 Yes
determines the length/
Interval Time of interval of the alarm. Yes
Queue Status Display
Class of Service --- Yes
Timing of alarm and Alarm triggered after the Alarm triggered after the
display queue status number of calls in number of calls in
Program 41-15-01 is Program 41-20-01 is
exceeded. exceeded. Then follows
Program 41-20-03 timing
for displaying status.
If a telephone is not idle, it cannot use the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key.
The Queue Status Display is not shown and the Queue Alarm is not heard by Contact Center agents in
Off-Duty mode.
To scroll through the Contact Center groups queue status, the Queue Status Display Programmable
Function key must be used. You cannot scroll when the Queue Status Display is displayed due to an
alarm.
If the Queue Status display and alarm are active and the queued called is answered/disconnected, the
display and alarm continue until the times in Program 41-20-02 and Program 41-20-05 expire.
When an overflowed call is in queue, the call is included in its original Contact Center group queue and
not in the group queue to which it overflowed.
The Queue Status is not displayed on a supervisors telephone based on the settings in Programs
41-20-xx. The supervisor must use the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key to view the
queue.
Programmable Wrap-up Timer
When an agent finishes their call, the system automatically starts a wrap-up timer and blocks any
Contact Center calls to the agent. This gives them time to complete important logs and records before a
new call comes in. When the time expires, the system returns the agent to the Contact Center Group to
handle new callers.

Issue 2.0
NEC Contact Center
The NEC Contact Center is a series of Windows-based software programs designed to enhance the
Contact Center features of the UNIVERGE SV9100 Telephone System. The software displays both
real-time data and historical reports. The NEC Contact Center is supported on Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2008, Windows 7 Professional and Ultimate 32- and 64-bit, Windows 8 Professional
and Enterprise 32- and 64-bit, Windows 8.1 Professional and Enterprise 32- and 64-bit and Windows
Embedded Standard (in Server on NEC InServer blade).
Refer to the NEC Contact Center Supervisor Manual for more information.
REFERENCE
Contact Center Group as Overflow Destination
The system can transfer an overflow call to a specific Contact Center Group, off-site via a speed dial bin,
Ring Group or to voice mail using Program 41-09-01. When Program 41-08-02: Contact Center Overflow
Destination has the Contact Center Overflow Destination set to 65, the system overflows the call to the
Group programmed in Program 41-09-01. (The system does not allow you to program a Contact
Centergroup with that Contact Center group as the overflow.) If, while the call is ringing, the extension
where the call was transferred becomes available, both the extension and the overflow Contact Center
group ring.
Contact Center Skill Based Routing
The system can receive and distribute Contact Center calls based on the Agents skill level. There are
seven priority levels that the Agents can be set to for each Contact Center Queue. Each queue can
have a different priority level. This works for both AIC and Normal Agents. The Skill levels are based on
the Login ID that the Agents use.
Refer to the NEC Contact Center Installation Manual for setup instructions.
REFERENCE
Contact Center Caller ID Based Routing
The SV9100 can allocate a Contact Center incoming call to an agent by using Caller ID registered in a
buffer. This is done when a Contact Center Agent presses the [Contact Center Caller ID Marking
Setup] Function Key and marks information of the caller when he thinks this caller would call again. By
the Contact Center Agent pressing the Function Key that marks the Caller ID to the system, the next
time the same Caller ID calls back into Contact Center, the Caller ID based routing tries to route the call
to the agent that marked the call. It provides smoother call center operation.
Conditions
System:
The Call Duration Timer (Program 20-13-36) is not displayed for inbound Contact Center
calls.
InMail can play Contact Center Delay Announcements.

Issue 2.0
If all agents are logged out of a Contact Center Queue, a transferred call to the Contact
Center Pilot number recalls immediately back to the transferring party.
If all agents are logged out of a Contact Center Queue, a trunk call directly to the Queue is
placed in queue.
Center Pilot number recalls immediately back to the transferring party if no Overflow
Destination is setup.
Center Pilot number will be placed in queue if an Overflow Destination is setup.
If defined in Program 22-11-03, DID calls in queue display the trunk name with the Queue
Status feature.
When Program 12-07-01 is customized, an agents display does not indicate the WAIT
Contact Center LOGIN status, however an agent may still log in.
Conversation Recording is programmed system-wide it is not Contact Center
feature-specific.
Up to 16 channels (speech paths) are available when using the DSP with VRS installed on
the GCD-CP10 for messages.
When the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is providing the 1st Delay Announcements, it continues to play
until the call is answered, abandoned, or the time in 41-10-04 expires and starts to play the
2nd Delay Announcement. The 2nd Delay Announcement continues to play until the call is
answered, abandoned, or the time in 41-10-05 expires and drops the call. This message
does not start from the beginning because it is on a constant loop.
The Dial Out of Queue feature is not supported during InMail Delay Announcements.
Wireless DECT (SIP) is not supported with Contact Center.
When all InMail talk paths (ports) are simultaneously being accessed by InMail Mailbox
subscribers or Voice Mail Delay Announcements, or combination of the two, the next
incoming call to the InMail will Ring No Answer until an available talk path becomes idle
(First Come First Served).
When Voice Mail Delay Announcements are being played, InMail talk paths (ports) are
used.
InMail cannot be used for Contact Center Night Announcement.
Program 41-08-03: Contact Center Overflow Options Delay Announcement Source Type.
The ACI port used for the Contact Center Delay Announcements is programmed like Music
on Hold (MOH) ACI ports. Refer to the MOH Music on Hold on page 2-1052.
Contact Center can only support one Music on Hold source.
When an agent is in a Ring Group and logged in, it will not ring when a call comes to the
Ring Group. It will ring when logged out.

Issue 2.0
If a phone has never been brought up and is assigned as an agent, the system will have to
be reset before the phone is able to login.
The End of Work Key (14) from a System Supervisor will only put Contact Center Groups
that have Normal Agents logged in into the End of Work. Groups that only have AIC agents
will not be put in the End of Work.
If the Help key is pressed when an Agent is logged in, calls in Queue are not received until
the Agent exits the Help menu.
When Contact Center delay announcements are used, and a call is delivered to an
available Contact Center agent, the agent MLT display may show one or two exclamation
points while the call is ringing.
One exclamation point indicates the incoming caller has queued long enough to hear the
first delay announcement.
Two exclamation points the caller has been in queue and heard both the first and second
delay announcements.
If a Contact Center Agent places a Contact Center call on hold to answer an incoming
non-Contact Center call (Trunk or Station), the system will offer another Contact Center call
to the Agent when the non-Contact Center call terminates. To prevent the second Contact
Center call from being sent, it is recommended the Agent go into the break or wrap mode
before finishing the non-Contact Center call.
On Contact Center extensions, Hold Recall to Operator is not supported.
When a caller dials out of one queue into another queue, the overflow timer of the original
queue is followed.
NEC Contact Center:

InServer SVR2 Blade The SVR2 is an in-skin blade for the SV9100 designed to be an
application server for several of the external applications available for the SV9100 product
line. Initially, the SVR2 will come pre-installed with Windows 7 Embedded Standard OS and
support the setup and deployment of the NEC UC Suite and NEC Contact Center.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system does not buffer the Contact Center Statistics when the PC
running the Contact Center Server application is not connected.
The programming of the Agents and Queues in the UNIVERGE SV9100 system are not
transferred to the PC running the Contact Center Server applications. The NEC Contact
Center Server applications are programmed separately.
A supervisor assigned to not receive calls or take calls after the overflow time is reached
shows as idle in Contact Center when they are logged in and idle even when calls are
queued up and not reaching the overflow timer.
Call Detail by Queue Report shows the Caller ID (if available) for each call.
A new report (Abandoned Call Detail by Queue) has been built and will display the Caller ID
for each abandoned call.
The maximum number of Contact Center Monitoring programs that can run simultaneously
is 16.

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Refer to the NEC Contact Center Supervisor Manual for more details.
REFERENCE
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Contact Center Client License (2002)
System Version R1 License (0411)
Required Software
None
Related Features
Music on Hold
Night Service
InMail

Issue 2.0

Refer to the NEC Contact Center Supervisor Manual for complete programming
information.
REFERENCE
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-13-01 Service Code Setup (for Contact Center) MLT, SLT 5

Contact Center LogIn/Log Out (for KTS) Maximum of eight digits
Assign for multiline terminals and single line

0 ~ 9, , #
telephones.
11-13-02 Service Code Setup (for Contact Center) SLT 655

Contact Center Log Out (for SLT) Maximum of eight digits
Assign for single line telephones. 0 ~ 9, , #

Set Contact Center Wrap-Up Time (for SLT) Maximum of eight digits

Cancel Contact Center Wrap-Up Time (for Maximum of eight digits
SLT)
0 ~ 9, , #
Assign for single line telephones.

Set Contact Center Off Duty (for SLT) Maximum of eight digits

Cancel Contact Center Off Duty (for SLT) Maximum of eight digits
11-13-08 Service Code Setup (for Contact Center) MLT, SLT No Setting
Agent ID Code Login Maximum of eight digits
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to log into a

0 ~ 9, , #
group.
11-13-09 Service Code Setup (for Contact Center) MLT, SLT No Setting
Agent ID Code Logout Maximum of eight digits
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to log out of a

0 ~ 9, , #
group.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-13-10 Service Code Setup (for Contact Center) MLT 667

Contact Center Agent Login by Supervisor Maximum of eight digits
Assign to allow a Contact Center Supervisor to

0 ~ 9, , #
log into a group.

Contact Center Agent Logout by Supervisor Maximum of eight digits
Assign to allow a Contact Center Supervisor to

0 ~ 9, , #
log out of a group.

Change Agent Contact Center Group by Maximum of eight digits
Supervisor 0 ~ 9, , #
When using service code 669 to change an
agent Contact Center group, the supervisor

must enter a 2-digit number for the group. For
example, to change to Contact Center group 4,
the entry would be 669 04.

Contact Center Agent Changing Own Maximum of eight digits
Contact Center Group 0 ~ 9, , #
When this service code is used, a Contact

Center Agent can reassign themselves to
another Contact Center Group.
11-17-01 Contact Center Group Pilot Number Contact Center Group Number: No Setting
Assign the Contact Center Master Number for 01 ~ 64
each Contact Center Group. Contact Center Group Pilot
Number: Maximum of eight
digits

default values.
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
752 by default)
15-08-01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup 0 = Tone Pattern 1 0 = Tone Pattern
When an extension or a virtual extension is 1 = Tone Pattern 2 1
call on that key.
For Contact Center CAR keys, only tone pattern Extension

1 (entry 0) can be used. The remaining patterns
5 = Tone Pattern 5
are not checked with this feature.
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign the ringing options for an extension Ringing:
Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension 0 = No Ringing
Group Answer Key, which is defined in Program 1 = Ring

15-07. Make an assignment for each Night
Service Mode. There are 512 Virtual Extension
Ports.
15-11-01 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Day Night/Mode: 1 ~ 8 0

Assign the delayed ringing options for an Ringing:
extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension 0 = Immediate Ring
Group Answer keys (defined in Program 1 = Delayed Ring

15-09). You make an assignment for each Night
Service Mode. There are 512 Virtual Extension
Ports.

extension after this interval.

Assign a Class of Service (COS) to an Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that (1 ~ 15) All other
can be assigned. Assign eight entries, one for extension port =
each Night Service Mode. Class 1


Service) Contact Center Supervisors 1 = On
Position Enhancement
Set this option to On for the operator to use
service codes in Program 11-13-10 ~ 11-13-13.

Service) Contact Center Queue Status 1 = On
Display
Turn Off or On the Contact Center Queue
Status Display for an extension Class of
Service. Any extension, which has this option
enabled, also hears the queue alarm.
22-01-11 System Options for Incoming Calls VRS 0 ~ 64800 seconds 20

Waiting Message Interval Time
Setup the sending duration time of the Auto
Attendant & Queuing. The message is
repeatedly sent out during the specified time.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
30-01-01 DSS Console Operating Mode 0 = Business Mode 0

Set the mode of the system DSS consoles. The 1 = Hotel Mode
entry for this option applies to all the system 2 = Contact Center Monitor
DSS consoles. Mode

3 = Business/Contact Center
Mode
30-05-04 DSS Console Lamp Table Contact Center 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 7 (On)
Agent Busy
Define the LED patterns for functions on the
DSS consoles. The entry for this option applies
to all the system DSS consoles.
30-05-05 DSS Console Lamp Table Out of Schedule 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 0 (Off)
(Contact Center DSS)
Define the LED patterns for out of schedule
(Contact Center/DSS) functions on the DSS
consoles.
30-05-06 DSS Console Lamp Table Contact Center 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 5 (IL)
Agent Log Out (Contact Center DSS)

DSS consoles.
30-05-07 DSS Console Lamp Table Contact Center 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 4 (IR)
Agent Log In (Contact Center DSS)

DSS consoles.
30-05-08 DSS Console Lamp Table Contact Center 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 6 (IW)
Agent Emergency (Contact Center DSS)

DSS consoles.

Enable (1) or Disable (0) the system ability to
play the fixed VRS messages (such as You
have a message).
41-01-01 System Options for Contact Center Maximum of eight digits No Setting
System Supervisory Extension 0 ~ 9, , #
Define the Contact Center Supervisor for the

entire system.
41-01-02 System Options for Contact Center Login 0 ~ 20 (0 = No Login ID) 0

ID Code Digit
Define the number of digits for agent login ID

code.
41-01-03 System Options for Contact Center 0 = None 0

Contact Center Connection Ports 3 = LAN (CPU)
Define what port is used for Contact Center

connection. Currently only LAN is supported.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-01-04 System Options for Contact Center 0 = Notifies 0

Contact Center-Command Notification when 1 = No notification
a BT Message is returned
Contact Center-Command Notification when a
BT message is returned.
41-02-01 Contact Center Group and Agent Contact Center Work Period 0
Assignments Mode Number: 1 ~ 8
For each Contact Center extension number, Contact Center Group Number:
assign a Contact Center Group (1 ~ 64). A 0~2

Contact Center Group number is assigned to (0 = No Setting)
each Work Period number (1 ~ 8).
41-03-01 Incoming Ring Group Assignment for Contact Center Group Number: 0
Contact Center Group Contact Center 0 ~ 64
Group Number (0 = No Setting)
For each incoming trunk group set up in
Program 22-05, designate which Contact

Center Group
(1 ~ 64) the trunks should ring for each of the
eight Work Periods.
41-03-02 Incoming Ring Group Assignment for 0 = No 0

Contact Center Group Night 1 = Yes
Announcement Service
Designate for each incoming trunk, whether or
not Night Announcement Service is assigned.
41-03-03 Incoming Ring Group Assignment for 0, 1 ~ 7 0

Contact Center Group Priority Data 0 = No Priority
Determine whether an incoming call to a trunk 1 = Highest Priority

ring group should follow a priority assignment. 7 = Lowest Priority
41-04-01 Contact Center Group Supervisor Group Extension Number = Maximum No Setting
Supervisor Extension of eight digits
Assign the group supervisor extension.
41-04-02 Contact Center Group Supervisor 0 = Do Not receive any Contact 0

Operation Type Center incoming calls (No)
Assign the supervisor operating type. 1 = Receive Contact Center
incoming calls in case of
overflow (Busy)
2 = Receive Contact Center
incoming calls all the time (Yes)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-05-01 Contact Center Agent Work Schedules Work Period Mode Number = 1 (Start) 0000
Set up the Work Schedules for Agents and ~8 (End) 0000
Groups. For each Contact Center Work Start Time = 0000 ~ 2359
Schedule End Time = 0000 ~ 2359
(1 ~ 4), designate the start and stop times for
each of the eight Work Periods. After the
schedules are set up in this program, assign
them to days of the week in Program 41-07.
(This is the same program used by the Trunk
Work Schedules.)
After the schedules are set up in this program,
assign them to days of the week in Program
41-07.
41-06-01 Trunk Work Schedules Work Period Mode Number = 1 (Start) 0000
Set up the Work Schedules for trunks. For each ~8 (End) 0000
Work Schedule (1 ~ 4), designate the start and Start Time = 0000 ~ 2359
stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. End Time = 0000 ~ 2359

After the schedules are set up, assign them to
days of the week in Program 41-07.
41-07-01 Contact Center Weekly Schedule Setup Day No./Time Pattern: 0

Assign the four Work Schedules (1 ~ 4) to days 1 = Sunday/ 0 ~ 4 (0 = No
of the week. Contact Center)
The assignments made in this program apply to 2 = Monday/ 0 ~ 4 (0 = No )
both the Contact Center Agent Work Schedules 3 = Tuesday/0 ~ 4 (0 = No )
(Program 41-05) and the Trunk Work 4 = Wednesday/ 0 ~ 4 (0 = No
Schedules (Program 41-06). Contact Center)

5 = Thursday/ 0 ~ 4 (0 = No
Contact Center)
(default = 0)
6 = Friday/ 0 ~ 4 (0 = No )
7 = Saturday/ 0 ~ 4 (0 = No )
41-08-01 Overflow Options Overflow Operation 0 = No overflow (None) 0

Mode 1 = Overflow with No
Assign the overflow mode (0 ~ 9), destination Announcement
and announcement message types. Delay 2 = No Overflow with First
Announcement functions are not available for Announcement Only
pilot number calls. Each Group can have 3 = No Overflow with First &
unique overflow options. Second Announcements
4 = Overflow with First
Announcement Only
5 = Overflow with First and
Second Announcement
6 = Not Used
7 = Not Used
8 = No Overflow with Second
Announcement Only
9 = Overflow with Second
Announcement Only

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-08-02 Overflow Options Overflow Destination 0 = No Setting 0

Assign the overflow mode (0 ~ 9), destination 1 ~ 64 = Group
and announcement message types. Delay 65 = Overflow Table (Program
Announcement functions are not available for 41-09)
pilot number calls. Each Group can have
unique overflow options.
66 = Voice Mail Integration
67 = System Speed (Program
41-08-05)
(Program 41-08-06)
41-08-03 Overflow Options Delay Announcement 0 = ACI 1

Source Type 1 = VRS
Assign the overflow mode (0 ~ 9), destination 2 = InMail
and announcement message types. Delay
Announcement functions are not available for
pilot number calls. Each Group can have
unique overflow options.
41-08-04 Overflow Options Overflow Transfer Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Define the time before overflow occurs. Each
Group can have unique overflow options.
41-08-05 Overflow Options System Speed Dial Bin 0 ~ 9999 (Used when Program 9999
Assign the speed dial bin to be used as the 41-08-02 is set to 5)
overflow destination. Using a speed dial bin for

Overflow is supported only for off premise calls.
41-08-06 Overflow Options Incoming Ring Group 1 ~ 100 1

when Overflow (Used when Program 41-08-02
Assign the Ring Group for overflow calls to go is set to 68)

to.
41-09-01 Overflow Table Setting 0 ~ 65 0

Define the group to which a call is transferred 0 = No Setting
when overflow occurs. 65 = In-Skin Voice Mail

Integration
41-10-01 ACI Delay Announcement 1st Delay 0 ~ 96 0

Announcement ACI Port Number 0 = No Setting
Define the ACI port number to be used for the
delay announcement. This program is activated
when the delay announcement source and
options are assigned as ACI in Program
41-08-03.
41-10-02 ACI Delay Announcement 2nd Delay 0 ~ 96 0

Define the ACI port number to be used for the
delay announcement.This program is activated
options are assigned as ACI in Program
41-08-03.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-10-03 ACI Delay Announcement 1st Delay 0 ~ 64800 seconds 4

Announcement Connection Timer
Define the time before the 1st Delay

Announcement is played.
41-10-04 ACI Delay Announcement 2nd Delay 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

Announcement Connection Timer
Set the time between when the 1st Delay
Announcement plays and when the 2nd Delay
Announcement plays.
41-10-05 ACI Delay Announcement 2nd Delay 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Announcement Sending Duration
Set the time the 2nd Delay Announcement
plays. After this time expires, the call

disconnects. To keep the call in queue, set this
time to 0.
41-11-01 VRS Delay Announcement Delay Message 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Start Timer
Set the time before the 1st Delay Message

Starts.
41-11-02 VRS Delay Announcement 1st Delay 0 ~ 101 0

Message Number 0 = No Message
Assign the VRS message number to be used 101 = Fixed Message
as the message source for the 1st and 2nd
Delay Announcement Messages. Refer to
Program 41-08 for more on setting up the

overflow options. This program is activated
options are assigned as VRS in Program
41-08-03.
41-11-03 VRS Delay Announcement 1st Delay 0 ~ 255 0

Message Sending Count
Input the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is sent. If set to 0, the message is not
played.
41-11-04 VRS Delay Announcement 2nd Delay 0 ~ 101 0

Input the VRS Message to be played as the 2nd

101 = Fixed Message
Delay Message.
41-11-05 VRS Delay Announcement 2nd Waiting 0 ~ 255 0

Input the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is sent. If set to 0, the message is not
played.
41-11-06 VRS Delay Announcement Tone Kind at 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

Message Interval 1 = MOH Tone
Input what is heard between the Delay

2 = BGM Source
messages.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-11-07 VRS Delay Announcement Forced 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

Disconnect Time after the 2nd Delay (0 = No Disconnect)
Message
Set the time, after the last 2nd Delay Message
is played, before the call is disconnected.
41-11-08 VRS Delay Announcement Queue Depth 0 = Disable 0

Announcement (Requires VRS) 1 = After 1st (1st)
Input when the Queue Depth Announcement 2 = After 2nd (2nd)
will be played. 3 = After 1st and 2nd (1st and
2nd)
41-12-01 Night Announcement Setup Night 0 = ACI 0

Announcement Source Type 1 = VRS
Define the source for each groups night
announcement. Night announcement

availability depends on the setting in Program
41-03-02.
41-12-02 Night Announcement Setup Night 0 ~ 96 0

Define the ACI port to be used for the Night

Announcement function.
41-12-03 Night Announcement Setup Night 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Announce Sending Time
Define the time the night Announcement plays.
Only used when Program 41-12-01 is set to 0

(ACI). Night announcement availability
depends on the setting in Program 41-03-02.
41-13-01 VRS Message Number for Night 0 ~ 100 0

Announcement VRS Message Number 0 = No Message
Define the VRS message number to be used as
the night announcement. This program is

activated when the night announcement source
is assigned as VRS in Program 41-12-01.
41-13-02 VRS Message Number for Night 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

Announcement Tone Kind at Message 1 = MOH Tone
Interval 2 = BGM Source
Define what is heard between the Night
Announcements.
41-14-01 Options Setup Emergency Call Operation 0 = Call to system supervisory 0

Mode extension when group
Define if Emergency Calls ring the system supervisory extension is busy.
supervisory extension or not when the group 1 = No calls to system
supervisory extension is busy. This option supervisory extension when
allows the supervisor to press an Emergency group supervisory extension is

Key (programmed for this feature) once to busy.
monitor the call or twice to barge in on the call.
The supervisor must be logged in for this
feature to work.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-14-02 Options Setup Automatic Wrap Up Mode 0 = After wrap up mode key is 0
Define if agents manually enter wrap mode by pressed (Manual)
pressing a key, or are put automatically into 1 = After call is finished
wrap mode at end of a call. This setting applies automatically (Auto)
to all agents in the selected group.
41-14-03 Options Setup Priority for Overflow Calls 0 = Own group priority 0
This option determines whether the group 1 = Priority order by Program
should use its own priority assignment or if it 41-03-03
should follow the priority assigned in Program
41-03-03.
41-14-04 Options Setup Automatic Answer at 0 = Off 0

Headset 1 = On
Enable (1)/Disable (0) Automatic Answer for

agents using headsets.
41-14-06 Options Setup Call Queuing after 2nd 0 = Enable (Yes) 0

Announcement 1 = Disable (No)
Determine whether the caller should hear the
2nd Delay Announcement and then be taken

out of queue (1), or be placed back into queue
(0).
41-14-07 Options Setup Automatic Off Duty for SLT 0 = No change to off duty mode 0
Enable (1)/Disable (0 Automatic Off Duty (rest) 1 = Change to off duty mode
mode for agents with single line telephones. automatically (Skip)
41-14-08 Options Setup Off Duty Mode 0 = Cannot receive internal call 0
Enable (1)/Disable (0) the agents ability to 1 = Can receive internal call
receive internal calls in Off Duty Mode.
41-14-09 Options Setup Automatic Wrap Up End 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Time
Set the time for the Automatic Wrap Up End

Time.
41-14-10 Options Setup No Answer Skip Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Set the time a call to the Group rings an idle
extension before routing to the next agent.
41-14-12 Options Setup Start Headset Ear Piece 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Ringing (for SLT)
Set the ringing start time for the headset ear

piece on a single line telephone.
41-14-13 Options Setup Queue 1-Digit Assignment 1st Data: Blank

(1) Set various options for Groups. When an option Up to one digit
is set for a Group, the setting is in force (if (0, 1 ~ 9, #, )
applicable) for all agents in the group. 2nd Data:
For each Queue (1 ~ 64) assign the One-Digit
number (0 ~ 9, , #) to be used for the
One-Digit Dial Out Option.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-14-13 Options Setup Destination Number Type 2nd Data: 0

(2) Set various options for Groups. When an option 0 = None
is set for a Group, the setting is in force (if 1 = Extension or Voice Mail
applicable) for all agents in the group. 2 = Incoming Ring Group

For each Queue (1 ~ 64), assign the 3 = Speed Dial Bin
Destination Number Type.
4 = Group
41-14-13 Options Setup Destination Number 3rd Data: Blank

(3) Set various options for Groups. When an option Maximum of eight digits
is set for a Group, the setting is in force (if
applicable) for all agents in the group.
(0, 1 ~ 9, #, )
For each Queue (1 ~ 64), assign the destination
number for the assigned Destination Type.
41-14-14 Options Setup DTMF Detection 0 = Does not detect during 1

Assignment during Delay Announcement message
Set various options for Groups. When an option 1 = Detect during message
For each Queue (1 ~ 64), assign if the
One-Digit Dial Out option can (1 = Yes) or
cannot (0 = No) be pressed during the Delay
Announcements.
41-14-15 Options Setup DTMF Detect Time after 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Delay Announcement Message
Set various options for Groups. When an option

For each Queue (1 ~ 64), assign the time after
the Delay Announcement that the 1-Digit Dial
Out option works.
41-15-01 Queue Alarm Information Number of Calls 0 ~ 400 0

in Queue to Activate Alarm Information 0 = No Alarm
Define the number of calls that must be in
queue before the Alarm Information is
activated.

Do not use these programs if the alarm options
are defined in Program 41-20-01 through
41-20-05.
41-15-02 Queue Alarm Information Interval Time of 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Alarm Information
Define the time the Alarm will ring when
activated.
Do not use these programs if the alarm options
are defined in Program 41-20-01 through
41-20-05.
41-16-01 Threshold Overflow Number of Calls in 0 ~ 400 0

Queue (0 = No Limitation)
Define the maximum number of calls allowed in

the queue before overflow occurs.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-16-02 Threshold Overflow Operation Mode for 0 = The last waiting call is 0
Queue transferred
Define how the system should handle calls 1 = The longest waiting call is
when the number of calls in queue exceeds the transferred
threshold. 2 = Send Busy Tone
41-17-01 Login Mode Setup 0 = Normal Login Mode 0

Define the login mode for each extension. If the 1 = AIC Login Mode
AIC Login Mode is enabled, set the AIC Login
and AIC Logout service codes for the AIC
members in Program 11-13-08 and 11-13-09.
41-18-01 Agent Identity Code Setup Agent Identity Maximum of four digits No Setting
Code
Define the Agent Identity Codes.
41-18-02 Agent Identity Code Setup Default Group 0 ~ 64 0

Number 0 = No Setting
Define the default group for AIC Agents in each

AIC table.
41-18-03 Agent Identity Code Setup Group Number 0 ~ 64 0

in Mode 1 0 = No Setting
For each AIC table, define the group AIC

Agents are in during mode 1.













Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


41-19-01 Voice Mail Delay Announcement Delay 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Message Start Timer
Assign how long the system waits before

playing the Delay Message.
41-19-02 Voice Mail Delay Announcement Mailbox Dial (maximum of eight digits) No Setting
Number for 1st Announcement Message
Assign the Voice Mail Announcement Mailbox
as the message source for the 1st
Announcement Message.
41-19-03 Voice Mail Delay Announcement 1st Delay 1 ~ 255 0

Message Sending Count 0 = No message is played
Assign the 1st Delay Message Sending Count.
This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the
message to play.
Number for 2nd Announcement Message
Assign the Voice Mail Announcement
Mailboxes as the message source for the 2nd
41-19-05 Voice Mail Delay Announcement 2nd Delay 1 ~ 255 0

Message Sending Count 0 = No message is played
Assign the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count.
This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the
message to play.
41-19-06 Voice Mail Delay Announcement Wait Tone 0 = Ring Back Tone 0
Type at Message Interval 1 = Music On Hold Tone
Assign what the caller hears between the

2 = Background Music Source
messages.
41-19-07 Voice Mail Delay Announcement Forced 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Disconnect Time after 2nd Announcement
Assign how long the system waits after the end

of the Delay Message before disconnecting.

Message Interval Time
Set the time between the Delay Messages.
41-20-01 Queue Display Settings Number of Calls in 1 ~ 400 0

Queue 0 = No Display
Program 41-15 can also provide a queue alarm
to the agents. The options in Program 41-20
should not be used if 41-15 is set.

Assign the number of calls that can accumulate
in the queue before the Queue Status Display
(and optional queue alarm) occurs.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-20-02 Queue Display Settings Queue Status 0 ~ 64800 seconds 5 seconds

Display Time
Assign how long the Queue Status display
remains on the telephone display.
41-20-03 Queue Display Settings Queue Status 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60 seconds

Display Interval
This option assigns the time that refreshes the

Queue Status Alarm time in queue display and
causes the optional queue alarm to occur on
telephones active on a call, logged out, or in
wrap-up.
41-20-04 Queue Display Settings Call Waiting Alarm 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Program 41-15 can also provide a queue alarm 1 = Enable (On)
Enable/Disable the queue alarm.
41-20-05 Queue Display Settings Call Waiting Alarm 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Hold Time
Assign the time the Call Waiting Alarm should
sound.
41-21-01 Login ID Setup Login ID Code Up to 20 digits No Setting

Input the Login IDs that will be used. (followed by Program 41-01-02)

41-21-02 Login ID Setup Skill Table Number 0, 1 ~ 960 0
Input the Skill Table number to be used for each
Login ID.
41-22-01 Skill Based Routing Setup Skill Base 0 = Off 0

Routing 1 = On
Turn On (1)/Off (0) the Skill Based Routing.
41-23-01 Skill Table Setup Skill Level 1~7 1

Input the Skill Level for each Queue for each
Skill Table number.
41-24-01 Caller ID Marking Setup Caller ID Marking 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Setup 1 = Enable (On)
Enable/Disable the availability of setting that
the Agent can mark the originator caller ID,
system base.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-24-02 Caller ID Marking Setup Agent Info for 0 = Agent Extension Number 0
Caller ID 1 = Agent ID
Set whether the Agent ID or extension number
of the Agent is used to mark with the CID in the
buffer.
41-24-03 Caller ID Marking Setup Caller ID Buffer 1 ~ 168 hours 24

Clear Timer
Set time interval for clearing stored Caller ID

record in buffer.
41-24-04 Caller ID Marking Setup Caller ID Buffer 1000 ~ 10000 10000

Store Size
Set the Caller ID Buffer Size. When the
number of CID records is over the limit, CID
buffer threshold alarm (71) can be reported.
47-03-02 SV9100 InMail Group Mailbox Options Maximum of eight digits, using No Setting
Mailbox Number 0 ~ 9).
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the No Setting (entered by pressing
Department Group master (pilot) number. Hold)
Select the Department Group master (pilot)
number associated with the Master Mailbox you
are programming.
47-03-03 SV9100 InMail Group Mailbox Options 0 = None 1

Mailbox Type 1 = Subscriber
Set the Group Mailbox type. 2 = Routing
47-07-02 SV9100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options 0 = None Mailboxes 01 ~

Routing Mailbox Type 1 = Call Routing 08 = 1 (Call
Routing)
Set the Routing Mailbox type. 2 = Announcement
Mailboxes 09 ~

3 = Directory
32 = 2
4 = Distribution
(Announcement)
47-09-03 Announcement Mailbox Options Hang Up 0 = None 0

After 1 = Goodbye
Use this option along with Next Call Routing 2 = Silent
Mailbox and Repeat Count above to provide
additional routing options to Automated
Attendant callers.

For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the
InMail System Guide.
Operation
Using the Headset with Automatic Answer for Agents:

1. With the multiline terminal in an idle state, press Feature.

Issue 2.0
2. Press the HEADSET key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 05).

The Headset key blinks when Automatic Headset is activated.
To cancel Automatic Headset, repeat these steps.
Transferring Trunk Calls to the Pilot Number:

1. While on an outside call, press Transfer.
2. Dial the Pilot number.
3. Hang up.
The call is transferred to the group.
A Supervisor can monitor a call:

1. When a agent is on an outside call, the supervisor presses the MONITOR key
(Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 15).
The supervisor can hear but cannot participate in the call. If participation is required, use the Barge-
In feature instead.
2. To cancel the call monitoring, press the MONITOR key again.
AIC Agent Log In:
To Log In:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press the LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 10).
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
2. Dial the log in code (up to 20 digits).
This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41-01-02.
3. Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

The LOG IN/LOG OUT key lights.
To Log Out (for single or multiple agent log ins):

Multiline Terminal
All AIC log ins become logged out.

NOTE

Issue 2.0
2. Dial 1 to accept.
- OR -
The LOG IN/LOG OUT key goes out.
All AIC log ins become logged out.

NOTE

2. Dial the AIC Log Out service code (Program 11-13-08).
- OR -
1. To log out of a group without using AIC, lift the handset.

2. Dial the Log Out service code 655 (Program 11-13-02).
Multiple Agent Log In:
To Log In:
Multiline Terminal
After already being logged in:

2. Dial 0 to cancel the log out option.
The LOG IN/LOG OUT key lights.
- OR -
The Log In/Log Out key lights.
Follow Steps 1~3 to log in with additional AICs (up to three) anytime.
1. Lift the handset and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
2. Dial the log in code (up to 20 digits).
This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41-01-02.
3. Dial the first Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).
You hear a confirmation tone when immediately logging in with additional AICs.

Issue 2.0
4. For second agent log: Dial the second Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).
You hear a confirmation tone.
5. For third agent log: Dial the third Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).
Queue Status Display:
When Logged Into Group

1. With an idle multiline terminal, press the Queue Status Display Programmable Function Key
(Code: 19).
The display indicates the number of calls in queue, the trunk name, and the time the call has been
waiting.
When the Queue Status Display key is pressed, the queue status of the extension group is displayed.
When the extension is not in a group, the Queue Status of group 1 is displayed instead.
When an agent logs in using an AIC code, the Queue Status of the default group defined in Program
41-18-02 is displayed.
2. Press VOL UP and VOL DOWN to scroll through the Queue Status Displays of all the Groups.
3. Press the EXIT key to return the telephone to an idle state.
When Logged Out of Group
When agents are logged out and a call is placed in the queue, the telephone of the logged out agents
displays the Queue Status and they hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system
programming.
Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key returns the telephone to idle until the
time in Program 41-20-03 expires again.
Rest Mode:
To Set The Manual Rest Mode:
Multiline Terminal
1. With the multiline terminal idle, press the Rest Mode key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 13).
The Rest Mode key lights. If the Rest Mode key is pressed while the agent is on an active call, the key
flashes until the agent hangs up.
This operation is not available for the System Supervisor.
1. Lift the handset and dial 658.

A fast busy is heard.
To set Pre-Rest Mode (while on a call), press the hookflash and then dial 658. Press the Hookflash
again to return to the outside party. Rest Mode begins once the call is completed.
2. Hang up.

Issue 2.0
To Cancel The Manual Rest Mode:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Rest Mode key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 13).

The Rest Mode key light goes off.

A fast busy is heard.
2. Dial 659.
3. Hang up.

Issue 2.0
Continued Dialing
Description
Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer, and then dial
additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice Mail, automatic banking and Other
Common Carriers (OCCs).
Two types of Continued Dialing are available:
Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls
Depending on an extension Class of Service, a multiline terminal user may dial additional digits after
their Intercom call connects. In systems with Voice Mail, for example, Continued Dialing lets extension
users dial the different options after the Voice Mail answers. Without Continued Dialing, extension users
cannot access these Voice Mail options.
Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls
Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an outside Automated
Attendant, bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers (OCCs). After the outside service answers, the
user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow. Without Continued Dialing, the system Toll
Restriction cuts off the call after a specific number of dialed digits. See Guide to Feature Programming
on page 2-310 for additional information.
Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud.
CAUTION
Conditions
The ability to use Continued Dialing on trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming.
Continued Dialing for intercom calls only applies to calls made to analog devices.
With Pulse to Tone Conversion, users can place calls to services over Dial Pulse trunks
then dial DTMF digits after the service answers.
character is passed to the telco. The system recognizes the initial as the beginning of an
Account Code entry, the second as the end of an Account Code entry, and the third will
be passed to telco.
Default Settings
Enabled
Continued Dialing 2-309

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


extension port =
Class 1

on ICM Call

2-310 Continued Dialing

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1~15) to an 1 ~ 9 (9 = Power Failure Mode)
21-05-04 Toll Restriction Class Maximum Number of 1 ~ 4 = Table 1, 2, 6 ~ 15 = 0

Digits Table Assignment 0 =Disable (None) 3=1
Select the table (defined in Program 21-06-03) 4=2
to be used to determine the maximum number 5=3
of digits allowed for outgoing calls.
21-06-03 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup 4 ~ 30 Tables 1 ~ 4 = 30

Maximum Number of Digits Table
Assignment
Set the Maximum Number of digits dialed for
each table.
Operation
To use Continued Dialing:

1. Place an intercom or trunk call.
2. Continue dialing after the call connects.
Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing.
Continued Dialing 2-311

Issue 2.0
Cordless DECT Terminals
Description
The Cordless DECT Terminals may be used with the UNIVERGE SV9100 KTS. The DTL-8R-1 TEL
uses 1.9 GHz DECT 6.0 FM Technology and is connected in tandem to a multiline terminal.
Refer to specific DECT Owners Manual for more information on the DTL-8R-1 terminal.
REFERENCE
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between Cordless operation and multiline terminal
operation.
Feature Specifications
DTL-8R-1
Digital Technology 1.9 GHz 6.0
LCD 2-line, 24-digit LCD Display
Silent Alarm Yes
Dedicated Keys TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, SPEAKER, REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
Programmable Line Keys 8
Operational Range 50~150 feet (expandable with repeaters)
Message Waiting Indication Yes (Icon)

Headset Connection Yes
Channels 5 channels by 12 time slots
Determined by environmental conditions. These are cordless RF devices and, therefore, some interference may
take place when operating in the same environment as other wireless devices which operate within the same
frequency spectrum.
Conditions
If using the Base Switching option, Cordless DECT Terminal programmable keys:
1~4 can be set as a Programmable Function key such as Trunk Line Keys
5 and 6 can be set as One-Touch keys
7 and 8 are reserved for Base Switching and cannot be programmed
If the Base Switching option is not used, programmable keys 1~8 can be programmed as
Programmable Function Keys such as Trunk Line Keys.
The DTL-8R-1 Cordless DECT Terminals can be used in conjunction with the UNIVERGE
SV9100 and DT400/DT300 Digital Multiline Telephones.
2-312 Cordless DECT Terminals

Issue 2.0
Battery Capacity is 910 mAh, 2.4V with a Talk Mode of 16 hours (typical) and a Standby
Mode of seven days (typical).
The battery can be hot swapped while on a call. The battery must be replaced with another
charged battery pack within 20 seconds, otherwise the connection is lost.
The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery condition.
When a message is received, the message icon is displayed.
Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals.
A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing.
A spare battery is available as an Optional Available Part. A second battery is not shipped
with the product.
The battery can be charged when it is installed in the handset or in the base charging unit
and the handset is in the charger. A stand-alone battery charger is not available.
Environments with many metal parts, metal shelves, or metal buildings are known to reduce
telephone performance.
When multiple cordless telephones are used in your office, they must operate on different
channels and be at least 20 feet apart (including the base unit and the telephones).
DECT telephones do not ring when receiving a doorbox call. Notification is shown in the
display.
Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a Recall key assigned in
the phone configuration or, by a Flash Key assigned to one of the line keys in Program
15-07 (751: 62).
Under certain conditions, HOLD and TRANSFER have the same behavior. To prevent an
unwanted transfer after placing a call on hold and calling another user, the Line Key for the
call on hold must be pressed to retrieve the call from hold, otherwise the call is transferred
when the Cordless Terminal is placed in idle.
The DTL-8R-1 DECT Cordless only supports connection with DT400/DT300 terminals.
DTH-4R-1/2 Cordless is not supported on the SV9100.
Restrictions
Cordless terminals cannot receive voice announcements when idle.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Cordless DECT Terminals 2-313

Issue 2.0
Terminals
DTL-8R-1 TEL
GCD-8DLCA Blade with GPZ-8DLCB Daughter Board
GCD-CP10 with GPZ-IPLE Daughter board
SIP telephone licenses
-OR-
CD-16DLCA
Related Features
Cordless Telephone Connection

Issue 2.0

The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data 3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset
for terminal type (B1). 6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used --
10-03-02 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Logical Port 0 = Not set 0
Number (B1) 1 = Multiline Terminal (1 ~ 960
Use to setup and confirm the Basic 6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging)
Configuration data for logical port number (B1). (1 ~ 8)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Tone
Ringer) (1 ~ 8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Door

Box) (1 ~ 8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for ACI)
(1 ~ 96)
10 = DSS (1 ~ 32)
11 = -- Not Used --
10-03-05 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Optional 0 = None 0

Installed Unit 2 1 = APR Module
Use to setup and confirm the Basic 2 = APA Module
Configuration data for optional installed Unit 2. 3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone
for terminal type. Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door

Box)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
10-03-07 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Logical Port 0 = Not Set 0
Number (B2) 6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Ext.
Use to setup and confirm the Basic Speaker)
Configuration data for logical port number (B2). 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging/
Tone Ringer = 1 ~ 8)

Box = 1 ~ 8) (ACI) = (1 ~ 96)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
12 = APR (for B2 Mode) (193 ~
960)
10-03-08 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Multiline 0 = DT3 0

Telephone Type 1 = Dterm8
Read only program that shows the type of

2 = Dterm7
multiline terminal connected to the port.
10-03-09 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Side Option 0 = No Option 0

Information 1 = 8LK Unit
Read only command that shows the type of 2 = 16LK Unit

side module connected to the terminal. 3 = 24ADM
10-03-10 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Bottom 0 = No option 0

Option Information (Only applies to DTL 1 = APR
style telephones) 2 = ADA

Shows optional adapter information. 3 = BHA
10-03-11 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Handset 0 = No option 0

Option Information 1 = PSA/PSD
Shows optional adapter information. 2 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset

Operation) Enable Force Ringing of 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Incoming Intercom Calls digits
Allows a telephone to be manually set to ring

when called if the system is set to voice
announce in Program 20-02-12.

Turn Off or On an extension for manually
Switching the Night Mode (Service Code 718).

This option must be enabled for an extension to
be able to display the Night indication.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3



Level) Set/Cancel Automatic 1 = On
Turn Off or On the ability of an extension to use

trunk only)
Turn Off or On an extension to use Forced
Trunk Disconnect. This allows the extension to
disconnect an Unsupervised Conference in
progress.

Turn Off or On the extension ability to use the




Message.

Delete


Extension Data
Define if Accumulated Extension Data is

included in the SMDR Printout for each Class of
Service.

(STG) Data
Define if Department Group (STG) Data is

Service.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Account Code Data
Define if Accumulated Account Code Data is

Service.

Enable/Disable an extension ability to receive
CO Message Waiting Indication.


or cancel Private Call Refuse.


or cancel Caller ID Refuse.






extension.


extension.

numbers.

numbers.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


(Service Code 663).

Turn Off (0) or On (1) an extension to use

Repeat Redial.

Turn Off or On an extension ability to use Dial

Block.

Turn Off or On Ringdown Extension for

extensions with this COS.






allowed.

Enable/Disable Call Address Information for

each Class Of Service.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Name and Number

dialed 911.

Map

outgoing calls.

Extension
Enable/Disable an extension ability to voice
over to a busy virtual extension.

E&M Override
Turns Off or On the extension ability to receive
a second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.


extension.

Service) Sub Address Identification 1 = On
Define whether an extension displays the Caller

Sub-Address.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Existence


calls.

is displayed on the multiline terminal LCD while
the telephone is ringing.

busy.

Turn Off or On and extension ability to display

calling party information on CCIS calls.







Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Code 756).

Turns Off or On an extension to use Meet-Me


Turns Off or On an extension to use Universal


Turns Off or On an extension ability to answer
an incoming call on a Call Arrival (CAR)/


Turn off or on an extension ability to use Call

Pickup to Pick up Callback calls.





Unanswered





Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Inward Transfer)



Turn Off or On an extension incoming Transfer

pre-answer display.


initiate a Group Hold.

Turn Off or On an extension user ability to pick

up a call on Group Hold.




Callback

operator.

Restriction
Turn Off or On the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer

is not possible.

Greeting)


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3



Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user in a
Department Group ability to use the
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service codes.



Service should allow normal (0) or extended
Park (1).


Callbacks.

on Hang Up

they hang up.

Service) Restricted Unsupervised 1 = On
Conference
Allow/Deny an extension user ability to initiate a
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Tandem Trunking).

Extension.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3





(Incoming)

(Outgoing)

(Bypass Call)


Message Waiting.





Enable the Barge-In Speech Mode) or Monitor
initiator).

Extension

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Monitored
Turn Off or On an extension ability to be

on ICM Call


Called Extension)


Barge-in on other's calls.



Tone)



(Text Messaging)

Transfer)
Toll Restriction.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


program the name.

Status)

Select whether or not an extension user should


Key
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to press
a line key to barge into an outside call. The
Barge-In feature must be enabled if this option
is to be used.


Group Listen.



Changed


20-13-30 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Allow COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Background Music 1 = Deny
Allow/Deny an extension user from turning


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(COLP)

conversation.

Service) Supervisors Position 1 = On
Enhancement
This option must be On for the operator to use

Program 11-13-13.

co-worker.




Service) Headset Ringing for SLT 1 = On

the Headset ringing.

Service) Queue Status Display 1 = On
Turn Off or On the Queue Status Display for an
extension Class of Service. Any extension with
this option enabled also hears the queue alarm.



DSS

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3




Live Monitor.

Service) MIC Key Mode While Call 1 = On
Monitoring

Service) Station Number Display 1 = On
phone is idle.

Determine if a station Name is displayed (On)
phone is idle.

State

Service) AIC Agent Display which Call is 1 = On
From

Service) Number and Name Appear in the 1 = On
Directory
Operation
To set up and program the Cordless DECT Terminals (DTL-8R-1):

1. Press and hold down and #, then press TALK. The F1 LED flashes red and F1=LK01 is
displayed on the LCD.

Issue 2.0
2. Press Ring/Vol repeatedly to scroll through the line key (LK) and feature options for function key
F1.
3. Press On/Off MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature.
4. When a Line key is assigned, press MUTE once to enter the Off-Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode.
Press Ring/Vol to toggle between TALK for On or NO TALK for Off.
TALK is selected when the F1~F8 function keys are programmed for CO or Call Appearance Keys. NO
TALK is selected when F1~F8 function keys are programmed for functions not requiring an off-hook
state (e.g., Log On/Off or DND.)
5. Press On/Off MUTE to advance to the next function key (F2 ~ F8).
6. After programming F4, press On/Off MUTE to advance to Global Off-Hook Ringing Assignment.
7. Press Ring/Vol to turn Global Off-Hook Ringing On or Off (LCD indicates ON or OFF as
appropriate).
8. Press TALK to exit.
Function keys F1 ~ F8 can be programmed as Line Keys 1~16, Redial (LNR/SPD), Answer (ANS),
Feature (FNC), or Recall. When assigned, these keys operate the same as on an NEC multiline
terminal.
When initially installed, function keys F1~F8 default to Line keys 1~8 respectively and Off-Hook
Ringing defaults to ON.
Global Off-Hook Ringing must be ON (default) for any function key to operate with off-hook ringing.
Switching Between the Desktop Multiline Telephone and the Cordless DECT Terminals Using the
Base Unit:
When the Cordless DECT Terminals is associated with a multiline telephone the following is applicable:
Switching between the cordless mode and desk mode must be done while both telephones are
idle.
A call in progress cannot be switched between the Cordless DECT Terminals and the associated
multiline telephone.
Switching held calls between the Cordless DECT Terminals and the associated multiline telephone
is not recommended because line key LED indications are not provided.

Issue 2.0
Cordless Telephone Connection
Description
When using an APR-L for DTL telephones a cordless telephone (2500-type) can be connected to a
multiline terminal.
The GCD-4LCA with GPZ-4LCA Daughter Board, GCD-8LCA with GPZ-8LCE Daughter Board also
support cordless telephones, but this feature refers to multiline terminal cordless connection.
Conditions
A voice announced internal call to the multiline terminal does not ring the cordless
telephone.
Only one cordless single line telephone can be connected to an APR-L Unit.
When CO Prime Line is assigned to the associated multiline terminal, internal dial tone
cannot be transferred to the cordless telephone.
The cordless telephone requires a PBR circuit while dialing. When all PBR circuits are busy,
a busy tone is heard when the phone goes off-hook.
Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without
interference varies.
This feature works with 2500-type cordless single line telephones.
The multiline terminal user and the associated cordless telephone user cannot talk to each
other.
An APR-L Unit with hookflash enabled follows the same operating procedures as a single
line terminal connected to a GCD-4LCA with GPZ-4LCA Daughter Board or GCD-8LCA with
GPZ-8LCE Daughter Board.
The multiline terminal LCD displays normal information for multiline terminal when a
cordless terminal is used.
When the multiline terminal user goes off-hook before the cordless single line telephone
user, a PBR circuit is not connected for the cordless single line telephone.
The cordless telephone must be installed within 10 feet of the APR-L Unit.
The following features are supported by an APR-L:
Initiate conference
Change station name
Privacy release by pressing line key
Group Listen
Cordless Telephone Connection 2-331

Issue 2.0
DSS/BLF indication
Headset Ringing
The APR-L only support DTMF signaling, DP (Dial Pulse) is not supported.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
Any DTL terminal with an APR-L Unit except the DTL-2DT-1 TEL
2500-type cordless Single Line Telephone
Related Features
Ancillary Device Connection
Class of Service

2-332 Cordless Telephone Connection

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data 3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset
for terminal type (B1). 6 = PGD (Paging)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used --
10-03-02 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Logical Port 0 = Not set 0
Number (B1) 1 = Multiline Terminal (1 ~ 960
Use to setup and confirm the Basic 6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging)
Configuration data for logical port number (B1). (1 ~ 8)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Tone
Ringer) (1 ~ 8)

Box) (1 ~ 8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for ACI)
(1 ~ 96)
10 = DSS (1 ~ 32)
11 = -- Not Used --
10-03-05 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Optional 0 = None 0

Installed Unit 2 1 = APR Module
Use to setup and confirm the Basic 2 = APA Module
Configuration data for optional installed Unit 2. 3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module

Setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone
for terminal type. Ringer)

Box)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
10-03-07 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Logical Port 0 = Not Set 0
Number (B2) 6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Ext.
Use to setup and confirm the Basic Speaker)
Configuration data for logical port number (B2). 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging/
Tone Ringer = 1 ~ 8)

Box = 1 ~ 8) (ACI) = (1 ~ 96)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
12 = APR (for B2 Mode) (193 ~
960)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-08 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Multiline 0 = DT3 0

Telephone Type 1 = Dterm8
Read only program that shows the type of

2 = Dterm7
multiline terminal connected to the port.
10-03-09 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Side Option 0 = No Option 0

Information 1 = 8LK Unit
Read only command that shows the type of 2 = 16LK Unit

side module connected to the terminal. 3 = 24ADM
10-03-10 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Bottom 0 = No option 0

Option Information (Only applies to DTL 1 = APR
style telephones) 2 = ADA

Shows optional adapter information. 3 = BHA
10-03-11 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Handset 0 = No option 0

Option Information 1 = PSA/PSD
Shows optional adapter information. 2 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset

752 by default)

Level) Changing the Music on Hold Tone 1 = On COS 15 = 1




Turn Off or On an extension to store System or




Service Code 752.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

trunk only)
Turn Off or On an extension to use Forced
Trunk Disconnect. This allows the extension to
disconnect an Unsupervised Conference in
progress.

Turn Off or On the extension ability to use the




Message.

Delete


Extension Data
Define if Accumulated Extension Data is

Service.

(STG) Data
Define if Department Group (STG) Data is

Service.

Account Code Data
Define if Accumulated Account Code Data is

Service.


or cancel Private Call Refuse.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


or cancel Caller ID Refuse.






extension.


extension.

numbers.

numbers.


(Service Code 663).

Turn Off or On an extension ability to use Dial

Block.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3





allowed.

Enable/Disable Call Address Information for

each Class Of Service.


Name and Number

dialed 911.

Map

outgoing calls.

Extension
Enable/Disable an extension ability to voice
over to a busy virtual extension.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

E&M Override
Turns Off or On the extension ability to receive
a second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.


calls.









Code 756).

Turns Off or On an extension to use Meet-Me


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Turns Off or On an extension to use Universal


Turns Off or On an extension ability to answer
an incoming call on a Call Arrival (CAR)/


Turn off or on an extension ability to use Call

Pickup to Pick up Callback calls.





Unanswered





Inward Transfer)


initiate a Group Hold.


up a call on Group Hold.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Callback

operator.

Restriction

is not possible.

Greeting)




Transfer)



Service should allow normal (0) or extended
Park (1).


Callbacks.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

on Hang Up

they hang up.

Extension.




Service) Cost Display (TTU) 1 = On
ISDN billing information.



(Incoming)

(Outgoing)

(Bypass Call)

Turn Off or On the ability of an extension to
send off-hook signals.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3



Message Waiting.

Enable the Barge-In Speech Mode) or Monitor
initiator).

Extension

Monitored

on ICM Call


Called Extension)


Barge-in on other's calls.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Tone)


Transfer)
Toll Restriction.


program the name.

Status)

Select whether or not an extension user should


Key
a line key to barge into an outside call. The
Barge-In feature must be enabled if this option
is to be used.


Group Listen.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Changed


20-13-30 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Allow COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Background Music 1 = Deny
Allow/Deny an extension user from turning


(COLP)

conversation.

Service) Supervisors Position 1 = On
Enhancement
This option must be On for the operator to use

Program 11-13-13.

co-worker.



Service) Queue Status Display 1 = On
Turn Off or On the Queue Status Display for an
extension Class of Service. Any extension with
this option enabled also hears the queue alarm.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3




Live Monitor.

Determine if a station Name is displayed (On)
phone is idle.

State

Service) AIC Agent Display which Call is 1 = On
From

Directory
Operation
To make a call using a cordless single line telephone:

1. Go off-hook.
2. Dial the station number or dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number.
To answer a call using a cordless single line telephone:
When the multiline terminal is ringing, the incoming call can be answered by the cordless single line
telephone user by going off-hook, when ringing line preference is assigned for the multiline terminal.
To transfer a call from a cordless single line telephone to its associated multiline terminal:
1. The multiline terminal user goes off-hook.

Issue 2.0
2. The single line telephone user goes on-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to
the multiline terminal).
To transfer a call from a multiline terminal to its associated cordless single line telephone:
1. The single line telephone user goes off-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to
the single line telephone).
2. The multiline terminal user goes on-hook.
Refer to Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets on page 2-1285 for hookflash information.

Issue 2.0
CO Message Waiting Indication
Description
This feature provides a Message Waiting indication when Voice Mail from the Central Office is used. The
CO provides this feature using Visual Message Waiting Indication (VMWI) standards. Visual Message
Waiting Indication alerts a user that a message is present in their voice mail box. When VMWI is
provided, the UNIVERGE SV9100 provides a flashing LED on a line key assigned with the trunk
appearance.
The VMWI standard supported by the UNIVERGE SV9100 includes:

Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the MDMF protocol
Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the SDMF protocol
Conditions
When a new message is stored in the CO Voice Mail system, the LED flashes green (0.5
sec ON, 0.5 sec OFF) on the Direct Trunk Appearance line key at stations assigned for this
feature.
When the Direct Trunk Appearance line key is used by other ports during green blink
(flutter), the line key becomes in use and LED is turned on red.
When the station is using a DTL-8LD telephone, <> flashes on the LCD of a Direct Trunk
appearance line key to indicate a new message is stored in the CO voice mail system.
A local Voice Mail system and this feature can be supported in the same system.
When power outage or some other reason causes the Central Office Message Waiting
Indication (CO-MWI) to be out of synchronization with the system, an Attendant Position
can clear the CO-MWI per CO line.
The CO-MWI Callback Speed Dial number uses System Speed Dial Area.
This feature is supported at multiline terminals and DSS Consoles assigned with a direct
line key appearance of the CO/PBX line key supporting this feature and with proper Class
of Service assignment.
When additional digits (e.g., for password) are included in the CO Message Waiting
Indication System Speed Dial buffer, they must be separated by pauses to allow connection
to the CO Voice Mail system.
A Single Line Telephone or Wireless DECT (SIP) Handset cannot indicate the CO-MWI.
The Message Display Board does not support the CO-MWI.
Default Settings
None
CO Message Waiting Indication 2-347

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
GCD-4COTB Blade with GPZ-4COTF Daughter Board
Related Features
Message Waiting
InMail

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-17-01 CO Message Waiting Indication LED Flash 0 = LED Off 0

Assignment 1 = LED On


extension port =
Class 1
2-348 CO Message Waiting Indication

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

21-22-01 CO Message Waiting Indication Call Back 0 = Disable VMWI Service 0

Settings CO MWI Call Back Enabling 1 = Enable VMWI Service

21-22-02 CO Message Waiting Indication Call Back 0000 ~ 9999 9999
Settings CO-MWI Call Back Number Area
Setting
Operation
To program the CO Message Waiting Callback Speed Dial Bin from an Attendant Position:
1. Press Feature.
2. Dial 28.
3. Press the CO line.
4. Dial Speed Dial bin (default = 9999).
The valid range is 0000~9999 and depends on system programming.
5. Press Feature.
To program the Central Office Message Waiting Indication callback number from an Attendant
Position:
1. Press Feature.
2. Dial 29.
3. Press the CO line.
4. Dial the Central Office Message Waiting Indication callback number.
The Exit key is used to clear all digits.
5. Press Feature.
This operation updates data in Program 13-04-01, a user can also edit the dial digits in Program 13-
04-01 from handset-programming or PCPro/WebPro.
To retrieve a Central Office Message Waiting Indication:

1. Press Feature.
2. Dial 27.
3. Press the CO line key.
The LCD indicates ERROR if the CO Line is not flashing for a CO Message Waiting.
CO Message Waiting Indication 2-349

Issue 2.0
4. Listen to the message.

The operation for deletion is based on the remote voice mail system.
5. Hang up.
To clear the Central Office Message Waiting Indication from an Attendant Position:
1. Press Feature.
2. Dial 20.
3. Press the CO line key.
2-350 CO Message Waiting Indication

Data Line Security
Description
Data Line Security protects any station port from receiving audible tones (such as Camp-On or
Override) and denies a station from barging in while busy to prevent disruption of data
D
transmission when using a modem or facsimile machine.
Conditions
When a multiline terminal and a single line telephone are assigned for Data Line
Security, Tone Override/Voice Override and Call Alert notification tone are not heard
over the handset speaker.
Data Line Security protects a station from Barge-In, even when Barge-In is allowed
in Class of Service.
When any multiline terminal or single line telephone calls a station with Data Line
Security, a constant busy tone is heard.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
None
Data Line Security 2-351

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


calls.

is displayed on the multiline terminal LCD while
the telephone is ringing.

is busy.

off-hook signals.




2-352 Data Line Security

Issue 2.0
Operation
None
Data Line Security 2-353

Issue 2.0
Delayed Ringing
Description
Delayed Ringing allows programmed secondary answering positions to ring on incoming calls after a
programmed time. This feature applies to CO/PBX lines, Secondary Incoming Extensions, Virtual
Extensions, and Call Arrival Keys.
Conditions
An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset (depending on
programming).
Terminals must have a CAP or CO line appearance for a trunk call to be answered on the
telephone.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Virtual Extensions
2-354 Delayed Ringing

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold

Assign CAR/SIE/VE function keys (code 03 + 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
extension number) or CO function keys (Code 751 by default) Manual for
01 + trunk port) on multiline terminals. 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
752 by default)
15-09-01 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Mode 1: 0

Individually program an extension Virtual 0 = Not Ring
Extension key(s) to either Ring or Not Ring. 1 = Ring
15-11-01 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment KY01 Mode 1: 0

Assign the delayed ringing options for an 0 = Immediate Ring
extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension 1 = Delayed Ring
Group Answer keys (defined in Program
15-09).

Delayed Ringing 2-355

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Answer Recall Time 0 = No Overflow
longer than this time diverts to the DIL No

Set the feature type for the trunk you are 0 = Normal
programming. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

If an incoming trunk call rings longer than the 001 ~ 100 = Incoming Ring
routes to the destination you specify in this 102 = (In-Skin/
option. Determine if the destination should be a External Voice Mail
Ring Group, In-Skin/External Voice Mail, or or InMail)
Central Voice Mail.
Operation
To answer Delay Ringing calls:

1. Go off-hook.
- OR -
Press Answer.
- OR -
Press the flashing key.

Either Trunk key or CAR/SIE/VE key.
To program a CAR/SIE/VE key on a phone:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 752.
4. Dial 03.
2-356 Delayed Ringing

Issue 2.0
6. Press Hold once for Immediate Ring (skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring).
7. Dial the mode number in which the key rings.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
8. Press Hold for a second time for Delayed Ring, or Skip to step 10.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
10. Press Speaker.
Delayed Ringing 2-357

Issue 2.0
Department Calling
Description
With Department Calling, an extension user can call an idle extension in a programmed Department
Group (64 Department Groups available) by dialing the group pilot number. For example, this would let a
caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales department pilot number. The caller does not
have to know any Sales department extension number.
Two types of routing are available with Department Calling: Priority Routing and Circular Routing. With
Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to the highest priority extensions first. Lower priority extensions
ring only if all higher priority extensions are busy. With Circular Routing, each call rings a new extension.
Overflow Routing
Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions in the group. If a user directly dials a
busy extension in a Department Group, the system can optionally route the call to the first available
group member. The system follows Program 22-15-01~22-15-07 for playing the periodic VRS message.
Department Calling also allows each Department group to transfer calls to a predefined Speed dial bin
(Program 24-05-01) immediately or after a Delayed time (Program 24-02-08). Internal and transferred
calls are not supported for Delayed transfer.
DID and Overflow Routing
Three types of Overflow are supported for DID calls:

Immediate Transfer:
This feature can be enabled or disabled by using a (58) key programmed in Program 15-07. It can
also be done by using the service codes in Program 11-11-25 (set) and Program 11-11-26 (cancel).
When this feature is activated, any DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number go immediately to
the transfer destination and do not ring anyone in the group. To set up the destination you use
Program 24-05 and Program 13-04. Once these programs are set, the access code assigned in
Program 11-11-27 can be used to change the destination as needed.
Delay:
This feature can be enabled or disabled by using a (59) key programmed in Program 15-07. It can
also be done by using service codes assigned in Program 11-11-28 (set) and Program 11-11-29
(cancel). When this feature is activated, any DID call pointed directly to the Pilot follows one of the
two patterns:
If all available members are busy or logged out, the call goes immediately to the transfer destination.
If agents are logged in and not busy, the call comes in and hunts through the idle members until the time
in Program 24-02-08 expires. Once this time expires, the call is routed to the transfer destination
assigned in Program 24-05 and Program 13-04. After these programs are assigned, the access code
assigned in Program 11-11-27 can be used to change the destination as needed.
2-358 Department Calling

Issue 2.0
DND:
This feature can be enabled by using a (60) key programmed in Program 15-07 or by using service
codes assigned in Program 11-11-30 (set) and Program 11-11-31 (cancel). When this feature is
activated any DID pointed directly to the Pilot gets a busy tone and the call does not route.
User Log Out/Log In
An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group. By logging out, the user
removes their extension from the group. Once logged out, Department Calling bypasses their extension.
When they log back in, Department Calling routes to their extension normally. All users can dial a code
to log in or log out of their Department Calling Group. A multiline terminal can optionally have a function
key programmed to login/logout.
Enhanced Hunting
Department Calling is enhanced with expanded hunting abilities. Hunting sets the conditions under
which calls to a Department Group pilot number cycle through the members of the group. The hunting
choices are:
Busy
A call to the pilot number hunts past only a busy group member to the first available extension.
Not Answered
A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call
continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. If the Department Group has
Priority Routing enabled, and the highest priority member is busy, the call does not hunt to the next
available extension.
Busy or Not Answered
A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call
continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up.
If all members of the Department Group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the group pilot
number queues for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold any number of waiting
calls. If a display telephone is waiting in queue, the user sees: WAITING (group name). If a transferred
call in queue is an outside call, and the system has a DSP daughter board installed with the VRS, the
queued caller hears, Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes
free.
The VRS also can transfer calls to Department Groups. Refer to Voice Response System (VRS) on
page 2-1618 for information on setting up the VRS.
The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is:

Busy on a call
In Do Not Disturb
Call Forwarded
Logged Out
Department Calling 2-359

Issue 2.0
Conditions
When a DIL rings to a Department Group, the DIL may follow overflow programming
(Program 22-01-04 and Program 22-08-01).
If all agents are logged out and an intercom call is made to the Department Group, the
caller hears a busy signal.
Extensions in a Department Group which have Call Forwarding enabled are not included in
the call hunt. The extension to which the user is forwarded does not receive the hunted
calls. When you use the automatic Department Step calling (Program 16-01-03) it hunts
only to members with the same or lower priority.
Easily step call to an idle Department Group member if the member called is busy.
A virtual extension can be programmed to receive multiple calls which can camp-on to the
extension no analog port is required.
An extension user can Transfer a call to a Department Group Pilot number. If unanswered,
the call recalls (depending on programming) the transferring extension after the Transfer
Recall Time (Program 24-02-04).
Voice mail uses one Department Group for voice mail.
When Program 16-01-05 is set to (1) Automatic, all telephones in the Department group
Ring for ICM calls & DID calls Directed to the Department Group Pilot Number only.
The Overflow feature is supported only for DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number.
POTS lines and transferred DIDs ignore the Overflow settings.
When a Department Group is assigned as the VM Department Group in Program 45-01-01
it only works as priority mode no matter what Program 16-01-02 is set to for that
Department Group.
Program 16-01-05 (Extension Group All Ring Mode Operation) does not work to a
Secondary Department Group.
Department Queuing will not work to Secondary Group Extensions.
Default Settings
Disabled

Issue 2.0
Priority Routing
Figure 2-2 Department Calling Priority Call Routing
IF IF IF
CALL Telephone on a call Telephone on a call
Priority 1 Priority 1 Priority 1
CALL Telephone on a call
CALL

Issue 2.0
Circular Routing
Figure 2-3 Department Calling Circular Routing
CALL 1
CALL 2
CALL 3
CALL 4
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals

Issue 2.0
VRS for Messaging
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Department Calling
Transfer
InMail

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Group set up.

Set the service code to activate immediate

automatic transfer for ICM and transferred calls
to Department Groups.

Set the service code to deactivate immediate

automatic transfer for ICM and transferred calls
to Department Groups.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


for immediate automatic transfer for ICM and
transferred calls to Department Groups.

Operation) Delayed Transfer for Every 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Extension Group digits
Set the delayed transfer destination
Department Group.

Operation) Delayed Transfer Cancellation 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
for Each Extension Group digits
Cancel the delayed transfer destination
Department Group.
11-12-09 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT, SLT No Setting
Change to STG (Department Group) All Ring 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code for ringing all members of digits

a Department Group.
11-16-10 Single Digit Service Code Setup 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit No Setting
(Department) STG All Ring Mode
Assign the Single Digit (post-dialing) Service

Code for All Member Ring.

Assign a Department Calling key (46) so 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
extension users can install or remove 751 by default) Manual for
themselves from the Department Calling 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
Group. Additional keys can also be assigned for

Department Group features immediate calling 752 by default)
destination (58), delayed calling destination
(59) and DND destination (60).
16-01-01 Department Group Basic Data Setup Maximum of 12 characters No Setting

Department Name
Assign a name to the Extension (Department)

Groups.
16-01-02 Department Group Basic Data Setup 0 = Normal Routing (Priority) 0

Department Calling Cycle 1 = Easy UCD Routing
Set the routing cycle for calls into a department (Circular)
(i.e., when a user dials the department pilot
number). The system can ring the highest

priority extension available (Priority Routing, 0)
or cycle in circular order to a new idle extension
for each new call (Circular Routing, 1).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
16-01-03 Department Group Basic Data Setup 0 = Normal (Intercom caller to 0

Department Routing When Busy (Auto Step busy department member hears
Call) busy)
Set how the system routes an Intercom call to a 1 = Circular (Intercom callers to
busy Department Group member. The caller busy department member routes
can hear busy tone (0) or overflow to the first to idle member)
available Department Group member (1). This
option is for Intercom calls to an extension, not
a pilot number.
16-01-04 Department Group Basic Data Setup 0 = Last extension is called and 0
Hunting Mode hunting is stopped
Set if an unanswered call should hunt once 1 = Circular
stopping at the last member tried (0) or
continually hunt through the idle members (1).
16-01-05 Department Group Basic Data Setup 0 = Manual 0

Extension Group All Ring Mode Operation 1 = Automatic
Set if all members of the group should ring
Automatically or use the service code defined in
Program 11-12-09. Selecting automatic
overrides the settings of Programs 16-01-03
and 16-01-04.
16-01-06 Department Group Basic Data Setup STG 0 = Disable (Camp On) 0
Withdraw Mode 1 = Enable (Overflow Mode)
Set the STG withdraw mode for each

department group.
16-01-07 Department Group Basic Data Setup Call 0 = Disable (Recall) 0

Recall Restriction for STG 1 = Enable (No Recall)
Determine whether or not an unanswered call
transferred to a Department Group should

recall the extension from which it was
transferred.
16-01-09 Department Group Basic Data Setup 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15

Department Hunting No Answer Time
Set the time a call rings a Department Group

extension before hunting occurs.
16-01-10 Department Group Basic Data Setup 0 = No queuing 0

Enhanced Hunt Type 1 = Hunting When Busy
Set the type of hunting for each Extension 2 = Hunting When Not
(Department) Group. Answered

3 = Hunting When Busy or No
Answer

Call Pickup Groups are set up in Program order:
23-02. Port 1 priority = 1
Port 256 priority
= 256

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
16-03-01 Secondary Department Group Extension Number No Setting

Assign extensions to multiple Department Maximum of eight digits
Groups and set the priority assignment. Each Priority Order
Secondary Department Group can have up to 0 ~ 9999
16 extensions assigned.
16-04 Call Restriction Between Department 0 ~ 64 0

Groups
Calls between members of different
Department (Station) groups can be restricted
per group.

extension port =
Class 1

is busy.

Transfer)


Called Extension)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
If you want a trunk to be a DIL to a Department Mode (1 ~ 8):
Group, assign Service Type 4 for each Night 0 = Normal
Service Mode. Refer to Program 22-07-01. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

For each trunk assigned Service Type 4 in Extension Number (maximum of
Program 22-02-01 above, assign the DIL eight digits)
destination as the Department Group pilot Pilot Number
number (as assigned in Program 11-07-01).
22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).
24-02-05 System Options for Transfer Message Wait 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Ring Interval Time
For Single Line Telephones (SLTs) without
message waiting lamps, this is the time

between intermittent ringing. If this value is set
to 0, the system rings once.
24-02-08 System Options for Transfer Delayed 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Transfer Timer for All Department Groups
Determine the time a call should ring a

Department Group before transferring the call.

Assign the Speed Dial bin to each Department
Group to hold the destination for the immediate
automatic transfer of ICM and transferred calls
to the Department Group feature.
Operation
To call a department group:

1. Go off-hook.
2. Dial department extension number.
The system routes the call to the first free telephone in the department group.
3. Optional: To manually ring all members of the group, dial the single digit service code assigned
for All Member Ring (Program 11-16-10).

Issue 2.0
To log out of your Department Calling Group:
While you are logged out, Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension.
NOTE
1. Press Speaker
2. Dial 650 + 1.
- OR -
Press Department Calling Log In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 46).

The key lights while you are logged out.
To log back in to your Department Calling Group:
When you log back in, Department Calling routes calls to your extension.
NOTE
1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 650 + 0.
- OR -
Press Department Calling Log In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 46).

The key goes out when you log back in.
To change the Department Group Overflow Destination:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 604 + Department Group (01 ~ 64).
3. Dial 01 ~ 08 (Refer to Program 24-05).
4. Dial the destination the calls route to.
5. Press Hold.

Issue 2.0
Department Step Calling
Description
After calling a busy Department Calling Group member, an extension user can have Department Step
Calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and place another
Intercom call if the first extension called is unavailable. Department Step Calling also allows an extension
user to cycle through the members of a Department Group.
Conditions
If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service
Code (default code = 2).
A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned (code 36).
In Program 20-08-12, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension user ability to use Department
Step Calling.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Department Calling
Department Step Calling 2-369

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-12-07 Service Code Setup (for Service MLT, SLT 708

Access) Step Call 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight digits
If required, customize the Step Call
service code used by an extension
user.
11-16-01 Single Digit Service Code Setup 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit 2

Step Call
If required, change the Department
Step Calling Single Digit Service
Code.

Assign a function key Department 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code 751 Programming Manual
Step Calling (code 36). by default) for default values.
00 ~ 99 (Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code 752 by
default)
20-06-01 Class of Service for Extensions Day Night/Mode: 1 ~ 8 Extension port 101 =
Assign a Class of Service (1 ~ 15) Class of Service of Extensions Class 15
to extensions. (1 ~ 15) All other extension port

= Class 1
20-08-12 Class of Service Options 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

(Outgoing Call Service) 1 = On
Department Group Step Calling
Turn Off or On an extension user

ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
2-370 Department Step Calling

Issue 2.0
Operation
To make a Step Call:

1. Place a call to a busy Department Group member.
- OR -
Place a call to a Department Group pilot number.

2. Dial Department Step Code (2) to call the next available Department Group member.
3. Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.
You step through Department Groups set in Program 16-02-01.
Department Step Calling 2-371

Issue 2.0
Dialing Number Preview
Description
Dialing Number Preview lets a display multiline terminal user dial and review a number before the
system dials it. Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors.
Conditions
An extension user cannot edit the displayed number.
To place an outgoing call, an extension user must have outgoing access to a line, CAP or
trunk group key.
If the system has VRS or InMail installed, pressing to preview a number is not required.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
2-372 Dialing Number Preview

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1


Dial Number Preview.
Operation
To use Dial Number Preview to place a call (multiline terminal only):

1. Do not lift the handset or press Speaker.
2. Dial .
Skip to step 3 if a VRS or InMail is not installed.
3. To preview any number, dial the number you want to call.

To preview a Speed Dial System/Group number, press Redial and dial the
Speed Dial System/Group bin number you want to call.
The number is displayed.
4. To dial out the displayed trunk number, press a Line/Trunk Group key.
If the previewed number as a trunk access code (e.g., 9), you can press Speaker instead.
- OR -
To dial an Intercom number, press Speaker.

- OR -
To cancel the number without dialing it out, press Hold.
Dialing Number Preview 2-373

Issue 2.0
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Description
For an extension with Dial Pad Confirmation Tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time they press
a key. This is helpful for Intercom calls and Dial Pulse trunk calls, since these calls provide no Call
Progress tones.
Conditions
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones or Wireless DECT
(SIP) Terminals.
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is not canceled when dialing in handset mode.
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is canceled when dialing in handsfree mode, but only for
internal calls. The tone is still heard for external dialing.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
None
2-374 Dial Pad Confirmation Tone

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Key Touch Tone On/Off 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, change the service code to enable digits

or disable the Key Touch Tone.
Operation
To enable/disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone:

2. Dial 724.
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone 2-375

Issue 2.0
Dial Tone Detection
Description
If a trunk has Dial Tone Detection enabled, the system monitors for dial tone from the Telco or PBX when
a user places a call on that trunk. If the user accesses the trunk directly (by pressing a line key or dialing
# 9 and the trunk number), the system drops the trunk if dial tone does not occur. If the user accesses
the trunk via a Trunk Group (by dialing a trunk group code or automatically using a feature like Last
Number Redial), the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group. Refer to
the chart under Programming for more information.
Conditions
None
Default Settings
Disabled for manually dialed calls; enabled for automatically dialed calls.
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Last Number Redial
Save Number Dialed
2-376 Dial Tone Detection

Issue 2.0
Trunk Groups
Trunk Group Routing

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
If dial tone detection is enabled, be sure to 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
allocate at least one circuit for dial tone 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
detection [ICM/Trunk (0) or Trunk (2)]. Circuit/Resource
09 ~ 32 = 2
(Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33 ~ 144 = 0
(Common)
When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available
14-02-05 Analog Trunk Data Setup Dial Tone 0 = Dial Tone Detection Not 0
Detection for Manually Accessed Trunks Used
Enable/Disable dial tone detection for directly 1 = Dial Tone Detection Used
accessed trunks. If disabled, the system

outdials on the trunks without monitoring for dial
tone.

If Enabled, the system skips over a trunk if dial
tone is not detected. This option pertains to
calls placed using Call Appearance (CAP)

Keys, Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or
Save Number Dialed. It does not pertain to line
key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
Dial Tone Detection 2-377

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Tone Detection Time
If dial tone detection is Enabled, the system
waits this time for the Telco to return dial tone.
When the time expires, the system assumes

dial tone is not present. To disable this time
(and have the system wait continuously), enter
0.

Disconnect Time When Dial Tone Not
Detected
If 14-02-11 is Enabled, the system skips over a
pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial, ARS,
Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed. It
does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk
Access calls.

Pause at First Digit
If Dial Tone Detection is Disabled, the system
waits this time before sending dialed digits. If
using Dial Tone Detection, this time should be
set longer than the time set in Program

21-01-05, otherwise, if this time is set shorter
than Program 21-01-05, Dial Tone Detection is
satisfied and Program 21-01-05 is disregarded
(not used).
Table 2-10 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction
Result if dial tone

Method 14-02-05 14-02-11
not present . . .
Press a line key 0 0 Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)

- or -
Dial #9+ Trunk 0 1 Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
number
1 0 Trunk drops
1 1 Trunk drops
Dial a Trunk Group 0 0 Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)

code
- or - 0 1 Trunk reroutes after time-out
Automatically
1 0 Trunk drops
through a feature
1 1 Trunk reroutes after time-out
Operation
Dial Tone Detection is automatic if enabled in programming.
2-378 Dial Tone Detection

Issue 2.0
Digital Trunk Clocking
Description
The UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10 has a built-in clock source for all digital trunk blades. Digital trunk
blades are connected via an internal PLO (Phase Locked Oscillator) to derive Primary Clock from the
network in priority order. If priority is set up incorrectly, or if two primary clocks are coming in, slips may
occur causing improper data synchronization. The PLO, equipped with the UNIVERGE SV9100
GCD-CP10 is the timing source for all digital trunk blades in the system. The PLO synchronizes the
system and clocks signals from another office. When the UNIVERGE SV9100 is a clock receiver office,
the PLO generates the clock signal according to the source clock signals received from the source office
in the network. The source clock signals are extracted from digital trunk blades and are supplied to the
PLO.
The PLO synchronization source priorities are as follows:

1. GCD-PRTA
2. GCD-CCTA (External)
3. GCD-2BRIA
4. GCD-CP10
Conditions
If multiple PRIs exist, the system chooses the first one that synchronized with the carrier.
If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down, the system
begins to count forward in slot numbers looking for the next available PRI.
If multiple BRIs exist and no GCD-PRTA or GCD-CCTA (External) exists, the SV9100
GCD-CP10 chooses the first BRI that synchronized with the carrier.
If there is one GCD-PRTA and the one being used for the source goes down, the SV9100
GCD-CP10 looks to see if there are any BRIs installed in the system. If there are no BRIs,
the SV9100 GCD-CP10 becomes the new synchronization source. The reason for this is
when a GCD-PRTA is installed in the system, all T1s must be assigned as (INTERNAL). T1
(INTERNAL) is not a clocking priority.
Default Settings
None
Digital Trunk Clocking 2-379

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
GCD-CP10
GCD-2BRIA
-OR-
GCD-PRTA, GCD-CCTA
Related Features
ISDN Compatibility
K-CCIS T1
Feature Examples
Digital Trunk Clocking Examples:
If multiple PRIs exist, the first one that synchronized with the carrier is chosen. In this example, the PRI
in 02 was the first to synchronize with the carrier; therefore, it is the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-4 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 1
2-380 Digital Trunk Clocking

Issue 2.0
If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down, the system begins to count
forward in slot numbers looking for the next available PRI. In this example, the PRI in 02 went down, so
the system now begins looking forward in slot numbers for the next PRI to use as the clock source.
In this example, the PRI in 05 was the first to synchronize with the carrier and became the PLO
synchronization source. The PRI in 05 then went down and the system began looking forward in slot
numbers to find the next PLO source. In this case, the PRI in 02 was the next source because after it
looks through the rest of the slots in the system, it starts over with 01.
In this example, there are multiple T1 circuits in the system. There can only be one T1 circuit assigned
as EXTERNAL in the system, so the T1 assigned as EXTERNAL is the PLO synchronization source.

Issue 2.0
In this example, there are multiple T1 circuits and a BRI circuit. Since the T1 assigned as EXTERNAL
has higher priority than a BRI, the T1 EXTERNAL is the PLO synchronization source.
In this example, there is a PRI, multiple T1s, and a BRI. The PRI was the PLO synchronization source
until it went down. The BRI then becomes the PLO synchronization source because when a PRI is in the
system, T1s cannot be assigned as EXTERNAL, which are not in the PLO synchronization source
priority list.
If multiple BRIs exist but no PRI or T-1 EXTERNAL exists, the system chooses the first BRI that
synchronized with the carrier. In this example, the BRI in 04 synchronized with the carrier first and
became the PLO synchronization source.
2-382 Digital Trunk Clocking

Issue 2.0
In this scenario, the PRI was the clocking source until it went down. There are no other PRIs, T1
(Externals), or BRIs in the system. The GCD-CP10 now becomes the PLO synchronization source.

Refer to the related features section for links to associated features.
Operation
Refer to the related features section for links to associated features.

Issue 2.0
Description
Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another extension. This allows
a user to conveniently answer a call for a co-worker from their own telephone. With Directed Call Pickup,
an extension user can pick up:
Trunk calls (i.e., Ring Group calls)
Direct Inward Lines
Transferred trunk calls
Transferred Intercom calls
Ringing and voice-announced Intercom calls
Conditions
Calls which were on hold or transferred which recall the extension can be answered using
Directed Call Pickup.
Personal Park also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.
Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.
Directed Call Pickup cannot be used to pick up a call ringing at a agent.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
2-384 Directed Call Pickup

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Department Calling
Group Call Pickup
Hold
Hotline
Park
Secretary Call Pickup
Transfer
Virtual Extensions
InMail

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Direct Call Pickup - Own Group 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes for direct call digits

pickup own group.
Call Pickup for Specified Group 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes for call pickup for digits

specified group.
11-12-27 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT, SLT #

Call Pickup 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes for call pickup. digits
Directed Call Pickup 2-385

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Call Pickup for Another Group 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight

another group.
11-12-29 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT, SLT

Direct Extension Call Pickup 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes for direct digits

extension call pickup.
Customize the Service Codes for specified digits

trunk answer.

Assign a Class of Service to extensions Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
(1 ~ 15). (1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

Code 756).
Operation
To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co-workers extension:

2. Dial .
3. Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept.
If more than one call is coming in, the system sets the priority for which call it answers first.
2-386 Directed Call Pickup

Issue 2.0
Directory Dialing
Description
Directory Dialing allows a multiline terminal user to select a co-worker or outside caller from a list of
names, rather than dialing the telephone number. Four types of Directory Dialing are available:
SPDSpeed Dials
EXTCo-workers Extensions
STAPersonal Speed Dials
TELBKTelephone Book
Conditions
Directory Dialing sorts and searches directory names in alphabetical order (based on all
characters entered of the name) when the system starts up or reboots. The system resorts
extension names when:
You change Program 15-01-01 (Extension Numbers and Names).
Any user dials 700 and changes their extension name.
Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Speed
Dial - System/Group/Station, Intercom Calling and One-Touch Calling.
Extension Directory only shows a telephones/VEs that are connected and have a name
assigned in Program 15-01-01.
Pressing the Right Cursor Key twice (on equipped terminals) displays the Common/Group
Speed Dial directory.
Pressing the Right Cursor Key three times (on equipped terminals) displays the Extension
Name directory.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with Display and Softkeys
Bluetooth Cordless Handset
Directory Dialing 2-387

Issue 2.0
None
Related Features
Last Number Redial
Name Storing
Softkeys

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Directory

should be listed (1) or unlisted (0) in the
directory.

Intercom Interdigit Time
If a user waits longer than this time between
Directory Dialing steps, Directory Dialing
automatically cancels.
2-388 Directory Dialing

Issue 2.0
Operation
To use Directory Dialing from a multiline terminal with an LCD:

1. Press the Dir softkey.
- OR -
Press the Right Cursor key.

2. Press the softkey for the Directory Dialing type:
SPDSpeed Dials
EXTco-workers Extensions
STAPersonal Speed Dials
TELBKTelephone Book
Directory Dialing follows any feature restrictions that your system may have enabled. For
example, if your extension cannot normally use Speed Dial - System/Group/Station, Directory
Dialing can not access it either.
3. Dial letter/number range for the party you want to call (e.g., dial 2 for A, B, C or 2).
You can enter several letters to help narrow the search.
Press # to enter additional letters on the same key (ex: TOM = 8666#6).
4. Press the Down Arrow softkey to jump to that section.
5. Press the Volume or key to scroll through the list.
If you wait too long between your selections, Directory Dialing automatically cancels.
6. Lift the handset or press the DIAL softkey, or press Speaker to place the selected call.
If you selected an outside call, it routes according to your system Trunk Group Routing/ARS setup.
To cancel Directory Dialing:
Press the Exit key.
Directory Dialing 2-389

Issue 2.0
Description
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for callers
who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller dials the local
exchange (NNX) and additional digits to ring the telephone system extension. For example, DID number
926-5400 can directly dial extension 400. The caller does not have to rely on attendant or secretary call
screening to complete the call.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) requires DID service from Telco.

NOTE
In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides:

DID Dialed Number Translation
Flexible DID Service Compatibility
DID Intercept
DID Camp-On
There are 20 DID Translation tables that can be divided between 4000 entries.
NOTE
DID Dialed Number Translation
DID allows different tables for DID number translation. This gives you more flexibility when buying DID
service from Telco. If you cannot buy the exact block of numbers you need (e.g., 301~556), use the
translation tables to convert the digits received. For example, a translation table could convert digits
501~756 to extension numbers 301~556.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system has 4000 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among
the 20 DID Translation Tables. One translation is made in each entry. For a simple installation, you can
put all 4000 entries in the same table. For more flexibility, you can optionally distribute the 4000 entries
among the 20 tables.
In addition to number conversion, each DID Translation Table entry can have a name assigned to it.
When the DID call rings the destination extension, the programmed name is displayed.
Flexible DID Service Compatibility
With three-digit service, the Telco sends three digits to the system for translation. Be sure to program
your system for compatibility with the provided Telco service. For example, if the Telco sends four digits,
make sure you set up the translation tables to accept four digits.
The system is compatible with Dial Pulse (DP) and DTMF DID signaling. DID trunks can be either wink
start, immediate start, 2nd Dial or Delay.
2-390 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Issue 2.0
DID Camp-On
DID Camp-On sets what happens to DID calls to busy extensions when you have Busy Intercept
disabled. With DID Camp-On enabled, a call to a busy extension camps-on for the DID Ring No Answer
Time. It then diverts to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without DID
Camp-On, the caller to the busy extension hears only busy tone.
DID Routing Through the VRS
DID calls can optionally route through the VRS. The DID caller hears an initial Automated Attendant
Greeting explaining their dialing options. If the caller misdials, they hear a second greeting with
additional instructions. For example, the first Automated Attendant Greeting can be, Thank you for
calling. Please dial the extension number you wish to reach or dial 0 for the operator. If the caller
inadvertently dials an extension that does not exist, they could hear, The extension you dialed is
unavailable. Please dial 0 for assistance or dial # to leave a message so we can call you back.
You assign Automated Attendant greetings (i.e., VRS Messages) to the numbers in each Translation
Table. This provides you with extensive flexibility when determining which greetings the system should
play for which dialed numbers. You could, for example, set up 926 5401 through 926 5449 to route to
extensions 401~449, and have 926 5450 route to the automated attendant.
If you translate a DID so that it hits a specific VRS message, you must disable Program 25-01-02.
Otherwise, the outside caller waits while hearing the DISA dial tone.
NOTE
The system allows an extension to be defined as a 1-digit number that can be dialed by the outside caller
on a DID/DISA trunk using the VRS. The outside caller can access the desired extension/department
group by dialing only one digit after the system answers the call. If the same number is used as the first
digit of an extension number and the 1-digit access code for DID/DISA, the outside caller cannot access
the extension.
Example:
If 2 is defined as a 1-digit access code to department group 300, outside callers cannot access
extensions 200~299 directly.
SMDR Includes Dialed Number
The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk name (entered in system programming) or the number
the incoming caller dialed (i.e., the dialed DID digits). This allows you to analyze the SMDR report based
on the number your callers dial. (This option also applies to an ISDN trunk.)
DID Intercept
DID Intercept automatically reroutes DID calls under certain conditions. There are three DID Intercepts:
Vacant Number Intercept
If a caller dials an extension that does not exist or misdials, Vacant Number Intercept can reroute
the call to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without Vacant
Number Intercept, the caller hears error tone after misdialing.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 2-391

Issue 2.0
Busy Intercept
Busy Intercept determines DID routing when a DID caller dials a busy extension. If Busy Intercept
is enabled, the call immediately routes to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or
Voice Mail. If Busy Intercept is disabled, the call follows DID Camp-On programming.
Ring-No-Answer Intercept
Ring-No-Answer Intercept sets the routing options for DID calls that ring unanswered at the
destination extension. With Ring-No-Answer Intercept enabled, the unanswered call reroutes to
the DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail after the DID Ring-No-Answer Time. If
Ring-No-Answer Intercept is disabled, the unanswered call rings the destination until the outside
caller hangs up.
Delayed DID
Delayed DID allows a user a programmed time to answer a call. If the call is not answered in this time,
the system automatically answers the call. An outside party hears a voice message, music, or dial tone
according to the following conditions:
If VRS is installed, the system sends a recorded message from the VRS.
If a customer-provided audio system (example: tape recorder) is connected, an error message or
music can be played for the caller.
If equipment is not connected for an announcement, the system sends a unique dial tone to the
outside caller.
This feature is not available for the normal incoming call on ISDN trunks.
DID Intercept Destination for Each DID Number
With this feature the system allows you to program a DID Intercept destination for a DID number which
receives no answer or busy call. The system can be programmed to use a trunk ring group, the VRS or
the voice mail as the programmed destination. Each vacant number intercept for a DID number can have
two destinations. The first destination is for an invalid DID number, busy or no answer extension. The
second destination is for a no answer trunk ring group.
If the first programmed destination is a Ring Group and the second Destination is Voice Mail, the call does not
forward to VoiceMail.
NOTE
For busy or no answer intercept calls, a third destination can be defined in Program 22-12. If the first and
third destinations are programmed but the second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third
destination after the first destination. If the first and second destinations are not programmed, but the
third destination is, the call goes directly to the third destination.
This feature works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 3 in Program 22-02. Other types of trunks
may use the DID table, but the DID intercept feature is not yet supported.

Issue 2.0
With the DID Intercept for each DID number feature, when the primary destination (Program 22-11-05) is
set to Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol is:
1. Busy Intercept = Forward Busy
2. Ring-No-Answer Intercept = Forward RNA
When the secondary destination (Program 22-11-06) is set to Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol is
based on the first destination routing. When the incoming call is forwarded to the first destination by a
busy intercept, the Voice Mail protocol forwards busy calls. When the incoming call is routed to the first
destination by a ring-no-answer intercept, the protocol forwards ring-no-answer. The Voice Mail transfers
the calls to the mailbox number defined in Program 22-11-02.
Any valid DID number must be entered in the DID table (Program 22-11 or Program 22-17-01). If a valid
DID number is not entered, there is no ring destination for any incoming call to that number (the calls do
NOTE not ring any extension in the system).
If the first programmed destination is a Ring Group and the second Destination is Voice Mail, the call
does not forward to VoiceMail.
Calls Can Follow Ring Group Programming for Transferring Calls
An option was added to Program 22-11 which allows you to determine if the DID routing should use the
programmed ring group entry in Program 22-12-01 when transferring calls from a busy or no answer
number.
If DID digits match the conversion table but there is no extension, no Voice Mail, or Voice Mail did not
boot up, use Program 22-11-11 to decide what to do with the incoming call. Go to (1) normal ring
(default) or (0) caller hears a Busy Tone.
DID Call by Time Schedule
DID Call by Time Schedule allows for 500 programmed DID Conversion table entries (Program
22-17-01) that can be routed based on Time Patterns. Each DID Conversion table has a maximum of
eight programmable Time Patterns and each Time Pattern can reference one of the 4000 different
Dial-In Conversion table entries in Program 22-11-01.
Example 1 (Automatic Change)
00:00 09:00 12:00 13:00 18:00 00:00
Time Pattern
PRG 22-17 1 2 3 4 5
PRG 22-11-01 1 2 3 2 1
PRG 22-11-02 100 incoming 101 incoming 102 incoming 101 incoming 100 incoming

Issue 2.0
Program 22-11-01 and Program 22-11-02
Table No. Receive Dial Transfer Dial

1 No setting 100
2 No setting 101
3 No setting 102
Program 22-17
Table No. Receive Dial Time Pattern Start Time End Time PRG 22-11
1~500 1111 1 00:00 09:00 1
2 09:00 12:00 2
3 12:00 13:00 3
4 13:00 18:00 2
5 18:00 00:00 1
6 00:00 00:00 0
7 00:00 00:00 0
8 00:00 00:00 0
Table 2-11 Example 2 (Manual Change)
Program 22-17
Table No. Receive Dial Time Pattern Start Time End Time PRG 22-11
1~500 1111 1 00:00 00:00 1
2 00:00 00:00 2
3 00:00 00:00 3
4 00:00 00:00 0
5 00:00 00:00 0
6 00:00 00:00 0
7 00:00 00:00 0
8 00:00 00:00 0

Issue 2.0
DID Call by Day of Week Schedule
DID Call by weekly schedule allows for 500 programmed DID Conversion table entries (Program
22-17-01 and Program 22-17-05) that can be routed based on Day of Week Patterns. Each DID
Conversion table has a maximum of eight programmable Time Patterns and Day of Week Pattern can
reference one of the 4000 different Dial-In Conversion table entries in Program 22-11-01.
Example 1 (Monday - Friday)
Example 2 (Saturday)
Example 3 (Sunday)

Issue 2.0
Table No. Receive Dial Transfer Dial

1 None 101
2 None 102
3 None 103
4 None 300
Table 2-12 Example 1 Monday ~ Friday
Program 22-17
Table No. Receive Dial Time Pattern 02: Start Time 03: End Time 04: PRG 22-11 05: Day
734 1 00:00 08:00 4 (Ext. 300)
1 734 2 08:00 17:00 1 (Ext. 101) Mon-Fri: 1 (On)
734 3 17:00 00:00 4 (Ext. 300)
Table 2-13 Example 2 Saturday
Program 22-17
734 1 00:00 09:00 4 (Ext. 300)
734 2 09:00 13:00 2 (Ext. 102)
2 Sat: 1 (On)
734 3 13:00 15:00 3 (Ext. 103)
734 4 15:00 00:00 4 (Ext. 300)
Table 2-14 Example 3 Sunday
Program 22-17
3 734 1 00:00 00:00 4 (Ext. 300) Sun: 1 (On)

Issue 2.0
Federal Communications Commission DID Requirements
Allowing this equipment to operate without providing proper answer supervision signaling violates Part
68 rules.
This equipment returns answer supervision to the Public Switched Telephone Network when the DID
trunk is:
Answered by the called station.
Answered by the attendant.
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user.
Routed to a dial prompt.
This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the Public Switched
Telephone Network. Permissible exceptions are when:
A call is unanswered.
A busy tone is received.
A reorder tone is received.
When ordering DID service, provide the Telco with the following information:
UNIVERGE SV9100 KF = US:NIFKF07B

MF = US:NIFMF07B
PF = US:NIFPF07B
DID Facility Interface Code 02RV2-T
DID Service Order Code 9.0F
DID Answer Supervision Code A S.2
DID USOC Jack Type RJ21X
Conditions
Analog DID requires the installation of a CD-4DIOPA Blade (provides four DID ports).
Depending on programming, the system may assign both trunk and extension ports (if OPX
is selected in Program 10-03-01) when this blade is installed.
DID service must be purchased from your local telephone company.
DID Intercept for each DID number works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 3 in
Program 22-02. Other types of trunks may use the DID table, but the DID intercept feature
for each DID number is not yet supported.
DND, the reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension when the call
is ringing to their telephone.
Direct Inward Lines (DILs) also provide a way for outside callers to dial a system extension,
virtual extension, or Department Group directly.

Issue 2.0
DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions directly.

The Off-Hook Signaling provide DID calls with signaling options. Refer to Off-Hook
Signaling for specific details.
DID trunks do not ring external page speakers. Only trunks defined as normal in Program
22-02-01 ring external page speakers.
To simplify answering DID calls, assign function keys as line keys for the DID trunks.
SMDR can print trunk port names or received dialed number for ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If
enabled, DNIS digits can be printed on the SMDR reports instead of the trunk name.
Transferred calls on DISA, DID, DIL, ISDN trunks, or from the VRS can display the reason
a call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer, or DND).
When defining trunks as DID or DID Mode in Program 22-02-01, DID translation (Program
22-11 or Program 22-17) must be used, even if the incoming digits match the extension
number.
When using DID Call by Time Schedule and breaking out the Time Patterns, set the start
time to 00:00 and end time to 00:00 for this feature to operate correctly. Refer to DID Call
by Time Schedule on page 2-393 for more details.
DID Call by Time Schedule Priority is given to the pattern that is set manually. However,
when a time pattern changes with the time schedules set in Program 22-17, the pattern
applied by the Manual change is canceled and the Time Pattern is given priority.
When Transfer Operation Mode is set to busy, call queuing must be turned off for it to work.
Incoming calls on T1/ANI trunks can only follow Program 22-11-01. They do not follow
Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06.
When a name is assigned to a DID in Program 22-11-03, the name is displayed during a
ringing DID call. When the call is transferred or forwarded, the name is not displayed until
the call is answered.
Default Settings
Disabled
Related Features
Off-Hook Signaling
Paging, External

Issue 2.0
Transfer

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-01 ETU Setup The assigned data varies Refer to the

Set up and confirm the basic configuration data depending on the blade installed Programming
for each blade. This program represents in the slot. Manual for a
different data depending on the blade installed more detailed
in the slot. description of the
10-03-XX
programs.
If the system has DTMF DID trunks, be sure to 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
reserve at least one circuit for analog trunk 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
DTMF reception (type 0 or 2). There must be Circuit/Resource
an available receiver for each DTMF DID trunk. 09 ~ 32 = 2
Use the following as a guide when allocating (Trunks)
DTMF receivers: Circuit/Resource
In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver 33 ~ 144 = 0
for every 10 devices that use them. (Common)
In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF When
receiver for every five devices that use them. GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available
14-05-01 Trunk Group Trunk group Number Trunk Port 1 ~ 400 = Default = Trunks
Put DID trunks in the same trunk group (other Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
than group 1). If you have different types of to trunk group 1
DID trunks, put each type in a separate trunk with priorities
group. equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign line or Call Appearance (CAP) Keys for 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
DID trunks (Trunks: 1 ~ 400). 751 by default) Manual for

752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

E&M Override
caller.



Set the time-out time for DID callers that do not
dial. After this time, the DID call routes

according to Vacant Number Intercept
programming.
22-01-06 System Options for Incoming Calls DID 0 ~ 64800 seconds 20

Ring-No-Answer Time
Set the DID Ring No Answer (RNA) Intercept
time. In systems with RNA Intercept, the DID

call rings the destination extension for this time,
and then rings Intercept Ring Group.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

For each Night Service Mode, enter service Mode (1 ~ 8):
type 3 when the trunk should be a DID trunk. 0 = Normal
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
22-04-01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Maximum eight digits. Extensions 101
Assign extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring ports) ring for
the extensions according to programming in incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.
Program 22-06.
No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.
22-09-01 DID Basic Data Setup Expected Number of 1~8 4

Digits
For each DID Translation Table (1 ~ 20), enter
the number of digits the table expects to receive

from the CO (eight maximum). For example, for
a table used with 3-digit DID service, enter 3.
22-09-02 DID Basic Data Setup Received Vacant 0 = Disconnect 0

Number Operation 1 = Transfer
Enable/Disable Vacant Number Intercept.
22-10-01 DID Translation Table Setup 0 ~ 4000 1st:

Assign the start and end range of DID (0 = No Setting) 1 Start 1,
Translation Table entries (1 ~ 4000) to each End 100
DID Translation Table (1 ~ 20). 2 Start 101,
End 200
3 Start 201,
End 300
4 Start 301,

End 400
5 ~ 20 Start 0,
End 0
2nd:
1 ~ 20 Start 0,
End 0
22-11-01 DID Translation Number Conversion Maximum of eight digits No Setting

Received Number
For each DID Translation Table entry
(1 ~ 4000), specify the digits received by the
system.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-11-02 DID Translation Number Conversion Maximum of eight digits No Setting

Target Number
(1 ~ 4000), specify the extension the system
dials after translation.
22-11-03 DID Translation Number Conversion DID Maximum of 12 digits No Setting

Name
(1 ~ 4000), specify the name that should show
on the dialed extension display when it rings.
22-11-04 DID Translation Number Conversion 0 = No Transfer 0

Transfer Operation Mode 1 = Busy
(1 ~ 4000), specify the condition required to
2 = No Answer
3 = Both
transfer the call to the destination defined in
Program 22-11-05 and Program 22-11-06.

Transfer Destination Number 1 1 ~ 100 = Incoming Group
Define the 1st transfer destination for each 101 = (Not Used)
tables received number. 102 = In-Skin/External Voice
Mail or InMail
401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = DISA/VRS
Message
1000 ~ 1999 = Speed Dial
Number (000 ~ 999)

400 = Allows the outside party to dial a different 101 = (Not Used)
extension number in the translation table (for 102 = In-Skin/External Voice
example, ring no answer to a dialed number, Mail or InMail
the caller then hears a dial tone, allowing them
to enter another Valid Extension Number).
401 = Provides the caller with DISA dialing
options (requires using the DISA password). 400 = Valid Extension Number
Note: This applies to 22-11-05 and 22-11-06. 401 = DISA
If the Transfer Destinations are busy or receive 501 ~ 599 = DISA/VRS
no answer, those calls are transferred to the final Message
transfer destination (Program 22-10). 1000 ~ 1999 = Speed Dial
Number (000 ~ 999)
22-11-07 DID Translation Number Conversion Call 0 = Disable (No) 0

Waiting 1 = Enable (Yes)
(1 ~ 4000), specify whether or not Call Waiting
should be allowed.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-11-08 DID Translation Number Conversion 0 ~ 400 (0 = No Limit) 0

Maximum Number of DID Calls
(1 ~ 4000), specify the maximum number of
DID calls.
22-11-09 DID Translation Number Conversion Music 0 = IC/MOH Port 0

On Hold Source 1 = BGM Port
For each DID Translation Table entry 2 = ACI Port
(1 ~ 4000), specify the source of music to be
used for DID trunks.
22-11-10 DID Translation Number Conversion ACI When a sound source type is 2 0
Music Source Port in above: (0 ~ 96)
(1 ~ 4000), if item 2 is selected in Program

22-11-09, specify the port to be used for the
source of music heard on DID trunks.
22-11-11 DID Translation Number Conversion Ring 0 = Disable (Caller hears 1

Group Transfer Ringback)
Enable/Disable each conversion table to follow 1 = Enable (Go to normal ring)
the Ring Group programming defined in
Program 22-12-01: DID Intercept Ring Group. If
Program 22-11-05: DID Translation Number
Conversion, Transfer Destination Number 1
and Program 22-11-06: DID Translation
Number Conversion, Transfer Destination
Number 2 are set, the priority of transferring is
in this order: Program 22-11-05 then Program
22-11-06 then if Program 22-11-11 is enabled,
Program 22-12-01.
22-12-01 DID Intercept Ring Group 0 (No Setting) 1

For each DID Translation Table, program the 1 ~ 100 (Incoming Ring Group)
DID Intercept destination. The destination can 102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
be a Ring Group, In-Skin/External Voice Mail,
or Centralized Voice Mail. This program is used
or InMail)
when there is no destination programmed in
Program 22-11-05. It is unrelated to Program
22-11-06 and Program 22-11-07.
22-13-01 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table 0 ~ 20 1

Assignment (0 = No Setting)
Assign the DID trunk groups to translation
tables. If all the DID trunks use the same type of
DID service, you may have only one DID trunk
group and one DID Translation Table (with
many entries).
25-01-01 VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup VRS/ 0 = Extension Number Service 0
DISA Dial-In Mode Code Specify (Intercom)
Determine whether the system should use 1 = Use Dial Conversion Table
option 0 or option 1 (Use dial conversion table)
for calls.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
25-01-03 VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup VRS/ 0 = Normal 0

DISA Transfer Alarm 1 = Alarm
Determine whether the system should use

option 0 or option 1 for calls.
25-02-01 DID/DISA VRS Message 0 = No Message 0

For each trunk port and each night mode, select 1 = VRS (01 ~ 100 VRS
the message source (0 = No Message, Message Number)
1 = VRS, 2 = ACI, 3 =S LT), assign the VRS 2 = ACI (01 ~ 04 ACI Group
message number to be used as the Automated
Attendant Message for each trunk, which is
Number)
3 = Department Groups (01 ~ 64
assigned as VRS/DISA [with VRS = 01 ~ 48 Extension Group Number)
(VRS message number), with ACI = 1 ~ 4 or
01 ~ 16 (ACI group number), with SLT = 1 ~ 8
or 01 ~ 64 (Department Group number)].
25-03-01 VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Ring Groups: 0

Incorrect Dialing 1 ~ 100
For each trunk port, set what happens to a call Trunk Ports:
when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller 001 ~ 400
dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The Day/Night Mode:
call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an 1~8
alternate destination (a ring group, In-Skin/
0 = Disconnect
External, Centralized). When setting the DISA
1 ~ 100 = Incoming Ring Group

and DID Operating Mode, you make an entry
for each Night Service mode. 101 DSPDB-VM
102 = In-Skin/External Voice
Mail or InMail
104 = Speed Dial Bin (table
Program 25-15-01)
25-04-01 VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Ring Groups: 0

Answer/Busy 1 ~ 100
For each trunk port (001 ~ 400), set the Trunk Ports:
operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets 001 ~ 400
what happens to the call when the DISA or Day/Night Mode:
Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or 1~8
unanswered extension. The call can either 0 (Disconnect)

disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate
1 ~ 100 (Incoming Ring Group)
destination (a ring group, In-Skin/External,
Centralized). When setting the DISA and DID 102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
Operating Mode, you make an entry for each or InMail)
Night Service mode. 104 (Speed Dial table Program
25-15-01)
25-05-01 VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment 0 ~ 100 (0 = No Setting) 0

For each trunk that is answered by the VRS,
enter the VRS message (1 ~ 48) the outside
caller hears if they dial incorrectly after answer.
If you enter 0, the call reroutes according to
Program 25-03 and Program 25-04. Make one
entry for each Night Service mode.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
25-06-02 VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup Maximum of eight digits No Setting
Destination Number
Set up single digit dialing for Automated
Attendant callers. For each VRS Message
programmed to answer outside calls, specify:
The digit the Automated Attendant caller
dials (1~12, where 10 = 0, 11 = and 12 =
#). (Keep in mind that if you assign

destinations to digits three and four, outside
callers cannot dial system extensions that
begin with that digit.)
The destination reached (four digits
maximum) when the caller dials the single
digit code.
25-07-01 System Timers for VRS/DISA VRS/DISA 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Dial Tone Time
After answering a VRS/DISA trunk, the system
waits this time for the caller to dial the first digit

of the DISA password. If the caller fails to dial in
this time, the system drops the call.
25-07-02 System Timers for VRS/DISA VRS/DISA No 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Answer Time
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for
this time before the system sets the call as a
Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the call

follows the programmed Ring No Answer
routing (set in Program 25-03 and Program
25-04).
25-07-04 System Timers for VRS/DISA Calling Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

to Automatic Answering Telephone Set
Set the answering waiting time of the automatic
answering extension when an incoming DID
trunk call is received.
25-07-05 System Timers for VRS/DISA Duration 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Time for Guidance Message by Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Set the announcement time of the automatic

answering extension before an incoming DID
trunk caller is disconnected.

Time for Guidance Message by ACI
Set the announcement time by the ACI before

an incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected.

Answer Delay Time
Set the time the system waits after receiving an
incoming VRS/DISA call before the system
automatically answers the call.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Busy Tone Interval
If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and
Program 25-04-01 is set to 0), the system plays
busy tone for this time before disconnecting.
25-07-14 System Timers for VRS/DISA Delayed VRS 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Answer Time
Assign the delay time from switching from a
normal incoming status to DID mode. If this

time is set to 0, the call switches to DID mode
immediately.
34-01-01 E&M Tie Line Basic Setup DID/E&M Start 0 = 2nd Dial Tone 1
Signaling 1 = Wink (default)
Set the start signaling mode for DID and tie 2 = Immediate
trunks. DID and tie trunks can use either 3 = Delay
immediate start or wink start signaling.
34-01-02 E&M Tie Line Basic Setup Receive Dial 0 = DP 1

Type for E&M Tie Line 1 = DTMF
For DID and tie trunks, set the trunks signaling

2 = MF
type.
Direct Call by Time Schedule:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-10-35 Service Code Setup (for Administrator) MLT, SLT No Setting

Dial-In Mode Switching 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign the service code Dial-In Mode digits

Switching.
12-04-01 Holiday Night Service Switching Night Mode Service Group No. No Setting
Define a yearly schedule of holiday night-switch 01-32
settings. This schedule is used for the setting of Days and Months
special days when the company is expected to 0101 ~ 1231
be closed, such as a national holiday. Time Pattern No.
0 ~ 10
0 = No Setting

Assign a function key for one-touch access to 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
the Dial-In Mode Switching setup code (Code 751 by default) Manual for
88). 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
752 by default)

Enable/ Disable an extension user ability to

manually change Dial-In Modes.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
For each Night Service Mode, enter service Mode (1 ~ 8):
type 8 when the trunk should be a DID (DDI) 0 = Normal
Mode Switching trunk. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
22-11-02 DID Translation Number Conversion Maximum of 24 digits No Setting

Target Number
Do not assign Received Digits in Program
22-11-01 when using DID Call by Time Schedule.
22-17-01 Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Maximum of eight digits No Setting
Time Pattern Received Dial
Define the received numbers for each Dial-In
Conversion Table (Program 22-17-02, 22-17-03
and 22-17-04).
22-17-02 Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for 0000 ~ 2359 0000
Time Pattern Start of Time (Time)
Define the Starting Time for each DID

Translation table in Program 22-17-01.
Time Pattern End of Time (Time)
Define the Ending Time for each DID

Translation table in Program 22-17-01.

Time Pattern Dial-In Conversion Table
Number
Assign each time pattern to a DID Translation
Table Entry in Program 22-11.
22-17-05 Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for 1-8 1: On (1-8)

Time Pattern Day of Week 1: Sunday
Assign day of week for each DID conversion 2: Monday
table. 3: Tuesday
4: Wednesday
5: Thursday
6: Friday
7: Saturday
8: Holiday

Issue 2.0
Operation
DID calls ring extensions like normal trunk calls.
To Activate DID Call by Time Schedule:

1. At any display multiline terminal, press Speaker.
2. Dial the Dial-In Mode Switching Service Code (Default = Not assigned).
- OR -
Press the Dial-In Mode Switching Programmable Function key (Program 15-07-01, 88, or SC
751 Key Code 88).
3. Dial 1~100/ 500 (table number).
4. Dial the Time Pattern 1~8.
Table 2-15 LED Flash Patterns
Time Pattern LED Appearance
Pattern 1 Off
Pattern 2 On
Pattern 3 Slow Flash
Pattern 4 Fast Flash
Patterns 5~8 Off

Issue 2.0
Description
A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a trunk that rings an extension, virtual extension or Department Group
directly. Since DILs only ring one extension or group (i.e., the DIL destination), employees always know
which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for
International Sales Information. When outside callers dial the DIL telephone number, the call rings the
operator on the International Sales line key. The DIL does not ring other extensions.
There are 400 available trunks, 64 Department Groups, 960 extensions and 512 virtual extensions.
DIL Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for another extension DIL. If the DIL is not
answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group. This could help a Technical
Service department, for example, that covers calls for an Inside Sales department. If the Inside Sales
calls are not answered, they ring to the Technical Service department.
Conditions
If unanswered, a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party
hangs up.
If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy, the system routes the call as
follows:
1. The trunk rings the overflow destination assigned in Program 22-08.
2. If there is no 22-08 assignment, the call rings according to the Ring Group assignments in
Program 22-04 and Program 22-05.
3. If none of the destinations in steps 1~2 above are available, the call continues to ring until a
destination becomes free.
The DIL follows call forwarding programming, even to voice mail.
When a call is transferred by Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer can display at the transferred extension.
You can place DILs in trunk groups to make outgoing DIL calls easier.
If a DIL destination extension is in DND, an incoming call rings according to Ring Group
programming (Program 22-05 then Program 22-08).
If a user puts the telephone in Do Not Disturb, calls routed to the telephone in DND do not
follow call forwarding.
A user can activate Group Call Pickup to intercept a DIL ringing another extension.
Program a name for a DIL in Program 14-01-01. This makes it easier to identify the
incoming call.
Direct Inward Line (DIL) 2-409

Issue 2.0
If a multiline terminal is busy, a second incoming DIL call provides Call Alert Notification,
depending on chassis programming. The second DIL call waits in line for the user to
answer the call. The outside caller hears ringback tone while this occurs.
If an extension has a line key for a DIL, the call rings the key. If not, the call rings an
available line appearance. For other extensions, the DIL indicates busy.
A DIL rings its assigned extension without Ring Group programming. A DIL only rings its
assigned extension. It does not ring other extensions in a Ring Group.
a call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer, or DND).
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Department Calling
Do Not Disturb
Group Call Pickup
Name Storing
Off-Hook Signaling
Paging, External
2-410 Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Issue 2.0
Ring Groups
Transfer

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

To have the DIL ring a key, program a line key 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
for the DIL trunk. 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

E&M Override
caller.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Answer Recall Time

Assign each DIL Service Type 4. Make an entry 0 = Normal
for each Night Service mode. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
Assign the extensions that should receive the ports) ring for
overflow to the ring group programmed in incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.
Program 22-08. Set the ringing in Program
22-06. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

Set the destination extension number for each Extension Number (maximum of
DIL for each Night Service mode. The eight digits)
destination can be an extension port, virtual
extension number, or Department Group pilot
Pilot Number
22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).

For each DIL with delayed ringing, enter the DIL 001 ~ 100 = Incoming Ring
No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL Group
rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time. 102 = (In-Skin/
Make an entry for each Night Service mode. External Voice Mail
or InMail)
2-412 Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Issue 2.0
Operation
To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line:

2. Press the flashing line key for DIL on the multiline terminal.
Press the flashing Answer Key to put the first call on hold and answer the second incoming
call. This can be repeated until all incoming calls are answered.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lift the handset to answer the call.
If you do not answer the call, it may ring other extensions (i.e., the DIL No Answer Ring
Group).
To place a call on your Direct Inward Line:

2. At the multiline terminal, press the line key for DIL.
- OR -
Dial # 9 and the DIL trunk number (e.g., 005).

- OR -
Dial 704 and the DIL trunk group number (e.g., 05).
- OR -
Dial 9 for Trunk Group Access.

3. Dial the number.

Issue 2.0
Description
DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions, trunks and selected features. This could
help an employee away from the office that wants to directly dial co-workers or use the company trunks
for long distance calls. To use DISA, the employee:
Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk
Waits for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone
Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code)
Waits for a second unique dial tone
Accesses a system trunk, uses a selected feature or dials a system extension
DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key for the DISA
trunk, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line key, the extension must have a Call
Appearance (CAP) key to answer the call.
You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode. For example, a trunk can be a
normal trunk during the day and a DISA trunk at night. You can also set the routing for DISA trunks when
the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension, dials incorrectly or forgets to dial.
DISA allows 15 users, 15 DISA Classes of Service and 400 trunks.
DISA Class of Service
DISA Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for DISA callers. This allows you to
control the ability of the DISA callers dialing into your system. When a DISA caller first accesses the
system, they can be prompted to enter a DISA password before proceeding. The system associates the
password entered with a specific user number, which in turn has a Class of Service. If the Class of
Service allows the action (such as making outgoing trunk calls), the call goes through. If the DISA Class
of Service does not allow the action, the system prevents the call. The DISA Class of Service options
are:
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
When a DISA caller dials into the system, they may be able to dial 9 and place outside calls. Any
toll charge is incurred by the system. The call follows the system Trunk Group Access or Automatic
Route Selection (ARS) whichever is enabled.
Trunk Group Access
DISA callers may access a specific trunk group for outgoing calls through the system. To access a
Trunk Group, the user dials Service Code 704 followed by the Trunk Group number (Trunk Groups
1~100). This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected group. Trunk Group
Access bypasses the system Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access Maps. As with dial 9
access, toll charges are incurred by the system.
2-414 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Issue 2.0
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station

The System Speed Dial dialing bins may be available to DISA callers. This could save the DISA
caller time when dialing. To access the System Speed Dialing bins, the caller dials Service Code
#2 and the System Speed Dial Bin number.
Operator Calling
A DISA caller may dial 0 for the system operator.
Paging
Internal and External Paging may be available to DISA callers. This allows co-workers in adjacent
facilities, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other.
Direct Trunk Access
DISA callers may select a specific trunk for outgoing calls through the system. To directly access a
trunk, the user dials Service Code #9 followed by the trunk number (e.g., 001). This allows the
DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected trunk. Direct Trunk Access bypasses the
system Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access Maps. As with dial 9 access, any toll charges are
incurred by the system.
Call Forward
DISA callers can set Call Forwarding to redirect extension calls to another extension. Call
Forwarding ensures that the users calls are covered when they are away from their work area.
DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In
The DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In option allows a DISA/Tie Line caller to break into another extension
users established call. This sets up a three-way conversation between the intruding party and the
two parties on the initial call.
DISA Toll Restriction
The digits a DISA caller dials for an outgoing call may be subject to the system Toll Restriction. For
example, Toll Restriction can prevent users from dialing a 1-900 service. When an incoming DISA caller
tries to use system trunks to dial 1-900, Toll Restriction denies the call.
DISA Operating Modes
The DISA Operating Modes determine what happens when a DISA caller forgets to dial, calls a busy or
unanswered extension or dials incorrectly. The system can either drop the call or send it to a preset Ring
Group (called the DISA Transfer Destination).
Department Calling with Overflow Message
If a DISA caller dials a busy Department Calling Group, the system can periodically play the voice
prompt, Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free. while
the caller waits. The interval between the voice prompts is the VRS Waiting Message Interval Time.
When an extension in the Department Group becomes available, the call automatically goes through. If
the Department Calling Group remains busy past the DISA No Answer Time, the DISA call routes to the
overflow destination or disconnects. (What happens to the unanswered call is set by the DISA Operating
Mode). The Overflow Message requires a VRS.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 2-415

Issue 2.0
Warning Tone for Long DISA Calls
You can set up the system to provide a warning tone to DISA callers that have been on a call too long.
The warning tone can be just a reminder (which the caller can ignore) or can be followed by a forced
disconnect of the call. When the DISA caller hears the warning tone, they have the option of dialing a
code to continue the conversation or disconnect.
Trunk Continue/Disconnect Codes
Users can use a Continue or Disconnect service code. The Continue service code extends the
conversation for a programmed time. If the user enters the Disconnect service code, the call is
immediately disconnected.
Example:
The following example indicates how a call will be handled with the system programmed as follows:
Program 14-01-25: 1
Program 20-28-01: #
Program 20-28-02: No Setting
Program 20-28-03: 180
Program 24-02-07: 600 (Used only with manually transferred Tandem Trunk calls)
Program 24-02-10: 30 (Used only with manually transferred Tandem Trunk calls)
Program 25-07-07: 600 (Used only with automatically transferred Tandem Trunk calls or DISA calls)
Program 25-07-08: 30 (Used only with automatically transferred Tandem Trunk calls or DISA calls)
1. An external call connects to an external number (either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA
caller).
2. After 10 minutes (Tandem Trunking = Program 24-02-07 or DISA = Program 25-07-07), a warning tone is
heard and the user dials # (Program 20-28-01) to extend the conversation.
3. After three minutes (Program 20-28-03), the warning tone is heard again. After 30 seconds (Tandem
Trunking = Program 24-02-10 or DISA = Program 25-07-08), the call is disconnected.
Conditions
The DISA caller must use an analog (DTMF) telephone. DISA is compatible with calling
devices that meet the DTMF signaling requirements of EIA Specification RS-464. DISA
trunks must be ground start or supervised loop start.
The Continue/Disconnect code must be DTMF.
With an analog trunk, the Continue/Disconnect code may work using DTMF sounds from
the opposite side trunk. With an ISDN trunk, Program 14-01-25 must be enabled to detect
the Continue/Disconnect code.
The Continue/Disconnect code is not accepted while dialing a trunk.
Continue/Disconnect codes do not work if all DTMF receivers are busy.

Issue 2.0
When used with the Networking feature, both systems must be programmed the same.
In a system with ARS enabled:
When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system routes the call via
ARS.
In a system with ARS disabled:
When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system uses the routes
programmed for Trunk Group Routing.
a call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer or DND).
Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for manually transferred Tandem Trunk
calls, automatically transferred Tandem Trunk calls, and DISA calls.
Tandem Trunking also uses the Continue/Disconnect codes DISA uses.
Department Calling with Overflow Message requires a DSP daughter board for VRS.
DISA can only be set to call forward to another extension. Call Forward Off-Premise is not
supported.
When the DISA/VRS Ring Group Transfer (Programs 25-03 and 25-04) are set to 104
(Speed Dial Bin), the Speed dial is treated as an internal call no matter what Program
13-01-01 is set to. If an outside number is required, the trunk access code must be put into
the speed dial bin.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Remote Analog DTMF (2500 type) telephones
InMail (for Announcements)
Related Features

Issue 2.0
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Transfer

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Reserve at least one circuit for DTMF reception 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
(entry 0 or 2). 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
Use the following as a guide when allocating Circuit/Resource
DTMF receivers: 09 ~ 32 = 2
In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF (Trunks)
receiver for every 10 devices that use them. Circuit/Resource
In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF 33 ~ 144 = 0
receiver for every five devices that use (Common)
them. When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available
11-01-01 System Numbering Refer to the

Programming
Define the system numbering plan.
Manual for

default values.
Access Code

11-01 for 2nd (Alternate) Trunk Route Access.

intervals)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

intervals)

If DISA caller can place outgoing calls through
the system (refer to Program 20-14 in the
UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual),

Enable loop supervision for the DISA trunk. If
DISA caller cannot use the system trunks for
outgoing calls, enter Disable.
20-01-05 System Options DTMF Receive Active 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Time
After answering the call, the system attaches a

DTMF receiver to the DISA trunk for this time.

extension port =
Class 1

E&M Override
caller.



Dialed)
For tie lines, enable/disable the ability to ignore
the first incoming digit. Use this to make the tie
trunk compatible with 3- and 4-digit tie line
service. This option does not apply to DISA.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Code 704).


to use System Speed Dialing.




to use the telephone system Internal Paging.




to use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code #9).

T-point>


Enable/Disable a DISA caller ability to use the
Call Forward service codes (Programs 11-11-01
~11-11-05).

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk user ability

to use the Barge-In feature.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-15-01 Individual Trunk Group Routing for 0 ~ 100 0

Extensions 0 = No Setting (Calls will not
Designate the trunk route accessed when a route.)

Code. Refer to Trunk Group Routing to set up
outbound routing.

Set up the duration time between announcing
the VRS Waiting Message for Auto Attendant

& Queuing. The message is repeatedly sent out
in the specified time.

For DISA operation, set the trunk service type Mode (1 ~ 8):
to 2. You can have a different service type for 0 = Normal
each Night Service mode. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
Assign the extensions that should receive the ports) ring for
overflow. Set the ringing in Program 22-06. incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.
No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.
25-01-01 VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup VRS/ 0 = Extension Number Service 0
DISA Dial-In Mode Code Specify (Intercom)
Select whether the DISA trunk uses Extension 1 = Use Dial Conversion Table
number/Service code specify or Dial
Conversion Table.
25-01-02 VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup DISA 0 = Off 1

User ID 1 = On
Select whether or not the DISA User ID should

be used.
25-01-03 VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup VRS/ 0 = Normal 0

DISA Transfer Alarm 1 = Alarm
Select whether or not the DISA transfer alarm

should be used.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign the source and VRS message number 1 = VRS (01 ~ 100 VRS
to be used as the Automated Attendant Message Number)
Message for each trunk (001 ~ 400) which is 2 = ACI (01 ~ 04 ACI Group
assigned as a VRS/DISA Number)
Extension Group Number)

Set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. Trunk Ports:
This sets what happens to the call when the 001 ~ 400
DISA caller dials incorrectly. The call can either Day/Night Mode:
Disconnect (0), transfer to an alternate ring 1~8
group destination, or transfer to In-Skin/
0 = Disconnect
External Voice Mail, or Centralized Voice Mail.

101 DSPDB-VM
Mail or InMail
Program 25-15-01)

Answer/Busy 1 ~ 100
Set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. Trunk Ports:
This sets what happens to the call when the 001 ~ 400
DISA caller calls a busy or unanswered Day/Night Mode:
extension. The call can either Disconnect (0), or 1~8
transfer to an alternate ring group destination, 0 (Disconnect)

In-Skin/External Voice Mail, or Centralized
Voice Mail.
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
or InMail)
104 (Speed Dial table Program
25-15-01)

Assign the VRS message number to be used
as the Automated Attendant error message. For
each VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS answers,
enter the VRS message (1 ~ 100) the outside
caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter

0 (i.e., no error message), the call reroutes
according to Program 25-03 and Program
25-04. For each trunk, you make a separate
entry for each Night Service mode.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
25-06-01 VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup 0 ~ 100 (0 = No Setting) 0

Next Attendant Message Number 101 = Voice Mail Answers
Set up single digit dialing through the VRS. This 104 = Refer to 25-04: VRS/DISA
gives VRS callers single-key access to Transfer Ring Group with No
extensions, the company operator, Department Answer/ Busy
Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS 105 = Dial the other extension
message set to answer outside calls (see
106 = Record VRS
Program 25-02 and Program 25-05), you
specify:
The digit the VRS caller dials (0 ~ 9, , #).
(Keep in mind that if you assign destinations
to digits, outside callers cannot dial system
extensions, starting with that digit.
The destination reached (eight digits
maximum) when the caller dials the
specified digit.
The destination can be an extension, a
Department Calling pilot number or the Voice
Mail master number. A one-digit code can be
assigned for each Automated Attendant
message.
25-06-02 VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup Maximum of eight digits No Setting
Destination Number
programmed to answer outside calls, specify:
The digit the Automated Attendant caller
dials (1 ~ 12, where 10 = 0, 11 = and
12 = #). (Keep in mind that if you assign

destinations to digits three and four, outside
callers cannot dial system extensions that
begin with that digit.)
The destination reached (four digits
maximum) when the caller dials the single
digit code.

Dial Tone Time
After answering the DISA trunk, the system

of the DISA password. If the caller fails to dial
during this time, the system drops the call.

Answer Time
A DISA caller can ring an extension for this time
before the system sets the call as a Ring No
Answer. After this time expires, the call follows
the programmed Ring No Answer routing (set in
Program 25-03 and 25-04).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
25-07-03 System Timers for VRS/DISA Disconnect 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

after VRS/DISA retransfer to IRG
From DISA trunk, when the call may go to
Incoming Ring Group (IRG) of Program 25-03/

25-04. This setting determines the time the call
is ringing in the IRG.
25-07-04 System Timers for VRS/DISA Calling Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

to Automatic Answering Telephone Set
Set the answering waiting time of the automatic
answering extension when an incoming DID
trunk call is received.

Time for Guidance Message by Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Set the announcement time of the automatic

answering extension before an incoming DID
trunk caller is disconnected.

Time for Guidance Message by ACI
Set the announcement time by the ACI after
which an incoming DID trunk caller is
disconnected.

automatically transferred trunk-to-trunk (such

as Tandem Trunking) conversation can talk
before the Long Conversation tone is heard.

Determine the time the system waits before
disconnecting a DISA or any automatically
transferred trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) call after the Long Conversation tone
is heard.
25-07-09 System Timers for VRS/DISA DISA Internal 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Paging Time
Set the maximum time of an Internal Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues

longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.
25-07-10 System Timers for VRS/DISA DISA 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

External Paging Time
Set the maximum time an External Page is

DISA call.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Answer Delay Time
Set the time the system waits after receiving an
incoming VRS/DISA call before the system

automatically answers the call (0 ~ 64800
seconds).

Busy Tone Interval
If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and
Program 25-04 = 0), the system plays busy
tone for this time before disconnecting.
25-07-14 System Timers for VRS/DISA Delayed VRS 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Answer Time
Assign the delay time from switching from a
normal incoming status to DID Mode. If this
time is set to 0, the call switches to DID
immediately.
25-08-01 DISA User ID Setup Password Dial (Six digits fixed) No Setting
For each DISA user, set the 6-digit password. (0 ~ 9, , #)

25-09-01 Class of Service for DISA Users Day/Night Mode = 1 ~ 8 1
Assign a DISA Class of Service for each user. Function Class = 1 ~ 15
Assign the DISA Class of Service options in
Program 20-14. The DISA Class of Service

cannot be 0. Program 20-06 cannot be used to
assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.
25-10-01 Trunk Group Routing for DISA Day/Night Mode = 1 ~ 8 1

Assign the Trunk Group Route chosen when a Route Table Number = 0 ~ 100
user places a DISA call to the system and dials (0 = No Setting)
9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06.
Enable or disable DISA caller ability to dial 9 in
Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to each
DISA Class of Service (1 ~ 15). The system
assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based
on the password the DISA caller dials.
25-11-01 DISA Toll Restriction Class Day/Night Mode = 1 ~ 8 2

If the system uses Toll Restriction, enter a Toll Toll Restriction Class = 1 ~ 15
Restriction Class (1 ~ 15) for each DISA user
(1 ~ 15). The system uses the Toll Restriction
Class you enter in Program 21-05 and 21-06.
The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA

call is based on the DISA Class of Service and
user, which is determined by the password the
caller dials. Program 21-04 cannot be used to
assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.
25-12-01 Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA Day/Night Mode = 1 ~ 8 1

Assign the trunk route that DISA Callers access Route Table Number = 0 ~ 100
if they dial the Alternate Trunk Route Access
Code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on
(0 = No Setting)
page 2-209 for more information on setting up
Alternate Trunk Route Access.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
25-15-01 DISA Transfer Target Setup DISA Transfer Speed Dial bin number 0 ~ 9999 9999
Target Area at Wrong Dial
Used to assign a speed dial number when the

wrong number is received.
Target Area at No Answer or Busy
Used to assign a speed dial number when a
dial tone times out and the target extension
does not answer or is busy.
Trunk Continue/Disconnect Codes:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-25 Basic Trunk Data Setup Continued/ 0 = Disable (No) 0

Discontinued Trunk-to-Trunk Conversation 1 = Enable (Yes)
When Program 24-02-10 is set to disconnect a
trunk after the defined time, determine whether

or not a user should be able to use the
continue/disconnect code.
20-28-01 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation 0 ~ 9, #, No Setting

Continue Code
When Program 14-01-25 is enabled, determine
the 1-digit code the user should dial (0 ~ 9, ,
#) to extend the conversation for the time
defined in Program 20-28-03. If the Continue
and Disconnect codes are programmed the
same (e.g., #), the system follows the Continue
operation. Using the Continue code before the
warning tone is heard has no action.

Disconnect Code
the 1-digit code the user should dial (0 ~ 9, ,
#) to immediately disconnect their call. Using
the Disconnect code before the warning tone is
heard disconnects the call.
20-28-03 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Continue Time
the time a call is extended when the user dials

the Continue code (defined in Program
20-28-01).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign the master/pilot number of the voice Extension Number (maximum of
mail group from Program 11-07-01 as the DIL eight digits)
destination. If all Voice Mail ports are in the Pilot Number
same unique Extension (Department) Group
(see Program 16-02 above), the DIL rings

another Voice Mail port if its assigned port is
busy.
22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).

This timer starts when a trunk begins talking
with another trunk (for example: Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer/Tandem Trunking). When this time
expires, a warning tone is heard. If Program
24-02-10 is set, the conversation disconnects
after that time expires. This timer is set again
when the external digit time expires. One of the
trunks used must be an analog trunk (or leased
line).
This applies to manually transferred Tandem
Trunk and DISA calls.

Trunk-to-Trunk
Determine the time a conversation continues
after the time in Program 24-02-07 expires. If
this option is set to 0, the conversation is
disconnected immediately. This program has
no affect if Program 24-02-07 is set to 0. One of
the trunks used must be an analog trunk (or
leased line).
This applies to manually transferred Tandem
Trunk and DISA calls.

is heard.
If Program 25-07-08 is set to 0, the call is
disconnected after the time expires. This timer
is set again when the external digit time
expires.
This applies to automatically transferred
Tandem Trunk and DISA calls.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

is heard.
This program has no affect if Program 25-07-07
is set to 0.
This applies to automatically transferred
Tandem Trunk and DISA calls.
Operation
To place a DISA call into the system (from any 2500 type telephone):
1. Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.
2. Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
3. Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).
4. Wait for a second unique dial tone.
5. Dial an extension.
- OR -
Dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS.

- OR -
Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (if enabled).

- OR -
Dial 704 + a trunk group number (1~100) for an outside call.

- OR -
Dial #9 + a trunk number (1~400) for an outside call.

- OR -
Dial #2 + System Speed Dialing bin number.

- OR -
Dial 0 for the operator.

- OR -
Dial 701 + an Internal Paging Zone number (0, 1~9, 00, 01~64).

Issue 2.0
- OR -
Dial 703 + an External Paging Zone number (1~8 or 0 for All Call).
- OR -
Dial 710 + a busy extension number to barge in to a call.
To forward extension calls using a DISA call into the system (from any 2500 type telephone):
1. Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.
2. Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
3. Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).
4. Wait for a second unique dial tone.
5. Dial the Call Forward service code (as defined in Program 11-11-01 through Program 11-11-05).
6. Dial the number of the extension to be forwarded.
7. Dial 1 to set Call Forwarding or 0 to cancel Call Forwarding.
8. Dial the extension number to which the calls will be forwarded.
To use the Continue code to extend a DISA call:

1. An external call connects to an external number (either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or
by DISA caller).
2. After the programmed time (Program 25-07-07), a warning tone is heard and the user dials the
Continue code (Program 20-28-01) to extend the conversation.
3. After the programmed time (Program 20-28-03), the warning tone is heard again. After the
programmed time (Program 25-07-08), the call is disconnected if the Continue code is not dialed
again.

Issue 2.0
Description
The DSS Console gives a multiline terminal user a Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) and one-button access to extensions, trunks, and
system features. This saves time for users that do a lot of call
processing (e.g., attendants, operators, or dispatchers). The
DSS Console simplifies:
Calling extensions and door boxes
Placing, answering and transferring outside calls
Making an External or Internal Page
Switching the Night Service mode
Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer
The DSS Console also provides DSS Console Alternate

Answer. This lets a multiline terminal user with a DSS Console quickly reroute their calls to a co-worker.
Transferred and dial 0 calls ring both DSS Consoles and, if the VRS is installed, the main operator hears
the message, Your calls have been forwarded. Central office calls ring both consoles and no message
is heard by the operator.
You can also program the DSS Console keys to store Service Codes (up to 29 digits long). This provides
the DSS Console user with many of the features available on One-Touch and Programmable Feature
Keys. The DSS Console keys can optionally store additional associated digits after the Service Code.
For example, storing 70401 under a DSS Console key accesses Trunk Group 1 when the console user
presses the key.
The maximum number of consoles allowed per system is 32. If a Digital Port Connection is used, one
telephone can support a maximum of 32 DSS Consoles. If connected to an IP phone as a side option, a
maximum of one DSS Console is supported per telephone.
DSS Lamp Table Changed to Apply to DSS/Hotline Keys for Multiline Terminals
Using Programs 30-05-02~30-05-21 DSS Console Lamp Table, you can assign LED flash patterns for
DSS and Hotline keys on multiline terminals and DSS Consoles.
/Non- Agent DSS Lamping Available
With the UNIVERGE SV9100 system, Programs 30-05-02~30-05-21 allow a non- DSS console to light
indicating the status of both non- agents and agents, but agents do not show status (Logged In/Out,
etc.), only idle, busy, etc.
2-430 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Issue 2.0
Conditions
Changing flash patterns for DSS Consoles also changes them for Hotline keys.
When installing a DSS, the system must auto-detect the console for the LEDs to function
correctly. When connecting the DSS to an extension previously defined with another circuit
type, undefine the circuit type (enter 00 in Program 10-03-01 for the extension number),
then connect the DSS Console.
Programmable Function Keys for codes (10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19)
cannot be programmed on a DSS Console.
Programmable Function keys for Trunk Group (02), Virtual Extension (03), and Call
Appearance (CAP) Key (08) cannot be programmed on a DSS Console as the system
does not allow entry of the additional data required for these keys.
A user can use the One-Touch Programmable Function Key (code 01) to have DSS
Console keys for Personal Speed Dial and common and group Speed Dial.
Lighting status for agents and non- agents does not appear on the same console type. For
agents lighting status, a DSS Console must be programmed as a console in Program 30-
01-01. For non- agents, the console must be programmed as a business console.
A DSS key indicates only a Call Forwarding indication for extensions forwarded with
Immediate Call Forwarding.
A DSS Console can have line keys for placing and answering calls.
The DSS Console provides one-touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Door Boxes. Refer
to Door Box on page 2-449 when programming Door Boxes.
The DSS Console provides one-touch Night Service switching. Refer to Night Service on
page 2-1078 when programming Night Service options.
Like a One-Touch Key, a user can have DSS Console keys for Direct Station Selection,
Trunk Calling, Personal Speed Dial, Speed Dialing, and Service Code access.
The DSS Console provides one-touch External and Internal Page zone access. Refer to
Paging, External on page 2-1109 and Paging, Internal on page 2-1119.
You can program the DSS Console keys with service codes to provide the functions of
many of the Programmable Function keys. The stored service code can have up to three
digits, but it can have additional option codes added (e.g. to set Immediate Call Forward for
all calls. Trunk Group (02), Virtual Extension (03), and Call Appearance (CAP) Key (08)
codes can not be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the
additional data required.
The capacity of a console can be expanded by assigning a Page key (shift key). The Page
key (shift key) must be assigned on keys 55~60.
The expanded capacity for DSS Consoles (two pages), is not supported for DSS Consoles
in the Monitor Mode.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console 2-431

Issue 2.0
When a multiline terminal user is on a call, they can transfer to another station by pressing
a DSS key for that station. It is not necessary to press Transfer to transfer to another
station using a DSS key.
When a multiline terminal user is on a call, they must press Transfer to transfer a call off site
with a DSS key.
Pauses can be entered in the dial string of a DSS/One Touch button. The pause is entered
as P in the dial string and causes the system to wait three seconds before sending the rest
of the digits that follow the P (pause). Multiple pauses can be entered.
The @ can be entered in the dial string of a DSS/One Touch button. The @ only applies to
ISDN and Intercom calls. When using the @, the system waits for the destination to answer
(answer supervision), and then sends the rest of the digits.
Entering a P (pause) in a DSS/One Touch dial string can be used for CO calls, Intercom
calls, or after the @ for ISDN calls.
When the system has the Hotel Motel license (0007), the Message Waiting Indication
(MWI) on a DSS Console for an extension is a Green LED. Without the Hotel Motel license
the MWI on a DSS Console for an extension is a Red LED.
Default Settings
No DSS Consoles assigned (in Program 30-02-01).
All DSS Console key ranges are ports 1~200.
Once a DSS Console is enabled, the console keys are DSS keys (Program 30-03-01).
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Contact Center

Issue 2.0
Door Box
Night Service
One-Touch Calling
Paging, External
Paging, Internal

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration 3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset
data for terminal type (B1). 6 = PGD (Paging)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used --

Set to 1 for a DSS Console to have one-touch Handsfree)
operation. If set to 0, the user must lift the

handset before pressing a DSS key for the call
to complete.

Assign Class of Service (1 ~ 15) to extensions. Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
(1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


State

Number

used by operators.

Set the mode of the system DSS Consoles. The 1 = Hotel Mode
available options are Regular (Business) Mode 2 = Monitor Mode
(0), Hotel Mode (1), Monitor Mode (2) or 3 = Business/ Mode
Business/ Mode (3).
30-02-01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Maximum of eight digits No Setting

Extension Number
Enter the extension number for the multiline
terminal connected with the DSS console (up to
eight digits).
30-03-01 DSS Console Key Assignment Key Number Refer to the

Customize DSS Console keys to function as 001 ~ 114 Programming
DSS keys, Service Code keys, Programmable 0 ~ 99 (General Functional Manual for
Function Keys, and One-Touch Calling keys. Level) default values.
The key [when defined as a DSS/One-Touch
key (code 01)] can have any function up to four
97 = Door Box Access key
(additional data: 1 ~ 8 Door Box
digits (e.g., extension number or Service Code). No.)
The function information (such as extension 00 ~ 99 (Appearance
number or Service Code) would then be Functional Level)
entered as the additional data.
30-04-01 DSS Console Alternate Answer Alternate DSS No. 01 ~ 32 No Setting

Define the DSS Console Alternate answer
number.
30-05-02 DSS Console Lamp Table Busy Extension 0~7 7 (On)

Define the LED patterns for busy extensions on
the DSS consoles.
30-05-03 DSS Console Lamp Table DND Extension 0~7 3 (RW)

Define the LED patterns for busy DND
extensions on the DSS consoles.
30-05-04 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Busy 0~7 7 (On)

Define the LED patterns for busy agents on the
DSS consoles.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
30-05-05 DSS Console Lamp Table Out of Schedule 0~7 0 (Off)

(DSS)
Define the LED patterns for out of schedule (/

DSS) on the DSS consoles.
30-05-06 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Log Out 0~7 5 (IL)
(DSS)
Define the LED patterns for agents that are

logged out on the DSS consoles.
30-05-07 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Log In 0~7 4 (IR)

(DSS)

logged in on the DSS consoles.
30-05-08 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent 0~7 6 (IW)

Emergency (DSS)
Define the LED patterns for agent using

emergency on the DSS consoles.
30-05-09 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 7 (On)

Code 1 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 1

on the DSS consoles.
30-05-10 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 1 (FL)

Code 2 (Hotel DSS)

30-05-11 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 2 (WK)

Code 3 (Hotel DSS)

30-05-12 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 3 (RW)

Code 4 (Hotel DSS)

30-05-13 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 5 (IL)

Code 5 (Hotel DSS)


Code 6 (Hotel DSS)

30-05-15 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 6 (IW)

Code 7 (Hotel DSS)


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
30-05-16 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 4 (IR)

Code 8 (Hotel DSS)

30-05-17 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 3 (RW

Code 9 (Hotel DSS)

30-05-18 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 0 (Off)

Code 0 (Hotel DSS)


Code (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel status code


Code # (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel status code #

30-05-21 DSS Console Lamp Table VM Message 0~7 3 (RW)

Indication
Define the LED patterns for VM message

indications on the DSS consoles.
30-10-01 DSS Console IP Terminal Setup MAC 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ FF-FF-FF- 00-00-00-00-00-

Address FF-FF-FF 00
Read Only program that displays the MAC
address of the IP terminal associated with a
DSS console.

Issue 2.0
Operation
Calling an extension from your DSS Console:

1. Press the DSS Console key.
If the call voice-announces, you can make it ring by dialing 1.
If you do not have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Extension Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is... The assigned extension is...
On Busy on a call
Off Idle
Flashing Fast In Do Not Disturb
Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console:

1. Press the flashing DSS Console key assigned to the trunk.
If you do not have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Transferring a call using your DSS Console:

1. Place or answer the call.
2. Press Transfer to transfer the call.
3. Press the DSS key for the extension to receive the transfer.
4. (Optional) Announce the call.
If called party does not want the call, press the flashing line key to retrieve it.
Making an External Page using your DSS Console:

1. Press the DSS Console External Page zone key (1~8).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
If you do not have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
External Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is... The External Page zone is...
On Busy
Off Idle

Issue 2.0
Making an Internal Page using your DSS Console:

1. Press the DSS Console Internal Page zone key (Group key 1~64).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
If you do not have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
Internal Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is... The Internal Page zone is...
On Busy
Off Idle
Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console:

1. Press the Night Service key.
Night Service Busy Lamp Field
When this key is ON... The system is in the...
DAY Day 1 Mode
NIGHT Night 1 Mode
BREAK Break 1 Mode
NIGHT 2 Night 2 Mode
Using a DSS Console key as a One-Touch or Programmable Function Key:

A user can have DSS Console keys programmed as One-Touch Keys. These keys can be used for Direct Station
Selection, Trunk Calling, Personal Speed Dial, Speed Dialing, and Service Code access. The stored service code
NOTE cannot be longer than three digits.
1. Press the DSS Console key for function.

For example, you can forward your calls by pressing DSS key + 1 + destination. Your DSS key must
have been previously programmed for Call Forward.

Issue 2.0
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Description
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns provide extension users with audible and visual call status
signals. This lets users tell the type of calls by listening to the ringing/tones and watching the keys. It
also helps users monitor the progress of their calls. In addition, Distinctive Ringing lets multiline terminal
users customize their Intercom and trunk call ringing. This is helpful for users that work together closely.
For example, if several co-workers set their multiline terminals to ring at different pitches, each co-worker
can always tell which calls are for them. You can also customize the tones the system uses for splash
tone, confirmation tone, trunk ring tone, Intercom ring tone and Alarm ring tone. Refer to the UNIVERGE
SV9100 Programming Manual for more details.
Table 2-16 Distinctive Ringing: Tones and Flash Patterns
Program Description
80-01-01~04 Service Tone Setup Set the frequency of the system splash tone. This is the tone the
system uses, for example, to alert the user of an incoming
voice-announced Intercom call.
30-05-02~21 DSS Console Lamp Table Set the DSS and Hotline key flash rates for busy, idle, DND, Agent
status, and hotel options.
Conditions
Single line telephone users cannot listen to or hear the pitch of the telephone incoming ring.
If Program 22-03-01 is set to 0~3 or 9~12 and Program 15-02-02 is set to 1~3, trunk calls
follow the ring pattern in Program 22-03-01 and the pitch in Program 15-02-02.
If Program 22-03-01 is set to 4~8 and Program 15-02-02 is set to 1~3, trunk calls follow the
ring pattern in Program 22-03-01.
If Program 22-03-01 is set to 0~12 and Program 15-02-02 is set to 4~8, trunk calls follow
the ring pattern in Program 15-02-02.
If Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup is set to Incoming Ring
Tone Extension, then Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
must have one of the priorities set to Incoming Ring Tone Extension.
The following voice mail features require system tones be changed in Program 80-01-02 to
work. Refer to the Programming section of the InMail feature for details.
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
Call Screening
Await Answer Transfer
When a ring group call rings a Single Line Station, the BLF indication shows busy.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns 2-439

Issue 2.0
The priority of the Large LED is as follows:

1. CO Call Ringing
2. Message Waiting Received
3. VM Message Waiting
4. Message Waiting Set
The SV9100 supports a total of eight Tone Patterns.
Program 15-08 is only effective for Virtual Extensions appearing on a station when the
station is set for patterns 1~3 in Program 15-02-02. When Program 15-02-02 for the station
is set to patterns 4~8, Program 15-08 for Virtual Extensions is not used.
2-440 Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-12 Trunk Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-13 ICM Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart
Default Settings
Enabled

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

From the range specified in Program 22-03-01, 3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
select the multiline terminal extension trunk ring
tone. 5 = Ring Tone 2

6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5

Extension Ring Tone 2 = Medium
Select the extension intercom ring tone. 3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2

6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-02-35 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 1 = Cycle 1 7

Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Calling 2 = Cycle 2
Extension 3 = Cycle 3
Select the cycle method that the Large LED 4 = Cycle 4
flashes when the extension has set Message 5 = Cycle 5
Waiting. 6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Called 2 = Cycle 2
flashes when the extension has Message 5 = Cycle 5
Waiting set to the extension. 6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
15-02-37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Green 1

Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color 1 = Red
Set up various message wait lamp cycle

options for lamp color.

Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Cycle 2 = Cycle 2
flashes when the extension has a VM Message 4 = Cycle 4
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
15-08-01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup ICM Tone Pattern, 0
Assign a ring tone range (0 ~ 8) to incoming 0 = Pattern 1
virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual 1 = Pattern 2
Extension key (Program 15-07). 2 = Pattern 3
3 = Pattern 4
Tone
5 = Tone Pattern 5
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
15-10-01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order 0 = Tone Pattern 1 Order 1 Pattern
Tone 2 = Pattern 3
3 = Pattern 4
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

State
20-15-01 Ring Cycle Setup Normal Incoming Call on Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 2

Trunk
Define the ringing cycle for Normal Incoming

Trunk calls.
20-15-02 Ring Cycle Setup PBX, CES Incoming Call Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 8
Define the ringing cycle for PBX, CES incoming
calls.
20-15-03 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Internal Call Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 12

Define the ringing cycle for incoming Internal
Calls.
20-15-04 Ring Cycle Setup DID/DISA/VRS Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 8

Define the ringing cycle for DID/DISA/VRS
Calls.
20-15-05 Ring Cycle Setup DID/DDI Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 8

Define the ringing cycle for DID/DDI calls.

20-15-06 Ring Cycle Setup Dial-In in the E&M Tie Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 12
Line
Define the ringing cycle for Dial-In and E&M Tie

Line calls.
20-15-07 Ring Cycle Setup Door Box Ringing for Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 8
SLT
Define the ringing cycle for Door Box ringing for

single line telephone.
20-15-08 Ring Cycle Setup Virtual Extension Ring Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 8

Define the ringing cycle for Virtual Extension
Ringing.
20-15-09 Ring Cycle Setup Callback Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 11

Define the ringing cycle for Callback.

20-15-10 Ring Cycle Setup Alarm for SLT Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 5
Define the ringing cycle for Alarm for single line
telephone.
20-15-11 Ring Cycle Setup VRS Waiting Message Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 6

Incoming Call
Define the ringing cycle for Incoming VRS

Waiting Message.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-03-01 Trunk Ring Tone Range 0 = Ring Tone Pattern 1 0

Set the ring tone range (1 ~ 9) for each trunk. 1 = Ring Tone Pattern 2
4 = Melody 1
5 = Melody 2
6 = Melody 3
7 = Melody 4
8 = Melody 5
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count 0 ~ 255 (0 = until On-Hook) 0~255 (0 = until
Customize the system basic tones and system On-Hook)
service tones. You need to reset for the

changes to take effect.
80-01-02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 1 ~ 33 33 = Default

The following features require that the system (0 = No Tone) Time Slot
tones listed below be changed to match the (33 = Default Time Slot) Refer to Table 2-
table. After changing these settings the chassis 17 Basic Tone
must be reset for the changes to take effect. Table Tone 06
Call Screening on page 2-447.
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
80-01-02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number Refer to Table 2-

(14) The following features require that the system 18 Basic Tone
tones listed below be changed to match the Table Tone 14
table. After changing these settings the chassis on page 2-447.
must be reset for the changes to take effect.
Call Screening
Call Holding
Busy Greeting

(39) The following features require that the system 19 Basic Tone
tones listed below be changed to match the Table Tone 39
table. After changing these settings the chassis on page 2-447.
must be reset for the changes to take effect.
Call Screening
Call Holding
Busy Greeting

Issue 2.0
Table 2-17 Basic Tone Table Tone 06
Tone 06
Unit Basic Tone Duration Gain Level

1 11~480/620Hz -13/-13dB 300ms 32
2 0 - No Tone 300ms 32
3 0 - No Tone 0ms
4 0 - No Tone 0ms
5 0 - No Tone 0ms
6 0 - No Tone 0ms
7 0 - No Tone 0ms
8 0 - No Tone 0ms
Tone 14

1 10~440/480Hz -13/-13dB 1000ms 32
2 0 - No Tone 2100ms 32
3 0 - No Tone 0ms
4 0 - No Tone 0ms
5 0 - No Tone 0ms
6 0 - No Tone 0ms
7 0 - No Tone 0ms
8 0 - No Tone 0ms
Tone 39

1 12~440/620Hz -16dB 500ms 32
2 0 - No Tone 500ms 32
3 0 - No Tone 0ms
4 0 - No Tone 0ms
5 0 - No Tone 0ms

Issue 2.0
Table 2-19 Basic Tone Table Tone 39 (Continued)
Tone 39 (Continued)
6 0 - No Tone 0ms
7 0 - No Tone 0ms
8 0 - No Tone 0ms
Operation
To listen to the incoming ring choices:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 711.
3. Dial 1 to check ringing for intercom calls.
- OR -
Dial 2 to check ringing for trunk calls.

4. For Intercom calls, select the pitch you want to check (1~8).
- OR -
For trunk calls, select the pitch (1~8) and the tone (1~4) you want to check.
5. Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up.
To change the pitch of your incoming ring (multiline terminal only):

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 720.
3. Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls.
- OR -
Dial 2 to change ringing for trunk calls.

4. Select the pitch (1~8).

Issue 2.0
Door Box
Description
The Door Box is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the
door can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends chime tones to all
extensions programmed to receive chimes. To answer the chime, the called extension user just lifts the
handset. This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Door Box. The Door Box is convenient to
have at a delivery entrance, for example. It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor the
delivery entrance; they answer the Door Box chimes instead. Any number of system extensions can
receive Door Box chime tones.
Each Door Box has a pair of normally open relay contacts that can connect to an electric door strike. Use
these contacts to remotely control the entrance door. After answering the Door Box chimes, a multiline
terminal user can press the Recall key to activate the Door Box contacts. This in turn releases the
electric strike on the entrance door. The device connected to the Door Box contacts cannot exceed the
contact ratings shown in the following table:
Door Box Specifications

Contact Configuration Normally Open
Maximum Load 60mA @30 VDC
10mA @90 VDC
Maximum Initial Contact Resistance 50m Ohms
The system can have up to eight Door Boxes. Six chime tones are available.
Conditions
The Door Box Feature Requires a PGD(2)-U10 ADP. A maximum of 56 PGD(2)-U10 ADP
units can be installed in an UNIVERGE SV9100 system. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100
System Hardware Manual for more information.
If a PGD(2)-U10 ADP circuit has a Door Box (doorphone) connected, you cannot use that
circuit for External Paging.
Door Boxes can ring multiline, single line, and wireless telephones. Refer to specific device
features for wireless telephone support of Door Box calls.
A Door Box cannot ring a virtual extension.
External Call forward by Doorphone can forward Doorphone calls Off-Premise while a user
is away. This feature only works for ISDN lines.
Off-hook signaling is available for Door Boxes. If an extension user is on the telephone, the
Large LED flashes indicating the Door Box ringing, and the display shows a call from the
door box.
Door Box 2-449

Issue 2.0
Each channel in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP has a jumper which must be set for Door Box
operation. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for additional
details.
A Single Line Telephone (SLT), connected to an APR does not ring when the Door Phone
rings the multiline telephone.
DECT telephones do not ring when receiving a doorbox call. Notification is shown in the
display.
Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a Recall key assigned in
the phone configuration or, by a Flash Key assigned to one of the line keys in Program 15-
07 (751: 62).
The door strike relay can be activated from the recall key on a multiline phone.
The door strike cannot be activated when a door box is forwarded off-premise.
Internal calls to or from a door phone are not included in the SMDR output.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Related Features
ISDN Compatibility
Paging, External
Wireless DECT (SIP)
2-450 Door Box

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(1) Type (B1) 1 = Multiline Terminal
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used --

Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone
data for terminal type. Ringer)
For DLC package support, set the terminal type
to 8 [PGD (for Door Box)]. First set 10-03-01 to
Box)
0 with no device plugged into that port, then 9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI)
plug the device in and the system should
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
recognize it as a door box and then set
Program 10-03-06.
11-12-36 Service Code Access (for Service Access) MLT, SLT 702
Door Box Access 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If the service code for Doorphone Access is not digits

acceptable, change it here.

Assign a function key for External Call Forward 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
by Doorphone (Code 54). 751 by default) Manual for

752 by default)
32-01-01 Door Box Timers Door Box Answer Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30
Set the time a user has to answer the Door Box
chimes.
Door Box 2-451

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
32-01-02 Door Box Timers Door Lock Cancel Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10
Set the time the Door Box strike stays open
when the single line telephone user
hookflashes or a multiline terminal user presses
Recall.
32-01-03 Door Box Timers Off-Premise Call Forward 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

by Door Box Disconnect Timer
Define the conversation time for an Off-Premise
Call Forward by Door Box call. When this timer
expires, the caller hears busy tone for 3
seconds (fixed time), and the call is then
disconnected.
32-02-01 Door Box Ring Assignments Maximum of eight digits No Setting

Determine which Door Box should ring which
extension by entering the extension number.
Each Door Box can be programmed to ring up

to 32 extensions and an extension can be
programmed to ring for multiple Door Boxes.
32-03-01 Door Box Basic Setup Chime Pattern 0 = None Door Box 1 = 1
Set the chime pattern (0 ~ 6) for each Door 1 = Door Box Ring 1 Door Box 2 = 2
Box. 2 = Door Box Ring 2 Door Box 3 = 3
3 = Door Box Ring 3 Door Box 4 = 4

Door Box 8 = 1
32-03-02 Door Box Basic Setup CODEC Transmit 1 ~ 63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB) 32

Gain Setup
Set the Transmit Gain for each Door Box.
32-03-03 Door Box Basic Setup CODEC Receive 1 ~ 63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB) 32

Gain Setup
Set the Receive Gain for each Door Box.
32-04-01 Door Box Name Setup Door Box Name Maximum of 12 characters No Setting
Define the name of each Doorphone.

Operation
To call a Door Box:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 702.
3. Dial Door Box Number (1~8).
2-452 Door Box

Issue 2.0

2. Dial 702.
3. Dial Door Box Number (1~8).
To activate the Door Box strike:
Multiline Terminal
1. While talking to the Door Box, press Recall.
Single Line 500/2500 Telephone
1. While talking to the Door Box, hookflash.
To answer a Door Box chime:

1. Lift the handset or press Speaker.
To Answer a Door Box call while busy on another call:
Multiline Terminal
If you are busy on a call, the display shows the incoming Door Box call and the large LED flashes.
1. Press Hold to place your active call on hold.
2. When you hear dial tone, dial the door box access code (702 by default) plus the door box
number (1~8) to answer the Door Box call.
To retrieve the original call, hang up with the door box and press Conf .
If you are busy on a call, an off-hook signal is heard indicating the incoming Door Box call.
1. Press the Flash key or hookflash to place your active call on hold.
2. Dial the door box access code (702 by default) plus the door box number (1~8) to answer the
Door Box call.
To retrieve the original call, hang up. The original call rings the single line telephone.
Door Box 2-453

Issue 2.0
To activate Call Forwarding, Off-Premise for a Door Box:
This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks.

NOTE

- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the External Forward by Doorphone key (Program 15-07-01
or SC 751, code 54).
- OR -

2. Dial the Door Box number (1~4).
3. Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded.
4. Press Speaker (or hang up at the single line telephone) to hang up.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:

- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press External Forward by Doorphone key (Program 15-07-01 or
SC 751, code 54).
- OR -

2. Dial 0 for Cancel.
2-454 Door Box

Issue 2.0
Do Not Disturb
Description
Do Not Disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements. DND permits an extension user to
work by the telephone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. The user can activate DND
while their telephone is idle or while on a call. Once activated, incoming trunk calls still flash the line
keys. The user may use the telephone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls.
Five Do Not Disturb options are available at each extension. These options can be accessed via
multiline terminal Softkeys, DND feature key or DND system access code.
1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked.
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked.
3 = All calls blocked.
4 = Incoming Call Forwards blocked.
0 = Do Not Disturb canceled.
Multiline Line Terminals display the following to indicate the type of DND that is set.
1 = DND EXTERNAL
2 = DND INTERCOM
3 = DND ALL
4 = DND TRANSFER
Conditions
Do Not Disturb access code is programmable via Program 11-11-08.
If there is no Call Forwarding key (Program 15-07: 10~17), the DND key blinks when the
extension is forwarded.
Call Arrival (CAR) Key/ Virtual Extension (VE) do not support DND Programmable Function
keys.
Multiline terminal users can activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while on a call. This
option is not available for single line telephones.
When DND and Call Forward are set on the same telephone, call forwarding works. If Busy
and No Answer Forwarding are set to different locations, it follows the Busy forwarding.
If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4, callers to the
forwarded extension hear DND tone.
If an extension activates DND option 4, other extensions can still forward calls to it, but the
callers hear DND tone.
Do Not Disturb 2-455

Issue 2.0
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension
using any of the following methods:
1. Program 11-12-01 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Bypass Call
(default: 707)
2. Program 11-16-06 Single Digit Service Code Setup DND/Call Forward Override Bypass
(default: No Setting)
3. OVRD Softkey
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension while the call
is ringing to the user telephone.
DND modes 1~3 causes calls to follow Program 22-05 programming, then Program 22-08
programming even if the extension is forwarded.
When Selectable Display Messaging is set as DND All, all other DND modes are canceled
when Selectable Display Messaging is canceled.
When DND and any Call Forwarding is set, the call forwards immediately.
DND settings are not saved in a PC Pro database.
If the terminal is configured for Call Forward Both Ring and DND is activated, the calling
station will receive a DND tone. Call Forward Both Ring is not followed.
When a call is ringing on an extension and Do Not Disturb (DND) is set, the DND can be
enforced immediately or on the next call based on Program 20-09-13.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
2-456 Do Not Disturb

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign Service Code for DND. digits
Assign Service Code for DND. digits
If a single digit service code is to be used,

assign an available code number.

Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(DND = 03). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1
20-09-13 Class of Service Options (Incoming Call 0 = Immediate COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) DND Active While Ringing 1 = Next
Assign when the DND will be enforced (set at

same time a call is ringing or for next call).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(Bypass Call)
Call Forwarding/DND Override.


Operation
To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while your extension is idle:
Multiline Terminal Using Softkeys

1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press Program softkey.
3. Press DND softkey.
4. Press Set softkey.
5. Choose from the following softkeys:
Ext ICM ALL Cfwto
Ext=Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked
ICM=Incoming Intercom, Paging, call forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked.
ALL=All Calls Blocked
Cftwto=Call Forwards Blocked
To Cancel DND Heading
6. Do not lift handset.
7. Press Program softkey.
8. Press DND softkey.
9. Press Cncl softkey.
2-458 Do Not Disturb

Issue 2.0
Multiline Terminal Using Feature Key or Access Code

1. Do not lift the handset.
2. Press the DND feature key programmed in (Program15-07-01 or SC:751:03).
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial 747.

3. Dial the DND option code.
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked
3 = All Calls Blocked
4 = Call Forwards Blocked

2. Dial 747.
3. Dial the DND option code.
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked
2 = Paging, Incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked
3 = All Calls Blocked
4 = Call Forwards Blocked

Issue 2.0
Drop Key
Description
The Drop Key abandons a call while retaining the PBX/Centrex line to originate another call. The Drop
Key is provided by programming a Function Key. This feature allows Recall to be used to provide a
hookflash to the PBX or Central Office. A single line telephone user can use the Drop Key function with
an access code.
Conditions
The Drop Key provides a timed disconnect signal on CO/PBX lines.
The Drop Key cannot be used for internal, DID, or Tie line calls.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Flash
PBX Compatibility
2-460 Drop Key

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-12-42 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) SLT #3

Flash on Trunk lines 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the flash on trunk lines Service digits

Codes.
11-12-59 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) SLT No Setting

Trunk Drop Operation for SLT 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the trunk drop operation for single digits

line telephone Service Codes.
14-02-03 Analog Trunk Data Setup Flash Type 0 = Open Loop Flash 0
Select the flash type. 1 = Ground
Always set this option for Open

Loop Flash (0)
14-02-04 Analog Trunk Data Setup Hooking Type 0 = Timed Flash (Hooking) 0
Use Flash for Timed Flash (Program 81-01-14) 1 = Disconnect (Cut)
or Disconnect (Program 81-01-15). (A user can
press the FLASH key while on a trunk call to
implement Flash.)
15-02-05 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Transfer 0

Transfer Key Operation Mode 1 = Serial Call
If the Conf key should access Flash, enter 2.

2 = Flash
Otherwise, enter 0 or 1.

Flashing 1 = Yes

type) telephones.

Assign a function key for Drop Key (code 84) if 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
required. 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
Drop Key 2-461

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1
81-10-07 COI Initial Data Setup Hookflash Time 0 = 20ms 9 (600ms)

Selection 1 1 = 40ms
Set the Flash duration (20ms ~ 5.0 sec) for 2 = 60ms
analog trunk [COI( )-U( ) ETU] circuits. 3 = 80ms
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms

9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
81-10-08 COI Initial Data Setup Hookflash Time 0 = 20ms 14 (3.0 seconds)
Set the open loop disconnect duration 2 = 60ms
(20ms ~ 5.0 sec) for analog trunk [COI( )-U( ) 3 = 80ms
ETU] circuits.
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms

9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
2-462 Drop Key

Issue 2.0
Operation
To use the Drop Key from a multiline terminal with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1. Press the Function key programmed as a Drop Key.
2. Receive the new CO/PBX dial tone.
3. Dial the desired number.
To use Feature plus Recall from a multiline terminal with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1. Press Feature.
2. Press Recall.
Receive the new CO/PBX dial tone.
To use the Drop Key feature from a single line telephone with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1. Hookflash.
2. Receive internal dial tone.
3. Dial the Service Code (Program 11-12-59, default not assigned).
4. Receive the new CO/PBX dial tone.
Drop Key 2-463

Issue 2.0
2-464 Drop Key

Ecology
Description
Environmental issues, such as global warming or ecology are one of the most important themes
in today's world. The following energy saving features are implemented in this system:
E
Power Cut Off Mode:
Based on Day/Night mode switching, the system can automatically cut power to
pre-programmed multiline terminals resulting in the system consuming less power. This
feature can also be activated/deactivated via service codes. When the system cuts the
power to the terminal it cannot be used again until power is restored.
Power Saving Mode:
Based on a configurable system timer, preprogrammed multiline terminals can dim the
brightness of all line keys and feature keys using less power. This feature does not affect
the multiline terminal display.
Power Failure Saving Mode:
If the SV9100 loses system power, this feature can be programmed to cut the power to
selected terminals while running on the backup battery. Cutting the power to specific
terminals will help extend battery backup run time. This feature is programmed on a per
station basis and is NOT enabled by default.
When a terminal is in the Power Cut off/Power Failure mode, a user cannot dial any
number including an emergency number (i.e., 911) from the station. The terminal is
CAUTION unusable until it returns from the power cutoff state.
Conditions
Power Cut Off Mode

While in power cut off mode, power does not automatically recover. If this is
expected to occur, disable the Ecology mode before license expiration, or reboot the
system to restore power to the telephones.
The system can cut power to digital (TDM) Multiline Terminals by using power save
groups. A maximum of 16 Power Save groups are supported.
The Power Cut Off mode can be set to On or Off on a per group basis. However,
Digital Station port 1 cannot be set for power cutoff. This keeps the terminal
powered on for emergency calls, etc.
If some terminals are on a call when the Power Cut Off mode is enabled, the system
will wait until all extensions on the blade become idle before cutting power to the
slot.
Ecology 2-465
Issue 2.0
Power Cut Off mode can be set to On or Off using one or a combination of the following
methods:
Night mode time schedule/Manual Night Mode selection
Service Code
Function Key
If the system is reset during the Power Cut Off mode, power to all phones is restored when
the phone system comes back on line.
When a phone has entered Power Cut Off mode, any direct calls to the terminal will follow
the stations call forwarding. If the phone is part of a chain call forwarding scenario, the
chain call forwarding will not process while the phone is in Power Cut Off mode.
When a terminal is set to Power Cut Off mode, the DSS/BLF status on keys or the console
will not display any status; including Hotel/Motel and Call Forward/DND.
When a terminal is in the Power Cut Off mode, Callback requests or Camp-On cannot be
set until terminal power is restored.
Call Forward Follow Me settings are not followed when the terminal loses power from the
Power Cut Off mode.
If the terminal has Call Forward Both set and then enters the Power Cut Off mode, any calls
directed to the terminal do not follow the Call Forward settings.
Caller ID history is not updated for a terminal in a Power Cut Off mode. Once power to the
terminal is restored, the Caller ID history will start functioning again.
If the system cuts the power via the Power Cut Off mode while a user is on a call, the call is
not lost. If the user places the caller on hold or park, the users phone then switches to
Power Cut Off mode and the call is lost.
If the Power Cut Off mode is manually set to On during a scheduled power Off time, power
cut remains in the On state until the next power cut off time, or until the Power Cut Off mode
is manually set to Off.
Power Saving Mode

If the Multiline Terminal is idle or receives no incoming calls for the programmed period,
system activates the Power Saving mode. The Line Key and feature key LED's on the
Multiline Terminal will darken. This feature does not affect the terminal display.
The Power Saving mode can be individually set for each terminal.
Any key operation or incoming call at the terminal ends the Power Saving mode and all
LEDs will return to normal brightness.
2-466 Ecology
Issue 2.0
Power Failure Saving Mode

The same conditions as Power Cut Off mode exists with the following exceptions:
When the system is in the Power Failure Saving mode, power must be restored to the system
before restoring power to the phones. When in a Power Failure Saving mode, a system reset
will not restore power to the multiline terminals.
Multiline Terminals can be assigned to cut power on a per station basis when the system
enters the Power Failure Saving mode. This feature does not support power save groups.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
Multiline Terminal (DT400/DT300)
GCD-8DLCA/ GCD-16DLCA or GPZ-8DLCB or GCD-LTA
Related Features
Night Service

Ecology 2-467
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-10-51 Service Code Setup (for System MLT, SLT 731 (NA)
Administrator) Power Saving for Power 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Save Group digits
Use to determine the Service Code setting for

the Power Save feature (On/ Off) in the Power
Saving Group.
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Patterns Start 0000 ~ 2359 Refer to the
Time Programming
Defines the daily pattern of the automatic mode Manual for
switching. Each mode group has 10 patterns. default values.

timer settings.
This option defines the start time.
12-02-02 Automatic Night Service Patterns End 0000 ~ 2359 Refer to the
Time Programming
Defines the daily pattern of the automatic mode Manual for
switching. Each mode group has 10 patterns. default values.

timer settings.
This option defines the end time.
12-02-03 Automatic Night Service Patterns 1~8 1 or 2 depending

Operation Mode on the time
Defines the daily pattern of the automatic mode pattern and time
switching. Each mode group has 10 patterns. number.
timer settings.
This option defines the operation mode the
system should be in during each time number.
12-03-01 Weekly Night Service Switching Night Mode Service Group Day of Week:
Assign one of the 10 Time Patterns Numbers: 01 ~ 32 01 = Sunday
programmed in Program 12-02-01 to each day Time Schedule Pattern Number: (Time Pattern 2)
of the week. 1 ~ 10 02 = Monday
(Time Pattern 1)
03 = Tuesday
(Time Pattern 1)
04 = Wednesday
(Time Pattern 1)
05 = Thursday
(Time Pattern 1)
06 = Friday
(Time Pattern 1)
07 = Saturday
(Time Pattern 2)
2-468 Ecology
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign one of the 10 Time Patterns to holidays. 0101 ~ 1231
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1; 1231 = Dec.
31)
0 ~ 10
(0 = No Setting)
15-02-18 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Normal Mode 1

Power Saving Mode 1 = Power Saving Mode
Enable/disable the ability of each terminal to cut (Eco-Mode)
power when the system is running on battery
backup following a loss of power.

Assign a function key as a Power Saving key 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code #6) 01 - 16: Power Saving Group 751 by default) Manual for
Number 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
00: All Groups Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
15-27-02 Power Save Setup Power Off When Power Maximum of eight digits 0
Failure 0 = Disable
Assign power cut or no power cut for each 1 = Enable (Power Cut)
extension when the system loses power and
runs on battery backup.

Time Before Shifting to Power Saving Mode 1 = 1 minute
System-wide timer that determines how long a 2 = 2 minutes
multiline terminal is idle before shifting into the 3 = 4 minutes
Power Saving mode.
4 = 8 minutes

5 = 16 minutes
6 = 32 minutes
7 = 64 minutes
20-53-01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Power Power Save Group Number 1
Save Group Night Mode Service Group 1 ~ 16
Number Night Mode Service group
Assigns the Night Mode Service group number number 1 ~ 32
into the Power Save group.
20-54-01 Power Supply Mode for Each Power Save Power Save Group Number 1
Group Power Saving Mode 1 ~ 16
Assign the Power Saving mode in each Power Night Mode 1 ~ 8
Saving group and Night mode. 0 = Power Cut
1 = Power Supply
90-02-02 Programming Password Setup Password Maximum of eight digits. Refer to the
Programming
Configure the administrator accounts that are
used when Power cut to the Power Save group. Manual for

default values.
Ecology 2-469
Issue 2.0
Operation
Power Cut Off Mode
To cut the power for Power Save Group 2 during the night time (19:00-6:00):
< Program >

Program 20-53-01: Power Save Group 2 Set 1 for Night mode Service Group Number
Program 20-53-01: Power Save Group 3 Set 1 for Night mode Service Group Number
Program 20-54-01: Power Save Group 2
Night Mode 1: Power Saving Mode 1 (Power Supply)
Night Mode 2: Power Saving Mode 0 (Power cut)
Program 20-54-01: Power Save Group 3
Night Mode 1: Power Save Mode 1 (Power Supply)
Night Mode 2: Power Save Mode 1 (Power cut)
Program 15-27-01:
TEL 101: Power Save Group 2
Table 2-20 Program 12-02: Automatic Night Service Patterns
Night Group Set Time

Time Pattern Start End Night Mode
Mode Number
1 1 1 0000 0600 2
1 1 2 0600 1900 1
1 1 3 1900 0000 2
2-470 Ecology
Issue 2.0
The power to TEL 101 and TEL 102 cuts at night.
Figure 2-14 Automatic Night Service
Settings Using Service Codes
< Program >

Program 15-27-01:
Power Off for Power Save Group 2
1. Press Speaker and dial (Service Code 731).

2. Dial 02, Group 2
3. Dial 1, Power Off
4. Enter the Password (Default: 0000)
Power supply to the system is cut when all terminals of Power Save group 2 are in an Idle state.
Password is set in Program 90-02-02 (User ID3).
5. Press Speaker to set Power Off for Power Save Group 2.
Power On for Power Save Group 2

2. Dial 02, Group 2
3. Dial 0, Power On
4. Press Speaker to set Power On for Power Save Group 2.
Power Off for the Entire Power Save Group
Ecology 2-471
Issue 2.0
2. Dial 00, Entire Group

3. Dial 1, Power Off
4. Enter the Password (Default: 0000)
Power supply to the system is cut when all terminals of Entire Power Save Group are in an Idle state.
Password is set in Program 90-02-02 (User ID3).
5. Press Speaker to set Power Off for Entire Power Save Group.
Power On for the Entire Power Save Group

2. Dial 00, Entire Group
3. Dial 0, Power On
4. Press Speaker to set Power On for Entire Power Save Group.
Settings Using Function Keys
Power Off for Power Save Group 2
1. Assign Power Save key (SC751 code #06) with additional data 02.
2. Press the Power Save key.
3. Enter the Password (set in Program 90-02-02 User ID3).
4. The key turns red.
Power On for Power Save Group 2
3. The key is turned Off.
Power Off for the Entire Power Save Group
3. Enter the Password (set in Program 90-02-02 User ID3).
4. The key turns red.
Power On for the Entire Power Save Group
3. The key is turned Off.
2-472 Ecology
Issue 2.0
Power Saving Mode
< Program >

Program 15-02-18: TEL 200: 1
Program 20-02-10: 1 minute
1. Idle state at TEL200.
2. One minute later, LED areas highlighted in red darken at TEL200.
Figure 2-15 Multiline Terminal Darkens
Power Failure Saving Mode
Set Program 15-27-02 to 1 for extensions to have the power cut when the system losses power and runs
on battery backup.
Example
< Program >
Program 15-27-02:
TEL 101: set to a 1
TEL 102: set to a 1
TEL 103: set to a 0
TEL 104: set to a 0
TEL 101 TEL 102 will be powered Off when a power failure occurs.
Ecology 2-473
Issue 2.0
E-911 Compatibility
Description
PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING!

When ARS is NOT enabled and the system allows trunk access by dialing 9, single line
telephones disregard Program 20-03-03 System Options for Single Lines Telephones SLT
IMPORTANT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines. This prevents the system from connecting to a trunk until all the
digits are dialed. This can be avoided by using either 8 or 9x (but not 91) as the trunk access code.
Be aware that this change requires additional programming changes.
Do not use in a PBX access code if the Account Code feature is used. With the Account Code
feature enabled, if this is used in the access code, the trunk stops sending digits to the central
office after the is sent.
Finally, but most importantly, TEST - TEST - TEST!! Due to the nature of the E911 feature, it is
imperative that when programming this, or any other feature, to be aware of the consequences.
Make sure to test the extensions with the E911 feature to confirm that other features do not
prevent the call from being completed. When using external equipment, make sure the dial
treatment tables are working properly.
E-911 Compatibility ensures that emergency calls always get through. If an emergency occurs, a user
goes to any telephone, lifts the handset and dials 911. The system built-in E-911 Compatibility places the
emergency call even if the user forgets to dial an access code or press a line key. The E911 abilities
include:
Attendant Notification
The attendant receives a notification each time a co-worker dials an emergency 911 call. This
notification is the co-workers name and number display optionally accompanied by an audible
alarm. Notification occurs regardless of whether the attendant is idle or busy on a call. You can
optionally extend this ability to other supervisory extensions as well.
Emergency Routing
When an extension user dials 911, the system can automatically find a trunk for the call. The
system can choose a route to which the user normally does not have access. If all normal routes
are busy, the system can even disconnect an active call and place the emergency call. E-911
Compatibility uses the flexibility of the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Call Route Options to
route 911 emergency calls (even in systems in which ARS is not enabled).
E911 Outgoing Dialing
The E911 call follows the trunk group route programming. It is possible to use the flexibility of the
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Call Route Options for additional routing options.
Forced Disconnect Follows Timer to Disconnect Call

When all lines in the programmed route are busy and the system must drop a call to place a 911 call, the
system waits the time set in Program 81-01 before disconnecting the call.
Calling Party Identification
With ISDN installed, the system can provide the Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from
Station. No additional customer-provided 911 equipment is required.
2-474 E-911 Compatibility

Issue 2.0
Uninstalled Trunks in Trunk Group Prevent Call from Dialing Out
By system default, all trunks in Program 14-05-01 Trunk Group are in group 1. When placing a 911 call,
the system tries to access the trunks defined in the group. If the trunks do not exist, the call does not dial
out. For E911 to function correctly, remove any uninstalled trunks from the trunk group.
If Program 21-01-12 : System Options for Outgoing Calls, Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is set
to 0 (trunk access code required), when using the Dial Number Preview feature and dialing 9+911, if all
trunks are busy, the user hears a busy signal and the call does not dial out.
If option Program 21-01-12 is set to 1 (trunk access code not required) and using Dial Number Preview,
911 is dialed, the system disconnects a trunk and dials the call.
Dial Number Preview is when a telephone number is first dialed (previewing the number in the display)
then Speaker or a line key is pressed to place the call.
Conditions
If Program 21-01-10 is programmed with an entry other than 0, a call does not have a talk
path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing
an outgoing call. This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem
when dialing 911. Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller. This option should be kept at
its default setting of 0 to prevent any problem with dialing 911.
CAMA Trunks are not supported.
The 911 Cut Through feature works when dialing trunk Access+911.
Calling Party Number (CPN)
CPN sent when making a normal trunk call from a terminal.
Table 2-21 CPN for Standard Calls
PRG PRG PRG PRG

CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01
Not Assigned None

Not Assigned
Assigned None
Off
Not Assigned 21-12-01
Assigned
Assigned 21-12-01
Off
Not Assigned None
Not Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
On
Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
E-911 Compatibility 2-475

Issue 2.0
Table 2-21 CPN for Standard Calls (Continued)
PRG PRG PRG PRG

CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01
Not Assigned None

Not Assigned
Assigned None
Off
Assigned
Assigned 21-12-01
On
Not Assigned None
Not Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
On
Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
The CPN provided is from the service provider.
CPN sent when making a normal trunk call from a Virtual Extension (VE).
Table 2-22 CPN for VE Standard Calls
PRG 21-13-01
PRG PRG PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01
Terminal VE
Not Assigned Not Assigned None
Not Assigned Assigned None

Not
Assigned
Assigned Not Assigned None
Assigned Assigned None

Off
Not Assigned Not Assigned 21-12-01
Not Assigned Assigned 21-12-01

Assigned
Assigned Not Assigned 21-12-01
Assigned Assigned 21-12-01

Off
Not Assigned Assigned 21-13-01 (VE)

Not
Assigned
Assigned Assigned 21-13-01 (VE)

On

Assigned

Issue 2.0
Table 2-22 CPN for VE Standard Calls (Continued)
PRG 21-13-01
PRG PRG PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01
Terminal VE

Not
Assigned

Off

On Assigned

Not
On
Assigned

On On Assigned
CPN sent when making a 911 call from a terminal.
Table 2-23 CPN for 911 Calls
PRG PRG PRG PRG

CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01
Not Assigned None

Not Assigned
Assigned None
Off
Assigned
Assigned 21-12-01
Off
Not Assigned None
Not Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
On
Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01

Issue 2.0
Table 2-23 CPN for 911 Calls (Continued)
PRG PRG PRG PRG

CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01
Not Assigned None

Not Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
Off
Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
On
Not Assigned None
Not Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
On
Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
CPN sent when making a 911 call from a Virtual Extension (VE).
Table 2-24 CPN for VE 911 Calls
PRG 21-13-01
PRG PRG PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01
Terminal VE
Not Assigned Assigned None

Not Assigned
Assigned Assigned None

Off
Not Assigned Assigned 21-12-01

Assigned
Assigned Assigned 21-12-01

Off

Not Assigned

On

Assigned

Issue 2.0
Table 2-24 CPN for VE 911 Calls (Continued)
PRG 21-13-01
PRG PRG PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01
Terminal VE

Not Assigned
Assigned Not Assigned 21-13-01 (Terminal)
Assigned Assigned 21-13-01 (Terminal)

Off

Assigned

On

Not Assigned

On

Assigned
Figure 2-16 CCIS Standard Calls

Issue 2.0
CPN sent when making a normal trunk call across CCIS trunks from a terminal.
Table 2-25 CPN for CCIS Standard Calls
System A System B
CPN: PRG
PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Off Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)

Issue 2.0
Table 2-25 CPN for CCIS Standard Calls (Continued)
System A System B
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Not On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)

Issue 2.0
System A System B
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
On Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)

Issue 2.0
System A System B
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
On Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)

On Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-17 CCIS VE Standard Calls

Issue 2.0
CPN sent when making a normal trunk call across CCIS trunks from a Virtual Extension (VE).
Table 2-26 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls
System A System B
PRG
CPN: PRG
PRG PRG PRG 21-13-01 PRG PRG PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Terminal VE
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Off Off
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)

Issue 2.0
Table 2-26 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls (Continued)
System A System B
PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Terminal VE
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)

Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off Off Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)

Issue 2.0
System A System B
PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Terminal VE
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Assigned
Off 21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Off On
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
System A System B
PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Terminal VE
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)

Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Off On Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
System A System B
PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Terminal VE
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
On Off
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
System A System B
PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Terminal VE
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)

Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
On Off Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
System A System B
PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Terminal VE
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
Not On None
Assigned On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
On On
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
Not On None
Assigned On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
System A System B
PRG
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Terminal VE
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)

Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
On On Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
CPN sent when making a 911 call across CCIS trunks from a terminal.
Figure 2-18 CCIS 911 Calls

Issue 2.0
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS 911 Calls
System A System B
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Of
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)

Issue 2.0
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS 911 Calls (Continued)
System A System B
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)

Issue 2.0
System A System B
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)

Issue 2.0
System A System B
CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysB)
Not
Assigned
Off None
Not
Assigned
On None
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Not
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)
On
Off 21-13-01 (SysA)
Assigned
On 21-13-01 (SysA)

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-19 CCIS VE 911 Calls

Issue 2.0
CPN sent when making a 911 call across CCIS trunks from a Virtual Extension (VE).
Table 2-28 CPN for CCIS VE 911 Calls
System A System B
PRG PRG PRG PRG 21-13-01 PRG PRG PRG CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 Terminal VE 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned On None
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Assigned Off
Not None
Assigned On None
On
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Assigned Off 21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Not
Assigned On 21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned
Not
Off Off
Assigned Off
Not None
Assigned On None
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Assigned Off
Not None
Assigned On None
On
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
Table 2-28 CPN for CCIS VE 911 Calls (Continued)
System A System B
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 Terminal VE 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Assigned On 21-12-01(SysA)
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Assigned Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
On
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned
Off Off Assigned
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Not
On
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
System A System B
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 Terminal VE 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned On None
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Assigned Off
Not None
Assigned On None
On
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned
Not
Off On
Assigned Off None
Not
Assigned On None
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Assigned Off
Not None
Assigned On None
On
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
System A System B
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 Terminal VE 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Not
On
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned
Off On Assigned
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Not
On
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned

Issue 2.0
System A System B
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 Terminal VE 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned On
Not None
Off
Assigned Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Assigned Off
Not None
Assigned On None
Assigned On
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned On
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
Assigned On 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
Assigned Off
Not Off 21-13-01
On Off
Assigned (SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
Assigned Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned On
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
Not (SysA:terminal)
Off
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned On
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)

Issue 2.0
System A System B
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 Terminal VE 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Not
On
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
Off
On Off Assigned Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
On
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
Off
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
On
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)

Issue 2.0
System A System B
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 Terminal VE 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off None
Not
Assigned On None
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Assigned Off None
Not
Assigned On None
On
Off 21-12-01(SysB)
Assigned
Not On 21-12-01(SysB)
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
Off
Not Off 21-13-01
On On
Assigned (SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
On
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
Off
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
On
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)

Issue 2.0
System A System B
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 Terminal VE 20-08-13 21-12-01 14-01-24
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Off
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Not
On
Off 21-12-01(SysA)
Assigned
On 21-12-01(SysA)
Not
Not
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
On
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
Off
On On Assigned Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
On
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
Off
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
Off 21-13-01
Not (SysA:terminal)
(SysA:terminal)
On
Off 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)
Assigned
On 21-13-01
(SysA:terminal)

Issue 2.0
CPN sent when making a 911 call from a terminal by pressing a CO Line Key and then dialing 911.
Table 2-29 CPN for Line Key+911 Calls
PRG PRG PRG PRG

CPN: PRG
99-01-58 20-08-13 21-12-01 21-13-01
Not Assigned None

Not Assigned
Assigned None
Off
Assigned
Assigned 21-12-01
Off
Not Assigned None
Not Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
On
Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
Not Assigned None

Not Assigned
Assigned None
Off
Assigned
Assigned 21-12-01
On
Not Assigned None
Not Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
On
Assigned
Assigned 21-13-01
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
None

Issue 2.0
Related Features
ISDN Compatibility

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-12-56 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT 786

E911 Alarm Shut Off 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Select the Service Code (normally 786) that an digits
extension user can dial to shut off the E911
Alarm Ring.
Assign the outbound trunks you want to use for Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
E911 service to the same Trunk Group. to trunk group 1
with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
1001 ~ 1100 = 1000 + Route 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not
All Other Routes
(2 ~ 100) and
Order Numbers
(1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not
Specified).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a Class of Service to an extension Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
(1 ~ 15). (1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

Name and Number

dialed 911.
21-01-12 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial 0 = Trunk Access Code 1
E911 Routing Without Trunk Access Required
If Enabled (1), an extension user can dial 911 1 = Trunk Access Code Not
without first dialing a trunk access code or Required
pressing a line key. If Disabled (0), an extension

user must dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or
press a line key before dialing 911. If enabled,
dialing 9+911 # still dials out.
21-01-13 System Options for Outgoing Calls Alarm 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Ring Timer (E911)
Set the duration of the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If

set to 0, the E911 Alarm does not ring.
21-02-01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 1 ~ 100 (Trunk Groups) 1

Assign the routes set in Program 14-06 to 0 ~ 100
extensions. This program and Program 14-06 (0 = No Setting)
are the minimum required if E911 must seize a
line to dial.
Calling Party Number Presentation:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-05 ETU Setup (PRTA Pkg Setup) CLIP 0 = Disable 1

Information 1 = Enable
Based on this setting, the system includes a
Presentation Allowed (1) or Presentation
Restricted (0) in the Setup message to allow/

deny the Calling Party Number. Program
15-01-04 must also be set to 1 if this option is
enabled.
15-01-04 Basic Extension Data Setup ISDN Caller ID 0 = Disable 1

If both Program 15-01-04 and Program 10-03- 1 = Enable
05 are Enabled, the system includes Caller ID
in the Setup message as Presentation Allowed.

If these options are Disabled, it is Presentation
Restricted.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1
20-08-13 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call 0 = Off 0

presentation and screening indicators should
be allowed.
21-12-01 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of 16 digits All Trunks = No
Assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk Setting
(maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is
made by an extension which does not have an
Extension Calling Number assigned (Program
21-13), the system sends the calling number for

the ISDN trunk defined in 21-12. If the Calling
Party Number is assigned in both Program
21-12 and Program 21-13, the system sends
the data in Program 21-13.
21-13-01 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of 16 digits No Setting
Extensions
Assign each extension a Calling Party Number
(maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling
number is the subscriber number of the dial-in
number. When a call is made by an extension
which does not have an Extension Calling
Number assigned (Program 21-12), the system
sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk
defined in Program 21-13. If a Calling Party
Number is assigned in both Program 21-12 and
Program 21-13, the system sends the data in
Program 21-13.
Operation
To place an emergency 911 call
When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is enabled:

1. Go to any telephone.
3. Dial 911.

Issue 2.0
When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is disabled:

1. Go to any telephone.
3. Dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or press a line key.
4. Dial 911.
To turn off the E911 Alarm at your telephone:

2. Dial 786.
The alarm goes off.
- OR - (if you have a display telephone)
1. Press the Exit key once to turn off the alarm.

2. Press the Exit key again to clear the alarm display.

Issue 2.0

Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Description
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system provides branch connection of locally provided facsimile
machines to CO/PBX lines. Additional dedicated CO/PBX lines are not required for a facsimile to
F
operate. The facsimile shares any CO/PBX line on the COI Package and Power Failure (PF)
circuit.
Conditions
This function requires a GCD-4COTB Blade to connect a facsimile in branch to a
direct CO/PBX line.
A PF circuit is required. The GCD-4COTB has PF circuits on the first two ports.
PF and FAX branch connection do not work together at the same port. Select either
way in Program 14-02-21.
For the FAX Branch Line, Incoming Group or DIL should be programmed.
The systems cannot distinguish between an incoming facsimile call and a CO/PBX
call. Incoming call may be automatically answered by FAX Machine. Ringing
assignments should be turned off for fax lines.
When the facsimile is used, the associated CO line key indicates Busy LED on a
multiline terminal.
When the facsimile is not used, the FAX Branch CO/PBX line can be used as an
outside line.
Code restriction does no apply to outgoing calls from the FAX machine.
Connection of the facsimile machine does not require extra system ports.
The GPZ-4COTF daughter board does not contain any Power Fail or FAX Branch
Exchange circuits.
Power Fail and FAX CO Branch Connection cannot be used on the same CO port at
the same time.
Program 14-02-21 must be used to set a CO port to use this feature.
Default Settings
None
Facsimile CO Branch Connection 2-513

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
GCD-4COTB
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Select Loop start or Ground start for the trunk.
14-02-21 FAX Branch Connection 0 = No 0

Set CO for Fax Branch Connection. 1 = Yes
If FAX Branch is selected, Program 14-10

Power Failure Telephone Setting is NOT valid.
14-05-01 Trunk Group Trunk Port 1 ~ 400 = Default = Trunks

Assign trunks to trunk groups (1 ~ 100). Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
to trunk group 1
with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
2-514 Facsimile CO Branch Connection

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Answer Recall Time
longer than this time, diverts to the DIL No
Group 1 calls.
groups. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

To have the trunks ring extensions, assign Incoming Group Number for
trunks to a Ring Group. The incoming ring Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
group assignment programmed in Program 0 = (No Setting)
41-03-01 overrides the setting in this program. 001 ~ 100 = (Incoming Group)

Mail or InMail)

A DIL that rings its programmed destination 001 ~ 100 = Incoming Ring
longer than this time. diverts to the DIL No Group
Answer Ring Group (set in Program 22-08). 102 = (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or InMail)
Operation
None
Facsimile CO Branch Connection 2-515

Issue 2.0
Flash
Description
Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting the trunk loop
current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected Telco or
PBX offers. You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected Telco or PBX.
Conditions
The system does not provide a ground flash.
A Flash (Recall) key can be placed on a line key.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Drop Key
PBX Compatibility
InMail
2-516 Flash
Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Flash on Trunk Lines 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes for flash on trunk digits

lines.
14-02-03 Analog Trunk Data Setup Flash Type 0 = Open Loop Flash 0
Make sure this item is set for open loop Flash. 1 = Ground

14-02-04 Analog Trunk Data Setup Hooking Type 0 = Timed Flash (Hooking) 0
For each trunk, select Timed Flash or open loop 1 = Disconnect (Cut)
Disconnect.

For each trunk, indicate if the trunk is installed 1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
behind a PBX. 2 = Not Used

3 = CTX assume 9

For the Cordless Lite/Cordless Lite II telephone
user to use the flash function, this option must
2 = Flash
be set to 2. This changes the Transfer key to a
Flash key.

Flashing 1 = Yes

type) telephones.
Flash 2-517
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
81-10-07 COT Initial Data Setup Hookflash Time 0 = 20ms 9 = 600ms

Set the Flash duration (16 ~ 4080ms) for 2 = 60ms
analog trunk GCD-4COTB circuits in Program 3 = 80ms
81-10-07.
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms

9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
81-10-08 COT Initial Data Setup Hookflash Time 0 = 20ms 14 = 3.0 seconds
Set the open loop disconnect duration 2 = 60ms
(16 ~ 4080ms) for analog trunk GCD-4COTB 3 = 80ms
circuits Program 81-10-08.
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms

9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
Operation
To flash the trunk you are on:
From a Multiline Terminal

1. Press Recall.
From a Single Line Telephone

1. Hookflash.
2. Dial #3.
2-518 Flash
Issue 2.0
Flexible System Numbering
Description
Flexible System Numbering lets you reassign the system port-to-extension assignments. This allows an
employee to retain their extension number if they move to a different office. In addition, factory
technicians can make comprehensive changes to your system number plan. You can have factory
technicians:
Set the number of digits in internal (Intercom) functions. For example, extension numbers can have
up to eight digits.
Change your system Service Code numbers.
Assign single digit access to selected Service Codes.
Talk to your sales representative to find out if this program is available to you.
You can also use Flexible System Numbering to change the system Trunk Group Routing code.
Although the default code of 9 is suitable for most applications, you can alter the code if needed.
The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan. Refer to the chart below and the
UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual for more details.
Program Description
11-01-01 System Numbering Set the system internal (Intercom) numbering plan. The
numbering plan includes the digits an extension user must
dial to access features and other extensions.
11-09-01 Trunk Access Code Assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 9). This
is the code users dial to access Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) or Trunk Group Routing.
11-20-01 Dial Extension Analyze Table Use tables 01~128 to assign the digits to be dialed using the
Dial Extension Analyze Tables. These tables are used when
Program 11-01-01 is set to option 9 = Dial Extension
Analyze.
(Up to eight digits can be assigned and the valid entries are:
0, 1 ~ 9, #, )
11-20-02 Dial Extension Analyze Table Assign the Type of Dial for the Dial Extension Analyze Table
from Program 11-20-01.
(Svc Code, Intercom, Operator, or F-Route)
Flexible System Numbering 2-519

Issue 2.0
Flexible System Numbering (Continued)
Program Description
11-10 Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) Customize the Service Codes.
11-11 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry
Operation)
11-12 Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-13 Service Code Setup (for )
11-14 Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-15 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for
Special Access)
11-16 Single Digit Service Code Setup Assign the Single Digit Service Codes. these are the post-
dialing codes a user can dial after placing an Intercom call to
a co-worker.
Conditions
Programming follows a telephone extension number, not the port number in most cases. If
you relocate a telephone, you may need to change additional programming. For example,
if you change the extension assigned to a port in Program 11-02, the line key programming
does not follow. However, if you move the extension using the Station Relocation Feature,
the line key programming does follow.
Since making changes in Program 11-01 does not automatically make any other changes in
any other program, changing the number plan after the system is in operation may cause
problems in the following programs:
Program 11-01 Type 2 Program 11-01 Type 1

(Extension Number) (Service Codes)
11-02 11-08 15-12 22-11 11-10 11-14 21-11
11-04 11-17 16-01-01 25-06 11-11 11-15 30-03
11-06 15-01-01 15-14 30-03 11-12 15-07
11-07 15-07 21-11 11-13 15-14
0507, 0515, 0516, 0920, 1207, 2402, 2402

2902, 2905, 2908
Any feature which requires dialing a code or extension number can be affected.
When the system searches the Dial Extension Analyze Table (Program 11-20-01), the
system uses prefix searching, giving the lower table number the higher priority. For
example, the user programs 211 in table 1 and 2113 in table 2, then dials 2113, the system
selects table 1.
2-520 Flexible System Numbering

Issue 2.0
Example for 310X Example for 3100X
10s Group 100s Group

(4-digit) (5-digit)
11-01-01 = Dial 3 11-01-01 = Dial 3
31 Digit 4 = (9)Dial Extension Analyze Table 31 Digit 7 = (9)Dial Extension Analyze Table
11-20-01 Table 1 = Dial 310 11-20-01 Table 1 = Dial 3100
11-20-02 Table 1 = Intercom 11-20-02 Table 1 = Intercom
Example for 31000X Example for 310000X
1000s Group 10,000s Group

(6-digit) (7-digit)
11-01-01 = Dial 3 11-01-01 = Dial 3

31 Digit 4 = (9)Dial Extension Analyze Table 31 Digit 7 = (9)Dial Extension Analyze Table
11-20-01 Table 1 = Dial 31000 11-20-01 Table 1 = Dial 310000
11-20-02 Table 1 = Intercom 11-20-02 Table 1 = Intercom
Default Settings
Extensions and Virtuals are numbered in the following order:

Physical Extensions:
Extn Port 1 = 101 ~ Extn Port 99 = 199
Virtual Extensions/CAR Keys:

VE Port 1 = 201 ~ VE Port 99 = 299
VE Port 100 ~ 512 = No Setting
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals

Issue 2.0
None
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-01-01 System Numbering Service Code Refer to the

Programming
Customize the system internal (Intercom)
numbering plan. Manual for

default values.
11-02-01 Extension Numbering Maximum of eight digits 1 ~ 99 :

Assign extension numbers to extension ports. 101 ~ 199
The telephone programming identity follows the 100 ~ 199 :
port number not the extension number 3101 ~ 3200
200 ~ 960 :
3201 ~ 3961
11-04-01 Virtual Extension Numbering Maximum of eight digits Virtual Extension

Virtual Extension
Number
201 ~ 299
Other Virtual
Extension Port =
No Setting

Define the virtual extension number to be used ACI Ports: 1 ~ 96
for the ACI extension numbering.
Group set up.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

11-09-01 Trunk Access Code Dial (maximum of four digits) 9

Access Code (normally 9). If you change this
code, you must also review the settings in
Program 11-01-01 for the new code selected.
Access Code

11-01-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.

Administrator) Night Mode Switching 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the night mode switching Service digits

Codes for the System Administrator.

Administrator) Setting the System Time 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the system time Service Codes for digits


Administrator) Storing Common Speed 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Dialing Numbers digits
Store common speed dialing Service Codes for

Administrator) Storing Group Speed 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Store group speed dialing numbers for the
System Administrator.


Set the service code for canceling automatic

for automatic trunk transfer.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Administrator) Night Mode Switching for 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Other Group digits
Customize the night mode switching for other

group Service Codes for the System
Administrator.

Administrator) Leaving Message Waiting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
(Requires CPU to be licensed for Hotel/ digits
Motel)
Customize the leave message waiting Service
Codes for the System Administrator (requires
CPU to be licensed for Hotel/Motel).

Administrator) Dial Block by Supervisor 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the supervisor dial block Service digits


Administrator) Off-Premise Call Forward 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
by Door Box digits
Customize the night mode switching Service

Administrator) VRS - Record/Erase 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Message digits
Customize the night mode switching Service

Administrator) VRS - General Message 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Playback digits
Customize the VRS general message playback
for the System Administrator.

Administrator) VRS - Record or Erase 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
General Message digits
Customize the VRS record or erase general
message for the System Administrator.

Administrator) SMDR - Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Accumulated Printout Code digits
Customize the SMDR extension accumulated
printout codes for the System Administrator.

Administrator) SMDR - Group 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the SMDR group accumulated
printouts for the System Administrator.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Administrator) Account Code 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the account code accumulated

printout Service Codes for the System
Administrator.

Administrator) Forced Trunk Disconnect 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the forced trunk disconnect Service digits


Administrator) Trunk Port Disable for 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Outgoing Calls digits
Define the service code which should be used

by an extension user to block a trunk from
being used for outgoing calls.

Administrator) Set Private Call Refuse 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set private call refuse Service digits

11-10-33 Service Code Setup (for System MLT No Setting

Administrator) Entry Caller ID Refuse 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the entry caller ID Service Codes for digits


Administrator) Set Caller ID Refuse 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set caller ID refuse Service digits


Administrator) Dial-In Mode Switching 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the forced trunk disconnect Service digits


Administrator) Change the Guidance 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Message Number on Voice Mail Auto digits
Attendant
Change the guidance message number on
voice mail auto attendant Service Codes for the
System Administrator.


all calls.


for busy calls.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


for no answer.

Answer digits




for follow me.


for Do Not Disturb.

Operation) Answer Message Waiting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the answer message waiting used digits

for registration and setup.

Operation) Cancel All Messages Waiting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Cancel all messages waiting used for digits

registration and setup.

Operation) Cancel Message Waiting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Cancel message waiting used for registration digits

and setup.

Operation) Alarm Clock 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the alarm clock used for registration digits

and setup.

Customize the display language for multiline
terminal used for registration and setup.

Operation) Text Message Setting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the text message setting used for digits


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Enable Handsfree Incoming 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Intercom Calls digits
Customize the enable handsfree incoming
intercom calls used for registration and setup.

Operation) Force Ringing of Incoming 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the force ringing of incoming

Operation) Programmable Function Key 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Programming (2-Digit Service Codes) digits
Set the service code (default 751) to assign
2-digit function codes to the Function keys.

Operation) BGM On/Off 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the BGM On/Off used for digits


Operation) Key Touch Tone On/Off 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the key touch tone Off/On used for digits


Ring Tones digits
Customize the change incoming CO and ICM
ring tones used for registration and setup.

Check incoming ring tones used for registration digits

and setup.

Operation) Extension Name Programming 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Extension name programming digits

used for registration and setup.

Operation) Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the second call of DID/DISA/DIL digits


Operation) Change Station Class of 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Service digits
Allow an extension user to change the COS of

another extension. Must be allowed in Program
20-13-28.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Customize the service code used to set the

Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature for a
Department Group.

Customize the service code used to cancel the

Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature for a
Department Group.

Customize the service code used to set the

destination for the Automatic Trunk Forwarding
feature for a Department Group.

Operation) Delayed Transfer for Every 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the delayed transfer for every
extension group used for registration and setup.

Operation) Delayed Transfer Cancellation 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
for Each Extension Group digits
Customize the delayed transfer cancellation for

each extension group used for registration and
setup.

Operation) DND Setup for Each Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Group digits
Customize the Service Codes which are used

Operation) DND Cancellation for Each 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the DND cancellation for each
extension group used for registration and setup.

Operation) Dial Block 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the dial block used for registration digits

and setup.

Operation) Temporary Toll Restriction 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Override digits
Customize the temporary toll restriction
override used for registration and setup.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Pilot Group Withdrawing 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes which are used digits


Operation) Toll Restriction Override 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the toll restriction override used for digits


Operation) Ring Volume Set 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the ring volume set used for digits



Operation) Station Speed Dial Number 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Entry digits
Customize the station speed dial entry used for

Operation) Tandem Ringing 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the tandem ringing used for digits


Operation) Headset Mode Switching 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the headset mode switching used digits


Operation) Auto Attendant 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the auto attendant used for digits


(Split) digits


(Split) digits
Code.

Service Code.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service Code.

Ring (Split) digits
Assign the Call Forward Both Ring Split Service
Code.
11-11-50 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry SLT No Setting

Operation) Set Message Waiting Indication 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set message waiting indication digits


Indication digits
Customize the cancel message waiting
indication used for registration and setup.

Assign the Call Forward All for any Extension
Service Code.

Assign the Call Forward Busy for any Extension
Service Code.

Assign the Call Forward No Answer for any
Extension Service Code.

Operation) Call Forward Busy No Answer 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set/Cancel the call forward busy or no answer
destination with no split.

Operation) Set Do Not Call Table 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set do not call table used for digits


Operation) Call Forward with Personal 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Greeting digits
with Personal Greeting.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Set the service code for Activating Call digits
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override. This code

is available only if you disable the voice mail
Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09.

Conference 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the conference Service Codes used digits

for service access.
Override (Off-Hook Signaling) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the override (off-hook signaling) digits

used for service access.
Customize the Service Code, used for setting digits

Camp-On.
Customize the Service Code, used for digits

cancelling Camp-On.
Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the switching of voice call and signal digits

call used for service access.
Step Call 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the step call used for service digits

access.

Change to STG (Department Group) All Ring 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code for ringing all members of digits

a Department Group.

Station Speed Dialing 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign Service code for accessing System digits

Speed Dial bins.

Group Speed Dialing 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the group speed dialing Service digits

Codes used for service access.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Last Number Dial 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign a service code to use Last Number Dial. digits
Saved Number Dial 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the service code used for dialing a digits

saved number.
Customize the Service Codes used for service digits

access.

Specified Trunk Access 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes used for digits

specified trunk access.
Trunk Access Via Networking 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes used for trunk digits

access via networking.
Clear Last Number Dialing Data 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign a service code to clear the Last Number digits

Dial.
Clear Saved Number Dialing Data 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define the service code for Clear Save Number digits

Dialing List if it is not acceptable.
Internal Group Paging 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define the service code for accessing an digits

internal paging group.
External Paging 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
External paging access code. Service code digits

setup.
Meet-Me Answer to Specified Internal 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Paging Group digits
Customize the Service Codes used for

meet-me answer to specified internal paging
group service access.
Meet-Me Answer to External Paging 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
meet-me answer to external paging service
access.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Meet-Me Answer in Same Paging Group 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
meet-me answer in same paging group service
access.

Combined Paging 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Combined paging, internal/external access digits

code. Service code setup.
pickup own group which are used for service
access.
specified group which are used for service
access.

Customize the Service Codes for call pickup digits

which are used for service access.
another group which are used for service
access.
11-12-29 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT, SLT

Direct Extension Call Pickup 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes for direct digits
extension call pickup which are used for service
access.
on hold.

Park Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code which should be used for digits

placing a call in Park.

Answer for Park Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code which should be used for digits

answering a call in Park.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Group Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
on hold.
Answer for Group Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
on hold.
Station Park Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code used for placing a call in a digits

Personal Park.
Door Box Access 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If the service code for Doorphone Access is not digits

acceptable, change it here.
Common Canceling Service Code 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes used for common digits

canceling service code access.

General Purpose Indication 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes used for general digits

purpose indication access.
11-12-40 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT #7

Customize the station speed access Service digits

Codes.

Voice Over 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
The service code used for the Voice Over digits

feature.

Flash on Trunk lines 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes used for flash on digits

trunk lines.

Answer No-Ring Line (Universal Answer) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the service code used to manually digits

answer a Universal Night Answer.

Callback Test for SLT 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, redefine the service code used for digits

single line telephone Callback Test.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Enabled On Hook When Holding (SLT) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes used for the digits
enabled on hook when holding (single line
telephone).

Answer On Hook When Holding (SLT) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes used for the digits
answer on hook when holding (single line
telephone).

If required, use this program to change the digits

code users dial to Split while on a call.
11-12-48 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) SLT ##

Account Code 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Use to customize the Service Codes used for digits

the account code.
General Purpose Relay 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define the service code used for turning the digits

general purpose relay on and off.

VM Access (SV9100 InMail and VMS) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes used for the VM digits

access (InMail and VMS).
11-12-52 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT No Setting

Live Monitoring (SV9100 InMail) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define access code used for InMail Live digits
Monitoring (VRS). At default this program is not
set.
Live Recording at SLT 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Service Codes used for live digits

recording at single live telephone.
VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define the service code to use when setting up digits
ANI/DNIS Routing to the VRS Automated

Attendant. Using the Transfer feature, this also
allows a call to be transferred to the VRS.
E911 Alarm Shut Off 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Select the Service Code that an extension user digits

can dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

With two trunks in Conference press the Hold digits
key and dial #8 and the Conference/Tandem
happens.
Transfer Into Conference 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, change the service code used to digits

transfer a call into a Conference call.
11-12-59 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) SLT No Setting

Trunk Drop Operation for SLT 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the trunk drop operation for SLT digits
Service Codes which are used for service
access.
11-13-01 Service Code Setup (for) LogIn/Log Out MLT, SLT 5

(for KTS) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign for multiline terminals and single line digits

telephones.
11-13-02 Service Code Setup (for) Log Out (for SLT) SLT 655
Assign for single line telephones. 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
digits
11-13-03 Service Code Setup (for) Set Wrap-Up SLT 656

Time (for SLT) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign for single line telephones. digits
11-13-04 Service Code Setup (for) Cancel SLT 657

Assign for single line telephones. 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
digits
11-13-05 Service Code Setup (for) Set Off Duty (for SLT 658
SLT) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
11-13-06 Service Code Setup (for) Cancel Off Duty SLT 659
(for SLT) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
11-13-08 Service Code Setup (for) Agent ID Code MLT No Setting

Login 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to log into a digits

group.
11-13-09 Service Code Setup (for) Agent ID Code MLT No Setting

Logout 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to log out of a digits

group.
11-13-10 Service Code Setup (for) Agent Login by MLT 667

Supervisor 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign to allow a Supervisor to log into a group. digits

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-13-11 Service Code Setup (for) Agent Logout by MLT 668

Supervisor 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign to allow a Supervisor to log out of a digits

group.
11-13-12 Service Code Setup (for) Change Agent MLT 669

Group by Supervisor 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
When using service code 669 to change an digits
agent group, the supervisor must enter a 2-digit

number for the group. For example, to change
to group 4, the entry would be 669 04.
11-13-13 Service Code Setup (for) Agent Changing MLT 670

Own Group 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
When this service code is used, an Agent can digits

reassign themselves to another Group.
11-14-01 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Set DND for MLT, SLT 627
Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set DND for own extension used digits

with the Hotel/Motel feature.
11-14-02 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Cancel MLT, SLT 628
DND for Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel DND for own extension digits

used with the Hotel/Motel feature.
Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set DND for other extension digits

DND for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel DND for other extension digits

11-14-05 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Set Wake MLT, SLT 631
Up Call for Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set wake up call for own digits

extension used with the Hotel/Motel feature.
Wake Up Call for Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel wake up call for own digits

Up Call for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set wake up call for other digits

Wake Up Call for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel wake up call for other digits


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-14-09 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Set Room MLT, SLT 635
to Room Call Restriction 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set room to room call extension digits

Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel room to room call digits
restriction (hotel) used with the Hotel/Motel
feature.
11-14-11 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Change MLT, SLT 637
Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the change toll restriction class for digits
other extension used with the Hotel/Motel
feature.
11-14-12 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Check-In MLT, SLT 638
Customize the check-in Service Codes used 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
with the Hotel/Motel feature. digits
11-14-13 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Check-Out MLT, SLT 639
Customize the check-out Service Codes used 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
with the Hotel/Motel feature. digits
11-14-14 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Room MLT, SLT 640
Status Change for Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the room status change for own digits
extension Service Codes used with the Hotel/
Motel feature.
Status Change for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the room status change for other digits
Motel feature.
11-14-16 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Room MLT 642

Status Output 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the room status output Service digits

Codes used with the Hotel/Motel feature.
11-14-17 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Hotel Room MLT, SLT 675
Monitor 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the hotel room monitor Service digits

Codes used with the Hotel/Motel feature.
11-14-18 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Set Hotel MLT 666
PMS Code Restriction 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set hotel PMS code restriction digits
Service Codes used with the Hotel/Motel
feature.
11-15-01 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for 730

Special Access) Remote Maintenance
Customize the remote maintenance Service
Codes used by the administrator in the Hotel/
Motel feature.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Special Access) Access in Dial-In
Conversion Table
Customize the access in dial-in conversion

table Service Codes used by the administrator
in the Hotel/Motel feature.
11-15-03 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for MLT ##9

Special Access) Backup Data Save 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
This service code is used to back up the digits
programmed data on the SRAM and Call

History to the Flash ROM. While saving the
database, it may cause system lock up.
11-15-05 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for MLT ##

Special Access) System Programming 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Mode, Log-On digits
Customize the system programming mode,

log-on Service Codes used by the administrator
in the Hotel/Motel feature.
11-15-06 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for MLT No Setting

Special Access) Wake on LAN to APSU 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Unit digits
Customize the wake on LAN to APSU unit
Service Codes.
11-15-09 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for No Setting

Special Access) Transfer to Incoming Ring
Group
When a call is transferred using this service
code, it is transferred to the ring group
destination for that incoming trunk. For
example, trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4. When the

call is transferred using this service code, the
trunk rings all extensions programmed for Ring
Group 4 or ring the External Paging Group for
Ring Group 4, depending on how the system is
programmed.

Special Access) Ethernet Port Reset
Customize the Ethernet port reset Service

Codes.
11-15-12 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for MLT No Setting

Special Access) Extension Data Swap 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Ext. Data Swap = xxx (service code in digits

accordance with Program 11-01).
11-15-13 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for SLT No Setting

Special Access) Remote Access from
DISA
Customize the service code for Remote Access
for DISA.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Special Access) Modem Access
Assign the service code used to access the

internal modem on the GCD-CP10.
11-16-01 Single Digit Service Code Setup Step Call 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit 2
Codes.
Set up Item 02 for single digit Barge-In. For
example, you can assign Item 02 to use digit 5
for Barge-In. This would allow you to program a
function key with an extension number plus the
Barge-In code (i.e., 5). This allows one-touch
access to the Barge-In feature for extension.
11-16-03 Single Digit Service Code Setup Switching 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit 1
of Voice/Signal Call
Customize the switching of Voice/Signal call
Service Codes used when a busy or ring back
signal is heard.
11-16-04 Single Digit Service Code Setup Intercom 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit
Off-Hook Signaling
Assign a one-digit service code to be used for

off-hook Signaling.
setting Camp-On.

DND/Call Forward Override.
11-16-07 Single Digit Service Code Setup Message 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit 0
Waiting
Customize the message waiting Service Codes

used when a busy or ring back signal is heard.
11-16-08 Single Digit Service Code Setup Voice 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit 6
Over
Service code used for the Voice Over feature.
11-16-09 Single Digit Service Code Setup Access to 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit 8
Voice Mail
Customize the access to voice mail Service
Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is
heard.
11-16-10 Single Digit Service Code Setup 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit No Setting
(Department) STG All Ring Mode

Code for All Member Ring.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-16-11 Single Digit Service Code Setup Station 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit No Setting
Park Hold
Customize the one-digit service code used

when placing a call in Personal Park.
11-20-01 Dial Extension Analyze Table Dial Digits Dial maximum of eight digits No Setting
Use tables 01 ~ 128 to assign the digits to be (0 ~ 9, #, , @)
dialed using the Dial Extension Analyze Tables.
These tables are used when Program 11-01-01

is set to option 9 = Dial Extension Analyze. Up
to eight digits can be assigned.
11-20-02 Dial Extension Analyze Table Type of Dials Type of Dials: No Setting
Assign the Type of Dial for the Extension 0 = Not used
Analyze Table from Program 11-20-01. 1 = Service Code
2 = Extension Number

5 = Operator Access
6 = F-Route Access
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
Flexible Timeouts
Description
The Flexible Timeouts feature provides a variety of timers in the Resident System Program to allow the
system to operate without initial programming. The system timers can be changed to meet customer
needs according to the system application requirements.
A Timer Class is used to allow terminals and trunks to have different timers for the same feature. There
are 16 timer Classes (0~15). The following table shows the Programs that are used depending on the
Timer Class used:
Timer Timer
Title Comment
Class 0 Class 1~15
20-01-08 20-31-01 Trunk Queuing Callback Time Trunk Queuing callback rings an extension for this
time. Station Timer Class is referred by the station
that sets trunk queuing.
20-01-09 20-31-02 Callback / Trunk Queuing The system cancels an extension Callback or Trunk
Cancel Time Queuing request after this time. Station Timer Class
is referred by the station that sets an extension
Callback or Trunk Queuing.
20-04-03 20-31-03 CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension If CAR/VE is set for Delayed Ringing (Program
Delay Interval 15-11-01), ring the covering extension after this time.
Station Timer Class is referred by the station assigned
to CAR/VE.
21-01-02 20-31-04 Intercom Interdigits Time When placing Intercom calls, users must dial each
digit in this time. Station Timer Class is referred by
stations. Trunk Timer Class is referred by DID/
Automatic Answer Trunk/E&M trunks.
21-01-03 20-31-05 Trunk Interdigits Time When placing CO calls, users must dial each digit in
this time. Station Timer Class is referred by stations.
Trunk Timer Class is referred by DID/Automatic
Answer Trunk/E&M trunks.
21-01-09 20-31-06 Hotline Time Start Time A Ringdown extension automatically calls its
programmed destination after this time. Station Timer
Class is referred by the stations which sets Hotline.
22-01-03 20-31-07 Ring No Answer Alarm Time If a trunk rings a key telephone longer than this time,
the system changes the ring cadence. This indicates
to the user that the call was ringing too long. Trunk
Timer Class is referred by the trunk.
22-01-04 20-31-08 DIL No Answer Recall Time A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer
than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (Program 22-08-01). Trunk Timer Class is
referred by the trunk.
2-542 Flexible Timeouts

Issue 2.0
Timer Timer
Title Comment
Class 0 Class 1~15
22-01-06 20-31-09 DID Ring-No-Answer Time In systems with DID Ring No Answer Intercept, this
time sets the Ring No Answer time. This time is how
long a DID call rings the destination extension before
rerouting to the intercept ring group. Trunk Timer
Class is referred by DID trunk.
24-01-01 20-31-10 Hold Recall Time (Non A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on
Exclusive Hold) Hold after this time. Station Timer Class is referred by
held call.
24-01-02 20-31-11 Hold Recall Callback Time A Hold recall rings an extension for this time. Station
(Non Exclusive Hold) Timer Class is referred by held call.
24-01-03 20-31-12 Exclusive Hold Recall Time A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on
Hold after this time. Station Timer Class is referred by
held call.
24-01-04 20-31-13 Exclusive Hold Recall An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this
Callback Time time. If not picked up, the call goes back on Non
exclusive Hold. Station Timer Class is referred by
held call.
24-01-06 20-31-14 Park Hold Time Normal A call left parked longer than this time recalls the
extension that initially parked it. Trunk or Station
Timer Class is referred by held call.
24-02-03 20-31-15 Delayed Call Forwarding If activated at an extension, No Answer Call
Time Forwarding occurs after this time. Station Timer Class
is referred by the station sets No Answer Call
Forward.
24-02-04 20-31-16 Transfer Recall Time A transferred call recalls to the extension that initially
transferred it after this time. Station Timer Class is
referred by transferred call.
25-07-02 20-31-17 VRS/DISA No Answer Time After this time expires, the call follows the
programmed Ring No Answer routing (Program 25-03
and 25-04-01). Trunk Timer Class is referred.
25-07-03 20-31-18 Disconnect after VRS/DISA Disconnect after re-transfer to Incoming Ring Group.
Re-transfer to IRG Trunk Timer Class is referred.
25-07-07 20-31-19 Long Conversation Warning Determine the time trunk-to-trunk conversation can
Tone Time talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard.
Trunk Timer Class is referred.
25-07-08 20-31-20 Long Conversation This timer determines how long the system waits
Disconnect Time before disconnecting a trunk-to-trunk conversation
call after the Long Conversation tone is heard. Trunk
Timer Class is referred.
25-07-09 20-31-21 DISA Internal Paging Time This is the maximum length of an Internal Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system terminates the DISA call.
Flexible Timeouts 2-543

Issue 2.0
Timer Timer
Title Comment
Class 0 Class 1~15
25-07-10 20-31-22 DISA External Paging Time This is the maximum length of an External Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system terminates the DISA call.
31-01-02 20-31-23 Page Announcement This timer sets the maximum length of External Page
Duration announcements. Station or Trunk Timer Class is
referred by the caller makes announcement.
Conditions
Timer Classes are also used for CAR/VE.
When Timer Class is set to 0 it uses the system-wide timers.
All stations and trunks are assigned to Timer Class 0 at default.
Both system-wide timers (Timer Class 0) and Timer Class timers (Timer Class 1~15) can be
used in the same system.
Default Settings
Timer Class set to 0 for all trunks and extensions.
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
None

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Time
Set the Trunk Queuing callback time. A Trunk
interval.

Cancel Time

Trunk Queuing request after this interval.

20-29-01 Timer Class for Extensions 0 ~ 15 0

Assign the timer class (0 ~ 15) to each 0 = Not assigned
extension for each Night mode. This entry

includes virtual extension number.
20-30-01 Timer Class for Trunks 0 ~ 15, #, 0

Assign the timer class (0 ~ 15) to each trunk for 0 = Not assigned
each Night mode.
20-31-01 Timer Class Timer Assignment Trunk 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15

Queuing Callback Duration Time
Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for

this time.
20-31-02 Timer Class Timer Assignment Callback / 0 ~ 64800 seconds 648000

Trunk Queuing Cancel Time

20-31-03 Timer Class Timer Assignment CAR/SIE/ 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Virtual Extension Delay Interval
Delayed Ringing (refer to 15-11: Virtual

Extension Delayed Ring Assignment) ring the

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-31-04 Timer Class Timer Assignment Intercom 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Interdigits Time (Intercom I/D Timer)
When placing Intercom calls, extension users

must dial each digit during this time.

Interdigits Time (Trunk I/D Timer)
placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts

after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after time expires).
20-31-06 Timer Class Timer Assignment Hotline 0 ~ 64800 seconds 5

Time Start Time (Hotline Start)
A Ringdown extension automatically calls its

programmed destination after this time.
20-31-07 Timer Class Timer Assignment Ring No 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

Answer Alarm Time
If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than
this time, the system changes the ring cadence.

This indicates to the user that the call has been
ringing too long.
20-31-08 Timer Class Timer Assignment DIL/ 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time
20-31-09 Timer Class Timer Assignment DID Ring- 0 ~ 64800 seconds 20

No-Answer Time
In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept,
this time sets the Ring-No-Answer time. This is
the time a DID call rings the destination
extension before rerouting to the intercept ring
group.
20-31-10 Timer Class Timer Assignment Hold 0 ~ 64800 seconds 90

Recall Time (Non Exclusive Hold)
A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed
it on Hold after this time. This time works with

the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program
24-01-02).
20-31-11 Timer Class Timer Assignment Hold 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Recall CallBack Time (Non Exclusive Hold)
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an
extension for this time. This time works with
Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time. After this
time, the system invokes the Hold Recall Time

again. Cycling between time Program 24-01-01
and 24-01-02 and Program 24-01-06 and
24-01-07 continues until a user answers the
call.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-31-12 Timer Class Timer Assignment Exclusive 0 ~ 64800 seconds 90

Hold Recall Time
A call on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension

that placed it on Hold after this time.
20-31-13 Timer Class Timer Assignment Exclusive 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Hold Recall Callback Time
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for
this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on
System Hold.
20-31-14 Timer Class Timer Assignment Park Hold 0 ~ 64800 seconds 90

Time Normal
A call left parked longer than this time, recalls

the extension that initially parked it.
20-31-15 Timer Class Timer Assignment Delayed 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Call Forwarding Time (Call Forward No
Answer)
If activated at an extension, Delayed Call
Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets

how long a Transferred call waits at an
extension forwarded to Voice Mail before
routing to the called extension mailbox.
20-31-16 Timer Class Timer Assignment Transfer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Recall Time
An unanswered transferred call recalls after this

time to the extension that initially transferred it.
20-31-17 Timer Class Timer Assignment VRS/DISA 0 ~ 64800 seconds 00

No Answer Time (Disconnect or IRG or VM)
routing (set in Program 25-03 and 25-04).
20-31-18 Timer Class Timer Assignment Disconnect 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

after Re-transfer to IRG
Assign Disconnect after Re-transfer to IRG

time.
20-31-19 Timer Class Timer Assignment Long 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3600

Conversation Warning Tone Time (Trunk to
Trunk)
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation can last before the Long
20-31-20 Timer Class Timer Assignment Long 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Conversation Disconnect (Trunk to Trunk)
disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-

trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation
call after the Long Conversation tone is heard.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-31-21 Timer Class Timer Assignment DISA 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Internal Paging Time
Set the maximum time of an Internal Page

DISA call.
20-31-22 Timer Class Timer Assignment DISA 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Set the maximum time of an External Page

DISA call.
20-31-23 Timer Class Timer Assignment Page 0 ~ 64800 seconds 1200

Announcement Duration
Set the maximum time for Page

announcements. (Affects External Paging only).

Set the time-out time for DID callers that do not
dial. After this time, the DID call routes

according to Vacant Number Intercept
programming.

Program the time an extension user must wait
before the Barge-In feature can be used on a

call (this time expires before a call is put in a
talk state). This time also affects Voice Over.

Ringdown Extension Timer (Hotline Start)
After the user lifts the handset, the extension
automatically calls the ringdown destination
after this time. A setting of 0 immediately rings
the programmed extension. Any other setting
delays the ringdown the time programmed.
22-01-03 System Options for Incoming Calls Ring 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

No Answer Alarm Time
Set the Ring No Answer Alarm time. If a trunk
rings a multiline terminal longer than this time,
the system changes the ring cadence.

Answer Recall Time
longer than this time, diverts to the DIL No

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-01-06 System Options for Incoming Calls DID 0 ~ 64800 seconds 20

Ring-No-Answer Time
Set the DID Ring No Answer (RNA) Intercept
time (0 ~ 64800 seconds). In systems with RNA
Intercept, the DID call rings the destination
extension for this time, and then rings Intercept
Ring Group.
Set the Hold Recall Time. A call on Hold recalls
the extension that placed it on Hold after this

time.

Callback Time
Set the Hold Recall Callback Time. A trunk
recalling from Hold rings an extension for this
time.

Recall Time
Set the Exclusive Hold Recall Time. A call on
Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed
it on Hold after this time.

Set the Hold Recall Time. A trunk recalling from
Hold rings an extension for this time. If still
unanswered, the call changes to System Hold.
Normal
Set the Park Hold Time (0 ~ 64800 seconds). A
call that is parked longer than the programmed
time recalls the extension where it was initially
parked.
Refer to Flexible System Numbering on page
2-519 for setting Flexible Timeouts for Class of
Service.

Forwarding Time
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding time. For an
unanswered call, Call Forward No Answer
occurs after this time.
24-02-04 System Options for Transfer Transfer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Recall Time
Set the Transfer Recall Time. An unanswered
transferred call recalls to the extension that
initially transferred it after this time. This also
sets the time a transferred call camps-on to a
busy extension.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Answer Time

routing (set in Program 25-03 and Program
25-04).

Define the system timers which affect DID and

DISA after VRS/DISA retransfer to IRG.



disconnecting a DISA caller or any
conversation call after the Long Conversation
tone is heard.
25-07-09 System Timers for VRS/DISA DISA Internal 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Paging Time
Set the maximum time for an Internal Page

DISA call.
25-07-10 System Timers for VRS/DISA DISA 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Set the maximum time for an External Page

DISA call.
31-01-02 System Options for Internal/External Paging 0 ~ 64800 seconds 1200

Page Announcement Duration
Set the maximum allowable time for a Paging

announcement.
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Description
Forced Trunk Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension active
outside call. The user can then place a call on the released trunk. Forced Trunk Disconnect lets a user
access a busy trunk in an emergency, when no other trunk is available. Maintenance technicians can
also use Forced Trunk Disconnect to release a trunk on which there is no conversation. This can happen
if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up.
Forced Trunk Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the line. Only use this feature in an
emergency and when no other lines are available.
CAUTION
Conditions
This feature only works on an analog trunk. ISDN and IP trunks do not have the Forced Trunk
Disconnect available.
Default Setting
COS 15 = Enabled
COS 1~14 = Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Analog Trunks
Related Features
Forced Trunk Disconnect 2-551

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Administrator) Forced Trunk Disconnect 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign the Service Code. digits

Assign a Class of Service (COS) to an Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that (1 ~ 15) All other
can be assigned. Assign eight entries, one for extension port =
each Night Service Mode. Class 1

trunk only)
extension to disconnect an Unsupervised
21-01-18 System Options for Outgoing Calls Reset 0 = Enable (On) 1

Dial After Failure of Trunk Access 1 = Disable (Off)

receiving Trunk Busy. This must be Enabled for
2-552 Forced Trunk Disconnect

Issue 2.0
Operation
To disconnect a busy trunk:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press line key for trunk.
- OR -
Dial trunk access code (#9 + trunk number).

You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001~400.
2. Dial the Service Code (not set at default).

You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the trunk.
You can now place a call on the free trunk.
3. Press the line key for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.
- OR -
Dial the trunk access code (#9 + trunk number) for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.

1. Dial trunk access code (#9 + trunk number).
You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001~400.
2. Dial Service Code (not set at default).

You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line.
3. Hookflash.
You can now place a call on the free line.
4. Dial the trunk access code (#9 + trunk number) for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.
Forced Trunk Disconnect 2-553

Issue 2.0
2-554 Forced Trunk Disconnect

General Purpose Relay
Description
The system allows up to eight general purpose relays using PGD(2)-U10 ADPs (four relays per
PGD unit) and one general purpose relay built into the GCD-CP10 for a maximum of nine relays.
G
These relays are normally opened and can be closed by dialing an access code on any terminal
or pressing a preprogrammed function key on any multiline terminal.
The relays can then be set back to an open state by dialing an access code on any terminal or by
pressing a preprogrammed function key on any multiline terminal. A relay can also be set back
to an open state after a drive timer expires. Each relay can have a separate drive timer, when the
relay is in a closed state, and this timer expires, the relay is automatically placed back into an
open state.
Table 2-30 General Purpose Relay Specifications
General Purpose Relay Specifications
Contact Configuration Normally Open

Maximum Load 500mA @24 VDC
Maximum Initial Contact Resistance 50m Ohms
Conditions
When relays 5 & 6 of a PGD(2)-U10 are assigned as General Purpose Relays, they
cannot be used for Door Box/Page Relays. Therefore it is recommended to first use
relays 7 & 8 for General Purpose Relay function allowing relays 5 & 6 to be used for
Door Box/Page Relays.
All General Purpose Relays can be programmed with a drive timer. The drive timer
allows the relay to return to the normally opened position after a timer expires not
requiring a user to dial a service code or press a line key to set the relay back to the
open position.
The drive timer on a General Purpose Relay can be bypassed by dialing an access
code on any terminal or pressing a preprogrammed line key on any multi line
terminal.
Multiline telephones can activate the General Purpose Relay while in a talking state
(call must be answered not just a voice announce) by pressing a preprogrammed
line key. All other terminal types cannot activate the relay while a call is in progress.
The General Purpose Relay cannot be activated by DISA.
General Purpose Relay 2-555

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals (using access code)
Multiline Terminal (using line key)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
GCD-CP10
Related Features
Door Box
Paging, External

2-556 General Purpose Relay

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-01 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Terminal 0 = Not Set 0

(1) Type (B1) 1 = Multiline Terminal
When using a PGD-U10 for general purpose 7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
relay functionality the digital port must be set to 8 = PGD (Door Box)
one of the valid PGD settings. 9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = --Not Used--
10-03-06 ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) Terminal 0 = Not Set 0

Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone
Ringer)
data for terminal type (B2).

When using a PGD-U10 for general purpose
relay functionality the digital port must be set to Box)
one of the valid PGD settings. 9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
10-05-01 General Purpose Relay Setup Slot No. Slot No: 0 ~ 24 0-0-0
Physical Port of DLCA Sensor Circuit No. DCLA Port: 0 ~ 16
Define which relay circuits (5 ~ 8) on the Relay No: 0, 5 ~ 8
PGD(2)-U10 ADP are used for General After each entry, press
Purpose Relays. Transfer to advance to the next
A maximum of (8) general purpose relay can be entry.
assigned using PGDs. Relay Circuits 5 ~ 8 can
be assigned on multiple PGDs.
Ex. PGD 1 has relay circuits 5 ~ 8 assigned to
system Relay 1 ~ 4. PGD 2 can have relay
circuits 5 ~ 8 assigned to system Relay 5 ~ 8.
10-05-02 General Purpose Relay Setup Drive Timer 064800 0

Setup 0 = No drive timer
The drive timer controls how long the relay is in 1 = 0.1 seconds
a closed state before automatically changing 2 = 0.2 seconds
back to an open state.
3 = 0.3 seconds

.
.
64800 = 6480 (seconds)
10-21-05 GCD-CP10 Hardware Setup General 0 = Off 0

Purpose Relay Switch on GCD-CP10 1 = Relay 1 on GCD-CP10
Used to enable/disable the General Purpose

2 = Relay 2 on GCD-CP10
Relay that is built into the GCD-CP10.
10-21-06 GCD-CP10 Hardware Setup Drive Timer 064800 0

Setup on GCD-CP10 0 = No drive timer
The drive timer controls how long the relay is in 1 = 0.1 seconds
a closed state before automatically changing 2 = 0.2 seconds
back to an open state.
3 = 0.3 seconds

.
.
64800 = 6480 (seconds)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
This is the access code to enable/disable the digits
General Purpose relays.
After dialing the service code the user must
then dial the relay (0 ~ 8) to enable/disable the
relays.
0 = Relay on GCD-CP10
1 ~ 8 = Relay assigned on PGD

Assign a function key for General Purpose 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Relay (Code 51 Add; Relay number 0 ~ 8). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
Operation
To Activate a Relay:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 780.
3. Dial Relay Number (0~8).
0 is for the relay on the GCD-CP10, 1~8 are relays on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
- OR -
1. Press the Line Key assigned as a General Purpose Relay (the key is lit).

2. Dial 780.
To Cancel a Relay:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press Speaker.
2-558 General Purpose Relay

Issue 2.0
2. Dial 780.
- OR -
1. Press the Line Key assigned as a General Purpose Relay (the key is not lit).
- OR -
1. Wait for the drive timer to expire.

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 780.
- OR -
1. Wait for the drive timer to expire.

Issue 2.0
Group Call Pickup
Description
Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing another extension in a Pickup
Group. This permits co-workers in the same work area to easily answer each others calls. The user
can dial a code or press a programmed Group Call Pickup key to intercept the ringing call. If several
extensions in the group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the call based on the
extension priority in the Pickup Group.
With Group Call Pickup, a user can intercept the following calls:
A call ringing the users own pickup group
A call ringing another pickup group when the user knows the group number
A call ringing another pickup group when the user does not know the group number
There are 64 Call Pickup Groups available.
Conditions
A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name.
Group Call Pickup can be used to answer calls recalling from Hold or Park.
Group Call Pickup can be used to answer calls ringing Call Arrival Keys or Virtual
Extensions.
Virtual Extensions can use Group Call Pickup to answer calls ringing a multiline terminal or
Users can pickup calls regardless of their access map programming.
Directed Call Pickup provides another way of answering a co-workers call.
Function keys simplify Group Call Pickup operation.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
2-560 Group Call Pickup

Issue 2.0
None
Related Features

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

pickup own group.

specified group.

Customize the Service Codes for call pickup. digits

another group.
Group Call Pickup 2-561

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign Group Call Pickup keys: 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Code 24 for an extension Pickup Group and 751 by default) Manual for
Code 25 for a telephone ringing in another
Pickup Group when the caller does not know 752 by default)

the group number (Service Code 769).
Code 26 (+ group) for a telephone ringing in
another specific Pickup Group (Service Code
768).

extension port =
Class 1

Enable/Disable an extension user ability to pick
up calls ringing into a pickup group (service
code #).





Enable or Disable the group call pick up.

Code 756).
23-02-01 Call Pickup Groups Call Pickup Groups: 1 ~ 9 or 1 xxx

Assign extensions to Pickup Groups. Also, 01 ~ 64
assign an extension priority in a Pickup Group

(Priority Number 1 ~ 9999).
2-562 Group Call Pickup

Issue 2.0
Operation
To answer a call ringing another telephone in your Pickup Group:

2. At multiline terminal only, press the Group Call Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 24).
- OR -
Dial 756 or #.
Service Code # can pick up any call in the group, plus any Ring Group calls. Service Code 756
cannot pick up Ring Group calls.
To answer a call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group when you do not know the group
number:
2. At multiline terminal only, press the Group Call Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 25).
- OR -
Dial 769.
To answer a call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group when you know the group number:
2. At multiline terminal only, press the Group Call Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 26 +
group).
- OR -
Dial 768 and the group number (1~9 or 01~64).
Group Call Pickup 2-563

Issue 2.0
Group Listen
Description
Group Listen permits a multiline terminal user to talk on the handset and have their callers voice
broadcast over the telephone speaker. This lets the multiline terminal users co-workers listen to the
conversation. Group Listen turns off the multiline terminal handsfree microphone so the caller does not
pick the co-workers voices during a Group Listen.
Conditions
An extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen.
Group Listen is not available to single line telephones.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Headset Operation
2-564 Group Listen

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1


Group Listen.
Operation
To initiate Group Listen:

1. Place or answer call using the handset.
2. Press Speaker twice (but do not hang up).
Speaker flashes slowly.
You can talk to the caller through your handset. Your co-workers hear your callers voice over your
telephone speaker after pressing Speaker twice. Press Speaker a third time to turn off Group
Listening.
To talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen:

1. Hang up the handset.
To cancel Group Listen (without hanging up your call):

1. Do not hang up.
2. Press the flashing Speaker.
You can talk to the caller over the handset. Your co-workers can no longer hear the callers voice.
Group Listen 2-565

Issue 2.0
2-566 Group Listen

Handset Mute
Description
Handset Mute is provided to most terminals connected to the UNIVERGE SV9100 system. While
talking on the multiline terminal handset, a station user can dial a feature code or press Mic to
H
mute the transmit speech path. The station user can still hear the outside (or intercom) voice.
Conditions
The Mic key or Handset Transmission Cut Off key flashes when active.
Two service set tones are heard when Handset Mute is activated or deactivated.
The called party must have answered using handset or speakerphone for the mute
feature to work.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Handset Mute 2-567

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a function key for Handset Transmission 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Cut Off (code 40). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count 0 ~ 255 Refer to Table 2-

Customize the system basic tones and system (0 = until On-Hook) 31 Service Tone
Setup Defaults,
service tones. The system must be reset for
the changes to take effect. Program

80-01-01 on
page 2-568.
80-01-02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 1 ~ 33 (33 = Default

The following features require that the system (0 = No Tone) Time Slot)
table. After changing these settings the system 32 Service Tone
must be reset for the changes to take effect. Setup, Program
Call Screening 80-01-02 on
Call Holding page 2-572.
Busy Greeting
Table 2-31 Service Tone Setup Defaults, Program 80-01-01
Service Repeat Unit Basic Gain Level

Service Tone Duration
Tone No. Count Count Tone No. (dB)
1 No Tone 0 Basic 1 0 10 32 (0dB)

2 Internal Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 10 32 (0dB)
3 Stutter Dial Tone 0 Basic 6 0 2 32 (0dB)
9 1
0 1
9 1
0 1
9 77
2-568 Handset Mute

Issue 2.0
Table 2-31 Service Tone Setup Defaults, Program 80-01-01 (Continued)

4 Internal Recall Dial Tone 2 Basic 2 9 1 32 (0dB)

0 1 32 (0dB)
5 Trunk Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 10 32 (0dB)
6 Internal Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 5 20 (-6dB)
11 5 20 (-6dB)
7 DND Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 2 32 (0dB)
1 2 32 (0dB)
8 B-Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 5 20 (-6dB)
11 5 20 (-6dB)
9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 Basic 2 11 3 20 (-6dB)
0 2 20 (-6dB)
10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
1 1 32 (0dB)
11 Internal Confirmation Tone 3 Basic 2 0 5 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
12 Internal Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB)
13 External Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB)
14 Intercom Ringback Tone 0 Basic 2 9 10 32 (0dB)
0 20 32 (0dB)
15 Override Tone 1 Basic 1 12 5 32 (0dB)
16 Lock-Out Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
17 Clock Alarm Tone 0 Basic 4 6 1 32 (0dB)
0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
0 7 32 (0dB)
18 BGM 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB)
19 Door Box Chime 1 3 Basic 6 4 2 38 (+3dB)
4 2 26 (-3dB)
2 3 38 (+3dB)
2 4 26 (-3dB)
2 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)
7 2 26 (-3dB)
5 3 38 (+3dB)
5 4 26 (-3dB)
5 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)
8 2 26 (-3dB)
6 3 38 (+3dB)
6 4 26 (-3dB)
6 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)
Handset Mute 2-569

Issue 2.0


4 1 26 (-3dB)
2 2 38 (+3dB)
2 2 26 (-3dB)
2 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)
7 1 26 (-3dB)
5 2 38 (+3dB)
5 2 26 (-3dB)
5 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)
8 1 26 (-3dB)
6 2 38 (+3dB)
6 2 26 (-3dB)
6 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)
25 Service Set Tone 3 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
9 1 32 (0dB)
26 Service Clear Tone 3 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
9 1 32 (0dB)
27 Talkback Tone 2 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
28 Speaker Monitor Tone 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
This tone is what the originator
6 1 32 (0dB)
hears when placing a handsfree
speaker ICM call.
29 Door Relay Tone 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)
30 Door Box Call Tone 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
31 Paging Tone 2 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
32 Splash Tone 1 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
35 1 Second Signal Tone 1 Basic 1 6 10 32 (0dB)
36 External Audible Ring Tone 0 Basic 2 7 2 32 (0dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)
37 External Reorder Tone 0 Basic 2 7 5 32 (0dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)
2-570 Handset Mute

Issue 2.0

38 External Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 7 7 32 (0dB)

0 7 32 (0dB)
39 Special Audible Ring Busy Tone 0 Basic 6 0 5 32 (0dB)
11 5 32 (0dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)
11 5 32 (0dB)
10 10 32 (0dB)
0 20 32 (0dB)
40 Internal Call Waiting Tone 1 Basic 1 12 2 32 (0dB)
41 Intrusion Tone 1 Basic 1 12 5 32 (0dB)
42 Conference Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB)
43 Intrusion Tone 2 0 Basic 1 2 8 32 (0dB)
44 External Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 1 26 (-3dB)
45 External Ring Back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 10 32 (0dB)
0 30 32 (0dB)
46 DID Error Tone 0 Basic 2 11 5 32 (0dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)
47 External Busy Tone 0 Basic 1 11 0 32 (0dB)
48 Voice Mail Message Indication 0 Basic 2 9 1 32 (0dB)
Tone 0 1 32 (0dB)
49 --- Not Used ---
50 External Special Audible Ring 0 3 10 10 32 (0dB)

Tone 12 2 32 (0dB)
0 30 32 (0dB)
51 External Intercept Tone 0 2 12 3 32 (0dB)
4 2 32 (0dB)
52 External Call Waiting Tone 1 1 12 3 32 (0dB)
53 External Executive Override Tone 1 1 12 10 32 (0dB)
54 Progress Tone 0 2 0 6 32 (0dB)
1 1 32 (0dB)
55 Generate tone for TAPI2.1 0 Basic 1 3 0 32 (0dB)
56 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 1 Basic 1 2 8 32 (0dB)
57 Headset Ear Piece Ringing Tone 0 Basic 5 0 2 32 (0dB)
2 1 32 (0dB)
0 1 32 (0dB)
2 1 32 (0dB)
0 20 32 (0dB)
Handset Mute 2-571

Issue 2.0

58 Opening Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 2 2 32 (0dB)

2 2 26 (-3dB)
14 2 32 (0dB)
14 2 26 (-3dB)
15 2 32 (0dB)
15 2 26 (-3dB)
16 6 32 (0dB)
16 4 26 (-3dB)
59 Ending Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 20 2 32 (0dB)
20 2 26 (-3dB)
19 2 32 (0dB)
19 2 26 (-3dB)
18 2 32 (0dB)
18 2 26 (-3dB)
17 6 32 (0dB)
17 4 26 (-3dB)
60 Splash Tone 1 (Mute) 1 Basic 2 0 1 8 (-12dB)
6 1 8 (-12dB)
6 1 8 (-12dB)
6 1 8 (-12dB)
63 EXT SPK Ring-back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 10 32 (0dB)
0 30 32 (0dB)
64 Music on Hold (MOH) 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)
Table 2-32 Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-02
Item
Item Repeat Count
No.
02 Basic Tone Number 0~33

(0 = No Tone)
(33=Default Time Slot)
03 Duration Count 0~255
(100~25500ms)
04 Gain Level (dB) 0~57
(-15.5 ~ +12.5)
2-572 Handset Mute

Issue 2.0
Operation
While talking on a terminal handset:

1. Press MIC.
- OR -
2. Press Feature + dial 1.

- OR -
3. Press the Handset Transmission Cut-Off key (Program15-07-01; Key 40 or SC 751 Key Code
40).
Handset Mute 2-573

Issue 2.0
Handsfree and Monitor
Description
Handsfree allows a multiline terminal user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the
telephone instead of the handset. Handsfree is a convenience for workers who do not have a free hand
to pick up the handset. For example, a terminal operator could continue to enter data with both hands
while talking on the telephone.
Three variations of Handsfree are available:

Handsfree
The user can press Speaker to place and answer calls instead of using the handset.
Automatic Handsfree
The user can press a trunk line key or virtual extension key without lifting the handset or press
Speaker. An extension can have Automatic Handsfree for outgoing calls or for both outgoing calls
and incoming calls.
Monitor
User can place a call without lifting the handset, but must lift the handset to speak.
Conditions
Handsfree and Monitor are not available for single line telephones.
Prime Line Selection affects how incoming and outgoing calls are handled and thus
determines what happens when the user presses Speaker.
Monitoring volume may be adjusted using the volume control on the multiline terminal.
When a multiline terminal user lifts the handset, the monitoring condition is automatically
released, and the Speaker LED goes off.
A multiline terminal is considered off-hook by the system when this feature is used.
Default Settings
Enabled
2-574 Handsfree and Monitor

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Microphone Cutoff
Prime Line Selection

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

One-Touch Key or preselects the key.

Handsfree Operation 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable an extension user ability to use
the speakerphone on outside calls. When

disabled, the user can hear the conversion, but
cannot respond handsfree.
Handsfree and Monitor 2-575

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-02-12 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = Disable (Voice) 0

Forced Intercom Ring (ICM Call Type) 1 = Enable (Signal)
Enable/Disable Forced Intercom Ringing. If
enabled, incoming Intercom calls normally ring.
If disabled, Intercom calls voice-announce.

Assign Class of Service (1 ~ 15) for extensions. Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
(1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1


calls.
Operation
To talk Handsfree:
1. Press Speaker, Trunk Line key or Virtual Extension key.
2. Place the call.
3. Speak toward the telephone when the called party answers.
To change a handset call to a Handsfree call:

1. Press Speaker and hang up the handset.
2. Press Speaker again to hang up.
To change a Handsfree call to a handset call:

To turn on/off Monitor:

1. Press MIC, Feature + 1, or the Microphone Function Key (Program 15-07 or SC 751 : 02) to turn
on or off the Microphone.
Monitor is off when MIC LED is lit, the Microphone Function Key is lit, or the handset is lifted.
2-576 Handsfree and Monitor

Issue 2.0
Description
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by
speaking toward the telephone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for
workers who do not have a free hand to pick up the handset.
Conditions
Handsfree Answerback does not require the Speaker phone to be enabled
(Program 15-02-16).
A multiline terminal user can process calls using the speaker and microphone in the
telephone (instead of the handset).
With Microphone Cutoff enabled, Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a
single beep (instead of two).
Incoming Intercom calls always ring single line telephones.
The extension you are calling must be set to Voice for this feature to work.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Microphone Cutoff
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing 2-577

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

If required, change the service code used for

setting an extension to voice announce for
incoming ICM calls.


setting an extension to forced ringing for
incoming ICM calls.
Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
If required, change the service code used for digits
toggling an outgoing ICM call between a voice
call and signal call.

Handsfree Operation 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable an extension user ability to use
the speakerphone on outside calls. When

disabled, the user can hear the conversion, but
cannot respond handsfree.


extension port =
Class 1
2-578 Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

toggle between Handsfree Answerback and

Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom
calls (dial 1 or Service Code 712).


calls.
Operation
To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls:

2. Dial 721.
This disables Forced Intercom Ringing.
To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls:

2. Dial 723.
This disables Handsfree Answerback.
To change the way your Intercom call signals the extension you are calling:
1. Dial 1.
- OR -
Dial 712.
If ringing, your call voice-announces. If voice-announced, your call starts to ring the destination. This
option is also available at single line telephones.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing 2-579

Issue 2.0
Headset Operation
Description
A multiline terminal user can use a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using
Handsfree, using the headset frees up the users hands for other work. However, Headset Operation
provides privacy not available from Handsfree.
As the headset plugs in a separate jack on the bottom of the telephone, the handset can still be
connected to the telephone. This gives you the option to use the handset, headset or the speakerphone
for calls.
Conditions
While using the headset, the Headset function key becomes a release (disconnect) key and
no dial tone is heard from the speaker.
While in the headset mode, the hook switch is not functional.
The Headset Programmable Function key (05) and Headset service code (688) are not
available for the Electra Professional telephones.
An extension with a headset can receive voice-announced Intercom calls and respond
handsfree when idle.
A Headset Function key is required to answer or place a call in headset mode.
The Electronic Headset Switch (EHS) is only supported on the ITL/DTL-8LD, ITL/DTL-12/
24 and ITL-320C terminals.
The EHS only functions with the Plantronics CX5xx and Savi 700 family of wireless
headsets.
The Headset key needs to be programmed on LK 25 on the ITL/DTL-12/24 and LK 33 on
the ITL/DTL-8LD and ITL-320C terminals.
The EHS and 8LK are not supported on the same SV9100 terminal.
Ambient noise and/or conversations close to the headset microphone may trigger beeps
heard in the headset. Also, the reorder tone results in beeps heard in the headset.
When the feature: Headset Operation (with Automatic Answer) is enabled, EHS is not
supported.
Default Setting
Disabled
2-580 Headset Operation

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Headset
Related Features

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Headset Ring Volume 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Adjustment digits
If needed, change the service code used to
adjust the Headset Ring Volume.

Operation) Headset Mode Switching 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Enable/Disable headset mode. digits
15-02-41 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Speaker Normal Ring 0

Incoming Ring Setup 1 = Headset Ring
Determine if incoming calls ring the speaker or

headset.
15-02-42 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Speaker Off-Hook Ring 0

Incoming Off-Hook Ring Setup 1 = Headset Off-Hook Ring
Determine if incoming off-hook ringing rings the

speaker or the headset.
Headset Operation 2-581

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-02-43 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = No Switch to Speaker Ring 0

Headset Ring Duration 1 = 10 seconds
If incoming ringing is set for headset, set the 2 = 20 seconds
duration the call rings the headset before
ringing the speaker.
3 = 30 seconds
4 = 40 seconds
5 = 50 seconds
6 = 1 minute

Assign a function key for Headset Operation 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 05). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
20-02-05 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = No 0

Headset Busy Mode 1 = Yes
Set the conditions under which a headset
extension is busy to incoming callers:
The Headset extension is busy to incoming
callers when only one extension
appearance is busy (0).
- OR -
Headset extension is busy to incoming
callers only when both extension
appearances are busy (1).

Determine whether intercom calls should ring or

voice-announce extensions.

busy.

2-582 Headset Operation

Issue 2.0
Operation
To enable the headset:

1. Plug in the headset in the headset jack on the bottom of the telephone.
2. Program a Headset key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 05).
You hear a confirmation beep.
To use the headset:

The Headset key lights when on a call. To disconnect, press the The Headset key lights when on a call. To
disconnect, press the Headset key.
You can use the handset for calls or respond to voice-announced Intercom calls with the headset plugged in.
The headset only activates when the Headset key is pressed.
Press the Headset key to answer a ringing call.

- OR -
Press the Headset key and then a line key or press Speaker then 9 to make an outgoing call.
- OR -
Press the Headset key to get intercom dial tone.

- OR -
If on a call, press the Headset key to hang up.
Headset Operation 2-583

Issue 2.0
Hold
Description
Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence or
Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension users work area. While the call waits on Hold, the
extension user may process calls or use a system feature. Calls left on Hold too long recall the extension
that placed them on Hold. Four types of Hold are available:
System Hold
An outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all other multiline
terminals. Any multiline terminal user with the flashing line key can pick up the call.
Exclusive Hold
When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call from Hold. The
trunk appears busy to all other multiline terminals that have a key for the trunk. Exclusive hold is
important if a user does not want a co-worker picking up their call on Hold.
Group Hold
If a user places a call on Group Hold, another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick
up the call. This lets members of a department easily pick up each others calls.
Intercom Hold
A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other
extension.
Hold Recall to Operator
Hold Recall to Operator enhances how the system handles calls that are left on hold too long. With Hold
Recall to Operator:
A trunk call recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Time.
The recalling trunk rings the extension that placed it on Hold for the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall
Callback Time.
After the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time, the trunk call rings the operator.
Hold Recall to Operator applies to trunk calls placed on System Hold, Exclusive Hold or Group Hold. It
does not apply to Intercom calls.
Conditions
The called extension must lift the handset or press Speaker before the call can be placed
on hold.
Callers on Hold hear Music on Hold, if programmed.
An extension can have function keys for System Hold and Exclusive Hold.
2-584 Hold
Issue 2.0
Analog single line telephones can use only Exclusive Hold or Group Hold.
If station A calls station B, and station A puts station B on hold and then calls station C,
station C cannot transfer the call.
For a station to retrieve a held ICM call, the station must have an ICM key assigned in
Program 15-07 (00).
The Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is used when an internal call from a Single Line Telephone
or 3rd Party SIP telephone is placed on hold.
On extensions, Hold Recall to Operator is not supported.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Music on Hold
Hold 2-585
Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
on hold.
Group Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
on hold.
Answer for Group Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
on hold.
14-01-16 Basic Trunk Data Setup Forced Release of 0 = Disable 0

Held Call 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Forced Release of Held Call.

access options for trunks. 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
(incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold

Set the function of the Multiline Hold key.
2-586 Hold
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Automatic Hold for CO Lines 1 = Disconnect (Cut)
When talking on a CO call, and another line key
is pressed, the original trunk is placed on Hold
or disconnected.

Callback Automatic Answer 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Callback Automatic Answer.

Assign a function key for Exclusive Hold (code 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
45). If an extension has its fixed Hold key 751 by default) Manual for
reassigned in Program 15-02-06, assign a 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
function key for System Hold (code 44). Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
(03 + ICM = VE or CAR where
ICM is the extension number of
the VE or CAR)

Port 960 priority
= 960

extension port =
Class 1


initiate Group Hold (Service Code 732).

up a call placed on Group Hold (Service Code
762).

Callback

a call, which recalls from Hold, transfer to the
operator.
Hold 2-587
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Number
Define the extension numbers used by

operators.
Set the Hold Recall Time. A call on Hold recalls
the extension that placed it on Hold after this

time.

Callback Time
Set the Hold Recall Callback Time. A trunk
recalling from Hold rings an extension for this
time.

Recall Time
Set the Exclusive Hold Recall Time. A call on
Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed
it on Hold after this time.

Set the Hold Recall Time. A trunk recalling from
Hold rings an extension for this time. If still
unanswered, the call changes to System Hold.
24-01-05 System Options for Hold Forced Release 0 ~ 64800 seconds 1800
of Held Call
Set the Forced Release of Held Calls time. If
enabled in Program 14-01-16, the system

disconnects a call if on Hold longer than this
Time.
Operation
System Hold
To place an outside call on System Hold:
Press Hold.
To pick up an outside call on System Hold:
Press the flashing CAP key.

- OR -
If you know the specific line number, dial 672 + Line number (001~400).
2-588 Hold
Issue 2.0
Exclusive Hold
To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold:
Press the Exclusive Hold key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 45).

- OR -
Press Feature + Hold.

1. Hookflash.
2. Dial 749.
To pick up an outside call on Exclusive Hold:
Press flashing CAP key.
Dial 759.
Group Hold
To place a call on Hold so anyone in your Department Group can pick it up:
1. Press Hold.
2. Dial 732.
1. Hookflash.
2. Dial 732.
3. Hang up.
To pick up a call on Group Hold:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 762.

2. Dial 762.
Hold 2-589
Issue 2.0
Intercom Hold
To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:

1. Press Hold.
To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Press flashing ICM Key (00).
2-590 Hold
Issue 2.0
Hotel/Motel
Description
Your UNIVERGE SV9100 telephone system provides Hotel/Motel services in addition to the many
features available to business users. These Hotel/Motel services help you run your facility more
efficiently, save you time and money and provide your guests with more responsive service.
Hotel/Motel features include:
Wake Up Call
Wake Up Call is like having an alarm clock in each room with some unique advantages:
Guests can set or cancel Wake Up Calls for themselves, or you can set and cancel Wake Ups for
them.
Unanswered Wake Up Calls can automatically call the operator and print on the Room Status
Printout report.
Use Wake Up Call as a meeting reminder (e.g., for convention attendees).
When used with the VRS feature, the destination is a single line room telephone Wake Up call
providing a pre-recorded greeting to the guest.
Single Digit Dialing
Single Digit Dialing gives your guests one-touch access to your important Hotel/Motel services. They
can lift the handset and press a single key for:
Extensions such as the front desk, reservation services, housekeeping or the maitre d of your
restaurant.
Feature Access Codes for one-button access to selected features and outside lines.
Voice Mail, so your guests can leave requests even when your service providers are unavailable.
A Department Calling Group
A Department Calling Group, allowing, for example, your guests to reach the first available agent in your
reservation desk group.
Message Waiting
If you call a guest while they are away from their room, leave them a Message Waiting. When the guest
returns, they see the lamp on their phone flashing and can automatically call you back. You can use
Message Waiting when you have parcels for a guest dropped off at your front desk. Do not keep
redialing the guest if they are not in just send them a Message Waiting. (Your DSS Console can show
all the rooms that have messages waiting.)
Hotel/Motel 2-591
Issue 2.0
PMS Integration
The UNIVERGE SV9100 can support third party Property Management System (PMS) applications. This
requires the use of the PVA PMS blade, which serve as a gateway between the PMS application, the
UNIVERGE SV9100 and UM8000 Mail voice mail. When using UM8000 Mail voice mail you must have
the RJ11 to DB-9 serial adapter (stock number 1091014). When using the PVA PMS blade you must
also have the USB to Serial Adapter (stock number 670545).
When the SV9100 is interfaced with an external PMS application, the first operator extension set in
Program 20-17-01 must be a physical phone connected to the phone system for all PMS features
to work.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 and UM8000 Mail must be licensed for Hotel/Motel for this feature to
work.
The supported PVA PMS protocols are NEAX 90-K, NEAX 60-K, KTSi and KTSi with ENQ.
The chassis to PVA PMS connection is via the LAN and an IP port only (default is 5129).
The PVA PMS to voice mail connection is via serial port COM 2 only using a NULL MODEM or
reverse cable.
Room name can only be displayed on terminals set to 0 (Normal) in Program 42-02-01.
Both COM ports are fixed at 9600 baud, eight data bits, one stop bit, and no parity.
The NEAX-90 with and without NAK protocol is compatible with property management systems
that support NEAX-90 protocol. Note that not all messages or functionality supported by NEAX
Model 90 protocol is implied or provided by the NEC PMS. The NEC PMS in conjunction with the
UNIVERGE SV9100 provides a subset of features supported by NEAX Model 90 protocol.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Hotel/Motel Services Guide for complete programming
information.
Room to Room Calling Restriction
Prevent guests in one room from calling guests in another a handy feature for guests that want to
maintain their privacy. If you need to, you can always allow inter-room calling (e.g., for families or groups
that have separate rooms).
Toll Restriction (When Checked In)
Control a guests long distance dialing automatically when they check in. Use this feature to set up two
different Toll Restriction modes. The first mode is for you and your staff when the room is checked out.
The second mode is for your guests when they check in. You may want to restrict the outside numbers
guests can dial, but allow your staff to call vendors and suppliers.
Room Status
Your phone and DSS Console can set and monitor the status of all your guest rooms: Checked In,
Checked Out, Maid Required and Maid in Room. Maximize room usage by coordinating your cleaning
staff and reservation desk. For example, you can dial simple codes to set a room status.
2-592 Hotel/Motel
Issue 2.0
Room Status Printouts
The Room Status Printouts give you a concise overview of the status of all your guest rooms at a glance.
The printouts provide up to the minute reports showing Room Status, Room Call Restriction, Do Not
Disturb, Message Waiting and Wake Up Calls. If your cleaning staff needs to know which rooms to clean,
for example, just print out the report showing Room Status. This printout requires a connection to the
system using an IP post on the CPU.
DSS Console Monitoring
Your DSS Console provides room monitoring abilities. You can see at a glance which rooms have Wake
Up Calls set or messages waiting. In addition, you can still use your console for business mode features.
Do Not Disturb
A guest can activate DND anytime they need privacy (for example, if they need to work uninterrupted).
Do Not Disturb (DND) blocks the room telephone incoming calls and Paging announcements. This can
be set from the room phone or attendant phone.
Flexible Numbering Plan
To simplify dialing guests and services in your facility, customize your system to have room numbers
match phone extension numbers. For example, if the rooms on the first floor are numbered 100~120, the
corresponding room extensions should also be 100~120.
Conditions
The following features are supported:
View current room status in Program 42-02-03 via Web Pro and Phone Pro.
Use Program 42-01-06 to enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to change any room status to
another room status.
Set room status on check out using Programs 42-06-07 and 42-06-08.
When setting room status automatically on check out, you cannot set a room to Room
Clean (Occupied) from the room using access code 640. This status can only be changed
from the front desk telephone (access code 641).
When Program 42-01-06 is disabled, valid room status changes are limited. Refer to the
PMS Developer Guide for information on valid status changes.
The current room status in Program 42-02-03 cannot be checked via PCPro.
When the system is configured for the VRS feature, Wake Up call greetings to single line
room telephones are supported.
Wakeup calls to multiline room telephones do not provide a wake up call greeting.
Wake Up call greetings to single line room telephones require the VRS feature and
licensing.
Hotel/Motel 2-593
Issue 2.0
When the SV9100 is interfaced with an external PMS application, the first operator
extension set in Program 20-17-01 must be a physical phone connected to the phone
system for all PMS features to work.
The SV9100 supports only one GCD-PVAA with the PVA PMS application.
The GCD-PVAA is chassis specific. A UX5000 CD-PVAA cannot be used in a SV9100
chassis. Conversely, a SV9100 GCD-PVAA cannot be used in a UX5000 chassis.
The PVA PMS web interface supports Windows Internet Explorer 8 run on any Windows 7
operating system.
Function codes 92 and 93 can be assigned only to a DSS Console that is in Hotel Mode.
These features do not work when programmed on multiline telephone line keys or on a
DSS Console in Business mode.
When multiple DSS Consoles are used for Hotel/Motel, function keys must be assigned to
each DSS console for Wake Up Call Indication and Room Status Indication.
The Message Waiting status of a room cannot be seen when the console is in Wake Up
Call or Room Status mode.
The BLF indication for each room is always available no matter what mode the console is
assigned.
To check the version number (while the application is running) press ALT + V.
The Hotel/Motel feature requires the GCD-CP10 be licensed for Hotel. The following dial
access codes can be used only if the GCD-CP10 is licensed for the Hotel/Motel Feature:
Dial Access Codes that Require GCD-CP10 Hotel License
Program Dial Access Code Description
11-10-16 626 Leaving Message Waiting (Requires CPU to be

licensed for Hotel/Motel)
11-14-01 627 Set DND for Own Extension
11-14-02 628 Cancel DND for Own Extension
11-14-03 629 Set DND for Other Extension
11-14-04 630 Cancel DND for Other Extension
11-14-05 631 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension
11-14-06 632 Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension
11-14-07 633 Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension
11-14-08 634 Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension
11-14-09 635 Set Room to Room Call Restriction
11-14-10 636 Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel)
11-14-11 637 Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension
11-14-12 638 Check In
2-594 Hotel/Motel
Issue 2.0
Dial Access Codes that Require GCD-CP10 Hotel License (Continued)
Program Dial Access Code Description
11-14-13 639 Check Out

11-14-14 640 Room Status Change for Own Extension
11-14-15 641 Room Status Change for Other Extension
11-14-16 642 Room Status Output
11-14-17 675 Hotel Room Monitor
11-14-18 666 Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction
Refer to the tables below for valid status code changes when Program 42-01-06 is enabled or disabled.
Table 2-33 Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42-01-06 is set to 1 (Enabled)
Change
Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 0 Code Code #
Status
Original
Status
Code 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Code Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Code # Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Hotel/Motel 2-595
Issue 2.0
Table 2-34 Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42-01-06 is set to 0 (Disabled)
Change
Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 0 Code Code #
Status
Original
Status
Code 1 N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Code 2 Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Code 3 Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Code 4 Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Code 5 Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Code 6 Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
Code 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y
Code 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y
Code 9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y
Code 0 Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Code Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y
Code # Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Default Settings
Not Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
DSS Console
When using the PVA PMS the following licenses affect this feature:
SV9100 Hotel/Motel License: SV9100 SYS PMS-Hotel/Motel-Lic (Feature Code 0007)
This license is required to enable the Hotel feature in the SV9100.
2-596 Hotel/Motel
Issue 2.0
SV9100 PVA PMS license: SV9100 PVA PMS -LIC (Feature Code 6201)
This license is only required when using the PVA PMS for PMS integration.
UM8000 Hotel/Motel license: SV91/SV93 UMS Hospitality/PMS-Lic (Feature Code 1407)
This license is only required when using the UM8000 Mail hotel features such as PMS
integration and Hotel Guest room mailboxes.
Related Features
Code Restriction
Department Calling
Do Not Disturb

Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Hotel/Motel Services Manual for complete programming
information.
Hotel/Motel 2-597
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-20-01 LAN Setup for External Equipment TCP 0 ~ 65535 External Device
Port 1 (CTI Server) =
Define the TCP port (0 ~ 65535) when 0
communicating to the SMDR (type 5). External Device
2 ( MIS) = 4000
External Device
5 (SMDR
Output) = 0
External Device
6 (DIM Output) =
0
External Device

11 (O&M Server)
= 8010
External Device
12 (Traffic
Report Output) =
0
External Device
13 (Room Data
Output for Hotel
Service ) = 0

Motel)
Codes for the System Administrator
(GCD-CP10 must be licensed for Hotel/Motel).
Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set DND for own extension used digits
with the Hotel/Motel feature (GCD-CP10 must
be licensed for Hotel/Motel).
DND for Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel DND for own extension digits
used with the Hotel/Motel feature (GCD-CP10
must be licensed for Hotel/Motel).
Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set DND for other extension digits
DND for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel DND for other extension digits
2-598 Hotel/Motel
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Up Call for Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set wake up call for own digits
extension used with the Hotel/Motel feature
Wake Up Call for Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel wake up call for own digits
Up Call for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set wake up call for other digits
Wake Up Call for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel wake up call for other digits
11-14-09 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Set Room MLT, SLT 635
to Room Call Restriction 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set room to room call extension digits
Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the cancel room to room call digits
restriction (hotel) used with the Hotel/Motel

feature (GCD-CP10 must be licensed for Hotel/
Motel).
11-14-11 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Change MLT, SLT 637
Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the change toll restriction class for digits
other extension used with the Hotel/Motel

Motel).
11-14-12 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Check-In MLT, SLT 638
Customize the check-in Service Codes which 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
are used with the Hotel/Motel feature. digits
11-14-13 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Check-Out MLT, SLT 639
Customize the check-out Service Codes used 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
with the Hotel/Motel feature (GCD-CP10 must digits

be licensed for Hotel/Motel).
Hotel/Motel 2-599
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Status Change for Own Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the room status change for own digits

Motel feature (GCD-CP10 must be licensed for
Hotel/Motel).
Status Change for Other Extension 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the room status change for other digits
extension Service Codes which are used with

the Hotel/Motel feature (GCD-CP10 must be
licensed for Hotel/Motel).
11-14-16 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Room MLT 642

Status Output 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the room status output Service digits
Codes used with the Hotel/Motel feature
Customize the hotel room monitor Service digits
Codes used with the Hotel/Motel feature
11-14-18 Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Set Hotel MLT 666
PMS Code Restriction 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the set hotel PMS code restriction digits
Service Codes used with the Hotel/Motel

Motel).

telephone uses.

manually.

Flashing 1 = Yes

type) telephones.
2-600 Hotel/Motel
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1

Extension

on ICM Call




Tone)




Define the ring cycle for Alarm for SLT
terminals.

Number

operators.
20-35-01 Extensions Operator Setting 0 ~ 15 0

Assign an extension to an operator group.

Set the mode of the system DSS Consoles. 1 = Hotel Mode
This option applies to all system DSS 2 = Monitor Mode

Consoles. 3 = Business/ Mode
Hotel/Motel 2-601
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
30-02-01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Maximum of eight digits No Setting

Extension Number
Define the extension number for the multiline
eight digits).

The key [when defined as a DSS/One-Touch
key (code 01)] can have any function up to four
digits (e.g., extension number or Service Code). No.)
The function information (such as extension 00 ~ 99 (Appearance
number or Service Code) would then be Functional Level)
entered as the additional data.
42-01-01 System Options for Hotel/Motel Answering 0 = MOH (Hold Time) 0

Message Mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel 1 = VRS Message
Mode) 2 = VRS Message + Time
Assign the answering message mode for wake
up call options for Hotel/Motel Service.
42-01-02 System Options for Hotel/Motel Wake Up 0 ~ 100 0

Call Message Assignment (0 = No Setting)
VRS Message for Wake Up Calls. You must
make an entry for this program if you have
selected 1 or 2 in Item 1 above.
42-01-03 System Options for Hotel/Motel Wake Up 0 = No Transfer 0

Call No Answer 1 = Transfer to the Operator
Assign the wake up call no answer options for

Hotel/Motel Service.
42-01-04 System Options for Hotel/Motel Setup 0 = Fixed Message 0

Message Mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel 1 = VRS Message
Mode)
Assign the setup message mode for wake up
2 = Time Information and VRS
call (hotel mode) options for Hotel/Motel
Service.
42-01-05 System Options for Hotel/Motel Wake Up 0 ~ 100 0

Call Message Assignment (0 = No Setting)
Assign the wake up call message assignment

options for Hotel/Motel Service.
42-01-06 System Options for Hotel/Motel Flexible 0 = Disabled 0

Room Status 1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) for
the system to change from any status code to
any other status code. Refer to Table 2-34
Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42-

01-06 is set to 0 (Disabled) on page 2-596
above and in the PMS Developer Guide for
valid status code changes when this program is
disabled.
2-602 Hotel/Motel
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
42-02-01 Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup Hotel Mode 0 = Normal 0

If you want an extension to operate in the Hotel/ 1 = Hotel
Motel mode, enter 1. If you want the telephone

to operate in the business mode, enter 0.
42-02-02 Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup Toll 1 ~ 15 1

Restriction Class When Check In
Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class when
it is checked in. The system has 15 Toll
Restriction Classes (1 ~ 15). The entry you
make in this option affects the telephone in all
Night Service modes. (Refer to Programs 21-05
and 21-06 to set up the Toll Restriction dialing
options.) When the extension is checked out, it
uses the Toll Restriction Class set in Program
21-04.
42-02-03 Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup Room Status 1 = Room Clean (Occupied) No Setting
This is a read only program that shows the 2 = Maid Required
current room status setting. 3 = Maid in Room
4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance Request
6 = Out of Order
7 = Reserve 1

8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
0 = Room Clean (Vacant)
= Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6
42-03-01 Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0
Check-In Operation 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel check-in operation COS

options.

Check-Out Operation 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel check-out operation COS

options.

Room Status Output 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel room status output COS

options.

DND Setting for Other Extension 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel DND setting for other

extension COS options.

Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel wake up call setting for

other extension COS options.
Hotel/Motel 2-603
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Room Status Change for Other Extension 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel room status change for

other extension COS options.

Restriction Class Changing for Other 1 = On
Extension
Set the Hotel/Motel restriction class changing
for other extension COS options.

Room to Room Call Restriction 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel room to room call restriction

COS options.

DND Setting for Own Extension 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel DND setting for own


Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel wake up call setting for own


Change Room Status for Own Extension 1 = On
Set the Hotel/Motel change room status for own

42-03-12 Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) SLT 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Room Monitor 1 = On
Enable/Disable a single line telephone ability to

use Room Monitor.

PMS Restriction Level 1 = On
Enable/Disable the attendants ability to change

the outgoing restriction class for hotel phones.
42-04-01 Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes 1 ~ 64 (Calling Group) No Setting

Set up the Hotel Mode one-digit service codes Maximum of eight digits
assigned in Program 42-02-01. 1 ~ 9, 0, , #
42-05-01 Hotel Room Status Printer Output Port 0 = No Setting 0

Type 1 = Not Used
Set the LAN port to output the Hotel Data
(Check-Out sheet, Room Status, etc.) and the
3 = LAN
output port type options for the Hotel/ Motel
feature.
42-05-03 Hotel Room Status Printer Wake Up Call 0 = Not Output 0

No Answer Data 1 = Output

wake up call no answer data options for the
Hotel/ Motel feature.
2-604 Hotel/Motel
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
42-05-04 Hotel Room Status Printer Check-Out 0 = Not Output 0

Sheet 1 = Output

check-out sheet options for the Hotel/ Motel
feature.
42-06-01 PMS Service Setting PMS Port Number 0 ~ 65535 5129

Set the PMS port number when using the PMS
feature.
42-06-02 PMS Service Setting 3:00 AM Auto Room 0 = Off 0

Scan 1 = On
Set maid required status for all checked-in

rooms at 3:00 AM.
42-06-03 PMS Service Setting CheckIn Message 0 = Off 0

Type 1 = On
Set the check-in message type when using the

PMS feature.
42-06-04 PMS Service Setting CheckOut Auto 0 = Off 0

Status Change 1 = On
Set the checkout auto status change when

using the PMS feature.
42-06-05 PMS Service Setting AREYUTHERE/ 1 ~ 128 (seconds) 10

LINETEST Send Timing
Set the AREYUTHERE/LINETEST send timing

when using the PMS feature.
42-06-06 PMS Service Setting AREYUTHERE/ 0 ~ 20 (times) 3

LINETEST Send Count
Set the AREYUTHERE/LINETEST send count

when using the PMS feature.
42-06-07 PMS Service Setting Check-Out Auto 0 = Disabled 0

Flexible Status Change 1 = Enabled
When Programs 42-06-07 and 42-06-04 are
both enabled, the status programmed in

Program 42-06-08 is set upon checkout
regardless of the previous room status.
42-06-08 PMS Service Setting Status for Check-Out 1 = Room Clean (Occupied) 4
Auto Flexible Status Change 2 = Maid Required
When Program 42-06-07 is enabled the status 3 = Maid in Room
programmed in 42-06-08 is set upon checkout. 4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance Request
6 = Out of Order
7 = Reserve 1

8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
= Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6
Hotel/Motel 2-605
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
42-07-01 PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table 1 ~ 15 Level 0 = 10

Change the default Toll Restriction class on Level 1 = 11
check in for a room (Program 42-02-02). Level 2 = 12

Level 3 = 13
42-09-01 Flexible Setup for Room Status 1 = Room Clean (Occupied) No Setting
When Program 42-01-06 is enabled dial room 2 = Maid Required
status codes can be defined in this program. 3 = Maid in Room
Note the code definitions only apply to the 4 = Inspection Required
system itself, when sending room status 5 = Maintenance Request
6 = Out of Order
messages to the PMS Application the status
codes are always sent as defined in the PMS 7 = Reserve 1

Developer Guide. 8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
= Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Hotel/Motel Services Manual for complete operation
information
2-606 Hotel/Motel
Issue 2.0
Hotline
Description
Hotline gives a multiline terminal user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline
partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer
calls to each other just by pressing a single key.
Hotline has two applications.

Hotline (Hotline partner)
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External (Refer to Ringdown Extension, Internal/External on page
2-1204.)
In addition, the Hotline key shows the status of the partners extension.
When the key is . . . The extension is . . .

Off Idle
On Busy or ringing
Fast Flash DND All calls (option 3) or Intercom calls (option 2)
Double Wink On Agent logged onto the group
Wink Off Agent logged off
There are 960 internal Hotline extensions available.
Conditions
An extension user cannot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partners extension.
If a station is a agent, the Hotline key blinks to indicate the agents status.
Hotline keys can be assigned to the DSS consoles.
Hotline does not override Do Not Disturb.
Hotline always follows the Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing mode set at
the called extension. The Hotline caller can override the setting, if desired.
External Hotline automatically dials a telephone number or Speed Dial - System/Group/
Station number when the handset is lifted.
If the partners extension is busy, Hotline does not automatically activate Off-Hook
Signaling.
A Hotline is a uniquely programmed function key.
Hotline 2-607
Issue 2.0
Default Setting
Disabled
Related Features
Contact Center
Do Not Disturb
Off-Hook Signaling
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a function key for Hotline (code 01 + 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
partners extension number). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
2-608 Hotline
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk 1 = Enable
When this option is Disabled, incoming calls to
an extension indicate on any Hotline key for
that extension as solid (busy). When this option
is Enabled, lighting is determined by the setting
of Program 22-01-01 Incoming Call Priority. If
set to trunk (1), the Hotline key lights solid when
a trunk call rings in. If set to intercom (0), the
Hotline key does not light for incoming trunk
calls, but lights solid for intercom calls.

(1 ~ 15). (1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

Turn Off or On Hotline (Ringdown). If disabled
in COS, the settings in Program 21-11 below
have no effect.

Service) Hotline for SPK 1 = On

Speaker to activate hotline or ringdown.

Inward Transfer)



(Automatic Override) Refer to Table 2-
Program 20-02-03 and Program 20-13-06 set 35 Extension
the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Busy Setup on
Voice Over or DSS Console key indicates that page 2-612.
an extension is busy. With condition 1 in the
following chart, the BLF LED is on only when
both extension line appearances are busy. In
conditions 2 ~ 4, the BLF LED is on when one
line appearance is busy.
21-01-09 System Options for Outgoing Calls 0 ~ 64800 seconds 5 seconds

A Ringdown extension automatically calls its

programmed destination after this time.
Hotline 2-609
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-11-01 Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment 0, , #, Pause, Hook Flash, @ No Setting

Define the Hotline destination number for each Maximum of 24 digits
extension number. (Code to wait for answer
Program the ringdown (Hotline) source and supervision)
destination (target) number, up to 24 digits (960
Hotline assignments). Include the trunk access

code (usually 9) in front of the number when
dialing outside numbers.
When programming Speed Dial System
numbers as the destination, the entry should be
#2 + bin number (the service code for Speed
Dialing and the Speed Dial bin number).

simultaneously.

Define the LED patterns for busy extensions on
the DSS consoles.

Define the LED patterns for DND extensions on
the DSS consoles.

Define the LED patterns for busy agents
function on the DSS consoles.

(DSS)

DSS) on the DSS consoles.
30-05-06 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Log Out 0~7 5 (IL)
(DSS)

logged out on the DSS consoles.
30-05-07 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Log In 0~7 4 (IR)

(DSS)

logged in the DSS consoles.

Emergency (DSS)
Define the LED patterns for agents in

emergency on the DSS consoles.

Code 1 (Hotel DSS)

2-610 Hotline
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Code 2 (Hotel DSS)


Code 3 (Hotel DSS)


Code 4 (Hotel DSS)


Code 5 (Hotel DSS)


Code 6 (Hotel DSS)


Code 7 (Hotel DSS)


Code 8 (Hotel DSS)


Code 9 (Hotel DSS)


Code 0 (Hotel DSS)


Code (Hotel DSS)


Code # (Hotel DSS)

Hotline 2-611
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Indication

indication on the DSS consoles.
Table 2-35 Extension Busy Setup
Program 20-13-06 Program 20-02-03 BLF 1 Status Busy Status
1 1 0 Off No
2 1 1 On Yes
3 0 0 On Yes
4 0 1 On Yes
1
BLF is on for extension receiving a voice announced Intercom call.
Operation
To place a call to your Hotline partner:

1. Press the Hotline key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 01 + partners extension number).
You can optionally lift the handset after this step for privacy.
To transfer your outside call to your Hotline partner:

1. Press the Hotline key.
2. Announce the call and hang up.
- OR -
Hang up to have the call wait at your Hotline partner unannounced.

If unanswered, the call recalls like a regular transferred call.
To answer a call from your Hotline partner:

1. If you hear two beeps, speak toward the telephone.
- OR -
If your telephone rings, lift the handset.
2-612 Hotline
Issue 2.0
Hot Key-Pad
Description
The Hot Key-Pad feature allows the user to place a call without lifting the handset or pressing Speaker.
When the user dials another extension number on an idle telephone with Hot Key-Pad enabled, the
Speaker lights and the internal call is made. When the user dials the trunk access code from a telephone
with Hot Key-Pad enabled, Speaker lights, a trunk is seized and the outgoing call is made.
Conditions
When a user dials any digit on a station with Hot Key-Pad enabled, Speaker LED lights.
After a user dials the trunk access code on a station with Hot Key-Pad enabled, a trunk is
seized when dialing the first digit of the called party number.
When both Hot Key-Pad and Dialing Number Preview are turned on, Hot Key-Pad has
priority and Dialing Number Preview does not work.
When both Hot Key-Pad and Hotline are turned on, Hot Key-Pad has priority and Hotline
does not work.
When placing an outgoing call with the Hot Key-Pad feature, the user must dial the trunk
access code before dialing the called party number.
The ARS feature can be used when placing outside calls with the Hot Key-Pad feature.
When both Hot Key-Pad and VRS Fixed Messaging are turned on, VRS fixed messaging
does not work.
The Hot Key-Pad Feature also works when dialing service codes.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Required Software
None
Hot Key-Pad 2-613

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Class of Service
Dialing Number Preview
Hotline
Intercom

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(1 ~ 15). Any Class of Service assignments you (1 ~ 15) All other
change using Service Code 677 automatically extension port =
update this program. Class 1

Service) Hot Key Pad 1 = On
a call by dialing the number without going
off-hook.
2-614 Hot Key-Pad

Issue 2.0
Operation
To place an intercom call using Hot Key-Pad:

1. The multiline terminal is idle. There is no need to press Speaker.
2. Dial the extension.
3. Dialed extension rings.
To place a trunk call using Hot Key-Pad:

1. The multiline terminal is idle. There is no need to press Speaker.
2. Dial the trunk access code, 9 by default, and the external destination number you want to call.
Hot Key-Pad 2-615

Issue 2.0
Howler Tone Service
Description
Howler Tone Service provides a Howler Tone when a station remains off-hook after a call is completed or
when a station is off-hook and digits are not dialed in a programmed time.
Conditions
Howler tone is generated 45 seconds after a call is disconnected and the telephone is left
off-hook or the telephone is left off-hook without dialing.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
None

2-616 Howler Tone Service

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-18-01 Service Tone Timers Extension Dial Tone 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Time
After completion of dial tone time Intercom dial
tone, a telephone user has this time to dial the
first digit of the Intercom call.
20-18-02 Service Tone Timers Busy Tone Timer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15

After Program 20-18-01 expires Busy Tone will
play for time programmed in this memory block.
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count 0 ~ 255 (0 = until On-Hook) Refer to Table 2-
Customize the system basic tones and system 31 Service Tone
Setup Defaults,
the changes to take affect. Program

80-01-01 on
page 2-568.
80-01-02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 1 ~ 33 Refer to the

The following features require that the system 0 = No Tone Programming
tones listed below be changed to match the 33 = Default Time Slot Manual for
table. After changing these settings the default values.
system must be reset for the changes to take
effect.

Call Screening
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
Operation
None
Howler Tone Service 2-617

Issue 2.0
2-618 Howler Tone Service

InMail
Description
The InMail is a low cost voice mail solution that mounts on the GCD-CP10. Its programming is
fully integrated with chassis programming. This system offers most voice mail system features
I
customers expect.
Automated Attendant automatically answers the system incoming calls. After listening to a
customized message, an outside caller can dial a system extension or use Voice Mail.
Start-Up Programming (Default)
Every SV9100 has InMail built in on the system. When a system is defaulted, InMail will be
automatically programmed and work in the system. The following settings are made
automatically on a defaulted system. If needed, they can be changed but it is recommended that
the default values be kept:
Subscriber Mailboxes are enabled for extensions 101~164. The mailbox numbers are the
same as the extension numbers.
The Automated Attendant does not answer outside calls.
The Department group pilot for InMail extensions in Program 11-07-01 is 3999.
All InMail extensions are assigned to Department group 64 in Program 16-02-01.
The extension numbers for the InMail ports are 3898-3913.
The voice mail Department group is set to 64 in Program 45-01-01.
InMail extensions 3898-3913 are set to DP in Program 15-03-01.
InMail extensions 3898-3913 are set to Special in Program 15-03-03.
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail
An extension user can forward their calls to Voice Mail. Once forwarded, calls to the
extension connect to that extension mailbox. The caller can leave a message in the mailbox
instead of calling back later. Forwarding can occur for all calls immediately, for unanswered
calls or only when the extension is busy. When a user transfers a call to an extension
forwarded to Voice Mail, the call waits for the Delayed Call Forwarding time before routing
to the called extension mailbox. This gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the
call instead of having it go directly to the mailbox.
Leaving a Message
Voice Mail lets a multiline terminal extension user easily leave a message at an extension
that is unanswered, busy or in Do Not Disturb. The caller presses their Voice Mail key to
leave a message in the called extension mailbox. There is no need to call back later.
InMail 2-619
Issue 2.0
Transferring to Voice Mail

By using Transfer to Voice Mail, a multiline terminal extension user can Transfer a call to the users
or a co-workers mailbox. After the Transfer goes through, the caller can leave a message in the
mailbox.
A station user transferring a call can transfer the call to the called party voice mail box after an
internal station number is dialed while performing a screened transfer, or during intercom calls. The
user calls the extension then dials the quick transfer dial access code (default = 8) and hangs up.
The call is placed in the mailbox and the caller hears the personal greeting.
Live Record
While on a CO/Trunk call, an extension user can have InMail record the conversation. The multiline
terminal user just presses the InMail Record key; the ESL user dials a code. Once recorded, the
Voice Messaging System stores the conversation as a new message in the users mailbox. After
calling their mailbox, a user can save, edit or delete the recorded conversation. This feature is
supported only on CO, Tie, or DID calls. It is not supported on internal calls. The recording time
limit is set by multiplying Program 47-01-03 x 10 with a maximum recording limit of 65 minutes. At
the default (120 seconds) this will allow a 20 minute Live Recording message to be made. The
initial recording beep is controlled with Program 47-02-07. The repeating beep interval is controlled
with Program 45-01-06. Once Live Record is started, dialed DTMF digits are no longer sent to the
outside system for the duration of that call.
Live Monitor
A multiline terminal user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine. This
lets InMail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the extension
incoming calls route to the users subscriber mailbox. The Live Monitor feature is supported for
external and internal calls. After the mailbox answers, the users phone changes to show that a
caller is leaving a message, no audible tone is provided. The multiline terminal user can then:
Choose Exit to let the call go through to their mailbox.
Choose ANSW to intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox.
Choose SCRN to monitor the message being left by the caller.

Personal Answering Machine Emulation
lets In-Mail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the
extensions incoming calls route to the users subscriber mailbox. Once the mailbox answers, the
user hears the callers incoming message. The multiline terminal user can then:
Let the call go through to their mailbox
Intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox
2-620 InMail
Issue 2.0
Voice Mail Overflow

If Voice Mail automatically answers trunks, Voice Mail Overflow can reroute those trunks to other
extensions when all Voice Mail ports do not answer or, with certain software, are busy. During
periods of high traffic, this prevents the outside calls from ringing Voice Mail for an inordinate
amount of time. There are two types of Voice Mail Overflow: Immediate and Delayed. With
immediate overflow, calls immediately reroute to other extensions when all Voice Mail ports do not
answer or, with certain software, are busy. With delayed overflow, calls reroute after a preset
interval. Without overflow, the outside calls ring Voice Mail until a port becomes available or the
outside caller hangs up.
Message Center Mailbox
A Message Center Mailbox is shared by more than one extension. Any multiline terminal that has a
Message Center Key for the shared mailbox can:
Listen to the messages stored in the shared mailbox
Transfer calls to the shared mailbox
Use many other Voice Mail features previously available only at an extension individual mailbox
A Message Center Mailbox helps co-workers that work together closely such as members of the
same Department Hunt Group or Group. For example, a Group Supervisor can send important
messages to the shared Message Center Mailbox, to which any Group member can respond
when time allows. Each Agents Message Center Key flashes when messages are waiting. (The
Message Center Mailbox can be a mailbox for an installed, uninstalled or virtual extension.)
Voice Mail Caller ID
InMail can use ANI/Caller ID information to identify the outside caller that left a message in a users
mailbox. When the message recipient presses TI after hearing a message, they hear the time the
message was sent and the outside telephone number of the message sender. Refer to Caller ID
on page 2-107 and T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) on page 2-1423 for more information
on setting up this feature.
Voice Mail Queuing
When accessing the voice mail, the system provides a voice mail queue. If all the voice mail ports are
busy, any call trying to get to the voice mail is placed in queue. As the voice mail port becomes available,
the calls are connected to the voice mail in the order in which they were received.
As the Voice Mail Queue follows Department Hunting programming, the queue can hold a maximum of
10 calls. If the queue is full or if the voice mail ports are not assigned to a Department Group, the calls
are handled as though no voice mail queuing feature was enabled. The calls either access voice mail if a
port is available or they receive a busy signal.

NOTE
The Voice Mail Queuing feature does not work with the Conversation Record feature.
InMail 2-621
Issue 2.0
Message Key will Operate as Voice Mail Key
The system enhances a telephone Message key function when connected to a system which has voice
mail installed. When an extension receives a voice mail, the MSG key can be used to check the number
of messages in voice mail, as well as call the voice mail to listen to the messages. If no Voice Mail
Programmable Function Key is defined (Program 15-07-01, code 77), the telephone Message Waiting
LED flashes to indicate new messages.

NOTE
This option is not available with a networked voice mail the voice mail must be local.
InMail Available
InMail is a plug-in in-skin full-featured, DSP-based integrated Voice Mail with Automated Attendant. It is
present on all SV9100 GCD-CP10 and requires mailbox licenses to activate.
The InMail Automated Attendant answers incoming calls and routes them quickly and efficiently.
Integrated Voice Mail features include Conversation Record, Answering Machine Emulation, and Caller
ID with Return Call. Interactive Softkeys guide the display telephone user through the extensive InMail
feature set.
Table 2-36 SV9100 InMail Part Numbers and Capacities
Part Number Capacity
All SV9100 systems have the InMail built in with 16 voice ports.
Each station mailbox must be licensed (1012). However, Call
Routing, Announcement and Group mailboxes Do Not require
mailbox licenses (1012).
P/N 640079 S system (1G) SV9100 SD Card (15 hours recording time)
P/N 640080 E system (4G) SV9100 SD Card (120 hours recording time)
P/N 640814 Additional InMail Voice Mailbox User License (1012)
Bundled with Standard and InMail Email Client License (1014)
Premium User License
Mailboxes Station Mailboxes = 896
Routing Mailboxes = 32
Group Mailboxes = 32
Total Mailboxes = 960
InMail: External Transfer Available
The software allows the InMail to perform an external transfer. This allows the InMail to route an
incoming Automated Attendant call out of the UNIVERGE SV9100 system on a new trunk based on an
Speed Dial number stored in a Dial Action Table.
2-622 InMail
Issue 2.0
InMail: Softkey With Security Code Programming
InMail provides softkeys when programming the security code. These softkeys allow a user to select OK,
CLEAR or EXIT following an entry of a new code.
InMail: Internal Message Notification Timer
When Message Notification places a call out, the system waits up to 30 seconds for ringback, reorder, or
busy tone from the trunk. If detected, notification call out processing begins normally. If not detected, the
system abandons the call and decrements the Ring No Answer (RNA) count.
InMail: Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few
letters in the extension users name. With Directory Dialing, the caller does not have to remember the
extension number of the person they wish to reach just the name.
The following conditions apply to InMail Directory Dialing:

Remote CCIS extensions are not supported in a centralized directory.
When set for Unscreened Transfer, calls from the InMail ring at the extension like other transferred
calls and display the incoming Caller ID data (if provided by Telco and enabled in programming)
while the phone is ringing.
When set for Screened Transfers, calls from the InMail ring like Intercom calls but do not display
incoming Caller ID data (if provided by Telco and enabled in programming) until after the call is
answered.
The following steps describe Directory Dialing:

1. When the Automated Attendant answers, it sends the call to the Main Greeting box. The caller
must dial a digit to access Directory Dialing.
2. The Directory Dialing Mailbox plays the Directory Dialing Message which asks the caller to dial
letters for the name of the person they wish to reach.
3. The caller dials the letters for the persons name plus #. They can dial by first name or last name,
depending on how the Directory Dialing Message was recorded and the Directory Dialing
Mailbox was set up.
4. InMail searches the list of programmed extension names for a match of the caller-entered letters.
5. Voice prompts announce the first three matches, and allow the caller to dial a digit (1~3) to reach
one of the announced matches. Additionally, the caller can dial 4 to hear additional matches (if
any).
6. The caller dials the digit for the extension they wish to reach, and InMail sends the call to that
extension. The call is sent as a Screened or Unscreened transfer, depending on programming.
For callers to use Directory Dialing, the system must have a name programmed for each extension (up
to 15 characters, A~Z, using upper and lower case letters). Each extension user should also have a
name recorded in their Subscriber Mailbox. In addition, each extension used by Directory Dialing must
be installed and have an active Subscriber Mailbox (Personal or Group).
InMail 2-623
Issue 2.0
An outside caller can route to a Master Mailbox or a Routing Mailbox programmed as a Directory Dialing
Mailbox from:
The Answer Tables Answer Schedule Override mailbox, Default mailbox, or Routing mailbox.
A GOTO action in the Dial Action Table of a Call Routing Mailbox.
InMail: Multiple Greetings
The mailbox subscriber can record up to three greetings and make any of the three active. When a caller
leaves a message in the subscribers mailbox, they hear the active greeting. This allows the subscriber,
for example, to record a greeting for work hours, after work, and during vacation. Instead of changing
their greeting when they leave the office, they can activate the after work greeting instead.
If the active greeting has not been recorded, a caller leaving a message in the subscriber mailbox hears,
At the tone, you can leave your message for (extension number or name).
Refer to the InMail System Guide for complete details on setting these features
REFERENCE
InMail: Message Playback Options
The following functions are available:

Auto Play
If Auto Play is enabled, New Messages play automatically when an extension user accesses their
Mailbox without having to dial 5.
Change Playback Order
Playback Order (FIFO: Playback from received call order and LIFO: Playback from New Messages
First) can be set by UserPro or mailbox setup.
Ability to mark message as New
The user can mark a message as "New" after playback of the message is complete.
Conditions
Mailbox licenses are consumed in order beginning with mailbox 1. You must assign
mailboxes to extensions starting with mailbox 1 in Program 47-02-01.
All SV9100 systems have the InMail built in with 16 voice ports. Each station mailbox must
be licensed (1012). However, Call Routing, Announcement and Group mailboxes Do Not
require mailbox licenses (1012).
Once Live Record is started, dialed DTMF digits are no longer sent to the outside system
for the duration of that call.
Remote CCIS extensions are not supported in a centralized directory.
When set for Unscreened Transfer, calls from the InMail ring at the extension like other
transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID data (if provided by Telco and enabled
in programming) while the phone is ringing.
2-624 InMail
Issue 2.0
When set for Screened Transfers, calls from the InMail ring like Intercom calls but do not
display incoming Caller ID data (if provided by Telco and enabled in programming) until
after the call is answered.
When creating a distribution list, do not use blank destinations within the list. The system
considers blank entries to be the end of the list and does not use entries following the
blank.
InMail is supported for centralized voice mail in a KTS to KTS CCIS network.
InMail is supported for centralized voice mail in a NetLink network. However, replication
should be scheduled for non-peak hours of operation.
Email forwarding requires one (1) InMail Email client license 1014 for each mailbox that will
use this feature.
Constant Message Count is displayed on a telephone display until another activity needs
the display (i.e., if a call is made or received on the telephone). To have the message count
display again, the telephone needs to receive a new voice mail message or a new call into
the voice mailbox.
Constant Message Count is not supported for Group Mailboxes.
The SV9100 supports a maximum of 16 InMail ports.
Answering Machine Emulation is only supported on InMail.
Audible tones are not provided to the multiline terminal when using Live Monitor, only visual
notifications are provided for incoming monitored calls.
The Quick Transfer to Voice Mail feature is allowed when:
Listening to the Ring Back Tone (RBT).
Listening to the Call Waiting Tone (CWT).
In Handsfree Answerback Mode.
In Voice Over Mode.
When Quick Transfer to Voice Mail is accessed, the Voice Over feature is canceled.
The Quick Transfer to Voice Mail is not allowed when caller is:
Listening to the busy tone (BT).
Talking on an internal line.
Talking on an outside line.
Making a conference call.
The following options must be changed from WebPro, PCPro or system programming for
group subscriber mailboxes:
Email Notification
Message Notification
Find-Me Follow-Me
InMail 2-625
Issue 2.0
Auto Play
The following options can only be changed from UserPro, WebPro, PCPro or system
programming for station subscriber mailboxes:
Email Notification
Message Notification
Find-Me Follow-Me
Auto Play
While on an intercom (ICM) call, dial the Quick Transfer Access Code (default: 8) to
automatically transfer to that station Voice Mail box.
Extension ID numbers cannot start with 0, 9, or #.
Mailboxes with extension IDs of 10-32 are not supported as these are already used by fixed
system resources.
Distribution List members can only have 2 or 3 digit extension IDs.
Live Record does not work for monitored calls.
Live Record does not work for conference calls.
Fixed Call Forwarding can be used to transfer a users unanswered calls to their voice mail.
Call Forwarding does not have to be programmed manually by each user.
Off-premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines.
When the voice mail places a call on hold, it uses Group Hold. Any line appearances for the
trunk shows the hold flash rate, however, a user cannot pick up this call (a busy signal is
heard).
Updating the system time also updates the InMail time.
InMail and UM8000 Mail cannot be used at the same time in the same system.
The displayed message count for New and Saved messages does not update until the
mailbox user hangs up and calls back into the InMail.
InMail and Analog Voice Mail cannot be used at the same time in the same system.
When using InMail in a CCIS or Netlink network, 8-digit extensions and mailboxes are not
supported.
InMail does not support Unified Messaging.
Group mailboxes do not provide a constant message count display.
2-626 InMail
Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
InMail Mailbox License (1012)
InMail Email Client License (1014)
System Resource License (0300)
Related Features
Barge-In
Caller ID
Call Forwarding
Contact Center
Hold
Message Waiting
One-Touch Calling
Transfer
InMail 2-627
Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Assign at least one circuit for DTMF reception 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
(0 or 1). 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF (Trunks)
receiver for every 10 devices that use them. Circuit/Resource

receiver for every five devices that use (Common)
them. When PZ-BS10
is installed, 81 ~
144 are available
11-07-01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Dial Maximum of eight digits. No Setting
Assign a Department Group pilot number for
the Voice Mail (eight digits maximum). The
extensions are assigned to the group in
Program 16-02-01.
Customize the Service Codes used for barge-in digits

service.
11-12-52 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT No Setting

Live Monitoring (SV9100 InMail) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define access code used for InMail Live digits

Monitoring (VRS).

Mail 0 = Disable

1 = Enable

Enable/Disable a trunk ability to receive Caller 0 = No
ID information. 1 = Yes
2-628 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-02-26 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup MSG 0 = Message Key 0

Key Operation Mode 1 = Voice Mail Key
Determine whether an extension MSG key
should function as a Message key or Voice Mail
key. If set as a Message key, the user can press
it to call the voice mail only when they have new
messages. If set as a Voice Mail key, it
functions as a normal Voice Mail key (it is not
active if Centralized Voice Mail is used).
15-02-28 Multiline Telephone Basic Data setup 0 = Green 1

Message Waiting Lamp Color 1 = Red
Determine whether an extension Message
Waiting Lamp lights Green or Red when a
message is received.

Select the color of the large LED when a voice

mail message is waiting at the extension.

For each UNIVERGE SV9100 voice mail

extension, set this option to 0.

15-03-09 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Caller ID Function for External Module 1 = Enable (On)
This option must be 0 when voice mail is used
or the integration code for the disconnect
function is incorrect.
InMail 2-629
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a Voice Mail key to an extension. You 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
must enter the Voice Mail key code (code 77) 751 by default) Manual for
followed by:
Your own extension number if you are Function Code) (Service Code
setting up your own Voice Mail key. 752 by default)
A virtual extension number if you are setting
up a Message Center key for a virtual
extension.
A co-workers extension number if you are
setting up a Message Center key for an
installed extension.
An uninstalled extension number if you are
uninstalled extension.
(Optional) Assign a Voice Mail Record key to an
extension (code 78).
(Optional) Assign a Personal Answering
Machine Emulation key (code 16).
(Optional) Use a Call Redirect key (49) to allow
a user to transfer a call to another extension or
voice mail without answering the call.

Port 1 priority = 1
Port 256 priority
= 256


system.

Assign a Class of Service (1 ~ 15) to the voice Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
mail extensions. You should use COS 14 for all (1 ~ 15) All other
time modes. extension port =
Class 1
2-630 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

E&M
caller.


extension.





Unanswered





Set this option to 0 for voice mail.


InMail 2-631
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Turn On or Off an extension ability to send
off-hook Signals.


Allow a busy extension to Manually (0) or


Message Waiting.

on ICM Call


You should set this option to 1 for voice mail.


other extensions barge-in on calls.

Changed
change COS via Service Code 677.

Service) Block Camp On 1 = On
Set this option to 0 for voice mail.

Answer Recall Time
2-632 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-08-01 DIL/IRG No Answer Destination 0 (No Setting) 1

Assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. 001 ~ 100
(Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or InMail)
24-02-02 System Options for Transfer MOH or 0 = Hold Tone 0

Ringback on Transferred Calls 1 = Ring Back Tone
Enable/Disable MOH on Transfer. If set to 0, a
transferred caller hears Music on Hold while
their call rings the destination extension. If set
to 1, a transferred caller hears ringback while

their call rings the destination extension. For
this option to work with voice mail, the
transferred call must be an unscreened
transfer.
Assign Trunks As Automated Attendant Trunks Method 1:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want 0 = Normal
to ring into Voice Mail as a Direct Inward Line 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
(DIL). VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Assign the master/pilot number of the voice Extension Number (maximum of
mail group from Program 11-07-01 as the DIL eight digits)
destination. If all Voice Mail ports are in the Pilot Number
same unique Extension (Department) Group
(see Program 16-02 above), the DIL rings

another Voice Mail port if its assigned port is
busy.
For this selection to work, set Program 22-02-01 to
4 (DIL).
InMail 2-633
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

to ring into Voice Mail as a normal line. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Use this program to assign Normal Ring Trunks Incoming Group Number for
(Program 22-02) to Incoming Ring Groups Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
(Program 22-04). 0 = (No Setting)

Mail or InMail)
For Either Method:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-04-01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Maximum of eight digits. Extensions

Assignment 01 ~ 108 (first
To enable Voice Mail Overflow, assign selected eight ports) ring
extensions to a Ring Group that rings for for incoming
Ring Group 1
unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ports. In
Program 22-06, enter 1 to enable overflow calls. No other

ringing. extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

For Voice Mail Overflow, enter the Ring Group 001 ~ 100
that unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ring after (Incoming Ring Group)
the DIL Call Waiting time (Program 22-01-04). 102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or InMail)
2-634 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Forwarding Time
Set the time a transferred call waits at a
forwarded extension before routing to the called
extension mailbox.
45-01-01 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Department Groups: 0

Department Group Number 0 ~ 64
Assign which Extension (Department) Group

0 = No Voice Mail
number is used for the voice mail group.
45-01-02 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Maximum of 12 characters. Voice Mail
Master Name
Assign the Voice Mail master name.
45-01-04 Voice Mail Integration Options Park and 0 = Off 1

Page 1 = On
Enable/Disable the system ability to process
the Voice Mail Park and Page () commands.
You should normally enable this option.
45-01-05 Voice Mail Integration Options Message 0 = Off 1

Wait 1 = On
the Voice Mail Message Wait (#) commands.
You should normally enable this option. If
enabled, be sure that the programmed
Message Notification strings do not contain the
code #9 for trunk access. When using an
external voice mail and Centrex transfer, this
option should be disabled or the service code
#3 in Program 11-12-42 must be changed.
45-01-06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30
Alert Tone Interval Time
Set the time between Voice Mail Conversation

Record alerts.
45-01-14 Voice Mail Integration Options CCIS Dial (maximum of eight digits) No Setting
Centralized Voice Mail Number
Assign the pilot number to Centralized Voice
Mail over CCIS link. Assign only in remote
switches.
45-01-15 Voice Mail Integration Options Analog 0: Fixed 0

Voice Mail Protocol Selection 1: Program
Assign whether fixed codes or codes used in
Program 45-04 are used for analog voice mail
protocol.
45-01-16 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Maximum of four digits. No Setting
Fax Digit Add Assignment
Assign up to four digits in front of the station
number sent to the SLT port when a call is
forwarded.
InMail 2-635
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
45-01-17 Voice Mail Integration Options Reply 0 = No 1

Mailbox Number 1 = Yes
Determine Whether or not to include the
mailbox number in the analog voice mail
protocol.
45-01-18 Voice Mail Integration Options Trunk 2~3 2

Number Mapping
Assign the digits of trunk number mapping.
47-01-02 SV9100 InMail System Options SV9100 Maximum of 12 characters. InMail ##

InMail Master Name (The system
The CHS2UG GW-US must be reset for a substitutes the
change to this program to take effect. Use this port number for
option to modify the name for all InMail ports. the # when
The system briefly displays this name when a calling the port).
display multiline terminal user calls a Voice Mail
port (either by pressing Message, their voice

mail key, or by dialing the master number). You
should always end the name with the ##
characters. The system substitutes the port
number for the last #. Using the default name
InMail ##, for example, the telephone display
shows InMail #1 when calling port 1.
47-01-03 SV9100 InMail System Options Subscriber 1 ~ 4095 seconds 120

Message Length
Set the maximum time for recorded messages
for:
Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to
record and send a message.
Extension users leaving a message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.
Outside Automated Attendant callers
accessing a mailbox via a GOTO command
and then dialing RS to record and send a
message.
Subscriber Mailbox Greetings.
Announcement Messages.
Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.
The Conversation Record time is 10 times the
Subscriber Message time. Since the Conversation
Record time cannot exceed 4095 seconds, any
setting in Subscriber Message time longer than 409
has no effect on the length of recorded
conversations.
47-01-04 SV9100 InMail System Options Non- 1 ~ 4095 seconds 120

Subscriber Message Length
Set the maximum time for recorded messages
for:
Automated Attendant callers leaving a
message or Quick Message in a Subscriber
Mailbox.
Outside callers transferred by an extension
user to a Subscriber Mailbox.
2-636 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-01-05 SV9100 InMail System Options Message 1 ~ 60 seconds 5

Backup/Go Ahead Time
Set the time for how far InMail backs up when a
user dials B while listening to a message. This
time also sets how far InMail jumps ahead
when a user dials G while listening to a
message.
47-01-07 SV9100 InMail System Options Digital Digits (12 maximum, using 0 ~ 9, XM#
Pager Callback Number # and )
Set the Digital Pager Callback Number part of M (Number of messages
the message Notification callout number for a entered by pressing LK1)
digital pager. This part of the callout number is No entry (Entered by pressing
appended to the pager service telephone HOLD).
number. Normally, this option should be XM#, X (Extension number entered
where
X is the number of the extension that
by pressing LK2) InMail
automatically replaces the X
generated the notification. command with the number of
is a visual delimiter (to make the pager
the extension that initially
display easier to read).
received the message.
M is the number of new messages in the
extension mailbox.
# is the digit normally used by the pager
service for positive disconnect.
47-01-08 SV9100 InMail System Options Delay in 0 ~ 99 seconds 9

Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number
Set the time delay (0 ~ 99 seconds) that occurs
just before InMail dials the Digital Pager
Callback Number portion of the Message
Notification callout number for a digital pager.
Set this delay so the pager service has enough
time to connect to the digital pager before
sending the callback number. Your pager
service may be able to help you determine the
best value for this option (0 ~ 99 seconds).
When placing a digital pager notification, the
system:
Seizes the trunk specified.
Dials the user-entered notification number (in
Message + OP + N).
Waits the 47-01-08: Delay in Dialing Digital
Pager Callback Number interval.
Dials the number entered in 47-01-07: Digital
Pager Callback Number.
The system assumes that the notification
number completes dialing approximately four
seconds after trunk seizure. This means that,
by default, the Digital Pager Callback Number
is dialed into the pager service about 13
seconds after trunk seizure.
InMail 2-637
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-01-09 SV9100 InMail System Options Wait 1 ~ 255 minutes 15

Between Digital Pager Callout Attempts
Set the minimum time between
unacknowledged or unanswered digital pager
Message Notification callouts. (A subscriber
acknowledges a digital pager notification by
logging onto their mailbox.)
After this time expires, InMail tries the callout
again (for up to the number of times set in
47-01-14: Number of Callout Attempts).
If the system dials the callout number and the
pager service is busy, it retries the number in
one minute.

Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts
Set the minimum time between non-pager
Message Notification callouts in which the
destination answers, says Hello, dials 1 to
acknowledge and then enters the wrong
security code.

Between Busy Non-Pager Callout Attempts
Set the time InMail waits after it dials a busy
non-pager callout destination, before retrying
the callout number.

Between RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempts
Set the time InMail waits, after it dials an
unanswered non-pager callout destination,
before retrying the callout number.
There are three types of unanswered
non-pager callouts:
If the callout rings the destination longer
than the 47-01-13: Wait for Answer
Non-Pager Callout Attempts option.
If the destination answers, says Hello (or the
system detects answer supervision) and
then hangs up without dialing 1 to log onto

their mailbox. This typically happens if
someone unfamiliar with notification
answers the callout, or if the callout is picked
up by an answering machine.
If the destination answers, and then hangs
up without saying Hello. This typically
happens if someone unfamiliar with the
notification answers the callout (like the
above example), or if the call is picked up by
an answering machine with insufficient
outgoing message volume.
2-638 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-01-13 SV9100 InMail System Options Number of 1 ~ 99 (rings) 5

RNA Rings
If a non-pager callout rings the destination
longer than this number of times, InMail marks

the call as unanswered (Ring No Answer) and
hangs up.

Cascading Attempts
Set how many times InMail retries an
incomplete Message Notification callout. This
total includes unacknowledged callouts,

callouts to a busy destination, and callouts to an
unanswered destination. This option applies to
pager and non-pager callouts.
47-01-15 SV9100 InMail System Options Send Pager 0 = No (Disabled) 0

Callout Until Acknowledged 1 = Yes (Enabled)
When this option is set to 1, InMail continues to
retry a digital pager Message Notification
callout until the notification is acknowledged. If
this option is set to 0, InMail retries a digital
pager Message Notification the number of
times specified in 47-01-14 Number of Callout
Attempts. This option does not apply to
Message Notification callouts to telephone
numbers.
A digital pager notification is acknowledged
when the recipient logs onto the mailbox.
47-01-16 SV9100 InMail System Options Name 0 = 1st Last 0

Format 1 = Last 1st
Specify how names are displayed.
47-02-01 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = None 1

Mailbox Type 1 = Personal
Enable/Disable the mailbox. An extension 2 = Group
mailbox is not accessible when it is disabled
(even though its stored messages and
configuration are retained in memory.) If
disabled, a user pressing Message initiates a
remote Logon and is asked to enter their
mailbox number. A voice prompt then
announces: That mailbox does not exist.
To make programming easier, consider
associating a mailbox number with a station
port. For example, mailbox 1 could correspond
to port 1, which in turn corresponds to
extension 101.
InMail 2-639
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-02-02 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Digits (maximum of eight Mailbox 1 = 101
Mailbox Number using 0 ~ 9) Mailboxes 2 ~ 64
Select the extension number associated with = 102 ~ 164
the mailbox you are programming. Normally, Mailboxes
mailbox 1 should use Mailbox Number 101, 65 ~ 896 = No
mailbox 2 should use Mailbox Number 102, etc. Entry
To make programming easier, consider
associating a mailbox number with a station
port. For example, mailbox 1 could correspond
to port 1, which in turn corresponds to
extension 101.
47-02-03 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 ~ 99 messages 99 for mailbox 1

Number of Messages To conserve storage space, 20 for all other
Set the maximum number of messages that enter 0 for all unused mailboxes. mailboxes
can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller
tries to leave a message after this limit is
reached, they hear, That mailbox is full. InMail
then hangs up.
47-02-04 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = FIFO (first-in/ first-out, or 0

Message Playback Order oldest messages first).
Set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback 1 = LIFO (last-in/ first-out, or
order. When a subscriber listens to their newest messages first)

messages, InMail can play the oldest message
or the newest message first.
47-02-05 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = Erase 1

Auto Erase/Save of Messages After the subscriber listens to
Determine what happens when a Subscriber the entire new message and
Mailbox user listens to a complete new hangs up, InMail erases the
message and then exits the mailbox without message.
either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. 1 = Save
Depending on the setting of this option, InMail After the subscriber listens to
either automatically saves or erases the the entire new message and
message. If the mailbox user hangs up before hangs up, InMail saves the
listening to the entire new message, InMail message.
retains the message as a new message.
47-02-06 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 1 ~ 99 Days 0

Message Retention 0 (Indefinite)
Determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox
retains held and saved messages. If a message

is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this
interval, InMail deletes it.
2-640 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-02-07 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = Disable 1

Recording Conversation Beep 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the Conversation Record beep.
If enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice
prompt Recording followed by a single beep
when the extension user initiates Conversation
Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep
do not occur. When you disable the
Conversation Record beep, the following voice
prompts do not occur while InMail records the
conversation:
Recording (followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full (if the mailbox message
storage capacity is reached)
You have reached the recording limit (if the
recorded message is too long)
The SV9100 telephone system software
provides an additional Conversation Record
beep. This beep repeats according to the
setting of Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail
Integration Options: Record Alert Tone
Interval Time.

Message Waiting Lamp 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Message Waiting lamp at the
extension associated with the Subscriber
mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should
enable this option. For Guest Mailboxes, you
should disable it.

Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb.
When a subscriber enables this option, an
Automated Attendant caller routes directly to
the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to
leave a message. A subscriber can also enable
this option while recording their mailbox
greeting.

Forced Unscreened Transfer 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Automated Attendant Forced
Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber
Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened Transfer
(TRF) to the extension is converted to an
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled,
Screened Transfers from the Automated
Attendant occur normally.
InMail 2-641
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Auto Time Stamp 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Auto Time Stamp for the
Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the
subscriber listens to a message InMail
announces the time and date the message was

left. Auto Time Stamp also announces the
message sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp
from their mailbox.
47-02-12 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = No (Disable) Mailbox 1 (101)

System Administrator 1 = Yes (Enable) =1
Designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System Other mailboxes
Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use =0
the SA options after logging into their mailbox.

Dialing Option 1 = Enable
Dialing Option provides additional dialing
options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see
Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a
caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to

leave a message can dial any option in the Next
Call Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If
disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use the
Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action).
47-02-14 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Call Routing Mailbox Number 1 (Call Routing
Next Call Routing Mailbox (1 ~ 3 digits, 01 ~ 016) No entry Mailbox 01)
Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the (Entered by pressing CLEAR) By default, Call
Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with Routing Mailbox
additional dialing options while listening to a
Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default
numbers are
01 ~ 08
greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends
on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox
and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox
options.
47-02-15 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = None 0

Directory List Number 1 ~ 8 = List Number
Set up a station/extension mailbox directory list. = All
47-02-26 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = Disabled 0

Auto Play 1 = Enabled
Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox
message Auto Play option. When a subscriber

logs into their mailbox, InMail can automatically
play new messages, or not.
47-03-02 SV9100 InMail Group Mailbox Options Digits (maximum of eight using 0 No Setting
Mailbox Number ~ 9)
Department Group master (pilot) number. Use Hold)
this option to select the Department Group
master (pilot) number associated with the
Master Mailbox you are programming.
2-642 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the Master Mailbox type. 2 = Routing
47-06-01 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options 0 ~ 99 messages 20

Number of Messages To conserve storage space,
Set the maximum number of messages that enter 0 for all unused mailboxes.
can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller
tries to leave a message after this limit is
reached, they hear, That mailbox is full. InMail
then hangs up.
47-06-02 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options 0 = FIFO (first-in/first-out, or 0

Message Playback Order oldest messages first).
Set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback 1 = LIFO (last-in/first-out, or
order. When a subscriber listens to their newest messages first).

messages, InMail can play the oldest
messages or the newest messages first.
47-06-03 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Auto 0 = Erase 1

Erase/Save of Messages After the subscriber listens to
Determine what happens when a Subscriber the entire new message and
Mailbox user completely listens to a new hangs up, InMail erases the
message and then exits the mailbox without message.
either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. 1 = Save
Depending on the setting of this option, InMail After the subscriber listens to
either automatically saves or erases the the entire new message and
message. If the mailbox user hangs up before hangs up, InMail saves the
listening to the entire new message, InMail message.
retains the message as a new message.
47-06-04 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options 1 ~ 99 days 0

Message Retention 0 (Indefinite)
Determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox
retains held and saved messages. If a message

is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this
interval, InMail deletes it.
InMail 2-643
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-06-05 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options 0 = No (Disable) 1

Recording Conversation Beep 1 = Yes (Enable)
Enable/Disable the Conversation Record beep.
If enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice
prompt Recording followed by a single beep
when the extension user initiates Conversation
Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep
do not occur. When you disable the
Conversation Record beep, the following voice
prompts do not occur while InMail records the
conversation:
Recording (followed by a beep) That mailbox is

full (if the mailbox message storage capacity is
reached).
You have reached the recording limit (if the
recorded message is too long).
The SV9100 telephone system software
provides an additional Conversation Record
beep. This beep repeats according to the
setting of Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail
Integration Options: Record Alert Tone Interval
Time.
47-06-06 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options 0 = Disable 1

Message Waiting Lamp 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Message Waiting lamp at the
extension associated with the Subscriber
mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should
enable this option. For Guest Mailboxes, you
should disable this option.
47-06-07 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Auto 0 = Disable 0

Attendant Do Not Disturb 1 = Enable
When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do
Not Disturb, an Automated Attendant caller
routes directly to the mailbox, hears the

greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A
subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Do
Not Disturb while recording their mailbox
greeting.
47-06-08 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Forced 0 = Disable 0

Unscreened Transfer 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Automated Attendant Forced
Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber
Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened Transfer
(TRF) to the extension is converted to an
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled,
Screened Transfers from the Automated
Attendant occur normally.
2-644 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Time Stamp 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Auto Time Stamp for the
Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the
subscriber listens to a message InMail
announces the time and date the message was

left. Auto Time Stamp also announces the
message sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp
from their mailbox.
47-06-10 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options 0 = Disable 0

System Administrator 1 = Enable
Designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System
Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use
the options after logging into their mailbox.
47-06-11 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Dialing 0 = Disable 0

Option 1 = Enable
Dialing Option provides additional dialing
options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see
Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a
caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to

leave a message can dial any option in the Next
Call Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If
disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use the
Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action).
47-06-12 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Next Call Routing Mailbox (default = 1)
Call Routing Mailbox Number (0 ~ 32) (Call Routing
Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the No entry (entered by pressing Mailbox 01) By
Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with CLEAR) default, Call
additional dialing options while listening to a Routing Mailbox
Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default numbers are

greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends 01 = 16
options.
47-06-13 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options 0 = None 0

Directory List Number 1 ~ 8 = List Number
Specify the Directory List Number to which the
Group Mailbox belongs. Use to set up a Master
= All
Mailbox assigned as a Subscriber Mailbox in
47-03-03.
47-06-24 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Auto 0 = Disabled 0

Play 1 = Enabled
Use this option to set the Group Subscriber
Mailbox message auto play option. When a

user logs into the group mailbox, InMail can
automatically play new messages, or not.
InMail 2-645
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-07-02 SV9100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options 0 = None Mailboxes

Routing Mailbox Type 1 = Call Routing 01 ~ 08 = 1
Set the Routing Mailbox type. 2 = Announcement (Call Routing)
Mailboxes

3 = Directory
4 = Distribution 09 ~ 32 = 2
(Announcement)
47-08-01 Call Routing Mailbox Options Dial Action 1 ~ 32 1 (Dial Action

Table (Dial Action Table 1 ~ 32) Table 1)
Assign the Dial Action Table to the Call Routing
Mailbox. The Dial Action Table defines the
dialing options for the call Routing Mailbox.
47-08-02 Call Routing Mailbox Options Screened 0 ~ 255 seconds 15

Transfer Timeout Entering 0 causes immediate
Set the time a Screened Transfer (TRF) from recall.
the Automated Attendant rings an unanswered
extension before recalling.
This option has a similar function as Customize:
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling]
Options: Delay Rings Before Redirect Transfer
in InMail.
47-08-03 Call Routing Mailbox Options Time Limit 0 ~ 99 seconds 5

for Dialing Commands Entering 0 causes the
Determine the time InMail waits for an Automated Attendant to
Automated Attendant caller to dial before immediately route callers to the
routing the call to the Timeout destination. Be Timeout destination
sure your Dial Action Tables have a Timeout programmed in the active Dial
action programmed. Action Table.
If the caller waits too long to dial:
When the associated Dial Action Table has a
Timeout action programmed, the caller routes
to that destination.
When the associated Dial Action Table does not
have a Timeout action programmed, the
Instruction Menu repeats three times and then
InMail hangs up.
47-08-04 Call Routing Mailbox Options Fax 0 = Disabled 0

Detection 1 = Enabled
Enable/Disable Fax detection for the Call
Routing Mailbox. When Enabled, the InMail
Automated Attendant (when using this mailbox)
detects incoming Fax CNG tone. The Fax then

routes to the company Fax Machine according
to the setting in Program 47-01-06: Fax
Extension. When Disabled, the Automated
Attendant does not detect incoming Fax calls.
2-646 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-09-01 Announcement Mailbox Options Next Call Call Routing Mailbox 0

Routing Mailbox Number (1 ~ 32)
If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to 0 = Undefined
answer Automated Attendant calls, use this
option to provide additional routing options to
the Automated Attendant callers. This option
interacts with Repeat Count and Hang Up After

below.
47-09-02 Announcement Mailbox Options Repeat 0 (No Repeats) 0

Count 1 ~ 10 (Announcement
Enter the number of times you want the repeats 1 ~ 10 times)
Announcement Mailbox message to repeat to
callers. After an Announcement Mailbox caller
initially listens to the message, it repeats the
number of times specified in this option. This
option interacts with Next Call Routing Mailbox

and Hang Up After when providing routing
options.
47-09-03 Announcement Mailbox Options Hang Up 0 = None 0

After 1 = Goodbye
Use this option along with Next Call Routing 2 = Silent
Mailbox and Repeat Count above to provide
additional routing options to Automated
Attendant callers.

47-10-01 SV9100 InMail Trunk Options Answer Answer Table 1

Table Assignment (1 ~ 16)
Assign an InMail Answer Table to each Direct
Inward Line (DIL) the Automated Attendant
should answer. The Automated Attendant
follows the routing specified by the selected
Answer Table.
47-11-01 InMail Answer Table Options Answer 0 = Disable 0

Schedule Override 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Answer Schedule Override for
the selected Answer Table. If enabled (and you
make an entry for Override Mailbox below), the
active Answer Table routes calls to the Override
Mailbox.
InMail 2-647
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-11-02 InMail Answer Table Options Override 0 = Undefined 0

Mailbox Category 1 = Subscriber
Specify the category of the mailbox where Mailbox STA
Automated Attendant calls should route when 2 = Group Mailbox
you enable Answer Schedule Override.
3 = Routing Mailbox
InMail mailbox categories are Subscriber
Mailbox, Master Mailbox, and Routing Mailbox.
InMail handles the routing according to the type
of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or
Announcement) within the specified category:
If the Override Mailbox is a Subscriber
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox
greeting (if recorded) and can leave a
message.
If the Override Mailbox is an Announcement

Mailbox, the outside caller shears the
recorded announcement. Depending on
how the Announcement Mailbox is
programmed, InMail then hangs up,
reroutes the call, or provides additional
dialing options.
If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the
instruction menu and can dial any option
allowed by the associated Dial Action Table.
If any Input Data value is entered, the terminal
displays the Override Mailbox Number selection
below.
Override Mailbox Number Digits No Entry

Specify the mailbox where Automated (maximum of three using 0 ~ 9)
Attendant calls should route when you enable
Answer Schedule Override. The mailbox
number you select in this option should match
the mailbox category specified in 47-11-02:
Override Mailbox Category above.
2-648 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-11-03 InMail Answer Table Options Default 0 = Undefined Answer Table 1 =

Mailbox Category 1 = Subscriber Mailbox - STA 3
Specify the category of mailbox used as the 2 = Group Mailbox Answer
Default Mailbox. InMail mailbox categories are 3 = Routing Mailbox Table 2 ~ 16 = 0
Subscriber Mailbox, Master Mailbox, and
Routing Mailbox. InMail uses the Default
Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is not in
effect.
InMail handles the routing according to the type
of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or
Announcement) within the specified category:
If the Default Mailbox is a Subscriber
message.
If the Default Mailbox is an Announcement
recorded announcement. Depending on
how the Announcement Mailbox is
programmed, InMail then hangs up,
reroutes the call, or provides additional
dialing options.
If the Default Mailbox is a Call Routing
instruction menu and can dial any option
allowed by the associated Dial Action Table.
If any Input Data value is entered, the terminal
displays the Default Mailbox Number selection
(below).
InMail Answer Table Options Default Digits (maximum of three using Answer Table 1 =
Mailbox Number 0 ~ 9) 1
Set the Answer Table Default Mailbox number. Answer Table
InMail uses the Default Mailbox when an 2 ~ 16 = No
Answer Schedule is not in effect. By default, Entry
this occurs at all times other than Monday
through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM.
47-11-04 InMail Answer Table Options Next Answer Answer Table 0

Table (1 ~ 16)
When 10 Answer Schedules in an Answer
Table are not enough, use this option to link two
0 = Undefined
Answer Tables together. InMail treats the two
linked tables as a single 20 entry Answer Table.
InMail 2-649
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-12-01 InMail Answer Schedules Schedule Type 0 = Undefined Answer Table 1/

Assign a Schedule Type to the selected Answer 1 = Day of the Week Schedule 1 = 2
Schedule. The Schedule Type determines how 2 = Range of Days All other
the Answer Schedule answers calls. 3 = Date schedules = 0
The schedule can be one of the following types:
1. Day of the Week A Type 1 Answer
Schedule runs on a specific day of the week.
For this type of schedule, you select:
The day of the week the schedule should
run:
The schedule start time.
The schedule end time
The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer calls.
2. Range of Days A Type 2 Answer
Schedule runs for a range of days. For this
type of schedule, you select:
start.

stop.
The time on the start day the schedule
should start.
The time on the stop day the schedule
should stop.
Mailbox used to answer the calls.
3. Date A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only
on a specific day of the year. For this type of
schedule, you select:
The specific date the schedule should
run.
On the selected date, the time the
schedule should start.
On the selected date, the time the
schedule should stop.
Mailbox used to answer the calls.
2-650 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-12-02 InMail Answer Schedules Answering 0 = Undefined 3

Mailbox Category 1 = Subscriber Mailbox - STA
Specify the category of mailbox to which 2 = Group Mailbox
Automated Attendant calls should route when 3 = Routing Mailbox
the schedule is in effect. InMail mailbox
categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Master
Mailbox, or Routing Mailbox.
InMail handles the routing according to the
exact type of Subscriber, Master, or Routing
Mailbox specified.
If the Answering Mailbox is a Subscriber

message.
If the Answering Mailbox is an Announcement
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed,InMail
then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides
additional dialing options.
If the Answering Mailbox is a Call Routing
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction
menu and can dial any option allowed by the
associated Dial Action Table.
Answering Mailbox Number Digits (maximum of three using Answer Table 1/

Set the number of the Answering Mailbox the 0 ~ 9) Schedule 1 = 1
Automated Attendant uses when the selected All Other Answer
schedule is in effect. This mailbox is defined in Schedules = No
47-12-02: Answering Mailbox Category. Entry
47-12-03 InMail Answer Schedules Day of the Week 1 = Sunday 1

For Day of the Week (Type 1) Answer 2 = Monday
Schedules, select the day of the week the 3 = Tuesday
Answer Schedule should be active. 4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
47-12-04 InMail Answer Schedules Start Day 1 = Sunday 1

For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, 2 = Monday Answer Table 1/
select the day of the week the Answer 3 = Tuesday Schedule 1 = 2
Schedule should start. 4 = Wednesday All Other
5 = Thursday Schedules = 1
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
InMail 2-651
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-12-05 InMail Answer Schedules End Day 1 = Sunday Answer Table 1/

For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, 2 = Monday Schedule 1 = 6
select the day of the week the Answer 3 = Tuesday All Other Answer
Schedule should end. 4 = Wednesday Schedules = 1
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
47-12-06 InMail Answer Schedules Date MMDD 0000

For Date (Type 3) Answer Schedules, select For example:
the date the Answer Schedule should be active. - 0101 = January 1
- 1231 = December 31
- 0000 = No date set
47-12-07 InMail Answer Schedules Schedule Start HHMM (24-hour clock) Default:
Time For example: Answer Table 1/
Specify the time the Answer Schedule should - 0130 = 1:30AM Schedule 1 =
start. It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), - 1700 = 5:00PM 08:30 (8:30AM)
Range of Days (Type 2), and Date (Type 3)
All other

schedules. (To make a schedule run
schedules are
continuously, make the same entry for
0000
47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08:
Schedule End Time.)
47-12-08 InMail Answer Schedules Schedule End HHMM (24-hour clock) Default:
Time For example: Answer Table 1/
Specify the time the Answer Schedule should - 0130 = 1:30AM Schedule 1 =
start. It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), - 1700 = 5:00PM 1700
Range of Days (Type 2), and Date (Type 3)
- 0000 = Undefined All Other

schedules. (To make a schedule run Schedules =
continuously, make the same entry for 0000
47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08:
Schedule End Time.)
47-13-01 SV9100 InMail Dial Action Tables Refer to the

Programming
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 InMail System
Guide, for complete programming details. Manual for

default values.
Set the criteria for DTMF dial, ringback and 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
busy tones. 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
2-652 InMail
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-04-01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Detect 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm Type 1 (DT) 0
Level 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm (-25dBm)
Define the various levels and timers for the Call 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm Type 2 (BT) 0
Progress Tone Detector. 3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm (-25dBm)
Use this option to set the Detection Level. 4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm Type 3 (RBT) 0
(-25dBm)
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
Type 4 (SBT) 0
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
(-25dBm)
Type 5 0
Delay Announcement:
Only use if Announcement Mailboxes are used for Delay Announcements.

NOTE
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Message Start Timer

playing the Delay Message.
Number for 1st Announcement Message
Assign Voice Mail Announcement Mailbox as
the message source for the 1st Announcement
Message.
41-19-03 Voice Mail Delay Announcement 1st Delay 0 = No message is played. 0

Message Sending Count 1 ~ 255
Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending
Count. This entry must be set to 1 or higher for
the message to play.
Number for 2nd Announcement Message
Assign Voice Mail Announcement Mailboxes
as the message source for the 2nd
41-19-05 Voice Mail Delay Announcement 2nd Delay 0 = No message is played. 0

Message Sending Count 1 ~ 255
Determine the 2nd Delay Message Sending
Count. This entry must be set to 1 or higher for
the message to play.
41-19-06 Voice Mail Delay Announcement Wait Tone 0 = Ring Back Tone 0
Type at Message Interval 1 = Music On Hold Tone
Determine what the caller hears between the

2 = Background Music Source
messages.
InMail 2-653
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
41-19-07 Voice Mail Delay Announcement Forced 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Disconnect Time after 2nd Announcement
Assign the time the system waits after the end

of the delay message before disconnecting.
41-19-08 Voice Mail Delay Announcement Delayed 0 ~ 64800 seconds 20

Message Interval Time
Set the time between Delayed Messages.
47-03-02 SV9100 InMail Group Mailbox Options Digits (maximum of eight using No Setting
Mailbox Number 0 ~ 9)
Department Group master (pilot) number. Use Hold)
this option to select the Department Group
master (pilot) number associated with the
Group Mailbox you are programming.

Set the Group Mailbox type. 2 = Routing
Operation
Calling Your Mailbox
To call your mailbox:
With a multiline terminal, your Voice Mail key flashes green and your Message Center keys flash red
when they have messages waiting. If you do not have a Voice Mail key, your Message Waiting LED
flashes instead.
Multiline Terminal
1. Press your Voice Mail key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 01 + 8).

- OR -
Press the Vmsg softkey.

- OR -
Press the Message key on the telephone, if equipped.

Your mailbox number is normally the same as your extension number. You may optionally dial a
co-workers mailbox - or use this procedure to call your mailbox from a co-workers telephone.
- OR -
2-654 InMail
Issue 2.0
2. If requested by Voice Mail, enter your security code.

Ask your Voice Mail system administrator for your security code.
Normally, your Message Waiting (MW) LED goes out (if applicable). If it continues to flash, you have
unanswered Message Waiting requests or a new General Message. See To check your messages
below.

If you are at a co-workers telephone, you can dial the Voice Mail master number and your mailbox
number instead. You can also use this procedure from your own telephone to call a co-workers
mailbox.
Checking Messages
If Program 15-02-26 = 0 (Message Key):

1. Press the Message key once.
The user can use the VOL UP and VOL DOWN keys to view the new messages. If there are both voice
mail messages and Message Waiting calls, the display indicates the number of new voice mail
messages and then each Message Waiting call is shown.
When there are new messages, the Message Waiting LED on the telephone will flash red.
To return a displayed Message Waiting, press the Speaker key or lift the handset.
2. To return a displayed Message Waiting, press Speaker or lift the handset.
To listen to the voice messages, with Voice Message displayed, press Speaker or lift the
handset.
The voice mail is called.
The voice mail is only called if there are new messages. If the display indicates Check Messages No
Messages, press the Exit key to return the telephone to idle.
If Program 15-02-26 = 1 (Voice Mail Key):

When there are new messages, the Message Waiting LED on the telephone flashes red.
With this option set, the MSG key can be used as a Voice Mail key for any function [calling voice mail
or transfer call a to voice mail (Hold + MSG + Extension Number), etc.].
InMail 2-655
Issue 2.0
Leaving A Message (Multiline Terminal Only)
To leave a message in the mailbox of an unanswered extension (the extension you call can be
busy, in DND or unanswered):
1. Press the Voice Mail key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 77 + InMail pilot).
- OR -
Press the Message key on telephone, if equipped.

- OR -
Dial 8.
The Voice Mail System prompts you to leave a message.
Forwarding Calls to Your Mailbox
To activate or cancel Call Forwarding:

1. Press Speaker (or lift the handset at the single line telephone) and choose from the following dial
access codes:
741 = Call Forward Immediate (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 10)
742 = Call Forward Busy (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 11)
743 = Call Forward No Answer (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 12)
744 = Call Forward Busy/No Answer (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 13)
2. Dial the Voice Mail master number.
3. Press Speaker to hang up (or hang up handset at the single line telephone).
Transferring Calls to a Mailbox
To transfer your active call to a mailbox:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press Hold.
2. Press the Voice Mail key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 77 + InMail pilot).
- OR -

3. Dial the number of mailbox to receive the transfer.
This number can be a mailbox number or a co-workers mailbox number.
- OR -
2-656 InMail
Issue 2.0
Press the DSS Console or One-Touch key for extension users mailbox, which receives the
transfer.
If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail, the call waits before routing the
called users mailbox. This gives you the option of retrieving the call instead of having it picked up by
Voice Mail.
4. Hang up.
Voice Mail prompts your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected.
- OR -
1. Dial extension number or press a DSS Console key for the extension mailbox which receives the
transfer.
2. Press the Voice Mail key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 77 + InMail pilot)
- OR -

3. Hang up.
Voice Mail prompts your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected.
1. Hookflash.
Dial Voice Mail master number followed by destination mailbox.
If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail, the call waits before routing the
called users mailbox. This gives you the option of retrieving the call instead of having it picked up by
Voice Mail.
2. Hang up.
Recording Your Call
To record your active call in your mailbox:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Voice Mail Record key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 78)
You hear a beep and your Record key flashes. The system beeps periodically to remind you that you are
recording.
To stop recording, press the Voice Mail Record key again. You can restart and stop recording as
required.
- OR -
1. Press Hold.
2. Dial 654.
The system automatically reconnects you to your call.
InMail 2-657
Issue 2.0
To stop recording, place the call on hold then pick the call back up. You can restart and stop recording
as required.
1. Hookflash.
2. Dial 654.
To stop recording, hookflash twice. You can restart and stop recording as required.
Personal Answering Machine Emulation (Multiline Terminal Only)
To enable or cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation:

1. Press Speaker (or lift the handset at the single line telephone) and choose from the following dial
access codes:
741 = Call Forward Immediate
743 = Call Forward No Answer
744 = Call Forward Busy/No Answer
745 = Call Forward Both Ring
746 = Call Forwarding Follow Me
2. Dial the Voice Mail master number.
3. Press Speaker to hang up (or hang up handset at the single line telephone).
When Personal Answering Machine Emulation broadcasts your callers message, you can:
Your telephone must be idle (not on a call).

1. Do nothing.
The message is automatically being recorded in your mailbox. The broadcast stops when your caller
hangs up.
- OR -
1. Lift the handset to intercept the call.

You connect to the caller. The system records the first part of the message in your mailbox. The line key
changes from red to green.
- OR -
Press Speaker to cut off the message broadcast and send the call to your mailbox.
Voice Mail records the entire message in your mailbox.
2-658 InMail
Issue 2.0
Checking Your Messages (Multiline Terminal Only)
To check your messages:

1. Press the Message key.
2. Dial 0.
You can have any combination of the message types in the table below on your telephone.
If you see. . . You have. . .
VOICE MESSAGE New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox

n MESSAGES
CHECK MESSAGE VRS Not listened to the current General Message

GENERAL MESSAGE
CHECK MESSAGE Message Waiting requests left at your telephone by your

(name) co-workers
3. Press VOL or VOL to scroll through your display.

4. When you find the message you want to answer, press Speaker. You can either:
Go to your Voice Mail mailbox.
Listen to the new General Message.
Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting.
Directory Dialing
Recording a Directory Dialing message:

1. Log onto the System Administrators mailbox: SA (72) or press 0 to play a Help message.
2. Select Instruction Menus: I (4).
3. Enter the Directory Dialing Mailbox number or press # to go back to the System Administrator
Options.
4. Select one of the following options:
L (5) = Listen to the current Directory Dialing Message (if any)
# = Exit listen mode
R (7) = Record a new Directory Dialing Message
= Pause or restart recording
E (3) = Erase recording
# = Exit recording mode
E (3) = Erase the Directory Dialing Message
# = Go back to the System Administrator options
InMail 2-659
Issue 2.0
Using Directory Dialing:

1. After the Automated Attendant answers, wait for the Directory Dialing Message.
The Automated Attendant may ask you to dial a digit for Directory Dialing.
2. Dial the letters that correspond to the name of the person you wish to reach + #.
The Directory Dialing Message tells you how many letters you need to dial, and whether
you should enter the persons first name or last name.
To exit Directory Dialing without selecting a name, dial #.
3. The Automated Attendant announces the name matches, and tells you which digit to dial (1~3) to
reach each of the announced names.
To hear additional name matches (if any), dial 6 instead.
4. After you make your selection, the Automated Attendant routes your call to the name you select.
2-660 InMail
Issue 2.0
InMail Park and Page
Description
InMail Park and Page can automatically Park a call at an extension and Page the user with a recorded
Paging Message announcing the parked call. The called extension user can then go to any telephone
and implement Personal Park to pick up the call. With InMail Park and Page, InMail tries to locate the
person instead of just sending the call to their mailbox. Additionally, there is no need for an operator or
receptionist to manually answer the call, park it, and then try to track down the employee.
The Paging Message is usually recorded in the users own voice and typically says something like, Mike
Smart, you have a call. If the Paging Message is not recorded for the extension, a built-in message
announces the called partys name or extension number (if the name is not recorded).
InMail Park and Page is available for all trunk calls that are redirected to voice mail via forwarding or
overflow, including transferred calls, Direct Inward Lines, and Direct Inward Dialing. Park and Page is
also available for Automated Attendant Screened (STRF) and Unscreened (UTRF) Transfers.
Optionally, an extension can have calls from the Automated Attendant immediately Park and Page
without trying their extension first.
When InMail Park and Page intercepts the call, it normally offers the caller three options:
1. Dial 1 to leave a message in the called extensions mailbox.
(The caller hears the mailbox Greeting, if recorded.)
2. Dial 2 to Park and Page.
(The caller returns to these options if the Park is not picked up.)
3. Dial 3 to have the system try and locate this person.
(The Find-Me Follow-Me feature returns the caller to these options if the user is not located.)
4. Dial 4 for other options.
(Normally, this routes to the extensions Next Call Routing Mailbox).
InMail Park and Page is available at Personal and Group Subscriber Mailboxes, and can be enabled
through system programming or via the subscribers Mailbox Options Menu. InMail Park and Page is not
applicable to Intercom calls.
Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (DVM)
When an extension has Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (DVM) enabled, all calls from the
Automated Attendant go directly to the subscribers mailbox. The extension does not ring for Automated
Attendant calls. The caller hears the mailbox greeting and can leave a message, but unlike Park and
Page is not normally offered any other routing options. A subscriber typically turns on DVM when they
need to work at their desk undisturbed by outside calls from the Automated Attendant.
DVM can be enabled by the installer from system programming or by the extension user from their
Mailbox Options Menu.
InMail Park and Page 2-661

Issue 2.0
Keep in mind that DVM does not block Intercom calls from co-workers or any other outside call not
routed through the Automated Attendant. For example, with DVM enabled, Direct Inward Lines and
transferred outside calls to an extension work normally.
Conditions
The Park and Page feature uses the extensions personal park location only.
Enabling Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (DVM) for a mailbox bypasses the Park
and Page feature.
The Park and Page feature uses the All Zone paging only; this cannot be changed or
configured.
Virtual extensions are not supported for Park and Page.
Default Settings
Park and Page and Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail are disabled.
For transferred outside calls, direct inward lines and direct inward dialing refer to Table 2-37 Park
and Page Call Handling.
Table 2-37 Park and Page Call Handling
Park and Page (Call Handling)

For Transferred Outside Calls, Direct Inward Line and Direct Inward Dialing
47-02-14: Next Call 47-02-13: Dialing 47-02-17: Enable

Result
Routing Mailbox Option Park and Page
Undefined 0 (No) 0 (No) If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message.
Undefined 0 (No) 1 (Yes) If unanswered, caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 2
to Park and Page.
Undefined 1 (Yes) 0 (No) If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message.
Undefined 1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) If unanswered, caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 2
to Park and Page.
Defined 0 (No) 0 (No) If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message.
Defined 0 (No) 1 (Yes) If unanswered, caller can dial 1 to leave a message, 2
to Park and Page, and 3 for other options (from the
Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Defined 1 (Yes) 0 (No) If unanswered, caller hears greeting, can leave a
message, and dial options (from the Next Call Routing
Mailbox).
2-662 InMail Park and Page

Issue 2.0
Table 2-37 Park and Page Call Handling (Continued)

For Transferred Outside Calls, Direct Inward Line and Direct Inward Dialing
47-02-14: Next Call 47-02-13: Dialing 47-02-17: Enable

Result
Routing Mailbox Option Park and Page
Defined 1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) If unanswered, caller can dial: 1 to leave a message, 2

to Park and Page, 3 to have the system try and locate
the user and 4 for other options (from the Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
For automated attendant unscreened (UTRF) and screened (STRF) transfers refer to
Table 2-38 Park and Page Call Handling.
Table 2-38 Park and Page Call Handling

For Automated Attendant Unscreened (UTRF) and Screened (STRF) Transfers
47-02-17: Enable 47-02-18: Paging 47-02-09: Auto Att

Result
Park and Page Option Direct to VM
0 (No) 0 (RNA) 0 (No) If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message.
0 (No) 0 (RNA) 1 (Yes) Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a
message.
0 (No) 1 (IMM) 0 (No) If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message. 1
0 (No) 1 (IMM) 1 (Yes) Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a
message.
1 (Yes) 0 (RNA) 0 (No) STRF: If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave
a message. 1
UTRF: If unanswered, caller can dial 1 to leave a
message or 2 to Park and Page.1
1 (Yes) 0 (RNA) 1 (Yes) Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a
message.
1 (Yes) 1 (IMM) 0 (No) Park and Page occurs immediately.
1 (Yes) 1 (IMM) 1 (Yes) Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a
message.
1
For an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) with a Next Call Routing Mailbox assigned, caller can dial 1 to leave a message, 2 to
Park and Page, and 4 for other options.

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
System Port License (0300)
VRS License (1001)
Related Features
Paging, Internal
Park

Setting Up Park and Page for Extension:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail 1 = Enable
When a subscriber enables this option, an
Automated Attendant caller routes directly to

the mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes you
should enable this option. For Guest Mailboxes
you should disable this option.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-02-14 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 1 ~ 32 (default = 1)

Next Call Routing Mailbox By default Call
Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Routing
Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with Mailboxes
additional dialing options while listening to a numbers are
subscriber Mailbox recording or default 01 ~ 08.

greeting. The digits the caller can dial depend
options.

Enable Paging 1 = Enabled
Enable the paging option for the appropriate
mailbox. This call can also be changed via
telephone in the extension's mailbox options.
47-02-18 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = RNA (Ring No Answer) 0

Paging Option 1 = Immediately
Determine if calls from auto attendant ring the
phone first or go directly to the Park and Page

feature options. This setting can be overridden
by Program 47-02-09.
Setting Up Park and Page for a Group Mailbox:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Attendant Do Not Disturb 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Auto Attendant Direct to VM.
When enabled, an Auto Attendant caller routes
directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and

is asked to leave a message. A subscriber can
enable this option while recording their mailbox
greeting.
47-06-12 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Next 1 ~ 32 (default = 1)

Call Routing Mailbox By default Call
Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Routing
Subscriber Mailbox. This provides additional Mailboxes
dialing option while listening to a Subscribe numbers are
Mailbox recording or default greeting. The digits 01 ~ 16.
the caller can dial depends on the setting of the
Next Call Routing Mailbox or alternate Next Call
Routing Mailbox options.
47-06-15 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Enable 0 = Disable (No) 0

Paging 1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable the paging option for the appropriate
Group Mailbox. This call can be changed via
telephone in the extension mailbox options.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-06-16 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Paging 0 = RNA (Ring No Answer) 0

Option 1 = Immediate
Determine if calls from auto attendant ring the
Group first or go directly to the Park and Page

feature options. This setting can be overridden
by Program 47-06-07.
Operation
To record your paging message refer to Table 2-39 Recording Your Paging Message.
Table 2-39 Recording Your Paging Message
In these Instructions:
Recording Your Paging Message [Telephone Softkey]
To record your Paging Message:
1. Log onto your Subscriber Mailbox.
2. [More> + More> + Page] Select Paging Message.

Alternately dial PG (74).
3. Do one of the following:

a. [Lstn] Select to listen to the current Paging Message (if any).
Alternately dial L (5).
# Exit the listen mode.

b. [Rec] Select to record the Paging Message.
Alternately dial R (7).
[Pause] Select to pause recording.

Alternately dial .
[Resume] Select to resume recording (if paused).

Alternately dial .
[Cncl] Select to erase the recording.

Alternately dial E (3).
[Done] Select to confirm the recording and exit the recording mode.
Alternately dial #.
c. [Del] Select to erase the Paging Message.

d. [Back] Select to go back to the Mailbox Main Menu.

Alternately dial #.

Issue 2.0
To set your call handling options refer to Table 2-40 Setting the Call Handling Options.
Table 2-40 Setting the Call Handling Options
Recording Your Paging Message [Telephone Softkey]
To set your Call Handling options:

This includes Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail as well as Park and Page.
1. Log onto your Subscriber Mailbox.
2. [More> + Setup] Select Mailbox Options. (You are at the Mailbox Options Menu).
Alternately dial OP (67).
[CallH] Select Call Options. (You are at the Call Handling Options Menu).
Alternately dial CO (26).

a. [DVM] Select to turn Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on or off.
Alternately dial O (6).
[Paging] Select to turn Park and Page on or off.

[Back] Select to go back to the Mailbox Options Menu.
To retrieve a call parked in a personal parked orbit refer to Table 2-41 Picking Up a Parked Call.
Table 2-41 Picking Up a Parked Call
Picking Up a Parked Call
[Telephone Softkey]
To retrieve a call parked in a Personal Orbit:
1. Dial .
2. Dial the number of the extension at which the call is parked.

Issue 2.0
InMail Upload Download Audio
Description
The InMail Upload Download Audio feature allows the upload of mailbox greetings up to 1MB in size,
recorded on a PC or professionally, to any valid subscriber mailbox in the system. It also allows users to
listen to, download and/or delete voice mail messages from callers. Access to the InMail compact flash
drive is via the HTML User Pro (WebPro).
Audio Prompt Format
In order for uploaded greetings to properly play on the InMail they must be in the proper format. Audio
files not recorded in the proper format may not playback on the InMail. The proper format is:
Bit Rate 64kbps
Sampling Size 8 bits
Channel 1 (Mono)
Sampling Rate 8 KHz
Audio Format CCiTT u-law
User Pro Access Options
There are two different User Pro logins available to make changes. To login, open an Internet browser
and enter the IP of the SV9100 LAN port in the address line. At default, the IP address is 192.168.0.10.
User Admin Mode (UA Mode): This mode allows the user admin to access any telephone and
mailbox in the system. This mode must be used to change VRS and Routing Mailbox greetings. At
default the login ID is USER1 and the password is 1111.
User Mode (UB Mode): This mode allows a user to access only their own telephone and mailbox
when logged in. They will not be able to change any other telephone, mailbox, VRS or Routing
Mailbox. At default the login ID is the Extension Number and the password is 1111.
2-668 InMail Upload Download Audio

Issue 2.0
The following details the page layout diagram of the two different User Pro login IDs:
Figure 2-20 InMail User Pro Login Diagram
Message Name Format
Downloaded messages are automatically assigned a name by the SV9100. This name includes the
mailbox number the message was left in, type of message, the message number and the date and time
to the second the message was left. The table below shows how to interpret the message name to
determine this information.
Table 2-42 Default Incoming Ringing Tone
BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS.wav
File Name Format
(maximum 32 characters)
B Mailbox number (maximum eight digits) or VRS for

the VRS message
T Message Type
+ : Greeting or VRS message
: Recorded message
NNN Message number (three digits)
YYYY Year
InMail Upload Download Audio 2-669

Issue 2.0
Table 2-42 Default Incoming Ringing Tone (Continued)
File Name Format
MM Month (1~12)
DD Date (1~31)
HH Hour (00~23)
MM Minute (00~59)
SS Second (0 ~59)
Conditions
Uploading audio files to any type of Call Routing box and Group mailboxes is supported.
Auto attendant and group mailbox greetings can be uploaded or deleted using End User
WebPro interface with the UA login.
VRS and InMail messages are recorded in an ADPCM format which may not be easily
opened on the support PC.
It is not possible to upload/download/delete multiple files simultaneously.
The mailbox will be inaccessible from the telephone under these conditions:
Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when opening the telephone setup screen of extension
XXX by UA or UB mode in User Pro.
Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when selecting the extension XXX on the file upload/
download screen of UA mode User Pro.
Mailbox XXX will be inaccessible when logging in the UB mode User Pro for extension XXX.
While uploading an audio file via User Pro the greeting is not accessible by telephone.
When downloading/deleting an audio file via User Pro, the file is not accessible by another
User Pro session or from the telephone.
This feature is only supported using a LAN connection.
When uploading an audio file the extension will be checked whether it is WAV or not.
However, the format of the uploaded file will not be checked. If the uploaded file is not in the
proper format it may not playback properly.
When a mailbox has a new message and the message is downloaded using the User Pro
interface, the MWI of the mailbox will NOT be canceled. If the message is deleted from
User Pro the MWI is turned off.
The largest allowed upload file size is approximately 1MB. Files larger than this cannot be
uploaded.
There is no size limitation when downloading audio files.

Issue 2.0
User Pro does not check the uploaded file for correct naming format (i.e.,
BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS.wav). The file name will be automatically changed when
the file is written in the CF.
The actual file name of the messages is not displayed in User Pro. The message number,
modified date and file size are displayed instead. If there is no message file, - will be
displayed and the download/delete icon will not be displayed.
The User Pro message page does not refresh automatically, to see new messages the
page must be refreshed. For instance, if a new message is received via regular operation
on the system while a user is viewing the upload/download screen, the new message is not
shown until the page is reloaded by clicking the icon.
At default, Microsoft Windows will automatically open and play the downloaded WAV. To
make Open or Save selectable, the following settings are required:
Windows XP
1. Select Control Panel then Folder Options.
2. Click on the Files tab.
3. Select the WAV extension from the list, then click Advanced.
4. Check Confirm to open the file after download, then click OK.
5. Close the folder option by clicking OK again.
Windows Vista: It is not possible to change the save to folder option. The downloaded file is
automatically opened for playback.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals

Issue 2.0
Related Features
InMail
Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio

Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.s
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-02-01 Programming Password Setup User Name Maximum of 10 characters. Refer to the
Programming
Set the system passwords.
Manual for

default values.
Configure the administrator accounts that are Programming
used when connecting to the KTS via PCPro/ Manual for
WebPro. default values.
If using PCPro, these are the accounts that are

used to connect.
If using WebPro, these are the accounts that
are used to login.
90-02-03 Programming Password Setup User Level 0 = Prohibited User Refer to the
Set the system password user levels. 1 = MF (Manufacturer Level) Programming
2 = IN (Installer Level) Manual for
default values.
3 = SA (System Administrator
Level 1)
4 = SB (System Administrator
Level 2)
5 = UA (User Programming
Level 1)

Issue 2.0
Troubleshooting
The table below shows possible Error messages and Causes:
Table 2-43 Error Messages and Causes
Error Message Cause
Mailbox XXX does not exist. The mailbox does not exist
(XXX = mailbox number)
The mailbox is being used by another When the mailbox is being used by another session, either PC or
session telephone.
There is no available space in the SD. When there is no available space in the SD.
The file is being used by another session. When the file to be downloaded is being used by another session,
Please try again later. either PC or telephone.
The selected file has already been deleted. When the file selected for download has already been deleted.
The file is being used by another session. When the file selected for deletion is being used by another
Please try again later. session.
The selected file has already been deleted. When the file selected for deletion has already been deleted.
Cannot upload the file since the original file is When the file to be replaced is being used when trying to upload
being used by another session. Please try the replacement.
again later.
Operation
Listening to Voice Mail Messages using User Admin Mode (UA):
All messages stored on the InMail can be accessed via the Mailbox User Mode for playback or
deletion.
NOTE
1. To login, open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV9100 LAN port in the address line.
At default, the IP address is 192.168.0.10.
2. At the login screen enter username = USER1 and password = 1111.
3. You will then see the main menu, click on the InMail Audio Up/Download icon.
4. Choose the extension number to be changed and make sure Audio Data is set to Incoming
Messages.
The message numbers correspond to the same message number when accessed via the telephone.
Message 1 is the first message, message 2 is the second message, etc.
5. To delete a message, click on the red X to the right of the appropriate message.

Issue 2.0
6. To listen to a message:
Click on the download icon to the right of the message you want to hear.
Depending on browser settings, a security prompt may appear.
Click on the menu and choose to allow the file to download.
Depending on Windows configuration, you may be prompted again to either Open or Save
the message. To listen, click Open and the default WAV file player will play the message. To
save the message, click on the Save icon and browse to the location where the message
will be saved on a local PC.
Listening to Voice Mail Messages using Mailbox User Mode (UB):
2. At the login screen enter username = Extension Number and password = 1111.
Message 1 is the first message, message 2 is the second message, etc.
5. To listen to a message:
Click on the download icon to the right of the message you want to hear.
Depending on browser settings, a security prompt may appear.
Click on the menu and choose to allow the file to download.
Depending on Windows configuration, you may be prompted again to either Open or Save
the message. To listen, click Open and the default WAV file player will play the message. To
save the message, click on the Save icon and browse to the location where the message
will be saved on a local PC.
Changing Mailbox Greetings using User Admin Mode (UA):
Audio files up to 1MB may be uploaded to the InMail for any mailbox greeting. In order for uploaded
greetings to play on the InMail they must be in the proper format. Audio files not recorded in the proper
format may not playback on the InMail. The proper format is:
Bit Rate 64kbps
Channel 1 (Mono)
Sampling Rate 8 KHz

Issue 2.0
4. Choose the extension number to be changed and make sure Audio Data is set to Incoming
Messages.
The greeting numbers correspond to the same greeting number when accessed via the telephone.
Greeting 1 is GR1, greeting 2 is GR2 and greeting 3 is GR3. Greeting 7 is the paging greeting used
with the park and page feature.
5. To delete a greeting, click on the red X to the right of the appropriate greeting.
6. To upload a greeting:
Under Message No, enter the greeting number to be replaced on the voice mail.
Browse to find the location where the greeting file is stored.
Click on the upload icon to the right of the selected file name.
Depending on file size and LAN speed, it may take several minutes to upload the greeting.
The uploaded greeting will appear in the assigned location.
Changing Mailbox Greetings using Mailbox User Mode (UB):
Audio files up to 1MB may be uploaded to the InMail for any mailbox greeting. In order for uploaded
greetings to play on the InMail they must be in the proper format. Audio files not recorded in the proper
format may not playback on the InMail. The proper format is:
Bit Rate 64kbps
Channel 1 (Mono)
Sampling Rate 8 KHz
2. At the login screen enter username = Extension Number and password = 1111.
The greeting numbers correspond to the same greeting number when accessed via the telephone.
Greeting 1 is GR1, greeting 2 is GR2 and greeting 3 is GR3. Greeting 7 is the paging greeting used
with the park and page feature.
4. To delete a greeting, click on the red X to the right of the appropriate greeting.
Under Message No, enter the greeting number to be replaced on the voice mail.
Depending on file size and LAN speed, it may take several minutes to upload the greeting.
The uploaded greeting will appear in the assigned location.

Issue 2.0
InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID
Description
Before, when a user outside the system accessed their InMail mailbox, they dialed voice mail, then
entered an access code followed by their mailbox number and password (if enabled). An InMail mailbox
can be associated with a specific caller ID (CID) number. When the CID number is presented to the
InMail it will automatically log the user into their mailbox. This enhancement improves VM accessibility
for outside callers, allowing them to simply dial the main voice mail number and be automatically logged
into their mailbox.
Two types of voice mail access modes exist for this feature.
1. Specifying the VM Pilot number as a DID/DIL/DISA/VRS destination.
- OR -
Dialing the VM pilot number after calling in from a Mobile Extension.

2. Program to forward a call to VM (102) by any of following Programs.
Program 22-05-01 (Incoming Ring Group)
Program 22-11-05 (Transfer Target number -1)
Program 22-11-06 (Transfer Target number -2)
Program 25-03-01 (Incoming Ring Group No.)
Program 25-04-01 (VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group at No answer/Busy)
Figure 2-21 Example User Access to Voice Mail
Conditions
When using this feature the InMail does not prompt for a password on a call from the set
CID number.
Incoming calls across CCIS are not supported.
2-676 InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID

Issue 2.0
Two different mailboxes can not be tied to the same inbound CID number. If two mailboxes
are set for the same inbound CID number the system uses the first match it finds.
To use this feature, the phone number must be set in Program 13-04-01 and the voice mail
box number in Program 13-04-11. If both are not set, the system requires the normal log in
procedure of entering a valid mailbox number and security code to login.
This feature is only supported for external calls to the InMail.
Mobile Extension users can use this feature by setting the VM box number in Program
13-04-11 which corresponds to the Speed Dial number registered in Program 15-22-01.
Common Speed Dial area is used for this feature. Group or Station Speed Dial areas are
not supported with this feature.
When a number in the Common Speed Dial includes a trunk access code or end code (#),
the Redial name indication will work if the number matches completely.
If the same number is registered in the Common Speed Dial bin, the latest Speed Dial
number is used.
The Flexible ringing feature has priority over the InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller
ID feature.
The UM8000 does not support setting this feature in SV9100 system programming. To set
this feature for the UM8000, refer to the on line UM8000 system administration guide.
To enable this feature, Program 14-01-22 (Caller ID to Voice Mail) must be set to 1.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Trunks
The following Trunks support sending Caller ID:

Analog Line
ISDN Line (BRI)
ISDN Line (PRI)
SIP Line
H.323 Line
InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID 2-677

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Caller ID Flexible Ringing
Mobile Extension
InMail

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
This program stores Speed Dial data into the @ = Wait for Answer
Speed Dial areas, and defines the Speed Dial Supervision - ISDN trunks only
names. P = Pause - Analog Trunk Only
Only
13-04-02 Speed Dialing Number and Name Name Maximum of 12 Characters (Use No Setting
Assign a name to each System Speed Dial bin. dial pad to enter name).
13-04-11 Speed Dialing Number and Name Mailbox Number 0 ~ 896, 0
Automatic Access to Voice Mail by Caller ID 900 ~ 931
Per Speed dial Bin No. (0000-9999), set the VM
BOX number (0 ~ 896). Incoming Caller ID
number will be checked against Speed Dial

data (Program 13-04-01). From matched Speed
Dial Bin No, system then finds the associated
VM Box number with this Program.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Mail 0 = Disable

1 = Enable
15-22-01 Mobile Extension Setup Mobile Extension 0 ~ 9999 0

Target Setup (0 = No setting
For each Mobile Extension number, select the 1 ~ 9999 = target of mobile
Abbreviated Dial bin number to be associated extension)
with it.
When using this feature with Mobile Extension,
set the associated VM Box number in Program
13-04-11. The incoming Extension number will
be checked with Program15-22-01. From
matched Speed Dial Bin No, system finds the
VM Box number with Program 13-04-11.

0 = Normal
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups. Use Incoming Group Number for
this program to assign Normal Ring Trunks Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
(Program 22-02) to Incoming Ring Groups 0 = (No Setting)
(Program 22-04). 001 ~ 100 = (Incoming Group)

It sets arriving group of the outside line set by 102 = (In-Skin/ External Voice
Program 22-02 as "General arrival call". Mail or InMail)

Transfer Destination Number 1 1 ~1 00 = Incoming Group
201~264 = Department Group
transfer destination (Program 22-10). 400 = DUD
401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = DISA/VRS
Message
1000 ~ 1999 = Speed Number
(000 ~ 999)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Transfer Destination Number 2 1 ~1 00 = Incoming Group
201~264 = Department Group
transfer destination (Program 22-10). 400 = DUD
401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = DISA/VRS
Message
1000 ~ 1999 = Speed Number
(000 ~ 999)

For each trunk port, set what happens to a call Trunk Ports:
when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller 001 ~ 400
dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The Day/Night Mode:
call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an 1~8
alternate destination (a ring group, In-Skin/
0 = Disconnect
External, Centralized). When setting the DISA

and DID Operating Mode, you make an entry
for each Night Service mode. 101 = DSPDB-VM
This program defines the Incoming Ring Group 102 = In-Skin/External Voice
when dial tone is timed-out or the wrong dialing Mail or InMail
is received in DID, DISA. 103 = Centralized VM
Program 25-15-01)

Answer/Busy 1 ~ 100
For each trunk port (001 ~ 400), set the Trunk Ports:
operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets 001 ~ 400
what happens to the call when the DISA or Day/Night Mode:
Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or 1~8
unanswered extension. The call can either 0 (Disconnect)
disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate

destination (a ring group, In-Skin/External,
Centralized). When setting the DISA and DID 101 DSPDB-VM
Operating Mode, you make an entry for each 102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
Night Service mode. or InMail)
This program defines the Incoming Ring Group 103 Centralized VM
when Target extension has no answer or is 104 (Speed Dial table Program
busy in DID. 25-15-01)

Issue 2.0
Operation
Retrieve VM Messages
To retrieve VM messages from outside of office:
If incoming analog trunks are used in the system:
Main Number: 214-555-5678
Outside party number: 214-555-1212

Program 22-02-01: Trunk 1 DIL
Program 22-07-01: VM Pilot number, 200
Program 13-04-01: Speed Dial area No.0 -> 2145551212
Program 13-04-11: Speed Dial area No.0 -> 001 (VM BOX number, not extension number)
1. Call the main number from 214-555-1212.
2. After the VM answers the user can listen to and manage voice messages or change mailbox
settings.
If incoming DID trunks are used in the system:
Main Number: 214-555-5678
Outside party number: 214-555-1212

Program 22-02-01: Trunk 1 DID
Program 22-11-05: Set transfer destination, 102 InMail
Program 13-04-01: Speed Dial area No.0 -> 2145551212
Program 13-04-11: Speed Dial area No.0 -> 001 (VM BOX number, not extension number)
1. Call the main number from 214-555-1212.
2. After the VM answers the user can listen to and manage voice messages or change mailbox
settings.

Issue 2.0
InMail Cascade Message Notification
Description
If an extension user receives a new message in their mailbox, Cascading Message Notification will call
them at up to five preset destinations to let them know a new voice mail message has arrived. A
destination can be an outside number (such as a cell phone, pager, or home office) or a co-worker's
extension.
The Cascading Message Notification destinations are set up in the Notification Schedule. Each of the
five schedule entries can be individually enabled or disabled and provides options for:
Type: Voice call or pager.
Start Hour: The time the destinations become active.
End Hour: The time the destinations become inactive.
Number: The destination telephone, pager, or extension number.
Busy Attempts: The number of times the system will try the destination when it is busy. The system
cancels notification callouts for this entry when the Busy Attempts number is met.
RNA Attempts: The number of times the system will try the destination when it is unanswered. The
system cancels notification callouts for this entry when the RNA Attempts number is met.
Security: Enables or disables the Security Code requirement for the notification destinations. For
example, you may want to disable the Security Code when the destinations is your cell phone and
it may be inconvenient to dial digits after answering the notification callout.
When the extension user enables Cascading Message Notification, the system will try each enabled
destination that is active for the current day and time (i.e., in-schedule). The system will not try any
destinations that are disabled or are not in-schedule. When the retries for a particular destination have
been met the system will immediately move to the next destination.
With SV9100 software, each mailbox can be set to queue notification options. When this feature is
enabled, messages received when destinations are not in-schedule are queued until a destination is
in-schedule at which time the notification process will start.
Conditions
When a mailbox has a new message and the message is deleted using the User Pro
interface, the MWI of the mailbox is turned off but Message Notification is not cancelled.
The Message Notification Queue feature can be changed using system programming only.
The Message Notification Queue feature is set on a per mailbox basis.
Retry Interval timers are set on a system wide basis only.
The pager dial string is set on a system wide basis only.
2-682 InMail Cascade Message Notification

Issue 2.0
Notification settings can be changed using the Telephone Mailbox Option Interface or
system programming only.
When the retries for a particular destination have been met the system will immediately
move to the next destination even if there is only one destination active.
Once the notification process begins, a new message does not restart the process if it is
already in progress. Once the process ends (e.g., if the message is acknowledged or the
maximum number of callout attempts is reached), the next new message will restart the
process.
The system determines which numbers are internal extensions or external numbers by the
system dial plan settings.
Depending on the system ARS routing maybe needed to properly route external calls.
If no trunks are available when an outside destination is attempted it is counted as a Busy
No Answer attempt.
Program 47-02-28 is used to enable or disable message notification queuing. If enabled,
message notification is stored in queue when there is no active notification destination.
Once the destination becomes active the queued notification is processed.
InMail Cascade Message Notification 2-683

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-22 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart-1

Issue 2.0

Issue 2.0

Issue 2.0
Message Notification to Normal Telephone Numbers
This is a basic overview of how Message Notification works to phone numbers assuming the retry
attempts are at default. The system determines which numbers are internal extensions or external
numbers by the system dial plan settings. Depending on the system, ARS routing maybe needed to
properly route external calls.
1. The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox.
2. When the subscriber receives a new message, the InMail dials the first active destination in the
cascade that should receive the Message Notification.
InMail waits up to 30 seconds (approximately five rings) for ringback, reorder, busy or voice
activity from the called number. If nothing is detected, the callout is considered
unanswered (RNA).
3. If the recipient answers, InMail plays the notification message (Hello, I have a message for) and
asks the recipient to dial 1 to log onto their mailbox. The recipient hears the notification message
if:
They say Hello after answering the callout, or
The system receives answer supervision from the telco after the recipient answers the call.
(Note that the recipient can skip the announcement by dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox
after answering the callout without saying Hello.), or
The notification is to a system extension.
4. Once the recipient logs onto the mailbox, the notification is considered acknowledged and will not
reoccur until the subscriber receives new messages.
5. If the recipient doesnt answer, the system follows the Cascading Message Notification retry
attempt settings and notification will eventually stop if the call is not answered.
6. Once the notification process begins, a new message does not restart the process if it is already
in progress. Once the process ends (e.g., if the message is acknowledged or the maximum
number of callout attempts is reached), the next new message will restart the process.
Message Notification to Pager Numbers
This a basic overview of how Message Notification works to pager numbers assuming the retry attempts
are at default. The system determines which numbers are internal extensions or external numbers by
the system dial plan settings. Depending on the system, ARS routing maybe needed to properly route
external calls.
1. The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox.
2. When the subscriber receives a new message, InMail immediately dials the pager service.
InMail waits up to 30 seconds (approximately five rings) for ringback, reorder, busy or voice
activity from the called number. If nothing is detected, the callout is considered unan-
swered.
3. After the pager service answers, InMail waits for the timer 47-01-08 then sends the dial string in
47-01-07 which causes the pager display to show the subscribers mailbox number as well as the
number of new messages in the mailbox.

Issue 2.0
The notification is considered acknowledged if the subscriber logs onto their mailbox.
If the notification is not acknowledged (within a programmable time frame, 47-01-12) the
pager notification is repeated (up to the RNA attempts count, 47-20-07).
If the pager service doesnt answer, the system follows the Cascading Message Notification
rules and notification will eventually stop if the call is not answered.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
VM Mailbox License (1012)
Related Features
None


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-01-07 SV9100 InMail System Options Digital Digits (12 maximum, using 0 ~ 9, XM#
Pager Callback Number # and )
Set the Digital Pager Callback Number part of M (Number of messages
the message Notification callout number for a entered by pressing LK1)
digital pager. This part of the callout number is No entry (Entered by pressing
appended to the pager service telephone HOLD).
number. Normally, this option should be XM#, X (Extension number entered
where
X is the number of the extension that
by pressing LK2) InMail
automatically replaces the X
generated the notification. command with the number of
is a visual delimiter (to make the pager
the extension that initially
display easier to read). received the message.
M is the number of new messages in the
extension mailbox.
# is the digit normally used by the pager
service for positive disconnect.
47-01-08 SV9100 InMail System Options Delay in 0 ~ 99 seconds 30

Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number
Set the delay that occurs just before SV9100
InMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number
portion of the Message Notification callout
number for a digital pager. Set this delay so the
pager service has enough time to connect to
the digital pager before sending the callback
number.

Between Digital Pager Callout Attempts
Use this option to set the minimum time
(1 ~ 255 minutes) between unacknowledged or
unanswered digital pager Message Notification
callouts. (A subscriber acknowledges a digital
pager notification by logging onto their
mailbox.) After this interval expires, InMail will
try the callout again.

Between Busy Non-Pager Callout Attempts
Callout Attempts (Notify Busy Intvl)
Set the time SV9100 InMail waits after it dials a

busy non-pager callout destination, before
retrying the callout number.

Between RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempts
Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout
Attempts (Notify RNA Intvl) Set the time
SV9100 InMail waits, after it dials an
unanswered non-pager callout destination,
before retrying the callout number.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

RNA Rings
Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts
(Notify RNA Rings)
If a non-pager callout rings the destination

longer than this number of rings, SV9100 InMail
marks the call as unanswered (Ring No
Answer) and hangs up.

Cascading Attempts
Notify Call Attempt
With Cascade Pager Notification: Set how
many times a mailboxes enabled pager
notification destinations are tried. For example
if 47-01-14 is set to 10 and a mailbox has 5
enabled pager destinations and each
destination has three retries for BNA/RNA
(47-20-06 and 47-20-07). The InMail will call
each destination three times and will retry all
the enabled destinations 10 times. This means
each enabled destination will be called a total of
30 times (10 x 3). With Normal Pager
Notification Set how many attempts SV9100
InMail retries an incomplete Message
Notification callout. This total includes
unacknowledged callouts, callouts to a busy
destination, and callouts to an unanswered
destination. This option applies to pager and
non-pager callouts.
47-02-23 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options All 0 = Disabled 1

Message Notification Enabled 1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable notification
for the subscriber mailbox. If disabled, enabling
the individual notification entries has no effect.

Message Notification Queuing Option 1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable message
notification queuing. If enabled, message
notification is stored in queue when there is no

active notification destination. Once the
destination becomes active the queued
notification is processed.
47-06-21 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options All 0 = Disabled 1

Message Notification Enabled 1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable notification
for the group mailbox. If disabled, enabling the
individual notification entries has no effect.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-06-26 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options 0 = Disabled 0

Message Notification Queuing Option 1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable message
notification queuing. If enabled, message

notification is stored in queue when there is no
active notification destination.
47-20-01 Station Mailbox Message Notification 0 = Disabled 0

Notification 1 = Enabled
For the selected entry (1-5), use this option to
enable or disable Message Notification. If
enabled, notification will occur when the
mailbox receives a new message according to
the settings for Type, Start Hour, End Hour, and
notification Phone Number. If disabled,
Message Notification will not occur.
There are five separately programmed Message
notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox.
47-20-02 Station Mailbox Message Notification 0 ~ 23 (24 Hour Clock) 0

Notification Begin Hour
set the hour when Message Notification will
start. Notification will occur only for new
messages received between this setting and
the End Hour setting. This entry is in 24-hour

(military time). For example, 08 is 8:00 AM and
20 is 8:00 PM. For 24-hour notification, make
the Start Hour the same as the End Hour.
47-20-03 Station Mailbox Message Notification 0 ~ 23 (24 Hour Clock) 0

Notification End Hour
stop. Notification will occur only for new
messages received between the Start Hour and
this setting. This entry is in 24-hour (military

time). For example, 08 is 8:00 AM and 20 is
8:00 PM. For 24-hour notification, make the
Start Hour the same as the End Hour.
47-20-04 Station Mailbox Message Notification 0 = Undefined 1

Notification Type 1 = Voice
For the selected entry (1-5), use this option to 2 = Pager
set the Message Notification type. The choices
are Voice and Pager. Choose Voice when the
Phone Number entry is to a regular office,
home, or mobile telephone. Choose Pager
when you want to deliver the notification to a
digital pager.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-20-05 Station Mailbox Message Notification Valid number (maximum of 16 No Setting

Notification Number digits).
set the telephone number (16 digits maximum)
Message Notification will dial to notify the
subscriber of new messages. Enter the number
exactly as you want the system to dial it
(including a leading 1 for toll calls, if required),
but do not include a line access code (such as
9). If the number you enter is extension number,
it will be an Intercom call. Otherwise, it will be
an outside call. (The system decides by
referring its numbering plan.)
47-20-06 Station Mailbox Message Notification 1 ~ 99 Attempts 5

Notification Busy Attempts
set how many times InMail will retry an
incomplete Message Notification callout to a
busy destination. This option applies to pager
and non-pager callouts. If the Busy Attempts
and RNA Attempts are both met, the notification
callout to the selected entry is cancelled.
47-20-07 Station Mailbox Message Notification 1 ~ 99 Attempts 5

Notification RNA Attempts
incomplete Message Notification callout when
the destination does not answer. This option
applies to pager and non-pager callouts. If the

Busy Attempts and RNA Attempts are both met,
the notification callout to the selected entry is
cancelled.
47-20-08 Station Mailbox Message Notification 0 = Security code not required 1

Notification Security 1 - Security code required
enable or disable Security Code protection for
the callout. If enabled, the user is required to
enter their security in order to log on and hear

the new message. If disabled, the Security
Code is not required.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-20-09 Station Mailbox Message Notification Day 0 = Disabled 1

of Week Sunday 1 = Enabled
enable or disable Message Notification on
Sunday.

of Week Monday 1 = Enabled
Monday.

of Week Tuesday 1 = Enabled
Tuesday.

of Week Wednesday 1 = Enabled
Wednesday.

of Week Thursday 1 = Enabled
Thursday.

of Week Friday 1 = Enabled
Friday.

of Week Saturday 1 = Enabled
Saturday.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-22-01 Group Mailbox Notification Options 0 = Disabled 0

Notification 1 = Enabled
enable or disable Message Notification. If
enabled, notification will occur when the
mailbox receives a new message according to
the settings for Type, Start Hour, End Hour, and
notification Phone Number. If disabled,
Message Notification will not occur.
notification entries for each Group Mailbox.
47-22-02 Group Mailbox Notification Options 0 ~ 23 (24 Hour Clock) 0

Notification Begin Hour
start. Notification will occur only for new
messages received between this setting and
the End Hour setting. This entry is in 24-hour

(military time). For example, 08 is 8:00 AM and
20 is 8:00 PM. For 24-hour notification, make
the Start Hour the same as the End Hour.
47-22-03 Group Mailbox Notification Options 0 ~ 23 (24 Hour Clock) 0

Notification End Hour
stop. Notification will occur only for new
messages received between the Start Hour and
this setting. This entry is in 24-hour (military

time). For example, 08 is 8:00 AM and 20 is
8:00 PM. For 24-hour notification, make the
Start Hour the same as the End Hour.
47-22-04 Group Mailbox Notification Options 0 = Undefined (Disabled) 1

Notification Type 1 = Voice
For the selected entry (1-5), use this option to 2 = Pager
set the Message Notification type. The choices
are Voice and Pager. Choose Voice when the
Phone Number entry is to a regular office,
home, or mobile telephone. Choose Pager
when you want to deliver the notification to a
digital pager.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-22-05 Group Mailbox Notification Options Valid number (maximum of 16 No Setting

Notification Number digits)
set the telephone number (16 digits maximum)
Message Notification will dial to notify the
subscriber of new messages. Enter the number
47-22-06 Group Mailbox Notification Options 1 ~ 99 Attempts 5

Notification Busy Attempts
incomplete Message Notification callout to a
busy destination. This option applies to pager
and non-pager callouts. If the Busy Attempts
and RNA Attempts are both met, the notification
callout to the selected entry is cancelled.
47-22-07 Group Mailbox Notification Options 1 ~ 99 Attempts 5

Notification RNA Attempts
incomplete Message Notification callout when
the destination does not answer. This option
applies to pager and non-pager callouts. If the

Busy Attempts and RNA Attempts are both met,
the notification callout to the selected entry is
cancelled.
47-22-08 Group Mailbox Notification Options 0 = Security code not required 1

Notification Security 1 - Security code required
enable or disable Security Code protection for
the callout. If enabled, the user is required to
enter their security in order to log on and hear

the new message. If disabled, the Security
Code is not required.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-22-09 Group Mailbox Notification Options Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Sunday 1 = Enabled
Sunday.

Week Monday 1 = Enabled
Monday.

Week Tuesday 1 = Enabled
Tuesday.

Week Wednesday 1 = Enabled
Wednesday.

Week Thursday 1 = Enabled
Thursday.

Week Friday 1 = Enabled
Friday.

Week Saturday 1 = Enabled
Saturday.

Issue 2.0
Operation
To set up Cascade Notification:

1. Access the All Message Notification Setting menu.
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox.
V m a i l - M a i l b o x : 1 0 1
M s g s N e w : 0 A r c h : 0
L s t n G r e e t L v M s g M o r e >
Dial OP(67) / Press "More >" "Setup"
Mailbox Options menu.
C o n f i g u r e M b o x 1 0 1
C o d e N o t f y C a l l H M o r e >
Dial N(6) / Press "Notfy"
Notification Type Selection menu.
M e s s a g e N o t i f i c a t i o n
P h o n e E m a i l B a c k
Dial P(7) / Press "Phone"
All Message Notifications Setting menu.
P h o n e N o t i f i c a t i o n : O f f
O n O f f D e s t B a c k
2. All message Notifications Setting menu.
P h o n e N o t i f i c a t i o n : O f f

Issue 2.0
Dial O(6) / Press "On" Dial O(6) / Press "Off"
P h o n e N o t i f i c a t i o n : O n
Soft key Operation (3-Line Phone/Super Display Phone)

On/On Turn All Notifications on
Off/Off Turn All Notifications off
Dest/Destinations Proceed to Notification Destination Selection menu
Back/Back Go back to Notification Type Selection menu
Key Operation
Key 3 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection menu
Key 6 Toggle All Notifications on/off
Key 9 Exit from mailbox
Key # Go back to Notification Type Selection menu
3. Notification Destination Selection menu.
D e s t 1 D e s t 2 D e s t 3 M o r e >
Press "More>" Press "More>"
D e s t 4 D e s t 5 B a c k M o r e >

Dest1/Destination1 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 1 menu
Back Go back to All Message Notifications Setting menu
Key Operation
Key 1 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 1 menu
Key 9 Exit from mailbox
Key # Go back to All Message Notifications Setting menu

Issue 2.0
4. Message Notification main menu

InMail plays a summary of your Message Notification settings.
D e s t 1 D i s a b l d 1 2 A M - 1 2 A M
P h o n e :
E n b l D i s b l C h n g e B a c k
If phone number already exists
D e s t 1 D i s a b l d 0 8 A M - 0 6 P M
P h o n e : 2 0 3 9 2 6 5 4 0 0
Dial E(3) / Press "Enbl" Dial D(3) / Press "Disbl"
D e s t 1 E n a b l e d 0 8 A M - 0 6 P M
P h o n e : 2 0 3 9 2 6 5 4 0 0

Enbl/Enable Turn destination[x] notifications on
Disbl/Disable Turn destination[x] notifications off
Chnge/Change Go to destination[x] notification setting menus
Back/Back Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu
Key Operation
Key 2 Go to destination[x] notification setting menus
Key 3 Toggle destination[x] notifications on/off.
Key # Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu
5. Message Notification Programming (Begin Hour)
N o t i f i c a t i o n B e g i n : 1 2 A M
N e x t E x i t
6. Message Notification Programming (End Hour)
N o t i f i c a t i o n E n d : 1 2 A M
N e x t E x i t

Issue 2.0
7. Message Notification Programming (Notification Type)
N o t i f y V i a : N u m b e r
N u m P a g e r N e x t E x i t
8. Message Notification Programming (Number)
N u m b e r :
O K C l e a r N e x t E x i t
9. Message Notification Programming (Security Code Required)
S e c u r i t y C o d e O p t i o n
R e q N o R e q N e x t E x i t

Req/Required Turn Security Code Required flag On
NoReq/Not Required Turn Security Code Required flag Off
Next/Next Keep current setting and proceed to Busy Attempt count menu
Exit/Exit Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu
Key Operation
Key 7 Turn Security Code Required flag On
Key 6 Turn Security Code Required flag Off
Key * Keep current setting and proceed to Busy Attempt count menu
Key # Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu
10. Message Notification Programming (Busy Attempt count)
B u s y A t t e m p t s : 0 5
N e x t E x i t

Next/Next Keep current setting and proceed to RNA Attempt menu.
Key Operation
Key 0-9 Set Busy Attempt count
Key * Keep current setting and proceed to RNA Attempt count menu

Issue 2.0
11. Message Notification Programming (RNA Attempt count)
R N A A t t e m p t s : 0 5
N e x t E x i t

Next/Next Keep current setting and proceed to main Notification menu
Key Operation
Key 0-9 Set RNA Attempt count
Key * Keep current setting and proceed to main Notification menu

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-25 Cascade Message Flow Chart 1

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-26 Cascade Message Flow Chart 2

Issue 2.0
InMail Email Notification
Description
Email Notification automatically sends an email notification when a Subscriber Mailbox receives a new
message. The email can optionally include the recorded message as a .wav file attachment. To hear the
message, the email recipient double-clicks the .wav attachment to have the message play in their wav
player (such as Windows Media Player).
Email Notification uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) to deliver messages to the recipients
email account. If the message recipient has a mobile telephone service provider with an SMS (Short
Message Service) portal, they can optionally choose to have text messages delivered right to their cell
phone. In either case, Email Notification does not provide synchronization the email account and the
voice mailbox operate independently. For example, deleting the voice mail message does not
automatically delete the email and visa-versa.
If Email Notification tries to deliver an email and it doesnt go through because of a connection problem
(i.e., no connection or a dropped connection), it will retry every 15 minutes for 24 hours. If the email still
cant go through, Email Notification cancels the delivery. Email deliveries that fail because authentication
fails or the encryption mode is incorrect are immediately cancelled.
Collecting the Email Notification Data
In order for the installation sites InMail to send email notifications, it must have a valid SMTP email
account assigned. To save time during programming, use the following table to help collect the systems
email account information. The email account provider can supply this information. See Programming in
this feature for more.
Table 2-44 InMail Email Account Information
Item Description Systems Email Account Data
SMTP Email Account The email account that will handle notifications sent from
the InMail (e.g., yourname@emailserver.com).
SMTP Server Name The SMTP server (email provider) that will handle email
for the SMTP email account. The SMTP server name is
typically similar to smtp.emailserver.com.
SMTP Port Number The port the SMTP server uses for SMTP delivery.
SMTP Encryption Determines whether or not the SMTP server accepts
plain text (unencrypted) or encrypted email (Yes or No).
SMTP Authentication Enter Yes if the SMTP server requires the SMTP Email
Accounts user name and password each time the
system logs on. Otherwise, enter No.
SMTP User Name In the SMTP Email Account, this is normally the
your-name portion of yourname@emailserver.com.
2-704 InMail Email Notification

Issue 2.0
Table 2-44 InMail Email Account Information (Continued)
Item Description Systems Email Account Data
SMTP Password This is the password for the account specified in SMTP
Email Account above.
Email Reply To If a notification recipient replies to a notification email,
this is the address to which the reply is sent.
Explanation of the Message Sender (From) Field
Like any other email client, Email Notification uses the From field to identify the person that left the
message being delivered. In the email message, the data in the From field is formatted as Name [Reply
To], where:
Name identifies the person that left the message.
Reply To2 is the email address used when the email recipient replies to the message.
This information is not provided in the recipients inbox just the actual email message.
For messages left by Intercom callers:

Name is:
The extension name (if programmed).
- OR -
The extension number (if there is no name programmed).
Reply To4 is:
The email address of the person that left the message (if programmed).
- OR -
The Reply To Email Address data from Program 47-18-09.
- OR -
The Send From Email Address data from Program 47-18-09.
For messages left by Outside callers:

Name is always the text Outside Caller.
Reply To3 is:
The Reply To Email Address data from Program 47-18-09.
- OR -
The Send From Email Address data from Program 47-18-09.
2. The recipients inbox only shows the Name portion of the From field. The Reply To portion is not included.
3. The recipients inbox only shows the Name portion of the From field. The Reply To portion is not included.
InMail Email Notification 2-705

Issue 2.0
SMS Text Message Delivery to a Cell Phone
The table below shows the basic format of a InMail email notification delivered to a cell phone as an
SMS Text Message. The information is much the same as that delivered to an email account. There may
be more than one text message for each notification, depending on the number of characters the
provider allows in each text message (typically 120-160 characters). SMS will not send the wav file
attachment, even if enabled in programming.
An extension set up for notification via SMS Text Messaging should have the Email Message
as Attachment option disabled in system programming. Attempting to deliver a wav file
CAUTION attachment to an SMS messaging service may have undesirable results.
SMS Text Message Notification

The following shows a typical SMS Text Message when the InMail is set up to provide email
notification only (no wav file of the actual message). In this case, the provider divided the message
into two parts: one for the message header and one for the message body. This is only an example
your provider may handle similar content differently.
Table 2-45 Typical SMS Notification (No Wav File)
Description Text
Text Message for Message Header

Text Message Inbox: InMail [2 OF 2]
Text Message Body: 1 MESSAGE FROM: InMail [2 OF 2]

SENT: 3:51PM 9/17
Text Message for Message Body
Text Message Inbox: SBJ:VOICE MESSAGE
Text Message Body: 1 MESSAGE FROM: XXXX

SUBJ: VOICE MESSAGE FROM XXXX- (0M6S)
VOICE MESSAGE ARRIVED ON MONDAY, SEPT 17@3:51
PMDURATION: 0M 6S
------------NEC [1 OF 2]
SENT: 3:51PM 09/17
1 Your cell phone display will automatically break the text lines to best fit
the screen.
POP3 Login
InMail Email Notification supports POP3 Login. The logic of this method is that it allows a user to send
e-mail from any location, as long as they can demonstrably also fetch their mail from the same place.
Check with your email provider to see if this type of login is required.

Issue 2.0
Some Common SMTP Settings
Table 2-46 Common Email Notification SMTP Server Settings
Server Name and Account SMTP Port Encryption Authentication

Provider Updated Comments
(1105-02, 08) (1105-03) (1105-04) (1105-05, 06, 07)
Yahoo smtp.mail.yahoo.com 465 Yes Yes 6/28/07 Requires POP

Yahoo! Mail
Plus
GMail smtp.gmail.com 465 Yes Yes 6/28/09
Optimum mail.optonline.net 587 Yes Yes 6/28/07
Online
AOL smtp.aol.com 587 Yes Yes 6/28/07
Some Common SMS Portals
Table 2-47 Some Common Mobile Telephone Service Provider SMS Portals
Provider Email Address for SMS Text Message
Some Popular Provider-Specific SMS Portals

Alltel yourcellphonenumber@message.alltel.com
AT&T Wireless yourcellphonenumber@mobile.att.net OR yourcellphonenumber@mmode.net
Boost Mobile yourcellphonenumber@myboostmobile.com
Cingular yourcellphonenumber@mobile.mycingular.com OR yourcellphonenumber@cingularme.com
Nextel yourcellphonenumber@messaging.nextel.com OR yourcellphonenumber@page.nextel.com
Sprint PCS yourcellphonenumber@messaging.sprintpcs.com
T-Mobile yourcellphonenumber@tmail.com OR yourcellphonenumber@tmomail.net
Verizon yourcellphonenumber@vtext.com
Virgin Mobile yourcellphonenumber@vmobl.com
A Universal SMS Portal
Teleflip yourcellphonenumber@teleflip.com
A More Complete SMS Portal Listing
For a more complete SMS portal list, see http://www.livejournal.com/tools/textmessage.bml?mode=details.

Issue 2.0
Conditions
SV9100 software required to support this feature.
The Email Notification feature (1014) is licensed on a per mailbox basis.
Refer to the InMail System Guide for more information about this feature.
A mailbox set for E-mail Notification can use the following settings for the forwarded
message:
Save: A forwarded voice message is archived and kept in the mailbox.
Delete: A forwarded voice message is deleted from the Mail Box.
No Change: A forwarded voice message is kept as "New" in the mailbox.
Email Notification options can only be changed from WebPro, PCPro or system
programming for group subscriber mailboxes.
Email Notification options can only be changed from UserPro, WebPro, PCPro or system
programming for station subscriber mailboxes.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Licensing for the InMail Email Client (1014).
Related Features
None

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-02-20 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = Off 0

Enable E-mail Notification 1 = On
Enables the email notification feature on a per

mailbox basis.
47-02-21 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting

E-mail Address
Assigns the destination email address on a per

mailbox basis.
47-02-22 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = Off 0

Include Message as Attachment 1 = On
Determines if the email notification includes the
voice message as a WAV file attachment. This

should be set to 0 if sending an SMS text
message to a cell phone.
47-02-27 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options 0 = No Change 0

Email Message Save/Delete Option 1 = Save
When email notification is enabled, use this 2 = Delete
option to set how notification handles new voice
mail message content.
If No Change is selected, the message
remains New in their mailbox after a successful
SMTP delivery.

If Save is selected, the message is marked as
Saved in their mailbox after a successful
SMTP delivery.
If Delete is selected, the message will be
deleted from their mailbox after a successful
SMTP delivery.
47-06-18 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Enable 0 = Off 0

E-mail Notification 1 = On
Enables email notification feature on a per

mailbox basis.
47-06-19 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options E-mail Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting

Address
Assigns the destination email address on a per

mailbox basis.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-06-20 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options 0 = Off 1

Include Message as Attachment 1 = On
Determines if the email notification includes the
voice message as a WAV file attachment. This

should be set to 0 if sending an SMS text
message to a cell phone.
47-06-25 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Email 0 = No Change 0

Message Save/Delete Option 1 = Save
When email notification is enabled, use this 2 = Delete
option to set how notification handles new voice
mail message content.
If No Change is selected, the message
remains New in their mailbox after a successful
SMTP delivery.

If Save is selected, the message is marked as
Saved in their mailbox after a successful
SMTP delivery.
If Delete is selected, the message will be
deleted from their mailbox after a successful
SMTP delivery.
47-18-01 InMail SMTP Setup SMTP Enabled 0 = No 0

Enables the SMTP forwarding feature for the 1 = Yes
system.
47-18-02 InMail SMTP Setup Server Name Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting

Sets the SMTP server name. If the DNS server
setting is not assigned in Program 90-11-11, the

47-18-03 InMail SMTP Setup SMTP Port 0 ~ 65535 25

Sets the SMTP server port.

47-18-04 InMail SMTP Setup Encryption 0 = No 0
Enable SSL Encryption. 1 = Yes

47-18-05 InMail SMTP Setup Authentication 0 = No 0
Enables authentication, when set to 2 (POP3) 1 = Yes
refer to Programs 47-19-xx. 3 = POP3
47-18-06 InMail SMTP Setup User Name Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting

Set the user name for SMTP authentication.

47-18-07 InMail SMTP Setup Password Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting
Set the password for SMTP authentication.

47-18-08 InMail SMTP Setup E-mail Address Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting
Set the email address for the system. This is
the from address for outgoing emails.
47-18-09 InMail SMTP Setup Reply to Address Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting

Set the email address for replies to outgoing
emails. This email account is not monitored by

the system and must be checked manually.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-19-01 InMail POP3 Setup Server Name Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting

Set the POP3 server name. If the DNS server
setting is not assigned in Program 90-11-11 the

47-19-02 InMail POP3 Setup POP3 Port 0 ~ 65535 110

Set the POP3 server port.

47-19-03 InMail POP3 Setup SSL Encryption 0 = No 0
Enable SSL encryption. 1 = Yes

47-19-04 InMail POP3 Setup User Name Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting
Set the user name for POP3 authentication.

47-19-05 InMail POP3 Setup Password Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting
Set the password for POP3 authentication.

90-11-11 System Alarm Report DNS Primary 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
Address
Assign the primary DNS IP Address. If this
setting is not assigned, the IP Address must be

used in Program 47-18-02 and 47-19-01
instead of the name.
90-11-12 System Alarm Report DNS Secondary 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

Address
Assign the secondary DNS server IP Address.

Issue 2.0
Operation
Refer to the InMail System Guide for more information about this feature.
REFERENCE
Table 2-48 Turn Email Notification On or Off
To Turn Email Notification On or Off
1. Log onto Subscriber Mailbox

2. [Setup] Select Mailbox Options.
Alternately dial OP (67)
3. [Notfy] Select Notification.

Alternately dial N (6)
4. [Email] Select Email.

Alternately dial E (3)

a. [On] Select to turn email notification on.
Alternately dial O (6)
b. [Off] Select to turn email notification off.

Alternately dial O (6)
c. [Back] Select to exit without making any changes.

Alternately dial #

Issue 2.0
InMail Find-Me Follow-Me
Description
Find-Me Follow-Me helps an outside caller locate an extension user who is not at their desk. If their call
is unanswered and is picked up by voice mail, the caller has the option of dialing a digit to try up to three
alternate Find-Me Follow-Me destinations. A destination can be an outside number (such as a cell
phone or home office) or a co-worker's extension.
The Find-Me Follow-Me destinations are set up in the Notification Schedule. Each of the three entries
can be individually enabled or disabled and provides options for:
Start Hour: Time the destinations become active.
End Hour: Time the destinations become inactive.
Number: The destination telephone, pager or extension number.
Days of Week: Days of the week the destinations are active or inactive.
If the caller chooses the Find-Me Follow-Me option, the system will try each enabled entry that is active
for the current date and time (i.e., in-schedule). The system will not try any entries that are disabled or
are not in-schedule.
When trying the destinations, Find-Me Follow-Me skips an active, in-schedule number that is busy, in
DND, or is unanswered. If a destination is answered the party must dial 1 and if enabled enter the
security code to hear new messages. If the system is forwarded to a voice mail system since the
destination does not enter a 1 it will be counted as a failed attempt and the system will move on to the
next destination. When all active in-schedule destinations have been tried the caller can then choose to
try Find-Me Follow-Me again or select another option.
You can set up Find-Me Follow-Me for an extension in system programming. In addition, an extension
user can set up Find-Me Follow-Me from their Mailbox Options.
Conditions
Find-Me Follow-Me settings can be changed using the Telephone Mailbox Option Interface
and system programming only.
Find-Me Follow-Me can be used for standard subscriber mailboxes and Group Mailboxes
set to subscriber in Program 47-03-03.
Find-Me Follow-Me does not work for internal callers.
Find-Me Follow-Me does not work for calls forwarded to InMail, this includes DID/DIL calls.
Find-Me Follow-Me requires that Tandem Trunking be enabled on the line that rings into the
Automated Attendant. If Tandem Trunking is not enabled, the Find-Me Follow-Me options
are not available.
InMail Find-Me Follow-Me 2-713

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
VM Mailbox License (1012)
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Disabled 1

Transfer 1 = Enabled
20-11-14 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer 0 = Disabled 0

Service) Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 1 = Enabled
Restriction
Make sure this option is disabled or Find-Me
Follow-Me will not work for CO calls.
2-714 InMail Find-Me Follow-Me

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-02-24 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options All 0 = Disabled 0

Find-Me Follow-Me Enabled 1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable Find-Me
Follow-Me for the extension. If disabled,

enabling the individual notification entries has
no effect.
47-06-22 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options All 0 = Disabled 0

Find-Me Follow-Me Enabled 1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable Find-Me
Follow-Me for the group mailbox. If disabled,

enabling the individual notification entries has
no effect.
47-21-01 Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options 0 = Disabled 0

Find-Me Follow-Me 1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable a Find-Me
Follow-Me destination. If enabled, Find-Me
Follow-Me will occur according to the settings

for Start Hour, End Hour, days of week and
Find-Me Follow-Me Phone Number. If disabled,
Find-Me Follow-Me will not occur.
47-21-02 Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options 0 ~ 23 (24 Hour Clock) No Setting
Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
Use this option to set the hour when Find-Me
Follow-Me will start. Find-Me Follow-Me will

occur only between this setting and the End
Hour setting.
47-21-03 Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options 0 ~ 23 (24 Hour Clock) No Setting
Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
Follow-Me will end. Find-Me Follow-Me will

occur only between this the Start Hour and this
setting.
47-21-04 Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options Maximum of 16 digits. No Setting

Find-Me Follow-Me Number
Use this option to set the telephone number
Find-Me Follow-Me will dial. Enter the number

Day of Week Sunday 1 = Enabled
enable or disable Find-Me Follow-Me on
Sunday.

There are three separately programmed
Find-Me Follow-Me entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Day of Week Monday 1 = Enabled
Monday.

Mailbox.

Day of Week Tuesday 1 = Enabled
Tuesday.

Mailbox.

Day of Week Wednesday 1 = Enabled
Wednesday.

Mailbox.

Day of Week Thursday 1 = Enabled
Thursday.

Mailbox.

Day of Week Friday 1 = Enabled
enable or disable Find-Me Follow-Me on Friday.
Mailbox.

Day of Week Saturday 1 = Enabled
Saturday.

Mailbox.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
47-23-01 Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options 0 = Disabled 0

Find-Me Follow-Me 1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable a Find-Me
Follow-Me destination. If enabled, Find-Me
Follow-Me will occur according to the settings

for Start Hour, End Hour, days of week and
Find-Me Follow-Me Phone Number. If disabled,
Find-Me Follow-Me will not occur.
47-23-02 Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options 0 ~ 23 (24 Hour Clock) No Setting
Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
Follow-Me will start. Find-Me Follow-Me will

occur only between this setting and the End
Hour setting.
47-23-03 Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options 0 ~ 23 (24 Hour Clock) No Setting
Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
Follow-Me will end. Find-Me Follow-Me will

occur only between this the Start Hour and this
setting.
47-23-04 Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options Maximum of 16 digits. No Setting

Find-Me Follow-Me Number
Use this option to set the telephone number
Find-Me Follow-Me will dial. Enter the number

Day of Week Sunday 1 = Enabled
Sunday.

Mailbox.

Day of Week Monday 1 = Enabled
Monday.

Mailbox.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Day of Week Tuesday 1 = Enabled
Tuesday.

Mailbox.

Day of Week Wednesday 1 = Enabled
Wednesday.

Mailbox.

Day of Week Thursday 1 = Enabled
Thursday.

Mailbox.

Day of Week Friday 1 = Enabled
enable or disable Find-Me Follow-Me on Friday.
Mailbox.

Day of Week Saturday 1 = Enabled
Saturday.

Mailbox.

Issue 2.0
Operation
Setting Up Message Notification
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.

OP (67) Access the Mailbox Options menu.
[Setup]
N (6) Access the Message Notification Options Menu.
[Notfy]
InMail plays a summary of your Message Notification settings.
The your telephone display shows your current notification settings (see
sample below).
For telephone numbers
Notify On 8am- 5pm
Number: 12039265400
- OR -
For Pager Numbers
Notify On 8am- 5pm
Pager: 12039265400
O (6) Turn Message Notification on or off.
[On]
[Off]
C (2) Change your Message Notification setup.
[Chnge]
When you see: Notification Begin
Enter the hour you want Message Notification to begin.
Enter 2 digits for the hour
A (2) Select AM
[AM]
P (7) Select PM
[PM]
* Skip this option without changing your entry.
[Next]
# Back up to the previous level without changing
your entry.
[Exit]
When you see: Notification End
Enter the hour you want Message Notification to end.
o Enter 2 digits for the hour.
o For 24-hour notification, make the End Time the same
as the Start Time.
A (2) Select AM
[AM]
P (7) Select PM
[PM]

Issue 2.0
Setting Up Message Notification (Continued)

[Next]
your entry.
[Exit]
When you see: Notify Via
N (6) The notification destination is a telephone
number.
[Num]
D (3) The notification destination is a digital pager.
[Pager]
[Next]
your entry.
[Exit]
When you see: Number
Enter the Message Notification callout number (16 digits
max).
o Enter the number exactly as you want the system to dial it
(including a leading 1 for toll calls, if required).
o If the number you enter is 4 digits or less, it is an Intercom
call. If it is more than 4 digits, it is an outside call.
# Accept the number entered and back

up to the previous level.
[OK]
[Clear] Erase the number you just entered.
[Next]
your entry.
[Exit]
# Go back to the Mailbox Options menu.
[Exit]
# Go back to the Main Menu.
[Exit]
0 Plays Help message.

Issue 2.0
InMail Language Setting
Description
The Language setting feature allows the telephone display language and the InMail mailbox language to
be changed from the telephone. This can be used to change either the users phone or another
specified telephones display and InMail language if allowed in system programming. Either a dial
access code or Softkey operation is available.
Conditions
The telephone display language can be changed using dial access codes or softkeys only.
The InMail language can be changed using dial access codes or softkeys only.
The ability to change other extensions language options is allowed on a class of service
basis in Program 20-13-53.
The system will not allow an InMail language to be selected if that language prompt set has
not been loaded onto the InMail SD card. When an invalid language is selected an error
tone is heard.
Supported Languages
01 (US English)
02 (UK English)
03 (Australian English)
04 (French Canadian)
05 (Dutch)
06 (Mexican Spanish)
07 (Latin America Spanish)
08 (Italian)
09 (German)
10 (Madrid Spanish)
11 (Norwegian)
12 (Parisian French)
13 (Brazilian Portuguese)
14 (Japanese)
15 (Mandarin Chinese)
InMail Language Setting 2-721

Issue 2.0
16 (Korean)
17 (Iberian Portuguese)
18 (Greek)
19 (Danish)
20 (Swedish)
21 (Thai)
22 (Taiwan)
23 (Flemish)
24 (Turkish)
25 (Reserved)
26 (Russian)
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
Related Features
None
2-722 InMail Language Setting

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

If needed, redefine the service code used to

select the language for display multiline
terminals.

Operation) IntraMail Language Selection 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
for own Extension digits
This setting is needed if the dial access code to
this feature is desired.

Operation) IntraMail Language Selection 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
for Specific Extension digits
This setting is needed if the dial access code to
this feature is desired.
20-13-53 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Disabled 0

Service) Language Selection for Specific 1 = Enabled
Extension
This setting must be Enabled (1) for a

telephones Class of Service for this feature to
function.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
40-07-01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for 1 = US English 1

VRS 2 = UK English
Specify the language to be used for the InMail 3 = AU English
prompts. 4 = CA French
5 = Dutch
6 = Mex Spanish
7 = LA Spanish
8 = Italian
9 = German
10 = ES Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = ParisFrench
13 = BR Portugue
14 = Japanese

15 = MandChinese
16 = Korean
17 = IB Portugue
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Taiwan
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Reserved
26 = Russian
2-724 InMail Language Setting

Issue 2.0
Operation
Table 2-49 Language Setting Operation
From an Idle Display Phone
Press down arrow
Prog Press Program Softkey
Press down arrow
Press down arrow
Lang Press Language Softkey
Disp To change telephone display language press Display Softkey.
Own To change your own extension display language press

Own Softkey.
Choose Select desired language, press down arrow

Lang to advance to next page. Press softkey for
desired language.
Press Speaker Exit
Other To change another extension display language press

Other softkey.
Ext # Enter the extension number to be changed.

desired language.
Press Speaker Exit
VMail To change spoken InMail mailbox language press VMail Softkey.
Own To change your own extension display language press

Own Softkey.

desired language.
Press Speaker Exit
Other To change another spoken mailbox language press

Other softkey.
Ext # Enter the extension number to be changed.

desired language.
Press Speaker Exit

Issue 2.0
Instant Access Application (IAA)
Description
The Instant Access Application (IAA) feature is a server based XML application that allows NEC IP
display phones (DT710/DT730/DT730G/DT750) access to the following options and features:
Voice Mail
Speed Dial
News (RSS News)
Weather
Photo
RSS Photo
Calendar
Banner
Sub Banner text
Screen Saver
Icon Position6
Mascot Greeting
Widget
Conditions
Speed Dial only supports a single number.
The Photo displayed in the News (RSS News) feed is only supported on the DT750 and
ITL-12CG terminals.
The DT730, ITL-12DG and ITL-8LDE do not support the IAA Calendar.
Sub Banner text can only be displayed in the Retro mode.
The Sub Banner text feature is not supported on the DT730, ITL-12DG and ITL-8LDE terminals.
Mascot Greeting is only displayed in the Retro mode.
The Mascot Greeting feature is only supported on the ITL-12CG terminal.

The DT730, ITL-12DG and ITL-8LDE terminals do not support the IAA Widget display.
If the Voice Mail type is InMail, mailbox integration is not supported when pressing the VM
icon. The user must enter the extension number or use the VMsg softkey.
2-726 Instant Access Application (IAA)

Issue 2.0
The IAA URL should be configured under the Home URL terminal XML configuration.
The IAA application will not function correctly if the IAA URL is configured in the Service
URL setting parameter of the terminal.
RSS subscriptions to third party news sources such as Yahoo can be terminated at any
time and without notice.
Defining IAA conditions through the menu operation are stored in volatile memory and as
such this information is automatically erased when the terminal is initialized. In order to
prevent the IAA configuration from being erased from the terminal, NEC recommends that
configuration assignment through the URL setting be set and stored under the Home URL
terminal XML configuration.
General maintenance on the IAA server may be performed as needed and especially after
normal business hours (6PM to 5AM, USA Central Time). IAA is temporally unavailable
during maintenance.
The response time to IAA feature activation/display is controlled by Internet speed and
traffic content on the LAN. Due to this, response times for the IAA feature activation/display
may vary.
DT730 and DT750 terminals use TCP port 1024-5000.
DT730G (ITL-12CG/ITL-12DG) terminals use TCP port 32768-61000.
If these port numbers are used by different applications in network, the terminal cannot
receive XML data from the IAA cloud server.
Table 2-50 DT700 Series Supported Features (IAA)
DT730G DT730G DT710

Feature Mode DT750 DT730
(ITL-12CG) (ITL-12DG) (ITL-8LDE)
Voice Mail All X X X X X
Speed Dial (SV9100) All X X X X X
Call Forward All X X X X X
History/DIR All X X X X X
News (RSS News) All X X X X X
Photo in News All X N/A X N/A N/A
Weather All X X X X X
Photo All X X X X X
RSS Photo All X N/A X N/A N/A
Calendar All X N/A X N/A N/A
Banner All X X X X X
Screen Saver All X X X X X
Icon Position Retro X X X X X
UCE UC XML All X X X X X
Instant Access Application (IAA) 2-727

Issue 2.0
Table 2-50 DT700 Series Supported Features (IAA) (Continued)
DT730G DT730G DT710

Feature Mode DT750 DT730
(ITL-12CG) (ITL-12DG) (ITL-8LDE)
Mascot Greeting All X N/A X N/A N/A
Modern Design Modern X N/A X N/A N/A
Splash Screen All X N/A X N/A N/A
Instruction All X X X X X
Widget All X N/A X N/A N/A
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
DT710 (ITL-8LDE) with firmware 5.0.4.0 or higher installed.
DT730 (ITL-8LD, ITL-12D, ITL-24D, ITL-32D, ITL-12PA) with firmware 5.0.4.0 or higher
installed.
DT730G (ITL-12CG and ITL-12DG) with firmware 1.0.2.0 or higher installed.
DT750 (ITL-320C) with firmware 5.0.4.0 or higher installed.
IP Phone Manager 6.1.0 or higher must be installed.
FTP or TFTP server application must be installed.
Related Features
SV9100 Terminals
Programming
None
2-728 Instant Access Application (IAA)

Issue 2.0
Operation
Refer to the Instant Access Application User Guide for detailed feature information.
REFERENCE
Instant Access Application (IAA) 2-729

Issue 2.0
Intercom
Description
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with complete
internal calling ability.
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by

speaking toward the telephone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for
workers who do not have a free hand to pick up the handset. Refer to Handsfree Answerback/Forced
Intercom Ringing on page 2-577 feature for more information.
Busy Status Display
When a display multiline terminal user places an Intercom call to a busy extension, the details of the
busy status (who is talking to the extension or which line is in use by the extension) can be displayed.
The details of the trunk busy status (the extension using the line) can be displayed after trying to access
the trunk. This feature provides a user information which can determine whether they should use
Barge-In for the extension or trunk. This information automatically displays for a multiline terminal once
programmed.
Conditions
Preventing ICM calls does not affect dialing other service codes, including 911.
Intercom calls can ring or be voice-announced at the called extension.
Ringing Line Preference can automatically answer ringing Intercom or trunk calls when the
user lifts the handset.
An extension can have a name assigned that identifies the extension to callers.
Dialing 9 or any other trunk access code after dialing a busy extension results in termination
of the Intercom call and seizing a trunk.
For a station to retrieve a held ICM call, the station must have an ICM key assigned in
Program 15-07 (*00).
A special ringtone is provided when a pre-assigned extension places an Intercom call.
The incoming ringtone from a pre-assigned extension (set in Program 15-01-13) is limited
to calls to the actual extension, not the Virtual Extension. Incoming calls to the VE follows
Program 15-08-1 settings.
Default Settings
Enabled
2-730 Intercom
Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Intercom
Line Preference
Name Storing

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Select the service code used at an extension to

change the displayed language on a multiline
terminal display.
Intercom 2-731
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-01-13 Basic Extension Data Setup Special 0 = Incoming Extension 0

Ringtone Choice Ringtone
Use to select the special incoming ring tone for 1 = Tone Pattern 1
the extension. When called from this Program 2 = Tone Pattern 2
3 = Tone Pattern 3
on the set extension, the called extension rings
with the selected ring tone. 4 = Tone Pattern 4

5 = Tone Pattern 5
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8

4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish

(1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1


extension.


calls, enable this option to prevent callers from



Status)
display the detailed state of the called party.
2-732 Intercom
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Number

operators.
20-18-01 Service Tone Timers Extension Dial Tone 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Time
After getting Intercom dial tone, a multiline
terminal user has this time to dial the first digit
of the Intercom call.

When placing Intercom calls, an extension user

must dial each digit during this time.
82-01-01 Incoming Ring Tone Frequency 1 1 = 520Hz Refer to Table 2-

(01) Customize the Intercom ring tone. 2 = 540Hz 51 Default
3 = 660Hz Incoming
4 = 760Hz Ringing Tone on
5 = 1100Hz page 2-735.
6 = 1400Hz
7 = 2000Hz
82-01-02 Incoming Ring Tone Frequency 2 1 = 520Hz Refer to Table 2-

Customize the Intercom ring tone. 2 = 540Hz 51 Default
3 = 660Hz Incoming
4 = 760Hz Ringing Tone on
5 = 1100Hz page 2-735.
6 = 1400Hz
7 = 2000Hz
82-01-03 Incoming Ring Tone Modulation 0 = No Modulation 2

Customize the Intercom Ring Tone modulation 1 = 8Hz Modulation
if desired. 2 = 16Hz Modulation

3 = Envelope
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Customize the enable handsfree incoming

Customize the force ringing of incoming
Intercom 2-733
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

enabled, Intercom calls normally ring. If
disabled, intercom calls voice announce. For

all NEC Cordless telephones, this option must
be enabled since voice announce is not
possible.

(1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

Turn Off or On an extension ability to force


calls.

80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Tone 28 (Speaker Service Tone #28 Refer to Table 2-
(28) Monitor Tone) 31 Service Tone
This tone changes the tone the originator of an Setup Defaults,
ICM call hears. (The tone cannot be changed Program
for what is heard by the user when receiving an 80-01-01 on
ICM call.) page 2-568.
80-01-02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 1 ~ 33 1~33

Define up to 64 Service Tones. Each service (0 = No Tone) (0 = No Tone)
tone is defined by the combination of 32 Basic (33 = Default Time Slot) (33=Default Time
Tones. Slot)
Refer to Table 2-
32 Service Tone
Setup, Program
80-01-02 on
page 2-572.
2-734 Intercom
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
82-01-01 Incoming Ring Tone Frequency 1 1 = 520Hz Default:

Customize the Intercom ring tone. 2 = 540Hz Refer to Table 2-
3 = 660Hz 51 Default
Incoming
4 = 760Hz
Ringing Tone on

5 = 1100Hz
page 2-735.
6 = 1400Hz
7 = 2000Hz
Incoming Ring Tone Number Tone Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Pattern 1 High 1100 1400 16Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 760 16Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 16Hz Modulation




Intercom Incoming Pattern Mid 660 760 8Hz Modulation
Pattern 6 High 760 760 No Modulation

Alarm Sensor Pattern Mid 760 760 No Modulation
Low 760 760 No Modulation




Intercom 2-735
Issue 2.0
Operation
To place an Intercom call:

1. At multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -

2. Dial extension number (or 0 for your operator).
Your call may voice-announce or ring the called extension. Dial 1 to change the way your call alerts
the called extension.
If the extension you call is busy or does not answer, you can dial another extension without hanging
up.
To answer an Intercom call:

1. If you hear two beeps, speak toward telephone.
Your telephone picks up your voice.
- OR -
If your telephone rings, lift the handset.
To check the extension data (multiline terminal only):

1. Press the Help key.
2. Dial the extension number.
You display shows your telephone extension number, port number and extension/Department Group.
You can also check any other extension numbers information by pressing Help + the extension number.
3. Press Exit to return the normal time/date display.
To change how Intercom calls ring the extension:

2. Dial 723 to have calls ring your extension.
- OR -
3. Dial 721 to have calls voice announce to your extension.
2-736 Intercom
Issue 2.0
IP Multiline Station (SIP)
Description
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system supports IP extensions using a variety of multiline terminals. These
telephones have the same look and functionality of typical multiline telephones, but they are connected
to the CCPU via IP rather than by a hardwired connection to a DLC port.
The following DT700 IP multiline telephones (ITL) support IP extensions:

ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
ITL-12CG-3 (BK) TEL
ITL-12DG-3 (BK) TEL
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
IP to TDM Conversion
When an IP telephone calls a DT300 multiline telephone, a single line telephone or trunk, the speech
must be converted from an IP to TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) technology. The GPZ-IPLE daughter
boards provide this function. Each GPZ-IPLE has a number of DSP resources on the blade, each one
can convert a speech channel from IP to TDM and vice versa. It is possible for DT700 IP telephones to
talk directly to other DT700 IP telephones without using GPZ-IPLE DSP resources.
DT700 IP Multiline Telephones (ITL)
The IP multiline telephone operates the same way as a DT300 (DTL) digital multiline telephone. The
DT700 has all of the features and flexibility you expect from a DT300 digital multiline telephone. The
difference is that the DT700 IP telephone uses an RJ-45 for connection to the IP network, rather than an
RJ-11 connection to a GCD-8DLCA or GCD-16DLCA.
Power Save Adapter (PSA-L UNIT)
The Power Save Adapter is an add-on module for the IP (DT700) and digital (DT300) multiline
telephones. The PSA-L UNIT allows connection to an analog trunk if the power or system connection
were to fail, or the IP telephone loses connection to the UNIVERGE SV9100 system. No programming is
required on the UNIVERGE SV9100 to support this adapter.
IP Multiline Station (SIP) 2-737

Issue 2.0
Connecting to an IP Telephone
The Power Save Adapter connects to an analog PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) line. For
example, at a small branch office this may be the same line that is used for faxes/modems/etc. The
handset is also connected to the Power Save Adapter You must unplug the handset from the IP
telephone and reconnect it to the adapter. This allows the speech path to be redirected to the handset
during network power failure.
LAN Connection
The IP telephone has two RJ-45 connections on the back marked PC and LAN. This allows the IP
telephone and a PC to share one cable run and switch port.
If installing an IP telephone at a location that has a PC connected to the data network, one of the
following methods can be used:
Using a different cable:
Leave the PC connected to the LAN.
Patch a switch port to the new cable run.
Connect a CAT 5 straight-through cable from the wall outlet to the LAN port on the IP telephone.
Sharing the existing cable:

Unplug the cable from the PC Network Interface Card (NIC).
Connect the cable to the LAN port on the IP telephone.
Connect a new straight-through patch lead from the PC NIC to the PC port on the IP telephone.
Powering the IP Telephone
Power can be provided to the IP telephone by one of the following methods:

Local Power
The IP telephone has a connector on the back for external power. This is supplied by an AC
adapter that outputs +27VDC requiring a separate power outlet per IP telephone. Loss of power in
the building will prevent the telephones from functioning.
Only use the NEC supplied power supply.

IMPORTANT
Power over Ethernet (PoE)

The PoE switch (802.3 AF is only method supported) provides power over the spare pairs. The
switch can be used with other devices than the IP telephones and detects whether or not power is
needed. Using a PoE switch makes it easier to protect the IP telephones from loss of power
(connection of the PoE switch to an UPS).
2-738 IP Multiline Station (SIP)

Issue 2.0
LLDP
Added support for Link Layer Discover Protocol (LLDP) or IEEE 802.1AB is a vendor neutral Data link
layer protocol used by network devices for advertising their identity, capabilities and interconnections on
the IEEE 802 LAN network. LLDP performs functions similar to several proprietary protocols such as
Cisco Discovery Protocol, Extreme Discovery protocol, Nortel Discovery Protocol (also known as
SONMP) and Microsofts Link Layer Topology Discover (LLTD). If enabled, the IP terminal takes longer
to boot as it waits for an information packet. If no LLDP information is received within the RX Wait Time,
the terminal continues a normal boot process.
This service supports the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) standard and is used to transmit and
receive VLAN information ONLY about neighboring network devices and IP Telephones. The following
are a list of VLAN settings which can be received by the terminal during a LLDP session:
LAN port Setting/ VLAN ID
LAN port setting/VLAN Priority
TOS Mode / RTP
TOS mode /SIP
Peer to Peer
An IP telephone can send and receive RTP packets to/from another IP telephone without using the DSP
resources on the GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board. This operation only allows intercom calls between the IP
telephones.
If a DT700 IP multiline telephone, or trunk line is required, a DSP resource is needed and a GPZ-IPLE
must be installed on the CPU. If, while on a peer to peer call, a conference call is initiated, the peer to
peer connection is released and a new non peer to peer connection is created using the GPZ-IPLE. If
the third party drops out of the conversation, the call reverts to a peer to peer call (silence may be heard
while this conversion is made by the system).
Although the peer to peer feature is supported for IP Station-to-IP Station calls, the UNIVERGE SV9100
chassis must still have a registered GPZ-IPLE installed in the system.
With Barge-In, a short silence may be heard if the following occurs:

A peer to peer call receives a Barge-In without a Barge-In tone.
A peer to peer call receives a Barge-In with Monitor mode.
When the established Barge-In is disconnected.
Peer to peer is a programmable feature that may be enabled or disabled (Program 15-05-50).
System Tones and Ring Tones
IP telephones do not use Program 80-01: Service Tone Setup entries. The tones are generated locally
by the IP telephone. When a Door Box chime rings an IP telephone, the system activates the chimes
using a ring command. Because of this, if the volume is adjusted while the door chime is sounding, the
ringing volume of the IP telephone is also adjusted.

Issue 2.0
Music on Hold
Music on Hold is also provided by the IP telephone. The settings in Program 10-04: Music on Hold Setup
are ignored except to determine whether or not music should be provided. If Program 10-04-02 is set to
0, music on hold is not heard. If Program 10-04-02 is set to 1 or 2, music is provided by the IP telephone.
Registration Mode
The SV9100 has three types of registration for IP terminals, Plug and Play, Automatic, and Manual
programmed in 10-46-01:
Plug and Play mode when the phone boots up it reports the extension assigned in the phone or
chooses the next available extension in the system. No password is required.
Automatic mode the SIP user name and password must be entered in the actual IP phone. The
phone comes up as the extension associated with the user name and password is entered.
Manual mode when the phone boots up it prompts the user to enter a user ID and password
before logging in. If a user ID and password are set in the SIP User settings of the phone, as with
Automatic mode, the phone does not prompt for login. This allows some phones to come up
automatically and some phones to prompt for login. In manual mode, the phones that do not have
a user ID and password set in the phone are prompted to log in. A user can also Logoff the IP
phone to allow another user to login with their own user ID and password.
To Logoff the IP phone:
Press the Down Arrow Softkey, press the Prog Softkey, and then press the LOGOFF Softkey.
Multiple Logon
The same user name and password can be assigned to multiple extensions when using Automatic or
Manual Registration. This makes it easier on the user by only having to remember one password. For
example, if a user has an IP Multiline terminal and uses Desktop Applications with the Enhancement
bundle controlling the IP Multiline, three different ports are used in the system.
Registration Override
When Manual mode is used, Registration Override can be used. Registration Override allows a user to
login at one phone, and later login at another phone and keep the same extension number. This is
useful in the case where an office user has an IP multiline terminal at work and at home or a Softphone
they use on the road. They log in at work to use the office terminal, and when they get home or are on
the road they login the home terminal or Softphone. When this happens the office terminal is logged out
and they have the same extension number at home or on the road.
Override with CTI is supported on a per station basis using Program 15-05-39 with certain restrictions.

Issue 2.0
System IP Phones and Analog Trunks
Due to the nature of analog-to-digital conversion, considerable echo may be encountered when using
Analog Trunks with IP Phones.
Due to all Analog trunks being different, padding of the Analog Trunks in Programs 81-07 and
14-01 may be necessary. Even after the pad changes are made, an echo may still be present the
first few seconds of the call while echo cancellers are learning the characteristics of the circuit on
this call. Program 90-68-01 can be used to automatically test the lines and auto assign the proper
values in Program 81-07. It is recommended to use this program whenever analog trunks are
involved.
Digital (ISDN, T-1, and SIP) trunks do not experience this problem.
NOTE
For best performance, it is recommended to use digital trunks when using IP phones.
TIP
Conditions
The voice quality of VoIP depends on variables such as available bandwidth, network
latency and Quality of Service (QoS) initiatives, all of which are controlled by the network
and Internet service providers. Because these variables are not under its control, NEC
cannot guarantee the performance of the users IP-based remote voice solution. Therefore,
NEC recommends connecting VoIP equipment through a local area network using a Private
IP address.
IP Multiline Stations must register with the IP address of the GPZ-IPLE. The IP Multiline
stations registering via a URL is not supported.
If an internal paging group has only IP Multiline Stations, mutlicast is used for the page. IP
multiline terminals must have a gateway programmed to accomplish a multicast
transmission. When an actual gateway device does not exist on the network, a dummy
gateway address on the same subnet must be defined. If the paging group has any TDM
stations or an external speaker, multicast is not used and the gateway is not required.
The system sees terminal types 1 (Economy), 2 (Value), 3 (Desi-Less), 4 (Sophisticated)
and 5 (Softphone) as the same terminal type.
When using Multiple Logon, the same Personal ID index can be assigned to an
ITL/Softphone or CTI (Desktop) terminal type.
Two ports of the same terminal type (Program 15-05-26) cannot be assigned to the same
Personal ID index (Program 15-05-27).
Program 10-46-01 must be set to 1 (Auto) or 2 (Manual) for Multiple Logon to work.
When three ports are assigned the same Personal ID index in Program 15-05-27, if
Program 15-05-26 is not set for those ports, the terminal types will be assigned based on
order of login. If Program 15-05-26 is set, the login order does not matter and they will
assign the correct port.

Issue 2.0
The Override feature functions the same as single login.

XML Multi-Window Support the multi-window service adds the following:
Multiple XML applications can be displayed and accessed through the NEC terminal XML
menu.
Line key operation can be performed without closing the active XML application window.
DT700 terminals and wireless IP terminals utilizing NAPT can be registered to the primary
or a secondary system. Refer to the feature SV9100 NetLink on page 2-1354 for additional
details.
With SV9100 system software and GPZ-IPLE daughter board installed, half duplex
connections are not supported. For troubleshooting purposes, a managed switch capable
of port mirroring is required to capture packet data from the SV9100 IPLE Ethernet port.
When downloading firmware for previously installed DT700 and the ITL-12CG/ITL-12DG
terminals, the firmware for both can be downloaded at the same time.
Restrictions
When using DT700 IP phones, assigning the following features to a large number of
phones (100 or more) is not recommended:
The same Trunk Line assignment (squared key system)
The same Virtual Extension assignment
Paging key with LED ON assignment
The same location Park key
The same location CAP key
The same BLF key assignment
Day Night Mode Change key assignment
The same VM Mail Box key assignment
Trunk Group key
Trunk Group All Line Busy Indication
An SIP multiline terminal can override another SIP multiline terminal or a Softphone.
A Softphone can override another Softphone or an SIP multiline terminal.
Override does not support SIP multiline terminal with DSS console or Softphone with DSS
Console.
When using Override with an active CTI connection, Program 15-05-39 must be enabled
for the extensions that will be overridden. The overriding terminal must be of the same type
and number of line keys as the terminal to be overridden. If the types of terminals and
number of keys are different between overriding and overridden phones, the Telephony
Service Providers (1st Party and 3rd Party) may not function properly.

Issue 2.0
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All IP Multiline Terminals
Required Software
None
GCD-CP10 with GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board installed
VoIP Resource License (5103)
IP Terminal License (5111)

Issue 2.0
NAPT Traversal
Description
NAPT (Network Address Port Translation), is a method by which a private address or addresses and
their TCP/UDP ports are translated into a single public address and its TCP/UDP ports. The NAPT
feature gives the SV9100 the ability to traverse its own subnet. With NAPT, the network administrator
can place the GCD-CP10 and the GPZ-IPLE (VoIPDB) in the customers LAN while still making it
accessible to users outside the local LAN. The NAPT Feature also allows the IP terminals to be placed
in a local LAN in a remote network and be able to communicate back to the SV9100.
Refer to the SV9100 Networking Manual for detailed installation instructions on this
REFERENCE
feature.
The router that the SV9100 resides behind still requires Port Forwarding statements. However the
router that the IP terminal/terminals reside behind may not require any port forwarding. This feature is
only available when using a GPZ-IPLE. Due to the fact that there are many manufacturers producing
routers there may still be times when port forwarding is required.
In all software versions, SIP ALGs (Application Level Gateway) or other SIP Applications MUST be
disabled in all routers. If a SIP ALG or a similar SIP application is enabled, IP phone service WILL be
CAUTION interrupted.
The NAPT feature is only effective when Program15-05-45 is set 1 (On). Refer to Figure 2-27 Example
NAT Traversal or an examples of the NAT Traversal network. Table 2-52 Example Required System
Settings on page 2-745 and Table 2-53 Example Required IP Terminal Settings on page 2-745 provide
examples of required system and IP terminal settings. Refer to Table 2-54 Example SV9100 System
Router A Port Forwarding Settings on page 2-745 for Port Forwarding setting examples.

NOTE
Actual input data should be set according to the required system.
Figure 2-27 Example NAT Traversal

Issue 2.0
Table 2-52 Example Required System Settings
Index Program Default Input Data Remark
1 10-12-03 0.0.0.0 172.16.0.254 LAN IP address of Router A

2 10-12-07 0.0.0.0 10.1.1.1 WAN IP address of Router A
3 10-12-09 172.16.0.10 172.16.0.10 LAN IP address of VOIPDB
4 10-12-10 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 Subnet Mask of VOIPDB
5 10-46-14 0:OFF 1:ON NAT Mode
6 15-05-45 0:OFF 1:ON NAT RTP send port choice
7 84-26-01 172.16.0.20 172.16.0.20 VOIP DSP IP Address
Table 2-53 Example Required IP Terminal Settings
Index Name Default Input Data
1 IP Address 0.0.0.0 172.17.0.100

2 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 172.17.0.254
3 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0
4 NAT Traversal Mode 1: Disable 2: Dynamic
5 WAN Mate IP Address 0.0.0.0 10.1.1.1
6 WAN SIP Mate Port 5060 5080
Table 2-54 Example SV9100 System Router A Port Forwarding Settings
Port IP Address Port is Forwarded To Remarks
5080 (UDP) 172.16.0.10 Signaling port and must be forwarded

to the IP Address assigned in Program
10-12-09.
5081 (UDP) 172.16.0.10 Secondary signaling port and must be
forwarded to the IP Address assigned
10020 ~ 10531 (UDP) 172.16.0.20 Voice ports and must be forwarded to
the IP Address assigned in Program
84-26-01.
Port forwarding does not need to be assigned at the Remote Terminal location.

Issue 2.0
Conditions
The router the SV9100 resides behind requires Port Forwarding statements.
When Program 15-05-45 is set to 1 the manual table setting for port forwarding may not
be required on the remote side Router B, but the router must support the NAT function
setting itself. If Program 15-05-45 is set to 0 port forwarding at the Remote side router is
required. This feature requires installation of a GPZ-IPLE.
The router may close the port being used if packet exchange is not performed during a
certain time frame. In this occurs, change Program 15-05-47 and Program 15-05-48 to a
shorter interval. These programs are changed on a per station basis. Non NAPT phones
will still use Programs 84-23-01 and 84-23-02 while only NAPT phones will use Programs
15-05-47 and 15-05-48.
The SIP-ALG or similar SIP application function of all routers in the network must be
disabled.
The SV9100 Desktop Application does not support Network Address Translation (NAPT). If
a user would like to connect the Desktop Application through an Internet Connection the
use of a VPN is required.
If excessive packet loss occurs on the network, IP phones will play a warning tone during
conversations. To disable this tone set Program15-05-31 to 0.
Multicast RTP is not supported.
Peer to Peer is only possible on IP terminals within the same router.
After starting SIP negotiation for the call, if any RTP packet cant be received from the
terminal within 10 seconds, the call is dropped and the IP Terminal displays the following:
Each NAPT terminal can have a separate Register and Subscribe expire timer. The load of
the CPU will increase with each NAPT terminal using a short timer. Refer to Table 2-55
NAPT Terminals Minimum Timer Settings to view the minimum timer settings based on
the number of NAPT terminals using Programs 15-05-47 and 15-05-48.
Table 2-55 NAPT Terminals Minimum Timer Settings
Number of DT800/DT700 Terminals Using Programs 15-05-47

and 15-05-48
Program Number
1 ~ 144 145 ~ 192 193 ~ 896
(Terminals) (Terminals) (Terminals)
15-05-47 (minimum setting) 60 seconds 90 seconds 180 seconds

15-05-48 (minimum setting) 60 seconds 90 seconds 180 seconds

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
DT800/DT700
Required Software
None
GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board installed
VoIP Resource license (5103)
IP Terminal (5111)
NAT Traversal License (0031)
Related Features
None


Issue 2.0
IP Multiline Station (SIP):
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign the IP Address for the CPU NIC card. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
When an GPZ-IPLE card is installed in the 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
system, it is recommended to set this Program
to 0.0.0.0.

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
Assign the default gateway IP address for the

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

Set IP address for GPZ-IPLE. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
The IP Address assigned in Program 10-12-01 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
cannot start with the same leading digits as the IP
Address assigned here.
Set the subnet mask of the GPZ-IPLE. |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-46-01 DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup 0 = Normal 0

Register Mode 1 = Auto
Normal mode: 2 = Manual
When the phone boots up, it reports the ext.
assigned in the phone or chooses the next
available extension in the system. No
password is required.
Auto mode:
If set to Auto, the SIP user name and password
must be entered in the actual IP phone. These

settings must match 84-22/15-05-27, for the
phone to come on-line.
Manual mode:
When the phone boots up it prompts a user to
enter a user ID and password before logging in.
It checks the user ID/password against 84-22/
15-05-27. If there is no match, the phone does
not come on-line.
10-54-01 License Configuration for Each Package 1 ~ 255 Resource Licenses 0

License Code
Assign VoIP Resource Licenses (5103) to
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
If applying more than 255 licenses to a slot, the
licenses must be applied across multiple
indexes.
For example, assigning 256 VoIP resource
licenses (5103) to the CPU slot could be
assigned using different methods as long as the
total for the CPU slot is 256.
1. Index 1 has 128 of feature code 5103 and
index 2 also has 128 of feature code 5103 for a
total of 256.
index 2 has 1 of feature code 5103 for a total of
256.
15-05-15 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 1-Type 1 1

CODEC Type 2-Type 2
Set the registered IP Phone Codec type 3-Type 3
Reference Program 84-24 DT800/DT700 4-Type 4
Codec Basic Information.
5-Type 5

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-05-26 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0 = Not Set 0

DT800/DT700 Terminal Type 1 = ITL-( )E-1D/IP-( )E-1
Set the DT800/DT700 series terminal type. 2 = ITL-( )D-1D/ITL-12BT-1D/
ITL- 12PA-1D [without
8LKI(LCD)-L]
3 = ITL-( )D-1D/ITL-12BT-1D/
ITL-12PA-1D [with 8LKI(LCD)-L]
4 = ITL-320C-1
5 = Softphone
6 = CTI
7 = AGW
10 = ITL-12DG-3
11 = ITL-12CG-3
12 = ITL-0-1
13 = ITZ-**-*D/ITZ-**PD-*D/
ITZ-**pA-*D
14 = ITZ-*CG
15 = ITZ-*DE
16 = ITZ-*LDE
15-05-39 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0 = Disable 0

CTI Override Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the ability of a station to be

overridden when CTI is active.

Peer to Peer Mode 1 = Enable
On a per station basis enable or disable Peer to

Peer mode.
84-10-01 ToS Setup ToS Mode 0 = Disable (Invalid) 0

When Input Data is set to 1, Protocol 7 is 1 = IP Precedence
invalid. When Data is set to 2, Protocols 2 ~ 6

2 = Diffserv
are invalid.
84-10-07 ToS Setup Priority (D.S.C.P. - 0 ~ 63 0

Differentiated Services Code Point)
DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point).
84-22-01 DT800/DT700 Multiline Logon Information Maximum of 32 characters No Setting

Setup User ID
Input the User ID for each Personal ID Index
(1-960) when using auto or manual registration
in 10-46-01.
IP multiline terminals only support numerical
user IDs, not alphanumeric.

Setup Password
Input the Password for each Personal ID Index
(1-960) when using manual or auto registration

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-22-03 DT800/DT700 Multiline Logon Information 0 = Off 0

Setup User ID Omission 1 = On
Enable/Disable User ID Omission.
Used when the registration mode (10-46-01) is
set to manual. When the phone prompts for a login,
the previous user ID appears so the user only has to
enter the password.
84-22-04 DT800/DT700 Multiline Logon Information 0 = Off 1

Setup Log Off 1 = On
When the registration mode (10-46-01) is set to
manual, and the phone prompts for a login, the
previous user ID appears so the user only has
to enter the password.
When enabled, the extension assigned to the
Personal ID Index can be logged off or
overridden by another IP multiline station or

Softphone.
In Manual mode a user can also Logoff the IP
phone to allow another user to login with their own
user ID and password.
To Logoff the IP phone:
Press the Down Arrow Softkey, press the Prog
Softkey, and then press the LOGOFF Softkey.

Setup Nick Name
Input the Personal ID from terminal

automatically when log on again.
84-24-28 DT800/DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic 0 = G.711 0

Information Setup Audio Capability 1 = G.729
Priority 2 = G.722
Assign the Codec for the NEC DT700 IP
Phone.
84-26-01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 172.16.0.20

Assign the IP address for each DSP on the
GPZ-IPLE.
84-26-02 IPL Basic Setup RTP Port Number 0 ~ 65534 10020

Assign the RTP port number to be used for
each DSP on the GPZ-IPLE.

Only even numbered ports are supported.

Issue 2.0
IP Multiline Station (SIP) with NAPT:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

to 0.0.0.0.

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0. 1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.
10-12-07 GCD-CP10 Network Setup NAPT Router IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address (Default Gateway [WAN]) 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Assign the WAN address of the router that the

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
CCPU is using for NAT.

|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255
10-46-06 DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup 0 ~ 65535 5080

Register Mode
Assign the port number in which the SIP
messages are sent on the GPZ-IPLE. This
same port number must be assigned in the SIP
multiline terminals. If this command is changed,
it requires a CPU reset.

Subscribe Session Port
Assign the port number to be used for
subscription messages between the SV9100
and the DT700 terminals.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-46-14 DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup 0 = Off 50

NAT Mode 1 = On
Turns On/Off the DT700 NAT mode of the

system.
10-58-01 Network Address Network Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

This program sets the IP or Network address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
for phones that are not to be routed through the 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
NAPT translations.
For example, if a system had multiple NAPT
phones and another site, with multiple IP
phones connected via a VPN connection, you
would not want the phones connected over the
VPN to use the NAPT feature. The network
address (or single IP phone addresses) of the
Remote location would be entered here. This is
for the IP Phones at this location to not use the
NAPT feature.
10-58-02 Network Address Subnet Mask 128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 | 224.0.0.0 255.255.0.0

This program sets the netmask for the IP |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
Addresses assigned in Program 10-58-01. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

NAT Plug and Play 1 = Enable
This program is valid when Program 10-46-14
is On (NAT feature activated).
Select sending RTP port number to remote
Router, use from negotiation result (0) or
received RTP packet (1).
SV9100 uses this program to decide a
destination port of RTP transmitting packets
from IPLE to a remote IP terminal. If 0:OFF is
selected, the destination port of RTP
transmitting packets will be a SIP/SDP
negotiation result.(same behavior as before). If
you chose 1:ON, the destination port of RTP
transmitting packet will be the same port of a
source port of a receiving RTP packet on IPLE.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-05-47 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 60 ~ 65535 seconds 180

Registration Expire Timer for NAT 0 = Disable
On a per station basis, this setting defines the
SIP registration expiry timer.

If this value is set to 0, for a NAPT terminal, the
value in Program 84-23-01 is applied.

Subscribe Expire Timer for NAT 0 = Disable
SIP Subscribe expiry timer.


GPZ-IPLE.


84-26-03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number (RTP 0 ~ 65534 10021
Port Number + 1)
Define the TCP port number for RTCP to use

for each DSP.
In addition to the above programming, define the programming options as required for the system
features.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual and the UNIVERGE SV9100
REFERENCE
Networking Manual for programming details.
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Networking Manual for detailed feature information.
REFERENCE

Issue 2.0
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440 Cordless
Description
Many SMB businesses, understanding the impact of a mobile workforce, are rapidly defining their
requirements for enabling effective communications and information access for mobile users. SMB
Mobility will allow the individual staff member to be instantly accessible- thus becoming more productive.
The ML440 IP Wireless Handset is an ergonomically designed compact wireless handset for business
users who are mobile in the office and want to make and receive wireless calls while in the office. The
DECT protocol operates in the 1.9 GHZ frequency band that has been cleared specifically for voice
applications, thus avoiding any interference problems and delivering crystal clear and secure voice
conversations.
The ML440 provides numerous features and conveniences for optimal comfort. Its illuminated graphic
color LCD display enables use in poorly lit environments, while its internal loudspeaker provides
Handsfree operation with excellent sound quality. Powerful encryption techniques ensure secure
communication, and it can also provide the subscriber with most of the features available for a wired
phone, in addition to its roaming and handover capabilities.
Unlike other in-building wireless solutions for the SV9100, the ML440 is an integrated multiline handset
capable of supporting the key elements of a SMB mobile solution. A complete list of supported features
can be found below.
Basic Operation
Figure 2-28 ML440 Cordless Handset
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440 Cordless 2-755

Issue 2.0
The ML440 has two sets of keys:

Three soft keys that are dedicated depending on the state of the call and four programmable keys.
The three dedicated soft keys are predefined depending on the state of the call. For example once
a person is in conversation, these three keys are Hold / Conf./ Transfer. This makes it easy for end
users to receive and move calls around.
Four programmable keys on the base on the handset. The keys can be programmed for many of
the same features that are supported on the DT800/DT700 desk sets.
Line key programming is flexible. The following is an example for the first three programmable keys:
Line Keys 1 and 2 = CAP Keys
Line Key 3 = Intercom Key
Powering the AP20
The AP20 can only be powered using Power over Ethernet (PoE) 802.3af.
A PoE switch is a switched hub that also provides power over the spare pairs. The switch can be used
with other devices than the IP telephones and detects whether or not power is needed. Using a PoE
switch makes it easier to protect the IP telephones from loss of power (connection of the PoE switch to
an UPS).
Updating the AP20 and ML440 System Firmware
The firmware on base stations and handsets is updated remotely using the HTTP configuration interface
to download firmware files from a TFTP server. Updating base station firmware involves an automatic
reboot of the base station at the end of the firmware download. This will drop any active calls and in
addition updating the handset firmware can take several hours. It is recommended updates are
performed after normal business hours.
Refer to the ML440 and AP20 System Installation Guide for detailed information.
REFERENCE
Handset Features
Local Features ML440
Calling name/number, call logging Yes

Programmable keys Yes up to 4
Talk time/standby 20/220
Handset LCD display 262K TFT type Color LCD with
backlight.176 x 220 pixel display
Built-in vibrator Yes
Speakerphone mode Yes
Bluetooth headset No
Headset Yes
2-756 IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440 Cordless

Issue 2.0
Local Features ML440
Backlit for keys Yes

Volume key up/down Yes
Mute key Yes
Soft keys based on status call Yes
Hold
Conference
Transfer
Centralized Directory Yes
Supported System Feature List
Feature Name ML440 Comment
Account Code Forced Verified/Unverified Yes

Account Code Entry Yes
Alarm Yes There is a system and ML-440 alarm available
Alarm Reports N/A
Alphanumeric Display Yes
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) N/A
Ancillary Device Connection N/A
Answer Hold No
Answer Key N/A
Applications N/A
Attendant Call Queuing No
Automatic Release N/A
Automatic Route Selection Yes
Background Music No
Barge-In Yes Can monitor but cannot use the microphone toggle
feature. The handset mute button is the only way to
mute audio from handset during monitoring.
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys Yes
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys Yes
Call Duration TImer No
Call Forwarding Yes Can be programmed in 24-09-xx, through feature
code from administrator desk set and from the phone
using dial access codes.
Call Forwarding Centrex Yes
Call Forwarding with Follow Me Yes

Issue 2.0
Call Forwarding with Park and Page Yes No recording beep is provided to handset user when
setting up greetings.
Call Forwarding, All, BNA, Busy and Both Ring Yes Can be programmed in 24-09-xx, through feature
code from administrator desk set and from the
ML-440 using dial access codes.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise Yes Can be programmed in 24-09-xx, through feature
code from administrator desk set and from the
ML-440 using dial access codes.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override Yes
Call Monitoring Yes Can monitor but cannot use the microphone toggle
feature. The handset mute button is the only way to
mute audio from handset during monitoring.
Call Queuing Yes
Call Redirect No
Call Transfer Yes Supervised and Unsupervised.
Call Waiting/Camp-On Yes
Callback Yes
Caller ID Yes
Caller ID Return Yes
Central Office Calls, Answering Yes
Central Office Calls, Placing Yes
Class of Service Yes
Clock/Calendar Display Yes
CO Message Waiting Indication No
Code Restriction Yes
Code Restriction Override Yes
Code Restriction, Dial Block Yes No confirmation tone is heard on ML-440.
Computer Telephony Integration No
Conference Calls Yes
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release Yes
Contact Center Yes
Cordless Telephone Connection N/A
Data Line Security Yes
Delayed Ringing Yes
Department Calling Yes
Department Step Calling Yes

Issue 2.0
DeskTop Suite No
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone No
Dial Tone Detection No
Dialing Number Preview No This is a function of the ML-440 Handset.
Dialing Inward Dialing (DID) Yes
Direct Inward Line (DIL) Yes
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) N/A
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console No A DSS Console cannot be associated with a ML-440
Handset
Directed Call Pickup Yes
Directory Dialing No This is a function of the ML-440 Handset.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns No Ring tones can be changed on the ML-440 Handset
only.
Do Not Disturb Yes Do Not Disturb (DND) can be set from the ML-440
using dial access codes or a function key.
Door Box Yes Door Box will not ring a ML-440 phone but will flash
the large LED. A ML-440 can call a door box but
cannot activate a relay to open the door.
Drop Key Yes
E911/911 Yes
Electra Elite Terminal Migration N/A
Facsimile CO Branch Connection N/A
Flash No
Flexible System Numbering Yes
Flexible Timeouts Yes
Forced Trunk Disconnect No
Group Call Pickup Yes
Group Listen No
Hands free No This is a function of the ML-440 Handset.
Hands free Answerback/Forced Intercom No
Handset Mute No This is a function of the ML-440 Handset.
Headset Operation No This is a function of the ML-440 Handset.
Hold Yes
Hotel/Motel No
Hotline Yes

Issue 2.0
Howler Tone Service No

InMail Yes Voice mail softkeys are not provided to the ML-440
Handset.
Intercom Yes
IP Multiline Station (SIP) Yes
IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol N/A
IP Trunk H.323 Yes
ISDN Compatibility Yes
K-CCIS IP Yes
K-CCIS T1 Yes
Last Number Redial No Call Redial function is a function of the ML-440
Handset.
Line Preference No
Long Conversation Cutoff Yes
Meet Me Conference Yes Can initiate a Meet Me Conference but cannot
receive internal pages to join an Internal Meet Me
Page.
Meet Me Paging Yes Can initiate a Meet Me Paging but cannot receive
internal pages to respond to an Internal Meet Me
Page.
Meet Me Paging Transfer Yes Can initiate a Meet Me Paging but cannot receive
Transfer Page.
Memo Dial No
Message Waiting Indication (MWI) Yes Only supports voice mail MWI.
Microphone Cutoff Yes This is a function of the ML-440 Handset.
Multiple Trunk Types Yes
Music on Hold No Callers to a ML440 hear SV9100 MOH. Calls made
from ML440 handsets do not hear MOH.
Name Storing No
NEC Interactive Voice Response Yes
Netlink Yes
Night Service No
Off-Hook Signaling No
Off-Premise Extension N/A
One-Touch Calling Yes Must press Line Key then go Off-hook on ML-440 for
stored number to be dialed.

Issue 2.0
Operator No A ML-440 should not be used as an operator phone.

Paging, External Yes A ML-440 can only initiate an Internal, External or All
Call Page. It cannot receive either Internal or All Call
pages or display page information.
Paging, Internal Yes A ML-440 can only initiate an Internal, External or All
Park Yes
PBX Compatibility Yes
PC Programming Yes
Personal Park Yes
Power Failure Transfer No
Prime Line Selection Yes Prime Line Selection can be assigned for a ML-440
however, when this is done the phone cannot access
ICM dial tone. In addition the ML-440 does not follow
program 20-08-21 settings.
Private Line Yes
Programmable Function Keys Yes
Programming from a Multiline Terminal No
Pulse to Tone Conversion No
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Yes
Repeat Redial No
Reverse Voice Over No
Ring down Extension, Internal/External Yes A ML-440 can be a ring down destination but cannot
originate a ring down call.
Ring Groups Yes
Room Monitor No A ML-440 can be monitored but cannot monitor other
extensions.
Save Number Dialed Yes
Secondary Incoming Extension Yes
Secretary Call (Buzzer) Yes
Secretary Call Pickup Yes Voice announcement is not supported on ML-440
Handset
Selectable Display Messaging Yes
Selectable Ring Tones No Selectable Ring Tones is a function of the ML-440
and not the phone system.
Serial Call Yes

Issue 2.0
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 sets N/A

Softkeys No ML-440 Handset Softkeys are fixed and do not follow
SV9100 Softkey settings.
Speed Dial Group Yes Group speed dial bins are only available using
function line key (28).
Speed Dial System No
Speed Dial Station No
Station Hunt Yes
Station Message Detail Recording Yes
Station Name Assignment User Programmable Yes ML-440 Handset power must be cycled for change to
show on handset.
Station Relocation Yes No confirmation tone is heard. ML-440 Handset must
have the power cycled to re-register with the AP20
base unit.
SV9100 Communications Analyst Enterprise Yes
SV9100 UC Suite No
SV9100 PoE Gigabit Switch Yes
SV9100 Terminals N/A
Synchronous Ringing No
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) Yes
Tandem Ringing No
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) Yes
TAPI Compatibility No
Tone Override Yes
Traffic Reports No
Transfer Yes
Trunk Group Routing Yes
Trunk Groups Yes
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On No
UM8000 Yes Voice mail softkeys are not provided to the ML-440
Handset.
Uniform Call Distribution UCD) Yes
Uniform Numbering Network Yes
User Programming Ability Yes
Virtual Extension Yes
Voice Mail Integration (Analog) Yes

Issue 2.0
Voice Over Yes ML-440 can initiate voice over but cannot respond to
voice from another extension.
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Yes By nature, this is a SIP device.
Voice Response System (VRS) Call Yes
Volume Controls No Volume control is a function of the ML-440 Handset
and not the phone system.
Conditions
The maximum number of ML440 Handsets that can register to one AP20 Access Point is
30.
The maximum number of ML440 Handsets supported in one SV9100 system is 200.
The maximum number of AP20 Access Points supported on one SV9100 is 40.
In a multi-cell system each AP20 supports a maximum of eight simultaneous voice paths.
The ML440 does not support voice announce calls. If the SV9100 is set to voice in Program
20-02-12, each phone should dial use access code 723 to set the phone to ring on internal
calls. The ML440 should also be put in their own class of service with Program 20-08-11
enabled.
In a single base (AP20) system the AP20 supports a maximum of 10 simultaneous voice
paths.
The ML440 and AP20 system uses NEC i-SIP for SV9100.
The ML440 and AP20 system supports the G.711 Codec only.
The ML440 Handset and AP20 Access Point are not supported in UX5000 or UX5000
Migration systems.
The ML440 handset supports Peer-to-Peer in a standalone system only. When used in a
CCISoIP system Peer-to-Peer (Program 15-05-50) must be disabled.
The ML440 Handset does not support the Live Monitor feature.
The line keys on the ML440 correspond to Line Keys 1-4 in Program 15-07-01 for that
phones extension.
The three dedicated soft keys are predefined depending on the state of the call.
The ML440 will follow the ring no answer timing whenever the ML440 handset either is
turned off or is out of range of an AP20.
The SV9100 requires one IP Terminal license (5111), one Port License (0300) and one
VoIP Resource License (5103) per ML440 handset.
The ML440 and AP20 system software is upgraded over-the-air direct to handsets and
access points.

Issue 2.0
The AP20 can only be powered using Power over Ethernet (PoE) 802.3af.
The ML440 and AP20 system supports seamless roaming between Base Units.
The ML440 and AP20 system are not supported for use with DeskTop Suite.
The ML440 and AP20 system cannot be used on multiple SIP servers at the same time.
NAT or NAPT is only supported on DT800/DT700 series phones. NAT or NAPT is not
supported on the ML440, the Wireless DECT (SIP), Softphone and third party SIP phones.
For CID to appear in the call log of the ML440 for all trunk types, Programs 15-02-13 and
15-02-34 must be set for Extension/Trunk. Also, Program 15-05-28 must be set to On for
the ML440 extensions.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
ML440 Handset
AP20 Base Unit
Related Features
Intercom
IP Multiline Station (SIP))

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign the IP address. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255
10-13-01 DHCP Server Mode 0 = Disable 0

Enable/Disable the built-in DHCP Server. 1 = Enable

10-13-02 Lease Time Days 0 ~ 255 0 day
Lease time of the IP address to a client. Press Hour 0 ~ 23 0 hour
the Transfer Key to increment to the next

Minutes 0 ~ 59 30 minutes
setting data.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-13-05 Last DHCP Data 0 = Disable 1

If 10-13-01 is enabled, this setting determines if 1 = Enable
DHCP resource is enabled or disabled.

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.


Peer mode.

NEC recommends the following for the first 751 by default) Manual for
three programmable keys: 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
Line Keys 1 and 2 = CAP Keys Function Code) (Service Code
Line Key 3 = Intercom Key 752 by default)
(08 + XXXX = CAP key where
XXXX is the CAP orbit number
0001-9999)
15-02-13 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = ICM/Trunk (Extension/Trunk 1

Redial List Mode Mode)
Select the type of numbers that are stored in 1 = Trunk Mode
the Redial List Internal and External numbers
(0) or External only (1).
For the ML440 extensions this should be set to
0.
15-02-34 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Call 0 = Trunk Mode 0

Register Mode 1 = Extension/Trunk Mode
The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk calls only (0),
or both Internal and Trunk calls (1).

1.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-05-28 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0 = Do not inform 0

Addition Information Setup 1 = Inform
Determines manner in which CID id presented
to an extension.

1.


Assign ML440 handsets to their own Class of Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
Service. (1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

Set this option for the ML440 Class of Service.
24-09-01 Call Forward Split Settings Call 0 = Call Forwarding Off 0

Forwarding Type: 1 = Call Forwarding with both
Assign Call Forwarding Type and the ring
destination numbers for each extension/virtual 2 = Call Forwarding when no
extension. answer
3 = Call Forwarding all calls
4 = Call Forwarding busy or no
answer
5 = Call Forwarding when busy
24-09-02 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ No Setting

Forwarding Destination for Both Ring, All Maximum of 24 digits
Call, No Answer
Assign CO Call Forwarding Destination for ring,
all call, and no answer.
24-09-03 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ No Setting

Forwarding Destination for Both ring, All Maximum of 24 digits
Call, No Answer
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding Destination
for ring, all call and no answer.

Forwarding Busy Destination Maximum of 24 digits
Assign CO Call Forwarding for busy

destinations.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign Intercom Call Forwarding for busy

destinations.
24-09-06 Call Forward Split Settings Call 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ No Setting

Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for All Maximum of 24 digits
Call, No Answer
Assign Call Forwarding for CTX/PBX all call, no
answer destinations.

Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for Maximum of 24 digits
Busy
Assign Call Forwarding destinations for busy
CTX/PBX calls.
84-24-28 DT800/DT700 Multiline CODEC Information 0 = G.711_PT 0

Basic Setup Audio Capability Priority 2 = G.729_PT
Set voice (RTP packet) encoding parameters.

The ML440 only supports G.711.

GPZ-IPLE.


Port Number + 1)
Define the UDP port number for RTCP to use

for each DSP.
Operation
Refer to the ML440 User Guide for detailed operation information.

REFERENCE

Issue 2.0
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440/G566/G266 with AP400/AP300
Description
ML440:
Many SMB businesses, understanding the impact of a mobile workforce, are rapidly defining their
requirements for enabling effective communications and information access for mobile users. SMB
Mobility will allow the individual staff member to be instantly accessible thus becoming more productive.
The ML440 IP Wireless Handset is an ergonomically designed compact wireless handset for business
users who are mobile in the office and want to make and receive wireless calls while in the office. The
DECT protocol operates in the 1.9 GHZ frequency band that has been cleared specifically for voice
applications, thus avoiding any interference problems and delivering crystal clear and secure voice
conversations.
The ML440 provides numerous features and conveniences for optimal comfort. Its illuminated graphic
color LCD display enables use in poorly lit environments, while its internal loudspeaker provides
handsfree operation with excellent sound quality. Powerful encryption techniques ensure secure
communication, and it can also provide the subscriber with most of the features available for a wired
phone, in addition to its roaming and handover capabilities.
Unlike other in-building wireless solutions for the SV9100, the ML440 is an integrated multiline handset
capable of supporting the key elements of a SMB mobile solution. A complete list of supported features
can be found below.
Basic Operation
Figure 2-29 ML440 Cordless Handset
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440/G566/G266 with AP400/AP300 2-769

Issue 2.0
The ML440 has two sets of keys:

Three softkeys that are dedicated depending on the state of the call and four programmable keys.
The three dedicated softkeys are predefined depending on the state of the call. For example once
a person is in conversation, these three keys are Hold / Conf./ Transfer. This makes it easy for end
users to receive and move calls around.
Four programmable keys on the base on the handset. The keys can be programmed for many of
the same features that are supported on the DT800/DT700 desk sets.
Line key programming is flexible. The following is an example for the first three programmable keys:
Line Keys 1 and 2 = CAP Keys
Line Key 3 = Intercom Key
G566 andG266:
The G566 and G266 operate as standard SIP devices when connected to a SV9100. The line keys on
the G566 are not functional in this application.
Figure 2-30 G566 and G266 in Desktop Charger
Powering the AP400/AP300
The AP400/AP300 can only be powered using Power over Ethernet (PoE) 802.3af. A PoE switch is a
switched hub that also provides power over the spare pairs. The switch can be used with other devices
than the IP telephones and detects whether or not power is needed. Using a PoE switch makes it easier
to protect the IP telephones from loss of power (connection of the PoE switch to an UPS).
2-770 IP Multiline Station (SIP) ML440/G566/G266 with AP400/AP300

Issue 2.0
Updating the AP400 and ML440/G566/G266 System Firmware
The firmware on base stations and handsets is updated remotely using the HTTP configuration interface
to download firmware files from a TFTP server. Updating base station firmware involves an automatic
reboot of the base station at the end of the firmware download. This will drop any active calls and in
addition updating the handset firmware can take several hours. It is recommended updates are
performed after normal business hours.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 IP-DECT Customer Engineer Manual for additional
REFERENCE
information.
Conditions
DAP Manager is required to support AP400 Access Points and ML440 handsets.
The ML440 handset requires AP400 Access Points.
The DAP manager does not support Internet Explorer 10 (IE 10).
Only AP400 and AP300 DAPs are supported for ML440/G566/G266 handsets.
The AP400/AP300 with ML440/G566/G266 handsets are not supported behind NAT
routers.
The line keys on the ML440 correspond to Line Keys 1-4 in Program 15-07-01 for that
phones extension.
The line keys on the G566 handset do not function when connected to a SV9100.
The three dedicated softkeys on the ML440 are predefined depending on the state of the
call and the handset type used.
12 simultaneous calls can be made per AP400/AP300 Access Point.
The maximum number of AP400/AP300 DAPs is 256.
The ML440/G566/G266 and AP400/AP300 will follow the Ring No Answer timing whenever
the ML440 handset is either turned off or out of range of an AP400.
The SV9100 requires one IP Terminal license (5111), one Port License (0300) and one
VoIP Resource License (5103) per ML440, G566 or G266 handset.
The G566 and G266 handsets do not support Peer-to-Peer.
The ML440 handset supports Peer-to-Peer in a standalone system only. When used in a
CCISoIP system Peer-to-Peer (Program 15-05-50) must be disabled.
The AP400/AP300 can only be powered using Power over Ethernet (PoE) 802.3af.
The ML440/G566/G266 firmware is upgraded over-the-air to handsets.
The ML440/G566/G266 and AP400/AP300 system supports seamless roaming between
Base Units.

Issue 2.0
The ML440/G566/G266 and AP400/AP300 system are not supported for use with DeskTop
Suite.
The ML440/G566/G266 and AP400/AP300 system cannot be used on multiple SIP servers
at the same time.
The ML440/G566/G266 and AP400/AP300 do not support voice announce calls. If the
SV9100 is set to voice in Program 20-02-12 then each phone should use access code 723
to set the phone to ring on internal calls.
The ML440/G566/G266 should be put in their own class of service with Program 20-08-11
enabled.
The ML440/G566/G266 with AP400/AP300 only supports the G.711 Codec and 20ms
frame size.
For CID to appear in the call log of the ML440 for all trunk types, Programs 15-02-13 and
15-02-34 must be set for Extension/Trunk. Also, Program 15-05-28 must be set to On for
the ML440 extensions.
Table 2-56 Handset Features
Local Feature ML440 G566 G266
Calling name/number, call logging Yes Yes Yes
Programmable keys Yes up to 4 No No
Talk time/standby 20/220
Handset LCD display 262K TFT type Color

LCD w/backlight. 176 x
220 pixel display
Built-in vibrator Yes Yes Yes
Speakerphone mode Yes Yes Yes
Bluetooth headset No No No
Headset connection Yes Yes Yes
Backlit for keys Yes Yes No
Volume key up/down Yes Yes Yes
Mute key Yes Yes Yes
Softkeys based on status call Yes Yes Yes

Hold Mute Mute
Conference
Transfer
Centralized directory Yes Yes Yes

Issue 2.0
Table 2-57 Supported System Feature List
Feature Name ML440 G566 G266 Comments
Account Code - Forced/Verified/ Yes Yes Yes

Unverified
Account Code Entry Yes Yes Yes
Alarm Yes Yes No Supported Alarms:

ML440 System and handset alarm available.
G566 System and handset alarm available.
Alarm Reports No No No
Alphanumeric Display Yes Yes Yes Time and Date Display:

ML440 obtains time and date from SV9100 system.
G566/G266 time and date is obtained from the DAP
controller PC.
Name:
ML440 obtains display name from network domain.
G556/G266 name is assigned per handset and does
not use the SV9100 system name.
Analog Communications Interface No No No

(ACI)
Ancillary Device Connection No No No
Answer Hold No No No
Answer Key No No No
Applications No No No
Attendant Call Queuing No No No
Automatic Release Yes Yes Yes
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Yes Yes Yes
Background Music No No No
Barge-In Yes No No ML440 Can monitor but cannot use the microphone
toggle feature. The handset mute button is the only
way to mute audio from handset during monitoring.
G566/G266 Can be barged into but cannot initiate
Barge-In.
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys Yes No No
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys Yes No No
Call Duration Timer No No No G566/G266 will show call duration briefly after hanging
up. More detailed call history information is available
on the call history log page.
Call Forwarding Centrex Yes Yes Yes
Call Forwarding with Follow Me Yes Yes Yes Only supported on G566/G266 when connected to
system (In Range).
Call Forwarding Park and Page No No No
Call Forwarding All Calls Yes Yes Yes Can be programmed in 24-09-xx, through feature code
from administrator desk set and from the handset

Issue 2.0
Table 2-57 Supported System Feature List (Continued)
Call Forwarding Both Ring Yes Yes Yes Only supported on G566/G266 when connected to
system (In Range).
Call Forwarding Busy Yes Yes Yes
Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Yes Yes Yes
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise Yes Yes Yes Can be programmed in 24-09-xx, through feature code
from administrator desk set and from the handset
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Yes Yes Yes ML440 Do Not Disturb Override can be performed
Override using dial access codes or a function key.
G566/G266 Do Not Disturb Override can be
performed using dial access codes only.
Call Monitoring Yes Yes Yes ML440/G566/G266 Can monitor but cannot use the
microphone toggle feature. The handset will not be
able to Barge-In to the conversation only monitor.
Call Redirect Yes No No
Call Waiting/Camp-On Yes Yes Yes ML440 Call Waiting/Camp-On can be performed
using dial access codes or a function key.
G566/G266 Call Waiting/Camp-On can be
performed using dial access code only.
Callback Yes No No G566/G266 handsets can receive a Callback but

cannot set one for another phone.
Caller ID Yes Yes Yes
Caller ID Caller Return Yes Yes Yes Function of handset.
Central Office Calls, Answering Yes Yes Yes
Central Office Calls, Placing Yes Yes Yes
Class of Service Yes Yes Yes
Clock/Calendar Display Yes Yes Yes Time and Date Display:

ML440 obtains time and date from SV9100 system.
G566/G266 time and date is set manually per
handset.
CO Message Waiting Indication No No No
Code Restriction Yes Yes Yes
Code Restriction Override Yes No No
Code Restriction, Dial Block Yes Yes Yes ML440 No confirmation tone is heard on ML440.
G566/G266 Only non-supervisor dial access code
600 is supported for these handsets. The G566/G266
cannot enable or disable this feature for another
extension.
Computer Telephony Integration No No
Conference Calls Yes No No
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Yes No No

Release
Contact Center Yes No No

Issue 2.0
Cordless Telephone Connection No No No
Data Line Security Yes No No
Delayed Ringing Yes No No
Department Calling Yes Yes Yes
Department Step Calling Yes No No
Desktop Suite No No No
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone No No No
Dial Tone Detection No No No
Dialing Number Preview No Yes Yes This is a function of the handset.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Yes Yes Yes
Direct Inward Line (DIL) Yes Yes Yes
Direct Inward System Access No No No

(DISA)
Direct Station Selection Key No No No
Direct Station Selection (DSS) No No No A DSS Console cannot be associated with a ML440/
Console G566/G266 handset.
Directed Call Pickup Yes No No
Directory Dialing No No No This is a function of the ML440/G566/G266 handset.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and No No No Ring tones can be changed on the ML440/G566/G266
Flash Patterns handset only.
Do Not Disturb Yes Yes Yes ML440 Do Not Disturb (DND) can be set using dial
access codes or a function key but no confirmation
tones are provided.
G566/G266 Do Not Disturb (DND) can be set using
dial access codes only.
Door Box Yes Yes Yes ML440 A Door Box will not ring a ML440 phone but
will flash the large LED. A ML440 can call a door box
but cannot activate a relay to open the door.
G556/G266 A Door Box will ring a G566/G266 but
they cannot activate a relay to open the door. A G566/
G266 can call a door box but cannot activate a relay to
open the door.
Drop Key Yes No No
E911/911 Yes No No
Flash No No No
Flexible System Numbering Yes Yes Yes
Flexible Timeouts Yes Yes Yes
Forced Trunk Disconnect No No No
Group Call Pickup Yes Yes Yes
Group Listen No No No

Issue 2.0
Handset Mute Yes Yes Yes This is a function of the handset.
Handsfree Yes Yes Yes This is a function of the handset.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced No No No
Intercom
Headset Operation Yes Yes Yes This is a function of the handset.
Hold Yes Yes Yes G566/G266 supported system hold only.
Hotel/Motel No No No
Hotline Yes No No Ml440 The ML440 does not follow Hotline for
speaker 20-08-19 only Hotline for hand piece
20-08-09.
Howler Tone Service No No No
InMail Yes Yes Yes Voice mail softkeys are not provided to handset. Live
monitor is not supported.
Intercom Yes Yes Yes
IP Multiline Station (SIP) Yes No No
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) No Yes Yes
IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Yes Yes Yes

Protocol
IP Trunk H.323 Yes Yes Yes
ISDN Compatibility Yes Yes Yes
K-CCIS IP Yes Yes Yes The following programs must be disabled, set to 0,
when using a ML440 handset in a CCISoIP network:
Peer-to-Peer 15-05-50 (0)
Link Reconnect 50-06-01 (0)
K-CCIS T1 Yes Yes Yes
Last Number Redial Yes Yes Yes Call Redial function is a function of the handset.
Line Preference Yes No No
Long Conversation Cutoff Yes Yes Yes With ML440 an alarm tone is not provided before
cutoff.
Meet Me Conference Yes No No The ML440 can initiate a Meet Me Conference but
cannot receive internal pages to join an internal Meet
Me Conference.
Meet Me Paging Yes Yes Yes Can initiate a Meet Me Paging but cannot receive
Page.
Meet Me Paging Transfer Yes Yes Yes Can initiate a Meet Me Paging Transfer but cannot
receive internal pages to respond to an Internal Meet
Me Transfer page.
Memo Dial No No No
Message Waiting Indication (MWI) Yes No No ML440 only supports voice mail MWI.
Microphone Cutoff Yes Yes Yes This is a function of the ML440 handset.

Issue 2.0
Multiple Trunk Types Yes Yes Yes
Music on Hold Yes Yes Yes Intercom Calls:

ML440 does not receive MOH.
G566/G266 does receive MOH.
Trunk Calls:
All handsets receive MOH from distant system.
Name Storing No No No
NEC Interactive Voice Response Yes Yes Yes
NetLink Yes Yes Yes
Night Service No No No
Off-Hook Signaling No No No
Off-Premise Extension No No No
One-Touch Calling Yes No No Must press line key then go Off-hook on ML440 for
stored number to be dialed.
Operator No No No A wireless handset should not be used as an operator

phone.
Paging, External Yes Yes Yes A ML440/G566/ZG266 can only initiate an External or
All Call Page. It cannot receive either Internal or All
Call Pages or display page information.
Paging, Internal Yes Yes Yes A ML440/G566/ZG266 can only initiate an External or
All Call Page. It cannot receive either Internal or All
Call Pages or display page information.
Park Yes Yes Yes
PBX Compatibility Yes Yes Yes
PC Programming Yes Yes Yes
Personal Park Yes No No
Power Failure Transfer No No No
Prime Line Selection Yes Yes Yes Prime Line Selection can be assigned for ML440/
G566/G266 handsets. However, when this is done the
phone cannot access ICM dial tone.
Private Line Yes Yes Yes
Programmable Function Keys Yes No No
Programming from a Multiline No No No

Terminal
Pulse to Tone Conversion Yes No No
PVA Conference Bridge Yes No No
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Yes Yes Yes ML440 can receive and make Quick Transfer to VM
calls.
G566/G266 can only receive Quick Transfer to VM
calls.
Repeat Redial Yes No No

Issue 2.0
Reverse Voice Over Yes No No
Ringdown Extension, Internal/ Yes Yes Yes ML440 The ML440 does not follow Hotline for
External speaker 20-08-19 only Hotline for hand piece
20-08-09.
G566/G266 The G566/G266 can be a hotline
destination, but cannot originate a hotline call.
Ring Groups Yes Yes Yes
Room Monitor No No No
Save Number Dialed Yes Yes Yes
Secondary Incoming Extension Yes No No
Secretary Call (Buzzer) Yes No No
Secretary Call Pickup Yes No No Voice announcement is not supported on ML440

handset.
Selectable Display Messaging Yes No No
Selectable Ring Tones Yes Yes Yes Selectable Ring Tones is a function of the handset and
not the phone system.
Serial Call Yes No No
Single Line Telephones, Analog No No No

500/2500 Sets
Softkeys No No No All handset softkeys are fixed and do no follow

SV9100 soft key settings.
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station Yes Yes Yes ML440 Speed dial bins are available using function
line key (28 for group and 27 for system) and dial
access codes.
G566/G366 Must use dial access codes to use
speed dial feature.
Cannot be used to program speed dial entries.
Station Hunt Yes Yes Yes
Station Message Detail Recording Yes Yes Yes
Station Name Assignment User No No No

Programmable
Station Relocation No No No
SV9100 Desktop Applications No No No
Synchronous Ringing No No No
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Yes Yes Yes

Compatibility)
Tandem Ringing No No No
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Yes No No The Unsupervised Conference will be disconnected

Conference) automatically based on Program 24-02-07.
TAPI Compatibility No No No
Tone Override Yes No No

Issue 2.0
Transfer Yes Yes Yes ML440 Supervised and Unsupervised.

G566/G266 Supervised only.
Trunk Group Routing Yes Yes Yes
Trunk Groups Yes Yes Yes
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On Yes No No Ml440 must use feature key programmed with Trunk
Queue function (35).
UM8000 Mail Yes Yes Yes Voice mail softkeys are not provided to ML440/G566/
G266 handsets.
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Yes Yes Yes G566/G266 handsets can be members of a UCD
group, but since they do not support programmable
feature keys have no way to remove or add
themselves to the group.
Uniform Numbering Network Yes Yes Yes
User Programming Ability Yes No No
Virtual Extensions Yes No No
Voice Mail Integration (Analog) Yes Yes Yes
Voice Over Yes No No ML440 can initiate voice over but cannot respond to a
voice from another extension.
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Yes Yes Yes By nature, these are SIP devices.
Voice Response System (VRS) Yes No No The ML440 can be used to record and erase VRS
Call messages. However, no beep to record or
confirmation beep is provided, so it is not
recommended.
Volume Controls Yes Yes Yes Volume control is a function of the ML440/G566/G266
handset, not the phone system.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
ML440 Handset
G566 Handset
G266 Handset

Issue 2.0
AP400 Base Unit
IP Terminal License (5111) 1 for each G566 or G266 handset
IP Terminal License (5111) 1 for each ML440 handset
DAP Controller PC
DAP Controller Site License
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Intercom
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP)
Softkeys
UM8000 Mail
InMail


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
Assign the default gateway IP address for the 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

Set the Subnet mask of the GPZ-IPLE. |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

Enable/Disable the built-in DHCP Server.
10-13-02 Lease Time Days 0 ~ 255 0 day

Lease time of the IP address to a client. Press Hour 0 ~ 23 0 hour
the Transfer Key to increment to the next

Minutes 0 ~ 59 30 minutes
setting data.
10-13-05 Last DHCP Data 0 = Disable 1

If 10-13-01 is enabled, this setting determines if 1 = Enable
DHCP resource is enabled or disabled.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.
14-02-23 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID 0 = Wait Caller ID 1

Receiving Method 1 = Immediate Ring
Rings extension before receiving Caller ID (1)
or after receiving Caller ID (0).
Recommended setting is 0 (Wait Caller ID).

For the ML440/G566/G266 extensions this
should be set to 0.


should be set to 1.

Determines manner in which CID id presented
to an extension.

should be set to 1.


Peer mode.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

NEC recommends the following for the first 751 by default) Manual for
three programmable keys on a ML440:
Line Keys 1 and 2 = CAP Keys Function Code) (Service Code
Line Key 3 = Intercom Key 752 by default)
(08 + XXXX = CAP key where
XXXX is the CAP orbit number
0001-9999)


This should be set to Signal (1) or each ML440
should be set to Signal manually using dial access
code 723.

Assign ML440 handsets to their own Class of Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
Service. (1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

Set this option for the ML440/G566/G266
handset Class of Service. When an extension is
set to ring mode for ICM calls, enabling this

option prevents callers from changing the call to
voice announce mode.
This setting should be Enabled (1) for the
ML440/G566/G266 handset Class of Service.

Forwarding Type: 1 = Call Forwarding with both
Assign Call Forwarding Type and the ring
destination numbers for each extension/virtual 2 = Call Forwarding when no
extension. answer
answer

Forwarding Destination for Both Ring, All Maximum of 24 digits
Call, No Answer
Assign CO Call Forwarding Destination for ring,
all call, and no answer.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
24-09-03 Call Forward Split Settings - Intercom Call 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ No Setting

Forwarding Destination for Both ring, All Maximum of 24 digits
Call, No Answer
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding Destination
for ring, all call and no answer.

Assign CO Call Forwarding for busy

destinations.

Assign Intercom Call Forwarding for busy

destinations.

Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for All Maximum of 24 digits
Call, No Answer
Assign Call Forwarding for CTX/PBX all call, no
answer destinations.

Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for Maximum of 24 digits
Busy
Assign Call Forwarding destinations for busy
CTX/PBX calls.
84-24-01 DT800/DT700 Multiline CODEC Information 1 = 10ms 2

Basic Setup Number of G.711 Audio 2 = 20ms
Frames
Input the amount of audio in the packets when
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
using the G.711 Codec.
This should be set to 20ms (2).
84-24-28 DT800/DT700 Multiline CODEC Information 0 = G.711_PT 0
Basic Setup Audio Capability Priority 2 = G.729_PT
Set voice (RTP packet) encoding parameters.

The ML440 only supports G.711.

GPZ-IPLE.


Port Number + 1)

for each DSP.

Issue 2.0
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 IP-DECT Customer Engineer Manual for additional information.
For specific handset information, refer to the following:
REFERENCE
ML440 End User Guide
G266 and G566 Handsets User Guide

Issue 2.0
Description
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) is used for Voice over Internet Protocol. It is defined by the IETF
(Internet Engineering Task Force) RFC3261. Other RFC designations, such as RFC3842, refer to a
later implementation of SIP and may be supported by the UNIVERGE SV9100. Commonly called SIP
Station, this feature is used for IP Stations using SIP.
SIP analyzes requests from clients and retrieves responses from servers, then sets call parameters at
either end of the communication, handles call transfer, and terminates. Typically, such features,
including but not limited to Voice over IP services, are available from an SIP service provider.
Depending on licensing, each GPZ-IPLE application can support a maximum of 256 TDM Talk paths.
This total may be shared among SIP Stations or SIP Trunks. Registered SIP Stations and/or SIP Trunks
require a one-to-one relation with the GPZ-IPLE DSP Resource. This is a required component of SIP
implementation in the SV9100.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10 contains a regular TCP/RTP/IP stack that can handle real-time
media, support industry standard SIP (RFC 3261) communication on the WAN side, and interface with
the GPZ-IPLE.
SIP IP Stations use the GPZ-IPLE. The GPZ-IPLE controls and interprets RTP messaging from the SIP
IP Phone to the UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10.
The GPZ-IPLE supports only those Codecs that are considered to provide toll-quality equivalent speech
path. The following voice compression methods are supported for the IP Station SIP feature:
G.711 -Law Highest Bandwidth
G.722 Wideband
G.729 Mid-Range Bandwidth
For the minimum bandwidth requirements for each voice call refer to Table 2-58 Minimum Bandwidth
Requirements. This includes all the overhead of VoIP communication, including signaling).
Table 2-58 Minimum Bandwidth Requirements
Time Theoretical
Transmit Receive Data Packetization Default Jitter
Codec Between Maximum
Data Rate Rate Delay Buffer Delay
Packets MOS
G.711 90Kbps 90Kbps 20ms 1.5ms 2 datagrams 4.4

-Law (40ms)
G.722 64Kbps 64Kbps 20ms 1ms 2 datagrams 4.5
(40ms)
G.729 34Kbps 34Kbps 20ms 15.0ms 2 datagrams 4.07
(40ms)
2-786 IP Single Line Telephone (SIP)

Issue 2.0
The GPZ-IPLE contains a regular TCP/RTP/IP stack that can handle real time media. The
GPZ-IPLE daughter board is an end-point on the IP network from the network administration
perspective.
The GCD-CP10 uses SIP Protocol to provide telephony services between remote stations through
the IP Network. This is an IETF/ITU standards-based protocol.
Speech-connection audio quality depends greatly on the available bandwidth between the stations
in the data network. Because Internet is an uncontrolled data network compared to an Intranet,
using this application in Intranet WAN environment with known (or controlled and assured) Quality
of Service (QoS) is highly recommended.
An on-board RJ-45 connector provides a WAN/LAN connection. Voice and signaling data to/from
the IP Stations are converted into IP Frames and transmitted through the Data Communication IP
Network.
The GPZ-IPLE supports a maximum of 256 VoIP connections
Duplex mode (Auto or Full) and speed (10, 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps) are configured via SV9100
chassis programming.
The IPLE does not support half duplex, only full duplex is supported.
UNIVERGE SV9100 supports a 100 rel option and Session Timer option.
UNIVERGE SV9100 supports Early Media.
UNIVERGE SV9100 SIP restricts an outgoing call under the following conditions:
SIP configuration failed
SIP registration failed
GCD-CP10 Link down
Lack of GPZ-IPLE resource
Both the signaling and voice ports can be configured in the SV9100. This change only affects the
packets from the SV9100 to the IP Phone. A change must be made in the IP phone to affect the
packets from the IP Phone to the SV9100.
ToS Support.
Conditions
Documentation for Polycom devices are available at http://www.polycom.com/
voicedocumentation.
By default Polycom devices use # to initiate dialing. Therefore, # cannot be used in a dial
string without a configuration change to the Polycom device. For example, dialing the
default Park access code #6 will not work from a Polycom device because it starts dialing
after the #, ignoring everything after. In this case, either the Park access code must be
changed to not include a #, or the Remove End-Of-Dial Marker option must be disabled in
the Polycom SIP Configuration Local Settings.
SIP Stations which support RFC 3842 (Message Waiting) receive Message Waiting Lamp
indications.
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) 2-787

Issue 2.0
Video Codecs H.264, H.263, and H.261 are supported.

Video is supported when P2P for standard SIP is turned on. (Program 15-05-50 SIP Peer to
Peer Mode ON)
Auto start video when call is answered is not supported.
Standard SIP video Codecs are not supported across CCIS.
Standard SIP video Codecs are not supported across NetLink.
Standard SIP terminal can not negotiate video Codec with Softphone.
SIP protocol (RFC3261) is used.
SIP Station uses the GPZ-IPLE as a media gateway.
Default UDP listen port for a SIP station is 5070.
UNIVERGE SV9100 Station registration policy supports an authentication feature. Enabling
this policy prevents the registered telephone from unexpected override.
UNIVERGE SV9100 supports HOLD and TRF feature on the basis of IETF draft.
draft-ietf-sipping-service-examples-09.txt
Section 2.5 (Transfer - Attended) of draft-ietf-sipping-service-examples-15.txt
draft-ietf-sip-session-timer-10.txt
When all VoIP DSP resources are busy, the SIP phone cannot preempt active calls to
make a 911 call.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10 is the registration server for the SIP stations. The
configurable IP Address is located in Program 10-12-09 (SV9100 Network Setup IP
Address).
T.38 (Fax) is supported for 3rd Party SIP IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) station ports.
Program 15-03-03 must be set to 1 (Special) at the receiving terminal in order for T.38 to
function.
With SV9100 system software and GPZ-IPLE daughter board installed, half duplex
connections are not supported. For troubleshooting purposes, a managed switch capable
of port mirroring is required to capture packet data from the SV9100 IPLE Ethernet port.
When using 3rd party SIP stations, the SIP server name can not contain a parenthesis.
When out of band DTMF is used (via RFC2833), the GPZ-IPLE supports a payload of
96 ~ 127.
If a user on a standard SIP phone is talking to another station using Voice Announce (the
receiving station has not pressed speaker or lifted the handset) and the SIP phone user
presses transfer or hold, the call is terminated. A standard SIP call cannot be placed on
hold or transferred until the other party answers.
The Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is used when an internal call from a 3rd Party SIP
telephone is placed on hold.

Issue 2.0
The system has the ability to receive DTMF information in SIP INFO messages sent by
Standard SIP terminals. This allows the SIP Terminal to initiate features during a ringing
state such as Camp-On and Message Waiting. SIP terminals must be able to support this
feature and have it enabled.
If Program 15-05-49 is set to 1: Allowed any time, SIP INFO is received upon arrival.
If Program 15-05-49 is set to 2: Allowed while RTP is not available, SIP INFO is received
while RTP is not established. An In-band method such as RFC2833 is used once the voice
path is established.
SIP INFO functions independently from other DTMF methods such as RFC2833. This
means SIP terminals should send DTMF information by a single method, otherwise the
system will receive both separately causing double digits.
NAT or NAPT is only supported on the DT800/DT700 series phones. NAT or NAPT is not
supported on the ML440, the Wireless DECT (SIP), or Softphone phones.
The SV9100 supports NAT for Standard SIP terminals.
Table 2-59 Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device
Standard
Feature Name Comments
SIP
Account Code - Forced/Verified/Unverified Yes Depending on SIP device the account code may have to
be part of the dial string.
Alarm No
Alarm Reports No
Alphanumeric Display Yes Some SIP devices have Alphanumeric Displays and are
backlit. However, the display is not updated with CPU
messages.
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) No
Ancillary Device Connection No
Answer Hold No
Answer Key No
Automatic Release Yes
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Yes
Background Music No
Barge-In Yes
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys No
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys No
Call Duration Timer No Call Duration timer is a function of the client device and is
not the system timer.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-59 Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device (Continued)
Standard
SIP
Call Forwarding Yes Can be programmed in 24-09-xx, through feature code

from administrator desk set and from the SIP device using
dial access codes. In some cases Call Forwarding can be
set on SIP device itself but this not system side
forwarding.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me No
Call Forwarding Park and Page No
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise Yes Can be programmed in 24-09-xx, through feature code
from administrator desk set and in some cases from the
SIP device using dial access codes.
Call Monitoring No
Call Redirect No
Call Waiting/Camp-On No
Callback Yes
Caller ID Caller Return Yes Caller ID Call Return is a SIP device feature not a system
feature.
Caller ID Yes Caller ID is shown only on ISDN, SIP or Analog CO trunks

that are directed at the SIP device. Caller ID will not
display for calls transferred to the SIP device.
Call Transfer Yes Only Announce/Supervised transfer is supported.
Clock/Calendar Display No
Code Restriction Override No
Code Restriction, Dial Block Yes
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) No

Applications
Conference No
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release No
Contact Center No
Cordless Telephone Connection No
Data Line Security Yes
Delayed Ringing No

Issue 2.0
Standard
SIP
Department Calling No
Department Group All Ring Yes
Dialing Number Preview Yes
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Yes
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) No
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console No
Directory Dialing No
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns No
Do Not Disturb Yes Do Not Disturb (DND) can be set from the SIP device
using dial access codes. In some cases Do Not Disturb
can be set via the SIP device but is not system side DND.
Do Not Disturb/Call Forward Override Yes
Door Box Yes Door Box will not ring a SIP device. A SIP device can call
a door box but cannot activate the relay.
Drop Key No
Dterm Handset Cordless No
Dterm IP Gateway System No
E-911 Compatibility No
Electra Elite Terminal Migration No
Facsimile CO Branch Connection No
Flash No
Flexible System Numbering Yes
Group Listen No
Handset Mute Yes Handset mute is a function of the SIP device.
Handset Operation Yes
Handsfree and Monitor Yes Handsfree is a feature of the SIP device.

Issue 2.0
Standard
SIP
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing No
Hold Yes
Hotel/Motel No
Hotline Yes A SIP device can be a hotline destination, but cannot

originate a hotline call.
InMail Yes
Intercom Yes
IP Multiline Station (SIP) No
IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol Yes
IP Trunk H.323 No
K-CCIS IP Yes
K-CCIS T1 Yes
Last Number Redial No
Line Preference No
Meet Me Conference No
Meet Me Paging Yes
Meet Me Paging Transfer Yes A SIP device can receive a Meet Me Paging Transfer but
it cannot originate a Meet Me Paging transfer call.
Memo Dial No
Message Waiting No
Message Waiting Answer Yes
Microphone Cutoff Yes Microphone Cutoff is a function of the SIP device.
Music on Hold Yes
NetLink Yes
Name Storing No
NEC Interactive Voice Response No
Night Service No
Off-Hook Signaling No
Off-Hook Signaling Override Yes

Issue 2.0
Standard
SIP
One-Touch Calling No
Operator Yes
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension No
Paging, External Yes A SIP device can only initiate an Internal, External or All
Paging, Internal Yes A SIP device can only initiate an Internal, External or All
Park No
PC Programming Yes
Prime Line Selection Yes Prime Line Selection can be assigned for Standard SIP
devices, however when this is done the telephones
cannot access ICM dial tone.
Private Line Yes
Programmable Function Keys No
Programming from a Multiline Terminal No
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Yes Multiline Telephones can Quick Transfer to a SIP devices
mailbox, but a SIP device cannot execute Quick Transfer.
Redial Function No Call Redial Function is a function of the client device and
not the system.
Repeat Redial No
Ring Groups Yes
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External Yes A SIP device can be a ring down destination but cannot
originate a ring down call.
Room Monitor No
Save Number Dialed No
Secondary Incoming Extension No
Secretary Call (Buzzer) No
Secretary Call Pickup No
Selectable Display Messaging No
Selectable Ring Tones Yes Selectable Ring Tones is a function of the client device.
Serial Call No

Issue 2.0
Standard
SIP
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets No
Softkeys No
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station No
Station Hunt No
Station Name Assignment User Programmable No
Station Relocation No
SV9100 Communications Analyst Enterprise Yes
SV9100 PoE Gigabit Switch No
SV9100 UC Suite No
SV9100 Terminals No
Synchronous Ringing No
Tandem Ringing No
Tone Override No
Traffic Reports No
Transfer Yes Transferred calls cannot be pulled back once transfer is

initiated.
Trunk Groups Yes
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) No
UM8000 Yes
Virtual Extensions No Limited user customization available.
Voice Call & Signal Switching Yes Can only send voice/signal switch.
Voice Over No

Issue 2.0
Standard
SIP
Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Yes

Park and Page
Volume Controls Yes Volume control is a function of the client device.
Wireless DECT No
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
SIP Terminals Compliant with RFC 3261, RFC 3262, RFC 3264 (Session Description Protocol),
RFC 1889 (Real Time Protocol).
Required Components
GCD-CP10
GPZ-IPLE
Related Features
None

Issue 2.0
STD SIP Transfer-Unattended
Description
With SV9100 software, any standard SIP terminal can perform an Unattended (Blind/Unsupervised)
transfer. Refer to Section 2.4 (transfer-Unattended) of draft-ietf-sipping-service-examples-15.txt.
Conditions
Program15-05-50 (Peer to Peer Mode) must be disabled for the Unattended Transfer to be
performed.
A SIP terminal must receive the re-Invite message of Session Timer in a state of
Unattended transfer.
When the transfer destination terminal is busy, unanswered or the extension number in the
Refer-To header is wrong or out of service, the call is sent back to the original terminal.
If the standard SIP phone is placed on hold/park from another extension, this call cannot be
transferred until the station that placed the call on hold/park retrieves the call. An
unattended transfer can only be completed while both parties are in a talking state.
The SV9100 supports both Attended and Unattended transfers.
An unattended transfer can only be performed to the following locations:
Extension Number
Department Group Pilot Number
Group Pilot Number
Operator Access
Trunk/Alternate trunk access code
F-Route Access
Network Access
Quick transfer to Voice Mail is not supported when using Unattended Transfer.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
Standard SIP Terminal

Issue 2.0
Required Components
GCD-CP10
GPZ-IPLE
Related Features
Transfer

VoIP Settings:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

cannot start with the same leading digits as the
IP Address assigned here.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Define the Media Gateway Subnet Mask |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
Address. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255
10-19-01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection 0 = Common use for both IP Resource 1 = 1
Select type of GPZ-IPLE DSP Resource. This extensions and trunks Resource
program setting has no affect on the terminal/ 1 = IP Extension 2 ~ 256 = 0
trunk port assignment or usage. 2 = SIP Trunk
3 = CCIS/Networking
4 = Use for NetLink
5 = Blocked
6 = Common without Unicast
Paging
7 = Multicast Paging
8 = Unicast Paging

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3



Peer mode.
84-06-01 PVA Data Setting RTP Port Number 0 ~ 65535 10020

Define the Media Gateway starting RTP Port
Number.
84-06-02 PVA Data Setting RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number + 1 10021
Define the Media Gateway Starting RTCP Port
Number. The RTCP Port Number is the RTP

port number + 1.
84-06-04 PVA Data Setting Fract Lost Threshold 0 ~ 100% 0

Define the fractional lost threshold this data is
sent to the UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10

when the value exceeds the defined value.
84-06-05 PVA Data Setting Packets Lost Threshold 0 ~ 16777215 0

Define the packet lost threshold this data is
sent to the UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10

when the value exceeds the defined value.
84-06-07 PVA Data Setting Jitter Threshold 0 ~ 4294967295 seconds 0

Define the Jitter Threshold this data is sent to
the UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10 when the

value exceeds the defined value.
84-06-09 PVA Data Setting Delay LSR Threshold 0 ~ 4294967295 seconds 0

Define the Delay threshold this data is sent to
the UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10 when the

value exceeds the defined value.

Issue 2.0
VoIP ToS Setup:
The UNIVERGE SV9100 supports Quality of Service (QoS) Marking for the Session Initiation Protocol
(SIP).
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


2 = Diffserv
are invalid.
IP Extension Numbering:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-02-01 Extension Numbering Maximum of eight digits 1 101

Define the IP Phone extension number. 2 102
3 103
~ ~
99 199
100 3101
~ ~
960 3961
SIP Extension Codec Information:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-19-01 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 1~4 2

Setup Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1 = 10ms
Define the G.711 audio frame size. 2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
84-19-02 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 = Disable 0

Setup G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/ Disable Voice Activity Detection for

G.711.
84-19-03 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 = A-law 1

Setup G.711 Type 1 =-law
Define the G.711 Type -law is recommended

when in USA.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-19-04 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 ~ 160ms 20

Setup G.711 Jitter Buffer (min)
Define G.711 Jitter Buffer minimum accepted

value.

Setup G.711 Jitter Buffer (average)
Define G.711 Jitter Buffer average accepted

value.

Setup G.711 Jitter Buffer (max)
Define G.711 Jitter Buffer maximum accepted

value.

3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

Enable/Disable Voice Activity Detection for

G.729.


value.

Setup G729 Jitter Buffer (average)

value.

Setup G729 Jitter Buffer (max)

value.
84-19-17 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 1 = Static 3

Setup Jitter Buffer Mode 2 = Adaptive during Silence
Define the Jitter Buffer mode supported Static

3 = Adaptive Immediately
or Immediate.
84-19-18 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 ~ 30 20

Setup VAD Threshold
Define the VAD Threshold Values set in dB.
Consult the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming

Manual for Threshold scale to set acceptable
values.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-19-28 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 = G.711_PT 0

Setup Audio Capability Priority 2 = G.729_PT
Define Audio Priority. Consult the UNIVERGE 3 = G.722
SV9100 Programming Manual for Transmit 4 = G.726
Gain scale to set acceptable value.
84-19-33 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic 1~4 3

Define the number of Audio Frames for G.722 2 = 20ms
Codec. 3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
84-19-34 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic 0 = Disable 0

Enable/Disable G.722 Voice Activity Detection

Mode.
84-19-35 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic 0 ~ 160ms 30

Define the minimum setting for the G.722 Jitter

Buffer.

Setup G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average)
Define the average setting for the G.722 Jitter

Buffer.

Setup G.722 Jitter Buffer (Max)
Define the maximum setting for the G.722 Jitter

Buffer.

Define the number of G.726 Audio Frames. 2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

Enable/Disable the G.726 Voice Activity

Detection mode.


Buffer.


Buffer.


Buffer.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Setup RTP Filter 1 = Enable
To avoid incorrect voice pass connection, this 2 = Enable (include SSRC)
Program checks the sending side address from
received RTP packet at VoIPDB.

Setup FAX Relay Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the FAX relay mode. 2 = Each Port Mode
84-33-02 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic 1 = U/R 1

Setup T.38 Protocol Mode 2 = RTP
Sets the T.38 protocol mode. 3 = UDPTL
84-33-06 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic 0 = V.27ter, 4800bps 2

Setup FAX Maximum Rate 1 = V.29, 9600bps
Sets the maximum FAX rate. 2 = V.17, 14400bps
84-33-10 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic 0 = Receive TCF signal by 1

Setup TCF Handling Method VoIPDB
Sets the training confirmation handling mode, 1 = Through TCF signal to
local denotes that the VoIP DB will generate external FAX

tone and check, Network denotes that TCF is
sent over the network provider.
84-33-18 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic 0, 2, 8, 96 ~ 127 103

Setup T.38 RTP Format Payload Number
Sets the payload number for T.38 RTP Format.
84-34-01 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTFMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

Define the DTMF Relay Mode for Type 4 SIP 1 = RFC2833
Extension. 2 = H.245
84-34-02 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTMF Payload 96 ~ 127 110

Number
Set DTMF Payload for standard SIP

extensions.
SIP Extension Basic Information Setup:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-20-01 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup 1 ~ 65535 5070

Registrar/Proxy Port
Define SIP station Proxy Port.

Session Timer Value
Define the periodic refresh time that allows both
user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP
session is still active.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Minimum Session Timer Value
Define the minimum allowed value for the SIP

session timer.
84-20-04 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup 0 = Request URI 0

Called Party Info 1 = To Header
Define the SIP Extension presented Caller ID

information.
84-20-05 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup 0 ~ 256 seconds 180

Expire Value of Invite
Define the time out response value for SIP

invite.

GPZ-IPLE.


Port Number + 1)

for each DSP.
IP Phone Configuration:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-01-01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Maximum of 12 characters. STA 101 = Ext
Name 101

102, etc.
15-05-02 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup IP MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-

Phone Fixed Port Assignment 00-00-00-00-00-00 to 00
MAC Address of registered MLT SIP phone is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
stored and/or can input the MAC address of an
MLT SIP phone so when it comes online it is
provided with the extension which the MAC
address matches.
15-05-07 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

Using IP Address
Review the registered IP Phones IP Address

[Informational Only].

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-05-16 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Maximum of 24 characters. No Setting

Authentication Password
Assign the authentication password for SIP

15-05-18 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup IP 0 = Disable 0

Duplication Allowed Group 1 = Enable
For an adapter that has one IP address coming
into it but multiple extensions off of it. Enable
this option for all extensions in the group so the
CPU knows that the one IP Address is assigned
to multiple extensions.
15-05-40 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0 = Both name and number 0
Calling Name Display Info via Trunk for 1 = Name only
Standard SIP 2 = Number only
Sets the incoming calling name display type on 3 = None

a standard SIP terminal. Trunk name is the first
priority and abbreviated (SPD) name is second
priority.

Video Mode 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable Video Mode for standard SIP

terminals.

Receiving SIP INFO 1 = Allowed any time
Select whether or not system can receive 2 = Allowed while RTP is not
DTMF from standard SIP phone via SIP INFO available
message.
STD SIP Transfer Unattended:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Peer mode.

Issue 2.0
SIP Phone Example:
Figure 2-31 Example SIP Phone
GPZ-IPLE
Switch
GPZ-IPLE:192.168.1.20
Subnet Mask:255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: 192.168.1.254
SIP Softphone SIP Phone
The following menu items require programming in your SIP IP Phone (consult SIP Phone vendor specific
documentation):
Program/Item
Description/Selection Default Assigned Data Comments
No.
1 IP Address 0.0.0.0 Enter a Static IP Address for the SIP

Phone.
2 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Enter the Subnet Mask Address.
3 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Enter the Default Gateway address.
4 GPZ-IPLE Address 0.0.0.0 Enter the GPZ-IPLE IP Address.

This information can be located in
Program 10-12-09 UNIVERGE SV9100 Network
Setup IP Address.
5 Extension Number 0 Assign the SIP Phone extension. This

information must match Program 11-02-01
Extension Numbering.
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) NAT Mode
Description
With SV9100 system software, the SV9100 supports the NAT (Network Address Translation) mode for
Standard SIP terminals.
Conditions
When Program 10-33-05 NAT mode for SIP phone is set to 1 (Enable), the P2P mode for
SIP Phone becomes always Off regardless of Program 15-05-50 setting.
Standard SIP Video call feature which uses P2P mode cannot be established in the same
system since the P2P mode is disabled by enabling Program 10-33-05.
SIP Station GPZ-IPLE does not support a Blind Transfer feature.
When connecting multiple SIP Phones via NAT, Program 15-05-18 has to be set to admit
registration of multiple SIP Phones which are using the same IP address. For example, a
Standard SIP terminal that has two lines registering with the same IP Address requires
Program 15-05-18 to be set for both extension numbers.
In the router/firewall that the SV9100 resides behind port forwarding is required. Port
forwarding at the SIP Terminal end is not required as long as Program 15-05-45 (Plug and
Play) is enabled. The ports that must be forwarded to the SV9100 are as follows:
UDP Port 5070 MUST be forwarded to the IP Address assigned in Program 10-12-09.
UDP Ports 10020 ~ 10531 (GPZ-IPLE), MUST be forwarded to the IP Address (s) assigned in
Program 84-26-01.
When Program 15-05-45 is set to 1 the manual table setting for port forwarding may not
be required on the remote side router, but the router must support the NAT function itself. If
Program 15-05-45 is set to 0 port forwarding at the Remote side router is required. This
feature requires the installation of GPZ-IPLE.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
Standard SIP Terminals
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) NAT Mode 2-807

Issue 2.0
Required Components
GCD-CP10
GPZ-IPLE
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

Define the IP Address of the WAN side of the

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
router.
10-12-08 GCD-CP10 Network Setup ICMP Redirect 0= (Enable) 0

When receiving ICMP redirect messages, this 1= (Disable)
determines if the IP Routing Table updates

automatically or not.
2-808 IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) NAT Mode

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign the IP Address for the VoIPDB. If a 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
VoIPDB is installed in the system it is
recommended to set Program 10-12-01 to
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0 and all connections to the system will be
made through the VoIPDB.
Address. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255
10-12-11 GCD-CP10 Network Setup NIC Setup 0 = Auto Detect 0

Define the LAN interface Speed and Mode of 1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
the VoIP Application supported. 3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
IPLE daughter board does not support half 5 = 1Gbps, Full Duplex
duplex connection.
10-33-02 SIP Registar/Proxy Information Basic Setup 0 = Disable 0

Authentication Mode 1 = Enable
When connecting STD SIP Terminal via NAT,
this option must be enabled to prohibit illegal
SIP phone registration.
10-33-05 SIP Registar/Proxy Information Basic Setup 0 = Disable 0

NAT Mode 1 = Enable
When system controls remote SIP phone via

NAT router, set this program to 1 = Enable.
10-37-01 UPnP Setup UPnP Mode 0 = Disable 0

Enable/Disable UPnP. 1 = Enable


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.
10-58-01 DT800/DT700 Intranet Local Network Area 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Setup Network Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
This program sets the IP or Network address 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
for phones that are not to be routed through the
NAPT translations.
For example, if a system had multiple NAPT
phones and another site, with multiple IP
phones connected via a VPN connection, you

would not want the phones connected over the
VPN to use the NAPT feature. The network
address (or single IP phone addresses) of the
Remote location would be entered here. This is
for the IP Phones at this location to not use the
NAPT feature.
10-58-02 DT800/DT700 Intranet Local Network Area 128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 | 224.0.0.0 255.255.0.0
Setup Subnet Mask |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
This program sets the netmask for the IP |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
Addresses assigned in Program 10-58-01. |255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-05-16 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Maximum of 24 characters. No Setting



NAT Plug and Play 1 = Enable
This program is valid when Program 10-46-14
is On (NAT feature activated).
Select sending RTP port number to remote
Router, use from negotiation result (0) or
received RTP packet (1).
SV9100 uses this program to decide a
destination port of RTP transmitting packets
from GPZ-IPLE to a remote IP terminal. If
0:OFF is selected, the destination port of RTP
transmitting packets will be a SIP/SDP
negotiation result.(same behavior as before). If
you chose 1:ON, the destination port of RTP
transmitting packet will be the same port of a
source port of a receiving RTP packet on
GPZ-IPLE (GPZ-IPLE required).

Registration Expire Timer for NAT 0 = Disable
SIP registration expiry timer.


Subscribe Expire Timer for NAT 0 = Disable
SIP Subscribe expiry timer.



Peer mode.


GPZ-IPLE.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Port Number + 1)

for each DSP.
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
IP Trunk H.323
Description
H.323 is an International Telecommunication Union (ITU) standard for Packet Based Multimedia
Communication Systems. The UNIVERGE SV9100 can use H.323 to connect to another UNIVERGE
SV9100 system or a third-party product.
The feature set is limited. When using H.323, it is impossible to use the advanced networking features. If
these features are required, use IP KCCIS. The UNIVERGE SV9100 Voice over IP Trunk H.323
package sends the real-time voice over the corporate LAN or WAN. The voice from the telephone is
digitized and then put into frames to be sent over a network using Internet Protocol.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 Voice over IP Trunk H.323 package allows communication using standard
H.323 (Normal and Fast Start) Protocol and allows connectivity to any H.323 standards compliant voice
gateway and gatekeeper. This VoIP Trunk Daughter board also allows Registration and Authentication
Server (RAS) support to register with an RAS Server and use Gatekeeper for dynamic call routing.
The GPZ-IPLE H.323 is an optional interface that can provide IP trunks and Tie Lines. It can operate
in the following modes:
COI
COID
DID
TLI
DTI
Depending on the requirements and resource allocation in the LAN/WAN/Internet, the GPZ-IPLE
H.323 can be configured to use any of the following voice compressions:
G.729 Low bandwidth requirement is used on most Wide Area Network links.
G.711 High bandwidth requirement is usually used on Local Area Networks.
G 722 This Codec is useful in fixed network, Voice over IP applications, where the required
bandwidth is typically not prohibitive.
Conditions
A maximum of 256 IP Trunks are supported in the SV9100.
Calling Party Name is not provided for outgoing calls on H.323 trunks.
With SV9100 software and GPZ-IPLE daughter board installed, half duplex connections are
not supported. For troubleshooting purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is
required to capture packet data from the SV9100 IPLE Ethernet port.
IP Trunk H.323 2-813

Issue 2.0
All IP trunks (SIP, CCIS, or H.323) must be contiguous. If any IP trunks are added to a
system that already has IP trunks installed, and the next set of trunks is not in sequence,
then all IP trunks are moved to a new set of sequential trunk numbers.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
GCD-CP10 with GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board
IP Trunk License (5001)
Related Features
None

2-814 IP Trunk H.323

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-01 ETU Setup (GPZ-IPLE Pkg) Trunk Logical 0 ~ 200 0

Port Number
Displays the port number assigned to the

GPZ-IPLE.
10-03-02 ETU Setup (GPZ-IPLE Pkg) Trunk Type 0 = H.323 1

Define if the IP Trunks are H.323 or SIP. 1 = SIP

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Address. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255
10-17-02 H.323 Gatekeeper Setup Gatekeeper IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Define the Gatekeeper IP address for H.323. 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
10-17-04 H.323 Gatekeeper Setup Preferred Maximum of 124 characters. No Setting

Gatekeeper
When 10-17-01 is set to 1, this is used and sets

the preferred ID of multiple gatekeepers.
10-18-01 H.323 Alias Address Setup Alias Address Dial maximum of 12 digits No Setting
Set the telephone number (Alias Address) to (0 ~ 9, , #)
external gatekeeper.
10-18-02 H.323 Alias Address Setup Alias Address 0 = E164 0

Type
Set the Alias Address Type to external

gatekeeper.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-23-01 SIP System Interconnection Setup System 0 = No (Disable) 0

Interconnection 1 = Yes (Enable)
Determine if the system is interconnected to

another system.
10-23-02 SIP System Interconnection Setup IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Define the IP Address for the SIP System

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Interconnection.
10-23-04 SIP System Interconnection Setup Dial Maximum of 12 digits (0 ~ 9). No Setting
Number
Define the Dial Number for the SIP System.

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.
10-68-01 IP Trunk Availability Trunk Type 0 = None 0

Set trunk type to CCISoIP for interconnecting 1 = SIP
trunks. 2 = H.323

3 = CCIS
10-68-02 IP Trunk Availability Start Port 0 ~ 400 0

Set the trunk port number to start the
assignment from.
10-68-03 IP Trunk Availability Number of Ports 0 ~ 400 0

Set the number of ports to assign from the
starting point set in Program 10-68-02.
14-02-01 Analog Trunk Data Setup Signaling Type 0 = Dial Pulse (10 PPS) 2
(DP/DTMF) 1 = Dial Pulse (20 PPS)
Set the outgoing signaling type for the tie trunk. 2 = DTMF

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
14-06-01 Trunk Group Routing Priority Order 0 = Not Specify Route 1, Order
Number 1 ~ 100: (Trunk Group Number) Number 1 = 1
Set the priority order number 1 ~ 4. 101 ~ 150: (100 + Networking (Trunk Group 1)
System Number) Order Numbers
1001 ~ 1100: (1000 + Route 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not
Table Number) Specified)
All Other Routes
(2 ~ 100) and
Order Numbers
(1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not
Specified)

be allowed.


extension.
21-17-01 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup Maximum of 16 digits No Setting
for Trunk (1 ~ 0, , #)
Assign the Caller Party Number for each IP
trunk. The assigned number is sent to the
central office when the caller places an
outgoing call. If the Calling Party Number is
assigned by both Program 21-17 and Program
21-18/ 21-19, the system uses the entry in
Program 21-18/21-19.
21-18-01 IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup Maximum of 16 digits No Setting
for Extension IP Trunk (H.323) Calling (1 ~ 0, , #)
Party Number Setup for Extension
Assign the Calling Party Number for each
extension. The assigned number is sent to the
exchange when the caller places an outgoing
call.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. 0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
44-02-01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access Maximum of eight digits (Use No Setting
Dial line key 1 for a Dont Care digit,
Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the @).
system for ARS routing.

Set the Service Type (0 ~ 3) for the Pre- 2 = ARS/F-Route Table
Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route. (F-Route)

Table (Option)
If a Service Type is selected in Program 2 = 0 ~ 500
44-02-02, set the additional data, if required, for
the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/
(0 = No Setting)
F-Route (24 digits max: 1 ~ 9, 0 #, @). To
enter a wild card/dont care digit, press Line
Key 1 to enter an @. (0 = No Setting)


Input the maximum number of digits to send
84-01-02 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup 1~4 3

Number of G.711 audio frames
Define the number of G.711 Audio Frames.
84-01-03 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G.711 0 = Disable 0

VAD mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the G.711 VAD mode for H.323.
84-01-04 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G.711 0 = A-law 1

Type 1 = -law
Define the G.711 type for H.323.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Number of G.729 audio frames 1 = 10ms
Define the number of G.729 audio frames for 2 = 20ms
H.323. 3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

VAD mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the G.729 VAD mode for H.323.
84-01-07 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G.729 0 ~ 270ms 30

Jitter Buffer (min)
Define the G.729 jitter buffer (minimum) for

H.323.

Jitter Buffer (average)
Define the G.729 jitter buffer (average) for

H.323.

Jitter Buffer (max)
Define the G.729 jitter buffer (maximum) for

H.323.
84-01-15 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Jitter 1 = Fixed 3

Buffer Mode 2 = Self adjusting (silence
Define the jitter buffer mode for H.323. period)

3 = Self adjusting

Jitter Buffer (min)

H.323.


H.323.

Jitter Buffer (max)

H.323.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-01-22 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup VAD 0 ~ 30 (-19db ~ +10db and self 20
Threshold adjustment)
Define the VAD threshold for H.323. 0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19db (-49dbm)
:
20 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = 9db (-21dbm)
30 = 10db (-20dbm)
84-01-23 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Idle -5000dbm ~ -7000dbm 7000
Noise Level
Define the idle noise level for H.323.
84-01-24 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Echo 0 = Disable 1

Canceller Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the echo canceller mode for

H.323.
84-01-25 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Echo 1 = 4ms 6

Canceller Tail Size 2 = 8ms
Define the echo canceller tail size for H.323. 3 = 16ms
4 = 32ms

5 = 64ms
6 = 128ms
84-01-26 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Echo 0 = Disable 1

Canceller NLP Mode 1 = Enable
Define the echo canceller NLP mode for H.323.
84-01-28 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Echo 0 = Automatic level adjustment 0
Canceller NLP Noise Setting 1 = Fixed level
Define the echo canceller NLP noise setting for

H.323.
84-01-30 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup TX 0 ~ 40 (-20dBm ~ +20dBm) 20

Gain
Define the TX gain for H.323.
84-01-31 H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup RX 0 ~ 40 (-20dBm ~ +20dBm) 20

Gain
Define the RX gain for H.323.

Number of G.722 audio frames 1 = 10ms
Define the number of G.722 audio frames for 2 = 20ms
H.323. 3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

Voice Activity Detection Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the G.722 voice activity

detection mode for H.323.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Jitter Buffer (min)

H.323.


H.323.

Jitter Buffer (max)

H.323.
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
Description
The UNIVERGE SV9100 IP Trunk SIP package sends the real time voice over the corporate LAN or
WAN. The voice from the telephone is digitized and then put into frames to be sent over a network using
Internet protocol.
With the SV9100 you can have two SIP Profiles allowing you to connect to two different SIP Carries, or
allow you to have a SIP System Interconnection and connection to a SIP Carrier.
Using VoIP equipment at a gateway (a network point that acts as an entrance to another network), the
packetized voice transmissions from users in the company are received and routed to other parts of the
company Intranet (local area or wide area network) or they can be sent over the Internet using CO lines
to another gateway.
The GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board interface can provide IP trunks and Tie Lines that can operate in the
following modes:
COI
COID
DID
TLI
DTI
Depending on the requirements and resource allocation in the LAN/WAN/Internet, the GPZ-IPLE - SIP
can be configured to use any of the following voice compressions:
G.729 (a) Most often used
The LAN/WAN or Internet connection is provided by a 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet.
For a list of vendors that have successfully completed interoperability certification go

to http://www.necntac.com and refer to Technical Documentation.
Conditions
The option to set the SIP trunk Codec to G711 or G729 Fixed is supported in Program
84-13-28.
A maximum of 400 IP Trunks are supported in the SV9100.
The SV9100 supports G.711 or T.38 for FAX.
The SV9100 does not support fallback to G.711 from G.729/G.726 for data (FAX) calls.
A transferred call can not use T.38 at the transferred destination.
2-822 IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol

Issue 2.0
SIP trunks are assigned in increments of four.

Calling Party Name is not provided for outgoing calls on SIP trunks.
The SV9100 software enables multiple SIP trunk carriers to be utilized when NetLink is
configured. Refer to SV9100 NetLink on page 2-1354 for additional details.
Each SIP Profile will require a different SIP Listen Port assigned in Program 84-14-06.
Each SIP Profile will have to connect using one route because the SV9100 can have only
one Gateway.
If SIP Trunks are programmed in a NetLink Secondary system, only SIP Profile 1 can be
utilized.
The SV9100 can only use one DNS Server, two SIP Carriers that require their own DNS
Server can't be used.
During a database migration from SV8100, some memory blocks required for SIP Trunks
will not convert. For a list of conversion exceptions refer to Conversion Exception on page
2-1006 under the Migration SV8100/SV8300 feature.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
GPZ-IPLE
IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol 2-823

Issue 2.0
SIP Trunk E.164 Support
Description
With SIP Trunk E.164 Support enabled, the PBX is able to support SIP configurations where the number
presentation within the SIP messages is formatted using the E.164 international numbering scheme.
Specifically the system is able to handle the + digit when required as the International Access Code.
For example, a normal international SIP call can be dialed and displayed as follows:
Number dialed = 00441202223344
Request-URI: Invite sip: 00441202223344@172.16.18.100 SIP/2.0
With SIP Trunk E.164 Support enabled, the SIP call can be displayed once dialed as:
Request-URI: Invite sip:+441202223344@172.16.18.100 SIP/2.0
This display is a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs (Internet Telephony Service Providers) and may
require that PBX handle these calls and modify any SIP messages to the correct format accordingly.
This feature uses the following SIP header fields:

Request-URI
To
From
P-Asserted Identity
P-Preferred Identity
Conditions
E.164 support is applied on the SIP trunk interface.
E.164 is supported for all carrier choices (Program 10-29-14).
Netlink multi-carrier support uses E.164 support across all carrier configurations at the
secondary nodes.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals

Issue 2.0
Trunks
IP SIP
GCD-CP10
GPZ-IPLE

Issue 2.0
SIP Trunk E.164 CLIP Enhancement
Description
With the SIP Trunk E.164 CLIP Enhancement enabled, when an incoming SIP call from an external ITSP
is presented at the system with a + in the From header field as the international access code, it is
recognized and displayed as an international call at the terminal display and also logged in the terminals
incoming caller history, allowing any outbound calls made from a multiline terminals caller history
possible using this numbering scheme.
This presentation can be a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs (Internet Telephony Service Providers) so it
is necessary the PBX can handle these calls and modify any SIP messages to the correct format
accordingly.
Conditions
E.164 Enhancement is applied for the SIP trunk interface.
Outgoing call from caller history of incoming calls is only possible from multiline terminals.
Netlink systems deployed in multiple countries using this feature may not work correctly
because the system will not know which international code should be added at each node.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Trunks
IP SIP
GCD-CP10
GPZ-IPLE

Issue 2.0


Issue 2.0
Video Support over SIP Trunks
Description
The SV9100 can support video calling over SIP interconnection trunks. IP Trunk License (5001), IP
Terminal License (5111), SIP Video License (0040), System Port License (0300) and Version R1 License
(0411) are required.
Conditions
Calls over SIP Interconnection while in P2P mode cannot be put on hold.
Calls over SIP Interconnection while in P2P mode cannot be transferred, i.e. an internal call
cannot be transferred to a SIP Interconnection trunk.
A video call cannot be changed to a voice call. A voice call cannot be changed to a video
call.
Video capability in the initial invite message is required for the Video Terminal.
When using an MCU, the SV9100 requires the Carrier Type Setting (Program 10-29-14) to
be set to 0 = Standard.
When using an MCU, the same video capability must be set between the MCU and the
Video SIP Terminal.
Default Settings
This feature is not enabled at default.
System Availability
Terminals
Polycom HDX4003
Polycom VVX1500D
GCD-CP10 with GPZ-IPLE installed.
Related Features
None

Issue 2.0

IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.
10-12-05 GCD-CP10 Network Setup NIC Interface 0 = Auto Detect 0

Set up the NIC Interface. 1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex

4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
5 = 1Gbps, Full Duplex

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
(Default Gateway [WAN])
Define the IP Address of the WAN side of the
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
router.
Only used when Program 10-20-21 is enabled.


192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Address. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

duplex connection.
10-19-01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection 0 = Common use for both IP 0

Select type of GPZ-IPLE DSP Resource. This extensions and trunks
program setting has no affect on the terminal/ 1 = IP Extension
3 = CCIS/Networking
4 = Use for NetLink
5 = Blocked
Paging
8 = Unicast Paging


another system.

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Define the IP Address of the SIP System

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Interconnection.
10-23-04 SIP System Interconnection Setup Dial Maximum of 12 digits. No Setting

Number
Define Dial Number for the SIP System

Interconnection.
10-23-06 SIP System Interconnection Setup SIP 1 = Profile 1 1

Profile 2 = Profile 2
Assign the Interconnection to a SIP Profile.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-28-01 SIP System Information Setup Domain Maximum of 64digits. No Setting

Name
Define the Domain name. This information is

(Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
generally provided by the SIP carrier.
10-28-02 SIP System Information Setup Host Name Maximum of 48 digits. No Setting
generally provided by the SIP carrier. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
10-28-03 SIP System Information Setup Transport 0 = UDP 0

Protocol 1 = TCP
Define the Transport type. This option is always
set to UDP. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
10-28-05 SIP System Information Setup Domain 0 = IP Address 0

Assignment 1 = Domain Name
Define the Domain Assignment. This entry is
determined by what information the SIP carrier
provides. If the SIP carrier provides a server
name: SIPconnect-sca@L0.cbeyond.net, then
the domain is: L0.cbeyond.net and the host
name is SIPconnect-sca.
10-28-06 SIP System Information Setup IP Trunk 0 = Disable 0

Port Binding 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable IP Trunk Port binding.
10-29-01 SIP Server Information Setup Default 0 = Off 0

Proxy (Outbound) 1 = On
Define the SIP Proxy setup, Default Proxy
(Outbound). When SIP trunking is used, this (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
must be on.
If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for an
SIP Server and the SIP Server is removed or not

used, the entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set
back to their default settings. Even if Program
10-29-01 is set to 0 (off), the UNIVERGE SV9100
still checks the settings in the remaining 10-29
programs.

Proxy (Inbound) 1 = On
Define the Default Proxy (Inbound).
10-29-03 SIP Server Information Setup Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Proxy IP Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Enter the default Proxy IP Address if the SIP
carrier is using an IP address for the proxy. In
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
most cases, this is left at the default entry as
the domain name is used.
10-29-04 SIP Server Information Setup Default 0 ~ 65535 5060

Proxy Port Number
Define the Proxy Port Number. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-29-05 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar 0 = None 0

Mode 1 = Manual
This program is used to Enable/Disable the
ability to Register to the ITSP.

In Registration mode (IP or Domain Name)
this MUST be enabled.
10-29-06 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Define the Registrar IP Address. The carrier
may provide an IP address. In most cases, a
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
domain name is used so this entry is left at the
default.
10-29-07 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar 0 ~ 65535 5060

Port Number
Define the Registrar Port Numbers. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
10-29-11 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar Maximum of 128 characters. No Setting
Domain Name
Define the Registrar Domain Name (normally (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
provided by the SIP carrier).
For example: mysipserver.sipprovider.com
10-29-12 SIP Server Information Setup Domain Maximum of 64 characters. No Setting

Name
Define the domain name of the SIP PROXY (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
Server provided by the SIP Carrier.
For example: if the SIP Proxy server address is
proxy.sipprovider.com, you would assign
sipprovider.com in this program.
If no SIP Proxy address is provided, use the SIP
Registration address as the proxy address.
10-29-13 SIP Server Information Setup Proxy Host Maximum of 48 characters. No Setting
Name
Assign the Proxy Host Name of the SIP PROXY (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
Server provided by the SIP Carrier.
For example: if the SIP Proxy server address is
proxy.sipprovider.com, you would assign proxy
in the program.
If no SIP Proxy address is provided, use the SIP
Registration address as the proxy address.
10-29-14 SIP Server Information Setup SIP Carrier 0 ~ 26 0

Choice 1 ~ 26 =
Define the SIP Carrier Choice. Carrier Type A ~ Carrier Type Z
Selecting Carrier B automatically sets
Program 10-29-16 to on (1). Program 10-29-16
MUST be set to off for incoming calls to route using
the lowest available trunk port.
Each certified vendor my use a different carrier
type. Visit NTAC website (http://www.necntac.com)
to verify the proper setting per vendor.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-29-15 SIP Server Information Setup Registration 120 ~ 65535 seconds 3600
Expiry (Expire) Time
This program defines the SIP Trunk (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
Registration timer.
This timer is negotiated between the Carrier
and the SV9100 during the registration process.
The Carrier will make the final decision on the
value to be used which means the value
specified in this program may be ignored.
When half of this timer expires, the SV9100 will
re-register itself with the Carrier.
10-29-20 SIP Server Information Setup 0~9 1

Authentication Trial 0 = No Authentication (1 Authentication
Define the number of times the SV9100 will Attempt)
attempt to authenticate before timing out and
not completing the registration process.
Recommend changing this to at least 2 in case
the first attempt did not succeed due to network
problems or any other issues.
10-29-21 SIP Server Information Setup NAT Router 0 = Disabled 0

If the SV9100 is connecting to the SIP Carrier 1 = Enabled
using NAT Translations, this setting must be
enabled. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
10-36-01 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup 0 = Disable 0

Registration 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the SIP trunk registration.
10-36-02 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup Maximum of 32 characters. No Setting

User ID
Assign the SIP User ID provided by your SIP (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
Carrier. In most cases this is your 10 digit main
billing number. This field is also used to send
outbound caller ID information when not

programmed on a per station or per trunk basis.
For non-registration and SIP Tie Lines to
another system, you MUST have a USER ID
entered.

Authentication User ID
Define the Authentication USER ID for the SIP

Trunk.

Define the Authentication Password for the SIP

Trunk.
10-37-01 UPnP Setup UPnP Mode 0 = Disable 0

Enable/Disable UPnP. 1 = Enable


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-37-02 UPnP Setup Retry Time 0, 60 ~ 3600 60

Define the retry time for UPnP. (1 ~ 59 cannot be input)

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.
10-67-01 SIP Stack Configuration Setup DNS Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select whether DNS mode is enabled. 1 = Enable

10-67-02 SIP Stack Configuration Setup DNS IP XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 0.0.0.0
Address
Set the IP Address of DNS Server. The SV9100
can only use one DNS Server, two SIP Carriers
requiring their own DNS Server cant be used.
10-67-03 SIP Stack Configuration Setup DNS Port 0 ~ 65535 53

Assign the DNS port.

10-67-04 SIP Stack Configuration Setup DNS 0 ~ 65535 53
Source Port
Assign the DNS source port.

Assign the trunk type as (1) SIP. 1 = SIP
2 = H.323
3 = CCIS
(Netlink System ID 0 ~ 50)

Assign the Start Port for your SIP trunks. (Netlink System ID 0 ~ 50)

10-68-03 IP Trunk Availability Number of Port 0 ~ 400 0
Assign the number of SIP port trunks. (Netlink System ID 0 ~ 50)


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the system internal (Intercom) numbering Programming
plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and Manual for
second digits dialed and affects the digits an default values.
extension user must dial to access other
extensions and features, such as service codes

and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan
does not meet the site requirements, use this
program to tailor the system numbering to the
site.

Enable/Disable the ability to send the original
Caller ID through when the call is Forward
Off-Premise.
Assign trunks to trunk groups. Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
to trunk group 1
with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
14-18-05 IP Trunk Data Setup SIP Profile (SIP Trunk) Profile 1 Profile 1
Assign each SIP Trunk to either Profile 1 or Profile 2
Profile 2.
15-03-18 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Type: 0

Select Special Terminal 0 = FAX
Used for selecting Special terminal type (FAX or 1 = Modem
Modem). This setting influences how data is
transmitted via SIP trunk.
Program 15-03-03 must be set to 1 (Special) to
use this feature.
21-17-01 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup 1 ~ 0, , # Maximum of 16 digits No Setting
for Trunk
Program 21-18/21-19.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-19-01 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup 1 ~ 0, , # Maximum of 16 digits No Setting
for Extension
Assign the Calling Party Number for each (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
extension. The assigned number is sent to the
21-18/Program 21-19, the system uses the data
in Program 21-18/Program 21-19.

1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
44-02-01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access Maximum of eight digits. No Setting
Set the Dial digits for the Pre-Transaction Table digit, @)
for selecting ARS/F-Route (eight digits max:

1 ~ 9, 0 #, @). To enter a wild card/dont care
digit, press Line Key 1 to enter an @.


Table (Option)
If a Service Type is selected in Program 2 = 0 ~ 500
44-02-02, set the additional data, if required, for
the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-
(0 = No Setting)
Route (24 digits max: 1 ~ 9, 0 #, @). To enter Table Number = 0 ~ 4
a wild card/dont care digit, press Line Key 1 to
(0 = No Setting)
enter an @.

Assign the trunk group to be used by the ARS/ 0 = No Setting
F-Route Table. 255 = Extension Call


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


2 = Diffserv
are invalid.
84-10-02 ToS Setup Priority, IP Precedence 0~7 0

1 = Router queuing priority. 0 = Low
7 = High
84-10-03 ToS Setup Low Delay 0~1 0

1 = Optimize for low delay routing. 0 = Normal Delay, Low Delay

84-10-04 ToS Setup Wideband (Throughout) 0~1 0
1 = Optimize for high bandwidth routing. 0 = Normal Throughput
1 = High Throughput
84-10-05 ToS Setup High Reliability 0~1 0

1 = Optimize for reliability routing. 0 = Normal Reliability
1 = Low Reliability

84-13-01 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 1~4 2

Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1 = 10ms
Set the G.711 Audio Frame Number. 2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
84-13-02 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 0 = Disable 0

G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the G.711 VAD Detection Mode.
84-13-03 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 0 = A-law 1

G.711 Type 1 = -law
Define the G.711 type.
84-13-04 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 0 ~ 300ms 20

G.711 Jitter Buffer (min)
Set the minimum G.711 Jitter Buffer. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

G.711 Jitter Buffer (Average)
Set the average G.711 Jitter Buffer. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

G.711 Jitter Buffer (max)
Set the maximum G.711 Jitter Buffer. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-13-07 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 1 = 10ms 2

Set the G.729 Audio Frame Number. 3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms

6 = 60ms

G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the G.729 VAD Detection Mode.

Set the minimum G.729 Jitter Buffer. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

G.729 Jitter Buffer (Average)
Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
84-13-17 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 1 = Static 3

Jitter Buffer Mode 2 = Self Adjusting
Set the Jitter Buffer Mode.
84-13-18 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 0 ~ 30 = -19dB ~ +10dB 20

VAD Threshold 1 =-19dB (-49dBm)
Set the VAD (Voice Activity Detection) :
threshold. 2 =0dB (-30dBm)
:
29 =9dBm (-21dBm)
30 =0dBm (-20dBm)
84-13-28 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 0 = G.711_PT 0

Audio Capability Priority 2 = G.729_PT
Define the Codec Priority. 3 = G.722_PT
4 = G.726_PT
6 = G711_Fix

7 = G729_Fix

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

Define the minimum level for the G.722 jitter

buffer.

G.722 Jitter Buffer (average)
Define the average level for the G.722 Jitter

Buffer.

Define the Max level for the G.722 Jitter buffer. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

Define the number of G.726 audio frames. 2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

G.726 VAD Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the VAD mode for G.726.

Define the minimum level for the G.726 jitter

buffer.

G.726 Jitter Buffer (average)
Define the average level for the G.726 jitter

buffer.

Define the max level for the G.726 jitter buffer. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

RTP Filter 1 = Enable
To avoid incorrect voice pass connection, this
program checks the sending side address from (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
received RTP packet at VoIPDB.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-14-06 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup SIP 1 ~ 65535 Profile 1 = 5060
Trunk Port Number Profile 2 = 5062
Set the SIP UA (User Authorized) Trunk port (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
number (Receiving Transport for UNIVERGE
SV9100 SIP).
Each SIP Profile will need to have a different
SIP Listen Port.
84-14-07 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup 1 ~ 65535 seconds 0

Session Timer Value
The Session Timer, when enabled, will allow (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
periodic refreshing of the SIP session using the
SIP Re-Invite message. The refreshing will
allow both the SV9100 and the Carrier to
determine if the session is still active. The

periodic refresh can be used to release calls
that are not active anymore when the SIP BYE
message may have been lost.
When this timer is set to 0, the session timer is
NOT included in the SIP Invite message.
84-14-08 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup 1 ~ 65535 seconds 1800

This timer controls the minimum accepted value (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
of the Session timer that the SV9100 will allow.
If the Session timer from the Carrier is lower
than the value defined here, the SV9100 will
deny the call.
84-14-09 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Called 0 = Request URI 0

Party Information 1 = To Header
This Program is used for inbound calls only.
When set to a 0 (Request-URI), the SV9100 will (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
look into the SIP "Request-URI" field to route
the inbound call.
When set to a 1 (To Header), the SV9100 will
look into the SIP "To" field to route the inbound
call.
84-14-10 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup URL 0 = SIP-URL 0

Type 1 = TEL-URL
Define the URL type for SIP trunks.
84-14-11 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup URL/To 0 = Proxy Server Domain 0
HeaderSetting Information 1 = SIP UA Domain
When set to a 0 (Proxy Server Domain), the
SV9100 will use the proxy settings in Programs
10-29-12 and 10-29-13 within the SIP Request-
URI and To headers. If neither of these
programs are assigned, the value in program

10-12-11 is used.
When set to a 1 (SIP UA Domain), the SV9100
will use the domain settings in Program
10-28-02 within the SIP Request-URI and To
headers.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-14-15 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup 100rel 0 = Use Default Settings (100rel 0
Settings included)
This program specifies if the 100rel message is 1 = Use Opposite Settings
included or not. (100rel not included)
When set to a 0 (Use Default Settings), the
100rel will be included in the initial SIP Invite
and any provisional 1XX responses (excluding
the 100 trying).
When set to a 1 (Use opposite settings), the
100rel will NOT be included in the initial SIP
Invite and provisional 1XX responses
(excluding the 100 trying)

GPZ-IPLE.


Port Number + 1)

for each DSP.

This program enables or disables DTMF Relay 1 = RFC2833 (For type 1 ~ 6)
for Type 3 SIP Trunk. 2 = H.245
90-10-01 System Alarm Setup Alarm Type 0 = Not Set No Setting

Define if Alarms are Minor, Major, or Not Set. 1 = Major Alarm
2 = Minor Alarm
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-02-01 Location Setup Country Code Dial (maximum of four digits) 1

Enter the country code. 0 ~ 9, , #

10-02-02 Location Setup International Access Dial (maximum of four digits) No Setting
Codes 0 ~ 9, , #
Enter the international access code.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
44-01-02 System Options for ARS/F-Route Dial Dial (maximum of one digit) No Setting
Tone Simulation 0 ~ 9, , # cannot be used
When first dialed, digit matches the data set in
this Program, system sends simulated DT to
calling party after receiving first digit.
Numbering plan for the dial needs to be
configured as F-Route in Program 11-01.
44-01-03 System Options for ARS/F-Route Tone 0 = Internal Dial Tone 0

Type 1 = External Dial Tone
Set simulated DT to type which can change the
tone used in Program 44-01-02 and Program
44-02-04.
84-14-13 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup 0 = Off 0

Incoming/ Outgoing SIP Trunk for E.164 1 = Mode 1
When this data is set to 1, then for any 2 = Mode 2
outbound SIP calls a + is added as a prefix to 3 = Mode 3
the Request-URI, To and From header fields of
the SIP message.
When it is set to 2 then if the dialed international
access code matches the value in Program
10-02-02 this value is removed from the
number dialed and the + added as a prefix to
the SIP Message.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-02-01 Location Setup Country Code Dial (maximum of four digits) 1

Enter the country code. 0 ~ 9, , #

10-02-02 Location Setup International Access Dial (maximum of four digits) No Setting
Codes 0 ~ 9, , #
Enter the international access code.
10-02-03 Location Setup Other Area Access Code Dial (maximum of two digits) 9
Enter the other area access code. 0 ~ 9, , #


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-14-13 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup 0 = Off 0

Incoming/ Outgoing SIP Trunk for E.164 1 = Mode 1
When this data is set to 1, then for any 2 = Mode 2
outbound SIP calls a + is added as a prefix to 3 = Mode 3
the SIP message.
When it is set to 2 then if the dialed international
access code matches the value in Program
10-02-02 this value is removed from the
number dialed and the + added as a prefix to
the SIP Message.
84-14-16 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup SIP 0 = Disable 0

Trunk SIP-URI E.164 Incoming Mode 1 = Mode 1
When this data is set to 1, then for any inbound 2 = Mode 2
SIP calls that include a + and a country code
not defined in Program 10-02-01, delete the +
and add the International Access Code in
Program 10-02-02. If the country code is a
match then delete both the + and country code
but do not add the International Access code.

When it is set to 2, then for any inbound SIP
calls that include a + and a country code not
defined in Program 10-02-01, delete the + and
add the International Access Code in Program
10-02-02. If the country code is a match then
delete both the + and country code and add the
Caller ID Edit Code from Program 10-02-03.
Video Support over SIP Trunks
Program Name/Description Level

Program
Input Data Default
Number
1 2 3

It is recommended to set this program to 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
0.0.0.0. All connections to the system are made

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
through the IPLE.

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.



Issue 2.0

Program
Input Data Default
Number
1 2 3

Set IP address for IPLE. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Address. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

duplex connection.

another system.

For the SIP System Interconnection set to
1 (Yes).

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Define the IP Address for the SIP System

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Interconnection.
10-23-04 SIP System Interconnection Setup Dial Maximum of 12 digits (0 ~ 9) No Setting

Number
Define the Dial Number for the SIP System.
10-23-06 SIP System Interconnection Setup SIP 1 = Profile 1 1

Profile 2 = Profile 2
Assign the Interconnection to a SIP Profile.

Issue 2.0

Program
Input Data Default
Number
1 2 3

User ID

entered.

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.

Programming
Assign the 1st and 2nd dial digit to F-Route for
Remote System Extension Numbering. Manual for

default values.
11-02-01 Extension Numbering Dial (Up to 8 Digits) Maximum of eight digits. 1 101
Assign extension numbers to Extension ports. 2 102
3 103
~ ~
99 199
100 3101
~ ~
960 3961
Assign SIP Trunks to same Trunk Group. Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
to trunk group 1
with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.

Issue 2.0

Program
Input Data Default
Number
1 2 3
14-18-03 IP Trunk Data Setup P2P Mode 0 = Disable 0

Enable/Disable P2P Mode. 1 = Enable
For Video Call via the System Interconnection

set to 1 (Enable).
14-18-04 IP Trunk Data Setup Video Mode 0 = Disable 0

Enable/Disable Video Mode. 1 = Enable

set to 1 (Enable).
14-18-05 IP Trunk Data Setup SIP Profile (SIP Trunk) Profile 1 Profile 1
Assign each SIP Trunk to either Profile 1 or Profile 2
Profile 2.

Enable/Disable Video Mode for Standard SIP
terminals.

set to 1 (Enable).

Peer mode.
For Video Call to function set to 1 (Enable).
be allowed.
for Trunk (1 ~ 0, , #)
Program 21-18/21-19.
for Extension (1 ~ 0, , #)
Assign the Calling Party Number for each
extension. The assigned number is sent to the (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
21-18/Program 21-19, the system uses the data
in Program 21-18/Program 21-19.

Issue 2.0

Program
Input Data Default
Number
1 2 3

For the SIP System Interconnection, set each 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
trunk to 5 (E&M Tie Line). VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
44-02-01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access Maximum of eight digits. No Setting
Dial
Set the Dial digits for the Pre-Transaction Table
for selecting ARS/F-Route (eight digits
maximum: 1~9, 0 #, @).
Key 1 to enter an @.


For the SIP System Interconnection, set each 3 = Dial Extension Analyze
Dial Digit to 2 (F-Route). Table (Option)
This is the F-Route Table set in Program 44-05. 2 = 0 ~ 500
(0 = No Setting)
(0 = No Setting)

Assign the Trunk Group to be used by the 0 = No Setting
F-Route Table. 255 = Extension Call
This is the Trunk Group assigned to the SIP
System Interconnection trunks in Program 14-05-01.


IPLE.

Issue 2.0
Operation
To make a call using E.164 number format:

2. Dial 00441202223344#.
The system automatically modifies the required header fields of the SIP INVITE message using the
configuration settings in the table below before forwarding to the ITSP.
Table 2-60 SIP INVITE Header Fields
Description
Program Program Program
Calling Party Number = 441509555123
84-14-13 10-02-01 10-02-02
Called Party Number = 00441202223344
0 44 Request-URI: Invite sip: 00441202223344@172.16.18.100 SIP/2.0

To header: To:sip:00441202223344@172.16.18.100
From header: From<sip:441509555123@172.16.0.10>
No Setting Request-URI: Invite sip: 00441202223344@172.16.18.100 SIP/2.0

To header: To:sip:00441202223344@172.16.18.100
1 44 Request-URI: Invite sip:+4400441202223344@172.16.18.100 SIP/2.0

To header: To:sip:+4400441202223344@172.16.18.100
From header: From<sip:+44441509555123@172.16.0.10>
No Setting Request-URI: Invite sip:+00441202223344@172.16.18.100 SIP/2.0

To header: To:sip:+00441202223344@172.16.18.100
From header: From<sip:+441509555123@172.16.0.10>
2 00 Request-URI: Invite sip:+441202223344@172.16.18.100 SIP/2.0

To header: To:<sip:+441202223344@172.16.18.100>
P-Asserted-Identity: P-Asserted-Identity441509555123@172.16.0.10>
P-Preferred-Identity: P-Preferred-Identity441509555123@172.16.0.10>
No Setting No Function

Issue 2.0
Delete the + only from an incoming SIP INVITE using E.164 numbering scheme:
Table 2-61 Delete + from Incoming SIP INVITE
Program 84-14-16 Program 84-14-13 Description
0: Off When a + is presented as the international access code in a SIP INVITE for
0: Off Or
1: On incoming calls then delete the + only.
<Example Output>
Incoming call from: +4902131795770
Displayed in terminal incoming caller history as:
Original
Delete and replace the + and matched country code from an incoming SIP INVITE using E.164
numbering scheme:
Table 2-62 Delete + and Country Code from Incoming SIP INVITE
With a SIP INVITE for incoming calls. When a + is presented as the international
access code along with a country code that DOES NOT match the value in
Program 10-02-01, then delete the + and add the international access code value
in Program 10-02-02 only.
1: Mode 1 1: On - Or -
access code along with a country code that DOES match the value in Program
10-02-01, then delete the + and country code but DO NOT add the international
access code value.
<Example Output>
Program 10-02-02 = 00

Issue 2.0
Original Program 10-02-01 = 0 Program 10-02-01 = 49
Delete and replace the + and matched country code from an incoming SIP INVITE using E.164
numbering scheme:
Table 2-63 Delete + and Country Code from Incoming SIP INVITE
access code along with a country code that DOES NOT match the value in
Program 10-02-01, then delete the + and add the international access code value
in Program 10-02-02 only.
2: Mode 2 1: On - Or -
access code along with a country code that DOES match the value in Program
10-02-01, then delete the + and country code but DO NOT add the international
access code value.
<Example Output>
Program 10-02-02 = 00
Program 10-02-03 = 9
Original Program 10-02-01 = 0 Program 10-02-01 = 49
Making an outgoing call from history of incoming calls:

1. From an idle multiline terminal.
2. Press soft key List.
3. Press soft key CID.
4. Press Speaker.

Issue 2.0
SIP Trunk Fax Pass-Through
Description
The SV9100 supports SIP trunk Fax pass-through using either the T.38 relay or Pass-Through mode. If
the SIP Carrier supports a T.38 Fax relay, select the T.38 mode. If the SIP carrier does not support T.38
Fax relay, then select the Pass-Through mode. The type of Fax relay should be selected manually as per
the SIP carrier capability.
Conditions
This feature is supported on the SIP carrier types specified in Program 10-29-14.
When the system detects a Fax tone or Codec exchange from the other side during
conversation, the system changes to a Codec specified for Fax in Program 84-33-12.
Supported Fax Codecs are G.711 a-law, G.711 u-law and G.726.
It is necessary to set the same Fax Codec on both systems. If the Codec does not match,
the Fax call will fail. The SIP/RTP session will continue. It is necessary to perform a
disconnect operation in this case.
If one side changes the Codec and the other side does not, the FAX call will fail.
The Codec exchange will continue until the call is terminated.
To establish a Fax call, set Program 15-03-03 to 1 (Special Receive DTMF tones after the
initial call is setup) and Program 15-03-18 to 0 (Fax).
STD SIP terminals do not support this functionality.
When the Fax call is complete, the SIP session will be disconnected.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
This function is not supported for STD SIP.

Issue 2.0
Trunks
SIP Trunks
VoIPDB-E1/IPLE
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

Assign the WAN address of the router that the

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
CCPU is using for NAT.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Define the Subnet Mask for the VoIPDB unit. |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255
10-28-01 SIP System Information Setup Domain Maximum of 64digits. No Setting

Name

generally provided by the SIP carrier.
10-28-02 SIP System Information Setup Host Name Maximum of 48 digits. No Setting
generally provided by the SIP carrier. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
10-28-03 SIP System Information Setup Transport 0 = UDP 0

Protocol 1 = TCP
Define the Transport type. This option is always
set to UDP. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

Proxy (Outbound) 1 = On
Define the SIP Proxy setup, Default Proxy
(Outbound). When SIP trunking is used, this (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
must be on.
If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for an
SIP Server and the SIP Server is removed or not

used, the entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set
back to their default settings. Even if Program
10-29-01 is set to 0 (off), the UNIVERGE SV9100
still checks the settings in the remaining 10-29
programs.

Proxy (Inbound) 1 = On
Define the Default Proxy (Inbound).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-29-03 SIP Server Information Setup Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Proxy IP Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Enter the default Proxy IP Address if the SIP
carrier is using an IP address for the proxy. In
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
most cases, this is left at the default entry as
the domain name is used.
10-29-04 SIP Server Information Setup Default 0 ~ 65535 5060

Proxy Port Number
Define the Proxy Port Number. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
10-29-05 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar 0 = None 0

Mode 1 = Manual
This program is used to Enable/Disable the
ability to Register to the ITSP.

In Registration mode (IP or Domain Name)
this MUST be enabled.
10-29-06 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Define the Registrar IP Address. The carrier
may provide an IP address. In most cases, a
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
domain name is used so this entry is left at the
default.
10-29-07 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar 0 ~ 65535 5060

Port Number
Define the Registrar Port Numbers. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
10-29-14 SIP Server Information Setup SIP Carrier 0 ~ 26 0

Choice 1 ~ 26 =
Define the SIP Carrier Choice. Carrier Type A ~ Carrier Type Z
Selecting Carrier B automatically sets
Program 10-29-16 to on (1). Program 10-29-16
MUST be set to off for incoming calls to route using
the lowest available trunk port.
Each certified vendor my use a different carrier
type. Visit NTAC website (http://www.necntac.com)
to verify the proper setting per vendor.
10-29-21 SIP Server Information Setup NAT Router 0 = Not Used 0

If the SV9100 is connecting to the SIP Carrier 1 = Used
using NAT Translations, this setting must be
enabled. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
10-36-01 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup 0 = Disable 0

Registration 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the SIP trunk registration.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

User ID

entered.

Authentication User ID
Define the Authentication USER ID for the SIP

Trunk.

Define the Authentication Password for the SIP

Trunk.

Assign the trunk type as 1 (SIP). 1 = SIP
2 = H.323

3 = CCIS

assignment from.


Enter 1 for this option to allow the SIP Station
ports to receive DTMF tones after the initial call

setup. For the Appointment Reminder, always
enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).
15-03-18 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Type: 0

Select Special Terminal 0 = FAX
Used for selecting Special terminal type (FAX or 1 = Modem
Modem). This setting influences how data is
transmitted via SIP trunk.
Program 15-03-03 must be set to 1 (Special) to
use this feature.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-13-28 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 0 = G.711_PT 0

Audio Capability Priority 2 = G.729_PT
Define the Codec Priority for voice session 3 = G.722_PT
establishment. 4 = G.726_PT
6 = G711_Fix

7 = G729_Fix
84-33 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic 1 = H.323 Trunk 1

Setup Index 1 - Trunk Type 2 = Networking
Set the type of SIP trunk for Fax through SIP 3 = SIP Trunk
trunk. 4 = SIP Extension
5 = CCIS over IP

Setup FAX Relay Mode 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the FAX relay mode. Port mode 2 = Each Port Mode
is used to enable Fax relay per port settings in
Program 15-03-03.
84-33-12 FAX Over IP Setup FAX Codec 1 = G.711 a-law 2 = US

Setup the Codec for Fax exchange. 2 = G.711 u-law 1 = other
3 = G726
84-33-13 FAX Over IP Setup Payload Size 1 ~ 4 (10ms base) 2 (20ms)

Set up the payload size.
84-33-14 FAX Over IP Setup Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 1

Static mode will use value defined in average 2 = Self Adjusting
jitter buffer. Self-adjusting automatically adjusts
values between minimum and maximum jitter (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
buffers defined.
84-33-15 FAX Over IP Setup Minimum Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 80

Setup FAX over IP Codec settings when using
CCIS over IP. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)
84-33-16 FAX Over IP Setup Average Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 120

84-33-17 FAX Over IP Setup Maximum Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 160

84-33-18 FAX Over IP Setup RTP Payload Type 0, 2, 8, 96 ~ 127 103

Set the payload number of the Codec selected
in Program 84-13-12. (Profile 1 ~ Profile 2)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-33-19 FAX Over IP Setup FAX over IP Type 1 = Type 1 1

Select FAX over IP type. 2 = Type 2
Type 1 (T.38 relay mode): SV9100 original
mode
Type 2 (Pass-Through mode): PBX compatible
mode
If Type 2 is selected, FAX over IP feature is
executed using Program 84-33 settings.
If Program 84-33-01 is disabled, Programs 84-33-12 ~ 84-33-19 are not valid. Also, Program 84-33 index must be
set to SIP Trunk.
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
IP Video Doorphone
Description
The IP Video Doorphone (IP3NE-IPCDH) can be connected to SV9100 system through a PoE Data
Switch and is normally used to monitor an entrance door. When pressed, the Doorphone sends a chime
tone to all extensions programmed to receive the chime. To answer, the called extension user just lifts
the handset. This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Doorphone location. In addition, a user
can view the outside image using the DR-viewer application (installed on a PC in the same network) or
the image can be viewed using a Polycom IP VVX 1500 terminal.
Each Doorphone has a Normally Opened and a Normally Closed relay contact that can be used to
connect to the electric door strike. These contacts are used to remotely control the entrance door. After
answering the chimes, a Multiline Terminal user can press the Recall key and activate the Doorphone
contacts. This in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door.
The following table lists the minimum requirement necessary when installing the DR-Viewer on a PC.
Table 2-64 DR-Viewer Requirements
Windows XP (Professional Windows 7 (Professional)

OS
SP3) (Professional SP1)
Minimum 2.0 GHz 32bits CPU or more

CPU Recommended Single Core 3.0 GHz 32bits CPU or more 3.2 GHz 32bits CPU or more
Dual Core 1.6 GHz 32bits CPU or more 2.0 GHz 32bits CPU or more
Minimum 512MB (Minimum) 1GB (Minimum)
Memory
Recommended 1GB (Minimum) 2GB (Minimum)
200MB (Minimum)
Disk Space Additional disk space is required for OS to function.
When the log storage term is for one month.
Windows XP Professional 32 bit with SP3 and Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit with SP1 are the only
Operating Systems supported.
If multiple LAN interfaces are installed, only the interface between the IP Video Doorphone and PC are active.
There is no recording function in the DR-Viewer.
Voice Transmission is not supported from a PC.
If using Windows 7, the UAC function must be disabled.
When using Windows 7, installation must be performed by the System Administrator.
2-858 IP Video Doorphone

Issue 2.0
Conditions
The IP Video Doorphone does not require a license to operate.
Under normal circumstances a third party SIP telephone with video would require the following:
5111 IP Terminal Advanced
0040 SIP Video
The IP Video Doorphone does not require these licenses.

NOTE
The IP Video Doorphone requires installation of the GPZ-IPLE unit and SIP Extension port.
The door unlock device is controlled by a built-in relay contact in the IP Video Doorphone.
For the DR-Viewer software to view the outside image from the IP Video Doorphone, each
device (SV9100, IP Video Doorphone, and the DR-Viewer) must be connected to the same
local network. Routing between the devices is not supported.
The IP Video Doorphone does not have an internal power supply and requires a PoE Data
Switch (IEEE802.3af connection).
A 100/1000 BASE-TX Data Switch is required, otherwise errors in the transmission of Voice
and Video data may occur.
CTI control is not supported on the IP Video Doorphone.
A maximum of eight door stations (including the normal Door box) can be connected.
The IP Video Doorphone requires one IP extension port per Door station. An extension
number is required for the setting but is not called using the extension number. Calls are
placed using the Service code or function key.
The DR-Viewer and IP Video Doorphone should be installed in the same data switch when
possible. If the number of switch connections between the DR-Viewer and IP Video
Doorphone is increased, the video resolution may deteriorate.
A maximum of eight PCs (with DR-viewer installed), can be connected.
The doorphone call can not be placed on hold using hook flash from the SLT, SIP Extension
or SIP DECT.
The Door Strike can not be controlled by the Service Code or Function key.
The Electric Door Strike can not be operated by the VVX1500 (Polycom) Terminal.
When a time-out occurs between the Doorphone and the system, an Error tone is heard on
the Doorphone.
When in the monitoring mode, the IP Video Doorphone cannot be called via the doorphone
access code (Program 11-12-36).
IP Video Doorphone 2-859

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
IP Video Doorphone (IP3NE-IPCDH)
Polycom VVX1500
GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board
IP3NE-IPCDH
PoE Data Switch (IEEE802.3af connection)
PC with DR-Viewer software installed
Related Features
Door Box


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(VoIPDB) 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Set the IP Address for GPZ-IPLE.
The IP Address assigned in Program 10-12-01
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Define the Subnet Mask for the VoIPDB unit. |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

duplex connection.


Select type of GPZ-IPLE DSP Resource. This extensions and trunks Resource 2 ~
program setting has no affect on the terminal/ 1 = IP Extension 256 = 0
3 = CCIS/Networking
4 = Use for NetLink
5 = Blocked
Paging
8 = Unicast Paging

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.
11-02-01 Extension Numbering Dial (Up to 8 Digits) Maximum of eight digits. 1 101
Assign a maximum of eight digits for extension 2 102
numbering. 3 103
~ ~
99 199
100 3101
~ ~
960 3961
11-10-18 Service Code Setup (for System 722 722

Administrator) Off-Premise Call Forward
by Door Box
transfer for ISDN/SIP.
11-12-36 Service Code Access (for Service Access) 702 702

Door Box Access
Assign the access code used to call the

doorphone.
15-05-01 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 1 = H.323 0

Terminal Type 2 = SIP
Set the terminal type for each extension. 3 = None
When connecting IP Video Doorphone 2 (SIP) 4 = DT800/DT700
is displayed.

This program Enables/Disables Standard SIP

phones video functionality.
15-05-46 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0 = Not Assigned 0

Doorphone Number 1 ~ 8 = Doorphone Number
If the port assignment of the Doorphone is
successful, a Doorphone number is
automatically entered.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a function key for External Call Forward 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
by Doorphone (Code 54) and Doorphone 751 by default) Manual for
Access (Code 97).
752 by default)
SLT
Define the ringing cycle for Door Box Ringing

for SLT terminals.
32-01-01 Door Box Timers Door Box Answer Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30
Set the time a user has to answer the Door Box
chimes.
32-01-03 Door Box Timers Off-Premise Call Forward 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

by Door Box Disconnect Timer
Define the conversation time for an Off-Premise
Call Forward by Door Box call. When this timer
expires, the caller hears busy tone for 3
seconds (fixed time), and the call is then
disconnected.
32-02-01 Door Box Ring Assignments Maximum of eight digits. No Setting

Determine which Door Box should ring which
extension by entering the extension number.
Each Door Box can be programmed to ring up
to 32 extensions and an extension can be

programmed to ring for multiple Door Boxes.
A minimum of one extension assigned is
required to setup the IP Video Doorphone.
32-03-01 Door Box Basic Setup Chime Pattern 0 = None Door Box 1 = 1
Set the chime pattern (0 ~ 6) for each Door 1 = Door Box Ring 1 Door Box 2 = 2
Box. 2 = Door Box Ring 2 Door Box 3 = 3

Door Box 8 = 1
32-04-01 Door Box Name Setup Door Box Name Maximum of 12 characters. No Setting
Define the name of each Doorphone.

3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

Setup G.711 Type 1 =-law

when in USA.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


GPZ-IPLE.
90-23-01 Deleting Registration of IP Telephones Maximum of eight digits.

Delete IP Telephone [Delete?]: Dial 1 + press
When deleting the registration, the Doorphone Transfer
number in Program 15-05-46 is deleted at the
same time.
programming and not through PC Programming
Operation
For additional information regarding the IP Video Doorphone, refer to the following manuals:
The UNIVERGE SV9100 IP Video Doorphone (IP3NE-IPCDH) Configuration Guide
REFERENCE
The UNIVERGE SV9100 IP Video Doorphone (IP3NE-IPCDH) DR-Viewer Installation and
Configuration Guide

Issue 2.0
IP/Digital Call Logging
Description
When using NEC DT300 and DT700 desktop terminals, telephone calls can be monitored, recorded and
stored. For single phone applications, the NEC 1-Port Digital Call Logging Unit can be used. This will
only support digital DT300 phone applications. For up to 16 digital ports or VoIP traffic the NEC IP/Digital
Back Office call logging unit can be used.
The back bone of NECs higher volume call recording software is the NEC IP/Digital BackOffice software
which is PC based and is capable of recording calls from both VoIP (DT700) and digital (DT300) phones.
NECs BackOffice software works in conjunction with a 4-Port Digital Logging Unit for recording of TDM
type calls.
IP Tap or BackOffice is used to record IP type calls. IP Tap is installed in line with the IP terminal.
BackOffice relies on port mirroring to collect and process packets for the recording of IP type calls.
The 1-Port IP Call Logging Unit (IP Tap) is a USB device capable of recording SIP audio.
1. To record SIP audio, the 1-Port Call Logging Unit (IP Tap) must be installed in line with a SIP
phone. Only calls sent or received on the connected SIP phone are recorded.
2. The 1-Port IP call Logging Unit (IP Tap) can be put in line with the VoIPDB to record either an
extension or a SIP trunk. When recording SIP trunks, a maximum of eight trunk members can be
recorded at a time, but the licenses must be present in the Call Logging Unit. This unit cannot be
used with Digital or Analog phones.
3. The 1-Port IP Call Logging Unit (IP Tap) can be managed by the Player/Recorder for IP Tap,
BackOffice, the Manager or Reporter Pro.
Three options are available for playing back of the recorded calls. For playback and management of
recorded calls NEC offers the NEC Player/Recorder, Manager and Reporter Pro. All of these perform the
playback function but offer increasing levels of additional features.
The NEC Digital Player/Recorder is used by an individual user to play back their own archive of calls or
to play back NEC VSR calls stored on their PC or network. It easily manages calls from one storage
location. It does not offer many of the advanced functions of the VSR Manager, such as establishing
preset shortcuts to any number of storage folders for quick and easy access. The Recorder portion of
this software is much like Back Office but scaled down to be utilized by the single port digital call logging
unit. It allows you to set where to store calls, and how long to archive them amongst other things.
The NEC IP/Digital Manager is much like the Player, it provides advanced visibility, access, retrieval, and
playback tools for the VSR Recorder administrators. It provides an intuitive interface for establishing
shortcuts to any number of storage folders and allows the supervisor to search across all storage folders
for specific call information such as User, Time/Date, Length of Call, etc. The application can be used to
access and manage VSR recordings whether created by the single port VSR or the 4-Port Digital Call
Logging Unit.
IP/Digital Call Logging 2-865

Issue 2.0
The NEC Call Logging Unit now supports licensing via LMS which in most cases can eliminate the need
for a license dongle.
The NEC IP/Digital Reporter is NECs most feature rich product for listening to recorded phone calls. It
has functionality much the same as the Manager but offers additional features. These additional features
make management easier by providing tools to help gather data and generate reports. NECs IP/Digital
Reporter also provides advanced features which help in gathering data and report generation of usage
and performance metrics for analysis and monitoring of the call recording environment. Usage analysis
provide data metrics on call volume, disk usage, average call length, longest calls, most called numbers,
longest recorded time numbers, call volume distribution over date span, call volume distribution at hourly
intervals and call volume distribution at call length intervals.
The use of these products is covered in greater depth it their specific User Guides.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record telephone
conversation or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal
CAUTION in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing
any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require
some form of notification to all parties to a telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other
notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to
monitoring or recording the telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions
The PC hosting Back Office should have the power save functionality disabled.
Encryption is only supported at 256-bit setting.
Does not support recording of VoIP phone conversations in a Netlink or CCIS configuration.
No Wireless terminal support.
Encryption Feature Requires IP/Digital Call Logging Manager or Reporter for playback.
Network Port monitoring is required for recording calls from VoIP extensions.
Peer-to-Peer is only supported in a VoIP multi-port mirroring scenario.
VoIP calls placed on hold or conference will break into two call recordings.
The data switch used to monitor traffic needs to have the monitor port capable of ingress
and egress simultaneously.
Only a single NIC is supported for the PC hosting Back Office.
A maximum of four 4-Port Digital Call Logging Units is supported.
IP/Digital Call Logging supports the G.711 CODEC only.
Licenses for the 1-Port IP Call Logging Unit (IP Tap) is embedded in the firmware.
2-866 IP/Digital Call Logging

Issue 2.0
XML Call Recording Control (IP Terminals Only)
Description
IP/Digital BackOffice Version 3.0 has been enhanced to allow for Desk Top Control support for DT700
terminals only. This feature allows the user to Start, Stop or Pause the recording function and to make
recorded comments from the terminal. Management of recordings can be done with IP/Digital Manager
and Reporter Pro.
Conditions
BackOffice is not supported with Dual NICs.
The Data switch must support Port Mirroring.
The monitor port must support both Ingress and Egress traffic.
The XML application will not function without Ingress and Egress traffic on the monitor port.
BackOffice will not receive a license without Ingress and Egress traffic on the monitor port
(SV8100 only).
XML is only supported on DT700 (I-SIP, N-SIP) series terminals.
IIS must NOT be installed on the same PC running XML BackOffice.
Terminal Configuration
The terminal must be configured with the following settings:

Pop up mode must be set to App Priority. From the terminal, login to the Admin menu. Select
Application Settings-> Popup-> Popup Mode. Check the box App Priority.
Push Server access must be set to Enable (All Clients). From the terminal, login to the Admin
menu. Select Security-> Push Server-> Push Server Access. Check the box Enable (All
Clients).
PC Requirements
PC should be dedicated for BackOffice use only.
PC running XML BackOffice must NOT have IIS installed.
Windows 7 and Windows 8 are supported.
Windows XP is not supported.
Firewall should be configured for inbound TCP traffic on port 80 and outbound TCP traffic on port
82. Firewall can also be disabled.
There cannot be another Web Server running on the same PC as BackOffice.
Confirm connection from PC to terminal TCP port 82 using telnet [terminal-IP address] 82.

Issue 2.0
Confirm connection to PC running XML BackOffice for another PC using telnet [recorder-IP
address] 80.
If either Telnet test fails the XML will not function.
WinPcap must be installed on the PC.
XML Windows
Displays may vary depending on the terminal type.

If manual recording is enabled or the recording has been stopped, the following is displayed.
Figure 2-32 Start Recording
If recording has started automatically or manually, the following is displayed.
Figure 2-33 Recording
If the recording has been paused, the following is displayed.
Figure 2-34 Paused

Issue 2.0
If there are no licenses installed in the BackOffice, the following will appear.
Figure 2-35 Information Screen
The following screen is used when making comments. Go to Settings, highlight the comment
during recording and click Save.
Figure 2-36 Comment List Screen
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
NEC DT300/DT700 Series Desktop Terminals NEC IP/Digital Call Logging
4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit DT300 only)
1-Port Call Logging Unit (IP Tap) XML is not supported
PC Hardware and Software:
Pentium 4 processor
512 Mb RAM
Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0+

Issue 2.0
Data switch with managed port capabilities

LAN connection to data switch to monitor for SIP and RTP traffic and for remote access to
stored calls.
NEC BackOffice or Recorder software
Sufficient hard drive space for recording calls. Using the default (.xtr) format 168 hours of
recording can be stored in 1 gbyte of storage space
Windows XP or Windows 7 (32- or 64-bit)
Related Features
None

None
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
ISDN Compatibility
Description
ISDN-BRI
Integrated Service Digital Network Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI) is a Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) service that provides two B channels and a D channel (2B + D) for voice call trunking.
The B channels provide two voice path connections. Caller ID is usually a standard feature on ISDN-BRI
provided trunks. Caller ID indication displays the calling party telephone number on the LCD of the
multiline terminal for CO incoming calls. This interface provides voice communication path only.
With ISDN BRI the SV9100 only supports the following protocol:
National ISDN-1 (NI-1)
ISDN-PRI
ISDN-PRI (Integrated Service Digital Network Primary Rate Interface) is a Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) service that provides 23 B channels and a single D channel (23B+1D) for trunking.
Caller ID indication displays the calling party telephone number on the LCD of the multiline terminal for
CO incoming calls. This interface provides voice communication path only.
With ISDN PRI the SV9100 supports the following protocols:

NI-2
4ESS (AT&T Custom)
AT&T 5ESS (Lucent Custom)
DMS-100 Custom (Nortel Spec NIX-A211-1)
DMS-100 National ISDN (Nortel Spec NIX-A233-1)
ISDN BRI/PRI Features

DID Line Service
When configured for DID Line Service, the trunks emulate Loop Start or Ground Start trunks for
outgoing calls and DID trunks for incoming calls.
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)
Program 10-03-05: ETU Configuration CLIP Information Announcement, allows the Calling Party
Number IE in the Setup Message for a call when placed out an ISDN Trunk.
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station allows each unique station or virtual
extension 10-digit number (representing the DID number of the originating station) to be sent out
over the ISDN Network, if it is programmed. If no Extension Calling Number is assigned, the
system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk. If both the extension and trunk information are
programmed, the extension information is sent as it takes priority.
ISDN Compatibility 2-871

Issue 2.0
Calling Party Name

If programmed, Calling Party Name allows the station name to be sent out over the ISDN network.
A system wide name can be programmed to be sent over the network or the name can be defined
on a per station basis. If both are programmed, the system wide name takes priority over the
station name.
SMDR Includes Dialed Number
The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk name (entered in system programming) or the
number the incoming caller dialed (i.e., the dialed ISDN digits). This allows you to analyze the
SMDR report based on the number your callers dial. (This option also applies to a DID trunk.)
Display Shows Why Caller ID is Not Available
With Caller ID enabled, the system provides information for ISDN calls that do not contain the
Caller ID information. If the Caller ID information is restricted, the telephone display shows
PRIVATE. If the system cannot provide Caller ID information because the Telco information is not
available, the display shows OUT OF AREA.
Conditions
Primary Rate Interface (PRI):
The system is compatible with ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) services. PRI services
currently supported include:
Basic PRI Call Control (BCC)
Display of incoming callers name and number when allowed by Telco
Routing in the system based on the number the caller dialed
ISDN maintenance functions (such as In Service/Out of Service Messaging)
Speech and 3.1 KHz audio
PRI ability requires the installation of GCD-PRTA. Each PRI circuit provides 24 PRI
channels (23B + D) 4 with 64K Clear Channel response. The T1/PRI Interface uses a single
slot. When installed, the T1/PRI Interface uses the first block of 24 consecutive trunks. For
example, if you have an GCD-4COTB + GPZ-4COTF installed for trunks 1~8, the T1/PRI
Interface automatically uses trunks 9~32. If you have GCD-4COTB + GPZ-4COTF installed
for trunks 1~8 and 17~24, the T1/PRI uses trunks 25~48. The T1/PRI Interface cannot use
trunks 9~16 (even if available) since they are not part of a consecutive block of 24 trunks.
The sending of Calling Party Name display information to the public network with ISDN PRI
is only supported with NI2 protocol.
When using Mobile Extension in a NetLink Network, the ISDN/PRI must be utilized in the
Primary System.
When using fractional PRI, the blade comes up as zero ports until Program 10-03-06 is set
to the 4/8/12/16/20/24(auto), and then reset.
2-872 ISDN Compatibility

Issue 2.0
If fractional PRI has the number of ports changed, the Trunk Port number might change if
they become split or fit into an empty gap of trunk ports. For example, if you have a
GCD-4COTB + GPZ-4COTF for Trunks ports 1~8 and 17~24 and the PRI (12 ports) was
assigned as 25~36 and the PRI is changed to be eight ports instead of 12 ports, the new
trunk port numbers would be 9~16 because the eight ports can now fix into the gap without
being split ports. Another example, if you have a GCD-4COTB + GPZ-4COTF for Trunks
ports 1~8 and 17~24 and the PRI (8 ports) was assigned as 9~16 and then you change the
PRI to be 12 ports instead of eight, the new trunk ports would be 25~36 because the ports
have to be split to keep the original port numbers, and this is not supported.
If using a CSU/DSU, Program 10-03-13 must be set to 0. If not using a CSU/DSU,
Program 10-03-13 must be set to 1~7 or anything other than 0.
Restrictions for Calling Party Name:
The UNIVERGE SV9100 supports receiving the name from the Network in supported
formats only. Refer to Table 2-57 Restrictions for Calling Party Names.
Table 2-65 Restrictions for Calling Party Names
Protocols Name Delivery Formats
NI-2 Facility Information Elements

4ESS (AT&T Custom) Not Supported
AT&T5ESS Lucent Custom Facility Information Element
DMS-100 (Custom) Display Information Element
DMS-100 (National; ISDN) Facility Information Element
Nortel Specification NIX-A211-1
Nortel Specification NIS-A233-1
CO Line Service is not supported
ISDN PRI cannot be configured for CO Emulation

B-Channel to Trunk Association
When an Incoming ISDN-BRI/PRI call is received, the system assigns the lowest trunk
number of the ISDN circuit to the incoming call associated with the B-Channel. When an
Outgoing call is placed using the ISDN-PRI/BRI, the system assigns the Trunk and
B-Channel association according to the chart below. This is based on the Trunk-to-Trunk
Group and Trunk Group Priority assignment in (Program 14-05-01).

Issue 2.0
Refer to the charts below for examples:
Trunk B-Channel
Incoming Call Number Number
Station User 9 1
Talking on TK009 10 2
11 3
12 4
13 5
14 6
15 7
16 8
17 9
18 10
19 11
20 12
21 13
22 14
31 23 Incoming call from the
Network on Channel 23. In most
cases, the Network will control/select
the B-Channel used for an incoming call.
Trunk Trunk B-Channel

Outgoing Call Number
Trunk Group
Priority Number
9 1 9 1
10 1 8 2
11 1 7 3
12 1 6 4
13 1 5 5
14 1 4 6
15 1 3 7
16 1 2 8
Station user 17 1 1 9
places outgoing trunk 18 2 3 10
call by dialing Trunk 19 2 2 11
Access code. Outgoing 20 2 1 12
call is placed on the 21 3 11 13
associated B-Channel. 22 3 10 14
31 3 ...1 23
In addition to T1/PRI interface ETUs, PRI also requires a CSU/DSU Unit and
interconnecting cables to interface with the Telco.

Issue 2.0
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Caller ID Name to Single Line Telephone is NOT supported for ISDN (BRT) Trunks.
The system is compatible with ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) services. BRI services
currently supported include:
Basic BRI Call Control (BCC)
Point-to-Point BRI Terminal Connection (no daisy-chaining)
Multipoint BRI Terminal Connection (daisy-chaining)
BRI services require the installation of GCD-2BRIA. Each GCD-2BRIA has two BRI circuits.
The GCD-2BRIA uses a single universal slot.
A GPZ-2BRIA daughter board can be added to the GCD-2BRIA to add two more BRI
circuits for a total of 4.
NOTE
For each BRI line, two different Terminal Endpoint Identifiers (TEIs) are assigned to two
different Service Profile Identifiers (SPIDs).
The two different SPIDs for each BRI line, are related to different trunk logical port
numbers. One BRI provides two trunk logical ports when it is connected to a CO line. Each
SPID is assigned to a different TEI. This relationship is made in the initialization of the BRI
line when it is connected to the CO.
This relationship between SPID and TEIs are created as follows.

LOGICAL-PORT-NUMBER + 0 = SPID-1
LOGICAL-PORT-NUMBER + 1 = SPID-2
When using the SMDR reports for BRI, all incoming BRI calls are displayed under the
CLASS column as IVIN.
When using Mobile Extension in a NetLink Network, the ISDN/PRI must be utilized in the
Primary System.
Automatic Data Link Failure Recovery
If a data link error is detected by the BRI ETU, the system tries to recover the data link and
send the SPID to the central office. To provide this enhancement, the BRI ETU must be
able to indicate to the system when a data link error has occurred.
In addition to the BRI Interface ETU, BRI Services require the installation of NT1 Network
Terminators and interconnecting cabling.
CO Line Service is not supported.
ISDNBRI cannot be configured for CO Emulation.

Issue 2.0
BRI and DID Callers with Non-Matching SPID Numbers

This feature allows you to determine whether the system checks the called party number
with the SETUP message and the SPID setup. Depending on the system programming,
this can allow DID calls to be received on BRI trunks and direct them according to the DID
Translation Table (Program 22-11).
Special Conditions Related to Ordering DID Service For ISDN-BRI
Telcos may refer to this in different ways. The reference Verizon uses to order such service
is Additional Directory Numbers with no new terminating equipment (only a dialable
number). When you want Additional Directory Numbers to hunt when a B-Channel is busy,
the service may be called Busy Diversion.
Calling Party Number (CPN) presentation from station is available for virtual extensions.
SV9100 supports only National ISDN-1.
The trunk setting (Program 20-19-09) for sending the caller name on outgoing ISDN calls
takes priority over the same setting for the station (Program15-01-01).
When programmed, Calling Party Name will be sent on calls that originate from a station
(MLT, SLT, or IP Multiline) or an incoming trunk (Analog, ISDN, or CCIS).
Calling Party Name supports up to 12 ASCII characters.
When a call originates from a virtual extension, the Calling Party Name for the virtual
extension is sent. It does not follow the setting in Program 15-18-02.
Calling Party Name is dependent upon the carrier. The network carrier must allow the
SV9100 to edit the Calling Party Name information.
SV9100 does not support ISDN sub-addressing.
SV9100 does not support ISDN Network Specific Parameters for the AT&T protocol such as
SDN (Software Defined Network, also known as Virtual Private Network), Megacom, and
Megacom800.

Issue 2.0
ISDN 2 B-Channel Transfer
Description
This ISDN PRI 2 B-Channel Transfer feature allows the UNIVERGE SV9100 to receive a call on one
B-Channel and transfer it back out on a second B-Channel (Trunk-to-Trunk transfer on the telco side).
When the transferred call connects, both of the B-Channels are then released and available for either
making or receiving another call. This feature provides more efficient use of B Channels on an ISDN
PRI by allowing a customer to transfer calls without tying up their B Channels for the duration of the call.
Conditions
The bearer capability of two calls must be Speech, 3.1-kHz Audio, Unrestricted Digital
Information or compatible.
This feature is not supported with Automatic Transfer.
This feature is not supported with Unsupervised Conference.
This feature is only supported with a Manual Transfer.
This feature is only supported when both trunks are ISDN/PRI and the bearer capability of
the two trunks meet the same service requirements.
Trunk-to-Trunk programming must be enabled for this feature to work.
Both ISDN/PRI trunks must reside in the same system for this feature to work.
This feature is available if the Telco Service Provider supports this feature.
This feature is available in the following case:
At least one call to be transferred is:

answered (outgoing from the SV9100)
answered (incoming to the SV9100)
And the other call is:

answered (outgoing from the SV9100)
answered (incoming to the SV9100)
Default Settings
None

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
To provide ISDN-PRI trunk connection:

GCD-PRTA
To provide ISDN-BRI trunk connection:

GCD-2BRIA or GCD-2BRIA with GPZ-2BRIA
NT-1 for each BRI (locally provided)
Related Features
E-911 Compatibility
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Transfer


Issue 2.0
ISDN BRI Installation:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-01 ETU Setup (BRIA PKG) ISDN Line Mode 0 = Not Used 1
Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration 1 = T-Point
data for each GCD-2BRIA. Use this program to

select the ISDN Line Mode.
10-03-03 ETU Setup (BRIA PKG Setup) Connection 0 = Point-to-Multipoint 0

Type 1 = Point-to-Point
Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration
data for each GCD-2BRIA. Confirm the
connection type for each GCD-2BRIA.
10-03-04 ETU Setup (BRIA PKG Setup) Layer 3 1~5 1

Timer Type
data for each GCD-PRTA. This program selects
the Layer 3 timer type (1 ~ 5). Each timer value
of Layer 3 is set up for each type in Program
81-06 (T-Bus).
10-03-08 ETU Setup (BRIA PKG Setup) Dial Sending 0 = Enblock Sending 1
Mode 1 = Overlap Sending
Select ISDN protocol.
10-03-09 ETU Setup (BRIA PKG Setup) Dial 0 = Keypad Facility 0

Information Element 1 = Called Party Number
Select ISDN Protocol if Overlap Sending is

selected in Program 10-03-08.
10-03-13 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) Loss of 0 = Level 0 2

Signal Detection Limit (lowest sensitivity)
If the transmit/receive voltage is less than the 1 = Level 1
setting in Program 10-03-13, the system 2 = Level 2
considers this as Loss-Of-Signal and the PRI
3 = Level 3
does not come up. Note that there are different
4 = Level 4

values based on the setting in Program
10-03-12 for the PRI. 5 = Level 5
6 = Level 6
7 = Level 7
(highest sensitivity)
10-06-01 ISDN BRI Setup TEI Selection 0 = Select by SPID number 0

Select the method the system uses when 1 = Select by Channel ID
assigning Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) Number

values to the BRI Circuit.
10-06-02 ISDN BRI Setup DID Mode 0 = Route by Called Party 0

Select the method the system uses when Number
assigning DID Mode to the BRI Circuit. 1 = Route by Redirecting

Number
10-06-03 ISDN BRI Setup SPID 1 Dial (Maximum of 20 digits). No Setting

Assign the SPID Number for B-Channel 1.

10-06-04 ISDN BRI Setup SPID 2 Dial (Maximum of 20 digits). No Setting
Assign the SPID Number for B-Channel 2.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-36 Basic Trunk Data Setup Sending Caller 0 = Disable 0

Name on Outgoing Calls (ISDN Trunk) 1 = Enable
Disable/Enable sending the Caller Name on

outgoing ISDN trunks.
15-01-10 Basic Extension Data Setup Sending 0 = Disable 0

Caller Name on Outgoing Calls (ISDN Trunk) 1 = Enable
Disable/Enable sending the Caller Name on

outgoing ISDN calls per station.
20-19-09 System Options for Caller ID Calling Party Maximum of 12 characters. No Setting
Name for ISDN Trunk
Enter the Calling Party Name to be used
system wide for outgoing ISDN calls.

If no data is entered, it will follow the station
name in Program 15-01-01.
21-12-01 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Maximum of 16 characters No Setting
Calling Party Number Data (1 ~ 0, , #)
Assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk
(maximum 16 digits per entry).

After the above programming is complete a
reset of the GCD-2BRIA is required.
ISDN PRI Installation:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-04 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) Layer 3 1~5 1

Timer Type
data for each CD-PRTA This program selects
the Layer 3 timer type (1 ~ 5). Each timer value
of Layer 3 is set up for each type in Program
81-06 (T-Bus).
10-03-06 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) Length of 0 = Level 1 2

Cable 1 = Level 2
Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration 2 = Level 3
data for each GCD-PRTA. Select the length of 3 = Level 4
cable to be used.
4 = Level 5
10-03-08 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) Dial 0 = Enblock Sending 0

Sending Mode 1 = Overlap Sending
ISDN protocol definition. Select either enblock

or overlap sending.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-09 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) Dial 0 = Keypad Facility 0

Information Element 1 = Called Party Number
ISDN protocol definition. If Overlap Sending is
selected in Program 10-03-08, select either 0 or
1 for the dial information element.
10-03-18 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) Type of 0 = Unknown 2

Number 1 = International number
Select the number type for the ISDN circuit. 2 = National number
3 = Network Specific number

4 = Subscriber number
5 = Abbreviated number
10-03-19 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) Numbering 0 = Unknown 1

Plan Identification 1 = ISDN numbering plan
Select the Numbering Plan used for the ISDN 2 = Data numbering plan
circuit. 3 = Telex numbering plan
4 = National standard
numbering plan
5 = Private numbering plan
10-03-20 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) Network 0 = Standard (Same as NI-2) 0
Exchange Selection 1 = reserved
Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN circuit. 2 = reserved
3 = DMS (A211)
4 = 5ESS

5 = DMS (A233)
6 = 4ESS
7 = NI-2
10-03-21 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) PRI Number 0 = Auto 0

of Ports 1 = 4 Ports
Select the number of ports for the PRI. 2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports

4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports
10-39-01 Fractional Setup 0 = Disable 0

Enable/Disable the T1/PRI fractional function. 1 = Enable

equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.

The time the system waits for the timer to

expire before placing the call in a talk state.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Calling Party Number Data (1 ~ 0, , #)
Assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk
(maximum 16 digits per entry).

After the above programming is complete a
reset of the GCD-PRTA is required.
DID Services for either ISDN BRI or PRI:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
22-09-01 DID Basic Data Setup Expected Number of 1 ~8 4

Digits
For each DID Translation Table (1 ~ 20), enter
the number of digits the table expects to receive
from the CO (eight maximum). For example, for

a table used with 3-digit DID service, enter 3.
For additional DID Services refer to Direct
Inward Dialing (DID) on page 2-390.
22-11-01 DID Translation Number Conversion Maximum of eight digits. No Setting

Received Number
system.
22-11-02 Translation Number Conversion Target Maximum of 24 digits. No Setting

Number

Issue 2.0
Calling Party Number Presentation for either ISDN BRI or PRI:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-05 ETU Setup (PRTA PKG Setup) CLIP 0 = Disable 1

Information 1 = Enable
Based on this setting, the system includes
Presentation Allowed (1) or Presentation
Restricted (0) in the Setup message to allow or

deny the Calling Party Number. Program
15-01-04 must also be set to 1 if this option is
enabled.
15-01-04 Basic Extension Data Setup ISDN Caller ID 0 = Disable 1

If Program 15-01-04 and Program 10-03-05 are 1 = Enable
enabled, the system includes Caller ID in the
Setup message as Presentation Allowed. If

these options are disabled, it is Presentation
Restricted.

extension port =
Class 1

be allowed.
Assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk (1 ~ 0, , #)

21-13-01 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Maximum of 16 characters No Setting
Extensions (0 ~ 9, , #)
Assign a Calling Party Number (maximum 16
digits per entry) to each extension. The calling
Program 21-13.

Issue 2.0
ISDN PRI Network Specific Assignment:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
26-02-07 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR Network 0 ~ 16 0

Define the network specified parameter table

for each ARS Table.
26-12-01 Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS 0 = System Default 0

Type of Number 1 = Unknown
Define the type of Number parameter for an 2 = International No.
ISDN outgoing call. 3 = National No.
4 = Network Specific No.
5 = Subscriber No.
6 = Abbreviated No.
26-12-02 Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS 0 = System Default 0

Numbering Plan Identification 1 = Unknown
Define the Numbering Plan Identification 2 = ISDN Plan
Parameter for an ISDN outgoing call. 3 = Data Plan
4 = Telex Plan
5 = National Standard Plan
6 = Private Plan
44-05-11 ARS/F-Route Table Network Specified 0 ~ 16 0

Parameter Table
Define the network specified parameter table

for each F-Route table.
SMDR Dialed Digits for either ISDN BRI or PRI:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Determine if the CLI/DID Number should be

2 = Caller ID Name
displayed.

to 1, ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits, if

set to 0 trunk names are printed instead.
For additional SMDR Services refer to Station
Message Detail Recording on page 2-1323.

Issue 2.0
General ISDN Programs:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Disable 1

Transfer 1 = Enable
For each trunk that should be able to participate
in a tandem call, enter 1. To disable a trunk

from Tandem Trunking, enter 0. Required for 2
B-Channel transfer.
15-02-29 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup PB 1 ~ 63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)

Back Tone Level
Adjust the PB Back Tone level when calling an

ISDN line.

Assign a function key for Caller ID Block for 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
ISDN (63) if required. 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)

Assign a Class of Service to extensions. Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
(1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1


extension.
20-09-03 Class of Service Options (Incoming Call 0 = Deny COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) Sub Address Identification 1 = Allow
Define whether or not an extension displays the

Caller Sub-Address.


transfer when the user hangs up.

Restriction

is impossible.
20-11-21 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer 0 = Deny COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) Restriction for Tandem Trunking 1 = Allow
on Hang Up
Allow an extension user to set up a tandem call
automatically when they hang up.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


20-19-04 System Options for Caller ID Wait Facility 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

IE Timer
This is the time an ISDN trunks uses to
determine the time the system waits for the
Caller ID name from the Telco.
20-25-14 ISDN Options No response Release Send 0 = Off 0

Operation mode setting for when second T303 1 = On
timer expires.
ISDN 2 B-Channel Transfer:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-16 ETU Setup PRI Service Two B-Channel 0 = Off 0

Transfer 1 = On
Turn On or Off the ability to use the ISDN-PRI 2

B-Channel Transfer service.

Transfer 1 = Enable
If DISA caller can place outgoing calls through
the system (refer to Program 20-14), Enable
loop supervision for the DISA trunk. If DISA
caller cannot use the system trunks for
outgoing calls, enter Disable.

Assign function to multiline terminal line keys 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(Transfer = 06). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)

Determine the time a user display shows Caller

ID for a second incoming call.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Restriction

is impossible.

on Hang Up

tandem/ conference call automatically when
they hang up.
20-25-15 ISDN Options Call Reference Selection for 0 = Negative Integer 0

PRI 2 B-Channel Transfer 1 = No Edit
Turn ON (1) or OFF (0) the ability for an
incoming call to be transferred (Trunk-to-Trunk)

to an outgoing call when 2 B-Channel Transfer
is used.
24-02-09 System Options for Transfer Two 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

B-Channel Transfer Retry Timer
Enable/Disable disconnect Supervision for the

system trunks.
Operation
To Perform an ISDN 2 B-Channel Transfer:

1. Receive or make an ISDN trunk call.
2. Go off-hook using the handset, or press Speaker (the Call Appearance key or direct trunk
appearance lights). Talk with the outside party.
3. Press the Transfer key.
4. Dial 9 to access second ISDN trunk.
5. Dial the outside number and wait for the outside party to answer.
6. Hang up.
7. LCD returns to idle after the LCD Display Hold timeout (Program 20-02-08).

Issue 2.0
Programming Flowchart for ISDN-PRI Answering Calls
Start
GCD-PRTA
In 10-03-01, determine the mode of the DTI( )-U40 ETU
(0=not set, 1=T-Bus)
Is the CRC
In 10-03-03, enter Multi-Frame In 10-03-03, enter
No Yes
'0'. (CRC4) '1'.
used?
In 10-03-04, select the Layer 3 timer type (1-5). The timer value is
set up in Program 81-06 (T-Bus)
In 10-03-06, determine the length of cable used to connect from the CSU to
GCD-PRTA
the DTI( )-U40 ETU
(0=0-40m, 1=40-81m, 2=81-122m, 3=122-162m, 4=162-200m).
Is the Dial
Sending Mode
In 10-03-08, enter In 10-03-08, enter
Enblock Enblock or Overlap
'0'. '1'.
Overlap
Sending?
In 10-03-09, select either

Keypad Facility (0) or
Called Party Number (1) for
the dial information element.
In 14-05-01, assign PRI lines to
trunk groups (determines
available channels for PRI lines).
Is the amount of time the

In 21-01-03, enter the
system waits before placing
interval for the trunk No
the call in a talk state
interdigit timer.
sufficient?
Yes
20-19-04, set the

In 20-19-04, set the Do you wish to have the Caller ID
No Yes timer to at least '10'
timer to '0'. Name displayed for incoming calls?
seconds.
Go To
A

Issue 2.0
Should the sub-address

In 20-09-03, set the In 20-09-03, set the
No ID be displayed for Yes
extension's COS to '0'. extension's COS to '1'.
incoming calls?
Should an extension
In 20-13-23, set the In 20-13-23, set the
No be able to display the reason why Yes
extension's COS to '0'. extension's COS to '1'.
a call is transferred to it?
Define the extension's

Class of Service in 20-06-01.
In 35-02-15, enter '0' to

print Caller ID Number, 1 DID
Is SMDR used? Yes
Calling Number or 2 Caller ID
Name.
No
In 35-02-16, enter '0' to
print the trunk port name
assigned in 14-01-01 or
enter '1' to print the
received dialed number.
In 22-02-01, enter 3.
Should all PRI Refertotothe
theElite
SV9100
In 22-02-01, enter Refer IPK II
Yes Trunks ring the same No Programming
0. Manual forManual
DID or
extensions? SV9100 Networking
programming.
Manual
In 22-05-01, assign all the trunks on a

PRI ETU to the same Ring Group.
In 14-07-01 and 15-06-01, set up the trunk

Access Maps for PRI trunks.
In 22-04-01, do not
In 22-04-01,
assign extension Should extension
assign extension
to PRI No ring for incoming Yes
to PRI trunk's Ring
trunk's Ring calls on PRI trunk?
Group.
Group.
In 14-01-01,
For each extension in the Ring
assign names to
Group, in 22-06-01, enter '1' for
trunks to make
each time mode when the
identification
extension should ring.
easier.
Go to
B

Issue 2.0
Do you want
In 22-01-04, Do not unanswered PRI In 22-01-04,
Reroute
enter 0. reroute calls to reroute if enter 0.
unanswered?
In 22-08-01, enter
the no-answer
Ring Group for
unanswered PRI
calls.
For each extension in the

In 22-04-01, assign
Ring Group, in 22-06-01,
extension
enter '1' for each time mode
to PRI trunk's Ring No
when the extension should
Answer Ring Group.
ring.
If a PRI call rings longer than

In 22-01-02, Enter 1.
In 22-01-02, enter a specified interval, should
No Yes Also, set the interval
0. the ring cadence change to a
in 22-01-03.
unique "alarm" sound?
Change the Ring Tone

Do you want to Range in 22-03-01 and
change the way 15-02-02 the tones within
Yes
PRI calls ring each range in 82-01-01
telephones? and the ring cadence in
20-15-01.
No
Adjust the CODEC

Do you want to
Gain in 14-01-02
Trunks adjust the gain
(transmit) and 14-
(volume) for trunks?
01-03 (receive).
No
Consider using CAP Keys, Do you want line In 15-07-01, program

Multiple Directory Numbers, or keys or CAP Keys function keys as line keys
Yes
Ring Groups for PRI trunks for incoming PRI (*01), loop keys (*05) or
instead of Direct Trunk trunks? line group keys (*02).
Appearance.
No
Finished

Issue 2.0
Programming Flowchart of ISDN-PRI Placing Calls
Start
In 10-03-01, determine the mode of the GCD-PRTA

CD-PRTA
(0=not set, 1=T-Bus).
Is the CRC
In 10-03-03, enter Multi-Frame In 10-03-03, enter
No Yes
'0'. (CRC4) '1'.
used?
In 10-03-04, select the Layer 3 timer type (1-5). The timer value is
set up in Program 81-06 (T-Bus).
In 10-03-06, determine the length of cable used to connect from the CSU to
the GCD-PRTA
CD-PRTA
(0=0-40m, 1=40-81m, 2=81-122m, 3=122-162m, 4=162-200m).
Is the Dial
Sending Mode
In 10-03-08, enter In 10-03-08, enter
Enblock Enblock or Overlap
'0'. '1'.
Overlap
Sending?
In 10-03-09, select either

Keypad Facility (0) or
Called Party Number (1) for
the dial information element.
20-08-02, enter 1 to
In 20-08-02, enter 0 to Should system users be able to place
No Yes enable outgoing
disable outgoing calls. outgoing calls on trunks?
calls.
In 20-06-01, assign
Class of Service to extensions.
Stop
In 20-08-13, enter 0 to Should telco display the In 20-08-13, enter 1 to

disable calling number No calling number for outgoing Yes enable calling number
display by telco. calls? display by telco.
Should telco display the

In 20-13-31, enter In 20-13-31, enter
trunk identification for
0 to disable trunk No Yes 1 to enable trunk
outgoing calls the extension
ID display by telco. ID display by telco.
places?
Go To
A

Issue 2.0
In 15-01-04, enter 0 Should Caller ID be included In 15-01-04, enter 1

No Yes
In 10-03-05 enter 0 in the call's setup message? In 10-03-05 enter 1.
In 20-09-03, enter 0 to Should telco display the In 20-09-03, enter 1 to

disable sub-address No calling number's sub- Yes enable sub-address
display by telco. address? display by telco.
In 21-12-01, program the calling party In 20-06-01, assign

number data (15 digits max.) for each Class of Service to
trunk. extensions.
In 21-13-01, program the calling party

number data (15 digits max.) for each
extension.
In 14-01-07, enter 0 Are outgoing

In 14-01-07, enter 1 to
to prevent outgoing No calls allowed on Yes
allow outgoing calls.
calls. specific trunks?
In 14-05-01 assign PRI trunks to trunk groups

(This determines available channels for PRI trunks).
Build an outgoing restriction matrix.
In the default program, In 14-07-01 for

Do you need to restrict
extensions have full each Access Map,
certain extensions from
access to all trunks. Yes select the access
placing calls on certain
options
trunks?
for each trunk.
No In 15-06-01,
assign extensions
to Access Maps.
Should caller hear DTMF

In 14-01-10, enter 0. No confirmation tones as they Yes
YEs In 14-01-10, enter 1.
are dialing a trunk call?
If a user preselects a line, how In 20-02-06, enter

long should the system Yes the preselection
remember the preselection? interval.
No
If the system detects the called party is

busy, how long should the busy
tone be heard? (0-64800)
Go To
B

Issue 2.0
In 21-01-03, enter
Is the amount of time the system waits before
No the interval for the
placing the call in a talk state sufficient?
trunk interdigit timer.
Yes
Should extension users In 15-07-01, assign

In 15-07-01, do not assign
No have one-button placing Yes function keys as line
function keys as line keys.
of outside calls? keys (code *01+001- 200).
In 15-07-01, do not Should extension users have

In 15-07-01, assign CAP Keys
assign Trunk Group No one-button access to trunk Yes
(*08) or line group keys (*02).
Access or trunk group keys. groups for placing calls?
See "CAP Key" in the
Feature & Specification
manual for more details.
Adjust the CODEC Gain Do you want to adjust

in 14-01-02 (transmit) Trunks the gain (volume) for
and 14-01-03 (receive). trunks?
No
Check the Analog Trunk Timers in 81-01

for compatibility with the telco. For example, to make
50 the Alternate Trunk
Route Access Code:
If desired, assign names to DIAL = 5
trunks in 14-01-01. Digit = 2
Kind = 8
In 11-01-01, set up a
Do you want to set up
Service Code for
Stop No an Alternate Trunk Yes
Alternate Trunk Route
Route Access Code?
Access.
In 11-09-02, assign the

Service Code set up in the
previous step for Alternate
Trunk Route Access.
In 21-15-01, enter the In 21-15-01, enter the

Should extension be
extension number and extension number
Yes able to use Alternate No
enter the Trunk Group and enter 0 to
Trunk Route Access?
Routing route number. prevent routing.
Refer to the Trunk

Group Routing
Is Trunk Group
feature and set up
Routing defined?
Trunk Group
Routing.
Stop

Issue 2.0
IVR Appointment Reminder Server
Description
The IVR Appointment Reminder Server solution is designed to provide a knowledge-based, intelligent
distributed application to optimize the scheduling and reminder of appointments. The IVR
Appointment Reminder Server is an external software application that connects to the SV9100 through
Standard SIP Ports. The IVR Appointment Reminder Server can be configured for 8 16 ports using
SV9100 licensing.
This IVR Appointment Reminder Server enables the phone system to automatically call customers and
remind them of their upcoming appointment. The Appointment Reminder automatically dials based on a
configurable schedule and upon detection of a live voice or answering device, delivers one of your
pre-recorded messages. The customer is then provided options to confirm the appointment or, if they
desire, to be able to talk to a customer service representative.
The Appointment Reminder was designed for the following verticals:

Dentist office
Doctors office
Optometrists office and other medical offices where scheduling is in common use.
Any other office where appointments are made and need to be reminded.
The contact numbers for the customers are loaded in the form of a CSV file using a web page on the
Appointment Reminder system. This file can offer up to three different alternate phone numbers to dial
including Home, Mobile, and Business numbers in any order you prefer. This file contains the date/time
of the appointment and the name of the customer to be called. Contact Numbers can also be manually
added one by one through the Appointment Reminder application to be used in times when a small
amount of numbers is to be called.
Appointment Reminder Call Flow

Out Bound Call - New Call
If the call is answered:
Play Main Greeting
Hello this is an appointment reminder from (name of customer). (Text to Speech name) your appointment
is scheduled for (Time and Date). To confirm this appointment press 1, to replay this message press 2,
to re-schedule this appointment or speak to someone in the office press 3.
If customer presses 1, annotate the database with the result saying that the customer has confirmed
the appointment.
If the customer presses 2 the message will be replayed
If the customer presses 3 then the call will be transferred to a configurable destination in the phone
system.
2-894 IVR Appointment Reminder Server

Issue 2.0
If the customer presses anything other than 1, 2, or 3 he/she will be prompted to retry three times.
If the customer continues to press wrong digit, after three times, the database is annotated with invalid
selection as the result, and the call is completed.
If the call is unanswered:
If a new call goes unanswered (after one minute) the call will be marked as NO ANSWER in the
database and the call will end.
This call can be re-tried at an interval that is configurable.
The call will be re-tried a configurable amount of times and then the outbound calls to this number will
not be tried again.
Conditions
Peer to Peer (Program 15-05-50) must be disabled.
The Appointment Reminder only supports the G.711 CODEC.
All SIP stations programmed as Appointment Reminder ports must be in the same IP
Duplication group (Program 15-05-18).
The following Web Browsers are supported for configuring the IVR Appointment
Reminder Server; Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, Firefox 3.6, Firefox 4 and
Chrome 11.0.
The IVR Appointment Reminder Server can be configured for 8 16 ports.
When a external user dials an invalid DTMF digit while listening to a recording, the initial
message is stopped and the user is prompted to make the selection by dialing other digits.
The digits 1~9, 0, and can be programmed to show up in the callout log report, but the #
character is not displayed in the report.
If TOS settings are changed in the Appointment Reminder application, a reset of the
IVR Appointment Reminder Server is required.
If the SV9100 is configured for Forced Account codes, the account code must be entered
before the dialed number in the IVR Appointment Reminder Server. For example: if the
system account code is "123456" and the Appointment Reminder needs to call
9-214-555-1111 then the entry in the IVR Appointment Reminder Server would be:
91234562145551111.
1- or 2-digit extension numbers are not supported in a system that has IVR Appointment
Reminder Server installed.
Default Settings
Disabled
IVR Appointment Reminder Server 2-895

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GPZ-IPLE
External IVR Appointment Reminder Server
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

It is recommended to set Program 10-12-01 to 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
through the GPZ-IPLE.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.
11-02-01 Extension Numbering Maximum of eight digits. 1 101

Set the extension number for the Appointment 2 102
Reminder ports. 3 103
The extension numbers must be assigned to ~ ~
unused hardware ports to allow the 99 199
Appointment Reminder SIP stations to register. 100 3101
~ ~
960 3961
Group set up.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


setup. For the Appointment Reminder, always
enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).


Peer mode.

For each Appointment Reminder Port set to 0
= Disable.
16-01-01 Department Group Basic Data Setup Maximum of 12 characters. No Setting

Department Name
Use to assign the name for the Department
Group to be used for the Appointment
Reminder.


This program sets what happens when an 1 = Circular
unanswered call to a Department Group pilot
number reaches the last member of the group.
If set to (0), once the last extension is called the
hunting stops.
hunting continues to search for an idle member
to receive the call.
1 (circular) is recommended when using a
Department Group for an Appointment
Reminder.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

3 (Hunting When Busy or No Answer) is 3 = Hunting When Busy or No
recommended when using a Department Group Answer
for an Appointment Reminder.

Use this program to assign all Appointment Department
Reminder ports to the Department Group. Group 1 with
priority in port
order:
Port 1 priority = 1
Port 256 priority
= 256

Assign the CODEC that is to be used for any
3rd party SIP stations.
3 = G.722
4 = G.726
When Appointment Reminder is installed, this 5 = Not Used
program must be set to 0 (G.711).

GPZ-IPLE.

Define the DTMF Relay Mode for 04 (SIP 1 = RFC2833
Extension). 2 = H.245
When Appointment Reminder is installed, this
program must be set to 1 (RFC2833).
Operation
For operating procedures refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 IVR Appointment Reminder
REFERENCE
Server Configuration Guide.

Issue 2.0
IVR Broadcast Server
Description
The IVR Broadcast Server solution is designed to provide a knowledge based, intelligent distributed
application which provides the most cost effective form of contacting your customers, employees, and
prospects. The IVR Broadcast Server is an external software application that connects to the SV9100
through Standard SIP Ports. The IVR Broadcast Server can be configured for 8 16 ports using
SV9100 licensing. Each IVR Broadcast Server port requires the following license in the SV9100:
SV9100 IP Client (STD/MLT)-Lic-1 (e.g. For 16 ports of Broadcast Server (16) SV9100 IP Client (STD/
MLT)-Lic-1 must be purchased.)
This solution provides an effective way of communicating corporate voice messages, informational
messages, past due notices, reminders, and verifications. The IVR Broadcast Message solution is
designed to call numbers from a managed list and plays a pre-recorded message to the call recipient or
answering machine.
Broadcast was designed for the following verticals:

Medical Offices
Utility Companies
Emergency Centers
Any other office where messages are to be Broadcast to users.
The contact numbers for the customers are loaded in the form of a CSV file using a web page on the
Broadcast system. This file can offer up to three different alternate phone numbers to dial including
Home, Mobile, and Business numbers in any order you prefer. Contact Numbers can also be manually
added one by one through the Broadcast application to be used in times when a small amount of
numbers is to be called.
Broadcast Call Flow

Out Bound Call - New Call
If the call is answered:
Play Main Greeting
Hello this is a Broadcast message from (name of customer). Customers personal message played here.
To replay this message press 1.
If the customer presses 1 the message will repeat.
If the customer presses anything other than the digit 1, they will receive a message stating "that was an
invalid entry". After the incorrect digit is pressed three times the call is terminated.
If the call is unanswered:
If a new call goes unanswered (after one minute) the call will be marked as NO ANSWER in the
database and the call will end.
2-900 IVR Broadcast Server

Issue 2.0
This call can be re-tried at an interval that is configurable.
The call will be re-tried a configurable amount of times and then the outbound calls to this number will
not be tried again.
Conditions
Peer to Peer (Program 15-05-50) must be disabled.
IVR Broadcast only supports the G.711 CODEC.
All SIP stations programmed as IVR Broadcast ports must be in the same IP Duplication
group (Program 15-05-18).
The following Web Browsers are supported for configuring the IVR Broadcast Server;
Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, Firefox 3.6, Firefox 4 and Chrome 11.0.
The IVR Broadcast Server can be configured for 8 through 16 ports.
When a external user dials an invalid DTMF digit while listening to a recording, the initial
message is stopped and the user is prompted to make the selection by dialing other digits.
The digits 1~9, 0, and can be programmed to show up in the callout log report, but the #
character is not displayed in the report.
If TOS settings are changed in the IVR Broadcast application, a reset of the IVR
Broadcast Server is required.
1 or 2 digit extension numbers are not supported in a system that has a IVR Broadcast
Server installed.
If the SV9100 is configured for Forced Account codes, the account code must be entered
before the dialed number in the IVR Broadcast Server. For example, if the system
account code is "123456" and the IVR Broadcast Server needs to call 9-214-555-1111
then the entry in the IVR Broadcast Server would be: 91234562145551111.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
IVR Broadcast Server 2-901

Issue 2.0
GCD-CP10
GPZ-IPLE
External IVR Broadcast Server
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

It is recommended to set Program 10-12-01 to 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
through the GPZ-IPLE.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.

Set the extension number for the IVR 2 102
Broadcast ports. 3 103
The extension numbers must be assigned to ~ ~
unused hardware ports to allow the IVR 99 199
Broadcast SIP stations to register. 100 3101
~ ~
960 3961
Group set up.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


setup. For Broadcast, always enter 1 (e.g.,
receive DTMF tones).


All IVR Broadcast ports must be assigned in a
Duplication Group that have no other system
ports assigned.

Peer mode.

All IVR Broadcast must have this option
disabled

Department Name
Use to assign the name for the Department

Group to be used for the IVR Broadcast.


This program sets what happens when an 1 = Circular
unanswered call to a Department Group pilot
number reaches the last member of the group.
hunting stops.

hunting continues to search for an idle member
to receive the call.
1 (circular) is recommended when using a
Department Group for a IVR Broadcast.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the type of hunting for each 2 = Hunting When Not
Extension (Department) Group. Answered
3 (Hunting When Busy or No Answer) is 3 = Hunting When Busy or No
recommended when using a Department Group Answer
for a IVR Broadcast.

Use this program to assign all Broadcast ports Department
to the Department Group. Group 1 with
priority in port
order:
Port 1 priority = 1
Port 256 priority
= 256

Assign the CODEC that is to be used for any
3rd party SIP stations.
3 = G.722
4 = G.726
When IVR Broadcast is installed, this 5 = Not Used
program must be set to 0 (G.711).

GPZ-IPLE.

Define the DTMF Relay Mode for 04 (SIP 1 = RFC2833
Extension). 2 = H.245
When IVR Broadcast is installed, this
program must be set to 1 (RFC2833).
Operation
For operating procedures refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 IVR Broadcast Server
REFERENCE
Configuration Guide.

Issue 2.0

K-CCIS Call Rerouting
Description
The CCIS Call Rerouting feature allows a system to use multiple call routing priorities when
remote system trunks are all busy. The four priorities can be local or remote trunks. For example
K
using ARS and F-Route table priorities the system can try up to four remote systems or up to
three remote systems and a local trunk to route the outbound call to its destination. If an
outbound route is unavailable for any reason the call will fall through to the next priority.
Figure 2-37 K-CCIS Call Rerouting Network
Conditions
The originating system must have a dial treatment of D019RE where 9 is the ARS
trunk access code in the destination system for this feature to work.
ARS must be enabled in all systems for this feature to work.
The CCIS Call Rerouting feature is not supported on stations using 3rd party CTI.
The CCIS Call Rerouting feature is not supported on a station which is controlled by
1st party CTI.
The CCIS Call Rerouting feature will not work if Line Load Control has been
triggered on the destination system.
K-CCIS Call Rerouting 2-907

Issue 2.0
The CCIS Call Rerouting feature is only supported on CCISoIP with SV9100 systems.
The CCIS Call Rerouting feature can only use the four routing options contained in one
F-Route table.
The CCIS Call Rerouting feature cannot fall through from one F-Route table to a second
F-Route table.
If none of the four F-Route table route priorities are available the outbound call will fail.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-CP10
GPZ-IPLE
K-CCISoIP License (5012)
Related Features
K-CCIS IP
2-908 K-CCIS Call Rerouting

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

to 0.0.0.0.

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

Select type of GPZ-IPLE DSP Resource. This extensions and trunks Resource
3 = CCIS/Networking
4 = Use for NetLink
5 = Blocked
Paging
8 = Unicast Paging
10-50-01 License Information License Name Refer to the

Programming
Confirm license information that is stored in a
system. Manual for

default values.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.

Set trunk type to CCISoIP for interconnecting 1 = SIP
trunks. 2 = H.323

3 = CCIS

assignment from.


Customize the system internal (Intercom) Programming
numbering plan. Manual for
The Call Reroute feature only supports closed default values.
numbering.

Assign extension numbers to extension ports. 2 102
The telephone programming identity follows the 3 103
port number not the extension number. ~ ~
99 199
100 3101
~ ~
960 3961
14-01-38 Trunk Basic Setup Outgoing CLI Selection 0 = None No Setting

Read only program used to confirm the trunk 1 = SIP
type. 2 = H.323
3 = CCIS

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
For Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
trunks to trunk groups. This is part of Trunk to trunk group 1
Group Routing programming. with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.




For each Night Service mode, enter service 0 = Normal
type for each trunk. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
26-01-01 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS 0 = Disabled (ARS service is 0

Service Off)
Enable/Disable ARS. 1 = Enabled (ARS service is On)

26-01-07 Automatic Route Selection Service 0 = F-Route 0

F-Route Access COS Reference 1 = ARS
Define the system options for Automatic Route

Selection (ARS).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
26-02-01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR Dial Dial a maximum of 16 digits No Setting
Enter the digits (16 digits maximum: 1 ~ 9, 0 (0 ~ 9, #, @)
this table entry.
Program 44-05.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
(0 ~ 100, 0 = No Route)
Used = 0 ~ 500

0 ~ 500

Service

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

options are:
programming.
any modifications.

34-02-01 E&M Tie Line Class of Service Day/Night Mode 1

Assign the Tie Line Class of Service (1 ~ 15). 1~8
Use Program 20-14-01 to set the Tie Line Class Class: 1 ~ 15
of Service options. You cannot use Program
20-06 to assign Class of Service to Tie Lines.
Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the digit, @)

system for ARS routing.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Select the Service Type. 2 = ARS/F-Route Table
(F-Route)

Table (Option)
Enter the additional data required for the 2 = 0 ~ 500
service type selected in Program 44-02-02, (0 = No Setting)
either the number of digits to be deleted or the
table number to be used.
(0 = No Setting)

Select the trunk group number used for the 0 = No Setting
outgoing ARS call (1 ~ 100). 255 = Extension Call

priority number (1 ~ 4). Turn Off or On a beep

tone if a lower priority trunk group is used.

Service used for ARS. An extension ARS COS
is determined in Program 26-04-01.

Treatment to be used for the table.
The recommended treatment code is D019RE
where 9 is the trunk access code in the destination
system.
The Dial Treatments are determined in Program
26-03-01.

44-05-10 ARS/F-Route Table CCIS over IP 0 ~ 16367 0

Destination Point Code
Input the Destination Point Code to send when

using F-Route.
50-01-01 CCIS System Setting CCIS Availability 0 = Disable 0

No other CCIS settings function if this program 1 = Enable
is disabled.
50-02-03 Connecting System Settings Originating 0 ~ 16367 No Setting

Point Code
For route ID 9, set the origination point code.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
50-03-01 CCIS Destination System Settings 0 ~ 16367 0

Assign the destination transfer point code for

Tandem KTS.
50-03-03 CCIS Destination System Settings IP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 0.0.0.0

Address (IP only) (xxx = 0 ~ 255)
Assign remote system IP network information.

GPZ-IPLE.


Port Number + 1)

for each DSP.
Programming Example
The following example uses the first two priorities of System A to route 10 digit local calls out trunk group
one of System B. If that fails, the call is routed out trunk group one of System A.
This example assumes the following:

System A has local trunks 1-8 in trunk group 1.
Both systems are already configured for the LAN on which they reside and have a network route to
each other.
Both systems are configured for K-CCISoIP.
System A is assigned point code 1 and 1XX extensions.
System B is assigned point code 2 and 2XX extensions.
While dial analysis can be configured in all systems, for this example only System A has ARS dial
analysis configured.
Program
Description System A Setting System B Setting
Number
10-68-01 IP Trunk Mode CCIS 3 3
10-68-02 Starting CCIS Trunk Number 9 9
10-68-03 Number of CCIS Trunks to create. This creates trunks 9 ~ 16. 8 8

Issue 2.0
Program
Description System A Setting System B Setting
Number
14-05-01 First setting data. Put CCISoIP trunks in trunk group 10. 10 10
14-05-01 Second setting data. Set priorities 1 ~ 8 for trunks 9 ~ 16. 1~8 1~8
26-01-01 Enable ARS services. 1 1
26-02-01 For table entry 1, enter 5 wildcard characters. @@@@@ N/A
26-02-02 For table entry 1, set service type to F-Route (2). 2 N/A
26-02-03 For table entry 1, set additional data to F-Route table 2. 2 N/A
26-03-01 Set ARS Treatment 1 to sent the number including the trunk access D019RE N/A
code of 9 to System B.
44-02-01 Closed numbering setup Set to first digit of remote system 2 1

extension number.
44-02-02 Closed numbering setup Set to F-Route table (2). 2 2
44-02-03 Closed numbering setup Set to use F-Route table 1 for intercom 1 1
calls.
44-05-01 Closed numbering setup Set table 1 first priority to use CCIS trunk 10 10
group 10.
44-05-09 Closed numbering setup Set table 1 first priority maximum digit 3 3
length to 3.
44-05-10 Closed numbering setup Set table 1 first priority to remote system 2 1
point code.
44-05-01 ARS Routing Set table 2 first priority to CCIS trunk group 10. 10 N/A
44-05-08 ARS Routing Set table 2 first priority to dial treatment 1. 1 N/A
44-05-09 ARS Routing Set table 2 first priority maximum dialing digit 11. 11 N/A
44-05-10 ARS Routing Set table 2 first priority to System B point code (2). 2 N/A
44-05-01 ARS Routing Set table 2 second priority to local trunk group 1. 1 N/A
44-05-09 ARS Routing Set table 2 second priority maximum dialing digit 10. 10 N/A
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Networking Manual for specific operations.

REFERENCE

Issue 2.0
K-CCIS IP
Description
The system uses the GPZ-IPLE daughter board to connect multiple systems together over a Data
Communication IP Network (Intranet). Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (KCCIS) is used to
provide telephony services between the UNIVERGE SV9100 and another UNIVERGE SV9100 or a
NEAX PBX system.
CCIS Networking via IP (Non Peer to Peer Connections Basis).

IP trunk connections over CCIS Networking via IP provide telephony services between UNIVERGE
SV9100 and UNIVERGE SV9100 and a NEAX IPS, IPX, SV7000, UNIVERGE SV8100,
UNIVERGE SV8300 and UNIVERGE SV8500.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 uses the NEC proprietary CCIS Peer to Peer protocol over IP to
communicate between system to system.
The GPZ-IPLE is required for connections between IP terminals and IP trunks. Only one GPZ-IPLE
daughter board can be accommodated per system with a maximum of 128 DSP resources per system.
The GPZ-IPLE daughter board is an optional interface package for converting the Real Time Transfer
Protocol (RTP) packets on the IP network to PCM highway. IP telephones are required to be connected
directly to the IP bus. When IP telephones are required to be connected to conventional PCM based
digital circuit, the GPZ-IPLE converts IP packet signals. The GPZ-IPLE provides the digital signal
processors (DSPs) for IP stations and trunks.
A DSP provides format conversion from circuit switched networks (TDM) to packet switched networks
(IP). Each voice channel from the circuit switched network is compressed and packetized for
transmission over the packet network. In the reverse direction, each packet is buffered for de-jittering,
decompressed, and sent to the circuit switched network. Each DSP converts a single speech channel
from IP to TDM and vice versa.
The following are examples of DSP allocation:

Calling from IP telephone to a TDM telephone uses one DSP.
Calling from an IP telephone to another IP telephone that is registered to the same CPU uses no
DSPs.
Calling from a TDM telephone to a TDM telephone uses no DSPs.
Calling from a TDM telephone and out an IP trunk uses one DSP.
Calling from a TDM telephone across IP K-CCIS to another TDM telephone uses one DSP.
Calling from an IP telephone across IP K-CCIS to another IP telephone uses two DSP resources at
each location.
2-918 K-CCIS IP
Issue 2.0
As stated earlier in this document, using Encryption (RTPs) or Packet Loss Recovery (PLR) can reduce
the number of available DSPs. Another thing that can reduce the amount of available DSPs is CODEC
choice.
Systems Requirements
Only voice (RTP/RTCP) processing functions are mounted among VoIP functions on the GPZ-IPLE. All
call control functions are handled by the GCD-CP10.
Only one GPZ-IPLE daughter board can be installed on the GCD-CP10.
The GPZ-IPLE daughter board has Layer2 Switch ability, along with a Gigabit Ethernet LAN interface
and RTP/RTCP packet is transmitted and received directly.
The number of ports supported by the IP K-CCIS (Peer to Peer) application depends on the GPZ-IPLE
installed on the GCD-CP10 and on the number of ports licensed in the GCD-CP10.
Conditions
A maximum of 400 IP Trunks are supported in the SV9100, but the maximum number of
simultaneous talk paths depend on the size and available channels of the GPZ-IPLE unit.
When using ARS Class of Service Matching, CCIS calls always follow Class of Service 1.
If single lines for fax machines are set to Special (Program 15-03-03), faxing across IP
CCIS will always use G.711 CODEC.
supported.
When connecting a SV9100 to a NEAX PBX, Link reconnect needs to be turned off in the
PBX to the SV9100.
The CCISoIP Fax Enhancement feature supports G.711, G.726 and T.38 between two
SV9100s.
When using the CCISoIP Fax Enhancement feature between a SV9100 and a SV8300/
SV8500, refer to the documentation for the SV8300/SV8500 system software level to
determine if the desired Fax CODEC is supported and for information on setting up the
feature on that system.
When connecting to a SV8300 or SV8500 using K-CCIS the Call Back feature is not
supported.
The CCIS Call Back feature is only supported when using a closed numbering plan.
The CCIS Call Back feature is not supported on K-CCIS PVA.
CCIS Call Back can only be set when the destination party is busy, and the calling party
hears a busy tone.
The calling party must hang up after setting CCIS Call Back.
K-CCIS IP 2-919
Issue 2.0
CCIS Call Back can only be set by pressing a programmed Feature key. Softkeys or dialing
a service code is not supported.
CCIS Call Back can only be set from a multiline terminal.
CCIS Call Back target can only be a multiline terminal.
The following telephones are not supported for either setting or receiving K-CCIS - Call
Back:
Single Line Telephones
Standard SIP Telephones
IP-DECT Telephones
For the CCIS Call Back to occur, CCIS trunks must be available in both systems.
The setting party can only set Call Back to one destination telephone.
One system can have a maximum of 50 Camp On/Call back requests set.
Call Back requests are canceled by a system reset.
When the destination extension does not become available within a specified time
(Program 20-01-09), the CCIS Call Back is canceled. This timer is set on the destination
system.
If the setting extension does not answer the Call Back ring within a specified time (Program
20-01-07) the CCIS Call Back is canceled. This timer is set on the originating system.
The called extension has the ability to receive Call Back settings from multiple extensions.
If this occurs, the Call Back requests are returned in the order received.
The K-CCIS Call Back feature does not apply to trunk calls as it does not include trunk
queuing features.
Call Forward Busy No Answer must be disabled for a telephone to receive a CCIS Call
Back request.
The CCISoIP Fax Enhancement feature requires installation of the GPZ-IPLE IP daughter
board.
In a CCIS network, the Memo Display Function only supports DID calls directed across
CCIS to a remote system.
Calls forwarded or transferred across CCIS do not support the Memo Display Function.
With SV9100 software and IPLE daughter board installed, half duplex connections are not
supported. For troubleshooting purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is
2-920 K-CCIS IP
Issue 2.0
Any calls across CCISoIP (station to station or stations transferring trunks) that use Quick
Transfer to voice mail require an extra CAP key. The initial call across the CCSIoIP link
uses the first CAP key. When the digit 8 is pressed to perform the Quick Transfer, a
second CAP key is accessed.
When trunks are being shared for outbound calls between CCIS networks, all sites must
utilize the same trunk access code.
All IP trunks (SIP, CCIS, or H.323) must be contiguous. If any IP trunks are added to a
system that already has IP trunks installed, and the next set of trunks is not in sequence,
then all IP trunks are moved to a new set of sequential trunk numbers.
K-CCIS IP 2-921
Issue 2.0
CCIS Networking via IP (Peer to Peer Connections Basis)
Description
IP-KCCIS has been improved to support Peer to Peer calls between IP Terminals residing in different
offices, without using DSP resources. Refer to the SV9100 Networking manual for more information.
Table 2-66 K-CCIS Main and Remote System VoIP Resources Used
Main System Remote System

The number in each
box indicates how CO CO
many VoIP CO Conf. CO Conf. CO Conf. CO Conf.
TDM IP Analog/ TDM IP Analog/
resources are used IP TDM IP TDM
Terminal Terminal Digital/ Terminal Terminal Digital/
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
SIP SIP
Main TDM 0 M: 1 0 M: 1 0 M: 1 M: 1 0 M: 1 M: 1
System Terminal R: 1 R: 1
IP M: 1 0 M: 1 M: 2 M: 1 R: 1 0 R: 1 M: 2 M: 2
Terminal R: 1
Remote TDM M: 1 R: 1 M: 1 R: 1 M: 1 0 R: 1 0 R: 1 M: 1
System Terminal R: 1 R: 1 R: 1 R: 1
IP M: 1 0 M: 1 R: 2 M: 1 R: 1 0 R: 1 R: 2 M: 1
Terminal R: 2 R: 2
M = Main K-CCIS System

R = Remote K-CCIS System
Conditions
The SV9100 to supports Peer to Peer in a CCISoIP network.
DT700 terminals are supported for Peer to Peer connections via a P2P CCIS call.
Standard SIP terminals are not supported for Peer to Peer connection.
If Program 50-15-04 is set to 0 (Disable) in system A, Peer to Peer is disabled for system A
and any remote systems when calling system A.
When port translation is done through a NAT router, Peer to Peer is disabled.
When RTP encryption is enabled, Peer to Peer is disabled.
SV9100 K-CCIS-IP to another SV9100, for calls from an IP terminal to a TDM terminal/
trunk via Peer to Peer, the IP Terminal's Codec must match the CCIS Codec and the packet
size is auto negotiated based on the receiving sides packet size.
SV9100 K-CCIS-IP to another SV9100 or to a NEAX PBX (SV8300, SV8500, etc.), for calls
from an IP terminal to another IP terminal/trunk via Peer to Peer, the IP Terminals Codec
must match and the packet size is auto negotiated.
2-922 K-CCIS IP
Issue 2.0
SV9100 K-CCIS-IP to a NEAX PBX (SV8300, SV8500, etc.), for calls from an IP terminal to
a TDM terminal via Peer to Peer, the IP Terminal's Codec and packet size (Program
84-24-XX) need to match the NEAX PBX CCIS Codec and packet size settings.
With SV9100 software and IPLE daughter board installed, half duplex connections are not
supported. For troubleshooting purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
GCD-CP10 with GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board
K-CCIS over IP License (5012)
Related Features
K-CCIS IP with PVA
K-CCIS IP 2-923
Issue 2.0

Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Networking Manual for programming details.

REFERENCE
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Peer mode.
50-15-04 CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting 0 = Peer to Peer disable 1

Connection Method for Terminal 1 = Peer to Peer enable
Choose the connection method for the DT700.
84-34-01 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

When connecting to an SV8300/9300 or 1 = RFC2833
SV8500/9300 option 05 (CCIS over IP) must be

2 = H.245
set to 2 (H.245).
K-CCISoIP FAX:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

84-33-12 FAX Over IP Setup FAX Codec 1 = G.711 a-law 2 = US

Setup FAX over IP Codec settings when using 2 = G.711 u-law 1 = other
CCIS over IP. 3 = G726
2-924 K-CCIS IP
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-33-13 FAX Over IP Setup Payload Size 1 ~ 4 (10ms base) 2

CCIS over IP.
84-33-14 FAX Over IP Setup Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 1

Setup FAX over IP Codec settings when using 2 = Self Adjusting
CCIS over IP.
84-33-15 FAX Over IP Setup Minimum Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 80

CCIS over IP.
84-33-16 FAX Over IP Setup Average Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 120

CCIS over IP.
84-33-17 FAX Over IP Setup Maximum Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 160

CCIS over IP.
84-33-18 FAX Over IP Setup RTP Payload Type 97 ~ 127 103

CCIS over IP.
84-33-19 FAX Over IP Setup FAX over IP Type 1 = Type 1 1

Select FAX over IP type. 2 = Type 2
Type 1: SV9100 original mode Type 2: PBX
compatible mode

If type 2 is selected, FAX over IP feature is
executed using Program 84-33 settings.
CCIS Call Back:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a function for Camp-On (code 35). This 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
key is also the Callback key. 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
20-01-07 System Options Callback Ring Duration 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15

Time
Set the time of the Callback ring. The timer is

set on the originating system.
K-CCIS IP 2-925
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Cancel Time
The system cancels Callback and Trunk
Queuing requests after this time. The timer is
set on the destination system.

E&M Override

caller.
This should be set to Off (0) in the destination
system.

busy.
system.

Turn Off or On an extension user ability to send
Off-Hook Signals.

system.

Allow a busy extension to Automatically (1) or
Manually (0) receive off-hook Signals.
Manually (0) receive off-hook signals.

Turn Off or On extension user ability to block

2-926 K-CCIS IP
Issue 2.0
Operation
REFERENCE
K-CCIS IP 2-927
Issue 2.0
K-CCIS IP with PVA
Description
The K-CCIS IP with PVA feature provides the benefits and additional feature compatibility of
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) between multiple systems including NEAX PBX
systems connected together over a Data Communication IP Network (Intranet). Voice Signals and
common signaling from and to distant offices are converted into IP packets and transmitted through the
Data IP Network. When using this feature, both Voice and Data Communication lines are integrated into
one network and communication costs can be reduced.
This feature is available between UNIVERGE SV9100, UNIVERGE SV8100 and NEAX PBX systems.
The following features are provided:

Automatic Recall
Brokerage Hotline
Call Forwarding All Calls
Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer
Call Park Retrieve
Call Transfer All Calls
Calling Name Display
Calling Number Display
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station
Centralized Billing
Centralized BLF (K-CCIS)
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change
Centralized E911
Dial Access to Attendant
Direct Inward Dialing
Dual Hold
Elapsed Time Display
Flexible Numbering of Stations
Hands-Free Answerback
Hot Line
Link Reconnect
Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls
2-928 K-CCIS IP with PVA

Issue 2.0
Multiple Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer

Paging Access
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Station-to-Station Calling
Uniform Numbering Plan
Voice Call
Voice Mail Integration
Not supported with InMail.
Not supported with NEAX PBX.
Conditions
The K-CCIS IP with PVA web interface supports Windows Internet Explorer 8 run on any
Windows 7 operating system.
The GCD-PVAA blade requires the K-CCIS IP with PVA with PVA Compact Flash card.
The K-CCIS IP with PVA application can be licensed in increments of four or a single 24
ports.
Each GCD-PVAA blade reduces the maximum capacity of trunks in the system.
One GCD-PVAA is required to support up to 24 channels of K-CCIS IP with PVA.
Up to eight GCD-PVAA blades can be installed in the UNIVERGE SV9100.
Port assignment of the GCD-PVAA package depends on the K-CCIS IP with PVA license.
You must input the license code 6200 in Program10-54 for each slot the PVA-CCIS
package is installed.
When multiple GCD-PVAA blades are installed in the same UNIVERGE SV9100, it is
necessary to input Program 10-54 for each slot the K-CCIS IP with PVA is installed. The
total K-CCIS with PVA call count is limited by the license quantity installed in the system.
The following tables illustrate examples of K-CCIS IP with PVA licensing and slot
assignments:
Table 2-67 GCD-PVAA Blade Installed in Slot 6
Example #1
License Quality: 8 Can make or receive a total of eight calls.

Program 10-54 = 8 Can assign eight ports and GCD-PVAA blade starts.
Example #2
License Quality: 8
Cannot assign ports and GCD-PVAA blade does
Program 10-54 = 0 not start.
K-CCIS IP with PVA 2-929

Issue 2.0
Table 2-67 GCD-PVAA Blade Installed in Slot 6
Example #1
Example #3
License Quality: 0 Cannot make or receive calls.

Program 10-54 = 8 Can assign eight ports and GCD-PVAA blade starts
Example #4
License Quality: 8 Can make or receive a total of eight calls.

Program 10-54 = 24 Can assign 24 ports and GCD-PVAA blade starts
Table 2-68 GCD-PVAA Blade Installed in Slot 4 and Slot 6
Example #1
License Quality: 16 Can Make or receive a total of 16 calls.

Program 10-54 (slot 4) = 8 Can assign eight ports and GCD-PVAA blade starts.
Program 10-54 (slot 6) = 8 Can assign eight ports and GCD-PVAA blade starts.
Example #2
License Quality: 16 Can Make or receive a total of 16 calls.

Program 10-54 (Slot 4) = 16 Can assign 16 ports and GCD-PVAA blade starts.
Program 10-54 (Slot 6) = 16 Can assign 16 ports and GCD-PVAA blade starts.
The K-CCIS IP with PVA shares the CO/PBX/Tie/DID trunks available for the system.
The GCD-PVAA blade supports only those codecs that are approved to provide toll-quality
speech path. The following voice compression methods are supported for the K-CCIS IP
with PVA application:
G.729 Mid-Range Bandwidth
G.723 Lowest Bandwidth

Issue 2.0
Each voice call requires at a minimum the bandwidth listed in the following table:
Table 2-69 Minimum Bandwidth Required
Time Theoretical
Transmit Receive Packetization Default Jitter
CODEC Between Maximum
Data Rate Data Rate Delay Buffer Delay
Packets MOS
G.711 -Law 90 Kbps 90 Kbps 20ms 1.5ms 2 datagrams 4.4

(40ms)
G.729 34 Kbps 34 Kbps 20ms 15.0ms 2 datagrams 4.07
(40ms)
G.723 25 Kbps 25 Kbps 30ms 37.5ms 2 datagrams 3.87
(60ms)
This includes the overheads of VoIP communication including signaling.
In voice communications, particularly Internet telephony, the mean opinion score (MOS) provides a
numerical measure of the quality of human speech at the destination end of the circuit. The scheme uses
subjective tests (opinionated scores) that are mathematically averaged to obtain a quantitative indicator
of the system performance. A score of 5.0 is the maximum for the Mean Opinion Score.
Data Calls (Modem Data) across the VoIP connection are only supported when the G.711
-Law Codec is used.
The GCD-PVAA blade contains a regular TCP/RTP/IP stack that can handle real-time
media. The blade, from the network administration perspective, is an endpoint on the IP
network.
The GCD-PVAA with K-CCIS IP with PVA application loaded uses Common Channel
Interoffice Signaling over IP networks. Currently this protocol does not allow for
communications across networks where Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed.
The audio quality of speech connections depends greatly on the available bandwidth
between the GCD-PVAA blade in the data network. As the Internet is an uncontrolled data
network compared to an Intranet, using this application in an Intranet WAN environment,
with known (or controlled and assured) Quality of Service (QoS), is highly recommended.
If any network where the GCD-PVAA blade is connected uses NAT for connecting the voice
calls (including firewall), consulting your network provider/administrator and specifically
requesting service for VoIP or real-time media support on your networks is highly
recommended.
A static IP Address is required for each GCD-PVAA with K-CCIS IP with PVA.
This feature allows Point-to-Multipoint connections for calls through the IP K-CCIS Network.
If a call is transferred or forwarded to a different system in the network, the trunks in the
transferring system are released and a new point-to-point connection is established.
When a call terminates back to the originating system because of call forwarding or transfer, the
intermediate trunks are not released until the call is completed by an answer at the called party
or until the call is forwarded to a different system (similar to the linkreconnect function in TDM
CCIS).

Issue 2.0
The GCD-CCTA blade is not required to support this feature. It can be installed and used in
a system using traditional K-CCIS with point-to-point T1 lines allowing both K-CCIS IP
with PVA and traditional K-CCIS to be used with the same system.
The LAN connection is provided by a 10/100/1000 Base T, Auto-sensing, full duplex
Ethernet.
When assigning a Closed Numbering Plan and DID conversion across K-CCIS IP with
PVA is required, the UNIVERGE SV9100 uses the ARS/F-Route Tables.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 uses the F-Route Tables to assign an Open Numbering Plan.
When all K-CCIS IP with PVA voice channels are busy, the UNIVERGE SV9100 originator
of a K-CCIS IP with PVA call hears a busy tone from the system.
Outgoing CO calls in a K-CCIS IP with PVA network can be routed over the K-CCIS IP
with PVA link and use the distant system CO lines.
Distant system extension numbers in the K-CCIS IP with PVA network can be assigned to
One Touch keys and Speed Dial buffers.
When a K-CCIS IP with PVA trunk is on hold, the Specified Line Seizure access codes
can be used to retrieve the call from its held state.
FoIP (Fax over Internet Protocol) with T.38 protocol is only supported with SV9100 to
SV9100.
Each UNIVERGE SV9100 can support both K-CCIS IP, K-CCIS IP with PVA and
SV9100 Net-link simultaneously.
Each UNIVERGE SV9100 can support up to eight GCD-PVAA blades (three) per chassis.
Refer to the SV9100 System Hardware Manual for more information regarding maximum
capacities.
K-CCIS IP with PVA does not require the use of the GPZ-IPLE (VoIPDB).
One way delay must not exceed 100ms.
Round Trip delay must not exceed 200ms.
Packet loss must not exceed 1%.
Data switches must be manageable.
Routers must provide QOS.
Adequate bandwidth for estimated VoIP traffic.
Codec changes in Program 84-30-XX require a GCD-PVAA reset.
The PVA-CCIS blade is supported in the primary system and/or secondary systems of a
NetLink network.
InMail is supported for centralized voice mail in a NetLink network. However, replication
should be scheduled for non-peak hours of operation.
InMail is supported for centralized voice mail in a CCIS network.

Issue 2.0
Restrictions
The UNIVERGE SV9100 can send billing information to a billing center office (UNIVERGE
SV8300/SV8500) but cannot receive the billing information as the billing center office.
Not all data networks are suitable to support Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP). A good
VoIP solution requires a low-latency, low jitter and low packet loss network. Accordingly, a
network must be evaluated for latency, packet loss, and jitter to qualify and determine if it
can provide toll-quality speech paths.
K-CCIS IP with PVA application will support trunks configured in increments of four
contiguous DSP resources.
Blade Configuration The K-CCIS IP with PVA Application Package is identified as a
PVA-XXCCIS blade type.
When the K-CCIS IP with PVA application is installed in the UNIVERGE SV9100, the
system assigns the first available logical port numbers for CCISoIP trunks.
When using K-CCIS T1 or K-CCIS IP with PVA in a Netlink system, the CCTA or
PVA-CCIS blades are only supported in the primary system.
If the UNIVERGE SV9100 system does not have registered GCD-PVAA K-CCIS IP with
PVA licenses, the Logical Trunk will not be assigned.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 can support only 1~8-digit station numbers.
Station Numbers are assigned by the 10s group for 4-digit station numbers, 100s group for
5-digit station numbers, 1000s group for 6-digit station numbers, 10000s group for 7-digit
station numbers.
When Voice Mail Message Waiting status must be sent across the K-CCIS to a remote
system, F-Routes must be used.
For a Closed Numbering Plan network using F-Routes, a maximum of 120 F-Route Tables
are available allowing a maximum of 121 connected systems per K-CCIS network.
When a Closed Numbering Plan Network is used, a user can call another station by dialing
the distant extension number, but extensions in the network cannot have the same prefix.

Issue 2.0
For an Open Numbering Plan network, a user can dial another station by dialing the office
location number plus an extension number and the extension number can have the same
prefix, but the office location cannot be the same.
An UNIVERGE SV9100 K-CCIS network should never have more than five hops (tandem
connections) because of the message delay through each tandem system.
The maximum number of systems depends on the Numbering Plan used and the maximum
number of hops (tandem connections).
K-CCIS requires assigning a point code for each office. Point codes differentiate between
an originating office and a destination office in the K-CCIS Network. Assigning point codes
requires the following considerations:
The point code must be unique in the network.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 can have a maximum of 255 codes assigned to distant systems.
Using a Key System-to-Key System network, centralized voice mail is not supported when
an Open Numbering Plan is used.
Centralized E911 K-CCIS is supported.
When Centralized E911 K-CCIS is not used, each UNIVERGE SV9100 system in a
K-CCIS network must have at least one trunk for Emergency 911calls.
Using a NEAX-to-UNIVERGE SV9100 network, the PBX must supply centralized voice
mail.
Multiline terminals must have an available Call Appearance (CAP) key to originate or
answer a K-CCIS IP with PVA trunk call.
Direct access of K-CCIS IP with PVA voice or data channels using Line keys or Specified
Line Seizure access codes is prohibited.
The Recall key or Drop key does not function on K-CCIS IP with PVA calls. When either
key is pressed, operation is ignored, and the call continues.
Trunk queuing is prohibited on a K-CCIS IP with PVA trunk route.
The ability to route an incoming DID call directly across a K-CCIS IP with PVA link (Direct
Inward Dialing K-CCIS) is supported only when a Closed Numbering Plan using F-Routes
is used.
This feature is not supported by the CD-4ODTA Analog Line interface.
Extension numbers cannot start with 0 or 9.
Internal Calls, transferred calls, and K-CCIS IP with PVA calls do not provide Caller ID to
Caller ID Call Return feature is not supported with K-CCIS IP with PVA calls.
supported.

Issue 2.0
The CCISoIP Fax Enhancement feature is not supported when using K-CCIS IP with
PVA.
The CCIS Call Back feature is not supported when using K-CCIS IP with PVA.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-PVAA w/K-CCIS-IP Compact Flash [PVA CCISoIP APP CF (670918)]
LK-PVA-CCISoIP 4 Port - LIC license requirements
LK-PVA-CCISoIP 24 Port - LIC license
Related Features
K-CCIS IP

None
Operation
Normal call handling procedures apply.
REFERENCE

Issue 2.0
K-CCIS T1
Description
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) allows multiple systems to be connected to
provide additional feature compatibility, above what normal Tie Lines provide. The system is configured
with a 24 channel T1 Connection and GCD-CCTA for receiving or transmitting common signaling data
from/to a distant office. The system can provide a variety of interoffice service features such as Calling
Name display, Centralized Voice Mail Integration, or Link Reconnect.
The following features are provided:

Call Forwarding All Calls K-CCIS
Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer K-CCIS
Call Park Retrieve K-CCIS
Call Transfer All Calls K-CCIS
Calling Name Display K-CCIS
Calling Number Display K-CCIS
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station K-CCIS
Centralized Billing K-CCIS
Centralized BLF (K-CCIS)
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change K-CCIS
Centralized E911 (K-CCIS)
Dial Access to Attendant K-CCIS
Direct Inward Dialing K-CCIS
Dual Hold K-CCIS
Elapsed Time Display K-CCIS
Flexible Numbering of Stations K-CCIS
Hands-Free Answerback K-CCIS
Hot Line K-CCIS
IP (K-CCIS)
IP (K-CCIS) to NEAX (Point-to-Multipoint)
Link Reconnect K-CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls K-CCIS
Multiple Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer K-CCIS
Paging Access K-CCIS
2-936 K-CCIS T1
Issue 2.0
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail K-CCIS

Station-to-Station Calling K-CCIS
Uniform Numbering Plan K-CCIS
Voice Call K-CCIS
Voice Mail Integration K-CCIS
Not supported with InMail.
Conditions
Each UNIVERGE SV9100 system can have up to eight K-CCIS routes.
Eight GCD-CCTAs can be used to support/connect a maximum of eight K-CCIS Links.
The Basic Port Package can have up to 63 T1 trunks for K-CCIS voice path.
The Expanded Port Package can have up to 199 T1 trunks for K-CCIS voice path.
The K-CCIS feature shares the CO/PBX/Tie/DID trunks available for the system.
When assigning a Closed Numbering Plan and DID conversion across K-CCIS is required,
the UNIVERGE SV9100 uses the ARS/F-Route Tables.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 uses the F-Route Tables to assign an Open Numbering Plan.
When all K-CCIS voice channels are busy, the UNIVERGE SV9100 originator of a K-CCIS
call hears a busy tone from the system.
Outgoing CO calls in a K-CCIS network can be routed over the K-CCIS link and use the
distant system CO lines.
Distant system extension numbers in the K-CCIS network can be assigned to Feature
Access or One Touch keys and Speed Dial buffers.
When a K-CCIS trunk is on hold, the Specified Line Seizure access codes can be used to
retrieve the call from its held state.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 can support only 2~8-digit station numbers.
Station Numbers are assigned by the 10s group for 4-digit station numbers, 100s group for
5-digit station numbers, 1,000s group for 6-digit station numbers, 10,000s group for 7-digit
station numbers.
When Voice Mail Message Waiting status must be sent across the K-CCIS to a remote
system, F-Routes must be used.
For a Closed Numbering Plan network using F-Routes, a maximum of 120 F-Route Tables
are available allowing a maximum of 121 connected systems per K-CCIS network.
When a Closed Numbering Plan Network is used, a user can call another station by dialing
the distant extension number, but extensions in the network cannot have the same prefix.
K-CCIS T1 2-937
Issue 2.0
For an Open Numbering Plan network, a user can dial another station by dialing the office
location number plus an extension number and the extension number can have the same
prefix, but the office location cannot be the same.
When an UNIVERGE SV9100 system is a tandem system (in the middle) between systems
with higher K-CCIS feature support (including NEAX PBXs), only the K-CCIS features
supported by the UNIVERGE SV9100 tandem system are passed through and supported.
An UNIVERGE SV9100 K-CCIS network should never have more than five hops (tandem
connections) because of the message delay through each tandem system.
A Star topology network supports up to eight systems.
A Tree topology network is supported. The maximum number of systems depends on the
Numbering Plan used and the maximum number of hops (tandem connections).
A Mesh topology network is not supported.
K-CCIS requires assigning a point code for each office. Point codes differentiate between
an originating office and a destination office in the K-CCIS Network. Assigning point codes
requires the following considerations:
The point code must be unique in the network.
When a system has two or more CCH channels, the same originating point code must be
assigned to all channels in the system.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 can have a maximum of 255 codes assigned to distant systems.
Using an UNIVERGE SV9100-to-UNIVERGE SV9100 network, centralized voice mail is not

supported when an Open Numbering Plan is used.
Centralized E911 K-CCIS is supported.
When Centralized E911 K-CCIS is not used, each UNIVERGE SV9100 system in a
K-CCIS network must have at least one trunk for Emergency 911 calls.
Using a NEAX-to-UNIVERGE SV9100 network, the PBX must supply centralized voice
mail.
Multiline terminals must have an available Call Appearance (CAP) key to originate or
answer a K-CCIS trunk call.
Direct access of K-CCIS voice or data channels using Line keys or Specified Line Seizure
access codes is prohibited.
The Recall key or Drop key does not function on K-CCIS calls. When either key is pressed,
operation is ignored, and the call continues.
Trunk queuing is prohibited on a K-CCIS trunk route.
Routing an incoming DID call directly across a K-CCIS link (Direct Inward Dialing - K-CCIS)
is supported only when a Closed Numbering Plan using F-Routes is used.
This feature is not supported by the CD-4ODTA Analog Line interface.
Up to eight GCD-CCTA blades can be assigned per system.
2-938 K-CCIS T1
Issue 2.0

Internal Calls, transferred calls, and K-CCIS calls do not provide Caller ID to single line
telephones.
Caller ID Call Return feature is not supported with K-CCIS calls.
Call Park Searching is supported only in the local system.
When the system searches the Dial Extension Analyze Table (Program 11-20-01), it uses
prefix searching, giving the lower table number the higher priority. For example, the user
programs 211 in table 1 and 2113 in table 2, then dials 2113, the system selects table 1.
When using ARS Class of Service Matching, CCIS calls always follow Class of Service 1.
The T-1 CCTA blade is supported in the primary system and/or secondary systems of a
NetLink network.
supported.
When connecting a SV9100 to a NEAX PBX, Link reconnect needs to be turned off in the
PBX to the SV9100.
Call Forward Busy No Answer must be disabled for a telephone to receive a CCIS Call
Back request.
When connecting to a SV8300 or SV8500 using KCCIS the Callback feature is not
supported.
This feature is only supported when using a closed numbering plan.
CCIS Callback can only be set when the destination party is busy, and the calling party
hears busy tone.
The calling party must hang up after setting CCIS Call Back.
CCIS Callback can only be set by pressing a programmed Feature key. Softkeys or dialing
a service code is not supported.
CCIS Callback can only be set from a multiline terminal.
CCIS Call Back target can only be a multiline terminal.
The following telephones are not supported for either setting or receiving CCIS Callback:
Standard SIP Telephones
IP-DECT Telephones
H.323 Telephones
ISDN Telephones
For the CCIS Call Back to occur there must be available CCIS trunks in both systems.
K-CCIS T1 2-939
Issue 2.0
The setting party can only set Callback to one destination telephone.
One system can have a maximum of 50 Camp On/Call back requests set.
Callback requests are canceled by a system reset.
When the destination extension does not become available within a specified time
(Program 20-01-09) the CCIS Callback will be canceled. This timer is set on the destination
system.
If the setting extension does not answer the Callback ring within a specified time (Program
20-01-07) the CCIS Callback will be canceled. This timer is set on the originating system.
The called extension has ability to receive Callback settings from multiple extensions. If
this occurs the Callback requests are returned in the order received.
The CCIS Callback feature does not apply to trunk calls as it does not include trunk queuing
features.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-CCTA
2-940 K-CCIS T1
Issue 2.0
The following table shows the chassis system software compatibility with GCD-CCTA
firmware and K-CCIS feature compatibility.
Chassis Software CCTA
SV9100 V X
X = Compatible
= Not Compatible
Related Features
Universal Slots
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Networking Manual for specific programming details.
REFERENCE
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Networking Manual for specific operations.

REFERENCE
K-CCIS T1 2-941
Issue 2.0
2-942 K-CCIS T1
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number dialed. For
example, a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the
L
digits.
Last Number Redial saves in system memory the last 24 digits a user dials. The number can be
any combination of digits 0~9, # and . The system remembers the digits regardless of whether
the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk group as
for the initial call. However, the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired.
When Redial is pressed, the display indicates REDIAL [#] / ABB. The user can then press # to
redial the number displayed, or enter an System Speed Dialing bin number to be dialed. Press
the Redial key repeatedly to scroll through the last 10 numbers dialed.
By pressing the Left Cursor Key the user can access the Redial and Incoming Call History
menus. The flow chart below shows the menu access sequence. If the terminal is not allowed to
have the Dial Preview feature, these menus cannot be accessed.
Figure 2-38 Left Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart
Conditions
Redial List requires the use of a display telephone. Non-display and single line
telephones cannot use this feature.
When using Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the
user preselects.
Last Number Redial 2-943

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Repeat Redial
Save Number Dialed

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Last Number Dial 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign a service code (#5) to use Last Number digits

Dial.
Clear Last Number Dialing Data 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign a service code (776) to clear the Last digits

Number Dial.
2-944 Last Number Redial

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Dial Number Preview. This program also turns
Off or On the Last Number Redial function.
Operation
To redial your last call:

1. Without lifting the handset, press Redial.
The last dialed number is displayed.
2. To redial the last number, press #.

- OR -
Search for the desired number from the Redial List by pressing Redial or VOLUME or
VOLUME keys.
- OR -
Press the Left Cursor key once and the VOLUME or VOLUME keys to find number.
3. Lift the handset or press Speaker to place the call.
The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and dials the last
number dialed.
- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker or lift the handset (optional).
- OR -
2. Dial #5.
The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and dials the last
number dialed.
Last Number Redial 2-945

Issue 2.0
To check the number saved for Last Number Redial:

1. Press Redial or the Left Cursor key once.
The stored number displays for six seconds. The stored number dials out if you:
Lift the handset.
Press an idle line key.
- or -
Press Speaker.
To erase the stored number:

1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker or lift handset.
- OR -
2. Dial 776.
2-946 Last Number Redial

Issue 2.0
Licensing
Description
Licenses are used to activate certain features and applications for the UNIVERGE SV9100. The
UNIVERGE SV9100 system provides the following licenses:
System Licenses:
System Capacity
IP Trunks This licenses the number of SIP trunks that can be installed in the system.
Port This licenses the total number of ports that can be enabled in the system.
VoIP Resource This license enables VoIP resources on the GPZ-IPLE daughter board.
IP Terminal This licenses the number of SIP phones that can connect to the system.
System Feature License
Enhancement Licenses This licenses the system to run the software level installed on the
GCD-CP10.
NetLink This licenses the number of remote system that can be connected to the main
system.
Hotel/Motel (PMS) This licenses the system to run the Hotel/Motel feature.
SMDR This licenses the system to print SMDR reports.
Remote Software Upgrade This licenses the system to be upgraded remotely.
This licenses the system to run the In feature.
Encryption This licenses the SV9100 system to encrypt VoIP calls.
Voice Mail (Embedded)
VRS Channels This licenses the number of VRS channels that can be used in the
system.
InMail Voice Mailbox Users This licenses the number of InMail mailbox users that can be
used in the system.
InMail Email Client This licenses the number of InMail users that can be allowed to
receive email notification.
Applications:
Voice Mail (InSkin US)
UMS Fax Channel This licenses the number FAX channels that can be used in the UMS.
UMS Client (View Apps) This licenses the number of simultaneous Client (View Apps)
that can be connected to the UMS.
Licensing 2-947
Issue 2.0
UMS Multi-language This licenses the number of languages that can be used
simultaneously.
UMS Hospitality/PMS This licenses the UMS to run Hospitality/PMS.
UMS Hospitality Language This licenses the number of languages that can be used
simultaneously with UMS Hospitality.
UMS Amis/Plus Net This licenses the UMS for Amis/Plus Net.
UMS TTS Channel This licenses the number of TTS channels that can be used in the
UMS.
UMS TTS Language This licenses the number of languages that can be used
simultaneously for TTS.
UMS Lite Channel This licenses the number of Voice Channels that can be used in UMS-
Lite.
UMS Lite 2 port Upgrade Loading this license enables the upgrade option of the UMS.
UMS Lite to Full Upgrade This licenses upgrading UMS-Lite to UMS full.
Desktop Application
Softphone This licenses the number of Desktop Applications that can be used for
Softphone.
Desktop Shared Services This licenses the number of Desktop Applications that can use
the Shared Services features like presence, DSS/BLF view, central directory, phone
message, and quick message.
Desktop Client This licenses the number of Desktop Applications that can be run.
Softphone Enhancement This licenses the number of Desktop Applications that can use
White Board, Apps Share, and IM.
Desktop Suite InMail Integration This licenses the number of Desktop clients that can
access the InMail function from Desktop Suite.
MIS
MIS Basic This licenses the SV9100 MIS.

MIS Add Monitor This licenses the SV9100 MIS for Monitor/Report.
MIS Agent This licenses the SV9100 MIS for Agent Client.
PVA
PVA-IVR Channel This licenses the number of IVR channels that can be used by the
PVA.
PVA-CCIS Channel This licenses the number of CCIS channels that can be used by the
PVA.
PVA PMS This licenses the PVA PMS feature for the system.
2-948 Licensing
Issue 2.0
Integration Methods
1st Party CTI Connection This licenses the number of 1st Party CTI connections to the
system.
3rd Party CTI Connection This licenses the system to allow a 3rd Party CTI connection.
SOAI Connection This licenses the system to allow a SOAI connection.
IP Recorder
IP Recorder Basic This licenses the system to use the IP Recorder.

IP Recorder Supervisor This licenses the number of supervisors that can simultaneously
use the IP Recorder.
IP Recorder Users This licenses the number of users that can be recorded.
60 Day Free License

The 60 Day Free License comes with the GCD-CP10. It allows for all features (except
Encryption feature) to be active for 60 days. The count down starts on the first power on and
ends at midnight of the 60th day.
By default, the 60 Day Free License is set to disabled. The 60 day count down starts when
the system is initially powered on and continues if the 60 Day Free License is disabled or
enabled.
The GCD-CP10 works for 1440 hours from the first time powered on.
The clock counts down only when the power supply in the chassis is ON battery is not in
effect.
If the GCD-CP10 is removed, or the system is powered OFF, the countdown stops.
Every time the clock is changed, the GCD-CP10 free license (60 days) loses one hour.
While the free license is active the user can increase the port size of the system to
maximum by using Program 90-55.
The Encryption feature will only work if Encryption License (0030) is installed.
Recovery License
The recovery license turns on all licenses for up to 30 days.
To request a recovery license, go to http://eip.necunified.com/Default.aspx and then go to the license

portal and select the customer and the location of the GCD-CP10. This can be done only once per
GCD-CP10.
Conditions
The recovery license can be used only once for each UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10.
When the recovery license is generated, it gives the date that the license ends (30 days
includes the day generated).
Licensing 2-949
Issue 2.0
If the date is changed in Program 10-01-XX, while the license is in effect, to a date before
the generated date it subtracts one day from the recovery license.
If the date is changed in Program 10-01-XX, while the license is in effect, to a date after the
generated date, it runs until the End Date specified when the License was generated.
If the date is changed in Program 10-01-XX, while the license is in effect, to a date after the
End Date specified when the License was generated, the system resets when it is applied
(transfer key pressed), not when exiting program mode.
When the System time turns to midnight of the End Date, the system resets and comes
back with no licenses.
The recovery license can be activated only from PCPro or WebPro, not a multiline terminal.
If any GCD-CP10 license is activated when the recovery licensing is being used, the
GCD-CP10 license resets with only the activated license(s).
2-950 Licensing
Issue 2.0
Temporary License
Description
Temporary License activates all valid feature licenses and all port maximum licenses. Temporary
License is programmed using Telephone programming only. Web/PC pro can be used when verifying the
settings.
The Temporary License can be set up to a maximum number of 10 days.
Conditions
Temporary License activates all feature licenses (except the Encryption feature) and all port
maximum licenses.
When the number of days for the temporary license is assigned, system reset is required
for the license to take affect.
When the number of the date is 0 (disable), the number can be set (1~10). When the
number of the date is 1~10, the date can be set to 0 (disable) only.
The date counter of the temporary license is decreased one day at twelve o'clock midnight
of each day. When the number of set date expires, the temporary license is cleared at
twelve o'clock midnight of the next day.
When the system date is changed, the date counter of the temporary license is cleared. As
a result, the temporary license is cleared at twelve o'clock midnight of the next day.
When the temporary license is cleared, the system reboots automatically at twelve o'clock
midnight of the next day.
The temporary license is cleared after a cold reset (default).
When the temporary license is cleared, the Normal license/Campaign license is not
cleared.
When the Normal license / Campaign license is registered, the temporary license remains
valid. The temporary license stays valid until the expiration date, then after a system reboot
Normal License / Campaign License is valid.
When a Free License is valid (Program 90-55-01); the temporary license cannot be set. If a
Free license is set during the period the temporary license is valid, the temporary license is
cleared, but the system does not reboot.
The Encryption feature will only work if Encryption License (0030) is installed.
Default Settings
60 Day Free License is enabled.
Licensing 2-951
Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Refer to the particular feature for required component(s)
Related Features
Programming from a Multiline Terminal

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-48-01 License Activation Software Key Code 20-digit character. No Setting

Turn on the license issued from the license
server.
10-48-02 License Activation Activation Code Eight-digit hexadecimal number. No Setting

server.
10-48-03 License Activation Feature Code Seven-digit figure. No Setting

server.
10-49-01 License File Activation Save License File Dial 1 + TRF No Setting
on USB Drive (Press TRF to cancel)
Enable the command to save the license file via
USB memory which is issued from the license
server.
10-50-01 License Information License Name No Setting

system.
2-952 Licensing
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-50-02 License Information License Quantity 0 ~ 32767 No Setting

system.
10-50-03 License Information Free License Quantity 0 ~ 32767 No Setting

system.
10-50-04 License Information Free License 0 ~ 9999 No Setting

Remaining Days

system.
10-52-01 Free/Demo License Information 0 ~ 9999 No Setting

Remaining Days of Free/Demo License
Display information on free of charge/Demo

license.
90-37-01 Set Temporary License Set Number of 00 ~ 10 Days 0

Days for Temporary License 0 = Temporary License is invalid
Use to set the effective days of the temporary
license
Requires system reset to take affect).
90-55-01 Free License Select Start Free License 0 = Off 0
Validate the Free License. 1 = On

Table 2-70 License Information
Feature Feature Name

Item Name Min Max Note
Code (WebPro/PCPro)
This license number is determined

according to number of secondary site.
So if 1 Primary and 3 Secondary site
network, 3 licenses are needed. All
0002 SV9100 NETLINK NODE LIC-01 NetLink 1 49
license will be activated at Primary site.
With each "SV9100 NETLINK NODE LIC-
01" you will receive (32) "SV9100 IP
RESOURCE- LIC 01" licenses.
0007 SV9100 HM LIC Hotel/Motel On/Off
0017 SV9100 REMOVE LIC On/Off
0030 SV9100 ENCRYPTION LIC Encryption On/Off
0031 SV9100 NAT TRAVERSAL LIC NAT Traversal On/Off
0041 SV9100 XMLPRO LIC XML Pro On/Off
0042 SV9100 VIDEO MCU LIC Video MCU On/Off
Licensing 2-953
Issue 2.0
Table 2-70 License Information (Continued)

Code (WebPro/PCPro)
0046 SV9100 PMS LIC PMS On/Off
0047 SV9100 REMOTE CONF LIC-01 Remote Conference 1 20
0048 SV9100 HW MIGRATION LIC H/W migration On/Off
0111 SV9100 1ST PARTY CTI LIC-01 1st Party CTI (Ethernet) 1 256 1st Party CTI (Ethernet) xx client
0112 SV9100 3RD PARTY CTI-LIC 01 3rd Party CTI Client 0 999
0123 SV9100 OAI LIC OAI Interface On/Off
0300 SV9100 RESOURCE - LIC 01 System Port 1 1296
0411 SV9100 VERSION LIC (R1) Version R1 On/Off
SV9100 INMAIL VRS PORT-LIC

1001 VRS Port 1 16
01
1012 SV9100 INMAIL VM BOX-LIC 01 VM Box 1 896
SV9100 INMAIL EMAIL

1014 InMail Email Client 1 896
CLIENT-LIC 01
SV91/93 UM8000 FAX PORT-

1402 UMS FAX Port 1 4 1 Port FAX
LIC 01
SV91/93 UM8000 TTS PORT- 1 Port of Text-to-Speech language for

1403 UMS TTS Port 1 6
LIC 01 Microsoft outlook activation license.
UM8000 MAIL View App Session.

Supports client View Mail, View Call
Plus, VMM (Outlook), VML (Lotus Notes),
SV91/93 UM8000 UMS CLIENT-
1404 UMS Client 1 896 VMG (GroupWise) and Web Mailbox
LIC 01
Manager.
This license now provides a UM8000
mailbox for the user.
SV91/93 UM8000 SYSTEM

1406 UMS Multi-Language 1 25 1 Language activation License.
LANG-01 LIC
SV91/93 UM8000 HOSPITALITY

1407 UMS Hospitality and PMS On/Off Hospitality and PMS activation license.
& PMS LIC
SV91/93 UM8000 HOSPITALITY

1408 UMS Hospitality Language 1 10 1 Hospitality Language activation license.
LANG-LIC 01
SV91/93 UM8000 AMIS

1409 UMS Amis/Plus Net On/Off
NETWORK LIC
SV91/93 UM8000 TTS LANG-LIC 1 Port of Text-to-Speech language

1410 UMS TTS Language 1 10
01 activation license.
SV9100 CONTACT CENTER

2002 ACD Client 1 896
AGENT-LIC 01

2101 ACD P-event On/Off
P-EVENT LIC
SV9100 CONTACT CENTER-MIS

2102 ACD-MIS Basic On/Off
LIC
2-954 Licensing
Issue 2.0

Code (WebPro/PCPro)
SV9100 CONTACT CENTER RT-

2103 ACD-MIS Monitor 1 16
REPORTING-LIC 01
SV9100 CONTACT CENTER MIS

2104 ACD-MIS Agent 1 197
AGENT-LIC 01

2105 ACD Advance On/Off
SKILL/CID BASE LIC
SV91/93/95 CA STATION PKG

3000 CA-Basic On/Off
LIC-20
SV91/93/95 CA STATION PKG

3001 CA-256 Station On/Off
LIC-256
3002 SV91/93/95 CA UPG LIC-20/256 CA-Up 20 to 256 On/Off
SV91/93/95 CA NETWORK
3003 CA-Network Client 1 999
CLIENT PACK-LIC 05
SV91/93/95 CA ADD REMOTE

3004 CA-Add Remote Site 1 999
SITE-LIC 01
SV91/93/95 CA ADD REMOTE

3005 CA-Remote Site Soft 1 999
SOFTWARE-LIC 01
SV91/93/95 CA SYS TRAFFIC

3006 CA-Traffic Analys On/Off
ANALYSIS LIC
SV91/93/95 CA SYS PMS

3007 CA-PMS Integratio On/Off
INTEGRATION LIC
SV91/93/95 CA WEB
3008 CA-Web Reporting On/Off
REPORTING-LIC 05
SV91/93/95 CA ADDITIONAL
3013 CA-Add Stations 1 256
STATION LIC-256
SV9100 CA E911-REPORTING-
3014 CA-E911 Reporting 1 999
LIC
SV91/93 IP RECORDER - Basic

3200 IP REC BASIC PAC On/Off
Package

3201 REC BASIC SUPV 1 256
Supervisor Capacity

3202 REC BASIC PORT 1 256
Port Capacity
SV91/93 IP RECORDER - IP
3203 IP REC ADD 256 1 256
Recorder-LIC 01
SV91/93 IP RECORDER - Call

3204 IP REC CALLSCORING 1 999
Scoring-LIC 01
SV91/93 IP RECORDER -
3205 IP CALL REPORTING On/Off
Reporting-LIC
SV91/93/95 IP/DIGITAL-
3210 VSR-IP Port Includes feature codes 3210 and 3211.
REPORT-LIC 01
3211 VSR-Encrypt
Licensing 2-955
Issue 2.0

Code (WebPro/PCPro)
SV91/93/95 MANAGER PORT-

3212 VSR-Manager
LIC 01
SV91/93/95 IP/DIGITAL-
3213 VSR-Reporter
REPORT-LIC 01
SV91/93/95 IP/DIGITAL
3214 VSR-Archive
ARCHIVER PORT-LIC 01
3300 SV91/93 E911 ESN Suite-LIC ESN Registry On/Off
SV91/93 E911On-Site Monitor-

3301 ESN Site Monitor 1 9999
LIC
SV91/93 E911 ALARM CLIENT

3302 ESN Alarm Client 1 9999
ADD-ON -LIC
SV91/93 E911 Call Notify-Addon-

3303 ESN Call Notify 1 9999
LIC
3400 SV9100 CTI OCX LIC CTI-OCX On/Off
5001 SV9100 IP TRUNK-LIC 01 IP Trunk 1 400
Each system need this license to specify

5012 SV9100 NETWORKING-LIC 01 K-CCIS over IP 1 400 suitable K-CCIS over IP channel (Trunk)
number.
SV9100 NETWORKING OVER

5091 Networking over IP 1 128
IP-LIC 01
5101 SV9100 IP CLIENT-LIC 01 IP Terminal Client 1 896
5102 IP Terminal SP 1 896
5103 SV9100 IP RESOURCE-LIC 01 VoIP Channel 1 12800
5111 SV9100 IP PHONE-LIC 01 IP Terminal 1 896
5201 SV9100 MOBILE EXT-LIC 01 Mobile Extension 1 896
SV9100 UCS SOFTPHONE

5301 UCS SoftPhone Client 1 256
CLIENT-LIC01
SV9100 UCS SOFTPHONE E

5303 UCS SoftPhone Enhance 1 256
CLIENT-LIC01
SV9100 UCS ATTENDANT

5304 UCS Attendant Client 1 512
CLIENT-LIC 01
5305 SV9100 UCS CLIENT-LIC01 UCS Client 1 256
SV9100 UCS ADVANCED

5309 UCS Enhancement I 1 512
SERVICE-LIC 01
This will support external CRM

SV9100 UCS CRM
5310 UCS CRM Integration 1 256 applications. Refer to the UC Suite
INTEGRATION-LIC 01
Installation manual for further details.
SV9100 MOBILE PRESENCE

5311 UCS Mobile Presence On/Off
LIC
SV9100 UCS VOICEMAIL INT- Access to In Mail function from Desktop

5312 UCS InMail Integration 1 128
LIC 01 Suite. Client base License.
2-956 Licensing
Issue 2.0

Code (WebPro/PCPro)
SV9100 UCS WEB CLIENT-LIC

5313 UCS Web Client 1 512
01
5320 SV9100 UCS VERSION LIC(R1) UCS Version 1 On/Off
6201 SV9100 PVA-PMS US LIC PVA-PMS On/Off
6300 RGA CONF PORT-LIC 08 RGA Conference 8 32
6301 RGA CONF ENH I-LIC RGA-CNF ENH I On/Off
6302 RGA CONF ENH II-LIC RGA-CNF ENH II On/Off
6303 RGA CONF ENH III-LIC RGA-CNF ENH III On/Off
6304 RGA CONF MULTI LANG-LIC 01 RGA-CNF Multi Lang 1 60
Operation
There are four different ways to activate the licenses in the system:
Manual Enter Software Key Code:
1. In Program 10-48-01 enter the Software Key Code.

2. In Program 10-48-02 enter the activation code.
3. In Program 10-48-03 enter the feature code(s) in the Software Key Code.
4. In Program 10-48-03 hit the Submit Softkey.
Manually Load the License File via the USB Drive:
1. Manually register the software key.

2. Save the License file to the USB Drive.
3. Install the USB Drive onto the GCD-CP10.
4. In Program 10-49-01 assign to 1 and then hit transfer.
Multiple License files can be loaded at the same time.
Upload the License File via WebPro/PCPro:
1. Manually register the software key.

2. Save the license file.
3. Connect to the system.
4. Go to the Feature Activation screen.
Licensing 2-957
Issue 2.0
5. Click on Load File.

6. Select the location of the license file to upload.
Auto Register the License for the System:

2. Go to the Feature Activation screen.
3. Enter email Address and Password.
4. Add Software Key code(s).
If left blank, it registers all attached licenses for the Hardware Key code.
5. Click on Auto Register.
2-958 Licensing
Issue 2.0
Line Load Control
Description
The Line Load Control feature allows the system to be configured so that resource use is limited to
certain stations during very high system load conditions. This allows only high priority phone access to
phone system resources during very high CPU load conditions.
If enabled, when the configured low level threshold is reached the system will not allow restricted phones
to make or receive internal or external calls. Calls that are in progress are not affected, but when a
phone set to be restricted hangs up they will not be able to make or receive calls until the configure
threshold to release restriction is reached.
For example, at default the system low lever threshold is set to 90% CPU load and the restriction end
threshold is set to 50% CPU load. If the CPU reaches 90% load restriction is enabled for all phones
configured in Program 15-01-16 to be restricted. Phones not set to be restricted can still make and
receive calls. The restricted phones will stay in restriction status until the CPU load drops below 50%.
Conditions
If the low or high level restriction is triggered any phone set to be restricted in Program
15-01-16 will not be able to make or receive calls including 911 calls.
At default all extensions are set to restrict in Program 15-01-16.
The surveillance interval of CPU load factor is fixed at 1 second.
When the CPU load factor exceeds value of Program 90-73-04 for the number of seconds
set in Program 90-73-05, the high level restriction is triggered.
When the CPU load factor exceeds value of Program 90-73-02 for the number of seconds
set in Program 90-73-03, the low level restriction is triggered.
If the CPU load factor drops below the value set in Program 90-73-06 during low level
restriction or high level restriction, the restriction will end.
The Line Load Control feature is automatic once enabled and cannot be started or ended
manually.
The alarm report provides the Start time and End time of restriction.
The Line Load Control feature is enabled and configured system wide but restriction is set
on a per phone basis.
Default Settings
Disabled
Line Load Control 2-959

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-CP10
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-01-16 Basic Extension Data Setup Line Load 0 = Disable (Not Restricted) 0
Control Extension 1 = Enable (Restricted)
make and receive calls when the Line Load
Control feature is triggered.

When enabled, users cannot make or receive
internal and external calls including 911 calls if the
Line Load Control feature is enabled and triggered.
90-73-01 Line Load Control Line Load Control 0 = Off 0

Use this Program to enable or disable Line 1 = On
Load Control feature.
90-73-02 Line Load Control CPU Load Factor (Low 30 - 100% 90%
Level Restriction)
Sets the CPU load factor percentage for low

level restriction.
2-960 Line Load Control

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-73-03 Basic Extension Data Setup Surveillance 1 ~ 10 seconds 6

Seconds (Low Level Restriction)
Sets the low level surveillance seconds.
When the CPU load factor exceeds value of
Program 90-73-02 for the number of seconds
set in Program 90-73-03 consecutive seconds,
the low level restriction is triggered.
90-73-04 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup CPU 30 - 100% 95%

Load Factor High Level Restriction
Sets the CPU load factor percentage for high

level restriction.
90-73-05 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 1 ~ 10 seconds 3

Surveillance Seconds (High Level
Restriction)
Sets the high level surveillance seconds.
When the CPU load factor exceeds value of

Program 90-73-04 for the number of seconds
set in Program 90-73-05 consecutive seconds,
the high level restriction is triggered.
90-73-06 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup CPU 30 - 100% 50%

Load Factor (High Level Restriction)
Sets the CPU load factor required for all
restriction levels to end.

This Program must be set smaller than
Program 90-73-04 and Program 90-73-05.
Operation
None
Line Load Control 2-961

Issue 2.0
Line Preference
Description
Line Preference determines how a multiline terminal user places and answers calls. Line Preference has
two types: Incoming Line Preference or Outgoing Line Preference.
Incoming Line Preference
Incoming Line Preference establishes how a multiline terminal user answers calls. When a call rings the
multiline terminal, lifting the handset answers either the ringing call (for Ringing Line Preference) or
seizes an idle line (for Idle Line Preference). The idle line can provide either Intercom or trunk dial tone
(see Outgoing Line Preference below). Ringing Line Preference helps users whose primary function is to
answer calls (such as a receptionist). Idle Line Preference is an aid to users whose primary function is to
place calls (such as a telemarketer).
Outgoing Line Preference
Outgoing Line Preference sets how a multiline terminal user places calls. If a multiline terminal has
Outgoing Intercom Line Preference, the user hears Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset. If a
multiline terminal has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference, the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the
handset. Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line
Preference. The user hears either trunk (dial 9) or Intercom dial tone.
Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines
With Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, an extension user can automatically answer trunk calls that ring
other extensions (not their own). This would help a user that has to answer calls for co-workers that are
away from their desk. When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based
on Trunk Group Routing programming. The extension users own ringing calls, however, always have
priority over calls ringing other co-workers extensions.
Conditions
If a multiline terminal extension has more than one call ringing its line keys, Ringing Line
Preference answers the calls on a first-in first-answered basis.
DILs do not affect Incoming Line Preference operation.
Trunks ring extensions according to Ring Group programming.
If an extension gets trunk dial tone when the user lifts the handset, the system uses the dial
9 routing to select the trunk. This bypasses ARS.
Default Settings
Enabled
2-962 Line Preference

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Ring Groups
Trunk Groups

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
Line Preference 2-963

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Set the priority order number (1 ~ 4). 100 ~ 150: (100 + Networking (Trunk Group 1)
1001 ~ 1100: (1000 + Route 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not
All Other Routes
(2 ~ 100) and
Order Numbers
(1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not
Specified)

For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer 1 = Outgoing access only 1 ~ 400 = Trunk
of Non-Ringing Lines, set up the Trunk Access 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
Maps. 3 = Access only when trunk on assigned with
(incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold
15-01-02 Basic Extension Data Setup Outgoing 0 = Off 0

Trunk Line Preference 1 = On
Turn Off or On an Outgoing Trunk Line

Preference for extensions.
15-02-10 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Idle 1

Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls 1 = Ringing
Enable Idle or Ringing Line Preference for trunk
calls. Program 22-01-01 sets Intercom (0) or
trunk (1) call priority.
For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer
of Non-Ringing Lines, assign trunk Access

Maps to extensions.

required).

simultaneously.
2-964 Line Preference

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign extensions to ring groups. Auto-Answer eight ports) ring
for Non-Ringing Lines only works for trunks that for incoming
Ring Group 1
do not ring an extension.
calls. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

Assign trunks to ring groups. Auto-Answer for Incoming Group Number for
Non-Ringing Lines only works for trunks that do Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
not ring an extension. 0 = (No Setting)

Mail or InMail)

Let an extension user automatically answer 1~8
trunk calls that ring other extensions. When the Route Table Number
user lifts the handset, they automatically 0 ~ 100

answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group
Routing programming (defined in Program
14-06).
Operation
Ringing Trunk or intercom (ICM) call:

Lift the handset or press Speaker.
The setting assigned for Program 15-02-10 and Program 22-01-01 determines which call is answered
first.
Line Preference 2-965

Issue 2.0
Description
For incoming and outgoing central office calls, each trunk can be programmed to disconnect after a
defined time. The timer begins when the trunk is seized and disconnects the call after the time expires.
When used with the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature, the system can provide a warning
tone on outgoing trunks calls before the call is disconnected.
Conditions
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time.
Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA and Tie Lines.
Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to
hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
2-966 Long Conversation Cutoff

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-14 Basic Trunk Data Setup Long 0 = Disable 0

Conversation Cutoff 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable a trunk ability to disconnect
incoming and outgoing central office calls
automatically.
14-01-15 Basic Trunk Data Setup Long 0 = Disable 0

Conversation Alarm Before Cut Off 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the Long Conversation Alarm

for each trunk.

extension port =
Class 1

(Incoming)

(Outgoing)
20-21-03 System Options for Long Conversation 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call
Enter the time the system waits before

disconnecting incoming trunks.

Long Conversation Cutoff for Outgoing Call
Enter the time the system waits before

disconnecting outgoing trunks.
Long Conversation Cutoff 2-967

Issue 2.0
Operation
This feature is automatic once it is programmed.
2-968 Long Conversation Cutoff

Issue 2.0
Loop Keys
Description
Loop Keys are uniquely programmed function keys that simplify placing and answering trunk calls.
There are three types of Loop Keys: Incoming Only, Outgoing Only and Both Ways.
Incoming Only Loop Keys
Incoming Only loop keys are for answering trunk calls. An extension can have an incoming loop key for
a specific trunk group (fixed) or a catch all loop key for any trunk group (switched). Fixed loop keys
allow an extension user to tell the type of call by the ringing key. Switched loop keys are ideal for an
extension with a large number of feature keys. In addition, switched loop keys are a destination for any
trunk not on a line key or fixed loop key. Without a switched loop key, calls not appearing on a line key or
fixed loop key will ring only the CALL key. Incoming Only loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls.
Outgoing Only Loop Keys
Outgoing Only loop keys are for placing trunk calls. An extension can have outgoing loop keys for a
specific trunk group or for ARS access. When a user presses the loop key, they get dial tone from the
first available trunk in the group (or from ARS if programmed). Outgoing Only loop keys help ensure that
an extension will always have a key available for placing calls.
Both Ways Loop Keys
Both Ways loop keys combine the functions of both Incoming Only and Outgoing Only loop keys. Both
Ways loop keys work well for extension users that handle a moderate amount of calls and dont separate
keys for incoming and outgoing calls. Both Ways loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls. An
extension can have many loop keys - of any type. You can program an operator, for example, with four
loop keys for incoming calls and four for outgoing calls. Once a loop key call is set up, the user can
handle it like any other trunk call. For example, the user can place the call on Hold, Transfer it to a
co-worker or send it to a Park Orbit. An incoming call will ring the first available loop key, beginning with
the lowest numbered key. If keys 1-3 are loop keys, for example, the first incoming call rings key 1. If key
1 is busy, the next call rings key 2. If keys 1 and 2 are busy, the next call rings key 3. If all three keys are
busy, additional incoming calls queue for the first available key. The terminal display will show WAITING
- LOOP KEY if the user presses a loop key when there are additional calls waiting.
Conditions
Loop Keys can only be assigned or used when Program 20-02-23 is set to UX5000 (1).
A system can use either CAP keys or Loops keys.
When SV telephones are installed, CAP key mode must be used. When UX telephones are
installed, Loop key mode must be used.
Loop Keys 2-969

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
UX5000 Terminals only
None
Related Features
Off-Hook Signaling
Ring Groups

2-970 Loop Keys

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.

For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer 1 = Outgoing access only 1 ~ 400 = Trunk
of Non-Ringing Lines, set up the Trunk Access 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
Maps. 3 = Access only when trunk on assigned with
(incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold
Assign trunks to trunk groups. In general, loop
keys access trunks within specific trunk groups.

Program function keys as trunk group/loop keys 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(*02 or *05). For additional data, enter 0 751 by default) Manual for
(incoming only), 1 (outgoing only) or 2 (both 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
ways). Use Programs 15-13-01 or 15-13-02 to Function Code) (Service Code
define the trunk groups used. 752 by default)
15-13-01 Loop Key Data Outgoing 0 ~ 8 or 0 ~ 100 Programmable

Assign trunk groups for outgoing loop keys 0 = Assigns the Loop Key for Function Key
(0=ARS, Trunk Groups 1-100). Selecting 0 for ARS Number 01 ~ 32:
ARS should only be used when ARS is enabled 1 ~ 100 = Assigns the Loop Key Outgoing Option
in Program 26-01-01 or it could cause the loop to the trunk group specified. - 0 (Assigns the
key to lock up. Loop Key for
ARS)
15-13-02 Loop Key Data Incoming 0 ~ 8 or 0 ~ 100 Programmable

Assign trunk groups for incoming loop keys 0 = Assigns the Loop Key to all Function Key
(0=all Trunk Groups, Trunk Groups 1-100). trunk groups Number 01 ~ 32:
1 ~ 100 = Assigns the Loop Key Incoming Option
to the trunk group specified.) - 0 (Assigns the
Loop Key to all
trunk groups)
Loop Keys 2-971

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-02-23 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = Original Operation Mode 0

UX5000 Phone Operation Mode (CAP Key)
Selects the Loop Key operation like the 1 = UX5000 Special Operation
UX5000 terminal, or the CAP Key operation like Mode (Loop Key)
the SV9100 terminal.

Service Code 752.

When programming a feature as a
Programmable Function Key, refer to Program
15-07-01 in the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming
Manual.

Assign extensions (up to 48) to Ring Groups. eight ports) ring
Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group for incoming
Ring Group 1
groups. calls. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

Assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups. Use Incoming Group Number for
this program to assign Normal Ring Trunks Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
(Program 22-02) to Incoming Ring Groups 0 = (No Setting)
(Program 22-04). 001 ~ 100 = (Incoming Group)

Mail or InMail)
Operation
To place a call on a loop key:

1. Press the outgoing or both ways loop key.
You hear dial tone and the key lights green.
2. Dial the number.
2-972 Loop Keys

Issue 2.0
To answer a call on a loop key:
Listen for ringing or look for a flashing loop key.

NOTE
1. Press loop key.

The key lights green and you connect to the call.
If there are additional calls waiting to be answered, your display shows: [WAITING - LOOP KEY]
To program a loop key:

1. Press the SPK key.
2. Dial 752.
3. Press the key you want to program as a loop key.
4. Dial 05.
5. Dial the loop key type:
0 = Incoming only
1 = Outgoing only
2 = Both ways (incoming and outgoing)
6. Dial the loop key routing option for incoming, outgoing, or incoming and outgoing calls:
If you selected option 2 in step 5 above, enter the incoming Trunk Group followed by the outgoing
Trunk Group.
7. Press SPK to hang up.
Loop Keys 2-973

Issue 2.0
2-974 Loop Keys

Maintenance
Description
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system has several utilities to assist in troubleshooting and diagnosing
problems both during and after installation.
M
PCPro can remotely access the UNIVERGE SV9100 for maintenance and diagnostics. Within
PCPro, the debug terminal can be accessed to monitor the systems activity and logging. PCPro
also has built-in reports that can display alarm data. If need be, an option in PCPro allows the
technician to reset or initialize the system remotely. If the technician determines the problem is
isolated to a specific slot, PCPro can reset only the slot in question.
The SV9100 Maintenance manual contains a number of flow charts to help technicians diagnose
and resolve problems that may arise during and after the installation of the UNIVERGE SV9100
system.
For detailed information on the Maintenance feature, refer to the UNIVERGE

REFERENCE
SV9100 System Maintenance Manual.
Per each analog trunk (or all analog trunks) the most suitable CODEC Filter setting for Program
81-07 and Program 81-17 can be automatically adjusted using Programs 90-68-01 and
90-68-02.
Trunk busy: Busy
After successful measurement, the option to copy the same settings to all analog trunks is
shown.
NOTE
Maintenance 2-975
Issue 2.0
Conditions
None
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
None
Related Features
None

None
Operation
None
2-976 Maintenance
Issue 2.0
Meet Me Conference
Description
With Meet Me Conference, an extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to
31 other internal or external parties. Each party joins the Conference by dialing a Meet Me Conference
code. Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting without leaving the office.
The GCD-CP10 provides two blocks of 32 conference circuits (or three blocks of 32 conference circuits
when the modem function is not used), allowing each block to have any number of internal or external
parties conferenced up to the block limit of 32.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Conference
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Conference 2-977

Issue 2.0

For additional programming for Paging, refer to the features Paging, External on page 2-1109 and Paging, Internal
on page 2-1119.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign function keys for Conference (code 07). 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1


Meet-Me Conference and Paging.

Privacy Release Time
Set the Privacy Release Time. After the user
initiates Meet Me Conference, the system waits

this interval for the Paged party to join the
conversation.
2-978 Meet Me Conference

Issue 2.0
Operation
Meet Me External Conference
To make a Meet Me External Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1. While on a call, press Conf softkey.

2. Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1~8 (for Internal/External Zones 1~8) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
3. Announce the zone.
4. When a co-worker answers your page, press Conf softkey twice.
5. Repeat steps 1~4 for each co-worker you want to add.
1. While on a call, hookflash and dial #1.

2. Dial 703 and the External Paging zone code (1~8 or 0 for All Call).
- OR -
Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1~8 (for Internal/External Zones 1~8) or 0 (for
4. When a co-worker answers your page, press hookflash twice.
To join a Meet Me External Conference:

- OR -
2. Dial 765.
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone code (0~8).

You connect to the other parties.
Meet Me Conference 2-979

Issue 2.0
Meet Me Internal Conference
To make a Meet Me Internal Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1. While on a call, press Conf softkey.

4. When a co-worker answers your page, press Conf softkey twice.
1. While on a call, hookflash and dial #1.

4. When a co-worker answers your page, press hookflash twice.
To join a Meet Me Internal Conference:

1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker (or lift the handset).
- OR -

2. Dial 763 (if your extension is in the zone called).
- OR -
Dial 764 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).
- OR -
Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (Program 15-07 or 23) if your extension is in
the zone called.
2-980 Meet Me Conference

Issue 2.0
Meet Me Paging
Description
Meet Me Paging allows an extension user to Page a co-worker and privately meet with them on a Page
zone. The Paging zone is busy to other users while the meeting takes place. While the co-workers meet
on the zone, no one else can hear the conversation, join in or make an announcement using that zone.
Meet Me Paging is a good way to talk to a co-worker when their location is unknown. If the co-worker
can hear the Page, they can join in the conversation.
Conditions
With Meet Me Paging Transfer, a user can page a co-worker and have the call
automatically transfer when the co-worker answers the page.
An extension access to internal and external page zones affects the Meet Me Paging
feature.
Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Paging operation.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
External zone paging requires a PGD(2)-U10 ADP installed in the system.
Meet Me Paging 2-981

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Paging, External
Paging, Internal

For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the features Paging, External on page 2-1109 and
Paging, Internal on page 2-1119.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Paging Group digits
Customize the Service Codes used for meet-

me answer to specified internal paging group
service access.
Customize the Service Codes used for meet- digits

me answer to external paging service access.
Customize the Service digits
Codes used for meet-me answer in same
paging group service access.

Assign function keys for External Zone Paging 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 19 + zone), External All Call Paging 751 by default) Manual for
(code 20), Internal Zone Paging (code 21 + 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
zone) or Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup Function Code) (Service Code
(code 23). 752 by default)
2-982 Meet Me Paging

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1


31-02-01 Internal Paging Group Assignment 0 ~ 64 0 for IP Station

Internal Paging Group Number (0 = No Setting) 1 for TDM
Assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups Station

(i.e., Page Zones).
31-02-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 0 = Deny 0

Internal All Call Paging Receiving 1 = Allow
Allow/Deny All Call Internal Paging for each
extension. If allowed, extension can place and
receive All Call Internal Paging
announcements. If denied, extensions can

make, but not receive, All Call Internal Paging
announcements. If combined, Paging zones
should be restricted as well, change the internal
page zone group in Program 31-07-01 to 0.
Operation
Meet Me External Page
To make a Meet Me External Page:

1. At multiline terminal, press Speaker or pick up the handset.
- OR -

2. Dial 703 and the External Paging Zone code (1~8 or 0 for All Call).
- OR -

Issue 2.0

- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal, press the External Paging Zone key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 19 +
zone).
To join a Meet Me External Page:

1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker or pick up the handset.
- OR -

2. Dial 765.
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0~8).
You connect to the other party.
Meet Me Internal Page
To make a Meet Me Internal Page:

- OR -

2. Dial 701 and dial the Internal Paging Zone code (0~9, 00~32 or 00~64).
- OR -
- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal, press the Internal Paging Zone key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 21 +
zone).
To join a Meet Me Internal Page:

- OR -
2-984 Meet Me Paging

Issue 2.0

- OR -
- OR -
Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 23) if your
extension is in the zone called.

Issue 2.0
Description
If a user wants to Transfer a call to a co-worker but they do not know where the co-worker is, they can
use Meet Me Paging Transfer. With Meet Me Paging Transfer, the user can Page the co-worker and
have the call automatically Transfer when the co-worker answers the Page. Since Meet Me Paging
Transfer works with both Internal and External Paging, a call can be quickly extended to a co-worker
anywhere in the facility.
Conditions
An extension user can set up a conference with their current call and up to 31 other inside
parties.
An extension user can Page a co-worker and meet with them on a page zone.
With External Paging, an extension user can broadcast an announcement over paging
equipment connected to external paging zones.
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other multiline terminals.
Function keys simplify Meet Me Paging Transfer operation.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
External zone paging requires a PGD(2)-U10 ADP installed in the system.
Related Features
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Paging
Paging, External
2-986 Meet Me Paging Transfer

Issue 2.0
Paging, Internal

For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the features Paging, External on page 2-1109 and
Paging, Internal on page 2-1119.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-21-04 GCD-CP10 Hardware Setup External 0 = External MOH (AUX2)/ 1

Source I/O Selection on GCD-CP10 External Speaker(AUX1)
Define how the I/O ports on the GCD-CP10 are 1 = BGM source (AUX2)/
used. External Speaker(AUX1)
2 = External MOH (AUX2)/
BGM source (AUX1)
Relationships between AUX
number and Relay number are as
follows:
AUX2 = Relay2
AUX1 = Relay1
Paging Group digits
Customize the Service Codes used for meet-

me answer to specified internal paging group
service access.

me answer to external paging service access.
me answer in same paging group service
access.
Meet Me Paging Transfer 2-987

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign function keys for External Zone Paging 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 19 + zone), External All Call Paging 751 by default) Manual for
(code 20), Internal Zone Paging (code 21 +
zone) or Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup Function Code) (Service Code
(code 23). 752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1
20-10-06 Class of Service Options (Answer Service) 0 = Off COS 1 ~15 = 1




(i.e., Page Zones).
31-02-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 0 = Prevent 0

Internal All Call Paging Receiving 1 = Allow
Allow/Prevent All Call Internal Paging for each
announcements. If prevented, extensions can

make (not receive) only All Call Internal Paging
should be restricted as well, change the internal
page zone group in Program 31-07-01 to 0.
31-03-01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Maximum of 12 characters. Refer to the
Paging Group Name Programming
Assign name to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Manual for
Page Zones). The system shows the name you default values.
program on the telephone display.
Operation
Meet Me External Paging Transfer
To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:

1. At the multiline terminal, while on a call, press Hold.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, while on a call, hookflash.

Issue 2.0
2. Press the External Paging Zone key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 19 + zone or 20 for all external
zones).
- OR -
Dial 703 and the External Paging Zone code (1~8 or 0 for All Call).
- OR -
3. Announce the call.
4. From a multiline terminal, when the paged party answers, press Transfer or the Transfer
softkey.
- OR -
From a single line telephone, when the paged party answers, hang up.
The party is transferred.
To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:

1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker or pick up handset.
- OR -

2. Dial 765.
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0~8).
The Paging party is connected.
4. Stay on the line.

From a multiline terminal, press Transfer or the Transfer softkey.
- OR -
From a single line telephone, hang up.

Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer
To make a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:

1. At multiline terminal, while on a call, press Hold.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, while on a call, hookflash.
Meet Me Paging Transfer 2-989

Issue 2.0
2. Press Internal Paging Zone key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 21 + zone or 22 for all internal
zones).
- OR -
Dial 701 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0~9 or 00~64).
- OR -
3. Announce the call.
4. From a multiline terminal, when the paged party answers, press Transfer or the Transfer
softkey.
- OR -
To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:

1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker or pick up handset.
- OR -

- OR -
- OR -
Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 23) if your
extension is in the zone called.
3. Stay on the line.
From a multiline terminal, when the paged party answers, press Transfer or the Transfer
softkey.
- OR -

Issue 2.0
Memo Dial
Description
On an outside call, Memo Dial lets a multiline terminal user store an important number for easy redialing
later on. The telephone can be like a notepad. For example, a user could dial Directory Assistance and
ask for a clients telephone number. When Directory Assistance plays back the requested number, the
caller can use Memo Dial to jot the number down in the telephone memory. They can quickly call the
Memo Dial number after hanging up.
When a user enters a Memo Dial number, the dialed digits do not output over the trunk. Dialing Memo
Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress.
Conditions
When Memo Dial calls out, it outdials the entire stored number. Memo Dial does not
automatically strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number.
Only one number can be stored at a time.
If a number is already stored in Memo Dial and you are on an internal or external call and
the Dial Memo Key is pressed, the number is erased.
A users outgoing dialing options affect how a Memo Dial call is placed.
Memo Dial is not available on single line telephones.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Memo Dial 2-991

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Last Number Redial
Save Number Dialed

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a function key for Memo Dial (code 31). 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)
Operation
To store a number while you are on a call:

1. While on a call, press Memo Dial key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 31).
2. Dial number you want to store.
3. Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation.
2-992 Memo Dial

Issue 2.0
To call a stored Memo Dial number:

2. Press the Memo Dial key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 31).
3. Press Speaker.
The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number.
- OR -
Press the line key.

The stored number dials out.
To check to see the stored Memo Dial number:

2. Press Memo Dial key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 31).
The stored number displays.
To cancel (erase) a stored Memo Dial number:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Press the Memo Dial key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 31).
Memo Dial 2-993

Issue 2.0
Message Waiting
Description
An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension
requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing MW lamp at the called extension and a steadily lit
MW lamp on the calling extension. Answering the Message Waiting automatically calls the extension
which left the indication. Message Waiting ensures that a user does not have to recall an unanswered
extension. It also ensures that a user does not miss calls when their extension is busy or unattended.
Additionally, Message Waiting lets extension users:

View and selectively answer messages left at their extension (display multiline terminal only)
Cancel all messages left at their extension
Cancel messages they left at other extensions
An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions. Also, any number of
extensions can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension. A periodic VRS announcement may
remind users that they have Messages Waiting.
mail installed. When an extension receives a voice mail, the Message key can be used to check the
number of messages in voice mail, and call the voice mail to listen to the messages. If no Voice Mail
Refer to the Voice Mail Integration (Analog) on page 2-1587 feature for the feature operation.
LED Color Indication
The software allows you to select whether the Message Wait LED located at the top of the multiline
terminal flashes green (0) or red (1) when a Message Wait indication is flashing. By default, this option is
set to flash red.
If this LED is also used for voice mail indications (no Programmable Function Key programmed for

NOTE
voice mail), and there are both voice mail messages and Message Wait indications, the color set for
Message Wait overrides the color used for voice mail indications (red).
2-994 Message Waiting

Issue 2.0
Conditions
Analog ports from APA or APR adapters do not provide Message Waiting lamping.
When a user responds to a Message Waiting, the system does not cancel the Message
Waiting indication if the called party uses Handsfree Answerback. The system cancels the
indication only if the called party lifts the handset or presses Speaker.
With the Hotel/Motel set up, an employee with a multiline terminal can send a Message
Waiting to a room telephone if allowed in system programming.
A Message Waiting key simplifies this feature operation.
Telephone-to-telephone Message Waiting works when the voice mail is installed.
The MW (Message Waiting) LED may be used to indicate voice mail messages if no
extension number is assigned to the voice mail key in system programming.
If the following programs are changed while the phone is online, a reset of the feature is
required before the setting takes effect.
Program 15-02-35 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Calling Extension
Program 15-02-36 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Called Extension
Program 15-02-37 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color
Program 15-02-38 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Cycle
For example, if a message waiting was set before any of these programs were changed, the
lamp remains the same until the message waiting is set again.
If both Voice Mail Message and Message Wait indication are set, the color set for Message
Wait overrides the color used for Voice Mail Message indication.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Message Waiting 2-995

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Hotel/Motel
UM8000 Mail
InMail

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Motel)
Codes (GCD-CP10 must be licensed for Hotel/
Motel).

Operation) Answer Message Waiting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the answer message waiting service digits

code.

Operation) Cancel All Messages Waiting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the Cancel All Messages Waiting digits

service code.

Cancel message waiting used for registration digits

and setup.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-16-07 Single Digit Service Code Setup Message 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit 0
Waiting
Customize the message waiting Service Codes
used to set message waiting when a busy or
ring back signal is heard.


Select the cycle that the Large LED flashes
when the extension has set Message Waiting.
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

Select the cycle that the Large LED flashes
when the extension has Message Waiting set to
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
the extension.
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

Select the Message Waiting flash pattern for
the station that set the Message Waiting
reminder.

flashes when the extension has a VM Message
Waiting set to the extension.
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

Assign a function key for Message Waiting 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Message Waiting.
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count 0 (endless).

(48) Set repeat count for tone 16 Lockout. Refer to Table 2-
31 Service Tone
Setup Defaults,
Program
80-01-01 on
page 2-568
80-01-02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 0

(48) Customize Service Tones. Refer to Table 2-
32 Service Tone
Setup, Program

80-01-02 on
page 2-572.
Operation
To leave a Message Waiting:

1. Call busy or unanswered extension.
2. Dial 0 or press the Message Waiting key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 38).
3. Hang up.
With multiline terminal telephones, the Message Waiting LED lights.
To answer a Message Waiting:
When you have a message, your Message Waiting LED flashes fast for multiline terminals.
NOTE
1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker and dial 0.

- OR -
Press the Message Waiting key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 38).

- OR -

Issue 2.0

If the called extension does not answer, dial 0 or press your Message Waiting key to automatically
leave them a message.
Normally, your Message Waiting LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have new messages in your
Voice Mail mailbox or a new General Message. See To check your messages below.
To cancel all your Messages Waiting:
This includes messages you have left for other extensions and messages other extension have left for you.
NOTE

- OR -

2. Dial 773.
3. Hang up.
To cancel the Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension:

- OR -

2. Dial 771.
3. Dial the number of the extension you do not want to have your messages.
4. Hang up.
To check your messages:

1. Press Message key or the MW (Message Waiting) softkey.

Issue 2.0
2. Dial 0.
You can have any combination of the message types in the table below on your telephone.
If you see. . . You have. . .
VOICE MESSAGE New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox.

n MESSAGE
CHECK MESSAGE A General message in Voice Mail that has not been heard.
VRS GENERAL MESSAGE
CHECK MESSAGE Message Waiting requests left at your telephone by your co-workers.
(name)
3. Press VOL or VOL to scroll through your display.

4. When you find the message you want to answer, press Speaker. You can do one of the following:
Go to your Voice Mail mailbox.
Listen to the new General Message.
Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting.

Issue 2.0
Microphone Cutoff
Description
Microphone Cutoff lets a multiline terminal user turn off their telephone handsfree or handset
microphone anytime. When activated, Microphone Mute prevents the caller from hearing conversations
in the users work area. The user may turn off the microphone while their telephone is idle, busy on a
call or ringing. The microphone stays off until the user turns it back on.
Conditions
Microphone Cutoff does not operate if the user calls another extension and the called
extension user responds without lifting the handset or pressing Speaker.
When using the Handset Transmission Cutoff key during an intercom call with the handset
on-hook, you hear three beep tones and the LED is on solid. This also occurs on an
outside call.
When using the Handset Transmission Cutoff key during an intercom call with the handset
off-hook, you hear three beep tones through the handset and the Handset Transmission
Cutoff and MIC keys flash. This also occurs on an outside call.
When Handset Transmission Cutoff is activated and the handset is off-hook, pressing
Speaker and returning the handset to the cradle turns off the Handset Transmission Cutoff
key. Three beep tones are heard over the telephone speaker.
Default Setting
Enabled (using MIC key)
System Availability
Terminals
None
Microphone Cutoff 2-1001

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Handset Mute

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

If an extension needs handset microphone 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
cutoff, program a Handset Transmission Cutoff 751 by default) Manual for
key (code 40). To program a MIC Cutoff key, 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
use code 02 as the entry. The MIC Cutoff key

mutes conversation on a handsfree call, but the 752 by default)
Handset Transmission Cutoff key mutes the
handset transmission on a non-handsfree call.
20-02-11 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = Off 1

Handsfree Microphone Control 1 = On
Control the setting for multiline terminal
handsfree microphone after being disconnected
and reconnected. If set to 0, the microphone is
always off when the terminal is reconnected. If
set to 1, the microphone remains in the same
state it was in when the terminal is
reconnected.
2-1002 Microphone Cutoff

Issue 2.0
Operation
To mute your telephone handset or Handsfree microphone while on a call:

1. Press MIC.
This only turns off the Handsfree microphone.
- OR -
Press the Microphone Cutoff key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 40).

This turns off both the handset and Handsfree microphone.
To turn your telephone microphone back on:

1. Press MIC.
Use MIC only if you pressed it initially to turn off your Handsfree microphone.
- OR -
Press the Microphone Cutoff key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 40).

Use the Microphone Cutoff key only if you pressed it initially to turn off your handset or Handsfree
microphone.
Microphone Cutoff 2-1003

Issue 2.0
Migration SV8100/SV8300
Description
The Migration SV8100/SV8300 feature allows a UNIVERGE SV8100 database to be converted to a
SV9100 database to utilize the enhanced capabilities of the SV9100.
Older telephones on new systems may be compatible but will have certain limitations depending
on installation and feature usage. Such limitations cannot be listed due to site specific usage.
IMPORTANT NEC always recommends migrating to the telephones advertised as compatible for specific
systems.
Conditions
The Migration SV8100/SV8300 feature is available with Version 1000 or higher.
Refer to the SV9100 System Hardware Manual for a complete list of supported packages.
Hardware Migration license (0048) is required to migrate SV8100 hardware to the SV9100.
SV8100 licenses will not migrate.
After an SV8100 to SV9100 database conversion there will be no VoIP Daughter Board and
GCD-CP10 present.
SV9100 does not support the IPK Migration board.
InMail messages and recordings will not migrate.
SV8100 UC Desktop Suite and Softphone will not migrate.
Unified Communications for Business (UCB) will not migrate.
When migrating from SV8100 to SV9100, the InMail auto programs to use Department
Group 64. For example, if Department Group 64 was previously being used on the SV8100
for UM8000, the UM8000 will need to be re-programmed to use a different Department
Group.
Supported Hardware
Table 2-71 SV8100 Supported Hardware
Package Description Supported
CHS2U 19 Chassis Yes
CHS2U B 9.5 Chassis Yes
CHS2U E 9.5 Expansion Chassis Yes
PZ-xxIPLA Voice Over IP Daughter Board No
PZ-xxIPLB Voice Over IP Daughter Board No
PZ-BS10 Expansion Board for Controlling Chassis Yes
2-1004 Migration SV8100/SV8300

Issue 2.0
Table 2-71 SV8100 Supported Hardware (Continued)
Package Description Supported
PX-BS11 Expansion Board for Expansion Chassis Yes
CD-8DLCA 8 Digital Station Interface Yes
PZ-8DLCA 8 Digital Station Interface Daughter Board Yes
CD-16DLCA 16 Digital Station Interface Yes
CD-16LCAH Analog Terminal Blade Yes
CD-4LCA 4 Single Line Telephone Interface Yes
PZ-4LCA 4 Single Line Telephone Interface Daughter Board Yes
CD-8LCA 8 Single Line Telephone Interface Yes
PZ-8LCE 8 Single Line Telephone Interface Daughter Board Yes
CD-LTA Combo Card 8 Digital, 2 Single Line, and an optional Yes

PZ-4COTF or PZ-2BRIA can be Installed
CD-4COTB 4 Loop/Ground Start Trunk Yes
PZ-4COTF 4 Loop/Ground Start Trunk Daughter Board Yes
CD-8COTBH 8 Loop/Ground Start Yes
CD-2BRIA 2 Basic Rate Interface Yes
PZ-2BRIA 2 Basic Rate Interface Daughter Board Yes
CD-PRTA 1 Primary Rate Interface Yes
CD-CCTA CCIS Trunk Interface/Common Channel Handler Yes
CD-4ODTA 4 E&M Yes
CD-RTB Router Yes
CD-VM00 Voice Mail and Server Yes
CD-4DIOPA 4 DID/OPX Yes
CD-ETIA Switching Hub with Power over Ethernet Yes

CD-SVRU Server Blade (Desktop Suite and ACD MIS) Yes

CD-SVRU Server Blade (NEC Meeting Center (NMC) Yes

CD-SVR2 Server Blade Yes
CD-PVAA (CCIS) US Only CCIS Point-to-Multipoint Yes
CD-PVAA PVA (PMS) Property Management System Yes
CD-PVAA (IVR) US Only Interactive Voice Response No
CD-PVAA (CNF) US Only Multimedia Conference No

CD-RGA Gateway Application Yes

- Requires firmware upgrade to migrate to the SV9100.

- Requires SV9100 InServer Migration kit.

- Requires SVR2 Migration kit.
Migration SV8100/SV8300 2-1005

Issue 2.0
Supported Terminals
Table 2-72 SV8100 Supported Terminals
Terminal Supported
Dterm80/85 (DTH & DTR) No
DT300 Series (DTL) Yes
DT400 Series (DTL) Yes
DT700 Series (ITL) Yes
DT800 Series (ITL) Yes
MH240 No
ML440 Yes
Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH) Yes
SLT Yes
SIP Terminal Yes
IP-DECT Yes
Softphone No
DTL-8R-1 Cordless terminal Yes
Cordless terminals (DTH-4R-1/DTR-1R-2) are not supported.
Conversion Exception
Table 2-73 SV8100 Conversion Exception
SV8100 Program SV9100 Program

Comments
Number Number
10-03 (VoIP) 10-68 The conversion of data for VOIP does not support conversion.
10-40 14-18 The VOIP package of SV8100 is deleted after conversion
completion. Please set VOIP package with blade configuration.
Thereafter IP trunks are set in Program 10-68.
10-26-01 15-05-50 The conversion of IP system communication mode, the peer to

peer mode does not support conversion. It is changed to the
extension terminal-based setting. After conversion completion,
Please set Program 15-05-50.
10-26-03 15-05-50 The conversion of IP system communication mode, the peer to

peer mode does not support conversion. It is changed to the
extension terminal-based setting. After conversion completion,
Please set Program1 5-05-50.
10-29-08 10-67-01 The conversion of SIP server information, DNS server setting
10-29-09 10-67-02 does not support conversion. Please set Programs 10-67-01,
10-29-10 10-67-03 10-67-02 and 10-67- 03.
84-32-01 ~ 84-32-07 84-33-12 ~ 84-33-18 The conversion of Fax over IP Codec information does not
support conversion. Please set Program 84- 33 for every type.
84-01-69 ~ 84-01-71 84-35-01 ~ 84-35-03 The conversion of RFC2833 play out level setting does not

Issue 2.0
Table 2-73 SV8100 Conversion Exception (Continued)

Comments
Number Number
84-12-39 ~ 84-12-41 84-35-01 ~ 84-35-03 The conversion of H.323 Codec setting does not support
conversion. Please set Program 84-35 for every type.
84-13-62 ~ 84-13-64 84-35-01 ~ 84-35-03 The conversion of SIP trunk Codec setting does not support
84-19-62 ~ 84-19-64 84-35-01 ~ 84-35-03 The conversion of SIP extension Codec setting does not
84-21-44 ~ 84-21-46 84-35-01 ~ 84-35-03 The conversion of CCIS trunk Codec setting does not support
84-25-50 ~ 84-25-52 84-35-01 ~ 84-35-03 The conversion of NetLink Codec setting does not support
84-31-19 ~ 84-31-25 84-36 and 84-38 The conversion of VOIP echo canceler setting does not
support conversion. Please set Program 84- 36 and 84-38.
84-31-26 ~ 84-31-36 84-38 The conversion of VOIP echo canceler setting does not
84-26 84-26 The VOIP package does not support conversion because it is
deleted after the conversion process. Please set Program
84-26-01~84-26-03.
15-01-01 (InMail) 15-01-01 (Port 897~912) The extension name of InMail does not support conversion.
Program Data Moved
Table 2-74 Program Data Moved
SV8100 Setting SV9100 Setting

84-31-36 84-33-06
84-01-44 84-33-08
84-01-45 84-33-09
84-01-46 84-33-10
84-01-55 84-33-11
84-01-59 84-33-01
84-01-62 84-34-01
84-12-31 84-34-01
84-12-32 84-33-01
84-13-30 84-34-02
84-13-31 84-34-01
84-13-50 84-33-01
84-13-51 84-33-02
84-13-52 84-33-06
84-13-56 84-33-08

Issue 2.0
Table 2-74 Program Data Moved (Continued)
SV8100 Setting SV9100 Setting

84-13-57 84-33-09
84-13-58 84-33-10
84-13-61 84-33-05
84-19-31 84-34-02
84-19-32 84-34-01
84-19-50 84-33-01
84-19-51 84-33-02
84-15-52 84-33-06
84-19-56 84-33-08
84-19-57 84-33-09
84-19-58 84-33-10
84-19-61 84-33-05
84-21-21 84-34-01
84-21-42 84-33-01
84-25-31 84-34-01
84-25-32 84-33-01
84-27-08 84-35-04
84-27-09 84-35-05
84-27-10 84-37-02
84-27-11 84-37-03
84-27-12 84-36-02
84-27-13 84-36-01
84-27-15 84-37-04
84-27-16 84-37-01
84-27-17 84-37-05
10-36 10-36
10-28-04 10-36-02
10-30-02 10-36-03
10-30-03 10-36-04
10-30-04 10-29-20
10-12-06 10-29-21

Issue 2.0
Input Value Change
Table 2-75 Input Value Change

SV9100 Program Setting
Number Setting
0:Auto Detect 0:Auto Detect

1:100Mbps, Full Duplex 1:100Mbps, Full Duplex
2:100Mbps, Half Duplex 3:10Mbps, Full Duplex
10-12-11 3:10Mbps, Full Duplex 5:1Gbps, Full Duplex
4:10Mbps, Half Duplex
5:1Gbps, Full Duplex
6:1Gbps, Half Duplex
84-01-15 1:Static 1:Static

84-11-17 2:Adaptive during silence 3:Self adjusting
84-12-17 3:Adaptive immediately
84-13-17
84-19-17
84-21-22
84-24-17
84-25-17
0:Disable 1:Line E.C.

84-31-08 1:Line E.C. 2:Acou.E.C.
2:Acou.E.C.
0:disable 0:Disable
1:Enable 1:Enable
184-31-02
2:Echo Path Mode
84-31-37
3:Echo Path Auto Detect
Mode
0:G.711_PT 0:G.711_PT
1:G.723_PT 2:G.729_PT
84-21-19 2:G.729_PT 3:G.722_PT
84-21-20 3:G.722_PT 4:G.726_PT
4:G.726_PT
5:iLBC
0:G.711_PT 0:G.711_PT
84-11-28 1:G.723_PT 2:G.729_PT
2:G.729_PT
0:G.711_PT 0:G.711_PT
1:G.723_PT 2:G.729_PT
84-19-28 2:G.729_PT 3:G.722_PT
84-13-28 3:G.722_PT 4:G.726_PT
4:G.726_PT
5:iLBC
0:Adaptec - 1:-19db(- 20:(-30dbm)
49dbm) 1:-19db(-49dbm)
84-01-22
20:0db (-30dbm) 20:0db (-30dbm)
30:10db (-20dbm) 30:10db (-20dbm)

Issue 2.0
Table 2-75 Input Value Change (Continued)

SV9100 Program Setting
Number Setting
84-11-18 0:Adaptec - 1:-19db(- 20:(-30dbm)

84-12-18 49dbm) 1:-19db(-49dbm)
84-13-18 20:0db (-30dbm) 20:0db (-30dbm)
84-19-18 30:10db (-20dbm) 30:10db (-20dbm)
84-21-23
84-24-18
84-25-18
10-03-03 1:-15.5db 1:-15.5db

10-03-04 ~ ~
14-01-02 57:12.5db 57:12.5db
14-01-03 58:13.0db
14-01-04 59:13.5db
14-01-05 60:14.0db
15-02-29 61:14.5db
31-06-04 62:15.0db
31-06-05 63:15.5db
32-03-02
32-03-03
44-07-01
44-07-02
44-07-03
44-07-04
47-01-18
47-01-19
47-10-02
80-01-04
0:Disable 0:Disable
1:Group1 1:Enable
2:Group2
3:Group3
4:Group4
15-05-18 5:Group5
6:Group6
7:Group7
8:Group8
9:Group9
10:Group10
0:Not set 0:Not set

35-01-01 3:LAN 3:LAN
4:CTA/CTU
0:Not set 0:Not set

42-05-01 1:CTA 3:LAN
3:LAN
90-12-01 0:Not set 0:Not set

90-13-01 4:CTA/CTU 5:USB
5:USB

Issue 2.0
UX5000 Migration
Conditions
A UX5000 database cannot be converted directly to an SV9100 database. You must first
convert the UX5000 database to an SV8100 database using SV8100 Pc Pro and save the
database file as (*.pcp). Next, convert the SV8100 database to SV9100 database using
SV9100 Pc Pro.
For detailed information converting a UX5000 database to an SV8100 database, please
refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 UX5000 to SV8100 Migration Manual.
UX5000 Licenses are not supported.
UX5000 terminals are supported in an SV9100 running in CTI mode only.
With no migration license, DG/IP (UX5000) terminals are only supported on GCD blades.
CD blades are supported only with the migration.
The UX Mail is not supported.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 UX5000 to SV8100 Migration Manual for more
information.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
DT300/DT700
The GCD-CP10-US must be installed in the CHS2U-US (19) or CHS2U B-US (9.5)
controlling chassis.
SV8100 Pc Pro (if converting UX5000)
SV9100 Pc Pro
Related Features
PC Programming

Issue 2.0

None
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 PC Programming Manual for more information.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 UX5000 to SV8100 Migration Manual for more information.

Issue 2.0
Migration SV9100-S to SV9100-E System
Description
The SV9100 system is available in two different system sizes and can be migrated from the SV9100-S
system to the SV9100-E system. The SV9100-S system is limited to 48 ports and the SV9100-E system
can have a maximum of 1296 ports.
Conditions
When migrating from the SV9100-S system to the SV9100-E system, the SV9100-S to -E
Expansion Kit is required.
The SV9100-S system requires the SD-A1 card.
The SV9100-E system requires the SD-B1 card.
During the migration, the 48 built-in Resource Licenses on the SV9100-S system are not
carried over to the SV9100-E system.
SV8100 Licenses do not migrate to the SV9100-S or SV9100-E system.
The UM8000 Voice Mail is not supported in the SV9100-S system.
The SV9100-S system is restricted to 48 resources maximum and by default has 48
SV9100 Resource licenses.
NetLink requires the SD-B1 card.
InMail does not use any of the 48 resources in a SV9100-S system.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
N/A
Expansion Kit: (GPZ-IPLE, 4GB SD-B1, 8 Standard Licenses and 8 Resource Licenses).
Migration SV9100-S to SV9100-E System 2-1013

Issue 2.0
Related Features
None

None
Operation
None
2-1014 Migration SV9100-S to SV9100-E System

Issue 2.0
Mobile Extension
Description
A mobile extension is an external telephone (preferably a mobile phone) linked to the UNIVERGE
SV9100 via a Proxy Port to operate as an internal single line telephone extension. The extension sends
DTMF signals to the system allowing access to the system features. A registered Mobile Extension uses
one analog port (ports are reserved in groups of two), however, no PCB support (analog or digital) is
required. The Mobile Extension port must be an unequipped extension port on the UNIVERGE SV9100
system - no physical telephone is required on the SV9100 system.
A mobile extension cannot be used as a voice mail port.

NOTE
Figure 2-39 Mobile Extension Layout
This feature can currently be used with ISDN PRI trunks or SIP trunks.
It is recommended to use this feature with an ISDN PCB (PRI or BRI), however, analog trunks
TIP
can be used as well.
To provide a proper disconnect, Disconnect Supervision is required for the trunks used
for this feature.
NOTE
The Mobile extension internal extension number (Proxy Port) is linked to a speed dial bin to provide
integration.
If all external trunks are busy when a call is made to the mobile extension, ringback tone is
presented giving the impression the phone is ringing.
NOTE
Mobile Extension 2-1015

Issue 2.0
A DID is directed to the Mobile Extension internal extension number (Proxy Port), and to provide internal
dial tone to the Mobile Extension, the incoming calling line identification of the Mobile Extension must
match the number in the Speed Dial bin. Once internal dial tone is presented, the operation is similar to
a single line telephone user lifting the handset.
Any DID with Program 22-11-13 enabled, provides internal dial tone to the Mobile Extension, must have
an incoming calling line identification that matches exactly the number of any Mobile Extension Speed
Dial Bins.
In the absence of DIDs, the VRS can be used to transfer the Mobile Extension call to the Mobile
Extension extension number. This provides internal dial tone when the calling line identification is
presented and matches the number in the associated Speed Dial bin.
Alternatively, if calling line identification routing is enabled, the relevant Speed Dial bin could be
transferred to the Mobile Extension proxy port, which would then provide internal dial tone.
The number of Mobile Extensions per system is limited by the available unequipped extension ports.
Features
The features available from a Mobile Extension are listed below. As the Mobile Extension is based on a
single line telephone port, the service codes used are as per a single line telephone port. Any feature not
listed should be assumed to be not supported:
Hold
Transfer
Incoming Ring Group member
Department Group member
DID
Toll Restriction
Class of Service
DSS Keys
Though DSS keys are available for the Mobile Extension, they cannot provide an exact indication of
busy status if, for example, the Mobile Extension is active on a call not linked to the UNIVERGE SV9100.
The following service codes are supported:
Table 2-76 Supported Service Codes
Set By
Set to Mobile
Type Incoming Feature Program Code Mobile
Extension
Extension
Night Mode Switching 11-10-01 718 Yes

Night Mode Switching for Other Group 11-10-12 618 Yes
2-1016 Mobile Extension

Issue 2.0
Table 2-76 Supported Service Codes (Continued)
Set By
Set to Mobile
Extension
Extension
Call Forward All 11-11-01 741 Yes Yes

Call Forward Busy 11-11-02 742 Yes Yes
Call Forward No Answer 11-11-03 743 Yes Yes
Call Forward Busy/No Answer 11-11-04 744 Yes Yes
Call Forward Both Ring 11-11-05 745 Yes Yes
Call Forward Follow-Me 11-11-07 746 Yes Yes
Do Not Disturb 11-11-08 747 Yes
Answer Message Waiting 11-11-09 *0 Yes
Cancel All Messages Waiting 11-11-10 773 Yes
Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group 11-11-25 602 Yes
Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group 11-11-26 603 Yes
Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group 11-11-28 605 Yes
Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group 11-11-29 606 Yes
DND Setup for Each Extension Group 11-11-30 607 Yes
DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group 11-11-31 608 Yes
Pilot Group Withdrawing 11-11-35 650 Yes
Station Speed Dial Number Entry 11-11-39 755 Yes
Auto Attendant 11-11-44 No Setting Yes
Bypass Call 11-12-01 707 Yes Yes
Conference 11-12-02 #1 Yes
Override (Off-Hook Signaling) 11-12-03 709 Yes
Set Camp-On 11-12-04 750 Yes Yes
Cancel Camp-On 11-12-05 770 Yes Yes
Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call 11-12-06 712 Yes
Step Call 11-12-07 708 Yes Yes
Barge-In 11-12-08 710 Yes Yes
Change to STG (Department Group) All Ring 11-12-09 No Setting Yes
Station Speed Dialing 11-12-10 #2 Yes
Group Speed Dialing 11-12-11 #4 Yes
Trunk Group Access 11-12-14 704 Yes

Issue 2.0
Set By
Set to Mobile
Extension
Extension
Specified Trunk Access 11-12-15 #9 Yes

Trunk Access Via Networking 11-12-16 No Setting Yes
Internal Group Paging (Mobile Extension cannot be a 11-12-19 701 Yes
member of a paging group)
External Paging 11-12-20 703 Yes
Meet-Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging Group 11-12-21 764 Yes
Meet-Me Answer to External Paging 11-12-22 765 Yes
Meet-Me Answer in Same Paging Group (although Mobile 11-12-23 763 Yes Yes
Extension cannot be paged)
Combined Paging 11-12-24 *1 Yes
Direct Call Pickup Own Group 11-12-25 756 Yes Yes
Call Pickup for Specified Group 11-12-26 768 Yes Yes
Call Pickup 11-12-27 *# Yes Yes
Call Pickup for Another Group 11-12-28 769 Yes Yes
Direct Extension Call Pickup 11-12-29 ** Yes
Park Hold 11-12-31 #6 Yes
Answer for Park Hold 11-12-32 *6 Yes
Group Hold 11-12-33 732 Yes
Answer for Group Hold 11-12-34 762 Yes
Personal (Extension) Park 11-12-35 757 Yes
Door Box Access (Door Box can also ring the Mobile 11-12-36 702 Yes
Extension, *# operates relay)
Common Canceling Service Code 11-12-37 620 Yes
General Purpose Indication 11-12-38 783 Yes
Station Speed Dialing 11-12-40 #7 Yes
Voice Over 11-12-41 690 Yes
Flash on Trunk lines 11-12-42 #3 Yes
Enabled On Hook when Holding (SLT) 11-12-45 749 Yes
Answer On Hook when Holding (SLT) 11-12-46 759 Yes
Call Waiting Answer/Split Answer 11-12-47 794 Yes
Account Code 11-12-48 ## Yes

Issue 2.0
Set By
Set to Mobile
Extension
Extension
General Purpose Relay 11-12-50 780 Yes

VM Access (InMail and VMS) 11-12-51 *8 Yes
Live Recording at SLT 11-12-53 654 Yes
VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS 11-12-54 682 Yes
Tandem Trunking 11-12-57 #8 Yes
Transfer into Conference 11-12-58 624 Yes
Set DND for Other Extension 11-14-03 629 Yes Yes
Cancel DND for Other Extension 11-14-04 630 Yes Yes
Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension 11-14-05 631 Yes
Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension 11-14-06 632 Yes
Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension 11-14-07 633 Yes Yes
Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension 11-14-08 634 Yes Yes
Set Room to Room Call Restriction 11-14-09 635 Yes Yes
Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel) 11-14-10 636 Yes Yes
Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension 11-14-11 637 Yes Yes
Check-in 11-14-12 638 Yes Yes
Check-out 11-14-13 639 Yes Yes
Room Status Change for Own Extension 11-14-14 640 Yes
Room Status Change for Other Extension 11-14-15 641 Yes Yes
Room Status Output 11-14-16 642 Yes
Hotel Room Monitor 11-14-17 675 Yes Yes
Although some features may be available to the Mobile Extension, it may be advisable to disable them in
Class of Service. There are also features that should be disabled in any case.
The features to be disabled/not used for Mobile Extension include:

Contact Center
TAPI (including applications such as UC Desktop Suite, etc.)
H.323 Trunks
Analog Trunks
Port Swap

Issue 2.0
Hotline
General Message
Message Waiting
Headset Mode for single line telephone
Flexible Transfer/Virtual Loop Back
Tandem Ringing
Park over CCIS
Virtual extension key as Call Coverage Key for mobile extension
Automatic Conversation Record for trunks
Caller ID Presented to the Mobile Extension for Type of Call

Direct Internal Call CPN of the Calling Phone is presented to the Mobile Extension.
Direct Trunk Call with CID Caller ID of incoming call is presented to the Mobile Extension.
Direct Trunk Call without CID CPN of Mobile Extension is presented to the Mobile Extension.
Transferred Trunk Call with CID
Transferred before inter-digit timeout Caller ID of incoming call is presented to the Mobile Extension.
Transferred after inter-digit timeout CPN of the Transferring Phone is presented to the Mobile
Extension.
Transferred Trunk Call without CID
Transferred before inter-digit timeout CPN of Mobile Extension is presented to the Mobile Extension.
Transferred after inter-digit timeout CPN of the Transferring Phones CPN is presented to the Mobile
Extension.
Only when the outbound trunks are ISDN or SIP trunks.
ISDN will need to accept the inbound Caller ID as the Calling Party Number (CPN) presentation for
the outbound call.
Table 2-77 Caller ID Sent to Mobile Telephone
Inbound Trunk Outbound Trunk Y/N
Analog CID CFA Analog N

Analog CID CFA ISDN PRI/SIP Y
ISDN PRI/SIP CFA ISDN PRI/SIP Y
ISDN PRI/SIP CFA Analog N
Analog CID CFNA Analog N
Analog CID CFNA ISDN PRI/SIP Y

Issue 2.0
Table 2-77 Caller ID Sent to Mobile Telephone (Continued)
Inbound Trunk Outbound Trunk Y/N
ISDN PRI/SIP CFNA ISDN PRI/SIP Y

ISDN PRI/SIP CFNA Analog N
Conditions
It is recommended that this feature use ISDN/SIP platform (as these trunks provide answer
supervision).
If the extension has Call Forward-Both Ring set to a Mobile Extension (twinning), it can only
forward to VM (NA or B/NA) and nowhere else.
If an extension has Call Forward-Both Ring set to a Mobile Extension (twinining), it will not
forward when the Mobile Extension is forwarded All or B/NA (Busy Immediate).
Analog, ISDN and SIP trunks are supported for the outbound call to the Mobile Extension
The analog line must provide calling line identification information to allow the Mobile
Extension to dial into the system to access features.
For the extension DTMF, the minimum Detect Level for the DTMF Tone (Program
80-03-03) must be set to allow a minimum detection level of -25dBm. This entry is
dependent on the Detect Level selected in Program 80-03-01.
The Mobile Extension uses the * to perform a flash, so any service codes which begin with
* must be changed (Programs 11-10, 11-11, 11-12, 11-13).
To provide a proper disconnect, Disconnect Supervision is required for the trunks used for
this feature.
When an entry is made in Program 15-22-01 for a Mobile Extension, ports are reserved for
Mobile Extension usage in groups of 2.
To keep consecutive port numbering for blades, you may wish to consider starting Mobile
Extensions at the upper extension port range.
When using Mobile Extension in a NetLink Network, the ISDN/PRI can be utilized in the
Secondary systems.
Calls on Mobile Extension can be easily picked up from a telephone in the SV9100 system.
This is done via a Barge-In key (34+Mobile Ext# or 34+*) * will Barge in to the Extension
that Call Forward Both Ring is set to. If no Forward Both Ring is set, the key will act as a
basic Barge-In key.
A Progress Tone is played to the caller until the call to the Mobile Extension number is set
up.

Issue 2.0
Callback to Cell Phone
Description
Callback to Cell Phone allows the user to make an incoming call to a system then hang up before the
system answers (like a one ring call), then the system calls back to the calling Cell Phone using a
pre-programmed number. The advantage is to reduce Cell Phone charges for calls on a mobile
extension system.
After receiving a call back on a Cell Phone, the user can call another extension or make an outgoing call
via the system using the mobile extension function.
Figure 2-40 Example Callback to Cell Phone
Conditions
Mobile Extension must be programmed for this feature to work.
In the Callback to Cell Phone feature set Program 15-22-04 to 1. If the Cell Phone user
continues to ring over the time set in Program 22-01-12, the system answers the call as a
normal Mobile Extension call.
Callback to Cell Phone will not proceed and no retry is made if all trunks are busy when
trying to callback.
Callback trunk routing follows Program 15-22-03 setting. When set 0 (Normal trunk access
code), ARS also can be used.
If Mobile Extension does not answer the Callback within time set in Program 20-01-16,
Callback will stop. If answered the within the Callback time, the user hears an extension
dial tone. A splash tone is not heard.

Issue 2.0
If the system receives a Disconnect from the far end after a Callback is made, Callback
will stop.
When Calling party number is used, Callback follows the Program 21-19-01 outgoing call
setting of the Mobile Extension which made the outgoing call.
The Callback to Cell Phone feature is not supported when using an analog trunk.
If Flexible ringing is set, the Callback to Cell Phone feature works in any type of Program
22-02-01 trunk setting. If Flexible ringing is not set, the Callback to Cell Phone feature does
not work if the incoming call type is DID/DISA.
After answering Callback, if the system does not receive a DTMF signal from the Mobile
Extension using Program 20-18-01 (Default; 30 seconds), the system disconnects the call.
The trunk user for SMDR for Callback is tied to the extension number of Mobile Extension.
If the user calls a Mobile Extension port during while using the Callback to Cell Phone
feature, the caller hears a busy tone.
The Callback to Cell Phone feature can be used on the K-CCIS network. Netlink can be
used for the Callback line, but not for the incoming line.
Default Settings
No Mobile Extensions are configured.
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Caller ID
Call Forwarding

Issue 2.0

Mobile Extension:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

The Mobile Extension port must be an 2 102
unequipped extension port on the SV9100 3 103
system. This extension port is directed to an ~ ~
Abbreviated Dial bin. 99 199
100 3101
~ ~
960 3961
11-10 Service Code Setup (for System Refer to the

Administrator) Programming
Customize the System Administrator service Manual for
codes. default values.
11-11 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Refer to the

Operation) Programming
Customize the service code for Setup and Manual for
Entry. default values.
11-12 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Refer to the

Programming
Customize the service codes for Service
Access. Manual for

default values.
11-13 Service Code Setup (for Contact Center) Refer to the

Programming
Customize the service codes which are used
with the Contact Center. Manual for

default values.
13-04-01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed (Maximum 24 digits) No Setting
Dialing Data 1 ~ 9, 0, , #
For the bin number defined in Program Pause (Press line key 1)
15-22-01 for the Mobile Extension, enter the
external number of the Mobile Extension. This
Recall/Flash (Press line key 2)
@ = Code to wait for answer
must exactly match the Caller ID number of the supervision in ISDN (Press line
Mobile Extension or the user cannot access the key 3)
internal features.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Enable/Disable the ability to send the original

Caller ID through.

Assign a function key for Barge-In (code 34). 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Optional additional data can be assigned as
extension number or .
752 by default)

with it.
15-22-02 Mobile Extension Setup Connect 0 = Always 0

Confirmation 1 = On analog line
As the Mobile Extension can be a GSM phone, 2 = Never
it is necessary to be certain a person and not,
for example, a GSM voice mail has answered
the call. This is achieved by returning Music on
Hold/ring tone to the Mobile Extension on
answer, after which the Mobile Extension user

presses to connect the call.
For each Mobile Extension number, select
whether the user needs to use DTMF
confirmation before a call is answered. Until the
is pressed, the call is treated as not being
answered.
15-22-03 Mobile Extension Setup Trunk Access 0 = Use normal trunk access 0
Code code (Program 11-09-01)
Select whether the Normal or Individual Trunk 1 = Use individual trunk access
access is used when making the call to the code (Program 11-09-02)
mobile number.
15-22-04 Mobile Extension Setup Call Back 0 = Dont call back 0

Select whether or not the system will try to call 1 = Call back
back a mobile extension user.
20-01-16 System Options Mobile Extension 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15

Callback Duration Time
Determines the amount of time the system will
call back a mobile extension user before
abandoning the call.
20-01-20 System Options Progress Tone for Mobile 0 = Disable 1

Extension Setting 1 = Enable
Select whether the Progress Tone (1) or
Ringback (0) is played to the Internal Caller
until the call to the Mobile Extension is setup.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

When an extension user dials a Mobile
Extension number, the system waits this time
before dialing the number.
20-09-02 Class of Service (Incoming Call Service) 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Caller ID Display 1 = On
Turns Off or On the Caller ID display at an

extension.
21-12-01 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Maximum of 16 digits. No Setting
Assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk (1-0, , #)

21-13-01 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Maximum of 16 digits. No Setting
Extensions (0 ~ 9, , #)
Assign each extension a Calling Party Number
(maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling
Program 21-13.
22-01-12 System Options for Incoming Calls Mobile 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3

Extension Answer Time
Determines the amount of time before the
mobile extension will answer with internal dial
tone. Extend this timer long enough for 1 ring
cycle to complete, giving the mobile extension
user time to hang up and wait for callback.

Received Number
Define the digits received by the system for the
telephone number on which a Mobile Extension
user calls into the system.
22-11-02 DID Translation Number Conversion Maximum of 24 digits. No Setting

Target Number
For the DID number defined in Program
22-11-01, enter the extension number for the
Mobile Extension user.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-11-13 DID Translation Number Conversion 0 = Off 0

Identify for Mobile Extension 1 = On
Determines when a Mobile Extension number
calls in on a DID if it will provide an Internal
Tone (1) or route the call as programmed (0).
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Tone 44, External Dial 0 ~ 255 (0 = until On-Hook) Refer to Table 2-
Tone 31 Service Tone
It is necessary to adjust the DID/DISA dial tone Setup Defaults,
(tone 44) to a Repeat Count of 250 (by default, Program
this is set to 0). The system must be reset for 80-01-01 on
this change to take affect. page 2-568.
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Tone 54, Progress Refer to Table 2-

Tone 31 Service Tone
Setup Defaults,
By default, when calling a Mobile Extension, the
Progress Tone is played to the caller. Program

80-01-01 on
page 2-568.
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Tone 57, Off-Hook Refer to Table 2-

Beep Tone - Headset Earpiece ringing Tone 31 Service Tone
If required, change the tone heard when a Setup Defaults,
Mobile Extension user goes off hook to answer Program
a call prior to pressing . The system must be 80-01-01 on
reset for this change to take affect. page 2-568.
Select the Detect Level to be used for DTMF 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
Tone detection. For the extension DTMF, this 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
entry must allow for a detection of -25dBm. Set
the minimum detection level in Program
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
80-03-03. The system must be reset for this
change to take affect. 5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

For the extension DTMF, the minimum Detect -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15) Type 2 ~ 3 = 15
Level (0-15) for the DTMF Tone must be set to (-25dBm)
detect level 1:
allow a minimum detection level of -25dBm. Type 4 ~ 5 = 10
This entry is dependent on the Detect Level -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
(-20dBm)
selected in Program 80-03-01. For example, if detect level 2:
Detect Level 0 were selected in Program -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
80-03-01, the entry in this option would be 15
detect level 3:
for -25dBm. The system must be reset for this
change to take affect. -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-80dBm(0) to -95dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15)

Issue 2.0
Callback to Cell Phone:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
13-04-01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed (Maximum of 24 digits) No Setting
Dialing Data 1~9, 0, , #
Enter the Common and Group Speed Dialing Pause (Press line key 1)
numbers and names which are to be used for Recall/Flash (Press line key 2)
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding. @ = Code to wait for answer
supervision in ISDN (Press line
key 3)

Destination Number Program 13-04-03):
Set up the transfer destination number or the
IRG number.
P = Pause
R = Recall
14-01-30 Basic Trunk Data Setup Flexible Ringing 0 = Disable 1

by Caller ID 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable Flexible ringing on each Trunk

port base.

with it.
15-22-03 Mobile Extension Setup Trunk Access 0 = Use normal trunk access 0
Code code (Program 11-09-01)
Select whether the Normal or Individual Trunk 1 = Use individual trunk access
access is used when making the call to the code (Program 11-09-02)
mobile number.
15-22-04 Mobile Extension Setup Call Back 0 = Dont call back 0

Select whether or not the system will try to call 1 = Call back
back a mobile extension user.
20-01-16 System Options Mobile Extension 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15

Callback Duration Time
Determines the amount of time the system will
call back a mobile extension user before
abandoning the call.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-31-24 Timer Class Timer Assignment Answer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3

Time from Mobile Extension (0 = Immediate Answer)
This program defines the data corresponding to
Program 22-01-12. Refer to Timer Class for
Extension.
20-31-25 Timer Class Timer Assignment Mobile 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15

Extension Callback Duration Time
This program defines the data corresponding to
Program 22-01-12. Refer to Timer Class for
Extension.
22-01-12 System Options for Incoming Calls Mobile 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3

Extension Answer Time
Determines the amount of time before the
mobile extension will answer with internal dial
tone. Extend this timer long enough for 1 ring
cycle to complete, giving the mobile extension
user time to hang up and wait for callback.
Operation
With any feature, if the Mobile Extension user presses , an existing call is placed in hold. Pressing a
second time or the timeout of the inter-digit timer returns the call to conversation mode.
Using Analog Lines with the Mobile Extension
Analog lines can be used for integration with the Mobile Extension using either DILs or VRS Auto
Attendant to access the Mobile Extension Proxy Port. However, it must be noted that the 0 Hang Up
code must be used prior to terminating any call (e.g., transfer, hang up etc.) as analog trunks do not
provide Disconnect Supervision.
Placing an Intercom Call to a Mobile Extension

1. Lift the handset or press SPK.
2. Dial the extension number assigned to the Mobile Extension.
If the Mobile Extension is turned off, incoming callers hear a message indicating the user is not
available. The setting in the DTMF Confirmation programming (Program 15-22-02) determines
how the call is handled.
Program 15-22-02 set to 0 or 1 (DTMF Confirmation Required):
The caller is retrieved by the UNIVERGE SV9100 and follows the no-answer programming (ring
another extensions, forward to UNIVERGE SV9100 voice mail, etc.)
Program 15-22-02 set to 2 (No DTMF Confirmation Required):
The caller is forwarded to the external extension voice mail, if available.

Issue 2.0
Outside Party Dialing the Mobile Extension

1. Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension.
System programming (DID=22-11-01 or DIL=22-07-01) must be defined.
If the Mobile Extension is turned off, incoming callers hear a message indicating the user is not
available. The setting in the DTMF Confirmation programming (Program 15-22-02) determines
how the call is handled.
Program 15-22-02 set to 0 or 1 (DTMF Confirmation Required):
The caller is retrieved by the SV9100 and follows the no-answer programming (ring another
extension, forward to SV9100 voice mail, etc.)
Program 15-22-02 set to 2 (No DTMF Confirmation Required):
The caller is forwarded to the external extension voice mail, if available.
Placing a Call from the Mobile Extension

1. Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension.
If the Caller ID of the Mobile Extension matches the Speed Dial bin entry (Program 13-04 and
15-22), internal dial tone is heard by the Mobile Extension user.
2. Dial the desired Intercom number or dial the trunk access code to place an outgoing call.
Answering a Call on the Mobile Extension

1. Answer the ringing call.
2. If Program 15-22-02 is set to 0 or 1, the Mobile Extension user hears Music on Hold/ring tone.
Press * (within 10 seconds) to answer the call.
This step is required when using analog trunks for the Mobile Extension feature.
Sending a Flash from the Mobile Extension

1. While on a conversation, a hook flash is returned by dialing # from the Mobile Extension.
Internal Dial Tone After Hang Up

1. When a call is finished, disconnect the call and receive internal dial tone by dialing 0.
Placing/Retrieving a Call on Hold from the Mobile Extension

1. While on a call, press #.
2. To retrieve the held call, with system dial tone, press #.

Issue 2.0
Swapping Between Two Held Calls from the Mobile Extension

1. While on a call, press #.
The first call is placed on Hold.
2. Place second call, then place on Hold by pressing #.
The second call is placed on Hold and the first call is picked up.
3. The Mobile Extension can connect the two held calls with Automatic On-Hook Transfer if
Program 20-11-11 is enabled by dialing 0.
Transferring a call from the Mobile Extension

1. With an active call, press #.
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Dial 0.
4. Hang up.
Call Forwarding
When setting Call Forwarding from the Mobile Extension, the service code(s) must be defined in
Programs 11-11-01~11-11-05 and 11-11-07.
To activate or cancel Call Forwarding to/from the Mobile Extension:

1. When activating Call Forwarding From the Mobile Extension:
Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension.
-OR-
When activating Call Forwarding to the Mobile Extension:
Press CALL key or lift the handset.
2. Dial the service code defined in Program 11-11-01~11-11-05 and.
3. Dial Call Forwarding condition:
1 = Set
0 = Cancel
4. Dial the destination extension or Off-Premise number.
5. Dial 0 (from Mobile Extension only).
6. Hang up.

Issue 2.0
To activate Call Forward Follow Me:

-OR-
Press SPK or lift the handset.
2. Dial 746.
3. Dial Call Forwarding condition:
1 = Set
0 = Cancel
4. Dial the destination extension.
6. Hang up.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me:

Program 15-22), internal dial tone is heard by the Mobile Extension user.
-OR-
Press SPK or lift the handset.
2. Dial 746.
3. Dial 0.
4. Dial destination Station to Cancel Forward Follow Me extension or Dial 0 to cancel all.
6. Hang up.

Issue 2.0
Receive Callback
Receive call from Mobile Extension and Callback:
Cell phone number: 09012345678

Incoming trunk set up: 22-02: Trk1, DIL
Mobile Extension set up: Ext150
Program 15-22-01: Speed Dial bin No, 50
Program 15-22-03: Trunk access code, 0: Use normal trunk access code
Program 15-22-04: Callback, (1) Enable
Speed Dial bin set up: No.50

Program 13-04-01: 09012345678
Program 13-04-03: Transfer mode, (1) Extension
Program 13-04-04: Destination, 150
Callback timer set up

Program 22-01-12: Answer time from Mobile Extension, 3 seconds
Program 20-01-16: Mobile Extension Callback Duration time, 15 seconds
Program 20-18-01: Extension Dial Tone Time, 30 seconds
1. Call the system Trk1 from the cell phone setting as a mobile extension (Ex 150).
2. The Cell Phone user hangs up within 3 seconds, before system answers.
3. System makes the Callback to the cell phone.
4. Answer the cell phone within 15 seconds.
5. Cell phone hears a dial tone and dials before 30 seconds.
Receive call from Mobile Extension, but system answered:

2. Cell Phone user continues ring for longer than 3 seconds, then system answers.
3. Cell phone user hears a dial tone.
Cell phone does not answer to Callback:

4. The Cell phone does not answer the call within 15 seconds.
5. System disconnects the call.

Issue 2.0
After Callback answered, but does not send any DTMF:

4. The Cell Phone answers within 15 seconds.
5. The Cell phone hears a dial tone but does not send any DTMF within 30 seconds.
6. System disconnects the call.

Issue 2.0
Description
The UNIVERGE SV9100 supports many different Trunks in the system (DID, E&M Tie Lines, Loop Start,
Ground Start, ISDN BRI, ISDN PRI, and T-1 trunks). The system supports up to 400 trunks in the
expanded port package, and a maximum of 56 trunks in the basic port package.
DID
Refer to the Direct Inward Dialing (DID) on page 2-390 feature for related information.
E&M Tie Lines
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire) can be connected to the system to provide communication between remote
systems and facilities. The system can receive and/or transmit DTMF or DP signals on E&M Tie Lines.
Ground Start Trunks
Ground Start Trunks can be connected to the system. Ground and Loop Start Trunks can be mixed in
the system per trunk. Ground Start Trunks are provided with line supervision to reduce call collisions.
Loop Start Trunks
Loop Start Trunks can be connected to the UNIVERGE SV9100 system. Loop Start is assigned per
trunk at the associated blade. Ground Start and Loop Start Trunks can be mixed in the system per trunk.
ISDN BRI
Refer to the ISDN Compatibility on page 2-871 feature for related information.
ISDN PRI
Refer to the ISDN Compatibility on page 2-871 feature for related information.
T-1 Trunks
Refer to the T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) on page 2-1423 feature for related information.
Conditions
Each GCD-4ODTA supports four 4-wire E&M Tie Lines.
Ground Start Trunks do not support Caller ID.
When adding or removing padding for trunks, use Program 14-01 for all trunks.
2-1036 Multiple Trunk Types

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Any Trunk Blade
Related Features
Caller ID
ISDN Compatibility

Multiple Trunk Types 2-1037

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-01 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk Name Maximum of 12 characters. Line 001
Set the names for trunks. The trunk name is Line 002
displayed on a multiline terminal for incoming Line 003
Line 400

Dial Tone Time
After answering a VRS/DISA trunk, the system

of the DISA password. If the caller fails to dial
during this time, the system drops the call.

For DID and tie trunks, set the trunk signaling.
Loop Start/Ground Start Trunks:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Indicate if the Analog trunk is Loop Start or

Ground Start.

Indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX 1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
(1) or not (0). There is one item for each Night 2 = Not Used

Service Mode. 3 = CTX assume 9
Assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
assign the outbound priority for trunks in the to trunk group 1
group. When users dial the trunk group, they with priorities
seize the trunks in the order you specify in the equal to the
outbound priority entry. trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-02-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup 0 = Normal 0

For each Night Service mode, enter service 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
type for each trunk. VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL

5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
81-10-01 COT Initial Data Setup DP Interdigit Time 0 = Pattern A 1 (Pattern B)

Selection (Pattern A: 10pps 650ms,
Select the DP Interdigit Time (minimum pause 20pps 500ms)
time between Dial Pulses). 1 = Pattern B

(Pattern B: 10pps 800ms,
20pps 800ms)
81-10-02 COT Initial Data Setup Prepause Time 1 ~ 13 1 second

Selection (1 ~ 13 seconds)
Specify the loop open time for a hookflash (0 = No Setting)
signal sent to the CO or PBX when Recall on a
multiline terminal is pressed. A single line

telephone generates a hookflash to the CO or
PBX line when a single line telephone
hookflash is assigned.
81-10-03 COT Initial Data Setup Incoming Signal 0 ~ 15 3 (200ms)

Detect Time Selection (50 ~ 800ms)
Specify the time after the incoming signal from
another system is detected before the
acknowledge signal is sent out.
81-10-04 COT Initial Data Setup Disconnect 1 ~ 15 3 (300ms)

Recognition Time Selection (100ms ~ 1.5 seconds)
Specify the minimum time before a

(0 = No Setting)
disconnected circuit can be accessed again.
81-10-05 COT Initial Data Setup Auto Release Signal 1 ~ 14 7 (350ms)

Detection Time (50 ~ 700ms)
Specify the signal detection time for release of 15 = (No limit)
a CO/PBX line after a disconnect signal is (0 = No Setting)
received from the distant Central Office or PBX.

Issue 2.0
Tie Lines:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
If the system has DTMF Tie Lines, be sure to 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
reserve at least one circuit for analog trunk 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
DTMF reception (type 0 or 2). Circuit/Resource
Use the following as a guide when allocating 09 ~ 32 = 2
DTMF receivers: (Trunks)
In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF Circuit/Resource
receiver for every 10 devices that use them. 33 ~ 144 = 0
In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF (Common)
receiver for every five devices that use them. When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available
Customize the transmit level of the CODEC 1 ~ 57 (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB
Gain for each trunk. intervals)
Customize the receive level of the CODEC 1 ~ 57 (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB
Gain for each trunk as required. intervals)

Transfer 1 = Enable
Enable loop supervision for each Tie Line that

should be able to place outgoing calls.
Set the outgoing signaling type for the tie trunk. 2 = DTMF
To set incoming signaling, refer to Program
34-01-02.
Program Tie Lines of similar type into the same Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
trunk group. The system uses trunk groups for to trunk group 1
outgoing access to Tie Lines (i.e., Service Code with priorities
704 + group). Also see Program 34-05-01. equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
1001 ~ 1100: (1000 + Route 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not
All Other Routes
(2 ~ 100) and
Order Numbers
(1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not
Specified).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-01-05 System Options DTMF Receive Active 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Time
After answering the Tie Line call, the system
attaches a DTMF receiver to the Tie Line for
this time.

extension port =
Class 1

E&M Override
caller.

Dialed)
For Tie Lines, turn Off or On the ability to
absorb (ignore) the first incoming digit. Use this

to make the tie trunk compatible with
3- and 4-digit Tie Line service. This option does
not apply to DISA.


Code 704).


to use the System Speed Dialing.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


to use the telephone system Internal Paging.





T-point>
Turn Off or On a tie trunk caller ability to use


Turn Off or On a DISA caller ability to use the


to use Barge-In.

Turn Off or On a DISA caller ability to retrieve

parked or held calls.
21-05-01 Toll Restriction Class International Call 0 = Unassign (No) 1, 6 ~ 15 = 0

Restriction Table 1 = Assign (Yes) 2~5=1
or Unassign the International Call Restrict Table
(Program 21-06-01).
21-05-02 Toll Restriction Class International Call 0 = Unassign 1, 3 ~ 15 = 0

Permit Code Table 1 = Assign 2=1
or Unassign the International Call Permit Table
(Program 21-06-02).
21-05-04 Toll Restriction Class Maximum Number of 1 ~ 4 = Table 1, 2, 6 ~ 15 = 0

Digits Table Assignment 0 = Disable (None) 3=1
Select the table (Program 21-06-03) to be used 4=2
to determine the maximum number of digits 5=3
allowed for outgoing calls.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-05-05 Toll Restriction Class Common Permit 0 = Not Refer 1, 8 ~ 15 = 0

Code Table 1 = Refer 2~7=1
Choose whether to refer or not refer to the table

21-05-06 Toll Restriction Class Common Restriction 0 = Not Refer 1, 6 ~ 15 = 0

Table 1 = Refer 2~5=1
Choose whether to refer or not refer to the table

21-05-07 Toll Restriction Class Permit Code Table 1 ~ 4 = Table 1, 2, 6 ~ 15 = 0


5=3
21-05-08 Toll Restriction Class Restriction Table 1 ~ 4 = Table 1, 2, 6 ~ 15 = 0


5=3
21-05-09 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for 0 = Disable 0

Common Speed Dials 1 = Enable
For the Code Restriction Class you select,
Enable/Disable Code Restriction for Common
21-05-10 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for 0 = Disable 0

Group Speed Dials 1 = Enable
For the Toll Restriction Class you select,
Enable/Disable Code Restriction for Group
21-05-11 Toll Restriction Class Intercom Call 0 = Disable 0

Restriction 1 = Enable
For the Toll Restriction Class you select,
Enable/Disable Intercom Call Restriction. If

enabled, extensions cannot place or receive
Intercom calls.
21-05-12 Toll Restriction Class PBX Call Restriction 0 = Disable 1 ~ 6, 8 ~ 15 = 0

Set how the system Toll Restricts calls over 1 = Enable 7=1
PBX trunks. If you enable PBX Toll Restriction,
the system begins Toll Restriction after the PBX
access code. The user cannot dial a PBX
extension. If you disable Toll Restriction, the
system only restricts calls that contain the PBX
access code, but does not restrict calls to PBX
extensions. Refer to PBX compatibility feature.
21-05-13 Toll Restriction Class Restriction of Tie 0 = Disable 0

Line Calls 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable toll restriction for Tie Line calls

(defined in Program 34-08-01).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the feature type for the trunk you are 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
programming. For each Night Service mode, VRS installed)
enter 5 when the trunk should be an E&M tie 2 = DISA
line. 3 = DID
4 = DIL

5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
Set the start signaling mode for DID and Tie 2 = Immediate
trunks. They can use either immediate start or 3 = Delay
Wink start signaling.
34-01-03 E&M Tie Line Basic Setup E&M Dial-In 0 = Specify Extension Number 0
Mode (Intercom)
Determine if the incoming Tie Line call should 1 = Use Conversion Table (NTT)
be directed as an intercom call or if it should

follow the DID Translation Table in Program
22-11-01.
34-01-04 E&M Tie Line Basic Setup E&M Line Dial 0 = Disable (No) 1
Tone 1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable if the Tie Line should send dial tone to
the calling system after the call is set up.
Disable if the Tie Line should not send dial tone.
34-01-05 E&M Tie Line Basic Setup System Toll 0 = No (Off) 0

Restriction 1 = Yes (On)
Determine if an incoming Tie Line call should

be subject to Toll Restriction.

Assign the Tie Line Class of Service (1 ~ 15). 1~8
Use Program 20-14-01 to set the Tie Line Class Class: 1 ~ 15
of Service options. You cannot use Program
20-06 to assign Class of Service to Tie Lines.
34-03-01 Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines 0 ~ 100 1

Assign the trunk group route chosen when a (0 = No Setting)
user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. Set Trunk
Group Routing in Program 14-06-01. If the
system has ARS, dial 9 to access ARS.
34-04-01 E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 2

If the system uses Toll Restriction, enter a Toll
Restriction Class (1 ~ 15) for each Tie Line. The
system uses the class you enter in Program
21-05 and 21-06. Make a separate Toll

Restriction Class entry for each night service
mode. You cannot use Program 20-06 to assign
Toll Restriction to Tie Lines.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
34-05-01 Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction 0 = Enable (Y-Tandem) 0

Build a restriction matrix for outgoing trunk calls 1 = Disable (N-Tandem)
placed over a Tie Line. For each Tie Line trunk
group, Enable/ Disable outgoing access to each
CO trunk group.
34-06-01 Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line Delete 0 ~ 255 0

Digit (255 = delete all digits)
Some Tie Line networks pass the location
number and extension number to the remote
side. If the system should ignore these digits,
use this program to define the number of digits
which should be deleted for a call.
34-06-02 Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line Maximum of four digits No Setting
Additional Dial Digits (0 ~ 9, , #)
If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to
reroute the call to a location, enter the digits for

the location which should be added to the
received digits.
34-07-01 E&M Tie Line Timer First Digit Pause (E&M 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3
Immediate Start)
Define the First Digit Pause (E&M Immediate

Start) timer.
34-07-02 E&M Tie Line Timer First Digit Pause (E&M 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0
Wink Start)
Define the First Digit Pause (E&M Wink Start)

timer.
34-07-03 E&M Tie Line Timer First Digit Pause (LD 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3
Trunk)
Define the First Digit Pause (LD Trunk) timer.
34-07-04 E&M Tie Line Timer LD Trunk Guard Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0
Define the LD Trunk Guard Time.

34-07-05 E&M Tie Line Timer Trunk Answer Detect 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30
Timer for E&M
Define the Trunk Answer Detect Timer for E&M

timer.
34-08-01 Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines Maximum of 10 digits No Setting
Define the toll restriction data for E&M Tie Lines (0 ~ 9, , #)
if required. This must be defined if toll restriction

is enabled in Program 21-05-13.
Use Items 11~32 to set the criteria for dial tone 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Receiver.

Tone Receiver. (-25dBm)
detect level 1:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) Type 4 ~ 5 = 10
(-20dBm)
detect level 2:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-80dBm(0) to -95dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

-5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
detect level 2:
-10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
80-03-05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward Twist 0~9 Type 1 ~ 5 = 5

Define the forward twist level for DTMF Tone

Receiver.
80-03-06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backwards 0~9 Type 1 ~ 5 = 0

Define the backwards twist level for DTMF Tone

Receiver.
80-03-07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON Detect 1 ~ 255 Type 1 ~ 5 = 1

Time (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Define the On detection time for DTMF Tone

Receiver.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect 1 ~ 255 Type 1 ~ 5 = 1

Time (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Define the Off detection time for DTMF Tone

Receiver.
Define the detection levels for the Call Progress 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm Type 2 (BT) 0
Tone Detector. (-25dBm)
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
Type 3 (RBT) 0

4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
(-25dBm)
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
Type 4, Type 5
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
0

Define the minimum detection levels for the Call -15dBm (0) to -30dBm(15) Type 2 (BT) 15
Progress Tone Detector. detect level 1: (-25dBm)
15
detect level 2:
(-25dBm)
-40dBm (0) to -55dBm(15)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-03 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup S/N 0 ~ 4 (0dB ~ -20dB) Type 1 (DT) 4
Ratio (-20dB)
Define the S/N ratio for the Call Progress Tone Type 2 (BT) 4
Detector. (-20dB)
Type 3 (RBT) 4

(-20dB)
Type 4, Type 5
0
Define the no tone time for the Call Progress 1 ~ 255 = 60 ~ 7680ms Type 2 (BT)
Tone Detector. The formula is 30 + 30N. 132 (3990ms)

+ 30 1 = 60. 132 (3990ms)
30+30255=7680 0
Count Type 2 (BT) 1
Define the pulse count for the Call Progress Type 3 (RBT) 1
Tone Detector. Type 4, Type 5
0

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Define the on minimum time for the Call Type 2 (BT) 12
Progress Tone Detector. (300ms)
Type 3 (RBT)

25 (780ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0

Maximum Time (30+30-7680ms) Type 2
Define the on maximum time for the Call (BT) 20
Type 3 (RBT)

40 1230ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 1 ~ 255 (30+30-7680 ms) Type 1 (DT) 1
Minimum Time (60ms)
Define the off minimum time for the Call Type 2
Progress Tone Detector. (BT) 12 (300
ms)
Type 3

(RBT) 83
(2520ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 0 ~ 255 (30+30-7680 ms) Type 1 (DT) 1
Maximum Time (60ms)
Define the off maximum time for the Call Type 2
Progress Tone Detector. (BT) 20
(450ms)
Type 3

(RBT) 115
(3480ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
81-11-01 Tie Line Initial Setup DP Interdigit Time 0 = Pattern A 1

Selection (Pattern A: 10pps 650ms,
Select the DP Interdigit Time (minimum pause 20pps - 500ms)
time between Dial Pulses). 1 = Pattern B

(Pattern B: 10pps 800ms,
20pps - 800ms)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
81-11-02 Tie Line Initial Setup Prepause Time 1~4 0

Selection (1 ~ 4 = 0.5 ~ 2.0 seconds)
Specify the loop open time for a hookflash (5 ~ 15 = 3.0 ~ 13 seconds)
signal sent to the Tie Line when the Recall key
on a multiline terminal is pressed. A single line
(0 = No Setting)
telephone generates a hookflash to the Tie Line
when a single line telephone hookflash is
assigned.
81-11-03 Tie Line Initial Setup Tie Line Answer 0 ~ 15 4 (520ms)

Detect Time Selection (130ms ~ 1950ms)
Specify the time before a SV9100 System

(0 = No Setting)
answer (off-hook) is recognized as an answer.
81-11-04 Tie Line Initial Setup Tie Line Release 0 ~ 15 4 (520ms)

Detect Time Selection (130ms ~ 1950ms)
Specify the before the circuit disconnect (0 = No Setting)
detected on the Tie Line on the distant system
side is recognized as Tie Line release.
81-11-05 Tie Line Initial Setup Incoming Signal [Wink Start] [Wink Start] 3
Detect Time Selection 1 ~ 15 (390ms)
Specify the time after the incoming signal from (130ms ~ 1950ms) [Delay] 3 (90ms)
another system is detected before the (0 = No Setting)
acknowledge signal is sent out.
[Delay]

1 ~ 15
(30ms ~ 450ms)
(0 = No Setting)
81-11-06 Tie Line Initial Setup Loop Off-Guard Time 1~4 4 (2.0ms)
Selection (0.5 sec ~ 2.0 seconds)
Assign the loop off-guard time to prevent noise 5 ~ 15
that could cause the system to be unable to (3 sec ~ 13 seconds)
answer an incoming Tie Line.
(0 = No Setting)
81-11-07 Tie Line Initial Setup Length of Wink 0 ~ 15 5 (180ms)

Signal Selection (30ms ~ 480 ms)
Specify the time a wink pulse is sent to another

system.
81-11-08 Tie Line Initial Setup Length of Delay 1 ~ 15 1 (300ms)

Signal Selection (300 ms ~ 4.5 seconds)
Specify the time a delay pulse is sent to another

(0 = No Setting)
system.
81-11-09 Tie Line Initial Setup Incoming Interdigit 0=8 6

Timeout Selection 1 ~ 15
Specify the time that an address signal is
missing during the incoming call detection
(1 ~ 15 seconds)
process before an error tone is returned to the
other system.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
81-11-10 Tie Line Initial Setup Wink/Delay Signal 0=8 7

Detect Timeout Selection 1 ~ 15
Specify a maximum time for receiving an (1 ~ 15 seconds)
acknowledgment signal from a distant system
before sending a busy tone.
81-11-11 Tie Line Initial Setup Disconnect 1 ~ 15 3 (0.3 seconds)

Recognition Time Selection (0.1 ~ 1.5 seconds)
Specify the minimum time before a

(0 = No Setting)
disconnected circuit can be accessed again.
81-11-12 Tie Line Initial Setup Automatic Release 1 ~ 14 7 (350ms)

Signal Detection Selection (50 ~ 700 ms)
Specify the signal detection time for release of 15 = (No Limit)
a Tie Line after a disconnect signal is received (0 = No Setting)
from the distant Central Office or PBX.
81-11-13 Pause Time Selection 1 ~ 15 (500 ~ 7500ms 6 (3000ms)

Specify the length of a pause (500 ~ 7500ms).

Operation
None

Issue 2.0
Music on Hold
Description
Music on Hold (MOH) sends music to calls on Hold and parked calls. The music lets the caller know that
the call is waiting, not forgotten. Without Music on Hold, the system provides silence to these types of
calls. The Music on Hold source can be internal (tone) or from an external customer-provided music
source (i.e., tape deck, receiver, etc.). The customer-provided source can connect to a PGD(2)-U10
ADP analog port or to a connector on the GCD-CP10.
Option Available for Using System Tone
The Music on Hold feature has been enhanced to allow callers to hear a system tone instead of playing
the internal or external music.
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be required from the American
Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers (ASCAP) or other similar organizations,
if radio, television broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are
CAUTION
transmitted through the Music on Hold feature of telecommunications systems. NEC
America, NEC Unified Solutions, Inc., and NEC hereby disclaim any liability arising
out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Conditions
A maximum of 97 Music on Hold sources are possible; 96 from PGD(2)-U10 ports and one
from the connector on the GCD-CP10.
External music on hold source for internal calls is provided only via audio input on the
GCD-CP10. Program 10-04-01 is to be set for 1 = External Source.
No music is provided to internal calls on hold via the ACI input.
Use the combination of Program 10-04, Program 10-21, Program 10-38 and Program
14-08.
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can connect to a GCD-8DLCA, GCD-16DLCA, or GCD-LTA.
A maximum of 56 PGD(2)-U10 ADP units can be installed in an UNIVERGE SV9100

NOTE
system.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for more information.
REFERENCE
can only support one Music on Hold source.
Default Settings
Disabled
2-1052 Music on Hold

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Optional PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Optional Locally provided Background Music source (i.e., CD player, Radio, NEC Audio
Emcee).
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-04-01 Music on Hold Setup Music on Hold 0 = Internal MOH 2

Source Selection 1 = External MOH
Determine whether the system should use
Internal MOH, External MOH, Service Tone, or
2 = Service Tone
3 = VMDB
VMDB. If set to 1, Program 14-08-01 must be
set to 0 or 1.
10-04-02 Music on Hold Setup Music on Hold Tone [When Item 1 is 0] No Setting
Selection 1 = Download File1
When Program 10-04-01 is set to Internal 2 = Download File2
MOH, define the music that is played for Music 3 = Download File3
on Hold.
[When Item 1 is 1, 2, or 3]
1 ~ 100 = VRS Message
Number
10-04-03 Music on Hold Setup Audio Gain Setup 1 ~ 63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)
Set the Music on Hold audio gain (1 ~ 63).

Music on Hold 2-1053

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

BGM source (AUX1)
follows:
AUX2 = Relay2
AUX1 = Relay1
14-08-01 Music on Hold Source for Trunks MOH 0 = Internal/External MOH 0

Type 1 = Customer Provided Source
Set the Music on Hold source for each trunk. Connected to BGM Port
2 = Customer Provided Source
Connected to ACI Port
14-08-02 Music on Hold Source Port Number Source port 0 ~ 96 0

Source Port Number
If the MOH type is 2 in Program 14-08-01, for
each trunk enter the ACI source port number
(1 ~ 96).

extension port =
Class 1

Level) Changing the Music on Hold Tone 1 = On COS 1 ~ 15 = 1


22-11-10 DID Translation Number Conversion ACI When a sound source type is 2 0
Music Source Port in above: (0 ~ 96)
(1 ~ 4000), if item 2 is selected in Program

22-11-09, specify the port to be used for the
source of music heard on DID trunks.
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Music On Hold Tone 0 ~ 255 (0 = Until On-Hook) 0
(Service Tone 64) Refer to Table 2-
Customize the repeat count for the music on 31 Service Tone
hold tone if Program 10-04-01 is set to 2. Setup Defaults,
Program
80-01-01 on
page 2-568

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-01-02 Basic Tone Number 0 ~ 33 33 = Default

Customize the basic tone number for the music (0 = No Tone) Time Slot
on hold tone if Program 10-04-01 is set to 2. (33 = Default Time Slot)
80-01-03 Duration Count 0 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500ms)

Customize the duration count for the music on
hold tone if Program 10-04-01 is set to 2.
80-01-04 Gain Level (dB) 0 ~ 57 (-15.5 ~ +12.5)

Customize the Gain Level for the music on hold
tone if Program 10-04-01 is set to 2.
When Using a PGD(2)-U10 ADP:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

If a PGD(2)-U10 ADP is used for the external 3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset
music source, the module is automatically 6 = PGD (Paging)
assigned type 9 if the jumper straps in the
module were set prior to connecting it to the
system. If another type was assigned, 8 = PGD (Doorbox)
disconnect the PGD(2)-U10 ADP from the 9 = PGD (ACI)

system, delete the type setting, and, with the 10 = DSS Console
jumper straps positioned correctly in the 11 = -- Not Used --
PGD(2)-U10 ADP, reconnect the module to the
system. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100
System Hardware Manual for the jumper strap
settings.

Each ACI port must be assigned an extension ACI Ports: 1 ~ 96
number. Assign the extension numbers to ACI
software ports. Select a number outside of the
normal extension number range.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
33-01-01 ACI Port Type Setup ACI Ports: 1 ~ 96 2

Set each ACI software port for Input or Input/ ACI Types:
Output. Use input ports for Music on Hold
sources. Use output ports for External Paging/
0 = None
1 = MOH/BGM (Input)

Ringer Control. 2 = External Audio Port
(Input/Output)
33-02-01 ACI Department Calling Group ACI Ports: 1 ~ 96 ACI Port/Group/

Assign ACI software ports to an ACI ACI Groups: 1 ~ 16 Priority
Department Group. This lets ACI callers 01/ 1/ 1
connect to ACI software ports by dialing the 02/ 1/ 2
group pilot number (set in Program 11-08). : / :/ :
96/ 1/ 96
Refer to Analog
Communications
Interface (ACI)
on page 2-39 for
additional
information.
80-01-02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 1 ~ 33 33 = Default

The following features require that the system (0 = No Tone) Time Slot
table. After changing these settings the chassis 32 Service Tone
must be reset for the changes to take effect. Setup, Program
Call Screening 80-01-02 on
Call Holding page 2-572.
Busy Greeting

Issue 2.0
Communications Interface feature for more

Issue 2.0

Issue 2.0
Operation
None

Issue 2.0

Name Storing
Description
Extensions and trunks can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a
multiline terminal display when the user places or answers calls. Extension and trunk names
N
make it easier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer to a directory when processing
calls. A name can have up to 12 digits, consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks
and spaces.
Additional Characters Available
When using Name Storing, the system now provides additional characters which can be used.
These characters are available with any option which allows Name Storing - Speed Dial -
System/Group/Station, One-Touch Keys, Extension Name, Trunk Naming.
Conditions
Display telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing.
Single line extensions cannot program names.
If a name is not assigned to the Extension/Virtual Extension, it does not show in the
Extension Directory.
Extension Directory only shows telephones/virtual extensions that have a name
assigned in Program 15-01-01.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Name Storing 2-1061

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Directory Dialing

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Customize the service code used to edit digits

Extension Name Programming.
Line 400
Name 101

102, etc.


extension.


program the name.
20-13-47 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Not Displayed COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Station Number Display 1 = Displayed
Determine if a station Number is Displayed or
Not Displayed in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
2-1062 Name Storing

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-13-48 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Not Displayed COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Station Name Display 1 = Displayed
Determine if a station Name is Displayed or Not

Displayed in the LCD when the phone is idle.
20-13-51 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Not Listed COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Number and Name appear in the 1 = Listed
Directory
are Listed or Unlisted in the directory.
Operation
To program your extension name:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 700.
- OR -
Press the Extension Name Change key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 55).
3. Press Hold.
4. Enter the name.
Your name can be up to 12 digits maximum.
5. Press Hold.
To program any extension name:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 700.
- OR -
3. Enter the extension number to be named.
4. Enter a name.
The name can be have to 12 digits maximum.
5. Press Hold.
Name Storing 2-1063

Issue 2.0
Refer to Table 2-78 Keys for Entering Names for and explanation for using the keypad to enter names.
1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ] ^ _ ` { | }

0 Enter characters:
0 ! # $ % & ( )
Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ?
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex:
TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right
arrow Softkey instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Feature Clear the character entry one character at a time (when using service code or function
key).
Recall Clear the character entry one character at a time (when in telpro).
Hold (Telpro Mode Only) Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
2-1064 Name Storing

Issue 2.0
NEC Communications Analyst
Description
NEC Communications Analyst is an easy to use, graphically oriented software package that allows you
to monitor and analyze telephone calls, understand telephone usage, and cut costs. Incoming and
outgoing calls are tracked accurately along with the date and time of the call. When the incoming
telephone call must be tracked with name and/or telephone numbers, NEC Communications Analyst
requires Caller ID service from the local telephone company.
NEC Communications Analyst increases productivity, facilitates billing, and helps detect toll fraud and
telephone abuse. It also has powerful tabular (text) and graphic report generating ability. Reports include
extension/line summaries, date, time, and department summaries, longest/most expensive calls, and
most frequently called numbers. These reports can be used to analyze your telephone as a critical
business communication tool, improve its business effectiveness, and reduce your telephone costs. A
report can be generated showing calling patterns by volume or duration on a color-coded United States
map. This can help Customer Support, Sales Order, or Telemarketing business become more focused,
more productive, and more cost effective.
NEC Communications Analyst keeps track of:

The date and time calls were made or received
The duration of each call
Which extension made or received the call
The CID/ANI, DNIS of the caller
The trunk or line numbers that handled the call
Account codes and authorization codes used for the call
CCIS calls are now logged with extension number and trunks used for CCIS. These trunks can be
placed in a different line group in order to track usage across a CCIS link using the Traffic Analysis
add-on feature.
Highlights of NEC Communications Analyst:

NEC Communication Analyst now supports SV9100.
NEC Communication Analyst supports NEC E911 Version 1.0.0.14.
NEC Communications Analyst supports Exclusion/Inclusion list.
NEC Communications Analyst supports Type of Call.
NEC Communications Analyst supports Fixed cost by Extension.
NEC Communications Analyst supports Encryption of SQL Password in the DSN.
NEC Communications Analyst supports Web report Internet Explorer compatibility.
NEC Communications Analyst supports SQL installer password length.
NEC Communications Analyst 2-1065

Issue 2.0
NEC Communications Analyst supports Import contact Enhancements for duplicate check.
NEC Communications Analyst supports MSRCDM acting as listener.
NEC Communications Analyst supports changing FTP port number in Archive and Report
Automation.
Network based.
CallAlert! This module can generate alarms by email, pager screen, screen pop-up, or .wav file.
when it detects user defined patterns in the call records.
Automatic report and data archival scheduling, to include automatic emailing of reports to
predetermined destinations.
Real-time inbound/outbound call monitoring.
Changes can now be made to the call record such as Account Code Entry, DNIS, and comments
field.
Call costing and user configurable rate plans
Time billing
Included Reports:
Date and time summaries
Most frequently called numbers
Department summaries
Extension and line summaries
Longest and most expensive calls
And many more
Table 2-79 Communications Analyst Support
Product SV8100 SV9100
Communications X X
Analyst
CallAnalyst
Enterprise Server
Elite CallAnalyst
2-1066 NEC Communications Analyst

Issue 2.0
Conditions
Refer to the NEC Communications Analyst Installation and Configuration Guide

installed with the software for more detailed information.
REFERENCE
On the SV9100, previous versions of Communications Analyst (Elite CallAnalyst/

CallAnalyst Enterprise Server) are not supported.
The following software items are installed on the PC:
Multi-Site Process Manager (MSPM) to collect call records from the system.
NEC Communications Analyst to allow reports and other Communications Analyst features.
SQL Express 2008 database.
Lite package is not available for NEC Communications Analyst.
Scheduler (default installed) to allow reports and database archival on a regularly scheduled
basis.
NEC Communications Analyst Installation Guide (default installed, PDF format).
The following optional modules of NEC Communications Analyst Software require license
upgrade:
Network Client
Network clients must then call NEC for additional licensing. The license is issued on the
Communications Analyst Server installation. All license information is maintained on the
UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10.
Traffic Analysis
This tool allows users to view and analyze trunk capacity usage by date, time, and call
direction.
Communications Analyst WebReports
This module allows authorized users access to many of the available reports over the Internet
using a web browser.
Monitors for emergency (911) calls made by the SV9100 and provides detailed automatic
location information to monitoring agents (refer to NEC E911 Security Notification on page
2-1075).
SMDR supports printing Intercom calls.

The SMDR call buffer stores 4000 calls. The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is
unavailable. When the buffer fills, no new records are collected.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 SMDR does not provide data to support the tracking of tandem
calls or conference calls. Tandem calls appear as one call with extension number shown as
the trunk it was answered on, and out with the extension number as the trunk used to make
the call. Conference calls show only the last party to join the conference and the party that
answered the call.
If the Collate option is enabled in the Communications Analyst Multi-site Configuration, all
legs of a call are combined into one call record. Also, the Communications Analyst will not
release the call from the database until the trunk that this call was placed on is used again.

Issue 2.0
Communications Analyst Web reports only supports Internet Explorer.

Cannot restore SQL 2008 archive files of CA DB to SQL 2005 CA DB.
Program incompatibility assistant window will display during Windows 7 Pro/Ultimate
installation. Click This program is installed correctly option.
If using a remote database, then the Windows account must be added to the SQL servers.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals:
Incoming CO/PBX Call
Outgoing CO/PBX Call
Conference CO/PBX Call
Transferred CO/PBX Call
LAN connection for SMDR over Ethernet and connection to the SV9100 license server.
Minimum PC Requirements:
For a detailed list of PC Requirements and Operating Systems supported, refer to
the NEC Communication Analyst Installation and Configuration Guide for the
REFERENCE version being installed.
Fixed Issues
Mascot issue #F140611001: Saved criteria configurations not loading correctly in Web
reports.
Mascot issue #F130715001: Caller ID name not showing up in correct field. The caller ID
name started appearing in the Account code field rather than the Caller name field.

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Account Code Entry
Account Code - Forced/Verified/Unverified
E-911 Compatibility
ISDN Compatibility
Traffic Reports
Trunk Groups

For additional SMDR programming options, see Station Message Detail Recording on page 2-1323.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-06 Basic Trunk Data Setup SMDR Printout 0 = No Print Out 0

Have the system Include (1) or Exclude (0) the 1 = Prints Out
trunk you are programming from the SMDR
printout. Refer to Program 35-01 and 35-02 for
SMDR printout options.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-01-03 Basic Extension Data Setup SMDR 0 = Do not print on SMDR report 1
Printout 1 = Include on SMDR report
For each extension, enter 1 if an extension call
should appear on the SMDR report. Enter 0 for
the extension if the calls should not appear.
35-01-01 SMDR Options Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

Specify the type of connection used for SMDR. 3 = LAN
The baud rate for the COM port should be set in

4 = Not Used
Program 15-02-19.
35-01-02 SMDR Options Output Destination Maximum of eight digits. No Setting

Number
Specify the SMDR printer output extension

(CTA extension number).
35-01-03 SMDR Options Header Language 0 = English 0

Specify the language used to print the SMDR 1 = German
header. 2 = French
3 = Italian
4 = Spanish
35-01-04 SMDR Options Omit Digits 0 ~ 24 0

The number of digits entered for this option do (0 = Not applied)
not print on the SMDR Report (0 ~ 24). For
example, if the entry is 10, the last 10 digits a
user dials do not appear on the SMDR report.
35-01-05 SMDR Options Minimum Digits 0 ~ 24 0

Outgoing calls must have at least this number (0 = Not applied)
of digits for inclusion in the SMDR report

(0 ~ 24).
35-01-06 SMDR Options Minimum Call Duration 0 ~ 65535 seconds 0

A call must last at least this time to be included (0 = All)
in the SMDR report.
35-01-07 SMDR Options Minimum Ring Time (For 0 ~ 65535 seconds 0

Incoming Calls) (0 = All)
A call must ring for at least this time to be

included in the SMDR report.
35-01-08 SMDR Options Format Selection 0 = NA Type (North America) 0

Set the SMDR (Station Message Detail 1 = G/J Type (Overseas/ Japan)
Recording) format for each of the eight SMDR

ports.

Determine if SMDR can include or exclude calls 1 = Displayed
blocked by Toll Restriction.

include all calls (1) or just calls dialed using the

PBX trunk access code (0).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Name 1 = Number
trunk Name or Number on SMDR reports.

must be set to 0.

Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed

night).


midnight).






or Name 1 = Number
Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR report
include extension numbers. Set this option to 0

names.


35-02-11 SMDR Output Options Walking Toll 0 = Not Output 1

Restriction Table Number 1 = Output
Set the SMDR (Station Message Detail
Recording) walking toll restriction table number

output options for each of the eight SMDR
ports.


displayed for incoming DID calls.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Determine if the Caller ID should be displayed
when the incoming DID number is transferred
to an outgoing trunk.

Determine if the date should be displayed on 1 = Displayed
SMDR reports.

Switching 1 = DID Number
Determine whether the Caller ID number, or 2 = Caller ID Name
DID number should be displayed in the SMDR
output.

to 1, ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits. For
DID trunks, if the received number is not
defined in Program 22-11-01, a number is not
printed. If set to 0 trunk names are printed
instead (assigned in Program 14-01-01).

Determine whether the Account Code or Caller
ID name should print in the SMDR record.

Program 35-01-08 must be set to 0 for this
entry to be followed.

Select whether to display up to 16 characters of
the Caller Name on the same line as the call
record (0) or if a line feed should be added and
up to 24 characters of the Caller Name are
displayed on the following line (1). If the line
feed option is selected, the Caller Name is
displayed on the next line as : NEXT Caller
Name.
This setting works regardless of the setting in
Program 35-02-15.
With this option set to 1, if your
communications program (such as HyperTerminal)
has the line wrap option enabled in the ASCII setup,
an additional line break may appear above the
Caller name line.
35-03-01 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Trunk Group: 1 ~ 100, 1
Assign the SMDR port for each trunk group. SMDR Port: 1 ~ 8
This is the SMDR port to which the incoming

call information should be sent.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
35-04-01 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Department Group: 01 ~ 64 1

Groups SMDR Port: 1 ~ 8
Assign the SMDR port for each department
group. This is the SMDR port where the
outgoing call information should be sent.
LAN Connection:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

When using an IP connection, set up the 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
GPZ-IPLE IP address used to connect from the

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
CommAnalyst PC to the system.
10-20-01 LAN Setup for External Equipment TC Port 0 ~ 65535 External Device
When using an IP connection, define the TCP 1 (CTI Server) =
port used for communicating to the 0
CommAnalyst (External Device 5 = SMDR, External Device
Entries: 0 ~ 65535). This entry must match the 2 ( MIS) = 4000
entry made in the CDM setup with the External Device
CommAnalyst program. 5 (SMDR
Output) = 0
External Device
6 (DIM Output) =
0
External Device

11 (O&M Server)
= 8010
External Device
12 (Traffic
Report Output) =
0
External Device
13 (Room Data
Output for Hotel
Service) = 0
10-20-03 LAN Setup for External Equipment Keep 1 ~ 255 seconds 30

Alive Time
Define the TCP port/address/etc.

Issue 2.0
Programming Notes:
If the system is programmed to display the date (Program 35-02-14=1), the date is displayed
regardless of the setting for display of trunk name (Program 35-02-03) and only the trunk number is
printed.
For example, if trunk port 049 has a trunk name of PRI Ch1, if Program 35-02-03 = 0 (name) and
Program 35-02-14 = 1 (display date), then SMDR shows 8/19 049. However, if Program 35-02-14
= 0 (date not displayed), the SMDR shows PRI Ch1.
For proper handling of DNIS calls, the name field (Program 22-11-03) must be the same as the
received DNIS digits (Program 22-11-01 and Program 35-02-12 DID Table Name must be turned
On). If this is not set, NEC Communications Analyst cannot track transferred calls since the system
displays the DNIS number when a call is received and displays the DNIS name for transferred
calls. This setting has no impact on outgoing calls, which display the trunk name instead of the
DNIS name.
Caller ID name can be displayed in SMDR records. Program 35-02-17 must be set to 0 and
Program 35-02-18 set to 1.
Operation
Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering on page 2-198 and Central Office Calls, Placing on page 2-209
features for detailed operations for placing or answering calls.

Issue 2.0
NEC E911 Security Notification
Description
The NEC E911 Security Notification (ESN) Application Suite, an easy-to- use yet powerful E911
notification solution. The E911 Security Notification solution offers robust features designed specifically
for business users who want to make use of the Enhanced 911 call notification during emergencies.
This application requires the latest full build of NEC Communications Analyst to be installed
as a prerequisite.
IMPORTANT
Figure 2-41 E911 Deployment Example
Conditions
ESN setup requires NEC Communications Analyst build 5315 or higher to be installed
prior to running the ESN installation.
ESN Alarm and ESN ALI Lookup works with Adobe Acrobat Reader version 11.0 and
above only.
The EOMS Service needs to be restarted after SQL Server restarts, the PC restarts or
whenever the Microsoft SQL Server service is started after the EOMS service enters a
running state.
Changes made in the Administrator Console requires restarting all the EOMS services to
take effect.

Issue 2.0
Propagating the changes made using the Administration Console to the ESN Alert clients
will require the Admin.ini file to be shared for the clients to access them over a network.
The Licence.lic file from the NEC Communications Analyst needs to be made available to
the ESN Administrator Console for the ESN related license.
ESN Alarm clients installed on VM ware PC's can not listen to the audio alarms.
Firewall/Antivirus rule exceptions need to be made for the services to communicate.
Platform Requirements:
Ensure the following hardware and software requirements are met before starting the E911 Security
Notification solution installation.
These recommendations are to be used as a minimum requirements guideline only. The actual

NOTE
requirements may vary based on the specific needs such as the call volume, number of remote
locations etc.
For a detailed list of PC Requirements and Operating Systems supported, refer to the E911
Security Notification (ESN) Installation, Setup & ESN Administrator Guide for the version
REFERENCE being installed.
ESN Solution:
Hardware:
Pentium 1.8 GHz core 2 duo or above
4 GB RAM
20 GB of free hard disk space
SVGA monitor 1024X 768 resolution
Network Interface card (NIC)
Supported Operating Systems:
Windows Server 2003 with SP2
Windows XP Professional with SP3
Client Side Requirements:

Hardware:
Pentium 4 class machine
At least 512 MB RAM
SVGA monitor 1024X 768 resolution
Vista with SP1

Issue 2.0

Refer to the NEC Communications Analyst E911 Security Notification Application Suite
Installation, Setup and ESN Administrator Guide for detailed instructions.
REFERENCE
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-20-01 LAN Setup for External Equipment TC Port 0 ~ 65535 External Device
When using an IP connection, define the TCP 1 (CTI Server) =
port used for communicating to the 0
CommAnalyst (External Device 5 = SMDR, External Device
Entries: 0 ~ 65535). This entry must match the 2 ( MIS) = 4000
entry made in the CDM setup with the External Device
CommAnalyst program. 5 (SMDR
Output) = 0
External Device
6 (DIM Output) =
0
External Device

11 (O&M Server)
= 8010
External Device
12 (Traffic
Report Output) =
0
External Device
13 (Room Data
Output for Hotel
Service ) = 0
41-01-03 System Options for MIS Connection 0 = None 0

Ports 3 = LAN (GCD-CP10)
Define what port is used for MIS connection.

Currently only LAN is supported.

Issue 2.0
Night Service
Description
Night Service lets system users activate one of the Night Service modes. Night Service redirects calls to
their night mode destination, as determined by Assigned and Universal Night Answer programming. A
user typically activates Night Service after normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable
to answer calls.
There are eight Service Modes. At default, the mode names are assigned as follows:
Mode 1 = No setting
Mode 2 = Night
Mode 3 = Midnight
Mode 4 = Rest
Mode 5 = Day2
Mode 6 = Night2
Mode 7 = Midnight2
Mode 8 = Rest2
There are 32 Service Patterns/Groups available.
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
With Assigned Night Answer (ANA), Night Service has calls ring extensions directly. Assigned Night
Answer provides an answering point for Night Service calls. For certain applications, this may be more
appropriate than Universal Night Answer. For example, you could program trunks to ring the security
station telephone during off hours.
For more information on assigning trunks to ring extensions, refer to Direct Inward Line (DIL) on page
2-409.
Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers. With UNA, an
employee can go to a telephone and press the flashing line key or use Universal Answer to pick up the
call. Only ring groups calls can be used with Universal Night Answer. For more on setting up Universal
Answer, refer to Central Office Calls, Answering on page 2-198.
You may also use Transfer to UNA. An extension user can transfer their call to UNA (i.e., External
Paging at night). Once transferred, the call rings the External Paging speakers like any other UNA call
and can be picked up at any extension. You can also set up Transfer to UNA through the Voice
Response System (VRS). This lets outside callers, answered by the VRS, dial a code to have their call
ring External Paging.
2-1078 Night Service

Issue 2.0
Automatic Night Service
The system allows or denies Automatic Night Service. If allowed, the calls route according to the service
patterns programmed. The Night Service programming is stored in the RAM memory. This means that if
the system is not using the Automatic Night Service, for a power failure in night mode, when the power is
restored, the system continues to be in night mode.
Programmable Function Key Can Toggle Night Modes
The software allows a Night Service Programmable Function Key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 09 + 0)
to toggle night modes. You can determine in programming (Program 12-08-01) how many modes
through which the user toggles. Note that the additional data for the Programmable Function Key must
be set to 0 for the toggle function to work.
Conditions
Almost all features are affected by Night Mode except the following:
Dial Tone Detection
External Alarm Sensors
Pulse to Tone conversion
SMDR
Volume Control
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys and Virtual Extension keys do not support Day/Night Mode (09)
Programmable Function keys.
Universal Night Answer only works when Call is sent to a ring group.
A Separate Access Map and Ring Group programming entry is available for each Night
Service mode (modes 1~8). Also, Universal Answer allows an extension user to pick up a
Universal Night Answer (UNA) call.
Mode Keys can be assigned as required for DSS Consoles.
With Universal Night Answer, outside calls can ring External Paging Zones.
Programmable Function Keys simplify activating Night Service.
The relay circuits (5~8) are on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are programmed and used for General
Purpose Relays.
When programming Night Service function keys, multiple keys must be used for switching
between each Night Service Mode.
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment (command 15-09) follows the ring assignment for the
Night Mode Group the virtual extension is assigned to (default Night Mode Group 1) and
not the Night Mode Group of the keyset the virtual is appearing on.
Night Service 2-1079

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
System is always in the Mode 1
System Availability
Terminals
None
None
Related Features
Paging, External
Ring Groups

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Administrator) Night Mode Switching 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the service code (718) used for day/ digits

night mode switching.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Administrator) Night Mode Switching for 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Other Group digits
Customize the service code (618) used for Day/

Night mode switching for another Night service
group.

Answer No-Ring Line (Universal Answer) 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the service code (#0) used to digits

manually answer a Universal Night Answer.
Define the service code used for turning the digits

general purpose relay on and off.
12-01-01 Night Mode Function Setup Manual Night 0 = Off 1

Mode Switching 1 = On

activate Manual Night Service.
12-01-02 Night Mode Function Setup Automatic 0 = Off 0

Night Mode Switching 1 = On
According to a preset schedule, Enable (1) or
Disable (0) Automatic Night Service for the
system. Make sure to set the Service Patterns
in Program 12-02-01, Program 12-02-02 and
Program 12-02-03.
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Start Time 0000 ~ 2359 Refer to the
For each Night Service Group, enter up to 20 Programming
start times for each Time Pattern (1 ~ 10). Manual for
The first pattern start time (Pattern 1) should default values.
begin at 00:00 (midnight).
12-02-02 Automatic Night Service End Time 0000 ~ 2359 Refer to the
For each Night Service Group (01 ~ 32), enter Programming
up to 20 end times (0000 ~ 2359) for each Time Manual for
Pattern (1 ~ 10). default values.
12-02-03 Automatic Night Service Operation Mode 1~8 Refer to the

For each Night Service Group (01 ~ 32), define Programming
the Night Service Mode (1 ~ 8) for up to 20 Manual for
start/end times for each Time Pattern (1 ~ 10). default values.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
12-03-01 Weekly Night Service Switching Night Mode Service Group 01 = Sunday
Assign one of the 10 Time Patterns Numbers: 01 ~ 32 (default = Time
programmed in Program 12-02-01 to each day Time Schedule Pattern Number: Pattern 2)
of the week. 1 ~ 10 02 = Monday
Day of Week: (default = Time
01 = Sunday Pattern 1)
02 = Monday 03 = Tuesday
03 = Tuesday (default = Time
04 = Wednesday Pattern 1)
05 = Thursday 04 = Wednesday
06 = Friday (default = Time
07 = Saturday Pattern 1)
05 = Thursday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
06 = Friday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
07 = Saturday
(default = Time
Pattern 2)

Assign one of the 10 Time Patterns to holidays. 0101 ~ 1231
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1; 1231 = Dec.
31)
0 ~ 10
(0 = No Setting)
12-05-01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Night Mode Service Group 1
Extensions Number:
Assign a Day/Night Mode Group (01 ~ 32), for 01 ~ 32

each extension.
12-06-01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Trunk Port Number: 001 ~ 400 1
Assign a Day/Night Mode Group (01 ~ 32), for Night Mode Service Group
each trunk port (1 ~ 400). Number:

01 ~ 32

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
12-07-01 Text Data for Night Mode Night Mode Service Group Default Text
Create an original text message which is Number: Messages for
displayed on an LCD of multiline terminal in 01 ~ 32 Day/Night
each Night Mode. Day/Night Mode: 1 ~ 8 Modes:
Text Message: Mode 1 = No
Setting
Maximum 12 Characters
(alphabetic or numeric) Mode 2 =
<Night>
Mode 3 =
<Midnight>
Mode 4 =

<Rest>
Mode 5 =
<Day2>
Mode 6 =
<Night2>
Mode 7 =
<Midnight2>
Mode 8 =
<Rest2>
12-08-01 Night Mode Service Range Night Mode Service Group 2

For each Night Mode Group (01 ~ 32), Number:
determine how many night modes a user 01 ~ 32
toggles through when the Night Mode key is Range: 2 ~ 8
pressed.

To allow for Universal Night Answer (UNA) 1 = Outgoing access only 1 ~ 400 = Trunk
answering, set up the Trunk Access Maps 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
(1 ~ 400). For UNA, extension must have 3 = Access only when trunk on assigned with
incoming access to trunk ringing the External Hold option 7 access
Paging speakers. (incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold
For Universal Night Answer (UNA) answering,
assign Trunk Access Maps (1 ~ 400) to
extensions. Make one entry for each Night
Service mode.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign Night Service function keys (09) to 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
extensions and set the key for the proper mode 751 by default) Manual for
(Day, Night, Rest, etc.). If the additional data is
set to 0, the toggle mode is assigned. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

manually Switch the Night Mode (Service Code

718). This option must be enabled for an
extension to display the Night indication.

required).

Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
There is one item for each Night Service Mode VRS installed)
(1 ~ 8). 2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL

5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

To have trunks ring extensions during the eight ports) ring
different Night Service modes (for ANA), assign for incoming
Ring Group 1
extensions to Ring Groups. For each extension
in the Ring Groups (1 ~ 100), indicate in calls. No other

Program 22-06-01 if trunk should Ring (1) or extensions ring
Not Ring (0). for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

To have trunks ring extensions for ANA, assign Incoming Group Number for
trunks to Ring Groups (1 ~ 100), you make a Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
different entry for each Night Service mode. 0 = (No Setting)

Mail or InMail)

If a Universal Answer call rings longer than the 001 ~ 100 = Incoming Ring
routes to the Ring Group specified in this 102 = (In-Skin/External Voice
option. Mail or InMail)
31-05-01 Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page 0 = No Ringing (No) 0

For each Night Service Mode, assign which 1 = Ringing (Yes)
trunks should ring which External Paging

Zones.
Operation
To activate Night Service by dialing codes:

- OR -

2. Dial 718. To change a different groups mode, dial 718 + the group number (01~32).
3. Dial the Night Service Code:
1 = Day 1 Mode
2 = Night 1 Mode
3 = Midnight 1 Mode
4 = Rest 1 Mode
5 = Day 2 Mode
6 = Night 2 Mode
7 = Midnight 2 Mode
8 = Rest 2 Mode
To activate Night Service by using programmable keys:

1. Press Night Service key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751:09 + Mode code number below).

Issue 2.0
1 = Day 1 Mode
2 = Night 1 Mode
3 = Midnight 1 Mode
4 = Rest 1 Mode
5 = Day 2 Mode
6 = Night 2 Mode
7 = Midnight 2 Mode
8 = Rest 2 Mode
To transfer a call to the Universal Answer External Page zones:

1. Place the CO call on hold and dial the Transfer to Trunk Ring Group code (assigned in Program
11-15-09).
2. Hang up.
The call rings over the External Paging, enabling anyone to answer the call.

Off-Hook Signaling
Description
Off-Hook ringing alerts a multiline terminal user that an incoming outside call is ringing to that
station during another call. Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers get through, without
O
waiting in line for the called extension to become free. The system provides the following
Off-Hook Signaling options:
Called Extension Block
The called extension Class of Service may block incoming Off-Hook Signaling attempts.
This is beneficial to users that do not want interruptions while on a call.
Automatic Signaling
Calling a busy extension automatically initiates Off-Hook Signaling. This option is useful to
receptionists, operators and others that must quickly process calls. This is set in the called
extension Class of Service.
Manual Signaling
After reaching a busy extension, manual signaling gives the caller the choice of using Off-
Hook Signaling or activating other features. Extensions without automatic signaling have
manual signaling. The users can dial a service code or press a Programmable Function
Key to send Off-Hook Signaling to the called telephone.
Selectable Off-Hook Signaling Mode
The Off-Hook Signal can be muted ringing, no off-hook ringing or a beep in the handset
based on the callers programming.
Off-Hook Ringing
Use this option to enable or disable an extension Off-Hook Signaling for incoming calls. If
enabled, Off-Hook Signaling occurs normally. If disabled, calls queue behind the extension
busy line appearance and the user gets no Off-Hook Signaling indication. The second line
appearance stays idle. The caller hears ringback tone while their call waits. This is set in
the called extension Class of Service.
DID Call Waiting
An extension can optionally have DID calls camp-on with Off-Hook/Call Wait signaling,
without Off-Hook/Call Wait signaling or no signaling. This is set in the called extension
Class of Service.
Block Manual Off-Hook Signals
This Class of Service option enables/disables a busy extension ability to block off-hook
signals manually sent from a co-worker. If disabled (not blocked), callers can dial at busy
or busy/ring to signal the extension. If enabled (blocked), nothing happens when the caller
dials to off-hook signal.
Off-Hook Signaling 2-1087

Issue 2.0
Block Camp-On
If an extension has Block Camp-On enabled, callers to the extension cannot dial 2 to Camp-On
after hearing busy or busy/ring. If the extension has Block Camp-On disabled, callers are not
prevented from dialing 2 to Camp-On after hearing busy or busy/ring. This is set in the called
extension Class of Service.
Conditions
An extension user cannot Camp-On to a busy extension or leave a callback if Off-Hook
Signaling has already gone through. Off-Hook Signaling allows an extension to block a
callers ability to dial # to camp-on.
You cannot send off-hook signals to an extension busy on a Handsfree (Speakerphone)
call. The called extension large LED flashes fast, with no ringing.
The setting of Program 20-13-06 affects the BLF display for Hotline and Reverse Voice
Over. Refer to the features Hotline on page 2-607 and Reverse Voice Over on page 2-1188
for additional information.
You cannot send off-hook signals to an extension that is already receiving a voice
announcement.
An extension user can store the Off-Hook Signaling Service Code (709) under a One-Touch
Key to provide quick Off-Hook Signaling access.
An extension set as Operator in Program 20-17-01 does not follow settings in Program
20-13-05, Program 20-13-06 or Program 20-09-07 and always receives Off-Hook
Signaling.
Program 20-09-07 and 20-13-06 must be set to 1 in Class of Service for a normal extension
to receive automatic Off-Hook Signaling.
Off-Hook signaling is supported for Wireless DECT (SIP) telephones.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones
None
2-1088 Off-Hook Signaling

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Callback
Hotline
Intercom
One-Touch Calling
Reverse Voice Over

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Assign a service code (709 by default) to be digits

used for off-hook Signaling Override.
11-16-04 Single Digit Service Code Setup Intercom Assign a one-digit service code (default = )
Off-Hook Signaling to be used for off-hook signaling.
Assign a one-digit service code to be used for

off-hook signaling.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-02-12 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Off- 0 = Muted Off-Hook Ringing 5
Hook Ringing 1 = No Off-Hook Ringing
For each extension, set off-hook Ringing type: 2 = Not Used
0 (muted), 1 (none), 3 (beep in speaker), 4
(beep in handset), 5 (Speaker & Handset
Beep). DID, DNIS and DIL trunks can use any
of the options normal/ring group trunks can 5 = Speaker & Handset Beep
use only option 0 or 1.

Assign a function key for off-hook Signaling 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

busy.
Must be set to 1 to enable automatic off-hook
Signaling.

Turn Off or On an extension user ability to send
Off-Hook Signals.


Manually (0) receive off-hook Signals.

co-worker.

Waiting Tone
Set the time between off-hook Signaling alerts.
2-1090 Off-Hook Signaling

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Refer to Table 2-

(39) Customize the system basic tones and system 31 Service Tone
Setup Defaults,
the changes to take affect. Program

80-01-01 on
page 2-568.

(39) The following features require that the system 32 Service Tone
tones listed below be changed to match the Setup, Program
table. After changing these settings the chassis 80-01-02 on
must be reset for the changes to take effect. page 2-572.
Call Screening
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
Operation
To send Off-Hook signals to an extension busy on a call:
Your extension may send off-hook signals automatically.

NOTE
1. Dial 7.
- OR -
Press Off-Hook Signaling key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 33).
You hear ringback.
To have your call voice-announce, dial 1.
Receiving Off-Hook Signaling on a single line telephone while engaged on an internal or external
call:
1. When Off-Hook Signaling is heard in the receiver, press the Flash Key to answer the call. The
first call is placed on hold.
2. Press the Flash Key again to toggle between the two calls.
If the single line phone hangs up with the active call, the other call on hold rings back to the single
line.

Issue 2.0
One-Touch Calling
Description
One-Touch Calling gives a multiline terminal user one-button access to extensions, trunks, speed dial
bins and selected system features. This saves users time when accessing co-workers, clients and
features they use most often. Instead of dialing a series of codes, the user need only press the
One-Touch key. An extension user can have One-Touch keys programmed for:
Direct Station Selection one-button access to extensions
Station Speed Dial one-button access to stored numbers (up to 24 digits long)
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station one-button access to stored speed dialing numbers
Trunk Calling one-button access to trunks or trunk groups
Service Codes one-button access to specific Service Codes
An extension user can chain dial with One-Touch Keys. For example, a user can store the number for a
company Automated Attendant in key 1 and employee extension numbers in keys 2~5. The user
presses key 1 to call the company, then one of keys 2~5 to ring the employee to which they want to
speak.
An extension user or system administrator can optionally store a Flash command under a One-Touch
key. This is helpful for One-Touch Keys used as Station Speed Dial bins. The stored Flash may be
helpful to access features of the connected Telco, PBX or Centrex.
Conditions
One-Touch keys provide a Busy Lamp Field (BLF).
station using a DSS key.
When a multiline terminal user is on a call, they must press transfer to transfer a call off site
with a DSS key.
When a multiline terminal user is on a call, they must press transfer to transfer a call to a
destination that is not a station (/Voice Mail/Department group pilot, etc.).
2-1092 One-Touch Calling

Issue 2.0
Entering a P (pause) in a DSS/One Touch dial string can be used for CO calls or after the @
for ISDN calls.
ARS with Max Digits is not supported when entering the @ or a P (pause) in the dial string
of a DSS/One Touch button.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals and DSS Consoles
None
Related Features
Transfer

One-Touch Calling 2-1093

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Define a Programmable Function Key for 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
One-Touch Calling by defining the key as a 751 by default) Manual for
DSS/One-Touch key (01).
752 by default)



Function Keys and One-Touch Calling keys. Level) default values.
When programming a feature within a 97 = Door Box Access key
One-Touch Key, refer to the feature description (additional data: 1 ~ 8 Door Box
for additional programming options. No.)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Functional Level)
Operation
To define a Programmable Function Key as a One-Touch Key:

1. Dial the service code for Function Key Programming (Program 11-11-17, 751 by default).
2. Press the key to be defined.
3. Dial 01 (DSS/One-Touch Key Operation).
4. For Direct Station Selection (Extension):
a. Dial extension number you want assigned to that key.
b. Press Hold.
c. Press Speaker.

Issue 2.0
For Personal Speed Dial:

a. Dial the general trunk access code (9).
- OR -
Dial the Specific Trunk Service Code (#9) plus the trunk number (e.g., 005).
- OR -
Dial the Trunk Group Service Code (704) plus the trunk group number (e.g., 1).
b. Dial the number you want to store.
The total of the digits stored in steps 3 and 4 cannot exceed 24.
Valid entries are 0~9, # and . To enter a pause, press MIC. To store a Flash, press Redial.
c. Press Hold.
d. Press Speaker.
For Speed Dial System/Group:

a. Dial #2 to store a Speed Dial System dialing number.
- OR -
Dial #4 to store a Speed Dial Group dialing number.
b. Dial Speed Dial number storage code (e.g., 001).
c. Press Hold.
d. Press Speaker.
For Central Office Calls, Placing (Trunk Calling):

a. Dial the general trunk access code (9).
- OR -
Dial the specific Trunk Service Code (#9) plus the trunk number (e.g., 005).
- OR -
Dial the Trunk Group Service Code (704) plus the trunk group number (e.g., 1).
b. Dial the telephone number to be stored.
c. Press Hold.
d. Press Speaker.
For Service Codes:

a. Dial the Service Code you want stored.
For example, if you want a One-Touch Key to automatically clear your Last Number Redial, enter 776.
b. Press Hold.
c. Press Speaker.
Checking the One-Touch Keys
To check the function of a One-Touch key:

One-Touch Calling 2-1095

Issue 2.0
2. Press the One-Touch key.

The stored function displays.
Repeat this step to check additional keys.


Issue 2.0
Operator
Description
When an extension user dials 0, calls are routed to a main system operator. The operator can answer
and route outside calls or locate employees using the Page feature.
A maximum of eight operators is available.
Conditions
Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers
hear busy tone.
The operator extension cannot be a CAR Key or virtual extension.
When dialing 0 from the in-skin Voice Mail across CCIS and CCISoIP, it follows what is in
the operator set up.
Extensions and trunks can be assigned to an operator group. A call to an operator that is
busy rolls to the next operator in the operator group.
Default Settings
Extension 101 is an operator.
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Attendant Call Queuing
Operator 2-1097
Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-01-01 System Options Operator Access Mode 0 = Step 0

Set up priority of a call when calling an operator 1 = Circular
telephone (0 = Step, 1 = Circular).
20-17-01 Operator Extension Operators Extension Maximum of eight digits. 101

Number
Designate an extension an operator. When an
extension user dials 0 or 9 (defined by Program
11-01, Type 5), calls go to the operator selected
in this program.
If you do not assign an extension in Program
90-11-01, system alarms appear on the
extension assigned in this option.
20-35-01 Extensions Operator Setting 0 ~ 15 0

Assign an extension to an operator group.

20-36-01 Trunks Operator Setting 0 ~ 15 0
Allow the user to select Operator Group per (0 = Not assigned)
trunk.
20-37-01 Operator Extension Group Setup 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight No Setting

Define the initial operator extension in the digits
operator group.
20-38-01 Operator Group Setting Operator Access 0 = Step 0

Mode 1 = Circular
Set up priority of a call when calling an operator

telephone.
Operation
Refer to the individual features for operation.
2-1098 Operator
Issue 2.0
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension
Description
Off-Premise Extension allows a single line telephone, located remotely from the main installation site, to
access the system features with the same abilities as an on-premise single line telephone.
Conditions
Each GCD-4DIOPA provides four off-premise circuits.
The maximum loop resistance between a GCD-4DIOPA and an Off-Premise Extension
Single Line Telephone is 1600ohms (including single line telephone set resistance).
The GCD-4DIOPA has a built-in ringer (RSG). This blade supports Synchronous Ringing
and detects Dial Pulse/DTMF tones.
The GCD-4DIOPA does not support an interface to a Voice Mail unit.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
GCD-4DIOPA
Related Features
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension 2-1099

Issue 2.0

Refer to Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets on page 2-1285 for related programming.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

for each blade. This program represents in the slot. Manual for
default values for
different data depending on the blade installed
in the slot. Refer to the SV9100 Programming a more detailed

Manual for a more detailed description of this description of the
program. 10-03-XX
programs.
Forwarding Centrex. Circuit/Resource
33 ~ 144 = 0
(Common)
When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available

telephone uses.

manually.
2-1100 (OPX) Off-Premise Extension

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

15-03-05 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Off 0

Trunk Polarity Reverse 1 = On
-- Not Used in U.S. -- Do Not Change Default
Entry as DTMF issues may arise with voice
mail.

Extension Polarity Reverse 1 = Enable (On)
mail.

Enabled On-Hook When Holding (SLT) 1 = Yes
Enable/Disable this program.
15-03-08 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Disable (No) 1

Answer On-Hook when Holding (SLT) 1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable/Disable Answer on-hook when Holding

for SLT.

Caller ID Function - For External Module 1 = Enable
Important:

disabled for the system integration codes to be
correct.
With a 2500 set (no Caller ID) installed, this
must be set to 0 for incoming callers to have a talk
path.

Determine if an extension user telephone

should display the Caller ID name.
15-03-11 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = FSK 0

Caller ID Type 1 = DTMF
Select whether the Caller ID type is FSK or

DTMF.
15-03-14 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Calling Extension Number 0
Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode (Calling)
Determine what the display shows when a 1 = External Caller ID (Forward)
multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside
call.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode 1 = Hookflash + Service Code

20-03-02 System Options for Single Line Telephones 0 = Do Not Ignore (No) 0
Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF SLT 1 = Ignore (Yes)
Port
Define whether the system should receive dial

pulse and DTMF signals (0) or ignore dial pulse
and only accept DTMF signals (1).
20-03-03 System Options for Single Line Telephones 0 = Receive all dialed data, 0
SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines before sending (All)
Type 0: The system keeps the digits dialed 1 = Direct through out (Direct)
by the single line telephone on a trunk in a
buffer. After they are received, the system
sends all the digits to the trunk. If the time
space between digits is longer than the time
in Program 20-03-04, the system considers
all digits received.
Type 1: The system passes the received
digits from the single line telephone to the
trunk immediately. If the single line
telephone has a Last Number Dial key
without a pause, this key may not be able to
use the Last Number Dial key with the Type
1 setting.
When using a third-party external paging
device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-04 to 1. These programs must
be set for Wireless DECT (SIP) users to break
dial tone on an analog trunk that is used for
paging.

When ARS or an analog extension user
accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the

system waits this interval before outdialing the
first digit.
20-03-05 System Options for Single Line Telephones 0 = Normal Mode 0

SLT Operation Mode 1 = Extended Mode1
Set the operation mode for single line

2 = Extended Mode2
telephones.

Headset Ringing Start Time (for SLT)
Define the headset ringing start time. After this
time expires after a single line telephone is

off-hook, the system sets the single line
telephone to headset ringing mode.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time
(Forced Dial)
Define the Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start
Time (Forced Dial) for single line telephones.

extension port =
Class 1

on ICM Call


Trunk
Define the ring cycle for Incoming Internal calls.

Define the incoming internal call ringing cycles
for each ring type.

Define the ring cycle for DID/DDI calls.

3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm


Receiver.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

detect level 1:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) Type 4 ~ 5 = 10
(-20dBm)
detect level 2:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-80dBm(0) to -95dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

-5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
detect level 2:
-10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
80-03-05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward Twist 0~9 Type 1 = 5

Receiver. (6dBm)
Type 3 = 5
(6dBm)

Type 4 = 5
(6dBm)
Type 5 = 5
(6dBm)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backwards 0~9 Type 1 = 0

Receiver. (1dBm)
Type 3 = 0
(1dBm)

Type 4 = 0
(1dBm)
Type 5 = 0
(1dBm)
80-03-07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON Detect 1 ~ 255 Type 1 = 1

Time (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Define the On detection time for DTMF Tone Type 2 = 1
Receiver. (30ms)
Type 3 = 1
(30ms)

Type 4 = 1
(30ms)
Type 5 = 1
(30ms)
80-03-08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect 1 ~ 255 Type 1 = 1

Time (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Receiver. (30ms)
Type 3 = 1
(30ms)

Type 4 = 1
(30ms)
Type 5 = 1
(30ms)

+ 30 1 = 60. 132 (3990ms)
30+30255=7680 0
82-11-01 LCA Initial Setup Bounce Protect Time 0 = No Setting 3

Specify a time for detection of a valid 0ff-Hook 1 ~ 15 = 100ms ~ 1.5sec
indication that is long enough to prevent an
unintentional bounce of the receiver from being

detected as a new off-hook indication from a
82-11-02 LCA Initial Setup HookFlash Start Time 0 = 40ms 5

Specify the minimum hookflash time from a 1 ~ 15 = 90ms ~ 790ms
Single Line Telephone or analog Voice Mail
system before it is detected as the beginning of
a valid hookflash.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
82-11-03 LCA Initial Setup HookFlash End Time 0 = HST+0ms 1 ~ 15 = 7

Specify the maximum hookflash duration from a HST+100ms ~ HST+1500ms
Single Line Telephone to receive a second dial

(HST = Hookflash Start Time)
tone.
Operation
Normal call handling procedures for single line telephones apply.

Issue 2.0

Paging, External
Description
With External Paging, a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment connected
to external Paging zones. When a user pages one of these external zones, the system
P
broadcasts the announcement over the speakers. Like Internal Paging, External Paging allows a
user to locate another employee or make an announcement without calling each extension
individually.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system allows up to eight External Paging zones, or a common zone
output provided by the CPU (Speaker 9). All other speakers (1~8) require a port on a PGD(2)-
U10 ADP, with a maximum of two external paging circuits per module. You must have four
PGD(2)-U10 ADPs to get the eight external zones. In addition, each external zone has an
associated relay contact. When a user pages to a zone, the corresponding contact activates
(closes). This provides for Paging amplifier control.
Combined Paging
Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding
external zone. For example, you can Page your company warehouse and outside loading dock at
the same time. Combined Paging is available for zones 1~8 and All Call. Refer to Paging,
Internal on page 2-1119 for more on setting up Combined Paging. In addition, you can program a
Function Key as a Combined Paging key. Using the External Page Function Key, when an All
Call External Page Function Key is programmed, it includes both the external zones and the
assigned internal zone(s). If the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page
group, the announcement is made on the external zones only.
Conditions
The UNIVERGE SV9100 provides a common zone output provided by the chassis.
For more than one external page zone, External Paging requires PGD(2)-U10 ADPs
and customer-provided paging equipment.
Talkback paging requires the use of a PGD(2)-U10 ADP. The UNIVERGE SV9100
common zone output provided by the chassis does not allow talkback.
A common zone output is provided by the chassis and is considered Zone 9 when
programming.
A Class of Service option is available in system programming to prevent display
telephones from showing incoming paging information. This allows the system to
save processor time and speed up system operation.
DID and DIL trunks do not ring external page speakers. Only trunks defined as
normal in Program 22-02-01 ring external page speakers.
Paging, External 2-1109

Issue 2.0
Paging keys can be assigned on Programmable Function Keys and Direct Station Selection
(DSS) Consoles to simplify External Paging operation.
If a PGD(2)-U10 ADP circuit has a Door Box connected, you cannot use that circuit for
External Paging.
To have outside calls ring External Paging Zones at night, refer to the Night Service feature
and Program 31-05.
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can be connected only to a DLC.
The maximum number of PGD(2)-U10 ADP is 56. Refer to the Hardware Manual for more
information which describes how many of the 56 can be for paging, door box or Music on
Hold (MOH).
Phones that have an APR/APA installed do not pass voice to a trunk used for paging until
the interdigit timer expires (Program 21-01-03).
If a Central Office (CO) trunk port is used for external paging, a Multiline Terminal with an
AP(A)-R Unit installed does not provide a speech path to the paging system.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-8DLCA, GCD-16DLCA or GCD-LTA for PGD(2)-U10 ADP
PGD(2)-U10 ADP for Zone Paging
1- or 2-way amplifier and speakers (locally provided)
Related Features
2-1110 Paging, External

Issue 2.0
Door Box
Night Service
Paging, Internal
Transfer

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-05-01 General Purpose Relay Setup Slot No. Slot No: 0 ~ 24 0-0-0
Physical Port of DLCA Sensor Circuit No. DCLA Port: 0 ~ 16
Define which relay circuits (5 ~ 8) on the Relay No: 0, 5 ~ 8
PGD(2)-U10 ADP are used for General
After each entry, press
Purpose Relays. Transfer to advance to the next
entry.

BGM source (AUX1)
follows:
AUX2 = Relay2
AUX1 = Relay1
11-12-50 Service Code Setup (For Service Access) MLT, SLT 780
Specify the service code used to toggle the digits

relay open and closed.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign function keys for External Paging zones 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(19 + zone) and External All Call Page (20). If 751 by default) Manual for
required, define a function key for a multiline
terminal to use the general purpose relay (51). Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1



Set the maximum allowable duration for a

Paging announcement.
program on the telephone display.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
31-04-01 External Paging Zone Group 0 ~ 8 (0 = No Setting) Speaker 1

Assign each External Paging Speaker to an [PGD(2)-U10] =
External Paging Group (1 ~ 8) used for 1 (Group 1)
accessing the zone. If zones 1 ~ 8 are not Speaker 2
connected to PGD(2)-U10 ADP, set these [PGD(2)-U10] =
unused zones to External Paging Group 0. 2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3
[PGD(2)-U10] =
3 (Group 3)
Speaker 4
[PGD(2)-U10] =
4 (Group 4)
Speaker 5
[PGD(2)-U10] =
5 (Group 5)
Speaker 6
[PGD(2)-U10] =
6 (Group 6)
Speaker 7
[PGD(2)-U10] =
7 (Group 7)
Speaker 8
[PGD(2)-U10] =
8 (Group 8)
Speaker 9
(GCD-CP10) = 1
(Group 1)
31-05-01 Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page External Paging Speaker/Zones: 0

Assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each 1~9
External Paging zone. For each trunk port, 0 = No Ringing (No)
make a separate entry for each External Paging 1 = Ringing (Yes)
Speaker.
31-06-01 External Speaker Control Broadcast 0 = No Tone (None) 2

Splash Tone before Paging (Paging Start 1 = Splash Tone
Tone) 2 = Chime Tone
Enable/Disable splash tone before Paging over
an external zone. If enabled, the system
broadcasts a splash tone before the External

Splash Tone after Paging (Paging End Time) 1 = Splash Tone
Assign option for each External Paging

2 = Chime Tone
Speaker (1 ~ 9).
31-06-04 External Speaker Control CODEC Transmit 1 ~ 63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32

Gain Setup
Define the CODEC transmitting gain settings

for the external speaker using an amplifier.
31-06-05 External Speaker Control CODEC Receive External Paging Speaker/Zone: 32

Gain Setup 1~9
Select the CODEC gain types (1 ~ 32) for each 1 ~ 63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)

External Page Speaker.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
31-07-01 Combined Paging Assignments 0 ~ 64 1

Assign an External Paging Group (0 ~ 8) to an (0 = All internal paging)
Internal Paging Zone (0 = All Call, Zones
1 ~ 64) for Combined Paging. When an
extension user makes a Combined Page, they
simultaneously broadcast into both the External
and Internal Zone.
31-08-01 BGM on External Paging BGM External Paging Speaker/Zone: 0

Assign the Background Music option for each 1~9
External Paging Speaker. If enabled, the 0 = Disable
system plays Background Music over the zone 1 = Enable
when it is idle.
Operation
To Page into an external zone:

1. Press External Paging key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 19 for External Paging zones or 20 for
External All Call Paging).
2. Make announcement.
- OR -

- OR -

- OR -
Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code (1~8 or 0 for Internal/External All Call).
Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page.
If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group, the page may be
announced as an External Page only.
3. Make an announcement.

Issue 2.0
- OR -
Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code (1~8 or 0 for Internal/External All Call).
If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group, the page may be
announced as an External Page only.

Issue 2.0
Paging, External (VRS)
Description
Paging, External (VRS) enables the use of prerecorded VRS messages for External Paging. The
advantage of this feature is saving time for the users who regularly use External Paging with the same
announcements.
Conditions
If VRS External Paging is answered using the meet me paging service code and both
parties are connected, VRS stops the announcement.
Paging, External (VRS) does not support Internal Paging. Also, combined paging is not
supported.
The paging telephone must remain off-hook during paging. If the paging telephone hangs
up during paging, VRS External paging stops.
If an invalid VRS number is dialed or, there is no recorded VRS greeting, the caller hears an
error tone.
Paging, External (VRS) will not play the starting and ending tone if enabled. If the starting
and ending tones are needed, they must be recorded in the VRS message itself.
After the recorded VRS message is finished, the paging telephone hears a busy tone.
When using the speaker mode on a paging telephone, the telephone becomes idle after the
recorded VRS message finishes.
The Paging, External (VRS) feature is supported with Embedded VRS.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Cordless Terminals
ISDN Terminals
H.323 Terminals
2-1116 Paging, External (VRS)

Issue 2.0
Standard SIP Terminals
CPU license for VRS
GCD-8DLCA, GCD-16DLCA or GCD-LTA for PGD(2)-U10 ADP
PGD(2)-U10 ADP for Zone Paging
1- or 2-way amplifier and speakers (locally provided)
Related Features
Paging, External

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Message digits
Define the service code to record or erase a
VRS message.
setup.
In case of normal Paging via External
speaker: <Service code+Paging group
number (0: all, 1-8)>.
In case of VRS Paging via External speaker:
<Service code+ +Paging group number
(0: all, 1-8)+VRS message number
(001-100).
Paging, External (VRS) 2-1117

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Level) VRS Record (VRS Msg Operation) 1 = On COS 1 ~ 15 = 1
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to COS 1 ~ 14 = 0

record, erase and listen to VRS messages. COS 1 ~ 15 = 1
Operation
External VRS Messaging:
To page into an external zone with VRS message:

1. Pick up the handset or press Speaker at multiline terminal.
2. Dial 703 and then the External Paging Zone code (1-8, 0 for all call).
3. Dial VRS message Number (001-100).
5. Press Speaker at multiline terminal or on-hook.
- OR -
1. Press DSS/One Touch Key programmed for External Paging.
To Program One Touch Key:
The following example shows how to program a On Touch key for External Paging zone 2 to play VRS
greeting number 099.
1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 7, 5, 1.
3. Press Line Key to be programmed.
4. Dial 0, 1 (Function Code for DSS/One Touch Key).
5. Dial 7, 0, 3, , 2, 0, 9, 9.
6. Press Speaker.
When using the Paging, External (VRS) feature, FC 20 (External All Call Paging code) cannot be used
as a programmable function key.
2-1118 Paging, External (VRS)

Issue 2.0
Paging, Internal
Description
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other multiline terminal users. When a
user makes a Zone Paging announcement, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions in the
zone dialed. With All Call Paging, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions programmed to
receive All Call Paging. An extension can be a member of only one Internal Paging Zone. Like External
Paging, Internal Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement without
calling each extension individually.
Combined Paging
Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding
external zone. For example, you can Page your company warehouse and outside loading dock at the
same time. Combined Paging is available for Paging zones 1~8 and All Call. Optionally, you can change
the Combined Paging assignments. For example, you can associate External Paging Zone 1 with
Internal Paging Zone 4. You can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key. When an All Call
External Page Function Key is programmed, it includes both the external zones and the assigned
internal zone(s). If the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group, the
announcement is made on the external zones only.
Conditions
Internal Paging does not require a PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
A maximum of 50 extensions is supported for Internal or All Call Paging Group.
A maximum of 50 TDM extensions are supported for Internal or All Call Paging Group.
A maximum of 50 IP extensions are supported for Internal or All Call Paging Group.
A system must have at least one extension port idle to make an Internal Page. If no
extension port is idle, the extension performing the Page hears a busy signal.
There are 64 available Internal Paging Groups (Zones).
A Class of Service option is available in system programming to prevent display telephones
from showing incoming internal paging information. This allows the system to save
processor time and speed up system operation.
An extension user can broadcast an announcement over an External Paging Zone.
Function keys simplify Internal Paging operation.
You must assign an extension to a two-digit zone in Program 31-02-01 before you can
assign a function key using the 751 service code as a two-digit Internal Group Paging Zone
key.
If Auto Hold in Program 15-02-07 is set to Cut (1), when a user presses the page key while
on a trunk call, the trunk call is put on hold.
Paging, Internal 2-1119

Issue 2.0
A single line telephone can initiate an Internal Zone page, but cannot receive an Internal
Zone Page.
If an internal paging group has only IP Multiline Stations, mutlicast is used for the page. IP
multiline terminals must have a gateway programmed to accomplish a multicast
transmission. When an actual gateway device does not exist on the network, a dummy
gateway address on the same subnet must be defined.
When a paging group contains all IP phones, the page is sent via a multicast message from
the initiating IP phone. If a paging group has IP and TDM phones, when and IP phone
initiates the page, a message is sent to the CPU and the CPU sends the multicast message
for the IP phones.
To receive the All Call Page, the extension must be assigned to an Internal Page Group.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Meet Me Paging
Paging, External
2-1120 Paging, Internal

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Service code setup. digits



Assign function keys for Internal Paging Zones 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 21 + page zone) and Internal All Call 751 by default) Manual for
Paging (code 22). 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1


31-01-01 System Options for Internal/External Paging Maximum of 12 characters. Group All
All Call Paging Zone Name
Assign a name to the All Call Internal Paging
Zone. The name shows on the display of the
telephone making the announcement.


Paging announcement (External Paging only).
31-02-01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Page Zones: 0, 1 ~ 9, 0 for IP Station
Internal Paging Group Number 00, 01 ~ 64 1 for TDM
Assign extensions to Internal Paging Zones. An 0 ~ 64 Station
extension must be assigned to a 2-digit zone to (0 = No Setting)
access any 2-digit zone.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
31-02-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 0 = Off 0

Internal All Call Paging Receiving 1 = On
Turn Off or On All Call Internal Paging for each
extension. If allowed, extensions can make
and receive All Call Internal Paging

announcements. If prevented, extension can
make only All Call Internal Paging
announcements.
31-03-01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Maximum of 12 characters. 01 = Group 1

Paging Group Name 02 = Group 2
Program names for the Internal Paging Zones. :

64 = Group 64
31-07-01 Combined Paging Assignments Internal Page Zones: 0, 1 ~ 9, 1

For each External Paging Group (1 ~ 8 and 0 00, 01 ~ 64
for All Call), assign a corresponding Internal 0 ~ 64

Zone for Combined Paging (0 = All internal paging)
Operation
To make an Internal Page announcement:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press the zone Internal Paging key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 21 + 0 or 1~9 or 01~64 for
zones (0 or 00 for All Call).
- OR -
Press Speaker or lift the handset.

2. Dial 701 and the Paging Zone number (0~9 or 00~64).
Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging.
- OR -
Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1~8 or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group, the page is announced
as an External Page only.
2-1122 Paging, Internal

Issue 2.0

4. Hang up.

Issue 2.0
Park
Description
Park places a call in a wait state (called a Park Orbit) so an extension user may pick it up. Park has two
types: System and Personal. System Park allows a user to have a call wait in System Orbit. Personal
Park allows a user to Park a call at their extension so a co-worker can pick it up. After parking a call in
orbit, a user can Page the person receiving the call and hang up. The paged party can dial a code or
press a programmed Park key to pick up the call. With Park, it is not necessary to locate a person to
handle their calls. A call parked for too long recalls the extension that initially parked it, however the call
remains in the park orbit until it is answered. There are 64 Park Orbits (1~64) available for use.
Extended Park
An extension Class of Service determines whether it uses the normal Park Orbit Recall time or the
Extended Park Orbit Recall time. The timers are set in system programming. When an extension with
Extended Park Recall Class of Service option parks a call, it recalls after the Extended Park Orbit Recall
time. When an extension with the Normal Park Orbit Recall Class of Service option parks a call, it recalls
after the normal Park Orbit Recall time, however the call remains in the park orbit until it is answered.
Programmable Function Key and Service Code Available for Personal Park
The Personal Park feature is enhanced by using a Programmable Function Key or service code (3-digit
or 1-digit) to place a call in Personal Park. This option is available for multiline terminals, single line sets,
and UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless telephones and can be used for analog or ISDN trunks.
Conditions
An extension user can park a call in any Park Orbit. However, an extension user can pick
up only a call Parked by a member of their own Park group (see Program 24-03).
When a 2-button telephone user parks a call, they must wait the Interdigit Time (normally
10 seconds) before trying to retrieve it.
An extension can have only one Personal Park key.
When the terminal that has a call in Personal Park is unplugged, the Personal Park is
released and the held caller is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold.
2-1124 Park
Issue 2.0
The following table indicates what condition the service codes and Programmable Function
key can be used.
Using
Using 3-Digit Using 1-Digit
Status Personal
Service Code Service Code
Park Key
Speaking Not Available Not Available Available

ICM Dial Tone or Busy Tone Available Not Available Available
Calling Another Extension Not Available Available Available
(with outside call on
hold and when
called extension
does not answer)
Receiving a Personal Park Recall Not Available Not Available Available
A user can display the Caller ID of a call in Park if Caller ID is enabled (1) in Program
20-09-02.
Park keys can be assigned on DSS consoles.
Calls on virtual extension keys cannot be put in Personal Park if Program 15-18-01 is set to
Land on the key (1).
Function keys simplify Park operation.
One Touch keys programmed for Park Hold Service Code cannot be used to park calls
without using Hold or Transfer.
Call Park Step Call is supported in the local system only.
A parked call cannot be retrieved from Hold Dial Tone (Second dial tone).
When a call is parked from a virtual extension, the virtual extension is released.
When parking a call from a virtual extension, Programs 15-02-21 and 15-18-01 must be set
to 1.
Park Group assignment is by the terminal extension, not the virtual extension.
When a call parked from a virtual extension recalls, it will ring the terminal the virtual
extension is programmed on, not the virtual extension key.
Park 2-1125
Issue 2.0
Personal Park at a Co-Workers Extension
Description
The Personal Park feature allows an extension user to place an outside call, which is on hold, on
Personal Park at a co-workers extension after placing an intercom call. This feature is available for
keysets, SLTs, IP terminals and IP DECT terminals.
Conditions
If an internal call forwards before Personal Park on a Co-Worker's Extension is performed,
the call is Parked in the originator's Personal Park orbit.
This feature is not available when calling a Department Groups pilot number.
If an extension user has a call in Personal Park and the terminal is unplugged, the Personal
Park is cancelled and the held caller hears a busy tone.
This feature does not work when calling a Networked or virtual extension.
If an extension already has a call in their Personal Park Orbit, the Personal Park for a
Co-Worker's Extension will not work until the first call is retrieved from Park.
A Personal Park Programmable Function Key or the Soft Key must be used to park the call
in a co-workers park. This operation cannot be done using a service code.
An extension can park a call in any Park Orbit. However, an extension can only pick up a
call Parked by a member of its own Park group (see Program 24-03).
If an extension is not allowed access to trunks in the Access Maps (Program 14-07 and
Program 15-06), calls in Park and on Hold can be blocked.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
2-1126 Park
Issue 2.0
Related Features
Caller ID
Hold

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Park Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code used for placing a call in digits

Park.

Answer for Park Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code used for answering a call digits

in Park.
Station Park Hold 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code used for placing a call in a digits

Personal Park.
11-16-11 Single Digit Service Code Setup Station Customize the one-digit service No Setting
Park Hold code used when placing a call in
Customize the one-digit service code used Personal Park.
when placing a call in Personal Park.

Set whether pressing a One-Touch key Handsfree)
preselects the key or goes off-hook to access
the key.
Park 2-1127
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a keys as a Park Orbit key (code 04 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
plus Park orbit number [01 ~ 64]) or as a 751 by default) Manual for
Personal Park key.
752 by default)

Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode 1 = Land On the Key
Set whether an incoming call to a Virtual
Extension/CAR resides on the Virtual
Extension/CAR key once answered (1) or
appears on a CAP Key/CO Appearance Line
key (0). This setting applies to multiline
terminals, single line telephones and virtual
extension numbers.

Display Mode when pacing a call on Virtual 1 = Actual Station Name
Extension Key
Define whether calls to or from a Virtual
Extension Key display the Virtual Extension
Key name or the name of the extension on
which it resides.

extension port =
Class 1
20-11-19 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer 0 = Normal COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Service) Hold/Extended Park 1 = Extended

Service should allow normal or extended Park.




Service) Station Park Hold Mode 1 = On
Turn Off or On an extension users ability to

Personal Park on a Co-Worker's extension.

Service) Call Park Automatically Search 1 = On
Turn Off or On using the Call Park

Automatically Search option.
2-1128 Park
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Callback Time
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an
extension for this time. After this time the
system invokes the Hold recall time again.

Cycling between Hold recall time and callback
time and normal or extended (Recall) Park Hold
time continues until a user answers the call.
Normal
Set the Park Hold Time. A call left parked
longer than this time recalls the extension that
initially parked it.
Extended (Recall)
Set the Extended Park Hold Time. A call left
parked longer than this time recalls the
extension that initially parked it.
24-03-01 Park Group Park Group Number 1 ~ 64 1

Assign an extension to a Park Group. An
extension user can pick up only a call parked

by a member of their own Park Group.
Operation
To Park a call in a system orbit:
You can Park Intercom or trunk calls.

TIP
1. Press the Park key (Program 15-07 or SC 752: 04 + orbit).

The Park key LED lights.
If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.
2. Use Paging to announce call.
If not picked up, the call recalls to you.
- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal or 2-button telephone, press Hold.

- OR -
At a 500/2500 single line telephone, hookflash.
Park 2-1129
Issue 2.0
2. Dial #6 and the Park orbit (01~64).

If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.
If you hear a busy tone, the orbit is busy. Dial #6 if enabled in Program 20-11-27 (Call Park
AutoSearching) to search for an idle park location in ascending order.
3. Use Paging to announce the call.
The parked call recalls after the Park Hold Time (Program 24-01-06). The call rings the extension to
which it recalled for the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program 24-01-02). The call then goes on Hold
for the Park Hold Time, then recalls again for the Hold Recall Callback Time. The call continues to
cycle between Hold and recall until the extension user answers the call or the outside party hangs up.
To pick up a parked call:

2. Press the Park key (Program 15-07 or SC 752: 04 + orbit).
- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal or 2-button telephone, press Speaker.

- OR -

2. Dial 6 and the Park orbit (01~64).
To park a call at your extension:

1. Press Hold and dial 757.
- OR -
Press Hold and the Personal Park key (Program 15-07 or SC 752: 07).
At a 500/2500 single line telephone, hookflash instead of pressing Hold.
A confirmation tone is heard and the call is parked at your extension. If the extension has a Personal
Park key, the key flashes.
The Personal Park single-digit service code (Program 11-16-11) cannot be used in this operation.
2. Page your co-worker to pick up the call.
3. Press Speaker to hang up (or hang up at the single line telephone).
To park a personal call at your extension after trying to call a co-worker:

1. While on a call, press Transfer/Hold.
Program 20-11-26=0 for an extension's Class of Service required.
2-1130 Park
Issue 2.0
2. Dial a co-workers extension number.

The co-worker does not answer.
3. Press the Personal Park key (Program 15-07 or SC 752: 07).

- OR -
Dial the Personal Park single digit code (Program 11-16-11).

The Intercom call to the co-worker is dropped. A confirmation tone is heard and the outside call is
parked at your extension.
If the co-worker answers the call, the outside call rings back after the intercom call is completed. The
call can then be placed in Personal park if desired.
To Park a personal call at a co-workers extension after calling them:
An extensions Class of Service must allow the user to park the call at a co-workers extension
(Program 20-11-26 = 1).
NOTE
1. While on a call, press Transfer/HOLD.

2. Dial a co-workers extension number.
The co-worker does not answer.
- OR -
Press the StaP Soft Key.

- OR -
Dial the Personal Park single digit code (Program 11-16-11).

The Intercom call to the co-worker is dropped. A confirmation tone is heard and the call is parked at
the co-workers extension.
If the co-worker does not answer the call, it will recall to the originators extension.
To pick up a call parked at your extension:

- OR -

At a single line telephone, do not press Speaker.
The Personal Park single-digit service code (Program 11-16-11) cannot be used in this operation.
To answer a call parked at a co-workers extension:

1. Press Speaker, dial plus the co-workers extension number.
At a single line telephone, do not press Speaker.
Park 2-1131
Issue 2.0
To display Caller ID for a call in Park:
When Program 15-02-08 is set to 0 (preselect) for this feature.

1. With Program 15-02-08 set to 0 (preselect) and a call in Park, press the Park key. (Program
15-07 or SC 752: 04).
- OR -
With Program 15-02-08 set to 1 (One-Touch), and a call in Park, press Feature, then the Park
key (Program 15-07 or SC 752: 04).
Call Park Step Call:
To Park a call in the first available system orbit:
You can Park Intercom or trunk calls.

TIP
1. Press Hold or Transfer.

2. Dial #6.
If you hear a busy tone, the orbit is busy. Proceed to step 3.
3. Dial .
Program 20-11-27 must be enabled in the multiline terminals Class of Service.

If not picked up, the call will recall to you.
- OR -

2. Press the DSS/BLF key programmed as #6
(The Park location will be displayed in the LCD).
2-1132 Park
Issue 2.0
PBX Compatibility
Description
You can connect your telephone system trunks to Centrex/PBX lines, rather than to Telco trunk circuits.
This makes the trunk inputs to the system 500/2500 type compatible Centrex/PBX extensions, rather
than Telco circuits. PBX Compatibility lets the system be a node (i.e., satellite) in a larger private
telephone network. To place outside calls when the system is behind a PBX, telephone system users
must first dial the PBX trunk access code (usually 9).
The system provides the following PBX Compatibility options:

PBX Trunk Access Code Screening
The system can monitor the numbers users dial and screen for PBX trunk access codes. The
system can screen up to four groups of trunk access codes. The codes can have one or two digits,
consisting of the digits 0~9, # and . (You use Line Key 1 as a wild card entry.)
PBX Trunk Toll Restriction
The system can provide the Toll Restriction for the PBX trunk, or restriction can be handled solely
by the connected PBX. If the telephone system provides the restriction, it restricts the digits dialed
after the PBX access code.
PBX Call Restriction
When the telephone system does the Toll Restriction, it can further restrict users from dialing PBX
extensions. In this case, the only valid numbers are those dialed after the PBX trunk access code.
The only PBX facility telephone system users can access are the PBX outside trunks.
Automatic Pause
The system automatically pauses when it sees a PBX trunk access code during manual dialing,
Speed Dialing, Last Number Redial, Repeat Redial and Save Number Dialed. This gives the
connected PBX time to set up its trunk circuits.
Conditions
When using Account Codes, do not use in a PBX access code. Otherwise, after the , the
trunk stops sending digits to the central office.
The system automatically pauses after it finds a PBX access code in a Speed Dialing bin.
If Speed Dialing routes a call to a PBX trunk, it does not automatically insert a PBX access
code. It outdials the digits just as they are stored.
Users answer incoming calls on PBX trunks just like other trunks. All relevant access and
Ring Group programming applies.
Except for dialing the PBX access code, users place calls on PBX trunks just like other
trunks. All relevant access programming applies. Refer to the Central Office Calls, Placing
on page 2-209 feature for more details.
PBX Compatibility 2-1133

Issue 2.0
You can have DILs route from the connected PBX. Users can access these trunks for
outgoing PBX calls. All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply.
Flash may allow access to certain PBX features like Transfer. Make sure you program
Flash for compatibility with the connected PBX.
The system does not provide automatic Pulse to Tone Conversion after outdialing the PBX
trunk access code.
You can program incoming DISA trunks to be outgoing PBX trunks. All PBX Compatibility
restrictions and programming apply.
PBX trunks can follow normal system Toll Restriction.
Users can get outbound access to PBX trunks through Trunk Groups and/or Trunk Group
Routing. All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply.
If the system routes a call to a PBX trunk, it does not automatically insert the PBX access
code. It outdials the call just as the user dialed it.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Account Code Entry
Code Restriction
2-1134 PBX Compatibility

Issue 2.0
Flash
Ring Groups
Trunk Groups
Trunk Group Routing

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Line 400
Set these options for compatibility with the 1 ~ 57
connected PBX. (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB

intervals)
14-01-08 Basic Trunk Data Setup Toll Restriction 0 = Restriction Disabled (No) 1
For each PBX trunk port, Enable/ Disable Toll 1 = Restriction Enabled (Yes)
Restriction.
At default, Program 14-02-01 is set to 2

2 = DTMF
(DTMF).
Set Extended Ring Detect or Immediate Ring 0 = Normal/delayed
Detect for the trunk. For T1 loop/ground start 1 = Immediate Ringing
trunks, this option must be set to 1 for the
trunks to ring and light correctly.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

For each PBX trunk port, enter 1. Make a 1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
separate entry for each Night Service mode. 2 = Not Used

3 = CTX assume 9

Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1 ~ 15) to each 1 ~ 9 (9 = Power Failure Mode)
21-05-12 Toll Restriction Class PBX Call Restriction 0 = Disable (No) 1 ~ 6, 8 ~ 15 = 0

For each Toll Restriction Class, enter 1 to 1 = Enable (Yes) 7=1
restrict calls on the PBX trunk to outside calls
only. Enter 0 to allow users to dial PBX
extensions.
21-06-08 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup PBX Dial (maximum of two digits) Dial (Up to two
Access Code digits)
Enter the system PBX access codes. The default:
system can have up to four codes. A code can
have one or two digits. Valid entries are 0 ~ 9,
Table 1 ~ 4 = No
Setting
# and . Use Line Key 1 as a dont care digit. If
using Account Codes, do not use the in the
PBX Access Code.
Operation
To place a call over a PBX trunk:

1. At multiline terminal, press Speaker and dial 704.
- OR -
At single line telephone, lift the handset and dial 704.

2. Dial PBX trunk group number (1~9 or 001~100).
3. Dial PBX access code and number.
- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal only, press PBX trunk group key (Program 15-07 or SC 752: 02 +
group).
2. Dial PBX access code and number.
- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker and dial 9.

- OR -
2-1136 PBX Compatibility

Issue 2.0
2. Dial the PBX access code and number.

- OR -

- OR -

2. Dial #9.
3. Dial the PBX trunk number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
- OR -
1. Press the PBX trunk key (Program 15-07 or SC 752: 01 + 1 to 400).

In all cases above, Toll Restriction may prevent your call.

Issue 2.0
PC Programming
Description
The UNIVERGE SV9100 has three different methods for programming. The first is via the handset, the
second is by PCPro and third by WebPro.
PCPro is a Microsoft Windows based application. It allows the technician/system administrator to

download a database from the system, make changes, and then upload.
The WebPro application is a web server running on the GCD-CP10 blade of the SV9100 system. No
special installation program is required. When programming the system, use Internet Explorer other web
browsers are not currently supported.
An overview of the three programming applications is shown below.
Figure 2-42 PC Programming Overview
PCPro
(Modem)
Handset
LAN
WebPro PCPro
(IP) (IP)
Connecting
As can be seen in Figure 2-42 PC Programming Overview, three connection types are available to
PCPro/WebPro.
If using PCPro, a user can connect directly, remotely using a modem or via LAN. A connection with the
system is made via the Connection Dialog in the application. (Refer to Figure 2-43 PCPro Connection
Dialog on page 2-1139.)
2-1138 PC Programming
Issue 2.0
Modem (remote) connections are established via the internal GCD-CP10 modem. To access the
modem, dial a trunk that is directed to the modem access service code (DIL or DID) or dial an
extension that is redirected to the modem access service code. When connecting with a Modem, a
Dial Up Connection (PPP) must be set up in Windows Network Connections.
When uploading via a Dial Up connection, uploading card configuration (Hardware Upload) is not
supported.
IP (LAN) connections are established via the Ethernet connector on the GCD-CP10 blade.
Figure 2-43 PCPro Connection Dialog
PC Programming 2-1139
Issue 2.0
If using WebPro, a user can connect only via IP. To connect, launch Internet Explorer and enter the IP
address of the switch (refer to Figure 2-44 WebPro Login Screen).
Figure 2-44 WebPro Login Screen
WebPro System Programming
WebPro can be used to edit system programming from a Web browser. System Data, License
Information, and Modification History are among the items that can be viewed in WebPro (refer to Figure
2-45 WebPro Home Page).
Figure 2-45 WebPro Home Page
Issue 2.0
The Maintenance Debug section is added to allow the WebPro user to turn on debug traces for
engineering troubleshooting (refer to Figure 2-46 Maintenance Debug Screen).
Figure 2-46 Maintenance Debug Screen
WebPro End User Programming
WebPro has an End User Login for which extensions can program functions for their own extension.
They can program Function keys, Virtual Extension ringing assignment, Station Speed Dial, InMail
features, Station Name, Call Forwarding, Display Language, Ring Tone and End User Password.
To login to the WebPro End User Programming, point to the IP address of the system in a web browser
like you would logging into WebPro. Use the extension number as the User Name (refer to Figure 2-47
WebPro End User Screen) and the password is assigned in Program 90-28-01 (Default is 1111).
Figure 2-47 WebPro End User Screen
Issue 2.0
Conditions
When connecting via a dial up connection, a Dial Up Connection (PPP) must be configured
in Windows Network Connections.
When uploading via a Dial Up connection, uploading card configuration (Hardware Upload)
is not supported.
The hardware/software requirements for the host PC running the PCPro application are:
Item Requirement
CPU Pentium III 598MHz (minimum)

Pentium 4 2.5GHz (recommended)
Memory 128MB of RAM, 256MB (recommended)
Operating System (OS) Windows XP or Microsoft Vista
Windows 7 (32- and 64-bit)
Other Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher
Communication Port LAN, or Modem
Disk Space 35MB for PCPro (minimum)
TCP Port TCP port 8000 must be open between the terminal
and the host PC for uploading/downloading via LAN.
PCPro/WebPro TCP port is set for 8000 at default,
but can be changed via WebPro using Program
90-38-02. Program 90-38-02 is not accessible from
Phone Programming or PCPro.
Screen Resolution 800 x 600 (minimum)
1024 x 760 (recommended)
The hardware/software requirements for the host PC running WebPro are:
Item Requirement
Browser MS Internet Explorer 6.0 (or higher)

Network IP connection to the KTS
Screen Resolution 800 x 600 (minimum)
1024 x 760 (recommended)
You can have a maximum of four users logged into WebPro anytime.
You can have up to two phones in programming mode anytime.
Issue 2.0
You can have two WebPro users and two phone programming users logged in at the same
time for a total of four users in programming mode simultaneously. However, the two
phone programming users do not show up in session management in WebPro.
PCPro can be logged in with only one user. This is allowed only if no other users are
logged into programming mode (PCPro, WebPro, or Phone). Also, if a user is connected to
the switch via PCPro, no other user can log in through PCPro, WebPro, or Phone
Programming.
Only one PCPro/WebPro/Handset can be programming the switch anytime.
When programming via WebPro/PCPro, some data requires you to logout before the switch
fully applies the changes. These Programs are: 10-21-2, 11-02 (for directory dial), 11-04
(for directory dial), 13-04 (for directory dial), 14-04, 15-05, 15-15, 16-02, 23-02, 31-02,
41-02, 41-17, 47-02, 47-03, 82-11 and 83-11.
In the card configuration window, if you click a card type in the main menu, the menu
closes. You must mouse over the card type to open the submenu to list all cards of that
type.
To access the modem over K-CCIS, route the modem access service code to the target
switch. Do not call a station that is call forwarded to the service code. When accessing the
modem over K-CCIS, enter the service code to be dialed in PC Pro.
PC Pro follows the PC dialing properties. If dialing a service code, you must turn off the dial 9
for outside line and area code inclusion or PC Pro will dial these digits as well.
Some program items require second initialization of the KTS before they take effect. These
Programs are: 10-12-01, 10-12-02, 10-12-03, 10-12-04, 10-13-01, 10-13-02, 10-13-03,
10-14, 10-15, 10-16-01, 10-16-02, 10-16-03, 10-16-04, 20-01-03, 47-01-01, 80-01,
80-02-01, 80-02-02, 80-02-03, 80-02-04, 80-03, 80-04, 84-03-01, 84-03-02, 84-03-06,
84-03-07, 84-03-08, 84-05-01, 84-05-02, 84-06-01, 84-06-02, 84-06-03, 84-06-04,
84-06-05, 84-06-06, 84-06-07, 84-06-08, 84-06-09, 84-06-10, 84-06-11, 84-09 and 84-10.
PCPro and WebPro have been enhanced allowing T1/ISDN layer 1 status, System Alarms
and SRAM information to be viewed. The SRAM displays Day/Night Mode information,
Trunk information (Trunk to Trunk Transfer Set/Not Set, Trunk disabled), Read List,
Department Group information (DND, Transfer settings) and Extension information
(Forwarding settings, Alarm settings, DND, BGM and more).
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 PC Programming Manual,

REFERENCE
Appendix L - Maintenance Features for details.
WebPro supports remote upgrade and is only available in the Manufacture (MF) and
Installer (IN) level logins.
WebPro supports Backup of the system data and also the restoring of a Backup.
Backup data is saved with a .pcpx file extension.
When the Backup is restored, the system resets after the upload is completed.
Issue 2.0
Only available in Manufacture (MF), Installer (IN), and System Administrator 1 (SA1) level
logins.
When other users are logged in by WebPro or Handset programming, the backup or
restoration of system data cannot be performed.
During Netlink Replication Web/PC Programming or Handset Programming is not

accessible.
Issue 2.0
Outbound IP Connection
Description
Outbound IP Connection for PC Programming allows the system to make a PC Pro Connection via an
outgoing call over IP, to a preprogrammed IP Address, upon receipt of an incoming CO call matching a
preprogrammed CLI. When the target number of DID incoming call matches with the service code of
Outbound IP Connection the SV9100 compares the received CLI with the registered CLI (Program
90-69-03). When the received caller ID and registered caller ID match, the SV9100 sends a TCP
establishment request to a waiting PCPro application. When the caller ID does not match, the call will
either step to the locations in Program 22-11-05 and Program 22-11-06 if configured or, send a busy tone
to the caller. Alternatively, via dialing service code from a Multiline Terminal, an outgoing IP connection
can be made to a waiting PCPro terminal with a preprogrammed IP Address. This allows for a
pre-authorized connection for programming purposes without using CO Lines and potentially reducing
the cost of calls for maintenance. The outgoing IP call connects by sending a TCP establishment request
to a waiting PC Programming terminal. A fixed, encrypted, user ID and password are used to verify the
connection.
If an unsuccessful connection attempt is made, this can be output as an alarm.
Conditions
SV9100 system software supports Outbound IP Connection (PC Programming required).
Outbound IP Connection for programming is not available when an existing WebPro/PCPro
or station programming session is active.
SV9100 changes the port number of TCP at each connection. The range used is
61050~61099.
Outbound IP Connection Service code can be dialed across CCIS.
Outbound IP Connection to a secondary side of Net-Link is not supported.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Issue 2.0
Required Software
None
CPU
PC Programming
Related Features
Alarm Reports

PC Programming:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
If the network section is: |255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
0,
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
127, |255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
128.0, |255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
191.255, |255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
192.0.0, |255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
223.255.255
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

Special Access) Modem Access
Assign the service code to be used to access

the internal modem on the GCD-CP10.

Define the service type for the trunk intended to 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
access the internal modem as 4:DIL. VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL

5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Assign the Modem Access service code set in Extension Number (maximum of
Program 11-15-14 as the destination extension eight digits)
for the DIL trunk for modem access. Pilot Number

22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).
Programming
Manual for

default values.
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

used to connect.
are used to login.
default values.
Level 1)
Level 2)
Level 1)
90-26-01 Program Access Level Setup Maintenance 1 = MF Level Refer to the

Level 2 = IN Level Level indication
Define access levels to each program. This 3 = SA Level for each
program defines which administrator accounts individual
4 = SB Level
in Program 90-02 can access the program. If a program (located
program is not accessible, it does not appear in in the upper left
PCPro/WebPro. corner at the
beginning of
each program).
90-28-01 User Programming Password Setup Maximum of eight digits 1111

Password Fixed four digits
Use to set the password to enter the user

programming mode.
Outbound IP Connection:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

for each blade. This program represents in the slot. Manual for
default values for
different data depending on the blade installed
in the slot. Refer to the SV9100 Programming a more detailed

Manual for a more detailed description of this description of the
program. 10-03-XX
programs.
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Special Access) Outbound IP Connect for
Programming
Assign the service code for Outbound IP
Connection for Programming. This Service
Code is used to invoke TCP establishment
request from SV9100 to remote PCPro.
90-10-01 System Alarm Setup Alarm Type 0 = Not Set Alarm 58:
Indicates the alarm type for Failure of Outbound 1 = Major Alarm Failure of
IP Connection for PC Programming. 2 = Minor Alarm Connection
(Outbound IP
Connection)
Adding
parameter:
01:
Programming
session is
already active
02: Not setting of
IP Address or
Port
03: Caller ID is
not match.
10: Failure of
getting IP
Address.
11: Socket Open
Error 12: Socket
Port Setting
Error.
13: TCP Session
Timeout
90-36-01 Firmware Update Time Setting Firmware Year: 0 ~ 99 No Setting

Update Schedule Time Month: 0 ~ 12
Read Only program. Day: 00 ~ 31
Hour: 00 ~ 23
Minute: 00 ~ 59
90-36-02 Firmware Update Time Setting Update 0 = Non Active No Setting

Mode 1 = Activated
Read Only program.
90-36-03 Firmware Update Time Setting Update Maximum of 256 characters. No Setting
Report
Read Only program.
90-69-01 Outbound IP Connection Setup Port 1 ~ 65535 8000

Number
Define the port number used for Outbound IP

Connection for Programming.
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-69-02 Outbound IP Connection Setup IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

Define the IP Address that the System will
make the TCP establishment request to. I.E.
the IP address of the PC with the waiting PC
Programming.
90-69-03 Outbound IP Connection Setup Caller ID Maximum of 16 digits No Setting

Define Caller ID number that the system to (0 ~ 9, , #9)
compare with received Caller ID.
Operation
Outbound IP Connection
1. Open PC Pro on PC that has same IP address as assigned in Program 90-69-02.
2. Go to Communications/Connect.
3. Select Outbound IP.
4. Input Connection port (same as Program 90-69-01).
5. Select Connect.
When PCPro does not receive a TCP established request within three minutes (fixed time), it ends the
state of "Attempting to Connect".
6. Dial Outbound IP Connection Service Code (Program 11-15-16).
-OR-
7. Call the DID that points to the Outbound IP Connection Service Code (Program 11-15-16) with
the matching CID (Program 90-69-03).
8. After connection hang up.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 PC Programming Manual for further operational

REFERENCE
details.
Issue 2.0
PCPro and WebPro Comparison
The table below gives a quick feature comparison of PCPro and WebPro.
For additional details refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 PC Programming Manual.

REFERENCE
Table 2-80 PCPro and WebPro Comparison
Feature
Application
Feature Comments
PCPro WebPro
Installation Program Y
File Handling File New/Open/Save/Save As Y
File Properties Y PCPro supports save/view/modify
UNIVERGE SV9100 Site Information,
password protect files, add notes,
connection settings.
Version Conversion Y PCPro can convert databases between
different UNIVERGE SV9100 versions.
Programming Offline Y Ability to program offline and upload to the
Modes UNIVERGE SV9100 at a later date.
Live Update Y Y Changes made in WebPro apply
immediately. No upload is required.
PCPro has Interactive Mode to make live
changes.
Remote Upload Y PCPro can download the database from
Connection the UNIVERGE SV9100 to allow backups.
Download Y
Connection Accounts Y PCPro supports Direct, Modem and IP
connections.
WebPro supports only IP.
Accounts Y Y WebPro: Refer to Program 90-02 in the
Programming Manual.
Issue 2.0
Table 2-80 PCPro and WebPro Comparison (Continued)
Feature
Application
Feature Comments
PCPro WebPro
Programming Screen Help Text: System Data Y Y Help in WebPro is more simplified than in
Help Text PCPro.
Control Hint Y Y
Text
Smart Links Y WebPro has more simplified links than

PCPro.
Smart Labels Y Y WebPro has more simplified labels than
PCPro.
Smart Controls Y WebPro has more simplified controls than
PCPro.
Validation Y Y
Multi-Assignments: Extension Y PCPro provides special screens that allow
Numbers multiple values to be set easily. This
Line Keys Y applies mainly to table data. These
(CAP) screens shorten the programming time.
Line Keys Y
(General)
Account Codes Y
Defaults: View Y
Copy: System Data Y Y Copy items in an individual program.
Level
Group Level Y Y Copy data for ports (telephone/trunk).

Modification Tracking Y PCPro keeps track of changes made to a
(See also Modification History.) database. This includes:
1. Changes made to a database that are not yet
saved.
2. Changes made to database that are not yet
uploaded.
Wizards Y Y
Issue 2.0
Feature
Application
Feature Comments
PCPro WebPro
Configuration Blade Configuration Y PCPro provides special screens that

Screens shorten the programming time to setup
Class of Service Y core UNIVERGE SV9100 features.
Night Mode Switching Y
Trunk Access Maps Y
Trunk Groups Y
Department Groups Y
Direct Inward Dialing Y
Ring Groups Y
Timers (Trunk/Telephone) Y
QuickSearch Y Y WebPro has a simplified search facility. It
applies only to programs.
PCPro provides extensive searching on
programs, Wizards and IPK
cross-referencing.
Reports System Data Y PCPro can generate various reports
based on values in the database.
Verify Y
Maintenance Y
CAP Keys Y
Numbering Plan Y
Class of Service Y
Modification History Y
Simulators LCR/ACR Y
Import/Export Speed Dials Y PCPro allows import/export of speed dials
(csv file). It can also import converted IPK
IPK Converted File Y databases.
Program Help Help Pages Y Y WebPro has more simplified help than
PCPro.
Context Sensitive Help Y Y
Issue 2.0
Feature
Application
Feature Comments
PCPro WebPro
Security Application Login Y Y User name/password protection to login to

PCPro/WebPro.
KTS Connection Login Y PCPro connections to a UNIVERGE
SV9100 are user name/password
protected.
File Open Y You can password protect a PCPro saved
database.
Debug/Capture GCD-CP10 Debug Capture Y PCPro provides a tool for capturing debug
information from the UNIVERGE SV9100
GCD-CP10.
SMDR Capture Y PCPro provides a tool for capturing SMDR
reports from the UNIVERGE SV9100.
Modification History Y PCPro keeps a running list of all the
modifications made to a system
databases. It also tracks uploads/
downloads.
System Initialize Y Y This is the ability to initialize the
UNIVERGE SV9100.
System Time Setting Y Y This sets the time on the UNIVERGE
SV9100.
Software Firmware Upload Y The UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD-CP10
Updates firmware can be upgraded via PCPro.
Licensing / KTS Feature Activation Y Y Licensed UNIVERGE SV9100 features
Feature can be activated via PCPro/WebPro. You
Activation
can also see what is licensed.
Issue 2.0
Power Failure Transfer
Description
Power Failure Transfer ensures that a customer has access to the Central Office network during a power
outage. The CO/PBX tip and ring are automatically transferred to a DTL or ITL terminal multiline terminal
with a PSA-L adapter installed.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for the MDF Pin Numbers
REFERENCE
and PFT Connections (Power Failure Transfer Relay 1).
Conditions
The PSA-L is not supported on DTL-2E-1, DTL-6DE-1, ITL-2E-1 and ITL-6DE-1 terminals.
The single line telephones that are installed must provide dialing signal accepted by the
outside exchange (Dial Pulse or Dual Tone Multifrequency).
Multiline telephones with PSA-L adapter or single line telephones cross-connected at the
MDF can be used for this feature.
Single Line or PSA-L equipped multiline telephones and outside lines connected during
power failure are fixed one-to-one.
Single line telephones must be equipped with a ground start button for use with Ground
Start Trunks.
System features cannot be activated from single line telephone or multiline telephone with
PSA-L adapter when Power Failure Transfer is in operation.
When power is restored to the system one of the following happens depending on which
telephone (a single line telephone or multiline telephone with PSA-L adapter) is used:
Power Failure Transfer is cancelled. Calls in progress on Power Failure Transfer lines are
disconnected.
Multiline Telephones with PSA-L Adapter
Calls in progress continue but the display does not show the date, time and system softkeys.
When the user hangs up, the phone automatically switches to Digital mode and the display
returns to normal.
The PSA-L adapter can be set to send DTMF or DP.
The PSA-L is supported on Loop Start Trunks only.
A Power Fail circuit is required. The GCD-4COTB has Power Failure circuits on the first two
ports.
The GPZ-4COTF daughter board does not have Power Fail or Fax Branch Exchange
circuits.
Power Failure Transfer 2-1155

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
PSA-L Handset Adapter
GCD-4COTB
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-02-09 Analog Trunk Data Setup Busy Tone 0 = Disable 0

Detection 1 = Enable
2-1156 Power Failure Transfer

Issue 2.0
Operation
None
Power Failure Transfer 2-1157

Issue 2.0
Description
Prime Line Selection allows a multiline terminal user to place or answer a call over a specific trunk by
lifting the handset. The user does not have to press keys or dial codes. This simplifies handling calls on
a frequently used trunk.
Prime Line Selection has the following two modes of operation:

Outgoing Prime Line Preference
Lifting the handset seizes the Prime Line. Outgoing Prime Line Preference would help a
telemarketer who always needs a free line to call prospective clients. The telemarketer lifts the
handset and the Prime Line is always available. (Outgoing Prime Line Preference may be affected
by Incoming Prime Line Preference refer to the Programming section of this feature.)
Incoming Prime Line Preference
When the Prime Line rings the extension, lifting the handset answers the call. Incoming Prime Line
Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customers
service calls and then dispatch repair technicians. When a customer calls in, the dispatcher lifts
the handset to get their call. (Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize an idle line
appearance refer to the Programming section of this feature.)
Conditions
Prime Line Selection can be assigned for Wireless DECT (SIP) and single line telephones
(Analog 500/2500), however, the telephones cannot access ICM dial tone.
Prime Line Selection directly interacts with line preference.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
2-1158 Prime Line Selection

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Line Preference

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Assign Prime Line to a separate trunk group for Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
outgoing Prime Line selection. (Also refer to to trunk group 1
Program 14-06 and Program 21-02.) with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
1001 ~ 1100: (1000 + Route 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not
All Other Routes
(2 ~ 100) and
Order Numbers
(1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not
Specified)
Prime Line Selection 2-1159

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-07-01 Trunk Access Map Setup Trunk Port 0 = No access Access Maps
Number 1 = Outgoing access only 1 ~ 400 = Trunk
For outgoing Prime Line selection, assign each 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
Prime Line trunk to a different Access Map and 3 = Access only when trunk on assigned with
deny outbound access to all trunks except the Hold option 7 access
Prime Line trunk. (incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold
15-01-02 Basic Extension Data Setup Outgoing 0 = Off 0

Trunk Line Preference 1 = On
Turn Off or On Outgoing Trunk Line Preference

for extensions.
15-02-10 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Idle (Off) 1

Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls 1 = Ringing (On)
Enter 1 if lifting the handset should answer
ringing Prime Line; enter 0 to seize idle line
appearance.
Set assignment so extension(s) can have
access to Prime Line. Deny outbound access to

extensions that should not have Prime Line.

Assign a 00(ICM key) on phones to get an 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Intercom dial tone when both Programs 751 by default) Manual for
15-01-02 and 20-08-21 are turned on for the 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
extension. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
21-02-01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Trunk Groups: 1 ~ 100 1

Assign extension(s) to a Prime Line route for Day/Night Mode: 1 ~ 8
outgoing Prime Line access. Route Table Number:
0 ~ 100
(0 = No Setting)

simultaneously.
2-1160 Prime Line Selection

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign extension(s) to a ring group that eight ports) ring
consists of a Prime Line. for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

Assign a Prime Line to a ring group. Incoming Group Number for
Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
0 = (No Setting)

Mail or InMail)

Service) Automatic Trunk Seizing by 1 = On
Pressing Speaker Key

automatically access Trunk Route when going
Off-hook via the Speaker key.
Operation
To place a call on your Prime Line:

You hear dial tone on your Prime Line.
To answer a call on your Prime Line:

Depending on your Line Preference programming, you either answer the Prime Line or get dial tone
on the idle line appearance.
Prime Line Selection 2-1161

Issue 2.0
Private Line
Description
A Private Line is a trunk reserved for a multiline terminal for placing and answering calls. Users with a
Private Line always know when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their own trunk for
placing calls that are not available to others in the system.
Conditions
Incoming Only The multiline terminal has a Private Line only for incoming calls. The user
cannot place calls on the Private Line.
Outgoing Only The multiline terminal has a Private Line only for outgoing calls. The
Private Line does not ring for incoming calls.
Both Ways The multiline terminal has a Private Line for both incoming and outgoing calls.
Private Lines do not follow Call Forwarding if not Direct Inward Line (DIL).
Other programmed options for outgoing calls also affect a Prime Line.
Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming. Direct
Inward Line (DIL) calls ring an idle Department Group member, then follow Program 22-08
then Program 22-05.
An extension user can have Line Preference options applied to their Private Line.
A Private Line can also be a Prime Line.
You should always program a line key for each Private Line.
Private Lines are available on single line telephones.
Private Lines follow normal Toll Restriction.
An extension user can transfer their Private Line. If other users have hold access, the
destination can answer the transferred Private Line and place it on Hold.
NEC does not recommend assigning ringdown to a private line.
Default Settings
Disabled
2-1162 Private Line

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb
Line Preference
Transfer
InMail

Private Line 2-1163

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-09 Basic Trunk Data Setup Private Line 0 = Disable Private Line 0
Determine if a trunk should be used as a (Normal)
Normal or Private line. 1 = Enable Private Line (Private
A Private Line reserves a trunk for a multiline Line)
terminal for placing and answering calls. A user
with a Private Line always knows when important
calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their
own trunk for placing calls that is not available to
others in the system.
Assign Private Line to the Private Line Access 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
Map (refer to Program 15-06 in this section). 3 = Access only when trunk on assigned with
Use option 5 for Incoming, option 7 for Both Hold option 7 access
Ways and option 4 for Outgoing. In all other (incoming and
Access Maps, assign option 3 to the Private outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
Line. and access
access
on Hold
Assign extension to have Private Line to an
unused Private Line Access Map.

Make sure extension has a line key (e.g., 012) 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
for the Private Line. 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
21-02-01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 1 ~ 100 (Trunk Groups) 1

Change the routing as needed. 0 ~ 100
(0 = No Setting)
2-1164 Private Line

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-02-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Ring Groups: 1 ~ 100 0

Set the Trunk Service to Type 4 if routing 0 = Normal
unanswered Private Lines to voice mail or 0 if 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
not routing to voice mail. VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Assign extension to Private Line ring group. eight ports) ring
Set the ringing in Program 22-06 use option 1 for incoming
Ring Group 1
for Incoming or Both Way Private Lines. Use
option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines. Do not calls. No other

assign any other extensions to the Private Line extensions ring
ring group. for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

Assign Private Line to an unused Private Line Incoming Group Number for
ring group (i.e., a ring group just for the Private Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
Line). 0 = (No Setting)

Mail or InMail)

If routing unanswered Private Lines to voice Extension Number (maximum of
mail, assign DILs to the extensions. eight digits)
22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).
Operation
To place a call on your Private Line:

1. Press Private Line key and then press Speaker or lift the handset.
2. Dial the number.
To answer a call on your Private Line:

1. Press Private Line key, and then press Speaker or lift handset.
Private Line 2-1165

Issue 2.0
To place a call from your multiline terminal on you Private Line:

1. Press the Private Line key, then press Speaker or lift the handset.
2. Dial the number.
To answer a call from your multiline terminal on your Private Line:

1. Press Private Line key or press Speaker or lift handset.
To place a call on your Private line from a single line telephone:

1. Pick up handset.
Private Line dial tone is heard.
2. Dial the number.
To answer a call on you Private Line from a single line telephone:

2-1166 Private Line

Issue 2.0
Description
Each multiline terminal has Programmable Function Keys. Programmable Function Keys simplify placing
calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of a multiline terminal
programmable keys from each multiline terminal. Depending on your telephone style, you can have up
to 48 Programmable Function keys.
Conditions
When a key is programmed using service code 752, that key cannot be programmed with a
function using the 751 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key
programmed by dialing 752 + 04 must be undefined by dialing 000 before it can be
programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 751 + 48.
Using Program 92-01 to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys, copies all
the keys whether or not they exist on the telephone to which the programming is being
copied. This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but
which does not exist on the telephone (displays as DUPLICATE DATA). It is recommend to
either clear these non-existent keys or to copy only from an extension which has the same
or fewer number of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied.
Speed Dialing and One-Touch Calling also offer quick access to calls and features.
Programming a 60-button console requires separate programming.
If the feature key is not listed below, the LCD shows ALL-BLANK. (Program 15-07-01 Line
Key Assign).
Function
Function Display
Number
00 None [All Blank]
01 DSS/One-Touch DSS (xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx = Extension Number)
02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) MIC
03 DND Key DND
04 BGM (ON/OFF) BGM
05 Headset HSET
07 Conference Key CONF
10 Call Forward Immediate CFA
11 Call Forward Busy CFB
12 Call Forward No Answer CFNA
13 Call Forward Busy/No Answer CFBNA
14 Call Forward Both Ring CFBOTH
15 Follow Me FLWME
Programmable Function Keys 2-1167

Issue 2.0
Function
Function Display
Number
If a key is programmed as a DSS/One-Touch key for a station that is set for Call Forward All Calls or
Do Not Disturb, the DSS/One-Touch key flashes.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual for a complete list of Function Numbers.
One-Touch keys programmed for Park Hold Service Code cannot be used to park calls
without using Hold or Transfer.
Entering a P (pause) in a DSS/One Touch dial string can be used for CO calls, Intercom
calls, or after the @ for ISDN calls.
DSS/One-Touch keys can be used for one-touch transfer.
DSS keys can distinguish whether the telephone is set for DND/Call Forward All Calls of if
the telephone is off-hook.
When a Ring Group call rings a station, a BLF Indication for this station shows idle or busy
based on Class of Service option (20-13-49).
All features programmed under one touch keys are still subject to class of service
restrictions.
If you change the extension assigned to a port in Program 11-02, the line key programming
does not follow. However, if you move the extension using the Station Relocation Feature,
the line key programming does follow.
In order for a station to retrieve a held ICM call, the station must have an ICM key assigned
in 15-07 (00).
Default Settings
The first eight keys on a telephone are line keys (e.g., key 1 = line 001). The remaining keys are
unassigned.
System Availability
Terminals
2-1168 Programmable Function Keys

Issue 2.0
None
Related Features
One-Touch Calling

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign the functions of a multiline terminal 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Programmable Function Keys. 751 by default) Manual for

752 by default)
15-20-01 LCD Line Key Name Assignment Maximum of eight digits. LK01 CO001
Define the Line Key Name for line keys on Maximum of 13 characters. : :
LK08 CO008
DESILESS terminals. Key Number:
LK09 All Blank

01 ~ 16 (for 16LD TEL)
: :
17 ~ 32 (for 16LD ADM) LK48 All Blank

Assign Class of Service (1 ~ 15) to extensions. Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
(1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Service Code 752.

When programming a feature as a
Programmable Function Key, refer to Program
15-07-01 in the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming
Manual.
20-13-18 Class of Service for Options 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

(Supplementary Service) Programmable 1 = On
Function Key Programming (General Level)
20-13-49 Class of Service for Options 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

(Supplementary Service) BLF Indication 1 = On
on CO Incoming State
Turn Off or On the BLF Indication on CO
Incoming State.
Operation
To change a 2-digit programmable key:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 751 for 2-digit codes.
4. Enter the 2-digit key function, any additional information needed for the key and press Hold.
For available functions codes refer to Program 15-07 in the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programing Manual.
To undefine a key, enter 00.
To change a 3-digit programmable key:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 752 for 3-digit codes.
4. Enter the 3-digit key function and any additional information needed for the key.
For available functions codes, refer to Program 15-07 in the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programing
Manual.
2-1170 Programmable Function Keys

Issue 2.0
To undefine a key, enter 000.

When a key is programmed using service code 752, that key cannot be programmed with a function
using the 751 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by
dialing 752 + 04 must be undefined by dialing 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key
by dialing 751 + 48.
To check the function of a programmable key:

2. Press the programmable key.
The programmed function displays.

Issue 2.0
Programming from a Multiline Terminal
Description
System Programming can be performed from any display multiline terminal. Most programming
changes become effective immediately. Other programming changes become effective after the data is
backed up from temporary memory to permanent memory.
Conditions
Up to two telephones can be in programming mode anytime.
A maximum of four users can be logged into WebPro anytime.
Two WebPro users and two phone programming users can be logged in at the same time
for a total of four users in programming mode simultaneously. However, the two phone
programming users do not show up in session management in WebPro.
PCPro can be logged in with only one user. This is allowed only if no other users are
logged into programming mode (PCPro, WebPro, or Phone). Also, if a user is connected to
the switch via PCPro, no other user can log in through PCPro, WebPro, or Phone
Programming.
Programming from a multiline terminal can require a password to enter programming.
Temporary License can be activated only from a multiline terminal, not PCPro or WebPro.
When activated, the system is temporarily licensed for all licenses except Encryption (feature
code 0030).
Each time the temporary license is activated, the program is read only until the temporary
license expires.
Each time the temporary license expires, it can be set again for up to 10 additional days.
After setting a number of days in the program, subsequent days show one less as it counts
down to expiration.
When Program 90-37-01 shows 1, the license expires at midnight on that day. When the
license expires, the system resets.
If the date is changed in Program 10-01-01 while the temporary license is in effect, one day is
subtracted from the license period.
If the date is changed in Program 10-01-01 when the temporary license shows 1 day, the
system resets when it is applied (Transfer), not when exiting programming mode.
Default Settings
Enabled
2-1172 Programming from a Multiline Terminal

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
Any DLC Blade
Required Software
None
Related Features
PC Programming

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Programming
Manual for

default values.

used to connect.
are used to login.
Programming from a Multiline Terminal 2-1173

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
default values.
Level 1)
Level 2)
Level 1)
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual for additional information.

REFERENCE
2-1174 Programming from a Multiline Terminal

Issue 2.0
Description
An extension can use Pulse to Tone Conversion on trunk calls. Pulse to Tone Conversion lets a user
change their extension dialing mode while placing a call. For systems in a Dial Pulse area, this permits
users to access dial-up OCCs (Other Common Carriers such as MCI) from their DP area. The user
can, for example:
Place a call to an OCC over a DP trunk.
Depending on programming:
Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion
- OR -
Wait 10 seconds.
Dial the OCC security code and desired number. The system dials the digits after the conversion
as DTMF.
Conditions
Pulse to Tone Conversion is valid only for Dial Pulse trunks (Program 14-02-01, options 0 or 1).
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
GCD-4COTB, GPZ-4COTF
- OR -
GCD-4ODTA
- OR -
GCD-CCTA
Pulse to Tone Conversion 2-1175

Issue 2.0
Related Features

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-02-01 Analog Trunk Data setup Signaling Type 0 = Dial Pulse (10 PPS) 2
At default, Program 14-02-01 is set to 2. 2 = DTMF
14-02-07 Analog Trunk Data Setup DP to DTMF 0 = Automatic 2

Conversion Options 1 = Automatic and Manual
For each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF

2 = Manual
Conversion required.
Operation
To convert your telephone dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line:
1. Place a call over pulse line.
2. Dial # to switch the DP trunk to DTMF dialing.
2-1176 Pulse to Tone Conversion

Redial Function
Description
Users can press Redial to cycle through the last 10 outside numbers dialed. Pressing # redials
the number displayed. Users can also press Redial and dial a System Speed Dial bin number to
R
access System Speed Dial.
Conditions
Redial List requires a display telephone.
This feature is not supported on multiline cordless phones.
UNIVERGE SV9100 telephones only support redial using Softkey or Navigation key.
Stored name for Redial Function is cleared when the system is reset.
With SV9100 software, names and numbers stored as a common or group speed
dial can be displayed for redialed numbers.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Last Number Redial
Redial Function 2-1177

Issue 2.0

None
Operation
To redial the last number dialed:

1. Press the left Navigation key.
REDIAL [#] / ABB is displayed along with the last dialed number.
2. Press the up or down arrow to view the number to dial.
3. Press # or press Speaker or lift the handset or press an idle trunk key.
- OR -
1. Press the List softkey

2. Press Redial.
REDIAL -01 is displayed along with the last dialed number.
3. Press the up and down arrow to view the number to dial.
4. Press the # key or press Speaker or lift the handset or press and idle trunk key.
To scroll through the last 10 outside numbers dialed:

1. Press Redial. Each time the Redial key is pressed, it displays the next most recently dialed
number.
2. When the desired number is displayed, press the # key or press Speaker or lift the handset.
- OR -
1. Press the List softkey

2. Press Redial.
3. Press the up and down arrow to view the number to dial.
4. Press # or press Speaker or lift the handset.
To access a System Speed Dial bin:

1. Press the left Navigation key.
2. Dial the System Speed Dial bin number.
The number stored in that bin is displayed for your preview.
3. Press # or press Speaker or lift the handset or press and idle trunk key.
2-1178 Redial Function

Issue 2.0
To view saved name history of outgoing calls:

1. Press REDIAL
2. Tap the cursor key up or down to refresh the list, if the redialed number has a matching common
or group speed dial bin associated with it, the name information from Program13-04-02 is
displayed.
3. Press Speaker or lift the handset to dial the number.
The name information will not display after dialing.
Redial Function 2-1179

Issue 2.0
Remote (System) Upgrade
Description
With PCPro or WebPro, the UNIVERGE SV9100 can be remotely upgraded to a newer version of main
system software. When a new version of main system software is released, a firmware package file is
provided. Using the PCPro or WebPro application, a technician can remotely upgrade the firmware on
the GCD-CP10. The upgrade can be applied immediately, or at a scheduled date and time. Remote
Upgrade is supported only via a LAN connection. A modem connection is NOT supported for Remote
Upgrade.
Conditions
When doing a Firmware Upgrade, the telephone system can become sluggish during the
file transfer portion of the update. You should perform updates after hours, even if the
update is scheduled. The file transfer happens when the update is set. For example, at
2:00PM a technician schedules an update to happen at 12:00AM. When they click start
(2:00PM), it begins transferring the file to the system. At this time the telephone system
experiences sluggishness until the file transfer is complete. When the time turns to
12:00AM, the telephone system resets and switches to the new firmware.
The Package file needed is provided by NEC at the time the new version of main system
software is released.
Booting from the USB drive does not replace the firmware in Flash Memory on the
GCD-CP10.
The time entered on the Firmware Upgrade screens is relative to the time on the
GCD-CP10, not the PC that PCPro was launched from. The user should take into account
time zone differences when using this feature.
The time to upload a firmware package file is directly related to the file size. Generally, it
takes a few minutes.
Remote Upgrade is supported only via LAN connection. A modem or serial connection is
not supported for Remote Upgrade.
Web Pro supports remote upgrade and is only available in the Manufacture (MF) and
Installer (IN) level logins.
If a loss of connection occurs during a Remote Upgrade, the Remote Upgrade fails and the
Remote Update process stops. The system remains at the previously installed software.
Default Settings
At default, PCPro and WebPro are set to Update Immediately after the upload.
2-1180 Remote (System) Upgrade

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
PCPro
PC connection with WebPro
Related Features
PC Programming

Refer to PC Programming on page 2-1138.
Operation
PCPro:
1. Obtain the firmware package file from NEC.
2. Open and login to PCPro.
4. Under the Home menu, choose the Upgrade SW option.
Until connected to the system the Firmware Update option is grayed out.
5. In the Firmware Update window, browse to the location of the Firmware Package file. Only the
.mdu file will be applicable here. For example, the file name might be SV9100_v1.xx.xx.
6. Select the schedule type:
Immediately after upload
At the time
If you choose At the time, select the date and time you want the GCD-CP10 to reset and switch over to
the new software version.
Remote (System) Upgrade 2-1181

Issue 2.0
7. Click Start. PCPro uploads the firmware package file, and updates the system at the time you
specified in step 6.
For additional information, refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 PC Programming

REFERENCE
Manual.
WebPro
1. Obtain the firmware package file from NEC.
2. Open and login to WebPro.
3. On the Home Page, choose Firmware Update.
4. In the Firmware Update page, browse to the location of the Firmware Package file. For example,
the file name might be 'SV9100_v1.00RemoteUpgrade.mem.
5. Select the schedule type:
Immediately after upload
At the time...
If you choose At the time, select the date and time you want the GCD-CP10 to reset

NOTE
and switch over to the new software version.
6. Click Start Update. WebPro uploads the firmware package file, and updates the system at the
time you specified in step 6.
For additional information, refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 PC Programming

REFERENCE
Manual.
2-1182 Remote (System) Upgrade

Issue 2.0
Repeat Redial
Description
If a multiline terminal user places a trunk call that is busy or unanswered, they can have Repeat Redial
try it again later on. The user does not continually have to try the number again hoping it goes through.
Repeat Redial automatically retries it until the called party answers (the number of retries is based on
system programming).
Conditions
Lifting the handset during a callout cycle cancels Repeat Redial.
Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a Repeat Redial call is placed.
Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing options as needed.
For systems with Automatic Route Selection (ARS), ARS selects the trunk for the Repeat
Redial call.
Single line telephones cannot use Repeat Redial.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Last Number Redial
Save Number Dialed
Repeat Redial 2-1183

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a function key for Repeat Redial 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

Turn Off or On an extension to use Repeat

Redial.
21-08-01 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Redial Count 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255

Set how many times Repeat Redial (default = 3)
automatically repeats if the call does not go

through.
21-08-02 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Redial Interval 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60

Time
Set the time between Repeat Redial attempts.
21-08-03 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Dial Calling 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Timer
Set the time the system waits for the called
party to answer after a Repeat Redial. If the
called party does not answer in this time, the
system hangs up and tries again (after the
Repeat Redial Interval Time). For unanswered
calls, the total time between retries is the sum
of Program 21-08-02 and Program 21-08-03.
2-1184 Repeat Redial

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-08-04 Repeat Dial Setup Time for Send Busy 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0
Tone for ISDN Trunk
Set the time to send out Busy Tone with an

ISDN line, when called party is busy.
Operation
To use Repeat Redial (if the outside party you call is unavailable or busy):
1. Place a trunk call.
Listen for busy tone or ring no answer.
2. Press Feature + Redial.

- OR -
Press the Repeat Redial key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 29).

Repeat Redial key flashes while you wait for the system to redial.

The system periodically redials the call.
4. Lift the handset when called party answers.

When using trunks with answer supervision the Repeat Redial feature automatically cancels.
To cancel Repeat Redial:

1. Press Feature.
2. Press Redial.
- OR -
1. Press Repeat Redial key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 29).

(Also refer to Last Number Redial on page 2-943.)
Repeat Redial 2-1185

Issue 2.0
Resident System Program
Description
When power is supplied to the system, the hardware configuration is scanned and Resident System
Program default values are assigned including terminal types (e.g. PGD(2)-U10 ADP, DSS Console).
This enables immediate operation, even before the system is programmed to accommodate the
individual site requirements.
Conditions
Default assignments for multiline terminals are: LK 01~LK 08 corresponds to
CO 01~CO 08.
DSS Console to Extension assignments for Attendant Add-On Consoles are not assigned.
Default Attendant Add-On Console key assignments are:
DSS Keys = 001~060

Stations = 101~160
First Initialization of the system returns all programming values to default. Without a
PC-ATA USB Drive installed, press and hold the SW1 (Load Switch) and toggle the Reset
(SW2) switch. Continue to hold the SW1 switch for approximately 5~10 seconds before
releasing. The system boots loading Resident System Programming.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
None
Related Features
None
2-1186 Resident System Program

Issue 2.0

None
Operation
None
Resident System Program 2-1187

Issue 2.0
Reverse Voice Over
Description
During a call, Reverse Voice Over lets a busy multiline terminal user make a private Intercom call to an
idle co-worker. The idle co-worker can be at a multiline terminal or single line telephone. The busy user
just presses a programmed Reverse Voice Over key to make a private call to a specified co-worker. The
initial caller cannot hear the Reverse Voice Over conversation. The private Intercom call continues until
the Reverse Voice Over caller presses the key again. The initial call can be an outside call or an
Intercom call.
Reverse Voice Over could help a salesman, for example, when placing a call to an important client. The
salesman can talk with the client and give special instructions to a secretary without interrupting the
initial call.
When the multiline terminal is idle, the Reverse Voice Over key functions the same as a Hotline or
One-Touch key. A multiline terminal Reverse Voice Over key also shows at a glance the status of the
associated extension:
When the key is. . . The associated extension is. . .
Off Idle
On Busy or call ringing
Fast Flash In Do Not Disturb
When the destination extension is idle, the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to

NOTE
the associated extension (like a Hotline key). An extension user cannot, however, use the
Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls by one-touch operation.
Conditions
An extension can have Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one extension (limited only
by the number of available function keys).
When the destination extension is in Do Not Disturb, a Reverse Voice Over placed to an
extension always rings, regardless of how Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
is set at the destination.
When the destination extension is not in Do Not Disturb, Reverse Voice Over follows
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing programming.
Reverse Voice Over is not available from single line telephones, but a single line can be a
Reverse Voice Over destination.
Reverse Voice Over requires a uniquely programmed function key.
2-1188 Reverse Voice Over

Issue 2.0
If an extension user places a Reverse Voice Over to a busy destination extension, the
system sets up a Voice Over. The Voice Over continues until the Reverse Voice Over key is
pressed again.
When a Reverse Voice Over call is placed to a destination station, while the originator is on
a CO call, the Reverse Voice Over is dropped if the destination station is involved in
another call and this call is terminated.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Do Not Disturb
Hotline
One-Touch Calling
Voice Over
Reverse Voice Over 2-1189

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a function key for Reverse Voice Over 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 47 + destination extension). 751 by default) Manual for
Assign a function key for Voice Over to the
destination extension (code 48). This allows the Function Code) (Service Code

user at the destination to switch between calls if 752 by default)
they were busy when the Reverse Voice Over
was initiated.

Assign a Class of Service (COS) to each Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
extension (1 ~ 15). (1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

Operation
When on a call:
To place a Reverse Voice Over call:

1. Press your Reverse Voice Over key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 47 + destination extension).
Your Reverse Voice Over key lights steadily (red) and you can talk with the programmed Reverse Voice
Over destination.
2-1190 Reverse Voice Over

Issue 2.0
To receive a Reverse Voice Over Call while busy:

1. Press the Voice Over key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 48).
The voice over key allows you to switch back and forth between the initial call and the Reverse Voice
Over Call.
To return to your initial caller:

1. Press the Reverse Voice Over key again.
If the co-worker you call hangs up, you return to the initial call automatically.
When the telephone is idle:
To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over destination:

1. Press your Reverse Voice Over key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 47 + destination extension).
You can optionally lift the handset after this step for privacy.
Reverse Voice Over 2-1191

Issue 2.0
RGA Conference
Description
The SV9100 supports the GCD-RGA blade.
The maximum Port Capacity Supported is 32 Ports on one blade and integrates to the SV9100 system
using the backplane. A total of 32 simultaneous people can be in one Audio Conference or in multiple
Audio Conferences at the same time (sum total cannot exceed 32).
The extensive RGA feature set is conveniently managed through the built-in Web-Based Administration
tool. This tool emphasizes sophistication in a simple-to-understand format that features integrated help
for each topic.
Do not plug the RGA LAN into a customers existing network without first verifying the RGAs DHCP
server will not cause a conflict. If needed, connect the support PC directly to the RGA to make
CAUTION configuration changes before connecting the existing network.
General
The RGA Conference application provides the following features:
A maximum of 32 Audio Conference ports.

Reservation-less and Reservation based audio conferences.
Basic Conference features:
Select entry and exit tones.
Select memorable vanity PINs.
Select name announcement on/off.
Select enter audio conference muted on/off etc.
Schedule recurring audio conferences via the Web Portal.
Use Microsoft Outlook iCalendar application to send invitations to desired participants.
Conduct audio conference with or without Moderator presence required.
See real time view of a running audio conference via Web Portal. Participants can be viewed by name
or by Caller ID.
Display loudest speaker helps identify and mute participants that may be inadvertently injecting noise
or echo into the audio conference.
Exercise multiple in-conference controls via phone key presses or the Web Portal.
On-the-fly dial out and add participants to a running conference.
Transfer participants between conferences via the Web Portal.
Raise Hand to get Moderators attention.
Send a detailed end of conference summary report to the Moderator after a given conference ends.
2-1192 RGA Conference

Issue 2.0
Enhancement I License features:

Turn recording on/off.
Conference recording capacity: 1000 minutes
Record entire conference or excerpts from a conference.
Conference playback via Windows Media Player.
Conference playback via IVR.
Audio Conferencing Application
Audio Conferencing Application provides rich conferencing experience for demanding users.
Conferencing Capacity
Audio Conference Ports: 32

Audio Recording storage capacity: 16 hours
Conditions
Caller ID information is not provided on calls transferred to the RGA Conference. Inbound
trunk calls must be directed to the conference pilot for Caller ID to be provided.
If a caller is prompted to record their name before conference entry but does not record a
name and does not press #, the system will record for 50 seconds then add them to the
conference. When the caller is added to the conference the recorded name of 50 seconds
of silence is played before they are provided a voice path.
The RGA Enhancement I license (6301) supports the following:
Conference Recording capacity: 1000 minutes
Record entire conference or excerpts from a conference
Conference playback via Media Player
Conference playback via IVR
If using a 9.5 Gateway (CHS2U GW-US) or Base (CHS2UG B-US) chassis the GCD-RGA
and CD-SVRU cannot be installed in the same chassis.
By default the RGA has the DHCP server enabled and will provide a device an IP Address
within the range of 192.168.1.100 ~ 192.168.1.150.
Do not plug the RGA LAN into a customers existing network without first verifying the
RGAs DHCP server will not cause a conflict. If needed connect the support PC directly to
the RGA to make configuration changes before connecting the existing network.
To connect to the RGA one of the following Web Browsers must be used:
Internet Explorer version 9.0 or higher
Google Chrome version 27.0 or higher
Mozilla Firefox version 22.0 or higher
RGA Conference 2-1193

Issue 2.0
By default the GCD-RGA WAN port will get the IP Address set in Program 10-55-01 for the
slot in which the GCD-RGA was installed.
If using the GCD-RGA for the RGA Conference application only the WAN port should be
connected to the existing customer network and the LAN ports should not be used. If the
Router functionality of the GCD-RGA will be used then the LAN ports can be used and
connected to the existing customer network.
Integration to the SV9100 requires a RGA Conference port license (6300) for each port.
The RGA Conference cannot send a hook flash to Telco.
Default Settings
DHCP Server enabled
IP Address 192.168.1.1
System Availability
Terminals
None
GCD-RGA Blade
AKS RGA APP Gateway (Compact Flash Media)
System port License (0300)
RGA Conference Port License (6300)
Optional RGA Enhancement 1 License (6301)
Related Features
Caller ID
Class of Service
Department Calling
Intercom

Issue 2.0
ISDN Compatibility
Trunk Groups
Trunk Group Routing

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
Set the default gateway for system to IP

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Address provided by IT department.
10-54-01 License Configuration for Each Package 1 ~ 255 Resource Licenses Refer to Program
License Code 10-50-01 in the
Assign licenses to the Conference Application Programming
on a per slot basis. For the slot the GCD-RGA Manual.
blade is installed in, assign the number of
licensed conference bridge ports. The license

feature code is 6300.
License assignment in program 10-54-01 and
10-54-02 must be done before the system recognizes
the GCD-RGA Blade.
10-54-02 License Configuration for Each Package Refer to Program

License Quantity 10-50-01 in the
Assign the number of licenses to the Programming
Conference Application per slot. For the slot the Manual.
GCD-RGA blade is installed in, assign the
number of licensed conference bridge ports.
License assignment in program 10-54-01 and
10-54-02 must be done before the system recognizes
the GCD-RGA Blade.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-55-01 Package Network Setup IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 172.16.1.100

Define the IP Address for the GCD-RGA. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254
When the blade is deleted from the system 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
using Program 90-05, the programming for the slot
in 10-55 is set back to default.
10-55-04 Package Network Setup Sub Net Mask 128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 | 224.0.0.0 255.255.0.0
Define the subnet mask for the GCD-RGA. |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255
10-55-05 Package Network Setup Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Define the default gateway for the GCD-RGA. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.25

Assign extension numbers to extension ports. 2 102
The telephone programming identity follows the 3 103
port number not the extension number. ~ ~
99 199
100 3101
~ ~
960 3961
the GCD-RGA (eight digits maximum). The
Program 16-02-01.
14-02-23 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID 0 = Wait Caller ID 1

Receiving Method 1 = Immediate Ring
Set to 0 (Wait for Caller ID) for all trunks.

Set to 1 (Special) for all GCD-RGA ports.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-07-01 Programmable Function Keys Trunks: 1 ~ 400 Refer to the

Program one Call Appearance Key (CAP Key) Line Key 1 ~ 48 Programming
on RGA CNF port. 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Manual for
Assign function keys as line (code 01 + trunk 751 by default) default values.
number) or Call Appearance (CAP) Keys [code
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
08 + CAP Key orbit 0001 ~ 9999 (or 0000 for Function Code) (Service Code
auto assign)]. 752 by default)
16-01-01 Department Group Basic Data Setup Maximum of 12 characters No Setting

Department Name

Groups.

Set the call routing for Department Calling. (Circular)
Routing to priority (cycle to highest priority
extension first).

Call) busy)

busy Department Group member. Set to 1 busy department member routes
(Routes to Idle Member). to idle member)
Set the action taken when a call reaches the 1 = Circular
last extension in the Department Group. Set to
1 (Circular) so cycling repeats.

Assign all GCD-RGA extensions to the group order:
set in 11-07-01. Then set the priority for port 1 Port 1 priority = 1
to 1, port 2 to 2 and so on until all ports have Port 256 priority
been assigned. = 256

on ICM Call


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

If in bound trunks are to be pointed at the 0 = Normal
GCD-RGA pilot number one of the following 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
must be done. VRS installed)
For Analog Trunks: Assign Service Type 4 to 2 = DISA
each trunk you want to ring into the GCD-RGA
Conference Bridge as a Direct Inward Line
3 = DID
(DIL). Then go to 22- 07-01. 4 = DIL
For PRI with DID: Assign service type 3 (DID) 5 = E&M Tie line
for each trunk. Then go to 22- 11-01. 6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Calling Group for each DIL incoming trunk. eight digits)
Assign the master/pilot number of the

Conference group from Program 11-07-01 as
the DIL destination.

Received Number
system.

Target Number

Assign the master/pilot number of the
Conference group from Program 11-07- 01 as
the DID destination.
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 RGA Multimedia Conference Solution manual.

Issue 2.0
RGA Router
Description
The SV9100 supports the GCD-RGA blade.
The NEC GCD-RGA Router Gateway blade is a plug-in blade for the UNIVERGE SV8100
Communications Server that offers a business-class routing/switching solution as well as application
hosting. The GCD-RGA provides a WAN Router and 4-Port Gigabit Ethernet Switch in a single SV8100
blade. The RGA business-class features include multiple highly-configurable VPN connections, flexible
QoS setup for each LAN port and a powerful Firewall.
The extensive RGA feature set is conveniently managed through the built-in Web-Based Administration
tool. This tool emphasizes sophistication in a simple-to-understand format that features integrated help
for each topic.
The RGA Router feature is not supported for the first release. This feature will be supported in

NOTE
a future build.
Do not plug the RGA LAN into a customers existing network without first verifying the RGAs
DHCP server will not cause a conflict. If needed, connect the support PC directly to the RGA to
CAUTION make configuration changes before connecting the existing network.
General
Each GCD-RGA blade comes with a built-in router application that provides the following features:
DHCP Server
WAN Router:
DHCP
PPPoE
Static IP
Dynamic DNS
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
NAT capabilities including 1-to-1 NAT and/or Port Forwarding
Virtual Private Network (VPN)
Quality of Service (QOS):
Port
DSCP
RGA Router 2-1199

Issue 2.0
CoS (Class of Service)

Traffic Shaping for Upstream and Downstream traffic
Firewall:
Denial of Service (DoS) Protection
Black WAN ping requests
Multicast pass-through
VPN pass-through
Block Web features (Java, Cookies, Active X, HTTP Proxy)
DMZ
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
IP Forwarding (1-1 NAT)
Port Forwarding
Port Range Forwarding
IP-based access restriction
Custom access policy
Services Management:
FTP
SSH
Telnet
SMTP
HTTP
Custom service
4-Port Gigabit Ethernet Switch:
Switch management
16 VLANs
Port mirroring
Link aggregation
Web-based administration
The GCD-RGA is also an Application Server blade that supports the RGA Conference application.
Refer to the RGA Conference feature for more information.
Conditions
The RGA Router feature is not supported for the first release. This feature will be supported
in a future build.
If using a 9.5 Gateway (CHS2U GW-US) or Base (CHS2UG B-US) chassis the GCD-RGA
and CD-SVRU cannot be installed in the same chassis.
2-1200 RGA Router

Issue 2.0
By default the RGA has the DHCP server enabled and will provide a device an IP Address
within the range of 192.168.1.100 ~ 192.168.1.150.
Do not plug the RGA LAN into a customers existing network without first verifying the
RGAs DHCP server will not cause a conflict. If needed connect the support PC directly to
the RGA to make configuration changes before connecting the existing network.
To connect to the RGA one of the following Web Browsers must be used:
Internet Explorer version 9.0 or higher
Google Chrome version 27.0 or higher
Mozilla Firefox version 22.0 or higher
By default the GCD-RGA WAN port will get the IP Address set in Program 10-55-01 for the
slot in which the GCD-RGA was installed.
If using the GCD-RGA for the RGA Conference application only the WAN port should be
connected to the existing customer network and the LAN ports should not be used. If the
Router functionality of the GCD-RGA will be used then the LAN ports can be used and
connected to the existing customer network.
Default Settings
DHCP Server enabled
LAN Port IP Address 192.168.1.1
WAN Port IP Address assigned from Program 10-55-01
System Availability
Terminals
None
SV9100 Software Version 1.00 or higher
GCD-RGA Blade
Related Features
None
RGA Router 2-1201

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
Set the default gateway for system to IP

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Address provided by IT department.

Define the IP Address for the GCD-RGA. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254
Define the subnet mask for the GCD-RGA. |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

Define the default gateway for the GCD-RGA. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.25
2-1202 RGA Router

Issue 2.0
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 RGA Multimedia Conference Solution manual.
RGA Router 2-1203

Issue 2.0
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Description
With a Ringdown Extension, a user can call another extension, outside number, or Speed Dialing
number by lifting the handset. The call automatically goes through there is no need for the user to dial
digits or press additional keys. Ringdown Extensions are frequently used for lobby telephones, where
the caller just lifts the handset to get the information desk or off-site Reservation Desk.
After the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset, ringdown occurs after a programmable time.
Depending on the setting of this time, the extension user may be able to place other calls before the
ringdown goes through.
This feature can also be used as an off-hook alarm application. For example, if a patient in a care facility
fails to return the handset to the cradle, it routes to a care givers station after a programmed time.
Conditions
Ringdown extension has no effect on an extension current (active) call.
The Ringdown Extension user can lift the handset or press Speaker to initiate ringdown.
If the Ringdown/Hotline destination is a speed dial bin, the appropriate service code must
precede the bin number.
Ringdown Extension can use Speed Dial - System/Group/Station numbers (and follow their
trunk routing) as the destination number.
Ringdown Extension follows Call Forwarding. For example, the ringdown destination can
forward their calls. When the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset, ringdown
automatically calls the extension to which calls are forwarded.
If the Ringdown Extension user hears busy tone when they lift the handset, they can
Camp-On to the destination, leave a Callback or activate Off-Hook Signaling.
The ringdown destination user can activate Do Not Disturb. When the Ringdown Extension
user lifts the handset, they hear DND. If enabled, the Ringdown Extension user can
override the destination DND.
If the destination extension has Handsfree Answerback enabled, the call voice announces.
If the destination extension has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, the call rings.
A Call Arrival (CAR) Key or Virtual Extension can be a ringdown destination. This would
allow a front door key to be programmed on every extension.
Delayed Ringdown can occur by setting the Hotline Start Timer. However, Ringdown does
not occur if the Hotline Start Timer is set longer than the Extension Dial Tone Timer.
Use the @ code to make an outbound call automatically forward to a DISA Trunk or to VM
Auto Attendant. This code can be used only on ISDN outbound calls. Internal calls and
analog outbound calls are not supported.
2-1204 Ringdown Extension, Internal/External

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Callback
Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb
Off-Hook Signaling
Virtual Extensions
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External 2-1205

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1


extension.

Turn Off or On Hotline (Ringdown). If disabled
in Class of Service, the settings in Program
21-11 below have no effect.

After the user lifts the handset, the extension
automatically calls the ringdown destination
after this time. A setting of 0 immediately rings

the programmed extension. Any other setting
delays the ringdown the number of seconds
programmed.
21-11-01 Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment Maximum of 24 digits No Setting

Program the ringdown (Hotline) source and 0 ~ 9, , #, Pause, Hook Flash,
destination (target) number, up to 24 digits (960 @ (Code to wait for answer
Hotline assignments). Remember to include the supervision)
trunk access code (usually 9) in front of the
number when dialing outside numbers. When

programming Speed Dial System numbers as
the destination, the entry should be #2 + bin
number (the service code for Speed Dialing and
the Speed Dial bin number).
2-1206 Ringdown Extension, Internal/External

Issue 2.0
Operation
To place a call if your extension has ringdown programmed:

If you want to place a trunk call, press a line key before lifting the handset.
Depending on the setting of your ringdown timer, you may be able to dial an Intercom call before your
ringdown goes through.
If the destination has Handsfree Answerback enabled, your call voice announces. If the destination
has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, your call rings.
To answer a call if you are another extension ringdown destination:

1. Speak toward the telephone to answer the incoming voice announcement.
- OR -
Lift the handset or press Speaker to answer ringing Intercom call.
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External 2-1207

Issue 2.0
Ring Groups
Description
Ring Groups determine how trunks ring extensions. Generally, trunks ring extensions only if Ring Group
programming allows. For example, to make a trunk ring an extension:
Assign the trunk and the extension to the same Ring Group.
In the extension Ring Group programming, assign ringing for the trunk.
Any number of extensions and trunks can be in a specific group. The system allows:
Ring Groups = 1~100
In-Skin Voice Mail = 102
Centralized Voice Mail = 103
If an extension has a line key for the trunk, Ring Group calls ring the line key. If the extension does not
have a line key, the trunk rings the line appearance key. If an extension has a key for a trunk that is not
in its ring group, the trunk follows Access Map programming.
Conditions
DIL trunks disregard ring group programming until DIL overflow.
Default Settings
All trunks are in Ring Group 1. The first 16 extensions ring for trunk calls and all other extensions
only flash.
System Availability
Terminals
None
2-1208 Ring Groups

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Contact Center
ISDN Compatibility
Night Service

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-07-01 Programmable Function Keys Trunks: 1 ~ 400 Refer to the

Assign function keys as line (code 01 + trunk Line Key 1 ~ 48 Programming
number) or Call Appearance (CAP) Keys [code 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Manual for
08 + CAP Key orbit 0001 ~ 9999 (or 0000 for 751 by default) default values.
auto assign)].
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
752 by default)

State
Turn Off or On BLF Indication on CO Incoming
State.

Answer Recall Time
Ring Groups 2-1209

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-02-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Day/Night Mode: 1~8 0

Assign the incoming trunk type (0) for each 0 = Normal
trunk. There is one item for each Night Service 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
Mode. VRS installed)
This option must be set to 0 for Ring Groups to 2 = DISA
work. 3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Ring Group 1

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

Assign trunks to ring groups. Incoming Group Number for
Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
0 = (No Setting)

Mail or InMail)
22-06-01 Normal Incoming Ring Mode 0 = No Ring 1

Define whether or not an extension should ring 1 = Ring
for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode.

For DIL Delayed Ringing, assign the DIL No 001 ~ 100 = Incoming Ring
Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings Group
this group after the DIL No Answer Time
(Program 22-01-04) expires. DIL Delayed
102 = (In-Skin/External Voice
Mail or InMail)
Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a
Ring Group In-Skin/External Voice Mail, or
Centralized Voice Mail.
22-12-01 DID Intercept Ring Group 0 = (No Setting) 1

For each DID Translation Table, assign the 001 ~ 100 = Incoming Ring
destination for DID Intercept. The destination Group
can be a Ring Group, In-Skin/External Voice 102 = (In-Skin/External Voice
Mail, or Centralized Voice Mail. For each table, Mail or InMail)
make a separate entry for each Night Service
mode.
2-1210 Ring Groups

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the transfer destination for each DISA and Trunk Ports:
Automated Attendant (OPA) trunk. The 001 ~ 400
destination can be a Ring Group or Voice Mail. Day/Night Mode:
Make a separate entry for each Night Service 1~8
mode.
For incoming calls, Ring Group programming
0 = Disconnect
(Program 22-04/Program 22-05) overrides Access
Map programming (Program 14-07/Program 102 = In-Skin/External Voice
15-06). Mail or InMail
Program 25-15-01)
Use the charts below to program the following example:
For this extension . . .1, 2
301 Trunk 1 Rings Trunk 2 Flashes Trunk 3 Flashes

302 Trunk 1 Flashes Trunk 2 Rings Trunk 3 Flashes
303 Trunk 1 Flashes Trunk 2 Flashes Trunk 3 Rings
1
Trunks ring the same in the day as at night.
2
MLT has trunk appearances not CAP keys.
Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Ring Group > 1 2 3
Ext. 301 1 01 01
Ext. 302 01 1 01
Ext. 303 01 01 1
1 = Extension rings
0 = Extension does not ring
1
To allow extension user to answer flashing line, be sure to give extension
incoming access to the trunk in Program 14-07 and Program 15-06.
Ring Groups 2-1211

Issue 2.0
Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Ring Group1> 1 2 3
Trunk 1 X - -
Trunk 2 - X -
Trunk 3 - - X
X = Trunk assigned to indicated Ring Group
1 Make the same Program 22-04 entry for all Night Service modes.
Operation
Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering on page 2-198.
2-1212 Ring Groups

Issue 2.0
Room Monitor
Description
Room Monitor lets an extension user listen to the sounds in a co-workers area. For example, the
receptionist could listen for sounds in the warehouse when it is left unattended. To use Room Monitor,
the initiating extension and the receiving extension must activate it.
When using multiline terminals for monitoring, an extension user can monitor only one extension at a
time. However, many extensions can monitor the same extension at the same time. However, only one
single line telephone can monitor another single line telephone at a time.
Room Monitor for Single Lines
This option enables you to monitor the room status through your single line telephones. Between
multiline terminals, the monitored room status is picked up by the telephone microphone and the activity
is heard through the speaker of the monitoring multiline terminal. Between single line telephones, at the
station to be monitored, a user goes off-hook and dials a service code and the extension number of the
monitoring telephone. At the monitoring station, a user goes off-hook and dials a service code and the
extension number of the monitored telephone. The activity of the area where the monitored telephone is
placed can then be heard at the monitoring telephone. This service is available until the handset of the
monitored telephone is placed on-hook.
telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with transmission,
CAUTION may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior
to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and
state laws require some form of notification to all parties to a telephone conversation, such as using a
beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone
conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the telephone conversation. Some of these laws
incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions
Room Monitor is for listening only. It does not allow conversation between the monitoring
and monitored extensions.
An extension user cannot monitor an Attendant.
A multiline terminal user cannot monitor a single line telephone, and a single line telephone
cannot monitor a multiline terminals.
Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) keys do not support Room Monitor Programmable
Function keys (code 39).
Room Monitor for single line telephones can be used with the Hotel/Motel feature.
For a multiline terminal, Room Monitor requires uniquely programmed function keys.
Room Monitor 2-1213

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Hotel/Motel

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Customize the service code (675 by default) to digits

be used for Room Monitor.

Assign a function key as a Room Monitor key 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 39) for both the extension being 751 by default) Manual for
monitored and the extension initiating Room 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
Monitor. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
2-1214 Room Monitor

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1

Extension

Monitored
42-03-12 Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) SLT 0 = Disable COS 1 ~ 15 =0

Room Monitor 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable a single line telephone user

ability to use Room Monitor.
Room Monitor 2-1215

Issue 2.0
Multiline Room Monitoring
2-1216 Room Monitor

Issue 2.0
Single Line Telephone Room Monitoring
Operation
You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the extension you
want to monitor. You can only listen to one extension at a time.
IMPORTANT
Room Monitor 2-1217

Issue 2.0
Multiline Terminals
To activate Room Monitor from an idle Multiline Terminal (initiating extension):

1. Press the Room Monitor key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 39).
2. Dial the number of extension you want to monitor.
You can place and answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.
To activate Room Monitor from an idle Multiline Terminal (extension to be monitored):

1. Press Room Monitor key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 39).
2. Dial the number of the extension where you are located.
For example, if you are at extension 106, dial 106.
You can place and answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.
To cancel Room Monitor (at either extension):

1. Press the Room Monitor key at both the initiating extension and the monitored extension.
To activate Room Monitor (at the initiating extension):

1. Lift the handset at the telephone which is monitoring another telephone.
2. Dial 675.
3. Dial 2.
4. Dial number of extension number, which will be monitored.
You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.
To activate Room Monitor (at the extension to be monitored):

1. Lift the handset at the telephone to be monitored.
2. Dial 675.
3. Dial 1.
4. Dial number of the extension number, which is monitoring the telephone.
5. Place the handset on the desk, placing the handset transmitter towards the room.
You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.
To cancel Room Monitor (at either extension):

1. Hang up the handsets for both the monitored and the monitoring telephones.
2-1218 Room Monitor

Save Number Dialed
Description
Save Number Dialed allows an extension user to save their last outside number dialed and easily
redial it later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number
S
without manually dialing the digits. The system retains the saved number until the user stores a
new one in its place or clears the stored one.
Save Number Dialed saves in system memory a dialed number of up to 24 digits. The number
can be any combination of digits 0~9, # and . The system remembers the digits regardless of
whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk
group as for the initial call. However, the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired.
Conditions
For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call
unless the user preselects.
Function keys simplify Save Number Dialed operation.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Save Number Dialed 2-1219

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Dial Tone Detection
Last Number Redial
Repeat Redial

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Saved Number Dial 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the service code used for dialing a digits

saved number.
Clear Saved Number Dialing Data 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define the service code for Clear Save Number digits

Dialing List if it is not acceptable.

Assign a function key as a Save key (code 30). 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)
2-1220 Save Number Dialed

Issue 2.0
Operation
To save the outside number you just dialed (up to 24 digits):
Use this feature before hanging up.

NOTE
Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Save Number Dialed key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 30).
1. Hookflash.
2. Dial 715.
To redial a saved number:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press an idle trunk line key.

This selects a specific trunk for the call.
- OR -
1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 715.
- OR -
Press Save Number Dialed key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 30).

Save Number Dialed automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call.
1. Go off-hook.
2. Dial 715.
To view the number you have saved from a multiline terminal with a display:
The stored number displays for 10 seconds.
The stored number dials out if you:
Lift the handset,
Press an idle line key,
Save Number Dialed 2-1221

Issue 2.0
Press the Speaker key.

To clear your saved number:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 785.

2. Hang up.
2-1222 Save Number Dialed

Issue 2.0
Description
Secondary Incoming Extensions (SIEs) are incoming appearance keys of actual stations assigned in the
system. SIE keys are assigned to programmable function keys and can appear on an individual station,
or multiple stations. Incoming internal calls, ringing DIL/Tie/DID/CO Transfer calls, or call forwarded
calls can be picked up from an SIE.
Conditions
Calls can be originated from a Secondary Incoming Extension, but the actual station cannot
place or answer calls.
Off-Hook ringing is provided with calls ringing to Secondary Incoming Extensions.
Secondary Incoming Extensions are forwarded when the actual station is set for call
forwarding.
SIE keys can appear on an individual station, or multiple stations.
A station can have more than one SIE key assigned.
Up to 32 calls can be queued waiting on an SIE key.
When a Secondary Incoming Extension call is received and answered while the user is on
an outside line, the first call can be automatically put on hold.
If a trunk call rings a Secondary Incoming Extension, to answer the call, the station must be
programmed with the direct trunk appearance key or an available CAP key and the SIE
must be programmed to allow the call to come off the SIE key and appear on the line or
CAP key.
The same SIE key cannot be programmed on multiple programmable function keys on the
same multiline terminal.
An SIE key does not ring during an Intercom Voice call to the actual station.
terminal when it receives an incoming call, or switch to the page of the incoming call. Also,
a default page can be defined for the DESI-Less terminal to change to when it goes idle or
when it has answered a call.
Secondary Incoming Extension 2-1223

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Virtual Extensions

2-1224 Secondary Incoming Extension

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-04-01 Virtual Extension Numbering Maximum of eight digits. Virtual Extension

Virtual Extension
Number
201 ~ 299
Virtual Extension
Port No. 100 ~
512 = No Setting
Name 101

102, etc.

Automatic Hold for CO lines 1 = Disconnect (Cut)
When talking on a CO call and another CO line
key is pressed, place the original trunk on Hold
or Disconnect it.
Virtual Extension Access Mode (When idle 0 = DSS
Virtual Extension key pressed) 1 = OTG (Outgoing)
Determine whether a Virtual Extension/Call 2 = Ignore
Arrival Key (CAR) should function as a DSS
key, a Virtual Extension, or a CAR key. When
DSS (0) is selected, the key functions as a DSS
key to the extension and for incoming calls to
that extension. When Outgoing (1) is selected,
the key functions as a virtual extension and can
be used for incoming and outgoing calls. When
Ignore (2) is selected, the key functions as a
CAR key and can receive incoming calls only.
Select the Toll Restriction Class used when 1 = Real Ext. (Real Extension

placing a call from a virtual extension. Class)

Assign the SIE key to the Multiline extension. 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
When an extension or a virtual extension is 0 = Pattern 1
assigned to the function key on the key 1 = Pattern 2
telephone, select the ring tone when receiving a 2 = Pattern 3
call on that key.
3 = Pattern 4
For CAR keys, only tone pattern 1 can be
used. The remaining patterns are not checked
Extension
with this feature.
5 = Tone Pattern 5
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
15-09-01 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Mode 1: 0

Assign the ring options for an extension Virtual 0 = No Ring
Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group

1 = Ring
Answer Key which is defined in Program 15-07.
15-10-01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order 0 = Tone Pattern 1 Priority order:
Setup 1 = Tone Pattern 2 1 = 0 (Tone
When two or more virtual extensions are set on 2 = Tone Pattern 3 Pattern 1)
a function key on the telephone, and the tone 3 = Tone Pattern 4 2 = 1 (Tone
pattern by which the sound of each extension Pattern 2)
differs, set up the priority of ring sound.
Tone 3 = 2 (Tone
5 = Tone Pattern 5 Pattern 3)
6 = Tone Pattern 6 4 = 3 (Tone
Pattern 4)
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8

Assign the delayed ringing options for an 0 = Immediate Ring
extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension 1 = Delayed Ring
Group Answer keys (defined in Program
15-09).
15-18-01 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options 0 = Release (Release to Line 0

Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode Appearance)
Define whether calls to a Virtual Extension key 1 = Land On the Key
land on the virtual key or on the extension/CAP/
CO appearance.

Display mode when placing a call on Virtual 1 = Actual Station Name
Extension Key
Define whether calls to or from a Virtual
Extension Key display the Virtual Extension key
name or the name of the extension on which it
resides.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to extensions. Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
(1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1


Service Code 752.


Virtual Extension by lifting the handset.


20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be set to off for
this option to work.

Restriction)

Extensions (0 or 00=Dont Care)
When an extension has a virtual extension
assigned to a Programmable Function Key,
determine the priority for automatically
answering the ringing calls when the handset is
lifted. If 0 or 00 is selected, the user can lift the
handset to answer a ringing call from any
group.

Issue 2.0
Operation
To answer a call ringing a SIE key:

1. Press the flashing SIE key.
To program a SIE key on a phone:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 752.
4. Dial 03.
6. Press Hold once for Immediate Ring, (skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring).
8. Press hold a second time for Delayed Ring, or Skip to step 10.
9. Dial the mode number in which the key delays ringing.
10. Press Speaker.

Issue 2.0
Secretary Call Pickup
Description
Secretary Call Pickup lets a multiline terminal user easily reroute calls intended for a co-worker to
themselves. By pressing a Secretary Call Pickup key, the user can have all calls to a co-workers
telephone ring or voice-announce theirs instead. Secretary Call Pickup is a simplified type of Call
Forward with Follow Me for employees that work closely together. This feature could be helpful to
customer service representatives that must frequently cover each others clients. When a representative
leaves their desk, an associate could press the Secretary Call Pickup key to intercept all their calls.
An extension can have a Secretary Call Pickup key for any number of extensions, limited only by the
available number of programmable keys.
Conditions
Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users.
A Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) cannot be programmed as the bosss
extension.
An extension user can also have Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroute a co-workers
calls to themselves.
A multiline terminal can have a Secretary Call Pickup key for a single line telephone.
agents should not use this feature.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Secretary Call Pickup 2-1229

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Secretary Call (Buzzer)

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a function key for Secretary Call Pickup 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(42 + boss ext). Unlike Secretary Call, you do 751 by default) Manual for
not have to program a corresponding key at the 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
source and destination extensions. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Operation
To activate Secretary Call Pickup:

1. Press your Secretary Call Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 42 + boss extension).
Your Secretary Call Pickup key lights and the bosss telephone display shows BOSS FWD>>.
Calls intended for covered extension, ring your telephone instead.
To cancel Secretary Call Pickup:

1. Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 42 + boss extension).
2-1230 Secretary Call Pickup

Issue 2.0
To check a key Secretary Call Pickup assignment:

2. Press your Secretary Call Arrival (CAR) key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 42 + bosss extension).
Secretary Call Pickup 2-1231

Issue 2.0
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Description
Secretary Call lets two co-workers alert each other without disturbing their work. To have Secretary Call,
both co-workers must have multiline terminals with Secretary Call buzzer keys. When a user presses
their buzzer key, the system alerts the called extension by sending a splash tone and flashing the called
extension buzzer key. The called user can respond by placing an intercom call to the calling party.
The called extension buzzer key continues to flash and the splash tone is heard until either user cancels
the Secretary Call. A secretary could use this feature, for example, to get a message through to the
boss in an important meeting. After being alerted, the boss could call the secretary when it is most
convenient.
An extension can have a Secretary Call key for any number of extensions, limited only by the available
number of programmable keys.
Conditions
Secretary Call is not available to single line telephone users.
Secretary Call does not set up an Intercom call.
When assigning Secretary Call, a user enters the associated extension number, not port
number.
Secretary Call requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
2-1232 Secretary Call (Buzzer)

Issue 2.0
Related Features

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign function keys for Secretary Call buzzer 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 41 + the destination extension number). 751 by default) Manual for
Both co-workers must have a buzzer key for 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
each other. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Operation
To buzz your secretary or boss:

2. Press the buzzer key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 41 + secretary extension).
Your boss or secretary hears ringing.
Your buzzer key lights steadily.
Your bosss or secretarys buzzer key flashes fast.
The telephone continues to ring until the Secretary Call key is pressed.
To check to see who left you a Secretary Call:

3. Press the Secretary Call key that flashed.
Secretary Call (Buzzer) 2-1233

Issue 2.0
To answer your Secretary Call indication:

1. Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you.
To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension:

1. Press the lit Secretary Call key.
To cancel a Secretary Call left at your extension:

2. Press the flashing Secretary Call key.
2-1234 Secretary Call (Buzzer)

Issue 2.0
Security
Description
This system supports the following built-in simple security features:
Warning Message (Watch Mode)
Automatically and periodically send the Watching (VRS) Message from built-In Speaker on
Multiline Terminal or external paging adapter during nightmode.
Enable to accommodate with 3rd Party PIR (Passive Infrared Sensor) or Emergency Button to
provide security feature such as Auto-Emergency Call with Warning (VRS) Message sending.
Remote Inspection
Automatically ring the terminal with preprogrammed schedule in order to check whether users
answer or not. If not answered, Emergency Call is placed to predefined destination automatically.
Conditions

Watch mode can provide Watching message in a preprogrammed interval via internal
paging group terminals during defined schedule such as night time.
When connected to the system the security sensor will receive sensor detections and send
a prepared warning message or emergency call to a preprogrammed destination.
When connecting security sensor, set Program 20-46-01 Sensor mode to 1 (On), the
security sensor can be connected to the detector circuit on the 2PGDAD. A maximum of
eight sensors can be connected.
Applied voltage when sensor is Off: 5V
Loop current when sensor is On: 14mA
When the system receives a detection signal from a contact on the 2PGDAD detector
circuit. The input circuit contact setting in Program 20-46-12 must match the circuit setting
Watch mode can be started and stopped automatically using settings in Program 20-47-01.
Watch mode can be started and stopped manually using Service code (Program 11-12-63)
or function key (SC752: 32) assignment. After 10 seconds a warning message is provided,
press again to stop the message.
Security sensor can be started and stopped automatically using settings in
Program 20-48-01.
Security sensor can start and stop manually using Service code (Program 11-12-64) or
function key (SC752: 33). Function key (33) blinks until the timer in Program 20-55-01
expires, then the function key turns red. The system can detect a signal from the sensor.
Security 2-1235
Issue 2.0
The Watching Message:

Is displayed after the timer in Program 20-44-04 expires.
Can be edited using the Service Code in Program 11-10-20.
Can be recorded up to a maximum of two minutes.
The Length of the watch message depends on the length of the recorded VRS message.
Internal Paging will only play the message when the targeted terminal is in an Idle state.
If an ordinary Internal Paging message is sent, the message is aborted and the watching
message is played.
A Warning message has a higher priority than a Watch message when both occur at same
time.
When using an external speaker, start and end tones are not supported.
When the security sensor detects a signal the following options can be set:
A Warning message is sent.
An Emergency call is sent.
A Warning message and an Emergency call are both sent.
Calling to an emergency destination:

The emergency number is set in Program 20-46-05.
Outside call routing uses Program 13-05-01.
If Program 13-05-01 is set to 0, outside call routing uses the settings in Program 14-06-01 and
search for data from route table 100 using order 4 in descending order. If Program 14-06-01 is
set to 0, outside calls are not supported.
If an outgoing call is set in a system, emergency calls cannot go through. When using outgoing
call restriction, Class 1 toll restriction is followed.
If all trunks are busy, the emergency call is not sent. If this occurs, Alarm Type 33 is used.
When an emergency call is answered:

Provide a VRS message to the destination.
After finishing the VRS message, start monitor operation which preprogrammed in Program
20-46-10. Also by pressing key from outside, it is possible to enable a two-way path. If the
monitor terminal is not idle status, an emergency call destination cannot start monitor and hear
no tone.
If a Watch or Warning message is sent to the destination and all VSR channels are busy, a
tone is played instead of displaying the VRS message.
If the VRS message is not recorded, a tone is played.
Barge-in is not allowed to outside call while monitoring.
A VRS message can be played from the extensions speaker only when the extension is
idle. But if a Watch or Warning message is requested while a normal page is being used,
normal paging stops and the Watch or Warning message is sent.
2-1236 Security
Issue 2.0
If a warning tone is provided instead of the VRS message, paging information is displayed
as a blank to the paging group terminal LCD.
If a Watch or Warning message happens during normal paging, normal paging stops and
the Watch or Warning message is sent.
A Warning message has a higher priority than a Watch message when both occur at same
time.
Activating or stopping sensor operations need to be set according to sensor specifications.
If an outgoing call restriction is set in a system, the number for the emergency call needs to
be pre-registered in the restriction allow table.
Auto outgoing call via leased line cannot go through when all trunks are busy.
When an emergency call destination is not answered, the system repeats the emergency
call the number of times specified in Program 20-46-08.
For Answer detection of Analog Trunks;
In case of answer supervision, when answer supervision is received, the system recognizes
the called party has answered.
In case of no answer supervision, after the inter digit timer has expired, the DTMF receiver
waits for the key to be pressed. Then the system recognizes the called party has answered.
During remote monitoring, the outside lines cannot be disconnected until the timer in
Program 20-21-05 expires.
For the Warning message:
Watch mode operation uses the order set in internal paging.
The VRS message can be edited using Service code Program 11-10-20.
The maximum length of a recorded message is two minutes.
If multiple sensors are detected at the same time, the latest detected sensors Warning
message is provided.
The warning message continues to play the same VRS message.
To cancel the Warning message use Security Sensor Reset Service Code Program 11-12-62.
When using external speaker, a start and end tone is not provided for any situation.
If, while playing a Warning message and the targeted internal or external paging group was
already playing another Warning message, the first Warning message is canceled. In this
case either the internal or external paging group was duplicated with the latest paging
group. An old Warning message stops both internal and external paging.
If the DND key is pressed at the called terminal while playing a Watch or Warning message,
the next message is not played because the terminal is determined to be busy. When the
terminal returns to an idle state, the message is played again.
An emergency call via analog trunk which has no disconnect signal, if Program 14-02-18 is
invalid the call cannot disconnect by trunk side.
Security 2-1237
Issue 2.0
In case of an emergency call the trunk key status is red. It is also red while monitoring or
speaking.
An emergency call goes through even if no trunk key is assigned to the terminal.
In case of using internal and external paging group same time, message will provided when
both paging groups are in idle status. If internal or external paging group is already used,
message will not provided.
In case of speaking status after monitor mode, monitored terminal key does not operate
except speaker key.
When the sensor malfunctions, use Security Sensor Reset Service Code programmed at
Program 11-12-62 to cancel the operation, stop warning message or stop emergency call.
During the Watch mode or Security sensor On state, if a system reset occurs these
modes automatically continue after boot up.
When sending a Warning message or placing an emergency call, if system reset occurs
the call state is cleared. Following a boot up, the Warning message or source placing an
emergency call will stop.
If security sensor detects a signal, display below sentence to terminal which set Program
20-08-23 data to 1.
Figure 2-48 Idle Terminal Display
Press Exit, terminal returns to idle display.
Remote Inspection
To use the Remote Inspection feature target destination setting is necessary.
When Remote Inspection is set to the terminal, Confirm and Ring Time are displayed on
Multiline Terminal LCD.
Figure 2-49 Confirm Ring Time Display
If Remote Inspection set terminal is busy (receiving another incoming call or on active
2-1238 Security
Issue 2.0
calls), an inspection ring starts after finishing the previous call.

If the VRS message is not recorded, a warning tone instead of a VRS message is sent.
A target dial can be programmed by using Service Code (Program 11-10-49).
Outside call routing follows the settings in Program 13-05-1 Abbreviated Dialing.
When Program 13-05-01 set to 0, an outside call route is referring to Program 14-06-01
setting and search data from route table 100 of order 4 in descending order. If Program
14-06-01 set to 0, no outside call is provided.
If outgoing call restriction is set in a system, an emergency call cannot go through. In case
of using outgoing call restrictions, toll restriction Class 1 is followed.
Auto outgoing call via leased line cannot go through when all trunks are busy.
When trunks are all busy, the emergency call does not complete. In this case, Alarm Type
33 is provided.
When the target destination answered:
Provide a VRS message to the destination.
After finishing VRS message, destination person can start monitoring of inspection terminal.
Also by dialing from outside it is possible to make both way talk. Dialing during the
message will just stop the message from being played and then you must dial again to have
speech path in both direction. When using Analog trunks the destination person must dial
before the initial message is played to the caller.
Barge-in is not allowed to outside call while monitoring.
If the destination does not answer an emergency call, the system repeats placing the call
using the number of times set in Program 20-45-07.
For answer detection of analog trunks:
In case of answer supervision, when answer supervision is received, the system recognizes
the called party has answered.
In case of no answer supervision, after the inter digit timer has expired, the DTMF receiver
waits for the key to be pressed. Then the system recognizes the called party has answered.
An emergency call via analog trunk has no disconnect signal. If Program 14-02-18 is invalid
the call cannot be disconnected on the trunk side.
If the cable was disconnected while ringing, the ring does not restart once the cable is
reconnected.
In case of an emergency call trunk key status is red. It is also red while monitoring or
speaking.
An emergency call goes through even if no trunk key is assigned to the terminal.
Security 2-1239
Issue 2.0
If the cable is disconnected while ringing, an emergency call performance is same as

off-hook status. If the cable was not connected by ring timer, Program 20-01-19 is set to 1
provide an emergency call, set to 0 retry to ring the inspection terminal.
If internal paging access performed while ringing, continues remote inspection ringing.
In case of speaking status after monitor mode, monitored terminal key does not operate
except speaker key.
When disconnected from outside while monitoring, the line can not be released without
disconnecting the signal. It disconnects when the timer in Program 20-21-05 ends. A
disconnect also occurs while monitoring or speaking if the timer expires. To prevent a line
hold, a disconnect occurs if the timer in Program 20-21-05 ends while hearing an answer
message.
A maximum of six extensions can be set as Remote Inspection terminals.
If all VRS channels are busy, a tone is provided instead of the VRS message, such as an
inspection message or a destination message.
If the VRS message is not recorded, a tone is provided.
Emergency call destination must be set considering this features purpose.

The emergency number dialed does not follow ARS settings:
If Program 13-01-01 is set to Trunk the system uses command Program 13-05 to route the
emergency call.
If Program 13-01-01 is set to ICM the system uses command Program14-06 to route the
emergency call.
If remote inspection target does not answer, display below sentence to terminal which set
Program 20-08-24 data to 1.
Figure 2-50 No Answer Display
Press Exit, display returns to idle.
Emergency Call 1
Emergency calls when Security Sensor or Remote Inspection performed, SMDR can record
these call class as follows:
Security Sensor: SAD
Remote Inspection: WAD
2-1240 Security
Issue 2.0
Emergency Call 2
When Security Sensor or Remote Inspection performs an Emergency call, alarm reports are
recorded and the alarm display terminal indicates the following:
Security Sensor: 31: Sensor Detect
Remote Inspection: 32: Confirm Dial
Recording Emergency Call
By setting Program 90-20-11 (1; Report) Emergency calls can be recorded on security report.
Maximum of 50 records can be saved.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
GCD-8DLCA/ GCD-16DLCA
PGDAD
Related Features
Paging, External
Security 2-1241
Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-10-46 Service Code Setup (for System MLT, SLT 614(NA/AT)/

Administrator) Watch Message Setting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight 714(OT)
Service Code setting for Watching message digits

recording to VRS.
11-10-47 Service Code Setup (for System MLT, SLT 615(NA/AT)/

Administrator) Warning Message Setting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight 719(OT)
Service Code setting for Warning message digits

recording to VRS.
11-10-48 Service Code Setup (for System MLT 617(NA/AT)/

Administrator) Auto Dial for Security 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight 748(OT)
Sensor digits
Service Code setting for destination number
when Warning mode detected.
11-10-49 Service Code Setup (for System MLT 619(NA/AT)/

Administrator) Auto Dial for Remote 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight 749(OT)
Inspection digits
Service Code setting for destination number
when remote inspection detects no answer.
11-12-62 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) MLT, SLT 716(NA/AT)/
Security Sensor Reset 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight 837(OT)
Service Code setting for cancel Warning digits

message sending and emergency call.
Watch Mode Start 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight 817(OT)
Service Code (SC) setting for on/off watch digits
mode. SC+1;Watch mode start SC+0; Watch
mode end.
Security Sensor Mode Start 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight 819(OT)
Service code + 1, after the timer (Program digits
20-55-01) passes, sensor signal is valid.
Service code + 0, sensor signal is invalid.
2-1242 Security
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
13-04-01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed Maximum of 24 digits. No Setting
Enter the System and Group Speed Dialing Pause (Press line key 1)
numbers and names. Recall/Flash (Press line key 2)
key 3)

Assign a function key for Warning Message 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming

752 by default)

Assign a function key for Sensor Mode (code 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
33). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
20-01-19 System Options Emergency Call Setting of 0 = Not Call 0

Remote Inspection Feature when the Target 1 = Call
is in Off-Hook Status
Assign to make an emergency call when the
inspection target is in off hook status.
20-08-23 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call 0 = Disable 0

Service) Display Indication for Security 1 = Enable
Sensor Detection
display indication for security sensor detection.
20-08-24 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call 0 = Disable 0

Service) Display Indication for Emergency 1 = Enable
Call by Remote Inspection

display indication for emergency call by remote
inspection.
20-21-05 System Option when Long Conversation 0 ~ 64800 seconds 180

Conversation Cutoff for Remote Monitor
20-44-01 Watch Mode Setup Internal Paging Group 0 = No Internal Paging 0

for Watch Message 1 ~ 64 = Internal Paging Group
Define Internal paging group number for Number

Watching message.
20-44-02 Watch Mode Setup External Paging Group 0 = No External Paging 0

for Watch Message 1 ~ 8 = External Paging Group
Define External paging group number for Number

Watching message.
Security 2-1243
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-44-03 Watch Mode Setup VRS Message for 0 = Send Warning Tone 0
Watch Mode 1 ~ 100 = VRS Message
Define VRS number used for Watching Number

message.
20-44-04 Watch Mode Setup Interval Timer for 0 = No Message Send 0

Watch Message 1 ~ 60 (minutes)
Define interval time for sending Watching

message.
20-45-01 Remote Watch Setup Ring Terminal for Terminal No. 1 ~ 6: Extension No Setting
Remote Monitor Number (maximum of eight
Assign Extension number for Remote digits)

Inspection.
20-45-02 Remote Watch Setup Ring Time Setting Terminal No. 1 ~ 6: 0000 ~ 2359 0000
Assign Ringing start time for Inspected
Extension.
20-45-03 Remote Watch Setup Ring Timer Terminal No. 1 ~ 6: 0

Assign Ringing continue time for inspected 0 ~ 60
extension.
20-45-04 Remote Watch Setup Auto Dial Number Terminal No. 1 ~ 6: Speed Dial 0
Area Setting Area
Assign Speed dial area number when detect no 0 ~ 1999
answer at extension and make emergency call.
20-45-05 Remote Watch Setup VRS Message for Terminal No. 1 ~ 6: 0

Answer 0 = Send Warning Tone
Assign VRS message number when inspected 1 ~ 100 = VRS Message

extension answered.
20-45-06 Remote Watch Setup VRS Message for Terminal No. 1 ~ 6: 0

Autodial 0 = Send Warning Tone
Assign VRS message number when 1 ~ 100 = VRS Message

emergency call destination answered. Number
20-45-07 Remote Watch Setup Time of Repeat Terminal No. 1 ~ 6: 0

Autodial 0 = No Redial
Assign Repeat numbers for making emergency 1 ~ 255 (times)

call.
20-45-08 Remote Watch Setup Auto Dial Calling Terminal No. 1 ~ 6: 0

Time 0 = No Redial
Assign Calling continue time when making 1 ~ 3600 (seconds)

emergency call.
20-45-09 Remote Watch Setup Interval of Auto Dial Terminal No. 1 ~ 6: 0

Assign interval between Auto Dial when making 0 = No Call
emergency call. 1 ~ 3600 (seconds)
20-46-01 Security Sensor Setup Sensor Mode Security Sensor No. 0

Define to use security sensor. 1~8
0 = Disable

1 = Enable
2-1244 Security
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-46-02 Security Sensor Setup Internal Paging Security Sensor No. 0

Group for Warning Message 1~8
Define Internal paging group number for 0 = No Internal Paging
Warning message. 1 ~ 64 = Internal Paging Group
Number
20-46-03 Security Sensor Setup External Paging Security Sensor No. 0

Group for Warning Message 1~8
Define External paging group number for 0 = No External Paging
Warning message. 1 ~ 8 = External Paging Group
Number
20-46-04 Security Sensor Setup VRS Message for Security Sensor No. 0
Warning 1~8
Define VRS number used for Warning 0 = Send Warning Tone
message. 1 ~ 100 = VRS Message
Number
20-46-05 Security Sensor Setup Auto Dial Number Security Sensor No. 1999
Area Setting 1~8
Define Speed dial area number when sensor Speed Dial Area

detects warning. 0 ~ 1999
20-46-06 Security Sensor Setup VRS Message for Security Sensor No. 0
Answer 1~8
Define VRS message number when emergency 0 = Send Warning Tone
call destination answered. 1 ~ 100 = VRS Message
Number
20-46-07 Security Sensor Setup Auto Dial Wait Security Sensor No. 10
Timer 1~8
Define wait time before making emergency auto 0 = Immediate Call

dial. 1 ~ 64800 seconds
20-46-08 Security Sensor Setup Repeat Dial Times Security Sensor No. 0
Define repeat numbers for making emergency 1~8
call. 0 = No Redial

1 ~255 (times)
20-46-09 Security Sensor Setup Auto Dial Calling Security Sensor No. 120
Time 1~8
Define calling continue time when making 0 = No Call

emergency call. 1 ~ 3600 seconds
20-46-10 Security Sensor Setup Monitored Terminal Security Sensor No. No Setting
Define extension number for monitor from 1~8
outside. IP terminal cannot set as monitored Extension Number (maximum of
extension. eight digits)
20-46-11 Security Sensor Setup Interval of Auto Security Sensor No. 0

Dial 1~8
Assign interval between Auto Dial when making 0 = No Call

emergency call. 1 ~ 3600 seconds
Security 2-1245
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-46-12 Security Sensor Setup General Purpose Security Sensor No. 0

Relay Contact Detector Circuit Setup 1~8
Define general purpose relay contact detector 0 = Not Used
circuit number (programmed in Program 10-41) 1 ~ 8 = Detect Circuit Number
for connect security sensor.
20-47-01 Time Pattern Setting for Watch Mode Time Pattern 1 ~ 8: 0

Watch Mode 0 =Off
Define watch mode on/off against time pattern

1 = On
1 ~ 8.
20-48-01 Time Pattern for Security Sensor Security Time Pattern 1 ~ 8: 0

Sensor 0 =Off
Define security sensor on/off against time

1 = On
pattern 1 ~ 8.
20-55-01 Delay Timer for Security Sensor Sensor 0 ~ 3600 seconds 60

Delay Timer
Assign the delay time, when the contact
detection start to work after set the security

sensor. The sensor starts at once in case of set
0.
35-02-22 SMDR Output Options Security Auto SMDR Port 1 ~ 8: 0

Dialing 0 = No Output

1 = Output
SAD (Security Auto Dialing) on SMDR report.
35-02-23 SMDR Output Options Watch Auto Dialing SMDR Port 1 ~ 8: 0

Select whether the system should display the 0 = No Output
WAD (Warning Auto Dialing) on SMDR report. 1 = Output
90-10-01 System Alarm Setup Alarm Type 0 = Not Set 0

Set the alarm type 31, 32, 33. Alarm 31 Auto 1 = Major Alarm
dialing after sensor detection. 2 = Minor Alarm
Alarm 32 Auto Dialing for Remote Watch
function.
Alarm 33 Fail to auto dialing of security
function.

Assign whether or not the alarm information is 1 = Report (autodial)
reported to the predefined destination in

Program 90-11.
90-20-11 Traffic Report Data Setup Security Sensor 0 = Not Record 0

Dial Record 1 = Record
Assign whether or not the security sensor dial
report is recorded for Record Security sensor
dialing and Remote Inspection dialing.
2-1246 Security
Issue 2.0
Operation
< Program >

Program 11-10-20: (616) Record, Erase VRS message SC616
Program 11-10-46: (614) Watch message setting
Program 11-12-63: (717+1/0) Watch Mode Start/Stop
Program 15-07-01: Set 32 to Function key
Program 20-44-01: (1) Internal paging group, 1
Program 20-44-02: (1) External paging group, 1
Program 20-44-03: (1) VRS message number for watching, 1
Program 20-44-04: (5) Interval time of Watching message, 5 minutes
Program 20-47-01: (1) Watch mode time pattern, 1
To record Watching message to VRS 001:

1. Press Speaker and dial 616 + 7 + 001.
2. After the beep, record message.
Set up Watch mode:

1. Press Speaker and dial 614.
2. Dial the internal paging group number 01.
3. Dial the external paging group number 1.
4. Dial the interval time of Watch message 05.
5. Dial the VRS message number being watched 001.
To Start Watch mode:

1. Press Speaker and dial 717 + 1.
-OR-
Press function key (32), the function keys turn red.
-OR-
Wait for Watch mode pattern 1 to start.
2. The Watching message is sent to internal and external page group 1 (every five minutes).
Security 2-1247
Issue 2.0
To Stop Watch mode:

-OR-
Press the red lit function key (32), the function keys turn off.
-OR-
Wait for Watch mode pattern 1 to end.
Warning Message (Use Security Sensor and Warning Message)
< Program >

Program 10-41-01(Index 1): (2) Slot Number connected with 2PGDAD
Program 10-41-02(Index 1): (8) Port Number connected with 2PGDAD
Program 10-41-03(Index 1): (1) Detection circuit number on 2PGDAD where a Sensor is connected to
Program 11-10-47: (615) Warning message setting
Program 11-10-48: (617) Auto Dial Setting for Security Sensor
Program 11-12-62: (716) Security Sensor Reset
Program 11-12-64: (719+1/0) Security Sensor Mode Start/Stop
Program 15-07-01: Set 33 to Function key
Program 20-46-01: (1) Sensor mode, on
Program 20-46-02: (1) Internal paging group, 1
Program 20-46-03: (1) External paging group, 1
Program 20-46-04: (1) VRS message number for warning, 1
Program 20-46-05: (1999) Speed dial bin number, 1999
Program 20-46-06: (2) VRS message number for destination answer, 2
Program 20-46-07: (10) Auto Dial Wait Timer, 30 sec
Program 20-46-08: (3) Times of auto repeat dial, 3
Program 20-46-09: (30) Auto dial calling time, 30 sec
Program 20-46-10: (200) Monitored terminal number, 200
Program 20-46-11: (30) Interval of Auto Dial, 30 sec
Program 20-46-12: (1) General purpose relay contact detector circuit 1
Program 20-48-01: (1) Security sensor time pattern, 1
Program 20-55-01: (60 sec, default) Sensor delay timer
Set up Warning message:

2. Dial the Security sensor number 1.
3. Dial the Internal paging group number, 01.
4. Dial the external paging group number, 1.
5. Dial the VRS message number for the warning, 001.
2-1248 Security
Issue 2.0
Set up Auto Dial (Security Sensor) Using Service Code:

2. Dial the Security sensor number (1~8), 1.
3. Dial the Speed dial bin number to be used, 1999.
4. Dial the emergency call destination number xxx-xxx and press Hold.
5. Dial the monitored terminal number, 200.
6. Dial the VRS message number 002.
Start Security Operation:

1. Press Speaker and dial 719 + 1. The sensor is enabled using the timer in Program 20-55-01.
-OR-
2. Press function key (33), the function keys turn red. The key lights after the timer in Program
20-55-01 expires. The sensor is valid.
-OR-
3. Security Sensor time pattern 1 starts.
Stop Security Operation:

-OR-
2. Press the red lit function key (33), the function keys turn off.
3. Security Sensor time pattern 1 stops.
When Detect Security Sensor is On:

1. A Warning message sent to internal page group 1 and external page group 1.
2. An outgoing call is automatically sent according to setting in speed dial bin 1999.
3. When destination answers, VRS sends a second message.
4. Once received, extension 200 can be used for monitoring. To have a two-way conversation, dial

.
To Send Warning message:
To send a Warning message, but not as an Emergency call:
Change Program 20-46-05 to no setting.
Security 2-1249
Issue 2.0
To Place an Emergency Call:
To send an Emergency call, but not as an Warning message:
Set Programs 20-46-02 and 20-46-03 to 0.
Remote Inspection
<Program>
Program 11-10-49: (619) Auto Dial Setting for Remote
Program 20-45-01: (200) Remote Inspection terminal, 200
Program 20-45-02: (12:00) Ringing start time, 12 oclock noon
Program 20-45-03: (3) ringing continue time, 3 minutes
Program 20-45-04: (1999) Speed dial bin number, 1999
Program 20-45-05: (1) VRS message number when inspected extension answered, 1
Program 20-45-06: (2) VRS message number when emergency call destination answered, 2
Program 20-45-07: (3) Times of auto repeat dial, 3
Program 20-45-08: (30) Auto dial calling time, 30 sec
Program 20-45-09: (30) Interval of Auto Dial, 30 sec
Set Up Remote Inspection:

2. Dial the Remote Inspection terminal number (1-6).
3. Dial 1 to set.
4. Dial the Remote Inspection extension number, 200.
5. Dial the Ring start time, 1200.
6. Dial ring length time, 03.
7. Dial the Speed dial bin number to be used, 1999.
8. Dial the emergency call destination number xxx-xxx and press Hold.
9. When answered, dial the VRS message number 001.
10. After the beep, record the message and press #.
11. When the emergency call destination answers, dial VRS message2
12. After confirmation tone, record message.
2-1250 Security
Issue 2.0
Cancel the Remote Inspection:

1. Press Speaker and 619.
2. Dial the Remote Inspection number (1~6).
Answering the Remote Inspection Ring:

1. At 12:00 oclock (noon) extension 200 starts ringing.
2. The first VRS message plays when answered.
3. When message finishes, the call disconnects.
Not Answering the Remote Inspection Ring

1. At 12:00 oclock extension 200 starts ringing.
2. Ringing continues for over three minutes.
3. The ringing on extension 200 ends and a call is automatically placed to Speed dial bin 1999.
4. When answered, VRS sends a second message.
5. After finishing second VRS message finishes, called destination can automatically monitor
extension 200.
6. Press to enable two-way conversation.
Emergency Call Record
<Program Example>
Program 10-20-01 (Index 5): 10000
Program 14-01-06: 1
Program 35-01-01: 3 (LAN)
Program 35-02-22: 1
Program 35-02-23: 1
In above setting, make sensor mode or remote inspection emergency call, record to SMDR.
Alarm Report
<Program Example>
Program 90-10-02 (Index 31, 32, 33): (1) report
Program 90-50-01: Extension number for System Alarm Display Telephone
In the above settings, send an alarm display to the terminal preprogrammed in Program 90-50-01 and
report to the predefined destination in Program 90-11.
After Program 90-53-01 completes, alarm display is cancelled.
Security 2-1251
Issue 2.0
Security Report
<Program Example>
Program 10-20-01 (Index 12): 20000
Program 90-20-11: 1
In the above settings, use the sensor mode or remote inspection emergency call, to record a traffic report.
2-1252 Security
Issue 2.0
Description
An extension user can select a programmed Selectable Display Message for their extension. Display
multiline terminal callers see the selected message when they call the users extension. Selectable
Display Messaging provides personalized messaging. For example, an extension user could select the
message GONE FOR THE DAY. Any display multiline terminal user calling the extension may hear a
DND signal and then see the message. See table below for a list of the standard messages.
An extension user can add digits for date, time or telephone number after messages 1~8 and 10 (up to
24 characters). For example, an extension user could select the message ON VACATION UNTIL and
then enter the date. Callers see the original message followed by the appended date. They could then
tell when the user is coming back from vacation. The system allows all telephones to use the Selectable
Display Messaging feature at the same time.
All telephones can use Selectable Display Messaging at one time.
The default messages are:
Table 2-81 Selectable Display Messaging Defaults
No. Message Change # to...
1 IN MEETING UNTIL ##:## Time (when meeting done)

2 MEETING ROOM - ######## Room Name or extension
3 COME BACK ##:## Time (when returning)
4 PLEASE CALL ############ 11 digits (telephone number)
5 BUSY CALL AFTER ##:## Time (when returning)
6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:## Time (when returning)
7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/## Date (when returning)
8 BUSINESS TRIP ########## 10 digits (where reached)
9 GONE FOR THE DAY
10 ON VACATION UNTIL ##/## Date (when returning)
11~20 MESSAGE 11~20
Conditions
When Selectable Display Messaging is set as DND All, all other DND modes are canceled
when Selectable Display Messaging is canceled.
The Selectable Display Message will not display to the calling party's phone if there is
forwarding on the phone that set the Selectable Display, it will just follow the forwarding.
Selectable Display Messaging 2-1253

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Do Not Disturb

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Text Message Setting 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define the service code used when setting a digits

text message.

Assign a function key for Text Message (code 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
18). The Text Message key automatically 751 by default) Manual for
selects the message used when programming 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
the key. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
2-1254 Selectable Display Messaging

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-01-02 System Options Text Message Mode 0 = Call mode 1

Select whether an intercom caller should hear 1 = No Answer/Busy mode
busy (1) or ring through (0) for extensions which
have Selectable Display Messaging set.
Any extension previously set with Selectable
Display Messaging must cancel the feature and
reactivate for a change in this option to take affect.
20-02-07 System Options for Multiline Telephones 1~8 3

Time and Date Display Mode Type 1 = (12 hour) 10 MAR TUE
Set the System Time and Date display mode. 3:15PM
The time that displays in Selectable Display Type 2 = (12 hour) 3:15PM MAR
Messages follows this setting. 10 TUE
Type 3 = (12 hour) 3-10 TUE
3:15 PM
Type 4 = (12 hour) 3:15PM TUE
10 MAR
Type 5 = (24 hour) 10 MAR TUE
15:15
Type 6 = (24 hour) 15:15 MAR
10 TUE
Type 7 = (24 hour) 3-10 TUE
15:15
Type 8 = (24 hour) 15:15 TUE
10 MAR

extension port =
Class 1

(Text Messaging)
20-16-01 Selectable Display Messages Maximum of 24 characters. Refer to Table 2-

Program the Selectable Display Messages 81 Selectable
Display
(1 ~ 20). Refer to the chart below for character
entry. Messaging

Defaults on page
2-1253

Issue 2.0
Table 2-82 Selectable Display Message Character Entry Chart
1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ] ^ _ { | } > <
3 Enter characters: D-F, a-f, 3.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! # $ % & <space> ( )
Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ?
# Accepts a numeric entry from the user when setting a display message.
e.g., time or date. Back at ##:##
Feature Clear the character entry one character at a time (when using service code or
function key).
Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Operation
To select a message:
1. Press Speaker + press the Text Message key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 18) + enter digits to
append (if needed) + Speaker to hang up. Skip the remaining steps.
2. (Optional for messages 1~8 and 10.)
Dial the digits you want to append to the message.
You can append messages 1~8 and 10 with digits (e.g., the time when you will be back). Enter the time
in 24-hour format.
2-1256 Selectable Display Messaging

Issue 2.0

Intercom calls to extensions with Selectable Display Messaging set receive a DND signal and receive
the display message on their telephone display instead of ringing the extension based on the setting in
Program 20-01-02.
To allow calls to ring through and have the message displayed on the calling extension display, cancel
DND by pressing DND feature key + 0.
To cancel a message:
1. Press Speaker and the Text Message key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 18).
Using the Text Message Service Code to select a message:

1. Press Speaker and dial the Text Message service code (Program 11-11-14).
2. Dial the Selectable Display Message number to be used (01~20).
(Optional messages 1~8, and 10, dial the digits you want to append to the message.)
To cancel, repeat Step 1 and hang up.

Issue 2.0
Selectable Ring Tones
Description
An extension user can change the way trunks or internal calls ring their telephone. Selectable Ring
Tones allow an extension user to set up unique ringing for their calls. This is important in a crowded
work area where several telephones are close together. Because their telephone has a characteristic
ring, the user always can tell when their telephone is ringing.
Conditions
None
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features

2-1258 Selectable Ring Tones

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Ring Tones digits

changing the incoming ring tones heard for CO
and ICM calls.

If required, change the service code used for digits

checking how the incoming ring tones sound.
15-02-02 MultiLine Telephone Basic Data Setup 1 = High 2

5 = Ring Tone 2

6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5

Set the tone (pitch) of the incoming extension 3 = Low
call ring for the extension port you are 4 = Ring Tone 1
programming. Also refer to program 15-08.
5 = Ring Tone 2

6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
When an extension or a virtual extension is 0 = Pattern 1
assigned to the function key on the key 1 = Pattern 2
telephone, select the ring tone when receiving a 2 = Pattern 3
call on that key.
3 = Pattern 4
For CAR keys, only tone pattern 1 can be used.
The remaining patterns are not checked with
Extension
this feature.
5 = Pattern 5
6 = Pattern 6
7 = Pattern 7
8 = Pattern 8
Selectable Ring Tones 2-1259

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-10-01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order 0 = Tone Pattern 1 Priority order:
Setup 1 = Tone Pattern 2 1 = 0 (Tone
When two or more virtual extensions are set on 2 = Tone Pattern 3 Pattern 1)
a function key on the telephone, and the tone 3 = Tone Pattern 4 2 = 1 (Tone
pattern by which the sound of each extension Pattern 2)
Tone 3 = 2 (Tone
5 = Tone Pattern 5 Pattern 3)
6 = Tone Pattern 6 4 = 3 (Tone
Pattern 4)
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
22-03-01 Trunk Ring Tone Range 0 ~ 12 0

Select the ring tone range for the trunk. The (Ring Tone Pattern 1 ~ 4)
trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected (Melody 1 ~ Melody 5)
when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are (Ring Tone Pattern 5 ~ 8)
available.
Table 2-83 Intercom or Trunk Ring Setting
1 = High 5 = Ring Tone 2
2 = Mid Range 6 = Ring Tone 3
3 = Low 7 = Ring Tone 4
4 = Ring Tone 1 8 = Ring Tone 5
Operation
To change your extension incoming ring tones:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 720.
3. Dial 1 to set Intercom ring; 2 to set trunk ring.
4. Dial code for the desired ring pattern (1~8).
To listen to the incoming ring choices:

2. Dial 711.
2-1260 Selectable Ring Tones

Issue 2.0
3. Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring; 2 to listen to trunk ring.

4. For Intercom Ring:
Dial the code for the ring pattern you want to hear (1~8).
- OR -
For Trunk Ring:

Dial code for the ring pattern you want to hear (Ring 1~3, Melody 4~8). If you select Ring 1~3, a
second screen prompts for the tone pattern (1~4).
Selectable Ring Tones 2-1261

Issue 2.0
Serial Call
Description
Serial Call transfers a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension. Serial Calling saves
transferring steps between users. For example, a Customer Service Representative (CSR) has a client
on the telephone who needs technical advice. The CSR wants to send the call to Technical Service, but
needs to advise the client of certain costs when Technical Service is done. Rather than transferring the
call back and forth, the CSR can use Serial Call to Technical Service and announce, I have Ted on the
telephone. I need to talk to him again. Just hang up when youre done and Ill get him back.
Conditions
The transferring extension can remain off-hook to auto-receive the callback or hang up and
it rings back to them.
Serial Call requires a uniquely programmed function key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 43) or
assigning the Transfer key as Call Back in (Program 15-02-05=1).
Serial Call is not available to single line telephones.
Serial Call can be activated only during a supervised transfer.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Transfer
2-1262 Serial Call

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the operating mode of the extension
Transfer key. The keys can be for Call Transfer,
2 = Flash
Serial Calling or Flash. When selecting Flash
(2), refer also to Program 81-01-14.

Assign a programmable key as a Serial Call key 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)
Operation
To place a Serial Call to a co-worker:

1. Place or answer a call.
3. Dial co-workers extension number.
Co-worker must lift the handset to respond to your announcement.
4. Press the Serial Call key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 43).

-OR-
5. Press Transfer key if Program 15-02-05 is set to Call Back (Serial Call).
6. When the multiline terminal display shows WAIT TRF extension can hang up.
When your co-worker hangs up the call, the system makes an automatic live transfer back to your
extension.
Serial Call 2-1263

Issue 2.0
Simple MCU Video
Description
The Simple MCU Video feature provides a built in video conferencing MCU for up to four standard SIP
phones using the Remote Conference feature of the SV9100 system.
The video functionality can also be set to use system VoIP DSP resources for non-MCU video
conferencing if peer-to-peer calls between standard SIP phones is disabled or not supported by the
terminal used. If the system is set to allow peer-to-peer calls between standard SIP stations then no
system DSP resources are required to support the video functionality between standard SIP phones.
Figure 2-51 Maximum of Four Standard SIP Phone Users
Conditions
CO calls cannot be transferred to a Remote Conference pilot and must directed to the
conference pilot as a DID or DIL termination.
If peer-to-peer is disabled the standard SIP video feature requires VoIP DSP resource be
reserved for this function reducing the number of VoIP resources available for SIP phone
calls.
The system will always reserve 64 of the total 256 VoIP DSP resources for SIP voice calls.
When set in programming the following tables show how many resources are reserved for
each video mode. The total number of VoIP resources reserved for video cannot be higher
than 192.
Table 2-84 Non-MCU Mode Video Channel VoIP Reservation
Max simultaneous
Program 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
video channels
84-27-20 Mode 1 VoIP Reserved 32 32 64 64 64 96 96 96
84-27-21 Mode 2 VoIP Reserved 32 64 96 128 160 192 N/A N/A
2-1264 Simple MCU Video

Issue 2.0
Table 2-85 MCU Mode Video Channel VoIP Reservation (Peer-to-Peer Enabled Systems)
Max simultaneous group

Program 1
(each group is 4 video channels)
84-27-22 MCU Mode 1 VoIP Reserved 64
84-27-23 MCU Mode 2 VoIP Reserved 160
Video over SIP trunks is not supported for version 1.00 software and will be supported in a
later release.
The combination of Programs 84-27-20, 84-27-21, 84-27-22 and 84-27-23 determine the
total number of VoIP DSP resources reserved for video channels (not exceed 192).
Mode 1 video quality is CIF (352x288).
Mode 2 video quality is VGA (640x480).
Video quality mode used depends on the standard SIP device support of that resolution.
Setting Programs 84-27-22 or 84-27-23 to 1 will allow 4 video channels for MCU video
mode type (1 or 2) if DSP resources are available.
MCU group for mode 1 and mode 2 video cannot be enabled at the same time as it will try
to reserve more than 192 VoIP DSP resources for video.
The system will not allow more than 192 VoIP DSP resources to be reserved for video.
After making setting changes to Programs 84-27-20, 84-27-21, 84-27-22 or 84-27-23 the
VoIP daughter board must be reset for the changes to take effect. This will happen
automatically once all VoIP resources go idle.
Up to 256 VoIP DSP resources are available when the SV9100 is properly licensed.
Video streaming is not supported to SIP Terminal via Netlink.
Simple MCU video is not supported for SIP Trunk calls.
Once VoIP DSP resources have been reserved for video functionality, pressing Feature+4
on an idle display phone will show the number of VoIP DSP resources available for voice
calls.
Default Settings
None
Simple MCU Video 2-1265

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
Standard SIP Terminals with video capabilities that are compliant with RFC 3261, RFC 3262,
RFC 3264 (Session Description Protocol), RFC 1889 (Real Time Protocol).
GCD-CP10
GPZ-IPLE
Video license (0042)
Remote Conference license (0047)
VRS Port License (1001)
IP Telephone license (5111)
Related Features
Conference Remote


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-03 ETU Setup Number of Voice Channels Refer to the

Read only program showing number of VoIP Programming
resources available for voice calls. Manual for
This information can also be viewed by default values.
pressing Feature+4 on an idle display terminal.

License Code
GCD-CP10 slot (1).
indexes.
total of 256.
256.
14-18-03 IP Trunk Data Setup P2P Mode (SIP Trunk) 0 = Disable 0
Select whether or not peer-to-peer connection 1 = Enable
method is used for the SIP Trunk.
14-18-04 IP Trunk Data Setup Video Mode (SIP 0 = Disable 0

Trunk) 1 = Enable
Select whether or not the video mode is used
for the SIP Trunk.

This program is not supported for v 1.00 and
will be added in a future release.


terminals.

Peer mode.
If enabled, MUC mode resource settings are

used in Programs 84-27-22 and 84-27-23.
If disabled, non-MCU mode resource settings
are used in Programs 84-27-20 and 84-27-21.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-13-46 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Disable COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Remote Conference 1 = Enable
Set Class of Service option for Remote

conference.

Remote Conference - Name 1~4=
Set name for remote conference. Conf 1 - Conf 4
Conferences
5 ~ 20 = blank

Remote Conference - Password 1 ~ 4 = 1111
Set password for remote conference. Conferences

5 ~ 20 = blank

Set whether users are prompted to enter a
password to access the conference. Normal will

prompt users to enter a password. If set to Skip
no password is required to enter a conference.

Mode for Remote Conference 1 = Mode 1
Set the MCU video mode for remote
conference.
2 = Mode 2
Setting this value for mode 1 or 2 determines
whether 84-27-22 or 84-27-23 is used.

When Input Data is set to 1, Item No. 07 is 1 = IP Precedence
invalid. When Data is set to 2, Items

2 = Diffserv
No. 02 ~ 06 are invalid.
84-10-02 ToS Setup Priority, IP Precedence 0~7 0

1 = Router queuing priority. 0 = Low
7 = High
84-10-03 ToS Setup Low Delay 0~1 0

1 = Optimize for low delay routing. 0 = Normal Delay, Low Delay

84-10-04 ToS Setup Wideband (Throughout) 0~1 0
1 = Optimize for high bandwidth routing. 0 = Normal Throughput
1 = High Throughput
84-10-05 ToS Setup High Reliability 0~1 0

1 = Optimize for reliability routing. 0 = Normal Reliability
1 = Low Reliability


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-13-70 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 0 = Mode 1 0

Video Quality Mode 1 = Mode 2
Specifies the SIP trunk video quality mode.
Mode 1 = CIF (352x288)
Mode 2 = VGA (640x480)
Used with Programs 84-27-20 for Mode 1 and
84-27-21 for Mode 2 video quality settings.
84-13-71 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 0 = H.264 0

Video CODEC
This program specifies the video CODEC
(H.264 only).

84-13-72 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 1 = Static 2

Jitter Buffer Mode for Video 2 = Self adjusting
Sets the jitter buffer size adjustment. At default
this is set to self adjusting and should only be
changed when directed by support.
84-13-73 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup 0 ~ 1000ms 70ms

Minimum Jitter Buffer for Video
Sets the minimum value of jitter buffer for the
video stream.
This value must be smaller than the value of the
maximum jitter buffer.

This value should only be changed if needed
for highly congested networks.

Initial Jitter Buffer for Video
Sets the initial value of jitter buffer for the video
stream.
maximum jitter buffer and larger than the value
of the minimum jitter buffer.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Maximum Jitter Buffer for Video
Sets the maximum value of jitter buffer for the
video stream. It is used only when Program
84-19-72 (Jitter Buffer Mode for video) is set to
1: Fixed.
This value must be larger than the value of the

minimum jitter buffer.
84-19-65 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 = Mode 1 0

Setup Video Quality Mode 1 = Mode 2
Specifies the SIP station video quality mode
when Peer to Peer is disabled in Program
15-05-50.
Mode 1 = CIF (352x288)
Mode 2 = VGA (640x480)
84-19-66 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 = H.264 0

Setup Video CODEC
This program specifies the video CODEC

(H.264 only).

Setup Jitter Buffer Mode for Video 2 = Self adjusting
Sets the jitter buffer size adjustment. At default
this is set to self adjusting and should only be
changed when directed by support.
84-19-68 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 ~ 1000ms 70ms

Setup Minimum Jitter Buffer for Video
Sets the minimum value of jitter buffer for the
video stream.

maximum jitter buffer.

Setup Initial Jitter Buffer for Video
Sets the initial value of jitter buffer for the video
stream.
maximum jitter buffer and larger than the value
of the minimum jitter buffer.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Setup Maximum Jitter Buffer for Video
Sets the maximum value of jitter buffer for the
video stream. It is used only when Program
84-19-72 (Jitter Buffer Mode for video) is set to
1: Fixed.
This value must be larger than the value of the
minimum jitter buffer.
84-26-12 IPL Basic Setup Video RTP Port 0 ~ 65534

Sets the starting RTP port used by standard 20020
SIP terminal video.
84-26-13 IPL Basic Setup Video RTCP Port 0 ~ 65534

Sets the starting RTCP port used by standard 20021
SIP terminal video.
84-27-20 IPL Basic Setup Maximum non-MCU Video 0~8 0

Channel Mode 1
Sets the number of VoIP DSP resources to
reserve for non-MCU mode 1 video. This
program is used if Peer to Peer is disabled for
standard SIP phones.
VoIP DSP resources are shared between video
and voice calls. The system will always keep 64
resources for voice calls. When changing this

program if resources are exceeded the system
will provide an error message and will not allow
the setting to be changed.
When changing this program, all DSP
resources are reset when idle. In progress calls are
not affected, but until all DSP resources go idle this
change will not take affect.

Channel Mode 2


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-27-22 IPL Basic Setup Maximum MCU Group 0 = No MCU video channels 0
Number (Mode 1) reserved
Used to reserve VoIP DSP resources for mode 1 = 4 MCU video Mode 1
1 video conferences. When a DSP resource is channels reserved
reserved it is not available for SIP voice calls.
84-34-01 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

Set DTMF mode for standard SIP extensions. 1 = RFC2833
The recommended method is RFC2833. 2 = H.245

Type 3 SIP Extensions, profile 1.
84-34-02 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTMF Payload 96 ~ 127 110

Number
Set DTMF Payload for standard SIP
extensions.
84-34-03 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTMF Detection Type 1~5 1


84-34-04 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTMF Transmit Type 1~5 1

84-34-05 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTMF Rely (inband) 1~5 1
Retransmit Type

Issue 2.0
MCU Mode:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


terminals.

Peer mode.

If enabled, MUC mode resource settings are
used in Programs 84-27-22 and 84-27-23.

Remote Conference - Name 1~4=
Set name for remote conference. Conf 1 - Conf 4
Conferences
5 ~ 20 = blank

Remote Conference - Password 1 ~ 4 = 1111
Set password for remote conference. Conferences

5 ~ 20 = blank

Set whether users are prompted to enter a
password to access the conference. Normal will

prompt users to enter a password. If set to Skip
no password is required to enter a conference.

Mode for Remote Conference 1 = Mode 1
Set the MCU video mode for remote
conference.
2 = Mode 2
Setting this value for mode 1 or 2 determines
whether 84-27-22 or 84-27-23 is used.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Non-MCU Mode:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3



terminals.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Peer mode.

If disabled, non-MCU mode resource settings
are used in Programs 84-27-20 and 84-27-21.
84-19-65 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 = Mode 1 0

Setup Video Quality Mode 1 = Mode 2
Specifies the SIP station video quality mode
when Peer to Peer is disabled in Program
15-05-50.
Mode 1 = CIF (352x288)
Mode 2 = VGA (640x480)

Channel Mode 1


Channel Mode 2


Issue 2.0
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Description
SV9100 system software contains Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support that functions
with Private MIBs and SNMP traps. Typically, an administrator uses an SNMP application to centrally
manage network devices. Using SNMP on the SV9100 allows it to be managed alongside these other
network devices. The SV9100 is considered as an SNMP Agent that can talk to an SNMP application.
Private MIBS allow an SNMP application to make very specific requests to the SV9100 to obtain useful
information from the system. Below are examples of the different types of information that is available:
Hardware Key Code
Installed Hardware
System Software
System Date and Time
Installed licenses
VOIP Information
SNMP traps can be used for the purpose of monitoring SV9100 alarms via SNMP. When any of the
alarms are triggered on the SV9100, they can be reported in the SNMP application. Details of the
available alarms reports are available in Alarm Reports on page 2-26.
A MIB (Management Information Base) file has been created that can be loaded into an SNMP
application. An OID (Object ID) of 14399 has been registered for use by NEC for its systems, this is
pre-configured in the MIB file.
Conditions
An SNMP browser is required to manage and view SNMP traps.
When properly configured, an SV9100 that enters a condition which causes an alarm will
also send SNMP traps to the SNMP browser.
A properly configured MIB OID file which is fully compiled in the MIB browser is required
before the MIB browser can perform Get operations from the SNMP agent.
The Target Host parameter referenced in Program 90-64 is the SNMP network
management device(s) that are run on an external PC.
All MIB OIDs used with the SV9100 begin with 1.3.6.1.4.1.14399.20.10.
SNMP traps for alarms that are not desired can be turned off in Program 90-10 by setting
the alarm type to Not Set for the alarm number that corresponds to the SNMP trap
number. For instance, SNMP trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.14399.20.10.30.2.6.60.0 is for alarm number
60, notice the second to the last octet in the example SNMP MIB OID.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 2-1277

Issue 2.0
The R6 release does not have ability to see remote Netlink systems, only the Primary
system is supported.
MIB File
The MIB file is structured according to the following tables, only data listed here is available via
SNMP. The data for each of the items can be read or write. Read is data that can be requested
from the system. Write requires that a value be entered in the SNMP application. For example,
the slot number would need to be entered when querying a card.
Common MIB OID information is as follows, these OIDs will be seen at the beginning of the NEC
portion of each OID used by the SV9100.
14399 Marks the beginning of the NEC portion of the OID.
20 Represents KTS which means Key Telephone System.
10 Cygnus
The MIB OID parameters using the common parameters above are defined in more detail in the
following tables.
10. Position can be used to obtain information about a card in a specific slot in the system.
Table 2-86 10. Position
Type Description Read or Write
1. System ID NetLink System ID Write

10. Position
2. System Card Position Card Slot Number Write
30. CPU contains several items relating to the CPU. The following tables show a break down of
the data available.
Table 2-87 30. CPU
1. System 1. Hardware 1. Hardware Key Code Read
1. CPU Version Read
30. CPU 2. CPU Main Software Build Version Read

2. Main 1. Version
3. System Date and Time Read
4. DSP Version Read
2-1278 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

Issue 2.0
30. CPU can also be used to view licenses installed on the CPU. Licenses are split by feature
licenses or port licenses. Available feature licenses are as follows:
Table 2-88 Feature Licenses
0002. Cygnus-Link Read
0007. Hotel/Motel (PMS) Read
0008. SMDR Read
0009. Remote Upgrade Read
0013. Q-Sig Read
0016. K-CCIS Read
30. CPU 2. Main 2. Licenses 0018. SIP T.38 FAX Relay Read
0030. Encryption Read
0040. SIP Video Read
0041. XML Pro Read
0123. OAI Activation Read
2001. Activation Read
2101. P-event Read
Available port licenses are as follows:
Table 2-89 Port Licenses
0111. 1st Party CTI (Ethernet) Read
0112. 3rd Party CTI Client Read
2002. Client Read
30. CPU 2. Main 2. Licenses 5001. IP Trunk (SIP/H323) Read
5012. K-CCIS over IP Read
5111. IP Terminal Read
5201. Mobile Extension Read

Issue 2.0
Table 2-90 Network, Interface, Trapset and Trap
1. CPU Card Address Read
2. CPU Subnet Mask Read

3. Network
3. CPU Default Gateway Read
30. CPU 2. Main 4. CPU MAC Address Read
4. Interface 1~24. Type of card inserted in slot Read
5. Trapset 1~100. Alarm Report Write
6. Trap 1~100. Alarm Report Read
40. VOIP can be used to determine information about the IPL card.
Table 2-91 IPL Information Using VOIP
1. Hardware 1. VOIP Type Read
1. VOIP Card Address Read
2. Status 2. VOIP Subnet Mask Read
3. VOIP Card MAC Address Read
1. Gateway 1 IP Address Read

40. VOIPDB

4. Gateway
20. Common can be used to determine hardware versions and system port numbers.
Table 2-92 20. Common
1. Version 1. Hardware Version Read

20. Common 1. Card Info
2. Hardware 1. Port Number Read

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
None
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-12-13 GCD-CP10 Network Setup DNS Primary 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Set the IP Address of the Primary DNS server. 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
10-12-14 GCD-CP10 Network Setup DNS Secondary 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Set the IP Address of the Secondary DNS

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
server.
10-12-15 GCD-CP10 Network Setup DNS Port 0 ~ 65535 53

Set the port number of the DNS server.

90-64-01 SNMP Setup SNMP 0 = Disable 0
Set to enable the SNMP feature. 1 = Enable


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
90-64-02 SNMP Setup Community Name Maximum of 12 characters. Public

Enter the SNMP community name.

90-64-03 SNMP Setup Target Host 1 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0
Enter the IP Address of the PC running the
SNMP application.

SNMP application.

SNMP application.

SNMP application.

SNMP application.
90-64-08 SNMP Setup Domain Name Maximum of 255 characters. 0.0.0.0

Enter the Domain name.

90-64-09 SNMP Setup Trap Set Message 0 = Disable 0
When Disabled, the trap message is sent to the 1 = Enable
SNMP application for Major and Minor Alarms.
When Enabled, all trap messages set to the
SNMP application are sent.
When Program 90-64-09 is disabled, all
alarms that are Minor or Major are output as a trap
message. For each Alarm in Program 90-10, it is
possible to set the Alarm type to Major, Minor and
Not Set. With Program 90-64-09 disabled, any
alarms set to Not Set are not trapped.
Operation
Using the MIB File Example
When the MIB file has been loaded into an SNMP application, it can send requests to the SV9100 and
the SV9100 will send a response back. The request is made up from information available in the MIB
file. Refer to Figure 2-52 SNMP Hardware Key Code Request and Figure 2-53 SNMP CPU IP
Address Request for two examples of how these requests and responses are processed in regards to
the hardware key code and the CPU IP address.

Issue 2.0
First, the SNMP user can make a request in the application to retrieve the hardware key code. This
request is received by the SV9100 and in turn sends back the hardware key code via SNMP.
Figure 2-52 SNMP Hardware Key Code Request
Similarly, the SNMP user can make a request for the CPU IP address. This is received and sent back
via SNMP.
Figure 2-53 SNMP CPU IP Address Request
Using SNMP Traps Example
SNMP Traps can be used to provide notifications to an SNMP application when an SV9100 alarm has
been triggered on the SV9100. For an alarm to be trapped, it has be set to Major or Minor in Program
90-10-01. Usually the SNMP application has to be configured to watch for a particular trap to be
triggered.

Issue 2.0
The user first sets a trap for alarm 64. When alarm 64 occurs, an SNMP message is sent out that the
SNMP application picks up and displays.
Figure 2-54 SNMP Set Trap Alarm 64
The details of the alarm is sent in the trap message displayed in the SNMP application. Refer
to Figure 2-55 SNMP Trap Alarm Details for information available in the alarm display.
Figure 2-55 SNMP Trap Alarm Details

Issue 2.0
Description
The system is compatible with 500 type (Dial Pulse) and 2500 type (DTMF) analog single line
telephones (SLTs). You can install single line telephones as On-Premise or Off-Premise extensions.
Single line telephone users can dial codes to access many of the features available to multiline terminal
users. With single line telephones, you can have your system simulate PBX operation.
There are 320 single line telephones available (note that this number may be restricted due to system
power requirements).
When installing single line telephones you must have:

A port on an LCA blade for each single line telephone installed.
If you have 2500 sets, at least one block reserved on the GCD-CP10 for analog extension DTMF
reception.
DTMF Dial Out Timer Added
A program is added for DTMF dialing, Program 20-03-07 : System Options for Single Line
Telephones - Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time (Forced Dial). When Program 20-03-03 :
System Options for Single Line Telephones SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines is set to 0 (receive all digits
before sending), the system follows the timer in Program 20-03-04 and Program 20-03-07.
The timer in Program 20-03-04 System Options for Single Line Telephones Dial Sending Start Time
for SLT or ARS resets when the user dials another digit.
The timer in Program 20-03-07 System Options for Single Line Telephones Trunk Call Dial Forced
Sending Start Time (Forced Dial) does not reset when a digit is dialed. The user must finish dialing all the
digits before this time expires (entries: 0~64800 seconds, default: 0).
Conditions
Dial Pulse (500 type) single line telephones cannot access any feature that requires the
user to dial # or .
A single line telephone can initiate an Internal Zone page, but cannot receive an Internal
Zone Page.
When a Ring Group call rings a single line station, the BLF indication shows busy.
Stutter Dial Tone is supported to Single Line Telephones for Voice Mail Message Waiting.
The GCD-CP10 has 32 resources for DTMF receiving and Dial Tone detection. When a
GPZ-BS10 is installed there are 64 resources available.
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets 2-1285

Issue 2.0
When Program 10-09-01 is set to 0 (Common) and Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 1
(Yes), all DTMF/Dial Tone Detection resources are always allocated to analog trunks, not
analog extensions. However, if Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 0 (No), all DTMF/Dial
Tone Detection resources can be used for both analog trunks and analog extensions.
The Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is used when an internal call from a Single Line Telephone
is placed on hold.
A maximum of two single line telephones can be connected, in series, on one port as long
as the maxim cable resistance stays below 600 Ohms.
Default Settings
Single line telephones function as soon as they are installed and properly programmed.
System Availability
Terminals
All Single Line Terminals
GCD-4LCA
GPZ-4LCA
GCD-8LCA
GPZ-8LCE
2-1286 Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Single line telephone users have access to the following features:
Account Code Entry Intercom

Alarm Last Number Redial
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Line Preference
Barge-In Meet Me Conference
Callback Meet Me Paging
Call Forwarding Meet Me Paging Transfer
Call Forwarding with Follow Me Message Waiting
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override Night Service
Call Waiting/Camp-On Off-Hook Signaling
Central Office Calls, Answering Paging, External
Central Office Calls, Placing Paging, External (VRS)
Conference Paging, Internal
Department Calling PBX Compatibility
Department Step Calling Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Directed Call Pickup Save Number Dialed
Door Box Selectable Display Messaging
Do Not Disturb Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Flash Transfer
Forced Trunk Disconnect Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Group Call Pickup InMail
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Voice Over
Ringing
Hold Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Data Communications
APA and APR modules can be used with multiline terminals to provide an analog port.
Refer to the individual features for additional descriptive, programming and operational information.

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Program all on-premise 500/2500 type single 3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset
line telephones with circuit type 2. Set the 6 = PGD (Paging)
DIOPU trunk to type 1 when trunks should be
defined for off-premise extension (OPX) use.
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used --
10-03-03 ETU Setup (LCA PKG Setup) Transmit 1 ~ 57 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)
Gain Level (S-Level)

data for each blade.
10-03-04 ETU Setup (LCA PKG Setup) Receive Gain 1 ~ 57 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)
Level (R-Level)
Assign transmit and receive levels for 500/2500

type single line telephones.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
If the system has 2500 type (DTMF) single line 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
extensions, allocate at least one circuit for 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
analog extension DTMF reception (0 or 1). Circuit/Resource
Use the following as a guide when allocating 09 ~ 32 = 2
DTMF receivers: (Trunks)
In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF Circuit/Resource
receiver for every 10 devices that use them. 33 ~ 144 = 0
In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF (Common)
receiver for every five devices that use When
them. GPZ-BS10 is
The GCD-CP10 has 32 resources for DTMF installed, 81 ~
receiving and Dial Tone detection. When a 144 are available
GPZ-BS10 is installed there are 64 resources
available.
When Program 10-09-01 is set to 0 (Common)
and Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 1 (Yes),
all DTMF/Dial Tone Detection resources are always
allocated to analog trunks, not analog extensions.
However, if Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 0
(No), all DTMF/Dial Tone Detection resources can
be used for both analog trunks and analog
extensions.

Enter 0 if single line telephone is a 500 type
(dial pulse). Enter 1 if single line telephone is a

2500 type (DTMF).
Set In-Skin Voice Mail and InMail to 0.
15-03-05 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Off 0

Trunk Polarity Reverse 1 = On
mail.

Extension Polarity Reverse 1 = Enable (On)
mail.

Enabled On-Hook When Holding (SLT) 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable this program step.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-03-08 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Disable (No) 1

Answer On-Hook when Holding (SLT) 1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable/Disable Answer ON-Hook when Holding

for SLT terminals.

Caller ID Function - For External Module 1 = Enable
Important:

disabled for the system integration codes to be
correct.
With a 2500 set (no Caller ID) installed, this
must be set to 0 for incoming callers to have a
talk path.

Determine if an extension user telephone

should display the Caller ID name.
15-03-14 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Calling Extension Number 0
Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode (Calling)
Determine what the display shows when a 1 = External Caller ID (Forward)
multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside
call.


For ESL sets, enable this option (1) to allow the 11-12-53).
20-03-02 System Options for Single Line Telephones 0 = Do not ignore (No) 0
Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF SLT 1 = Ignore (Yes)
Port
Define whether the system should receive dial

pulse and DTMF signals (0) or ignore dial pulse
and only accept DTMF signals (1).
20-03-03 System Options for Single Line Telephones 0 = Receive all dialed data, 0
SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines before sending (All)
Set the SLT phones to (0). Collect all digits 1 = Direct through out (Direct)
before sending or (1), send out immediately
after receiving. When using a third-party
external paging device, set this option to 1. In
addition, set Program 20-03-04 to 1.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the time before the first digit is sent out.
When using a third-party external paging

device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-03 to 1.
20-03-05 System Options for Single Line Telephones 0 = Normal Mode 0

SLT Operation Mode 1 = Extended Mode1
Define the Operation Mode for SLT terminals. 2 = Extended Mode2

Headset Ringing Start Time (for SLT)
Define the headset ringing start time. After this
time expires from the time when a single line

telephone is off-hook, the system sets the
single line telephone to headset ringing mode.

Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time
(Forced Dial)
Define the Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start
Time.

Assign a unique Class of Service for Dual OPX Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
telephones only when using Continued Dialing. (1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1

on ICM Call


Trunk
Define the ringing cycle (1 ~ 13) for normal

incoming trunk calls (DIL, ring group, etc.).

Define the ringing cycle (1 ~ 13) for ICM calls.

Define the ringing cycle (1 ~ 13) for DID calls.

3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-02 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Start delay 0 ~ 255 Type 1 ~ 5 = 0

time (0.25ms ~ 64ms)

Receiver.
80-03-03 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Min. detect 0 ~ 15 Type 1 = 10

level detect level 0: (-20dBm)
detect level 1:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) Type 4 ~ 5 = 10
(-20dBm)
detect level 2:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-80dBm(0) to -95dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-04 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Max. detect 0 ~ 15 Type 1 ~ 5 = 2

-5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
detect level 2:
-10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
80-03-05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward twist 0~9 Type 1 = 5

level (1dB ~ 10dB) (6dBm)
Receiver. (6dBm)
Type 3 = 5
(6dBm)

Type 4 = 5
(6dBm)
Type 5 = 5
(6dBm)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backward 0~9 Type 1 = 0

twist level (1dB ~ 10dB) (1dBm)
Receiver. (1dBm)
Type 3 = 0
(1dBm)

Type 4 = 0
(1dBm)
Type 5 = 0
(1dBm)
80-03-07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON detect time 1 ~ 255 Type 1 = 1

Define the On detection time for DTMF Tone (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Receiver. Type 2 = 1
(30ms)
Type 3 = 1
(30ms)

Type 4 = 1
(30ms)
Type 5 = 1
(30ms)
80-03-08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF detect 1 ~ 255 Type 1 = 1

time (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Receiver. (30ms)
Type 3 = 1
(30ms)

Type 4 = 1
(30ms)
Type 5 = 1
(30ms)
If required, modify the criteria for dial tone 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm Type 2 (BT) 0
detection and call progress tone detection for (-25dBm)
the DTMF tones received at a single line
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
Type 3 (RBT) 0

4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
telephone. (-25dBm)
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
Type 4, Type 5
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
0
tone time (0 = not detect) 132 (3990ms)
Set No Tone Time. 1 ~ 255 = 60 ~ 7680ms Type 2 (BT)
The formula is 30 + 30N. 132 (3990ms)

+ 30 1 = 60. 132 (3990ms)
30+30255=7680 0

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
82-11-01 LCA Initial Setup Bounce Protect Time 0 = No Setting 3

Specify a time for detection of a valid off-hook 1 ~ 15 = 100ms ~ 1.5sec
indication that is long enough to prevent an
unintentional bounce of the receiver from being

detected as a new off-hook indication from a
Single Line Telephone.
82-11-02 LCA Initial Setup HookFlash Start Time 0 = 40ms 5 [290ms]

Specify the minimum hookflash time from a 1 ~ 15 = 90ms ~ 790ms
Single Line Telephone or analog Voice Mail
system before it is detected as the beginning of
a valid hookflash.
82-11-03 LCA Initial Setup HookFlash End Time 0 = HST+0ms 1 ~ 15 = 7

Specify the maximum hookflash duration from a HST+100ms ~ HST+1500ms
Single Line Telephone to receive a second dial

(HST = Hookflash Start Time)
tone.
Operation
Refer to the individual features listed in the Related Features section of this feature.

Issue 2.0
Softkeys
Description
Each display telephone provides interactive softkeys for intuitive feature access. It is not necessary to
remember feature codes to access the telephone advanced features because the function of the
softkeys change as the user processes calls.
Additional options allow you to fine tune the multiline terminal volume levels for handset receive and
transmit, speaker volume, ringer and handset volume, and headset volume levels. You can also
customize the point at which the built-in speakerphone switches from transmit to receive; a boon for
noisy environments. The display telephones also have a contrast control for the LCD display.
Conditions
If a feature is restricted by an extension Class of Service, though the Softkey menu still
displays the option, the user cannot set the feature.
Using the Directory Dialing Softkeys, Recall can toggle the language display from English
to Japanese.
The feature must be active to change the volume (e.g., telephone must be ringing, page
being heard, etc.). Press the volume keys when the telephone is idle to adjust the display
contrast.
Disabling the softkeys or limiting the menu key is supported with SV9100 system software.
When a Softkey is disabled, the Softkey is not displayed on the LCD (depending on the
feature it may appear) and related keys are not functional. Cursor keys and the Menu key
are also disabled.
To use the Disable Softkey function, Program 15-02-71 must be set to 1 (On) at associated
terminal.
Default Settings
Display shows time/date/extension/Softkey menu information.
System Availability
Terminals
2-1296 Softkeys
Issue 2.0
None
Related Features
Directory Dialing
Volume Controls

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Customize the service code used to select the
display language for a multiline terminal.

4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
Softkeys 2-1297
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Disable Softkey 1 = On
Disable (1) softkey buttons and limit the softkey
display. Also limits the Menu key left and right
buttons.
Operation
None
2-1298 Softkeys
Issue 2.0
Description
Speed Dialing gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. This saves time, for
example, when calling a client with whom they deal often. Instead of dialing a long telephone number,
the extension user just dials the Speed Dialing code.
There are three types of Speed Dialing: System, Group and Station. All co-workers can share the
System Speed Dialing numbers. All co-workers in the same Speed Dialing Group can share the Group
Speed Dialing numbers. Station Speed Dialing numbers are available only at a users own extension.
The system has 10000 Speed Dialing bins that you can allocate between System and Group Speed
Dialing and a maximum of 64 Speed Dialing Groups are available. Each extension has 10 Station Speed
Dial bins.
Each Speed Dialing bin can store a number with up to 24 digits.

NOTE
When placing an Speed Dialing call, the system normally routes the call through Trunk Group Routing or
ARS (whichever is enabled). Or, the user can preselect a specific trunk for the call. Also, the system can
optionally force System Speed Dialing numbers to route over a specific Trunk Group. User preselection
always overrides the system routing.
System Bins Limited to 1000 with Speaker Key or #2 Service Code
Though there are 10000 Speed Dialing bins available in the system, once programmed, these bins can
currently be dialed only using the Directory Dial feature (Press Directory key + ABB softkey + press
ABBc/ABBg + use arrow keys to locate number or enter the Speed Dial bin name & press arrow key to
locates number + Speaker to place call.)
Speaker and service code #2 operations are not available for any 4-digit Speed Dial System bin
number.
NOTE
DSS Console Chaining
DSS Console chaining allows an extension user with a DSS Console to chain to a Speed Dialing number
stored under a DSS Console key. The stored number dials out (chains) to the initial call. This can, for
example, simplify dialing when calling a company with an Automated Attendant. You can program the
bin for the company number under one DSS Console key (e.g., #200) and the clients extension number
under the other (e.g., #201). The DSS Console user can press the first key to call the company, wait for
the Automated Attendant to answer, then press the second key to call the client (extension 400). See the
Programming section below for additional details.
The DSS Console user can also chain to an Speed Dialing number dialed manually, from a
Programmable Function Key or a One-Touch Key.
NOTE
Speed Dial System/Group/Station 2-1299

Issue 2.0
Storing a Flash
To enhance compatibility with connected Centrex and PBX lines, Speed Dialing bin can have a stored
Flash command. For example, storing 9 Flash 926 5400 causes the system to dial 9, flash the line and
then dial 926 5400. The Flash can be stored by the user from their telephone or by the system
administrator during system programming.
Using a Programmable Function Key
To streamline frequently-called numbers, a Speed Dialing Programmable Function Key can also store a
Speed Dialing bin number. When the extension user presses the key, the telephone automatically dials
out the stored number. This provides true one-touch calling via a telephone function keys.
By pressing the Right Cursor key, the user can access all directory menus. The flow chart below shows
the menu access sequence (refer to Figure 2-56 Right Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart on page
2-1300). If the terminal is not allowed access to Speed Dial and/or Telephone Book numbers or no
telephone numbers are programmed in those areas, they are skipped.
Figure 2-56 Right Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart
2-1300 Speed Dial System/Group/Station

Issue 2.0
Conditions
Speed Dial bins can contain stored Account Codes. To prevent them from being displayed
use Program 35-05-04.
ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects.
A user can implement Speed Dial only if their extension has outgoing access to trunks.
An extension can have a One-Touch Key for Speed Dial operation.
If you enter a PBX trunk access code in a Speed Dial bin, the system automatically inserts
a pause after the bin.
Single line telephones can dial only System and Group Speed Dial numbers.
Toll Restriction may prevent a user from using a stored Speed Dial number.
Unless a user preselects a trunk, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk Speed Dial uses
for trunk calls.
If the Speed Dial bin does not have a name assigned, it does not show when scrolling
through the directory of speed dials.
If Program 13-01-01 is set to 1 (Intercom Access mode), system speed dial bins require
inserting a trunk access code.
When operating the Right Cursor key, if the menu is not enabled by programming or there
are no numbers in a telephone book, the menu is skipped and the next menu will appear.
For DT3XX or DT7XX terminals, use the Feature Key to clear the characters one at a time
when entering the name.
The priority for the Large LED color for incoming calls is Programs 13-04-13, then 14-01-35
or 15-23-01.
Default Settings
Available (No Speed Dialing bins are assigned).
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Account Code Entry
Code Restriction
Dial Tone Detection
One-Touch Calling
PBX Compatibility
Trunk Group Routing

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
If dial tone detection is enabled, allocate at 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
least one circuit for dial tone detection (Type 0 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
or 2). Circuit/Resource
09 ~ 32 = 2
(Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33 ~ 144 = 0
(Common)
When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Administrator) Storing Common Speed 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the service code used for storing
Common Speed Dialing Numbers

Administrator) Storing Group Speed 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the service code used for storing
group speed dialing numbers.

Operation) Station Speed Dial Number 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Entry digits
Customize the service code used for entering
station speed dial numbers.

Assign Service code used for accessing digits

System Speed Dial bins (default #2).

Group Speed Dialing 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Customize the service code used for group digits

speed dialing.
13-01-01 Speed Dialing Option Setup Speed Dialing 0 = Trunk Outgoing Mode 0
Auto Outgoing Call Mode 1 = Intercom Outgoing Mode
Designate trunk or intercom outgoing mode.
13-01-03 Speed Dialing Option Setup Number of 0 ~ 10000 1000

Common Speed Dialing Bins 0 = No Common Speed Dialing
Designate the bins the system uses for System

Speed Dialing.
13-02-01 Group Speed Dialing Bins 01 ~ 64 No Setting

Designate the starting and ending bin numbers 0 ~ 9999
the system uses for Group Speed Dialing. Starting bin number range:
0 ~ 9990

Ending bin number range:
0 ~ 9999
13-03-01 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for 01 ~ 64 1

Extensions
For Group Speed Dialing, assign extensions to

Speed Dialing groups.
Enter the System and Group Speed Dialing Pause (Press line key 1)
numbers and names. Recall/Flash (Press line key 2)
key 3)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
13-04-02 Speed Dialing Number and Name Name Maximum of 12 characters No Setting
Assign a name to each System Speed Dial bin. (Use dial pad to enter name)
Destination Number Program 13-04-03):


Define the ring tone for the caller ID routed call. 1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1 ~ 4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern (1 ~ 5)
10 ~ 13 = Tone Pattern (5 ~ 8)
13-04-13 Speed Dialing Number and Name Large 1 = Not used No Setting
LED Illumination Setup by (CID) 2 = Red
Define the color the large LED will blink when 3 = Green
Incoming call with matching Caller ID is 4 = Blue
received.
5 = Yellow
6 = Purple

7 = Light Blue
8 = White
9 = Rotation
0 = No Setting
13-05-01 Speed Dialing Trunk Group Trunk Group 0 = No setting 0

Number 1 ~ 100
For each System Speed Dialing number, enter
the routing option Trunk Group Number
(1 ~ 100) to dial out on.
14-02-06 Analog Trunk Data Setup Pause at 1st digit 0 = No Pause (No) 1
after Line Seize in Manual Dial Mode 1 = Pause (Yes
Enable/Disable the system ability to pause after

dialing the first digit.
15-02-04 Multiline Telephone Basic Data setup 0 = Common and Individual 0

Redial (Speed Dial) Control Speed Dialing
Assign the extension Redial key for either 1 = Group Speed Dialing

Common or Group Speed Dialing.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign a function key for System Speed Dialing 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(27) or Group Speed Dialing (28). You can 751 by default) Manual for
program the key as either a general Speed
Dialing key or you can choose to store a bin Function Code) (Service Code
number with the function key. This key then
always dials the associated bin number. If
752 by default)
storing a bin number along with the code, do
not store 0, 00 or 000. To bypass entering a bin
number, press Hold (Hold is also required if
programming the function key using the service
code 751).
15-14-01 Programmable One-Touch Keys Station Maximum of 24 digits. No Setting

Speed Dial Data 1~0, , #, Pause, Hookflash, @
Assign the extensions Speed Dial number (Code for Answer-Wait)

(1 ~ 10).
15-14-02 Programmable One-Touch Keys Station Name No Setting

Speed Dial Name
Assign the name associated with the extension

Speed Dial Bin (1 ~ 10).

extension port =
Class 1

Turn Off or On an extension user ability to store

System or Group Speed Dialing numbers.
20-08-03 COS Options (Outgoing Call Service) 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

System Speed Dialing 1 = On
numbers.
20-08-04 COS Options (Outgoing Call Service) 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Group Speed Dialing 1 = On
numbers.

For DSS Console Chaining, assign an Speed 001 ~ 114 Programming
Dialing Service Code (or) plus a 2-digit bin 0 ~ 99 (General Functional Manual for
number to a DSS Console key. Level) default values.
No.)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Functional Level)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Define the detect levels for the DTMF Tone 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
Receiver. 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
80-03-02 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Start delay 0 ~ 255 (0.25ms ~ 64ms) Type 1 ~ 5 = 0
time
Define the start delay times for the DTMF Tone

Receiver.
80-03-03 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Min. detect 0 ~ 15 Type 1 = 10

Define the minimum detect levels for the DTMF -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15) Type 2~3 = 15
detect level 1:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) Type 4~5 = 10
(-20dBm)
detect level 2:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-80dBm(0) to -95dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-04 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Max. detect 0 ~ 15 Type 1 ~ 5 = 2

Define the maximum detect levels for the DTMF 0dBm(0) to -15dBm(15)
-5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
detect level 2:
-10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
80-03-05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward twist 0 ~ 9 (1dB ~ 10dB) Type 1~5 = 5
level (6dBm)
Define the forward twist levels for the DTMF

Tone Receiver.
80-03-06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backward 0 ~ 9 (1dB ~ 10dB) Type 1~5 = 0
twist level (1dBm)
Define the backward twist levels for the DTMF

Tone Receiver.
80-03-07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON detect time 1 ~ 255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) Type 1~5 = 1
Define the on detect times for the DTMF Tone (30ms)
Receiver.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF detect 1 ~ 255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) Type 1~5 = 1
time (30ms)
Define the off detect timer for the DTMF Tone

Receiver.
Define the detection levels for the Call Progress 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm Type 2 (BT) 0
Tone Detector. (-25dBm)
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
Type 3 (RBT) 0

4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
(-25dBm)
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
Type 4, Type 5
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
0

15
detect level 2:
(-25dBm)
-40dBm (0) to -55dBm(15)
Type 4, Type 5
0
Ratio (-20dB)
Detector. (-20dB)
Type 3 (RBT) 4

(-20dB)
Type 4, Type 5
0
tone time (0 = not detect) 132 (3990ms)

+ 30 1 = 60. 132 (3990ms)
30+30255=7680 0
Count Type 2 (BT) 1
0

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

minimum time (30 + 30 ~ 7680ms) (300ms)
Type 3 (RBT)

25 (780ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-07 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON 0 ~ 255 (30+30-7680ms) Type 1 (DT) 0
maximum time Type 2 (BT) 20
Define the on maximum time for the Call (450ms) [ET]
Progress Tone Detector. Type 3 (RBT)
40 1230ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 1 ~ 255 (30+30-7680ms) Type 1 (DT) 1
minimum time (60ms)
Define the off minimum time for the Call Type 2 (BT) 12
Type 3 (RBT)

83 (2520ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 0 ~ 255 (30+30-7680ms) Type 1 (DT) 1
maximum time (60ms)
Define the off maximum time for the Call Type 2 (BT) 20
Type 3 (RBT)

115 (3480ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
Operation
To store an Speed Dialing number (display telephones only):

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 753 (for system) or 754 (for group).
3. Dial system or group storage code.
Initially, there are 1000 System Speed Dialing codes. There are Group Speed Dialing codes only if you
define them in programming.

Issue 2.0
4. Dial telephone number you want to store (up to 24 digits).

Valid entries are 0~9, # and . To enter a pause, press Transfer. To store a Flash, press Recall.
Enter @ for await answer before sending following digits on ISDN.
5. Press Hold.
6. Enter the name associated with the Speed Dialing number.
1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ] ^ _ ` { | }
0 Enter characters:
0 ! # $ % & ( )
Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ?
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey
instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Feature Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD (Telpro only) Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
7. Press Hold.
8. Press Speaker to hang up or repeat steps 3~7 to program another System or Group Speed Dial
bin.
To dial a System Speed Dialing number:

1. Go off-hook.
2. Press Redial.
- OR -

Issue 2.0
Press the Right Cursor key until the Group Speed Dial menu appears.
3. Dial the System Speed Dialing storage code.
Unless you preselect, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call. The system may optionally
select a specific Trunk Group for the call.
If you have a DSS Console, you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number.
To store a System Speed Dialing number under a Programmable Function Key:

1. At multiline terminal, press Speaker.
2. Dial 751.
3. Press the key where the number is to be stored.
4. Dial 27.
5. Dial System Speed Dial Bin number to put under the key.
To dial a System Speed Dialing number under a Programmable Function Key:

2. Press the key, which has the stored number to be dialed.
The number seizes an outside line and dials out.
To dial a Group Speed Dialing number:

1. Go off-hook.
2. Press Redial.
- OR -
Press the Right Cursor key until the Group Speed Dial menu appears.
- OR -
Press the Group Speed Dialing key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 28).
To preselect, press a line key in step 1 (instead of Speaker) before pressing Redial or Speed Dialing
key.
3. Dial the Group Speed Dialing code.
Unless you preselect, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call.
To check your stored Speed Dialing numbers (display telephone only):

2. For System Speed Dialing, press Redial.

Issue 2.0
Dial the Speed Dialing Code (e.g., common code 001).

If the entire stored number is too long for your telephone display, press to see the rest of the number.
- OR -
For Group Speed Dialing, press the Group Speed Dialing key.
- OR -
For System Speed Dialing key, press the System Speed Dialing key.
To display additional numbers, repeat from step 1.
- OR -
Press the Right Cursor key until the appropriate Telephone Book, System or Group Speed Dial
menu appears.
Use the Volume "Down" and Volume "Up" keys to scroll through the stored numbers.
To store a Station Speed Dialing number (display telephones only):

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 755.
3. Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed (0~9).
1 = Station Speed Dial buffer 1
" " " " " "
4. Dial the telephone number you want to store (up to 24 digits).
Valid entries are 0~9, # and . To enter a pause, press MIC. To store a Flash, press Recall.
5. Press Hold.
6. Enter the name associated with the Speed Dialing number (display telephones only). Refer to
Table 2-93 Keys for Entering Names on page 2-1310.
7. Press Hold.
To store a Station Speed Dialing number (Single Line Telephones only):

1. Lift the Handset.
2. Dial 755.
3. Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed (0~9).
1 = Station Speed Dial Buffer 1

Issue 2.0

4. Dial the telephone number you want to store (up to 24 digits).
Valid entries are 0~9, # and .
A Single line set cannot program a pause or flash in a spd bin.
5. Hang up.
To dial a Station Speed Dialing number (multiline terminal):

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial #7 (default Service Code).
3. Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number (0 ~9).
: : : : : : :
Unless you preselect, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call. The system may optionally
select a specific Trunk Group for the call.
To dial a Station Speed Dialing number (Single Line Telephone):

1. Lift the Handset.
2. Station Speed Dial #7
Group Speed Dial #4
System Speed Dial #2
3. Dial the Speed Dial Memory Location.
Station Speed Dial 0~9
Group Speed Dial xxx (none at default)
System Speed Dial 000~9999
4. Converse.

Issue 2.0
Speed Dial Telephone Book
Description
Speed Dial Telephone Book is a part of the Speed Dialing system. A maximum of 200 Telephone
Books are supported per system. Individual extensions can be assigned up to two Telephone Books.
Each Telephone Book can contain up to 450 alphabetical entries. Each of the 200 Telephone Books can
have the 450 entries separated into 40 different Telephone Book Groups providing a quicker search
capability to the user.
For example, Telephone Book 1 represents equipment manufacturer ABC Corporation. The ABC
Corporation is divided into three groups; Sales, Service, and Parts. When a user needs to search the
ABC Corporation Telephone Book for a Sales number, the search from all 450 entries in the ABC
Corporation Telephone Book can be narrowed to the entries in the Sales Group only.
Conditions
A maximum of 200 Telephone Books is supported.
Each extension in the SV9100 can be assigned two different Telephone books.
Each Telephone Book can contain 40 different Telephone Book Groups.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
DT300 and DT700 terminals
None
Related Features
2-1314 Speed Dial Telephone Book

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Telephone Book Lock Service 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Password to unlock telephone book. digits
Dial the service code to lock the telephone
book (Program 11-11-56), then it prompts
you for an extension number to unlock.
Type in the ext number you want to unlock
then you will be prompted for the password.
Type in the password and then the
telephone book is unlocked. When you dial
the password to unlock the telephone book it
removes the entry in 15-19-06 so the book is
not locked anymore.
To lock the telephone book do the same
steps as above when the book is already
unlocked. It will then assign 15-19-06 for
you.
13-07-01 Telephone Book Dial Number and Name Maximum of 24 digits No Setting
Speed Dialing Data 1~9, 0, , #,
Assign telephone numbers to entries in each Pause (Press line key 1),
book. There are 200 books with 450 entries Recall/Flash (Press line key 2),
(0-449) in each book.
key 3)
13-07-02 Telephone Book Dial Number and Name Maximum of 12 digits No Setting
Name (Use dial pad to enter name)
Assign a name to each telephone number.
13-07-04 Telephone Book Dial Number and Name 1 ~ 40 1

Group Number
Assign each entry in the telephone book to a
group if needed.
In the telephone book you can break it down
further and have specific groups to search on. For

example, you could have sales, support, personal,
finance, etc. groups to narrow your search.
A name and number can be assigned to an
entry and each entry can be assigned to a group.
Speed Dial Telephone Book 2-1315

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
13-08-01 Telephone Book System Name Telephone Maximum of six characters. No Setting
Book Name
Assign a name to all 100 telephone books.
13-09-01 Telephone Book Group Name Group Name Maximum of 12 characters. 1 = Group 01
Assign a name to all 40 telephone book groups 2 = Group 02
per telephone book (1-200). 3 = Group 03
:
:
:
40 = Group 40
13-10-01 Telephone Book Routing Outgoing Mode 0 = Trunk Outgoing 0

Assign a trunk or ICM per telephone book 1 = Intercom Outgoing
(1-100).
If set to trunk, it follows the stations trunk
group routing and you do not enter the trunk access

code in the entries. If set to ICM, you must enter the
trunk access code in front of the number and it will
follow the trunk access code for routing.
15-19-01 System Telephone Book Setup for Maximum of eight digits Port 1 : 1
Extension Telephone Book 1 0 ~ 200 Port 2 : 2
Assign a station to the first telephone book. A :
station can have a maximum of two telephone :
books assigned.
Port 200 : 200
15-19-02 System Telephone Book Setup for Maximum of eight digits 0

Extension Telephone Book 2 0 ~ 200
Assign a station to the second telephone book.
A station can have a maximum of two
telephone books assigned.
15-19-06 System Telephone Book Setup for 0 = Off 0

Extension Locking of Telephone Book 1 = On
Allows the book to be locked/unlocked. When
locked, the password must be dialed to unlock
the book or it can be removed via programming.
15-19-07 System Telephone Book Setup for 0000 ~ 9999 (Fixed four digits) 0000
Extension Password
Allows you to lock/unlock the telephone book

per extension.

Issue 2.0
Operation
To search for an entry in the Telephone Book:

1. Press the DIR softkey.
2. Press the TELBK softkey.
3. Press the softkey associated with the first or second book.
- OR -
Press the Right cursor key.

4. After selecting the book, choose one of the following search types.
To scroll the entries in the book, press Up or Down on the cursor pad. Once you reach the last entry
on the page, the display advances to the next page. To select one of the entries, press the associated
number on the dial pad or the center cursor pad button.
Search By Name
Type as many letters as you want used for the search. If searching for an entry labeled Paul,
type P. A page listing all entries beginning with the letter P is displayed. Or, you could type
Paul and it would display Paul. After typing the search criteria, press the down pad to initiate
the search.
Search By Number
Press the NUM softkey. Now you can do the same search as above but using a telephone
number instead of a name. If searching for a number beginning with 1, type 1. A page listing
all entries beginning with the number 1 is displayed. Or, you could type part of all of the
telephone number 817 and it would display all telephone numbers beginning the 817. After
typing the search criteria, press the down pad to initiate the search.
Search Using Softkey

Press the Menu softkey and choose one of the following search types.
Select the NAME softkey to search by name. Use the same search criteria explained in the
Search by Name section.
Select the GRP softkey to search by groups within that phone book. Use the Up/Down
arrow to search through groups (1~40). Select the group you want to search and press the
center cursor pad button. All the entries in the group are selected, press the Up/Down
arrows to scroll through all entries in the group.
Select the NUM softkey to search by number. Use the same search criteria explained in
the Search by Number section.
Select the MEM softkey to search by registry memory area (0~449). Type in the registry
memory area (0-449) to jump to that entry.
5. Once you have found entry, proceed to the change, delete or dial entry operation.
To change entries in the Telephone Book:


Issue 2.0

- OR -

4. Search to select the telephone name, telephone number or registry memory area (0~449) to
change. The selected entry flashes.
5. Press OK (center cursor key).
6. Press the CHG softkey. The selected entry flashes.
7. Press the center button on the cursor pad.
8. If you want to change the Telephone Book Entry Name, type the new name using the telephone
dial pad keys and press the center button on the cursor pad. To accept the name change, press
the center button on the cursor pad again. If you do not want to change the Telephone Book
Entry Name, press the center button on the cursor pad again. The group is displayed.
If you want to change the Group Name type the new name using the telephone dial pad keys
and press the center button on the cursor pad. To accept the name change, press the center
button on the cursor pad again. If you do not want to change the Group Name, press the center
button on the cursor pad again. The phone number is displayed.
If you want to change the Telephone Number type the new number using the telephone dial pad
keys and press the center button on the cursor pad. To accept the number change, press the
center button on the cursor pad again. If you do not want to change the Telephone Number,
press the center button on the cursor pad again. The registry memory is displayed.
If you want to change the Registry Memory Area (0~449) type the new number using the
telephone dial pad keys and press the center button on the cursor pad. To accept the number
change, press the center button on the cursor pad again. If you do not want to change the
Registry Memory Area, press the center button on the cursor pad again. The registry memory
area is displayed. If you select a field that is already used, you have the option to overwrite that
field (the old entry will be deleted). If you do not want to overwrite it press NO, if you do press
YES. If you selected a memory area that was not assigned, all the entries that you made to the
new memory area are assigned and you are returned to the speed dial entry selection window.
To delete entries in the Telephone Book:

- OR -

4. Search to select the telephone name, telephone number or registry entry (0~449) to be deleted.
The selected entry flashes.

Issue 2.0
5. Press OK (center cursor key).

6. If you want to delete the entry, press the YES softkey. If you do not want to delete the entry,
press the NO softkey.
To dial entries in the Telephone Book:

- OR -

4. Search to select the telephone name, telephone number or registry entry (0~449) to be dialed.
5. Press the Dial softkey to dial the selected number.

Issue 2.0
Station Hunt
Description
After calling a busy extension, a call immediately hunts to the next available member of the Hunt Group
(Department Group). The caller does not have to hang up and place another Intercom call if the first
extension called is unavailable.
Conditions
If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service
Code (default code = 2).
A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned (code 36).
In Program 20-08-12, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension user ability to use Department
Step Calling.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Department Calling
Department Step Calling
2-1320 Station Hunt

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Call) busy)
Assign whether a call to busy station Hunts (1) 1 = Circular (Intercom callers to
or Not Hunts (0) to the next available member busy department member routes

of the Hunt Group (Department Group). to idle member)
Refer Department Calling on page 2-358 to set
up the Department Group.

Port 1 priority = 1
Port 256 priority
= 256

extension port =
Class 1

Turn Off or On Call Queuing to the extension.
Set to Off for Station Hunting to work.

20-13-06 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Manually COS 1 ~ 15 = 1

Service) Automatic Off-Hook Signaling 1 = Automatically
Allow a busy extension to Manually or
Automatically receive off-hook signals. Set to 0

for Station Hunting to work.
Station Hunt 2-1321

Issue 2.0
Operation
To make a Step Call:

1. Place a call to a busy extension.
2-1322 Station Hunt

Issue 2.0
Description
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of both system trunk calls and internal
calls. Typically, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection
device. SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and trunk. This makes charge-back
and traffic management easier.
SMDR provides:
Abandoned Call Reporting
The SMDR report includes calls that rang into the system but were unanswered (i.e., abandoned).
SMDR can include all abandoned calls or only those abandoned calls that rang longer than the
specified duration. The Abandoned Call Report helps you keep track of lost business.
Blocked Call Reporting
When Toll Restriction blocks a call, you can have SMDR print the blocked call information. Or, you
can have SMDR exclude these types of calls. With Blocked Call Reporting, you can better
customize Toll Restriction for the site application.
Customized Date Format
The SMDR header can show the report date in one of three formats: American, European or
Japanese. Set the format for your preference.
Transferred Call Tracking
SMDR shows each extension share of a transferred call. If an outside call is transferred among
four extensions, SMDR shows how long each of the callers stayed on the call.
Data Call Tracking
Data Call Tracking can log the system internal data calls. Since SMDR normally logs external
(trunk) data calls, Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture of data terminal activity.
Digit Counting
With Digit Counting, SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls. For example, if the digit count is
nine, SMDR does not include toll calls in the home area code. Digit Counting permits SMDR to
include only the calls you want to monitor.
Digit Masking
Digit Masking lets you X out portions of the number dialed on the SMDR report. A digit mask of
seven, for example, masks out all exchange codes (NNXs) and local addresses. Digit Masking
makes it easier to keep track of calling patterns, without having to interpret each individual number.
You can also use Digit Masking to block out access and security codes.
Duration Monitoring
SMDR can include calls of any duration, or only those that last longer than the time you specify. If
you want to keep track of all trunk activity, use a short duration. To keep track of only significant
usage, use a longer duration.
Station Message Detail Recording 2-1323

Issue 2.0
Extension Exclusion
You can selectively exclude extensions from the SMDR report. This ensures privacy for high-profile
callers. For example, the company attorney negotiating a merger may not want his calls to show
up on an in-house report.
PBX Call Reporting
If your system is behind a PBX, you can have SMDR monitor all traffic to the PBX or just calls
placed over PBX trunks. The SMDR record can include all PBX calls (including calls to PBX
extensions) or just calls that include the PBX trunk access code.
Trunk Exclusion
Use Trunk Exclusion to exclude certain trunks not subject to per-call charges (like WATS lines)
from the SMDR report. This makes call accounting easier, since you review only those calls with
variable costs.
Usage Summaries
SMDR can automatically print daily, weekly and monthly call activity summaries. Each summary
includes the total number of regular trunk calls and ISDN trunk calls, and the costs for each type.
The daily report prints every day at midnight. The weekly report prints every Sunday night at
midnight. The monthly report prints at midnight on the last day of the month.
Internal SMDR is not included in the summary reports.

NOTE
Extension Name or Number

The SMDR report can include an extension name or extension number. Choose the method that
makes it easier for you to track call usage.
The LAN port only provides information through LAN-capable programs, such as
HyperTerminal. Printing of the SMDR information must be done from that program.
IMPORTANT
Internal SMDR provides:

Answered Calls
SMDR records the calling extension and the extension number or name of who was called.
Held Calls
SMDR records the extension numbers of the party on hold and the held party. The duration of the
call is recorded as the time both parties are connected until one party becomes idle. Duration Time
starts when both sides are connected until one side becomes idle.
2nd Call Made While 1st is on Hold
When party A puts party B on hold and then dials party C, SMDR records the time party A and C
talk until one party goes idle. If party B is picked up from hold and then either party goes idle,
SMDR creates a second record for that call.
2-1324 Station Message Detail Recording

Issue 2.0
Transferred Calls
Screened Transfer If party A calls Party B and then transfers B to party C after talking to party C,
there are 2 records at this point: one for the A to B call and one for the A to C call. A third record is
printed once party B or C goes idle.
Unscreened Transfer If party A calls Party B and transfers to party C without talking to party C,
there is one record at this point. A second record is printed once party B or C goes idle.
Mobile Extension
An internal call to a mobile extension generates two records:
Internal extension to mobile extension.
Mobile extension call to trunk call.
The same is true for a mobile user who calls from outside the system and gets a dial tone
from the mobile extension and makes an internal or trunk call.
NOTE
Conferences
If party A establishes a conference with party B and C and then drops out, a record prints for party
A to B and party A to C. A 3rd record is printed when either B or C goes idle. Calls are printed in
the order they leave the conference.
Virtual Extension
SMDR records the extension that the virtual extension resides on.
Answering Paging
SMDR records the extension that originated the page and the extension that answers using meet
me paging.
Group Call
SMDR records the extension that answered the Department Call.
CCIS
SMDR does not support internal calls across either system.
Barge-In
SMDR does not record Barge-In.
Room Monitor
SMDR does not record Room Monitor.
Retrieving Parked Calls
SMDR prints the parked extension in the STATION column and the extension that retrieved the
park in the DIALLED column.

Issue 2.0
SMDR Enhanced for Caller ID
The SMDR output is enhanced to include up to 16 or 24 characters of the Caller ID name information
(depending on the view option selected in Program 35-02-18). You can select to display the Caller ID
number or name or the DID number. If you want to display the Caller Name in the DIALLED NO./CLI
and ACCOUNT area, select 2 in the updated Program 35-02-15 and 1 in Program 35-02-17.
If the Caller ID name is not received, the area for Caller ID Name is blank.
Sample SMDR Report (Trunk)
For example, with Program 35-01-08 = 0 (Format for NA), Program 35-02-14 = 1 (Date) and Program
35-02-17 = 1 (Caller ID Name), if a call is received with the Caller ID Name of NEC Infrontia Corporation
(24 characters), the following SMDR record is displayed:
CLASS TIME DATE LINE DURATION STATION DIALLED No./CLI ACCOUNT
POT 10:52 12/09 002 00:00:10 2001 2142623801 08754
PIN 10:52 12/09 001 00:00:20 2017 2142623802 NECinfrontia

Corp.
PIN 10:53 12/09 002 2142623801 NO ANSWER
If Program 35-02-18 = 1 (Caller ID Name Output Method) is set to line feed, the SMDR displays as
follows:
CLASS TIME DATE LINE DURATION STATION DIALLED No./CLI ACCOUNT
POT 10:52 12/09 002 00:00:10 2001 2142623801 08754
PIN 10:52 12/09 001 00:00:20 2017 2142623802 NECinfrontia

Corp.
NEXT NECinfrontia Corp.
PIN 10:53 12/09 002 2142623801 NO ANSWER
Sample SMDR Report (Internal)
Figure 2-57 Example of SMDR Report

Issue 2.0
Flexible Transfer/Virtual Loopback Enhancement
When calls are routed through the ISDN Virtual Loopback, the SMDR information does not provide
enough information to provide complete tracking of route of the call. This has been enhanced with the
addition of a tag to any part of the call that is routed through the virtual loopback to enable complete
tracking of the call.
When a call is routed through the Virtual Loopback, or more precisely its S-point, it will return as a new
incoming call on the Loopback T-point trunk port.
Figure 2-58 Virtual Loopback S-Point
The SMDR will report this as follows:
Figure 2-59 Example of S-Point Report
To give the SMDR software an indication that the call is not terminated on the S-point and not a new call,
but an extension of the first call, the PBX puts a special flag on the appropriate fields in the SMDR
records.
Figure 2-60 Example of S-Point Report (Flagged)

Issue 2.0
The mark provides two functions. First, by using an encoding that is not a usual number or trunk port
index, the SMDR software gets the information that a virtual loopback channel is used. Additionally, on
the Virtual Loopback's S-points, the station's phone number isnt used, but the trunk port index of the
associated T-point, again marked as virtual. This way, the SMDR software can directly use the mark as
tag to link the calls together.
Figure 2-61 Virtual Loopback T-Point
Tracking the call path is even then possible if the call is routed two or more times through the Virtual
Loop:
The SMDR will then show like this:
Figure 2-62 Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop
Here, the call passes twice through the Virtual Loopback, the first time using trunk #5, the second time
using trunk #6. Note the reverse order which is the result of the called party clearing the call, so that the
last leg is printed first. The opposite order occurs if the calling party clears first:
Figure 2-63 Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop (Reverse Order)
This special tagging applies anytime Virtual Loop ports are used. If an extension uses a Virtual Loop
T-point to dial 'out', this port is tagged in the SMDR report accordingly; as well the associated S-point.

Issue 2.0
The same applies if internal SMDR is enabled and the S-point is called. Then, the S-point is printed as
tagged associated T-point. Here is an example of an external call being routed through the T-point of the
Virtual Loop:
Figure 2-64 Virtual Loopback External Call Routed Through T-Point
The SMDR output looks very similar to the one before, where the call was routed through the same T-
and S-point ports, but in the other direction:
Figure 2-65 Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop (Reverse Direction)
This intended purpose of the tagging is to link the first and last port of such a chain together. Note that
the internal SMDR feature needs to be switched on in this case to get the call leg from S-point to
extension printed.
Limitation
These programs must be set correctly to function:
Program 35-02-03= 1: Trunk Number
Program 35-02-09= 1: Extension Number
This is not a real limitation however, if both are set to 0, matching names may be given to
TIP
the T-point and S-point ports (e.g. V-one, V-two, ...) yielding the same functionality.

Issue 2.0
Program 35-02-16 must be set to 1: Trunk Name/Number otherwise, the received dialed number
not the trunk port information is printed.
Table 2-94 SMDR Report Definitions
Report Heading Definition
Call Record Number SMDR record number (consecutive)

CLASS Type of call (see Class Definitions below)
TIME Time call placed or answered. (For Transferred calls, shows time user picked up
Transfer.)
DATE Date the call was made (Program 35-02-14=1). For Extension calls, this area is blank.
LINE Trunk number used for call. For Extension calls, this area is blank.
DURATION The time the call lasted. (For Transferred calls, shows how long user was on call after
answering the Transfer.)
STATION Extension number of call owner (i.e., extension that first placed or answered call) (For
Transferred calls, there can be more than one owner depending on how many
extensions shared the call.)
DIALLED No./CLI For outgoing calls, the number dialed or, for incoming calls, the Caller ID information
ACCOUNT Account Code number entered by extension user. For Extension call, this area blank.
Class Definition
POT Outgoing trunk call

POTA Outgoing trunk call placed using Toll Restriction Override
PIN Incoming trunk calls
ALB All lines in group are busy (group number follows TIME field)
BRD Call blocked due to Toll Restriction
PTRS Transferred call
IVIN BRI/PRI inbound trunk call
ICM Extension call
Table 2-95 SMDR Report Format with Program 35-02-14 Set to 0
Character Position Field Definition
Header Line 1
1~60 Spaces
61~70 MM/DD/YYYY
71 Space
72~75 PAGE

Issue 2.0
Table 2-95 SMDR Report Format with Program 35-02-14 Set to 0 (Continued)
76 Space
77~79 Report page number (e.g., 001)
CR & LF Carriage return and line feed
Header Line 2
1~5 CLASS
6 Space
7~10 TIME
11~14 Spaces
15~18 LIN
19~22 Spaces
23~30 DURATION
31~32 Spaces
33~39 STATION
40~44 Spaces
45~51 DIALLED
52 Space
53~59 No./CLI
60~63 Spaces
64~70 ACCOUNT
LF Line feed
SMDR Record
1~4 Call type (e.g., POT for outgoing)

5 Space
6~10 Time in 24 hour clock (HH:MM)
11 Space
12~21 LINE
22 Space
23~30 Call Duration (HH:MM:SS)
31 Space
32~41 Station number or name
42 Space

Issue 2.0
43~62 Number dialed (20 digits maximum)

63 Space
64~79 Account number or NO ANSWER
Table 2-96 SMDR Report Format with Program 35-02-14 Set to 1
Header Line 1
1~60 Spaces
61~70 MM/DD/YYYY
71 Space
72~75 PAGE
76 Space
77~79 Report page number (e.g., 001)
Header Line 2
1~5 CLASS
6 Space
7~10 TIME
11 Spaces
12~15 DATE
16~17 Spaces
18~21 LINE
22 Space
23~30 DURATION
31~32 Spaces
33~39 STATION
40~44 Spaces
45~51 DIALLED
52 Space
53~59 No./CLI
60~63 Spaces

Issue 2.0
64~70 ACCOUNT
LF Line feed
SMDR Record
1~4 Call type (e.g., POT for outgoing)

5 Space
6~10 Time in 24 hour clock (HH:MM)
11 Space
12~16 DATE
17 Space
18~21 LINE
22 Space
23~30 Call Duration (HH:MM:SS)
31 Space
32~41 Station number or name
42 Space
43~62 Number dialed (20 digits maximum)
63 Space
64~79 Account number or NO ANSWER

Issue 2.0
Table 2-97 SMDR Summary Report
OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY

FOR DAY OF nn/nn/nn
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS: 0

TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS: 0
NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED: 0 COST: 0
NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED: 0 COST: 0
OUTGOING CALL/COST
SUMMARY FOR WEEK ENDING nn/nn/nn
OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY

FOR MONTH ENDING nn/nn/nn
Conditions
SMDR can record/print both system trunk and internal calls. The buffer stores calls when
the SMDR device is unavailable. When the buffer fills, SMDR will not collect any new calls
until the buffer is cleared.
The SV9100 can buffer up to 4000 calls.
When SMDR reports are enabled using the same port as the Traffic Reporting feature
(example: 147), the SMDR blocks the Traffic reports. Unplug the cable and plug it back in to
allow Traffic reports to print.
SMDR requires a connection to the GCD-CP10 LAN.
DT300 and DT700 style terminals do not support a RS232 serial connection for SMDR
output.

Issue 2.0
If no answer is received, NO ANSWER is displayed regardless of the system programing

for the Caller ID display option (Trunk only).
The setting in Program 35-02-18 works regardless of the entry in Program 35-02-15 or
35-02-17.
When Program 35-02-18 is set to 1, the first and second lines are sometimes separated.
When the buffer is full, the overflowed data may not be shown.
The special characters used in the UNIVERGE SV9100 system cannot be output to the
SMDR they are converted to (_).
To use the PBX Call Reporting option, program system for behind PBX operation.
Calls made from Virtual Extensions show up in SMDR as calls made from the physical
extension the VE resides on.
Terminals that have a tandem setting is not supported in Internal SMDR feature.
Internal SMDR is not included in the Summary Report (Programs 35-02-04, 35-02-05 or
35-02-06).
Internal calls to or from a door phone are not included in the SMDR output.
When using internal SMDR, blind transfers generate two records and the duration is
recorded as between those two stations.
When using internal SMDR, screened transfers generate three records, and the duration
overlaps between those three extensions.
CCIS Centralized Billing will only buffer 320 calls.
The SMDR call records will be buffered when the system cannot output the SMDR
information due to the lost connection.
When the connection is active, the SMDR information will be immediately output and it will
not be buffered.
When the system is powered off, all current records in the buffer are deleted.
When the buffer fills, the oldest record remains and the new record is counted as overflow
records.
When using the free license and it expires, only the first 320 calls are buffered or output.
SMDR supports the option to tag Virtual Loopback calls.
Default Settings
Disabled

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals (with Trunk SMDR)
All Terminals except Virtual extension (with Internal SMDR)
None
Related Features
PBX Compatibility
Traffic Reports

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Define the TCP port (0 ~ 65535) when 0
communicating to the SMDR (type 5). External Device
2 ( MIS) = 4000
External Device
5 (SMDR
Output) = 0
External Device
6 (DIM Output) =
0
External Device
11 (O&M Server)
= 8010

External Device
12 (Traffic
Report Output) =
0
External Device
13 (Room Data
Output for Hotel
Service) = 0
External Device
14 (IP-DECT
Directory
Access) = 0
10-20-03 LAN Setup for External Equipment Keep 1 ~ 255 seconds 30

Alive Time
Define the keep alive time for communicating to

external equipment.
14-01-06 Basic Trunk Data Setup SMDR Printout 0 = No Print Out 0

Have the system print or Not print the trunk you 1 = Prints Out
are programming in the SMDR printout. Refer
to Programs 35-01 and 35-02 for SMDR
printout options.

For ANI/DNIS, the following additional setting is 1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
recommended: Behind PBX = 0 (Stand Alone). 2 = Not Used

3 = CTX assume 9
15-01-03 Basic Extension Data Setup SMDR 0 = Do not print on SMDR report 1
Printout 1 = Include on SMDR report
For each extension, enter 1 if extension calls
should print on the SMDR report. Enter 0 if

extension calls should not print on the SMDR
report.
15-01-14 Basic Extension Data Setup SMDR Output 0 = Disable 0

of Maid Intercom Calls 1 = Enable
When set to 0 (Disable) it will not record sent

internal calls.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
15-01-15 Basic Extension Data Setup SMDR Output 0 = Disable 0

of Answered Intercom Calls 1 = Enable
When set to 0 (Disable) it will not record

received internal calls.
16-02-01 Department Group Assignment for 1 ~ 64 1

Extensions Extension Group Setting
Use to set up the extension group.

Extension Data
Determine if Accumulated Extension Data is
included in the SMDR report for each COS.

(STG) Data
Determine if Department Group (STG) Data is
included in the SMDR report for each COS.

Account Code Data
Determine if Accumulated Account Code Data
is included in the SMDR report for each COS.

35-01-01 SMDR Options Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

Specify the type of connection used for SMDR. 3 = LAN
The baud rate for the COM port should be set in

4 = Not Used
Program 15-02-19.
35-01-03 SMDR Options Header Language 0 = English 0

Specify the language in which the SMDR 1 = German
header should be printed. 2 = French
3 = Italian
4 = Spanish
35-01-04 SMDR Options Omit Digits 0 ~ 24 0

The number of digits entered in this option do (0 = None omitted)
not print on the SMDR report. Enter 0 if you

want to print all digits.
35-01-05 SMDR Options Minimum Digits 0 ~ 24 0

Outgoing calls must have at least this number (0 = Include all)
of digits for inclusion in the SMDR report. Enter
0 to include all outgoing calls, regardless of the
number of digits dialed.
35-01-06 SMDR Options Minimum Call Duration 0 ~ 65535 seconds 0

The duration of a call must be at least this time (0 = All)
to be included on the SMDR report. Enter 0 to

have calls of any duration print.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
35-01-07 SMDR Options Minimum Ring Time (For 0 ~ 65535 seconds 0

Incoming Calls) (0 = All)
A call must ring for at least this time to be
included on the SMDR report. Enter 0 to allow
all calls to print.
35-01-08 SMDR Options Format Selection 0 = NA Type (North America) 0

Do not change: 1 = G/J Type (Overseas/ Japan)
This option is added to allow an increased
account code field from eight to 16 when used
in the U.K. This allows 16 characters of the
Caller ID name to be displayed. For the U.S.,
this option is set to 0 and should remain at this
setting as 16 characters are already provided
for the account code field.

Toll Restriction.

include all calls (1) or just calls dialed using the

PBX trunk access code (0).

Name 1 = Number
trunk name or number on SMDR reports.

must be set to 0.


night).


midnight).



Set this option to 1 have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

or Name 1 = Number
Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR report
include extension numbers. Set this option to 0

names.


35-02-11 SMDR Output Options Walking Toll 0 = Not Output 1

Restriction Table Number 1 = Output
Set the SMDR (Station Message Detail
Recording) walking toll restriction table number

output options for each of the eight SMDR
ports.


displayed for incoming DID calls.

Determine if the Caller ID should be displayed
when the incoming DID number is transferred
to an outgoing trunk.

Determine whether or not the date should be 1 = Displayed
displayed on SMDR reports.

Determine whether the CLI or DID Calling

2 = Caller ID Name
Number should be displayed.

to 1, ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits.If
set to 0 trunk names are printed instead
(assigned in Program 14-01-01).

Determine whether the Account Code or Caller
ID name should print in the SMDR record.

Program 35-01-08 must be set to 0 for this
entry to be followed.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Determine how SMDR should print Caller
Name of incoming call. Select whether to
display up to 16 characters of the Caller Name
on the same line as the call record (0) or if a line
feed should be added and up to 24 characters
of the Caller Name are displayed on the
following line (1). If the line feed option is
selected, the Caller Name is displayed on the
next line as : NEXT Caller Name.
This setting works regardless of the setting in
Program 35-02-15.
With this option set to 1, if your
communications program (such as HyperTerminal)
has the line wrap option enabled in the ASCII setup,
an additional line break may appear above the
Caller name line.
35-02-21 SMDR Output Options S-Point Terminal 0 = MSN Number 0

Number 1 = Extension Number
Set up SMDR Port 1.
35-02-22 SMDR Output Options Security Auto SMDR Port 1 ~ 8: 0

Dialing 0 = No Output

1 = Output
SAD (Security Auto Dialing) on SMDR report.
35-02-23 SMDR Output Options Watch Auto Dialing SMDR Port 1 ~ 8: 0

Select whether the system should display the 0 = No Output
WAD (Warning Auto Dialing) on SMDR report. 1 = Output
35-02-24 SMDR Output Options Mark Virtual Loop 0 = Dont Mark 0

Define whether calls routed via the ISDN Virtual 1 = Mark
Loopback are tagged.
80-05-01 Date Format for SMDR and System Date 0 = American Format (Month / 0
Format Day / Year)
Set the date format for SMDR. 1 = Japanese Format (Year /
Month / Day)

2 = European Format (Day /
Month / Year)

Issue 2.0
SMDR flowcharts are located on the following pages.
SMDR with a GCD-CP10 Connection - Ethernet

Issue 2.0
SMDR Flowchart (Continued)

Issue 2.0

Issue 2.0
Operation
Once installed and programmed, SMDR operation is automatic.

Issue 2.0
Station Name Assignment User Programmable
Description
This feature allows a user to program the Station Name for their telephone extension or any extension in
the system. The name is displayed on the multiline terminal LCD when an intercom or K-CCIS call is
placed.
Conditions
Display telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing.
Single line telephone extensions cannot program names.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
Required Component
None
Related Features
Directory Dialing
Name Storing
2-1346 Station Name Assignment User Programmable

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Customize the extension name programming digits

Name 101

102, etc.

Assign an Extension Name Change key (55) to 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
extensions. 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1


program its name.
Station Name Assignment User Programmable 2-1347

Issue 2.0
Operation
To program your extension name:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 700.
- OR -
3. Press Hold.
4. Enter the name. (Refer to Table 2-98 Keys for Entering Names.)
Your name can be up to 12 digits maximum.
5. Press Hold.
To program any extension name:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 700.
- OR -
3. Enter the extension number to be named.
4. Enter a name. (Refer to Table 2-98 Keys for Entering Names.).
The name can be have to 12 digits maximum.
5. Press Hold.
1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ] ^ _ ` { | }
4 Enter ch3aracters: G-I, g-i, 4.
2-1348 Station Name Assignment User Programmable

Issue 2.0
Table 2-98 Keys for Entering Names (Continued)

0 Enter characters:
0 ! # $ % & ( )
Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ?
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey
instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Feature Clear the character entry one character at a time (when using service code or
function key).
Hold (Telpro Mode Only) Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Station Name Assignment User Programmable 2-1349

Issue 2.0
Station Relocation
Description
Station Relocation allows a station to be moved (swapped) from one location to another, without having
to reprogram the station data. The station features and extension number are the same after it is moved
to the new location.
Refer to the Programming section in this feature for system programs that are swapped.
NOTE
Conditions
This feature can be used to swap or relocate multiline and single line terminals.
This feature is not supported for IP terminals (Softphone or a physical IP phone).
The destination extension must be idle. If the station is not idle, error tone is heard.
If the Extension Swap service code is dialed from an extension that does not have an
extension swap password programmed, error tone is heard.
If the Extension Swap service code is dialed from an extension whose Class of Service
does not allow Extension Data Swap, error tone is heard.
If the destination extension entered is not a valid extension, error tone is heard.
The following user setting data is relocated with the extension. All other user setting data is
either not relocated or cleared.
DND
Call Forwarding
Memo Dial
Last Number Dial History
Saved Number Dial
Incoming History
MIC LED Status
VM MW LED Status
When using Set Relocation, and a terminal is re-located from one physical system to
another physical system, route programming must be made accordingly for 911 calls.
Default Settings
None
2-1350 Station Relocation

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-15-12 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for MLT, SLT No Setting

Special Access Extension Data Swap 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Ext. Data Swap = xxx (service code in digits

accordance with Program 11-01).


Station Relocation.
92-05-01 Extension Data Swap Password Password Fixed four digits No Setting
Fixed 4-Digits. (No setting at default)

Station Relocation 2-1351

Issue 2.0
The following programs are swapped when Station Relocation is used:

Program 11-02 Extension Numbering
Program 12-05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Program 13-03 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
Program 15-01 Basic Extension Data Setup
Program 15-02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Program 15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Program 15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Program 15-07 Programmable Function Keys
Program 15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Program 15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Program 15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Program 15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Program 15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Program 15-14 Programmable One-Touch Keys
Program 15-20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment
Program 16-02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Program 20-06 Class of Service for Extensions
Program 21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Program 21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Program 21-07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Program 21-10 Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
Program 21-11 Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
Program 21-13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
Program 21-15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Program 21-19 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Program 23-02 Call Pickup Groups
Program 23-03 Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Program 23-04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Program 24-03 Park Group
Program 26-04 ARS Class of Service
Program 30-02 DSS Console Extension Assignment
2-1352 Station Relocation

Issue 2.0
Program 31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment

Program 41-02 Group and Agent Assignments
Program 41-17 Login Mode Setup
Program 42-02 Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
Operation
To exchange two terminals:

2. Dial the Extension Data Swap Service Code not assigned at default (Program 11-15-12).
3. Dial the Extension Data Swap Password not assigned at default (Program 92-05-01).
4. Dial the extension to be swapped with or relocated to.
5. When successfully completed, confirmation tone is heard and the display shows completed.
6. Press Speaker twice to exit.
Station Relocation 2-1353

Issue 2.0
SV9100 NetLink
Description
The NetLink feature allows up to 50 sites to be linked together over a Data Communication IP NetLink
that allows Remote Sites to have the same service features as the Main Site, acting as one system.
Systems can be installed separately in the same building or in remote offices connected via a qualified
IP network.
With NetLink, the maximum system capacity still applies (400 Trunks and 960 Stations), but the ports
can be distributed between sites using an SV9100 CHS2UG-US chassis at each location.
Each site must have a GPZ-IPLE daughter board and SD-B1 (4GB) card installed on its GCD-CP10
blade. The GCD-CP10 blade at each Remote Site must have the same data as the Main Site
GCD-CP10 blade. The Main Site automatically uploads the system data to the Remote Sites anytime it
changes.
The Main Site requires a proper SV9100 NETLINK NODE License for each Remote Site.
When a communication failure occurs between the Main Site and any Remote Site, the Main Site
GCD-CP10 blade automatically changes to survival mode and operates as a stand-alone system. If
multiple Remote Sites are installed, a Remote Site can be assigned as a temporary Main Site to control
remaining connected sites.
If connecting a Remote site with SV8100 hardware, the hardware must first be removed to let Netlink
establish a connection. The reason for this is the Remote site must first pull the Licensing for Hardware
Migration from the Primary site. Once Netlink has established you can slot the SV8100 hardware. The
connection status can be verified by logging in the Primary system and checking Blade configuration.
Conditions
Systems using NetLink no longer refer to programs 10-46-06 SIP Registrar Port and
10-46-13 Subscribe Session Port. New programs 51-17-01 and 51-17-02 are used to
change the ports on a per system basis when connecting IP phones via NAPT.
The Primary System (Main Site) requires the appropriate NetLink licenses dependent upon
the number of nodes in the NetLink network.
Up to 50 Nodes can be supported in a NetLink network.
A maximum of 240 Virtual slots are supported.
Port assignment is performed sequentially by the requested order from the Secondary
Systems.
All nodes in a NetLink network should have the same main GCD-CP10 software.
When a Terminal is placed on hold, the Music on Hold comes from the system where the
Terminal resides.
2-1354 SV9100 NetLink

Issue 2.0
When a trunk is placed on hold, the Music on Hold comes from the system where the trunk
resides.
External Paging uses an output on the GCD-CP10 of the Primary System.
A PGD(2)-U10 ADP must be used if External Paging is required in the Secondary Systems.
License information in the Primary will be copied to the Secondary site when doing
database duplication.
Duplicate license information in the Secondary System is available for only 28 days.
After twenty-eight days, the license expires. To renew the license, a connection to the
original Primary site must be re-established. (Once the connection to the Primary is
recovered, if fail-over occurs again, the license is once again enabled for twenty-eight days
to the new Primary System).
If the original Primary site is in the NetLink network as a temporary secondary, the license
information is available.
If a user wants to enter another additional feature license, it needs to be entered on the
original Primary System.
When fail-over occurs, the Primary System is changed to another communication server.
The IP applications do not know the new primary IP Address, so the following features are
disabled after fail-over:
SMDR
-MIS
SIP Terminal
Softphone
IP K-CCIS
The following Programs are not updated by the Primary System during fail-over:
Program 10-01, Program 10-02, Program 10-12, Program 10-13, Program 10-14, Program
10-15, Program 10-16, Program 51-01, Program 90-01 or Program 90-09.
Data in SRAM area is not transferred to the Secondary Systems during fail-over, therefore
when fail-over occurs DND and Caller ID History may be lost.
When a Secondary System with an ETIA or RTB assigned is added to a NetLink network,
the Primary Systems database does not replicate the data in Programs 10-55 or 90-61.
Both the Primary Site and Secondary Sites can have their own local MOH source
connected to the CN8 or CN9 on the front of the GCD-CP10.
The T-1 CCTA and PVA-CCIS blade is supported in the primary system and/or secondary
systems.
When using Mobile Extension in a NetLink Network, the ISDN/PRI must be used in the
Primary System.
SV9100 NetLink 2-1355

Issue 2.0
When using Set Relocation, and a terminal is re-located from one physical system to
another physical system, route programming must be made accordingly for 911 calls.
FoIP (Fax over IP) is supported in a NetLink Network.
DT700 series IP terminals and wireless IP terminals can be registered to secondary
systems in a NetLink environment, Softphones must still register to the primary only.
For a network to be suitable for VoIP it must pass specific requirements. To ensure the site
meets these requirements, an IP ready check and a site survey must be completed at each
site before VoIP implementation.
One-way delay must not exceed 100ms
Round Trip delay must not exceed 200ms
Packet loss must not exceed 1%
Data switches must be manageable
Routers must provide QOS
Adequate bandwidth for estimated VoIP traffic
Depending on how QoS policies are built in the network, assignments may be needed in the
CPU
Table 2-99 VoIP Resource Chart
Primary System Secondary 1 Secondary 2
CO CO CO
TDM IP Terminal IP TDM TDM
Analog Analog/ Analog
Terminal (DT700) Trunk Terminal Terminal
/Digital Digital /Digital
TDM 0 P:1 0 P:1 P:1 P:1 P:1 P:1

Terminal S1:1 S1:1 S2:1 S2:1
Primary
System IP Terminal P:1 0 P:1 P:2 S1:1 S1:1 S2:1 S2:1
(DT700)
Secondary TDM P:1 S1:1 P:1 P:2 0 0 P1:1 S1:1

System 1 Terminal S1:1 P:2 S1:1 S1:1 S2:1 S2:1
Secondary TDM P:1 S2:1 P:1 P:2 S1:1 S1:1 0 0

System 2 Terminal S2:1 P:2 S2:1 S2:1 S2:1 S2:1
P = Primary
S1 = Secondary System #1
S2 = Secondary System #2
The number of conference blocks in a NetLink network is the same as a stand-alone

system.

Issue 2.0
Invalid data is displayed in the LCD of the terminal if Program 51-01 is enabled.
When installing a Secondary System in a Netlink network and the Secondary System has
GCD-LCA blades installed, the GCD-LCA blades will come online and assign ports before
any GCD-DLCA blades are assigned.
Always connect to the Primary System when using PCPro.
The following programs require a reset after making a change using PCPro, WebPro or
Handset programming:
Table 2-100 CPU Reset Programs
Program When Changed Using
10-12-01 Handset, WebPro, PCPro
51-15 WebPro, Handset Programming
90-04 Handset Programming
90-58 Handset Programming
10-46-07 PcPro
84-23 Handset, WebPro, PCPro
When network communication is down, an alarm is sent to the Attendant terminal informing
of the communication error on the network. Improvements also allow for a defined number
of network outages per clock hour before failing over.
When the Attendant telephone exists on a secondary system, alarm information is not
displayed on the Attendant telephone.
When Fail Over occurs between the Primary System and two or more Secondary Systems,
the Attendant telephone displays the System ID of the system that went into Fail-Over last.
supported.
The SV9100 can recognize each system where the DT700 extension(s) are connected and
provide an Automatic Route Selection (ARS) COS based on the System (System ID) when
using NetLink.
When NetLink is enabled, synchronous ringing (Program 14-02-17) is automatically
disabled. Synchronous ringing is not supported in a NetLink environment.
All nodes in a NetLink network should have the same setting in Program 51-01-04.

Issue 2.0
Restrictions
Netlink is only supported between SV9100 systems.
Netlink is not supported between SV8100 and SV9100 systems.
The number of total ports depends on the Primary System.
System ID (Program 51-01-02) must be unique for each system in a NetLink network.
/MIS can connect to the Primary (Main) site only.
Only one Voice Mail can be installed in a NetLink network.
In-Mail and VRS use the VMDB of the Primary (Main) site.
APSU can be installed in the Secondary (Remote) System, however the NetLink time zone
follows the Primary (Main) System.
Secondary systems must follow the primary CPU software settings for Mu-law/A-law within
the country where the primary system is located. SV9100 NetLink connections are only
supported within the same countries/areas. For example, the SV9100 can be connected via
NetLink between the US and Canada, however the SV9100 can not be connected via
NetLink with systems in other countries (e.g., Mexico or the U.K.).
Synchronous Ringing via NetLink is not supported.

Issue 2.0
NetLink Multi-SIP Carrier
Description
Multiple SIP Trunk carriers can be utilized when NetLink is configured.
A Secondary NetLink system is able to utilize its own SIP trunks independently to the Primary system.
Refer to Figure 2-66 Example NetLink Multiple Carrier to see the advantage of this feature.
Figure 2-66 Example NetLink Multiple Carrier
Conditions
If SIP Trunk are programmed in a Netlink secondary system, only SIP Profile One can be
utilized.
It is possible to set Register ID for trunks that belong to that specific system. For example, a
Register ID set in the Primary system cannot be assigned to a trunk in the Secondary
system. The allocation of the trunk and Register ID of Program14-12 must be in the same
system.
In order to use CPN in a secondary system, Program 51-19 must be turned on for those
extensions. Once enabled, CPN may be sent on a per station basis using Program 21-19.
Once NetLink is established, PCPro or WebPro must be used to change the system data
related to the SIP trunks.
Any SIP trunks that are built in a system before establishing NetLink will be deleted after
establishing NetLink.
SIP trunks are assigned in the order of system set up. System ID's are needed to assign
Program 10-68 data.

Issue 2.0
The following programs no longer replicate and can be set on a per system basis: 10-23,
10-37, 21-19, 84-13, and 84-14.
Each NetLink secondary system can use either SIP trunks to a provider or SIP trunk TIE
line mode but not both.
Registered SIP trunks can be utilized by any system in the NetLink network as long as trunk
route programming allows it.
When a secondary system becomes the primary after fail over, the SIP trunks will work for
the effective license time.
Program 51-01-04 selects the packet sending method whether each packet is sent
immediately or after buffering some packets across the network. This program needs to be
set at each system and it is recommended all systems have same setting.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-CP10 Blade with GPZ-IPLE
SD-B1(4GB) card
SV9100 NETLINK NODE License
Related Features

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
Define the default gateway to be used by the

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GPZ-IPLE interface.

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Address. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255
51-01-01 NetLink System Property Setting NetLink 0 ~ 50 0

System ID (0 = No operation)
This is the ID of each NetLink system. Set to

insure that no overlap occurs between nodes.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
51-01-02 NetLink System Property Setting Primary 1 ~ 50 30

Candidate Order
When the Primary system is turned off or
disconnect from network, this value is used to
select a new Primary system. Smaller number
is higher priority.

If this value is the same number, the System ID
(Program 51-01-01) is referred, and the system
which has the smaller number is selected as
Primary system.
51-01-03 NetLink System Property Setting 0 = Disable 0

Secondary System Flag 1 = Enable
If set to 0, NetLink is dynamically established
based on Node List in Program 51-03-01.
Primary System is selected in the order the
system wakes up.

If set to 1, the system connects with Top Priority
Primary System. If Top Priority Primary System
is not found, the system searches Primary
System like this is set to 0.
51-01-04 NetLink System Property Setting Signal 0 = Immediate 1

Transmit Method 1 = Buffering
0 = Immediate
This default setting does not use the Nagle
Algorithm. When enabled, data packets are
immediately sent across the network with no
buffering delay.
1 = Buffering
Nagle Algorithm enabled. Small data packets
are not transmitted immediately across the
network. The smaller data packets will be
buffered and then sent across as larger data
packets decreasing the number of packets sent
across the network. When the number of
packets sent across the network decreases, the
amount of bandwidth also decreases.
51-02-01 NetLink System Individual Setting System Maximum of 20 characters. No Setting

Name
Enter the name given to each system.
51-02-02 NetLink System Individual Setting Time 0 ~ 24 12

Zone (Hour)
Determine the time offset from the Primary
system.
(0 = -12, 1 = -11, 2 = -10.... 24 = +12)
This setting affects Time Display on MLT (see
Program 51-13-02).
51-02-04 NetLink System Individual Setting 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ 00-00-00-00-00-

Authenticate System MAC Address FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 00
Set Program 51-13-03 to 1 (enable). NetLink
systems reject the connection from
unauthenticated system access.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
51-03-01 NetLink Internet Protocol Address List 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Setting Internet Protocol Address List 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
The system seeks the Primary system based 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
on this list.
When there is no Primary system yet, or Fail
Over occurs, Node List is referred to establish
new link. This setting is necessary when
Program 51-01-03 is 0, or Program 51-05-02 is

other than 0.
Once the system connects to the Primary
System, this setting is updated by the Primary
system when Program 51-13-01 is On. So,
enter IP address of the systems which may
become Primary at least.
51-04-01 IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

System of Net-Link Internet Protocol 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Address of Top Priority Primary 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Enter the IP address of the Top Priority Primary
System.
To use this feature, set Program 51-06-01 to
1(On).
51-05-01 NetLink Timer Settings Keep Alive 1 ~ 3600 seconds 5

Sending Interval
This is the Keep Alive sending time from the
Secondary system to confirm communication
with the Primary system.
51-05-02 NetLink Timer Settings Keep Alive 0, 5 ~ 10800 seconds 20

Response Waiting Time (0 = infinity)
This is the time the Secondary system waits for
a response from the Primary system before
cutting off communication.
51-05-03 NetLink Timer Settings Primary Search 1 ~ 3600 seconds 5

Packet Sending Interval
While searching the Primary system, the

system sends a packet at this time.
51-05-04 NetLink Timer Settings Primary Search 0, 5 ~ 10800 seconds 20

Time Maximum Value
Total time of Primary system seek time.
51-05-05 NetLink Timer Settings Top Priority 1 ~ 3600 seconds 10

Primary Detection Packet Sending Interval
When current Primary system is not Top Priority
Primary System, the system sends packet to
check if Top Priority System exists.
51-05-06 NetLink Timer Settings Primary 1 ~ 10800 seconds 30

Compulsion Specification Trial Maximum
Time
When the forced change Primary command is

executed, the system searches the new
Primary system for this time.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
51-05-07 NetLink Timer Settings Socket Refresh 20 ~ 3600 seconds 40

Time
If the IP connection becomes unstable, the
keep-alive function does not work. To avoid

this, if there is no data traffic for this time, the
socket is refreshed.
51-06-01 NetLink Primary Automatic Integration 0 = Off 0

Setting Primary Integration Right or 1 = On
Wrong
When LAN cable was divided, multiple Primary
systems may appear. If the LAN connection is
recovered, multiple NetLinks exist in the
network. When this option is enabled, NetLink
is composed around Top priority Primary
System.
51-06-02 NetLink Primary Automatic Integration 0 = Reset when all packages 0

Setting Package Reset Timing Option are in idle condition
When Primary System Automatic Integration is 1 = Anytime
done, all packages of secondary systems reset.

This option can select the timing of package
reset.
51-07-01 NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification 0 = Disable 1

Setting Forced Change Primary System 1 = Enable
Enabling
Set this item whether the Forced Change
Primary is available or not.
51-07-02 NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification 0 = Off 0

Setting Package Reset Timing Option 1 = On
When Forced Change Primary System is done,
all packages reset. This option can select the
timing of package reset.
0 = Reset when all packages are idle, otherwise
reject Primary System Integration.
1 = Anytime
51-08-01 Primary NetLink Setting IP Address of 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

New Primary System 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Enter target IP address for New Primary 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
system. When the Forced Change Primary
system is done, this setting is erased.
51-08-02 Primary NetLink Setting System ID of New 0 ~ 50 No Setting

Primary System
When set to 0, top priority Primary system is
assumed to be the new Primary system.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
51-09-01 NetLink Communication Port Settings 0 ~ 65535 58000

Primary Waiting Port
Set the communication port that the Primary
system uses to communicate with the
Secondary system.

Communication Waiting Port
Set the Port used to communicate between

nodes. It is always opened by all nodes.

Secondary Communication Port
Secondary system communicates with Primary
system at this port number. If 0 is specified,
temporary port is dynamically selected.

Primary Search Port
When Fail-Over occurred, each system
communicates with other system at this port
number.
If 0 is set, temporary port is selected
dynamically.
If 0 is not specified, the number and continuous
maximum 50 number is used.
(e.g. 5000 is specified 5001, 50025049 are
used).

Primary Detection Port
Enter port number to seek the Top Priority
Primary system.

If 0 is specified, temporary port is selected
dynamically.

Database Replication Communication
Listening Port
Set the port used to replicate database.

Database Replication Primary Detection
Port
Set the port used to replicate database.

If 0 is specified, temporary port is selected
dynamically.
51-10-01 Virtual Slot Setting Number of Available 240 slots can be controlled in No Setting
Virtual Slots NetLink. This command can
240 slots can be controlled in NetLink. This check how many slots are
command can check how many slots are available.
available.
51-11-01 NetLink System Information System Name For reference only. No Setting
For reference only.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
51-11-02 NetLink System Information Connected For reference only. 0

State
For reference only.
51-11-03 NetLink System Information IP Address For reference only. 000.000.000.000

For reference only.

51-11-04 NetLink System Information MAC Address For reference only. 00:00:00:00:00:0
For reference only. 0
51-11-05 NetLink System Information Primary For reference only. 0
Priority Level
For reference only.
51-11-06 NetLink System Information Main Software For reference only. XX.XX
Version
For reference only.
51-12-01 Primary System Information System ID For reference only. 0

For reference only.

51-12-02 Primary System Information System Name For reference only. No Setting
For reference only.

51-12-03 Primary System Information IP Address For reference only. 000.000.000.000
For reference only.

51-12-04 Primary System Information MAC Address For reference only. 00:00:00:00:00:0
For reference only. 0
51-12-05 Primary System Information Primary For reference only. 0
Priority Level
For reference only.
51-12-06 Primary System Information Main For reference only. XX.XX

Software Version
For reference only.
51-13-01 NetLink Options Automatic IP Address 0 = Disable (Off) 1

List Operation Update 1 = Enable (On)
When set to 1, the list in Program 51-03-01 is

automatically updated.
51-13-02 NetLink Options Time Zone Option 0 = Disable (Off) 0

When set to 0, the following features are 1 = Enable (On)
affected: Clock Display, Incoming/Outgoing
History List.
When set to 1, the following features are
affected: VRS Time Announce, Date and Time
Setting Service Code, Alarm Clock setting.
51-13-03 NetLink Options MAC Address 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Authorization Enable 1 = Enable (On)
Refer to Program 51-02-04 for setting MAC

address.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
51-14-01 NetLink System Control Delete System 1 ~ 50 1

Information
Delete system information and the slot
information. The system must be disconnected.

51-15-01 Demonstration Setting 1 = Primary automatic setting No Setting

Automatically set the minimum setting values in 2 = Secondary 1 - automatic
NetLink. A system reset occurs after this operation setting
command is executed. 3 = Secondary 2 - automatic
(This program is available only via telephone operation setting
programming and not through PC Programming). 4 = Secondary 3 - automatic
operation setting
51-16-01 NetLink System Data Replication Mode 0 = Disable 2

Setting System Data Replication Mode 1 = Setting Time Mode
Set the synchronous mode of the system data. 2 = Interval Mode
When set to 1, the systems are synchronized at
the time set in Item 02 below.
When set to 2, the systems are synchronized at
regular time intervals set in Item 03 below.
51-16-02 NetLink System Data Replication Mode 0000 ~ 2359 0000

Setting System Data Replication Time
Setting
Set the time of day that both systems

synchronize database (when Item 01 is set to
1).
51-16-03 NetLink System Data Replication Mode 15 ~ 1440 minutes 30

Setting System Data Replication Interval
Setting
Set the time that both systems synchronize
database (when Item 01 is set to 2).
51-16-04 Replication Time Stamp Month: 0~12 No Setting

Show next replication time.
(Read Only) Day: 0~31
Hour: 00~23
Minute: 00~59.
51-16-05 NetLink System Data Replication Mode 1 ~ 86400 seconds 180
Setting System Data Replication Wait Time
Set the wait time until replication starts when

NetLink is created.
51-16-06 NetLink System Data Replication Mode 1 ~ 86400 seconds 1

Setting System Data Replication Interval
Set an interval time to start replication to the
next node after replication to one node is
completed.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
51-17-01 NetLink DT800/DT700 Server Individual 0 ~ 65535 5080

Information Setup Registrar Port
Use to set the SIP Register Port of each

system.
51-17-02 NetLink DT800/DT700 Server Individual 0 ~ 65535 5081

Information Setup Subscribe Session Port
Use to set the SIP Subscribe Session Port

number of each system when NetLink is used.
51-18-01 Netlink Configuration Options Netlink Fail- 0, 2 ~ 10 0

Over Limit (0 = Infinity)
When tear-down of network was repeated more
than the specified times, NetLink is operated
stand-alone.
51-19-01 NetLink IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number 0 = Disable 1

Setup for Extension NetLink CPN 1 = Enable
Transmission
This program assigns transmission of Calling
Party Number (CPN) from Program 21-19 for
each secondary system. The transmission
applies for every extension.
84-26-01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Slot 1 =

Assign the IP address for each DSP on the 172.16.0.20
GPZ-IPLE.
84-26-02 IPL Basic Setup RTP Port Number 0 ~ 65534 VoIP GW1 =
Assign the RTP port number to be used for 10020

84-26-03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number (RTP 0 ~ 65534 VoIP GW1 =
Port Number +1) 10021
Assign the RTCP Port number to used for each

DSP on the GPZ-IPLE.
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
SV9100 PoE Gigabit Switch
Description
The NEC PoE Gigabit Switch (GSWU) is a fully managed switch which brings gigabit speeds to users
while adding a whole new level of intelligence and security to networks.
The eight 10/100/1000 Mbps ports enable users to take advantage of the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
The NEC PoE Gigabit Switch supporting the UNIVERGE SV9100 and SV8300 system.
All user ports can support up to Gigabit Ethernet and may also support the primary Layer 2 protocols,
with an emphasis on QoS features such as 802.1p and Diffserv.
The GCD-ETIA blade has eight RJ45 ports for 10 BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX and 1000 Base-T along the
front. The GCD-ETIA design is based on one card and one software build. However, all the cards in the
system are managed as a Master/Slave configuration. The Master provides full distributed Layer 2
management to all Ethernet Switch cards in the system.
The GCD-ETIA card can be a standalone card providing eight Gigabit Ethernet PoE ports. However, the
real advantage with this card is that additional cards can be stacked by external daisy chain
connections to provide up to 76 contiguous ports (all on the same managed domain/network). Below are
the primary features of the card set.
Switches, unlike hubs, use microsegmentation to create collision domains, one per connected segment.
This way, only the Ethernet devices which are directly connected via a point-to-point link, or directly
connected hubs are contending for the medium. By eliminating collisions, full-duplex point-to-point
connections on the switch are possible.
When multiple blades requiring Ethernet data connections are installed in an UNIVERGE SV9100
chassis, the GCD-ETIA can provide a neat and simple installation.
The GCD-ETIA is an in-skin, fast Ethernet switching hub unit that provides the following services:
Eight 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet ports
PoE
802.3af compliant, supplies up to IEEE standard maximum 15.4W on eight 10/100/1000 ports Link/
ACT, POE System
Simplified QoS management using 802.1p, Diffserv or ToS traffic prioritization specifications
Granular security and QoS implementation
802.1Q based VLANs enable segmentation of networks for improved performance and security
VLAN
Port Based and 802.1Q Tag-based VLANS Management VLAN
Automatic configuration of VLANs across multiple switches through GVRP/ GARP
Auto MDI/MDIX
SV9100 PoE Gigabit Switch 2-1369

Issue 2.0
Port Mirroring
Traffic on a port can be mirrored to another port for analysis with a network analyzer
Firmware Upgrade
Built in Web UI for easy browser-based configuration (HTTP)
Rate Limiting
Ingress Policer
Egress rate control
Stacking (SV9100 Chassis Only)
The idea of stacking allows the user the ability to manage multiple GSWU cards in one system as one
switch, instead of individual units and IP addresses, etc. For example, a set of three cards would appear
to the UI as a 24-port switch, instead of three 8-port switches.
Stacking will work by assigning a Master Management Card (or Main card), which will provide all the GUI
information for all cards in the same stack. The CCPU will assign the Main card by issuing an IP address
and configuring the Main Card assignment to the GSWU via data program. All other GSWU cards
detected in the system will not be assigned an IP address and will be configured as Add-on, signifying
them as Add-on cards.
A PBX system can have up to 12 GSWU cards per system. However, only three GSWU units can be
grouped together to form a single 20-port switch. When more than three GSWU units are present within
a system, the units other than the three designated will not have any of the software features specified in
this document. They will behave as unmanaged Gigabit Ethernet switches.
Unmanaged Switch Functions
In the Unmanaged mode, a GSWU unit will have following functions only:
10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (x8)
PoE Class 1 (lowest power class)
Stacking Network Configuration
The GSWU Main board will maintain the network configuration and card initialization sequence. The
provision of IP address from the back plane will identify the Main board. If, during initialization, the IP
address is set to 0 by the CPU, then the card is determined to be an Add-on card.
The IP address for the GSWU will be assigned in program Program 10-55 on the SV9100. It contains
settings for IP Address, Subnet Mask and a gateway IP address.
Stacking Formation
When a GSWU determines that it is an Add-on by the configuration setting in Program 10-55-03, the
Add-on GSWU will send a broadcast message to all the GSWU units in the Chassis, until it receives an
acknowledge message from a Main board.
2-1370 SV9100 PoE Gigabit Switch

Issue 2.0
The Main board receiving this broadcast message will acknowledge by sending port identification
information to the Add-on board and a board type (i.e. Add-on 1, Add-on 2, etc.).
The board type will identify the Add-on board to system (Main GSWU) of its port assignments. A board
type of Add-on 1 will be Ports 9~16. A board type of Add-on 2 will be Ports 17~24. A GSWU that has
been designated as the Main board will always be assigned Ports 1~8.
Stacking Port Number Determination
When a Main board is initialized, it assigns the first eight ports as port 1 through 8. When subsequent
add-on boards broadcast messages are received, the CCPU, by manual means or any other means,
will assign a Board Type to the Add-on card. This will automatically assign its port numbers.
On power up, all GSWU boards are assigned as Main boards, or generic Add-on boards (by no

NOTE
IP address or IP address of 0). In order to include the Add-on boards as part of the managed
stack and assign port numbers, the CCPU will send a Board Type message to the Add-on
card. This will identify the port assignment of the Add-on card to the Main card for stacking.
The grouping of the three GSWU units to form a 20-port switch is restricted to reside in a single system
location. Stacking is not supported for those GSWU units in remote locations supporting the NetLink
feature.
Conditions
When Auto Negotiation is denied and port speed is set to 100Mbps, the yellow LED
(located on the RJ45 connector) is ON. When port speed is set to 10Mbps, this LED is
OFF.
The number of supported GCD-ETIA blades are to be determined by the power
consumption chart. Reference Hardware manual for more details.
When linking multiple GCD-ETIA cards each card must be statically assigned an IP
address and each blade must be linked.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Components
GCD-ETIA

Issue 2.0
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Define the IP Address for the GCD-ETIA. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254
10-55-03 Package Network Setup Main/Add-on 0 = Main 1

Use the Main setting to distribute an IP Address 1 = Add-on
to the blade.
Define the subnet mask for the GCD-ETIA. |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

Define the default gateway for the GCD-ETIA. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
2-1372 SV9100 PoE Gigabit Switch

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

GPZ-IPLE.
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
SV9100 Terminals
Description
The SV9100 is a full-featured IP based communications system providing a rich feature set with pure
Voice over IP (VoIP) communications, across corporate Local and Wide Area Networks (LAN and WAN).
The DT700 series telephones provide a converged infrastructure at the desktop, with a 10Base-T/
100Base-TX connection to the LAN and built-in hub for a PC connection to the telephone itself. The
system can provide peer to peer connections between the DT700 series telephones with voice
compression, offering existing IP telephone features with an enhanced user interface. On the WAN side,
the system can provide peer to peer connections over IP networks with the voice compression, on CCIS
over IP or Remote Unit over IP.
Remote Unit over IP is available only for the SV8300.

IMPORTANT
The SV9100 can provide legacy line/trunk interfaces to support the existing Time Division Multiplexing
(TDM) based infrastructure, such as analog telephones, digital telephones (DT300 series), analog
networks and digital networks (T1/E1, ISDN, etc.).
Encryption
This feature is supported with main software V 2.5 or above and terminal firmware 92.2.1.0 or above.
SV9100 supports AES 128 bit encryption. Program 10-46-08 Mode1 (read only) represents

NOTE
AES 128 bit.
Table 2-101 DT700 Supported Encryption
Source Destination SRTP Comment

DT700 DtermIP S DT700 VoIPDB
Encrypt between DT700 and VoIPDB
DT700 STD SIP (P2P) N
DT700 STD SIP (Non P2P) S DT700 VoIPDB
DT700 DT700 S
DT700 PSTN S DT700 VoIPDB
DT700 IP Network S DT700 VoIPDB
(SIP/H323/CCIS Encrypt between DT700 and VoIPDB
DT700 DT700 N
Encryption On Encryption Off
S = Supported
N = Not Supported
2-1374 SV9100 Terminals

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-67 SV9100 Encryption Configuration
Table 2-102 SV9100 Supported Terminals
New Terminals Series E and

Terminal Group DT300/DT700 Series i
DT400/DT800 UT880 Prior
SV9100 Yes Yes No No
Conditions
Furthermore, a default page can be defined for the DESI-Less terminal to change to when it
goes idle or when it has answered a call.
The Electronic Headset Switch (EHS) is only supported on the ITL/DTL-8LD, ITL/DTL-12/
24 and ITL-320C terminals.
The EHS and 8LK are not supported on the same SV9100 terminal.
Table 2-103 Terminal Category Reference Chart on page 2-1376 provides a quick
reference of the DT series Digital and IP multiline terminals.
SV9100 Terminals 2-1375

Issue 2.0
Table 2-103 Terminal Category Reference Chart
Equipment
Series Name Comments
ID
DT 300 Series DT 310 DTL-2E-( ) Economical terminal providing access to basic telephony and messaging
Digital (Economy) DTL-6DE-( ) service
Terminal DTL-12E-( ) Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such as hold,
transfer, speaker, microphone and other features
(TDM)
2-button terminal is non-display
6-button terminal equipped with LCD and full-featured keypad
Available in black
DT 330 DTL-8LD-( ) 8-button DESI-Less LCD telephone

(Value) DTL-12D-( ) Also available are 12-, 24-, 32-button LCD telephones
DTL-24D-( ) Provides access to more sophisticated system features and allowing room for
DTL-32-D-( ) growth
All DT 330s come with a standard LCD display, full duplex speakerphone
capability, module support for expansion and feature add-on capability
Optional 60-button DSS Console provides 60 programmable keys and provides
users a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and 1-button access to extensions, trunks, and
system features
Available in black and white
DTL-12BT( ) Bluetooth available in black
DTL-12PA( ) Power Save Adapter provides backup for analog trunk connection
DT 400 Series DT 410 DTZ-2E-( ) Economical terminal providing access to basic telephony and messaging
Digital (Economy) DTZ-6DE-( ) service
Terminal Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such as hold,
(TDM)
Available in black
DT 430 DTZ-8LD-( ) 8-button DESI-Less LCD telephone

(Value) DTZ-12D-( ) Also available are 12-, 24-, 32-button LCD telephones
DTZ-24D-( ) Provides access to more sophisticated system features and allowing room for
growth
All DT 430s come with a standard LCD display, full duplex speakerphone
system features

Issue 2.0
Equipment
ID
DT 700 Series DT 710 ITL-2E-( ) Economical terminal providing access to basic telephony and messaging
IP Terminals (Economy) ITL-6DE-( ) service
ITL-8LDE-( ) Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such as hold,
Available in black
IP formatted terminal has a dual port, supports compression, full-duplex
handsfree operation
DT 730 ITL-8LD-( ) 8-button DESI-Less LCD telephone

(Value) ITL-12D-( ) Also available are 12-, 24-, 32-button LCD telephones
ITL-24D-( ) Provides access to more sophisticated system features allowing room for
ITL-32-D-( ) growth
All DT 730s come with a standard backlit LCD display, full duplex speakerphone
Expands the capability by providing XML display to provide more productivity
enhanced applications to the users
system features
ITL-12PA( ) Power Save Adapter provides backup for analog trunk connection
DT 730G ITL-12CG-( ) Provides access to more sophisticated system features allowing room for
(Value) ITL-12DG-( ) growth
DT 730G terminals come with a standard back-lit LCD display, full duplex
speakerphone capability, module support for expansion and feature add-on
capability
Available in black only
12CG equipped with color LCD display
12CG/12DG support Gigabit Ethernet
DT 750 ITL-320C-( ) IP terminal provides a 5 color touch panel

(Sophisticat Features of the telephone provide easy use of NEC Unified communications
ed) and third-party telephony XML applications
Access to 32 telephony feature lines across an IP backbone, built-in full duplex
speakerphone and DESI-Less line key labeling are standard
users a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and one-button access to extensions, trunks,
and system features
Wireless Handset G955 SIP DECT
G266 SIP DECT
G566 SIP DECT
ML440 SIP DECT
Cordless DTL-8R-1 Cordless DECT

Issue 2.0
Equipment
ID
DT 800 Series DT 830 ITZ-8LD-( ) 8-button DESI-Less LCD telephone

IP Terminals (Value) ITZ-8LDG-( ) Also available are 12-, 24-, 32-button LCD telephones
ITZ-12D-( ) Provides access to more sophisticated system features allowing room for
ITZ-24D-( ) growth
All DT 830s come with a standard backlit LCD display, full duplex speakerphone
system features
DT 830G ITZ-12CG-( ) Provides access to more sophisticated system features allowing room for
(Value) ITZ-12DG-( ) growth
DT 830G terminals come with a standard back-lit LCD display, full duplex
speakerphone capability, module support for expansion and feature add-on
capability
Available in black only
12CG equipped with color LCD display
12CG/12DG support Gigabit Ethernet
Table 2-104 Connectivity of Options (DT300/DT700) and Table 2-105 Connectivity of

Options (DT400/DT800) on page 2-1379 provide a quick overview of the options available
with the DT Series terminals.
Table 2-104 Connectivity of Options (DT300/DT700)
IP Terminals Digital Terminals
Value
ITL-8LD-1 Value
Economy Economy
Terminal Options ITL-12D-1 ITL- DTL-8LD-1
Sophisticated ITL-2E-1 ITL- DTL-2E-1
12CG-3 ITL- DTL-12D-1
ITL-320C-1 TEL 6DE-1 DTL-6DE-1
12DG-3 ITL- DTL-24D-1
ITL-8LDE-1 DTL-12E-1
24D-1 ITL- DTL-32D-1
32D-1
Ten Key Kit

12LK Kit
N/A (Built in) (Except 8LD- N/A (Except 8LD- N/A
1 Unit) 1 Unit)
Key Kit
8LK Unit N/A N/A
EHS
(Except 32D- N/A (Except 32D- N/A
1 Unit) 1 Unit)

Issue 2.0
Value
ITL-8LD-1 Value
Economy Economy
Terminal Options ITL-12D-1 ITL- DTL-8LD-1
Sophisticated ITL-2E-1 ITL- DTL-2E-1
12CG-3 ITL- DTL-12D-1
ITL-320C-1 TEL 6DE-1 DTL-6DE-1
12DG-3 ITL- DTL-24D-1
ITL-8LDE-1 DTL-12E-1
24D-1 ITL- DTL-32D-1
32D-1
ADA:
Analog Recording Adapter
N/A N/A
PSA:
Common N/A N/A
PSTN Adapter for analog
DSS: Connect to Digital Port on
N/A KTS
60-Button DSS Console
APR:
Analog Port adapter with N/A
Ringer
DESI-Less LK/LCD Unit
Digital (Except N/A
8LD-1 Unit)
Backlit LCD
(Except N/A
8LD-1 Unit)
DESI-Less LK/LCD Unit

IP N/A (Built in) (Except N/A N/A
ITL-12CG-3
ITL-12DG-3)
Value
ITZ-8LDG-3 Value
Terminal Options Economy
ITZ-12D-3 Economy DTZ-8LD-3
DTZ-2E-3
ITZ-24D-3 ITZ-8LD-3 DTZ-12D-3
DTZ-6DE-3
ITZ-12CG-3 DTZ-24D-3
ITZ-12DG-3
Ten Key Kit

Key Kit
8LK Unit N/A N/A

Issue 2.0
Value
ITZ-8LDG-3 Value
Terminal Options Economy
ITZ-12D-3 Economy DTZ-8LD-3
DTZ-2E-3
ITZ-24D-3 ITZ-8LD-3 DTZ-12D-3
DTZ-6DE-3
ITZ-12CG-3 DTZ-24D-3
ITZ-12DG-3
ADA:
Analog Recording Adapter
N/A N/A
Common
DSS: Connect to Digital Port on
N/A KTS
60-Button DSS Console
APR:
Digital Analog Port adapter with N/A
Ringer
Table 2-106 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT300/DT700) and Table 2-107 Terminal
and Adapter Compatibility (DT400/DT800) on page 2-1381 show the compatibility between
the terminals and adapters used in the system.
Table 2-106 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT300/DT700)
Adapter Unit
Terminal
ADA-L APR-L ILPA PSA-L BCH-L BHA-L GBA-L IPv6-L
Digital Terminals: DT300

DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12E-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-8LD(BK)/(WH) TEL
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
IP Terminals: DT700
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL

Issue 2.0
Adapter Unit
Terminal
ADA-L APR-L ILPA PSA-L BCH-L BHA-L GBA-L IPv6-L
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL

ITL-8LD-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
ITL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
ITL-12CG-3 (BK) TEL Note2
ITL-12DG-3 (BK) TEL Note2
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
Console:
DCL-60-1 (BK)/(WH) CONSOLE
= Option Not Available
= Optional Available
1
= When the ILPA-R is connected to a 12CG/12DG terminal, maximum connection speed drops to 100Mbps.
2 = The 12CG/12DG terminals support Gigabit Ethernet, GBA-L Unit not required.
Adapter Unit
Terminal
ADA-L APR-L ILPA BHA-Z BCA-Z

DTZ-2E-3 (BK) TEL
DTZ-6DE-3 (BK) TEL
DTZ-12D-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTZ-8LD-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL
IP Terminals: DT800
ITZ-8LD-3 (BK) TEL
ITZ-12D-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL

Issue 2.0
Adapter Unit
Terminal
ADA-L APR-L ILPA BHA-Z BCA-Z
ITZ-12CG-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL
ITZ-12DG-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL
ITZ-8LDG-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL
Console:
DCZ-60-2 (BK)/(WH) CONSOLE

= When the ILPA-R unit is used, 1000 BASE-T is not available.
Table 2-108 DT330 Compatibility Settings
Terminal Lot Number DT-330

ADA-L Unit Switch Settings
xxx I Lx or lower xxx I Mx xxxJSx or higher
(Version 1.E0 or lower) (Version 8.10) (Version 2.20 or higher)
ADA Connection for Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7

Recording Only. and 8 are OFF. Switches and 8 are OFF. Switches and 8 are OFF. Switches 4
4 and 6 are ON. 4 and 6 are ON. and 6 are ON.
ADA Connection for Dip switches 2, 3, 5, 7 and Dip switches 2, 3, 5, 7 and Dip switches 2, 3, 5, 7 and
Sending Recorded Calls 8 are OFF. Switches 1, 4 8 are OFF. Switches 1, 4 8 are OFF. Switches 1, 4
to the Telephone. and 6 are ON. and 6 are ON. and 6 are ON.
To Send and Receive to Not supported Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7
the Terminal and 8 are OFF. Switches and 8 are OFF. Switches 4
4 and 6 are ON. and 6 are ON.
Lot Numbers: I, J Hardware Revision
Lot Numbers: L, M, S Software Revision
To verify DT-330 terminal firmware, hold down keypad buttons 1, 2 and 3 while plugging the line cord into the
terminal.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-109 Firmware Compatibility Matrix
BCH-L Unit Lot Number
xxxDxx or lower xxxExx or higher
Terminal
xxx I xx or lower Supported Supported
Lot (Version 8.10 and 1, E0 or lower)
Number xxxJxx or higher Not supported Supported
DT-330
(Version 2.20 or higher)
BCH Support may differ based on terminal firmware. To verify both DT-330 terminal and BCH-L Unit
firmware, hold down keypad buttons 1, 2 and 3 while plugging the line cord into the terminal.
Table 2-110 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (DT300/DT700) and Table 2-111
Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (DT400/DT800) on page 2-1384 show the
compatibility between the terminals and Line Key or LCD used in the system.
Table 2-110 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (DT300/DT700)
Line Key/LCD
Terminal
8 LK-L 8LKD(LD)-L 8LKI(LD)-L 12LK-L LCD (BL)-L DCL-60

DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12E-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
IP Terminals: DT700
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL

Issue 2.0
Line Key/LCD
Terminal
8 LK-L 8LKD(LD)-L 8LKI(LD)-L 12LK-L LCD (BL)-L DCL-60

ITL-12CG-3 (BK) TEL
ITL-12DG-3 (BK) TEL
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
Line Key/LCD
Terminal
8 LK-Z 16LK-Z DCL-60

DTZ-2E-3 (BK) TEL
DTZ-6DE-3 (BK) TEL
IP Terminals: DT800
ITZ-8LD-3 (BK) TEL

Issue 2.0
Line Key/LCD
Terminal
8 LK-Z 16LK-Z DCL-60

Table 2-112 Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility (DT300/DT700) and Table 2-113
Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility (DT400/DT800) on page 2-1386 show the
compatibility between the terminals and Ten Key kits used in the system.
Table 2-112 Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility (DT300/DT700)
Ten Key Kit
Terminal BS
BS
BS(F)-L BS(S)-L (Braille)-L BS(Retro)-l
(S-Hotel)
(BK) KIT

DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12E-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
IP Terminals: DT700
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL

Issue 2.0
Ten Key Kit
Terminal BS
BS
BS(F)-L BS(S)-L (Braille)-L BS(Retro)-l
(S-Hotel)
(BK) KIT
ITL-12CG-3 (BK) TEL

ITL-12DG-3 (BK) TEL
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
The BS (Braille)-L (BK) KIT kit consists of stickers to be installed.
Ten Key Kit

Terminal
Sticker- BS
BS(F)-Z BS(S)-Z BS(ACD)-Z
Braille-Z KIT (Retro-F)-Z

DTZ-2E-3 (BK) TEL
DTZ-6DE-3 (BK) TEL
IP Terminals: DT800
ITZ-8LD-3 (BK) TEL

Issue 2.0
Ten Key Kit

Terminal
Sticker- BS
BS(F)-Z BS(S)-Z BS(ACD)-Z
Braille-Z KIT (Retro-F)-Z

The Sticker-Braille-Z kit consists of stickers to be installed.
Table 2-114 Adapter Compatibility shows the compatibility between the adapters used in
the system.
Table 2-114 Adapter Compatibility
Adapter
Adapter ADA-L APR-L ILPA PSA-L BCH-L BHA-L GBA-L

ADA-L
APR-L
ILPA
PSA-L
BCH-L
BHA-L
GBA-L
Encryption
Encryption must be turned on in the DT700 as well as the SV9100 for encryption to take
place.
Encryption is supported between the DT700 terminal and the GPZ-IPLE (VoIPDB).
Encryption can be enabled on a per phone basis.
CCISoIP and SIP trunking are not supported.
Program 10-26-02 RTP forwarding is not supported with encryption.
Multicast (paging, room monitor, etc.) is not encrypted.

Issue 2.0
If Program 90-45-01 is used to change the temporary password, all terminals using
encryption will be logged off. Terminals will then need the 1-time password to be reentered.
Encryption is not supported on DT700 series phones that are connected via NAPT.
Encryption is not supported on DT700 series phones that are registered to a secondary
NetLink system.
DT700 series phones that are registered to a primary NetLink can fail over to a secondary
system regardless of encryption settings.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
None
Related Features
None


Issue 2.0
Encryption:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-46-07 DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup 0 = Off 0

Encryption Mode 1 = On
Set encryption for signaling (requires system

reset).
10-46-08 DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup 0 = Mode 1 0

Encryption Type
Read Only
10-46-09 DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup Maximum of 10 characters No Setting

One Time Password (0~9, , #)
Set the one-time password for encryption

authentication to the DT700.

Event 1 = Enable


idle.
4 = Display page 4

a call.
4 = Display page 4
84-23-08 DT800/DT700 Multiline Basic Information 0 ~ 4294967295 seconds 0

Setup Digest Authorization Registration
Expire Timer
Set the time for authentication update.
84-23-09 DT800/DT700 Multiline Basic Information

Setup Temporary Password
Read Only
84-27-03 IPL Basic Setup SRTP Mode Setup 0 = Disable 0

Set the encryption of the SRTP (voice packets). 1 = Enable

90-45-01 Temporary Password Change for Multiline 00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.F.FF 00.00.00.00
Telephone Temporary Password Change Change? (Yes :1)
Request
Change the temporary password.

Issue 2.0
Operation
Refer to individual features.

Issue 2.0
SV9100 UC Suite
Description
The SV9100 UC Suite allows users to control their SV9100 terminal from their PC (Deskset mode) or the
PC can become their SV9100 terminal (Softphone - IP Soft Phone Mode).
Through licensing control and user selection, the application can be tailored to meet the needs of a
variety of end users. Additional utilities are provided as part of the UC Suite:
Answering Center with UC Suite, the Answering Center supports additional features to be utilized
with the UC Client to provide efficient call handling in a multi-tenant environment. For example, if a
receptionist is required to answer calls for a variety of different businesses, the Answering Center
module will identify the company being called and display information on the receptionists screen
to assist with handling the call.
CRM Integration license (license code 5310 in Program 10-50-01) and SV9100 system
software Version 1000 or higher is required for Answering Center.
CAUTION
Outlook Add-In allows the user to dial out, end call, conference, transfer and perform screen
pops through the Contacts folder within Microsoft Outlook. With UC Suite, a separate installation of
the Outlook Add-In is included to provide Outlook functionality with the Web Client. This eliminates
the need for a client license as the new Outlook Add-In can be configured to point to the UC Server
for call control.
With UC Suite, the Outlook integration is enhanced to include the ability to associate a Presence
State with an Outlook Calendar Appointment, and to add telephone numbers from an Outlook
Contact to the UC Client Speed Dial list.
SV9100 system software Version 1000 is required for Presence Setting from Outlook
Calendar.
CAUTION
Salesforce.com adapter with UC Suite, Salesforce.com provides access to the following

operations through the Salesforce.com interface:
Call contact phone number
Dial phone number directly
Answer incoming call
End active call
Hold active call
Retrieve a Held call
Transfer active call
SV9100 UC Suite 2-1391

Issue 2.0
Additionally, with an Enterprise or Unlimited account, the Salesforce integration module also
provides the following feature:
Pop contact on incoming call that matches phone number.
With UC Suite, Salesforce.com screen pops are also supported with the Professional edition.
The Salesforce.com integration module requires a Salesforce.com Professional, Enterprise, or
Unlimited Edition account. The integration module is compatible with the following browsers:
Internet Explorer 9 or higher, Firefox 15 or higher and Google Chrome browser Version 21 or
higher.
software Version 1000 are required for Salesforce.com integration.
CAUTION
Telephony Service Provider (TSP) with UC Suite, the 1st Party TSP installed with Desktop
supports additional functionality such as transfer, conference, hold and unhold.
Video Test Tool Helps verify that the Softphone can communicate with and utilize the video
camera connected to the PC.
Integration Toolkit The UC Suite has the ability to support integration with a variety of popular
third-party CRM applications. These integrations typically allow the third-party software to dial
numbers stored within the application and screen pop entries based upon Caller ID recognition.
However, many companies use CRMs (Customer Resource Management) packages that are
industry-specific or, in some cases, internally developed.
In order to provide another means to integrate with third-party applications, the Integration
Developers Toolkit allows users to develop their own interface to the UC Suite.
software Version 1000 are required for the Integration Toolkit.
CAUTION
UC Client
The UC Client enhances the operation of the NEC digital telephone set by providing easy access to
common, and not so common, UNIVERGE SV9100 voice control features. This software application
provides a very intuitive user interface that can be conveniently located at the top or bottom of the PC
screen. The user interface can even "shrink" into the edge of the screen and become visible when a call
arrives, or when the user moves the mouse to the edge of the display.
In addition to quick access to these SV9100 features, the UC Client provides a call log for easy viewing
of recent received, missed, or made calls just like your cell phone. It also includes a directory to keep
your commonly dialed numbers close at hand, and optional features like voice recording, personal
greeting, and screen pops using Microsoft Outlook, ACT! 2005 or higher, Goldmine 6.7 or higher,
Salesforce.com, Time Matters and Tigerpaw. With UC Suite, Browser-based CRM applications can
screen pop a record.
software Version 1000 are required for Salesforce.com Time Matters, Tigerpaw, Answer
CAUTION Center integration and Browser-based CRM integration.
2-1392 SV9100 UC Suite

Issue 2.0
UC Suite users that are also Contact Center agents can perform Contact Center functions from within
the UC Client. Contact Center functions included in the UC Client are Login, Logout, Off Duty, Wrap Up,
view Agent Monitor, and view Queue Monitor.
UC Client has the following main components:

SV9100 UC Client Software
This application runs on a PC and provides the PC-based GUI (Graphical User Interface) and
features.
Headset (Optional)
The headset can be plugged into the multiline telephone and used when making or receiving calls
with the UC Client. UC Client runs on a PC and communicates with the UNIVERGE SV9100
through TCP/IP. The UC Client can be run for a physical deskset station or a Softphone station.
When calls come into the station, the UC Client displays it on the PC, and provides several
features that allow the user to handle the call quickly. UC Client can be minimized to run in the
background and pop to the front when call activity occurs. Calls can then be handled using either
the keyboard or the mouse. The user speaks to the caller through the telephone handset, headset,
or speakerphone of the multiline telephone the application is running on, or through a USB handset
or headset connected to PC running the Softphone.
Color Scheme Selection
Users can customize the color scheme of the application. This scheme applies to the main window
and the instant message window. Any sub windows (i.e., Preferences or Call Control dialog boxes)
will continue to follow the Windows theme coloring.
Contact Center Agent Functionality
UC Suite users that are Contact Center Agents can perform Contact Center functions from the UC Client
GUI. Agents can change Contact Center states (Login, Logout, Wrap Up and Off Duty), view real-time
queue statistics, monitor Contact Center states for other agents and initiate Emergency Call functions
from the UC Client.
UC Suite users that are Contact Center Agents can receive alerts when callers hang up while waiting in
a Contact Center queue. An Abandon Call Alert icon will flash with the number of abandoned calls that
are currently included in the Abandon Call List. If the user has selected the options, a notification
message will appear in the system tray when a new Abandoned Call has been added to the list.
The Abandoned Call Window lists shows each abandoned call on a separate line with the most recent
call at the bottom of the list. Each abandoned call includes Date, Arrival Time, Contact Center Group,
Caller ID, Wait Time and Callback Status. Calls are removed from the list when the Clear Calls After
time expires, is manually removed using the Delete option or a subsequent call from the same Caller ID
is received in the same queue. Entries with a Callback Status of In Progress, Attempted or Complete will
include additional details regarding the callback activity. The Abandoned Call Window also has the
following options under File Menu: Save the list to a file, Print the list or Exit to close the Window.

Issue 2.0
Softphone
The Softphone is a software phone that functions as an IP Multiline Station (SIP). The Softphone
provides access to all features of a physical IP Multiline Station with a few exceptions. Through the VoIP
connection to the SV9100 system, the user can speak to the caller through a USB Handset or USB
Headset connected to the PC running the Softphone. The user can handle the call through a Toolbar
view, Compact Phone view, or an Emulation Phone view that looks like a physical IP Multiline Station.
Audio frame (Payload) size for the Softphone supports only 20ms or 40ms according to CODEC type.
G.711: PRG 84-24-01 setting must be 20ms or 40ms.
G.729: PRG 84-24-07 setting must be 20ms or 40ms.
G.722: PRG 84-24-32 setting must be 20ms.
Successful operation of the Softphone requires audio properties be set to a supported format. Default
settings for the audio device must be set within the following range of values:
Sampling frequency (Hz) 8000 / 16000 / 32000 / 48000
Quantization bit 16 bit
Channel all values supported
Some USB Headsets do not support this range and are not supported in UC Client.
SV9100 InMail Integration
UC Suite can integrate to the SV9100 InMail providing the following features:
Message Status
View new messages
View archived messages
Message Access
Play new/archived messages through the deskset terminal or Softphone
Set new message status to archive
Delete a message
Dial the number associated with the message
InMail Integration license (license code 5312 in Program 10-50-01) and SV9100 system
software Version 1000 are required for InMail Integration. A DT InMail integration
CAUTION license is needed for each Desktop user requiring InMail integration.
InMail Integration can be set to On in Program 20-59-18 and on the Voicemail Tab in Preferences.
Users can change their InMail Greeting when changing presence states.
When using InMail integration, all clients must connect to the UC Server or all clients must be
used without connecting to the UC Server. A mixture of some clients connected and some not
CAUTION connected to UC Server is not supported when using InMail Integration.

Issue 2.0
SV9100 UM8000 Integration
UC Suite can integrate to the SV9100 UM8000 providing the following features:
Message Status
Number of new messages
View new messages
View archived messages
View opened messages
View urgent messages
Message Access
Play New, Urgent, Opened and Archived messages through PC audio device
Set new message status to archive
Delete a message
Return call
Presence Voice Mail Greetings
Assign a Voice Meeting Greeting to:
A presence change
A scheduled presence change
An Outlook appointment presence change
Users must have a mailbox in the voicemail system and have UM8000 integration configured
in order to change the Voicemail Greeting for other users.
CAUTION
UM8000 support requires UM8000 Version 11.6 or higher and one UMS Client license
(License code 1404) per Desktop user requiring UM8000 integration.
Web Client
Users can launch a UC Client from within an Internet browser window. This browser-based client
provides many of the features that are available within the full UC Client. Refer to the UC Suite Manual
for a comparison of features available between the full client and the Web Client.
The UC Web Client is supported on the following Internet browsers:

Internet Explorer 11
Firefox 24
Google Chrome 30
Safari 5.0.6
Each UC Web Client requires a UC Web Client license.
With UC Server on the InServer Blade, the Web Client is supported on the iPad.
CAUTION

Issue 2.0
UC Server
The SV9100 UC Suite includes the option to install UC Server. This is required for the following features:
SystemWide BLF/DSS
Central Directory
Phone Message
Quick Message
Presence
The InServer in-skin blade is designed to be an application server for several of the external applications
available for the SV9100 product line. Initially, the InServer will come pre-installed with Windows
Embedded Standard 7 OS and will support the setup and deployment of the NEC UC Suite and Contact
Center. NEC UC Server and Contact Center run on the InServer blade. With the InServer blade,
installation is made easier by allowing the technician to direct users to a URL where software files with
preconfigured settings that automatically populate the configuration fields within the desktop can be
downloaded. For more information on the InServer blade, refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 InServer
Configuration Guide.
The UC Server manages shared resources and provides communication facilities between user
endpoints. The functionality implemented by the UC Server includes the following:
Access to Operator or Receptionist Type Functions An operator or receptionist type user can
easily manage their call handling tasks without having to switch attention between the telephone
and the PC. One or two clicks of the mouse is all it takes for the operator or receptionist to transfer
a call or put a caller into a users voice mailbox. A company directory, recording ability, PC-to-PC
messaging, and Presence indication provide additional features to further enhance the operation.
The UC Client connected to the UC Server can monitor all line keys and control the actions of the
operator's phone, including placing calls.
The application on the PC communicates with the SV9100 system through a TCP port on the
telephone system. The UC Suite connected to UC Server also includes a supporting application
called Quick Message. By installing the Quick Message client on individual PCs, the operator can
quickly send short messages to other employees, who can respond with a single keystroke. The
PC to be used requires an interface to the SV9100 system through the Ethernet link to monitor and
control telephone activity.
Shared Directory/Contact List provides a shared database that includes the company directory,
external contact list and personal contact list that can be accessed by all users. Without UC
Server, each UC Client user must maintain their own Directory and Contact list. The external and
personal contact list can be imported via a .csv file.
Centralized BLF Monitoring the UC Server monitors the status of all stations on the system and
provides updates to the individual clients. With UC Server, the BLF status area can expand to a
larger button size and provide call details when mousing over a BLF. The user can Drag and Drop
BLFs in a custom order if they prefer something other than extension or name order.
Common Trunk Labeling provides a central storage for assigning labels to trunks.
Quick Messaging manages delivery of messages and responses from attendant level users to
end users.

Issue 2.0
Phone Messaging manages the delivery of messages and responses from attendant level users
to end user desksets.
With UC Suite, Phone and Quick Messages can be sent to multiple recipients.
TIP
Presence indicates Availability Status, Location, Expected Return Date and Time, Forward
Settings, and Special Instructions. Presence status is viewable through the Directory or the
Window view DSS/BLF pane. Presence status is manually set by each UC Suite user, or users
with appropriate permissions can update the Presence settings for other users. The toolbar and
window views support the Presence feature.
With UC Suite, Presence states can be customized for each site. The system administrator can
determine which Presence states are valid, change the icon for the pre-defined Presence states,
and define up to four custom presence states with custom labels/names and custom icons.
Also, scheduling of Presence state changes is supported by a list of Presence Events each user
defines in the new user interface or through the Outlook Calendar. Users also have the ability to
view and set Presence status and call forwarding rules while they are out of the office. This can be
achieved through mobile devices that support web browsing and desktop web browsers like
Internet Explorer.
With UC Suite the Presence area is located on the title bar area. The Presence indicator in the BLF
section shows animation when a users presence state changes.
Mobility with UC Suite, mobile users can view and set presence status and call forwarding
options while way from the office.
MOBILE PRESENCE (License Code 5311) and SV9100 system software Version 1000 or
higher is required for Mobility features.
CAUTION
Profile Sharing UC Server allows users to create and share profiles consisting of commonly used
preferences and configurations.
All settings in the following Preferences tabs are saved in the Profile:
General
BLF/DSS
Tool Buttons
Active Call List
Screen Pop
Shortcuts
Dialing Rules
Telephony Settings
Voice Mail
Notification Settings
Quick Message
Phone Message
Trunk Settings

Issue 2.0
Phone Image
Only selected settings in the following Preferences tabs are saved in the profile:
Recording (Record All Calls, Enable beep tone while recording)
Agent (Network Name/IP Address, Port Number)
The following General User Interface Settings are saved in the profile:
UI Mode (Window, Toolbar, or Compact Phone)
Sort BLF By (Extension, Name, or Drag and Drop)
Size and position of main window in Window Mode
Users configured to connect to the UC Server can apply a saved profile from the Tools menu in
Window mode or the File menu in Toolbar mode.
Park With UC Server, UC Clients can monitor all 64 park orbits in the SV9100. A Park area at the
bottom of the Window view shows the current status of the park orbits. The user can configure
which park orbits are of interest to them and UC Client will only show these orbits. Each monitored
park orbit will indicate when it is in use and hovering the mouse over this icon will display a pop-up
box that shows the name/extension of the person parking the call, the CLID of the parked call if
available, and the length of time that the call has been parked. While on an active call, the users
can click one of the unoccupied orbits and park the call with one mouse click.
The Park Area can also be configured to include a Valet button which will use the Step Park
function to park the call in the next available park orbit. The Valet option is also available from right
clicking an active call.
Also, while on an active call, users can Drag and Drop the call to an available park orbit or the Valet
button to park the call in the next available orbit.
Instant Messenger With UC Server, UC Client users can instant message each other. A
maximum of eight IM sessions can be established with different users. UC Suite has the ability to
maintain a history of the Instant Message sessions for each user. Previous IM sessions with a
particular user can be recalled to the History area at any time. When the user scrolls to the first
message in a session, a button is displayed in the History area allowing the user to load the
previous IM session.
Profile View Users can upload or capture a profile picture to be associated with their entry in the
Directory. An additional BLF view with larger BLF buttons can be selected to display Profile
Pictures instead of the Presence state images. The Profile Picture will also be displayed in the
Instant Message Window.

Issue 2.0
Licensing
The following table lists and describes the UC Suite related part numbers and licenses:
Table 2-115 Desktop Suite Licenses
License Code Item Name Description
640774 SV9100 STANDARD USER- Allows for a UC Client or a Web Client, Outlook Add-in, a UC
LIC 01 Server connection for Presence, Central Directory, Instant
Messaging and UCS Voicemail integration (InMail or
UM8000), and single column BLF panel. Enables license
codes (5305) UCS Client, (5309) UCS Advanced Service,
(5312) UCS Voicemail Integration, (5313) UCS Web Client,
(0012) 3rd Party CTI.
640776 SV9100 PREMIUM USER- LIC Allows everything the Standard User does but adds CRM
01 Integration and Attendant level features like BLF Tabs, Phone
Message, ability to change other users Presence States, Park
Orbit Monitoring, detailed phone status monitoring, Wide
column BLF panel and Pinning. Enables license codes (5304)
UCS Attendant Client and (5310) UCS CRM Integration.
640809 SV9100 SOFTPHONE Allows for a softphone client, enables license 5301 UCS
CLIENT- LIC 01 Softphone Client. Allows collaboration with DataConference
(Video, Chat, Communication Board, and document sharing).
Enables license code 5303 UCS Softphone Enhanced.
Multiple Logon
The same user name and password can be assigned to multiple extensions when using Automatic or
Manual Registration. This makes it easier on the user by only having to remember one password. For
example, if a user has an IP Multiline terminal and uses UC Suite with the Enhancement bundle
controlling the IP Multiline, three different ports are used in the system. All three can be assigned the
same user name and password.
TCP/UPD Port and Windows Process Firewall Exceptions
When a firewall is involved in the network between the SV9100 and the UC Client or UC Server. Refer
to Table 2-116 Exceptions to Firewall for Ports for exceptions to be made in the firewall for ports and
Table 2-117 Exceptions to Windows Process on page 2-1400 for windows processes.
Table 2-116 Exceptions to Firewall for Ports
TCP and/or Port

UC Suite Component Related Program
UDP Numbers
SIP UDP 5070~5197
Audio RTP UDP 60000~60254
Video Control TCP 6000
Video RTP UDP 61000~61019
File Transfer TCP 8282~8284

Issue 2.0
Table 2-116 Exceptions to Firewall for Ports (Continued)
TCP and/or Port

UC Suite Component Related Program
UDP Numbers
License TCP 6080
DataConference Control TCP 62010~32019
DataConference Video UDP 62010~32019
Outlook Integration/Highlight Dial/CallToTag/XML API TCP 20864~20865
TSP Support: UDP/TCP 972-973 UDP and TCP 972~973
UC Server Client Connection TCP 8888
3rd Party Call Control TCP 8181 10-20-1 Device 1 CTI Server
1st Party Call Control TCP 8282 10-20-1 Device 9 1st Party CTI
File and Print Sharing UDP and TCP 137
Operation & Maintenance (O&M) UDP and TCP 8010
Web Client UDP and TCP 8088
Table 2-117 Exceptions to Windows Process
Windows Process Firewall Exceptions
NECPhone.exe
RPCTIService.exe
DataMeeting.exe
RtcSvGM.exe
Virtual Machine Support
With the increasing popularity of deploying virtual machine environments by IT organizations, UC Server
supports the virtual machine environments listed below. This option provides a cost-effective alternative
to implementing a physical server.
Environment #1
Applications: UC Server 1.0
Host: Windows 2012 Server, running VMWare Workstation 9
Virtual: Windows 7 (32-bit)
Environment #2
Host: Windows 2012 Server, running VMWare ESXI 5.1
Virtual: Windows 7 (32-bit)

Issue 2.0
Environment #3
Host: Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise, running Hyper-V 6.1
Virtual: Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Conditions
When migrating from the SV8100 UC Desktop, all SV8100 UC Desktop software must be
uninstalled before installing the SV9100 UC Suite. This includes Shared Services, NEC
Telephony Driver, UC Desktop Client and RP Web Admin if on an InServer blade. Refer to
the SV9100 UC Suite Manual for further information on the removal process.
Migrating an InServer blade from SV8100 UC Desktop to SV9100 UC Suite requires the
SV9100 InServer Migration kit.
UC Suite does not support the Cordless DTL-8R-1 terminal.
The UC Client must be running in order to run the Answering Center.
The UC Suite does not support Centrex trunks for transferring or call forwarding off-site.
The UC Suite does not follow delay ringing. For example, if a virtual extension is set to
delay ring and appears on a UC Suite terminal, the UC Client will show the call as ringing
immediately.
The Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH) is not a supported terminal when using 1st-Party
CTI, 3rd-Party CTI, or with the UC Suite.
Up to 512 UC clients are supported with UC Server. Clients without a UC Server connection
and Softphone clients are still limited to a maximum of 256 connections. Any 1st-Party CTI
Driver connections take away from the 256 maximum connections.
A separate Outlook Add-In installation to support Outlook functionality with Web Client and
to support Outlook functionality without a client.
The SV9100 UC Suite does not support Network Address Translation (NAT). Because of
this, any UC Client must appear to be on the same network as the SV9100 VoIP Interface
(GPZ-IPLE). For remote UC Clients, like Softphone, this can be achieved by a VPN
connection to the network the SV9100 resides on.
The UC Suite requires an ADA-L Adapter installed on the multiline terminal with connection
directly to the client PC for Call Recording and Personal Greeting voice functions when
running in deskset mode.
The GCD-CP10 must be licensed for either an IP Terminal license when using a Softphone
or the Enhancement Bundle.
UC Suite users can dial digits while a call is in progress.
When UC Suite is in Toolbar mode, if the docked edge is changed from Top to Bottom or
Bottom to Top, it may rearrange the icons on the PC Desktop.
Recording with Softphone mode does not require an ADA adapter. Recording is done
through the softphone.

Issue 2.0
The Voice Mail button on the tool bar is not used in the US market.
If the dial window is open when a new call rings into the Desktop, and the phone is on-hook,
the new call takes priority and the dial window will close.
When using the Chat feature in the UC Suite, the maximum number of characters in a chat
message is 256.
The integration between the desktop application and the GCD-CP10 does not support CAP
keys 4000-9999. Only 0001-3999 can be supported. CAP keys above 3999 can be used
elsewhere in the system, but not for CTI controlled extensions which include UC Suite.
To reset the Telephony Settings (i.e., Service Codes) to default, you must delete the
c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Cygnus Application Suite\PC
Phone\TapiConfig.xml file and it recreates with defaults on the next launch of the
application.
Using an ADA-L for recording in Deskset mode for the UC Suite: DIPS 1 and 6 on the
ADA-L should be on with all others off.
Any station using UC Suite, in softphone or deskset mode, must have an ICM key
programmed in 15-07 (00).
If DND is set for another station, the BLF shows Red. If Call Forward Immediate (CFA) is
set for another station, the BLF shows Blue
For UC Clients without a UC Server Connection, BLF/DSS to be monitored in the UC Client
must be programmed on a physical key on the phone or DSS console attached to the
phone. DSS/BLF buttons that are programmed on buttons that do not physically exist on
the phone or on a DSS console that is not physically present do not show up in the UC
Client.
Without UC Server, ringing trunk calls show green. With the Shared Services solution,
ringing trunks calls show red.
When running UC Client in deskset mode for an IP phone when the registration mode is set
to automatic or manual, the user name and password must be different than that of the IP
phone.
A Softphone that is assigned a DSS console cannot override another IP phone.
A Softphone cannot override an IP phone that is assigned a DSS console.
Once a Softphone with a DSS console is logged in, it cannot log in with a different user
name and password.
Once a UC Client is launched on one PC using a User ID and Password in deskset or
Softphone mode, the same User ID and Password cannot be used on a different PC in a
different mode.
If the desktop is launched for a phone that is on a call, the desktop will not show the active
call until it is placed on hold.
The Enhancement Bundle features require a non-Deskset only license level even when
controlling a Deskset phone. When a non-Deskset only license level is selected, the UC
Client registers as an IP station consuming an additional system port.

Issue 2.0
The system sees terminal types 1 (Economy), 2 (Value), 3 (Desi-Less), 4 (Sophisticated)

and 5 (Softphone) as the same terminal type.
When using Multiple Logon, the same Personal ID index can be assigned to an
ITL/Softphone, and a CTI (UC Client) terminal type.
Two ports of the same terminal type (Program 15-05-26) cannot be assigned to the same
Personal ID index (Program 15-05-27).
Program 10-46-01 must be set to 1 (Auto) or 2 (Manual) for Multiple Logon to work.
When three ports are assigned the same Personal ID index in Program 15-05-27, if
Program 15-05-26 is not set for those ports, the terminal types will be assigned based on
order of login. If Program 15-05-26 is set, the login order does not matter and they will
assign the correct port.
The Override feature functions the same as single login.
When using manual registration for IP stations in Program 10-46-01, the UC Suite User ID
and Password in Programs 20-59-01 and 20-59-02 must match the Softphone User ID and
Password in Programs 84-22-01 and 84-22-02
When selecting the Deskset license level in Program 20-59-14 with UC Server connect
enabled in Program 20-14-13, call control is handled by the Telephony Service Provider on
the UC Server.
The new Voice Message notification by Windows Toast is only supported in Softphone
mode, and not in Desktop mode.
The new Voice Message notification by Windows Toast is only supported with InMail. The
UM8000 Mail does not support this Voice Message notification in UC Desktop Applications.
The Synchronization button within Preferences is available to the license levels in Program
20-59-14 shown below as long as UC Server is not used:
Softphone
Softphone + Deskset
The Synchronization button within Preferences is not available to the Deskset license level
in Program 20-59-14 with or without UC Server.
InMail Integration is not supported in a Centralized VM environment over IP or T1 CCIS.
When using a CS50 USB Headset for Softphone audio device, the Disable CS50 Power
Saving option should be checked in the Desktop Configuration Wizard. This disables the
CS50's power save/sleep mode which is not supported by UC Suite. Please note that this
will decrease the CS50's battery time.
NAT or NAPT is only supported on the DT700 series phones. NAT or NAPT is not
supported on the ML440, the Wireless DECT (SIP) or Softphone.
If analog Caller ID trunks are being used, Program 14-02-23 must be set to Wait Caller ID
for Salesforce to receive the caller ID for screen pops.
With CO lines, if TAPI is present in the system, there is a designed delay in ringing the
station so TAPI can capture the CID.

Issue 2.0
When using InMail integration, all clients must use UC Server or all clients must be used
without UC Server. A mixture of some clients with UC Server and some without is not
supported when using InMail Integration.
If an Outlook appointment is set for less than 30 minutes and you open the Presence Form,
the duration is changed to 30 minutes.
Using up or down arrows in the Presence State fields in Web Client is not supported.
ACT! 2001, 2012 and 2013 are supported with the following conditions:
In Act>Tools>Preferences>Communications>Dialer Preferences choose NEC Single Line
Device as modem or line and uncheck Hide dialer after dialing.
Windows Phone and Modem properties need to be configured for local dialing.
With ACT! 2012 and 2013, use either the Hang up button in the ACT! dialer window to
disconnect the call or toggle the handset if you hang up the phone and close the ACT! dialer
window. Failure to do either would hold the dialer open in ACT!
With ACT! 2013, a reboot is required after configuring the integration.
The Outlook Add-in is supported with the following Outlook versions (32- and 64-bit):
Outlook 2003
Outlook 2007
Outlook 2010
Outlook 2013
Recurring Appointments in Outlook will not set recurring Presence changes in UC Client.
Only the initial change will occur.
DID name information of analogue trunk type will not be sent by TSP.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All ITL/DTL type terminals
PC Class: Pentium 3
Processor Speed: 1Ghz
RAM: 512MB Minimum, 1GB Recommended

Issue 2.0
Display: Super VGA (800x600) or higher

50MB Available Disk Space
CD ROM Drive
Network Adapter
Sound Card
ADA-L for Recording/Personal Greeting in deskset mode
The desktop system supports the following operation systems:
Windows 7 Professional (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Server 2008 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Server 2012
Windows 8 Professional and Enterprise (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows 8.1 Professional and Enterprise (32 bit and 64 bit)
Refer to the Conditions section for Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit limitations.
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 must be enabled for Windows 8 and Server 2012.
Optional Component(s)
Video Camera
Microphone/Headset/USB Handset
Speakers
Related Features
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 UC Suite Manual for detailed feature information.
REFERENCE


Issue 2.0
In addition to the following programming, define the programming options as required for

NOTE
the system features.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual for programming details. Callback,
Callback Request, and Auto Redial are not supported.
REFERENCE
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
Define the default gateway to be used by the

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GPZ-IPLE interface.

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.25
Address. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Define the TCP port number for the LAN CTI 0
and O&M communication between the External Device
GCD-CP10 and the UC Suite. 2 (Contact
Center) = 4000
External Device
5 (SMDR
Output) = 0
External Device
6 (DIM Output) =
0
External Device
9 (1st Party CTI)

=0
External Device
11 (O&M Server)
= 8010
External Device
12 (Traffic
Report Output) =
0
External Device
13 (Room Data
Output for Hotel
Service ) = 0
10-46-01 DT700 Series Server Information Setup 0 = Normal 0

Register Mode 1 = Auto
If set to 0, when the phone boots up it reports 2 = Manual
the ext. assigned in the phone or chooses the
next available extension in the system. No
password is required.
If set 1 the SIP user name and password must
be entered on the actual IP phone. These
settings must match 84-22/15-05-27, or the
phone does not come on-line.
If set to 2, when the phone boots up it prompts
user to enter a user ID and password before
logging in. It checks this user ID/password
against 84-22/15-05-27. If there is no match,
the phone does not come on-line.
10-69-01 UC Server General Settings UC Server 0 = Disable 0

Availability 1 = Enable
Enable the UC Server if it is to be used.
10-69-02 UC Server General Settings UC Server IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
Define the IP address of the UC Server. 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
10-69-03 UC Server General Settings UC Server Any characters No Setting

Host Name
Define the host name of the UC Server.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-69-04 UC Server General Settings UC Server 0 ~ 65535 0

Port Number
Define the port UC Clients will connect to the

UC Server on. Recommended port 8888.

Trace 1 = Enable
Enable if NTAC requests to turn on. This is

used for troubleshooting purposes only.
10-69-06 UC Server General Settings UC Server Use 0 = Disable 0

Name for Communication 1 = Enable
Enable if the clients will communicate with the

UC Server via host name (not IP).

Large System Mode 1 = Enable
Enable if the system is to support more than

256 stations.

Auto Restart 1 = Enable
Enable if the UC Server is required to be reset

periodically for cleanup purposes.
10-69-09 UC Server General Settings UC Server 0 = Weekly 0

Auto Restart Frequency 1 = Monthly
If Auto Restart is enabled, specify if Weekly or

Monthly.
10-69-10 UC Server General Settings UC Server 0: Sunday 0

Auto Restart : Day of the Week 1: Monday
If Auto Restart is set for Weekly, specify which 2: Tuesday
day of the week it will occur. 3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
10-69-11 UC Server General Settings UC Server 0 = First 0

Auto Restart Week 1 = Second
If Auto Restart is set for Monthly, specify which 2 = Third

week in the month it will occur. 3 = Fourth
10-69-12 UC Server General Settings UC Server 0: Sunday 0

Auto Restart Day 1: Monday
If Auto Restart is set for Monthly, specify which 2: Tuesday
day of the week set in Program 10-69-11 it will
occur.
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
10-69-13 UC Server General Settings UC Server 00:00 ~ 23:59 00:00

Auto Restart Time
Specify the time of day the Auto Restart will

occur. This applies to Monthly or Weekly.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-70-01 UC Server Voicemail Interface Settings UC 0 = Disable 0

Server Voicemail Integration 1 = Enable
Enable if the UC Suite will have Voicemail

Integration.
10-70-02 UC Server Voicemail Interface Settings 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

UM8000 IP Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
If the voicemail system is UM8000, specify the

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
IP address of the UM8000.
10-70-03 UC Server Voicemail Interface Settings 0 ~ 65535 0

UM8000 Port Number
If the voicemail system is UM8000, specify the
port number UC Suite will connect to the

UM8000 on.
This should be set to port 1024.
10-71-01 UC Server MIS Settings MIS Server IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0
Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
If the UC Server will integrate to the Contact 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Center Server for Abandoned Call Alerts, define
the IP address of the Contact Center Server.
10-71-02 UC Server MIS Settings MIS Server Any characters No Setting

Computer Name
If the UC Server will integrate to the Contact
the Contact Center Server's computer name.
10-71-03 UC Server MIS Settings MIS Server Port 0 ~ 65535 0

Number
If the UC Server will integrate to the Contact
the port number it should connect on.
For external server this should be set to 8080
and for InServer Blade set this to 9090.
15-05-27 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0 ~ 960 0

Personal ID Index
When the SIP Multiline telephone is using
manual/auto registration, assign each phone a

unique personal index. Then go to command
84-22 to assign the user name and password.

Set Talking Party to 0 for Desktop Application

softphone.

Assign a function key to terminals. 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming

752 by default)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-23-06 System Options for CTI 3rd Party CTI IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0.0
Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Read only program that displays the IP address

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
of the currently connected 3rd Party CTI Server.
20-58-01 UC Server Presence Settings UC Server 0 = Disable 0

Presence States: In the Office 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the In the Office Presence

State for UC Suite.

Presence States: On Vacation 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the On Vacation Presence

State for UC Suite.

Presence States: Business Travel 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the Business Travel

Presence State for UC Suite.

Presence States: In a Meeting 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the In a Meeting Presence

State for UC Suite.

Presence States: Out to Lunch 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the Out to Lunch Presence

State for UC Suite.

Presence States: Sick 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the Sick Presence State for

UC Suite.

Presence States: Gone for the Day 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the Gone for the Day


Presence States: Out of the Office 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the Out of the Office


Presence States: Unavailable 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the Unavailable Presence

State for UC Suite.

Presence States: Unknown 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the Unknown Presence State

for UC Suite.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Custom Presence Usage 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable the use of the Custom

Presence States for UC Suite.
20-58-12 UC Server Presence Settings UC Server Any characters No Setting

Custom Presence 1 Definition
Define the name of Custom Presence State

number 1.

Custom Presence 1 Use 1 = Enable
Enable or Disable number 1 custom Presence

State for UC Suite.


number 2.


State for UC Suite.


number 3.


State for UC Suite.


number 4.


State for UC Suite.
20-59-01 UC Server Settings UC User ID Any character No Setting

Define the user ID for the UC Suite User

20-59-02 UC Server Settings UC User Password Any character No Setting
Define the password for the UC Suite User.

20-59-03 UC Server Settings UC - DT Client 0 = Disable 0
Enable or Disable the users ability to launch a 1 = Enable
UC full PC client.
20-59-04 UC Server Settings UC - DT Web Client 0 = Disable 0

Enable or Disable the users ability to launch a 1 = Enable
Web Client.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-59-05 UC Server Settings UC - Deskset 0 ~ 9, , # No Setting

Extension
If the UC Suite User will control a Deskset
extension, define the extension number to
control.
20-59-06 UC Server Settings UC - Softphone 0 ~ 9, , # No Setting

Extension
If the UC Suite User will use a softphone, define

the extension number.
20-59-07 UC Server Settings UC - IM- Allow 0 = Disable 0

If the UC Suite User will be allowed to send and 1 = Enable
receive Instant Messages.
20-59-08 UC Server Settings UC - Shared Data 0 = Disable 0

Allow 1 = Enable
Enable if the UC Suite User will be allowed to

edit the Directory.
20-59-09 UC Server Settings UC - Global Presence 0 = Disable 0

Change Allow 1 = Enable

change other users presence states.
20-59-10 UC Server Settings UC - Message Feature 0 = Disable 0

Allow 1 = Enable

send and receive Phone Messages.
20-59-11 UC Server Settings UC - Phone Monitor 0 = Disable 0

Allow 1 = Enable

view the current call state of other extensions.
20-59-12 UC Server Settings UC - Block to be 0 = Disable 0

Monitored 1 = Enable
Enable if the UC Suite User's call state should
be blocked from being viewed by other UC
Suite users with Program 20-59-11 enabled.
20-59-13 UC Server Settings UC - Server Connect 0 = Disable 0

Enable if the UC Suite User's client will connect 1 = Enable
to the UC Server.
20-59-14 UC Server Settings UC - License Level 0 = Softphone 0

Define if the UC Suite User will us a Deskset, 1 = Deskset
Softphone, or Deskset + Softphone. (Deskset +
Softphone is needed for UC Suite users
2 = Softphone + Deskset
controlling a deskset but require data
conference.
20-59-15 UC Server Settings UC - Login Mode 0 = Softphone 0

Define if the UC Suite User will control a 1 = Deskset
Deskset or be a Softphone.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-59-16 UC Server Settings UC - Attendant Mode 0 = Disable 0

Enable or Disable if the UC Suite User will have 1 = Enable
full Attendant type functionality like BLF Tabs,
Phone Message, ability to change other users
Presence States, Park Orbit Monitoring,
detailed phone status monitoring, Pinning and
Wide Column BLF.
20-59-17 UC Server Settings UC - Trial Mode 0 = Disable 0

Enable or Disable if the client will come up in 1 = Enable
trial mode. Once this is set, the first time the
client logs in the trial will be active on that PC
for 30 days.
20-59-18 UC Server Settings UC - Voicemail 0 = Disable 0

Interface 1 = Enable
Enable if the UC Suite user will have Voicemail

integration.
20-59-19 UC Server Settings UC - Agent Mode 0 = Disable 0

Enable if the UC Suite user will use Contact 1 = Enable
Center integration.
20-59-20 UC Server Settings UC - Abandon 0 = Disable 0

Callback 1 = Enable
Enable if the UC Suite user will use the

Abandoned Call Alert Feature.
20-60-01 UC Server Telephony Settings UC Server 0 = Disable 0

Consult Call for Immediate Transfer 1 = Enable
Enable if Immediate transfers off-site are not

working.
20-60-02 UC Server Telephony Settings UC Server 0 ~ 9, , # No Setting

Emergency Number
Define the number dialed for emergency calls.
20-61-01 UC Server Call Alerts Feature Settings UC 0 = Disable 0

Server Abandon Call Alerts 1 = Enable
Enable the Abandoned Call Alert feature.
20-61-02 UC Server Call Alerts Feature Settings UC 00:00 ~ 23:59 00:00

Server Minimum Wait Time
Define the minimum wait time for the call to be

included in the abandoned call alert list.
20-61-03 UC Server Call Alerts Feature Settings UC 00:00 ~ 23:59 00:00

Server Clear Call Timer
Define the time limit for calls to remain on the
Abandoned Calls Alert list. When a call has
been on the list for longer than the specified
time, the call is automatically removed from the
list. If this field is blank, calls are not removed
automatically and will stay on the list until
manually deleted.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-61-04 UC Server Call Alerts Feature Settings UC 0 = Disable 0

Server Clear Call If Matching Caller ID 1 = Enable
Returns to Queue
Define if a call will be removed from the

Abandoned Calls list if a subsequent call
returns to the queue with the same Caller ID.
20-62-01 UC Exception Table Dial Data 0 ~ 9, , # No Setting

Define dial strings that are not internal calls but
are the same digit length as internal station

numbers.

Set the DSS system Console mode. 1 = Hotel Mode
2 = Monitor Mode

3 = Business/ Mode
30-02-01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Maximum of eight digits. No Setting

Extension Number
Set the extension number for the multiline
eight digits).

For DSS Console Chaining, assign an Speed 001 ~ 114 Programming
Dialing Service Code (or) plus a 2-digit bin 0 ~ 99 (General Functional Manual for
number to a DSS Console key. Level) default values.
No.)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Functional Level)

Session Timer Value

Define to convey the minimum allowed value

for the SIP session timer.
84-22-01 DT800/DT700 Series Multiline Logon Maximum of 32 characters. No Setting

Information Setup User ID
Input the User ID for each Personal ID Index
in 10-46-01.
84-22-02 DT800/DT700 Series Multiline Logon Maximum of 16 characters. No Setting

Information Setup Password
Input the Password for each Personal ID Index
in 10-46-01.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

GPZ-IPLE.
Operation .
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 UC Desktop Suite Applications Manual for detailed
feature information.
REFERENCE

Issue 2.0
Synchronous Ringing
Description
Synchronous Ringing synchronizes CO/PBX incoming ringing with the incoming ringing pattern from a
Central Office.
Conditions
When the multiline terminal is ringing at Secondary Extension (SE)/Virtual Extension (VE)
key, Synchronous Ring works.
Synchronous Ringing is not supported for Tie/DID incoming calls, Off-Hook Ringing, or CO/
PBX Ring Transfers.
If Synchronous Ringing is enabled, the VRS Preamble Message cannot be used.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals except Single Line Telephones connected to AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit
None
Related Features
None
2-1416 Synchronous Ringing

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-02-17 Analog Trunk Data Setup Sync. Ringing 0 = Disable 1

Enable/Disable per trunk. 1 = Enable

Trunk
Define the ring cycle for Normal Incoming trunk

calls.
20-15-02 Ring Cycle Setup PBX, CES Incoming Call Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 8
Define the ring cycle for PBX and CES
incoming trunk calls.
20-15-04 Ring Cycle Setup DID/DISA/VRS Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 8

Define the ring cycle for DID/DISA/VRS
incoming calls.

Define the ring cycle for DID/DDI incoming
calls.
20-15-06 Ring Cycle Setup Dial-In in the E&M Tie Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 12
Line
Define the ring cycle for Dial IN and E&M Tie

line calls.
SLT
Define the ringing cycle for Door Box Ringing

for SLT terminals.
20-15-08 Ring Cycle Setup Virtual Extension Ring Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 8

Define the ringing cycle for Virtual Extensions.

20-15-09 Ring Cycle Setup Callback Ringing Cycle = 1 ~ 13 11
Define the ringing cycle for callbacks.

Define the ring cycle for Alarm for SLT
terminals.
Synchronous Ringing 2-1417

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Incoming Call
Define the ring cycle for incoming VRS Waiting

messages.
22-03-01 Trunk Ring Tone Range Ring Tone Pattern 0 ~ 12 0

Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks. Trunks ring (Ring Tone Pattern 1 ~ 4)
extensions according to the Ring Tone Range
selected in Program 22-03-0 and the settings
(Melody 1 ~ Melody 5)
(Ring Tone Pattern 5 ~ 8)
made with either Service Code 720 or Program
15-02-02.
Operation
None
2-1418 Synchronous Ringing

Issue 2.0
System Caller Log
Description
With this feature, the user can check all caller logs one by one when they push the system caller log
function key. User can check 200 caller logs in the System. All outside calls whether answered or not
are stored in the System Call log.
Conditions
The system caller log key is appearance function code. Set Program 20-07-10 to 1 in
order to set key via service code.
The latest log is shown first. The system call log is registered when a call ends. (The call log
list is not the order of incoming call time.)
The oldest log can be checked when the user presses the up soft-key or Volume UP Key.
Only trunk Calls are displayed.(Program 15-02-34 settings are not used.)
The Cursor key on DT7xx/DT8xx/DT3xx/DT4xx terminals can be used to control the scroll
feature.
One record in 'SYSTEM CALL HISTORY' function is registered relating to one external
incoming call.
If a notified calling number agrees in search of Common ABB (Program 13-04) area, the
name of ABB is registered into the 'SYSTEM CALL HISTORY' record. Telephone Book is
not applied.
Internal Caller Logs are not displayed in this feature.
Search and jump function are not supported.
The Caller Logs are erased when system is reset.
Only a user can operate the system caller log key.
The system caller log is not supported on the DSS console function key.
The called extension number is not displayed.
If Program 20-02-18 times out, the LCD display changes to IDLE automatically.
Missed calls are noted by an asterisk.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Caller Log 2-1419

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Station and Trunk Terminals
GCD-CP10
Table 2-118 Station Application
Terminal Type Applied/Not Applied Remarks
DT300 Series Y
DT400 Series Y
DT700 Series Y
DT800 Series Y
Bluetooth Handset Y
DC550/Softphone Y Console only.
Curl Cordless Telephone Y
Y = Applied
N = Not Applied
Table 2-119 Trunk Application
Terminal Type Applied/Not Applied Remarks
Analog Line Y
1
ISDN (BRI) Line Y 1
ISDN (PRI) Line Y 1
SIP Line Y 1
H.323 Line Y 1
CCIS Y 1
Y = Applied
N = Not Applied
1 = Trunk is registered to Caller Log.
2-1420 System Caller Log

Issue 2.0
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

752 by default)
35 - System Call History
Related System Data:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


1.

752 by default)
08 - Incoming Caller ID list
System Caller Log 2-1421

Issue 2.0
Operation
1. User pushes the System Caller Log key in idle mode.
2. User can check the all of the system caller log one by one.
Figure 2-68 System Caller Log Example 1
3. User can page by pushing up and down key.
Figure 2-69 System Caller Log Example 2
4. LED Operation:
On (Red) Other Using
On (Green) Using
Off Not Using
2-1422 System Caller Log

Description
The T1/PRI Interface gives the system T1 trunking ability. This blade uses a single universal slot
and provides up to 24 trunk circuits. In additional to providing digital-quality trunking, the T1/PRI
T
Interface allows you to have maximum trunking ability with fewer blades. This in turn makes more
universal slots available for other functions.
You can program each T1/PRI for any combination of the following trunks:
CO loop start
CO ground start
Direct Inward Dialing
Tie Lines 4
GCD-PRTA uses the first block of 24 consecutive trunks. For example, if you have a
GCD-4COTB with GPZ-4COTF installed for trunks 1~8, the T1/PRI Interface automatically uses
trunks 9~32. If you have GCD-4COTB with GPZ-4COTF installed for trunks 1~8 and 17~24, the
T1/PRI uses trunks 25~48. The T1/PRI Interface cannot use trunks 9~16 (even if available) since
they are not part of a consecutive block of 24 trunks. Each T1/PRI requires that 24 consecutive
ports be available in the system even if not all the ports are used otherwise the blade does not
function.
The GCD-PRTA can be programmed as a 4/8/12/16/20/24 port Fractional T1/PRI.
ANI/DNIS Compatibility
The system is compatible with Telco T1 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and Dialed
Number Information Service (DNIS) services. A compliment to Caller ID service, ANI/DNIS
Compatibility provides:
Receive Format
The Receive Format must be set as ANIDNIS in Program 34-09-01 option 4, which is
treated as a Feature Group D format. (Example of ANI Information
KP009727517645STKP7100ST.)
Flexible Routing
Based on the data received, the system can route the incoming ANI/DNIS call to:
An extension
A or Voice Mail master extension number
4. Two-wire (four-lead) type 1 Tie Lines (FIC TL11M) only.
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) 2-1423

Issue 2.0
A VRS and play a VRS message to the caller
A Department Group pilot number
A trunk Ring Group
Route According to DID Translation Table or Speed Dial Bins

Calls can be routed based on either the number of digits defined in Program 22-09-01 (digits 1~8)
or by digits entered in Speed Dial bins in Program 13-04-01.
ANI/DNIS Data Displayed as Caller ID Data

Data Error and Unanswered Call Handling
If a call cannot be completed, send it to a predetermined Ring Group or play supervisory tones to
the caller.
Conditions
T1 Trunking requires a T1/PRI Interface and a customer-provided CSU/DSU to interface
with the Telco. Consult your sales representative and the System Hardware Manual for
additional details.
ANI/DNIS Compatibility requires using system DTMF receivers. When all receivers are
busy, the incoming ANI/DNIS call waits for a receiver to become available.
The ANI/DNIS/Address data received from the Telco can have up to 10 digits.
An extension Class of Service (Program 20-09-02) determines whether ANI information is
displayed.
Refer to Digital Trunk Clocking on page 2-379 for the specifics on how the system detects
dial tone.
The T1 Tie Line can be used for networking.
The T1/PRI Interface provides Tie Line service. All programming parameters are the same
as those used for analog Tie Lines (except for the additional T1/PRI Interface settings).
With an UNIVERGE SV9100 Expanded Port Package, up to 400 T1 trunks can be
assigned.
You can use T1 trunks in place of standard analog trunks. The procedures for placing and
answering calls are the same for both trunks.
The T1/PRI Interface provides DID service. All programming parameters are the same as
those used for analog DID trunks (except for the additional T1/PRI Interface settings).
SMDR can print trunk port names or received dialed number for ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If
enabled in programming, DNIS digits can be printed on the SMDR reports instead of the
trunk name.
T1 trunks follow Tie Line toll restriction programming (Program 34-01-05 and Program
34-08).
When using Fractional T-1s, the blade comes up with zero ports until Program 10-03-06 is
set to the 4/8/12/16/20/24(auto) and then reset.
2-1424 T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)

Issue 2.0
If the number of ports are changed for a fractional T-1 in Program 10-03-06, the trunk ports
could be reassigned if the numerical sequence would split or it could fit into an empty gap of
trunk ports.
Examples:
The GCD-4COTB with GPZ-4COTF is assigned for trunk ports 1~8 and 17~24 and the T-1 (12 ports)
was assigned as ports 25~36, the number of T-1s change to eight ports instead of 12. The new
trunk port numbers are assigned as 9~16 because the eight ports can fit into the gap between ports
8 and 17 without splitting the numerical port number sequence.
The GCD-4COTB with GPZ-4COTF is assigned for trunk ports 1~8 and 17~24 and the T-1 (eight
ports) was assigned as 9~16 and then the T-1 was changed from eight to 12 ports. The new trunk
port numbers are assigned as 25~36 because the port number sequence would have to be split to
keep them within the original number sequence (9~16) and splitting the numerical port number
sequence is not supported.
Incoming calls on T1/ANI trunks can only follow Program 22-11-01. They do not follow
Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06.
DID name information of T1 trunk type will not be sent by TSP.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-PRTA
Locally provided CSU/DSU
Required Software
None

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Caller ID
Code Restriction
Dial Tone Detection
ISDN Compatibility

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-01 ETU Setup (DTI (T1) PKG Setup) Logical The start port number of a T1 0
Port Number line is displayed, and 24 logic
Set various T1 trunk options for compatibility ports are automatically assigned
with the local Telco. For ANI/DNIS, the following to a DTI (T1) line.
settings in Program 10-03 are recommended: 0 ~ 200
Item 02: Frame Type = 0 (D4)
Item 03: Zero Suppression = 1 (AMI/ZCS)
Item 04: Distance Between ETU and CSU = 0
(0 ~ 133)
Item 05: Clock Select = 1 (Internal)
Item 06: DTI No. of Ports= 0 (Auto/24), 1 (4
Ports), 2 (8 Ports), 3 (12 ports), 4 (16 ports),
and 5 (20 Ports)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-03-02 ETU Setup (DTI (T1) PKG Setup) T1 Signal 0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame) 1
Format Selection 1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame)
Set up and confirm the basic configuration data

for logical port number T1.
10-03-03 ETU Setup (DTI (T1) PKG Setup) Zero 0 = B8ZS 0

Code Suppression 1 = AMI/ZCS

for the Clear Channel Selection.
10-03-04 ETU Setup (DTI (T1) PKG Setup) Line 0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet 0
Length Selection 1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet
Set up and confirm the basic configuration data 2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet
for the Line Length Selection. 3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet
4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet
10-03-05 ETU Setup (DTI (T1) PKG Setup) T1 Clock 0 = Internal 1

Source 1 = External

for the DTI trunk type assignment.
10-03-06 ETU Setup (DTI (T1) PKG Setup) Number 0 = Auto 0

of Ports 1 = 4 Ports
Set up and confirm the basic configuration data 2 = 8 Ports
for the number of ports required. 3 = 12 Ports

4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports
For ANI/DNIS, reserve at least one DTMF 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
receiver for DTMF reception (entry 0 or 2). 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver (Trunks)
for every 10 devices that use them. Circuit/Resource
receiver for every five devices that use them. (Common)
When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available
10-39-01 Fractional Setup Fractional 0 = Disable 0

Enable/Disable T1/PRI fractional function. 1 = Enable

Select transmit level of CODEC Gain (signal 1 ~ 57
amplification) for each trunk. (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB

intervals)
Select receive level of CODEC Gain (signal 1 ~ 57
amplification) for each trunk. (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB

intervals)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-07 Basic Trunk Data Setup Outgoing Calls 0 = Deny (No) 1

Allow/Deny outgoing calls on the trunk you are 1 = Allow (Yes)
programming.
For ANI/DNIS, the following additional settings 2 = DTMF
in Program 14-02 are recommended:
Item 1: Signaling Type (DP/DTMF) = 2
(DTMF)
Item 2: Ring Detect Type = 1 (Immediate)

Item 3: Flash Type = 0 (Open Loop Flash)
Item 4: Flash for Time Flash or Disconnect =
0 (Timed Flash)
Item 5: Dial Tone Detection for Manually
Dialed Calls = 1 (Outgoing calls allowed)
Set the trunks for Extended Ring Detect or 0 = Normal/delayed
Immediate Ring Detect. For T1 loop/ground 1 = Immediate Ringing
start trunks, set this option to 1 for the trunks to
ring and light correctly.

For ANI/DNIS, Stand Alone (Trunk) setting is 1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
recommended: Behind PBX. 2 = Not Used

3 = CTX Assume 9
For ANI/DNIS, place all your ANI/DNIS trunks Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
in Trunk Groups as required. to trunk group 1
with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.

extension port =
Class 1

E&M Override
caller.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


extension.

First Digit Absorbtion (Delete First Digit 1 = On
Dialed)
For Tie Lines, Enable/Disable the ability to
ignore the first incoming digit. Use this to make

the tie trunk compatible with 3- and 4-digit Tie
Line service. This option does not apply to
DISA.


Code 704).


to use System Speed Dialing.




to use telephone system Internal Paging.


to use telephone system External Paging.



T-point>


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Enable/Disable a DISA caller ability to use the

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk user from

using the Barge-In feature.

Turn Off or On the ability for a DISA caller to

retrieve parked or held calls.
22-02-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Incoming Type 0 = Normal 0

For each T1 trunk, set the Trunk Service Type 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
to match the Telco connected T1 service. For VRS installed)
each T1 trunk that should support ANI/DNIS 2 = DISA
service, enter 7. (ANI/DNIS trunks must be 3 = DID
immediate start or wink start T1 trunks with
4 = DIL

E&M signaling.) For T1 loop/ground start
trunks defined as 0, Program 14-02-02 must be 5 = E&M Tie line
set to 1 for the trunks to ring and light correctly. 6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Received Number
system.

Target Number
22-11-03 DID Translation Number Conversion DID Maximum of 12 digits. No Setting

Name
(1 ~ 4000), specify the name that should show
on the dialed extension display when it rings.
22-13-01 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table DID Translation Tables: 1 ~ 20 1

Assignment Trunk Groups: 1 ~ 100
Assign DID translation tables to trunk groups. 0 ~ 20

(0 = No Setting)
For each ANI/DNIS trunk, set the start signaling 2 = Immediate

mode to 1. 3 = Delay

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

For DID and tie trunks, set the trunk signaling
type (Dial Pulse or DTMF).
2 = MF
Program 34-01-02 must be set to (2) = MF in
order for T1 ANI to work.
34-01-03 E&M Tie Line Basic Setup E&M Dial-In 0 = Specify Extension Number 0
Mode (Intercom)
Determine if the incoming Tie Line call should 1 = Use Conversion Table (NTT)
be directed as an intercom call (0) or if it should

follow the DID Translation Table in Program
22-11 (1).
34-01-04 E&M Tie Line Basic Setup E&M Line Dial 0 = Disable (No) 1
Tone 1 = Enable (Yes)
Enter 1 if the Tie Line should send dial tone to
the calling system after the call is set up. Enter
0 if the Tie Line should not send dial tone.

Assign a Class of Service (1 ~ 15) to a Tie Line. 1~8
The Class of Service options are defined in Class: 1 ~ 15
Program 20-14. For each Tie Line, you make a
separate entry for each Night Service mode.
34-09-01 ANI/DNIS Service Options Receive Format 0 = Address COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Specify the format of the ANI/DNIS data 1 = ANI
received from the Telco. Make sure your entry 2 = DNIS
is compatible with the service the Telco
provides (4 = ANIDNIS [ = Delimiter
3 = ANIAddress
Code]).
4 = ANIDNIS
5 = DNISANI
If Program 34-01-02 is set to (2) = MF, this
Program works only as 4 =ANIDNIS ( = Delimiter Code)
34-09-02 ANI/DNIS Service Options Delimiter Dial 0 ~ 9, #, and . COS 1 ~ 15 =

Code
Define the character Telco uses as a delimiter
(see entries 1 ~ 5 in Program 34-09-01).
Valid entries are: 0 ~ 9, #, and .
34-09-03 ANI/DNIS Service Options Route Setup of 0 = Fixed Route (Item 08) (No COS 1 ~ 15 = 0
Receive Dial Routing)
Specify the source of the data the system uses 1 = Routes on Received DNIS
to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. If 2 is or Address Data

selected, refer to Program 34-09-04. 2 = Routes on Received ANI
Data

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
34-09-04 ANI/DNIS Service Options Route Table 0 = SPD Table (Program 13-03) COS 1 ~ 15 = 0
Setup of Target Dial 1 = DID Table (Program 22-11)
Set how the system uses the route data
(gathered in Item 03) to route incoming ANI/
DNIS calls.
If option 2 is selected and the call is routed
using the DID table, up to eight digits can be
matched. The number of expected digits set in
Program 22-09-01 must match the ANI digits
defined in Program 22-11-01. For example, if
an ANI/DNIS number received was
20355512343001 and Program
22-09-01=4, then the entry in Program
22-11-01 must be 1234 with the defined target
extension.
If the call is routed using the ABB table (0), up
to 24 digits can be matched. Define the range
of the ABB table to be used in Program
34-09-06. The data is then compared to the
entries in Program 13-04-01 and then routed
according to Program 13-04-03.
34-09-05 ANI/DNIS Service Options ANI/DNIS Caller ID Display: COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Display as Target Dial Name 0 = Display Off
Set whether or not ANI data should be 1 = Display On
displayed on telephone displays as part of
Caller ID display.
34-09-06 ANI/DNIS Service Options Routing SPD Start = 0, 100 ~ 9900 COS 1~15
Table Setup End = 0, 99 ~ 9999 Start = 0
Define which part of the SPD Dial Table set up End = 0
in Program 13-04 the system uses for ANI/
DNIS Caller ID look-ups and ANI/DNIS routing
(Start = 0, 100~9900, End = 0, 99 ~ 9999). This
is required if Items 4 and 5 above are 1 (Caller
ID on). When you specify a starting and end
address, the system uses the part of the table
for look-ups. When you specify a starting
address and length, the system uses that part
of the table for routing. If the incoming ANI/
DNIS number data matches the Number entry
in the table, the system routes according to the
associated Name data. That data can be an
extension, Department Group pilot number, the
voice mail master number or a trunk ring group.
34-09-07 ANI/DNIS Service Options Routing on ANI/ 0 = Play Busy Tone to Caller COS 1 ~ 15 = 0
DNIS Error 1 = Route Caller to Ring Group
Determine how the system handles an ANI/ Specified in Program 25-03
DNIS call if a data error is detected in the (Transfer)
incoming data string.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
34-09-08 ANI/DNIS Service Options Routing When 0 = Play Busy or Ringback Tone COS 1 ~ 15 = 0
Destination Busy or No Answer to Caller (Busy/ NoAns)
Determine how the system handles an ANI/ 1 = Route Caller to Ring Group
DNIS call if destination is busy or does not Specified in Program 25-04
answer. (Transfer)
34-09-09 ANI/DNIS Service Options Calling Number 1~8 COS 1 ~ 15 = 7

Address Length
When Item 01 = 0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is
address), specify the address length. The
choices are 1 ~ 8 digits.
34-10-01 Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment 0~9 2

Define the number of digits to delete from the
information element received from Telco.
Operation
Refer to the operation for the following features:
Central Office Calls, Answering on page 2-198
Central Office Calls, Placing on page 2-209
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) on page 2-390
Multiple Trunk Types on page 2-1036

Issue 2.0
Tandem Ringing
Description
Tandem Ringing allows an extension user to have two telephones with one telephone number. For
example, extension 105 (the master telephone) sets Tandem Ringing with extension 106. When
extension 105 receives an incoming call, both extensions 105 and 106 ring. Callers would dial the
master extension number (extension 105 in this example). When either the master telephone or slave
telephone is in use, the other telephone cannot be used for outgoing calls or incoming calls.
The multiline terminal must be paired with a single line telephone. It cannot be paired with another
multiline terminal.
A single line telephone must be paired with another single line telephone. It cannot be paired with a
multiline telephone.
Conditions
The slave telephone cannot call the master telephone.
DT800/DT700 IP Multiline terminals do not support Tandem Ringing.
Extension numbers up to eight digits can be registered on the Tandem Ringing key.
Extension numbers over nine digits cannot be registered.
If Tandem Ringing is enabled, and one of the extensions is busy, no additional calls can be
received or placed from either telephone.
Tandem Ringing can support up to 128 pairs of Tandem Ringing extensions.
The extension user which enables Tandem Ringing is the master, while the slave telephone
is the extension entered by the user while setting up the feature.
A slave telephone ignores the settings for DND and follows the master telephone settings
instead.
Voice Call is not supported on a multiline terminal with Tandem Ringing.
Calls placed on Hold while Tandem Ringing is active, immediately recall if the handset is
placed on-hook.
A slave telephone ignores the settings for Ring Groups and follows the master telephone
settings instead.
To transfer calls between the two Tandem Ringing stations, a System Park Orbit should be
used.
A message waiting indication set for the master telephone only lights the message waiting
LED on the master telephone.
Tandem Ringing is not supported with extensions defined as Operator Extensions in
Program 20-17-01.
2-1434 Tandem Ringing

Issue 2.0
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Master Telephone:
TDM Multiline Terminals or Single Line Telephones
Slave Telephone:
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb
Hold
Intercom
Message Waiting
Ring Groups
Tandem Ringing 2-1435

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Tandem Ringing 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define a service code to be used to set up digits

Tandem Ringing.

Assign a function key for Tandem Ringing (code 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
80). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)

Assign a DSS function key for Tandem Ringing 001 ~ 114 Programming
(code 80). 0 ~ 99 (General Functional Manual for
Level) default values.
No.)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Functional Level)
Operation
To set up Tandem Ringing:

1. Press Speaker at the extension considered to be the master telephone (optional).
2. Press the Tandem Ringing key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 80).
3. Dial 1 to set the feature.
4. Enter the extension number to be considered the slave telephone (the telephone that rings when
the master extension rings).
A confirmation tone is heard (if Speaker was used).
2-1436 Tandem Ringing

Issue 2.0
5. Press Speaker to hang up (if the key is lit).

While the feature is active, if either the master or slave telephone is on a call, no calls can be
placed or answered at the other extension until the busy telephone has hung up. Multiline
terminals indicate TANDEM IN USE in the display and single line telephone users hear a busy
signal when the handset is lifted.
To cancel Tandem Ringing:

1. Press the Tandem Ringing key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 80).
2. Dial 0 to cancel the feature.
Tandem Ringing 2-1437

Issue 2.0
Description
Tandem Trunking allows an extension user to join two outside callers in a Trunk-to-Trunk Conference.
The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving the trunks in an Unsupervised Conference. The
extension user that established the conference is not part of the conversation. The conference continues
until either outside party hangs up. The extension user that set up the conference can end the tandem
call anytime.
The number of simultaneous conference calls is limited by the number of conference circuits in the
system. The maximum number of conference calls cannot exceed the limits defined below:
The GCD-CP10 provides two blocks of 32 conference circuits, allowing each block to have any number
of conferences with any number of internal or external parties conferenced as long as the total number of
conference channels used does not exceed the block limit of 32.
Tandem Trunking could help an office manager, for example, put two outside sales people in touch. The
office manager could:
Answer a call from one salesperson
Place a call to the second salesperson
Set up the Trunk-to-Trunk Conference
Drop out of the call
The office manager could terminate the conference anytime.

NOTE
Tandem Trunking methods include:

Method A - Tandem Trunking from Conference
An extension user can set up Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) by dialing a 2-digit
service code (#8) or a uniquely programmed Transfer key.
Method B - Tandem Trunking with Transfer Key
This method allows an extension user to easily set up an Unsupervised Conference with a call they
have placed on Hold. It uses a uniquely programmed Transfer key to set up a tandem call.
Method C - Automatic Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
This method allows an extension user to easily set up an Unsupervised Conference without having
to place the conference call on Hold. A Class of Service option is available, which allows or denies
an extension user from automatically setting up a Conference/Tandem Trunking call after hanging
up the telephone.
2-1438 Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)

Issue 2.0
Method D - Automatic Tandem Trunking Setup to Speed Dial Number

This method allows an extension user to easily set up an Unsupervised Conference with a call they
have placed on Hold. A Class of Service option is available, which allows or denies an extension
user from automatically setting up a Conference/Tandem Trunking call after hanging up the
telephone.
Trunk Continue/Disconnect Codes Added
Software enhances the forced trunk release option with the Tandem Trunking and DISA features. Users
can use a Continue or Disconnect service code. The Continue service code extends the conversation a
programmed time. If the user enters the Disconnect service code, the call is disconnected immediately.
Example:
The following example indicates how a call is handled with the system programmed as follows:
Program 14-01-25: 1 (Continued/Discontinued Trunk-to-Trunk Conversation)

Program 20-28-01: # (Conversation Continue Code)
Program 20-28-02: No Setting (No Conversation Disconnect Code is entered)
Program 20-28-03: 180 (Conversation Continue Time)
Program 24-02-07: 600 (Only used with Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone)
Program 24-02-10: 30 (Only used with Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk)
Program 25-07-07: 600 (Long Conversation Warning Tone Timer)
Program 25-07-08: 30 (Long Conversation Disconnect)
1. An external call connects to an external number (either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by
DISA caller).
2. After 10 minutes (Tandem Trunking = Program 24-02-07 or DISA = Program 25-07-07), a warning tone
is heard and the user dials # (Program 20-28-01) to extend the conversation.
3. After three minutes (Program 20-28-03), the warning tone is heard again. After 30 seconds (Tandem
Trunking = Program 24-02-10 or DISA = Program 25-07-08), the call is disconnected.
Conditions
Tandem Trunking requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or ground
start trunks.
The maximum number of simultaneous trunk-to-trunk conferences allowed is determined
by the Conference feature setup. Refer to the Guide to Feature Programming on page
2-1441 for this feature.
The Continue/Disconnect code must be DTMF.
With an analog trunk, the Continue/Disconnect code may work using DTMF sounds from
the opposite side trunk. With an ISDN trunk, Program 14-01-25 must be enabled to detect
the Continue/Disconnect code.
The Continue/Disconnect code is not accepted while dialing a trunk.
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) 2-1439

Issue 2.0
Continue/Disconnect codes do not work if all receivers are busy.

When used with the Networking feature, both systems must be programmed the same for
the Continue/Disconnect codes.
A trunk can be set up to automatically tandem trunk/forward to an outside telephone
number or Speed Dial System/Group Dialing bin.
Other programmed options for incoming and outgoing calls can affect how calls are
handled. Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering/Central Office Calls, Placing and check or
program these options as needed.
DISA calls also use the same Continue/Disconnect codes.
After initiating an unsupervised conference, selecting one of the CAP keys or line keys
allows you to barge-in to the conference.
If the station that barges into an unsupervised conference hangs up, the conference is
terminated.
A Trunk-to-Trunk transfer can be established by the following operation:
1. While talking to an outside party, press Hold.
2. Access a second outside line and dial the desired number.
3. Press Transfer to complete the Trunk-to-Trunk transfer.
When the second call is to be transferred to another station (Not Trunk-to-Trunk), the user
should press Hold at step 3, then dial the desired station, and press Transfer to complete the
transfer.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features

Issue 2.0

Method A Tandem Trunking from Conference:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

If the default service code (#8) for Tandem digits
Trunking is not acceptable, change the code as
required.
14-01-04 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Gain 1 ~ 57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 32 (0dB)
Select the Transmit CODEC gain level used by
the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised
Conference.
14-01-05 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Gain 1 ~ 57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 16 (-8dB)
Select the Receive CODEC gain level used by
Conference.

Transfer 1 = Enable
For each trunk that should be able to participate

in a tandem call, enter 1.

(Optional) Assign a function key for Transfer 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming

752 by default)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1
20-07-11 Class of Service Options (Administrator 0 = Off COS 1~14 = 0

trunk only)
extension to disconnect an unsupervised
conference in progress.

Restriction

is not possible.

on Hang Up
tandem call automatically when they hang up.

Service) Restricted Unsupervised 1 = Deny
Conference
Allow/Deny an extension user ability to initiate
an unsupervised conference.

Turn Off or On extension user ability to initiate a

conference or Meet Me Conference.

Enable the extension Barge-In Mode to be

speech or Monitor mode.

Trunking).
When this time expires, a warning tone is

heard. If Program 24-02-10 is set, the
conversation disconnects after time expires.
This time is set again when the external digit
time expires. One of the trunks used must be
an analog trunk (or leased line).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Trunk-to-Trunk
This timer starts after the Trunk-to-Trunk

warning tone is heard.
25-07-07 System Timers for VRS/DISA Ling 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3600

Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk-
to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)


tone is heard.
Method B Tandem Trunking with Transfer Key:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Conference.
Conference.

Transfer 1 = Enable
For each trunk, enter 1 to enable loop

supervision.

Assign a function key for Transfer (code 06). 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

trunk only)
extension user to disconnect an Unsupervised

Restriction

is not possible.

on Hang Up



Trunking).


Trunk-to-Trunk






Issue 2.0
Method C Tandem Trunking on Hang up:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Conference.
Conference.

Transfer 1 = Enable

supervision.

extension port =
Class 1

trunk only)

is not possible.

Restriction

is not possible.

on Hang Up

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Trunking).


Trunk-to-Trunk





(such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call
after the Long Conversation tone is heard.
Method D Tandem Trunking to Speed Dial Number:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

If the default service code (733) for enabling

Automatic Tandem Trunking feature is not
acceptable, change the code as required.

If the default service code (734) for canceling

Automatic Tandem Trunking feature is not
acceptable, change the code as required.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

If the default service code (735) for setting the
destination of the Automatic Tandem Trunking
feature is not acceptable, change the code as
required.
Dialing Data (1 ~ 9, 0, , #
Enter the number and name for the bins used to Pause (Press line key 1)
hold the Automatic Tandem Trunking Recall/Flash (Press line key 2)
destination. @ = Code to wait for answer
key 3)
13-04-02 Speed Dialing Number and Name Name Maximum of 12 characters No Setting
Assign a name to each System Speed Dial bin. (Use dial pad to enter name).

Assign the transfer mode for each System

2 = Incoming Ring Group (IRG)
Speed Dial bin.
13-04-04 Speed Dialing Number and Name Transfer Maximum of 24 characters No Setting
Destination Number If Transfer mode is (Refer to
Store transfer destination number data in the 13-04-03):
Speed Dialing areas. 1 = Internal Dial Mode
1 ~ 9, 0, , #, P, R, @


Store incoming ring pattern data in the Speed 1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1 ~ 4)
Dialing areas. 5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern (1 ~ 5)
10 ~ 13 = Tone Pattern (5 ~ 8)
Conference.
Conference.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Transfer 1 = Enable

supervision.

extension port =
Class 1


trunk only) COS 1~14 = 0
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use COS 15 = 1


Trunking).


Trunk-to-Trunk

24-04-01 Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Trunks: 1 ~ 400 9999

Setup 0 ~ 9999
Assign the Speed Dialing number (0 ~ 9999) to
be used as the destination for the
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Trunk Disconnect Continue/Disconnect Codes:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-25 Basic Trunk Data Setup Continued/ 0 = Disable 0

Discontinued Trunk-to-Trunk Conversation 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable the ability to dial a service code
to continue or disconnect the trunk-to-trunk
conversation after the alert tone is heard.

Continue Code
Input the code that can be dialed to continue
the conversation after the Trunk-to-Trunk
Release Warning tone is heard.

Disconnect Code
Input the code that can be dialed to disconnect
Release Warning tone is heard.

Continue Time
Input the time the conversation extends when

the Conversation Continue Code is dialed.

Transfer/Tandem Trunking). When this time
expires, a warning tone is heard. If Program
24-02-10 is set, the conversation disconnects
after time expires. This time is set again when
the external digit timer expires. One of the
trunks used must be an analog trunk (or leased
line).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Trunk-to-Trunk
Determine the time a conversation continues
after the timer in Program 24-02-07 expires. If
this option is set to 0, the conversation is
disconnected immediately. This program has
no affect if Program 24-02-07 is set to 0. One of
the trunks used must be an analog trunk (or
leased line).




(such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call
after the Long Conversation tone is heard.

(35) Programming
Edit the warning service tone in the system. 0 = No Tone
Manual for

33 = Default Time Slot
default values.
Operation
Method A Tandem Trunking from Conference
To set up a Tandem Call:

1. Place or answer first trunk call.
2. Press Conf softkey.
3. Place or answer second trunk call.
4. To set up the tandem call, press Conf twice.
This sets up a Conference between you and both outside parties.
5. Press Transfer.
- OR -
Press Hold and dial #8 or the service code set for Unsupervised Conference/Tandem Trunking in
Program 11-12-57.
The line keys for the trunks blink green as long as the Unsupervised Conference continues.

Issue 2.0
To end the Tandem Call:

1. Press either flashing line key.
The line keys light steadily (green). You can listen (i.e., monitor) to the call or rejoin the conversation,
based on the setting in Program 20-13-10.
If Program 20-13-10 is set to 0, the Conference ends and the line keys go out.
If Program 20-13-10 is set to 1, to manually disconnect the Conference, Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e.,
Press the line key + 3 or the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in Program 11-10-26) must
be used by an extension other than the originating extension.
Method B Tandem Trunking with Transfer Key
Multiline Terminal:

2. Press Hold to place the first trunk call on hold.
3. Place a second trunk call.
4. Press Transfer.
This sets up an Unsupervised Conference with both outside parties.
The line keys for the trunks light solid red.
To disconnect the Conference, use Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press the line key + 3 or the service
code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in Program 11-10-26) must be used by an extension other than
the originating extension.
Single Line Telephone:

2. Press hookflash and dial #1.
4. To set up the tandem call, press hookflash and dial #8.
5. Hang up.
This sets up a Conference between both outside parties.

Issue 2.0
Method C Tandem Trunking on Hang up
Multiline Terminal:

2. Press Hold to place the first trunk call on hold.
3. Place a second trunk call.
4. Hang up.
This sets up an Unsupervised Conference with both outside parties.
The line keys for the trunks light solid red.
To disconnect the Conference, use Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press line key + 3 or the service
code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in Program 11-10-26).
Single Line Telephone:

2. Press hookflash.
4. To set up the tandem call, hang up.
This sets up a Conference between both outside parties.
To disconnect the Conference, use Forced Trunk Disconnect [i.e., Dial the trunk access code (#9 +
trunk number) + 3 or the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in Program 11-10-26].
Method D Automatic Tandem Trunking Using Speed Dialing
To set Automatic Tandem Trunking:

1. Dial service code 733 (or the service code set for Set Automatic Transfer per Trunk).
2. Dial the desired trunk number (Trunk Number: 001~400).
3. Hang up.
The line key for the trunk is solid red as long as the Unsupervised Conference continues.
To disconnect the Conference, use Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press the line key or #9 plus the trunk
number + 3).
To cancel Automatic Tandem Trunking:

1. Dial service code 734 (or the service code set for Disable Automatic Transfer per Trunk).

Issue 2.0
3. Hang up.
To disconnect the Conference, Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press the line key or #9 plus the trunk
number + 3 or the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in Program 11-10-26).
To set and change the destination of the Automatic Tandem Trunk call:
1. Dial service code 735 (or the service code set for Set Destination for Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer).
3. Dial the desired time mode (Time Mode: 1~8).
4. Dial the destination Number (trunk access code is not needed).
5. Press Hold.
6. Hang up.
To disconnect the Conference, use Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press the line key or #9 plus the trunk
number + 3).
Continue/Disconnect Codes
To use the Continue code to extend a Tandem Trunk call:

1. An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or
by DISA caller.
2. After the programmed time (Program 24-02-07), a warning tone is heard and the user dials the
Continue code (Program 20-28-01) to extend the conversation.
3. After the programmed time (Program 20-28-03), the warning tone is heard again. After the
programmed time (Program 24-02-10), the call is disconnected.

Issue 2.0
TAPI Compatibility
Description
The system has Telephony Applications Programming Interface (TAPI) compatibility that provides:
Reduced TAPI Feature Set (see the Supported TAPI Commands chart below)
Caller ID data to the PC for data base lookups and screen pops (see the Caller ID Data chart
below)
Telephone control (Off-Hook, On-Hook and dialing)
The 1st-Party TAPI Ethernet Driver provides an interface that allows the user personalized control of the
telephone system from a desktop or laptop PC when used in conjunction with a TAPI-compliant
application. The telephone system and PC are connected by installing an adapter on the telephone
multiline terminal, allowing the PC user to access sophisticated communications services via the
telephone lines.
Conditions
UC Desktop Suite does not support the Cordless DTL-8R-1 terminal.
The Override function for IP multiline terminals and Softphones is supported.
The Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH) is not a supported terminal when using 1st-Party
CTI, 3rd-Party CTI, or with the Desktop Suite.
A maximum of 256 1st-Party CTI over Ethernet connections is supported. Any Desktop
Application connection takes away from the 256 maximum connections.
Caller ID and Call status are available from the TAPI interface functions.
Only one 3rd-Party CTI connection to the SV9100 is supported.
Refer to Table 2-120 TAPI Commands for a list of supported TAPI commands.
The TAPI Compatibility feature does not support CAP keys 4000~9999. Only 0001~3999
can be supported.
DID name information of analogue trunk type will not be sent by TSP.
SOAI and 3rd Party CTI can be used at the same time in the system.
Table 2-120 TAPI Commands
lineAddProvider lineAnswer
lineConfigDialog lineBlindTransfer
lineGetAddressCaps lineCompleteCall
lineGetDevCaps lineCompleteTransfer
2-1454 TAPI Compatibility

Issue 2.0
Table 2-120 TAPI Commands (Continued)
lineGetDevConfig lineDevSpecific
lineGetIcon lineDial
lineGetID lineDrop
lineInitializeEx lineForward
lineNegotiateAPIVersion lineHold
lineNegotiateExtVersion lineMakeCall
lineRemoveProvider linePark
lineSetDevConfig linePickup
lineShutdown linePrepareAddToConference
lineClose lineRedirect
lineDeallocateCall lineRemoveFromConference
lineGetAddressStatus lineSetupConference
lineGetCallInfo lineSetupTransfer
lineGetCallStatus lineSwapHold
lineGetLineDevStatus lineUncompleteCall
lineOpen lineUnhold
lineSetAppSpecific lineUnpark
lineSetLineDevStatus lineGatherDigits
lineSetMediaMode lineGenerateDigits
lineSetStatusMessages lineGenerateTone
lineMonitorDigits
When SOAI (Simplified OAI, used by DT Plusware) and 3rd Party TAPI (i.e. Desktop
Applications Shared Services) are used in the same system, the following limitations apply
to only the SOAI application.
Multiple Call Handling (Operator Terminal, Call Queuing, etc.) is not supported for extensions
controlled by SOAI.
SOAI controlled extensions cannot be the destination for Call Forward Both Ring or Tandem
Ringing.
SOAI controlled extensions cannot have direct CO line keys (752: *01).
SOAI controlled extensions do not support Park Holding.
SOAI controlled extensions cannot be used with the Mobile Extension feature.
CCIS Link Reconnect is not supported when SOAI and 3rd Party TAPI are used in the same
system.
TAPI Compatibility 2-1455

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
SV9100 Multiline Terminals and SV9100 SIP Multiline Terminals
GCD-CP10 should have LAN connection ability
Compatible system software version
PC Driver for the 1st-Party TAPI over Ethernet (CTE): PC running Windows XP 32-bit, or
Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit or Windows 8 32-bit and 64-bit.
PC Driver for 3rd Party TAPI: PC Running Windows Server 2003 32-bit, Windows 2008
32-bit, Windows 2008 R2 64-bit, or Windows 2012 64-bit.
A TAPI compatible Windows application
Related Features
Headset Operation


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
If the network section is: |255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
0,
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
127, |255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
128.0, |255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
191.255, |255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
192.0.0, |255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
223.255.255
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.
Port 1 (CTI) = 0
Define the TCP port/address/etc. for External Device
communicating to external equipment. 2 ( MIS) = 4000
External Device
5 (SMDR
Output) = 0
External Device
6 (DIM Output) =
0
External Device
11 (O&M Server)
= 8010
External Device
12 (Traffic
Report Output) =
0
External Device
13 (Room Data
Output for Hotel
Service ) = 0
TAPI Compatibility 2-1457

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
93-06-01 IP Address List IP Address of 1st Party CTI IP Address:

Client xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx No Setting
Read only.
Indicates IP Address of 1st Party CTI client.
93-06-02 IP Address List Availability of 1st Party 0 = Not Available

CTI Connection 1 = Available
Read only. No Setting
Indicates Availability of 1st Party CTI client
connection.
Operation
TAPI operation is automatic once programmed in the telephone system and enabled in the PC TAPI
application, unless a headset is used.
Using the Headset with Automatic Answer:

1. With the multiline terminal in an idle state, press the Help key.
2. Press the Headset key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 05) twice.
3. Press the Exit key to return the display to idle.
To redirect calls to the headset and disable the hookswitch (required for some TAPI features):
1. With the multiline terminal in an idle state, press the Help key.
2. Press the Headset key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 05) twice.
3. Press the Exit key to return the display to idle.
4. Press the Headset key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 05) to go off-hook.

Issue 2.0
Tone Override
Description
The multiline terminal user that calls a busy station and receives a call waiting tone can generate a Tone
Override that is heard by the originator and busy station. The busy station user can place the existing
call on hold to answer the Override.
Conditions
One Tone Override at a time can be received at a multiline terminal.
Tone Override can be accomplished only after receiving a BUSY tone.
Tone Override originate is allowed from a single line telephone until the PBR times out.
Virtual Extensions do not support Tone Override.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Data Line Security
Tone Override 2-1459

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Assign the service code used for off-hook digits

Signaling Override.
11-16-04 Single Digit Service Code Setup Intercom 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit
Off-Hook Signaling
Assign the one-digit service code used for

off-hook Signaling.
15-02-12 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Muted Off-Hook Ringing 5

Off-Hook Ringing 1 = No Off-Hook Ringing
Set the telephone off-hook signaling that 2 = Not Used
occurs when a telephone user receives a
second call while busy on a handset call. To
enable or disable off-hook signaling for an
extension Class of Service, use Program 5 = Speaker & Handset Beep
20-13-06.

Assign a function key for off-hook Signaling 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1
2-1460 Tone Override

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

E&M Override
caller.

is busy.

off-hook signals.



co-worker.



Waiting Tone
Set the time between off-hook signaling alerts.
Tone Override 2-1461

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(39) Customize the service tones in the system. 31 Service Tone
Setup Defaults,
Tone Override is tone 39.
Program

80-01-01 on
page 2-568.
80-01-02 Service Tone Setup Ring Busy Tone Refer to Table 2-

(39) Define Ring Busy Tone. 32 Service Tone
Setup, Program
80-01-02 on
page 2-572.
Operation
To send Off-Hook signals to an extension busy on a call:
Your extension may send Off-Hook signals automatically.

NOTE
1. Dial (Program11-16-04).
- OR -
Dial 709 (Program 11-12-02).

- OR -
Press the Off-Hook Signaling key (Program 15-07-01 code 33).

You hear Ring Busy Tone.
The called extension hears Call Alert Notification.
To answer Tone Override:

1. Receive Tone Override.
2. Press Hold and talk with the party.
2-1462 Tone Override

Issue 2.0
Traffic Reports
Description
The system can send data to a PC connected to the UNIVERGE SV9100. The telephone call traffic data
for each extension is captured for use with the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature.
Call Traffic
The total of outgoing call frequency, outgoing call duration, incoming call frequency, answer frequency,
incoming call duration, ringing duration for each line and extension, and abandon call frequency for each
line is logged. The total of incoming calls, answer frequency, call duration for each line and extension,
and abandon call frequency of each line is logged and the data is outputted to the PC. The system totals
the hour, day, week, and month for each terminal and trunk number. This information is used by the
SMDR feature. The extension which is totaled is determined by system programming. The system
outputs this data to the PC for the total period.
Conditions
The SMDR call buffer stores 4000 calls. The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is
unavailable. When the buffer fills, the oldest record is deleted to allow the new record to be
saved.
If connected to the output device, the reports print hourly. If not connected and the data is
not output at the end of the hour, the traffic data is overwritten by new incoming data.
The traffic data is lost if power failure occurs.
Additional programming is required. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware
Manual for more on setting up and connecting to the UNIVERGE SV9100 system.
SMDR provides additional information about the system trunk calling patterns. Refer to
Station Message Detail Recording on page 2-1323 for more information.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Traffic Reports 2-1463

Issue 2.0
Software Licenses for SMDR
Traffic Total Report Sample Report
Terminal OTG Duration Cost ICM Answer Duration Ringing Abandon
301 54 01:45:14 720 326 115 02:11:52 00:09:36
301 92 02:37:22 1855 84 84 01:58:31 00:04:19
LINE001 -- -- -- 79 71 01:05:26 -- 8
Term Definition
Terminal Terminal Number/Called Party Number (maximum 24 digits)
OTG Outgoing Call Frequency/number of outgoing calls (maximum 65535 calls)
Duration Call Duration for an Outgoing Call
Cost Call Charge (Not Used)
ICM Incoming Call Frequency/number of incoming calls (maximum 65535 calls)
Answer Answer Frequency (maximum 65535 calls)
Duration Call Duration for an Incoming Call
Ringing Ringing Duration
Abandon Number of Abandoned Calls (maximum 65535 calls)
Related Features
2-1464 Traffic Reports

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
10-20-12 LAN Setup for External Equipment TCP 0 ~ 65535 Refer to the
Port Programming
Manual for ?
Define the TCP port/address/etc. for
communicating to external equipment. default values.
90-20-01 Traffic Report Data Setup Call Traffic 0 = Not Measured 0

Output 1 = Measure
Determine whether or not the Call Traffic

Output should be measured.
90-21-01 Traffic Report Output Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

Define the output port to be used for the traffic 3 = LAN Port GCD-CP10
reports. The reports print hourly when

connected to the output device.
Operation
None
Traffic Reports 2-1465

Issue 2.0
Transfer
Description
Transfer permits an extension user to send an active Intercom or outside call to any other extension in
the system. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a call to the desired co-worker. A call a
user transfers, automatically recalls if not picked up at the destination extension. This assures that users
do not lose or inadvertently abandon their transfers. While a transferred call is ringing an extension the
system can optionally play ringback tone or Music on Hold to the caller.
The system allows the following types of transfers:

Screened Transfer
The transferring user announces the call to the destination before hanging up.
Unscreened Transfer
The transferring party extends the call without an announcement.
Extension (Department) Groups Transfer
The Transferring party sends the call to a Department instead of an extension.
Transfer Without Holding
A user presses a busy line key or the same (busy) CAP key and waits for the call to complete. The
system automatically sends them the call when the internal caller hangs up.
Automatic On-Hook Transfer Operation
With Automatic On-Hook Transfer, a transfer goes through as soon as the transferring user hangs up.
For example, extension 104 can answer a trunk, press Transfer, dial 105 and hang up. The system
extends the call to extension 105. Without Automatic On-Hook Transfer, the call would stay on Hold at
extension 104 when the user hangs up. To extend the call, the user at extension 104 would have to
press the Transfer key again before hanging up.
Each method has advantages. Automatic On-Hook Transfer makes transferring calls easier. However,
users have to be more aware of how they handle their calls on Hold. Without Automatic On-Hook
Transfer, extending a call becomes a two-step operation but separate from placing calls on Hold.
Prevent Recall of Transferred Call
The Class of Service program allows you to prevent a Transferred call from recalling the originating
extension if the call is not answered.
Transfer Call into Conference/Existing Call
This feature allows either a multiline terminal or single line telephone user with Barge-In ability to transfer
a call into an existing call. This call can be a 2-party call, a Conference call, or a Barge-In Conference.
The system allows Intercom and trunk calls to be transferred into a Conference call. This allows, for
example, an attendant to locate co-workers and then transfer them into an existing telephone meeting.
There is no need for the attendant to locate all the parties at the same time and sequentially add them
into the Conference.
2-1466 Transfer
Issue 2.0
Transfer to Trunk Ring Group Available
It is possible to transfer a trunk call to the trunk defined ring group (defined in Program 22-05-01:
Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment). The trunk then rings the defined extensions for the ring group.
This also allows the transferred call to ring over the External Paging (Program 31-05: Universal Night
Answer/Ring Over Page) so that an employee can answer the call from any available telephone.
To enable this feature, the system has a program option, Program 11-15-09: Service Code Setup
Administrative (for Special Access) Transfer to Trunk Ring Group Code (not assigned at default).
When a call is transferred using this service code, it is transferred to the ring group destination for that
incoming trunk. For example, trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4. When the call is transferred using this service
code, the trunk rings all extensions programmed for Ring Group 4 or rings the External Paging Group for
Ring Group 4, depending on how the system is programmed.
Program 22-04-01: Extension Ring Group Assignment and Program 22-05-01: Incoming Trunk Ring
Group Assignment must be programmed to allow an extension access to the ring groups. If the call is not
answered, it can overflow to the destination defined in Program 22-08-01: DIL/IRG No Answer
Destination.
This service code can also be used with the VRS. This provides the caller listening to the VRS message
with the ability to transfer their call and have it ring the external page. The code the caller would dial is
defined in Program 25-06-02: VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup.
Transfer Key Can Place Call on Hold
While on a call, press Transfer to place the call on hold.
Conditions
An existing call can be transferred into a call with Barge-In enabled.
Unscreened Transfers from voice mail show pre-answer Caller ID information.
With Transfer to Busy Extensions enabled (Program 24-02-01 = 1), Call Forwarding with
Both Ringing offers a unique option. A transferred call waits for either the forwarding or
destination extension to become free. The call goes through to the extension that first
becomes available. If neither extension becomes free in the Transfer Recall Time, the call
recalls the transferring extension.
With Transfer to Busy Extensions disabled (Program 24-02-02 = 0), you must also set Program
20-09-07 for the extensions COS to 0 to disable call queuing and Program 20-13-06 to set
Automatic Off-hook Signaling to manual.
An existing call can be transferred into a conference call.
Meet Me Paging Transfer allows the user to page a co-worker and have the call
automatically transferred when the co-worker answers the page.
When transferring, an extension user can press a One-Touch key instead of dialing the
extension number.
Transfer 2-1467
Issue 2.0
Serial call allows transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension
when completed.
station with a DSS key.
When a multiline terminal user is on a call, they must press transfer to transfer a call off-site
with a DSS key.
The following features require certain tones be changed in Program 80-01-02. Refer to the
table in the InMail on page 2-619 feature programming section for settings:
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
Call Screening
A Trunk-to-Trunk transfer can be established by the following operation:

1. While talking to an outside party, press Hold.
2. Access a second outside line and dial the desired number.
3. Press Transfer to complete the Trunk-to-Trunk transfer.
When the second call is to be transferred to another station (Not Trunk-to-Trunk), the user
should press Hold at step 3, then dial the desired station and press Transfer to complete the
transfer.
If station A calls Station B, and station A puts station B on hold and then calls station C,
station C cannot transfer the call.
When transfer recall is disabled, unanswered transferred calls to a Virtual Extension or
Virtual Loopback port will always recall once the transfer recall timer expires.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
2-1468 Transfer
Issue 2.0
Related Features
Barge-In
Caller ID
Call Forwarding
Conference
One-Touch Calling
Serial Call

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Transfer into Conference 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign the code a user dials to Transfer a call digits
into a Conference call. This code is normally
624.
11-15-09 Service Code Setup Administrative (for No Setting

Special Access) Transfer to Incoming Ring
Group
When a call is transferred using this service
code, it is transferred to the ring group
destination for that incoming trunk. For
example, trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4. When the

call is transferred using this service code, the
trunk rings all extensions programmed for Ring
Group 4 or ring the External Paging Group for
Ring Group 4, depending on how the system is
programmed.
Transfer 2-1469
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the operating mode of the extension Conf
key. The keys can be for Call Transfer, Serial
2 = Flash
Calling or Flash. When selecting 2, refer also to
Program 81-01-14.
15-02-24 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Conference 0

Conference Key Mode 1 = Transfer
Program an extension Conf key for Conference
or Transfer. When set for Transfer, the user
places a call on hold, dials the extension to
which it should be transferred, then presses

Conf. The call is then transferred. When set for
Conference, with an active call, the user can
press Conf, place a second call, then press
Conf twice. All the calls are then connected.

Extension users may want a function keys 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
programmed for Transfer (code 06). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)
20-02-04 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = Not Holding (No Keep) 1
Retrieve the Line After Transfer 1 = Holding (Keep)
answer a call after it is transferred, but before it
is answered.

telephones, set the mode used to answer a

extension port =
Class 1

is busy.

Inward Transfer)
2-1470 Transfer
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3



Turn Off or On an extension ability for incoming

Transfer preanswer display.



No Recall set to 1 does not stop transferred

calls from recalling from a virtual extension.


receive callbacks.


Enable extension Barge-In as Speech or
Monitor mode (i.e., Barge-In initiator). This is
required to transfer a call to a conference.




other extensions Barge-In on calls.

Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In Tone. If set to 1,
callers hear an alert tone and their display

indicates the Barge-In when another extension
barges into their conversation. If set to 0, there
is no alert tone or display indication.
Transfer 2-1471
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Allow/Deny an extension user ability to have

multiple users Barge-In to their conversation.
20-14-11 Class of Service Options For DISA/E&M 0 = Off COS 1 ~ 15 = 0

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk user ability

to use Barge-In.

Repeat Time
After a call is interrupted (such as Barge-In,
Voice Mail Conversation Recording or Voice

Over) the system repeats the Intrusion tone
after this time. Normally, you should enter 0.


after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are

Ring Group 1

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

Define a trunk ring group. When transferring a Incoming Group Number for
DID or trunk call to the trunk defined ring group, Day/Night Mode (1 ~ 8):
the trunk then rings the defined extensions for 0 = (No Setting)
the ring group. 001 ~ 100 = (Incoming Group)

Mail or InMail)

Assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group where 001 ~ 100
an unanswered call should overflow. (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or InMail)
103 (Centralized VM)
2-1472 Transfer
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
24-02-01 System Options for Transfer Busy 0 = Disable (No) 1

Transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled,

calls transferred to busy extensions recall
immediately.

Enable (0)/Disable (1) MOH on Transfer. If
enabled, a transferred caller hears Music on
Hold while their call rings the destination
extension. If disabled, a transferred caller hears

ringback while their call rings the destination
extension. For this option to work with voice
mail, the transferred call must be an
unscreened transfer.

Forwarding Time
Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets
the time a Transferred call waits at an extension
forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the
called extension mailbox.
24-02-04 System Options for Transfer Transfer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30

Recall Time
Set the Transfer Recall Time. An unanswered
transferred call recalls to the extension that
initially transferred it after this time.

Ring Interval Time
between intermittent ringing. If this value is 0,
the system rings once.

A release transfer to a busy Department Group
only follows this time if the Department Group is set
to 0 = No Queue in Program 16-01-10, if set to 1, 2
or 3 it follows the time in Program 24-02-04.
Transfer 2-1473
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set up single digit dialing through the VRS. This 104 = Refer to 25-04: VRS/DISA
gives VRS callers single-key access to Transfer Ring Group with No
extensions, the company operator, Department Answer/ Busy
Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS 105 = Dial the other extension
message set to answer outside calls (see
106 = Record VRS
Program 25-02 and Program 25-05), you
specify:
The digit the VRS caller dials (0 ~ 9, , #).
(Keep in mind that if you assign destinations
to digits, outside callers cannot dial system
extensions, starting with that digit.
The destination reached (eight digits
maximum) when the caller dials the
specified digit.
The destination can be an extension, a
Department Calling pilot number or the Voice
Mail master number. A one-digit code can be
assigned for each Automated Attendant
message.
25-06-02 VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup Maximum of eight digits. No Setting
Destination Number
Define the digit used by a VRS caller which
allows their call to be transferred to the external
page.
31-05-01 Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page 0 = No Ringing (No) 0

For each trunk which should ring the external 1 = Ringing (Yes)
page, set the External Page zone (1 ~ 9) to

allow ringing.
Operation
Transferring Trunk Calls
To Transfer a trunk call to a co-workers extension:

1. At the multiline terminal, press Transfer.
- OR -
At 500/2500 single line telephone, hookflash.

You hear Transfer dial tone.
2-1474 Transfer
Issue 2.0
2. Dial the co-workers extension number.

If the extension is busy or does not answer, you can dial another extension number or press the line key
to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp-On.
Single line telephone users can press hookflash to retrieve the call. If a call was transferred and the
500/2500 user has hung up the handset, the unanswered call can be retrieved by dialing and the
extension number to which it had been transferred.
3. Announce the call and press Transfer (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 06) or hang up.
If you do not have Automatic On-Hook Transfer, you must press Conf (Program 15-02-24=1) or your
Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call.
If your co-worker does not want the call, press the flashing line key to return to the call.
500/2500 user has hung up the handset, only the unanswered call be can retrieved by dialing and
the extension number to which it had been transferred.
If you do not want to screen the call, hang up without making an announcement.
To answer a call transferred to your extension:

1. Lift the handset or press Speaker when a co-worker announces the call.
Transferring without Holding
To Transfer without holding (multiline terminal only):

2. Press busy line or press Speaker.
3. When original caller hangs up, you are connected.
Transferring Intercom Calls
To Transfer your Intercom call:

1. At the multiline terminal, press Hold.
- OR -
At single line telephone, hookflash.

2. Dial extension to receive your call.
If the extension is busy, does not answer or does not want the call, you can dial another extension
number or press the lit line key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have
the call Camp-On.
500/2500 user has hung up the handset, only the unanswered call can be retrieved by dialing and
the extension number to which it transferred.
Transfer 2-1475
Issue 2.0
3. Announce your call and press Transfer (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 06) or hang up.
With Automatic On-Hook Transfer
When you hang up, the call is automatically transferred.
Without Automatic On-Hook Transfer
You must press your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call.
To Transfer the call unscreened, press your Transfer Programmable Function Key and hang up
without making an announcement.
Transferring a Call Into a Conference/Existing Call

1. While on a call, press Transfer and dial service code 624.
The display shows the Transfer to Conf. ICM Dial.
2. Enter the extension number of the co-worker currently on a Conference call to which the call
should be transferred.
To cancel the transfer, press the flashing line key to retrieve the call.
If an error tone is heard, Barge-In is not enabled for the extension and the call does not go through.
Press the flashing line key to retrieve the call or hang up, and the call recalls the extension.
3. The transferred call is incorporated into the conference call.
The callers hear the Barge-In tone if enabled in Program 20-13-17.
If a call is transferred into a Barge-In Conference (an existing 2-party call into which an extension
user has used the Barge-In feature to join), the Conference becomes a regular 4-party Conference call.
4. Hang up.
Transferring a Call to a Trunk Ring Group:

1. While on a call, press Transfer.
2. Dial the Transfer to Ring Group service code defined in Program 11-15-09.
You hear confirmation tone.
3. Hang up.
The call is transferred to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22-05-01 and all assigned
extensions in the group (Program 22-04-01) ring or it rings the External Paging, enabling anyone to
answer the call.
Transferring an Intercom or Trunk Call using a DSS/One-Touch Key:

1. While on a call, press the DSS/One-Touch key.
2. Announce the call or hang up.
2-1476 Transfer
Issue 2.0
Trunk Groups
Description
Trunk Groups let you optimize trunk usage for incoming and outgoing calls. Each group can be accessed
by an Access Code plus the group number. There are 100 available Trunk Groups and you set the
access order in trunk group programming. Using Call Appearance (CAP) Keys give an extension user
more available function keys, since the user does not need a separate line key for each trunk.
Like Trunk Group Routing, Trunk Groups help you minimize the expense of toll calls. For example, if
your system has outbound WATS lines, OCC lines and DDD lines, program the trunk group to route to
the WATS lines first.
Priority Type of Trunk
1 WATS
2 OCC
3 DDD
Conditions
Unless a user preselects a trunk, Trunk Group programming selects the trunk Speed
Dialing used for trunk calls.
If a user dials a number that is not programmed in ARS, the system can route the call to a
trunk group.
All DID trunks of the same type should be placed in the same trunk group. These trunk
groups must then be assigned to a DID Translation Table.
Trunks ring extensions according to Ring Group programming.
Default Settings
All trunks are in group 1.
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Trunk Groups 2-1477

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Dial Tone Detection
Ring Groups
Trunk Group Routing

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Allocate the circuits on the GCD-CP10 for 1 = Extension Only 01 ~ 08 = 1
either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09 ~ 32 = 2
(Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33 ~ 144 = 0
(Common)
When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available
2-1478 Trunk Groups

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
If the service code for Trunk Group Access (704 digits
by default) is not acceptable, change it as
necessary.

Enable/Disable the system ability to skip over a
trunk if dial tone is not detected. This pertains to
calls using Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number
Redial, or Save Number Dialed. It does not
pertain to line keys or Direct Trunk Access calls.
to trunk group 1
with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
1001 ~ 1100: (1000 + Route 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not
All Other Routes
(2 ~ 100) and
Order Numbers
(1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not
Specified).
Assign trunks to Access Maps. 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
(incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold
Assign Access Maps to extensions.

Trunk Groups 2-1479

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign function keys for trunk group access 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 02 + group) or Call Appearance (CAP) 751 by default) Manual for
Keys (code 08 + CAP Key orbit 0001 ~ 9999
(or 0000 for auto assign). Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-02-02 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = Outgoing / Incoming 0

Trunk Group Access Key Operating Mode 1 = Outgoing
Set the operating mode of the extension trunk

2 = Incoming
group keys.
20-29-01 Timer Class for Extension Day/Night Mode 0 ~ 15 0

1~8, Class Number 0 = Not assigned
Assign the timer class to each extension. There
are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make
eight entries for this Program, one for each
Night Service Mode. This entry includes virtual
extension numbers.
20-31-04 Timer Class Timer Assignment Intercom 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Interdigits Time (Intercom I/D Timer)

must dial each digit in this time.


must dial each digit in this time.

Disconnect Time When Dial Tone Not
Detected
If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system skips over a
pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial, ARS,
Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed. It
does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk
Access calls.
Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:

1. At the multiline telephone, press Speaker.
- OR -

2. Dial 704.
3. Dial trunk group number (1~9 or 001~100).
2-1480 Trunk Groups

Issue 2.0
4. Dial number.
- OR -
1. Press the Trunk Group key (Program 15-07 or SC 752: 02 + group).

2. Dial the number.
To answer an incoming trunk group call:

2. Press the flashing Trunk Group key.
Trunk Groups 2-1481

Issue 2.0
Trunk Group Routing
Description
Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk Group Routing code
(9) for trunk calls. Trunk Group Routing routes calls in the order specified by system programming. If a
user dials 9 and all trunks in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group.
When you are setting up your system, Trunk Group Routing helps you minimize the expense of toll calls.
For example, if your system has outbound WATS lines, OCC lines and DDD lines, use Trunk Group
Routing to route calls to the WATS lines first.
There are 100 available Trunk Groups and 100 Routes.
WATS OCC DDD

Outbound Least Expensive Moderately Most Expensive
Expensive
First Choice Second Choice Third Choice
Conditions
DISA (Program 25-10) and Tie Lines (Program 34-03) have separate Trunk Group Routing
programs.
The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming (Program 14-06) when setting up
Ringing Line Preference.
Use trunk group programming to set the order in which users access trunks within a specific
trunk group.
Dialing 9 activates ARS, overriding trunk group routing if ARS service is turned on.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise is not supported when using Alternate Trunk Group Routing.
Default Settings
Enabled (All trunks are in Group 1)
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
2-1482 Trunk Group Routing

Issue 2.0
None
Related Features
Dial Tone Detection
Trunk Groups

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-01-01 System Numbering Service Code Set up a Service Code for Refer to the
Alternate Trunk Route Access. Programming
Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk
Route Access. Manual for

default values.
11-09-01 Trunk Access Code Trunk Access Code Dial (maximum of four digits) 9
Access Code (normally 9). This is the code
extension users dial to access Automatic Route
Selection. If you change this code, you must
make corresponding changes in Program
11-01.
Trunk Group Routing 2-1483

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Access Code
Define additional trunk access codes. When a

Code, the system routes their call to the.
Alternate Trunk Route.
to trunk group 1
with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
Set the priority order number (1 ~ 4). 101 ~ 150: (100 + Networking (Trunk Group 1)
1001 ~ 1100: (1000 + Route 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not
All Other Routes
(2 ~ 100) and
Order Numbers
(1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not
Specified).
Access Map programming may limit Trunk 2 = Incoming access only Ports 1 ~ 400
Group Routing options. 3 = Access only when trunk on assigned with
(incoming and
outgoing access
when trunk on Hold
and access
access
on Hold
Access Map programming may limit Trunk
Group Routing options.

Assign a function key for Trunk Group Routing 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
access (code 02 + trunk group #). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
21-02-01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Trunk Group Routes: 1 ~ 100 1
Assign the trunk routes to extensions. Day/Night Mode: 1 ~ 8
Route Table Number:
0 ~ 100
(0 = No Setting)
21-15-01 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Trunk Group Routes: 1 ~ 100 0
Extensions 0 ~ 100
Designate the trunk route accessed when a
(0 = No Setting)
Code assigned in Program 11-09-02. Trunk
Group Routing is set up in Program 14-06.

Let an extension user automatically answer 1~8
trunk calls that ring other extensions. When the Route Table Number
user lifts the handset, they automatically 0 ~ 100

answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group
Routing programming (defined in Program
14-06).
25-10-01 Trunk Group Routing for DISA Trunk Group Routes: 1 ~ 100 1
Assign the Trunk Group Route chosen when a Day/Night Mode = 1 ~ 8
user places a DISA call into the system and Route Table Number = 0 ~ 100
dials 9. The Trunk Group Routing is defined in
Program 14-06. If the system has ARS, dialing
(0 = No Setting)
9 accesses ARS. The route chosen is based on
the DISA Class of Service, which is determined
by the password the caller dials.
25-12-01 Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA Trunk Group Routes: 1 ~ 100 1
Define the trunk route selected when a DISA Day/Night Mode = 1 ~ 8
caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code Route Table Number = 0 ~ 100
assigned in Program 11-09-02. The route
selected is based on the DISA caller Class of
(0 = No Setting)
Service, which is in turn determined by the
password the caller dials. Program 14-06 is
used to set up the Trunk Group Routing.
34-03-01 Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines Trunk Group Routes: 0 ~ 100 1
Assign the Trunk Group Route chosen when a (0 = No Setting)
user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. Set Trunk
Group Routing in Program 14-06. If the system
has ARS, dialing 9 accesses ARS.
Trunk Group Routing 2-1485

Issue 2.0
Operation
To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:

- OR -

2. Dial 9.
3. Dial number.
- OR -
1. At the multiline terminal, press Trunk Group Routing key (Program 15-07 or SC 752: 05).
Also refer to the Call Appearance (CAP) Keys on page 2-132.
2. Dial the number.

Issue 2.0
Description
Trunk Queuing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on-hook for a busy trunk or trunk group
to become free. The system recalls the queued extension as soon as the trunk is available. The user
does not have to manually retry the trunk later. Trunk Queuing lets the caller know when the call can go
through. If the extension user does not answer the Trunk Queuing ring, the system cancels the queue
request.
With Trunk Camp-On, an extension user can queue (wait in line) Off-Hook for a busy trunk or trunk group
to become free. The caller connects to the trunk when the trunk becomes free. As with Trunk Queuing,
the user does not have to manually retry the trunk later.
Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp-On for the same trunk or trunk group.
When a trunk becomes free, the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left.
Conditions
With Automatic Route Selection (ARS), Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least
costly route.
A user can camp-on or leave a callback request for an extension.
Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a call is placed. Check or
program these options as needed (e.g., access line/Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, etc.).
Using a Programmable Function Key can simplify the trunk queuing operation.
Default Settings
Enabled
Related Features
Callback
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On 2-1487

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Customize the Service Code used for setting digits

Camp-On.
Customize the Service Code, used for digits

cancelling Camp-On.
setting Camp-On.

Assign a function key for Trunk Queuing and 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Trunk Camp-On (code 35). 751 by default) Manual for
752 by default)

Time
Set the Trunk Queuing Callback Time. Trunk
time.

Cancel Time
Set the Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time.

extension port =
Class 1


2-1488 Trunk Queuing/Camp-On

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-29-01 Timer Class for Extensions 0 ~ 15 0

Assign the timer class (0 ~ 15) to each 0 = Not assigned
extension for each Night mode. This entry

includes virtual extension number.

Queuing Callback Duration Time
Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for

this time.
20-31-02 Timer Class Timer Assignment Callback / 0 ~ 64800 seconds 64800

Trunk Queuing Cancel Time

21-01-18 System Options for Outgoing Calls Reset 0 = Enable 1

Dial After Failure of Trunk Access 1 = Disable

receiving Trunk Busy. This must be set to 0 for
the Forced Trunk Disconnect feature to work.
Operation
To queue for a busy trunk:

1. Try to access the busy trunk.
2. Dial # or 750.
- OR -
Press Trunk Queuing/Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).

3. Hang up to leave a Trunk Queuing request.
- OR -
Wait Off-Hook to Camp-On to the trunk.
To answer when Trunk Queuing calls you back:

To cancel a Trunk Queuing/Camp-On request:

1. At the multiline terminal, press idle Speaker.
- OR -
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On 2-1489

Issue 2.0
2. Dial 770.
3. At the multiline terminal, press Speaker to hang up.
- OR -
2-1490 Trunk Queuing/Camp-On

UM8000 Mail
Description
The UM8000 Mail voice mail system, using the UNIVERGE SV9100 system and a Local Area
Network, provide Unified Messaging services for voice, fax and email messages with access at
U
either the desktop PC or the telephone. Unified Messaging lets the PC control telephone calls
and information about each inbound and outbound call.
Automated Attendant automatically answers the system incoming calls. After listening to a
customized message, an outside caller can dial a system extension or use Voice Mail.
At default the system is programmed to use the built in InMail voice mail. By programming

NOTE
the UM8000 to work in the SV9100 it becomes the primary voice mail.
Integrated Voice Mail enhances the telephone system with the following features:
Expanded Schedules
The UM8000 Mail has three schedules (1-3) and each schedule has an A, B and C option.
It also has 99 custom schedules that are available in addition to the three standard
schedules. Each custom schedule can support a maximum of nine time intervals
These schedules can be applied to Opening Boxes, Transaction Boxes and Voice Detect
Boxes. You can also assign a supported box type to inherit its schedule from the previous
box the call came from or from the voice mail port the call came in on. This flexibility allows
for much more detailed scheduling of different groups within a system. The new Expanded
Schedules provide the following:
A maximum of 99 Custom Schedules.
A maximum of nine time intervals per schedule.
Each schedule can be set to follow or ignore holidays.
The following box types can use custom schedules:

Opening Boxes
Transaction Boxes
Voice Detect Boxes
Boxes can be configured to follow:

One of the three standard schedules.
A particular custom schedule.
Inherit their schedule from the previous box.
Inherit their schedule from the voice mail port the call came in on.
The All hours All Day schedule, this schedule is fixed to Day Mode.
UM8000 Mail 2-1491

Issue 2.0

An extension user can forward their calls to Voice Mail. Once forwarded, calls to the extension
connect to that extension mailbox. The caller can leave a message in the mailbox instead of calling
back later. Forwarding can occur for all calls immediately, for unanswered calls or only when the
extension is busy. When a user transfers a call to an extension forwarded to Voice Mail, the call
waits for the Delayed Call Forwarding time before routing to the called extension mailbox. This
gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the call instead of having it go directly to the
mailbox.
Leaving a Message
Voice Mail lets a multiline terminal extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is
unanswered, busy or in Do Not Disturb. The caller presses their Voice Mail key to leave a message
in the called extension mailbox. There is no need to call back later.
By using Transfer to Voice Mail, a multiline terminal extension user can Transfer a call to their own
mailbox.
Live Record
While on a CO/Trunk call, an extension user can have Voice Mail record the conversation. The
multiline terminal user presses the Voice Mail Record key; the single line telephone user dials a
code. Once recorded, the Voice Messaging System stores the conversation as a new message in
the users mailbox. After calling their mailbox, a user can save, edit or delete the recorded
conversation. The Live Record feature is supported only for External CO/Trunk calls. Internal/
Intercom calls are not supported.
Live Monitor
lets the UM8000 screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the
extension incoming calls route to the users subscriber mailbox. The Live Monitor feature is
supported for external and internal calls. After the mailbox answers, the users phone changes to
show that a caller is leaving a message, no audible tone is provided. The multiline terminal user
can then:
Choose Exit to let the call go through to their mailbox.
Choose ANSW to intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox.
Choose MON to monitor the message being left by the caller.
Voice Mail Overflow

If Voice Mail automatically answers trunks, Voice Mail Overflow can reroute those trunks to other
extensions when all Voice Mail ports do not answer or, with certain software, are busy. During
periods of high traffic, this prevents the outside calls from ringing Voice Mail for an inordinate
amount of time. There are two types of Voice Mail Overflow: Immediate and Delayed. With
immediate overflow, calls immediately reroute to other extensions when all Voice Mail ports do not
answer or, with certain software, are busy. With delayed overflow, calls reroute after a preset
interval. Without any type of overflow, the outside calls ring Voice Mail until a port becomes
available or the outside caller hangs up.
2-1492 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Voice Mail Caller ID

The Voice Mail can use ANI/DNIS information to identify the outside caller that left a message in a
users mailbox. When the message recipient dials 0 or presses the CID softkey while listening to a
message, they hear the outside telephone number of the message sender.
The message recipient can also return the call from their mailbox if allowed by system
programming by pressing the CALL softkey or #,0. Press Speaker to hang up.
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
A station user transferring a call can transfer the call to the called party voice mail box after an
internal station number is dialed while performing a screened transfer, or during intercom calls.
The user simply calls the extension and then dials the quick transfer dial access code (default = 8)
and hangs up. The call is placed in the mailbox and the caller hears the personal greeting.
Voice Mail Queuing
busy, any call trying to get to the voice mail is placed in queue. As the voice mail ports become available,
are handled as though there were no voice mail queuing feature enabled. The calls either access voice
mail if a port is available or they receive a busy signal.
mail installed. When an extension receives a voice mail, the Message key can be used to check the
number of messages in voice mail, or call the voice mail to listen to the messages. If no Voice Mail
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few
letters in the extension users name. With Directory Dialing, the caller does not have to remember the
extension number of the person they wish to reach just their name. Here is how Directory Dialing
works:
1. When the Automated Attendant answers, it sends the call to the Main Greeting box. The caller
must dial a digit to access Directory Dialing.
2. The Directory Dialing Mailbox plays the Directory Dialing Message which asks the caller to dial
letters for the name of the person they wish to reach.
UM8000 Mail 2-1493

Issue 2.0
3. The caller dials the first three letters for the persons name. They can dial by first name or last
name, depending on how the Directory Dialing Message was recorded and the Directory Dialing
Mailbox was set up.
4. Voice Mail searches the list of programmed extension names for a match of the caller-entered
letters.
5. The caller dials the digit for the extension they wish to reach, and Voice Mail sends the call to that
extension. The call is sent as a Screened or Unscreened transfer, depending on programming.
For callers to use Directory Dialing, the system must have a name programmed for each extension.
Each extension should also have a name recorded in their Subscriber Mailbox. In addition, each
extension used by Directory Dialing must be installed.
Optional UM8000 Mail TeLANophy Module Features

Text-to-Speech Using Nuance RealSpeak
The UM8000 Text-to-Speech (TTS) package enables subscribers to have 24-hour, two-way access
to Microsoft Exchange, Novell GroupWise, or Lotus Notes Email messages without a laptop or
modem connection. Subscribers can manage email messages using a telephone. Subscribers can
listen to any plain text email message using TTS conversion and record a reply that is sent as a
voice mail message or an email message with a WAV file attachment. Subscribers use touchtone
keypads over a phone to reply, redirect, save and delete email messages, making subscribers
more efficient and accessible when they are away from the office.
ViewMail with Live Record Module
All voice and fax messages are visible at a glance on the PC screen and can be sorted in any
order. An intuitive Microsoft Windows interface shows the sender name, subject, and the date
and time messages were sent so the user can quickly prioritize them and respond immediately.
ViewFax
The fax feature works in ViewMail (VM) and View Mail for Microsoft Messaging (VMM) to display
faxes on screen and lets you send them to any printer. When a fax is received, a fax icon is
displayed next to the message in VM/VMM. Double click to open the message, and press the play
button to listen to any voice annotation sent with the fax. Fax ports are built-in on the GCD-VM00
based UM8000 Mail and are activated as a system licensing option. Fax on Demand and Fax
Server functions are not supported.
A maximum of four fax ports are supported on the UM8000 Mail.
ViewCall Plus
All inbound and outbound calls can be controlled from your PC. Outbound call control requires a
TAPI adapter on the user telephone. By managing calls on the PC instead of the telephone,
ViewCall Plus lets you communicate more easily with people inside and outside the office. Three
integrated windows are provided to control telephone calls, log all telephone activity, and manage
data about each call. With a click of the mouse you can take a call, ask a caller to hold, route the
call to another extension, or send the call to voice mail.
2-1494 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Hospitality Package
The Hospitality package is used specifically by hotels and resorts to provide guests with personal,
accurate, and timely messages. Features include personal greetings, security codes, guest
directory, and wake up calls. This feature also supports Property Management System (PMS)
integration.
Additional Hospitality Languages
See Multilingual support below for list of supported languages. The Hospitality Package supports
five languages at default. Additional languages can be purchased (up to the limit of 10).
Networking
This allows the networking of multiple Active Net (AMIS Only) and PlusNet compatible voice mails
systems.
Multilingual Support
Add Languages, only United States English is on the drive at default. New languages can be
added in the field from the support CD. Additional languages can be added in the field with an
upgrade code.
The UM8000 supports three languages (American English, Mexican Spanish and Canadian
French) by default. Both systems can support a maximum of 23 active languages. However, if all
language prompts are loaded, recording time is severely reduced. For an installation requiring 23
languages, 8G or higher media is recommended.
Supported Languages:
ar = Argentinean ja = Japanese (hospitality only)
au = Australian English la = Latin America Spanish
ca = Catalan Spanish md = Mandarin Chinese
ct = Cantonese Chinese nl = Dutch
de = German nz = New Zealand English
dk = Danish pi = Iberian Portuguese
ed = Madrid Spanish pt = Portuguese
es = Mexican Spanish se = Swedish
fc = Canadian French uk = UK English
fr = Parisian French us = US English
he = Hebrew ru = Russian
it = Italian
EMail Integration
With email integration, subscribers can forward all voice messages to their email inbox
automatically and forward all incoming faxes to their email inbox as well. Email integration provides
users with 24-hour access to email from any touchtone phone. Email integration uses standard
protocols to access, read and send email messages on the voice messaging system.
When voice messages forwarded to an email address using email integration are deleted from
the user mailbox the following features are not supported: Pager Notification, Message
CAUTION Waiting Indication.
UM8000 Mail 2-1495

Issue 2.0
The following email protocols are supported:

IMAP
Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) allows the voice messaging system to access an email inbox.
Using IMAP, the voice messaging system can obtain email message headers and body information from
a variety of email users. This information is then delivered to the text-to-speech engine to convert the
text into audio for playback.
MIME
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME), ensures that the voice messaging system can read the
message header and body information. Multipart MIME messages enable the email system to send
enhanced versions of the message for messaging clients such as Lotus Notes or Microsoft Outlook. In
addition, multipart MIME messages contain plain text messages that can be read to subscribers over the
phone.
If HTML tags are heard when listening to an email message by phone, the system skips
the message. Messages encoded only in HTML are not supported by text-to-speech at this
CAUTION time. Messages containing HTML must be encoded using multipart MIME for text-to-
speech to work properly.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP), sends outgoing email messages to email boxes using the voice
messaging system. The Forward voice mail to the email system, Forward faxes to the email system,
Receive email notification of new fax/voice mail and Reply to email messages via voice mail features use
SMTP to send outgoing messages. SMTP can also be configured to restrict the type of messages sent,
such as only allowing SMTP mail to be sent to other users on the same domain. Refer to your Exchange,
Domino, or GroupWise documentation, or consult your administrator on which settings work best for
your organization.
Conditions
Additional mailbox licenses can be added using part number 640814.
The UM8000 Voice Mail is not supported in the SV9100-S system.
The Expanded Schedule feature has the following conditions:
A maximum of 99 Custom Schedules are supported.
A maximum of nine time intervals per custom schedule are supported to set multiple day or
week and hour of day options.
If two time intervals within a customer schedule contradict each other the numerically lower
time interval is followed.
Constant Message Count is displayed on a telephones display until another activity needs
the display (For instance, if a call is made or received on the telephone). To get the
message count to display again, the telephone needs to receive a new voice mail message
or call into the voice mailbox.
The GCD-VM00 supports one media size: 8G with 550 Hours of recording time.
Live Record does not work for monitored calls, conference calls or internal calls.
2-1496 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Audible tones are not provided to the multiline terminal when using Live Monitor, only visual
notifications are provided for incoming monitored calls.
A maximum of four fax ports are supported on the UM8000.
Fax on demand is not supported.
Fax server is not supported.
The UM8000 supports up to 23 languages and 10 Hospitality languages.
Caller ID Return Call may require ARS programming to properly route outgoing calls.
Updating the system time also updates the UM8000 Mail time.
When setting up hunt group priorities in 16-02-01 the VM ports must be assigned as port
1 = priority 1, port 2 = priority 2 and so on. Failure to do this causes the VM to answer but
no audio is heard.
The Live Record feature is supported only for External CO/Trunk calls. Internal/Intercom
calls are not supported.
The Live Record feature is supported only for Multiline telephones. Single Line Telephones
do not support this feature.
The following databases can be migrated to the UM8000:
OS/2 based EliteMail CTI
DOS based EliteMail Q51731 or higher
Linux based EliteMail CTI LX
Linux based EliteMail CTI LX Lite
Voice messages forwarded to an email address using email integration can be set to be
automatically deleted, saved as new or saved as old, in a user's mailbox.
When a mailbox is set to delete or save as old voice messages forwarded to an email
address using email integration, the following features are not supported: Pager
Notification, Message Waiting Indication.
Email integration refers to forwarding voice messages to an email server and does not
apply to the client applications ViewMail, VMM, VMG and VML.
The operating system is Linux.
Extension numbers cannot include or #.
InMail and UM8000 Mail cannot be used at the same time in the same system.
Ring Group calls do not follow extension call forwarding to voice mail.
Caller ID information is passed from the voice mail to an extension for pre-answer display
on an unscreened transfer from voice mail.
Off-premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines.
UM8000 Mail 2-1497

Issue 2.0
To have the Voice Mail Automated Attendant answer a trunk, program the trunk as a DIL to
the Voice Mail pilot.
When the voice mail places a call on hold, it uses Group Hold. Any line appearances for the
trunk shows the hold flash rate, however, users cannot pick up these calls (a busy signal is
heard).
If the Message Waiting LED is also used for Message Waiting Indication, and there are both
voice mail messages and Message Wait indications, the color set for Message Wait
overrides the color used for voice mail indications (red).
During a Conversation Record session, DTMF digits are not transmitted. If the End softkey
is used to stop the Conversation Record, DTMF to the outside party is restored. If you press
the Conversation Record button to end the recording DTMF is not restored.
Stutter Dial Tone is supported to Single Line Telephones (SLTs) for Voice Mail Message
Waiting.
When a Department Group is assigned as the VM Department Group in Program 45-01-01
it works only as priority mode no matter what Program 16-01-02 is set to for that
Department.
A modem for remote maintenance is built into the GCD-VM00 blade.
When migrating from SV8100 to SV9100, the InMail auto programs to use Department
Group 64. For example, if Department Group 64 was previously being used on the SV8100
for UM8000, the UM8000 will need to be re-programmed to use a different Department
Group.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-VM00
UM8000 Mail Media Kit
2-1498 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0

One UMS Client License per mailbox (1404)
Required Software
When using ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging (VMM) with Office XP/2002 or Office 2000 you
must have at least Service Pack 3 for Office installed prior to installing VMM. Failure to do so
requires removing and installing the entire Office software suite again. Microsoft Outlook needs
Corporate or Workgroup version.
The following versions of Microsoft Outlook work with VMM:

Outlook 2007 (Vista 32-bit only)
Outlook 2010 (Windows 7 32- and 64-bit)
Outlook 2013 (32- and 64-bit)
The supported TeLANophy applications include:

ViewMail
ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging (VMM)
ViewCall Plus
ViewMail for GroupWise (VMG)
ViewMail for Lotus Notes (VML)
ViewFax (VF)
These TeLANophy applications work on the following operating systems:

Windows XP
Windows Vista (32-bit only)
Related Features
Barge-In
Caller ID
Call Forwarding
UM8000 Mail 2-1499

Issue 2.0
Hold
Message Waiting
One-Touch Calling
Transfer

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
(type 0 or 1). Use the following as a guide when 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
allocating DTMF receivers: Circuit/Resource
In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF 09 ~ 32 = 2
receiver for every 10 devices that use them. (Trunks)
In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF Circuit/Resource
receiver for every five devices that use 33 ~ 144 = 0
them. (Common)
When
GPZ-BS10 is
installed, 81 ~
144 are available

Define the IP Address for the GCD-ETIA. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254
10-55-03 Package Network Setup Main/Add-on 0 = Main 1

Set to 0 to distribute an IP Address to the blade. 1 = Add-on

2-1500 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Define the subnet mask for the GCD-ETIA. |240.0.0.0 | 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0
|254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255

Define the default gateway for the GCD-ETIA. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
the Voice Mail (maximum of eight digits). The
Program 16-02-01.

Mail 0 = Disable

1 = Enable

Enable/Disable a trunk user ability to receive 0 = No
Caller ID information. 1 = Yes


One-Touch Key or preselects the key.

key. If set as a Message key, users can press
the key to call the voice mail only when they
have new messages.

UM8000 Mail 2-1501

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set up various message wait lamp cycle

options for lamp color.

6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7




Caller ID Function - For External Module 1 = Enable (On)
Enable/Disable the Caller IFD FSK signal for an
external Caller ID Module or a 3rd-Party vendor
If voice mail is used, set this to 0 for the system
integration code to be correct.

followed by: 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
extension.
(Optional) Assign a Voice Mail Record key
to an extension (code 78).
(Optional) Use a Call Redirect key (49) to
allow a user to transfer a call to another
extension or voice mail without answering
the call.
2-1502 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the Department Group called by the pilot Department
Port 1 priority = 1
When setting up hunt group priorities the VM Port 256 priority
ports must be assigned as port 1 = priority 1, port 2
= 256
= priority 2 and so on. Failure to do this causes the
VM to answer but no audio is heard.


system trunks.

mail extensions. Use COS 14 for all time (1 ~ 15) All other
modes. extension port =
Class 1


extension.


Call Forward All.



Unanswered




Call Forwarding with Follow Me.
UM8000 Mail 2-1503

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(External Call forwarding)

up Call Forwarding Off-Premise at their
extension. For voice mail, set this option to off.




off-hook signals.



Message Waiting.

On ICM Call





other extensions Barge-In on calls.

Changed
2-1504 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

callers from dialing to Camp -On. Set this option
to 0 for voice mail.

Answer Recall Time
24-02-02 System Options for Transfer MOH or Ring 0 = Hold Tone 0

back on Transferred Calls 1 = Ring Back Tone
Enable/Disable MOH on Transfer. If set to 0, a
transferred caller hears Music on Hold while
their call rings the destination extension. If set
to 1, a transferred caller hears ring back while

their call rings the destination extension. For
this option to work with voice mail, the
transferred call must be an unscreened
transfer.
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

to ring into Voice Mail as a Direct Inward Line 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
(DIL). VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Calling Group for each DIL incoming trunk. A eight digits)
DIL rings an extension directly, without any Pilot Number
other Access Map or Ring Group Programming.
Use Program 22-02 to designate a DIL trunk.
If all Voice Mail ports are in the same Extension
(Department) Group, the DIL rings another
Voice Mail port if its assigned port is busy.
22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).
UM8000 Mail 2-1505

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign 0 to each trunk you want to ring into 0 = Normal
Voice Mail as a normal line. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Assign Ring Group 102 for an In-Skin/External eight ports) ring
Voice Mail, or 103 for a Central Voice Mail as for incoming
Ring Group 1
the destination.
calls. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.
For Either Method:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Flash on Trunk Lines 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Program the dial access code used for sending digits
a hook flash to Telco. This code is used for
Centrex Transfer using Digital Voice Mail ports.
If this code starts with #, Program 45-01-05
must be set to 0.

Assign extensions to Ring Groups. eight ports) ring
Programming Ring Group 1
calls. No other
To enable Voice Mail Overflow, assign selected
extensions ring
extensions to a Ring Group that ring for
for incoming
unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ports. In
Ring Group 1
Program 22-06, enter 1 to enable overflow
calls.
ringing.
2-1506 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

For Voice Mail Overflow, enter the Ring Group 001 ~ 100 = Incoming Ring
that unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ring after Group
the DIL Call Waiting time expires (Program 102 = (In-Skin/
22-01-04). External Voice Mail
or InMail)

Forwarding Time
Forwarding occurs after this time
This also sets the time a Transferred call waits
at an extension forwarded to voice mail before
45-01-01 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail 0 ~ 64 0

Department Group Number 0 = No Voice Mail
Assign which Extension (Department) Group
number is to be assigned as the voice mail
group. This program defines the Quick
Transfer to Voice Mail destination. A 0 entry
means no voice mail is installed.
45-01-02 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Maximum of 12 characters. Voice Mail
Master Name
Enter the Voice Mail master name.

Page 1 = On
the Voice Mail Park and Page () commands.
You should normally enable this option.

Wait 1 = On
the Voice Mail Message Wait (#) commands.
You should normally enable this option. If
enabled be sure the Programmed Message
notification strings do not contain the code for
trunk access.
When using Centrex transfer from a voice mail

port the following items must be considered:
If the Feature Access Code starts with # in
Program 11-12-42 set Program 45-01-05 to
0.
When assigning the dial string in voice mail,
one or more Pauses may be needed too,
depending on what Telco needs.


Record alerts.
UM8000 Mail 2-1507

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Number Mapping

Programming
Customize the systems service tones. 0 = No Tone
Manual for

33 = Default Time Slot
default values.
Customize the Detect Level for DTMF Tone 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
Receivers. 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm


Receiver.
2-1508 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Tone Receiver. detect level 1: (-25dBm)
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) Type 4 ~ 5 = 10
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-80dBm(0) to -95dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15)
UM8000 Mail 2-1509

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

-5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
detect level 2:
-10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
80-03-05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward Twist 0~9 Type 1 ~ 5 = 5

Define the forward twist level for DTMF Tone

Receiver.
80-03-06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backward 0~9 Type 1 ~ 5 = 0

Define the backwards twist level for DTMF Tone

Receiver.
80-03-07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON Detect 1 ~ 255 Type 1 ~ 5 = 1

Time (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Define the On detection time for DTMF Tone

Receiver.
80-03-08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect 1 ~ 255 Type 1 ~ 5 = 1

Time (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) (30ms)
Define the Off detection time for DTMF Tone

Receiver.
2-1510 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-04-01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm Type 1 (DT) = 0
Define the various levels and timers for the Call 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm Type 2 (BT) = 0
Progress Tone Detector. (-25dBm)
Use this option to set the Detection Level.
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
Type 3 (RBT) = 0

4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
(-25dBm)
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
Type 4, Type 5 =
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
0
80-04-02 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Min. 0 ~ 15 Type 1 (DT) = 15

Define the various levels and timers for the Call -15dBm (0) to -30dBm(15) Type 2 (BT) = 15
Use this option to set the minimum detection -30dBm (0) to -45dBm(15) Type 3 (RBT) =
level. 15
detect level 2:
(-25dBm)
-40dBm (0) to -55dBm(15)
Type 4, Type 5 =
0
80-04-03 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup S/N 0 ~ 4 (0dB ~ -20dB) Type 1 (DT) = 4
Ratio (-20dB)
Define the various levels and timers for the Call Type 2 (BT) = 4
Progress Tone Detector. (-20dB)
Type 3 (RBT) = 4

(-20dB)
Type 4, Type 5 =
0
Define the various levels and timers for the Call 1 ~ 255 = 60 ~ 7680ms Type 2 (BT)
Progress Tone Detector. The formula is 30 + 30N. 132 (3990ms)
Use this option to set No Tone Time. When set to N = 1, it means 30 Type 3 (RBT)

+ 30 1 = 60. 132 (3990ms)
30+30255=7680 0
80-04-05 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Pulse 1 ~ 255 Type 1 (DT) = 1
Count Type 2 (BT) = 1
Define the various levels and timers for the Call Type 3 (RBT) = 1
Progress Tone Detector. Type 4, Type 5 =
Use this option to set the Pulse Count. 0

Define the various levels and times for the Call Type 2 (BT) 12
Use this option to set the minimum On time. Type 3 (RBT)

25 (780ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
UM8000 Mail 2-1511

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-04-07 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON 0 ~ 255 Type 1 (DT) = 0

Maximum Time (30+30 ~ 7680ms) Type 2 (BT) = 20
Define the various levels and times for the Call (450ms) [ET]
Progress Tone Detector. Type 3 (RBT) =
Use this option to set the maximum On time. 40 1230ms)
Type 4, Type 5 =
0
80-04-08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 1 ~ 255 Type 1 (DT) = 1
Minimum Time (30+30 ~ 7680ms) (60ms)
Define the various levels and times for the Call Type 2 (BT) = 12
Use this option to set the minimum Off time. Type 3 (RBT) =

83 (2520ms)
Type 4, Type 5 =
0
80-04-09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 0 ~ 255 Type 1 (DT) = 1
Maximum Time (30+30 ~ 7680ms) (60ms)
Define the various levels and times for the Call Type 2 (BT) = 20
Use this option to set the maximum Off time. Type 3 (RBT) =

115 (3480ms)
Type 4, Type 5 =
0
Operation
Refer to UM800 Mail User Guide for complete telephone operation procedures.
2-1512 UM8000 Mail

Issue 2.0
Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode
Description
With SV9100 software the IP terminals (DT7XX) can receive an Internal Page via a Unicast or Multicast
packet based upon system programming. This feature allows IP terminals (DT7XX) to be assigned to
Unicast Mode, Multicast Mode, or Auto.
When the phone is set to Unicast Mode the internal paging is sent to the phone via a Unicast Packet.
When the phone is set to Multicast Mode the internal page is sent to the phone via a Multicast Packet.
When the phone is set to Auto, the internal page is sent to the phone either by Multicast or Unicast
based on the subnet of the IP station. If the DT7XX terminal is in the same subnet as the GPZ-IPLE then
it will receive the Internal Page via a Multicast Packet. If the DT7XX terminal is in a different subnet than
the GPZ-IPLE the DT7XX will receive the Internal Page via a Unicast Packet.
When phones are set to receive Unicast packets the GPZ-IPLE will send a separate RTP stream to each
phone that is set to receive the page. E.g. If there are five DT7XX IP phones in the page group and they
are all set to Unicast Page Mode the GPZ-IPLE will send five separate RTP streams utilizing five DSP
resources.
When the phones are set to receive Multicast packets the GPZ-IPLE will send one RTP stream.
Multicast is a protocol that allows one device to communicate to multiple devices without the need to
stream to the individual end point. E.g. If there are five DT7XX IP phones in the page group that are set
to Multicast Mode, the GPZ-IPLE will send one RTP stream utilizing only one DSP resource.
Figure 2-70 Multicast Mode Example
Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode 2-1513

Issue 2.0
Figure 2-71 Unicast Mode Example
Figure 2-72 Auto Mode Example
By default routers do not pass Multicast packets between subnets. If you have IP phones in

NOTE
different subnets than the GPZ-IPLE, and you are trying to utilize Multicast paging, you have to
program the router to pass the Multicast packet. Routing of Multicast Packets is not a default
routing feature and should be confirmed with the manufacturer of the routing equipment.
The default multicast address utilized by the SV9100 is 224.0.0.10. It should be noted that many
routing devices available do not support multicast within the range of 224.0.0.0/24 and may require
the default address to be changed in the SV9100.
2-1514 Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode

Issue 2.0
GPZ-IPLE DSP Resource Selection
Three additional GPZ-IPLE DSP resource assignments are available. The new assignments are:
Common without Unicast Paging, Multicast Paging, and Unicast Paging. The new assignments
assist with keeping IP phones from using all available DSP resources when utilizing Unicast Paging.
When the DSP resource is set to Common without Unicast Paging the resource can be accessed by
anything but a Unicast page.
When the DSP resource is set to Multicast Paging the resource can only be accessed by a Multicast
page no other device/feature can access this resource.
When the DSP resource is set to Unicast Paging the resource can only be accessed by a Unicast page
no other device/feature can access this resource.
Conditions
You can assign up to 50 IP phones in an Internal or All call paging group.
When using Unicast mode, there must be an available DSP recourse for each IP phone in
the page group at the time of the internal page. If the resources are less than the number of
IP phones, the page will be delivered to the IP phones with the lowest port numbers. IP
phones that cannot obtain a DSP resource will not receive the page.
IP terminals (DT7XX) via NAT cannot utilize Multicast paging. These terminals must use
Unicast paging.
The ability to assign Unicast or Multicast on an IP phone basis, is restricted to internal
paging only. Other Multicast features (External MOH, Background Music, Room Monitor)
cannot utilize Unicast.
For an IP terminal to utilize the Multicast feature the IP terminal must have a gateway
programmed to accomplish the multicast transmission. When an actual gateway device
does not exist on the network, a dummy gateway address on the same subnet must be
defined.
When utilizing Multicast mode and a page group consists of all IP phones, the page is sent
via a multicast message from the initiating phone. If a paging group has IP and TDM
phones, when an IP phone initiates the page, a message is sent to the GPZ-IPLE and the
GPZ-IPLE sends the Multicast message for the IP phones.
SIP DECT Wireless phones cannot receive an Internal Page.
When using the G.711 Codec for multicast paging, only 10ms, 20ms, 30ms, and 40ms
frame sizes can be used.
Default Settings
Multicast

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
All DT8XX/DT7XX IP Terminals
DT8XX/DT7XX IP terminal
GCD-CP10 and GPZ-IPLE
Router that supports Multicast Packets if utilizing Multicast Mode
Related Features
Meet Me Paging
Paging, External
Paging, Internal


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Select type of VoIP ETU DSP Resource. This extensions and trunks Resource 2 ~
program setting has no affect on the terminal/ 1 = IP Extension 256 = 0
3 = CCIS/Networking
4 = Use for NetLink
5 = Blocked
Paging
8 = Unicast Paging
10-46-11 DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup 224.0.0.0 ~ 239.255.255.255 224.0.0.10
Multicast IP Address
Set the Multicast IP address so that two or
more main devices dont overlap on the same

network, or if Multicast is used by other IP
services.

Multicast Port
Sets the starting port number used by Multicast.
15-05-38 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0 = Multicast 0

Paging Protocol Mode 1 = Unicast
Sets the protocol mode for the Paging function. 2 = Auto

Assign function keys for Internal Paging Zones 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
(code 21 + page zone) and Internal All Call 751 by default) Manual for
Paging (code 22). 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1


31-01-01 System Options for Internal/External Paging Maximum of 12 characters. Group All
All Call Paging Zone Name
Assign a name to the All Call Internal Paging
Zone. The name shows on the display of the
telephone making the announcement.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Paging announcement (External Paging only).
31-02-01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Page Zones: 0, 1 ~ 9, 0 for IP Station
Internal Paging Group Number 00, 01 ~ 64 1 for TDM
Assign extensions to Internal Paging Zones. An 0 ~ 64 Station
extension must be assigned to a 2-digit zone to (0 = No Setting)
access any 2-digit zone.

Turn Off or On All Call Internal Paging for each
extension. If allowed, extensions can make and

announcements. If prevented, extension can
make only All Call Internal Paging
announcements.
31-03-01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Maximum of 12 characters. 01 = Group 1

Paging Group Name 02 = Group 2
Program names for the Internal Paging Zones. :

64 = Group 64
31-07-01 Combined Paging Assignments Internal Page Zones: 0, 1 ~ 9, 1

For each External Paging Group (1 ~ 8 and 0 00, 01 ~ 64
for All Call), assign a corresponding Internal 0 ~ 64
Zone for Combined Paging. (0 = All internal
paging)
Operation
To make an Internal Page announcement
Multiline Terminal/IP Terminal

1. Press the zone Internal Paging key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 21 + 0 or 1~9 or 01~64 for
zones (0 or 00 for All Call).
- OR -
Press Speaker or lift the handset.

Dial 701 and the Paging Zone number (0~9 or 00~64).
- OR -

Issue 2.0
If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group, the page is announced
as an External Page only.
Single Line Telephone/SIP DECT Wireless

4. Hang up.

Issue 2.0
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Description
With Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), an extension user can call an idle extension in a preprogrammed
UCD Group (Department Group 64 Department Groups available) by dialing the group pilot number.
For example, this would let a caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales department pilot
number. The caller would not have to know any of the Sales department extension numbers.
User Log Out/Log In
An extension user can log out and log in to a UCD (Department) group. By logging out, the user removes
their extension from the group. Once logged out, UCD (Department Calling) bypasses their extension.
When they log back in, UCD (Department Calling) routes to their extension normally. All users can dial a
code to log in or log out of their UCD (Department Calling) Group. A multiline terminal can optionally
have a function key programmed for one-button log in and log out.
Enhanced Hunting
UCD (Department Calling) is enhanced with expanded hunting abilities. Hunting sets the conditions
under which calls to a UCD (Department Group) pilot number cycles through the members of the group.
The hunting choices are:
Busy
A call to the pilot number only hunts past a busy group member to the first available extension. A
call rings on an unanswered extension until it is answered, or the caller hangs up.
Not Answered
A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a UCD (Department Calling) group.
The call continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. However, if the next
station in the cycle is busy when a new call comes in, the call queues to the busy agent. New calls
do not hunt past a busy agent.
Busy or Not Answered
A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a UCD (Department Calling) group.
The call continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up.
If all members of the UCD (Department) group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the group pilot
number queues for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold any number of waiting
calls. If a display telephone is waiting in queue, the user sees: WAITING (group name). If a transferred
call in queue is an outside call, the queued caller hears, Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will
be answered when a line becomes free.
The VRS can also transfer calls to UCD (Department) groups. Refer to the Voice Response System
(VRS) on page 2-1618 feature for more information on setting up the VRS.
2-1520 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

Issue 2.0
The system prevents hunting to a UCD (Department) group extension if it is:

Busy on a call
In Do Not Disturb
Call Forwarded
Logged Out
Conditions
When a DIL rings to a UCD (Department) groups, the DIL may follow overflow programming
(Program 22-01-04 and Program 22-08-01).
If an extension has Call Forwarding set, the system does not hunt to the forwarded
extension.
Default Settings
Disabled
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 2-1521

Issue 2.0
Priority Routing
Figure 2-73 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Priority Call Routing
CALL Telephone on a call Telephone on a call
Priority 1
Priority 1 Priority 1
CALL Telephone on a call
CALL

Issue 2.0
Circular Routing
Figure 2-74 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Circular Routing
CALL 1
CALL 2
CALL 3
CALL 4
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Contact Center
Transfer
InMail

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Assign pilot numbers to the Extension
(Department) Groups you set up in Program

16-02-01 ~ Program 16-02-10.

Assign a Uniform Call Distribution key (46) so 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
extension users can install or remove 751 by default) Manual for
themselves from the Uniform Call Distribution 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
Group. Additional keys can also be assigned for Function Code) (Service Code
Department Group features Automatic Transfer 752 by default)
(56), immediate calling destination (58),
delayed calling destination (59), and DND
destination (60).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Department Name

Groups.

Routing can be either circular (cycles to all
phones in group) or priority (cycles to highest
priority extension first)
Set to 1 for UCD.

Call) busy)
busy Department Group member. Intercom busy department member routes
callers can hear busy or route to the first to idle member)

available Department Group member. This
occurs only for calls to the extension directly,
not the department number assigned in
Program 11-07.

last extension of the department group.

Determine whether calls ringing a Department
Group should ring all extensions in the group
simultaneously automatically or manually when

using the service code defined in Program
11-12-09. When set to 1 only ICM and DID
calls ring all stations in the Department Group.
Set the STG withdraw mode for each

department group.


transferred.

Set how long a call rings a Department Group


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Set the type of hunting for each Department 2 = Hunting When Not
Group. Answered

Answer

Port 1 priority = 1
Port 256 priority
= 256
16-03-01 Secondary Department Group Extension Number No Setting

Assign extensions to multiple Department Maximum of eight digits
Groups and set the priority assignment. Each Priority Order 0 ~ 9999
Secondary Department Group can have up to
16 extensions assigned.

extension port =
Class 1

is busy.

Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user ability in a
Department Group to use the Trunk-to-Trunk

Automatically (1) receive off-hook Signals.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Called Extension)

If you want a trunk to be a DIL to a Department 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
Group, assign Service Type 4 for each Night VRS installed)
Service Mode. Also see Program 22-07-01. 2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL

5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

For each trunk assigned Service Type 4 in Extension Number (maximum of
Program 22-02 above, assign the DIL eight digits)
destination as the Department Group pilot
Pilot Number
(Department: Groups 1 ~ 64).
22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).

Ring Interval Time

between intermittent ringing. If this value is 0,
the system rings once.
24-02-08 System Options for Transfer Delayed 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10

Transfer Timer for All Department Groups
Determine the time a call should ring a

Department Group before transferring the call.

Use the Speed Dialing area to program the
destination number of the transferred telephone
number when a Department Group call is
transferred using Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
Operation
To call a UCD Group:

- OR -

Issue 2.0
2. Dial the UCD group (department) extension or pilot number.

The system routes the call to the first free telephone in the (UCD group) department.
To log out of your UCD (Department Calling) Group:
While you are logged out, UCD (Department Calling) cannot route calls to your extension.
1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 650 and 1.
- OR -
Press Uniform Call Distribution Log In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 46).
The key lights while you are logged out.
To log back in to your UCD (Department Calling) Group:
While you log back in, Uniform Call Distribution routes calls to your extension.
1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 650 and 0.
- OR -
Press UCD (Department Calling) Log In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 46).
The key goes out when you log back in.

Issue 2.0
Uniform Numbering Network
Description
Uniform Numbering Network allows multiple or compatible systems to be connected in a network using
Tie Lines. A station user can dial a system number and a station number (open numbering) or dial the
station number only (closed numbering) to access any station. When the calling and called systems are
not directly connected, several Tie Lines may be accessed to route the call. Each system extends the
call to the next system until the final destination is reached. Networking provides a seamless connection
of multiple systems into a single virtual communications system using Tie Lines with a unified
numbering plan. Networking allows many companies to connect their telephone systems so they appear
as one. An extension user in the network can easily dial another extension or transfer a call in the
Networking System. Calls are passed from network node to network node using a protocol that contains
information about the source, type, and destination of the call.
Flexible Network Routing
Use network routes to set up single-channel networking between many separate systems or use
multiple networking channels per system for greater network performance. Data tables in the system
program define the routing for each extension in each network node. These tables are easily customized
to meet the requirements of each networking configuration. Users may place an intercom call or transfer
a call to any extension at any location by dialing an extension number. The system analyzes each
extension number received and determines how to route the call to its final destination. The feature
which handles this route selection is called Flexible Routing (F-Routing). F-Routing also can select
alternate routes to the destination extension if the primary destination is busy. Up to 120 routes are
available for networking. After an extension number is dialed, the system checks the routing, accesses
the assigned trunk group and places the call. Each extension is assigned a route or routes that decide
which trunk group to access and any modified dialed data if required.
Conditions
Monitor the Uniform Numbering Network Access Code plan to avoid loss of Access Codes
and to prevent duplicating codes.
The distant system number can be programmed as 2~8 digits.
The UNIVERGE SV9100 system has 500 ARS/F-Route Tables that can be shared by
outgoing Tie lines, ISDN CO/PBX, and FT1 lines.
When a call from/to the remote-end is made to a busy station in the UNIVERGE SV9100
system, the caller cannot set features such as Callback Message, Step Call, or Camp-On.
A maximum of 120 Dial Analysis Tables allow a maximum of 121 connected systems per
Uniform Numbering Network.
DID Full Digit Conversion can access the Uniform Numbering Network.
Uniform Numbering Network 2-1529

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-4ODTA
-OR-
GCD-PRTA
Related Features
K-CCIS IP
K-CCIS T1

2-1530 Uniform Numbering Network

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-01-01 System Numbering Service Code Caution Refer to the

Set the systems internal (Intercom) numbering Improperly programming this Programming
plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and option can adversely affect Manual for
second digits dialed and affects the digits an system operation. Make sure default values.
extension user must dial to access other you thoroughly understand the
extensions and features, such as service codes default numbering plan before
and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan proceeding.
does not meet the site requirements, use this Before changing your
program to tailor the system numbering to the numbering plan, use PCPro or
site. WebPro to make a backup
copy of your system data.

Set the extension number. The extension 2 102
number can have up to eight digits. The first/ 3 103
second digit(s) of the number should be ~ ~
assigned in Program 11-01-01. This allows an 99 199
employee to move to a new location (port) and 100 3101
retain the same extension number. ~ ~
960 3961
14-02-09 Analog Trunk Data Setup Busy Tone 0 = Disable 0

Detection 1 = Enable
Enable/Disable busy tone detection for trunk

ports.
14-02-14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start/ 0 = Loop Start 0

Ground Start 1 = Ground Start
Define an analog trunk as Loop Start or Ground

Start.
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1 ~ 100). Priority 1 ~ 400 1 ~ 400 assigned
to trunk group 1
with priorities
equal to the
trunk number.
Trunk 1 = Priority
1 Trunk 400 =
Priority 400.
44-01-01 System Options for ARS/F-Route ARS/ 0 = Not Used 0

F-Route Time Schedule 1 = Used
Set this option to 0 so the F-Route table
selected is determined only by the digits dialed
without any relation to the day or time of the
call. If 1 is selected, the system refers to

Program 44-10. If there is a match, the pattern
defined in that program is used. If not, the
F-Route pattern in Program 44-09 and the time
set in 44-08 are used.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Set the dial digits to be analyzed by the system digit, @)

for ARS routing.

Select the Service Type. 2 = ARS/F-Route Table
(F-Route)

Table (Option)
Enter the additional data required for the 2 = 0 ~ 500
service type selected in Program 44-02-02, (0 = No Setting)
either the number of digits to be deleted or the
table number to be used.
(0 = No Setting)
44-02-04 Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access 0 = Off 0

Dial Tone Simulation 1 = On
If Enabled (1), this option sends dial tone to the
calling party after the routing is determined.

This may be required if the central office at the
destination does not send dial tone.
44-03-01 Dial Analysis Extension Table Dial Maximum of 24 digits No Setting

Set the Dial digits (24 digits maximum) 1 ~ 9, 0 Digits = 1 ~ 9, 0, , #, @
#, @) to be used for the Dial Extension (Press Line Key 1 for wild
Analysis Table. When Program 44-02-02 is set character @)
to 3, this program sets the dial extension
analysis table. These tables are used when the
analyzed digits must be more than eight digits.
Key 1 to enter an @ symbol.
44-03-02 Dial Analysis Extension Table ARS/ 0 ~ 500 0

F-Route Select Table Number (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
When dialed digits match the setting in With Program 44-01 set to 0,
Program 44-03-01, select the ARS/R-Route Program 44-05 is checked.

table number (0 ~ 500) to be used for the Dial With Program 44-01 set to 1,
Extension Analysis Table. Program 44-04 is checked.
44-03-03 Dial Analysis Extension Table ARS/ 0 ~ 500 0

F-Route Select Table Number (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
If the received digits are not identified in tables With Program 44-01 set to 0,
1 ~ 250, the F-Route selection table number Program 44-05 is checked.

(0 ~ 500) defined in table 251 is used. With Program 44-01 set to 1,
Program 44-04 is checked.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
44-03-04 Dial Analysis Extension Table Next Table 0~4 0

Area Number (252)
If the received digits do not match the digits set
in tables 1 ~ 250, table number 252 is used

refer to the next Extension Table Area (1 ~ 4) to
be searched.
44-04-01 ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule ARS/F-Route Time Mode: 1 ~ 8 0

Assign each ARS/F-Route Selection number ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0
(1 ~ 500) to an ARS/F-Route table number for ~ 500

each ARS/F-Route time mode.

Select the trunk group number used for the 0 = No Setting
outgoing ARS call (1 ~ 100). 255 = Extension Call

Enter the number of digits to be deleted from (255 = Delete All)
the dialed number [0 ~ 255 (255 = Delete all)].

Table
Enter the table number defined in Program
44-06 for additional digits to be dialed
(0 ~ 1000).

priority number (1 ~ 4). Turn Off or On a beep

tone if a lower priority trunk group is used.

Internal Calls 0 = No Setting

number used for internal call (defined in
Program 44-07).


number used for the tandem call (defined in
Program 44-07).

Service used for ARS. An extension ARS COS
is determined in Program 26-04-01.

Treatment to be used for the table. The Dial

Treatments are determined in Program
26-03-01.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

44-05-10 ARS/F-Route Table CCIS over IP 0 ~ 16367 0

Input the Destination Point Code to send when

using F-Route.
44-05-11 ARS/F-Route Table Network Specified 0 ~ 16 0

Parameter Table
Enter a table number from Program 26-12.
44-06-01 Additional Dial Table Maximum of 24 digits No Setting

Set the additional dial table to add prior to the Enter: 1 ~ 9, 0, , #, Pause
dialed ARS/F-Route Number. The Additional (press line key 1 to enter a
Dial Table used is determined in Program pause)
44-05-03. Define the additional dial table
(1 ~ 1000) to add digits in front of the dialed
ARS/F-Route number.
44-07-01 Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access Set the gain table to be used 1 ~ 63
Incoming Transmit (1 ~ 500). If an extension dials (-15.5 ~
ARS/F-Route number; +15.5dB)

The Extension Dial Gain Table (default = 32)
assigned in Program 44-05 is
44-07-02 Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access activated. 1 ~ 63
Incoming Receive The Extension Dial Gain Table (-15.5 ~
follows Outgoing transmit and +15.5dB)

Outgoing receive settings. (default = 32)
If the incoming call is transferred
44-07-03 Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access 1 ~ 63
to another line using ARS/
Outgoing Transmit (-15.5 ~
F-Route; the Tandem Gain Table
+15.5dB)

assigned in Program 44-05 is
activated. (default = 32)
44-07-04 Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access The Tandem Gain Table follows 1 ~ 63
Outgoing Receive the Incoming transmit and
(-15.5 ~
Incoming receive settings for
+15.5dB)
incoming line, and Outgoing
transmit and Outgoing receive (default = 32)
settings for the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the
CODEC gains defined in
Program 14-01-02 and Program
14-01-03 are not activated.
44-08-01 Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route Time Number: 01 ~ 20 All Schedule

Define the daily pattern of the ARS/F-Route Start Time = 0000 ~ 2359 Patterns: 0:00
feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. 0:00, Mode 1
These patterns are used in Program 44-09 and
End Time = 0000 ~ 2359
Mode: 1 ~ 8
Program 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20
time settings.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
44-09-01 Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route 1 = Sunday Pattern 1

Define a weekly schedule for using ARS/ (Pattern 1 ~ 10)
F-Route day numbers 1 ~ 7, pattern numbers 2 = Monday
(1 ~ 10). The pattern number is defined in (Pattern 1 ~ 10)
Program 44-08-01. 3= Tuesday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)
4 = Wednesday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)

5 = Thursday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)
6 = Friday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)
7 = Saturday
(Pattern 1 ~ 10)
44-10-01 Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route Date: 0101 ~ 1231 Date:

Define a yearly schedule for ARS/F-Route. This Schedule Pattern Number = 0101~1231
schedule is used for setting special days such 0 ~ 10 Schedule
as national holidays (pattern numbers 1 ~ 10). 0 = No Setting Pattern Number
The pattern number is defined in Program = 0~10
44-08-01. 0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
Universal Slots
Description
The UNIVERGE SV9100 has six universal slots, and up to four cabinets can be installed. The system
uses the same chassis for the 64, 256 and unlimited systems to support up to 24 Universal Slots.
Up to four combined CHS2UG B-US/CHS2UG E (3-Slot Base/3-Slot Expansion) or CHS2UG-US

(6-Slot) chassis can be connected locally to reach the systems maximum port capacity.
EXAMPLE:
0 CHS2UG-US (19 Chassis) & 4 CHS2UG B-US/CHS2UG E (9.5 Base Chassis/9.5 Expansion Chassis)
Conditions
Two software packages (Basic Port Package and Expanded Port Package) are available for
the UNIVERGE SV9100 system using the GCD-CP10. Refer to Table 2-121 SV9100
Maximum System Capacities Trunks/Ports/Channels on page 2-1537 for maximum
system capacities for each software package.
2-1536 Universal Slots

Issue 2.0
Table 2-121 SV9100 Maximum System Capacities Trunks/Ports/Channels
9.5
19 Chassis
Chassis
System
Number of:
x1 Maximum
x1 x2 x3 X4
(CPU + 2
(6 Slots) (12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots)
Slots)
PCM 48 104 208 312 416 444

Number of Timeslots 1
Data 7 7 14 21 28 28
DT400/DT300 TDM (-48V) 32 80 176 272 368
SLT (-28V) 32 80 176 272 368
SLT (-48V) 8 20 44 68 92
Total 896
DT800/DT700 IP 896
Desktop Applications
(Desktop Client, Desktop Client with
256 Total 256
Shared Services and SoftPhones)
SIP/WLAN 896 Total 896
Analog Trunks (COT) 16 40 88 136 184
BRI 16 40 88 136 184
PRI (1.5M) 48 96 192 192 192

Total 400
IP Trunk (SIP) 400
DTMF Receivers 32 32 32 32 96 *2
VoIP Channels 256 256
Voice Mail Channels on CPU 16 channels 16
V34 Modem 1 channel 1

1 = For-law countries 104 timeslots per chassis are assigned the G.711 PCM communications (e.g., voice
communications) and 7 timeslots per chassis are assigned for the Data communications (e.g., HDLC over
ISDN). Thus the simultaneous data communications are limited up to seven per chassis.
2 = An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the GPZ-BS10 is installed.

An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the GPZ-BS10 is installed.
If using Caller ID to analog trunks and DSP resources are set to common, DSP resources will only be used for analog
trunks and not analog stations.
Universal Slots 2-1537

Issue 2.0
Table 2-122 SV9100 9.5 (Base and Expansion) Maximum System Capacities Trunks/Ports/Channels
9.5 Base 9.5 Base + Expansion

System
Number of: x1
x1 x2 x3 X4 Maximum
(CPU + 2
(6 Slots) (12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots)
Slots)
PCM 48 104 208 312 416 444

Number of Timeslots 1
Data 7 7 14 21 28 28
DT400/DT300 TDM (-48V) 32 80 176 272 368
SLT (-28V) 32 80 176 272 368
SLT (-48V) 8 20 44 68 92
Total 896
DT800/DT700 IP 896
Desktop Applications
(Desktop Client, Desktop Client with
256 Total 256
Shared Services and SoftPhones)
SIP/WLAN 896 Total 896
Analog Trunks (COT) 16 40 88 136 184
BRI 16 40 88 136 184
PRI (1.5M) 48 96 192 192 192

Total 400
IP Trunk (SIP/K-CCIS IP) 400
DTMF Receivers 32 32 32 32 96 *2
VoIP Channels 256 256
Voice Mail Channels on CPU 16 channels 16
V34 Modem 1 channel 1

1 = For-law countries 104 timeslots per chassis are assigned the G.711 PCM communications (e.g., voice
communications) and 7 timeslots per chassis are assigned for the Data communications (e.g., HDLC over
ISDN). Thus the simultaneous data communications are limited up to seven per chassis.
2 = An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the GPZ-BS10 is installed.

An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the GPZ-BS10 is installed.
If using Caller ID to analog trunks and DSP resources are set to common, DSP resources will only be used for analog
trunks and not analog stations.

Issue 2.0
Each Universal Slot is capable of 24 ports.

The Basic Port Package is limited to one chassis.
The PRTA blades can be programmed as a 4/8/12/16/20/24 port Fractional T1/PRI.
Program 10-39-01 must be Enabled).
If trying to assign an blade which would excede the maximum number of ports for the Basic
Port Package you do not get an error, but it does not let you program the related programs.
The 9.5" chassis can now accommodate two GCD-LTA (combo) blades in the universal
slots. Both blades can be viewed and accessed via PC Pro.
The available interface blades and maximum capacities for Universal Slots with the
UNIVERGE SV9100 system are shown in Table 2-123 Maximum System Capacities for
Station Interface Blades, Table 2-124 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface
Blades on page 2-1541 and Table 2-125 Maximum System Capacities for Application
Interface Blades on page 2-1543.
Table 2-123 Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface Blades
Maximum Capacities
Station Interface Units Description Notes
Basic Port Expanded Port
Package Package
GCD-8DLCA This 8-port Digital Line Blade contains 5 20 Note: 1

eight circuits. Each circuit can support
any Attendant Console, multiline
terminal, or Single Line Telephone
adapter.
This blade is installed in slots 2~6 of a
chassis with CPU and slots 1~6 of
expansion chassis. The maximum
number depends on other station blades
installed. This blade shares the total
number of extension ports in the system.
No more than 80 DLC ports are
supported in a single chassis.
GCD-16DLCA These blades are 16-port. Each circuit 5 23 Note: 1
can support any Attendant Console,
multiline terminal, or Single Line
Telephone adapter.
number of extension ports in the system.
No more than 80 ESI ports are supported
in a single chassis.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-123 Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface Blades (Continued)
Maximum Capacities
Package Package
GCD-4DIOPA This 4-port Analog DID or Off-Premise 5 23 Note: 1

Extension blade provides termination
and operation of four analog DID trunks
or four off premise extensions. Each
blade has a built-in ringer signal
generator (RSG). Up to 1600 ohms of
resistance (including the single line
instrument) is acceptable between the
blade and the single line telephone.
chassis with CPU or slots 1~6 of
expansion chassis and shares the
number of station ports in the system.
GCD-4LCA This 4-port Single Line Interface blade 5 23 Note: 1
supports four Single Line Telephones
and/or analog voice mail ports. Each
blade provides a built-in ringer signal
generator (RSG) and Message Waiting
(MW) LED voltage to single line
telephones.
GCD-8LCA This 8-port Single Line Interface blade 5 23 Note: 1
supports eight Single Line Telephones
and/or analog voice mail ports. Each
blade provides a built-in ringer signal
generator (RSG) and Message Waiting
(MW) LED voltage to single line
telephones.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-123 Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface Blades (Continued)
Maximum Capacities
Package Package
GPZ-4LCA This daughter board is a 4-port Single 4 23 Note: 1

Line Interface. The GPZ-4LCA is
installed on the GCD-4LCA, and
supports four single line telephones with
built-in ringer signal generator (RSG) and
Message Waiting (MW) LED voltage to
The GCD-4LCA with a GPZ-4LCA is
installed in slots 2~6 of a chassis with
CPU and slots 1~6 of expansion chassis.
The maximum number depends on other
station blades installed. This daughter
board shares the total number of station
ports in the system.
Note 1: Calculating maximum capacities is based on the system having a minimum of eight Digital Line (DLC) ports, four
trunk ports.
Note 2: A maximum of 32 Digital Voice Mail ports are available.
Note 3: Refer to the Board Power Factor Chart.
Table 2-124 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface Blades
Maximum Capacities
Trunk Interface Blades Description Notes
Package Package
GCD-2BRIA/ This 2/4-port Basic Rate Interface for up to 5 23 Note: 1

GPZ-2BRIA eight trunks provides four channels (eight
voice channels) for an ISDN-Basic Rate
Interface. Caller ID is supported. This
blade is installed in slots 2~6 of a chassis
with CPU and slots 1~6 of expansion
chassis. The maximum number depends
on other trunk blades installed. This blade
shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-124 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface Blades (Continued)
Maximum Capacities
Package Package
GCD-4COTB This 4-port CO/PBX Line Interface has 5 23 Note: 1

built-in fuses (posistors), supports four
outside (CO/PBX) lines, and provides
circuitry for ring detection, holding and
dialing. The outside lines must be Loop
Start DTMF trunks. This blade is installed
in slots 2~6 of a chassis with CPU and
slots 1~6 of expansion chassis. The
maximum number depends on other trunk
blades installed.
This blade shares the total number of CO/
PBX lines in the system.
GPZ-4COTF This 4-port CO/PBX Line Interface has 5 23 Note: 1
built-in fuses (posistors), supports eight
Daughter Board
outside (CO/PBX) lines, and provides
circuitry for ring detection, holding and
dialing. The outside lines must be Ground
Start DTMF trunks. This daughter board is
installed on a GCD-4COTB or GCD-LTA
The maximum number depends on other
trunk blades installed.
This daughter board shares the total
number of CO/PBX lines in the system.
GCD-PRTA This T1/FT1 Trunk Interface or 4 16 Note: 1
ISDN-Primary Rate digital trunk
terminates Fractional T1 trunks (Up to 24
DS-0 channels). This blade supports ANI/
DNIS trunks, and CSU less function on
T1. A combination of ground start and loop
start signaling can be used on the
GCD-PRTA. Dial pulse dialing, DTMF, Tie
Line (E&M), and DID are supported. This
blade has 24 built-in DTMF detectors.
Trunks are assigned in groups of four.
When channels are assigned to ANI,
Feature Group D is supported. Feature
Group D incoming MF/outgoing DTMF
signaling with point-to-point E&M Tie Lines
are also supported.
expansion chassis. The maximum number
depends on other trunk blades installed.
This blade shares the total number of CO/
PBX lines in the system.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-124 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface Blades (Continued)
Maximum Capacities
Package Package
GCD-CCTA The GCD-CCTA (Common Channel 4 4

Handler) is an optional blade that provides
a common channel signal through the
GCD-CCTA to a K-CCIS network and
controls the signaling between the KTS
and the CP00. Each GCD-CCTA blade
supports one K-CCIS link.
Four GCD-CCTA blades can be installed
per system. The T1 interface has a single
24 channel 64kb/s digital signal circuit
which can be configured either for T1
trunking.
GCD-4ODTA The GCD-4ODTA Tie Line blade is an out 5 23
band dial type analog tie line interface
blade. This blade supports system
connections to either 2-wire (four lead, tip/
ring) or 4-wire (eight lead, tip/ring/tip 1/
ring 1) E&M signaling tie lines (determined
in Program 10-03). System programming
is also used to select the connection types
with Type 1 or Type V.
The GCD-4ODTA consumes 4 ports
ranging between ports 001~200. This
blade is installed in slots 2-6 of a chassis
with CPU and slots 1-6 of expansion
chassis. The maximum number depends
on other trunk blades installed. This blade
shares the total number of CO/PBX lines
in the system.
Note 1: Calculating maximum capacities are based on the system having a minimum of eight Digital Line (DLC) ports, four
trunk ports.
Note 2: Refer to Table 2-126 Board Power Factor on page 2-1544.
Table 2-125 Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface Blades
Maximum Capacities
Application Interface
Description Notes
Blades Basic Port Expanded Port
Package Package
GCD-VM00 This GCD-VM00 is a PC platform that 1 1 Note: 1

contains data storage for voice recording
and application software supporting a
maximum of 16 ports.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-125 Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface Blades (Continued)
Maximum Capacities
Application Interface
Description Notes
Blades Basic Port Expanded Port
Package Package
GCD-ETIA The GCD-ETIA is an 8-port Gigabit Switch 1 1 Note: 1

that provides Power over Ethernet (POE).
GCD-PVAA The GCD-PVAA is a 16-port blade for the 2 2 Note: 1
Multimedia Conference Bridge or IVR
applications.
Note 1: Refer to Table 2-126 Board Power Factor.
Refer to the SV9100 General Description Manual or System Hardware Manual for more
information.
The following Blade Calculator allows you to determine the maximum power consumption
for each cabinet.
Table 2-126 Board Power Factor
Board Power Factor
Total =<7
Item Power Factor
GCD-CP10 1
GCD-VM00 2
GCD-ETIA 2
GCD-PVAA 1
GPZ-IPLE 2
GCD-SVR2 2

Issue 2.0
Table 2-127 Terminal Power Factor
Terminal Power Factor
19 inch Metal Chassis with Fan = <80

9.5 inch Plastic Chassis without Fan =<64
Item Power Factor
DTL-24D-1 TEL 0.8

DTL-8LD-1 TEL 0.8
BHA-L UNIT 2
ADA-L UNIT 2
APR-L UNIT DT300 series : 2
Dterm series i : 3
BCH-L (BK) UNIT 2
PSA-L UNIT 1.2
8LK-L UNIT 0
DCL-60-1 CONSOLE 2
ITL-320C-1 TEL 6
ITL-24D-1 TEL 4
ITL-12CG-3 TEL 4
ITL-12DG-3 TEL 4
ITL-2E-1 TEL 4
ITL-6DE-1 TEL 4
SLT (-24V) 0.8
SLT (-48V) 2
PGD(2)-U10 ADP 2
ITL factors are calculated using the GCD-ETIA blade.
Power requirements for the 9.5 chassis are the same as the
19 chassis.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-128 Maximum Number of Packages Installed
Maximum Number of Package Installed

Board
19 inch
(Power Factor) 9.5 inch 19 inch with
without 4 x 19 inch
with CCPU CCPU
CCPU
GCD-ETIA (2) 2 3 3 12
GCD-PVAA (1) 2 5 6 23
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
Any Blade
Related Features
None


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

for each blade. This program represents in the slot. Manual for a
different data depending on the blade installed more detailed
in the slot. Refer the SV9100 Programming description of the
Manual for a more detailed description of this 10-03-XX
program. programs.
90-34-01 Firmware Information Pkg Name The data varies depending on

List the package type and firmware for the the card in the slot.
packages installed.
90-34-02 Firmware Information Firmware Version The data varies depending on

Number the card in the slot.
View the package name and firmware for each

blade.
Operation
None

Issue 2.0
Description
A station user can perform programming functions. Speed Group Dialing and Function Keys are just two
features programmable from a station.
Conditions
Multiline terminals must be idle and Off-Hook and have entered the service code when
programming any function.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
None
Related Features
Code Restriction
One-Touch Calling

None
2-1548 User Programming Ability

Issue 2.0
Operation
None
User Programming Ability 2-1549

Issue 2.0
2-1550 User Programming Ability

Virtual Extensions
Description
Virtual Extensions are available software extensions on the Basic and Expanded Port Packages.
A Virtual Extension assigned to a line key can appear and ring on an individual station or multiple
V
stations and be used for outbound access.
Virtual Extensions (VE) are shared with Call Arrival (CAR) Keys. In virtual extension mode, the
key acts as a secondary extension. Up to 512 CAR/VE keys are provided.
Conditions
There are 512 available ports/Extensions shared between CAR keys and Virtual
Extensions.
The 512 available ports/Extensions are assigned per extension for CAR key mode
or Virtual Extension key mode.
More than one extension can share a Virtual Extension key.
An extension can have more than one Virtual Extension key assigned.
Assigning a Virtual Extension key of the extension the key is assigned on is not
supported.
Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy Virtual Extension key.
You cannot have a CAR key and Virtual Extension on the same telephone.
Virtual Extensions do not support the following features:
Barge-In
Conference
Reverse Voice Over
Tone Override
Voice Over
When a valid system station calls a Virtual Extension appearing on another station,
Voice and MW softkeys appear in the display of the calling station, but they do not
operate.
When talking on a Virtual Extension you cannot mute the handset.
Virtual Extensions 2-1551

Issue 2.0
Calls on Virtual Extension keys cannot be put in Personal Park if Program 15-18-01 is set to
Land on the key (1).
Virtual Extension Keys assigned as code 03 do not support Voice Mail Message Indication
on Line Keys.
Busy Virtual Extensions cannot be Tone overridden.
Class of service feature Program 20-11-20: No Call Back (transfer recall disable) is not
supported for calls from a physical extension to a virtual extension.
Also a default page can be defined for the DESI-Less terminal to change to when it goes
idle or when it has answered a call.
When a call is parked from a virtual extension, the virtual extension is released.
When parking a call from a virtual extension, Programs 15-02-21 and 15-18-01 must be set
to 1.
Park Group assignment is by terminal extension, not the virtual extension.
When a call parked from a virtual extension recalls, it will ring the terminal where the virtual
extension is programmed to, not the virtual extension key.
When an internal station-to-station call is made to a virtual extension, the name and
number of the calling party does not appear in the display of the station the virtual extension
resides on until the call is answered.
A door box cannot ring a virtual extension.
tone.
CCIS trunk pointed or transferred to a virtual that is call forwarded off premise will always
Calls made from Virtual Extensions will show up in SMDR as calls made from the physical
extension the VE resides on.
2-1552 Virtual Extensions

Issue 2.0
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment (command 15-09) will follow the ring assignment for the
Night Mode Group the virtual extension is assigned to (default Night Mode Group 1) and
not the Night Mode Group of the keyset the virtual is appearing on.
A special ringtone is provided when a pre-assigned extension places an Intercom call.
With SV9100 software, distinctive ringing on VE is supported which can distinguish
between external and internal calls. When Program 20-04-05 is set to On, an outside call
to VE follows the trunk incoming ringtone configured in Program 22-03-01 and Program 15-
02-02.
The incoming ringtone from a pre-assigned extension (set in Program 15-01-13) is limited
to calls to the actual extension, not the Virtual Extension. Incoming calls to the VE follows
Program 15-08-1 settings.
A virtual extension can display the caller ID of an internal caller (Callers station name is
displayed, if station name is not available the extension number is displayed). Also, a
virtual extension can now display the caller ID of an internal or external caller when the
virtual is not set to ring (Previously the virtual extension must be set to ring or CID is not
displayed).
Default Settings
Extensions 201~299 are the default for CAR/VE.
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-04-01 Virtual Extension Numbering Maximum of eight digits. Virtual Extension

Assign Extension Number for the Virtual Port No. 1 ~ 99 =
Extensions (1 ~ 512). Virtual Extension
Number
201 ~ 299
Virtual Extension
Port No. 100 ~
512 = No Setting
14-02-17 Analog Trunk Data Setup Sync. Ringing 0 = Disable 1

Enable or Disable ringing per trunk. 1 = Enable

Name 101

102, etc.

5 = Ring Tone 2

6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5

Set the tone (pitch) of the incoming extension 3 = Low
call ring for the extension port you are 4 = Ring Tone 1
programming. Also refer to Program 15-08.
5 = Ring Tone 2

6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Virtual Extension Access Mode (when idle 0 = DSS
Virtual Extension key pressed) 1 = OTG (Outgoing)
Determine whether an extension Virtual 2 = Ignore
Extension Key should be used as a DSS key to
the extension and for receiving calls (0),
answering incoming calls and ability to place
outgoing ICM or CO calls (1), or just receiving

incoming calls (2). If the key is used for
outgoing calls, the extension number of the key
must be a real extension or virtual extension
number. When the extension number of the
key is a real extension number, and the key is
pressed, the real extension cannot be used.
Assign if the phone uses the Toll Restriction 1 = Real Ext. (Real Extension
class of the VE (0) or the Real Extension when Class)
making outbound calls from the VE.

Assign Virtual Extension function keys on 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
Multiline telephones (code 03 + extension 751 by default) Manual for
number). 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
752 by default)
15-08-01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup 0 = Tone Pattern 1 0

When an extension or a virtual extension is 1 = Tone Pattern 2
call on that key.
For CAR keys, only tone pattern 1 can be Extension

used. The remaining patterns are not checked
5 = Tone Pattern 5
with this feature.
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8

Individually program an extension Virtual Ringing:
Extension key(s) to either Ring or Not Ring. 0 = Not Ring

1 = Ring
15-10-01 Virtual Incoming Extension Ring Tone Order 0 = Tone Pattern 1 Order 1 Pattern
Tone 2 = Pattern 3
3 = Pattern 4
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Individually program an extension Virtual 0 = Immediate Ring
Extension key(s) for Delayed Ringing (1) or 1 = Delayed Ring

Immediate Ringing (0).

Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode 1 = Land On the Key
Assign if a call to a VE Holds (1) on the VE or

Releases to the phone that answered the VE.

Display Mode when pacing a call on Virtual 1 = Actual Station Name
Extension Key
Define if calls to or from a Virtual Extension Key

display the Virtual Extension Key name or the
name of the extension where it resides.
15-18-03 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options 0 = No CLI info 0

Show CLI 1 = Show CLI info
When set to a 0, the caller ID of a trunk call/
station call pointed to a virtual extension will
not be displayed if the virtual extension is not
set to ring.
When set to a 1, the caller ID of a trunk call

pointed to a virtual extension WILL be
displayed if the virtual extension is not set to
ring. Station calls to a virtual that is not
assigned to ring will display the station name or
number if Program 15-18-04 is set to a 1.
15-18-04 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options 0 = Do not show 0

Show Internal Caller Information 1 = Show
When set to a 0, internal calls to the virtual
extension will not show the name or number of
the extension that is calling.
When set to 1, internal calls to the virtual

extension WILL show the name or number of
the extension that is calling if the virtual is
assigned to ring or if Program 15-18-03 is set to
a 1.
15-18-05 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options 0 = Normal Ring Cycle 0

One Ring 1 = One Ring
When set to a 0, the virtual extension follows
the normal ring cycle.
When set to a 1, the virtual extension will only
ring one time (the virtual extension must be first
set to ring in Program 15-08).

Event 1 = Enable

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


idle.
4 = Display page 4

a call.
4 = Display page 4
20-02-19 System Options for Multiline Telephones 0 = No 0

Virtual Extension Mode 1 = Yes
Set the mode of a virtual extension key that

appears on a DSS console.

20-04-05 System Options for Virtual Extensions 0 = Off 0

Ringtone Mode for Incoming to Virtual 1 = On
Extension
Assign distinctive ringtone to incoming Virtual
extension.

Assign the Extension to a Class of Service. Class of Service of Extensions 101 = Class 15
(1 ~ 15) All other
extension port =
Class 1


Service Code 752.


Virtual Extension by lifting the handset.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be Off for this
option to work.
20-15-03 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Internal Call 1 ~ 13 - Ringing Cycle 12

Define ringing cycle for incoming Internal calls.

Restriction)
22-03-01 Trunk Ring Tone Range 0 ~ 12 0

Select the ring tone range for the trunk. The (Ring Tone Pattern 1 ~ 4)
trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected (Melody 1 ~ Melody 5)
when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are (Ring Tone Pattern 5 ~ 8)
available.

Extensions (0 or 00 = Dont Care)
When an extension has a virtual extension on
Function Key, this program determines the
priority (1 ~ 4) for a Ring Group for
automatically answering ringing calls when the
handset is lifted. If (00) is selected for the Ring
Group, when the handset is lifted, the user can
answer a ringing call from any group.
Operation
To answer a call ringing a Virtual Extension:

1. Press the flashing Virtual Extension key.
- OR -
Go off-hook.
Program 20-10-08 needs to be set to on (1) for extension Class of Service.
To place a call to a Virtual Extension:

1. Go off-hook.
2. Dial the Virtual Extension, or press the Virtual Extension key.

Issue 2.0
To place a call from a Virtual Extension:

1. Press the Virtual Extension key.
2. Place an intercom call or dial a trunk access code to seize an outside line and place your call.
To program a Virtual Extension key on a telephone:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 752.
4. Dial 03.
6. Press Hold once for Immediate Ring (skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring).
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
8. Press Hold for a second time for Delayed Ring, or Skip to step 10.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
10. Press Speaker.

Issue 2.0
Voice Call Recording
Description
When using NEC DT 300 and DT 700 desktop terminals, telephone calls can be monitored, recorded
and stored. For DT 300 (TDM) terminals, the NEC 4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit VSR (Voice Security
Recorder) is used. For DT 700 (IP) terminals, the NEC SonicView IP Recorder is used.
Dterm Voice Security Recorder (VSR)
Description
The Dterm Voice Security Recorder is a USB device that taps across the digital extension pair of the
NEC telephone system allowing digital recording of the telephone users conversation. The file created is
saved either to the local PC or to a network location, depending on the application blade used. This
adapter is for use with IP or digital multiline terminals. It cannot be used to record VoIP phone
conversations in a Netlink or CCIS configuration.
Two options are available for playing back calls recorded by your VSR(s). The first is the Desktop Player
which is used by an individual user to play back their own archive of calls or to play back NEC Dterm
VSR calls stored on their PC or network. It easily manages calls from one storage location. It does not
offer many of the advanced functions of the VSR Manager, such as establishing preset shortcuts to any
number of storage folders for quick and easy access.
The second player option is the VSR Manager. Take your call recording environment to the next level
with NEC VSR application software. VSR Manager provides advanced visibility, access, retrieval, and
playback tools for the VSR Recorder administrators. It provides an intuitive interface for establishing
shortcuts to any number of storage folders and allows the supervisor to search across all storage folders
for specific call information such as User, Time/Date, Length of Call, etc. The application can be used to
access and manage VSR recordings whether created by the single port VSR or the 4-Port Digital Call
Logging Unit. VSR Manager is built on the robust Microsoft.net frame-work and manipulates large
volumes of recordings. It is a workhorse that delivers truly feature rich productivity tools in a familiar,
ergonomic and easy to use MS Office style interface.
These two players can be combined in any number of configurations in the company, providing control
and management where needed and simple playback in other locations.
2-1560 Voice Call Recording

Issue 2.0
Refer to the documentation included with the Dterm VSR (P/N 780275) for details on setting up and
using the Desktop Player.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or
record telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous
CAUTION with transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal
advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any
telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all
parties to a telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods
or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or
recording the telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions
The PC hosting Back Office should have the power save functionality turned off.
Encryption is only supported at 256-bit setting.
Does not support recording of VoIP phone conversations in a Netlink or CCIS configuration.
No Wireless terminal support.
Encryption Feature Requires VSR Manager or VSR Reporter for playback.
Network Port monitoring for IP Extensions.
Peer to Peer not supported.
VoIP calls placed on hold or conference will break into two call recordings.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
NEC DT300/DT700 Series Desktop Terminals Dterm VOICE SECURITY RECORDER (VSR)
4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit
PC Hardware and Software:
4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit

Pentium 4 processor
512 Mb RAM
Voice Call Recording 2-1561

Issue 2.0
One USB Controller Card for each four devices powered USB hubs can be used however,
no more than four devices should be connected to a USB Controller Card
An available PCI slot for each USB Controller Card
LAN connection for remote access to stored calls
NEC BackOffice Recorder software
Windows XP
Windows 7
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3





Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


extension.


exceeds 12 digits.
Operation
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual, Chapter 11, Section 11 Dterm Voice
Security Recorder (VSR) for detailed information.
REFERENCE

Issue 2.0
NEC SonicView IP Recorder (1.0)
Description
The NEC SonicView IP Recorder application is an easy-to-use yet powerful web-based call recording
solution. The SonicView software offers robust features designed specifically for business users who
want to make use of Enterprise call data for reporting, analysis and monitoring. The different
components that make up the SonicView application are:
Application Server
Database Server
Recording Engine
Network Infrastructure to Enable Call Recording
Web Server
The SonicView application uses the Apache Tomcat server as a web container, or web server. Apache
Tomcat implements the necessary Java Servlet and Java Server Pages (JSP) specifications from Sun
Microsystems. Thus, providing an environment for the SonicView application to run in conjunction with a
web server. It adds tools for configuration and management but can also be configured by editing
configuration files that are normally XML-formatted. Tomcat includes its own internal HTTP server.
Refer to the NEC IP Recorder SonicView User Guide and Installation Manual located on the AK
System PC Apps CD (P/N 670830) for additional Information.
REFERENCE
Database Server
The SonicView application uses PostgreSQL server as the database server for storing all the call
information captured from the network. The PostgreSQL database server can be implemented in a
straightforward manner as a separate node (on a network) dedicated to running database-management
software. This node provides an interface to client nodes (the end users of the SonicView application)
such that the same data is accessible to all nodes. The SonicView application interface allows users to
submit requests to the database server and retrieve call information. The database server manages the
processor-intensive work such as data manipulation, compilation, and optimization. It then, sends only
the final results back to the SonicView application.
Refer to the NEC IP Recorder SonicView User Guide and Installation Manual located on the AK System
PC Apps CD (P/N 670830) for additional Information.

Issue 2.0
Recording Engine
The SonicView application uses the recording engine component to sniff and record all call information
captured from the network. Typically, the recording engine should be installed on a server class machine
with a network card that interfaces with a managed switch. After installing the SonicView application
using the setup CD, the recording engine will not record any VoIP calls by default. To make this happen,
you must ensure that the necessary network infrastructure and configurations are in place. For a detailed
description of the network infrastructure required for call capture, refer to the Network Infrastructure
section.
To make the necessary configurations on the recording engine to enable call capturing, refer to
Configuring the Recorder subsection under the Administrative tasks section.
Refer to the NEC IP Recorder SonicView User Guide and Installation Manual located on the AK System
SonicView On-Demand Recording (ODR) Client
The SonicView On-Demand Recording client is a convenient tool to record and view calls as they
happen in real-time. This standalone desktop application can be downloaded and installed from the login
page of the main application. For instructions to download and install this client, refer to the NEC IP
Recorder SonicView installation and configuration guide.
CAUTION transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice
telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring
the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions
NEC IP Recorder SonicView - The PC hosting the recording engine component should be
on the same subnet as the PBX for it to capture calls. Unless this configuration is made, no
calls will be recorded.
NEC IP Recorder Sonic View - A Vista Master Administrator account (Administrator) is
required to install the application. The user must enable the Vista Master Administrator
account and log into this account to perform the installation. The Apache Tomcat web
server, Apache Derby Database server and Recording Engine will not be installed correctly
in non-master administrator accounts.
NEC IP Recorder Sonic View - A single-/multi-port managed switch with port mirroring
setup is mandatory to enable call capturing over the network. The server hosting the
recording engine should be connected to a managed switch (customer provided) such that
the PBXs traffic mirrored to the port on which the recording engine server is connected.

Issue 2.0
Default Settings
Not Installed
System Availability
Terminals
NEC DT700 (IP) Terminals NEC SonicView IP Recorder
Hardware:
4 GB RAM
250 GB of free hard disk space (30000 hours of continuous recording)
SVGA monitor 1024 X 768 resolution
Network Interface Card (NIC)

Windows Vista Business Edition with SP1
Recording Server Requirements

Hardware:
Pentium 1.6 GHz core 2 duo
A minimum of 2 GB RAM
Application and Recording Server Requirements (both features on same server)

Hardware:
Pentium 2.66 GHz core 2 duo

Issue 2.0
Client Side Requirements:
A minimum of 512 MB RAM
Adobe Flash player plug-in version 9 or above
Adobe Acrobat Reader 7 or above (if client needs to view/edit reports)
Microsoft Excel 2000 (if client needs to view/edit reports)
Supported Internet Browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 and above
Mozilla Firefox version 2.0 or above
Google Chrome
SV9100 CPU License (NEC IP Recorder SonicView)
Table 2-129 IP Recorder Basic Licenses
670863 LKS-IP Recorder Basic Pkg-LIC
Feature Code Quantity Included Comments
3200 4 Stations Provides the ability to have four stations, one

1 Supervisor Supervisor and up to four On-Demand Recording
4 ODRs (On-Demand Recording) clients.
670864 LKS-IP Recorder Basic Port Add-on 4-LIC
3202 4 Additional Stations Provides the ability to record four additional stations
over the initial four received with 670863.
670865 LKS-IP Recorder Basic Port Add-on 1-LIC
3202 1 Additional Station Provides the ability to record one additional station

Issue 2.0
Table 2-129 IP Recorder Basic Licenses (Continued)
67082 LKS-IP Recorder Basic SUPV Add-on 1-LIC
3201 1 Additional Supervisor Provides one additional Supervisor Login.
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3





Peer mode.


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


extension.


exceeds 12 digits.
Operation
Refer to the SonicView User Guide for operational details.

Refer to the following manuals for detailed information regarding the NEC SonicView IP
REFERENCE Recorder:
NEC SonicView IP Recorder Installation and Setup Guide
NEC SonicView IP Recorder Application User Guide

Issue 2.0
NEC SonicView Recorder (TDM and IP) (2.0)
Description
The NEC SonicView Recorder application is an easy-to-use yet powerful web-based call recording
solution use for both IP and TDM calls. The SonicView software offers robust features designed
specifically for business users who want to make use of Enterprise call data for reporting, analysis and
monitoring. The different components that make up the SonicView application are:
Application Server
Database Server
Recording Engine
Network Infrastructure to Enable Call Recording
Web Server
The SonicView application uses the Apache Tomcat server as a web container, or web server. Apache
Tomcat implements the necessary Java Servlet and Java Server Pages (JSP) specifications from Sun
Microsystems. Thus, providing an environment for the SonicView application to run in conjunction with a
web server. It adds tools for configuration and management but can also be configured by editing
configuration files that are normally XML-formatted. Tomcat includes its own internal HTTP server.
Refer to the NEC SonicView Recorder User Guide and Installation Manual located on the AK System
REFERENCE
Database Server
The SonicView application uses PostgreSQL server as the database server for storing all the call
information captured from the network. The PostgreSQL database server can be implemented in a
straightforward manner as a separate node (on a network) dedicated to running database-management
software. This node provides an interface to client nodes (the end users of the SonicView application)
such that the same data is accessible to all nodes. The SonicView application interface allows users to
submit requests to the database server and retrieve call information. The database server manages the
processor-intensive work such as data manipulation, compilation and optimization. It then, sends only
the final results back to the SonicView application.
Refer to the NEC SonicView Recorder User Guide and Installation Manual located on the AK System
REFERENCE

Issue 2.0
Recording Engine
The SonicView application uses the recording engine component to sniff and record all call information
captured from the network. Typically, the recording engine should be installed on a server class machine
with a network card that interfaces with a managed switch. After installing the SonicView application
using the setup CD, the recording engine will not record any VoIP calls by default. To make this happen,
you must ensure that the necessary network infrastructure and configurations are in place. For a detailed
description of the network infrastructure required for call capture, refer to the Network Infrastructure
section.
To make the necessary configurations on the recording engine to enable call capturing, refer to
Configuring the Recorder subsection under the Administrative tasks section.
Refer to the NEC IP SonicView Recorder User Guide and Installation Manual located on the AK
System PC Apps CD (P/N 670830) for additional Information.
REFERENCE
SonicView On-Demand Recording (ODR) Client
The SonicView On-Demand Recording client is a convenient tool to record and view calls as they
happen in real-time. This standalone desktop application can be downloaded and installed from the login
page of the main application. For instructions to download and install this client, refer to the NEC IP
Recorder SonicView installation and configuration guide.
CAUTION transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice
telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring
the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions
If NEC Sonic View IP Recorder 1.0 has been installed previously, then the SonicView IP
Recorder 1.0 must be uninstalled prior to installing NEC SonicView recorder 2.0.
The PC hosting the recording engine component should be on the same subnet as the PBX
for it to capture calls. Unless this configuration is made, no calls will be recorded.
A Vista Master Administrator account (Administrator) is required to install the
application. The user must enable the Vista Master Administrator account and log into this
account to perform the installation. The Apache Tomcat web server, Apache Derby
Database server and Recording Engine will not be installed correctly in non-master
administrator accounts.
A single-/multi-port managed switch with port mirroring setup is mandatory to enable call
cap-turing over the network. The server hosting the recording engine should be connected
to a managed switch (customer provided) such that the PBXs traffic mirrored to the port on
which the recording engine server is connected.

Issue 2.0
Recording Digital terminals is now possible after adding the NEC-4 port digital call logging
device via USB to the system that has the Digital recorder installed. See the SonicView
Installation and Configuration guide for detailed information.
Recording of internal Digital calls will result in no direction, name or number indication. Only
the Receiving Terminal will show name and number. Recording of Digital terminals that
have been assigned to trunk configuration will result in no number indication. Outgoing or
incoming trunk calls with a Digital terminal will not show direction.
Recording both IP and Digital terminals on the same server requires an additional NIC
(network interface card).
Default Settings
Not Installed
System Availability
Terminals
NEC DT700 series (IP) Terminals NEC SonicView Recorder
NEC DT300 series (Digital) Terminals- NEC SonicView Recorder
Only Application
Hardware:

Windows Server 2008, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003 with SP2, Windows Vista Business
Edition with SP2, Windows XP Professional with SP3.

Issue 2.0
Only Recording Server

Hardware:

Application & Recording Server (both components on same server) Hardware:


Client Side Requirements

Adobe Acrobat Reader 7 or above (if client needs to view\edit reports)
Microsoft Excel 2000 (if client needs to view\edit reports)
Supported Internet browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 and above
Mozilla Firefox version 3.2 or above
Google Chrome 3.0 or above
Digital Terminal Recording Requirements
NEC 4-Port Digital Call Logging Hardware via USB.

Issue 2.0
Related Features
None
Table 2-130 SV9100 CPU License (NEC SonicView Recorder)
670863 LKS-Recorder Basic Pkg-LIC
3200 4 Stations Provides the ability to have four stations, one Supervisor
1 Supervisor Login and up to four On-Demand Recording clients.
4 ODRs (On-Demand Recording)
670864 LKS-Recorder Basic Port Add-on 4-LIC
3202 4 Additional Stations Provides the ability to record four additional stations over
the initial four received with 670863.
3202 1 Additional Station Provides the ability to record one additional station over
670862 LKS-Recorder Basic SUPV Add-on 1-LIC

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3




Peer mode.



extension.


exceeds 12 digits.
Operation

Refer to the following manuals for detailed information regarding the NEC
REFERENCE SonicView Recorder:
NEC SonicView Recorder Installation and Setup Manual
NEC SonicView Recorder Application User Guide

Issue 2.0
NEC SonicView Recorder (2.7)
Description
The NEC SonicView Recorder application is an easy-to-use yet powerful web-based call recording
solution. The SonicView software offers robust features designed specifically for business users who
want to make use of Enterprise call data for reporting, analysis and monitoring.
Conditions
Table 2-131 Known Limitations
ID Item Description Comments
1 Installation - Windows Vista & 7 Specific Restrictions
1.1 A Windows Vista, Windows 7 Professional/Ultimate The user must enable the Windows Vista, Windows 7
Master Administrator account (Administrator) is required Professional/Ultimate Master Administrator account and log
to install the application. into this account to perform the installation. The Apache
Tomcat web server, Apache Derby Database server and
Recording Engine will not be installed correctly in non-master
administrator accounts.
1.2 A Windows 7 Professional/Ultimate, Program Compatibility During SonicView installation on Windows 7 Professional/
Assistant. Ultimate, you will see Program Compatibility Assistant
window for StopRemoval LicenseServer.EXE, so user
should select This Program is installed Correctly option to
proceed further.
2 Network Infrastructure dependencies
2.1 A single\multi port managed switch with port mirroring The server hosting the recording engine should be
setup is mandatory to enable call capturing over the connected to a managed switch such that the PBXs traffic
network. mirrored to the port on which the recording engine server is
connected.
3 Known Limitations of the Solution
3.1 Outbound and internal calls are recorded even if the called For example, if a call is established between STA131 and
party does not answer the call. Such recordings include the 503 429 8643 even if the outbound party does not answer
DTMF tones as well as the phone ringing activities. the call, the recording will begin and show in the application.
If the user plays the recorded audio, he\she will be able to
hear the DTMF and the phone ring tones.
3.2 If an extension number is the same as a trunk line number, For example, if a you have a trunk number 101 and an
then calls to and from this extension show as an Outbound extension number 101 then the call details are shown as:
and Inbound call respectively.
Direction Ext Agent Name Name Number
In 101 STA101 STA131 131
Out 131 STA131 STA101 101
3.3 When a party drops and rejoins a conference, the new call For example, if conference calls are established between
will show as a separate call. three parties STA 130, STA 131 and STA 132. If STA 130
drops from the conference, and reconnects back in to the
same conference again, then technically this is identified as a
new conference call.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-131 Known Limitations (Continued)
3.4 Answering multiple calls within intervals of 5 seconds

causes the calls to display with incorrect caller ID.
3.5 Participants details are missing in the conference. For example, if a In call is landed on 101, later 101 consulted
with 102 and initiated 3-party conference then the call details
are shown as:
Type Direction Ext Agent Name Number

Name
Conf Int 102 STA102 STA101 101
Conf Int 101 STA101 STA102 102
Int 102 STA102 STA101 101
Int 101 STA101 STA102 102
In 101 STA103 Unavailable 5034391111
3.6 When a call is being transferred multiple times be-tween For example, if a In call is landed on VoIP extension number
VOIP and Digital extension, the recording will show 130, consulted and transferred through multiple extension
Duplicate calls for the last-1 VoIP extension. (102, 106, 103 & 131). Assume last-1 VoIP extension is 131,
then the call details are shown as:
Type Direction Ext Duration Name Number
Trf In 131 01:12:00 STA131 5034391111
Trf In 131 01:12:00 STA131 5034391111
Int 103 00:02:00 STA103 105
Int 106 00:06:10 STA106 107
Int 102 00:05:00 STA102 104
In 130 00:02:00 STA130 5034391111
3.7 Configure License Server tool to modify PBX IP address, Known issues with modifying the Web Server IP address &
Port, MAC address, Web Server IP address & Port will not Port from Configure License Server tool.
support modifying the Web Server IP address & Port.
3.8 License Server drops the license after making configuration Scenario where you have configured the primary NIC card in
changes on secondary NIC card. the application to capture the licenses from SV9100 phone
system. Assume you have got the licenses and are
registered with Primary NIC card. Sometimes later if you
uninstall/install/modify secondary NIC card that was
configured for another recorder will result in license loss from
the primary NIC card. Recommended solution to get licenses
back is to reconfigure correct primary NIC card in the
application.
3.9 EXTERNAL calls posted from Digital Recovery service Known limitation with NEC 4-Port Digital Call Logging
shows direction as INTERNAL instead of INBOUND or Hardware device. i.e., it is unable to capture right direction of
OUTBOUND. the call.
3.10 VoIP Recovery: Outbound/ Inbound call that has Hold and Outbound/ Inbound call that has Hold and Un-hold scenarios
Un-hold scenarios will split single call in to two different experience a SonicView recorder crash will recover this call,
calls when posted through Recovery service. but when it is posted to an application you will observe two
calls, one call will have recording till Hold and another call is
from where you Un-hold the call.

Issue 2.0
3.11 Recording Rules: The rules perform exact match for dialed If a recording rule is made for 503 429 8643 and the user
number in outgoing calls. dials 503 429 86431111 instead, then the call will not be
captured in the application even if it was established via the
PBX.
3.12 Recording Rules: The application will not permit creation of You may create a rule for STA 131, and enable the rule.
more than one active Recording Rule per extension. However, if another rule is created for STA 131, then this rule
will be disabled by default. The user will have to disable the
first rule to be able to enable the newer rule.
3.13 The IP Recorder and\or Digital Recorder should be The user will have to restart the SonicView VoIP Recorder
restarted to apply the configuration changes to new or the SonicView Digital Recorder service to apply changes
recordings. in the Recorder Configuration and Recording Rules
sections to the new recordings.
3.14 Default recording rule for Call Duration: Default minimum The default minimum call duration threshold value is 20
threshold for recording calls is 20 seconds. seconds; therefore you may not see calls shorter than this
duration show up in the application. The value of this
threshold can be changed using the Administration Console.
3.15 Recording Rules based on caller & dialed numbers will not Recording rules for outbound calls from UC Desktop Suite
work for UC Desktop Suite calls. should be created with the * wildcard or dialed numbers
prefixed with the trunk access code to work correctly.
Similarly, recording rules for inbound calls to UC Desktop
Suite should be created with the * wildcard or caller ID to
work correctly.
3.16 The Recording Engine will not record calls over a SIP Not supported in this release.
trunk.
3.17 Statistics The Extension-Duration statistic will not display An area chart cannot be displayed for the Extension-Duration
when only one call is being displayed in the call information statistic for one data point as an area chart requires at least 2
grid. data points (or calls) to render.
3.18 Advanced Player Controls: The transport controls in The rewind, forward, pause controls and dragging the slider
media player in the application do not work as intended for may cause the stream to stop playing and not resume.
short duration call recordings.
3.19 Live monitor: The automatic refresh interval for recordings It is recommend that the user performs a manual Refresh
using Live Monitor should not be very short. This may when more than 500 calls are displayed at a time in the call
degrade the application performance in a high call volume recording grid (WorkArea of the application).
environment.
3.20 The Do not record Calls lesser than option in the If this value is set to 30 seconds, then a call recorded from
recorder configuration will not apply to calls recorded using the On-Demand client will be saved even if it is less than 30
the On-Demand recording client application. seconds in duration.
3.21 When a call recording is initiated from the ODR client and If a user initiates a call using the ODR client and closes the
the client is closed, the recording will continue till the call is client without clicking on the stop icon, then a prompt warning
terminated. the user about recordings being terminated comes up.
However, irrespective of the user action, the complete call is
recorded and saved.
3.22 Supervised transfers will show, as linked calls in the Blind transfer calls will show as independent calls in the
application but blind transfers will not be linked. SonicView application.

Issue 2.0
3.23 When the ODR toolbar experiences network problem, the For example, if a call is established between STA131 and
active call during this process may end up in losing the call 503 429 8643 an outbound party and user experiences
information. network problem, the respective call will end up in showing
incomplete information in the SonicView application and
also user cannot play back this call.
3.24 Initiating Outbound and internal calls from ODR toolbar For example, if a call is established between STA131 and
able to record and playback calls even though they were 503 429 8643 even if the outbound party does not answer
not actually established. the call, clicking on ODRs recording button at STA131 will
record the voice file of the ODR user.
3.25 When the ODR toolbar experiences SonicView recorder For example, if a Out call is initiated by extension 101 then
crashing due to unexpected circumstances, you will the SonicView Recorder crash in between and now call
observe TWO calls, one call with 00:00:00 duration and details are shown as:
another call with actual duration (i.e, recovered call during
engine crash). Direction Ext Duration Name Number
Out 101 00:00:00 STA101 5034392222
Out 101 02:17:40 STA101 5034392222
3.26 The SonicView application will fail to display licensing For instance if the Recorder MAC address entered during the
information correctly if the Recorder MAC Address entered installation is 00-0F-04-05-6D and the MAC address entered
during the installation and in the Recorder Configuration in the Recorder Configuration screen is 000f04056d (note
screen in the application are entered differently. that the alphabets are in lower casing) in this case, the
licensing information will not be fetched from the PBX and
the application will remain unlicensed.
3.27 The SonicView application will register license details If license is registered to either VoIP or Digital recorder, then
either against the VoIP or the Digital recorder depending on only port details belonging to registered recorder will be
which MAC address is being used for licensing. displayed in the License screen. But the calls between VoIP
and Digital extensions will record as intended to record.
3.28 Re-installation over an existing installation is not supported. Installing the Hybrid Installer over an existing Hybrid recorder
installation will result in a corrupt installation and unusable
system.
3.29 Digital recorder: Recordings details for TDM/Digital For example, if a you have a TDM/Digital extension 101 that
extensions will not show the call direction. was part of an Outbound/Inbound/Internal call then the call
details are shown as:
Direction Ext Agent Name Number

Name
101 STA101 Unavailable Unavailable
extensions will not show the Caller ID for Inbound calls. was part of an Inbound call then the call details are shown
as:

Name

Issue 2.0
extensions will not show the Calling Party number for was part of an Outbound call then the call details are shown
Outbound calls. as:

Name
3.32 Digital recorder: Linking of Trf/Conf calls and call types for Linking of Trf/Conf calls and call types will not support for
TDM/Digital extensions in SV9100 phone system. TDM/Digital extensions. The entire Trf/Conf call details will
show in a single call.
3.33 Schedule Reports will not Play the records from EXCEL Schedule Reports will show Play link, if you have configured
sheet. SonicView reports to be delivered as EXCEL sheet. But user
cannot able to play the recording using this option.
3.34 The Recording Engine will not record calls over a NAT Not supported in this release.
environment in case of SV8300 Phone system.
4 Required Configuration\Settings
4.1 The server hosting the recording engine software should be

configured to have the same subnet as that of the PBX.
4.2 Silence activity detection should be disabled in the PBX. If Silence activity detection is enabled, then the recorded
calls will have overlapping voice channels and will sound as
though both the parties involved in the call are speaking
simultaneously.
4.3 Recording internal calls between IP Telephones: Peer to Peer to Peer Media (RTP Traffic) must be disabled on all the
Peer Media (RTP Traffic) must be disabled if a single port- registered telephones to force their RTP traffic to traverse via
mirroring switch is used. the PBX. Alternatively, a managed Ethernet switch that
supports the ability to mirror many ports to a single port as
well as writing from the mirrored port is required.
4.4 Archiving data to a remote destination will not work unless If a user is trying to archive calls to a system other than the
the database server service (PostgreSQL or Microsoft SQL system on which PostgreSQL or Microsoft SQL server is
server as the case may be) has domain credentials to installed, then the archive file will not be created unless the
write to the particular location in question. database service has domain credentials to write to the
remote location.
4.5 Application supports recording only for calls that involve at Only calls where at least one of the participating members is
least one VoIP/Digital extension. a VoIP/Digital extension will be recorded in the present
release.
Default Settings
Not Installed

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
NEC DT700 series (IP) Terminals NEC SonicView Hybrid Recorder
NEC DT300 series (Digital) Terminals- NEC SonicView Hybrid Recorder
Ensure the following hardware and software requirements are met before starting the SonicView
installation:
These recommendations are to be used as a minimum requirements guideline only. Actual requirements may
vary based on specific needs such as recording call volume, number of ports to be recorded and number of
remote locations etc.
Minimum System Requirements
Table 2-132 System Minimum Requirements
Server Hardware
Recommended Operating Systems
Recording Capacity Specifications
(See Note 2)
(See Note 1)
Up to 40 Stations 1 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Up to 100 Stations 2 1 & 4 (Windows Server OS)
Up to 256 Stations 3 1 & 4 (Windows Server OS)
Greater than 256 Stations Consult with NEC 1 & 4 (Windows Server OS)
Digital 04s (up to 3 devices per PC) 1 1, 2, 4, 5
Digital 16s (up to 2 devices per PC) 1 1, 2, 4, 5
Note 1: Refer to Table 2-133 Server Hardware Matrix for Hardware Specifications ID.
Note 2: Refer to Table 2-136 Supported Operating Systems on page 2-1584 for Operating Systems ID.

Issue 2.0
Hardware
Server:
Table 2-133 Server Hardware Matrix
ID Hardware Specifications
Processor Intel Core 2 Duo (2.8 GHz or higher)

Harddrive 200 GB hard disk space (138 hours of recording per GB)
1
Other Refer to Table 2-134 Common Hardware Requirements on page
2-1582
Processor Quad Core XEON 2.0 GHz (dual processors preferred)
Harddrive 500 GB hard disk space (138 hours of recording per GB)
2
2-1582
Processor Dual Processor Quad Core XEON 2.4 GHz
Harddrive 1TB hard disk space (138 hours of recording per GB)
3
2-1582
Common:
Table 2-134 Common Hardware Requirements
Hardware Specification
RAM Minimum 4 GB RAM or higher, 16 GB where WIndows

Server OS is used
Ethernet Card 2 NICs (Gigabit Ethernet Cards)
Sound Card General MIDI capable sound card
Monitor/Display SVGA monitor 1024 X 768 resolution
USB (only with Digital Devices) 1.1 or 2.0 One dedicated USB port per device
USB Controller (only with Digital 16 Devices) 1 Dedicated USB Controller per device

Issue 2.0
NICs (2 Required):
One (1) Network Interface card (NIC) is sufficient provided the Managed Switch performing
port mirroring supports both Ingress and Egress traffic on the mirrored port. Two (2)
Network Interface cards (NIC) are required in case of Hybrid installation (one for
associating with IP Recorder and other NIC for Digital Recorder) OR if the Managed Switch
does not support bi-directional (Ingress and Egress) traffic on the mirrored port.
When using two NIC cards, only one of the NIC cards should be configured to connect to the
LAN (with Gateway and DNS). The other NIC should only be configured to connect to the
mirrored port on the Managed Switch and can be associated with the IP Recorder. When used in
Hybrid mode to record both Digital and IP stations, the NIC connected to the LAN can be
associated with the Digital Recorder.
When using SonicView with Digital Recorder units (VSR Hardware) for Digital Station
recording, mixing different phone models within a single installation of SonicView is not
recommended.
The PC and Digital Recorder units need to be installed within at least six feet of the pbx/mdf/
tap points. This is to avoid distortion in the recordings when not installed to specification.
SonicView Supervisor/Agent Recommendations:
Table 2-135 Supervisor/Agent Studio PC Recommendations
Specification
System Minimums
(See Note 1)
Processor Intel Pentium 4 class machine

RAM Minimum 2 GB RAM or higher
Harddrive 20 GB hard disk space
Ethernet Card 1 NIC (10/100 or GB)
Sound Card General MIDI capable sound card
Monitor Display SVGA monitor 1024 X 768 resolution
Adobe Acrobat Reader 7 or above (to view PDF reports)
Microsoft Excel 2000 (to view\edit reports)
Software Requirements
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or above, Mozilla Firefox
version 3.0 or above; Google Chrome 3.0 or above, Opera 4 or
above, Safari 10.01 or above
. NET 3.0 and above
Operating Systems 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Note 1: Refer to Table 2-136 Supported Operating Systems for Operating Systems ID.

Issue 2.0
Operating System:
Table 2-136 Supported Operating Systems
Operating System ID
Windows Server 2008 with SP1 1

Windows 7 Professional 2
Windows Vista Business Edition with SP2 3
Windows Server 2003 with SP2 4
Windows XP Professional with SP3 5
Database:
Table 2-137 Supported Databases
Database Type
32-bit/64-bit Microsoft SQL Server 2008

32-bit/64-bit Microsoft SQL Server 2005
32-bit PostgreSQL Server 8.3 only
CPU Licenses:
Table 2-138 SV9100 CPU License (NEC SonicView Recorder)
670863 LKS-Recorder Basic Pkg-LIC
3200 4 Stations Provides the ability to have four stations, one

1 Supervisor Supervisor Login and up to four On-Demand Recording
4 ODRs (On-Demand Recording) clients.
3202 4 Additional Stations Provides the ability to record four additional stations
3202 1 Additional Station Provides the ability to record one additional station over
670862 LKS-Recorder Basic SUPV Add-on 1-LIC

Issue 2.0
Table 2-138 SV9100 CPU License (NEC SonicView Recorder) (Continued)
670889 LKS-Recorder Call Scoring 1-LIC
3204 1 IP Recorder Call Scoring Provides one IP recorder call scoring.
670990 LKS-Recorder Automated Reports 1-LIC
3205 1 IP Recorder Automated Provides one IP recorder automated reporting.

Reporting
670991 LKS-Recorder Add On 256 Port-LIC
3204 1 256 Port Add-on to Record 256 Provides one additional 256 port to record 256 stations.
Stations
Related Features
None

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-02-10 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID Trunks 1 ~400 0





Peer mode.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3



extension.


exceeds 12 digits.
Operation

Refer to the following manuals for detailed information regarding the NEC SonicView Recorder:
REFERENCE NEC SonicView Recorder Installation and Setup Manual
NEC SonicView Recorder Application User Guide

Issue 2.0
Description
The system provides telephone users with comprehensive Voice Mail features. Voice Mail ends the
frustration and cost of missed calls, inaccurate written messages and telephone tag. This frees busy
receptionists and secretaries for more productive work.
External voice mail requires available analog station ports based on the number of voice mail ports
connected.
Integrated voice mail enhances the telephone system with the following features:
An extension user can forward their calls to Voice Mail. Once forwarded, calls to the extension
connect to that extension mailbox. The caller can leave a message in the mailbox instead of calling
back later. Forwarding can occur for all calls immediately, for unanswered calls or only when the
extension is busy. When a user transfers a call to an extension forwarded to Voice Mail, the call
waits for the Delayed Call Forwarding time before routing to the called extension mailbox. This
gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the call instead of having it go directly to the
mailbox.
Leaving a Message
Voice Mail lets a multiline terminal extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is
unanswered, busy or in Do Not Disturb. The caller can press their Voice Mail key to leave a
message in the called extension mailbox. There is no need to call back later.
By using Transfer to Voice Mail, a multiline terminal extension user can Transfer a call to the users
mailbox.
Voice Mail Queuing
busy, calls trying to get to the voice mail are placed in queue. As the voice mail ports become available,
are handled as though no voice mail queuing feature is enabled. The calls either access voice mail if a
port is available or they receive a busy signal.

NOTE
Voice Mail Integration (Analog) 2-1587

Issue 2.0
MSG Key will Operate as Voice Mail Key
The system enhances a telephone MSG key function when connected to a system which has voice mail
installed. When an extension receives a voice mail, the MSG key can be used to check the number of
messages in voice mail, or call the voice mail to listen to the messages.
Analog Voice Mail Protocol Leading and Trailing Digits Assignment
The Analog Voice Mail Protocol Leading Digits (chassis to VM) and the Trailing Digits format can be
changed.
The following chart illustrates the input data for Program 45-04-01~Program 45-04-09 (Voice Mail Digit
Add Assignment) based on the setting in Program 45-01-15 (Analog Voice Mail Protocol Selection) and
Program 45-01-17 (Reply Mailbox Number). If Program 45-01-15 is set to 0 it uses the Fixed Memory
Location for the Leading Digits or, if set to 1 it uses Program 45-04-01~Program 45-04-09 for the
Leading Digits. If Program 45-01-17 is set to 0, it does not have the calling party in the Trailing Digits.

NOTE
The default values for Program 45-04-01~Program 45-04-09 are not assigned.
Use the chart below to determine what leading and trailing digits are sent to the Analog Voice Mail
System.
Program 45-01-15 Program 45-01-15 Program 45-01-15

(0 = Fixed) (1 = Program) (1=Program)
Program Description
(1=Yes or 0=No) (1=Yes) (0=No)
45-04-01 - Remote Logon 1XXX Up to four digits + Up to four digits + Remote Log-On (Internal)
(Internal) XXX XXX
Up to four digits Internal call to VM from
Default not assigned extension XXX.
User has not indicated intent to
enter mail box.
45-04-02 - Direct Logon #XXX Up to four digits + Up to four digits + Direct Log-On
Up to four digits XXX XXX
Default not assigned Connect user to mail box for
extension XXX.
45-04-03 - Transfer 2YYY Up to four digits + Up to four digits + Transfer Message
Message 2XXXYYY YYY YYY
Or User is transferring a call to VM
Up to four digits + Record a message to be placed
XXXYYY in mail box of extension YYY.
Record Message for Called
Extension (QVM)
Record a message to be placed
in mail box of extension YYY.
Up to four digits
Default not assigned Store source extension number
XXX for automatic reply feature.
2-1588 Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

Issue 2.0

(0 = Fixed) (1 = Program) (1=Program)
Program Description
(1=Yes or 0=No) (1=Yes) (0=No)
45-04-04 - Forward-All 3UUUZZZ Up to four digits + Up to four digits + Forward-All

UUUZZZ ZZZ
Extension or Trunk UUU that
called extension ZZZ and was
Up to four digits forwarded to the Voice Mail Box
Default not assigned
of extension ZZZ.
45-04-05 - Forward-Busy 4UUUZZZ Up to four digits + Up to four digits + Forward-Busy
UUUZZZ ZZZ
of extension ZZZ.
45-04-06 - Forward RNA 5UUUZZZ Up to four digits + Up to four digits + Forward RNA
UUUZZZ ZZZ
of extension ZZZ.
45-04-07 - Remote Logon 6TTT Up to four digits + Up to four digits + Remote Log-on
TTT TTT
External call to Voice Mail from
Trunk TTT.
Up to four digits Play welcome greeting and
connect user to prompt.
45-04-08 - Conversation 8NNN Up to four digits + Up to four digits + Conversation Recording
Recording NNN NNN
Up to four digits Record a message to be placed
Default not assigned in voice mail box of extension
NNN.
45-04-09 - Clear Down 9999 Up to four digits Up to four digits Clear down string.
String
Up to four digits Terminate
= If leading digits are blanks, nothing will be sent to the Analog VM as integration.
Conditions
Ring Group calls do not follow extension call forwarding to voice mail.
Only one Voice Mail system can be installed in an SV9100 system (Analog or Digital, but
not both in same system). This restriction is because only one Department Group can be
assigned for Voice Mail.
If installing an Analog Voice Mail System, any Analog station port (Single line telephone
port) can be assigned to support the Analog Voice Mail system. With an Expanded Port
Package, the SV9100 supports up to 176 Analog station ports (22 x 8 ports = 176).
If installing a InMail system (In-Skin product), an Analog station port (Single line telephone
port) can be assigned to support the sending of DTMF tones and Disconnect Signal to
support a Fax server or other like products.

Issue 2.0
When using Programmed (45-01-15 = 1) integration and 45-04-XX is blank, no trailing

digits are sent. You can allow only the trailing digits to be sent by setting 45-05-XX to 1.
Stutter Dial Tone is supported to Single Line Telephones for Voice Mail Message Waiting.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
GCD-4LCA (4-Port main blade)
GPZ-4LCA (4-Port daughter board)
GCD-8LCA (8-Port main blade)
GPZ-8LCE (8-Port daughter board)
Related Features
Barge-In
Caller ID
Hold
Message Waiting
One-Touch Calling
Transfer

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
(0 or 1). 2 = Trunk Only (Extensions)
(Trunks)
In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver
Circuit/Resource

for every 10 devices that use them.
receiver for every five devices that use them. (Common)
When PZ-BS10
is installed, 81 ~
144 are available
the Voice Mail. The extensions are assigned to

the group in Program 16-02-01.

Operation) Set Message Waiting Indication 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Assign a Service Code to set a Message digits

Waiting light from an Analog Voice Mail port.

Indication digits
Assign a Service Code to cancel a Message
Waiting light from an Analog Voice Mail port.

key . If set as a Message key, the user can

press the key to call the voice mail only when
they have new messages. If set as a Voice Mail
key, it functions as a normal Voice Mail key.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Select the Message Waiting flash pattern for 4 = Cycle 4
the station that set the Message Waiting 5 = Cycle 5
reminder. 6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

Select the Message Waiting flash pattern for 4 = Cycle 4
the station that receives the Message Waiting 5 = Cycle 5
reminder. 6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

Select the color of the large LED when a voice

mail message is waiting at the extension.

Select the cycle method that the large LED 3 = Cycle 3
Waiting set to an extension. 5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7




Caller ID Function For External Module 1 = Enable
Set to 0 when voice mail is used or the
integration code for the disconnect function is
incorrect.

Special DTMF Protocol Send 1 = Yes
Determine whether or not to send the extension
number of the phone forwarded to the

extension when Program 15-03-03 is set to 1
and not in the VM group.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

followed by:
extension.
(Optional) Assign a Voice Mail Record key to an
extension (code 78).
(Optional) Use a Call Redirect key (49) to allow
a user to transfer a call to another extension or
voice mail without answering the call.

Department Name

Groups.

Routing can be either circular (cycles to all

phones in a group) or priority (cycles to the
highest priority first).

Call) busy)
busy Department Group member. Intercom busy department member routes
callers to the extension can either hear busy or to idle member)

route to the first available department number.
This occurs only for direct calls to the
extension, not the Department number
assigned in Program 11-07.
last extension in the department group. Hunting
is stopped or circular search continues.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Determine whether calls ringing a Department
Group should ring all extensions in the group
simultaneously automatically or manually when

using the service code defined in Program
11-12-09. When set to 1, only ICM and DID
calls ring all stations in the Department Group.
Set the STG Withdraw Mode for each

department group.


transferred.

Set the time a call rings a Department Group



Answer
16-02-01 Department Group Assignment for Department Groups 1 ~ 64 Default = All

number and the extension priority when the Group 1 with
group is called. priority in port
Port 256 priority
= 256


system trunks.

For a busy single line (500/2500) telephone, set 794
the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk Service Code 654 is for Live

call. The default setting should be used. Recording at SLT (Program
11-12-53).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

mail extensions. You should use COS 14 for all (1 ~ 15) All other
time modes. extension port =
Class 1


Call Forward All.


Call Forward when Busy.

Unanswered
Call Forward when Unanswered.


Call Forward with Both Ringing.



Service) Call Forwarding Off Premise 1 = On

up Call Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.



(Incoming)

(Outgoing)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

(Bypass Call)
Call Forwarding/DND Override.


off-hook signals.



Message Waiting.

Monitored
Turn Off or On an extension user ability to be

on ICM Call



Barge-In on calls.

Changed



Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-02-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Incoming Type 0 = Normal 0

Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
There is one item for each Mode. When using VRS installed)
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding the trunk must be 2 = DISA
set to 0. 3 = DID
4 = DIL

5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Ring Group 1
programming.
calls. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.

Assign the destination extension for each DIL Extension Number (maximum of
incoming trunk (001 ~ 400). eight digits)
22-02-01 to 4 = DIL.

For Voice Mail Overflow, enter the Ring Group 001 ~ 100
that unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ring after (Incoming Ring Group)
the DIL Call Waiting time (Program 22-01-04). 102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or InMail)

Enable (0)/Disable (1) MOH on Transfer. If
enabled, a transferred caller hears Music on
Hold while their call rings the destination
extension. If disabled, a transferred caller hears

ringback while their call rings the destination
extension. For this option to work with voice
mail, the transferred call must be an
unscreened transfer.

Forwarding Time
Set the time a transferred call waits at an
extension forwarded to Voice Mail before

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

VRS 2 = UK English
Specify the language to be used for the VRS 3 = AU English
prompts. 4 = CA French
5 = Dutch
6 = Mex Spanish
7 = LA Spanish
8 = Italian
9 = German
10 = ES Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = ParisFrench
13 = BR Portugue
14 = Japanese

15 = MandChinese
16 = Korean
17 = IB Portugue
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Taiwan
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Reserved
26 = Russian
45-01-01 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Department Groups: 0

Department Group Number 0 ~ 64
Assign which Extension (Department) Group 0 = No Voice Mail
number is assigned as the voice mail group. An
entry of 0 means no voice mail is installed.
45-01-02 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Maximum of 12 characters. VOICE MAIL
Master Name
Enter the Voice Mail master name up to 12

characters.

Page 1 = On
Turn Off or On the system ability to process the
Voice Mail Park and Page () commands. You
should normally enable this option.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Wait 1 = On
Turn Off or On the system ability to process the
Voice Mail Message Wait (#) commands. You
should normally enable this option. If enabled,
be sure that the programmed Message
Notification strings do not contain the code #9
for trunk access. When using an external voice
mail and Centrex transfer, this option should be
disabled or the service code #3 in Program
11-12-42 must be changed.


Record alerts.
45-01-14 Voice Mail Integration Options CCIS Maximum of eight digits. No Setting
Centralized Voice Mail Number
Assign the pilot number to Centralized Voice
Mail over CCIS Link. Assign this only in the
remote switches.
45-01-15 Voice Mail Integration Options Analog 0: Fixed 0

Voice Mail Protocol Selection 1: Program
Assign whether Fixed codes or the codes used
in Program 45-04 are used for analog voice
mail protocol.
45-01-16 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Maximum of four digits. No Setting
FAX Digit Add Assignment
Assign up to four digits in front of the station
number sent to the SLT port when a call is
forwarded.
45-01-17 Voice Mail Integration Options Reply Mail 0 = No 1

Box Number 1 = Yes
Set whether or not to include the mailbox

number in the analog voice mail protocol.

Number Mapping
45-04-01 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Remote Maximum of four digits. No Setting
Logon (Internal)
Define the digits for remote Logon (internal).
45-04-02 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Direct Maximum of four digits. No Setting
Logon
Define the digits for direct Logon.
45-04-03 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Transfer Maximum of four digits. No Setting
Message
Define the digits for transfer message.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
45-04-04 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Forward- Maximum of four digits. No Setting
All
Define the digits for forward all.
45-04-05 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Forward- Maximum of four digits. No Setting
Busy
Define the digits for forward busy.
45-04-06 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Forward Maximum of four digits. No Setting
RNA
Define the digits for forward RNA.
45-04-07 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Remote Maximum of four digits. No Setting
Logon
Define the digits for remote Logon.
45-04-08 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Maximum of four digits. No Setting
Conversation Recording
Define the digits for conversation recording.
45-04-09 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Clear Maximum of four digits. No Setting
Down String
Define the digits for clear down string.
45-05-01 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without 0:Off 0

Additional Digits Remote Log-On Internal 1:On
Send trunk number and/or station number
information if integrating to Voice Mail when

Program 45-04-XX is left blank and 45-01-15 is
set to Program.

Additional Digits Direct Log-On 1:On

set to Program.

Additional Digits Transfer Message/QVM 1:On

set to Program.

Additional Digits Forward-All 1:On

set to Program.

Additional Digits Forward-Busy 1:On

set to Program.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Additional Digits Forward RNA 1:On

set to Program.

Additional Digits Remote Log-On 1:On

set to Program.

Additional Digits Conversation Recording 1:On

set to Program.

Additional Digits Clear Down String 1:On

set to Program.
Define the Detect Level for DTMF Tone 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
Receiver. 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
80-03-02 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Start Delay 0 ~ 255 (0.25ms ~ 64ms) Type 1 ~ 5 = 0
Time
Customize the Start delay time for DTMF Tone

Receivers.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Define the various minimum detect levels for -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15) Type 2 ~ 3 = 15
the DTMF Tone Receiver. detect level 1: (-25dBm)
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) Type 4 ~ 5 = 10
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-80dBm(0) to -95dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Define the various maximum detect levels for 0dBm(0) to -15dBm(15)
the DTMF Tone Receiver. detect level 1:
-5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
detect level 2:
-10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
detect level 3:
-15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
detect level 4:
-20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
detect level 5:
-25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
detect level 6:
-30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
detect level 7:
-35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
detect level 8:
-40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
detect level 9:
-45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
detect level 10:
-50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
detect level 11:
-55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
detect level 12:
-60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
detect level 13:
-65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
detect level 14:
-70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
detect level 15:
-75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
80-03-05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward Twist 0 ~ 9 (1dB ~ 10dB) Type 1 ~ 5 =
Level 5 (6dBm)
Define the various forward twist levels for the

DTMF Tone Receiver.
80-03-06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backward 0 ~ 9 (1dB ~ 10dB) Type 1 ~ 5 =

Twist Level 0 (1dBm)
Define the various backward twist levels for the

DTMF Tone Receiver.
80-03-07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON Detect 1 ~ 255 (15+ 15m s~ 3825ms) Type 1 ~ 5 =
Time 1 (30ms)
Define the on detect time for the DTMF Tone

Receiver.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
80-03-08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect 1 ~ 255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) Type 1 ~ 5 =
Time 1 (30ms)]
Define the off detect time for the DTMF Tone

Receiver.
80-04-01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm default:

Detection Level 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm Type 1 (DT) 0
Define the detection levels for the Call Progress 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm (-25dBm)
Tone Detector. 3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm Type 2 (BT) 0
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm (-25dBm)
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm Type 3 (RBT) 0
(-25dBm)
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
Type 4, Type 5
0

15
detect level 2:
(-25dBm)
-40dBm (0) to -55dBm(15)
Type 4, Type 5
0
Ratio (-20dB)
Detector. (-20dB)
Type 3 (RBT) 4

(-20dB)
Type 4, Type 5
0

+ 30 1 = 60. 132 (3990ms)
30+30255=7680 0
Count Type 2 (BT) 1
0

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Type 3 (RBT)

25 (780ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0

Maximum Time (30 + 30 ~ 7680ms) Type 2
Define the on maximum time for the Call (BT) 20
Type 3
(RBT) 40
1230ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 1 ~ 255 Type 1

Minimum Time (30 + 30 ~ 7680ms) (DT) 1 (60ms)
Define the off minimum time for the Call Type 2
(300ms)
Type 3

(RBT) 83
(2520ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0
80-04-09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 0 ~ 255 Type 1

Maximum Time (30 + 30 ~ 7680ms) (DT) 1 (60ms)
Define the off maximum time for the Call Type 2
(450ms)
Type 3

(RBT) 115
(3480ms)
Type 4, Type 5
0

Issue 2.0
Operation
Calling your Mailbox
To call your mailbox:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press your Voice Mail key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 77) or the Message key.
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial the Voice Mail Master Number. After Voice Mail Answers, dial your
mailbox number.
Your mailbox number is normally the same as your extension number. You may optionally dial a co-
workers mailbox - or use this procedure to call your mailbox from a co-workers telephone.
- OR -

Ask your Voice Mail system administrator for your security code.
Normally, your Message Waiting LED goes out (if applicable). If it continues to flash, you have
unanswered Message Waiting requests or a new General Message. Refer to Checking Messages on
page 2-655.

If you are at a co-workers telephone, you can dial the Voice Mail master number and your mailbox
number instead. You can also use this procedure from your own telephone to call a co-workers
mailbox.
Checking Messages:
When there are new messages, the Large LED on the telephone flashes red.
With this option set, the MSG key can be used as a Voice Mail key for any function [calling voice mail
or transfer call a to voice mail (Hold + MSG + Extension Number), etc.].

Issue 2.0
Recording your Call
To record your active call in your mailbox:
Multiline Terminal
1. Press Voice Mail Record key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 78).
You hear two beeps and your Record key flashes. The beeps periodically repeat to remind you that you
are recording.
To stop recording, press the Voice Mail Record key again. You can restart and stop recording as
required.
- OR -
1. Press Hold.
2. Dial 654.
To stop recording, place the call on hold then pick the call back up. You can restart and stop recording
as required.
1. Hookflash.
2. Dial 654.
To stop recording, hookflash twice. You can restart and stop recording as required.

Issue 2.0
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Description
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys indicates a new voice mail message on Line Keys or DSS/
BLF keys.
Conditions
When a DSS key of an installed extension is pressed when flashing that extension is called.
You have to use a VM Message key (code 77) to get the indication when there is a new
message. It can be used also for installed extensions.
VM Message key calls the VM and logs into the mail box.
If a VM Message key for extension A is placed on extension A, the Large LED does not light
on extension A for new message indication. Instead the VM Message key flashes green.
VM message LED is a higher priority then any other status for the DSS/BLF key.
The enabling or disabling of Voice Mail Indication on BLF enables the station with the
message to show up on other telephones. It does not enable/disable stations from seeing
the BLF indication.
Virtual Extension Keys assigned as code 03 do not support Voice Mail Message Indication
on Line Keys.
Default Settings
Not allowed
System Availability
Terminals
VM (Digital or Analog)
2-1608 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Class of Service
UM8000 Mail
InMail

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Assign DSS/BLF function keys on Multiline 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
telephones (code 01 + extension number) or 751 by default) Manual for
Message Key (Code 77 + mailbox number). 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
752 by default)

DSS

Set the system DSS consoles mode. 1 = Hotel Mode
2 = Monitor Mode

3 = Business/ Mode
30-02-01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Maximum of eight digits. No Setting

Extension Number
Enter the extension number for the multiline
eight digits).
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys 2-1609

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Customize DSS console keys to function as 001 ~ 114 Programming
The key (when defined as a DSS/One-Touch
key [code 01] can have any function with up to
four digits (e.g., extension number or Service No.)
Code). The function information (such as 00 ~ 99 (Appearance
extension number or Service Code) would then Functional Level)
be entered as additional data.

Define the LED patterns for busy extension
functions on the DSS consoles.

Define the LED patterns for DND extension

Define the LED patterns for agent busy

( DSS)

DSS) functions on the DSS consoles.
30-05-06 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Log Out ( 0~7 5 (IL)
DSS)
v
Define the LED patterns for agent log out (/
DSS) functions on the DSS consoles.
30-05-07 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Log In ( 0~7 4 (IR)

DSS)
Define the LED patterns for agent login (/DSS)


Emergency ( DSS)
Define the LED patterns for agent emergency

(/DSS) functions on the DSS consoles.

Code 1 (Hotel DSS)

(hotel DSS) functions on the DSS consoles.

Code 2 (Hotel DSS)


Code 3 (Hotel DSS)


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Code 4 (Hotel DSS)


Code 5 (Hotel DSS)


Code 6 (Hotel DSS)


Code 7 (Hotel DSS)


Code 8 (Hotel DSS)

30-05-17 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status 0~7 3 (RW

Code 9 (Hotel DSS)


Code 0 (Hotel DSS)


Code (Hotel DSS)


Code # (Hotel DSS)


Indication

indication functions on the DSS consoles.
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys 2-1611

Issue 2.0
Operation
To program a DSS/BLF key on a telephone:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 751.
4. Dial 01.
6. Press Hold.
7. Press Speaker.
To program a VM Message key on a telephone:

1. Press Speaker.
2. Dial 751.
4. Dial 77.
6. Press Speaker.

Issue 2.0
Voice Over
Description
Voice Over lets a user interrupt a busy station user that is on another call. With Voice Over, the busy
extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the interrupting party. The extension user
receiving the Voice Over can respond to the interrupting party without being heard by the original caller.
If desired, the user can easily switch between their original caller and the interrupting co-worker. The
original caller and the interrupting party can never hear each other.
Example:
Voice Over could help a lawyer waiting for an urgent call. While on a call with another client, the lawyers
paralegal could announce the urgent call as soon as it comes in. The lawyer could then give the paralegal
instructions how to handle the situation all without the original client hearing the conversation.
Both multiline terminal users and 500/2500 set users can initiate and receive a Voice Over.
To enable Voice Over, a multiline terminal can have a function key programmed for Voice Over. In
addition to one- touch Voice Over operation, the key shows the Voice Over status as follows:
When the key is . . . You are . . .
Off Not using Voice Over

Flashing (Red) Listening to the interrupting party
On (Green) Responding to the interrupting party
Conditions
While active, Voice Over uses a Conference circuit on a GCD-CP10. Refer to the
Conference feature for Conference circuit programming.
Voice Over can interrupt a trunk call only if the trunk is set up for at least six seconds.
Do not use Voice Over to a user on speakerphone as the conversation may be heard by the
outside party.
When a multiline terminal user performs Voice Over, the speech path is 1-way from the
originator to the destination.
The Voice Over Access Code can be assigned on a Programmable Function Key.
An override tone is sent to both calling and called parties. A single line telephone user can
receive Voice Over. After a Tone Override is heard, Voice Over can be set.
When a Programmable Function Key (programmed with the Voice Over Access Code) is
pressed, the LED lights while responding to the page.
Voice Over 2-1613

Issue 2.0
When a multiline terminal has a Handsfree Unit programmed, the Voice Over call can be
received and answered handsfree.
When Data Line Security is assigned to a station, the Voice Over to the station is disabled.
An extension user cannot Voice Over to another extension user in a Conference.
If you place a call on hold and then Voice Over to a busy extension, the call on hold does
not transfer to the busy party when you end the Voice Over.
A station can receive only one Voice Over at a time.
A multiline terminal user cannot answer a Voice Over with an internal call on hold.
An attempt to Voice Over a station can be denied if the station is in DND (Do Not Disturb)
Mode, Automatic Redial is activated, during Station Programming, during Incoming
Ringing, during Internal/External Paging, during a Conference Call, during a conference
call on hold, the terminal is on internal hold, or the terminal has a call on internal hold.
When a single line telephone is on a call and Voice Over is presented, the single line
telephone cannot talk back to the party that originated the Voice Over.
Voice Over to a single line telephone is not recommended because cross talk is inherent in
the side tone of analog telephones.
Voice Over to a user on speakerphone is not recommended because the conversation may
be heard by the outside party.
Answering a Voice Over requires a uniquely programmed Voice Over key.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
2-1614 Voice Over

Issue 2.0
Related Features
Conference
Off-Hook Signaling

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-12-41 Service Code Setup (for System Access) MLT 690

Voice Over 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Set the service code used for the Voice Over digits
feature.
To use Service Code 690 for Voice Over,
Program 11-16-08 (Single Digit Service Code Setup
Voice Over) must be undefined.
11-16-08 Single Digit Service Code Setup Voice 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of one digit 6
Over
Set the Service code used for the Voice Over

feature.

Assign a function key for Voice Over (code 48). 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming

752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1
Voice Over 2-1615

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


before using the Voice Over feature can be
used on a call (this time expires before putting a
call in a talk state). This time also affects
Barge-In.
Operation
To initiate a Voice Over to a busy extension:

1. Press Voice Over key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 48)
- OR -
Dial 6.
- OR -
Dial 690.
You hear an alert tone and the Voice Over key flashes. You can talk to the called party after the alert
tone ends.
To use Service Code 690 for Voice Over, Program 11-16-08 (Voice Over Service Code) must be
undefined.
To respond to a Voice Over alert tone to your extension:
You can respond only if you have a Voice Over key.

NOTE
1. Press the Voice Over key.

The Voice Over key lights steady (green), and you can talk to the interrupting party.
You cannot respond by dialing the Voice Over Service Code (6).
2-1616 Voice Over

Issue 2.0
To return to your original call:

1. Press the Voice Over key.
2. Press the Voice Over key again.
Your Voice Over key flashes red when you are talking to your original call.
To switch between your original call and the interrupting party, just keep pressing the Voice Over key.
Voice Over 2-1617

Issue 2.0
Description
With appropriate licensing the SV9100 provides the option for the Voice Response System (VRS) which
gives the system voice recording and playback ability. The VRS CompactFlash card provides up to 100
system messages (General Message, Automated Attendant greetings, messages, and the 900
Preamble).
General Message provides a recorded message to which any user can listen
Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance) answers incoming calls, plays a greeting to the caller
and then lets the caller directly dial a system extension
Messages provides announcement and overflow messages for groups
Transfer to the VRS allows any extension user to Transfer their outside call to the VRS
Voice Prompting Messages plays call and feature status messages to users
900 Preamble alerts callers using 900 lines of the cost and features of the pay-per-call service
Time, Date and Station Number Check lets a multiline terminal extension user quickly hear a
recording for the time, date, or the extension number
VRS Messages
The VRS allows you to record up to 100 VRS messages. You allocate these messages for Automated
Attendant greetings, the General Message, messages and the 900 Preamble message. The total
storage time for all messages is approximately 45 minutes. The maximum duration for any message is
two minutes this is not programmable. VRS messages are stored on the system drive, and do not
require battery back up.
Any on-premise extension caller can listen, record and erase VRS Messages (unless restricted in
programming). DISA and DID callers can listen and record VRS messages (unless restricted in
programming).
General Message
A General Message is a recorded message available to all callers. A General Message typically contains
important company information that all employees should hear. To hear the General Message, an
employee can go to any multiline terminal and press 4 (for General Message). You can restrict the ability
to record the General Message in an extension Class of Service. This allows you to give recording ability
to the System Administrator or Communications Manager, for example, but not any other employee. The
Message Waiting LED at each telephone flashes when a new General Message is recorded. After the
extension user listens to the message, the Message Waiting LED goes out.
2-1618 Voice Response System (VRS)

Issue 2.0
Park and Page
When an extension user is away from their telephone, Park and Page can let them know when they have
a call waiting to be answered. The Personal Greeting and Park & Page options can have up to 200 total
messages (note that the Park & Page feature uses two messages). To enable Park and Page, the user
records a Personal Greeting along with an additional Paging announcement. Park and Page then
answers an incoming call and plays the Personal Greeting to the caller. The caller then listens to Music
on Hold (if available) while the system broadcasts the recorded Paging announcement. When the
extension user hears the Page, they can go to any telephone and use Directed Call Pickup to intercept
the call. Refer to Call Forwarding on page 2-145, Paging, External on page 2-1109, Paging, Internal on
page 2-1119, and Park on page 2-1124.
Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance)
Automated Attendant automatically answers outside calls, plays a recorded greeting and then lets the
outside callers directly dial system extensions, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. Automated
Attendant provides immediate answering and routing of outside calls without the need for an operator or
dispatcher. Automated Attendant provides:
Single Digit Dialing
Single Digit Dialing allows Automated Attendant callers to dial extensions, Department Calling
Groups, and Voice Mail by pressing a single digit. For example, your Automated Attendant can
greet calls with, Thank you for calling. To place an order, dial 1. To check on an existing order, dial
2. To speak with an operator, dial 0. You can set up single digit dialing for each VRS Message
programmed to answer outside calls via the Automated Attendant. This allows you to set up day/
night/holiday greetings or unique greetings for each incoming trunk. (Keep in mind that, with a
default system, if you assign destinations to digits 3, 4 and 5, outside callers cannot dial system
extensions.)
Security of a communication system is the responsibility of the installer/maintainer and the network
providers. However NEC will, of course, be pleased to offer advice on specific queries or issues
brought to our attention.
The timer in Program 25-16-01, has been added, per single digit table, which enables the direct
dialing of destinations even if a destination or another VRS message has been assigned to a digit.
This timer, when set, defines a time that is required to expire after the first digit is dialed before the
action assigned to the digit in the single digit table is used. If additional digits arrive before the timer
expires, these and possible further digits are used as the direct dial destination.
The timer (Program 25-16-01) works only when destination is set in Program 25-06-02. If
Program 25-06-01 is used (other than 0), single digit attendant works.
NOTE If the timer (Program 25-16-01) is set 0, this feature is deactivated. If the timer value is
longer than inter-digit timer (Program 21-01-03), the setting of Program 25-16-01 has no
effect.
Simultaneous Call Answering

With VRS installed, the Automated Attendant can answer up to 16 calls simultaneously.
Voice Response System (VRS) 2-1619

Issue 2.0
Flexible Routing
The outside caller can directly dial any system extension, Department Calling Group or Voice Mail.
If the caller dials a busy extension, Automated Attendant allows them to dial another extension or
wait for the busy extension to become free.
Automatic Overflow
Automatic Overflow can automatically redirect a call if it cannot go through. This can happen if all
VRS ports are busy, if the called extension does not answer, or if the caller misdials or waits too
long to dial. (This occurs if the caller is using a dial pulse telephone.) When the call overflows, it
rings a designated Ring Group or the Voice Mail system.
Programmable Automated Attendant Greetings
You can record a different greeting for each trunk answered by the Automated Attendant. The
greetings can be different in the day, at night or on holidays or weekends. You can also have a
special greeting if the caller misdials. You record the greetings just the way you want. For example,
Dial the 3-digit extension number you wish to reach, dial 500 for Sales or dial 600 for Customer
Service. When assigning and recording Automated Attendant greetings, you can choose among
the 100 VRS messages.
VRS Waiting Message
Using VRS Waiting Message, the system can automatically answer an incoming trunk call first (either a
normal trunk or one designated for a department group) to let the outside caller hear a recorded
message when the call is not answered in a programmed time. With this feature, the call keeps ringing at
the same destination until it is answered or until other programming, takes affect.
This feature can use up to two messages for an incoming call and the duration between the messages is
programmable. These messages are repeated and, between these messages, either ring back tone or
Music on Hold can be played.
This feature has two different modes:

Permanent Mode
This mode sets the feature using system programming and is available for the following calls:
Normal Incoming Call
When the call is not answered or a user presses the VRS Waiting Message function key, this feature is
initiated. The waiting message is played until other no-answer program (e.g. transfer to another incoming
ring group or disconnect) takes affect.
Designated Call for the Department Group

When a department group receives a call from a DID, DIL, DISA or E&M trunk and all terminals in the
group are busy, the call is put in a queue and VRS Waiting Message is also initiated. The waiting
message is played until other no-answer program (e.g. transfer to another incoming ring group or
disconnect) takes affect or a terminal becomes available to receive the department call.
Manual Mode
This mode can be programmed by pressing the VRS Waiting Message function key from a
multiline terminal to set this feature for each incoming ring group. This mode can be used for
normal incoming calls only.

Issue 2.0
The following programs are used to define the VRS Waiting Message feature and the trunk overflow:
11-10-20: Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) VRS - Record/Erase Message
15-07: Programmable Function Keys
Automatic Answer with Delay Message Setup (Function Number 52)
Function Key 52 can be used to enable the VRS Waiting Message feature when Program 22-01-
10 is set to 1 (Changed by Manual Operation).
NOTE
Automatic Answer with Delay Message Start (Function Number 53)
Function Key 53 can be used to play the VRS Waiting Message immediately when Function Key
53 + the ringing Trunk Appearance Key are pressed.
NOTE
20-07-13: Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) VRS Record (VRS Msg Operation)
20-15-11: Ring Cycle Setup VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call
22-01-04: System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No Answer Recall Time
22-01-08: System Options for Incoming Calls DID Pilot Call No Answer Timer
22-01-10: System Options for Incoming Calls VRS Waiting Message Operation
22-01-11: System Options for Incoming Calls VRS Waiting Message Interval Time
22-08-01: DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
22-14-01~07: VRS Delayed Message for IRG
22-15-01~07: VRS Delayed Message for Department Group
25-07-02: System Timers for VRS/DISA VRS/DISA No Answer Time
25-07-03: System Timers for VRS/DISA Disconnect after VRS/DISA retransfer to IRG
Transfer to the VRS
Any extension user can Transfer their outside call to the VRS. This lets their caller take advantage of the
Automated Attendants extensive routing abilities. To Transfer the call, the user places the call on Hold,
dials the unique VRS service code (set up in system programming : default 782), and hangs up.
Voice Prompting Messages
The VRS feature provides the system with Voice Prompting Messages. These Voice Prompting
Messages tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. For example, if a user calls
extension 300 when it is busy, they hear, Station 300 is unavailable, please dial a new station or dial 750
to wait.

Issue 2.0
The following table shows the available Voice Prompting Messages.
Table 2-139 Voice Prompting Messages
Message No. Message This message will play when . . .
1-00 This is station A user dials 6 for the extension number.
1-01 Station A user dials 6 for the extension number.
1-02 Is busy, for callback dial A user is calling a busy extension.
1-03 All lines are busy, for A user dials 9 or 704 (+ trunk group) and all trunks are busy.
callback dial
1-04 Please do not disturb A user calls an extension that has enabled Do Not Disturb.
1-05 Please hold on, all lines message - refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Manual.
are busy, your call will be
answered when a line
becomes free.
1-06 Please hold on, your call Call Forwarding Off-Premise is rerouting your call.
is being rerouted
1-07 The lowest cost line is ARS tries to reroute the users call and the least costly route is
busy, please wait for the busy.
next one.
1-08 The number you have User dials a Service Code that Class of Service prevents.
dialed is not in service.
1-09 You have a message. An extension user has a Message Waiting to which they have not
responded.
1-10 You have a message. An extension user has a Message Waiting to which they have not
responded.
1-11 Your calls have been An extension user has forwarded their calls.
forwarded.
1-12 Vacant number An extension user has dialed an extension that does not exist.
1-13 Is unavailable An outside caller dials an extension through the Automated

Attendant and the extension is busy.
1-14 Please dial a new station
1-15 Or dial
1-16 To wait
1-17 To leave your number
1-18 Dial # to call you back at
1-19 Enter your area code and An outside caller dials an extension through the Automated
telephone number Attendant and the extension is busy.
1-20 Please enter your
password
1-21 Please enter an account A user tries to place a trunk call and Forced Account Codes are
code enabled.

Issue 2.0
Table 2-139 Voice Prompting Messages (Continued)
1-22 Please start recording A user has dialed the code to record a VRS message.
1-23 Recording finished A user is recording a VRS message and they have exceeded the
maximum allowed recording length.
1-24 Audio file is full There is no more space available in the VRS for storing messages.
1-25 To listen dial A user is trying to record a VRS message and the recording already
exists.
1-26 To erase dial
1-27 To re-record dial
1-28 To save dial
1-29 To leave a message
1-30 Just a moment
1-31 Hello
1-32 Thank you
1-33 Good-bye
2-00 Oh A user dials 6 for the extension number or 8 for the time.
2-01 Dial
2-02 Star
2-03 Pound
2-04 Zero
2-05 One A user dials 6 for the extension number, 8 for the time and date or as
part of a spoken code (e.g., 714).
2-06 Two
2-07 Three
2-08 Four
2-09 Five
2-10 Six
2-11 Seven
2-12 Eight
2-13 Nine
2-16 Twelve
2-15 Eleven

Issue 2.0
2-17 Thirteen
2-18 Fourteen
2-19 Fifteen
2-20 Sixteen
2-21 Seventeen
2-22 Eighteen
2-23 Nineteen
2-24 Twenty
2-25 Thirty
2-26 Forty
2-27 Fifty
2-28 Sixty
2-29 Seventy
2-30 Eighty
2-31 Ninety
2-32 Hundred
2-33 Thousand
2-43 Message
2-44 Messages
2-64 January
2-65 February
2-66 March
2-67 April
2-68 May
2-69 June
2-70 July
2-71 August
2-72 September
2-73 October
2-74 November
2-75 December

Issue 2.0
2-76 Sunday A user dials 8 for the date.
2-77 Monday
2-78 Tuesday
2-79 Wednesday
2-80 Thursday
2-81 Friday
2-82 Saturday
2-83 The date is A user dials 8 for the date.
3-04 The time is A user dials 8 for the time.
3-05 AM
3-06 PM
900 Preamble
If the system has trunks that are part of a 900 (caller paid) service, the VRS can automatically play a
recorded message when a user answers the call. This recorded message should describe the 900
service features and cost. The 900 Preamble ensures that the caller is always aware that they have
accessed a 900 pay-per-call service. A system user cannot converse with the caller until the preamble
message ends. If the caller hangs up before the message completes, they are not charged for the call. If
the caller waits for the message to end, they can talk to a system user and call charging begins. The
system answers as many 900 calls as there are available VRS ports. If a 900 calls comes in when all
VRS ports are busy, the call does not appear on an extension until a VRS port is available.
You can also use the 900 Preamble message to set up an Auto-Answer with Greeting application. When
a receptionist answers a call, the VRS can play a preamble message such as, Welcome to ABC
Company. How can I help you? When the caller replies, the receptionist answers, One moment
please, and quickly extends the call to the desired party. This ensures that all incoming calls are
answered quickly, courteously and consistently.
Time, Date and Station Number Check
If the system has a DSP daughter board installed for VRS, any multiline terminal user can find out the
time, date or the extension number while their telephone is idle (on-hook). The time and date check
saves the user time since they do not have to look for a clock or calendar. Hearing the extension number
conveniently identifies non-display multiline terminals. To find out their extension number, the user can
press 6 (for Number). To listen to the time and date, the user can press 8 (for Time/Date).

Issue 2.0
Conditions
VRS record time is fixed at two minutes and cannot be changed.
The Automated Attendant (VRS) can answer up to 16 calls simultaneously.
If Synchronous Ringing is enabled, the Preamble message cannot be used.
The maximum number of VRS ports is 16 when the SV9100 is properly licensed.
When the DISA/VRS Ring Group Transfer (Programs 25-03 and 25-04) is set to 104
(Speed Dial Bin), Speed dial will be treated as an internal call no matter what Program
13-01-01 is set to. If an outside number is needed, the trunk access code must be put into
the speed dial bin.
When Program 25-16-02, is set to 0 = Off (Do not detect DTMF), after playing a VRS
greeting, the transfer destination set in Program 25-03-01 is followed.
Program 25-03-01 is set on a per trunk port base, not Dial-in number base.
A DISA Password can be detected regardless of Program 25-16-02 setting.
If an outside caller dials an invalid extension number when connected to the VRS
Automated Attendant or calling in on a DISA trunk, the following options are available to
route these calls:
Extension Number (e.g., operator)
F-Route Dial (e.g., outside phone number)
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Related Features
Transfer

Issue 2.0

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Message digits
VRS message.

Administrator) VRS - General Message 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Playback digits
Define the service code to playback the general
message.

Administrator) VRS - Record or Erase 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
General Message digits
general message on the VRS.
VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Define the service code to use when setting up digits
ANI/DNIS Routing to the VRS Automated
Attendant. Using the Transfer feature, this also
allows a call to be transferred to the VRS
(default: 782).

For the VRS Waiting Message feature, assign 0 ~ 99 (Normal Function Code Programming
the VRS Incoming Call Queuing Setup key 751 by default) Manual for
(code 52 + ring group #) to manually enable the 00 ~ 99 (Appearance default values.
feature. Function Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

extension port =
Class 1


record, listen to, or erase VRS messages.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Message.

Delete


Greeting)
Service Code 616 to record, listen to, or erase a
Personal Greeting. This option also affects Park
and Page.



Incoming Call
Set the ring cycle callers hear when the VRS

Waiting Message feature is used.

When placing Intercom calls, users must dial

each digit during this time.
22-01-10 System Options for Incoming Calls VRS 0 = Enable Always 0

Waiting Message Operation 1 = Change by Manual
Define whether the VRS Waiting Message is Operation

Automatically or Manually set.

For VRS Waiting Message, determine the time

between VRS messages.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

For each Night Service mode, enter 1 if trunk 0 = Normal
should be automatically answered by VRS 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no
Automated Attendant. VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS

Ring Group 1
programming.
calls. No other

extensions ring
for incoming
Ring Group 1
calls.
22-14-01 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0
Message Start Time
For each Ring Group, set the time the system
waits before playing the first message. This
time is also used for VRS Waiting Message.
22-14-02 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed 0 ~ 101 0

For each Ring Group, select the message
number to be played as the first message
101 = Fixed Message
(0 ~ 101). This program is also used for VRS
Waiting Message.
22-14-03 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed 0 ~ 255 (times) 0
For each Ring Group, set the number of times
the first message is played. This program is
also used for VRS Waiting Message.
22-14-04 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 2nd 0 ~ 101 0

Delayed Message Number 0 = No Message
For each Ring Group, select the message
number to be played as the second message
101 = Fixed Message
(0 ~ 101). This program is also used for VRS
Waiting Message.
22-14-05 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 2nd 0 ~ 255 (times) 0

Delayed Message Sending Count
For each Ring Group, set the number of times
the second message is played. This program is
also used for VRS Waiting Message.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-14-06 VRS Delayed Message for IRG Tone Kind 0 = Ring Back Tone 0
at Message Interval 1 = MOH Tone
For each Ring Group, determine what the caller 2 = BGM Source
hears between messages. This program is also
used for VRS Waiting Message.
22-14-07 VRS Delayed Message for IRG Disconnect 0 = No Disconnect 60

Time After the end of VRS Delayed Message 1 ~ 64800 seconds
For each Ring Group, set the time the system
waits after playing the VRS message before
disconnecting the call. To prevent the call from

disconnecting, set this option to 0. This
program is also used for VRS Waiting
Message.
22-15-01 VRS Delayed Message for Department 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

Group 1st Delayed Message Start Time
For each Department Group, set the time the
system waits before playing the first message.

This program is also used for VRS Waiting
Message.
22-15-02 VRS Delayed Message for Department 0 ~ 101 0

Group 1st Delayed Message Number 0 = No Message
For each Department Group, select the
message number to be played as the first
101 = Fixed Message
message (0 ~ 101). This program is also used
for VRS Waiting Message.
22-15-03 VRS Delayed Message for Department 0 ~ 255 (times) 0

Group 1st Delayed Message Sending
Count
For each Department Group, set the number of

times the first message is played. This program
is also used for VRS Waiting Message.
22-15-04 VRS Delayed Message for Department 0 ~ 101 0

Group 2nd Delayed Message Number 0 = No Message
For each Department Group, select the
message number to be played as the second
101 = Fixed Message
message (0 ~ 101). This program is also used
for VRS Waiting Message.
22-15-05 VRS Delayed Message for Department 0 ~ 255 (times) 0

Group 2nd Delayed Message Sending
Count
For each Department Group, set the number of
times the second message is played. This
Message.
22-15-06 VRS Delayed Message for Department 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

Group Tone Kind at Message Interval 1 = MOH Tone
For each Department Group, determine what
the caller hears between messages. This
2 = BGM Source
Message.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
22-15-07 VRS Delayed Message for Department 0 = No Disconnect 60

Group Disconnect Time After the End of 1 ~ 64800 seconds
VRS Delayed Message
For each Department Group, set the time the
system waits after playing the VRS message
before disconnecting the call. To prevent the
call from disconnecting, set this option to 0.
This program is also used for VRS Waiting
Message.

Forwarding Time
Set the time a telephone rings before the call

reroutes to the programmed destination.
25-01-02 VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup DISA 0 = Off 1

User ID 1 = On
Select whether or not the DISA User ID is to be

used.

For each Night Service mode, enter 1 at the 1 = VRS (01 ~ 100 VRS
Talkie prompt if trunk should be automatically Message Number)
answered by VRS and the message number 2 = ACI (01 ~ 04 ACI Group
the caller should hear (1 ~ 101). Number)
Extension Group Number)

Set the destination that Automated Attendant Trunk Ports:
(OPA) calls ring if the OPA caller dials an 001 ~ 400
incorrect extension number. This also sets the Day/Night Mode:
options for DISA calls. The system allows Ring 1~8
Groups or Disconnect.
0 = Disconnect

101 = DSPDB-VM
Mail or InMail
Program 25-15-01)

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Answer/Busy 1 ~ 100
Set the destination that Automated Attendant Trunk Ports:
(OPA) calls ring if the OPA caller dials an 001 ~ 400
extension that does not answer or is busy. This Day/Night Mode:
also sets the options for DISA calls. The system 1~8
allows Ring Groups or Disconnect. 0 = (Disconnect)
1 ~ 100 = (Incoming Ring

Group)
102 = (In-Skin/External Voice
Mail or InMail)
104 = (Speed Dial table
Program 25-15-01).

For each trunk answered by VRS, enter the
VRS message (1 ~ 100) the outside caller
hears if they dial incorrectly after answer. If you
enter 0, the call reroutes according to Program
25-03 and Program 25-04. Make one entry for
each Night Service mode.

Set up single digit dialing for Automated 104 = Refer to 25-04: VRS/DISA
Attendant callers. For each VRS Message Transfer Ring Group with No
programmed to answer outside calls (see
Program 25-02-01), specify the digit the
Answer/ Busy
105 = Dial the other extension
Automated Attendant caller dials (1 ~ 9, 0, ,
106 = Record VRS
#). (Keep in mind that if you assign
destinations to digits 3 and 4, outside callers
cannot dial system extensions.)
25-06-02 VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup Maximum of eight digits. No Setting
Destination Number
programmed to answer outside calls (see

Program 25-02-01), specify the destination
reached (eight digits maximum) when the caller
dials the single digit code.

Answer Time
If an Automated Attendant caller dials an
extension that does not answer, the call waits
this time before rerouting to the Ring Group
specified in Program 25-03 and Program 25-04.
This time also affects unanswered DISA calls.

Set the time for disconnecting a call after it is

re-transferred to a ring group by VRS/DISA.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
25-08-01 DISA User ID Setup Password Dial (Six digits fixed) No Setting
Set up password (six digits). (0 ~ 9, , #)

25-13-01 System Option for DISA VRS Message Six digits fixed No Setting
Access Password (0 ~ 9, , #)
Enter the password DISA callers must dial
before the system allows them to record, listen
to or erase VRS messages.
Target Area at Wrong Dial
Used to assign a speed dial number when the

wrong number is received.
Target Area at No Answer or Busy
Used to assign a speed dial number when a
dial tone times-out and the target extension
does not answer or is busy.
25-16-01 DID/DISA Talkie Base Setup Single Digit 0 ~ 64800 0

Timer (0 = No Setting)
Assign a timer, per single digit table, required to
expire before the allocated single digit entry is
applied.
25-16-02 DID/DISA Talkie Base Setup DTMF Detect 0 = Off 1

1 = On setting detects DTMF signal during 1 = On
sending VRS message for DID/DISA call.
0 = Off setting does not detect DTMF signal

during sending VRS message for DID/DISA
call.


(i.e., Page Zones).

Allow/Prevent All Call Internal Paging for each
announcements. If prevented, extensions can
make only (not receive) All Call Internal Paging
should be restricted as well. Change the
internal page zone group in Program 31-07-01
to 0.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
31-04-01 External Paging Zone Group Paging 0 ~ 8 (0 = No Setting) Speaker 1

Group Number [PGD(2)-U10] =
Assign each External Paging zone to an 1 (Group 1)
External Paging group. Speaker 2
[PGD(2)-U10] =
2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3
[PGD(2)-U10] =
3 (Group 3)
Speaker 4
[PGD(2)-U10] =
4 (Group 4)
Speaker 5
[PGD(2)-U10] =
5 (Group 5)
Speaker 6
[PGD(2)-U10] =
6 (Group 6)
Speaker 7
[PGD(2)-U10] =
7 (Group 7)
Speaker 8
[PGD(2)-U10] =
8 (Group 8)
Speaker 9
(GCD-CP10) = 1
(Group 1)
31-07-01 Combined Paging Assignments 0 ~ 64 1

Assign an External Paging Group (0 ~ 8) to an (0 = All internal paging)
Internal Paging Zone for Combined Paging.
When an extension user makes a Combined

Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both
the External and Internal Zone.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

VRS 2 = UK English
Select the language to be used for the VRS. 3 = AU English
Although the system allows this option to be 4 = CA French
changed in programming, the language
5 = Dutch
changes only if the SD card has the firmware
which provides the newly selected language. 6 = Mex Spanish
7 = LA Spanish
8 = Italian
9 = German
10 = ES Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = ParisFrench
13 = BR Portugue
14 = Japanese

15 = MandChinese
16 = Korean
17 = IB Portugue
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Taiwan
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Reserved
26 = Russian

Enable/Disable the system ability to play the
fixed VRS messages (such as You have a
message.).
40-10-02 Voice Announcement Service Option 0 ~ 100 0

General Message Number (0=No General Message
Enter the number of the VRS message you Service)
want to use for the General Message (01~100).

The message you select should not be used as
a VRS message.
40-10-03 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS 0 ~ 100 0 (No Setting)

No Answer Destination (Incoming Ring Group Number)
Assign the transferred Ring Group when the
VRS is unanswered after Call Forwarding with
Personal Greeting Message.
40-10-04 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

No Answer Time
If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled
and all VRS ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call

to the extension waits this time for a VRS port
to become free.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
40-10-05 Voice Announcement Service Option Park 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

and Page Repeat Timer (VRS Msg Resend)
If a Park and Page is not picked up during this

time, the Paging announcement repeats.

VRS Message for Private Call Refuse (VRS (0 = No message)
Msg Private Call) (101 = Fixed message)
Private Call Refuse. When Fixed message is
set, VRS message guidance is: Service
finished. Disconnect the line, please.

VRS Message for Caller ID Refuse (VRS Msg (0 = No message)
CID) (101 = Fixed message)
Caller ID Refuse. When Fixed Message is set,
VRS message guidance is: Service finished.
Disconnect the line, please.
40-11-01 Preamble Message Assignment 0 ~ 100 0

Assign the VRS Message number used as the (0 = No Service)
Preamble Message for each trunk. When the
extension user answers the incoming call, the

assigned VRS message is sent to the outside
caller.
47-03-02 SV9100 InMail Group Mailbox Options Digits (eight maximum, using No Setting
Mailbox Number 0 ~ 9)
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the No Setting
Department Group master (pilot) number. (entered by pressing Hold)
Select the Department Group master (pilot)
number associated with the Master Mailbox you
are programming.
Operation
VRS Messages
To record a VRS message:

- OR -

2. Dial 616.
3. Dial 7 (Record).
4. Dial the VRS message number you want to record (01~100).

Issue 2.0
5. When you hear, Please start recording followed by a beep, record your message.
6. Press # to end recording.
- OR -
Hang up to save the message.
To listen to a previously recorded VRS message:

- OR -

2. Dial 616.
3. Dial 5 (Listen).
4. Dial the VRS message number to which you want to listen (01~100).
You hear the previously recorded message. If you hear a beep instead, no previous message is
recorded.
5. Press # to hear the message again.
- OR -
To hear another message, dial 5 and then enter the message number (01~100).
- OR -
Hang up.
To erase a previously recorded VRS message:

- OR -

2. Dial 616.
3. Dial 3 (Erase).
4. Dial the number of the VRS message you want to erase (01~100).
5. Press Hold (multiline terminal only) to cancel the procedure without erasing (and return to step
3).
- OR -
Hang up to erase the message.

Issue 2.0
To record, listen to or erase a VRS message if you call in using DISA:

1. Place call to the system.
You hear dial tone.
2. After the system answers, dial the DISA password (normally 000000).
You hear dial tone.
3. Dial 616 and the VRS password.
4. Dial the function you want.
7 = Record
5 = Listen
3 = Erase
5. Dial the message number (01~100), record the message and press # to end recording.
If you dialed 7 to record, you can dial # to listen to the message you just recorded.
If you dialed 5 to listen, you can dial 5 and the message number to hear it again or if you want to
Record, listen to or erase another message, go back to step 4.
General Message
To listen to the General Message:
Multiline Terminal Only
Your Message Waiting LED flashes when there is a new General Message. A voice message
periodically reminds you.
2. Dial 4 (General).
- OR -

You hear the General Message.
Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have unanswered Message Waiting
requests or new messages in your Voice Mail mailbox.
To record, listen to or erase the General Message:

- OR -

2. Dial 612.

Issue 2.0
3. Dial the function you want.

7 = Record
5 = Listen
3 = Erase
If you dialed 7 to record, press # to end the recording.
If you dialed 5 to listen, you can dial 5 to listen to the message again.
To Record the General Message again, go back to step 1.
If you dialed 3 to erase the General Message, you must go to step 4 (hang up). To cancel without
erasing on a multiline terminal, press HOLD instead and go back to step 1.
4. Hang up when you are done.
Time, Date and Station Number Check
To check the extension number of any multiline terminal:

2. Dial 6 for extension number.
To check the system time and date from any multiline terminal extension:
2. Dial 8 for time and date.
900 Preamble
To answer a 900 Preamble call:

1. Answer the ringing call.
The line key or Call Appearance (CAP) key turns solid red as the system plays the preamble to the
caller.
2. When you hear two beeps and the line key turns green, converse with the caller.

Issue 2.0
Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio
Description
The Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio feature allows the upload of VRS greetings
up to 1MB in size, recorded on a PC or professionally, to any valid VRS message in the system. It also
allows users to listen to and delete VRS messages from callers. Access to the InMail/VRS drive is via
the HTML User Pro (Web Pro).
The User Admin (UA Mode) can change Routing Mailbox greetings for the following Routing mailbox
types: Instruction (Call Routing), Announcement and Group.
Audio Prompt Format
In order for uploaded greetings to properly play on the VRS InMail CF they must be in the proper format.
Audio files not recorded in the proper format may not playback on the VRS/InMail CF. The proper format
is:
Bit Rate 64kbps
Channel 1 (Mono)
Sampling Rate 8 KHz
User Pro Access
There are two different User Pro logins available to make changes to audio files on the InMail/VRS CF,
but only one allows changes to be made to VRS messages. To login, open an Internet browser and enter
the IP of the SV9100 LAN port in the address line. At default, the IP address is 192.168.0.10.
User Admin Mode (UA Mode): This mode allows the user admin to access any telephone and mailbox in the
system. This mode must be used to change VRS and Routing Mailbox greetings. At default the login ID is
USER1 and the password is 1111.
User Mode (UB Mode): This mode allows a user to access only their own telephone and mailbox when
logged in. They will not be able to change any other telephone, mailbox, VRS or Routing Mailbox. At default
the login ID is the Extension Number and the password is 1111.
2-1640 Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio

Issue 2.0
The following details the page layout diagram of the two different User Pro login IDs:
Figure 2-75 VRS User Pro Login Diagram
Message Name Format
Downloaded messages are automatically assigned a name by the SV9100. This name includes the
mailbox number the message was left in, type of message, the message number and the date and time
to the second the message was left. Table 2-140 Default Incoming Ringing Tone shows how to interpret
the message name to determine this information.
File Name Format
B Mailbox number (maximum eight digits) or VRS for

the VRS message
T Message Type
+ : Greeting or VRS message
: Recorded message
NNN Message number (three digits)
Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio 2-1641

Issue 2.0
Table 2-140 Default Incoming Ringing Tone (Continued)
File Name Format
YYYY Year
MM Month (1~12)
DD Date (1~31)
HH Hour (00~23)
MM Minute (00~59)
SS Second (00~59)
Conditions
Uploading audio files to any type of Call Routing box and Group mailboxes is supported.
Auto attendant and group mailbox greetings can be uploaded or deleted using End User
WebPro interface with the UA login.
VRS and InMail messages are recorded in an ADPCM format which may not be easily
opened on the support PC.
It is not possible to upload/download/delete multiple files simultaneously.
The mailbox will be inaccessible from the telephone under these conditions:
Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when opening the telephone setup screen of extension
XXX by UA or UB mode in User Pro.
Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when selecting the extension XXX on the file upload/
download screen of UA mode User Pro.
Mailbox XXX will be inaccessible when logging in the UB mode User Pro for extension XXX.
While uploading an audio file via User Pro the greeting is not accessible by telephone.
When downloading/deleting an audio file via User Pro, the file is not accessible by another
User Pro session or from the telephone.
This feature is only supported using a LAN connection.
When uploading an audio file the extension will be checked whether it is WAV or not.
However, the format of the uploaded file will not be checked. If the uploaded file is not in the
proper format it may not playback properly.
When a mailbox has a new message and the message is deleted using the User Pro
interface, the MWI of the mailbox will NOT be cancelled.
The largest allowed upload file size is approximately 1MB. Files larger than this cannot be
uploaded.
There is no size limitation when downloading audio files.

Issue 2.0
User Pro does not check the uploaded file for correct naming format (i.e.,
BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS.wav). The file name will be automatically changed when
the file is written in the CF.
The actual file name of the messages is not displayed in User Pro. The message number,
modified date and file size are displayed instead. If there is no message file, - will be
displayed and the download/delete icon will not be displayed.
The User Pro message page does not refresh automatically, to see new messages the
page must be refreshed. For instance, if a new message is received via regular operation
on the system while a user is viewing the upload/download screen, the new message is not
shown until the page is reloaded by clicking the icon.
At default, Microsoft Windows will automatically open and play the downloaded WAV. To
make Open or Save selectable, the following settings are required:
Windows XP
1. Select Control Panel then Folder Options.
2. Click on the Files tab.
3. Select the WAV extension from the list, then click Advanced.
4. Check Confirm to open the file after download, then click OK.
5. Close the folder option by clicking OK again.
Windows Vista: It is not possible to change the save to folder option. The downloaded file is
automatically opened for playback.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
VRS License (1001)

Issue 2.0
Related Features

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Programming
Manual for

default values.

used to connect.
are used to login.
default values.
Level 1)
Level 2)
Level 1)

Issue 2.0
Troubleshooting
The table below shows possible Error messages and Causes:
Table 2-141 Error Messages and Causes
Error Message Cause
Mailbox XXX does not exist. The mailbox does not exist
(XXX = mailbox number)
The mailbox is being used by another When the mailbox is being used by another session, either PC or
session telephone.
There is no available space in the SD. When there is no available space in the SD.
The file is being used by another session. When the file to be downloaded is being used by another
Please try again later. session, either PC or telephone.
The selected file has already been deleted. When the file selected for download has already been deleted.
The file is being used by another session. When the file selected for deletion is being used by another
Please try again later. session.
The selected file has already been deleted. When the file selected for deletion has already been deleted.
Cannot upload the file since the original file When the file to be replaced is being used when trying to upload
is being used by another session. Please try the replacement.
again later.
Operation
Changing VRS Messages using User Admin Mode (UA)
Audio files up to 1MB may be uploaded to the SV9100 for VRS messages. All 100 VRS messages can
be uploaded or deleted. The messages can be used on all VRS features: General Message, Automated
Attendant greetings, messages and the 900 Preamble.
In order for uploaded messages to play they must be in the proper format. Audio files not recorded in the
proper format may not playback. The proper format is:
Bit Rate 64kbps
Channel 1 (Mono)
Sampling Rate 8 KHz
3. You will then see the main menu, click on the VRS Audio Up/Download icon.

Issue 2.0
4. There can be up to 100 VRS messages and you may need to scroll through several pages or
jump to get to the desired message number.
Message 1 is 001, message 2 is 002 and message 3 is 003, etc.
6. To Upload a message:
Under Message No, enter the message number to be replaced.
Depending on file size and LAN speed, it may take a minute to upload the greeting.
The uploaded message will appear in the assigned location.

Issue 2.0
Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Park and Page
Description
When an extension user is away from their phone, VRS Park and Page can let them know when they
have a call waiting to be answered. The Personal Greeting and Park & Page options can have up to 200
messages total (note that the Park & Page feature uses two messages). To enable VRS Park and Page,
the user records a Personal Greeting along with an additional Paging announcement. VRS Park and
Page then answers an incoming call and plays the Personal Greeting to the caller. The caller then listens
to Music on Hold (if available) while the system broadcasts the recorded Paging announcement. When
the extension user hears the Page, they can go to any telephone and use Directed Call Pickup to
intercept the call.
For example, John Smith could record a Personal Greeting that says:
Hello, this is John Smith. I am away from my phone right now but please hold on while I am
automatically paged.
The recorded Paging announcement could say:
John Smith, you have a call waiting on your line.
The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broadcasts
the second message. John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call. If John doesnt pick
up the call, the Page periodically repeats.
VRS Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for All Calls, immediately rerouted. This
means that Park and Page activates for ringing Intercom calls, DID calls and DISA calls. It also activates
for calls transferred from the Automated Attendant. Additionally, calls from the Automated Attendant
follow Automatic Overflow routing if not picked up. Park and Page activates for transferred outside calls
but does not play the Personal Greeting to the caller. If a call comes in when the specified Page zone is
busy, the system broadcasts the announcement when the zone becomes free.
Conditions
VRS Park and Page announcements only repeat once.
Voice Announcement (VAU) recording time is fixed at two minutes and cannot be changed.
While VRS Park and Page is enabled, only one DID call at a time can be processed.
Subsequent callers hear a busy tone.
This feature is not supported for CO transferred calls.
Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Park and Page 2-1647
Issue 2.0
Default Settings
VRS Park and Page is available at default for internal paging access code 701, zone 1.
Use access code 713. See feature Operation. Set Program 40-10-01 for VRS guidance
message.
System Availability
Terminals
None
VRS License (1001)
Related Features
Music on Hold

2-1648 Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Park and Page
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Operation) Call Forward with Personal 0 ~ 9, , # Maximum of eight
Greeting digits
Call forward with Personal greeting VRS.
Service code setup.

setup.



extension port =
Class 1

(i.e., Page Zones). The system allows up to 64

Internal Paging Groups. An extension can be in
only one Internal Paging Group.
program on the telephone displays.
Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
31-04-01 External Paging Zone Group Paging 0 ~ 8 (0 = No Setting) Speaker 1

Group Number [PGD(2)-U10] =
Assign each External Paging Speaker to an 1 (Group 1)
External Paging Zone. Speaker 2
[PGD(2)-U10] =
2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3
[PGD(2)-U10] =
3 (Group 3)
Speaker 4
[PGD(2)-U10] =
4 (Group 4)
Speaker 5
[PGD(2)-U10] =
5 (Group 5)
Speaker 6
[PGD(2)-U10] =
6 (Group 6)
Speaker 7
[PGD(2)-U10] =
7 (Group 7)
Speaker 8
[PGD(2)-U10] =
8 (Group 8)
Speaker 9
(GCD-CP10) = 1
(Group 1)

Splash Tone Before Paging (Paging Start 1 = Splash Tone
Tone) 2 = Chime Tone
Enable/Disable splash tone before Paging over
broadcasts a splash tone before the External

Splash Tone After Paging (Paging End Time) 1 = Splash Tone
Enable/Disable splash tone after Paging over
2 = Chime Tone
broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an
External Paging announcement.
40-10-01 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS 0= Not Used 0

Fixed Message 1= Used
Enable/Disable the system ability to play the
fixed VRS messages (such as, You have a
message).
40-10-05 Voice Announcement Service Option Park 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0

and Page Repeat Timer (VRS Msg Resend)
If a Park and Page is not picked up in this time,

the Paging announcement repeats.
2-1650 Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Park and Page
Issue 2.0
Operation
To have the system page you when you have a call:

1. Press Speaker (or lift the handset at the single line telephone) and dial 713.
2. When you hear, Please start recording, record your Personal Greeting.
If you already have Park and Page or Personal Greeting set up, you can dial:
3 to erase (the optionally HOLD to cancel the erase)

5 to listen (then # again to listen again)
7 to record again
3. Dial #7.
4. When you hear, Please start recording, record your page and dial # when the announcement is
complete.
A paging chime overrides the first four seconds of an announcement. Allow a delay in announcement
recording for chime time.
5. Dial the Page Zone that should broadcast your announcement.
For example, for Internal Zone 1 dial 701 + 1, or for Combined Paging Zone, 1 dial 1 + 1.
6. Dial the Park and Page type:

2 = All Calls
3 = Outside Calls Only
7. Press Speaker to hang up (or go on-hook at the single line telephone).
To pick up your Park and Page:

1. Press Speaker (or lift the handset at the single line telephone).
2. Dial + your extension number.
To cancel your Park and Page:

1. Press Speaker (or lift the handset at the single line telephone).
2. Dial 713 + 3.
3. Press Speaker to hang up (or go on-hook at the single line telephone).
Issue 2.0
Volume Controls
Description
Each multiline terminal user can control the volume of incoming ringing, splash tone, Paging,
Background Music, Handsfree and your handset. Multiline terminals consolidate all adjustments into the
volume buttons. Press the VOLUME or VOLUME to adjust the volume level for whichever feature
is active (outside call, ICM, ICM ringing, paging, etc.). Press these keys when the telephone is idle to
adjust the contrast level of the telephone display. The users should set the volumes for their most
comfortable levels.
Conditions
The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled.
Multiline terminal users can press the Speaker key and dial Code 729 to further increase
station ring volume.
Headset volume, off-hook ringing volume, station ringing volume, and speaker volume
adjustments are determined by Program 15-02-27.
The LCD of the SV9100 terminals provide a volume bar indication while adjusting the
following volumes or controls:
Speaker Volume
Handset/Headset Volume
Background Music (BGM) Volume
Ring Volume/Off-Hook Ring Volume
LCD Contrast
With the SV9100, the handset/speaker volume for intercom calls or outside calls can be
adjusted.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
2-1652 Volume Controls

Issue 2.0
None
Related Features
Off-Hook Signaling
SV9100 Terminals

Level
Program
Program Name Description/Comments Assigned Data
Number
1 2 3
15-02-27 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 0 = Back to Default (Back) 1

Handset Volume 1 = Stay at previous level (Stay)
Determine how an extension handset volume
is set after it is adjusted during a call.
When 1 is assigned, and a user sets the
volume to maximum, it is reset to a level to
meet FCC standards when the user hangs up.
Operation
To adjust the volume of incoming ringing and splash tone:

1. If the telephone is idle, press Speaker and dial 729. If the telephone is ringing, skip to Step 2.
2. Press VOLUME or VOLUME .
Volume Controls 2-1653

Issue 2.0
To adjust the volume of ringing incoming Paging announcements, Handsfree, the handset or
Background Music:
1. Press VOLUME or VOLUME .
The feature must be active to change the volume. Press the volume keys when the telephone is idle to
adjust the display contrast.
2-1654 Volume Controls

Description
The system can broadcast warning tones to a trunk caller, warning the caller that he has been on
the call too long. If he chooses, the caller can disregard the tones and continue talking. The
W
outside caller does not hear the warning tones. Warning tones do not occur for Intercom calls and
most incoming trunk calls. DISA trunks can also have warning tones. Warning tones are not
available to analog single line telephone (SLT) users.
There are two warning tones: Alarm Tone 1 and Alarm Tone 2. Alarm Tone 1 is the first set of
tones that occur after the user initially places a trunk call. Alarm Tone 2 broadcasts periodically
after Alarm Tone 1 as a continued reminder. Each alarm tone consists of three short beeps.
If programmed, DISA calls are disconnected unless the continue code is entered by the user.
With the Long Conversation Cutoff feature, incoming or outgoing central office calls can also be
disconnected.
Warning Tone for DISA Callers
For DISA callers, with this feature enabled, the warning tone timer begins when an incoming
DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter-digit timer expires or the outgoing call is
answered.
If an outside call is transferred to forwarded off-premise using an outside trunk, the warning tone
timer begins immediately. This occurs only if either trunk involved in the call is programmed for
this feature (Program 14-01-17). When transferring a trunk call off-premise, Program 14-01-13
must be enabled (set to 1).
Conditions
Warning Tone for Long Conversation does not occur for incoming trunk calls.
Warning Tone for Long Conversation occurs for all outgoing trunk calls, regardless
of how they are placed or other outgoing restrictions.
Warning Tone for Long Conversation can be enabled for DISA calls.
Warning Tone for Long Conversation does not occur for Intercom calls.
Warning Tone for Long Conversation can be used with the Long Conversation
Cutoff feature for outgoing calls.
Warning Tone is presented on a single line telephone in the ear piece.
Warning Tone for Long Conversation 2-1655

Issue 2.0
Default Setting
Disabled
Related Features
Code Restriction
Intercom

Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
14-01-17 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk 0 = Disable 0

Warning Tone for Long Conversation Alarm 1 = Enable
Determine whether DISA callers should hear

the Warning Tone for Long Conversations.
14-01-25 Basic Trunk Data Setup Continued/ 0 = Disable 0

Discontinued Trunk-to-Trunk Conversation 1 = Enable
When Program 24-02-10 is set to disconnect a
trunk after the defined time, determine whether

or not a user can use the continue/discontinued
code.
2-1656 Warning Tone for Long Conversation

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1



Long Conversation Alarm 1
After a user places a trunk call, the system
sends the first warning tone to their extension
after this time.

Long Conversation Alarm 2
After hearing the first warning tone, the system
sends additional warning tones after this time.

The warning tones continue, spaced by this
time, until the user hangs up.

Continue Code
Input the code that can be dialed to continue
Release Warning Tone is heard.

Disconnect Code
Input the code that can be dialed to disconnect
Release Warning Tone is heard.

Continue Time
the time a call is extended when the user dials

the Continue code defined in Program
20-28-01.
21-01-01 System Options for Outgoing Calls 0 = Priority Route 0

Seizure Trunk Line Mode 1 = Circular Route
Select the trunk based on the Trunk Route
Priority (0) or based on the trunk that has not
been used in the longest time (1).


after time expires. Voice Over and Barge-In are
Warning Tone for Long Conversation 2-1657

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

trunk-to-trunk (Such as Tandem Trunking)


trunk-to-trunk (Such as Tandem Trunking)
tone is heard.
Operation
Warning Tone for Long Conversation is automatic if programmed.
Warning Tone for Long Conversation for DISA Callers:

1. A DISA caller dials into the system and places a call.
2. After the Warning Tone is heard, To continue the call the DISA caller can press the
programmed Continue Code.
- OR -
To disconnect the call, the DISA caller can press the programmed Disconnect Code.
2-1658 Warning Tone for Long Conversation

Issue 2.0
Wireless DECT (SIP)
Description
The Wireless DECT (SIP) (Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication) system allows using DECT
6.0 DECT (SIP) handsets. These handsets provide the freedom and convenience of a wireless
telephone but also allow access to features provided by the UNIVERGE SV9100 system.
The number of Wireless DECT (SIP) handsets supported by the UNIVERGE SV9100 is dependent on
the number of SIP Client licenses.
Table 2-142 Supported Wireless DECT (SIP) Features lists the SV9100 features supported on the
Wireless DECT (SIP).
Table 2-142 Supported Wireless DECT (SIP) Features
SIP
Feature Name Comments SIP DECT
DECT
Account Code - Forced/Verified/Unverified Yes
Alarm No
Alarm Reports No
Alphanumeric Display Yes IP DECT Handsets have Alphanumeric Display and are
backlit. However, the display is not updated with CPU
messages
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) No
Ancillary Device Connection No
Answer Hold No
Answer Key No
Automatic Release Yes
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Yes
Background Music No
Barge-In No
Battery Backup System Memory N/A
Battery Backup System Power N/A
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys No
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys No
Call Duration Timer Yes SIP DECT handset timer not system timer.
Wireless DECT (SIP) 2-1659

Issue 2.0
Table 2-142 Supported Wireless DECT (SIP) Features (Continued)
SIP
DECT
Call Forwarding Yes Must be programmed in 24-09 or through feature code in

handset.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me No
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise Yes
Call Monitoring No
Call Redirect No
Call Waiting/Camp-On Yes Can only set Camp-On to IP DECT handset from softkey
menu of multiline terminal, not with access codes.
Callback No
Caller ID Call Return N/A
Caller ID Yes Only on ISDN or SIP Trunks. Analog Caller ID is not

supported.
Clock/Calendar Display No
Code Restriction Override Yes
Code Restriction, Dial Block Yes
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications No
Conference No
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release No
Contact Center No
Cordless Telephone Connection No
Data Line Security Yes Barge-In is not supported.
Delayed Ringing No
Department Calling No
Dialing Number Preview Yes
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Yes
2-1660 Wireless DECT (SIP)

Issue 2.0
SIP
DECT
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Yes
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console No
Directory Dialing No
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns No
Do Not Disturb No
Do Not Disturb/Call Forward Override Yes
Door Box Yes Door Box will not ring IP DECT handset. IP DECT handset
can call doorbox, but cannot activate the relay.
Drop Key No
Dterm Handset Cordless No
Dterm IP Gateway System No
E911 Compatibility Yes
Facsimile CO Branch Connection No
Flash Yes
Flexible System Numbering Yes SIP DECT numbering controlled through IP DECT Manager
application.

Group Listen No
Handset Mute Yes
Handsfree and Monitor Yes Handsfree is supported by handset.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing No
Headset Operation Yes
Hold Yes
Hotel/Motel No
Hotline Yes Handset can be a hotline destination, but cannot originate a

hotline call.
InMail Yes
Intercom Yes
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling Yes

Issue 2.0
SIP
DECT
IP Multiline Station (SIP) No
IP Trunk (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol Yes
IP Trunk H.323 No
K-CCIS IP Yes
K-CCIS T1 Yes
Last Number Redial No Redial built in.
Line Preference No
Meet Me Conference No
Meet Me Paging Yes
Meet Me Paging Transfer Yes
Memo Dial No Internal phone book. Capacity varies with handset model.
Message Waiting Yes Only VM Message Waiting can be received.
Message Waiting Answer Yes
Microphone Cutoff Yes Handset has mute function.
Music on Hold Yes
Name Storing No
NEC Communications Analyst Yes
NEC Interactive Voice Response No
Night Service No
Off-Hook Signaling Yes
Off-Hook Signaling Override Yes
One-Touch Calling No
Operator Yes
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension No
Paging, External Yes IP DECT handset can only initiate a page, it cannot receive a
page or display page information.
Paging, Internal Yes IP DECT handset can only initiate a page, it cannot receive a
page or display page information.
Park No

Issue 2.0
SIP
DECT
PC Programming Yes IP stations can be programmed from PCPro for IP

duplication.
Prime Line Selection Yes
Private Line Yes
Programmable Function Keys No
Programming from a Multiline Terminal N/A
Redial Function No Handset has redial list.
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Yes MLTs can q/t to the SIP DECT VM, but SIP DECT handset
cannot execute Q/T.
Remote (System) Upgrade N/A
Repeat Redial No
Resident System Program N/A
Ring Groups Yes
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External Yes IP DECT handset can only be the ringdown destination. It
cannot initiate ringdown.
Room Monitor No
Save Number Dialed No Handsets have own phone book and redial lists
Secondary Incoming Extension No
Secretary Call (Buzzer) No
Secretary Call Pickup No
Selectable Display Messaging No
Selectable Ring Tones Yes Ring tones are selectable at the handset level, specific to the
type of call.
Serial Call No
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets No
Softkeys No All keys are fixed in C124 handset.
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station No
Station Hunt No
Station Name Assignment User Programmable Yes Handset name can be programmed in the handset (it does
not show the name in Program 15-01-01), but will not display
back to IPK II callers.

Issue 2.0
SIP
DECT
Station Relocation No
Step Call Yes
SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch No
SV9100 UC Suite No
SV9100 Terminals No
Synchronous Ringing Yes
Tandem Ringing No
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) Yes Only Tandem Trunking on hangup is supported with IP DECT.
Tone Override No
Traffic Reports No
Transfer Yes
Trunk Groups Yes
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On No
UM8000 Mail No
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) No
Universal Slots N/A
User Programming Ability Yes Limited user customization available.
Virtual Extensions No
Voice Call & Signal Switching Yes Can only send voice/signal switch, not receive.
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys No
Voice Over No
Voice Response System (VRS) N/A
Voice Response System (VRS) Call Forwarding Yes

Park and Page
Volume Controls Yes
Warning Tone for Long Conversation Yes
Wireless DECT No

Issue 2.0
Components of the Wireless DECT (SIP) system include the following:
NEC C124 SIP DECT Handset
The handset has the following features:

Alphanumeric Display with Backlight
LED Indication for Incoming Calls
Telephone Book with 40 entries
While idle, dial the number to be stored, then press > and OK. Enter the name associated with the
number using the dial pad, and press OK.
Silent Mode (mute all sounds)
Redial Function (last 10 numbers)
Press and continue to press to scroll through the numbers. Press Hook key to dial a
number.
Programming Pause
A long press on # adds a pause to pre-dial or phone book numbers.
Adjustable Volume
Ring volume can be adjusted using and on the handset.
Key Lock
Press OK and to lock the dial pad.
Ten Different Ring Tones
Ring tones can be selected in the tone setup menu and press OK.
Microphone Mute
Press while the telephone is off-hook to mute the microphone.
Caller ID Presentation
Headset Connection
R-Key for Transfer and Special Services
When off-hook, press R to Recall, transfer.
Display Enhancements
The SIP DECT handset can now receive the calling party name on an incoming internal/external call.
The priority for the display is as follows:
If calling from a standard SIP terminal:

1. Program 15-05-04 nick name.
2. Program 15-01-01 extension name.
3. Calling name from originating standard SIP caller.
4. Extension number.

Issue 2.0
If calling from an SLT, DT300 (including virtual extensions) or a DT700:

1. Program 15-01-01 Extension name.
2. Extension number.
If calling from a trunk, (i.e. SIP trunk, ISDN, Analog C.O.):

1. Calling party name of incoming trunk. (Caller ID information).
2. Program13-04-02 abbreviated dial Name (with matching caller ID).
3. Calling party number.
For trunks, new Program 15-05-40 controls what is displayed and has the following options:
1. Both Name and Number.
2. Name only.
3. Number only.
4. None.
If calling from Voice Mail:

1. Program 45-01-02 Voice Mail master Name.
2. Program 45-01-09 Centralized Voice Mail Master name.
3. Program 15-01-01 Calling station information (Voicemail extension).
Conditions
Program 15-05-17 is no longer used.
Program 32-04-01 Door Phone Name is not supported.
Hold recall will not display calling name.
Transfer recall will not display calling name.
Alarm is not supported.
Call forward from trunk is not supported.
The system has the ability to receive DTMF information in SIP INFO messages sent by
Standard SIP Terminals. This allows the SIP Terminal to initiate features during a ringing
state such as Camp-On and Message Waiting.

Issue 2.0
NEC G955 SIP DECT Handset
Features Description
Call Handling Automatic Call answer Call reject option

Features Caller log Caller filter
CLI (name and number support): when available in Crystal clear speech and seamless handover
a directory presented by name On-hook number preparation
Last number redial Silent charging
Recall/hold (inquiry) Talk time: 12 hours
Standby time: 120 hours
Directory Phone book multiple numbers per contact Personal phone book
Display Color Graphic TFT display Illuminated display: Incoming calls and messages
160 X 128 pixels (262k)
Headset Headset support Bluetooth headset support: via additional

Bluetooth module
Keys Function and keypad keys: 24 keys with 12 On and off-hook key: 2 separate keys
keypad keys (0~9, , #), with text mode support Increase and decrease volume
Recall or inquiry key OK/confirm key
Menu navigation keys: programmable short keys, Programmable softkeys (2 keys menu dependent
up, down, left, right function)
Power On/Off key Keypad lock
Localization Multiple supported languages: 13 Triple frequency band
Menu Easy menu programming
Mobility/Other Multiple subscriptions DECT systems:

8 DECT systems
Sound/Audio Adjustable ringer volume Microphone mute

Loudspeaker mode/hands free Silent ring support
Adjustable earpiece/loudspeaker volume
Security Automatic encryption for secure calls
Service/ Software upgrading via air interface Backup of local data storage: via additional 64k
Maintenance Easy subscription to another handset: by memory card
transferring memory card to another handset
User Data Internal memory: for storage of local data Memory card: the storage capacity can be
Storage of local user data: personal phone book, doubled by adding a memory card. The memory
caller log, caller filter and calender entries card also contains the subscription information
User Interface Visible indicators: Icon driven menu Ringer tones/melodies: 20 distinctive melodies for
Distinctive melodies for messages and priorities external, internal calls
Status line indicators in the display Audible indicators are user selectable
12 simultaneous calls can be made per DECT Access Point.

When the Wireless DECT (SIP) telephone does not respond to an incoming call within 12
seconds because it is out of area, the originator hears a busy tone.
The Out of Area Timer is fixed at eight seconds (Program 20-22-05).
The maximum number of Wireless DECT (SIP) handsets is 255.
The maximum number of DAPs is 256.

Issue 2.0
Wireless DECT (SIP) is not supported with .

Off hook signaling is supported with Wireless DECT (SIP) telephones.
When replacing the batteries in a C124, G355 or G955 handset, it is necessary to place the
handset on the charger for 10 seconds in order to update the battery status indicator.
NAT or NAPT is only supported on the DT700 series phones. NAT or NAPT is not
supported on the ML440, the Wireless DECT (SIP) or Softphone.

Issue 2.0
Off-Hook Signaling
Description
This feature enables the display of off-hook signaling on an IP DECT terminal while talking with the 1st
call.
Figure 2-76 IP DECT 2nd Indication
Conditions
Multiple call appearance and call waiting indication must be turned on for the SIP DECT
system using the IP DECT configurator V 5.0.1.4 or higher.
Program 20-13-54 must be turned on for the class of service the DECT telephone is in.
If Program 20-13-06 is set on, IP DECT receives an off-hook signaling automatically. If
Program 20-13-06 is set off, the 2nd caller hears a busy tone. If the override code is dialed
(Program 11-12-03 SC 709) and overrides SC (Program 11-12-03), then the IP DECT
receives off-hook signals manually.
Off-hook signaling is supported from an extension, voicemail and trunk call.
If a SIP DECT extension is talking to a voice mail port, the system does not send an
off-hook signal. Once the SIP DECT disconnects from voice mail, SIP DECT can answer
the 2nd call.
If the 1st call is an extension and the 2nd call is a voice mail, IP DECT answers the 2nd call
by pressing the button, but can not go back to the 1st call by pressing the button. To
reconnect to the1st call again, IP DECT has to disconnect the 2nd call and wait for recall of
the 1st call.

Issue 2.0
Caller ID Display After a Call Transfer
Description
Previously in case of screened transfer, if a call was from a trunk line or legacy terminal, etc, the
transferrer's calling party number was displayed in IP DECT. In case of an unscreened transfer, the
calling party number from where the call was transferred is displayed on the IP DECT.
This feature enables the IP DECT terminal to display the calling party number of the original caller
(Transferee) when making a screened or unscreened transfer to an IP DECT terminal.
Figure 2-77 IP DECT Caller ID Display
Conditions
Calling party name is not supported in this feature.
In case of a screened transfer, when the transfer is made, IP DECT shows the calling party
number of the original caller (Transferee) after answering the call.
In case of an unscreened transfer, when the transfer is made, IP DECT shows the calling
party number of the original caller (Transferee) before (and after) answering the call.

Issue 2.0
Out of Range Call Warning Notification
Description
With SV9100 software, it is possible to determine when a SIP-Dect terminal is Out of Range or powered
off. When an internal caller calls the Out of Range SIP terminal, either a lock out tone or call forwarding
can be performed. When the Out of Range timer (Program 24-02-15) expires, CFW is performed when
Program 24-09-01 is set to 2-5 and the dial is set to the suitable place of Program 24-09-02~24-09-05. If
CFW is not set, the calling terminal hears a Lock-out tone and the following Out of Range notice is
displayed on the originators LCD.
Figure 2-78 Out of Range Example
Conditions
When a call comes into an idle SIP terminal which has not been recognized as out of range,
the system waits for the timer in Program24-02-15 (default 4 sec) to expire to determine if
the terminal is Out of Range state or not.
Out of Range transfer works against the SIP terminal in an Out of Range state when
Program 24-09-01 is set to a value between 2 and 5 (2: No Answer, 3: Immediate, 4: Busy/
No Answer or 5: Busy). In case of a value of 0 or 1 (0: None or 1: Both), Out of Range
transfer does not work.
When the SIP terminal starts ringing and then moves to out of range, the terminal keeps
ringing because the terminal is no longer under the control of the system. In this case the
Out of Range transfer is not applied.
Out of Range transfer is applied to individual calls only, group incoming calls or paging call
to a SIP terminal are not applied.
In case of Ring Transfer to the SIP terminal Out of Range transfer is not applied. It follows
No Answer timer in Program 24-02-03.
In case of internal call from other standard SIP terminal, lock-out tone is not applied. Caller
hears a busy tone.
Default Settings
Enabled

Issue 2.0
System Availability
Terminals
NEC C124 SIP DECT Handset
NEC G955 SIP DECT Handset
IP DECT
Standard SIP terminals have not been evaluated with this feature.
NEC DECT Access Point AP200S
NEC SIP DECT Handset - NEC C124/G955
Related Features
Caller ID
Off-Hook Signaling
Transfer
Wireless DECT (SIP)


Issue 2.0
VoIP Settings:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
GCD-CP10.

192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Address. |254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
|255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0
|255.224.0.0 | 255.240.0.0
|255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0
|255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0
|255.255.128.0 | 255.255.192.0
|255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0
|255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0
|255.255.254.0 | 255.255.255.0
|255.255.255.128
|255.255.255.192
|255.255.255.224
|255.255.255.240
|255.255.255.248
|255.255.255.252
|255.255.255.254
|255.255.255.255
Select type of VoIP ETU DSP Resource. This extensions and trunks Resource
3 = CCIS/Networking
4 = Use for NetLink
5 = Blocked
Paging
8 = Unicast Paging


Peer mode.
84-06-01 PVA Data Setting RTP Port Number 0 ~ 65535 10020

Define the Media Gateway starting RTP Port
Number.
84-06-02 PVA Data Setting RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number + 1 10021
Define the Media Gateway Starting RTCP Port
Number. The RTCP Port Number has to be the

(RTP port number + 1).

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-06-04 PVA Data Setting Fract Lost Threshold 0 ~ 100% 0

Define the fractional lost threshold. This data is
sent to the GCD-CP10 if the value exceeds the

defined value.
84-06-05 PVA Data Setting Packets Lost Threshold 0 ~ 16777215 0

Define the packets lost threshold. This data is
sent to the GCD-CP10 when the value exceeds

the defined value.
84-06-07 PVA Data Setting Jitter Threshold 0 ~ 4294967295 seconds 0

Define the Jitter Threshold. This data is sent to
the GCD-CP10 when the value exceeds the

defined value.
84-06-09 PVA Data Setting Delay LSR Threshold 0 ~ 4294967295 seconds 0

Define the Delay LSR threshold. This data is
sent to the GCD-CP10 when the value exceeds

the defined value.
VoIP ToS Setup:
The UNIVERGE SV9100 supports Quality of Service (QoS) Marking for the Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP).
NOTE
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

When Input Data is set to 1, Item No. 07 is 1 = IP Precedence
invalid. When Data is set to 2, Items

2 = Diffserv
No. 02 ~ 06 are invalid.
IP Extension Numbering:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
11-02-01 Extension Numbering Dial (maximum of eight digits). 1 101

Define the IP Phone extension number. 2 102
3 103
~ ~
99 199
100 3101
~ ~
960 3961

Issue 2.0
SIP Extension CODEC Information:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Define the G.711 audio Frame Size. 2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms


G.711.

Setup G.711 Type 1 = -law

when in USA.


value.

Setup G.711 Jitter Buffer (average)

value.

Setup G.711 Jitter Buffer (max)

value.

Define the G.729 audio Frame Size. 2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms


G.729.


value.

Setup G729 Jitter Buffer (average)

value.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Setup G729 Jitter Buffer (max)

value.

Setup Jitter Buffer Mode 3 = Self Adjusting
Define the Jitter Buffer mode.
84-19-18 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic 0 ~ 30 dB 20

Setup VAD Threshold
Define the VAD Threshold. Consult the
UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual for
Threshold scale to set acceptable values.

Define Audio Capability Priority. 3 = G.722
4 = G.726
5 = Not Used

Define the number of Audio Frames for G.722 2 = 20ms
CODEC. 3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms


Buffer.


Buffer.


Buffer.

3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

Enable/Disable the G.726 Voice Activity

Detection Mode.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Buffer.


Buffer.


Buffer.
SIP Extension Basic Information Setup:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3


Session Timer Value

Define the minimum allowed value for the SIP

session timer.
84-20-04 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup 0 = Request URI 0

Called Party Info 1 = To Header
Define the SIP Extension presented Caller ID

information.

Expire Value of Invite
Define the time out response value for SIP

invite.

GPZ-IPLE.
84-26-02 IPL Basic Setup RTP Port Number 0 ~ 65534 VoIP GW1 =
Assign the RTP port number to be used for 10020


Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
84-26-03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number (RTP 0 ~ 65534 VoIP GW1 =
Port Number + 1) 10021
Assign the RTCP port number to be used for

IP Phone Configuration:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Name 101

102, etc.
15-05-02 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup IP MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-

Phone Fixed Port Assignment 00-00-00-00-00-00 to 00
MAC Address of registered MLT SIP phone is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
stored and/or can input the MAC address of an
MLT SIP phone so when it comes online it is
provided with the extension which the MAC
address matches.
15-05-07 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

Using IP Address
Review the registered IP Phones IP Address

[Informational Only].
15-05-15 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 1-Type 1 1

CODEC Type 2-Type 2
Assign the registered IP Phone Codec type of 3-Type 3
the MLT SIP Reference Program 84-11 Dterm 4-Type 4
IP Codec Basic Information.
5-Type 5
15-05-16 Authentication Password Maximum of 24 characters. No Setting


15-05-40 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 0 = Both name and number 0
Calling Name Display Info via Trunk for 1 = Name only
Standard SIP 2 = Number only
Sets the incoming calling name display type on 3 = None

a standard SIP terminal. Trunk name is the first
priority and abbreviated (SPD) name is second
priority.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Receiving SIP INFO 1 = Allowed any time
Select whether or not system can receive 2 = Allowed while RTP is not
DTMF from standard SIP phone via SIP INFO available
message.
Off-Hook Signaling:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
Customize the override (off-hook signaling) digits

used for service access.

E&M Override
caller.

is busy.

off-hook signals.


Allows a busy extension to Manually (0) or

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
20-13-54 Class of Service Options (Supplementary 0 = Disable 0

Service) Call Waiting for Standard SIP 1 = Enable
Terminal
Set up Call waiting (Off-hook Signaling) for
Standard SIP terminal. When setting this

Program to enable, Program 20-13-05,
20-13-06 and Program 20-09-01, 20-09-07 also
need to be set to Enable.
20-17-01 Operator Extension Operators Extension Maximum of eight digits. ext. 101
Number

used by operators.
Caller ID Display After a Call Transfer:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

extension port =
Class 1

Inward Transfer)
24-02-15 System Options for Transfer SIP Out of 0 ~ 30 seconds 4

Range Timer
When not receiving any response within this
timer setting, system determines SIP terminal is
out of range. When set to 0, timer is invalid.

Forwarding Type 1 = Call Forwarding with both
Type of Call Forwarding ring
2 = Call Forwarding when no
answer
answer

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Only
24-09-03 Call Forward Split Settings Interim Call Maximum of 24 digits (0 ~ 9, , No Setting
Only

Only
Only
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Lockout Tone Value 0 ~ 255 Refer to the
(16) Programming
Lock Out Tone Repeat Count.
Manual for

default values.
Out of Range Call Warning Notification:
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3
24-02-15 System Options for Transfer SIP Out of 0 ~ 30 seconds 4

Range Timer
When not receiving any response within this
timer setting, system determines SIP terminal is
out of range. When set to 0, timer is invalid.

Issue 2.0
Level
Program
Number
1 2 3

Forwarding Type 1 = Call Forwarding with both
Type of Call Forwarding. ring
2 = Call Forwarding when no
answer
answer

Only
24-09-03 Call Forward Split Settings Interim Call Maximum of 24 digits (0 ~ 9, , No Setting
Only

Only
Only
80-01-01 Service Tone Setup Lockout Tone Value 0 ~ 255 Refer to the
(16) Programming
Lock Out Tone Repeat Count.
Manual for

default values.
Operation
Placing an outside call with pre-dial:

1. Dial 9.

Issue 2.0
2. Press and hold the # key to insert a pause (), if necessary.

3. Dial the outside number.
4. Press the key (On-Hook/Off-Hook).
For more information on the Wireless DECT (SIP) feature, refer to the NEC SIP DECT Solutions
Manuals.
REFERENCE
Off-hook Signaling
To answer off-hook signaling (2nd call) and answer hold recall of 1st call:
Program 20-13-54 is set to Enable.
Program 20-13-06 is set to Automatically
NOTE
1. From ext 100 call IP DECT 200 (1st call).

2. Answer on IP DECT 200 and talk with ext 100.
3. From ext 101 Call IP DECT (2nd call).
4. IP DECT receives off-hook signal.
5. Press the button on the IP DECT. Hold the 1st call and answer the 2nd call.
6. Talk with ext 101.
7. Use on-hook on the IP DECT to disconnect ext 101.
8. Hold Recall occurs and seizes the 1st call (On hold) on the IP DECT.
To toggle between the 1st call and off-hook signaling (2nd call):
Program 20-13-06 is set to Automatically.
NOTE

7. Press the button on the IP DECT. Hold the 2nd call and retrieve the 1st call (On hold).

Issue 2.0
To answer off-hook signaling (2nd call) and 2nd caller disconnect the call:
Program 20-13-06 is set to Automatically
NOTE

7. Use on-hook on ext 101. A busy tone is heard on the IP DECT.
8. Press the button on the IP DECT and retrieve the 1st call (On hold).
Caller ID Display After a Call Transfer
To make screened transfer to IP DECT of trunk call:
Transferee : Caller ID:297XXXYYY

Transferrer : Multi line, Ext 100
Transfer target : IP DECT, Ext 200
1. Place a call to ext 100 from outside party 297XXXYYY.
2. Answer incoming call at ext 100 and press the Transfer button.
3. Dial 200 to call an IP DECT.
4. Announce the call and press the Transfer button or hang up ext 100.
5. Calling party number 297XXXYYY is displayed on the IP DECT.
To make unscreened transfer to IP DECT of trunk call:
Transferee : Caller ID:297XXXYYY

Transferrer : Multi line, Ext 100
Transfer target : IP DECT, Ext 200
1. Place a call to ext 100 from outside party 297XXXYYY.
2. Answer incoming call at ext 100 and press the Transfer button.
3. Dial 200 to call an IP DECT.
4. Press the Transfer button or hang up ext 100.
5. The IP DECT rings and calling party number 297XXXYYY is displayed on the IP DECT.

UNIVERGE SV9100
Codes Tables Chapter 3
SECTION 1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
The charts in this chapter provide a list of the Service Codes, Function Key Codes,
and System Number Plan/Capacities. The service codes and function codes are
listed by number and by feature in separate charts for ease of use.
SECTION 2 SIMPLIFYING MULTILINE TERMINAL OPERATIONS WITH ONE-TOUCH

KEY OPERATION
A multiline terminal user can access many features through Service Codes (e.g.,
Service Code #9 to access a specific trunk). To streamline the operation of their
telephone, a multiline terminal user can store these codes under One-Touch Keys.
This provides one-button operation for almost any feature. To find out more, turn to
the One-Touch Calling feature.
When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation
similar to (PRG 15-07 or SC 7nn). This means that the key requires function code
nnn, and you can program this code through Program 15-07 or by dialing Service
Code 751 or 752. Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more
information.
SECTION 3 USING HANDSFREE
The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just
press a line key or Speaker Key to answer or place a call. For extensions without
Automatic Handsfree, the user must:
Lift the handset or press Speaker for intercom dial tone.
Lift the handset or press Speaker, then press a line key for trunk dial tone.

Issue 2.0
Table 3-1 Post Dialing Service Codes Single Digit Post Dialing Codes
Code For this feature. . . When you are. . .
1 Handsfree Answerback / Forced intercom Ringing Changing the signaling mode of your outgoing Intercom
call
2 Department Step Calling Cycling to the next member of a Department Calling
Group
3~5 Not used
6 Voice Over Sending a Voice Over to a busy extension after hearing

Busy/Ring tone
7 Barge-In Barge into another station's active call
8 Voice Mail Leaving a message in a co-workers mailbox after

calling their busy or unanswered extension
0 Message Waiting Leaving a Message Waiting at a co-workers busy or
unanswered extension
# Call Waiting / Camp-On / Callback / Trunk Queuing Call Waiting / Camp-On / Callback / Trunk Queuing
Off-Hook Signaling Sending off-hook signal tones to a busy extension
3-2 Codes Tables

Issue 2.0
Table 3-2 Service Codes by Number
Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you . . . For this feature. . .
Function Key. . .
1
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle Speaker first).
+ Enter Account Code + Enter an Account Code. Account Codes -

Pick up a call ringing or waiting at Directed Call Pickup -
another extension. Voice Response
System (VRS)
# Pick up a call ringing an extension Group Call Pickup 24
in your pickup group (except Ring
Group calls).
0 Answer a Message Waiting Message Waiting 38
request.
06 Set the Automatic Transfer for Transfer -
each trunk line.
07 Cancel the Automatic Transfer for Transfer -
each trunk line.
08 Set the Destination for Automatic Transfer -
Trunk Transfer.
1 + Paging Group Number Make a Combined Page. Paging -
+0 Cancel Call Forwarding. Call Forwarding 16
2 + 1 + Type (2~4) Activate Personal Answering Voice Mail (Personal 16
Machine Emulation. Answering Machine
Emulation)
2 + 2 + Destination + Type Activate Call Forwarding when Call Forwarding 13
(2~4) Busy/Not Answered.
2 + 3 + Destination + Type Activate Call Forward Follow Me at Call Forwarding with 15
(2~4) the destination extension. Follow Me
2 + 4 + Destination + Type Activate Call Forwarding Call Forwarding 10
(2~4) Immediate.
2 + 6 + Destination + Type Activate Call Forwarding when Call Forwarding 12
(2~4) Unanswered (delayed).
2 + 7 + Destination + Type Activate Call Forwarding (Both Call Forwarding 14
(2~4) Ringing).
3 (After + 001~400 + busy) Disconnect a call in progress on a Forced Trunk -
trunk. Disconnect
4 + 3 + Message (01~20), or Activate or cancel Selectable Display 17
+ 3 + Hang up to cancel Selectable Display Messaging. Messaging

Issue 2.0
Table 3-2 Service Codes by Number (Continued)
Also see
Function Key. . .
1
4 + 6 + Trunk access code + Forward your calls to an Call Forwarding 17

Outside number, or + 6 + Hold off-premise telephone number. Off-Premise
+ Hang up to cancel
+ 7 + Record message + # + Record, listen to or erase a Voice Response 17
Condition (2, 4, 6 or 7) + Personal Greeting or Park and System (VRS)
Destination + Type (2 or 3) or Page. (Personal Greeting)
+ 7 + 3 to cancel
5 Log out of or in to a group. Contact Center 10
6 + Orbit (01~64) Pick up a call parked in a system Park 04 + orbit

Park orbit (01~64).
8 Call your mailbox. Voice Mail 77
## Enter system programming mode. System Programming -
Password Protection
##9 Back up system data. Maintenance -
Hookflash + ## + Enter Enter an Account Code at a single Account Codes -
Account Code + Hookflash line telephone.
#0 Use Universal Answer Code to Central Office Calls, -
pick up a call ringing over the Answering
paging system.
Hookflash + #1 + extension + Activate Conference from a Single Conference -
hookflash twice Line (500/2500) Telephone.
#2 + bin Dial a Common Speed Dialing Speed Dialing 27
number.
#3 Flash a trunk from an single line Flash -
telephone.
#4 + bin Dial a group Speed Dialing Speed Dialing 28
number.
#5 Use Last Number Redial. Last Number Redial -
#6 + orbit (01~64) Park a call in a system Park orbit Park 04 + orbit (1~64)
(1~8, 01~32 or 01~64).
#7 Use Personal Speed Speed Dialing -
dialing.
#8 Set up an Unsupervised Tandem Trunking -
Conference. (Unsupervised
Conference)
#9 + 001 -400 Place a call over a specific trunk. Central Office Calls, 01 + trunk
Placing (001~400)
3-4 Codes Tables

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key. . .
1
0 (Off-Hook) Leave a Message Waiting at a co- Message Waiting 35

workers busy or unanswered
extension.
1 (Off-Hook) Change the signaling mode of your Handsfree -
outgoing Intercom call. Answerback/Forced
Intercom Ringing
4 (On-Hook) Listen to the General Message. Voice Response -
System (VRS)
6 (On-Hook) Check an extension number. Voice Response -
System (VRS)
8 (On-Hook) Listen for the time. Voice Response -
System (VRS)
9 Place a call using ARS or Trunk Automatic Route 02
Group Routing. Selection
Trunk Group Routing
600 + code + 0 Use Dial Block. Toll Restriction, Dial -
Block
601 + code + 0 Aa a supervisor use Dial Block. Toll Restriction, Dial -
Block
602 + Group number Set Automatic Transfer Setup for Transfer -
(1~8 or 01~64) each extension group.
603 + Group number Cancel Automatic Transfer Setup. Transfer -
(1~8 or 01~64)
604 + Group number Set the destination for Automatic Transfer -
(1~8 or 01~64) + mode + Transfer Setup for each extension
extension group.
605 + Group number Set Delayed Transfer for each Transfer -
(1~8 or 01~64) extension group.
606 + Group number Cancel Delayed Transfer. Transfer -
(1~8 or 01~64)
607 + Group number Set up DND for each extension Transfer -
(1~8 or 01~64) group.
608 + Group number Cancel DND for each extension Transfer -
(1~8 or 01~64) group.
611 Use an SLT to listen the General Voice Response -
Message. System (VRS)
612 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or Record, listen to or erase the Voice Response -
7 to record General Message. System (VRS)

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key. . .
1
616 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or Record, listen to or erase a VRS Voice Response -

7 to record Message. System (VRS)
618 Use Night Mode Switch for other Night Answer
group.
620 Use Common Cancel Service TBD -
Code.
621 Print the SMDR Extension Station Message Detail -
Accumulated printout. Recording (SMDR)
622 Print the SMDR Group Station Message Detail -
623 Print the SMDR Account Code Station Message Detail -
782 Transfer a call to the VRS This can Transfer -
also be used for routing ANI/DNIS
to the VRS.
627 Enable DND at a room Hotel/Motel -
telephone. (Do Not Disturb)
628 Cancel DND at a room Hotel/Motel -
629 Enable DND for another room Hotel/Motel -
630 Cancel DND at another room Hotel/Motel -
telephone. (Wake Up Call)
631 Set up a Wake Up call for your own Hotel/Motel -
room telephone. (Wake Up Call)
632 Cancel a Wake Up Call for your Hotel/Motel -
room telephone. (Wake Up Call)
633 Set a Wake Up Call for another Hotel/Motel -
guest room telephone. (Wake Up Call)
634 Cancel a Wake Up Call for another Hotel/Motel -
guest room telephone. (Wake Up Call)
635 Enable Room to Room Call Hotel/Motel -
Restriction for a guest room (Room to Room Call
telephone. Restriction
636 Disable Room to Room Call Hotel/Motel -
Restriction for a guest room (Room to Room Call
telephone. Restriction)
3-6 Codes Tables

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key. . .
1
637 Change a room telephone Toll Hotel/Motel (Toll -

Restriction (When Checked In) Restriction When
level. Checked In)
638 Set a room as checked in. Hotel/Motel -
(Room Status)
639 Set a room as checked out. Hotel/Motel -
(Room Status)
641 Set a room status from another Hotel/Motel -
telephone. (Room Status)
642 Request a Room Status Printout. Hotel/Motel -
(Room Status Printouts)
645 + trunk # + 1 (block) Block/busy out outbound usage on Central Office Calls, -
645 + trunk # + 0 (enable) a trunk with Trunk Port Disable. Placing
650 + 0 (install) or 1 (remove) Log in (0) or log out (1) for your Department Calling
Department Calling Group.
654 Enable Conversation Record at an Voice Mail -
SLT.
655 Log out of or in to a Group from a () -
656 Activate Work Time from an SLT. Automatic Call 17
Distribution ()
657 Cancel Work Time from an SLT. Automatic Call 17
Distribution ()
658 Activate Rest Mode from an SLT. Automatic Call 13
Distribution ()
659 Cancel Rest Mode from an SLT. Automatic Call 13
Distribution ()
Hookflash + 160 Record for an SLT. Automatic Call -
Distribution ()
663 + 6-digit code + line + Override Toll Restriction. Toll Restriction -
telephone number
667 Log an agent into their Group. Automatic Call -
Distribution ()
668 Log an agent out of their Group. Automatic Call -
Distribution ()
669 Are a supervisor assigning an Automatic Call -
agent into another Group or Distribution ()
changing an agents status.

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key. . .
1
670 + Group Change your Group assignment. Automatic Call -

Distribution ()
672 + Line number (001~400) Answer a call on a specific trunk. Central Office Calls, -
Answering
Hold
675 Monitor a room telephone. Hotel/Motel -
(Room Monitor)
677 Change the COS of another Class of Service -
extension. Must be allowed in
Program 20-13-28.
678 + 0~9 Change the language of a display Alphanumeric Display / -
telephone. Maintenance
679 + 1 (set) or 0 (cancel) Change the ability for a second call Central Office Calls, -
with DID/DISA/DIL. Answering
689 Transfer a Wireless DECT (SIP) Wireless DECT (SIP) -
call when out of range.
700 + extension # + enter Program extension names. Name Storing 55
name + Hold
701 + zone (1~9 or 01~64) 801 Make an Internal Zone Page. Paging, Internal 21 + zone
+ zone (0 or 00) Make an All Call Internal Page. 22
702 + Door Box (1~4 or 1~8) Place a call to a Door Box. Door Box -
703 + zone (1~4 or 1~8) Make an External Zone page. External Paging 19 + zone
803 + zone (0) Make an External All Call page. 20
704 + trunk group (1~8 or Place an outside call over a trunk Central Office Calls, 02 + group
1~9 or 001~100) group. Placing
707 Override Do Not Disturb or Call Call Forwarding 37
Forwarding. Do Not Disturb
708 Step through a Department Group. Department Step 36
Calling
709 Send a Call Waiting tone to a busy Call Waiting 33
extension.
710 Break into another extension call. Barge-In -
711 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (TRK) + Listen to the incoming ring choices. Selectable Ring Tones -
tone (1~8)
712 Change the signal type for calling Intercom -
an extension.
3-8 Codes Tables

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key. . .
1
715 Save a number (from SLT) or dial a Save Number Dialed 30

saved number
718 + 1 Activate Day 1 Mode. Night Service 09 + 1
718 + 2 Activate Night 1 Mode. 09 + 2
718 + 3 Activate Midnight 1 Mode. 09 + 3
718 + 4 Activate Rest 1 Mode. 09 + 4
718 + 5 Activate Day 2 Mode. 09 + 5
720 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (TRK) + Change your extension incoming Selectable Ring Tones -
tone (1~8) ring tones.
721 Enable Handsfree Answerback for Handsfree -
incoming Intercom calls. Answerback/Forced
Intercom Ringing
722 Call off-premise with a Door Box. Call Forwarding, 54
Off-Premise
Door Box
723 Enable Forced Ringing for Handsfree Answerback/ -
incoming Intercom calls. Forced Intercom ringing
724 Enable/disable Dial Pad Dialing Pad -
Confirmation Tone. Confirmation tone
725 Turn Background Music on and off. Background Music 04
727 + 1 or 2 + time, or 727 + 1 Check, set or cancel an alarm. Alarm -
or 2 + 9999 to cancel
728 + hour + minutes Set the system Time. Time and Date -
729 Check or change ring volume. Volume Control -
730 Use Remote maintenance. - -
732 Place a call on Group Hold. Hold -
740 Access the internal modem on the - -
GCD-CP10.
747 + Activate Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb 03
0 (Cancel)
1 (Trk calls)
2 (Paging, ICM, Call Forward
and transfers)
3 (All calls)
4 (Call Forwards)

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key. . .
1
749 Place a call on Exclusive Hold at Hold -

an SLT.
750 Camp On to an extension when Voice Response 35
calling into the system through the System (VRS)
VRS.
751 + key + code Change the function of a Programmable -
programmable key using 751 Function Keys
service code.
752 + key + code Change the function of a One-Touch -
programmable key using 752 Serial Operation
service code.
753 + bin + number + Hold + Store Common Abbreviated Abbreviated Dialing -
Name + Hold to store Dialing numbers.
754 + bin + number + Hold + Store Group Abbreviated Abbreviated Dialing -
Name + Hold to store Dialing numbers.
755 + One Touch key + code Program a One-Touch Key or One-Touch Dialing -
Personal Speed Dial.
756 Answer a call ringing a telephone Group Call Pickup -
in your pickup group (except Ring
Group calls).
757 Park a call or pick up a parked call Park -
at an extension.
759 Retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold Hold -
at an SLT.
760 Use DID Access Code. Automatic Call -
Distribution ()
762 Pick up a call from Group Hold. Hold -
763 Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Conference 23 or 32
Meet Me Page on an Internal Meet Me Paging
Paging Zone (if your extension is in
the group called).
764 + zone paged Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Paging 23 or 32
(0~9 or 00~64) Meet Me Page if your extension is
not in the group paged.
765 + zone (0~8) Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Conference 23 or 32
Meet Me Page on an External Meet Me Paging
Paging Zone.
3-10 Codes Tables

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key. . .
1
768 + pickup group Answer a call ringing a telephone Group Call Pickup 26 + group
(1~8 or 1~9 or 01~64) in another pickup group (except
Ring Group calls).
769 Answer a call ringing a telephone Group Call Pickup 25
in another pickup group if you do
not know the group number
(except Ring Group Calls).
770 Cancel a Callback request. Callback -
771 + ext Cancel Messages Waiting you left Message Waiting -
at a specific extension.
773 Cancel all Messages Waiting you Message Waiting -
have left at other extensions.
775 + pswd (0000) + place Temporarily override an Toll Restriction -
outside call extension Toll Restriction. Override
776 Clear number saved by Last Last Number Redial -
Number Redial.
780 + Relay (0~8) Use the General Purpose Relay. Paging, External 51
Night Service
781 + 00 (no tone), 01 Change the Music on Hold Tone. Music on Hold -
(general) or 02 (holiday)
782 Route ANI/DNIS to the VRS. It can Transfer -
also be used to transfer to VRS. Voice Response
Service (VRS)
783 Enable the data communication Data Communications -
auto-answer mode.
784 Access the VRS. Voice Response -
Service (VRS)
785 Clear the number saved by Save Save Number Redial -
Number Redial.
790 Use Voice Over after calling a busy Voice Over 48
extension.
794 Split between two calls on an SLT. Call Waiting -
799 Test Callback operation for an SLT. Callback -

Issue 2.0
Table 3-3 Service Codes by Feature
Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you ...
Function Key...
1
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle Speaker first).
Speed Dialing 753 + bin + number + Hold + Store System Speed Dialing numbers. -
Name + Hold to store
754 + bin + number + Hold + Store Group Speed Dialing -
Name + Hold to store numbers.
#2 + bin Dial a System Speed Dialing number. 27
#4 + bin Dial a Group Speed Dialing number. 28
#7 + bin Use Personal Speed Dialing. -
Account Codes + Enter Account code + Enter an Account Code. -
Hookflash + ## + Enter Enter an Account Code at an SLT. -
account code + Hookflash
Alarm 727 + 1 or 2 + time, or 727 + Check, set or cancel an alarm. -
1 or 2 + 9999 to cancel
Alphanumeric 678 + 0~9 Select the language used on display -
Display multiline terminals.
Wireless DECT 689 Transfer a Wireless DECT (SIP) call -
(SIP) when out of range.
Automatic Call 5 Log out of or in to a Group. 10
Distribution ()
655 Log out of or in to a Group from an SLT.
656 Activate Work Time from an SLT. 17
657 Cancel Work Time from an SLT. 17
658 Activate Rest Mode from an SLT. 13
659 Cancel Rest Mode from an SLT. 13
Hookflash + 660 Use Recording with an SLT. -

667 Allow a Agent to log into a group. -
668 Allow a Agent to log out of a group. -
669 Allow a supervisor to change agents -
status.
670 + Group Change your Group assignment. -
Automatic Route 9 Place a call using Trunk Group. 02
Selection or Trunk Route an Automatic Route Selection.
Group Routing
Background Music 725 Turn Background Music on or off. 04
3-12 Codes Tables

Issue 2.0
Table 3-3 Service Codes by Feature (Continued)
Also see
Function Key...
1
Call Forwarding 745 Set/Cancel Call Forwarding 14

(Both Ringing).
742 Set/Cancel Call Forwarding when Busy. 11
744 Set/Cancel Call Forwarding when Busy/ 13
No Answer.
743 Set/Cancel Call Forwarding No Answer. 12
746 Set/Cancel Call Forwarding Follow Me. 15
741 Set/Cancel Call Forwarding Immediate. 10
Call Forwarding, 722 Call off-premise with a Door Box. 54
Off-Premise
Door Box
Call Forwarding/Do 707 Override an extension Call Forward or 37
Not Disturb Override DND setting.
Call Waiting / 794 Split (switch) between calls on an SLT. -
Camp-On
770 Cancel a Callback request. -
799 Test Callback operation for an SLT. -
Callback / Camp-On / # Camp On or leave a Callback for a busy 35
Trunk Queuing extension or trunk.
770 Cancel a Callback request. -
799 Test Callback operation for an SLT. -
Central Office Calls, #0 Use Universal Answer to pick up a call -
Answering / ringing over the paging system.
Hold
672 + Line number Answer a call on a specific trunk. -
(001~400)
679 + 1 (set) or Change the ability for a second call with -
0 (cancel) DID/DISA/DIL.
Central Office Calls, #9 + 001~400 Place a call over a specific trunk. 01 + trunk
Placing (001-400)
645 + trunk # + 1 (block) Block/busy out outbound usage on a -
145 + trunk # + 0 (enable) trunk with Trunk Port Disable.
704 + trunk group (1~9 or Place an outside call over a trunk group. 02 + group
001~100)
Class of Service 677 Change the COS of another extension. -
Must be allowed in Program 20-13-28.

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key...
1
Conference Hookflash + #1 + extension + Activate Conference from a Single Line 07

hookflash twice (500/2500) Telephone.
Data 783 Enable the data connection auto-answer -
Communications mode.
784 Disconnect an active data call. -
Department Calling 650 + 0 (install) or Log in (0) or log out (1) for your 46
1 (remove) Department Calling Group.
Department Step # Step Call through a Department Group. 36
Calling
Dial Pad 724 Enable/disable Dial Pad -
Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone.
Directed Call Pickup + ext. Pick up a call ringing or waiting at an -
extension.
Do Not Disturb 747 + Activate Do Not Disturb. 03
0 (Cancel)
1 (Trk calls)
2 (Paging, ICM, Call
Forwards, and Transfers)
3 (All calls)
4 (Call Forwards)
Door Box 702 + Door Box (1~4 or 1~8) Place a call to a door Box. -
722 Forward a Door Box off-premise. -
E911 786 Turn off the E911 alarm. -
Flash #3 Flash a trunk from an SLT. -
Forced Trunk 3 (after #9 + 1~8 or Disconnect a call in progress on a trunk. -
Disconnect 001~400 + busy)
Group Call Pickup 756 Pick up a call ringing an extension in your 24
own pickup group (except Ring Group
calls).
768 + pickup group (1~8 or Answer a call ringing a telephone in 26 + group
1~9 or 01~64) another pickup group.
769 Answer a call ringing a telephone in 25
another pickup group if you do not know
the group number (except Ring Group
calls).
3-14 Codes Tables

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key...
1
Handsfree 1 (Off-Hook) Change the signaling mode of your -

Answerback/Forced outgoing Intercom call.
Intercom Ringing
721 Enable Handsfree Answerback for -
incoming Intercom calls.
723 Enable Forced Ringing for incoming -
Intercom calls.
Hold 732 Placing a call on Group Hold. -
749 Place a call on Exclusive Hold at an SLT. -
759 Retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold at a -
2-Button telephone.
762 Pick up a call from Group Hold. -
Hotel/Motel 627 Enable DND at a room telephone. -
(Do Not Disturb)
Hotel/Motel 628 Cancel DND at a room telephone. -
(Do Not Disturb)
Hotel/Motel 629 Enable DND for another room -
(Do Not Disturb) telephone.
Hotel/Motel 630 Cancel DND at another room -
(Do Not disturb) telephone.
Hotel/Motel 675 Monitor a room telephone. -
Hotel/Motel 631 Set a Wake Up Call for your room -
(Wake Up Call) telephone.
Hotel/Motel 632 Cancel a Wake Up Call for your room -
(Wake Up Call) telephone.
Hotel/Motel 633 Set a Wake Up Call for another guest -
(Wake Up Call) room telephone.
Hotel/Motel 634 Cancel a wake Up Call for another guest -
(Wake Up Call) room telephone.
Hotel/Motel 635 Enable Room to Room Call Restriction -
(Room to Room Call for a guest room telephone.
Restriction)
Hotel/Motel 636 Disable Room to Room Call Restriction -
(Room to Room Call for a guest room
Restriction)
Hotel/Motel 637 Change a room telephone Toll -
(Toll restriction Restriction (When Checked In) level.
[When Checked In])

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key...
1
Hotel/Motel 638 Set a room as checked in. -

(Room Status)
Hotel/Motel 639 Set room as checked out. -
(Room Status)
Hotel/Motel 641 Set a room as available (clean) from -
(Room Status) another telephone.
Hotel/Motel 642 Request a Room Status Printout. -
(Room Status
Printouts)
Last Number Redial #5 Use Last Number Redial. -
776 Clear number saved by Last Number -
Redial.
Maintenance ## 9 Back up system data. -
678 + 0~9 Display the language the telephone is -
using.
Meet Me Conference 763 Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me 23 (Meet Me
Meet Me Paging Page on an Internal Paging Zone (if your Paging)
extension is in the group called). or 32 (Meet Me
Conference)
764 + zone paged Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me -
(0~9 or 00~64) Page if your extension is not in the group
paged.
765 + zone (0~8) Join a Meet Me conference or Meet Me -
Page on an External Paging Zone.
Message Waiting 0 (Off-Hook) Leave a Message Waiting at a 38
co-workers busy or unanswered
extension.
0 Answer a Message Waiting request. 38
771 + ext Cancel Messages Waiting you have left -
at a specific extension.
773 Cancel all Messages Waiting you have -
left at other extensions.
Music on Hold 781 + 00 (no tone), Change the Music on Hold Tone. -
01 (general) or 02 (holiday)
Name Storing 700 + enter name + Hold Program extension names. 55
3-16 Codes Tables

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key...
1
Night Service 618 Use Night Mode Switching for other -

group.
Off-Hook Signaling (Off-Hook) or 709 Send off-hook signal tones to a busy 33

extension.
One-Touch Dialing 755 + One-Touch key + code Program a One-Touch Key or -
Personal Speed Dial.
Paging, Combined 1 + Zone (1~8) Make a combined zone page. 19 + zone
1 + Zone (0) Make a combined All Call page. 20
Paging, External 703 + zone (1~8) Make an external zone page. 19 + zone
703 + zone (0) Make an external All Call page. 20
Paging, External 780 + relay number (0~8) Activate the general purpose relay. 51
Night Service
Paging, Internal 701 + zone (1~8, 1~9 or Make an Internal Zone Page. 21 + zone or
01~64) 22
701 + zone (0 or 00) Make an internal All Call Page.
Park #6 + orbit (01~64) Park a call in a system Park orbit 04 + orbit
(01~64).
6 + orbit (01~64) Pick up a call parked in a system Park 04 + orbit
orbit (01~64).
757 Park a call or pick up a parked call at an -
extension.
Programmable 751 + key + code Change the function of a programmable -
Function Keys key using 751 service code.
752 + key + code Change the function of a programmable -
key using 752 service codes.
Save Number Dialed 715 Save a number (from SLT) or dial a saved 30
number.
785 Clear the number saved by Save -
Number Redial number.

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key...
1
Selectable Display 4 + 3 + message (01~20), Activate or Cancel Selectable 17

Messaging or Display Messaging.
4 + 3 + Hang up to cancel
Selectable Ring 711 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (Trk) + Listen to the incoming ring choices. -
Tones tone (1~8)
720 + 1 (ICM) + 2 (Trk) + Change your extension incoming ring -
tone (1~8) tones.
System ## Enter system programming mode. -
Programming
Password Protection
Station Message 621 Print the SMDR Extension Accumulated -
Detail Recording printout.
622 Print the SMDR Group Accumulated -
printout.
623 Print the SMDR Account Code -
Accumulated printout.
Tandem Trunking #8 Set up an Unsupervised Conference. 06
(Unsupervised
Conference)
Time and Date 728 + hour + minutes Set the system Time. -
Clock/Calendar
Display
Toll Restriction, Dial 600 + code + 0 Use Dial Block. -
Block
601 + code + 0 As a supervisor use Dial Block. -
Toll Restriction 775 + pswd (0000) + place Temporarily override an extension Toll -
Override outside call Restriction.
663 + digit code + line + Override Toll Restriction. -
telephone number
3-18 Codes Tables

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key...
1
Transfer 733 Set the Automatic Transfer for each trunk -

line.
734 Cancel the Automatic Transfer for each -
trunk line.
735 Set the Destination for Automatic Trunk -
Transfer.
602 + Group number (1~8 or Set Automatic Transfer Setup for each -
01~64) extension group.
603+ Group number (1~8 or Cancel Automatic Transfer Setup -
01~64)
604 + Group number (1~8 or Set the destination for Automatic Transfer -
01~64) + mode + extension Setup for each extension group.
605 + Group number (1~8 or Set Delayed Transfer for each extension -
01~64) group.
Transfer (continued) 606 + Group number (1~8 or Cancel Delayed Transfer. -
01~64)
607 + Group number (1~8 or Set up DND for each extension group. -
01~64)
608 + Group number (1~8 or Cancel DND for each extension group. -
01~64)
624 + Extension number Transfer a call into an existing call. -
782 Transfer a call to the VRS. This can be -
used also to route ANI/DNIS to the VRS.
Trunk Group Routing 9 Place a call using Trunk Group Routing or 02
or Automatic Route Automatic Route Selection.
Selection
8 Call your mailbox. 67
654 Enable Conversation Record at an SLT. -
Trunk Queuing
# (Off-Hook) Camp on to or leave a Callback at a busy 35
trunk.
8 (Off-Hook) Leave a message in a co-workers -
mailbox after callback their busy or
unanswered extension.
Voice Mail
8 Call your mailbox. 77
654 Enable Conversation Record at an SLT. -

Issue 2.0
Also see
Function Key...
1
Voice Over 6 (Off-Hook) Send a Voice Over to a busy extension 48

after hearing Busy/Ring tone.
Voice Response + ringing ext. Pick up a call ringing another extension -
System (VRS) for Directed Call Pickup or VRS Park and
Page.
616 + 7 + Record message + Record, listen to or erase a 17
# + Condition (2, 4,6 or 7) + Personal Greeting or Park and Page.
Destination + Type (2 or 3)
or
616 + 7 + 3 to cancel
4 (On-Hook)

SV9100 Features and Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SV9100 Features and Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SV9100

Features and Specifications Manual

NEC Corporation of America

Communications Technology Group

Before Reading this Manual

Congratulations! You have purchased the NEC UNIVERGE SV9100 System.

UNIVERGE SV9100 General Description Manual

SV9100 System Hardware Manual

UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual

Section 3 SV8100 to UNIVERGE SV9100 Feature Comparison List ............... 2-2

Section 4 Features .............................................................................................. 2-9

Account Code Entry .......................................................................... 2-11

SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual i

Barge-In ............................................................................................ 2-89

Contact Center ................................................................................ 2-277

SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual iii

Forced Trunk Disconnect ............................................................... 2-551

IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) NAT Mode ................................. 2-807

SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual v

Message Waiting ............................................................................ 2-994

Pulse to Tone Conversion ............................................................ 2-1175

SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual vii

SV9100 NetLink ............................................................................ 2-1354

viii Table of Contents

Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys ............................... 2-1608

Chapter 3 Codes Tables

Section 3 Using Handsfree ................................................................................ 3-1

Chapter 4 Feature Availability by Software Revision

SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual ix

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Figure 1-1 SV9100 Key Assignment Example .......................................................................... 1-2

Figure 2-3 Department Calling Circular Routing ................................................................... 2-362

Figure 2-4 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 1 ....................................................................... 2-380

Figure 2-5 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 2 ....................................................................... 2-381

Figure 2-6 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 3 ....................................................................... 2-381

Figure 2-7 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 4 ....................................................................... 2-381

Figure 2-8 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 5 ....................................................................... 2-382

Figure 2-9 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 6 ....................................................................... 2-382

Figure 2-10 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 7 ....................................................................... 2-382

Figure 2-11 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 8 ....................................................................... 2-383

Figure 2-13 ICM Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart ..................................................................... 2-442

Figure 2-14 Automatic Night Service ...................................................................................... 2-471

Figure 2-16 CCIS Standard Calls ........................................................................................... 2-479

Figure 2-17 CCIS VE Standard Calls ..................................................................................... 2-484

Figure 2-18 CCIS 911 Calls .................................................................................................... 2-493

Figure 2-19 CCIS VE 911 Calls .............................................................................................. 2-498

Figure 2-20 InMail User Pro Login Diagram ........................................................................... 2-669

Figure 2-22 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart-1 ...................................................... 2-684

Figure 2-23 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart-2 ...................................................... 2-685

Figure 2-24 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart-3 ...................................................... 2-686

SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual xi

Figure 2-25 Cascade Message Flow Chart 1 ......................................................................... 2-702

Figure 2-26 Cascade Message Flow Chart 2 ......................................................................... 2-703

Figure 2-28 ML440 Cordless Handset .................................................................................... 2-755

Figure 2-29 ML440 Cordless Handset .................................................................................... 2-769

Figure 2-30 G566 and G266 in Desktop Charger ................................................................... 2-770

Figure 2-32 Start Recording ................................................................................................... 2-868

Figure 2-33 Recording ............................................................................................................ 2-868

Figure 2-34 Paused ................................................................................................................ 2-868

Figure 2-35 Information Screen .............................................................................................. 2-869

Figure 2-36 Comment List Screen .......................................................................................... 2-869

Figure 2-39 Mobile Extension Layout ................................................................................... 2-1015

Figure 2-41 E911 Deployment Example ............................................................................... 2-1075